Controller Configuration Tool (CCT)

Help
Code No. LIT-12011147
Software Release 3.1
Issued November 9, 2007
Supersedes May 2, 2007

Chapter 1: Using This Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Accessing the CCT Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Help Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Help Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Navigation and Search Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Help Content Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Help Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Introduction Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Concepts Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Steps Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Screens Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Printing the Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Printing the Navigation and Search Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Printing a Specific Help Topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Printing the Entire Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Chapter 2: User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
CCT Commissioning Only Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Controller Application File (.caf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 1

 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Logic Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
CCT User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Select System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Sideloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Define Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Quick Navigation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Control/Logic View Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Control View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Control View Module Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Control View Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Control View Status Colors and Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Right-Click Menus (Control View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Connections Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Parameters Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Balancer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Toolbar (Logic View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Right-Click Menus (Logic View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Control Block Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Logic View Status Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

2 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Details Tab (Inputs and Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Hardware View Tab (Inputs and Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Language Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Opening a Controller Application File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Changing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Switching between Control View and Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Printing Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Saving a Controller Application File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Closing a Controller Application File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Exiting CCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
CCT User Interface Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Control View Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Logic View Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Summary Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Chapter 3: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Configuration and Simulation Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Commissioning and Servicing Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Chapter 4: Upgrading System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
System Module and File Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Upgraded Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

New Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

System Selection Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 3

 Backup Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Upgrading Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Modifying the System Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
System Upgrade (with Modules) Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

System Upgrade (without Modules) Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Chapter 5: Setting and Using Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Object Naming and Signal Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
System Selection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Unit Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Import and Export Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Localization Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setting Default Object Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Filtering Object Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Performing Custom Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Sorting Object Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Copying and Pasting Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Resetting Object Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Exporting Object Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Importing Object Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Setting Default System Selection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Resetting System Selection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Exporting System Selection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Importing System Selection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Setting Localization Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

4 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Preferences-Object Naming and Signal Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Preferences-System Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Preferences-Localization Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Chapter 6: Configuring a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
System Selection Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

System Types and Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

System Selection Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Control View Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Logic View Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Details Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Hardware Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Peer-to-Peer Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Application Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Selecting a System (Creating a New System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Opening an Existing Controller Application File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Entering or Viewing Job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Renaming a System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Viewing and Modifying System Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Viewing and Modifying Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Hardware View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Viewing Controller Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Control View Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Viewing and Modifying Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Viewing and Modifying Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 5

 Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Viewing and Modifying a Module’s Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Changing an Input or Output Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Adding a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Renaming a Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Deleting a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Navigating between Control View and Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Viewing/Printing Application Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Logic View Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Selecting a Block from the Control Block Palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Searching for a Block Using the Block Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Renaming a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Deleting a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Exposing Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Connecting Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Adding a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Showing and Hiding Connection Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Deleting a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Changing the Hidden Edge Label of a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Configuring a Hybrid Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Configuring the Command Hierarchy Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Configuring the Line Segment Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Configuring the MUX Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Configuring the Translation Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Setting the Default Element of a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Exporting a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Printing the Logic Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Creating Custom Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

6 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Using File > New: Custom Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Modifying an Existing Controller Application File or Selected System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Creating Custom Logic (Adding Modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Customizing State Selection Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Creating a Sideloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Setting Up Peer-to-Peer Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Disabling Peer-to-Peer Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
New System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

CCT System Selection Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Controller Information Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Control View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Module Selection (New). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Input Selection (New). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Output Selection (New) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

State Selection (State Tables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Create State Selection Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Create State Selection Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Setup (Input or Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Command Hierarchy (Enum Output or Boolean Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Translation (Enum to Boolean or Boolean to Enum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Port Name Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Enum Set Change Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Line Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Block Selection (Block Finder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Default Element Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 7

 Hidden Edge Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Port Exposure (For BACnet System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Port Exposure (For Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Port Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Confirm (Delete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Rename (Module/Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

System Rename Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Chapter 7: Configuring the Local Controller Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Local Controller Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Configuring the Local Controller Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Selecting Points to Appear on Display Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Selecting Points to Appear on Idle Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Specifying User Names and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Selecting Points for Read-Only Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Defining Display Page Display Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Defining Idle Page Display Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Specifying Local Controller Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Specifying Display Timeout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Defining Display Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Downloading the Application to the Display Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Downloading the Main Code of the Display Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Configure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Define Idle Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

8 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

Chapter 8: Simulating a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Simulation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Starting Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Stopping Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Control View Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Commanding Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Viewing and Modifying Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Viewing and Modifying Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Viewing Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Showing and Hiding Involvement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Navigating Between the Control View and a Module’s Logic View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Logic View Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Viewing Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Viewing and Modifying Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Simulation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Command Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Simulation Exit - Confirmation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Chapter 9: Defining Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Hardware Definition Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Hardware Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 9

 Defining Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Selecting a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Adding Points to an SAB Bus Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Deleting an SAB Bus Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Assigning Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Defining Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Controller Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Point Assignment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Network Settings Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Controller Device Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

SA Bus Device Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Add IOM Devices Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Add LocalDisplay Devices Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Add NetSensor/NetSensorDuct Devices Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Add NetVSD Devices Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Add RT_IOM Devices Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Add Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Advanced Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Chapter 10: Loading Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Load Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Upload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Ethernet NAE Passthru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Bluetooth Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Boot Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

10 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Main Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Application Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Code Download Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Uploading a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Downloading a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Load Device Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Chapter 11: Commissioning a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
System and Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Ethernet NAE Passthru Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Bluetooth Wireless Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Balancer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Making Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Making an Ethernet Passthru Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Making a Bluetooth Wireless Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Commissioning a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Control View Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Viewing Controller Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Commanding Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Issuing Metasys Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Viewing and Modifying Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Viewing and Modifying Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Viewing Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Viewing a Module’s Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Showing and Hiding Involvement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 11

 Commissioning Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Commissioning Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Logic View Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Viewing and Modifying Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Showing and Hiding Connection Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Navigating between Control View and Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Working with the Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Starting the Test Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Modifying Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Stopping the Test Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Using the Balancer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Editing the Balancing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Autocalibrating the VAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Issuing a Flow Override Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Restoring Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Calculating the K-Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Commissioning Device Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Setup Screen for Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Setup Screen for Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Controller Information Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Balancer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Auto Calibrate Command Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Flow Override Command Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Flow Restore Command Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Calculate K-Factors Command Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Chapter 12: Performing a Box Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

12 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Box Flow Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Performing a Box Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Reading Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Saving the Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Canceling a Box Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Box Flow Test Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Chapter 13: Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Application Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Application Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Core Logic Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Mechanical System Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Control Logic Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Chapter 14: Air Handling Unit Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Mixed Air Single Duct Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Mixed Air Single Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Modules (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Mixed Air Single Duct Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Fans (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Economizer Damper(s) (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Temperature Control Strategy (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Occupancy Control (MASD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Heat Recovery (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 13

 Coils (Preheat) (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Coils (Cooling) (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Coils (Reheat) (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Humidification (MASD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Dehumidification Control (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Optional Features (MASD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Mixed Air Single Duct Control Logic Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Optional Sensors (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Optional Equipment (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Monitored Safeties (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Mixed Air Dual Duct Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Mixed Air Dual Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Modules (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Mixed Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Fans (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Economizer Damper(s) (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Temperature Control Strategy (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Occupancy Control (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Heat Recovery (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Coils (Preheat) (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Humidification (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Optional Features (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Mixed Air Dual Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Optional Sensors (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Optional Equipment (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

14 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Monitored Safeties (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Modules (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Mechanical System Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Fans (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Temperature Control Strategy (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Occupancy Control (OASD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Heat Recovery (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Coils (Preheat) (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Coils (Cooling) (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Coils (Reheat) (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) (OASD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Humidification (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Dehumidification Control (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Optional Features (OASD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Optional Sensors (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Optional Equipment (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Monitored Safeties (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Modules (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Fans (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Temperature Control Strategy (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Occupancy Control (OADD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Heat Recovery (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Coils (Preheat) (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 15

 Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Humidification (OADD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Optional Features (OADD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

Optional Sensors (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

Optional Equipment (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Monitored Safeties (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Rooftop Unit Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Rooftop Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Modules (RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Rooftop Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Fans (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Economizer Damper(s) (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Temperature Control Strategy (RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

Occupancy Control (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

Coils (Cooling) (RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

Coils (Heating) (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Humidification (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Dehumidification Control (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Optional Features (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Rooftop Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Optional Sensors (RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Optional Equipment (RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Monitored Safeties (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

Modules (MADD-MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Configuration Options (MADD-MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Air Handling Unit Configuration (MADD-MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

16 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Zone Configuration (MADD-MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

Optional AHU Sensors (MADD-MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

Optional Equipment (MADD-MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Monitored Safeties (MADD-MZ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

Chapter 15: Fan Coil Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Fan Coil Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Modules (FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

Fan Coil Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

Supply Fan (FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Modules (FC Supply Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

Coils (FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

Modules (FC Coils) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Optional Equipment (FC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

Modules (FC Optional Equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

Sensors (FC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

Modules (FC Sensors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

Monitored Safeties (FC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

Modules (FC Monitored Safeties) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

Misc (FC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

Modules (FC Misc). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

Fan Coil Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

Occupancy (FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

Modules (FC Occupancy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Optional Features (FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Modules (FC Optional Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

Chapter 16: Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Unit Ventilator Core Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 17

 Modules (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

Unit Ventilator Mechanical System Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Supply Fan (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Modules (UV Supply Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

Coils (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

Modules (UV Coils) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Optional Equipment (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

Modules (UV Optional Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

Sensors (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

Modules (UV Sensors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

Monitored Safeties (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Modules (UV Monitored Safeties) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Misc (UV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Modules (UV Misc). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Unit Ventilator Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

ASHRAE Cycle Control (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

Modules (UV ASHRAE Cycle Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Occupancy (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

Modules (UV Occupancy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

Economizer Suitability (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Modules (UV Economizer Suitability). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Optional Features (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Modules (UV Optional Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

Chapter 17: Heat Pump Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Heat Pump Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Modules (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Heat Pump Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Supply Fan (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Modules (HP Supply Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

18 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Coils (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

Modules (HP Coils) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

Optional Equipment (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Modules (HP Optional Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Sensors (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

Modules (HP Sensors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

Monitored Safeties (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

Modules (HP Monitored Safeties) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

Misc (HP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

Modules (HP Misc). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

Heat Pump Control Logic Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

Occupancy (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

Modules (HP Occupancy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

Economizer Suitability (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Modules (HP Economizer Suitability). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Reversing Valve Output(s) (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618

Optional Features (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

Modules (HP Optional Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

Chapter 18: VAV Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
VAV Single Duct Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
VAV Single Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Modules (VAV-SD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

VAV Single Duct Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

Supply Damper Actuator (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

Exhaust Damper Actuator (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

Box Fan (VAV-SD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630

Coils (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

Optional Equipment (VAV-SD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Sensors (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 19

 Misc (VAV-SD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

VAV Single Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

Occupancy (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

Heating Priority (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

Optional Features (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

VAV Slave Single Duct Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644

VAV Slave Single Duct Core Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

Modules (VAV-SD Slave). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

VAV Slave Single Duct Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

Supply Damper Actuator (VAV-SD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

Exhaust Damper Actuator (VAV-SD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

Box Fan (VAV-SD Slave). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

Coils (VAV-SD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

Optional Equipment (VAV-SD Slave). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

Sensors (VAV-SD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

VAV Slave Single Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL (VAV-SD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

VAV Dual Duct Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

VAV Dual Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

Modules (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

VAV Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Cold Deck Damper Actuator (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Hot Deck Damper Actuator (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

Flow Sensor Locations (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

Exhaust Damper Actuator (VAV-DD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662

Coils (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

Optional Equipment (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

Sensors (VAV-DD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

Misc (VAV-DD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

VAV Dual Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

20 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Control Scheme (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

Occupancy (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

Optional Features (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

VAV Slave Dual Duct Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

VAV Slave Dual Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

Modules (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

VAV Slave Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

Cold Deck Damper Actuator (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

Hot Deck Damper Actuator (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678

Flow Sensor Locations (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

Exhaust Damper Actuator (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

Coils (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682

Optional Equipment (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

Sensors (VAV-DD Slave). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

VAV Slave Dual Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Control Scheme (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

Master and Slave VAV Box Peer-to-Peer Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

VAV Master and Slave Single Duct Peer References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

VAV Master and Slave Dual Duct Peer References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Chapter 19: Sideloop Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Sideloop Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Feedback Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692

Modules (Feedback Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694

Binary Interlock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696

Modules (Binary Interlock Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696

Create State Selection Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

Chapter 20: Central Plant Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 21

Central Cooling Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Central Cooling Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

Modules (CC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

Central Cooling Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

Cooling System Enable (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

Chillers (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

Condenser Water System (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716

Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723

Central Cooling Control Logic Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727

Chiller Options (CC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727

Condenser Options (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731

Basin Options (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732

Secondary Chill Water Options (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734

General Options (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736

Central Heating Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737

Central Heating Core Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737

Modules (CH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737

Central Heating Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738

Heating System Enable (CH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738

Hot Water/Steam Boilers (CH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739

Heat Exchangers (CH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751

Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping (CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759

Zone Loop Control (CH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764

Central Heating Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766

Boiler Options (CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766

Heat Exchanger Options (CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

Secondary Hot Water Options (CH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770

General Options (CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771

22 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

Chapter 21: Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Module Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Module Category Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Module Group Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Module Use in Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775

Primary States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776

Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776

Chapter 22: Network Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777

Generator Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
Enable Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
Sensor and Setpoint Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Rotation and Switch Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Generic (Add New) Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Chapter 23: Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Chapter 24: Setpoint Determination/Misc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Central Plant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Add-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792

Module Use in Applications (Add-8). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792

Attributes (Add-8). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793

Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

Module Use in Applications (Subtract). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

Attributes (Subtract) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

Device Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 23

 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

Economizer Availability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

Module Use in Applications (Economizer Availability) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

Attributes (Economizer Availability) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796

Reliability (Economizer Availability) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797

Economizer Availability RA-T Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

Module Use in Applications (Economizer Availability RA-T Compare) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

Attributes (Economizer Availability RA-T Compare) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799

Reliability (Economizer Availability RA-T Compare) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799

Device Mode Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Flow Status Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Module Use in Applications (Flow Status Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Attributes (Flow Status Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801

Primary States (Flow Status Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801

Reliability (Flow Status Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801

Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802

Module Use in Applications (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel) . . . . . . . . . . 802

Attributes (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802

Primary States (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

Reliability (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

Staged Device Enable Determination Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Module Use in Applications (Staged Device Enable Determination Series) . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Attributes (Staged Device Enable Determination Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

Primary States (Staged Device Enable Determination Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

24 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Reliability (Staged Device Enable Determination Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

Status Alarm Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

Module Use in Applications (Status Alarm Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

Attributes (Status Alarm Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Primary States (Status Alarm Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Reliability (Status Alarm Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

SummerWinter Mode Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

Module Use in Applications (SummerWinter Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

Attributes (SummerWinter Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810

Primary States (SummerWinter Mode Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810

Reliability (SummerWinter Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810

WarmupCooldown Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Module Use in Applications (WarmupCooldown Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811

Attributes (WarmupCooldown Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

Primary States (WarmupCooldown Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

Reliability (WarmupCooldown Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

Fan Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813

Module Use in Applications (Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813

Attributes (Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

Reliability (Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

Unocc Heating Fan Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

Module Use in Applications (Unocc Heating Fan Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

Attributes (Unocc Heating Fan Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 25

 Reliability (Unocc Heating Fan Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816

Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817

Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Module Use in Applications (Flow Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

Attributes (Flow Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819

Pickup Gain Calculations (Flow Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820

Reliability (Flow Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820

Flow Differential Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Module Use in Applications (Flow Differential Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821

Attributes (Flow Differential Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822

Reliability (Flow Differential Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822

Flow Sum Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823

Module Use in Applications (Flow Sum Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823

Attributes (Flow Sum Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824

Reliability (Flow Sum Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824

Setpoint Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
Damper Minimum Position Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825

Module Use in Applications (Damper Minimum Position Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

Attributes (Damper Minimum Position Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

Reliability (Damper Minimum Position Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827

Module Use in Applications (Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827

Attributes (Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828

26 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Reliability (Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828

Discharge Air Setpoint Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829

Module Use in Applications (Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829

Attributes (Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830

Reliability (Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830

Discharge Air Setpoint Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

Module Use in Applications (Discharge Air Setpoint Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

Attributes (Discharge Air Setpoint Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832

Reliability (Discharge Air Setpoint Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832

Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

Module Use in Applications (Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

Attributes (Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834

Reliability (Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834

Setpoint Reset by OA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

Module Use in Applications (Setpoint Reset by OA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

Attributes (Setpoint Reset by OA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836

Reliability (Setpoint Reset by OA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836

Summer Winter Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

Module Use in Applications (Summer Winter Compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

Attributes (Summer Winter Compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838

Reliability (Summer Winter Compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838

VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839

Module Use in Applications (VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation) . . . . . 839

Attributes (VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 27

 Reliability (VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840

VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841

Module Use in Applications (VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination). . . . . . . . . . . 841

Attributes (VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

Reliability (VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843

Module Use in Applications (VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation) . . . . . . 844

Attributes (VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844

Reliability (VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846

Module Use in Applications (VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination) . . . . . . . . . 846

Attributes (VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847

Reliability (VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848

ZN-T Setpoint Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849

Module Use in Applications (ZN-T Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852

Attributes (ZN-T Setpoint Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852

Reliability (ZN-T Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854

Sideloop Signal Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855

Sideloop Average Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855

Attributes (Sideloop Average Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856

Reliability (Sideloop Average Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856

Sideloop Maximum Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

Attributes (Sideloop Maximum Selector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

28 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Reliability (Sideloop Maximum Selector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

Sideloop Minimum Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858

Attributes (Sideloop Minimum Selector). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858

Reliability (Sideloop Minimum Selector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858

Sideloop Sum Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

Attributes (Sideloop Sum Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

Reliability (Sideloop Sum Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860

Module Use in Applications (Last Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861

Attributes (Last Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862

Reliability (Last Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862

Damper Trouble Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Damper Trouble Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

Module Use in Applications (Damper Trouble Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

Attributes (Damper Trouble Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864

Reliability (Damper Trouble Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864

Chapter 25: State Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866

Latching Alarm Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866

Module Use in Applications (Latching Alarm Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 29

 Attributes (Latching Alarm Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868

Primary States (Latching Alarm Manager). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869

Reliability (Latching Alarm Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869

Central Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870

Calculate Building Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871

Module Use in Applications (Calculate Building Load) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874

Attributes (Calculate Building Load). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874

Load Calculation v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Module Use in Applications (Load Calculation v2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878

Attributes (Load Calculation v2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879

Central Heating Low Temp Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Module Use in Applications (Central Heating Low Temp Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Attributes (Central Heating Low Temp Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881

Primary States (Central Heating Low Temp Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882

Reliability (Central Heating Low Temp Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882

Count On Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Module Use in Applications (Count On Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883

Attributes (Count On Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883

Device Availability Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884

Module Use in Applications (Device Availability Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884

Attributes (Device Availability Calculation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885

PID Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

Module Use in Applications (PID Sequencer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

30 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Attributes (PID Sequencer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887

Plant Sequencing-Building Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Building Load) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Building Load) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889

Plant Sequencing-Decouple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Decouple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Decouple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891

Primary States (Plant Sequencing-Decouple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891

Plant Sequencing-Discrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Discrete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Discrete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

Primary States (Plant Sequencing-Discrete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894

Plant Sequencing-Modulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Modulating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Modulating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896

Primary States (Plant Sequencing-Modulating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897

Plant Sequencing-OA-T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-OA-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-OA-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899

System Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

Module Use in Applications (System Enable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

Attributes (System Enable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901

Tower Sequencing-1 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 31

 Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing 1 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

Attributes (Tower Sequencing 1 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Tower Sequencing-2 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing-2 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

Attributes (Tower Sequencing-2 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906

Tower Sequencing-3 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908

Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing-3 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908

Attributes (Tower Sequencing-3 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909

Tower Sequencing-Vernier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911

Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing-Vernier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911

Attributes (Tower Sequencing-Vernier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912

Device Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915

Pass Through (Device Enable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915

Module Use in Applications (Device Enable Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916

Availability Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Module Use in Applications (Availability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917

Attributes (Availability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918

Primary States (Availability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919

Reliability (Availability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919

Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination) . . . . . . . 920

Attributes (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921

Primary States (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922

32 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Reliability (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922

Heat Recovery Suitability Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923

Attributes (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924

Primary States (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925

Reliability (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925

General Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926

Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926

Dehumidification Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927

Module Use in Applications (Dehumidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927

Attributes (Dehumidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928

Primary States (Dehumidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929

Reliability (Dehumidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929

Emergency Mode Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Module Use in Applications (Emergency Mode Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930

Attributes (Emergency Mode Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931

Primary States (Emergency Mode Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931

Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932

Module Use in Applications (Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . 932

Attributes (Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933

Primary States (Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934

Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935

Attributes (Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 33

 Primary States (Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936

Humidification Sequencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937

Attributes (Humidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938

Primary States (Humidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938

Reliability (Humidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938

Loss of Airflow Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939

Module Use in Applications (Loss of Airflow Sequencing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939

Attributes (Loss of Airflow Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939

Primary States (Loss of Airflow Sequencing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941

Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100% OA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942

Module Use in Applications (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
Attributes (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943

Primary States (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945

Reliability (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946

Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947

Module Use in Applications (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
Attributes (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949

Primary States (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

Reliability (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

Occupied Sequencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952

Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD]). . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955

34 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956

Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960

Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963

Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966

Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970

Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD w HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 35

 Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974

Occupied Sequencing (Single Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

Occupied Zone Sequencing (FC/AHU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [FC/AHU]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [FC/AHU]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [FC/AHU]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979

Occupied Zone Sequencing (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [HP]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [HP]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [HP]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982

Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 1]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 1]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 1]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985

Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 2]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 2]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 2]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988

Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989

36 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 3]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 3]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 3]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990

Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle W]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle W]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle W]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993

Occupied Zone Sequencing (VAV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [VAV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [VAV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [VAV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996

Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Pass Through (Boolean, Enum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997

Module Use in Applications (Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997

Attributes (Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Reliability (Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

State Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999

Application Mode Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Module Use in Applications (Application Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Attributes (Application Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001

Primary States (Application Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001

Energy Hold Off Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002

Module Use in Applications (Energy Hold Off Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 37

 Attributes (Energy Hold Off Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003

Primary States (Energy Hold Off Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004

Reliability (Energy Hold Off Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004

Fan Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005

Module Use in Applications (Fan Alarm Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005

Attributes (Fan Alarm Status). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006

Primary States (Fan Alarm Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006

Reliability (Fan Alarm Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006

Fan Determination (Terminal Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [Terminal Units]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007

Attributes (Fan Determination [Terminal Units]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008

Primary States (Fan Determination [Terminal Units]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009

Reliability (Fan Determination [Terminal Units]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009

Occupancy Mode Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010

Module Use in Applications (Occupancy Mode Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011

Attributes (Occupancy Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011

Primary States (Occupancy Mode Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012

Reliability (Occupancy Mode Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013

Occupancy Mode Determination (MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

Module Use in Applications (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

Attributes (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

Primary States (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

Reliability (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

System Mode Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016

Module Use in Applications (System Mode Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016

38 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Attributes (System Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017

Primary States (System Mode Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017

Unit Enable Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018

Module Use in Applications (Unit Enable Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018

Attributes (Unit Enable Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019

Primary States (Unit Enable Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020

Reliability (Unit Enable Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020

Zone Low Limit Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021

Module Use in Applications (Zone Low Limit Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021

Attributes (Zone Low Limit Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022

Primary States (Zone Low Limit Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022

Reliability (Zone Low Limit Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022

Unoccupied Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023

Unoccupied Sequencing (Common) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025

Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028

Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air ZN-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T]) . . . . . . . . 1029

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 39

 Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031

Unoccupied Sequencing (MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034

Unoccupied Sequencing (UV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037

Unoccupied Sequencing (VAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040

VAV Specific Sequencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

Autocalibration Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

Module Use in Applications (Autocalibration Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042

Attributes (Autocalibration Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042

Primary States (Autocalibration Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043

Balancer Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044

40 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Module Use in Applications (Balancer Override) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044

Attributes (Balancer Override) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045

Primary States (Balancer Override) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047

Reliability (Balancer Override) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047

Box Flow Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048

Module Use in Applications (Box Flow Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048

Attributes (Box Flow Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049

Primary States (Box Flow Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050

Reliability (Box Flow Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051

WarmupCooldown Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052

Module Use in Applications (WarmupCooldown Sequencing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052

Attributes (WarmupCooldown Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053

Primary States (WarmupCooldown Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054

Reliability (WarmupCooldown Sequencing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054

VAV Fan Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Flow Based) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055

Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based]) . . . . . . . . . 1055

Attributes (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056

Primary States (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057

Reliability (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057

Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Temp Based) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058

Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based]) . . . . . . . . 1058
Attributes (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059

Primary States (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059

Reliability (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 41

 Fan Determination (VAV Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060
Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [VAV Series]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060

Attributes (Fan Determination [VAV Series]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061

Primary States (Fan Determination [VAV Series]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061

Reliability (Fan Determination [VAV Series]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061

Chapter 26: Output Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
Cascaded Zone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064

Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065

Module Use in Applications (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . 1066

Attributes (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066

Primary States (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067

Reliability (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067

Flow Setpoint (VAV Dual Duct). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068

Module Use in Applications (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068

Attributes (Flow Setpoint [VAV Attributes (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct]) . . . . . . . . . . 1069

Primary States (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070

Reliability (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070

Flow Setpoint (VAV Single Duct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
Module Use in Applications (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071

Attributes (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072

Primary States (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073

Reliability (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073

HD Constant Flow Setpoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074

42 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Module Use in Applications (HD Constant Flow Setpoint) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074

Attributes (HD Constant Flow Setpoint) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075

Reliability (HD Constant Flow Setpoint) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075

Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076

Module Use in Applications (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076

Attributes (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077

Primary States (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077

Reliability (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077

Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
Module Use in Applications (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct) . . . . . . . . . 1078

Attributes (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079

Primary States (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079

Reliability (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079

Central Plant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080

Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080

Module Use in Applications (Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 1080

Attributes (Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081

Primary States (Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082

Plant Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
Module Use in Applications (Plant Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083

Attributes (Plant Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084

Primary States (Plant Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085

Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086

Module Use in Applications (Pump Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 43

 Attributes (Pump Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087

Primary States (Pump Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088

Pump Control v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089

Module Use in Applications (Pump Control v2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089

Attributes (Pump Control v2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090

Primary States (Pump Control v2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091

Rotation Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092

Module Use in Applications (Rotation Small). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092

Attributes (Rotation Small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093

Primary States (Rotation Small). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095

Reliability (Rotation Small). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096

Secondary Pump PID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
Module Use in Applications (Secondary Pump PID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097

Attributes (Secondary Pump PID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097

Primary States (Secondary Pump PID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098

Sequenced Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

Module Use in Applications (Sequenced Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

Attributes (Sequenced Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

Tower Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1100

Module Use in Applications (Tower Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100

Attributes (Tower Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101

Tower Control v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103

Module Use in Applications (Tower Control v2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103

Attributes (Tower Control v2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104

44 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Primary States (Tower Control v2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105

Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106

Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106

Attributes (Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107

Primary States (Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108

Damper Control with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109

Attributes (Damper Control with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110

Primary States (Damper Control with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111

Damper Control - AHU Econ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
Damper Control for Economizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for Economizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112

Attributes (Damper Control for Economizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113

Primary States (Damper Control for Economizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114

Reliability (Damper Control for Economizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114

Damper Control for Relief Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for Relief Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116

Attributes (Damper Control for Relief Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117

Primary States (Damper Control for Relief Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118

Reliability (Damper Control for Relief Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118

Damper Control for Volume Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for Volume Matching) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 45

 Attributes (Damper Control for Volume Matching) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120

Primary States (Damper Control for Volume Matching). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121

Reliability (Damper Control for Volume Matching). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121

Damper Control - AHU Min OA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122

Min OA Damper 2 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122

Module Use in Applications (Min OA Damper 2 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122

Attributes (Min OA Damper 2 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123

Primary States (Min OA Damper 2 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124

Reliability (Min OA Damper 2 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124

Min OA Damper Proportional Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125

Module Use in Applications (Min OA Damper Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125

Attributes (Min OA Damper Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126

Primary States (Min OA Damper Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127

Reliability (Min OA Damper Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127

Min OA Fan Constant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128

Module Use in Applications (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128

Attributes (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129

Primary States (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130

Reliability (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130

Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131

Module Use in Applications (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control). . . . . . . . . . . 1131

Attributes (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132

Primary States (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134

Reliability (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134

Damper Control - VAV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135

46 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135

Damper Control (VAV Exhaust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135

Attributes (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136

Primary States (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137

Reliability (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137

Damper Control (VAV Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control [VAV Supply]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138

Attributes (Damper Control [VAV Supply]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139

Primary States (Damper Control [VAV Supply]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140

Reliability (Damper Control [VAV Supply]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141

Fan Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Fan Proportional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142

Module Use in Applications (Fan Proportional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142

Attributes (Fan Proportional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143

Primary States (Fan Proportional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144

Reliability (Fan Proportional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144

Parallel Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145

Module Use in Applications (Parallel Fan Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145

Attributes (Parallel Fan Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145

Reliability (Parallel Fan Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145

Single Speed Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146

Module Use in Applications (Single Speed Fan Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146

Attributes (Single Speed Fan Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 47

 Primary States (Single Speed Fan Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147

Reliability (Single Speed Fan Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147

Fan Three Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148

Module Use in Applications (Fan Three Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148

Attributes (Fan Three Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149

Primary States (Fan Three Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150

Reliability (Fan Three Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150

Fan VAV Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151

Module Use in Applications (Fan VAV Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151

Attributes (Fan VAV Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152

Primary States (Fan VAV Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152

Reliability (Fan VAV Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152

Fan Control - AHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153

Fan Single Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154

Module Use in Applications (Fan Single Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154

Attributes (Fan Single Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155

Primary States (Fan Single Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155

Reliability (Fan Single Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155

Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156

Module Use in Applications (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156

Attributes (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156

Primary States (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157

Reliability (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157

Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158

48 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Module Use in Applications (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158

Attributes (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159

Primary States (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160

Reliability (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160

Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161

Module Use in Applications (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161

Attributes (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162

Primary States (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163

Reliability (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163

Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164

Module Use in Applications (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164

Attributes (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165

Primary States (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166

Reliability (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166

Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167

Module Use in Applications (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167

Attributes (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168

Primary States (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169

Reliability (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169

Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170

Module Use in Applications (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control) . . . . . . . . . 1170

Attributes (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171

Primary States (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172

Reliability (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173

Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 49

 Module Use in Applications (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . 1174

Attributes (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175

Primary States (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176

Reliability (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177

Fan Supply Duct Static Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178

Module Use in Applications (Fan Supply Duct Static Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178

Attributes (Fan Supply Duct Static Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179

Primary States (Fan Supply Duct Static Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180

Reliability (Fan Supply Duct Static Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180

Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181

Module Use in Applications (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181

Attributes (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182

Primary States (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183

Reliability (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183

Heating & Cooling Control - 2 Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
2 Pipe 2 Position Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185

Attributes (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186

Primary States (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187

Reliability (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188

2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Attributes (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190

Primary States (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192

2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194

50 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . 1194
Attributes (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195

Primary States (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197

Reliability (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198

2 Pipe Proportional Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199

Attributes (2 Pipe Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200

Primary States (2 Pipe Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201

Reliability (2 Pipe Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202

2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit). . . . . . . . . 1203

Attributes (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204

Primary States (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205

2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207

Attributes (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208

Primary States (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210

Reliability (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211

Heating & Cooling Control - Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212

Cooling 2 Position Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212

Module Use in Applications (Cooling 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213

Attributes (Cooling 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213

Primary States (Cooling 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214

Reliability (Cooling 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 51

 Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
Module Use in Applications (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification) . . . 1215

Attributes (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216

Primary States (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217

Reliability (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218

Cooling Proportional Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219

Module Use in Applications (Cooling Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219

Attributes (Cooling Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220

Primary States (Cooling Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220

Reliability (Cooling Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220

Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221

Module Use in Applications (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification). . . . . . . 1221

Attributes (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222

Primary States (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223

Reliability (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224

Cooling Staged Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225

Module Use in Applications (Cooling Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225

Attributes (Cooling Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226

Primary States (Cooling Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227

Reliability (Cooling Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227

Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228

Module Use in Applications (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . 1228

Attributes (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228

Primary States (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230

Reliability (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230

52 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

Heating & Cooling Control - Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231

Heat Pump Staged Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231

Module Use in Applications (Heat Pump Staged Compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231

Attributes (Heat Pump Staged Compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232

Primary States (Heat Pump Staged Compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234

Reliability (Heat Pump Staged Compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234

Heating & Cooling Control - Heat Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235

Heat Recovery Glycol Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235

Attributes (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236

Primary States (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237

Reliability (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237

Heat Recovery Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238

Attributes (Heat Recovery Wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239

Primary States (Heat Recovery Wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240

Reliability (Heat Recovery Wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240

Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241
Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers) . . . . . 1241

Attributes (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242

Primary States (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243

Reliability (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244

Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 53

 Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . 1245

Attributes (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246

Primary States (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247

Reliability (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248

Heating & Cooling Control - Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249

Heating 2 Position Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
Module Use in Applications (Heating 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250

Attributes (Heating 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251

Primary States (Heating 2 Position Valve). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252

Reliability (Heating 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252

Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253

Module Use in Applications (Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . 1253
Attributes (Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253

Primary States (Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255

Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256

Module Use in Applications (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . 1256

Attributes (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
Primary States (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258

Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259

Module Use in Applications (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit). . . . . . . . . 1259

Attributes (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260

Primary States (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261

Reliability (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262

Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263

54 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Module Use in Applications (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . 1263

Attributes (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264

Primary States (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266

Reliability (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267

Heating Proportional Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268

Module Use in Applications (Heating Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268

Attributes (Heating Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269

Primary States (Heating Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270

Reliability (Heating Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270

Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271

Module Use in Applications (Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . 1271

Attributes (Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272

Primary States (Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274

Module Use in Applications (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274

Attributes (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275

Primary States (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276

Reliability (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277

Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278

Module Use in Applications (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278

Attributes (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279

Primary States (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280

Reliability (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281

Heating Staged Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282

Module Use in Applications (Heating Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 55

 Attributes (Heating Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283

Primary States (Heating Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284

Reliability (Heating Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284

Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285

Module Use in Applications (Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit). . . . . . . . . . 1285

Attributes (Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285

Primary States (Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287

Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288

Module Use in Applications (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
Attributes (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289

Primary States (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290

Reliability (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291

Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292

Module Use in Applications (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control). . . 1292

Attributes (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293

Primary States (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294

Reliability (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295

Humidity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296

Humidification Packaged Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Packaged Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296

Attributes (Humidification Packaged Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297

Primary States (Humidification Packaged Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298

Reliability (Humidification Packaged Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298

Humidification Proportional Steam Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299

56 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Module Use in Applications (Humidification Proportional Steam Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299

Attributes (Humidification Proportional Steam Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300

Primary States (Humidification Proportional Steam Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301

Reliability (Humidification Proportional Steam Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301

Humidification Scrubber Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Scrubber Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302

Attributes (Humidification Scrubber Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303

Primary States (Humidification Scrubber Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304

Reliability (Humidification Scrubber Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304

Humidification Staged Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305

Attributes (Humidification Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306

Primary States (Humidification Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307

Reliability (Humidification Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307

Lighting Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308

Module Use in Applications (Lighting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308

Attributes (Lighting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309

Primary States (Lighting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310

Reliability (Lighting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310

Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311

Blocking Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311

Module Use in Applications (Motor Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311

Attributes (Motor Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 57

Multizone Zone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313

Zone Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314

Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314

Attributes (Zone Damper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314

Primary States (Zone Damper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315

Reliability (Zone Damper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315

Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316

Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316

Attributes (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317

Primary States (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319

Reliability (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319

Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320

Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve). . . . . . . . . . . 1320

Attributes (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321

Primary States (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322

Reliability (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323

Zone Damper w Staged Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324

Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper w Staged Heating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324

Attributes (Zone Damper w Staged Heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325

Primary States (Zone Damper w Staged Heating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327

Reliability (Zone Damper w Staged Heating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327

Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328

Pass Through (Enum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328

58 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Module Use in Applications (Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328

Attributes (Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329

Reliability (Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329

Sideloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330

Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330

Attributes (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331

Primary States (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331

Reliability (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331

Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332

Attributes (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333

Primary States (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333

Reliability (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333

Sideloop PI Proportional Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334

Attributes (Sideloop PI Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334

Primary States (Sideloop PI Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335

Reliability (Sideloop PI Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335

Sideloop PI With Reset Proportional Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336

Attributes (Sideloop PI with Reset Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336

Primary States (Sideloop PI with Reset Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338

Reliability (Sideloop PI with Reset Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338

Sideloop PI Staged Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
Attributes (Sideloop PI Staged Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339

Primary States (Sideloop PI Staged Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341

Reliability (Sideloop PI Staged Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 59

 Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
Attributes (Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343

Primary States (Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345

Reliability (Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345

Sideloop Reset Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346

Attributes (Sideloop Reset Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347

Primary States (Sideloop Reset Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347

Reliability (Sideloop Reset Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347

Staged Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348

MSC 01 through MSC 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348

Module Use in Applications (MSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360

Attributes (MSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361

Reliability (MSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364

Staged Output Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365

Sequencer 01 through Sequencer 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365

Module Use in Applications (Sequencer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371

Attributes (Sequencer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371

Reliability (Sequencer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373

Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374

Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374

Module Use in Applications (Last Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375

Attributes (Last Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379

60 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Reliability (Last Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379

Totalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380

Totalization (Enum Runtime) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Module Use in Applications (Totalization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381

Attributes (Totalization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382

Reliability (Totalization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383

Chapter 27: Network Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385

Output Control Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
Generic (Add New) Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
Chapter 28: Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
Chapter 29: CCT Input and Output Object Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
CCT Input and Output Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
Command Priority Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
Object Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391
Chapter 30: Analog Input Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
Analog Input Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
Analog Input Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398
Chapter 31: Analog Output Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
Analog Output Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400
Analog Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
Chapter 32: Analog Value Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Analog Value Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Analog Value Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
Chapter 33: Binary Input Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 61

Binary Input Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
Binary Input Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
Chapter 34: Binary Output Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
Binary Output Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
Binary Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
Chapter 35: Binary Value Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
Binary Value Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
Binary Value Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425
Chapter 36: Counter Input (Accumulator) Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
Counter Input (Accumulator) Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
Counter Input (Accumulator) Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
Chapter 37: Multistate Value Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
Multistate Value Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
Multistate Value Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
Chapter 38: Position Adjust Output Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
Position Adjust Output Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
Position Adjust Output Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
Chapter 39: Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
Activity Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Activity Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
EWMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444

Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446

62 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

 Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447

Totalization (Analog Integration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448

Totalization (Boolean Event). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450

Totalization (Boolean Runtime) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452

Totalization (Enum Event) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454

Totalization (Enum Runtime) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456

Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
MSC Pre-Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
PID Pre-Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463

Process ID Configuration Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464

PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465

PVDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471

Math. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Psychrometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Absolute Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Dew Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476

Enthalpy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477

Free Cooling is Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478

Relative Humidity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1480

Wet Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481

Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482
Statistical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
Execution Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484

Last Value (Boolean) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486

Last Value (Enum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487

Last Value (Float) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 63

 Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489

Rate Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491

Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
Chapter 40: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
Chapter 41: Application and Module Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . 1497
Chapter 42: Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539
E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539
F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
Chapter 43: Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547
Chapter 44: Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Chapter 45: Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551

64 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help

Chapter 1: CCT Help: Introduction
Using This Help System
Introduction
This Help system contains the user information for CCT. This section describes
the organization of the Help system and offers tips for using it effectively. For
information on using CCT, start with the User Interface section, then see the
Getting Started section. For a list of acronyms and terms, see the Glossary. For a
list of trademarks, see Trademarks.

Concepts
Accessing the CCT Help
You can access the CCT Help in the following ways:
• On the Help menu in CCT, select Topics.
If you access the Help via the Help menu, you start at the beginning and
navigate to the topic you are looking for.
• Click the Help button on a dialog box or press F1 while working in CCT.
Dialog box Help buttons and the F1 key open the Help to the appropriate topic
for the currently active view or dialog box. The entire Help system opens, but
you start at a topic relevant to your location in the application.
Internet Explorer Information Bar Security Message
When you access the Help from a computer running the Windows XP operating
system with SP2 (or similar system configuration) and Internet Explorer, the
following security message may appear in the Internet Explorer Information Bar
due to Microsoft security settings:
To help protect your security, Internet Explorer has restricted this file from
showing active content that could access your computer. Click here for
options...
To open the Help:
1. Click Click here for options... and select Allow Blocked Content. A Security
Warning dialog box appears stating:
Allowing active content such as script and ActiveX controls can be useful, but
active content might also harm your computer. Are you sure you want to let
this file run active content?
2. Click Yes. The CCT Help system opens.

Using This Help System 65

Help Appearance
The look and feel of the Help system varies slightly depending on if your Web
browser has Java settings enabled. If Java settings are disabled, the Help appears
using JavaScript settings. The full Java implementation opens the Help with all of
its designed Java functionality, including the Contents, Index, Search, and
Favorites tabs. The main differences you may notice if Java settings are disabled is
that the Help system opens, but the Favorites tab does not appear and the user
interface is not as robust.
To enable the full Java implementation, do the following:
1. If the Java implementation suddenly does not appear on your computer when it
had previously, delete Internet Cookies to reset your settings. If this does not
make a difference the next time you open the Help, continue to the next items.
2. Check that Web browser is configured to run Java programs (for example.
Internet Options in the Control Panel or from the Web browser). See your Web
browser documentation for details.
3. Check your Java settings in the Control Panel. See your Java documentation
for details.

Help Window Layout

The CCT Help window is divided into two panes or sides:
• Navigation and Search Pane – on the left side of the Help window, contains the
Contents, Index, Search and Favorites tabs used for locating and jumping to the
Help information
• Help Content Pane – on the right side of the Help window, contains the Help
information

66 CCT Help: Introduction

Navigation and Search Pane

Tabs
This Help system offers several ways to navigate and search for information using
tabs on the left side of the Help window:
Contents
The Contents tab contains the table of contents,
which is the hierarchy of the entire Help system
based on the paragraph headings.

• The icons break the information into

sub-categories or pages.
• To see the contents of a closed book icon,
open it by clicking on the button next to
the icon.
• To close an open book icon, click on the
button next to the icon.

• To display a topic, click on the , , or

icon. The topic information appears in the right pane.
The Help topics are organized such that the highest levels of the hierarchy
contain Help for the main CCT activities/operations (as well as an introductory
topic, reference section, and sections covering application, module, and logic
block information). Each section is organized as follows:
• Introduction topic with overview information
• Concepts section covering information key to understanding the section
• Steps section with procedures for that topic
• Screens section covering the screens, wizards, and dialog boxes specific to
that topic

Using This Help System 67

 Index
The Index tab contains the index for the entire
Help system. The Index allows you to select
terms from a predefined alphabetical list of key
terms developed by the Help authors.
To search the Index, type a term in the text box at
the top. The cursor moves in the list of terms to
match what you type. Select the term or the term
closest to the word you are searching for. Click
Display to show the information in the right side
of the Help window. You also can double-click
on a term to display the information.
Tip: The Indexed term is not highlighted in the
displayed content.
Tip: To do a full-text search, use the Search tab.

68 CCT Help: Introduction

 Search
The Search tab allows you to do a full-text search
of the entire Help system or a section of it (using
the scope selection). In other words, it allows you
to search for any text rather than restricting you
to a predefined list of terms as the Index does.
To search, type a word in the search text box at
the top and click Go!. The system lists the topics
containing the word at the bottom. The topics list
is arranged with the most relevant topics at the
top of the list.
To view a topic in the list, select the title from the
list at the bottom. The Help content appears in the
right side of the Help window. The search term is
highlighted in the Help content.
Tip: The search defaults to the scope used in your last search, so adjust the
content in the Choose the scope of the search box as necessary. The All
Available Books scope searches the entire Help system.
Tip: The arrow button to the right of the search text box contains previous
searches.
Tip: Search for multiple words by separating the words with spaces (for
example, user interface). The search returns titles for sections containing
all of the words you type.
Tip: The Search tab is not capable of doing a boolean search. However, the
entire Help system is available in Adobe PDF format on the QuickLIT
Product Information Web site or the QuickLIT CD, which allows you to
perform advanced searches.
Tip: If the term appears in a drop-down list, expand the list to see the term.

Using This Help System 69

 Favorites
The Favorites tab contains bookmarks set inside
the Help system. If you visit a place in the Help
often, make it a Favorite so you can quickly
return to the spot.
• To add a Favorite, navigate to a topic any way
you choose (using the Contents, Index, Search
tabs, or F1). When the topic you want to save
appears, select the Favorites tab on the left
side, and click Add.
• To display a Favorite, select the page name in
the Favorites tab list, and click Display.
• To remove a Favorite, select the page name in the Favorites tab list, and
click Remove.
Tip: Bookmarks in the Help system are not the same as Web browser
bookmarks.

70 CCT Help: Introduction

Help Content Pane

Buttons
Buttons allow you to navigate the Help system and print. The buttons in this Help
are the following:

Show in Contents
The Show in Contents button synchronizes the information in the Contents tab
to your current location in the Help system. If the Contents tab is not active on
the left side of the Help, it is brought forward. Highlighted text in the Contents
list indicates where you are in the Help system.

Previous button
The Previous button takes you to the topic preceding the one you are viewing.
In other words, it takes you to the prior topic in the table of contents.
Tip: To go back to the last screen you visited, use the browser Back button.

Next button
The Next button takes you to the topic that follows the one you are viewing. In
other words, it takes you to the next topic in the table of contents.
Tip: To go to the next screen in your browsing sequence, use the browser
Forward button.

Related Topics button

The Related Topics button displays a list of topics associated with the
information you are viewing. Topics in this list vary depending on the section.
When you click on the Related Topics button, a box with active links to the
related topics appears.

Tip: If no related topics exist, the Related Topics button appears dimmed.
Tip: The related topics that appear when you click the Related Topics button at
the top of the Help are the same topics that appear when you click
in the body of the Help.

Using This Help System 71

 Print button
The Print button prints the scrollable information on the right side of the Help
window. The information prints as you see it. To see the content of collapsed
lists, you must expand them before you print the Help.
You may also print a PDF of the entire CCT Help system from the QuickLIT
CD or Web site. This option allows you to print all of the Help’s contents from
beginning to end, including a table of contents and index.
For more information, see Printing the Help.

Links

Drop-Down Lists
When you view the Help content, drop-down lists can be either open or closed. In
a closed drop-down list, only the introduction text appears at first, bold and black
with an arrow next to it. When you click on the introduction text, the list opens up.
In an open drop-down list, the list appears when you first view the Help. When you
click on the introduction text, the list closes and only the introduction text is
visible. Click it again to re-open the list.
Note: Information in a drop-down list only prints if you have the list open on the
screen.

Jumps
Jumps take you to a different section in the Help system. Jumps appear as blue,
underlined text like.

Pop-Ups
Pop-ups appear as blue text without an underline. When you move the mouse
cursor over the pop-up text, explanatory text appears in a pop-up window. If you
click on a pop-up, you jump to its entry in the glossary or other topic.
Note: Pop-up window content does not print.

72 CCT Help: Introduction

Help Organization
Topics in the CCT Help include the following sections:
• Introduction Section
• Concepts Section
• Steps Section
• Screens Section

Introduction Section
The Introduction section contains the introductory and overview information of the
topic. Introduction headings appear in the Contents tab on the left side of the Help
and in the information on the right.

Concepts Section
The Concepts section contains information key to understanding the topic.
Concepts headings appear in the Contents tab on the left side of the Help and in the
information on the right.

Steps Section
The Steps section appears only in the Help topics that have procedures associated
with them. The steps appear in the Contents tab on the left side of the Help.

Screens Section
The Screens section contains descriptions of the views, wizards, and dialog boxes
you might encounter. Screen headings appear in the Contents tab on the left side of
the Help and in the information on the right.

Using This Help System 73

Steps
Printing the Help
You have three options in printing the Help:
• Printing the Navigation and Search Pane
• Printing a Specific Help Topic
• Printing the Entire Help System

Printing the Navigation and Search Pane

To print the content expanded on the left side of the Help, click anywhere on the
left side of the Help and click the browser print button.

Printing a Specific Help Topic

To print the scrollable contents of the right side of the Help, click the Print button
in the Help or click anywhere on the right side and click the browser print button.
Note: Information in drop-down lists prints only if you have the list open on the
screen. Pop-up content does not print in the pop-up window.

Printing the Entire Help System

The entire Help system is available for printing in the Adobe PDF format.
To print the entire Help system:
1. If necessary, download Adobe Reader (required to view the PDF file) from the
Adobe Reader site.
2. Go to the QuickLIT Product Information Web site or insert the QuickLIT CD.
3. Search for or browse to and open the CCT Help PDF file.
4. On the File menu, select Print.
Note: This file is large. Allow plenty of time for download and printing.

74 CCT Help: Introduction

Chapter 2: CCT Help: Introduction
User Interface
Introduction
The Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) is used to configure, simulate, and
commission devices, such as FECs, IOMs, NCEs, and VMA1600s, on a
Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) bus. The CCT user interface operates in
three modes: Configuration, Simulation, and Commissioning.
For information on the Commissioning mode only version of the CCT software,
see the CCT Commissioning Only Software section.
This section describes the user interface of the CCT, including the Control View,
Logic View, and the Details dialog box. For information on the tasks you can do in
these parts of CCT, see the Configuring a System, Simulating a System, and
Commissioning a System sections.
Before performing tasks in CCT, see the Getting Started section for guidance.

Concepts
CCT Commissioning Only Software
A Commissioning mode only version of the CCT software is available to the
Johnson Controls branch offices for individuals having only commissioning tasks
(for example, balancing contractors). The CCT Commissioning software allows
you to focus on the commissioning tasks you need to perform without being
distracted by the tasks done in the other two modes. For example, you can issue
commands and commission devices, but you cannot make configuration changes,
define hardware, load, or simulate devices. You can print the system, use the Test
Mode, and view system selections, hardware definitions, controller information,
connections, and item details. The Configuration and Simulation modes are
disabled in the CCT Commissioning software.

System
In CCT, a system is represented by the mechanical equipment and the logic needed
to control that equipment, independent of hardware definition. The System
Selection Wizard in CCT describes the make-up of a mechanical system to aid you
in creating the group of logic components that work together to control the
mechanical system. See System Types and Configurations in the Configuring a
System section.

Application
An application is a collection of the components that make up the control logic of a
system, including modules, logic blocks, custom logic, and hardware definition.
For information on the types of applications you can create, see the Applications
section.

User Interface 75
Controller Application File (.caf)
A Controller Application File (.caf) is a file which contains all the logic
components needed to represent a system. CCT prompts you to save a controller
application file for each system you create. Saving this file allows you to access it
again later to make changes or to use it for additional systems.
The default location to save a Controller Application File is C:\Documents and
Settings\username.
You cannot use certain characters when saving a Controller Application File.
Illegal characters include:
: * ?"<>|/ \

Modules
A module is a component made up of logic blocks used to create portions of the
overall control logic of a system. Module inputs are used to influence the state or
values of outputs. You can view and/or edit modules highlighted in tan in the
Control View, but changes should not be made until the default configuration is
thoroughly understood and the effect of changes on the connected outputs is
considered. To view or change default values used in a module, see Details
Configuration in the Configuring a System section. To view or change connections
to a module, see Control View Configuration in the Configuring a System section.
See the Modules section.

Logic Blocks
A logic block is a component used to construct the control logic of a system. You
can view and work with logic blocks in the Logic View of CCT. Logic block
inputs are used to influence the state or values of outputs. You can view and/or edit
logic contained within modules highlighted in tan in the Control View, but
changes should not be made until the default logic is thoroughly understood and
the effect of changes on the connected outputs is considered. To view or change
default values used in a block, see Details Configuration in the Configuring a
System section.
See the Logic section for information on logic blocks.

76 CCT Help: Introduction

 CCT User Interface
Figure 2-1 shows the CCT user interface. Click on the links to the left of the
graphic or click an area of the graphic for information on the UI components.
Figure 2-1: CCT User Interface

Menu Bar
Modes and
Operations
Buttons

Quick
Navigation
Menu

Control/Logic
View
Workspace
(Control View
shown here)

Status Bar

The slider bars of the center and side panels have arrows allowing you to expand
the Parameters, Connections, or Balancer tabs to achieve the desired view (circled
in red in Figure 2-1). Click the arrows to show and hide the panels. If you click the
slider bar and drag it to the desired location, clicking the arrows returns the view to
the location you moved the slider bar. Clicking the arrows a second time shows/
hides the entire panel. The sliders maintain their location between sessions.

User Interface 77
Menu Bar
The CCT menu bar includes the following options:
Table 2-1: Menu Bar Options (Part 1 of 3)
Menu Option Keyboard Description
Shortcut
File New Ctrl + N Opens the New System dialog box. See the Configuring a
System section.
Open Ctrl + O Opens the Open dialog box to select an existing Controller
Application File (.caf) to use.
The default location of a Controller Application File is
C:\Documents and Settings\username.
Note: You cannot open a .caf file in the CCT Commissioning
only software. You must Commission to show a system in
the CCT UI.
Close Closes the open Controller Application File. You must be in
Configuration mode to close the Controller Application File.3
Note: You cannot close a .caf file in the CCT Commissioning
only software. You must stop Commissioning mode to
remove a system from the CCT UI.
Save Ctrl + S Saves the current system as a Controller Application File (.caf). If
you have not already saved the system, CCT opens the Save
dialog box.
Illegal characters include:
: * ?"<>|/ \
Save As Opens the Save dialog box to allow you to save the system as a
Controller Application File (.caf) using a different name.
Illegal characters include:
: * ?"<>|/ \
Print Ctrl + P Opens the Summary Report Options dialog box to print a
summary of the open Controller Application File (.caf) in PDF
format.
Exit Closes the CCT software. You must be in Configuration mode to
exit CCT.
Note: In the CCT Commissioning only software, you can exit
CCT after you stop Commissioning.
Modes1 Configure2 Switches to Control View in Configuration mode.3, 4 The
Configure button text changes to Stop Simulation when in
Simulation mode and to Stop Commissioning when in
Commissioning mode. See the Configuring a System section.
Simulate2 Opens the Simulation dialog box to enter Simulation mode.3 See
the Simulating a System section.
Commission Opens the Commission Device wizard to enter Commissioning
mode.3, 4 See the Commissioning a System section.

78 CCT Help: Introduction

 Table 2-1: Menu Bar Options (Part 2 of 3)
Menu Option Keyboard Description
Shortcut
Action5 Commands Opens the Commands dialog box to issue a command to the
selected item. This option is available in Simulation mode. See
the Simulating a System section.
This option is also available in Commissioning mode but only
when in Test Mode. See the Commissioning a System section for
details on the Test Mode.
Metasys Commands Opens the Metasys Commands dialog box to issue a
Metasys system command to the selected item. This option is
available in Commissioning mode. See the Commissioning a
System section.
Delete Opens the Confirm dialog box verifying you want to remove the
item.
Rename Opens the Rename dialog box to rename the selected module or
logic block.
View Connections Displays the connections of the selected module(s) in the
Connections tab.
View Details Displays the Details dialog box to view the details of the selected
item.
View Logic Opens the Logic View for the selected module. This menu option
is available only when the module contains logic that can be
viewed or modified (see the Control View Status Colors and
Icons section).
Setup Opens the Setup dialog box to change the current signal of the
selected Input or Output.
Operations Select System Opens the CCT System Selection Wizard. See the Configuring a
System section.
Sideloop Opens the CCT System Selection Wizard to create a sideloop.
See the Configuring a System section.
Define Hardware Opens the Hardware Definition Wizard. See the Defining
Hardware section.
Load Opens the Load Device Wizard.3 See the Loading Devices
section.

User Interface 79
 Table 2-1: Menu Bar Options (Part 3 of 3)
Menu Option Keyboard Description
Shortcut
Tools Box Flow Test Opens the Box Flow Test application. See the Performing a Box
Flow Test section.
Preferences > Opens the Preferences - Naming and Signal screen. See the
Naming and Signal Setting and Using Preferences section.
Preferences > Opens the Preferences - System Selection screen. See the
System Selection Setting and Using Preferences section.
Preferences > Opens the Preferences - Localization screen. See the Setting
Localization and Using Preferences section. This option is available only
when a .caf file is not open.
Controller When in Commissioning mode, opens the Controller Information
Information wizard to display information from the controller on the field bus
to which you are currently connected and commissioning. See
the Commissioning a System section.
When in Configuration mode, opens the Controller Information
wizard to display information from one or more controllers on a
field bus. See the Configuring a System section.
System Rename Opens the System Rename dialog box to rename the current
system. This option does not change the name of the Controller
Application File (.caf).
Job Information Opens the Job Information dialog box to enter information
specific to the current job and open Controller Application File
(.caf).
Configure Display Opens the Configure Display dialog box to set up the Local
Controller Display. This option is available in Configuration mode.
See the Configuring the Local Controller Display section.
Upgrade System Opens the System Upgrade dialog box to upgrade the open .caf
file to the latest version. See the Upgrading System Files section.
Help Topics F1 Opens the CCT Help system.
About CCT Opens the About dialog box displaying the CCT version,
database information, and file version.

1. See the Changing Modes section for information on entering and exiting modes.
2. The Configuration (Configure) and Simulation (Simulate) modes are not available in the CCT Commissioning only
software version.
3. If you made changes to the system, the Save Confirmation or Confirm dialog box opens prompting you to save.
4. When switching from Simulation mode, a Confirm dialog box appears prompting you to save or discard the changes
made during simulation.
5. Menu options appear in the Action menu as appropriate for the selected item. If an item is not selected, the Action
menu may appear empty.

80 CCT Help: Introduction

Modes
The CCT user interface operates in three modes: Configuration, Simulation, and
Commissioning. In addition to the options in the Modes menu to change modes,
the CCT UI includes buttons for moving between the modes (Figure 2-1):
Configure, Simulate, and Commission.
Note: The Configuration and Simulation modes are not available in the CCT
Commissioning only software version.
See the Configuration, Simulation, and Commissioning sections for descriptions of
the modes. Also, see the Changing Modes section.

Configuration
Note: The Configuration mode is not available in the CCT Commissioning only
software version.
The Configuration mode is the default mode of CCT. When you add or select a
system, it opens the system in Configuration mode. This mode allows you to
design and edit a system. Configuration tasks include selecting a system,
modifying parameters, creating custom logic (as necessary), and other tasks to set
up a system. See the Configuring a System section for details.
The Configure button/menu text changes to Stop Simulation when in Simulation
mode and to Stop Commissioning when in Commissioning mode. The
Configuration mode also acts as a transitional mode when you need to switch from
Simulation to Commissioning mode and vice versa. See the Changing Modes
section.
You must be in Configuration mode to close a Controller Application File (.caf) or
exit CCT.
Back to Modes.

Simulation
Note: The Simulation mode is not available in the CCT Commissioning only
software version.
When you enter Simulation mode, the Simulation dialog box appears allowing you
to set the Simulation Speed (up to 5x real time) and the startup values for the
simulation session. The settings you select are saved and appear in the Simulation
dialog box the next time you enter Simulation mode. Simulation mode allows you
to see your system as though it were in Commissioning mode. This allows you to
test your system and make adjustments before downloading it into a device. See
the Simulating a System section for information on how to simulate your system.
Back to Modes.

User Interface 81
Commissioning
Commissioning mode allows you to connect to a device and view actual data from
that device. You can use this mode to monitor your device and set Offsets, COVs,
and Polarity in addition to other Parameter and Detail changes. For example, you
can change the Min Out and Max Out values of an Output to fine tune the range of
a 2-10 VDC proportional valve. In addition, the Commissioning mode has a
Balancer tab in the Control View for VAV applications to easily autocalibrate
VAV boxes and set flow constants in one location. See the Commissioning a
System section.
Back to Modes.

Operations
In addition to the options in the Operations menu to perform specific tasks, the
CCT UI has operation buttons: Select System, Sideloop, Define Hardware, and
Load. See the Select System, Sideloop, Define Hardware, and Load sections for
descriptions of the operations.

82 CCT Help: Introduction

Select System
The Select System operation opens the System Selection Wizard to select, review,
and change the options for a system. See the following topics in the Configuring a
System section for details on the wizard and how to use it:
• System Selection Wizard
• Selecting a System (Creating a New System)
• Viewing and Modifying System Selections
CCT does not enable the Select System button and Operation menu item for
Custom Applications or Monitoring/Supervisory Control only applications.
Back to Operations.

Sideloop
The Sideloop operation opens the System Selection Wizard for creating a sideloop.
See the Creating a Sideloop and Sideloop Applications sections for more
information.

Define Hardware
The Define Hardware operation opens the Hardware Definition wizard to define
the hardware for your system. See the Defining Hardware section for details.
Back to Operations.

Load
The Load operation opens the Load wizard to upload applications into the CCT
and to download to devices. See the Loading Devices section for details.
Back to Operations.

User Interface 83
Quick Navigation Menu
The Quick Navigation menu is a drop-down menu that allows you to navigate from
the Control View to the Logic View of any module that makes up the system, and
vice versa. This menu also allows you to view the logic of the entire application
and print it if desired. The Quick Navigation menu appears in the upper left-hand
side of the CCT screen above the Control/Logic View workspace.
The Quick Navigation menu indicates the displayed item first (for example, a
specific module or the system name). The System name appears first in the menu
list. The second item in the menu is always the View Application Logic option.
Lastly, any modules that can be viewed/modified appear in alphabetical order. If a
module has a child, the child does not appear in the menu until after the parent is
viewed once. For example, the OA Percent Min Flow Determination child module
does not appear in the menu until the Min Flow Determination parent module is
viewed. Figure 2-2 shows the Quick Navigation menu.
The View Application Logic option is available only in the Configuration mode.
Figure 2-2: Quick Navigation Menu
Displayed Item
System Name
Logic of the Entire
Application that can
be Viewed/Printed

Modules with Logic

that can be Viewed
and/or Modified
(Alphabetically)

See Application Logic View, Navigating between Control View and Logic View,
and Viewing/Printing Application Logic in the Configuring a System section for
more information.

Control/Logic View Workspace

This workspace contains the Control View or the Logic View components. You
can view an overview of a system in Control View or view individual modules in
the Logic View. See the Control View and Logic View sections for information.

84 CCT Help: Introduction

Control View
Figure 2-1 shows the Control View in the workspace. The Control View of CCT
allows you to view and modify your system design. This view visually displays
components to provide information about your system. The control components in
this view correspond to the device’s inputs, logic, and outputs, which flow from
the left side of the workspace to the right. The Control View is divided into
categories relating to the main items that make up a system (for example, Network
Inputs and Network Outputs). The items listed in these sections are derived from
the items selected for your system in the System Selection Wizard. For
information on this wizard, see the System Selection Wizard in the Configuring a
System section.
Depending on the mode in which CCT is operating, you are able to perform certain
tasks in the Control View. For information on the CCT modes, see the Modes
section. The following table describes the tasks you can perform in the Control
View in the different modes.
Table 2-2: Control View Tasks Available in Different Modes
Task Mode
Configuration Simulation Commissioning
Create a New System X
Select a System X X1 X1
Create a Sideloop X X1 X1
View Connections X X X
Modify Connections X
View Parameters X X X
Modify Parameters 2 X X3 X3
View Logic X X X
Modify Logic X
View the State Tables X X X
Modify the State Tables X
Add Modules X
Rename Modules X
Modify a Module’s Details in the X X X
Details Dialog Box
Delete Modules X
Send a Command X X4
Send a Metasys Command X
Set Up Inputs and Outputs X X X

1. Read-only
2. You cannot modify outputs of modules from the Parameters table.
3. Select parameters only
4. Only available in Test Mode.

User Interface 85
 See the following sections for information on the Control View components:
• Modes
• Operations
• Control View Module Categories
• Control View Status Colors and Icons
• Right-Click Menus (Control View)
• Connections Table
• Parameters Table

Control View Module Categories

The module categories are the sections of the Control View representing the main
items that make up a system (for example, the Network Inputs and Network
Outputs sections). The modules in the sections are automatically added based on
the items selected for your system in the System Selection Wizard. For
information on this wizard, see the System Selection Wizard in the Configuring a
System section.
The module category sections in the CCT Control View are:
• Network Inputs
• Inputs
• Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• State Generation
• State Selection
• Output Control
• Network Outputs
• Outputs
See Figure 2-1 for the location of these categories on the CCT UI.

86 CCT Help: Introduction

 Network Inputs
The Network Inputs category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1).
This section lists the network inputs defined for the system. Network inputs are
typically used to read/write values to/from a supervisory device over the network.
When a network input is not mapped to a supervisory device, it uses its default
value and can only be commanded from the Commissioning mode of CCT.
An example use is that a supervisory device reads an Outdoor Air Temperature
sensor from one device and writes its value to the network input of other devices.
Network inputs connect into other modules or the State Table.
See Network Inputs in the Modules section for information on network input
modules. Also, see Peer-to-Peer Communication in the Configuring a System for
information on peer-to-peer communication in CCT.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

Inputs
The Inputs category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1). This section
lists the inputs defined for the system. An input defines an interface to the actual
hardware in a system. An input can represent a physical sensor in the system or an
input associated with a sensor. Inputs get data directly from hardware input points
of a device.
See Inputs in the Modules section for information on input modules.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

Setpoint/Miscellaneous
The Setpoint/Miscellaneous category appears in the Control View of CCT
(Figure 2-1). This section lists the setpoint and miscellaneous modules defined for
the system. A setpoint or miscellaneous module contains logic that calculates a
setpoint or provides other calculations for a system. This section lists modules for
other miscellaneous calculations required by a system.
See Setpoint Determination/Misc in the Modules section for information on
setpoint/miscellaneous modules.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

User Interface 87
 State Generation
The State Generation category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1).
This section lists the state generators defined for the system. The state generators
are listed according to priority, where the state generators appearing at the top have
a higher priority than those listed below them. This order typically corresponds to
the order in a State Selection Table when viewing the State Tables. A state
generation module calculates a state, that is prioritized by the State Table, which
calculates a mode to be controlled by an Output Controller.
See State Generators in the Modules section for information on state generation
modules.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

State Selection
The State Selection category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1) in
Configuration mode. You also can access State Selection by right-clicking the
State Generation header in Configuration, Simulation, or Commissioning mode.
The State Tables define how the states of the inputs of the State Tables control the
outputs in the system. See the State Tables section for information.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

State Tables
You can access the State Tables screen using the right-click menu of the State
Selection header in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1) in Configuration mode
or by using the right-click menu of the State Generation header in Configuration,
Simulation, or Commissioning mode. You can modify the State Tables only in
Configuration mode. The State Tables are used to set the hierarchical priority of
incoming states and to define the appropriate mode of operation of each output
controller for each state in the State Selection Tables.
The individual tables in the State Tables correspond to the State Generators and the
column headings are the Output Controllers. For each State Generator state, there
is a corresponding Output Controller state. The States column lists the states from
highest priority to lowest priority in descending order from top to bottom. An
asterisk (*) or an X appearing instead of a valid Output Controller state indicates
that the current State Generator has no interaction with the Output Controller, and
the Output Controller is controlled by the next highest priority State Generator
showing a valid Output Controller state. An X also indicates that the field should
not be modified unless certain control specifications are required.
For information on how to use the state tables, see Viewing and Modifying State
Selection Tables in the Configuring a System section.To see an example of how the
State Tables are used, see the Control View Application Example section.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

88 CCT Help: Introduction

 Output Control
The Output Control category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1).
This section lists the output controllers defined for the system. An output control
module defines the specific logic associated with each state, as determined by the
State Tables’ mode. For example, if the State Tables determine that the
Proportional Box Heating Control output controller should be in Control mode,
the Proportional Box Heating Control output controller defines the PID control
logic to use while in this state.
See Output Controller in the Modules section for information on output control
modules.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

Network Outputs
The Network Outputs category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1).
This section lists the network outputs defined for the system. A network output
module acts as a network variable read from a supervisory device. When a network
output is not mapped to a supervisory device, it can only be viewed from the
Commissioning mode of CCT. Network outputs connect from other modules or
the State Table.
See Network Outputs in the Modules section for information on network output
modules. Also, see Peer-to-Peer Communication in the Configuring a System for
information on peer-to-peer communication in CCT.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

Outputs
The outputs category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1). This
section lists the outputs defined for the system. An output defines an interface to
the actual hardware in a system. An output can represent a physical hardware point
in the system or a point associated with an output. Outputs send data to hardware
output points of a device.
See Outputs in the Modules section for information on output modules.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

User Interface 89
Control View Application Example
The following figure shows how modules in the Control View interact (using
Show Involvement in Simulation mode).
Figure 2-3: Fan Coil Application Example (Show Involvement)

This example is of a Fan Coil application. Based on the network inputs and input
readings in this example, the State Tables have determined that the highest priority
state generator that should be in Control is FC-ZN-T SEQUENCING (Zone
Sequencing [FC]), which is set to the Cooling state. As a result, the Proportional
Cooling Control output control is set to Control, which modulates the cooling
valve open (CLG-O output).
The following drawing and text further explain the interaction between the cooling
modules.

90 CCT Help: Introduction

 Figure 2-4: Fan Coil Application Example (Cooling Interaction)

Zone Mode Percent Cmd

Hardware ZNT-STATE
EFFCLG-SP Temperature
Setpoint Process
Cooling
Setpoint Variable

Setpoint

Flush
Position

The interactions in this example are as follows:

• The FLUSHPOS network input provides an input to the Proportional Cooling
Control output control.
• The ZN-SP input provides a Hardware Setpoint input to the ZN-T Setpoint
Determination setpoint.
• The ZN-T input provides input to the following modules:
- Zone Temperature input to the FC-ZN-T SEQUENCING (Zone
Sequencing [FC]) state generator
- Process Variable input to the Proportional Cooling Control output control
• The ZN-T Setpoint Determination setpoint provides input to the following
modules:
- Cooling Setpoint input to the FC-ZN-T SEQUENCING (Zone Sequencing
[FC]) state generator
- Setpoint input to the Proportional Cooling Control output control
• The FC-ZN-T SEQUENCING (Zone Sequencing [FC]) state generator
provides the ZNT-STATE input to the State Tables.
• The State Tables provide the Mode input to the Proportional Cooling Control
output control.
• The Proportional Cooling Control output control provides the Percent Cmd
input to the CLG-O output.
The following graphic shows how the modules in the State Generation section
provide input to the State Tables and how the state configuration within the State
Tables provides input to the modules in the Output Control section. The individual
tables in the State Tables are the State Generators and the column headings are the
Output Controllers. See the State Selection and State Tables sections.

User Interface 91
 Figure 2-5: Fan Coil Application Example (State Tables)

In this example, the Water System Flush Pass Through has the highest priority and
Fan Determination has the lowest. The Water System Flush Pass Through state is
set to False, and the cells have an X, which means no behavior change occurs and
the next table is evaluated.
When the Unit Enable Determination state is set to Shutdown, then the Mode is set
to Off for the Proportional Cooling Control, Proportional Heating Control, and
Single Speed Fan Control. The Unit Enable Determination state is set to Enable
and the cells have an X, and the next table is evaluated.

92 CCT Help: Introduction

 The next table, Heating isAvailable Pass Through, is evaluated to determine if it
sends a state to the Output controllers. The only Output it can affect is the
Proportional Heating Control since both the False and True cells for Single Speed
Fan Control and Proportional Cooling Control are set to an X. In this example, the
Heating isAvailable Pass Through module is set to a True state; therefore, no
command is sent to the Proportional Heating Control and the next table is
evaluated.
The Cooling isAvailable Pass Through state is True, and no command is sent to the
Proportional Cooling Control module. With a System Mode Determination state of
Auto and an Unocc Status Determination state of Unocc Cntrl Not Req'd, neither
table sends commands to the output modules. A command is not sent to the outputs
until the FC-ZN-T SEQUENCING (Zone Sequencing [FC]) module is evaluated.
With the State of Cooling from the State Generation module, the Cooling row in
the FC-ZN-T SEQUENCING (Zone Sequencing [FC]) table sets the Proportional
Heating Control mode to Off and the Proportional Cooling Control mode to
Control. The asterisks (*) in the Single Speed Fan Control cells mean no command
is sent to the output module and the Fan Determination module must be evaluated.
With the Fan Determination module in the On State, an On command is sent to the
Single Speed Fan Control Mode.

User Interface 93
Control View Status Colors and Icons
Table 2-3 lists the status colors and icons used in the Control View of CCT.
Table 2-3: Control View Status Colors
Status Color Appears in Mode Description
White All modes Indicates a non-editable module.
Tan All modes Indicates an editable module; that is, it contains logic
that you can view and/or edit. You can use the View >
Logic option for this type of module.
Blue All modes Indicates the selected module.
Green All modes In Configuration mode, indicates modules that contain
exposed ports that are compatible (that is, the
enumeration set and units match) with the current port
you are connecting. See Viewing and Modifying
Connections in the Configuring a System section.
In Simulation and Commissioning modes, indicates the
active state generator(s).
Magenta Simulation and In Simulation and Commissioning modes, shows the
Commissioning modes involvement of other modules to the selected Output
module.
Orange Simulation and In Simulation and Commissioning modes, indicates
Commissioning modes when the software value does not match hardware value
of the item.
Note: In Simulation mode, inputs and outputs are
orange because the associated hardware has
not yet been defined.
Red All modes Indicates an input or output that is not assigned properly.
Delete such inputs and outputs from CCT.
All modes Identifies a module that has been modified by a user.
(Green
Triangle) If the changes were made in Configuration mode, this
icon appears directly to the left of the module name
(first row).
If the changes were made in Simulation or
Commissioning mode, the green triangle appears
directly to the left of the module’s Default Element value
(second row).
All modes Identifies that the input or output is assigned to a
(Network Network Sensor (Network Duct Sensor or Network Zone
Sensor)1 Sensor).
All modes Identifies that the input or output is assigned to a
wireless sensor and has a wireless Ethernet signal.

(Wireless
Ethernet
Sensor)
All modes Identifies that the input or output is assigned to an
Eaton Variable Speed Drive.
(VSD)
All modes Identifies that the input or output is assigned to an FEC.
(FEC)
All modes Identifies that the input or output is assigned to an IOM.
(IOM)

1. Device and Port label information appears after the module name for assigned Inputs and Outputs.

94 CCT Help: Introduction

Right-Click Menus (Control View)
The following table lists the right-click menu options in the Control View and
indicates the mode and item in which the menu is available. Menu options appear
in the right-click menu when an item is selected.
Table 2-4: Right-Click Menus (Control View) (Part 1 of 2)
Menu Option Appears in Control View Section Description
Mode

Miscellaneous

Generation

Selection
Setpoint/
Network

Network
Outputs
Outputs
Control
Output
Inputs
Inputs

State

State
New (Header Configuration X X X X X X X Adds a new module.
Only)
Simulation
Commissioning
Delete Configuration X X X X X X X Removes the module.
Simulation
Commissioning
Rename Configuration X X X X X Changes the name of the
module.
Simulation
Commissioning
View Details Configuration X X X X X X X X Displays the Details dialog
box to view the details of the
Simulation X X X X X X X
selected module.
Commissioning X X X X X X X
View Configuration X X X X X X X X Displays the connections of
Connections the selected module(s) in the
Simulation X X X X X X X
Connections tab.
Commissioning X X X X X X X
View Logic1 Configuration X X X X X X X Opens the Logic View for the
selected module. This menu
Simulation X X X X X X X
option is available only when
Commissioning X X X X X X X the module has logic that can
be viewed and/or modified
(indicated by a tan
background).
View State Configuration X Opens the State Selection
Tables Tables. This option is
Simulation X
available from the State
Commissioning X Generation header or the
State Selection header.
Commands Configuration Opens the Commands dialog
box to command items.
Simulation X X X X X X X
Commissioning X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
Metasys Configuration Opens the Metasys
Commands Commands dialog box to
Simulation
issue a Metasys system
Commissioning X X command to the selected
item.

User Interface 95
 Table 2-4: Right-Click Menus (Control View) (Part 2 of 2)
Menu Option Appears in Control View Section Description
Mode

Miscellaneous

Generation

Selection
Setpoint/
Network

Network
Outputs
Outputs
Control
Output
Inputs
Inputs

State

State
Setup Configuration X X Allows you to change the
signal type of Inputs and
Simulation
Outputs in Configuration
Commissioning X X mode. Allows you to
Commission Inputs and
Outputs in Commissioning
mode.
Show Configuration Highlights the connected
Involvement modules in the Control View.
Simulation X
Commissioning X
Hide Configuration Removes the highlighting on
Involvement the connected modules in the
Simulation X
Control View.
Commissioning X

1. Only available for modules containing logic that can be viewed and/or modified (indicated by a tan background). See
the Control View Status Colors and Icons section.
2. Only available in Test Mode.

Connections Table
The Connections table appears in the Connection tab of the Control View
workspace in all modes. This table can show the connections for one or more
modules. The Connections table displays the source and destination module and
port data with the associated input and output connection of the selected module.
Inputs appear yellow and outputs appear turquoise in this table.
By default, connections appear for all modules. You can select to view connections
for one module, multiple modules in a module category, or you can select a
column header of one of the module categories to view connections for all modules
in that section. To return to the default, showing all module connections, right-
click within the overall table header and select Show All.
Figure 2-6: Connections Table Show All Menu

Header

96 CCT Help: Introduction

 For Inputs and Outputs, the default value appears after the input/output name (for
example, Present Value - False or Input - False). Table 2-5 describes the right-
click menu options of the Connections table.
Table 2-5: Control View Connections Table Right-Click Menus
Menu Option Context Description
Show All Table Header Returns the Connections table to the default
(see Figure 2-6) view, which is showing all module
connections.
Break Connection Input Disconnects the current connection and
Output leaves the connection blank.
Change Connection Input Highlights modules with compatible exposed
Output ports, in green, for selection of a different
connection.
Expose Ports Input Opens the Port Exposure dialog box to hide
Output ports from connection. By default, all ports are
Selected Module Header exposed for connection. You cannot remove
the selection for connected ports as such
ports are disabled in this dialog box.
Make Connection Input Highlights modules with compatible exposed
Output ports, in green, for selection of a new
connection.

Parameters Table
The Parameters table lists key parameters/attributes used by the system. In
Configuration mode, default values appear only for parameters/attributes that can
be edited. To add other parameters/attributes to the Parameters table, enable the
inputs and outputs for BACnet network exposure by editing the individual
module’s BACnet Exposed attribute to True in the Details dialog box. You cannot
modify outputs of modules from the Parameters table. See the Control View
Screen section for a description of this table’s components.

Balancer Tab
The Balancer tab appears in the Control View workspace in Commissioning mode
only for VAV applications. This tab includes a parameters table and task buttons to
autocalibrate VAV boxes and set flow constants easily in one location. See the
Control View Screen section for a description of this table’s components, and see
the Commissioning a System section for details on using this tab.

User Interface 97
Logic View
Figure 2-7 shows the Logic View in the workspace. Click on the links to the left of
the graphic or click an area of the graphic for information on the Logic View
components.
Figure 2-7: Logic View
Toolbar

Control Block
Palette

Logic Diagram
(Workspace)

The Logic View of CCT allows you to view and modify the control logic used in
your system. This view displays the logic blocks visually to provide information
about your system. The Logic View is divided into three sections: a toolbar,
control block palette, and logic diagram area. Depending on the mode in which
CCT is operating, you are able to perform certain tasks in the Logic View. For
information on the CCT modes, see the Modes section.
See the following sections for information on the Logic View components:
• Toolbar (Logic View)
• Right-Click Menus (Logic View)
• Control Block Palette
• Logic Diagram
• Logic View Status Colors

98 CCT Help: Introduction

 The following table describes the tasks you can perform in the Logic View in the
different modes.
Table 2-6: Logic View Tasks Available in Different Modes
Task Mode
Configuration Simulation Commissioning
View Logic X X X
Use the Block Finder X
Add Blocks X
Rename Blocks X
Modify Blocks and Their Details X X X
in the Details Dialog Box
Delete Blocks X
Connect Blocks X
Show/Hide Connection Lines X
Delete Connections X
Export a Module X
Send a Command X X

User Interface 99
Toolbar (Logic View)
Table 2-7 describes the icons in the Logic View toolbar. These options appear in
all modes, unless otherwise noted.
Table 2-7: Logic View Toolbar
Icon Command Description
Print Opens the Print dialog box to print the logic diagram.

Print Preview Opens the Print Preview dialog box.

Select Turns the cursor into a selection cursor.

Pan Turns the cursor into a hand that allows you to pan over
the logic diagram by dragging.

Marquee Zoom Allows you to define a selection box to zoom.

Interactive Zoom Zooms in and out on a logic diagram when you hold the
mouse button down.

Zoom – Fit Window Zooms the logic diagram to fit within the window.

Selective Zoom Allows you to select the percentage zoom applied to the
logic diagram.

Trace Mode Removes all the connection lines in the logic diagram.
Live values remain. This option is available in the
Commissioning and Simulation modes only.
Note: This option is available in the Configuration mode
only when viewing logic of the entire application
(View Application Logic option of the Quick
Navigation menu).
Set Default Element Selects a default element for the block/module. The
default element indicates the value displayed in the
Control View in Simulation and Commissioning modes.
This option is available for configuration in the
Configuration mode only.
Note: This option is not available when viewing logic of
the entire application (View Application Logic
option of the Quick Navigation menu).
Export Module Exports the module logic by adding it to the Custom
folder in the Control Block Palette. Use the export
feature to share custom modules. This option is
available in the Configuration mode only. See Exporting
a Module in the Configuring a System section.
Note: This option is not available when viewing logic of
the entire application (View Application Logic
option of the Quick Navigation menu).

100 CCT Help: Introduction

Right-Click Menus (Logic View)
The following table describes the right-click menu options available in the Logic
View.
Table 2-8: Right-Click Menus (Logic View)
Icon Description
Export Module Exports the module logic by adding it to the Custom folder in the
Control Block Palette. Use the export feature to share custom
modules. This option is available in the Configuration mode only.
Set Default Element Selects a default element for the block/module. The default element
indicates the value displayed in the Control View in Simulation and
Commissioning modes. This option is available for configuration in the
Configuration mode only.
View > Details Displays the Details dialog box to view the details of the selected block
(available in all modes).
View > Logic Displays additional logic for the selected block.
Expose Ports > Opens the Port Exposure dialog box to select the input/output ports to
For BACnet show for BACnet network exposure in the Logic View and to add to
the Parameters list (Configuration mode only).
Expose Ports > Opens the Port Exposure dialog box to select input/output ports to
For Connection show for connections in the Logic View (Configuration mode only).
Hide Removes the connection lines in the Logic View and displays the
hidden edge labels (Configuration mode only).
Unhide Removes the hidden edge labels and shows the connection lines in
the Logic View (Configuration mode only).
Rename Opens the Rename dialog box to change the name of the block.
Delete Removes the block from the system.

User Interface 101

Control Block Palette
The Control Block palette allows you to select or search for blocks to add to the
logic diagram. The Logic View supports drag and drop functionality for adding
blocks. For more information on the logic blocks, see the Logic section.
Table 2-9: Logic Blocks
Item/Folder Name Description
Control View Contains the Block Finder and folders of blocks you can add to the logic
diagram.
Block Finder Allows you to search for a block and add it to the logic diagram.
Activity Inputs Contains boolean, float, and enumeration input blocks.
Activity Outputs Contains boolean, float, and enumeration output blocks.
Boolean Contains blocks that perform Boolean functions on one or more inputs,
producing a single output.
Calculation Contains blocks that control the amount an output can change per control
logic execution or extrapolates an output using two inputs for reference.
Compare Contains comparison blocks such as Greater Than or Not Equal.
Constant Contains blocks that pass a constant value to block inputs.
Container Contains the Activity and Hybrid Activity blocks that act as containers for
other blocks.
Control Contains blocks that perform control functions on multiple inputs,
producing a single output.
Math Contains blocks that perform mathematical functions on one or more
inputs, producing a single output.
Psychrometric Contains blocks that perform psychrometric functions on the defined
inputs, producing a single output.
Selection Contains Command Hierarchy and MUX blocks that perform multiplexing
for multiple inputs, producing a single output.
Statistical Contains blocks that perform statistical functions on multiple inputs
producing a single output.
Timing Contains blocks that perform timing functions such as Pulse, On Delay,
and Off Delay. Timing blocks are used to break up feedback loops.
Custom Contains any modules exported using the Export Module feature for
sharing custom modules. The Custom folder appears once a module is
exported on the computer running CCT.

Block Finder
The Block Finder appears in the Control Block palette before the folders
containing available blocks for selection. You can drag the Block Finder to the
logic diagram workspace, search for a block, and select the block to add to the
diagram. When you click OK, the block appears in the logic diagram. Adjust the
placement of the block as needed. See Searching for a Block Using the Block
Finder in the Configuring a System section.

102 CCT Help: Introduction

Logic Diagram
The logic diagram appears on the right side of the workspace (Figure 2-7). The
logic diagram consists of logic blocks, their inputs and outputs, and the
connections between them. The following figure identifies the main components
you may find in a logic diagram.
Figure 2-8: Logic Diagram (Supply Damper Control Module)

Logic Blocks
(Label in Blue)

Inputs Container Block

to View Logic
(Connected
Outputs

Input (Not Connected)

Default Element

Connection Lines Hidden Edge Labels

Logic is generally executed following a left-to-right flow across the logic diagram.
Connection lines between elements may be visible or hidden. When hidden, each
connection has a hidden edge label at the origination point and at each destination
point. At the origination point, the hidden edge label may contain two numbers,
where the first number indicates the connection number and the second indicates
the number of instances. For example, a hidden edge label of 5:7 means there are
seven instances of connection number five.
Note: You can change the label of a hidden edge. See Changing the Hidden Edge
Label of a Connection in the Configuring a System section.
For each Logic block, you can select one parameter/attribute as the Default
Element, which becomes the value that displays dynamic data in Simulation and
Commissioning modes.

User Interface 103

 In some instances in Simulation and Commissioning mode, two values appear
next to one another instead of one. The first (left side) value indicates the value the
block sends out if the logic were in the state currently being displayed, and the
second (right side) value indicates the value being sent out from the block due to
the actual state of the logic.
Figure 2-9 is an example of the CLG-OUTSTATE block in the Water Flush state
(highlighted state). Since the current state of the logic is Normal, not Water Flush,
two values appear next to some connections. The left value is the value that would
be expected when the logic goes into the Water Flush state (100.00% and
Overridden). The right value is the Present Value of the connections (47.89% and
Normal).
Figure 2-9: Double Values in Logic View (Logic State)

Similarly, when you command the output of a block to a different value, the
existing value appears first and is followed by the commanded value. Figure 2-10
is an example of a block with double values.
Figure 2-10: Double Values in Logic View (Commands)

When you place your cursor over an input or output of a logic block, the input/
output name and default value appear.
When making a connection, a tooltip indicates if there is no valid connection for
the selected input/output. An invalid connection is when the data type of the source
and destination do not match (for example, a Boolean source and a Float
destination).
For information on the individual logic blocks, see the Logic section. Also, see the
Logic View Status Colors section.
For information on configuring logic blocks, including information on how the
Hybrid Activity block works, see Logic View Steps and Configuring a Hybrid
Activity in the Configuring a System section.

104 CCT Help: Introduction

Logic View Status Colors
Table 2-10 lists the status colors used in the Logic View of CCT.
Table 2-10: Logic View Status Colors
Status Color Appears in Mode Description
Yellow Block All modes Indicates an activity input.
Turquoise All modes Indicates an activity output.
Block
Tan Block All modes Indicates an editable module; that is, it contains logic
that you can view and modify.
White Block All modes Indicates an uneditable block.
Note: The Hybrid Activity block is white with the
selected state highlighted in blue.
White Block All modes Indicates a Hybrid Activity State block.
with Blue
State
Block with All modes Indicates a connected input.
Yellow Input
Block with All modes Indicates an input that is not connected.
Orange Input
Block with All modes Indicates an input available for connection from the
Green Input selected block.
Black Block All modes Indicates the default element of a module/block.
Black Line All modes Indicates a regular connection line.
Black Line All modes Indicates the connection units or enumeration sets do
with Red not match.
Circle
Blue Line Configuration mode Indicates a selected connection line.
Magenta Line Simulation and Indicates a selected connection line.
Commissioning modes
Yellow Circle All modes Indicates a hidden edge label connected to an input.
Gray Circle All modes Indicates a hidden edge label connected to something
other than an input.

User Interface 105

Status Bar
The status bar displays the system name, hardware assignment indicator, system
capacity indicator, current connection type, connection status, and current CCT
mode.
If the open Controller Application File requires an upgrade to the latest version,
the status of (Upgradeable) appears next to the system name in the status bar and
the functionality of CCT becomes limited. For details on upgrading the file, see the
Upgrading System Files section.
The hardware assignment indicator options are:
• Assigned (Green)
• Not Assigned (Red)
The system capacity indicator displays the percentage of maximum objects
currently being used by your application.
The connection type options are:
• Bluetooth
• Ethernet
The connection status options are:
• Connecting
• Connected (Sensor/Actuator Bus)
• Connected (Field/Controller Bus)
• Disconnected
The current mode status options are:
• None
• Configuration
• Simulation
• Commissioning

106 CCT Help: Introduction

Details Dialog Box
The Details dialog box provides information on and allows you to modify the
selected module or block’s attributes/parameters, inputs and outputs, and hardware
attributes/parameters (if available). You can access this dialog box from a
module’s right-click menu regardless of whether the Control View or Logic View
is displayed in the workspace. You also can access the Details dialog box by
double-clicking a module from the Control View.
For the Network Inputs, Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules, State Generation
modules, Output Control modules, and Network Outputs, the Details dialog box
has one interface displaying the attributes/parameters of the selected module on the
left, and the inputs and outputs of the module appear in tables on the right.
For only Inputs and Outputs, the Details View interface has two tabs: Details tab
and Hardware View tab. For details, see the Details Tab (Inputs and Outputs) and
Hardware View Tab (Inputs and Outputs) sections.
Also, see the Details Dialog Box screen section.

Details Tab (Inputs and Outputs)

For only Inputs and Outputs, this tab appears in the Details dialog box and displays
the attributes/parameters of the selected module or block on the left and the inputs
and outputs of the module appear in tables on the right. See the Details Dialog Box
screen section for descriptions of the tab’s components (attribute table and Inputs
and Outputs tables).

Hardware View Tab (Inputs and Outputs)

For only Inputs and Outputs, this tab appears in the Details dialog box and displays
the selected module’s hardware related attributes/parameters and their defined
values. See the Details Dialog Box screen section for descriptions of the tab’s
components (attribute table).

Language Options
The CCT software installation program allows you to select the languages to
support and set the default language in which to run CCT. You can change these
language selections after initial installation without re-running the entire
installation program. The CCT Installation Instructions explains how to initially
set up and later change these language options. See the Related Documentation for
information on accessing this document.
You also can define preferences for localization. See the Setting and Using
Preferences section.

User Interface 107

Steps
Opening a Controller Application File
For details on creating a new system (File > New), see the Configuring a System
section.
To open an existing Controller Application File (.caf):
1. From the File menu, select Open. The Open dialog box appears.
2. Browse to the location of the saved Controller Application File (.caf) and
select the file to open.
Note: The default location of a Controller Application File (.caf) is
C:\Documents and Settings\username.
3. Click Open. The Controller Application File appears in the Control View of
CCT in Configuration mode.
Note: If the selected Controller Application File requires an upgrade, the
System Upgrade dialog box appears. For details on upgrading the file,
see the Upgrading System Files section.

Changing Modes
Note: CCT opens a Controller Application File (.caf) in Configuration mode by
default. The Configuration and Simulation modes are not available in the
CCT Commissioning only software version.
To change from Configuration mode to Simulation or Commissioning mode, click
the Simulate or Commission button. Or, select the menu options from the Modes
menu.
Note: The Configure button/menu text changes to Stop Simulation when in
Simulation mode and to Stop Commissioning when in Commissioning
mode.
To return to Configuration mode from Simulation or Commissioning mode, click
the Stop Simulation or Stop Commissioning button. Or, select the menu options
from the Modes menu.
Note: The Configuration mode acts as a transitional mode when you need to
switch from Simulation to Commissioning mode and vice versa. To change
from Simulation mode to Commissioning mode, for example, you must
first change to Configuration mode.
Note: When stopping simulation (Stop Simulation), a Confirm dialog box
appears prompting you to save or discard the changes made during
simulation.
Note: If you made changes to the system in a particular mode, CCT opens the
Save Confirmation dialog box prompting you to save. Click Yes to save the
changes before changing modes or No to discard them. If you select No,
CCT does not revert to the previous version and closes the system.

108 CCT Help: Introduction

 Note: When in the Logic view, if you switch from Configuration mode to
Simulation mode after making changes, the Confirm dialog box has only
Yes and No options. If you click the X in the upper right corner of the
dialog, the cancel function does not occur. Instead, CCT saves the changes
and opens the Simulation dialog box; however, when switching from
Configuration mode to Commissioning mode in Logic View after making
changes, the Confirm dialog box has functional Yes, No, and Cancel
options.
Note: You must be in Configuration mode to close a Controller Application File
(.caf) or exit CCT.

Switching between Control View and Logic View

See Navigating between Control View and Logic View in the Configuring a System
section.

Printing Summary Reports

For information on printing the logic diagram, see Printing the Logic Diagram in
the Configuring a System section.
To print a summary report of the information in CCT:
1. From the File menu, select Print. The Summary Report Options dialog box
appears.
2. Select the check boxes for the information you want to print. See the Summary
Report Options screen section for descriptions.
3. Click OK. CCT creates a PDF using Adobe Acrobat Reader software
containing the selected information in report format.
Note: If the Summary Report does not open in Adobe Acrobat Reader
software, see the workaround in the Troubleshooting section.
4. Print and/or save the PDF as desired from the Adobe Acrobat Reader software.

Saving a Controller Application File

To save a Controller Application File (.caf):
1. Select Save from the File menu. The Save dialog box appears. Illegal
characters include:
: * ?"<>|/ \
Note: The default location to save a Controller Application File (.caf) is
C:\Documents and Settings\username.
2. Accept the default name or type a name for the file and click Save.

User Interface 109

Closing a Controller Application File
To close a Controller Application File (.caf), select Close from the File menu. If
you made changes, CCT opens the Save Confirmation dialog box prompting you
to save. Click Yes to save the changes before closing or No to discard them.
Note: You must be in Configuration mode to close a file. You cannot close a .caf
file in the CCT Commissioning only software. You must stop
Commissioning mode to remove a system from the CCT UI.
Note: The default location of a Controller Application File (.caf) is
C:\Documents and Settings\username.

Exiting CCT
To exit CCT, select Exit from the File menu.
Note: You must be in Configuration mode to exit CCT. In the CCT
Commissioning only software, you can exit CCT after you stop
Commissioning.

110 CCT Help: Introduction

Screens
CCT User Interface Screen
See Figure 2-1.
Table 2-11: CCT User Interface
Screen Area Description
Menu Bar Includes the menus available in CCT. See the Menu Bar section.
Mode Buttons Allows you to switch between the modes of operation while
working in CCT. The mode buttons are:
• Configuration (Stop Simulation or Stop Commissioning when in
Simulation or Commissioning mode)
• Simulation
• Commissioning
Note: The Configuration and Simulation modes are not available
in the CCT Commissioning only software version.
See the Modes section for information on the modes and buttons.
See the Menu Bar section for the mode menu options.
Operation Buttons Allows you to perform specific tasks in CCT. The operation tasks
and buttons are:
• Select System
Note: The Select System button is not enabled in Custom
Applications or Monitoring/Supervisory Control only
applications.
• Sideloop
• Define Hardware
• Load
See the Select System, Sideloop, Define Hardware, and Load
sections for descriptions of the operations. See the Menu Bar
section for the Operation menu options.
Quick Navigation Menu Allows you to navigate between the Control View (system
overview) and the Logic View of individual modules. The menu
also allows you to view/print the logic of the entire application. See
the Quick Navigation Menu section.
Control View and Displays the Control View or the Logic View contents. The Quick
Logic View Workspace Navigation menu appears in each view. See the following sections
for more information and details:
• Control/Logic View Workspace
• Control View and Control View Screen
• Logic View and Logic View Screen
Status Bar Indicates the system name, hardware assignment indicator,
system capacity indicator, current connection type, connection
status, and current CCT mode. See the Status Bar section.

User Interface 111

Control View Screen
The Control View is part of the CCT UI. See the Control View in Figure 2-1 and in
the CCT User Interface Screen section. See the Modes section for information on
the modes of operation.
Table 2-12: Control View (Part 1 of 2)
Screen Area
Module Sections
Connections Table
112 CCT Help: Introduction
Description
Displays the modules used in the selected system in categorized
sections. The flow of the content is from left to right where network
inputs and inputs appear on the left, control/logic/state
components are in the center, and network outputs and outputs
appear on the right. The module categories in the CCT Control
View are:
• Network Inputs
• Inputs
• Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• State Generation
• State Selection
• Output Control
• Network Outputs
• Outputs
See the Control View Module Categories section for information
on these types.
Displays the source and destination exposed ports with the
associated input and output connection of the selected module(s).
The Connections table is divided into three sections: Source,
Selected Module, and Destination.
Note: When selecting multiple modules at once, a table appears
in the Connections area for each module selected.
The Source module section lists the module from which the
selected module receives its input and has the following columns:
• Block: Displays the name of the connected module.
• Port: Displays the port being connected.
The Selected Module section indicates the name of the selected
module and has the following columns:
• Input: Displays the exposed port inputs used for the
connection.
• Output: Displays the exposed port outputs used for the
connection.
The Destination module section lists the module to which the
selected module sends its output and has the following columns:
• Block: Displays the name of the connected module.
• Port: Displays the port being connected.
See the Connections Table section for more information and
right-click menu options.
 Table 2-12: Control View (Part 2 of 2)
Screen Area Description
Parameters Table Lists the parameters/attributes of all modules that are exposed for
connection (Expose Ports > For Connection) and to BACnet
systems (Expose Ports > For BACnet). The components of the
Parameters table are:
• Edit button: Enters Edit mode and allows modification of
default parameter/attributes values.
• Apply button: Saves the changes to parameter/attributes
values.
• Cancel button: Cancels the edits made and exits Edit mode.
• Item column: Lists the names of the parameters/attributes.
• Current Value column: Displays the current calculated values
of the parameters/attributes (Simulation and Commissioning
modes only).
• Default Value column: Displays the default values of the
parameters/attributes.
• Units column: Displays the units of measurement used for the
parameters/attributes.
• Standard Name column: Displays descriptive text for the
parameters/attributes.
Note: You cannot modify outputs of modules from the
Parameters table.
Balancer Tab Allows you to autocalibrate VAV boxes and set flow constants.
This tab appears in Commissioning mode only for VAV
applications. The components of the Balancer tab are:
• Edit button: Enters Edit mode and allows modification of
parameter/attributes values.
• Apply button: Saves the changes to parameter/attributes
values.
• Cancel button: Cancels the edits made and exits Edit mode.
• Auto Calibrate button:1 Opens the Auto Calibrate Command
dialog box.
• Flow Override button:1 Opens the Flow Override Command
dialog box.
• Flow Restore button:1 Opens the Flow Restore Command
dialog box.
• Calculate K-Factors button:1 Opens the Calculate K-Factors
Command dialog box.
• Item column: Lists the names of the parameters/attributes.
• Current Value column: Displays the current calculated values
of the parameters/attributes.
• Default Value column: Displays the default values of the
parameters/attributes.
• Units column: Displays the units of measurement used for the
parameters/attributes.
• Standard Name column: Displays descriptive text for the
parameters/attributes.
See the Commissioning a System section for details on using this
tab.

1. This option is available only in Test Mode.

User Interface 113

Logic View Screen
The Logic View is part of the CCT UI. See the CCT User Interface Screen section.
See the Modes section for information on the modes of operation.
Table 2-13: Logic View
Screen Area Description
Toolbar Displays the icons for the actions you can perform in the Logic
View. See the Toolbar (Logic View) section.
Control Block Palette Contains a tree view (folders) of the blocks to drag and drop into
the logic diagram and the Block Finder search feature. See the
Control Block Palette and Block Finder sections.
The Control Block palette does not appear when viewing logic of
the entire application (View Application Logic option of the Quick
Navigation menu).
Logic Diagram Displays a graphical representation of the selected module’s logic.
See the Logic Diagram section for information on the diagram and
its components.

114 CCT Help: Introduction

Details Dialog Box
The Details dialog box displays software and hardware attributes/parameters for
modules or logic blocks. The Details dialog box has no tabs for the Network
Inputs, Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules, State Generation modules, Output
Control modules, and Network Outputs. For only Inputs and Outputs, the Details
dialog box has two tabs: Details tab and Hardware View tab. See the Details
Dialog Box section.
Table 2-14: Details Dialog Box
Screen Area Description
Items Common to All Tabs/Screens
Basic Radio Button Displays only basic information in the view.
Advanced Radio Button Displays the advanced information in the view in addition
to the basic data.
Edit Button Enters Edit mode and allows modification of items in the
view.
Apply Button Saves the changes to items in the view.
Cancel Button Cancels the edits made and exits Edit mode.
Details
Attribute Table Lists the selected module/block’s attributes/parameters,
their defined values, and units.
Input and Output Tables Displays both an Inputs and an Outputs table for the
selected module/block. These tables include the
following data:
• Name: Displays the name of the input or output.
• Standard Name: Displays the Johnson Controls
standard name used for the input or output.
• Default Value: Displays the default values of the
inputs and outputs.
• Units: Displays the units of measurement used for
the inputs and outputs.
• Display Precision: Displays the Display Precision
value used for the inputs and outputs (for example,
10ths).
Hardware View
Attribute Table Lists the selected module/block’s hardware related
attributes/parameters, their defined values, and units.
See the Modules, Logic, and CCT Input and Output
Object Overview sections.

User Interface 115

Summary Report Options
See Printing Summary Reports.
For information on printing the logic diagram, see Printing the Logic Diagram in
the Configuring a System section.
Table 2-15: Summary Report Options
Field Description
Project Information Prints the following project information:
• CCT Version
• Configuration File (Controller Application File, .caf, name)
• Configuration Date (MM/DD/YYYY)
• Engineering Units (Imperial or Metric from the New System
dialog box)
• Application Name (System Name entered in the New System
dialog box)
• Assigned to Controller (list of the hardware devices defined
during hardware definition)
• System Capacity (%)
Job Information Prints the information entered in the Job Information dialog box.
System Selection Summary Prints the selections made during System Selection.
Controller Summary Prints a summary of the hardware network settings, including:
• Device
• Address
• Type (of device)
• BACnet ID
IO Summary Prints a brief summary of the hardware point assignments:
• Label (Input, Network Input, and Output)
• Object Name
• Attribute (Description and Signal only)
• Value
• Units
IO Summary With Basic Prints a summary of the hardware point assignments:
Information • Label (Input, Network Input, and Output)
• Object Name
• Attribute (Description, Signal, Display, Setup, and Hardware
only)
• Value
• Units
IO Summary With Advanced Prints a detailed summary of the hardware point assignments:
Information • Label (Input, Network Input, and Output)
• Object Name
• Attribute (All)
• Value
• Units
Parameters Prints the Parameters list, including:
• Item (module type, module name, and parameters)
• Default Value
• Standard Name
Balancer Prints the Balancer tab information, including:
• Item
• Current Value
• Default Value
• Units
• Standard Name

116 CCT Help: Introduction

 Table 2-15: Summary Report Options
Field Description
Connections Prints the Connections tables, including the following for each
table:
• Source Block and Port
• Selected Module Input and Output
• Destination Block and Port
State Tables Prints the State Tables.
OK Creates a report of the selected data in PDF format that you can
print and/or save.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without creating a printable PDF.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

User Interface 117

118 CCT Help: Introduction
Chapter 3: CCT Help: Introduction
Getting Started
Introduction
Use this section to get started using the CCT software and to guide you through
common tasks CCT allows you to perform. Gather any information you need to
complete these tasks before beginning.
The tasks are categorized as follows:
• Configuration and Simulation Tasks - Configuration and Simulation tasks
include creating and configuring your system, simulating your system, and
defining its associated hardware.
• Commissioning and Servicing Tasks - Commissioning and servicing tasks
include loading and commissioning devices.

Steps
Configuration and Simulation Tasks
Configuration and Simulation tasks include the following:
1. Set or import naming and signal preferences and System Selection Wizard
defaults if you plan to add a new system (optional) (Setting and Using
Preferences).
2. Create a new system or open an existing system (Controller Application File)
(Configuring a System).
Note: You may be prompted to upgrade your system when opening an
existing file. For details, see the Upgrading System Files section.
3. Edit a system (Configuring a System):
• Add Inputs and Outputs (optional).
• Edit attributes/parameters.
- Change Input and Output signals (optional).
- Set up peer-to-peer communication on Network Inputs or Network
Outputs (optional).
• Edit the State Table (optional).
• Add custom logic (optional).
4. Simulate a system (Simulating a System).
5. Define hardware (Defining Hardware).
6. Save the Controller Application File (File > Save).

Getting Started 119

Commissioning and Servicing Tasks
Commissioning and Servicing tasks include the following:
1. Load a device (Loading Devices):
• Make a connection:
- Bluetooth connection on SAB
- Bluetooth connection on FCB
- Ethernet NAE Passthru
• Upload or Download
2. If you have VAV systems, perform a Box Flow test for all the appropriate
devices of a given MS/TP bus (optional). Repeat this process for other buses.
(Performing a Box Flow Test).
3. Commission a system (Commissioning a System):
• Make a connection:
- Bluetooth connection on SAB
- Bluetooth connection on FCB
- Ethernet NAE Passthru
• Observe the connected application
• Test a system in Test mode
• Adjust Offsets, COVs, and Polarity values as necessary.
• Adjust Inputs and Outputs ranges and Details dialog box Hardware tab
attributes/parameters as necessary.
• Exit commissioning.
4. Save the Controller Application File (File > Save) if you made changes during
commissioning.

120 CCT Help: Introduction

Chapter 4: CCT Help: System Upgrade
Upgrading System Files
Introduction
The CCT upgrade process allows you to easily upgrade an existing .caf file to the
latest modules or system selection default selections.

Concepts
System Module and File Upgrades
When you open a Controller Application File (.caf) that requires an upgrade, CCT
automatically displays a dialog box prompting you to either upgrade the modules
or keep the modules at the current version. Depending on the type of upgrade, CCT
displays two different dialog boxes: a dialog box that displays modules that need to
be upgraded and a dialog box that appears if no modules require upgrading. The
following list describes the two dialog boxes:
• system upgrades with module upgrades
If the file requires module upgrades, then a dialog appears displaying a list of
standard modules included as part of the upgrade process. This dialog box also
displays a list of user-modified modules, if any. CCT does not upgrade
user-modified modules. User-modified modules appear in the Control View
with a triangle next to the module.
• system upgrades without module upgrades
If the file does not require module upgrades, then a smaller dialog box appears
prompting you to upgrade the system.
If you choose not to upgrade the modules, the status bar displays the status of
Upgradeable and the functionality of CCT becomes limited. With this limited
functionality, CCT only allows you to:
• edit detail views
• commission the current application
• edit parameters (default values only)
• view the Hardware Definition Wizard
• view the System Selection tree
If necessary, CCT provides a menu option to upgrade your file at a later time
(Tools > Upgrade System).

Upgrading System Files 121

Upgraded Modules
Table 4-16 displays a list and description of the modules that may appear in the
module upgrade dialog box when you upgrade your system. Use this table as a
reference to determine whether to upgrade the system.
Note: As of Release 3.0, CCT contains modules and system selections to support
UL 864 UUKL Smoke Control sequencing. Some modules were updated to
handle the proper command priority requirements for this support.
Table 4-16: Updated Modules (Part 1 of 3)
Module Version Description
Building Load Calculation (Calculate 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is no longer used.
Building Load) System Selection now loads the Building Load
Calculation v2 module, which is a new version of
this module that includes a setup element for proper
support of SI and IP unit sets. The new v2 module
also fixes an error in the calculation of the load
when the medium is water.
Emergency Mode Sequencing 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is no longer used.
System Selection now loads the Smoke Control
Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL module. The original
module has been updated to handle the command
priority requirements for UL Smoke Control
sequencing.
Mixed Air Cold Deck Sequencing 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is no longer used.
[Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD)] System Selection now loads an instance of the
Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w HR) module
called Mixed Air Cold Deck HR Sequencing.
Note: HR stands for Heat Recovery.
Mixed Air Single Duct Sequencing 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is no longer used for
[Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD)] Mixed Air Single Duct applications. System
Selection now loads an instance of the Occupied
Sequencing (AHU MASD w HR) module called
Mixed Air Single Duct HR Sequencing.
This new module is used by the AHU Mixed Air
Single Duct Application and Rooftop Unit
Application.
Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan BSP 3.0 As of Release 3.0, these modules are no longer
Control and Variable Capacity Return used. System Selection now loads the Return Fan
Fan BSP Control (Fan Return or BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL or Exhaust Fan BSP
Exhaust BSP Control) Control for UL-864-UUKL module. The original
module has been updated to handle the command
priority requirements for UL Smoke Control
sequencing.
Note: BSP stands for Building Static Pressure.
Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan 3.0 As of Release 3.0, these modules are no longer
Volume Match Control and Variable used. System Selection now loads the Exhaust Fan
Capacity Return Fan Volume Match Volume Match Control for UL-864-UUKL or Return
Control (Fan Return or Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control for UL-864-UUKL
Volume Match Control) module. The original module has been updated to
handle the command priority requirements for UL
Smoke Control sequencing.
Variable Capacity Relief Fan BSP 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is no longer used.
Control (Fan Relief Variable Capacity System Selection now loads the Relief Fan BSP
BSP Control) Control for UL-864-UUKL module. The original
module has been updated to handle the command
priority requirements for UL Smoke Control
sequencing.

122 CCT Help: System Upgrade

 Table 4-16: Updated Modules (Part 2 of 3)
Module Version Description
Variable Capacity Supply Fan Control 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is no longer used.
(Fan Supply Duct Static Control) System Selection now loads the Supply Fan Duct
Static Control for UL-864-UUKL module. The
original module has been updated to handle the
command priority requirements for UL Smoke
Control sequencing.
Heating Staged Output with DA-T 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is upgraded to
Low Limit provide proper functionality. The changes are
similar to the Release 2.2 changes: includes an
integrated deadband for the PID (based on the MSC
Band), and improves the PRAC and adaptive tuning
performance if used in conjunction with the MSC.
Staged Box Heating Control 2.2.3 This module now sets the Instant Shutdown output
when the Proof of Airflow input is not True.
2 Pipe 2 Position Valve 2.2 Includes an integrated deadband for the PID (based
on the MSC Band).
2 Pipe 2 Position Valve w DA-T Low
Limit Improves the PRAC and adaptive tuning
performance if used in conjunction with the MSC.
Cooling 2 Position Valve
Cooling Staged Output
Cooling Staged Output with
Dehumidification
Heat Pump Staged Compressors
Heating 2 Position Valve
Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T
Low Limit
Heating Staged Output
Heating Staged Output with DA-T
Low Limit
Heating Staged Output with Low
Limit
Humidification Staged Output
Sideloop PI Staged Output
Sideloop PI With Reset Staged
Output
Application Mode Override 2.2 As of Release 2.2, this module is no longer used.
System Selection now loads the Application Mode
Determination module.
Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or 2.2 Removes logic that prevented the Min and Max
W Value of the PID from being equal. The PID has
built-in protection; therefore, the exterior objects are
Damper Control with Low Limit
unnecessary.
DA-T Unoccupied Status 2.2 As of Release 2.2, this module is no longer used.
Determination System Selection now loads the DA-T Unocc Status
Determination module for intermittent unoccupied
operation of DA-T control systems.

Upgrading System Files 123

 Table 4-16: Updated Modules (Part 3 of 3)
Module
Sideloop Interlock Binary To Analog
Sideloop PI Proportional Output
Sideloop PI Staged Output
Sideloop PI With Reset Proportional
Output
Sideloop PI With Reset Staged
Output
Sideloop Reset Output
Steam Isolation Valve Control
System Mode Pass Through
Unoccupied Sequencing (Common)
124 CCT Help: System Upgrade
Version Description
2.2 Provides more generic configuration values
applicable to the Sideloop System Selection
feature.
2.2 As of Release 2.2, this module is no longer used.
2.2 As of Release 2.2, this module is no longer used.
System Selection now loads the System Mode
Determination module.
2.2 Removes two ambiguous combinations of the input
modes. Previously, the command hierarchy had two
active rows when Occupancy = Unoccupied, Zone
Control = False, Off During Unoccupied = False,
and WarmupCooldown = Warmup or Cooldown.
This combination was only applicable to the DA-T
Unoccupied Status Determination instance used in
the Air Handling Unit systems.
New Modules
Table 4-17 displays a list and description of the new modules that were added to
the system since the last release.
Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 1 of 9)
Module
2 Pipe Pump Alarms (Latching Alarm
Manager)
2 Pipe Pump Blocking Protection
2 Pipe Pump Command LV [Last
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)]
2 Pipe Pump Status Alarm
Determination
CD-T sp Reset by OA (Setpoint Reset
by OA)
Chiller X Control (Where X Is Now
1-8) (Plant Control)
Chiller X Enable LV (Where X Is Now
1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum,
Float)]
Chiller X Interlock Cmd LV (Where X
Is Now 1-8) [Last Value (Boolean,
Enum, Float)]
Chiller X LV (Where X Is Now 1-8)
[Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)]
Chiller X Totalization (Where X Is Now
1-8) [Totalization (Enum Runtime)]
CHW PumpX Enable LV (Where X Is
Now 1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum,
Float)]
Cooling Pump Alarms (Latching
Alarm Manager)
Cooling Pump Blocking Protection
Cooling Pump Command LV [Last
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)]
Upgrading System Files
Version Description
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This module monitors the command signal to the
pump. If the pump is off for a period of time (default
is 7 days), the pump then starts and runs for a short
period of time.
3.1 This module passes the command back to other
modules in the application and eliminates circular
dependencies (loops) in the application code.
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This module resets the Cold Deck Setpoint using
the Outside Air Temperature, and four span
parameters.
3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
chiller.
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) to feed the enable signal from the control
module to the sequencer.
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) to feed the chiller interlock signal from the
control module to the isolation valve status module.
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) to feed the chiller runtime signal from the
totalization block to the sequencer.
3.1 This module totalizes the runtime for a chiller.
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) to feed the enable signal from the control
module to the sequencer.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This module monitors the command to the cooling
coil pump. If the pump is off for a period of time
(default is 7 days), the output turns on for a short
period of time (default is 5 seconds).
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to the cooling coil pump to
the alarm status determination.
125
 Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 2 of 9)
Module
Cooling Pump Status Alarm
Determination
CW Pump X Control v2 (Where X Is
1-8) (Pump Control v2)
CW Pump X LV (Where X Is 1-8) [Last
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)]
CW Pump X Totalization (Where X Is
1-8) [Totalization (Enum Runtime)]
CW PumpX Enable LV (Where X Is
1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum,
Float)]
CWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-8)
(Latching Alarm Manager)
CWPX Blocking Protection (Where X
Is 1-8)
CWPX Status Alarm Determination
(Where X Is 1-8)
DA-T sp Reset by OA (Setpoint Reset
by OA)
Econ Enable OA versus RA
(Economizer Availability RA-T
Compare)
Energy Wheel Two Pos Byp (Heat
Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass
Dampers)
Exhaust Fan Alarms (Latching Alarm
Manager)
Exhaust Fan Command LV [Last
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)]
126 CCT Help: System Upgrade
Version Description
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
condenser water pump.
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) to feed the condenser water pump runtime
signal from the totalization block to the sequencer.
3.1 This module totalizes the runtime for a condenser
water pump.
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) to feed the enable signal from the control
module to the sequencer.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This module monitors the command to the
condenser water pump. If the pump is off for a
period of time (default is 7 days), the output turns on
for a short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This module resets the Discharge Air Setpoint using
the Outside Air Temperature, and four span
parameters.
3.1 This module compares the Outside Air Temperature
to the Return Air Temperature to determine whether
the conditions are suitable for using the economizer
to condition the air.
3.1 This module provides modulating control of a
variable speed heat recovery wheel that also has
two-position bypass dampers.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to the exhaust fan to its
alarm status determination.
 Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 3 of 9)
Module
Exhaust Fan Status Alarm
Determination
Frost Protection Determination
(Central Heating Low Temp Control)
HD-T sp Reset by OA (Setpoint Reset
by OA)
Heat Exchanger with Low Limit
Output (Heat Exchanger with Return
Water Control)
Heat Recovery Pump Alarms
(Latching Alarm Manager)
Heat Recovery Pump Blocking
Protection
Heat Recovery Pump Command LV
[Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)]
Heat Recovery Pump Status Alarm
Determination
Heating Zone X Output (Where X Is
1-8) (Heating Proportional Valve with
Low Limit)
Heating Zone X SP Reset (Where X Is
1-8) (Setpoint Reset by OA)
High Temp Alarm Pass Through
[Pass Through (Enum)]
HR Energy Wheel Alarms (Latching
Alarm Manager)
Upgrading System Files
Version Description
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This module monitors the outside air temperature
and the zone air temperature to determine when to
take frost protection actions:
• When the OA Temp is below the first setpoint,
the Primary pumps start.
• When the OA Temp is below the second
setpoint and the Zone is above the zone
setpoint, the Boilers start.
• When the OA Temp is below the second
setpoint and the Zone is below the zone
setpoint, the zone loops start.
3.1 This module resets the Hot Deck Setpoint using the
Outside Air Temperature, and four span
parameters.
3.1 This module provides control of a high temperature
hot water supply heat exchanger. This module also
provides a low limit control based on the water’s
leaving high temperature value.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This module monitors the command to the heat
recovery glycol pump. If the pump is off for a period
of time (default is 7 days), the output turns on for a
short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to the heat recovery glycol
pump to its alarm status determination.
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This module provides control of a zone hot water
loop.
3.1 This module resets the Heating Zone 1 Setpoint
using the Outside Air Temperature and four span
parameters.
3.1 This module passes the signal from the Hi Temp
alarm to the State Selection module.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
127
 Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 4 of 9)
Module
HR Energy Wheel Blocking
Protection
HR Energy Wheel Command LV [Last
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)]
HR Energy Wheel Status Alarm
Determination
Humidification Pump Command LV
[Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)]
Humidity Scrubber Output
(Humidification Scrubber Output)
Min Outdoor Air Fan Command LV
[Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)]
Min Outdoor Air Fan Status Alarm
Determination
Minimum OA Fan Alarms (Latching
Alarm Manager)
PCHWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-8)
(Latching Alarm Manager)
PCHWPX Blocking Protection (Where
X Is 1-8)
PCHWPX Command LV (Where X Is
1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum,
Float)]
PCHWPX Status Alarm Determination
(Where X Is 1-8)
PHWPX Blocking Protection (Where
X Is 1-4)
128 CCT Help: System Upgrade
Version Description
3.1 This module monitors the command to the heat
recovery energy wheel. If the wheel is off for a
period of time (default is 7 days), the output turns on
for a short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to the heat recovery
energy wheel to its alarm status determination.
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to the humidification pump
to its alarm status determination.
3.1 This module provides control of a spray humidifier
and opens/closes the fill and drain valves.
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to the minimum outdoor
air fan to its alarm status determination.
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This module monitors the command to the primary
chilled water pump. If the pump is off for a period of
time (default is 7 days), the output turns on for a
short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to a primary chilled water
pump to its alarm status determination.
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This module monitors the command to the primary
hot water pump. If the pump is off for a period of
time (default is 7 days), the output turns on for a
short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
 Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 5 of 9)
Module
PHWPX Command LV (Where X Is
1-4) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum,
Float)]
PHWPX Status Alarm Determination
(Where X Is 1-4)
Preheat Proportional Valve Output
(Preheat Proportional Valve with
Return Water Control)
Preheat Pump Alarms (Latching
Alarm Manager)
Preheat Pump Blocking Protection
Preheat Pump Command LV [Last
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)]
Preheat Pump Status Alarm
Determination
Primary CHW Pump X Control v2
(Where X Is 1-8) (Pump Control v2)
Primary CHW Pump X LV (Where X Is
Now 1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum,
Float)]
Primary CHW Pump X Totalization
(Where X Is Now 1-8) [Totalization
(Enum Runtime)]
Primary Pump X Control v2 (Where X
Is 1-4) (Pump Control v2)
RA-T sp Reset by OA (Setpoint Reset
by OA)
Reheat Pump Alarms (Latching Alarm
Manager)
Reheat Pump Blocking Protection
Upgrading System Files
Version Description
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to a primary hot water
pump to its alarm status determination.
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
3.1 This module provides control of a preheat valve.
This modules also provides low limit control based
on the leaving water temperature.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This module monitors the command to the preheat
coil water pump. If the pump is off for a period of
time (default is 7 days), the output turns on for a
short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to the preheat coil water
pump to its alarm status determination.
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
primary chilled water pump.
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) to feed the primary chilled water pump
runtime signal from the totalization block to the
sequencer.
3.1 This module totalizes the runtime for a primary
chilled water pump.
3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
primary hot water pump.
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
3.1 This module resets the Return Air Setpoint using
the Outside Air Temperature and four span
parameters.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This module monitors the command to the reheat
coil water pump. If the pump is off for a period of
time (default is 7 days), the output turns on for a
short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
129
 Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 6 of 9)
Module
Reheat Pump Command LV [Last
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)]
Reheat Pump Status Alarm
Determination
Relief Fan Alarms (Latching Alarm
Manager)
Relief Fan Command LV [Last Value
(Boolean, Enum, Float)]
Relief Fan Status Alarm
Determination
Return Fan Alarms (Latching Alarm
Manager)
Return Fan Command LV [Last Value
(Boolean, Enum, Float)]
Return Fan Status Alarm
Determination
SCHWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-8)
(Latching Alarm Manager)
SCHWPX Blocking Protection (Where
X Is 1-8)
SCHWPX Command LV (Where X Is
1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum,
Float)]
130 CCT Help: System Upgrade
Version Description
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to the reheat coil water
pump to its alarm status determination.
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to relief fan to its alarm
status determination.
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to the return fan to its
alarm status determination.
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This module monitors the command to the
secondary cooling water pump. If the pump is off for
a period of time (default is 7 days), the output turns
on for a short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to a secondary chilled
water pump to its alarm status determination.
 Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 7 of 9)
Module
SCHWPX Status Alarm Determination
(Where X Is 1-8)
Secondary CHW Pump X LV (Where X
Is Now 1-8) [Last Value (Boolean,
Enum, Float)]
Secondary CHW Pump X Modulating
Control v2 (Where X Is 1-8) (Pump
Control v2)
Secondary CHW Pump X Totalization
(Where X Is Now 1-8) [Totalization
(Enum Runtime)]
Secondary HW Pump X Control v2
(Where X Is 1-4) (Pump Control v2)
SHWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-4)
(Latching Alarm Manager)
SHWPX Blocking Protection (Where
X Is 1-4)
SHWPX Command LV (Where X Is
1-4) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum,
Float)]
SHWPX Status Alarm Determination
(Where X Is 1-4)
Supply Fan Alarms (Latching Alarm
Manager)
Tower Fan X Control v2 (Where X Is
1-8) (Pump Control v2)
Tower Fan X Enable LV (Where X Is
Now 1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum,
Float)]
Upgrading System Files
Version Description
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) to feed the secondary chilled water pump
runtime signal from the totalization block to the
sequencer.
3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
secondary chilled water pump.
3.1 This module totalizes the runtime for a primary
chilled water pump.
3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
secondary hot water pump.
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
3.1 This module monitors the command sent to the
secondary hot water pump. If the pump is off for a
period of time (default is 7 days), the output turns on
for a short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to a secondary hot water
pump to its alarm status determination.
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
cooling tower fan.
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) to feed the enable signal from the control
module to the sequencer.
131
 Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 8 of 9)
Module
Tower Fan X LV (Where X Is Now 1-8)
[Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)]
Tower Fan X Totalization (Where X Is
Now 1-8) [Totalization (Enum
Runtime)]
TwrFanX Alarms (Where X Is 1-8)
(Latching Alarm Manager)
TwrFanX Blocking Protection (Where
X Is 1-8)
TwrFanX Command LV (Where X Is
1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum,
Float)]
TwrFanX Status Alarm Determination
(Where X Is 1-8)
Building Load Calculation v2
Damper Trouble Detection
(Cold Deck Damper Trouble
Detection, Exhaust Damper Trouble
Detection, Hot Deck Damper Trouble
Detection, and Supply Damper
Trouble Detection)
Exhaust Fan BSP Control for
UL-864-UUKL
Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control
for UL-864-UUKL
Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability
Determination
Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass
Dampers
132 CCT Help: System Upgrade
Version Description
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) to feed the cooling tower fan runtime signal
from the totalization block to the sequencer.
3.1 This module totalizes the runtime for a cooling tower
fan.
3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
3.1 This module monitors the command sent to the
cooling tower fan. If the fan is off for a period of time
(default is 7 days), the output turns on for a short
period of time (default is 5 seconds).
3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(loop) from the command to a cooling tower fan to
its alarm status determination.
3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
3.0 This module replaces the Building Load Calculation
module. This module is a new version of the original
module that includes a setup element for proper
support of SI and IP unit sets. The new v2 module
also fixes an error in the calculation of the load
when the medium is water.
3.0 This module provides position detection for VAV
dampers. This module also provides an indication of
failure due to the damper not opening or closing
properly. This module is used for UL 864 UUKL
Smoke Control support to validate the VAV damper
is in the commanded position.
Used by: VAV Single Duct Application, VAV Slave
Single Duct Application, VAV Dual Duct Application,
and VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
3.0 This module provides outputs that allow proper
command prioritization of the outputs to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
3.0 This module provides outputs that allow proper
command prioritization of the outputs to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
3.0 This module uses the enthalpy of the outdoor and
return air to determine whether the heat recovery
device should be heating or cooling the supply air.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
3.0 This module provides control for a heat recover
wheel that has bypass dampers.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
 Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 9 of 9)
Module
Mixed Air Cold Deck HR Sequencing
[Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w
HR)]
Mixed Air Single Duct HR Sequencing
[Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD w
HR)]
Relief Fan BSP Control for
UL-864-UUKL
Return Fan BSP Control for
UL-864-UUKL
Return Fan Volume Match Control for
UL-864-UUKL
Secondary Chill Water Pump PID v2
(Secondary Pump PID)
Secondary Hot Water Pump PID v2
(Secondary Pump PID)
Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control
Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control
Dual Duct (Slave CD Constant Flow
Setpoint Control, Slave CD Flow
Setpoint Control, and Slave HD Flow
Setpoint Control)
Smoke Control Sequencing for
UL-864-UUKL
Supply Fan Duct Static Control for
UL-864-UUKL
Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout
Unocc Heating Fan Lockout
Upgrading System Files
Version Description
3.0 This module provides proper sequencing for a dual
path air handling unit that supports both mixed air
control and a heat recovery device.
Used by: AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application and
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
3.0 This module provides proper sequencing for a
single path air handling unit that supports both
mixed air control and a heat recovery device.
Used by: AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
and Rooftop Unit Application
3.0 This module provides outputs that allow proper
command prioritization of the outputs to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
3.0 This module provides outputs that allow proper
command prioritization of the outputs to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
3.0 This module provides outputs that allow proper
command prioritization of the outputs to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
3.0 This module provides control of a secondary
pumping system.
Used by: Central Cooling Applications
3.0 This module provides control of a secondary
pumping system.
Used by: Central Heating Applications
3.0 This module provides the flow setpoint for a slave
single duct VAV box.
Used by: VAV Slave Single Duct Application
3.0 This module provides the flow setpoint for a slave
dual duct VAV box.
Used by: VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
3.0 This module provides the proper command
prioritization of the fans and dampers to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: All Applications
3.0 This module provides outputs that allow proper
command prioritization of the outputs to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
3.0 This module locks out the fan during unoccupied
periods if the cooling is not available.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
3.0 This module locks out the fan during unoccupied
periods if the heating is not available.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
133
System Selection Updates
After you upgrade the .caf file, you have the option to replace the logic originally
created by System Selection to receive the updated modules and the functionality
found for the system types in Table 4-18 through Table 4-31.
However, if you decide to modify the System Selection, then all previous
parameters, configurations, and hardware settings are lost. Table 4-18 through
Table 4-31 display a list of system types that changed since the last release of
CCT. Use this table as a reference to determine whether to modify the System
Selection. See Viewing and Modifying System Selections for more information.
Table 4-18: All System Types
Version Description
2.2 • Loads Max Cap Fract LV modules only if two or more stages are selected.
• Loads Water System Flush Pass Through if Hot Water or Chilled Water valves are
selected.

Table 4-19: Air-Handling Unit – Mixed Air Single Duct

Version Description
3.1 This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides a preheat control module with low limit control based on the leaving water
temperature.
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all coil pumps.
• Provides additional setpoint reset options.
• Provides a comparison of outdoor air dry bulb temperature to return air dry bulb
temperature to enable economizer cooling.
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected or
an alarm that can stop the fan is loaded.
• Loads Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Supply Fan Control.
• Loads Return Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Return Fan BSP Control.
• Loads Return Fan Volume Match Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable
Capacity Return Fan Volume Match Control. This output controller switches to fan
tracking mode when the unit is unoccupied and the differential flow during
unoccupied is zero.
• Loads Relief Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity Relief
Fan BSP Control.
This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides Heat Recovery devices. These options include: single speed enthalpy
wheels with or without bypass dampers; glycol loop with or without a three-way
bypass valve; or enabling heat recovery based on either a dry bulb comparison or an
enthalpy comparison of outdoor and return air.
• Provides options to define the coil pumps as pressure/flow boost or as low
temperature circulation.
• Loads Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout and/or Unocc Heating Fan Lockout. These
modules prevent the fan from operating in the unoccupied mode when heating and/or
cooling are not available.
2.2 • Loads Application Mode Determination instead of Application Mode Override.
• Replaces Proportional Humidification Control with Packaged Humidifier Control and
Proportional Steam Humidification Control modules.
• Loads DA-T Unocc Status Determination instead of DA-T Unoccupied Status
Determination for intermittent unoccupied operation of DA-T control systems.
• Updates State Selection table so that humidification is enabled to operate (if
necessary) during the Economizer mode.

134 CCT Help: System Upgrade

 Table 4-20: Air-Handling Unit – Mixed Air Dual Duct
Version Description
3.1 This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides a preheat control module with low limit control based on the leaving water
temperature.
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all coil pumps.
• Provides additional setpoint reset options.
• Provides a comparison of outdoor air dry bulb temperature to return air dry bulb
temperature to enable economizer cooling.
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected or
an alarm that can stop the fan is loaded.
• Loads Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Supply Fan Control.
• Loads Return Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Return Fan BSP Control.
• Loads Return Fan Volume Match Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable
Capacity Return Fan Volume Match Control. This output controller switches to fan
tracking mode when the unit is unoccupied and the differential flow during
unoccupied is zero.
• Loads Relief Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity Relief
Fan BSP Control.
This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides Heat Recovery devices. These options include: single speed enthalpy
wheels with or without bypass dampers; glycol loop with or without a three-way
bypass valve; or enabling heat recovery based on either a dry bulb comparison or an
enthalpy comparison of outdoor and return air.
• Provides options to define the coil pumps as pressure/flow boost or as low
temperature circulation.
• Loads Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout and/or Unocc Heating Fan Lockout. These
modules prevent the fan from operating in the unoccupied mode when heating and/or
cooling are not available.
2.2 • Loads Application Mode Determination instead of Application Mode Override.
• Replaces Proportional Humidification Control with Packaged Humidifier Control and
Proportional Steam Humidification Control modules.
• Loads DA-T Unocc Status Determination instead of DA-T Unoccupied Status
Determination for intermittent unoccupied operation of DA-T control systems.
• Updates State Selection table so that humidification is enabled to operate (if
necessary) during the Economizer mode.

Table 4-21: Air-Handling Unit – 100% OA Single Duct (Part 1 of 2)

Version Description
3.1 This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides a preheat control module with low limit control based on the leaving water
temperature.
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all coil pumps.
• Provides additional setpoint reset options.

Upgrading System Files 135

 Table 4-21: Air-Handling Unit – 100% OA Single Duct (Part 2 of 2)
Version Description
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected or
an alarm that can stop the fan is loaded.
• Loads Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Supply Fan Control.
• Loads Exhaust Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Exhaust Fan BSP Control.
• Loads Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable
Capacity Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control.
This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides Heat Recovery devices. These options include: single speed enthalpy
wheels with or without bypass dampers; or enabling heat recovery based on either a
dry bulb comparison or an enthalpy comparison of outdoor and return air.
• Provides options to define the coil pumps as pressure/flow boost or as low
temperature circulation.
• Loads Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout and/or Unocc Heating Fan Lockout. These
modules prevent the fan from operating in the unoccupied mode when heating and/or
cooling are not available.
2.2 • Loads Application Mode Determination instead of Application Mode Override.
• Replaces Proportional Humidification Control with Packaged Humidifier Control and
Proportional Steam Humidification Control modules.
• Loads DA-T Unocc Status Determination instead of DA-T Unoccupied Status
Determination for intermittent unoccupied operation of DA-T control systems.

Table 4-22: Air-Handling Unit – 100% OA Dual Duct

Version Description
3.1 This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides a preheat control module with low limit control based on the leaving water
temperature.
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all coil pumps.
• Provides additional setpoint reset options.
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected or
an alarm that can stop the fan is loaded.
• Loads Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Supply Fan Control.
• Loads Exhaust Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Exhaust Fan BSP Control.
• Loads Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable
Capacity Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control.
This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides Heat Recovery devices. These options include: single speed enthalpy
wheels with or without bypass dampers; or enabling heat recovery based on either a
dry bulb comparison or an enthalpy comparison of outdoor and return air.
• Provides options to define the coil pumps as pressure/flow boost or as low
temperature circulation.
• Loads Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout and/or Unocc Heating Fan Lockout. These
modules prevent the fan from operating in the unoccupied mode when heating and/or
cooling are not available.
2.2 • Loads Application Mode Determination instead of Application Mode Override.
• Replaces Proportional Humidification Control with Packaged Humidifier Control and
Proportional Steam Humidification Control modules.
• Loads DA-T Unocc Status Determination instead of DA-T Unoccupied Status
Determination for intermittent unoccupied operation of DA-T control systems.

136 CCT Help: System Upgrade

 Table 4-23: Air-Handling Unit – Rooftop Unit
Version Description
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected.
• Provides options to define the coil pumps as pressure/flow boost or as low
temperature circulation.

Table 4-24: Air-Handling Unit – Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)

Version Description
3.1 This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides a preheat control module with low limit control based on the leaving water
temperature.
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all coil pumps.
• Provides additional setpoint reset options.
• Provides a comparison of outdoor air dry bulb temperature to return air dry bulb
temperature to enable economizer cooling.
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected.
• Provides Heat Recovery devices. These options include: single speed enthalpy
wheels with or without bypass dampers; glycol loop with or without a three-way
bypass valve; or enabling heat recovery based on either a dry bulb comparison or an
enthalpy comparison of outdoor and return air.
• Provides options to define the coil pumps as pressure/flow boost or as low
temperature circulation.

Table 4-25: VAV – Single Duct

Version Description
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected.
• Loads Supply Damper Trouble Detection when Smoke Control Support is selected.
• Loads Exhaust Damper Trouble Detection when Smoke Control Support and an
exhaust damper are selected.
• Provides support for use of calibration solenoid(s) to set the zero on the differential
pressure sensor(s) instead of closing the damper(s).
2.2 Loads System Mode Determination instead of System Mode Pass Through.

Table 4-26: VAV – Dual Duct

Version Description
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected.
• Loads Hot Deck Damper Trouble Detection and Cold Deck Damper Trouble
Detection when Smoke Control Support is selected.
• Loads Exhaust Damper Trouble Detection when Smoke Control Support and an
exhaust damper are selected.
• Provides support for use of calibration solenoid(s) to set the zero on the differential
pressure sensors instead of closing the dampers.
2.2 Loads System Mode Determination instead of System Mode Pass Through.

Table 4-27: VAV – Slave Single Duct

Version Description
3.0 This application is new at Release 3.0. The VAV Slave Single Duct Application provides
Network Input points to read corresponding values using peer-to-peer communication
from the associated Master Single Duct VAV box to provide control of the damper(s) and
heating devices.

Upgrading System Files 137

 Table 4-28: VAV – Slave Dual Duct
Version Description
3.0 This application is new at Release 3.0. The VAV Slave Dual Duct Application provides
Network Input points to read corresponding values using peer-to-peer communication
from the associated Master Dual Duct VAV box to provide control of the dampers and
heating devices.

Table 4-29: Fan Coil

Version Description
2.2 Loads System Mode Determination instead of System Mode Pass Through.

Table 4-30: Unit Vent

Version Description
3.0 Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected.
2.2 • Loads System Mode Determination instead of System Mode Pass Through.
• Updates State Selection table so that staged outputs are held off when Fan Alarm is
active.

Table 4-31: Heat Pump

Version Description
3.1 Updates State Selection table so that the Unocc Status Determination module’s Unocc
Clg and Unocc Htg request Control instead of Max. This allows the heating or cooling
device to operate in the Control mode.
3.0 Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected.
2.2 • Loads System Mode Determination instead of System Mode Pass Through.
• Updates State Selection table so that staged outputs are held off when Fan Alarm is
active.

Table 4-32: Central Cooling

Version Description
3.1 • Loads CW Pump X Control v2 (Pump Control v2) instead of CW Pump X Control
(Pump Control).
• Loads Primary CHW Pump X Control v2 instead of Primary CHW Pump X Control.
• Loads Secondary CHW Pump X Modulating Control v2 instead of Secondary CHW
Pump X Modulating Control.
• Loads Tower Fan X Control v2 instead of Tower Fan X Control.
This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides the option of up to eight devices.
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all pumps and cooling tower fans.

138 CCT Help: System Upgrade

 Table 4-33: Central Heating
Version Description
3.1 • Loads Primary Pump X Control v2 (Pump Control v2) instead of Primary Pump X
Control (Pump Control).
• Loads Secondary HW Pump X Modulating Control v2 instead of Secondary HW
Pump X Modulating Control.
This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option for high temperature water heat exchanger.
• Provides option of three-stage frost protection.
• Provides option for up to eight zone water loops. Loops support a modulated valve,
an optional pump, and temperature reset for each loop.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all pumps.

Backup Files
When you upgrade your system, CCT creates a backup version of the original file
and stores the file in the same directory as the original file. The backup file has the
same name as the original file; however, the backup file has a .bak extension. To
use the backup file, you need to remove the extension from the file name.

Upgrading System Files 139

Steps
Upgrading Modules
To upgrade a system:
1. From the File menu, select Open.
2. Select the .caf file that requires the upgrade and click OK. One of two dialog
boxes appears, depending on whether the file you selected requires module
upgrades:
• If the file requires module upgrades, a dialog box appears displaying a list
of standard and user-defined modules. Standard modules are included as
part of the upgrade process. For more information about these standard
modules, see Upgraded Modules. User-defined modules are not included
as part of the upgrade process.
• If the file does not require module upgrades, a smaller dialog box appears
prompting you to upgrade the system.
3. Click OK. CCT upgrades the system to the latest version.
Note: If you do not want to upgrade the system or you want to upgrade the
system at a later time, click No.
Note: At any time, you can perform this process by selecting System Upgrade
from the Tools menu.

Modifying the System Selection

To update the system types found in Table 4-18, you need to modify your System
Selection. To modify your System Selection, see Viewing and Modifying System
Selections.

140 CCT Help: System Upgrade

Screens
System Upgrade (with Modules) Screen
See Upgrading Modules.
Table 4-34: System Upgrade (with Modules) Screen
Field Description
Version Information Displays CCT version information.
Standard Modules Displays the modules that require upgrade.
User Modified Modules Displays the modules that have been modified by a user.
User-modified modules are not included in the upgrade.
Yes Closes the System Upgrade screen and upgrades the
.caf file and modules.
No Closes the System Upgrade screen and does not
upgrade the .caf file and modules.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

System Upgrade (without Modules) Screen

See Upgrading Modules.
Table 4-35: System Upgrade (without Modules) Screen
Field Description
Yes Closes the System Upgrade screen and upgrades the
.caf file.
No Closes the System Upgrade screen and does not
upgrade the .caf file.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Upgrading System Files 141

142 CCT Help: System Upgrade
Chapter 5: CCT Help: Preferences
Setting and Using Preferences
Introduction
By default, CCT is set up to apply the Johnson Controls standard object names,
signals, and System Selection type selections. The preferences option allows you
to modify the Johnson Controls default preferences and create your own
preference files for use in a specific region of the country or customer job site.
Example usage of preferences are:
• For Object Naming, the default Johnson Controls suffix for all temperature
points is -T. You can edit the suffix so that all temperature points are -TMP.
• For Signals, the default Johnson Controls selection for all non-Zone
Temperature Sensors is Nickel. You can edit the signal so that the Zone
Temperature is Platinum.
• For System Selection preferences, you can set preheat coils on Air Handling
Units to defaults for colder climates. You also can match economizer strategies
to defaults for the local climate.
• For System Selection preferences, if your site typically has electric heat on its
VAV boxes instead of the default hot water, you can change the preference so
that each new system you create has electric heat selected by default.
Preferences are unique to the computer in which CCT is installed. The preferences
are configured in CCT and used as defaults for any files created by CCT on that
computer. Changing the preferences does not affect existing systems, only those
created after changing the preferences.
You can import and export preference files for the object naming and signal
preferences and for each System Selection tree to use on other computers or to use
specific preferences for different sites.

Concepts
Object Naming and Signal Preferences
Object naming and signal preferences determine the naming conventions to use
when adding input and output objects to your system (via the System Selection
process or when you manually add inputs and outputs after System Selection). The
names and signals you define in the object naming preferences are used when
adding inputs and outputs during the System Selection process, as well as when
adding them manually in the Control View.
An object name consists of a defined Object Name Prefix and a defined Object
Name Suffix. The object name is created by combining them. For example, the
Object Name Prefix BLDG added to the Object Name Suffix of SP results in an
object name of BLDG-SP. Similar functionality is available to define an expanded
identifier for each object.

Setting and Using Preferences 143

 A signal specifies the physical communications connection for a given input or
output. This connection allows the controller to receive input values and send
output values.
Use Table 5-36 to determine the signal to use for point types on your system.
Table 5-36: FEC Point Types and Signals (Part 1 of 2)
Point Type
Universal Input (UI)
Binary Input (BI)
Analog Output (AO)
Binary Output (BO)
Configurable Output (CO)
Universal Output (UO)
Relay Output (RO)4
Integrated Velocity
Pressure Sensor
Integrated Actuator
144 CCT Help: Preferences
Signals Supported
Resistive
Nickel 1k RTD
Platinum 1k RTD
Silicon A99B
2.25k NTC Type 2 Thermistor
10K NTC Type L Thermistor
VAV Velocity Pressure
0-10 VDC
4-20 mA1
Dry Contact Maintained
Dry Contact Maintained
Dry Contact Pulsed
0-10 VDC
4-20 mA
24 VAC Incremental2
24 VAC Maintained
24 VAC Pulse
24 VAC Start Stop3
0-10 VDC
24 VAC Incremental2
24 VAC Maintained
24 VAC Pulse
24 VAC Start Stop3
0-10 VDC
4-20 mA
24 VAC Incremental2
24 VAC Maintained
24 VAC Pulse
24 VAC Start Stop3
24 VAC Incremental2
24 VAC Maintained
24 VAC Pulse
24 VAC Start Stop3
24 VAC-240 VAC Incremental2
24 VAC-240 VAC Maintained
24 VAC-240 VAC Pulse
24 VAC-240 VAC Start Stop3
Integrated Velocity Pressure on VMA-type controllers
Integrated actuator on VMA-type controllers
 Table 5-36: FEC Point Types and Signals (Part 2 of 2)
Point Type Signals Supported
Sensor/Actuator Bus The SAB signal type is used to provide the point. Examples of
(SAB) Interfaces this include Network Sensor (Network Duct Sensor or Network
Zone Sensor) and Network VSD.
Wireless Ethernet A wireless Ethernet signal is used to indicate that a wireless
Interfaces Many to One sensor provides the data for this input. An
appropriate value object (AV, BV, MV) is created to which the
NAE passes the sensor data.

1. The UI on VMA1610 and VMA1620 controllers does not support the 4-20 mA signal.
2. Incremental outputs use two binary hardware slots for opening and closing an actuator.
3. Start stop outputs use two binary hardware slots for starting and stopping a device.
4. You can use Relay Outputs to drive incremental/floating 3-wire actuators; however, we
recommend using triac outputs instead of Relay Outputs for the following control loop types:
VAV Flow Control, Airflow, Airflow%, Airflow Diff, Bldg Static, and Duct Static.

System Selection Preferences

The System Selection preferences set the default values of the selection trees of the
System Selection Wizard as specified by the user. For example, if your site
requires a discharge air sensor on all VAV boxes, select Discharge Air
Temperature on the VAV Single Duct Tree.
Setting preferences before going through the System Selection process for similar
systems allows you to save time during selection and helps keep your systems
consistent. Set preferences on the selection trees to match your local climate
conditions. These preferences only specify the starting values for the System
Selection options. System Selection preferences do not prevent you from making
particular selections on any given system.

Unit Preferences
You can set the units of measurement to use when working in CCT from the New
System dialog box (File > New) during the System Selection process. After setting
the units and closing CCT, CCT remembers the last unit’s setting. The selected
units are used until you change them in the New System dialog box. See Selecting
a System (Creating a New System) in the Configuring a System section.

Setting and Using Preferences 145

Import and Export Preferences
You can export and import object naming, signal, and System Selection
preferences using the Export and Import buttons. This functionality allows you to
save preferences files (export) to access them from the same computer for later use
(import), or you can copy the files to use on other computers.
When you export the object naming and signal preferences, the default file name
and location to save the preferences are:
• ObjectNaming.properties
• C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Johnson
Controls\MetasysIII\CCT\Configuration\Backup\Object Naming
When you export System Selection preferences, the default file names and
location to save the preferences are:
• [applicationname].properties:
- Mixed Air Single Duct.properties
- 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct.properties
- Mixed Air Dual Duct.properties
- 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct.properties
- Rooftop Unit.properties
- Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct).properties
- Fan Coil.properties
- Unit Ventilators.properties
- Heat Pumps.properties
- Single Duct.properties (for VAV)
- Dual Duct.properties (for VAV)
- Slave Single Duct.properties (for VAV)
- Slave Dual Duct.properties (for VAV)
- Central Heating.properties
- Central Cooling.properties
- Sideloop.properties
• C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\CCT\Configuration\Backup\SelectionTree
You can adjust the file names to indicate specific sites or uses. You also can save
the files to different locations.

146 CCT Help: Preferences

Localization Preferences
You can set localization preferences for the languages installed during the CCT
software installation. See Language Options in the User Interface section.
When you have support for more than one language, the tabs of the Preferences -
Localization screen contain content. See the Setting Localization Preferences and
Preferences-Localization Screen sections for details.

Setting and Using Preferences 147

Steps
Setting Default Object Naming and Signal Preferences
To set default object naming and signal preferences:
1. From the Tools menu, select Preferences > Naming and Signal. The
Preferences - Object Naming and Signal screen appears. See the Preferences-
Object Naming and Signal Screen section.
2. Click a non-shaded cell to change and type the desired text.
Note: You also can use Ctrl+C to copy text from a cell and use Ctrl+V to
paste the copied text to another cell. See Copying and Pasting Naming
and Signal Preferences.
Note: You cannot edit data in columns that are shaded gray. Use the filter and
sorting features to locate and view data of specific items. See the
Filtering Object Naming and Signal Preferences and Sorting Object
Naming and Signal Preferences sections.
3. Repeat Step 2 for other name changes.
Note: To return to the original Johnson Controls standard preferences, use the
resetting options. See the Resetting Object Naming and Signal
Preferences section.
4. Click OK.
Note: Edits to object naming and signal preferences appear in bold text.

Filtering Object Naming and Signal Preferences

To filter object naming and signal preferences, select an item to filter from the
drop-down menu of the desired column. Only items of that type appear on the
screen. To narrow the items further, you can filter on other columns. You also can
use custom filters. See Performing Custom Filters.
Note: Filtering is based on function or application name. For example,
Temperature is a function. If you want to change the suffix from -T to -
TMP you can change one entry for Temperature and copy (Ctrl+C) and
paste (Ctrl+V) the change to the other rows.
Note: To mass edit names, first filter on the gray-shaded columns for Application
or Function.

148 CCT Help: Preferences

Performing Custom Filters
To perform custom filters:
1. In the drop-down menu of the desired column, select Custom. The Custom
AutoFilter Dialog Box appears.
2. In the Filtering Operator drop-down menu, select the filtering operation to use.
Use Table 5-37 as a reference.
Table 5-37: Filtering Operators for Custom Filters
Operator Description
Equals Displays the items that exactly match the words you select or enter.
Does Not Equal Displays the items that do not exactly match the words you select
or enter.
Contains Displays the items that contain the word you select or enter.
Does Not Contain Displays the items that do not contain the word you select or enter.
Ends With Displays the items that end with the word you select or enter.
Does Not End With Displays the items that do not end with the word you select or
enter.
Begins With Displays the items that begin with the word you select or enter.
Does Not Begin With Displays the items that do not begin with the word you select or
enter.

3. In the drop-down menu to the right of the selected filtering operator, enter the
information to filter or select an item from the list.
4. Click OK. CCT displays the filtered information.
Note: To remove the filter, select All from the drop-down menu for the
desired column.
Note: To narrow the items further, you can filter on other columns.

Sorting Object Naming and Signal Preferences

To sort object naming and signal preferences, click the header of the desired
column. Clicking the header repeatedly results in the items switching between
ascending and descending alphabetical order.
Note: If necessary, you can manually move columns around. To move a column,
select the column and move it to the desired location.

Setting and Using Preferences 149

Copying and Pasting Naming and Signal Preferences
To copy and paste naming and signal preferences:
1. In the desired column, select the cell you want to copy.
2. Press Ctrl+C to copy the preference.
3. Select the cell to which you want to paste. To paste to multiple cells, click and
drag multiple cells in the column.
4. Press Ctrl+V to paste the preference.
Note: To mass edit names, first filter on the gray-shaded columns for Application
or Function.

Resetting Object Naming and Signal Preferences

To reset object naming and signal preferences in a single row to the Johnson
Controls standard default value, select a cell in the row to reset and click Reset.
To reset object naming and signal preferences in all rows to the Johnson Controls
standard default values, click Reset All.
Note: The Reset and Reset All functions reset the preferences to the Johnson
Controls standard default values regardless of user session.

Exporting Object Naming and Signal Preferences

To export object naming and signal preferences:
1. Click Export. The Save dialog box appears.
2. Keep the default File name of ObjectNaming.properties or adjust the name to
indicate a specific site or use.
Note: It is not necessary to export/save a separate copy of the Johnson
Controls standard preferences because the Reset and Reset All
functions reset the preferences to the Johnson Controls standard default
values regardless of user session.
3. Keep the default location (C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\CCT\Configuration\Backup\Object
Naming) to save the file or adjust it as desired.
4. Click Save. The file saves and you can access it from the same computer for
later use or you can copy the file to use on another computer.

150 CCT Help: Preferences

Importing Object Naming and Signal Preferences
To import object naming and signal preferences:
1. Click Import. The Open dialog box appears.
2. Select the desired file to import.
Note: You may need to browse to the location where you saved the file if you
saved it to a different location from the default or received the file from
others.
3. Click Open. The preferences file opens and populates the Object Naming and
Signal Preferences screen.

Setting Default System Selection Preferences

For information on the System Selection tree types, see the Applications section.
For information on the System Selection Wizard, see System Selection Wizard in
the Configuring a System section.
To set default System Selection preferences:
1. From the Tools menu, select Preferences > System Selection. The Preferences
- System Selection screen appears. The left pane contains the different System
Selection trees available. See the Preferences-System Selection Screen section.
2. Navigate to and select the System Selection tree to modify. The tree appears in
the right pane of the screen.
3. Select and remove selections to fit your specific needs. The options you choose
here determine how the tree appears in the System Selection Wizard when you
add a new system or make changes to an existing system’s selections. Make
selections by:
• checking a check box to turn a setting on and removing a check in a check
box to turn a setting off
• selecting a radio button to select that item from among several possible
options
Note: To return to the original Johnson Controls standard preferences, use the
resetting option. See the Resetting System Selection Preferences
section.
4. Click OK.

Resetting System Selection Preferences

To reset System Selection preferences, click Reset. The current System Selection
tree resets to the Johnson Controls standard default tree values.
Note: The Reset function resets the preferences to the Johnson Controls standard
default values regardless of user session.

Setting and Using Preferences 151

Exporting System Selection Preferences
To export System Selection preferences:
1. In the Preferences - System Selection screen, select the System Selection tree
that you want to export.
2. Click Export. The Save dialog box appears.
3. Keep the default File name of [application].properties or adjust the name to
indicate a specific site or use.
Note: The default File name for each selection tree is listed in the Import and
Export Preferences section ([applicationname].properties).
Note: It is not necessary to export/save a separate copy of the Johnson
Controls standard preferences because the Reset function resets the
preferences of the displayed selection tree to the Johnson Controls
standard default values regardless of user session.
4. Keep the default location (C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\CCT\Configuration\Backup\SelectionTree)
to save the file or adjust it as desired.
5. Click Save. The file saves and you can access it from the same computer for
later use or you can copy the file to use on another computer.

Importing System Selection Preferences

To import System Selection preferences:
1. In the Preferences - System Selection screen, select the System Selection tree
that matches the type you want to import.
2. Click Import. The Open dialog box appears.
3. Select the desired file to import.
Note: You may need to browse to the location where you saved the file if you
saved it to a different location from the default, or received the file
from others.
4. Click Open. The preferences file opens and poplulates the System Selection
preferences tree.

152 CCT Help: Preferences

Setting Localization Preferences
To set localization preferences:
1. From the Tools menu, select Preferences > Localization. The Preferences -
Localization screen appears. See the Preferences-Localization Screen section.
2. On the Localization tab, click the desired locale such as German (Germany).

IMPORTANT: If you are selecting a locale/language for the first time, exit
CCT. Then, open CCT again to automatically populate the language data that
was provided during the installation process.

3. On the Naming tab, type the desired text translation in the Translated Value
column.
4. On the Systems tab, type the desired text translation in the Translated Value
column.
5. On the Views tab, type the desired text translation in the Translated Value
column.
6. On the Selection Trees tab, select a selection tree in the navigation pane and
type the desired text translation in the Translated Value column in the right
pane.
7. Click Save.
8. Click Close.

Setting and Using Preferences 153

Screens
Preferences-Object Naming and Signal Screen
See Setting Default Object Naming and Signal Preferences.
Table 5-38: Preferences - Object Naming and Signal Screen
Field Description
Column Headers (Sorting) You can sort the contents in ascending/descending
order. See the Sorting Object Naming and Signal
Preferences section.
Drop-down Menus (Filtering) Each column has a drop-down menu to filter contents on
the screen. See the Filtering Object Naming and Signal
Preferences and Sorting Object Naming and Signal
Preferences sections.
Application Name Column Displays the name of the application in which the object
belongs. You cannot edit items in this column.
Function Name Column Displays the function of the object (for example, used for
an Analog Input or for a command). You cannot edit
items in this column.
Derived Name Column Displays the format of the object’s name. You cannot
edit items in this column.
An object name consists of a defined Object Name
Prefix and a defined Object Name Suffix. The object
name is created by combining them. For example, the
Object Name Prefix BLDG added to the Object Name
Suffix of SP results in an object name of BLDG-SP.
Name Prefix Column Displays the full prefix of the object name. You can edit
items in this column.
Name Suffix Column Displays the full suffix of the object name. You can edit
items in this column.
Description Prefix Column Displays the full prefix of the object’s Expanded ID. You
can edit items in this column.
Description Suffix Column Displays the full suffix of the object’s Expanded ID. You
can edit items in this column.
Signal Displays the default signal used for the application. See
the Object Naming and Signal Preferences section.
Reset Resets the selected row to the Johnson Controls
standard default value. See the Resetting Object
Naming and Signal Preferences section.
Reset All Resets all rows to the Johnson Controls standard default
values. See the Resetting Object Naming and Signal
Preferences section.
Import Opens a saved object naming preference file and
populates the object naming and signal preferences
screen with its data. See the Import and Export
Preferences section.
Export Saves object naming and signal preferences to a file so
you can access it from the same computer for later use
or you can copy the file to use on another computer. See
the Import and Export Preferences section.
OK Applies the changes and closes the Preferences -
Object Naming and Signal screen.
Cancel Closes the Preferences - Object Naming and Signal
screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

154 CCT Help: Preferences

Preferences-System Selection Screen
See Setting Default System Selection Preferences.
Table 5-39: Preferences - System Selection Screen
Field Description
System Selection Tree Displays the System Selection trees available. For
Navigation Panel information on the system types, see the Applications
section. For information on the System Selection
Wizard, see System Selection Wizard in the Configuring
a System section.
Display Panel Displays the selected tree and allows you to make
changes to the default selections. See the Setting
Default System Selection Preferences section.
Reset Resets the selected tree to the Johnson Controls
standard default tree values. See the Resetting System
Selection Preferences section.
Import Opens a saved System Selection tree preference file
and poplulates the screen with its data. See the Import
and Export Preferences section.
Export Saves System Selection tree preferences to a file so you
can access it from the same computer for later use or
you can copy the file to use on another computer. See
the Import and Export Preferences section.
OK Applies the changes and closes the Preferences-
System Selection screen.
Cancel Closes the Preferences - System Selection screen
without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box

See Performing Custom Filters.
Table 5-40: Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box
Field Description
Filtering Operator Displays a list of filtering operations to use when you
perform custom filters. For example, if you select the
filtering operator Equals, CCT displays the items that
exactly match the words you select or enter in the Filtering
Criteria field.
Filtering Criteria Displays a list of criteria that you can select when you
perform custom filters. The criteria in this field is
determined by the column you select.
OK Applies the changes and closes the Custom AutoFilter
dialog box.
Cancel Closes the Custom AutoFilter dialog box without applying
the changes.

Setting and Using Preferences 155

Preferences-Localization Screen
See Setting Localization Preferences.
Table 5-41: Preferences - Localization Screen
Field Description
Localization Tab Displays a list of the locales installed during the CCT
installation process.
Naming Tab Allows you to enter text in the desired language for the
English text in CCT. For example, for Exhaust Filter, you
can enter text in another language that should appear in
place of the English text. The table in this tab has the
following columns:
• Context Id: Indicates where the item appears in the
CCT software (for example, Application).
• English Value: Displays the English text to be
translated.
• Translated Value: Indicates the text translation.
Systems Tab Allows you to enter text in the desired language for the
English text in CCT. For example, for Rooftop Unit, you can
enter text in another language that should appear in place
of the English text. The table in this tab has the following
columns:
• Context Id: Indicates where the item appears in the
CCT software (for example, Air Handling Unit
Configuration).
• English Value: Displays the English text to be
translated.
• Translated Value: Indicates the text translation.
Views Allows you to enter text in the desired language for the
English text in CCT. For example, for Device Type, you can
enter text in another language that should appear in place
of the English text. The table in this tab has the following
columns:
• Context Id: Indicates where the item appears in the
CCT software (for example, HW device view).
• English Value: Displays the English text to be
translated.
• Translated Value: Indicates the text translation.
Selection Trees Allows you to enter text in the desired language for the
English text in the CCT System Selection trees. For
example, for Device Type, you can enter text in another
language that should appear in place of the English text.
This tab has a navigation tree in the left pane of all the
system selection trees (for example, Fan Coil) to select the
context. The right pane has a table with the following
columns:
• English Value: Displays the English text to be
translated.
• Translated Value: Indicates the text translation.
Reset All Resets all values to the defaults.
Save Applies the changes and closes the screen.
Close Closes the screen. If you did not save your changes, a
dialog appears asking if you want to save them before
closing the screen.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

156 CCT Help: Preferences

Chapter 6: CCT Help: Configuration
Configuring a System
Introduction
Configuring a system involves opening or selecting a system, modifying a system,
and defining hardware for a system. You can open an existing Controller
Application File (.caf) in CCT using the Open option from the File menu, select a
new system using the System Selection Wizard, or upload a Controller Application
File from an existing device.
Before selecting a new system using the System Selection Wizard, you can
optionally set naming preferences and System Selection Wizard defaults to
customize to your specific needs. See the Setting and Using Preferences section
for more information.
Using a Johnson Controls standard file or the System Selection Wizard allows you
to create systems in CCT according to common system configurations. We
recommend using Johnson Controls standards whenever possible. If your system
requires customization outside what is provided by the Johnson Controls
standards, you can create custom control logic in CCT by adding, removing, and
modifying items in the Control View of CCT.
This section covers how to add and configure a system in Configuration mode. For
information on uploading a Controller Application File, see the Loading Devices
section. See the Simulating a System and Defining Hardware sections after
configuring your system.
For information on the Control View, Logic View, and Details View interfaces,
see the User Interface section. For information on the types of systems you can
create and details on the selections available, see the User Interface and
Applications sections.
Before performing tasks in CCT, see the Getting Started section for guidance.

Configuring a System 157

Concepts
System Selection Wizard
The System Selection Wizard is used to identify the mechanical equipment, its
related control components, and the control strategy. The Mechanical System
Selection screen allows you to choose the mechanical components for your
system, such as actuator type or fan type. The Control Logic Selection screen lets
you select the control logic strategies to control the mechanical system.
When creating a new system, the File > New option opens the New System dialog
box that allows you to name the system and choose the desired system type and
configuration. After completing this dialog box, the System Selection Wizard
opens prompting you to make the selections corresponding to your system. See the
Selecting a System (Creating a New System) section.
You also can use the Select System button to open the System Selection Wizard to
review and make changes to previously made selections. Any customization
changes made are lost because these selections are laid down over the previous
selections. See the Viewing and Modifying System Selections section.
See the System Types and Configurations and System Selection Tree sections.
Similarly, the Sideloop button opens a System Selection Wizard specific to
defining a sideloop. See the Creating a Sideloop and Sideloop Applications
sections for more information.

158 CCT Help: Configuration

System Types and Configurations
When selecting a system, you first choose the overall type of system and a specific
configuration to create. For example, you may select VAV as the system type and
Single Duct as the specific configuration to use. See the Selecting a System
(Creating a New System) steps and the Applications section for details on the
System Selection options:
Air Handling Unit
• Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
• Rooftop Unit Application
• Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Fan Coil (Fan Coil Applications)
Unit Ventilators (Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications)
Heat Pumps (Heat Pump Applications)
VAV
• VAV Single Duct (VAV Single Duct Application)
• VAV Dual Duct (VAV Dual Duct Application)
• VAV Slave Single Duct (VAV Slave Single Duct Application)
• VAV Slave Dual Duct (VAV Slave Dual Duct Application)
Central Heating (Central Heating Applications)
Central Cooling (Central Cooling Applications)
Custom Applications
• Electrical
• Misc Fan
• Elevator
• Security
• Fire
• SMOKE
• Miscellaneous

Configuring a System 159

 Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only
• Electrical
• Misc Fan
• Elevator
• Security
• Fire
• SMOKE
• Miscellaneous
For information on creating Custom Applications and Monitoring/Supervisory
Control Only applications, see Creating Custom Applications and Creating
Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications.

System Selection Tree

The System Selection Wizard has a Mechanical System Selection screen and
Control Logic Selection screen containing selection tree/folder structures for
selecting options for a system.
The selection trees contain folders that you can expand and collapse, check boxes,
and radio buttons. The check boxes let you include or exclude an option. The radio
buttons let you select one option from a list. Click the + and - next to a node in the
tree to show and hide selections.
When you select a parent node in the selection tree, its child nodes become
available for selection. You cannot select a child node without first selecting its
parent node.
Nodes are tied together logically so that if you select a node option, another node
option activates or deactivates accordingly. This functionality helps prevent you
from making selections that are not used together. For example, in the VAV Single
Duct Selection Tree’s Mechanical System Selection screen, when you choose Box
Heating as Electric Staged, the Hot Water option becomes disabled.
Another example is if you choose Discharge Air Control for Temperature Control
Strategy on an Air Handling Unit system, the Discharge Air Temperature sensor
on the Control Logic Selection portion of the wizard is disabled. The Discharge
Air Temperature sensor is disabled because a Discharge Air Temperature sensor is
required for the control strategy, and is automatically selected.
Nodes in the selection tree that do not have check boxes and radio buttons are
options that are automatically selected by the wizard. These nodes are required for
a system such as a Fan for a Fan Coil application or a Zone Temperature Sensor for
any Terminal Unit Control application.
The tree selections provided for each system type define commonly expected
system configurations and control strategies. The default selections are simply a
place to start. You can customize these configurations in the Control View, if
necessary.

160 CCT Help: Configuration

Control View Configuration
In Configuration mode, the Control View allows you to add, remove, and modify
its contents. For example, you can add an input and define state generators. You
also can modify parameters/attributes in the Parameters table and modify
connections in the Connections table.
See the Steps section for details on how to perform the configuration tasks in the
Control View. See the User Interface section for a description of the Control View
user interface and its contents.

Logic View Configuration

In Configuration mode, the Logic View allows you to modify your system’s
control logic. For example, you can connect inputs and outputs, add and remove
logic blocks, and expose ports. See the Steps section for details on how to perform
the configuration tasks in the Logic View. See the User Interface section for a
description of the Logic View user interface and its contents.
Once a system is selected and configured using the System Selection Wizard, the
modules and logic provided will control your system as expected. Only modify
logic if you require a unique control that the System Selection Wizard did not
address.

Details Configuration
The Details dialog box allows you to view and modify the attribute/parameter,
input, output, and hardware details of modules/blocks selected from the Control
View or Logic View. See the Steps section for details on how to perform the
configuration tasks in the Details dialog box. See the User Interface section for a
description of the Details dialog box interface and its contents.

Simulation
After configuring your system, verify your system is configured properly in
Simulation mode. Simulation mode allows you to see your system as though it
were in Commissioning mode. This allows you to test your configuration and
make adjustments before setting up communications to devices and going farther
in the workflow. See the Simulating a System section for information on how to
simulate your system.

Hardware Definition
After configuring your system, define the hardware for your system using the
Hardware Definition wizard. This wizard allows you to define devices such as
FECs and IOMs, map points to hardware slots, and define network settings. See
the Defining Hardware section for details.

Configuring a System 161

Peer-to-Peer Communication
The peer-to-peer configuration provides communication directly between two
devices on a trunk (for example, communication between two FECs). This setup
allows a device to read values from another device or write values to it using
Network Inputs or Network Outputs. To read a value from another device, set up
peer-to-peer communication using a Network Input. The recommended method for
peer-to-peer communication is reading values from other devices (as opposed to
writing values to devices). To write a value to another device, set up peer-to-peer
communication using a Network Output (for example, to send a value to a
third-party device). Configure the Peer Reference attribute in the Network Input or
Output to enable or disable the communication.
Peer-to-Peer Communication Devices:
• Johnson Controls Devices: Peer-to-peer communication occurs between two
Johnson Controls devices (for example, two FECs). The updates are done
based on Change-of-Value (COV).
• Third-Party MS/TP Device: Peer-to-peer communication occurs between a
Johnson Controls device and a third-party MS/TP device (for example, an FEC
and TEC). In this case, the reference is a poll with a poll rate of 30 seconds,
which cannot be changed.
Guidelines for Peer-to-Peer Communication:
• You should not exceed 15 output references per device.
• We recommend a limit of 50 input references to a single device. That is, do not
define a single device as the source of peer-to-peer data to more than 50 other
devices.
Note: Peer-to-peer communication requires processor time on both devices
and bandwidth on the MS/TP communication bus.
• The preferred method of peer-to-peer communication for FECs is to use
Network Inputs to reference a source. Using a Network Input with a referenced
source allows the reliability of the reference to be used in logic (for example,
for referencing the OA-T analog input). If you use Network Outputs to send a
value to a peer controller, make sure that the destination is only sent a value
from a single source (that is, avoid using fan-in references from multiple
Network Outputs).

162 CCT Help: Configuration

 Examples of Peer-to-Peer Communication:
• Many applications provide a Network Input for Outdoor Air Temperature
when a physical sensor is not installed. You can use peer-to-peer
communication to reference the OA-T analog input on a different controller on
the same MS/TP Field Bus.
• You can configure the Unit Enable input of cooling only VAV boxes to
reference the Supply Fan Status BI (SF-S) of the Air Handling Unit that serves
them.
• You may no longer need to configure Global Data Sharing in the NAE. For
example, in previous releases you had to define an Outdoor Air Temperature
object in the NAE and use Global Data Sharing to write the Outdoor Air
Temperature to the necessary FECs. Using peer-to-peer communication,
reference the OA-T analog inputs on the FECs located on the same MS/TP
Field Bus.
For more information, see the following sections:
• Setting Up Peer-to-Peer Communication
• Disabling Peer-to-Peer Communication
• CCT Input and Output Object Overview (see the specific object listed)

Application Logic View

The View Application Logic option of the Quick Navigation drop-down menu
allows you to view the logic of the entire application in the Logic View. This
option is available only in Configuration mode.
You cannot edit logic in this tool. Use this feature to view and print application
logic. You can use standard Logic View options such as select, pan, zoom, Trace
mode, and print. The Control Block palette, the Set Default Element button, and
the Export Module button do not appear when viewing application logic.
The application logic diagram is organized in the same order as the Control View
columns. The modules flow from the left side of the screen to the right side in the
following order: Network Inputs and Inputs, Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules,
State Generation modules, Output Control modules, and lastly Network Outputs
and Outputs.
See the Viewing/Printing Application Logic section.

Configuring a System 163

Steps
Selecting a System (Creating a New System)
For information on the types of systems you can create and details on the
selections available, see the User Interface and Applications sections.
To select a system (create a new system):
1. From the File menu, select New. The New System dialog box appears.
2. Type a name for the system in the System Name text box. Illegal characters
include:
:*?"<>|/[]#@
3. Select a type from the System Type drop-down menu.
Note: For information on the Custom Applications and Monitoring/
Supervisory Control Only options, see the Creating Custom
Applications and Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only
Applications sections.
4. Select a type from the System Configuration drop-down menu, if options
appear.
5. Select Imperial or Metric from the System of Units drop-down menu.
Note: After setting the units and closing CCT, CCT remembers the last units’
setting. See Unit Preferences in the Setting and Using Preferences
section.
Note: In the Download Language drop-down menu, English (United States)
is currently the only option available.
6. Click OK. The CCT System Selection Wizard appears with the Mechanical
System Selection screen active. See the System Selection Tree section for
information on tree behavior and use (for example, using the check boxes,
radio buttons, and the + and - next to a node in the tree to show and hide
selections).
7. Select the mechanical options for your system and click Next. The CCT
System Selection Wizard appears with the Control Logic Selection screen
active.
8. Select the control logic options for your system and click Finish. The CCT
software applies the selections to your system and closes the wizard. The
system you selected appears in the Control View of CCT in Configuration
mode.

164 CCT Help: Configuration

Opening an Existing Controller Application File
For information on the types of systems and applications, see the User Interface
and Applications sections.
To open an existing system from a saved Controller Application File (.caf):
1. From the File menu, select Open. The Open dialog box appears.
2. Browse to the location of the saved Controller Application File and select the
file to open.
Note: The default location of a Controller Application File (.caf) is
C:\Documents and Settings\username.
3. Click Open. The Controller Application File appears in the Control View of
CCT in Configuration mode.
Note: If the selected Controller Application File requires an upgrade, the
System Upgrade dialog box appears. For details on upgrading the file,
see the Upgrading System Files section.

Entering or Viewing Job Information

To enter or view job information associated with the open Controller Application
File (.caf):
1. From the Tools menu, select Job Information. The Job Information dialog box
appears.
2. Enter or view the data in the Operator Name, Job Name, Contract Number, and
History text boxes as described in the Job Information screen section.
3. Click OK.

Renaming a System
To rename a system:
1. With a system open, select System Rename from the Tools menu. The System
Rename Dialog box appears.
2. In the System Name text box, type the desired name. Illegal characters include:
:*?"<>|/[]#@
3. Click OK.
Note: This option does not change the name of the Controller Application File
(.caf).

Configuring a System 165

Viewing and Modifying System Selections
IMPORTANT: If you have already selected a system or opened a Controller
Application File (.caf) in CCT, you can view and change the selections made.
Any customization changes made are lost if you make changes to the System
Selections. For information on the types of systems and selections available, see
the User Interface and Applications sections.

Before modifying System Selections, print a copy of the current System Selections
using the System Selection Summary option in the Summary Report Options
dialog box. See Printing Summary Reports in the User Interface section.
To view and modify System Selections:
1. Select a system, open an existing Controller Application File, or upload a
Controller Application File from a device. See the Selecting a System
(Creating a New System), Opening an Existing Controller Application File, or
the Loading Devices sections for details.
2. Click the Select System button in the CCT user interface. The CCT System
Selection Wizard appears with the Mechanical System Selection screen active.
Note: Adding Inputs and Outputs used for monitoring only purposes should
not be done by modifying the System Selection if custom logic or
changes were made after the initial System Selection process. For
information on manually adding modules, see the Creating Custom
Logic (Adding Modules) section.
3. View the mechanical options for your system and make any changes.
Note: You can only make changes to System Selection in Configuration
mode. See the System Selection Tree section for information on tree
behavior and use (for example, using the check boxes, radio buttons,
and the + and - next to a node in the tree to show and hide selections).
4. Click Next. The CCT System Selection Wizard appears with the Control Logic
Selection screen active.
5. View the control logic options for your system and make any changes
(Configuration mode only).
6. If you did not make any changes (or do not wish to apply any of the changes
you made), click Cancel to close the wizard. Clicking Cancel prevents the
selections from being laid down over your previously selected system and
overwriting any customization changes made. Stop here.
Any customization changes made are lost when your selections are laid
down. If you made changes, click Finish. A Rebuild Application Warning
dialog box appears. Click Yes to continue. The CCT software rebuilds your
system and closes the wizard. The system you selected appears in the Control
View of CCT in Configuration mode.

166 CCT Help: Configuration

 System Selection Logic Upgrade and Modification Rules
If you run System Selection after upgrading a Controller Application File, the
original logic created by System Selection in the previous version of CCT is
completely replaced with the logic that would result if you make the same
selections for a new system with the newer version of CCT. See the Upgrading
System Files section.
The following rules apply any time you modify the System Selections:
• Changes you make to the logic created from the original System Selection
process are lost.
• Inputs and Outputs are created based on Signal and Naming preferences
from the active instance of CCT (that is, only current preferences apply and
preferences used to create the original .caf file have no effect).
• If you added modules to the system manually or if you used the Sideloop
selection tree after running System Selection for the first time, CCT does
not delete those modules. However, the Output Controllers for the
sideloops are deleted from the State Table and must be manually added and
connected again. To add the Output Controllers back to the State Table, see
Adding a Column to the State Selection Tables. To connect the outputs of
the State Table to the Output Controllers, see Making a Connection.
• All values in the State Tables created by the System Selection process
return to their default values, thus matching a system created with the File
> New option.
• All custom logic modules added by a user within the original .caf file
remain untouched.
• Connections between custom logic and the original System Selection logic
are lost as well any values in the State Tables created by the System
Selection process.
• The hardware definitions from the original .caf file are preserved,
including:
- the base controller, IOMs, Network Devices, and parameters for each
device (for example, the Device Address and BACnet ID).
- the point assignments for manually added inputs and outputs.
You may need to reassign System Selection created points to the desired
slots.

Configuring a System 167

Viewing and Modifying Details
The Details dialog box has no tabs for the Network Inputs, Setpoint/Miscellaneous
modules, State Generation modules, Output Control modules, and Network
Outputs. For only Inputs and Outputs, the Details dialog box has two tabs: Details
tab and Hardware View tab. See the Details Dialog Box concept and Details
Dialog Box screen topics in the User Interface section for more information.
To view and modify Details from the Control View, right-click a module to view
and select View Details, or from the Logic View, right-click the block to view and
select View > Details. You also can double-click a module from the Control View
to open the Details dialog box. The Details dialog box appears with the module/
block’s data. See Details and Hardware View.
Note: If you change the enumeration set for an Input or Output associated with a
binary object, the enumeration set for the binary object is also updated if
the set exists in the Two State enumeration set list, otherwise the binary
object’s enumeration set defaults to the Inactive/Active set. When this
happens, the binary object’s States Text attribute is set to the Inactive/
Active enumeration set instead of the set you selected.
Note: When you change the units for analog values, the function of the value
does not change. For all modules, the value passes, but the units do not. For
example, if you change timers from seconds to minutes or hours, the
function of the number does not change.

Details
For information on the attribute/parameter, input, and output data of the selected
module, see the Modules section.
To view and modify the Details:
1. Click the Details tab (if applicable and if it is not already active). A table of
attributes/parameters appears in the left pane of the view, and tables of inputs
and outputs appear in the right pane of the view.
Note: The splitter bar between the panes has left and right arrows allowing
you to achieve the desired view. Click the arrows to show/hide the
panes. If you click the splitter bar and drag it to the desired location,
clicking the left/right arrows returns the view to the location you moved
the splitter bar. Clicking the left/right arrows a second time shows/
hides the entire pane.
2. Click Edit.
3. Make changes to the attribute/parameter, input, and output data using the text
boxes and drop-down menus and click Apply.
4. Click Close.
Note: If you modify a custom module to expose ports for BACnet systems, close
and reopen the Controller Application File (.caf) to view the input/output
ports in the Parameters table.

168 CCT Help: Configuration

Hardware View
The Hardware View tab only applies to Inputs and Outputs. For information on the
hardware attributes/parameters, input, and output data of a selected module/block,
see the Modules, Logic, and CCT Input and Output Object Overview sections.
To view and modify the Hardware View:
1. Click the Hardware View tab. A table of hardware attributes/parameters
appears.
2. Click the Advanced radio button, if it is not already selected, to see more
hardware attributes/parameters.
3. Click Edit.
4. Make changes to the hardware attributes/parameters using the text boxes and
drop-down menus and click Apply.
5. Click Close.

Viewing Controller Information

You can view controller information for one or more controllers on the field bus in
the Configuration mode. You must open a Controller Application File (.caf) before
viewing controller information.
To view controller information:
1. From the Tools menu, select Controller Information. The Controller
Information Wizard appears.
2. Follow the wizard steps.
Note: The Controller Information Wizard contains the same information as
the Commissioning Device Wizard, with the addition of the Copy To
Clipboard option.
For information on viewing information of a controller while it is being
commissioned (Commissioning mode only), see the Commissioning a System
section.

Configuring a System 169

Control View Steps
System selection makes all the necessary module and associated configurations
and connections required for your system. You do not need to change
configurations or connections if you are not modifying logic after selecting the
system.
For information on creating Custom Applications and Monitoring/Supervisory
Control Only applications, see Creating Custom Applications and Creating
Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications.

Viewing and Modifying Connections

System selection makes all the necessary connections required for your system.
You do not need to review connections if you are not modifying logic after
selecting the system.
To view and modify connections:
1. Right-click the module to view and select View Connections. The module’s
connection data appears in the Connections tab. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section.
Note: You can select multiple modules (within a module category) to view
connections on the selected modules at once. Holding down the Ctrl
key while selecting the modules, then right-click and select View
Connections. A table appears in the Connections area for each module
selected.
To return to the default, showing all module connections, right-click
within the overall table header and select Show All.
2. See Exposing Ports for Connection, Making a Connection, Changing a
Connection, and Breaking a Connection.

Exposing Ports for Connection

By default, all ports are exposed for connection. You cannot remove the selection
for connected ports because the ports are disabled in the Port Exposure dialog box.
To expose (or hide) ports for connection in the Connections table:
1. Right-click an input or output header and select Expose Ports. The Port
Exposure dialog box appears. See the Port Exposure (For Connection) screens
section. All available modules for connection become visible.
Note: Some items in the lists may appear disabled because they are
automatically exposed for connection and cannot be changed, or if they
are already connected.
2. Select ports to expose (or remove the selection on ports to hide) from the Input
Port List and Output Port List sections of the dialog box, using the Select All
and/or Deselect All buttons as necessary, and click OK.

170 CCT Help: Configuration

 Making a Connection
To make a connection in the Connections table:
1. Right-click an input or output that has no connections and select Make
Connection. All modules that have exposed ports with compatible data type or
enumerations sets turn green.
Note: A module output can have more than one connection (fan-out). A
module input cannot have more than one connection (fan-in is not
allowed).
2. Click the desired module highlighted in green. The Port Selection dialog box
appears.
3. Select the input/output port in which to connect from the Port List and click
OK.

Changing a Connection
To change a connection in the Connections table:
1. Right-click an input or output that has an existing connection and select
Change Connection. All modules that have exposed ports with compatible
units or enumerations sets turn green.
Note: A module output can have more than one connection (fan-out). A
module input cannot have more than one connection (fan-in is not
allowed).
2. Click the desired module highlighted in green. The Port Selection dialog box
appears.
3. Select the input/output port in which to connect from the Port List and click
OK.

Breaking a Connection
To break a connection in the Connections table, right-click an input or output that
has an existing connection and select Break Connection.

Viewing and Modifying Parameters

To view and modify parameters:
1. Click the Parameters tab if not already active. See the Control View screen
description in the User Interface section.
2. Click Edit.
3. Make changes to the parameters/attributes using the text boxes and drop-down
menus and click Apply.
Note: You cannot modify outputs of modules from the Parameters table.
Note: You cannot save or switch modes while editing in the Parameters tab. Click
Apply or Cancel before proceeding.

Configuring a System 171

Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables
System Selection makes all the necessary state configurations required for your
system. You do not need to review state configurations if you are not modifying
logic after selecting the system.
To view and modify State Selection tables:
1. Right-click the State Generation or State Selection header in the Control View
and select View State Tables. The State Selection dialog box appears with the
system’s state selection data populated within tables. See the State Selection
(State Tables) screen section.
Note: The individual tables in the State Tables are the State Generators and
the column headings are the Output Controllers. See State Selection,
State Tables, and Control View Application Example in the User
Interface section.
Note: For each State Generator state, there is a corresponding Output
Controller state. The States column lists the states from highest priority
to lowest priority in descending order from top to bottom. An asterisk
(*) or an X appearing instead of a valid Output Controller state
indicates that the current State Generator has no interaction with the
Output Controller, and the Output Controller is controlled by the next
highest priority State Generator showing a valid Output Controller
state. An X also indicates that the field should not be modified unless
certain control specifications are required.
2. To change the Output Controller state for a given State Generator state, click
the cell and select the Output Controller state from the drop-down menu.
3. To change the hierarchy of the State Generators (reordering tables), click the
up or down arrow in the upper right-hand corner of the corresponding State
Selection Table until the tables appear in the desired order.
Note: After making a change, the border around the State Selection Table
appears green if the changes are OK. The border appears red when
there are problems with the changes made.
Note: After reordering the tables, the order that the corresponding modules
appear in the Control View remains the same until the next time you
load the Control View screen (for example, by switching modes or
views).
4. Click OK.
Note: At least one of the rows in a state table for an input must have all of its
options defined to prevent an Output Controller from having an unreliable
mode input.
See the Customizing State Selection Tables section for making changes for custom
applications.

172 CCT Help: Configuration

Viewing and Modifying a Module’s Logic
To view and modify a module’s logic, right-click a module that contains logic that
can be viewed and/or modified (appears tan in the Control View) and select View
Logic. The Logic View appears and displays the logic diagram for that module.
See the Logic View Steps section for details on how to modify logic.

Changing an Input or Output Signal

Note: You can designate default input and output signals before creating systems
from the Signal column in the Naming and Signal Preferences screen. See
the Setting and Using Preferences section for details.
To change an input or output signal:
1. Right-click the input or output module and select Setup. The Setup dialog box
appears. See the Setup (Input or Output) screen section.
2. Select a signal from the drop-down menu and click OK.
Wireless Ethernet Network Tips:
Tip: For Inputs such as Temperature, Setpoint, Warm/Cool Adjust, and Temp
Occ, select the Wireless Ethernet signal.
Tip: Make sure you remove any unused Network Sensor (Network Duct
Sensor or Network Zone Sensor) Inputs or Outputs from the system.

Adding a Module
System Selection adds all the necessary modules required for your system. You do
not need to add modules if you are not modifying logic after selecting the system.
See one of the following sections to add modules:
• Adding a Network Input
• Adding an Input
• Adding a Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module
• Adding a State Generation Module
• Adding an Output Control Module
• Adding a Network Output
• Adding an Output

Configuring a System 173

Renaming a Module
To rename a module:
1. Right-click the module to rename and select Rename. The Rename dialog box
appears. See the Rename (Module/Block) screen section.
2. Type a name for the module in the User Name text box.
3. Click OK.
To rename an Input or Output:
1. Right-click an Input or Output and select View Details, or double-click the
module. The Details dialog box appears.
2. On the Details tab, click Edit.
3. Modify the Name attribute/parameter as desired.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click Close.

Deleting a Module
To delete a module:
1. Right-click the module to delete and select Delete, or select multiple modules
by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting the modules, then right-click and
select Delete. The Confirm dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you
want to delete the module(s). See the Confirm (Delete) screen section.
2. Click Yes.

174 CCT Help: Configuration

Navigating between Control View and Logic View
Only the modules that contain logic that can be viewed and/or modified appear in
the Quick Navigation menu. The modules appear in alphabetical order. If a module
has a child, the child does not appear in the menu until after the parent is viewed
once.
For information on viewing and printing the logic of the entire application, see the
Viewing/Printing Application Logic section.
To navigate between the Control View and a module’s Logic View (using the
Quick Navigation menu in the upper left-hand side of the workspace; see Quick
Navigation Menu in the User Interface section):
In Control View:
From the Quick Navigation drop-down menu, select a module to view. The
Logic View of the selected module appears.
In Logic View:
From the Quick Navigation drop-down menu, select the system name (appears
first in the list below the displayed item). The Control View of the system
appears.
Or, select another module to view from the menu. The Logic View of the
selected module appears.

Viewing/Printing Application Logic

You can view and print application logic only in Configuration mode. See the
Application Logic View section. Also see Quick Navigation Menu in the User
Interface section.
To view/print application logic:
1. From the Quick Navigation drop-down menu, select View Application Logic
(appears second in the list below the system name). The logic of the entire
application appears in the Logic View.
2. Use the Logic View’s select, pan, and zoom options to view the application
logic. See the Panning and Zooming sections for details.
3. Use the Logic View’s Print Preview and Print options to print the logic of the
entire application. See the Printing the Logic Diagram section for details.

Configuring a System 175

Logic View Steps
See the User Interface section for information on the Logic View and descriptions
of its content, including the meanings of the color indicators used in this view. See
the Logic section for information on the logic blocks.
System Selection makes all the necessary logic configurations required for your
application. You do not need to change configurations if you are not modifying
logic after selecting the system.
For information on creating Custom Applications and Monitoring/Supervisory
Control Only applications, see Creating Custom Applications and Creating
Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications.

Selecting a Block from the Control Block Palette

To select a block from the Control Block palette:
1. Browse through the folders in the palette to locate the block. See the Logic
View screen description in the User Interface section.
Note: Or, use the Block Finder to locate a block. See the Searching for a
Block Using the Block Finder section.
2. Drag and drop the block from the palette to the logic diagram in the right panel.

Searching for a Block Using the Block Finder

To search for a block using the Block Finder:
1. Drag and drop the Block Finder from the control block palette to the logic
diagram in the right panel. The Block Selection dialog box appears. See the
Block Selection (Block Finder) screen section.
2. Type the name of the block to locate in the Search For text box. The search
displays and filters results for each letter you type. For example, to find the
PID block you would begin by typing the letter P, which brings up all blocks
starting with the letter P. Then you would type the letter I, and only blocks
starting with PI appear in the list. Then typing the letter D narrows the results
to blocks beginning with PID.
3. Select a block from the list and click OK. The selected block appears in the
logic diagram in the right panel.

176 CCT Help: Configuration

Renaming a Block
We typically do not recommend renaming logic blocks because their names
identify their function. You may wish to rename a Container logic block (Activity
or Hybrid Activity) to identify the logic it contains.
To rename a block in the Logic View:
1. Right-click the block to rename and select Rename. The Rename dialog box
appears. See the Rename (Module/Block) screen section.
2. Type a name for the block in the User Name text box.
3. Click OK.

Deleting a Block
To delete a block in the Logic View:
1. Right-click the block to delete and select Delete, or select multiple blocks by
holding down the Ctrl key while selecting the blocks, then right-click and
select Delete. The Confirm dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you
want to delete the block(s). See the Confirm (Delete) screen section.
2. Click Yes.

Configuring a System 177

Exposing Ports
You can expose ports to make them available for connection. If you expose ports
for BACnet systems, the BACnet exposed ports are viewable objects through the
NAE. You cannot remove the selection for connected ports because the ports are
disabled in the Port Exposure dialog box.
To expose ports for connection in the Logic View:
1. Right-click a block and select Expose Ports > For Connection. The Port
Exposure dialog box appears. See the Port Exposure (For Connection) screen
section.
Note: This menu option is not available for blocks that do not have additional
ports to expose, such as Activity Inputs, Activity Outputs, and MUX
blocks.
2. Select input/output ports to expose or hide from the Input Port List and Output
Port List sections of the dialog box, using the Select All and/or Deselect All
buttons as necessary, and click OK.
To expose ports for BACnet systems in the Logic View:
1. Right-click a block and select Expose Ports > For BACnet. The Port Exposure
dialog box appears. See the Port Exposure (For BACnet System) screen
section.
2. Select input/output ports to expose or hide from the table of available ports by
checking the check box in the Expose column of the desired rows, and click
OK.
Note: After exposing ports for BACnet systems in Custom Logic, close and
reopen the Controller Application File (.caf) to view the ports in the
Parameters table.
Note: For blocks that do not have any available ports to expose (such as
Activity Inputs and Activity Outputs), you can expose ports by setting
the BACnet Exposed attribute to True in the Details dialog box.

178 CCT Help: Configuration

Connecting Blocks
To connect blocks in the Logic View (See the Logic View screen description in the
User Interface section.):
1. Place the cursor over the starting connection point or right side of an Activity
Input block [appears yellow]) until it changes shape from an arrow to a magic
wand and click on the starting connection point. The cursor changes to a +
sign. Compatible inputs/outputs of all blocks change color from orange to
green indicating where you can connect.
Note: If do not wish to complete the connection, press the Escape (Esc) key
or click within the empty space in the logic diagram to remove the
starting connection point.
2. Drag the cursor (+ sign) to the desired destination connection point and when
the cursor changes to the magic wand, click the point. The connection line
appears in the logic diagram and the connected input point appears yellow.
Note: A tooltip appears when you place your cursor over an invalid
connection point. An invalid connection is when the data type of the
source and destination do not match (for example, a Boolean source
and a Float destination).
Figure 6-11: Connecting a Block Process

Configuring a System 179

Adding a Port

IMPORTANT: Not all logic blocks support the New Port feature. The Logic
section indicates the blocks that support this feature. You can add up to 99 input
connections for blocks that support the New Port feature.

Although the New Port feature may appear for some logic blocks, only use this
feature for the blocks that indicate New Port support as documented in the
Logic section. Using the New Port feature to add ports to blocks that do not
support the feature may break your logic.

To add a port using the New Port feature:

1. When making a connection as described in the Connecting Blocks section,
place the + sign cursor over the lower left-hand corner of a block (for example,
the Add Math block) until New Port appears and the cursor changes to the
magic wand cursor.
2. Click New Port. An additional input appears on the block.
Note: Once you add a port, you cannot remove it. If you want to remove a port,
you must delete the block and then add it with the desired number of ports.
Figure 6-12: Adding a Port (New Port)

180 CCT Help: Configuration

Showing and Hiding Connection Lines
See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.
To hide a connection line, right-click a connection line and select Hide. The
connection line becomes a hidden edge label (numbered circle next to an Activity
Input, Activity Output, block input, or block output: , , or ).
To show a connection line, right-click a hidden edge label and select Unhide. The
hidden edge label becomes a connection line.

Deleting a Connection
See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.
To delete a connection line:
1. Right-click the connection line or hidden edge label (numbered circle next to
an Activity Input, Activity Output, block input, or block output: , , or
) and select Delete. The Confirm dialog box appears asking you to confirm
the deletion. See the Confirm (Delete) screen section.
2. Click Yes.
Note: When a hidden edge label indicates multiple connections (for example,
1:5), only the connected added last is deleted. If you need to delete a
specific connection, unhide the connection lines and remove the
appropriate connection.

Changing the Hidden Edge Label of a Connection

See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.
To change the hidden edge label of a connection:
1. Double-click the connection’s hidden edge label (numbered circle next to an
Activity Input, Activity Output, block input, or block output: , , or ).
The Hidden Edge Label dialog box appears.
2. Type a name or number for the label and click OK. The label text changes as
defined.

Configuring a System 181

Configuring a Hybrid Activity
A Hybrid Activity block contains state-based logic. You can define different logic
for each state in the chosen enumeration set. See the Logic View screen
description in the User Interface section. For information on the Hybrid Activity
container block, see Container in the Logic section.
To configure a Hybrid Activity:
1. In Logic View, drag and drop the Hybrid Activity Container block from the
Control Block palette to the logic diagram.
2. Select the enumeration set to use for the block:
a. Right-click the Hybrid Activity and select View > Details. The Details
dialog box appears.
b. Click Edit.
c. Select the desired enumeration set to use for the States Text attribute/
parameter.
d. Click Apply.
e. Click Close.
Note: You may need to view another block and view the Hybrid Activity
block to refresh the enumeration set visible in the Logic View.
3. Double-click the Hybrid Activity block or right-click the block and select
View Logic to access the Hybrid Activity’s Logic View.
Note: By default, the Hybrid Activity’s State Table’s State is selected (blue
background).
4. With the State header selected, create logic that determines how the states
change in this view.
5. Double-click on a state (The logic you created for the State header is hidden.)
and create logic for this particular state.
6. Repeat Step 5 for all states.
The following figures show the Hybrid Activity logic of the Proportional Box
Heating Control module. The State block is the HTG-OUTSTATE. This example
shows details for only two of the module’s seven states. See Heating Proportional
Valve in the Output Controller section for more information on the Proportional
Box Heating Control module.

182 CCT Help: Configuration

 Figure 6-13: Proportional Box Heating Control - State Logic

Figure 6-14: Proportional Box Heating Control - Enum Off Logic

Configuring a System 183

 Figure 6-15: Proportional Box Heating Control - Enum Control Logic

184 CCT Help: Configuration

Configuring the Command Hierarchy Block
For information on the Command Hierarchy block, see the Selection section in the
Logic.
To configure the Command Hierarchy block:
1. Double-click a Command Hierarchy block. The Command Hierarchy (Enum
Output) or Command Hierarchy (Boolean Output) dialog box appears. See the
Command Hierarchy (Enum Output or Boolean Output) screen section.
2. Review the column types and add, remove, and rename columns, and change
enumeration sets as necessary for your logic using the right-click menus
accessible from the column headers.
Note: By default, I1 is an Enum input (Off, On), and I2 is a Boolean input
(False, True).
3. In the input columns, use the drop-down menus for each cell to select a value
to assign when in the State listed in the State column for that row.
Note: Gray table rows with asterisks indicate that when the block is in a
particular state, no behavior change occurs, and the block checks for
the next state listed.
Note: A complete configuration is when all possible combinations of inputs
and values are represented in the rows (for example, the I1 column has
an Off row and an On row in Figure 6-17).
Note: An incomplete configuration is when the input and value combinations
listed in the rows do not cover all of the possible combinations. The
output of the command hierarchy holds the last value and the output is
flagged as Output cannot be determined. Use an incomplete
configuration to hold the last value if an unlisted or undesirable
condition occurs. The condition does not match any of the rows in the
table (that is, none of the rows are true) and the output remains at the
last value. When the configuration is incomplete, a dialog box appears
stating: “This Command Hierarchy table is Underspecified (missing
some possible combinations).”
Note: A yellow border surrounding the table cells indicates that the
combination of inputs and values configured is redundant. A
redundant configuration means that there are multiple rows that cover
the same combination of inputs and values. The command hierarchy
selects the row that has higher priority (appears higher) in the table to
generate the output. In the first and third rows in Figure 6-16, for
example, when the Mode is Off and the Maintenance Switch is Disable,
both rows are True. Since the first row is of greater priority, the State
output is set to False. Additionally, to create an Else condition, add a
row of asterisks as the last row in the table with a True state. When
using redundant rows, lower priority rows may not be active, which
could indicate unused rows or an improperly configured command
hierarchy block.

Configuring a System 185

 Figure 6-16: Command Hierarchy Redundancy Example

Tip: To change the label of a column, right-click the column header and select
Change Column Label. The Port Name Dialog appears. Type a name in
the Port label text box and click OK. We recommend leaving this text box
empty so that dynamic naming may be used.
Tip: To add an enumeration input column, right-click the column header and
select Add Enum Column. After adding an enumeration input column,
make sure you select the appropriate enumeration set to use. The default
set is Off/On.
Tip: To add a boolean input column, right-click the column header and select
Add Boolean Column.
Tip: To remove a column, right-click the column header and select Remove
Column. When removing a column that you wish to replace with another,
make sure you remove the existing column first, then add the new
column. For example, to replace the I1 column that has an Off/On
enumeration input with a boolean input column, first remove the existing
I1 column, then add a boolean input column and rename the column to I1.
Tip: To change the enumeration set of a column (including the State column),
right-click the column header and select Change Column Enum Set. The
Enum Set Change Dialog appears. Select the Enum Set and click OK.
Tip: To add a row, right-click a cell and select Insert Row.
Tip: To add 5 rows, right-click a cell and select Insert 5 Rows.
Tip: To add 10 rows, right-click a cell and select Insert 10 Rows.
Tip: To remove a row, right-click a cell and select Delete Row.
Tip: To copy a row, right-click a cell and select Copy Row. The copied row
appears at the end of the table.
Tip: To move a row, right-click a cell and select Move Row Up or Move Row
Down. Or, select a row and use the up or down arrows to the right of the
table.

186 CCT Help: Configuration

 Tip: To indicate a state to use when the input is NOT a specific value (for
enumeration input columns only), right-click a cell and select ! Value. For
example, when you want an event to occur during any other state than the
Satisfied state and you use ! Value, the state is indicated as ! Satisfied. To
remove the NOT indication and use a regular value, right-click the cell
and select Value.
4. Click OK to apply the changes.
For example, the following figure indicates:
• Row 1: When Input 1 (I1) is Off and Input 2 (I2) is False, the Output State is
False.
• Row 2: When Input 1 (I1) is On, the Output State is True regardless of Input 2
(I2).
Figure 6-17: Command Hierarchy (Boolean Output) Example

Configuring a System 187

Configuring the Line Segment Block
For information on the Line Segment block, see the Calculation section in the
Logic.
To configure the Line Segment block:
1. Double-click a Line Segment block. The Line Segment dialog box appears.
2. In the Input Points and Output Points columns, select a cell and type the
desired values.
Tip: To add a row, right-click a cell and select Insert Row.
Tip: To add 5 rows, right-click a cell and select Insert 5 Rows.
Tip: To remove a row, right-click a cell and select Delete Row.
3. Click OK to apply the changes.

Configuring the MUX Block

For information on the MUX blocks, see the Selection section in the Logic.
To configure the MUX block:
1. Double-click a MUX block. The MUX dialog box appears.
2. Select the number of inputs to use from the Inputs drop-down list.
3. For MUX blocks with Enum Mode, select the enumeration set to use from the
Enum Set drop-down list.
Note: This field is used for MUX blocks with Enum Mode only and is
disabled for Boolean Mode. If you change the Enum Set, the Input X -
Mode(s) fields are cleared and need to be configured.
4. Click an Input X - Mode(s) button. The Mode Selection dialog box appears.
5. Select the value to use for the mode and click OK.
6. Click OK.

188 CCT Help: Configuration

Configuring the Translation Blocks
For information on the Enum to Boolean Translation and Boolean to Enum
Translation blocks, see the Selection section in the Logic.
To configure the Translation block:
1. Double-click a Translation block. The Enum to Boolean Translation or
Boolean to Enum Translation dialog box appears. See the Translation (Enum
to Boolean or Boolean to Enum) screen section.
2. In the input columns, use the drop-down menus for each cell to select a value
to assign when in the State listed in the State column for that row.
Note: Gray table rows with asterisks indicate that when the block is in a
particular state, no behavior change occurs, and the block checks for
the next state listed.
Note: A complete configuration is when all possible combinations of inputs
and values are represented in the rows (for example, the I1 column has
an Off row and an On row).
Note: An incomplete configuration is when the input and value combinations
listed in the rows do not cover all of the possible combinations. The
output of the command hierarchy holds the last value and the output is
flagged as Output cannot be determined. Use an incomplete
configuration to hold the last value if an unlisted or undesirable
condition occurs. The condition does not match any of the rows in the
table (that is, none of the rows are true) and the output remains at the
last value. When the configuration is incomplete, a dialog box appears
stating: “This Translation table is Underspecified (missing some
possible combinations).”
Note: A yellow border surrounding the table cells indicates that the
combination of inputs and values configured is redundant. A
redundant configuration means that there are multiple rows that cover
the same combination of inputs and values. The command hierarchy
selects the row that has higher priority (appears higher) in the table to
generate the output. Additionally, to create an Else condition, add a
row of asterisks as the last row in the table with a True state. When
using redundant rows, lower priority rows may not be active, which
could indicate unused rows or an improperly configured block.
Tip: To change the label of a column, right-click the column header and select
Change Column Label. The Port Name Dialog appears. Type a name in
the Port label text box and click OK. We recommend leaving this text box
empty so that dynamic naming may be used.
Tip: To add an enumeration input column, right-click the column header and
select Add Enum Column. After adding an enumeration input column,
make sure you select the appropriate enumeration set to use. The default
set is Off/On.

Configuring a System 189

 Tip: To add a boolean input column, right-click the column header and select
Add Boolean Column.
Tip: To remove a column, right-click the column header and select Remove
Column. When removing a column that you wish to replace with another,
make sure you remove the existing column first, then add the new
column. For example, to replace the I1 column that has an Off/On
enumeration input with a boolean input column, first remove the existing
I1 column, then add a boolean input column and rename the column to I1.
Tip: To change the enumeration set of a column, right-click the column header
and select Change Column Enum Set. The Enum Set Change Dialog
appears. Select the Enum Set and click OK.
Tip: To add a row, right-click a cell and select Insert Row.
Tip: To add 5 rows, right-click a cell and select Insert 5 Rows.
Tip: To add 10 rows, right-click a cell and select Insert 10 Rows.
Tip: To remove a row, right-click a cell and select Delete Row.
Tip: To copy a row, right-click a cell and select Copy Row. The copied row
appears at the end of the table.
Tip: To move a row, right-click a cell and select Move Row Up or Move Row
Down. Or, select a row and use the up or down arrows to the right of the
table.
Tip: To indicate a state to use when the input is NOT a specific value (for
enumeration input columns only), right-click a cell and select ! Value. For
example, when you want an event to occur during any other state than the
Satisfied state and you use ! Value, the state is indicated as ! Satisfied. To
remove the NOT indication and use a regular value, right-click the cell
and select Value.
3. Click OK to apply the changes.

Setting the Default Element of a Module

To set the Default Element of a module:
1. Click the Set Default Element button in the Logic View toolbar or select Set
Default Element from the right-click menu in the logic diagram. The Default
Element Selection dialog box appears.
Note: When creating custom logic in an Activity or Hybrid Activity, you
must toggle between the Control View and Logic View to populate the
element list.
2. Select the radio button of the desired element and click OK. The default
element appears black in the logic diagram.

190 CCT Help: Configuration

Exporting a Module
To export a module, click the Export Module button from the Logic View toolbar,
or right-click within the white space of the Logic diagram and select Export
Module. The module currently displayed in the logic diagram and its children are
added to the Custom folder in the palette.
The exported module is saved in a file in the C:\Program
Files\Johnson Controls\CCT\Custom Control Modules directory on your computer
using the current name of the module with a .caf.module file extension.
You can share this file with other users. Place a copy of the file in the C:\Program
Files\Johnson Controls\CCT\Custom Control Modules directory on a different
computer and the module appears in the Custom folder in the palette the next time
CCT is started on that computer.
You can import or use the module by adding the module the same way you add
other modules. See the Adding a Module and Selecting a Block from the Control
Block Palette sections.

Panning
See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.
To pan in the logic diagram:
1. Click the Pan (hand) button in the Logic View toolbar.
2. Click and hold the cursor down while moving the mouse.
3. Release the hold when you reach the desired location.

Configuring a System 191

Zooming
See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.
To zoom the logic diagram:
Marquee:
1. Click the Marquee zoom button in the Logic View toolbar.
2. Place the cursor to the left and just above the location to zoom.
3. Click and drag the cursor over the desired area.
4. Release the hold when you reach the desired view.
Interactive:
1. Click the Interactive zoom button in the Logic View toolbar.
2. Click and drag the cursor over the desired area to zoom in and out. Drag down
to zoom in and drag up to zoom out.
3. Release the hold when you reach the desired view.
Fit to Window:
Click the Fit to Window button in the Logic View toolbar. The logic diagram
resizes to fit all blocks within the right panel.
Selective Zoom (Drop-Down Menu):
Select the desired zoom level option from the Selective zoom’s drop-down menu
in the Logic View toolbar.
Selective Zoom (Custom Zoom Level):
Type the desired zoom level in the Selective zoom’s text box in the Logic View
toolbar and press Enter.

192 CCT Help: Configuration

Printing the Logic Diagram
See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.
For information on printing summary reports, see Printing Summary Reports in the
User Interface section.
To print the logic diagram:
Print Preview
Click the Print Preview button in the Logic View toolbar. The Print Preview screen
appears with the following options:
• Print
• Print Setup
Note: The Print Setup dialog box contains a Page Setup button that allows
you to change the orientation of the page from Portrait to Landscape
and vice versa.
• Zoom In
• Zoom Out
• Selective Zoom Menu
• Fit In Window
• Close
Print
Click the Print button in the Logic View toolbar. The Print dialog box appears.
Select the desired print settings/properties and click Print/OK.

Configuring a System 193

Creating Custom Applications
You can create custom applications by modifying an existing Controller
Application File (.caf), making changes to a selected system, or by using the File >
New: Custom Applications option to start from scratch. For details on specific
applications, modules, and logic, see the Applications, Modules, and Logic
sections.
For information on creating a Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only application,
see the Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications section.
To create custom applications, perform the steps that apply:
1. Begin creating a custom application according to the steps in Using File >
New: Custom Applications or Modifying an Existing Controller Application
File or Selected System.
2. Create custom logic by adding the desired modules and modifying them as
necessary. See Creating Custom Logic (Adding Modules) and the Control View
Steps.
3. Create logic for the modules in the Logic View as necessary. See the Logic
View Steps.
4. Expose and make connections between the modules according to the
instructions in the Viewing and Modifying Connections section.
5. Add the State Generation modules as tables in the State Tables and add the
Output Control modules as columns in the State Tables as necessary. See the
Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables and Customizing State Selection
Tables sections.
6. In the Control View, make connections between the State Selection Table and
the State Generators and Output Controllers as necessary. See Viewing and
Modifying Connections.

194 CCT Help: Configuration

 Modification Example
For example, you may want to add lighting control to a Mixed Air Single Duct Air
Handling Unit application where the lights turn on/off when the AHU turns on/off.
To add lighting control to a Mixed Air Single Duct Air Handling Unit application:
1. With your MASD application open, add the Output Control Lighting module
and the LIGHT-C Output module.
Figure 6-18: MASD Application with Lighting Modules

Configuring a System 195

 2. View Connections (A) for the Output Control Lighting module and connect its
Present Value (B) to the LIGHT-C Output module (C).
Figure 6-19: Viewing and Making Connections (Lighting/LIGHT-C)

196 CCT Help: Configuration

 Figure 6-20: Lighting/LIGHT-C Connection Complete

Configuring a System 197

 3. View State Tables and add a Lighting column.
Figure 6-21: Adding Lighting Column to the State Tables

4. In the Start Stop Sequencing DA-T table, set the Lighting to Off when the State
is Off and On when the State is On.
Figure 6-22: Start Stop Sequencing DA-T and Lighting State Table
Configuration

198 CCT Help: Configuration

 5. View Connections for State Selection and connect the Lighting output to the
Output Control Lighting module.
Figure 6-23: Viewing and Making Connections (State Selection/Lighting)

Configuring a System 199

 Figure 6-24: State Selection/Lighting Connection Complete

200 CCT Help: Configuration

Using File > New: Custom Applications
The Custom Applications option available from the File > New dialog box lays
down a blank Control View workspace where you can create specialized
applications.
To create a custom application using File > New: Custom Applications:
1. From the File menu, select New. The New System dialog box appears.
2. Type a name for the system in the System Name text box. Illegal characters
include:
:*?"<>|/[]#@
3. Select Custom Applications from the System Type drop-down menu.
4. Select a type from the System Configuration drop-down menu.
5. Select Imperial or Metric from the System of Units drop-down menu.
Note: After setting the units and closing the application, the application
remembers the last units setting. See Unit Preferences in the Setting
and Using Preferences section.
Note: In the Download Language drop-down menu, English (United States)
is currently the only option available.
6. Click OK. The blank Custom Application appears in the Control View of CCT
in Configuration mode.
7. Follow the remaining steps in the Creating Custom Applications section.

Modifying an Existing Controller Application File or Selected System

To create a custom application by modifying an existing Controller Application
File (.caf) or selected system:
1. Open an existing Controller Application File (.caf) or a select a system similar
to the one you wish to customize. See the Opening an Existing Controller
Application File and Selecting a System (Creating a New System) sections.
Note: The default location of a Controller Application File (.caf) is
C:\Documents and Settings\username.
2. Follow the remaining steps in the Creating Custom Applications section.

Configuring a System 201

Creating Custom Logic (Adding Modules)
See one of the following sections to add modules:
• Adding a Network Input
• Adding an Input
• Adding a Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module
• Adding a State Generation Module
• Adding an Output Control Module
• Adding a Network Output
• Adding an Output

Adding a Network Input

To add a Network Input:
1. Right-click the Network Input header in the Control View and select New. The
Network Input Selection dialog box appears. See the Module Selection (New)
screen section.
2. Select an input from the palette.
3. Type a name for the input in the User Name text box.
4. Click OK. The input appears in the Network Input section of the Control View.

202 CCT Help: Configuration

 Adding an Input
Note: You can designate default input signals before creating systems from the
Signal column in the Naming and Signal Preferences screen. See the
Setting and Using Preferences section for details.
To add an input:
1. Right-click the Inputs header in the Control View and select New. The Input
Selection dialog box appears. See the Input Selection (New) screen section.
2. Use the drop-down menus to filter the input data and click the column headers
to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
Note: You can filter on multiple columns. For example, you can filter on
Function first and Data Type second to see if there is an Application
type that meets your requirements. If not, you can select Unknown for
Application type and pick the Signal to use.
If your system requires a 0-10 VDC Humidity sensor, select Humidity
from the Function drop-down menu, select an Application type from
the Application drop-down menu, and select 0-10 VDC from the Signal
drop-down menu.
When choosing an input to which you wish to provide a control
strategy, use an appropriate input type from the list provided. Populated
inputs carry tuning attributes/parameters for use with PID Pre-
Processors and PID logic blocks.
Note: To perform custom filters, select Custom from the drop-down menu,
select the filtering operator, and enter/select the information to filter.
3. Select one or more inputs with the appropriate signal types from the list using
the check boxes in the Create column.
Note: Each SA Bus device must have a unique Application ID.
4. In the Count column, type the desired number of inputs to add and press the
Enter key.
5. Click OK. The input module or modules appear in the Inputs section of the
Control View.
Note: To rename the input module, use the View Details option and modify
the Name attribute/parameter.
Note: If you must change the signal, right-click the module and select Setup.
See Changing an Input or Output Signal.

Configuring a System 203

 Adding a Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module
To add a Setpoint/Miscellaneous module:
1. Right-click the Setpoint/Miscellaneous header in the Control View and select
New. The Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module Selection dialog box appears. See
the Module Selection (New) screen section.
2. Select a module from the palette.
Note: If you need to create your own non-state based custom logic, choose
Activity from the palette and be sure to provide a meaningful name for
the module to indicate the type of logic it will contain.
Note: Any custom modules of this type also appear in the palette.
3. Type a name for the module in the User Name text box.
4. Click OK. The module appears in the Setpoint/Miscellaneous section of the
Control View.

Adding a State Generation Module

To add a State Generation module:
1. Right-click the State Generation header in the Control View and select New.
The State Generation Module Selection dialog box appears. See the Module
Selection (New) screen section.
2. Select a module from the palette.
Note: If you need to create your own state based custom logic, choose Hybrid
Activity from the palette and be sure to provide a meaningful name for
the module to indicate the type of logic it will contain.
Note: Any custom modules of this type also appear in the palette.
3. Type a name for the module in the User Name text box.
4. Click OK. The module appears in the State Generation section of the Control
View.

204 CCT Help: Configuration

 Adding an Output Control Module
To add an Output Control module:
1. Right-click the Output Control header in the Control View and select New.
The Output Control Module Selection dialog box appears. See the Module
Selection (New) screen section.
2. Select a module from the palette.
Note: If you need to create your own state based custom logic, choose Hybrid
Activity from the palette and be sure to provide a meaningful name for
the module to indicate the type of logic it will contain.
Note: Any custom modules of this type also appear in the palette.
3. Type a name for the module in the User Name text box.
4. Click OK. The module appears in the Output Control section of the Control
View.

Adding a Network Output

To add a Network Output:
1. Right-click the Network Output header in the Control View and select New.
The Network Output Selection dialog box appears. See the Module Selection
(New) screen section.
2. Select an output from the palette.
3. Type a name for the output in the User Name text box.
4. Click OK. The output appears in the Network Output section of the Control
View.

Configuring a System 205

 Adding an Output
Note: You can designate default output signals before creating systems from the
Signal column in the Naming and Signal Preferences screen. See the
Setting and Using Preferences section for details.
To add an output:
1. Right-click the Outputs header in the Control View and select New. The
Output Selection dialog box appears. See the Output Selection (New) screen
section.
2. Use the drop-down menus to filter the output data and click the column headers
to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
Note: You can filter on multiple columns. For example, you can filter on
Function first and Data Type second to see if there is an Application
type that meets your requirements. If not, you can select Unknown for
Application type and pick the Signal to use.
Note: To perform custom filters, select Custom from the drop-down menu,
select the filtering operator, and enter/select the information to filter.
3. Select one or more outputs with the appropriate signal types from the list using
the check boxes in the Create column.
4. In the Count column, type the desired number of outputs to add and press the
Enter key.
5. Click OK. The output module or modules appear in the Outputs section of the
Control View.
Note: To rename the output module, use the View Details option and modify
the Name attribute.
Note: To change the signal, right-click the module and select Setup. See
Changing an Input or Output Signal.

206 CCT Help: Configuration

Customizing State Selection Tables
See the Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables section and State Selection
(State Tables) screen section for general details on working with the state selection
tables before changing a table label or adding a table or column to the State
Selection tables. Then, see the following procedures:
• Changing a State Table Label
• Adding a Table to the State Selection Tables
• Adding a Column to the State Selection Tables

Changing a State Table Label

To change a state table label:
1. Right-click the State Selection or State Generation header in the Control View
and select View State Tables. The State Selection dialog box appears with the
system’s state selection data populated within tables. See the State Selection
(State Tables) screen section.
2. Right-click the module name (table heading: yellow = connected or orange =
not connected) and select Change Table Label. The Port Name Dialog box
appears.
Note: You must right-click the module name (table heading: yellow =
connected or orange = not connected) towards the left of the center of
the screen to access the right-click menu.
3. Type a name in the Port Label text box.
Note: We recommend leaving this text box empty so that dynamic naming
may be used.
4. Click OK.

Changing a Column Label

To change a state table column label:
1. Right-click the State Selection or State Generation header in the Control View
and select View State Tables. The State Selection dialog box appears with the
system’s state selection data populated within tables. See the State Selection
(State Tables) screen section.
2. Right-click the turquoise column header and select Change Column Label. The
Port Name Dialog box appears.
3. Type a name in the Port Label text box.
Note: We recommend leaving this text box empty so that dynamic naming
may be used.
4. Click OK.

Configuring a System 207

 Adding a Table to the State Selection Tables
To add a table to the State Selection tables:
1. Right-click the State Selection or State Generation header in the Control View
and select View State Tables. The State Selection dialog box appears with the
system’s state selection data populated within tables. See the State Selection
(State Tables) screen section.
2. Right-click the module name (table heading: yellow = connected or orange =
not connected) and select Create State Selection Table. The Create State
Selection Table dialog box appears.
Note: You must right-click the module name (table heading: yellow =
connected or orange = not connected) towards the left of the center of
the screen to access the right-click menu.
3. Type a name in the Port Label text box.
Note: We recommend leaving this text box empty so that dynamic naming
may be used.
4. Select a priority for the table.
Note: Selecting 0 places the table at the top of the list, thus giving it the
highest priority in the list.
5. Select the type of data for the table (Enumeration or Boolean).
6. Click OK.

208 CCT Help: Configuration

 Adding a Column to the State Selection Tables
To add a column to a State Selection table:
1. Right-click the State Selection header in the Control View and select View
State Tables. The State Selection dialog box appears with the system’s state
selection data populated within tables. See the State Selection (State Tables)
screen section.
2. Right-click the module name (table heading: yellow = connected or orange =
not connected) and select Create State Selection Column. The Create State
Selection Column dialog box appears.
Note: You must right-click the module name (table heading: yellow =
connected or orange = not connected) towards the left of the center of
the screen to access the right-click menu.
3. Type a name in the Port Label text box.
Note: We recommend leaving this text box empty so that dynamic naming
may be used.
4. Select where you want the column to appear in the table using the Column
Index drop-down menu.
Note: Selecting 1 places the column in the left most column position.
5. Select the type of data for the column (Enumeration or Boolean).
6. Click OK.

Adding the Hybrid Activity to the State Tables

To add the Hybrid Activity to the State Tables:
1. Add a table to the State Tables according to the instructions in the Adding a
Table to the State Selection Tables section. Be sure to select the States Text
enumeration set.
2. In the Control View, right-click the Hybrid Activity and select View
Connections.
Note: If no items appear in the Connections table, expose ports for
connection. See Exposing Ports.
3. Connect the inputs and outputs as desired, including the State output.

Configuring a System 209

Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications
The Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only option available from the File > New
dialog box lays down a blank Control View workspace where you can create
specialized applications for monitoring purposes.
To create a Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only application:
1. From the File menu, select New. The New System dialog box appears.
2. Type a name for the system in the System Name text box. Illegal characters
include:
:*?"<>|/[]#@
3. Select Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only from the System Type drop-down
menu.
4. Select a type from the System Configuration drop-down menu.
5. Select Imperial or Metric from the System of Units drop-down menu.
Note: After setting the units and closing the application, the application
remembers the last units setting. See Unit Preferences in the Setting
and Using Preferences section.
Note: In the Download Language drop-down menu, English (United States)
is currently the only option available.
6. Click OK. The blank monitoring/supervisory control application appears in the
Control View of CCT in Configuration mode.
7. Add the desired input and output modules and modify them as necessary. See
Adding an Input, Adding an Output and the Control View Steps.

210 CCT Help: Configuration

Creating a Sideloop
For information on the specific Sideloop Output Control modules, see Sideloop in
the Output Controller section.
Note: To manually create a Sideloop by adding the desired sideloop modules to
the system, see the Adding an Output Control Module section. If you are
not using the System Selection Wizard to create the sideloop, skip to
Step 5.
To create a sideloop:
1. Click the Sideloop button. The CCT System Selection Wizard appears with the
Sideloop Selection screen active.
Note: The Previous and Next buttons are disabled.
2. Select the sideloop options for your system and click Finish. See the System
Selection Tree section for information on tree behavior and use (for example,
using the check boxes, radio buttons, and the + and - next to a node in the tree
to show and hide selections). For information on the selection options in the
Sideloop Selection screen, see the Sideloop Applications section. The Sideloop
dialog box prompts you to name the sideloop.
3. Type a name to identify the sideloop being created.
4. Click OK. The sideloop modules are added to the system with the name
entered in Step 3 as their prefix.
5. View and modify the sideloop modules’ details according to the steps in the
Viewing and Modifying Details section. Make sure you note the enumeration
set selected for the mode input of this module.
Note: Make sure the Process ID and Process Units attributes are set
according to the needs of your system. If the Process ID selected is
Airflow, Airflow Diff, or Other, you must set the Process Range as
necessary. See the PID Pre-Processor logic block description and the
Process ID Configuration Restrictions in the Control topic of the
Logic section for details.
6. If necessary, expose and make connections between the modules according to
the instructions in the Viewing and Modifying Connections section.
7. View the Sideloop module column in the State Tables and modify the states as
necessary. Keep in mind the enumeration set selected for the mode input of this
module in Step 5. See the Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables
section.
Note: If you did not use the System Selection Wizard to create the sideloop,
you must add the sideloop Output Control module as a column in the
State Tables and modify the states as necessary. See the Customizing
State Selection Tables section.

Configuring a System 211

 8. In the Control View, view and modify the connections between the State
Selection Table and the State Generators and Sideloop Output Controllers as
necessary. See the Viewing and Modifying Connections section.
Tip: You can run the Sideloop System Selection Wizard as many times as
desired.
Tip: Once a sideloop is created, you cannot re-run the sideloop selection
process on one of the sideloops.
Tip: If you re-run System Selection for the main application after sideloops
have been created, the sideloops are not deleted.

212 CCT Help: Configuration

Setting Up Peer-to-Peer Communication
For information on peer-to-peer communication and guidelines, see the Peer-to-
Peer Communication section.
To set up peer-to-peer communication:
1. Identify and record the Instance Number (BACnet ID) of the device to which
you want to communicate. You can locate this attribute on the Network
Settings screen of the Hardware Definition Wizard.
Note: You also can locate the Instance Number of devices using the
Metasys system UI. This method allows you to look up multiple device
instance numbers at once.
If the Johnson Controls Point Schedule was used to download the
controllers, check the instance number on the MSTP Field Device tab
of the project's Point Schedule.
2. Identify and record the Object Identifier of the object in which you want to
read/write a value. You can locate this attribute in the Advanced view of the
Details dialog box.
Note: The Object Identifier consists of the BACnet Class ID and the object’s
Instance Number separated by a colon. For example, an Object
Identifier of AV:10026 has a BACnet Class ID of AV and an Instance
Number of 10026.
3. View the details of the desired Network Input or Network Output.
4. Click Edit.
5. In the configuration table for the Peer Reference attribute, modify the
elements as follows:
a. Instance Number (BACnet ID): Enter the device’s Instance Number in
the text box as recorded in Step 1.
b. Object Identifier: Select the BACnet Class ID from the drop-down menu
and enter the object’s Instance Number in the text box as recorded in
Step 2.
The BACnet Class ID should typically be of the same Data Type as the
object for which the peer-to-peer attribute is being configured (for
example, an AV Network Input should reference another AV, an AI, or an
AO object). If multistate values are used in peer-to-peer references, the
Enumeration sets should be the same. If the sets do not match, you must
determine if the values in the sets are compatible.
6. Click Apply and then click Close.

Configuring a System 213

 Note: Check the Error Status attribute to diagnose communication problems.
This attribute displays the status of the last communication that occurred
with an input or output reference. Common errors include:
• Surrogate Object is Not Bound: The referenced device (Device ID)
has never responded because a device with the entered Device ID either
does not exist or is offline.
• Remote Device is Offline: The referenced device did respond at one
time but is no longer responding.
• Unknown Object: The referenced device exists and is online, but the
Object ID that was entered does not exist on that device.
• Type Mismatch: The referenced object exists but the data type of the
referenced attribute/property is invalid. This error generally does not
appear for inputs on Johnson Controls or third-party devices. For
outputs on third-party devices, the Object Type of the output needs to
match the type of output object making the peer reference.
• Unknown Property: This error generally does not appear if you leave
the Peer Reference Attribute field as Present Value. If you change
this setting, the Unknown Property error means the referenced object
exists but the referenced attribute does not exist.

Disabling Peer-to-Peer Communication

To disable peer-to-peer communication:
1. View the details of the Network Input or Network Output.
2. Click Advanced and then click Edit.
3. In the Peer Reference attribute’s configuration table, select the Peer to Peer
Disabled option from the Object Identifier drop-down menu.
4. Click Apply and then click Close.

214 CCT Help: Configuration

Screens
New System
See Selecting a System (Creating a New System).
Table 6-42: New System Dialog Box (Part 1 of 2)
Field Description
System Name Allows you to type a name for your new system.
Illegal characters include:
:*?"<>|/[]#@
System Type Allows you to select the type of system to create. Options include (see Applications):
• Air Handling Unit
• Fan Coil
• Unit Ventilators
• Heat Pumps
• VAV
• Central Heating
• Central Cooling
• Custom Applications (Creating Custom Applications)
• Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only (Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only
Applications)

Configuring a System 215

 Table 6-42: New System Dialog Box (Part 2 of 2)
Field Description
System Allows you to select a configuration type for your new system. Options include (see
Configuration Applications):
Air Handling Unit
• Mixed Air Single Duct
• 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct
• Mixed Air Dual Duct
• 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct
• Rooftop Unit
• Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Fan Coil
• Blank: This system type covers all configuration options.
Unit Ventilators
• Blank: This system type covers all configuration options.
Heat Pumps
• Blank: This system type covers all configuration options.
VAV
• Single Duct
• Dual Duct
• Slave Single Duct
• Slave Dual Duct
Central Heating
• Blank: This system type covers all configuration options.
Central Cooling
• Blank: This system type covers all configuration options.
Custom Applications (Creating Custom Applications)
• Electrical
• Misc Fan
• Elevator
• Security
• Fire
• SMOKE
• Miscellaneous
Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only (Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only
Applications)
• Electrical
• Misc Fan
• Elevator
• Security
• Fire
• SMOKE
• Miscellaneous
System of Units Allows you to select the units to use in your new system (Imperial or Metric).
Note: After setting the units and closing CCT, CCT remembers the last units setting. See
Unit Preferences in the Setting and Using Preferences section.
OK Applies the selections and closes the dialog box. The system appears in the Control View.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

216 CCT Help: Configuration

CCT System Selection Wizard
See Selecting a System (Creating a New System) and Viewing and Modifying
System Selections.
Table 6-43: CCT System Selection Wizard
Field 1 Description
Mechanical System Selection Allows you to select the mechanical components to use in your system by
Screen browsing through the folders of the selection tree and selecting the check boxes
and radio buttons. For information on the types of systems you can create and
details on the selections available, see the User Interface and Applications
sections.
Control Logic Selection Allows you to select the control logic to use in your system by browsing through
Screen the folders of the selection tree and selecting the check boxes and radio buttons.
For information on the types of systems you can create and details on the
selections available, see the User Interface and Applications sections.
Previous Moves to the previous screen of the wizard.
Next Moves to the next screen of the wizard.
Finish Applies the selections and closes the wizard. The system appears in the Control
View in Configuration mode.
Cancel Closes the wizard without applying the selections.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

1. For Sideloops, there is only one Selection screen called Sideloop Selection. The Previous button is enabled but
does not work. The Next button is disabled. For information on creating sideloops, see the Creating a Sideloop
section.

Configuring a System 217

Controller Information Wizard
See the Viewing Controller Information section. The Controller Information
Wizard contains the same device connection information as the Commissioning
Device Wizard, with the addition of the Copy To Clipboard option. For
information on viewing information of a controller while it is being commissioned
(Commissioning mode only), see the Commissioning a System section.
Table 6-44: Controller Information Wizard
Field Description
Name Displays the names of the controllers.

Description Displays information for the controllers.

Model Displays the model numbers for the controllers.

Maincode Version Displays the firmware version for the controllers.

Bootcode Version Displays the bootcode version for the controllers.

System Name Displays the system name for the controllers.

CPU Usage % Displays the CPU usage for the controllers.

Object Memory Usage % Displays the memory usage for the controllers.

Status Displays the status for the controllers.

Device Address Displays the device address for the controllers.

Copy To Clipboard Copies the selected device’s data to the clipboard for
pasting into another program.

Close Closes the Controller Information Wizard.

218 CCT Help: Configuration

Control View
See the Control View screen description in the User Interface section.

Module Selection (New)

The following dialog boxes are the same:
• Network Input Selection
• Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module Selection
• State Generation Module Selection
• Output Control Module Selection
• Network Output Selection
See Adding a Module and Creating Custom Logic (Adding Modules).
Table 6-45: Module Selection (New)
Field Description
Palette Lists the modules you can add to the system.
Show Description/ Displays or hides the description of the selected module in the
Hide Description palette.
User Name Allows you to type a name for the module.
Standard Name Displays a Johnson Controls standard name for the module.
OK Applies the selections and closes the dialog box. The module
appears in the Control View.
Cancel Closes the wizard without applying the selections.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Input Selection (New)

See Adding an Input.
Table 6-46: Input Selection (New) (Part 1 of 2)
Field Description
Drop-Down Filter Menus Allows you to filter each column to narrow the list and identify the
desired input.
Note: The Custom option allows you to perform custom filters by
selecting the filtering operator and entering/selecting the
information to filter.
Column Headers Allows you to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
Create Column Allows you to select one or more inputs to add to the system.
Note: When you select a check box, the Count column text
updates to 1. You can type the desired number of inputs to
add in that column and press the Enter key.
Count Column Allows you to enter the number of inputs to add to the system.
Note: When you type a number in the Count column and press the
Enter key, the check box in the Create column is selected.

Configuring a System 219

 Table 6-46: Input Selection (New) (Part 2 of 2)
Field Description
Application Column Lists the application types available for the inputs.
Note: Miscellaneous is the default category that appears in this
column when you open this dialog box. You can change the
default setting to another category in the
ApplicationConfiguration.properties file. Access this file
in the C:\Program Files\Johnson Controls\CCT\lib directory.
Then change Miscellaneous in the following entry to the
desired category. For example, to display all categories,
change Miscellaneous to All. Save the file. The change
appears the next time you open CCT.
controlview.newFilterColumnValue=Miscellaneous
controlview.newFilterColumnName=Application
Function Column Lists the functions available for the inputs.
Data Type Column Lists the data types available for the inputs.
Signal Column Lists the signals available for the inputs.
OK Applies the selections and closes the dialog box. The input appears
in the Inputs section of the Control View.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without adding the input.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Output Selection (New)

See Adding an Output.
Table 6-47: Output Selection (New) (Part 1 of 2)
Field Description
Drop-Down Filter Menus Allows you to filter each column to narrow the list and identify the
desired output.
Note: The Custom option allows you to perform custom filters by
selecting the filtering operator and entering/selecting the
information to filter.
Column Headers Allows you to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
Create Column Allows you to select one or more outputs to add to the system.
Note: When you select a check box, the Count column text
updates to 1. You can type the desired number of outputs to
add in that column and press the Enter key.
Count Column Allows you to enter the number of outputs to add to the system.
Note: When you type a number in the Count column and press the
Enter key, the check box in the Create column is selected.
Application Column Lists the application types available for the outputs.
Note: Miscellaneous is the default category that appears in this
column when you open this dialog box. You can change the
default setting to another category in the
ApplicationConfiguration.properties file. Access this file
in the C:\Program Files\Johnson Controls\CCT\lib directory.
Then change Miscellaneous in the following entry to the
desired category. For example, to display all categories,
change Miscellaneous to All. Save the file. The change
appears the next time you open CCT.
controlview.newFilterColumnValue=Miscellaneous
controlview.newFilterColumnName=Application
Function Column Lists the functions available for the outputs.
Data Type Column Lists the data types available for the outputs.
Signal Column Lists the signals available for the outputs.

220 CCT Help: Configuration

 Table 6-47: Output Selection (New) (Part 2 of 2)
Field Description
OK Applies the selections and closes the dialog box. The output
appears in the Outputs section of the Control View.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without adding the output.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Configuring a System 221

State Selection (State Tables)
Each table shows the behavior that occurs when its corresponding State Generator
module is in a particular state (the State Generator Module in State X yields the
Behavior of the Output Controller). See the Viewing and Modifying State Selection
Tables and Customizing State Selection Tables sections for more information.
Table 6-48: State Selection (State Tables)
Field Description
Module Name and Port Displays the name of the State Generator module in which the state
(Yellow or Orange Table table is associated. The module name is followed by the connected
Captions) port in the following format: Module Name.Port (for example, Start
Stop Sequencing DA-T.STARTSTOP-STATE).
Note: A yellow table header indicates a connected module and
orange indicates that the module is not connected.
State Column (Gray Column Lists the states of the State Generator module from highest priority
Headers) to lowest priority.
Output Controller Columns Indicates the name of the Output Controller module state in which
(Turquoise Column Headers) the column is associated.
Table Rows (White with Text White table rows with text indicate the Output Controller state value/
or Gray with Asterisks or Xs) behavior associated with the State Generator state.
Gray table rows with asterisks or Xs indicate that when the State
Generator module is in a particular state, no behavior change
occurs, and the Output Controller module checks for the next State
Generator state listed.
An X also indicates that the field should not be modified unless
certain control specifications are required.
Up and Down Arrows Moves a state generation table up or down in the order. The tables
appear in order of priority where the top most table has the highest
priority.
Note: After reordering the tables, the order that the corresponding
modules appear in the Control View remain the same until
the next time you load the Control View screen (for example,
by switching modes or views).
OK Applies the changes and closes the screen.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Create State Selection Table

See Customizing State Selection Tables.
Table 6-49: Create State Selection Table
Field Description
Port Label Allows you to type a name for the module/table. We recommend
leaving this text box empty so that dynamic naming may be used.
Table Priority Indicates the order in which the table appears in the State Tables
dialog box.
Table Data Type (Port Type) Allows you to select an Enumeration set to use or indicates to use a
Boolean data type.
OK Creates the table and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the change.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

222 CCT Help: Configuration

Create State Selection Column
See Customizing State Selection Tables.
Table 6-50: Create State Selection Column
Field Description
Port Label Allows you to type a name for the module/column. We recommend
leaving this text box empty so that dynamic naming may be used.
Column Index Indicates the order in which the column appears in the table.
Column Data Type (Port Allows you to select an Enumeration set to use or indicates to use a
Type) Boolean data type.
OK Creates the column and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the change.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Setup (Input or Output)

See Changing an Input or Output Signal.
Table 6-51: Setup
Field Description
Current Signal Allows you to select a different signal for the input or output.
OK Applies the change and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the change.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Configuring a System 223

Logic View
See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.

Command Hierarchy (Enum Output or Boolean Output)

See Configuring the Command Hierarchy Block.
Table 6-52: Command Hierarchy (Enum Output or Boolean Output)
Field Description
Input Columns (Yellow or Indicates the name of the input (Boolean Input or Enumeration
Orange Column Headers) Output) in which the column is associated.
Note: A yellow table header indicates a connected module and
orange indicates that the module is not connected.
State Column (Turquoise Lists the output states of the commands in its rows.
Column Headers)
Table Rows (White with Text White table rows with text indicate the enumeration state or True/
or Gray with Asterisks) False state that is associated with the input column.
Gray table rows with asterisks indicate that the associated input
column has no effect on the resulting output state.
Up and Down Arrows Moves the row selection up or down, but does not move the row
itself.
OK Applies the changes and closes the screen.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Translation (Enum to Boolean or Boolean to Enum)

See Configuring the Translation Blocks.
Table 6-53: Translation (Enum to Boolean or Boolean to Enum)
Field Description
Input (Orange Column Indicates the name of the input in which the column is associated.
Headers)
State Column (Turquoise Lists the output states of the commands in its rows.
Column Headers)
Table Rows (White with Text White table rows with text indicate the enumeration state or True/
or Gray with Asterisks) False state that is associated with the input column.
Gray table rows with asterisks indicate that the associated input
column has no effect on the resulting output state.
Up and Down Arrows Moves the row selection up or down, but does not move the row
itself.
OK Applies the changes and closes the screen.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

224 CCT Help: Configuration

Port Name Dialog
This dialog box is used to make changes to the labels in the State Tables, the
Command Hierarchy block’s state, and Translation block’s states. See
Customizing State Selection Tables, Configuring the Command Hierarchy Block,
and Configuring the Translation Blocks.
Table 6-54: Port Name Dialog
Field Description
Port Label Allows you to type a name for the input port. We recommend leaving
this text box empty so that dynamic naming may be used.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Enum Set Change Dialog

This dialog box is used to make changes to the enumeration sets in the State Tables
and the Command Hierarchy and Translation blocks. See Customizing State
Selection Tables, Configuring the Command Hierarchy Block, and Configuring the
Translation Blocks.
Table 6-55: Enum Set Change Dialog
Field Description
Enum Set Allows you to select an enumeration set to use.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Line Segment
See Configuring the Line Segment Block.
Table 6-56: Line Segment
Field Description
Input Points Lists the inputs associated with the line segment.
Output Points Lists the outputs associated with the line segment.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Configuring a System 225

MUX
See Configuring the MUX Block.
Table 6-57: MUX
Field Description
Input Allows you to define how many inputs the MUX block contains
(range = 2-12).
Enum Set Allows you to select the enumeration set to use.
Note: This field is used for MUX blocks with Enum Mode only and
is disabled for Boolean Mode. If you change the Enum Set,
the Input X - Mode(s) fields are cleared and need to be
configured.
Input 1 - Mode(s) Defines the modes that are configured for this input. If the mode
value equals one of the input mode configurations, the value on the
input is passed. See Mode Selection.
Input 2 - Mode(s)1 Defines the modes that are configured for this input. If the mode
value equals one of the input mode configurations, the value on the
input is passed. See Mode Selection.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

1. The number of Input X - Mode(s) fields is determined by the number selected in the Input field.

Mode Selection
See Configuring the MUX Block.
Table 6-58: Mode Selection
Field Description
Mode Allows you to select a value to use for the input mode of a MUX
block.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Block Selection (Block Finder)

See Searching for a Block Using the Block Finder.
Table 6-59: Block Selection (Block Finder)
Field Description
Search For Allows you to type the name of a block to find.
Results List Lists the blocks matching the Search For entry.
OK Closes the dialog box and places the selected block in the logic
diagram.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without selecting a block to add to the logic
diagram.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

226 CCT Help: Configuration

Default Element Selection
See Setting the Default Element of a Module.
Table 6-60: Default Element Selection
Field Description
List of Elements Lists the elements you can select as the default element for the
module.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box. The default element
appears with a black background and white text.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Hidden Edge Label

See the Changing the Hidden Edge Label of a Connection section.
Table 6-61: Hidden Edge Label
Field Description
Label Allows you to type a label name to use to indicate the associated
hidden connection line.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Details
See the Details dialog box description in the User Interface section. See Viewing
and Modifying Details.

Port Exposure (For BACnet System)

See Exposing Ports.
Table 6-62: Port Exposure (For BACnet System)
Field Description
Name Column Lists the names of the input/output ports you can expose to BACnet
systems.
Expose Column Allows you to select a check box indicating the inputs/outputs to
expose to BACnet systems.
Exposed Name Lists the input/output names that are exposed to BACnet systems.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Configuring a System 227

Port Exposure (For Connection)
You cannot remove the selection for connected ports as such ports are disabled in
this dialog box. See Exposing Ports for Connection and Exposing Ports.
Table 6-63: Port Exposure (For Connection)
Field Description
Input Port List Lists the input ports you can hide or expose for connections and
allows you to select ports using check boxes.
Output Port List Lists the output ports you can hide or expose for connections and
allows you to select ports using check boxes.
Select All Selects all input/output ports in the Input Port List and Output Port
List.
Deselect All Removes the selection of all input/output ports in the Input Port List
and Output Port List.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Port Selection
See Making a Connection and Changing a Connection.
Table 6-64: Port Selection
Field Description
Port List Lists the input/output ports to which you can connect.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Confirm (Delete)
The Confirm dialog box appears after selecting to delete a module or block. Click
Yes to delete it or No to cancel the deletion. See Deleting a Module, Deleting a
Block, and Deleting a Connection.

Rename (Module/Block)
See Renaming a Module and Renaming a Block.
Table 6-65: Rename (Module/Block)
Field Description
User Name Allows you to type a name for the module/block.
Standard Name Displays a Johnson Controls standard name for the module/block.
OK Applies the name change and closes the dialog box. The name
change appears in the Control View or Logic View.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the change.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

228 CCT Help: Configuration

System Rename Dialog
See Renaming a System.
Table 6-66: System Rename Dialog
Field Description
System Name Allows you to enter a name for the system.
Illegal characters include:
:*?"<>|/[]#@
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.

Job Information
See Entering or Viewing Job Information.
Table 6-67: Job Information
Field Description
Operator Name Allows you to enter or view the name of the operator responsible for
the open Controller Application File (.caf).
Job Name Allows you to enter or view the name of the job associated with the
open Controller Application File (.caf).
Contract Number Allows you to enter or view the contract number associated with the
job and Controller Application File (.caf).
History Allows you to enter or view notes indicating the history of the job and
Controller Application File (.caf).
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.

Configuring a System 229

230 CCT Help: Configuration
Chapter 7: CCT Help: Configuration
Configuring the Local Controller Display
Introduction
CCT configures the information used with the Local Controller Display for a
Network Control Engine (NCE) or Field Equipment Controller (FEC). You can
configure the Display after selecting the hardware in the Hardware Definition
Wizard (Defining Hardware).
For information on installing or operating the Local Controller Display, see the
documents listed in the Related Documentation section.

Concepts
Local Controller Display Configuration
You can customize many items particular to the display from the
Tools > Configure Display menu option while in Configuration mode. The
Configure Display menu option allows you to:
• define which points appear on the Display pages (Input/Output View,
Parameter/Setpoint View, and Idle View) and in what order
• define which points are read-only (cannot be commanded using the display)
• edit point user names and descriptions
• set display attributes including contrast and backlight intensity
• select timeout settings
• select authorization including password definition
After configuring the display, you can download the application to the controller
with CCT. The changes then become effective.

Configuring the Local Controller Display 231

Steps
Configuring the Local Controller Display

Selecting Points to Appear on Display Pages

To select points to appear on the Display pages:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Under the Display Page column for each controller view, place a check mark
next to each point that you want displayed. Click All to select or clear all
points.
Note: If you intend to select a point for the Idle page, you must first select it
for the Display page.
Note: Inputs and outputs used to interface the Occupancy Status to a Network
Sensor, or the Integrated Actuator settings for Minimum Position and
Stroke Time on VMA controllers cannot be selected for use in the
Local Controller Display. In Figure 7-25, for example, you can select
all Inputs, but can select only three of the outputs. The
PARAM-DPR-MINP and PARAM-DPR-ST outputs are not available
to display on the Local Controller Display. Clicking the All check box
in the Display Page column selects all items available for display while
leaving the unavailable items cleared.

232 CCT Help: Configuration

 Figure 7-25: Display Selection Example

4. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

Configuring the Local Controller Display 233

Selecting Points to Appear on Idle Page
To select points to appear on the Idle page:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Under the Idle Page column for each controller view, place a check mark next
to each point that you want displayed under the Idle Page column. Click All to
select or clear all points.
Note: You cannot select a point for the Idle page unless it is already selected
under the Display Page column. Also, clearing a point from the Display
Page column clears it under the Idle Page and Read Only columns.
4. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

Specifying User Names and Descriptions

When you modify user names for the Display, the changes also apply to and
appear in CCT.
To specify user names and descriptions:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Under the User Name column for the point name you want to specify, click
inside the cell and type a new name.
Note: Click outside of the cell for the change to take effect.
4. Under the Description column for the desired point description, click inside the
cell and type a new description. The description is limited to a maximum of
40 characters.
Note: Click outside of the cell for the change to take effect.
Note: The primary use of the Description is for the Display. The Description
field is generally not used in CCT.
5. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.
Note: The changes you made to the User Name appear in the Control View of
CCT after you click OK. The changes appear at the Local Controller
Display after the download.

234 CCT Help: Configuration

Selecting Points for Read-Only Display
To select points for read-only display:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Under the Read Only column for each controller view, place a check mark next
to each point that you want to configure as read-only. Points marked as
read-only cannot be commanded with the controller. Click All to select or clear
all points.
Note: You cannot select a point under the Read Only column unless it is
already selected under the Display Page column. Also, clearing a point
from the Display Page column clears it under the Idle Page and Read
Only columns.
4. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

Defining Display Page Display Order

To define Display page display order:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. To move a point up in the list, select the point and click Move Up. The point
moves up one row. Repeat this step until the point is at the desired location.
4. To move a point down in the list, select the point and click Move Down. The
point moves down one row. Repeat this step until the point is at the desired
location.
Note: To move a group of items together (group select), drag the mouse
across the items you want to move, and then click Move Up or Move
Down.
5. When satisfied with the display order, click OK. The Local Controller Display
configuration is saved. This change becomes effective after you download the
application to the controller. See Downloading the Application to the Display
Device.

Configuring the Local Controller Display 235

Defining Idle Page Display Order
To define Idle page display order:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Click Define Idle Order. The Define Idle Order dialog box appears with the
current list of points.
4. To move a point up in the list, select the point and click Move Up. The point
moves up one row. Repeat this step until the point is at the desired location.
5. To move a point down in the list, select the point and click Move Down. The
point moves down one row. Repeat this step until the point is at the desired
location.
Note: To move a group of items together (group select), drag the mouse
across the items you want to move, and then click Move Up or Move
Down.
6. When satisfied with the display order, click OK. The Local Controller Display
Configuration screen returns.
7. Click OK again. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This
change becomes effective after you download the application to the controller.
See Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

Specifying Local Controller Display Settings

To specify Local Controller Display settings:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Select the Setup tab. The setup options appear.
4. Under Display Settings, select a Contrast level.
5. Under Display Settings, select a Backlight Intensity.
6. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

236 CCT Help: Configuration

Specifying Display Timeout Settings
To specify display timeout settings:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Select the Setup tab. The setup options appear.
4. Under Timeout Settings, select an Idle Page Timeout value.
5. Under Timeout Settings, select a Backlight Timeout.
6. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

Defining Display Authorization

To define display authorization:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Select the Setup tab. The setup options appear.
4. If you want to disable password access to the display, select Disabled under
Authorization. The Password fields are disabled.
Or, select Local to enable password access. The Password fields become
enabled.
5. If you selected Local, enter a password in the Password field, and then enter it
again in the Re-enter Password field.
Note: Valid characters are uppercase letters A through Z and numbers 0 to 9.
The password can range from 1 to 32 characters in length.
6. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

Downloading

Downloading the Application to the Display Device

After making the desired changes in the Configure Display dialog box, you need to
download the application to the device (NCE or FEC) with the Display for the
changes to become effective. Use the Load Device Wizard to perform the
download. See the Loading Devices section for details.

Downloading the Main Code of the Display Device

When updated Local Controller Display code becomes available, you can use the
Load Device Wizard to perform a main code download. See the Loading Devices
section for details.

Configuring the Local Controller Display 237

Screens
Configure Display
The Configure Display screen is split into two tabs: Display (Table 7-68) and
Setup (Table 7-69). The Display tab allows you to configure which of the defined
Inputs, Outputs, and Parameters you wish to show in the Local Controller Display.
The Setup tab allows you to configure the display, timeout, and authorization
settings.
See Configuring the Local Controller Display.
Table 7-68: Configure Display Dialog Box - Display Tab (Part 1 of 2)
Field Description
Input/Output View Provides a scrollable list of inputs (sensors) and outputs (control points) defined by the
application.
Parameter/ Provides a scrollable list of BACnet exposed elements for all modules within the application. This
Setpoint View list is identical to what is shown in the Parameters table of the Control View screen. It also
includes any network inputs or outputs defined by the system. The default order is: network
inputs, parameters, network outputs. You can re-order this list using the Move Up and Move Down
buttons. If you select to show one or more items, the selected items appear at the top of the list
the next time you open the dialog box.
Tables (Columns) Provides Input/Output and Parameter/Setpoint data in table format. The Input/Output View and
Parameter/Setpoint View tables contain five columns of data:
• User Name – Use this column to edit the default names given by the application. If you use a
blank or empty user name, that object is not available on the display. The specified user name
appears in the ADS user interface of your browser when the field controller is added as a
monitored device under a supervisory controller. The changes you made to the User Name
appear in the Control View of CCT after you click OK. The changes appear at the Local
Controller Display after the download.
• Display Page – Use this column to select which items to show in the Local Controller Display.
The Display Page box must be selected for an item in order to enable the Idle Page and Read
Only selections for the item. Some Inputs and Outputs cannot be selected for display as they
cannot be viewed on the Local Controller Display.
• Idle Page – Use this column to select which items to show while the Local Controller Display
is in idle mode. The Local Controller Display is in idle mode when no one is logged onto the
Display. The Idle Mode page cycles through the selected items in the order they are arranged.
You can define this order by clicking the Define Idle Order button. The Idle Page option is
disabled for any item that is not selected in the Display Page column.
• Read Only – Use this column to select which items should be marked as read-only on the
display. The values of items selected for read-only can be viewed but not commanded. The
Read Only option is disabled for any item that is not selected in the Display Page column.
• Description – Use this column to enter or modify the description for an item. The description
is limited to 40 characters in length. The description appears in the ADS user interface of your
browser when the field controller is added as a monitored device under a supervisory
controller.

238 CCT Help: Configuration

 Table 7-68: Configure Display Dialog Box - Display Tab (Part 2 of 2)
Field Description
Tables (Details) Three dots are appended to the names of items that are not fully shown in the window. Resize the
column to view the item in its entirety. The tool then retains the new size of the column for the next
time the Display tab window is opened. Also, the cells in the columns provide a tool tip that
displays the full name of the item, which shows long item names without resizing the column.
Note: A tooltip appears when you place your cursor over an item in the User Name column of the
Parameter/Setpoint View table only, displaying the user name followed by the standard
name (User Name: Standard Name). Also, when you place your cursor over an item in the
Description column of the Parameter/Setpoint View table only, a tooltip appears showing
the description and standard name (Description: Standard Name).
Each column header contains the All check box. Checking this box selects all the items in the
column for that category. Checking the box again clears the All box and removes the check boxes
from all the items in the column.
To reposition the order of items as they appear within a category, use the Move Up and Move
Down buttons. Select the item you want to reposition, then click Move Up to move it one position
above or click Move Down to move it one position below. To move a group of items together
(group select), hold down and slide the mouse across the items you want to move, then click
Move Up or Move Down. These buttons are disabled if no items are selected.
Idle View Provides a scrollable list of points that appear on the Idle page of the controller.
You can define the sort order of items defined on the Idle page. Clicking Define Idle Order on the
Display tab displays the current sort order in the Define Idle Order dialog box.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Table 7-69: Configure Display Dialog Box - Setup Tab

Field Description
Display Settings Defines the contrast percentage and backlight intensity value for the display using drop-down
menus:
• Contrast – 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, or 90%
• Backlight Intensity – Off, Dim, Medium, or Bright
Timeout Settings Sets the idle page timeout and backlight timeout values used by the display using drop-down
menus:
• Idle Page Timeout – 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour
• Backlight Timeout – 1 minute, 5 minutes, 1 hour, or 8 hours
Authorization Enables or disables password access to the display. The choices are Disabled or Local.
If you select Disabled, the password fields in this window are disabled and a password is not
required to use the Local Controller Display.
If you select Local, the password fields are enabled and the specified password is required to
access the Local Controller Display. Asterisk characters (*) are shown to hide a password as it is
entered. Acceptable characters are uppercase letters A to Z and numbers 0 to 9. Lowercase
letters convert to uppercase characters when typed. The maximum password length is
40 characters.
Note: The Site option is intended to allow password authorization to come from the Site Director
and is not available at this release.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Configuring the Local Controller Display 239

Define Idle Order
Table 7-70: Define Idle Order Dialog Box
Field Description
Idle View Displays the current sort order of the items on the Idle page.
Note: A tooltip appears when you place your cursor over an item in the list, displaying the user
name followed by the standard name (User Name: Standard Name).
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the list of items. The group select option for
moving items is also available in this window.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

240 CCT Help: Configuration

Chapter 8: CCT Help: Configuration
Simulating a System
Introduction
Simulation mode allows you to test your logic. When you enter Simulation mode,
the Simulation dialog box appears allowing you to set startup values for the
simulation session. Simulation mode allows you to see your system as though it
were in Commissioning mode.

Concepts
Simulation Overview
When you simulate your system, you are in the Test Mode. You can set the
simulation speed (1-5) and the default values for network inputs and outputs.
Simulation speed allows processes like time delays on Binary Outputs (BO) or
Stroke Times on Actuators to run 5 times as fast. For example, a 60 second delay
timer runs in 12 seconds if the simulation time is set to 5.
Use the start up values to modify the defaulted starting points for all the Network
Inputs and Inputs. The start up values display the values that the Network Inputs
and Inputs use in the system because they are not connected to physical hardware.
Once simulation is running, you can command the values to see how the system
behaves.

Simulating a System 241

Steps
Starting Simulation
To start the simulation mode:
1. Click Simulate. The Simulation dialog box appears.
Note: You can also use the Modes > Simulate menu option.
2. Select the simulation parameters/attributes.
3. Click OK.
Note: When simulating a VAV box, verify SA-VP is set to zero. Once
Autocalibration is complete, the SA-VP can be increased to simulate
airflow.

Stopping Simulation
To stop the simulation mode:
1. Click Stop Simulation. The Simulation Exit - Confirmation Dialog Box
appears.
2. Click Yes to confirm that you want to stop simulation.
3. If you made changes during Simulation session, a second Confirm dialog box
appears.
4. Click Yes if you want to apply the changes you made during the simulation
session or No to discard the changes.

Control View Steps

Commanding Items
To command items:
1. In the Control view, right-click on an item that can be viewed and/or modified.
The right-click menu appears.
2. Select Commands. The parameter/attribute’s specific command dialog box
appears.
3. Make your selections.
4. Click Send or OK depending on which button appears. If you clicked Send, the
command is issued and the dialog box closes and you are finished. If you
clicked OK, a second dialog box appears. Continue to Step 5.
5. Make your selections.
6. Click Send.

242 CCT Help: Configuration

Viewing and Modifying Parameters
You can view and modify parameters/attributes in the Configuration mode,
Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying
Parameters in the Configuring a System section for more information.

Viewing and Modifying Details

You can view and modify Details in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode,
and Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying Details in the Configuring
a System section for more information.

Viewing Connections
You can view connections in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and
Commissioning mode. See Viewing Connections in the Configuring a System
section for more information.

Showing and Hiding Involvement

You can show and hide involvement in the Simulation mode and Commissioning
mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the Commissioning a System
section for more information.

Navigating Between the Control View and a Module’s Logic View

You can navigate between the control view and a module’s logic view in the
Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Navigating
Between the Control View and a Module’s Logic View in the Configuring a System
section for more information.

Simulating a System 243

Logic View Steps

Viewing Logic
To view logic, on the Action menu, select View Logic.
Note: You can also right-click on a module containing logic that can be
viewed and/or modified. The right-click menu appears. Select View
Logic. The Logic View appears and displays the logic diagram for that
module.

Viewing and Modifying Details

You can view and modify details in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode,
and Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying Details in the Configuring
a System section for more information.

Panning
You pan in the logic view in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and
Commissioning mode. See Panning in the Configuring a System section for more
information.

Zooming
You can zoom in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning
mode. See Zooming in the Configuring a System section for more information.

Printing
You can print in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning
mode. See Printing the Logic Diagram in the Configuring a System section for
more information.

244 CCT Help: Configuration

Screens
This section describes screens specific to the Simulation mode. For information on
screens that appear in both the Simulation mode and the Configuring mode, see
Configuring a System section for more information.

Simulation Screen
See the Starting Simulation section.
Table 8-71: Simulation Parameters
Field Description
Simulation Speed Allows you to indicate the speed of the simulation. The
speed range is 1-5.
Item Displays the name of the item.
Startup Value Displays the item’s starting value.
Units Displays the item’s units.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Command Dialog Box

See the Commanding Items section.
Table 8-72: Command Dialog Box
Field Description
Commands and Attributes Allows you to select the command to send via a radio
button and any further command parameters via
drop-down menus, text boxes, or other fields.
OK Opens a second screen with more command choices
based on your selections.
Send Sends the command.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.

Simulation Exit - Confirmation Dialog Box

See the Stopping Simulation section.
The Simulation Exit - Confirmation dialog box appears when attempting to exit the
Simulation mode. A second Confirm dialog box appears prompting you to save
your changes, if any were made.

Simulating a System 245

246 CCT Help: Configuration
Chapter 9: CCT Help: Hardware Definition
Defining Hardware
Introduction
The Hardware Definition Wizard allows you to select devices and define hardware
point assignments. You need to have a Controller Application File (.caf) open in
CCT to use the Hardware Definition Wizard. After you save your file, you can
make modifications.

Concepts
Hardware Definition Wizard
The Hardware Definition Wizard consists of three main sections: controller
selection, point assignment, and network settings. A summary of the three main
selections appears after you complete the main sections. When you define your
hardware assignments, you are assigning items to the device.

Hardware Considerations
When you define your hardware, keep the following points in mind about Network
Sensors (Network Duct Sensors or Network Zone Sensors), Network VSDs, and
VMA Hardware for Integrated Flow and Integrated Actuators.
In addition to these considerations, note that the Network Sensors, Network VSDs,
and Local Controller Displays are SAB devices.
Network Sensors (Network Duct Sensors or Network Zone Sensors)
During the System Selection process, the Temperature Sensor functions can be
defaulted to use Network Sensors based on naming and signal preference settings.
The points do not count towards the Hardware Slot Summary calculation. The
Network Sensor shows up as an SA Bus device in Step 3 of the Hardware
Definition Wizard (where you can set the address).
Network VSDs
During the System Selection process, the key points for variable speed fans or
pumps can be defaulted to use Network VSDs based on naming and signal
preference settings. The points do not count towards the Hardware Slot Summary
calculation. The Network VSD shows up as an SA Bus device in Step 3 of the
Hardware Definition Wizard (where you can set the address). For more
information, see the VSD document referenced in the Related Documents table.

Defining Hardware 247

 VMA Hardware for Integrated Flow and Integrated Actuators
The FEC VMA hardware sets integrate Velocity Pressure and the Supply Damper
Actuator. The points show up in the System Requires column of the Hardware Slot
Summary table (located on the Controller Selection screen). During the Point
Assignment setup, these points are automatically assigned to the correct slots in
the VMA.

Steps
Defining Hardware
This section includes selecting a device, assigning points, and defining network
settings device.

Selecting a Device
To select a device:
1. Click Define Hardware. The Hardware Definition Wizard opens with the
Controller Selection screen active.
Note: You can also use the Operations menu > Define Hardware to open the
Hardware Definition Wizard.
2. Click Select next to the Field Device row. The Controller Device Selection
Dialog Box appears.
3. Select the desired field device (for example, a VMA1610 or an FEC1610) and
click OK. The Add Device dialog box appears.
Note: If necessary you can filter devices. To filter devices, select an item to
filter from the drop-down menu of the desired column. Only items of
that type appear on the screen. To narrow the items further, you can
filter other columns.
Note: To perform custom filters, select Custom from the drop-down menu,
select the filtering operator, and enter the information to filter.
4. Enter a device name and click OK. The device name appears in the Field
Device text box.
5. Verify the devices you selected meet the requirements of the selected system in
the Hardware Slot Summary. If any of the fields are red, then you need to add
an IOM device (described in Step 6) to support the System Selection.

248 CCT Help: Hardware Definition

 6. Click Add Device next to the SA Bus Devices section. The SA Bus Device
Selection Dialog Box appears. Different steps apply to the different devices.
Follow the steps listed here for the specific device type to add.
For an IOM device:
a. Select the IOM device and click OK. The Add IOM Devices screen
appears.
b. If necessary, enter a new device name, quantity, and starting index and
click OK. The Hardware Definition Wizard - Controller Selection screen
appears with the selected device in the SA Bus Devices text box.
For a Local Controller Display:
Note: A Local Controller Display is always defined for the system and cannot
be removed. You cannot have more than one Local Controller Display
in the system.
For a Network Sensor device (Network Duct Sensor or Network Zone
Sensor):
a. Select the Network Sensor device and click OK. The Add NetSensor
Devices or Add NetSensorDuct Devices dialog box appears.
b. Select the check boxes next to the applications you want and click OK. The
Hardware Definition Wizard - Controller Selection screen appears with the
selected device in the SA Bus Devices text box.
For a Network VSD device:
a. Select the Network VSD device and click OK. The Add NetVSD Devices
dialog box appears.
b. Select the check boxes next to the applications you want and click OK. The
Hardware Definition Wizard - Controller Selection screen appears with the
selected device in the SA Bus Devices text box.
For a Romutec IOM device:
a. Select the Romutec IOM device and click OK. The Add RT_IOM Devices
dialog box appears.
b. If necessary, enter a new device name, quantity, and starting index and
click OK. The Hardware Definition Wizard - Controller Selection screen
appears with the selected device in the SA Bus Devices text box.
7. If necessary, add points to the SAB Bus Device. See Adding Points to an SAB
Bus Device.
Note: To delete an SAB Bus Device, see Deleting an SAB Bus Device.
8. Click Next. The Point Assignment screen for the device appears. See Assigning
Points.

Defining Hardware 249

Adding Points to an SAB Bus Device
You can only add points to an SAB Bus device if the device is a Network Sensor
(Network Duct Sensor or Network Zone Sensor) or a Network VSD.
To add points to an SAB bus device:
1. In the SAB Bus Devices section of the Controller Selection Screen, select the
device you want to add points to.
2. Click Add Points. The Add Points dialog box appears.
3. Select the check boxes next to the points you want and click OK. CCT adds the
points to the device.

Deleting an SAB Bus Device

To delete an SAB bus device:
1. In the SA Bus Devices section, select the device you want to delete.
2. Click Delete. A confirmation screen appears.
3. Click Yes.

Assigning Points
CCT automatically assigns the points based on the selections made. Points that it
could not assign appear in the Unassigned Points list. You need to assign the points
in the Unassigned Points list. You cannot proceed until all points are assigned.
To assign points:
1. Assign your points. Use the right arrow to assign a point to an object. Use the
left arrow to unassign a point from an object. Use drag-and-drop functionality
to move a point up and down the Assigned Points list.
Note: An alert message appears if you attempt to move a point to an invalid
location and the point remains in its original location.
Note: The slider bar between the Unassigned Points and Assigned Points lists
has left and right arrows allowing you to achieve the desired view.
Click the arrows to show/hide the lists. If you click the slider bar and
drag it to the desired location, clicking the left/right arrows returns the
view to the location you moved the slider bar. Clicking the left/right
arrows a second time shows/hides the entire list.
2. Click Next. The Network Settings screen appears. See Defining Network
Settings.

250 CCT Help: Hardware Definition

Defining Network Settings
To define network settings:
1. Review and modify the settings, if needed.
Note: The Local Display (Local Controller Display) Address is always set to
3 and cannot be modified.
Note: The NCE Address is always set to 4 and cannot be modified.
Note: The Network Settings table does not allow you to enter duplicate
device addresses. An alert message appears if you type an address
assigned to another device.
Note: Click the Advanced button to select the BACnet Localization and Baud
Rate parameters. See Advanced Dialog Box for details.
2. Click Finish.

Defining Hardware 251

Screens
The Hardware Definition Wizard contains the following screens: Controller
Selection Screen, Point Assignment Screen, and Network Settings Screen.

Controller Selection Screen

See the Defining Hardware section
Table 9-73: Hardware Definition Wizard - Controller Selection Screen
Field Description
Field Device Displays the name of the device. The name in this field
appears on the Point Assignment Screen when you auto
discover your device.
Select Opens the Controller Device Selection Dialog Box to
select the device.
SA Bus Devices Lists all the SA Bus Devices assigned to the Field
Device.
Add Device Opens the SA Bus Device Selection Dialog Box to select
your SA Bus device.
Delete Deletes the selected device from the SA Devices field.
Add Points Opens the Add Points dialog box to add points to your
SA Bus device.
Note: You can only add points to an SAB Bus device if
the device is a Network Sensor (Network Duct
Sensor or Network Zone Sensor) or a Network
VSD.
Hardware Slot Summary Displays the requirements of the system you select. The
Hardware Slot Summary displays the hardware
requirements of the system in the Controller Application
File (.caf), the hardware capacity of the selected devices
(Selected Hardware), unused space, and available
space (Unused/Available Space).
When the Controller Application File exceeds the
capacity of the selected hardware, the field turns red to
indicate an additional hardware device is needed to
support System Selections.
• Category: Displays the System Requirements,
Selected Hardware, and Unused and Available
points.
The Hardware Slot Summary included the following
types:
• UI: Universal Inputs
• AI: Analog Inputs
• BI: Binary Inputs
• UO/CO: Universal Outputs/Configurable Outputs
• AO: Analog Outputs
• BO: Binary Outputs
• RO: Relay Outputs1
Previous Returns to the previous screen.
Next Skips to the next screen.
Finish Completes your selections.
Cancel Closes the wizard without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

1. You can use Relay Outputs to drive incremental/floating 3-wire actuators; however, we
recommend using triac outputs instead of Relay Outputs for the following control loop
types: VAV Flow Control, Airflow, Airflow%, Airflow Diff, Bldg Static, and Duct Static.

252 CCT Help: Hardware Definition

Point Assignment Screen
See the Defining Hardware section.
Table 9-74: Hardware Definition Wizard - Point Assignment Screen
Field Description
Unassigned Points Displays all the unassigned points. The object names
appear alphabetically.
• Name: Displays the point name.
• Description: Displays the expanded ID for the point.
• Signal: Displays the signal information.
• Data Type: Displays the data type.
• Type: Displays the type information.
Assigned Points Displays all the assigned points.The object names
appear alphabetically, including the Object Name,
Expanded ID, Signal, Data Type, and Type.
• Controller: Displays the controller information.
• Name: Displays the point name.
• Description: Displays the expanded ID for the point.
• Signals: Displays the signal information.
Note: Select a point and use drag-and-drop
functionality to move a point up or down on the
list. An alert message appears if you attempt to
move the point to an invalid location and the point
remains in its original location.
Moves the selected point from the Unassigned Points
pane to the Assigned Points pane.

Moves the selected point from the Assigned Points pane

to the Unassigned Points pane.

Previous Returns you to the previous screen.

Next Skips to the next screen.
Finish Applies the changes and closes the wizard.
Cancel Closes the wizard without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Defining Hardware 253

Network Settings Screen
See the Defining Hardware section
Table 9-75: Hardware Definition Wizard - Network Settings Screen
Field Description
Field Device & Bus Settings Displays the information for the selected field device.
• Model: Displays the device model.
• Name: Displays the name you entered in the New
Device dialog box.
• Device Address: Displays the address of the device.
• Instance Number (BACnet ID): Displays the BACnet
ID number. This value is the same value used in the
Peer Reference attribute in the Details View.
• Advanced Button: Opens the Advanced dialog box to
edit the BACnet Localization and Baud Rate
parameters. See Advanced Dialog Box for details.
SA Bus Device Settings Displays the information for the SA Bus Devices.
• Name: Displays the device name.
• Address: Displays the device address.
• Type: Displays the hardware component connected
to the SA Bus. IOM, Network Sensors (Network Duct
Sensors or Network Zone Sensors), and Network
VSDs are the available types.
Previous Returns you to the previous screen.
Next Skips to the next screen. This button is inactive because
this is the last screen in the wizard.
Finish Applies the changes and closes the wizard.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Controller Device Selection Dialog Box

See the Defining Hardware section.
Table 9-76: Controller Device Selection Dialog Box
Field Description
Selections Includes information for the following:
• Name: Displays the names of the available
selections.
• Description: Displays the description of the available
selections.
• Bus Type: Displays the bus type.
• Device Type: Displays the device type.
• Universal Inputs: Displays the number of universal
inputs.
• Binary Inputs: Displays the number of binary inputs.
• Universal Outputs: Displays the number of universal
outputs.
• Analog Outputs: Displays the number of analog
outputs.
• Binary Outputs: Displays the number of binary
outputs.
• Relay Outputs: Displays the number of relay outputs.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

254 CCT Help: Hardware Definition

SA Bus Device Selection Dialog Box
See the Defining Hardware section
Table 9-77: SA Bus Device Selection Dialog Box
Field Description
Selections Includes information for the following:
• Name: Displays the names of the available
selections.
• Description: Displays the description of the available
selections.
• Bus Type: Displays the bus type.
• Device Type: Displays the device type.
• Universal Inputs: Displays the number of universal
inputs.
• Analog Inputs: Displays the number of analog inputs.
• Binary Inputs: Displays the number of binary inputs.
• Universal Outputs: Displays the number of universal
outputs.
• Analog Outputs: Displays the number of analog
outputs.
• Binary Outputs: Displays the number of binary
outputs.
• Relay Outputs: Displays the number of relay outputs.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Add IOM Devices Dialog Box

See the Defining Hardware section.
The Add IOM Devices dialog box appears after you select an IOM device to add in
the Controller Selection Screen. Use this dialog box to name your device.
Table 9-78: Add IOM Devices Dialog Box
Field Description
Device Name Displays the device name.
Quantity Allows you to enter the number of IOMs you are adding
to your system.
Starting Index Allows you to enter the starting index for the IOMs you
are adding to your system.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Add LocalDisplay Devices Dialog Box

A Local Controller Display is always defined for the system and cannot be
removed. You cannot have more than one Local Controller Display in the system.

Defining Hardware 255

Add NetSensor/NetSensorDuct Devices Dialog Box
See the Defining Hardware section.
The Add NetSensor/NetSensorDuct Devices dialog box appears after you select a
Network Sensor (NetDuctSensor or NetZoneSensor) device to add in the
Controller Selection Screen. Use this dialog box to add applications to the device.
Table 9-79: Add NetSensor/NetSensorDuct Devices Dialog Box
Field Description
Add Allows you to add applications to the device.
Application Displays the available applications for the device.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Add NetVSD Devices Dialog Box

See the Defining Hardware section.
The Add NetVSD Devices dialog box appears after you select a Network VSD
(NetVSD) device to add in the Controller Selection Screen. Use this dialog box to
add applications to the device.
Table 9-80: Add NetVSD Devices Dialog Box
Field Description
Add Allows you to add applications to the device.
Application Displays the available applications for the device.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Add RT_IOM Devices Dialog Box

See the Defining Hardware section.
The Add RT_IOM Devices dialog box appears after you select a Romutec IOM
device to add in the Controller Selection Screen. Use this dialog box to name your
device.
Table 9-81: Add RT_IOM Devices Dialog Box
Field Description
Device Name Displays the device name.
Quantity Allows you to enter the number of IOMs you are adding
to your system.
Starting Index Allows you to enter the starting index for the IOMs you
are adding to your system.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

256 CCT Help: Hardware Definition

Add Points Dialog Box
See the Adding Points to an SAB Bus Device section.
Table 9-82: Add Points Dialog Box
Field Description
Add Allows you to select whether or not to add the point to
the device.
Type Displays the point type.
Function Displays the point function.
Data Type Displays the point data type.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Advanced Dialog Box

See the Defining Network Settings section.
Table 9-83: Advanced Dialog Box
Field Description
BACnet Localization Allows you to select whether the file type is Unicode or
ASCII. By default, BACnet Localization is set to Unicode.
Unicode is the required setting when FECs are
integrated into a Metasys NAE network. The ASCII
option is required if the FEC is integrated into a BACnet
system that is not NAE based and does not support
Unicode characters.
Baud Rate Allows you to select the Baud Rate of Auto, 1200, 9600,
19200, 38400, or 76800. This field is set to Auto by
default.
Close Closes the screen and applies the changes.

Defining Hardware 257

258 CCT Help: Hardware Definition
Chapter 10: CCT Help: Load Process
Loading Devices
Introduction
The Load Wizard allows you to perform upload and downloads to a device. You
must be in the Configuration mode to use the Load Wizard.

Concepts
Load Wizard
The Load Wizard allows you to perform uploads and downloads to a device. The
Load Wizards determines the network connection method by the Connections-
either Ethernet NAE Passthru or Bluetooth Wireless.

Upload
You can upload devices using the Load Wizard. You are able to discover available
devices. The Discover option is only available when you upload devices.

Download
You can download devices using the Load Wizard. You can only download fully
mapped (hardware assigned) systems.

Connections

Ethernet NAE Passthru

The Ethernet NAE Passthru connection mode consists of three steps: Load Type,
Device Selection, and Summary. You can select which NAE to connect through to
perform the load operation.

Bluetooth Wireless
The Bluetooth Wireless connection mode consists of three steps: Load Type,
Device Selection, and Summary.

Loading Devices 259

Codes

Boot Code
The boot code is the start up code for the device. The boot code acts like a mini-
operating system in the device and supports the communications necessary to
download the Main Code. The boot code is a minimal size version of the main
code.

Main Code
The main code acts like an on-board library and gives the device information on
the modules. You need to update the main code whenever there is a change to a
module (used in the Application Code). Together the boot code and main code
make up the firmware.

Application Code
The application code tells the device the actual code/sequence and priorities of the
control strategy created in CCT. For example, definitions of the Inputs, Outputs,
Control Logic, and Network variables.

Code Download Order

When upgrading devices from one release to the next, you must download Boot
code before Main code and Application code to successfully upgrade the firmware
and application. If you do not download Boot code first, the MS/TP device may
become inoperable.
Required download order:
1. Boot code
2. Main code
3. Application code

260 CCT Help: Load Process

Steps
Uploading a Device
To upload a device:
1. Click Load. The Load Device Wizard appears with the Connection Screen
active.
2. Select Upload From Device and choose connection type, connection
parameters, and discovery type.
Note: For the Bluetooth Wireless connection, we recommend you keep the
Baud Rate default (38400).
3. Click Next.
Note: If you selected the Manual discovery type, CCT skips the Device
Selection Screen and the Load Summary Screen appears. Go to Step 6.
If you selected the Auto discovery type, go to Step 4.
4. When the Device Selection Screen appears, click Discover if the wizard does
not automatically begin the discovery process.
Note: Once the desired device appears in the list, click Stop.
5. Select a device from the list and click Next. The Load Summary Screen
appears.
6. Click Finish. The upload status appears.
Note: When the upload completes, the Finish button changes to Done. This
does not happen if you selected the Close wizard after successful load
check box on the Load Summary screen. Instead, the wizard closes and
you can skip Step 7.
7. Click Done.
Note: If the selected Controller Application File requires an upgrade, the
System Upgrade dialog box appears. For details on upgrading the file,
see the Upgrading System Files section.

Loading Devices 261

Downloading a Device
If you are downloading devices over the SA Bus, first download the individual
device to which you are connected. Then, download the remaining devices.
See Code Download Order if you are upgrading a device from one release to the
next.
To download a device:
1. Click Load. The Load Device Wizard appears with the Connection Screen
active.
2. Select Download To Device and choose connection type and connection
parameters.
3. Click Next. The Device Selection Screen appears.
4. Select the device to download and click Next. The Load Summary Screen
appears.
Note: The Discover option is not available during downloads because the
application code disables. Therefore, the Object code cannot be
downloaded to these devices. You can only download object codes
from IOMs on the FC Bus.
5. Select the code to download following the rules in the Code Download Order
section. See the Codes section for information on each code type.
6. Click Finish. The selected device code downloads.
Note: See the Status column of the Download Operation table and the Status
bar for information on the load progress and other status indicators.
Note: When the download completes, the Finish button changes to Done.
This does not happen if you selected the Close wizard after successful
load check box on the Load Summary screen. Instead, the wizard
closes and you can skip Step 7.
7. Click Done.

262 CCT Help: Load Process

Screens
Load Device Wizard
Table 10-84: Load Device Wizard
Field
Connection Screen
Load Type
Connection Type
Connection Parameters
Discovery (Upload Only)
Device Selection Screen
Discover (Upload Only)
Stop (Upload Only)
Device Table
Load Summary Screen
Device Information
Load Operation
Close wizard after successful
load
Previous
Next
Description
Allows you to specify which type of load to perform: upload or
download. Download options include boot code, main code,
and object code.
Allows you to select the type of connection to use:
• Ethernet
• Bluetooth
Ethernet NAE Passthru connection: Allows you to specify the
supervisory device and trunk number through which you want
to connect.
Bluetooth Wireless connection: Allows you to specify the
COM port and baud rate to use.
Allows you to choose the type of discovery process to use:
• Auto
• Manual (Allows you to select the specific address.)
Performs a device Discovery to find a device you can upload.
The Discovery option only returns field devices and IOMs that
are on the Field Bus.
Note: You can only discover devices for an upload. After a
Discovery, when you click Discover again, the list clears
from the Device Selection table.
Stops the Discovery process (upload only).
Displays the available devices, including:
• Device Name: Displays the name of the device.
• System Name: Displays the name of the system.
• Address: Displays the address of the device.
• Type: Displays the type of device.
• Status: Displays the status of the device.
Displays the following device information:
• Name: Displays the name of the device.
• Description: Displays a description of the device.
• Model: Displays the model number of the device.
• Maincode Version: Displays the main code version
• Bootcode Version: Displays the boot code version.
• System Name: Displays the system name.
• CPU Usage: Displays the CPU usage.
• Object Memory Usage: Displays the memory used by the
objects in the device.
• Status: Displays the device’s status.
• Device Address: Displays the address of the device.
Displays the load type, code type, and load status.
For the Download Operation, check boxes appear next to the
Code type (Boot, Main, and Application) for selection and the
version of the code also appears.
Closes the Load Device wizard after successfully completing
the load operation, when selected.
Moves to the previous screen of the wizard.
Moves to the next screen of the wizard.

Loading Devices 263

 Table 10-84: Load Device Wizard
Field Description
Finish/Done Finish starts the load.
Done appears in place of Finish after the load completes and is
used to close the wizard.
Cancel Closes the wizard without performing the load.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

264 CCT Help: Load Process

Chapter 11: CCT Help: Commissioning
Commissioning a System
Introduction
CCT commissioning provides you with the ability to commission your device with
or without a Controller Application File (.caf). In the Commissioning mode, you
can make passthru or wireless connections, work with the Test Mode, and balance
VAV boxes.
Note: If you are running the CCT Commissioning software, this section describes
the main tasks available to you. The CCT Commissioning Only Software
topic in the User Interface section describes this software version.

Concepts
System and Device Connections
There are two connection options available: Ethernet NAE Passthru and Bluetooth
Wireless.

Ethernet NAE Passthru Connection

CCT opens in Ethernet mode when you launch it from the Metasys system User
Interface (UI). The Ethernet mode allows you to specify which NAE (and trunk
number) to connect through to perform the commissioning operation. The device
Discovery option is available when you commission using the Application in
Controller.
Note: For the Ethernet NAE Passthru connection to work properly, you must
install SCT on the computer due to software components.

Bluetooth Wireless Connection

CCT opens in the Bluetooth wireless connection mode when you launch it from
the desktop icon. The Bluetooth Wireless Connection allows you to connect
through a BTCVT to a controller and access it through CCT. You must configure
your Bluetooth connectivity settings in the Commissioning Device Wizard menu
to set the COM Port and Baud Rate before you can use your Bluetooth connection.
The device Discovery option is available when you choose to commission using
the Application in Controller.

Commissioning a System 265

Balancer Tab
The Balancer tab appears in the Control View workspace and includes a
parameters table and task buttons to autocalibrate VAV boxes and set flow
constants. This tab appears in Commissioning mode only for VAV applications.
The task buttons are active only when in the Test mode; however, you do not need
to be in Test mode to edit the parameters table.
The parameters that appear on the Balancer tab depend on the setup of your system
and the .caf file. The parameters fall into the following categories:
• Mode - Indicates the current balancing modes (for example, for the
autocalibration and flow setpoint override commands).
• Duct - Indicates the values for flow and other balancing calculations. This
section is organized by duct type (supply, return, and so on). The number of
duct parameter sections appearing in this tab depends on the number of ducts in
the system (single duct or dual duct).
• Flow Setpoints - Indicates the flow setpoint values such as the heating/cooling
min/max flow.
The Balancer tab user interface is described in the Control View Screen topic of the
User Interface section. See the Using the Balancer Tab section for information on
tasks to perform in the Balancer tab.

Test Mode
The Test Mode allows you to command inputs, modules, and outputs to assist in
commissioning your system. During Test Mode, the controller being
commissioned is taken offline from the supervisory system to ensure that only the
commands from the CCT Commissioning session override the inputs and outputs.
You must exit Test Mode before you exit the Commissioning mode. See the
Working with the Test Mode section.

266 CCT Help: Commissioning

Steps
Making Connections

Making an Ethernet Passthru Connection

To make an Ethernet Passthru connection:
1. Open the Metasys system user interface.
2. From the Tools menu, select Field Device Tools > CCT (MSTP).
3. Select the device to make a Passthru connection. The Passthru Wizard screen
appears.
4. Follow the Wizard steps.
Note: If you create an Ethernet Passthru connection and let it run overnight, the
next day the connections do not work unless you shut down CCT and then
restart it. The policy file that is created is only good until midnight of the
day the Ethernet passthru connection was made.

Making a Bluetooth Wireless Connection

To make a Bluetooth wireless connection:
1. Open the CCT user interface.
2. Click Commission. The Commission Device Wizard appears.
3. Make your application and connection parameter selections and click Next.
4. Select the device and click Next. The Commission Device Summary dialog
box appears.
Note: Only defined devices appear in the selection list.

Commissioning a Device
To commission a device:
1. Click Commission. The Commission Device Wizard appears.
2. Choose the application type and the connection point information.
3. Click Next.
4. From the Device Selection screen, select a device.
Note: If the application type is Application in Controller and no devices
appear on the Device Selection screen, click Discover.
5. Click Next. The Commission Summary appears.
6. Click Finish. The application appears to be commissioned in the Control View.
Note: If the application type is Application in Controller, CCT uploads the
application from the selected device.

Commissioning a System 267

Control View Steps

Viewing Controller Information

You can view controller information for a single controller in Commissioning
mode. This option is not available in the Simulation mode. Use this procedure to
access information from the controller to which you are connected and
commissioning. You must open a Controller Application File (.caf) before viewing
controller information.
To view controller information for the controller, from the Tools menu, select
Controller Information. The Controller Information Wizard appears with the
information from the controller being commissioned. Click the Refresh button to
update the contents of the wizard.
Note: For information on viewing controller information from the Configuration
mode, see the Configuring a System section.

Commanding Items
You can command items in the Commissioning mode and Simulation mode. You
must be in Test mode to issue commands while commissioning. The controller
goes offline and the field point displays ???? as well as the value sent using the
Commands option. The commands you perform in Test mode are temporary. CCT
releases these commands when you leave Test mode in Commissioning mode. The
controller goes online, and the point value returns to its value. See Commanding
Items in the Simulating a System section.

Issuing Metasys Commands

You can issue Metasys Commands on inputs and outputs in the Commissioning
mode. Metasys Commands send commands (for example, adjust or override) as if
you performed them through the Metasys system User Interface. Metasys
commands are not released when you leave Commissioning mode. The value is
retained in the Metasys system at the priority level commanded. You can view and
clear the command from the Metasys system UI or from the Metasys Command
option in CCT.
To issue Metasys commands:
1. In the Control view, right-click on an Input or Output. The right-click menu
appears.
2. Select Metasys Commands. The parameter/attribute’s specific command
dialog box appears.
3. Make your selections.
4. Click Send.

268 CCT Help: Commissioning

Viewing and Modifying Details
You can view and modify information in the Details dialog box in the
Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Viewing
and Modifying Details in the Configuring a System section.

Viewing and Modifying Parameters

You can view and modify parameters/attributes in the Configuration mode,
Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying
Parameters in the Configuring a System section for more information.

Viewing Connections
You can view connections in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and
Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for more information.

Viewing a Module’s Logic

You can view logic in modules in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and
Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying a Module’s Logic in the
Configuring a System section for more information.

Showing and Hiding Involvement

To show and hide involvement:
1. Right-click on an output. The right-click menu appears.
2. Select Show Involvement. The magenta background color change indicates
which modules are affecting the selected output. See Control View Status
Colors and Icons in the User Interface section for more information.
3. To hide the involvement, right-click on the output again and select Hide
Involvement.

Commissioning a System 269

Commissioning Inputs

Modifying Offsets
To modify offsets:
1. Right-click on an input. The right-click menu appears.
2. Select Setup. The Setup Screen for Inputs appears.
3. Enter the desired offset value.
4. Click OK.

OR

1. Right-click on an input. The right-click menu appears.

2. Select View Details. The Details dialog box appears.
3. Click the Hardware View tab and select the Advanced Radio button.
4. Modify the offset attribute/parameter.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click Close.

270 CCT Help: Commissioning

Commissioning Outputs

Modifying the Change of Value Increment

You can modify the Change of Value increment to filter change update notices.
To modify the Change of Value increment:
1. Right-click on an output. The right-click menu appears.
2. Select Setup. The Setup Screen for Outputs appears.
3. Enter the desired COV value.
4. Click OK.

OR

1. Right-click on an output. The right-click menu appears.

2. Select View Details. The Details dialog box appears.
3. Click the Hardware View tab and select the Advanced Radio button.
4. Click Edit.
5. Modify the COV Inc attribute/parameter.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click Close.

Modifying the Polarity of Position Adjust Outputs (PAOs)

To modify the polarity of PAOs:
1. Right-click on an output. The right-click menu appears.
2. Select Setup. The Setup Screen for Outputs appears.
3. Enter the desired PAO value.
4. Click OK.

OR

1. Right-click on an output. The right-click menu appears.

2. Select View Details. The Details dialog box appears.
3. Click the Hardware View tab and select the Advanced Radio button.
4. Modify the polarity attribute/parameter.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click Close.

Commissioning a System 271

Logic View Steps

Viewing and Modifying Details

You can view and modify information in the Details dialog box in the
Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Viewing
and Modifying Details in the Configuring a System section for more information.

Showing and Hiding Connection Lines

Use the Trace Mode button to show and hide the Connection Lines in the
logic diagram.

Panning
You can pan in the logic view in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and
Commissioning mode. See Panning in the Configuring a System section for more
information.

Zooming
You can zoom in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning
mode. See Zooming in the Configuring a System section for more information.

Printing
You can print the logic diagram in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and
Commissioning mode. See Printing the Logic Diagram in the Configuring a
System section for more information.

272 CCT Help: Commissioning

Navigating between Control View and Logic View
You can navigate between the control view and a module’s logic view in the
Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Navigating
between Control View and Logic View in the Configuring a System section for
more information.

Working with the Test Mode

The Test Mode allows you to command inputs, modules, and outputs to assist in
commissioning your system. See the Test Mode section.

Starting the Test Mode

To start the Test Mode, on the Action menu, select Start Test Mode. When the Test
Mode is active, the header area appears with blue highlighting and states Test
Mode Active. You now have the ability to issue commands.

Modifying Outputs
You can view and modify output attributes/parameters in the Configuration mode,
Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying
Parameters in the Configuring a System section.

Stopping the Test Mode

To stop the test mode, on the Action menu, select Stop Test Mode.
Note: Stop test mode before you exit Commissioning mode. If you exit
Commissioning mode without stopping test mode, the controller stays
offline and the commanded value remains on the point. To resolve this
situation, enter Commissioning mode and start test mode. Then, stop test
mode and exit Commissioning mode.

Commissioning a System 273

Using the Balancer Tab
Note: The task buttons of the Balancer tab are active only when in the Test mode;
however, you do not need to be in Test mode to edit the parameters table.
The following steps describe a typical use of the Balancer tab:
1. Start the Test mode. See the Starting the Test Mode section.
2. Edit the VAV balancing parameters such as Flow Setpoints to the desired
values, if necessary. See the Editing the Balancing Parameters section.
3. Autocalibrate the VAV. See the Autocalibrating the VAV section.
4. Issue a Flow Override command to measure the flow in the space (for example,
drive the VAV box to the maximum cfm). See the Issuing a Flow Override
Command section.
• If the flow measurement is accurate, restore the flow as is. See the
Restoring Flow section.
• If the flow measurement is inaccurate, calculate the K-Factor with the new
measurement. See the Calculating the K-Factors section.
5. Exit the Test mode. See the Stopping the Test Mode section.

Editing the Balancing Parameters

To edit the balancing parameters:
1. Click the Edit button on the Balancer tab.
2. Modify the parameters as desired (for example, change the flow setpoints).
Note: Click Cancel to exit Edit mode without applying changes.
3. Click Apply. The changes are made and the system exits Edit mode.
Return to the Using the Balancer Tab section.

Autocalibrating the VAV

To autocalibrate the VAV:
1. Click the Auto Calibrate button on the Balancer tab. The Auto Calibrate
Command dialog box appears asking if you want to autocalibrate the device.
2. Click Send.
3. Monitor the Auto Calibrate Complete parameter in the Mode section of the
parameter table:
• When False, the autocalibration is in progress and the task buttons are
inactive.
• When True, the autocalibration is complete and the task buttons are active.
Note: Autocalibration takes approximately 60 seconds to complete, which is
the stroke time of the actuator over 90 degrees of travel.
Return to the Using the Balancer Tab section.

274 CCT Help: Commissioning

Issuing a Flow Override Command
To issue a flow override command:
1. Click the Flow Override button on the Balancer tab. The Flow Override
Command dialog box appears.
2. Select a value from the menu. For example, select Supply Duct Max to drive
the VAV to the maximum cfm.
3. Click Send to issue the command.
Return to the Using the Balancer Tab section.

Restoring Flow
To restore the flow:
1. Click the Flow Restore button on the Balancer tab. The Flow Restore
Command dialog box appears asking if you want to send the restore flow
command.
2. Click Send.
Return to the Using the Balancer Tab section.

Calculating the K-Factors

To calculate the K-Factors:
1. Click the Calculate K-Factors button on the Balancer tab. The Calculate K-
Factors dialog box appears.
2. Select the duct from the Duct Selection menu.
3. Enter the proper value in the Measured Flow text box.
4. Click Send. The values on the Balancer tab update according to this new value.
Return to the Using the Balancer Tab section.

Commissioning a System 275

Screens
This section describes screens specific to the Commissioning mode. For
information on screens that appear in both the Configuration mode and the
Commissioning mode, see the Configuring a System section for more information.

Commissioning Device Wizard

Table 11-85 through Table 11-87 describe the screens in the Commissioning
Device Wizard. See the Commissioning a Device section.
Table 11-85: Commission Device Wizard - Main Screen
Field Description
Choose Application Allows you to select either the current Controller Application
File (Current Application) or a Controller Application File in the
device (Application in Controller). When you select Application
In Controller, the wizard uploads the file from the device.
Connection Parameters Displays the default Baud Rate and COM Port information for
Bluetooth Wireless Connections. Keep the default Baud
(38400).
Displays Supervisory Device and Trunk number information for
Ethernet Passthru Connections.

Table 11-86: Commission Device Wizard - Device Selection Screen

Field Description
Device Name Displays the device name after the discovery process finishes.
System Name Displays the system name after the discovery process finishes.
Address Displays the controller’s address after the discovery process
finishes.
Type Displays the type after the discovery process finishes.
Status Displays the status after the discovery process finishes.
Previous Moves to the previous screen of the wizard.
Next Moves to the next screen of the wizard.
Finish Closes the wizard and starts Commissioning mode.
Cancel Closes the wizard without starting Commissioning mode.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

276 CCT Help: Commissioning

 Table 11-87: Commission Device Wizard - Commission Summary
Screen
Field Description
Device Information Displays information for the following:
• Name: Displays the name of the controller.
• Description: Displays a description for the controllers.
• Model: Displays the model number.
• Maincode Version: Displays the maincode version for the
controller.
• Bootcode Version: Displays the bootcode version for the
controller.
• System Name: Displays the system name for the controller.
• CPU Usage: Displays the CPU usage for the controller.
• Object Memory Usage: Displays the amount of memory
used by the controller.
• Status: Displays the status of the controller.
• Device Address: Displays the device address for the
controller.
Previous Moves to the previous screen of the wizard.
Next Moves to the next screen of the wizard.
Finish Closes the wizard and starts Commissioning mode.
Cancel Closes the wizard without starting Commissioning mode.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Setup Screen for Inputs

See the Modifying Offsets section.
Table 11-88: Setup Screen (Inputs)
Field Description
Offset Allows you to enter offset for the selected input.

OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the screen without starting Commissioning
mode.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Setup Screen for Outputs

See the Commissioning Outputs section.
Table 11-89: Setup Screen (Outputs)
Field Description
COV Incr Allows you to enter the Change of Value Increment for
the selected output.

Polarity Allows you to enter the polarity for the selected output.

OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.

Cancel Closes the screen without starting Commissioning
mode.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Commissioning a System 277

Controller Information Wizard
See the Viewing Controller Information section.
For information on viewing controller information from the Configuration mode,
see the Configuring a System section.
Table 11-90: Controller Information Wizard
Field Description
Name Displays the name of the controller.

Description Displays information for the controller.

Model Displays the model number for the controller.

Maincode Version Displays the firmware version for the controller.

Bootcode Version Displays the bootcode version for the controller.

System Name Displays the system name for the controller.

CPU Usage % Displays the CPU usage for the controller.

Object Memory Usage % Displays the memory usage for the controller.

Status Displays the status for the controller.

Device Address Displays the device address for the controller.

Refresh Updates the Controller Information Wizard.

Close Closes the Controller Information Wizard.

Balancer Tab
The Balancer tab user interface is described in the Control View Screen topic of the
User Interface section. See the Using the Balancer Tab section for information on
tasks to perform in the Balancer tab.
The following dialog boxes appear when performing the various tasks in the
Balancer tab:
• Auto Calibrate Command Dialog Box
• Flow Override Command Dialog Box
• Flow Restore Command Dialog Box
• Calculate K-Factors Command Dialog Box

278 CCT Help: Commissioning

Auto Calibrate Command Dialog Box
Table 11-91: Auto Calibrate Command Dialog Box
Field Description
Do you want to send Auto Calibrate Command?
Send Begins autocalibration.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without starting the autocalibration
process.

Flow Override Command Dialog Box

Table 11-92: Flow Override Command Dialog Box
Field Description
Attribute Displays the attribute being commanded. You cannot
edit this field.
Value Provides a list of values to command to the attribute (for
example, Normal or Close All).
Send Issues the Flow Override command.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without issuing the command.

Flow Restore Command Dialog Box

Table 11-93: Flow Restore Command Dialog Box
Field Description
Do you want to send Flow Restore Command?
Send Issues the Flow Restore command.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without issuing the command.

Calculate K-Factors Command Dialog Box

Table 11-94: Calculate K-Factors Command Dialog Box
Field Description
Duct Selection Lists the available ducts to command.
Measured Flow Allows you to enter the value measured during the flow
override.
Send Issues the command and calculates the K-Factor values.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without issuing the command.

Commissioning a System 279

280 CCT Help: Commissioning
Chapter 12: CCT Help: Commissioning
Performing a Box Flow Test
Introduction
Use the Box Flow Test to verify and diagnose the operation of VAV Single Duct
applications that run on the FC Bus. The Box Flow Test module provides the
timing, output control, and data-gathering functions for testing the flow control
performance of a VAV application. The Box Flow Test results are stored in the
VMA.
See Box Flow Test in the State Generators section for information on the Box
Flow Test module.

Concepts
Box Flow Test Overview
You can run the Box Flow Test on a single duct VAV application after you
download the initial application. The air handling unit must be running to
implement the Box Flow Test. After completion of the test, the error summary
report shows which devices and applications were not installed or set up correctly.
The Box Flow Test consists of two tabs: Setup/Progress and Results. You can
Discover the test results from the device. After you initiate the Box Flow Test, you
can disconnect from the network and return later to collect and review the results.

Performing a Box Flow Test 281

Steps
Performing a Box Flow Test
Before you perform a Box Flow Test, you must make a connection. See Making
Connections in the Commissioning a System section.
To perform a Box Flow Test:
1. On the Tools menu of CCT, select Start Box Flow Test. The Box Flow Test
screen appears.
2. Click Discover. In Bluetooth Wireless mode, the Communication
Configuration dialog box appears.
3. Enter the Bluetooth COM port and Baud Rate. The Box Flow Test begins to
Discover devices.
4. After the Discovery is complete, you can individually select the devices or use
the filters to select the devices for which to perform the Box Flow Test.
5. On the Edit menu, select Auto-set Starting Positions.
Note: The Starting Positions of the selected devices alternates between open
and close to prevent all VAV boxes from closing off to the air handling
unit.
6. Make necessary changes to the actuator stroke time, bidirectional test, and/or
display precision.
7. After you make your selections, click Begin Test. The Box Flow Test begins.

Reading Results
To read results after the Box Flow Test completes:
1. Select the devices (if they are not already selected).
2. Click Read Results. The Results tab enables.
Note: If the test is still in progress, it displays in the Setup/Progress tab in the
State column. Wait until the test completes and read the results again.

Saving the Results

To save the results, while reviewing the results in the Results tab, from the File
menu select Save. The results save to a .CSV file.

Canceling a Box Flow Test

To cancel a Box Flow Test, click the Cancel button in the Box Flow Test screen.

282 CCT Help: Commissioning

Screens
Box Flow Test Screen
Table 12-95: Box Flow Test
Field Description
NAE Displays the selected NAE. Displays only when you are connected
via Ethernet.
Trunk Displays the selected trunk. Displays only when you are connected
via Ethernet.
Setup/Progress Tab
Selection Indicates the devices to test.
Device Displays a list of devices containing a Box Flow Test module.
Device Address Displays the field device address.
Note: The DIP switch settings are not dependent on the tool
connection point.
System Displays the loaded device’s System name.
Starting Position Indicates the damper position set by the Box Flow Test at the start
of the test. You can modify the damper starting position.
State Displays the current (or last) state of the test for each device.
Operation Status Displays a summary of the test for each device.
Discover Launches the Field Trunk Selection dialog (if Ethernet) or
Auto-Discovers the connected field devices (if FCB or SAB).
Begin Test Starts the Box Flow Test.
Read Results Displays the Box Flow Test results for: State, Operation Status, and
Airflow readings on the Results tab.
Cancel Cancels the current process. For example, if you click Cancel during
Discovery, the Discovery process cancels. If you click Cancel after
you click Begin Test, the test terminates.
Results
Device Displays a list of devices containing a Box Flow Test module.
Device Address Displays the field device address.
System Displays the loaded device’s System name.
Max CFM Displays the maximum rated cubic feet per minute flow rate of the
VAV box. This can be used to compare to the flow values read for
100%.
Percent Columns Displays the airflow when the damper is open to that percentage.
(0% - 100%)
Actuator Stroke Time Displays the amount of time, in seconds, it takes the actuator to
move from the fully closed to fully opened position.
Bidirectional Test Indicates if the Box Flow Text is bidirectional or single. When the
Bidirectional Test is False, the test causes the damper to stroke only
in one direction from the starting point. When the Bidirectional Test
is True, the test causes the damper to make the return part of the
test.
Display Precision Displays the number of decimal places to display in the Max CFM
values. The default value is 0.
Exit Closes the Box Flow Test screen.

Performing a Box Flow Test 283

284 CCT Help: Commissioning
Chapter 13: CCT Help: Applications
Applications
Introduction
An application is a collection of the components that make up the control logic of a
system, including modules, logic blocks, custom logic, and hardware definition.
The Applications section of the CCT Help system describes the applications as
they are presented in the System Selection Wizard and as they are seen in the
Control View after being selected.
See the following application sections for details:
• Air Handling Unit Applications
• Fan Coil Applications
• Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications
• Heat Pump Applications
• VAV Applications
• Central Plant Applications
• Sideloop Applications (Sideloop button)
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.
The Custom Applications and Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only options
available from the File > New dialog box lay down blank Control View
workspaces where you can create specialized applications. See Creating Custom
Applications and Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications in
the Configuring a System section.
See the Configuring a System section for information on how to make selections in
the System Selection Wizard.
See the Application Descriptions section for a description of the type of
information provided in this Help system for the applications.

Applications 285
Application Descriptions
The application sections contain the following topics:
• Application Introduction
• Core Logic Modules
• Mechanical System Selection
• Control Logic Selection
Note: The Sideloop application has one Sideloop Selection screen instead of the
Mechanical System Selection and Control Logic Selection screens.

Application Introduction
This section describes the application and provides links to its detailed
descriptions.

Core Logic Modules

This section describes the modules that get automatically laid down by the
application, regardless of the selections you make in the wizard.
The modules are listed by type to identify where they appear in the Control View
(for example, Network Inputs and Output Controllers).

Mechanical System Selection

This section corresponds to the mechanical selections available in the Mechanical
System Selection screen of the System Selection Wizard. The Mechanical System
Selection section is broken down into groups of selections based on how they
appear in the wizard. Each group describes the selections available, any selection
dependencies, and the modules that get laid down by the selections.
The modules are listed by type to identify where they appear in the Control View
(for example, Network Inputs and Output Controllers). A category of modules is
listed only if modules of that type are laid down by the particular group of
selections, otherwise it is not included.

Control Logic Selection

This section corresponds to the control logic selections available in the Control
Logic Selection screen of the System Selection Wizard. The Control Logic
Selection section is broken down into groups of selections based on how they
appear in the wizard. Each group describes the selections available, any selection
dependencies, and the modules that get laid down by the selections.
The modules are listed by type to identify where they appear in the Control View
(for example, Network Inputs and Output Controllers). A category of modules is
listed only if modules of that type are laid down by the particular group of
selections, otherwise it is not included.

286 CCT Help: Applications

Chapter 14: CCT Help: Applications
Air Handling Unit Applications
Introduction
The Air Handling Unit applications provide selections that are capable of
controlling many different air handlers and control strategies. The selections for
the AHU applications have Mechanical System and Control System options like
other systems, but the selections are integrated together into the Mechanical
System Selection section. Input sensors are automatically loaded if required for
selected device or control options. The Control System Selection section provides
optional sensors, equipment, and monitored safeties.
See the sections specific to the AHU Application Type:
• Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
• Rooftop Unit Application
• Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

Air Handling Unit Applications 287

Mixed Air Single Duct Application
See the following sections for information on this application’s logic and
selections:
• Mixed Air Single Duct Core Logic
• Mixed Air Single Duct Mechanical System Selection
- Fans
- Economizer Damper(s)
- Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper
- Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature
- Temperature Control Strategy
- Occupancy Control
- Heat Recovery
- Coils (Preheat)
- Coils (Cooling)
- Coils (Reheat)
- Coils (Common Heating-Cooling)
- Humidification
- Dehumidification Control
- Optional Features
• Mixed Air Single Duct Control Logic Selection
- Optional Sensors
- Optional Equipment
- Monitored Safeties
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

288 CCT Help: Applications

Mixed Air Single Duct Core Logic

Modules (MASD)
All Mixed Air Single Duct Applications use the core logic listed below.
Network Inputs
• APP-MODE (Application Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
State Generation
• Application Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water
Flush application mode for separate connection to State Selection and
passes the remaining application modes to State Selection.
• Water System Flush Pass Through: This module passes the Water Flush
system mode to a separate State Selection input so that when water flush is
requested, the valves always open.
• Mixed Air Single Duct HR Sequencing
Output Control
• Heating Required LV
• Cooling Required LV

Air Handling Unit Applications 289

Mixed Air Single Duct Mechanical System Selection

Fans (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for the main fans.
The selection options for Fans are:
Supply Fan
• Single Speed
• Variable Speed
- Two Duct Static Pressure Sensors
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

290 CCT Help: Applications

 Return Fan
• Single Speed
• Variable Speed
- Volume Matching
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints
- Building Static Pressure
- Track Supply Fan
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Fan to Start First
- Supply
- Return

Air Handling Unit Applications 291

 • Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Press Control)
- Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
A Supply Fan is required (that is, it is selected by default). A Return Fan or Relief
Fan (only one) may also be optionally selected.
A Variable Speed Supply Fan is required to select a Variable Speed Return Fan.

292 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (MASD Fans)
The Fans selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• DAP-SP (Duct Static Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Supply Fan Status
with Manual Restart is selected, but a Unit Reset Switch (BI) is not
selected.
• FLOW-DIFF (Flow Differential Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control is selected, but
Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are not selected.
• OCCFLOW-DIFF (Occupied Flow Differential Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are
selected with Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching.
• UNOCCFLOW-DIFF (Unoccupied Flow Differential Setpoint): This
module is loaded when Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints
are selected with Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching.
• BLDGP-SP (Building Static Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Return Fan Building Static Pressure control or
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• DA1-P (Discharge Air Static Pressure 1): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• DA2-P (Discharge Air Static Pressure 2): This module is loaded when Two
Duct Static Pressure Inputs is selected with Variable Speed Supply Fan.
• SF-S (Supply Fan Status)
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Unit Reset Switch
(BI) is selected with Supply Fan Status with Manual Restart.
• DA-F (Discharge Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow
Measurement (Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control. The flow scaling is
configured by setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum
Value attributes.
• RA-F (Return Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow Measurement
(Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.

Air Handling Unit Applications 293

 • DA-VP (Discharge Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• RA-VP (Return Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• BLDG-P (Building Static Pressure): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Return Fan Building Static Pressure control or Variable Speed
Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) is selected.
• RF-S (Return Fan Status): This module is loaded when Return Fan Status is
selected. This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• RLF-S (Relief Fan Status): This module is loaded when Relief Fan Status
is selected. This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• RLF-BA (Relief Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) Alarm Management Belt
Alarm is selected.
• RLF-LO (Relief Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) Alarm Management
Lockout Switch is selected.
• RF-BA (Return Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Return
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• RF-LO (Return Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Return Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SF-BA (Supply Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Supply
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• SF-LO (Supply Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Supply Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) options are selected.
See the Inputs section.

294 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Discharge Flow Determination: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• Return Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity Pressure
(Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• VOLUMEMATCH-RANGE (Volume Match PID Process Range): This
module is loaded for Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
It determines the default PID proportional band for the volume matching
control loop and should be configured to the design flow of the Return Fan.
• Flow Differential Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when
Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are selected for
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• Return Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Return Fan, Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.
• Relief Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Press Control), Fan Status Loss of
Airflow Strategy is selected.
State Generation
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Supply Fan
Status is selected.
• Relief Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Variable Speed Relief Fan
(Bldg Static Press Control) Alarm Management is selected.
• Return Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Return Fan Alarm
Management is selected.
• Supply Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Supply Fan Alarm
Management is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 295

 Output Control
• Constant Capacity Supply Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan OnOff LV
• Supply Fan Percent Cmd LV: This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Supply Fan is selected.
• Constant Capacity Return Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Return Fan is selected.
• Variable Capacity Return Fan Volume Matching Control: This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching is selected.
• Return Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Return Fan Building Static Pressure is selected.
• Variable Capacity Return Fan Track Control: This module is loaded when
Return Fan Variable Speed Track Supply Fan is selected.
• Relief Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected.
Outputs
• SF-C (Supply Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Supply
Fan is selected.
• SF-O (Supply Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Supply Fan is selected.
• RF-C (Return Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Return Fan
is selected.
• RF-O (Return Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Return Fan is selected.
• RLF-C (Relief Fan Command): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected.
• RLF-O (Relief Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected.
See the Outputs section.

296 CCT Help: Applications

Economizer Damper(s) (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for the Economizer Damper(s). If no
economizer control (Free Cooling) is required, these options should not be selected
(use Two Position Min OA Damper instead).
The selection options for Economizer Damper(s) are:
• Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output
• Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs)
• EAD & RAD Proportional
- Separate Outputs
- Common Output
- Two Position OAD
• OAD & RAD Proportional
- Separate Outputs
- Common Output
- Two Position EAD
• Economizer Suitability
- Network Command
- Enthalpy Switch (BI)
- Outdoor Air
• Dry Bulb Temp Economizer
• Temp & Enthalpy Economizer
• Outdoor Air versus Return Air: This option compares outdoor air
with return air to switch the economizer.
• Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 Sensor
- Use Zone CO2 Sensor
- Use Return CO2 Sensor
Per ASHRAE Guideline16-2003 - Selecting Outdoor, Return, and Relief Dampers
for Air-Side Economizer Systems, OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate
Outputs is required if Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is
selected.
The OAD & RAD Proportional options can only be selected if Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 297

 Modules (MASD Economizer Dampers[s])
The Economizer Damper(s) selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OAD-MINPOS (Occupied Minimum Position for the Economizer
Dampers): This module is loaded when no dedicated Minimum Outdoor
Air Fan and/or Damper is selected.
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enable): This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Network Command is selected.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature shared via network): This module is
loaded when either of the Outdoor Air Economizer Suitability options is
selected and a physical Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected in
the Optional Sensors group of the Control System Selections.
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity shared via network): This module is loaded
when Temp & Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected and a physical
Outdoor Air Humidity input is not selected in the Optional Sensors group
of the Control System Selections.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enable): This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Enthalpy Switch (BI) is selected.
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy, Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy, Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected.
• ZN-Q (Zone Quality for CO2, CO, and others): This module is loaded
when Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by
CO2 Sensor using Zone CO2 Sensor is selected.
• RA-Q (Return Air Quality for CO2, CO, and others): This module is
loaded when Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset
by CO2 Sensor using Return CO2 Sensor is selected.
See the Inputs section.

298 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Economizer Availability
• MAD-RAMPRATE (Damper Ramp Rate): This floating-point Constant is
loaded to determine the rate at which the damper ramps open to its
minimum position during the startup process.
• Damper Minimum Position Determination: This module is loaded when no
dedicated Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper is selected.
• Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2: This module is loaded when
Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2
Sensor is selected.
• Econ Enable OA versus RA: This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Outdoor Air, Outdoor Air versus Return Air is selected.
Output Control
• Proportional OA Damper Control: This module is loaded when one of the
following three combinations of selections are made: 1) Common
Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output; 2) Separate Proportional Outputs
(3 AOs), but no Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching; 3) OAD &
RAD Proportional, but no Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press
Control).
• Proportional EA Damper Control for Volume Matching: This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Volume Match is selected with a Economizer
Damper selection of either Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) or EAD
& RAD Proportional.
• Proportional OA Damper Control for Relief Fan: This module is loaded
when OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate Outputs and Variable
Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) are selected.
• Two Position Exhaust Damper Control: This module is loaded when the
Two Position EAD option under OAD & RAD Proportional is selected.
• Damper Control Status LV

Air Handling Unit Applications 299

 Outputs
• MAD-O (Mixed Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output is selected.
• RAD-O (Return Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs), EAD & RAD Proportional with
Separate Outputs, or OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate Outputs is
selected.
• OAD-O (Outdoor Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when either
Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) or OAD & RAD Proportional is
selected.
• OAD-C (Outdoor Air Damper Command): This module is loaded when
EAD & RAD Proportional with Two Position OAD is selected.
• EAD-O (Exhaust Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) or EAD & RAD Proportional is
selected.
• EAD-C (Exhaust Air Damper Command): This module is loaded when
OAD & RAD Proportional with Two Position EAD is selected.
See the Outputs section.

300 CCT Help: Applications

Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for a dedicated Minimum Outdoor Air Damper
and/or a Minimum Outdoor Air Fan (Injection Fan) with optional damper.
The selection options for Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper are:
• Two Position Damper
• Proportional Damper
- Adjustable Minimum Position Outdoor Air Damper
• Single Speed Injection Fan
- Two Position Damper
• Variable Speed Injection Fan
- Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
- Flow Measurement (Scaled)
- Unreliable Flow Sensor Operation
• Close Damper - Turn Off Fan
• Open Damper - Fan Maximum Speed
- Two Position Damper
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

Air Handling Unit Applications 301

 - Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Damper End Switch
The Fan Status and Damper End Switch are available only for selection if
applicable (that is, if fan or damper is selected).

Modules (MASD Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper)

The Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper selection loads the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• MOADPOS-SP (Minimum Outdoor Air Damper Position): This module is
loaded when an Adjustable Minimum Position is selected for the
Proportional Minimum OA Damper.
• MOAFLOW-SP (Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Injection Fan is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• MOA-F (Min Outdoor Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow
Measurement (Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Injection Fan control. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• MOA-VP (Min Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded
when Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Injection Fan control.
• MOAF-S (Min Outdoor Air Fan Status): This module is loaded when Min
Outdoor Air Fan Status is selected. This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• MOAD-S (Min Outdoor Air Damper Status): This module is loaded when
Min Outdoor Air Damper End Switch is selected. This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• MOAF-BA (Minimum OA Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded
when Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• MOAF-LO (Minimum OA Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded
when Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.

302 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Minimum OA Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type with Variable
Speed Injection Fan.
• Min Outdoor Air Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.
State Generation
• Minimum OA Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Alarm
Management is selected.
Output Control
• Two Position Min OA Damper Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Damper is selected.
• Proportional Damper Minimum OA Flow Control: This module is loaded
when Proportional Damper is selected.
• Constant Capacity Fan Minimum OA Flow Control: This module is loaded
when Single Speed Injection Fan is selected.
• Variable Capacity Fan Minimum OA Flow Control: This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Injection Fan is selected.
Outputs
• MOAD-C (Min Outdoor Air Damper Command): This module is loaded
when Two Position Damper is selected either by itself or supporting an
Injection Fan.
• MOAD-O (Min Outdoor Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Proportional Damper is selected.
• MOAF-C (Min Outdoor Air Fan Command): This module is loaded when
either injection fan option is selected.
• MOAF-O (Min Outdoor Air Fan Output): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Injection Fan is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 303

Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature (MASD)
This selection loads logic that reduces the intake of outdoor air when the
temperature is low. This reduction is accomplished by closing dampers, reducing
the volume differential (if Variable Capacity Return Fan Volume Matching control
is selected), and turning off or closing two-position fans or dampers.
If a preheat coil is located downstream of the mixing plenum (that is, it is in the
mixed air), the Preheat Temperature (downstream of the coil) serves as the process
variable for this control strategy. Otherwise, the Mixed Air Temperature serves as
the process variable.
The control logic for the low limit strategy is embedded directly into the Output
Control modules and activated simply by connecting the appropriate setpoint and
process variable. The logic takes precedence over all logic other than Emergency
Modes.
This selection is allowed if any of the Economizer Damper, Minimum Outdoor Air
Fan, or Minimum Outdoor Air Damper options is selected.

Modules (MASD Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature)

The Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature selection loads the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Inputs
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature): This module serves as the low limit
process variable when a preheat coil is not located in the mixed air duct.
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature): This module serves as the low limit process
variable when a preheat coil is located in the mixed air duct.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is used as the
upper threshold of the low limit control logic.
• LT-PB (Low Limit Proportional Band): This floating-point Constant is
used as the range over which the outdoor air is reduced from its normal
operating values to the minimum that can be achieved by the application.

304 CCT Help: Applications

Temperature Control Strategy (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for the basic Temperature Control Strategy for
the application. The Discharge Air Control options (fixed setpoint and Reset from
Outdoor Air Temperature) are designed for providing air to separately controlled
zones. The Zone or Return Control options are designed for directly controlling a
single zone (whether the sensor is in the zone or in the return duct). For single zone
control, the application can optionally be configured to control the Discharge Air
Temperature to a setpoint reset based on the Zone or Return Air Temperature.
The selection options for Temperature Control Strategy are:
• Discharge Air Control
- Reset from Outdoor Air Temperature: This option loads a module that
uses four parameters to define the outside reset band and the associated
discharge setpoints.
- Alternate Reset From Outdoor Air Temperature: This option loads a
module that uses four parameters to define the outside reset band and the
associated setpoint and offset band.
• Zone or Return Control
- Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return: This options
resets the discharge air setpoint based on zone or return air temperature.
• Add Return/Zone Reset by OA: This option resets the zone/return air
setpoint based on the outdoor air temperature.
- Cycle During Occupied
- Return Air Temperature
- Zone Temperature
• Setpoint Adjust
- Common Setpoint Adjust
- Warm Cool Adjust
• Temp Occ Support
- Summer/Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift
If Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return is selected, Cycle During
Occupied cannot be selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 305

 Modules (MASD Temperature Control Strategy)
The Temperature Control Strategy selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• DAT-SP (Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded
when (fixed) Discharge Air Control is selected.
• RAT-SP (Return Air Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Return Air Temperature control is selected. This point serves as the
Network Setpoint input into the ZN-T Setpoint Determination module.
• ZNT-SP (Zone Network Temperature Setpoint): This setpoint is always
created. If no Setpoint Adjustment or Warm Cool Adjust is selected,
ZNT-SP provides a Zone Setpoint Adjustment for the Supervisory system.
If a Setpoint Input for the Network Sensor is created, ZNT-SP becomes the
local backup if the Supervisory system is not communicating.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when
Discharge Air Control or Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or
Return is selected. This module may also be loaded if needed for particular
coil control strategy.
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Return Air
Temperature control is selected.
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature): This module is loaded when Zone Temperature
control is selected.
• ZN-SP (local Zone Setpoint): This module is loaded when Common
Setpoint Adjust is selected.
• WC-ADJ (local Warmer/Cooler Adjust): This module is loaded when
Warm Cool Adjust is selected.
• ZN-TOCC (Zone Temporary Occupancy): This module is loaded when
Temp Occ Support is selected. This module is connected to the Occupancy
Mode Determination module.
See the Inputs section.

306 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Discharge Air Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when
Discharge Air Control or Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or
Return is selected.
• Discharge Air Setpoint Reset: This module is loaded when the Reset from
Outdoor Air Temperature option of Discharge Air Control is selected.
• ZN-T Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when Zone or Return
Control is selected.
• Summer Winter Compensation: This module is loaded when Summer/
Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift is selected.
• DA-T sp Reset by OA: This module is loaded when Discharge Air Control
Alternate Reset From Outdoor Air Temperature is selected.
• RA-T sp Reset by OA: This module is loaded when Zone or Return
Control, Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return, Add Return/
Zone Reset by OA is selected.
State Generation
• Start Stop Sequencing DA-T: This module is loaded when Discharge Air
Control or Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return is selected.
• Start Stop Sequencing Zone: This module is loaded when Zone or Return
Air Temperature Control is selected, but Discharge Air Temperature Reset
by Zone or Return is not selected.
• Zone Sequencing: This module is loaded when the Discharge Air
Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of Zone or Return Control is
selected.
Output Control
• Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded
when the Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of
Zone or Return Control is selected.
• Cascaded DA-T Setpoint LV: This module is loaded when the Discharge
Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of Zone or Return Control
is selected.
• Zone Heating Control Status LV: This module is loaded when the
Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of Zone or
Return Control is selected.
• Zone Cooling Control Status LV: This module is loaded when the
Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of Zone or
Return Control is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 307

Occupancy Control (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for Occupancy Mode Determinination.
The selection options for Occupancy Control are:
• Always Occupied
• Scheduled Occupancy
- Override Support
- Occupancy Switch (BI)
- Unoccupied Strategy
• Intermittent Night Operation
• Off during Unoccupied
If any options are selected for separate Occupied and Unoccupied Setpoints or
Temporary Occupancy, the Always Occupied option cannot be selected.

Modules (MASD Occupancy Control)

The Occupancy Control selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE: This module is loaded when Scheduled Occupancy is
selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• OCC-OVERRIDE: This module is loaded when Override Support is
selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• WC-C (WarmupCooldown command): This module is the input for when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected.
• ZN-T (network Zone Temperature): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected with the Discharge Air Control
temperature control strategy and a physical Zone Temperature input is not
selected in the Optional Sensors group of the Control System Selections.
• CLGUNOCC-SP (Night Cooling Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected with the Discharge Air Control
temperature control strategy.
• HTGUNOCC-SP (Night Heating Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected with the Discharge Air Control
temperature control strategy.
See the Network Inputs section.

308 CCT Help: Applications

 Inputs
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module is loaded when Occupancy
Switch (BI) is selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode
Determination module.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Always Occupied: This is an Enum Constant. In applications that are
always Occupied (when Enabled), the Always Occupied module is loaded
to provide a consistent source of data for other modules that require
Occupancy Mode information.
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• WarmupCooldown Pass Through: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• DA-T Unocc Status Determination: This module is loaded when both
Discharge Air Control and Intermittent Night Operation are selected or
when Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return is selected. For
Discharge Air Control applications, this module only sequences the
application during intermittent unoccupied night operation. For Zone or
Return control applications, it sequences during Warmup or Cooldown as
well.
• Zone Unoccupied Sequencing: This module is loaded when Zone or Return
Control is selected, but Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or
Return is not selected.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Occupancy Status Display): This module is loaded when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected and a Zone Temperature Sensor is also
loaded (either due to the Temperature Control Strategy or selected as an
Optional Sensor). It provides Occupancy Mode information for models of
the network sensor with a LED.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 309

Heat Recovery (MASD)
The selection options for Heat Recovery are:
Enable Type
• Dry Bulb Compare
• Enthalpy
Enthalpy Wheel
• Single Speed
- Modulated Bypass Dampers
• Variable Speed
- Bypass Damper BO
• Wheel Status
- Loss of Status Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Blocking Protection/Cleaning Mode: This option provides cleaning mode
functionality. If the wheel is off for an extended period, the wheel turns on for
a short time to keep the wheel free of dirt and dust.

310 CCT Help: Applications

 Glycol Loop
3-Way Valve
Proportional Actuator
Incremental Actuator
Circulation Pump
Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to a
motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of time
(for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor from
seizing up).

Air Handling Unit Applications 311

 Modules (MASD Heat Recovery)
The Heat Recovery selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HR-EN (Heat Recovery isAllowed)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when either Enable
Type option is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Enthalpy
Enable Type is selected.
• EA-T (Exhaust Air Temperature)
• EAHR-T (Exhaust Air Heat Recovery Temperature): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is selected or when Glycol Loop is selected
but not a 3-Way Valve (Circulation Pump only). This input serves as the
low limit process variable.
• GLY-T (Glycol Temperature): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected. This input serves as the low limit process
variable.
• HRW-S (Heat Recovery Wheel Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• HRP-S (Heat Recovery Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• HRP-LO (Heat Recovery Pump Lockout Switch BI): This module is
loaded when Glycol Loop Circulation Pump Alarm Management Lockout
Switch is selected.
• HRW-BA (Heat Recovery Wheel Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• HRW-LO (Heat Recovery Wheel Lockout Switch BI): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Lockout Switch is
selected.
• HRW-FAULT (Heat Recovery Wheel VFD Fault BI): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Frequency Converter
Fault is selected.
See the Inputs section.

312 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HRLL-SP (Heat Recovery Low Limit Setpoint)
• Heat Recovery Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Glycol Loop Circulation Pump, Pump Status is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel, Wheel Status is selected.
State Generation
• Heat Recovery Suitability Determination: This module is loaded when Dry
Bulb Enable Type is selected.
• Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination: This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Enable Type is selected.
• Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing
• Heat Recovery Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
Circulation Pump Alarm Management is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Alarms: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel
Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Heat Recovery Htg CS LV
• Enthalpy Wheel Control: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is
selected.
• Glycol Loop Control: This module is loaded when Glycol Loop is selected.
• Energy Wheel Two Pos Byp: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel
Variable Speed Bypass Damper BO is selected.
• Heat Recovery Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when
Glycol Loop Circulation Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Blocking Protection is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 313

 Outputs
• HROAFBD-O (Heat Recovery OA FBD AO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
• HREAFBD-O (Heat Recovery EA FBD AO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
• HRW-C (Heat Recovery Wheel Command): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed is selected.
• HR-O (Heat Recovery Output): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected.
• HRP-C (Heat Recovery Pump Command): This module is loaded when
Glycol Loop with 3-Way Valve is selected.
• HREAFBD-C (Heat Recovery Exhaust FBD BO): This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed Modulated Bypass Dampers is
selected.
• HROAFBD-C (Heat Recovery OA FBD BO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
See the Outputs section.

314 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (Preheat) (MASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Preheat coil. A Preheat coil may be
located in the Outdoor Air Duct (ahead of the mixing plenum). If this is the case, a
Preheat coil is always set to Control to Preheat Air Temperature. When in the
Mixed Air Duct, the coil may either be controlled by a dedicated sensor or
sequenced with the other devices. During startup, if a DA-T or PH-T sensor is
available, the Preheat coil is controlled by the LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint).
The selection options for Coils (Preheat) are:
Preheat
Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air
Location
• Outdoor Air
• Mixed air
- Sequenced with Main Control Strategy
- Control to Preheat Air Temperature
Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• Gas Bonnet Switch
• No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The
current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior.
• High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a
High Temperature alarm occurs.
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages

Air Handling Unit Applications 315

 Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Incremental Output
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Output
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

316 CCT Help: Applications

 - Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Face and Bypass Switchover
- Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- Based on Mixed Air Temperature
- Based on Network Input
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control: This option turns on
the coil pump if the outdoor air temperature is lower than the setpoint and
the unit is off. The preheat valve is modulated to control the leaving water
temperature.
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position

Air Handling Unit Applications 317

 The Preheat Gas Bonnet Switch is only supported for Zone or Return Control (not
Discharge Air Control) when the unit has opportunity to use it for triggering start
up. This is the case when Preheat is Sequenced with Main Control Strategy and
Cycle During Occupied or Intermittent Night Operation are selected. If these
options are not selected, the Preheat Gas Bonnet Switch may not be selected.
The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support including Face & Bypass Damper or
Circulation Pump controls.
The Face and Bypass Switchover option is applicable only when either a
Proportional or Incremental valve actuator is selected with Face and Bypass
Damper. This option specifies how to determine when the valve should be in
control (with the Damper at full face) and when the damper should be in control
(with the Valve fully open).
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either Proportional or Incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Modules (MASD Coils [Preheat])

The Coils (Preheat) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• PH-EN (Preheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Preheat
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point is
the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall below before
heating is enabled.
• FBPD-SWO (Network Face & Bypass Switchover): This module is loaded
when Face and Bypass Switchover Based on Network Input is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature): This module is loaded when Control to
Preheat Air Temperature is selected or when the Preheat Coil is in the
Outdoor Air (and Control to Preheat Air Temperature is the only control
option permitted).
• PHBS-S (Preheat Bonnet Switch Status): This module is loaded when the
Preheat Gas Bonnet Switch is selected.
• PHWE-T (Preheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.

318 CCT Help: Applications

 • PHWL-T (Preheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• PHP-S (Preheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Face and
Bypass Switchover Based on Mixed Air Temperature is selected.
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Remain
in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected and Preheat Temperature is not
otherwise loaded.
• PHP-LO (Preheat Pump Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is
selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when a
process variable is available for Low Limit control of the Preheat Coil
during Startup (either DA-T or PH-T) or for when any Coil has the Remain
in Control Shutdown Control options selected.
• PHT-SP (Preheat Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Control to Preheat Air Temperature is selected or when the Preheat Coil is
in the Outdoor Air (and Control to Preheat Air Temperature is the only
control option permitted).
• Preheat Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Preheat Availability Determination
• Preheat Sequencing: This module is loaded when Control to Preheat Air
Temperature is selected or when the Preheat Coil is in the Outdoor Air (and
Control to Preheat Air Temperature is the only control option permitted).
• Preheat Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Hot Water or Steam
Coil Pump Alarm Management is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 319

 Output Control
• Preheat Control Status LV
• Preheat Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Staged Preheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Preheat is
selected.
• Preheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of Staged Preheat are selected.
• Preheat Percent Cmd LV: This module is loaded when the Preheat Gas
Bonnet Switch is selected.
• MSC Staged Preheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat.
• Preheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Preheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Sequenced Valves Preheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• FBPD Proportional Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when the
Face and Bypass Damper option for Proportional Actuator or Incremental
Actuator is selected.
• Proportional Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator are selected (and Two
Valves and Face and Bypass Damper are not selected).
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• Preheat Proportional Valve Output: This module is loaded when Loss of
Airflow Strategy Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control is
selected.
• Preheat Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.

320 CCT Help: Applications

 Outputs
• PHX-C (Preheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• PH-O (Preheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (but not the Two Valves
option).
• PH1-O (Preheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• PH2-O (Preheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• PH-C (Preheat Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• PHFBD-O (Preheat Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• PHP-C (Preheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Preheat
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 321

Coils (Cooling) (MASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Cooling coil.
The selection options for Coils (Cooling) are:
Cooling
Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air
Staged Cooling
• Device Rotation
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Chilled Water
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Actuator
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

322 CCT Help: Applications

 - Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
Cooling cannot be selected if Common Heating-Cooling is selected.
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 323

 Modules (MASD Coils [Cooling])
The Coils (Cooling) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• CLG-EN (Cooling isAvailable): This module is loaded when Cooling
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• CLGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Cooling Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point is
the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must rise above before
cooling is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CHWE-T (Chilled Water Entering Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CHWL-T (Chilled Water Leaving Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CP-S (Cooling Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• Cooling Pump Lockout Switch BI: This input is loaded when Chilled
Water Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Cooling Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Chill Water Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Availability Determination
• Cooling Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Chilled Water Coil
Pump Alarm Management is selected.

324 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Cooling Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Control Status LV
• Staged Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Staged Cooling is
selected.
• Cooling Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of Staged Cooling are selected.
• MSC Staged Cooling X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Cooling.
• Cooling X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Cooling and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Cooling X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Cooling and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Proportional Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• Cooling Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Chilled
Water Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• CLGX-C (Cooling X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Cooling. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• CLG-O (Cooling Output): This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• CLG-C (Cooling Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• CLGFBD-O (Cooling Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• CP-C (Cooling Pump Command): This module is loaded when Cooling
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 325

Coils (Reheat) (MASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Reheat coil.
The selection options for Coils (Reheat) are:
Reheat
Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air
Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• Gas Bonnet Switch
• No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The
current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior.
• High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a
High Temperature alarm occurs.
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
• Incremental Output
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status

326 CCT Help: Applications

 • Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position

Air Handling Unit Applications 327

 Reheat cannot be selected if Common Heating-Cooling is selected.
The Reheat Gas Bonnet Switch is only supported for Zone or Return Control (not
DA-T Reset) when the unit has opportunity to use it for triggering start up. This is
the case when Cycle During Occupied or Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
In addition, if a Preheat coil is selected and Sequenced with the Main Control
Strategy the Reheat Gas Bonnet Switch is not allowed.
The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support including Face & Bypass Damper or
Circulation Pump controls.
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Modules (MASD Coils [Reheat])

The Coils (Reheat) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• RH-EN (Reheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Reheat Lockout
from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point is
the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall below before
heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• HTGBS-S (Reheat Bonnet Switch Status): This module is loaded when the
Reheat Gas Bonnet Switch is selected.
• RHWE-T (Reheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHWL-T (Reheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHP-S (Reheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Remain
in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• Reheat Pump Lockout Switch BI: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.

328 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• Reheat Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Availability Determination
• Reheat Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Hot Water or Steam
Coil Pump Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Reheat Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Control Status LV
• Staged Reheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Reheat is
selected.
• Reheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more stages
of Staged Reheat are selected.
• Reheat Percent Cmd LV: This module is loaded when the Reheat Gas
Bonnet Switch is selected.
• MSC Staged Reheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat.
• Reheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Reheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Sequenced Valves Reheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 329

 • Proportional Valve Reheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (and Two Valves
is not selected).
• Reheat Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• HTGX-C (Reheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• RH-O (Reheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (but not the Two Valves
option).
• HTG1-O (Reheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• HTG2-O (Reheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• RHP-C (Reheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Reheat
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

330 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) (MASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Common Heating-Cooling (also
known as 2-pipe) coil.
The selection options for Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) are:
Common Heating-Cooling
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Actuator
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).

Air Handling Unit Applications 331

 • Summer/Winter Switchover Strategy
- Local Switch (BI)
- Network
- Supply Water Temperature
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
Common Heating-Cooling cannot be selected if either Cooling or Reheat is
selected.
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

332 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (MASD Coils [Common Heating-Cooling])
The Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) selection loads the following modules in
these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• HC-EN (2 Pipe isAvailable)
• SUMWIN-C (SummerWinter): This module is loaded when the Network
option for Summer/Winter Switchover Strategy is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• SUMWIN-S (Summer/Winter Mode Status): This module is loaded when
the Local Switch (BI) option for Summer/Winter Switchover Strategy is
selected.
• HCWE-T (Htg/Clg Entering Water Temperature): This module is loaded
when the Supply Water Temperature option for Summer/Winter
Switchover Strategy is selected or when selected as a monitor only input.
• HCWL-T (Htg/Clg Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• HCP-S (Heating/Cooling Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Remain
in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• HCP-LO (Heating/Cooling Pump Lockout Switch, 2 Pipe Pump Lockout
Switch BI): This module is loaded when Coil Pump Alarm Management
Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• SummerWinter Mode Determination: This module is loaded when the
Supply Water Temperature option for Summer/Winter Switchover Strategy
is selected.
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• 2 Pipe Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 333

 State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• 2 Pipe isAvailable Pass Through
• 2 Pipe Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Coil Pump Alarm
Management is selected.
Output Control
• 2 Pipe Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• 2 Pipe Heating Control Status LV
• 2 Pipe Cooling Control Status LV
• Proportional Valve 2 Pipe Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• FBPD 2 Position Valve 2 Pipe Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• 2 Pipe Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Coil Pump
Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• HC-O (Heating/Cooling Output): This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• HC-C (Heating/Cooling Command): This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• HCFBD-O (Heating/Cooling Face & Bypass Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• HCP-C (Heating/Cooling Pump Command): This module is loaded when
Heating/Cooling Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

334 CCT Help: Applications

Humidification (MASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a humidifier if present.
The selection options for Humidification are:
• Staged
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the humidifier.
• Steam Proportional Valve
- Isolation Valve
• Modulated Packaged Unit
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier).
• Scrubber: This option is for a scrubber humidifier, which is a shower head,
pump, and basin located in the ductwork. This type of humidifier requires
3 BOs; a pump BO, a drain valve BO, and a BO to close the fill valve. The
drain valve and fill valve BOs should actuate together (if draining, close the
inlet valve and disable the pump). The operational water level is maintained by
a mechanical float valve.
- Drain Valve: This option provides an output for the drain valve and an
output for the fill valve.
• Open valve if scrubber is inactive: This option provides monitoring
of and indicates the status of the pump command and a network input to
open the drain valve. If the network input requests the valve to open or
if the pump command has been off for a period of time, the drain valve
opens. If the pump is required to start, the drain valve closes for a
period of time to allow the sump to fill before starting the pump.
• Open valve on Network Input
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier).
• Control Sensor
- Zone Humidity
• During Unoccupied Mode
- Return Air Humidity
• Discharge Humidity High Limit Control

Air Handling Unit Applications 335

 The During Unoccupied Mode option is applicable only when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.

Modules (MASD Humidification)

The Humidification selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HUM-EN (Humidification isAvailable)
• BASIN-C (Drain Basin): This module is loaded when Scrubber Drain
Valve Open valve on Network Input is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): This module is loaded when Zone Humidity is
selected for the humidification process variable.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Return Air
Humidity is selected for the humidification process variable.
• DA-H (Discharge Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Discharge
Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HUM-SP (Humidification Setpoint): This is a floating-point Constant.
• DAH-SP (Discharge Air Humidity Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when Discharge Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
State Generation
• Humidification Sequencing
• Humidification isAvailable Pass Through

336 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Humidity Control Status LV
• Staged Humidification Control: This module is loaded when Staged
Humidification is selected.
• Humidification Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or
more stages of Staged Humidification are selected.
• MSC Staged Humidification X: This module is loaded when X number of
stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
• Proportional Steam Humidification Control: This module is loaded when
Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• Packaged Humidifier Control: This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• Humidity Scrubber Output: This module is loaded when Scrubber is
selected.
Outputs
• HUMX-C (Humidification X Command): This module is loaded when a
number of stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
One Output is loaded per stage.
• HUM-O (Humidifier Output): This module is loaded when Steam
Proportional Valve or Modulated Packaged Unit is selected.
• HUM-C (Humidifier Command): This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• STMISO-C (Steam Isolation Valve Command): This module is loaded
when the Isolation Valve option for Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• HDV-C (Drain Valve BO): This module is loaded when Scrubber Drain
Valve is selected.
• HFV-C (Fill Valve BO): This module is loaded when Scrubber is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 337

Dehumidification Control (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for dehumidification control.
The selection options for Dehumidification Control are:
• Zone Humidity
• Return Air Humidity
Dehumidification cannot be selected unless both Cooling and Reheat are selected.

Modules (MASD Dehumidification Control)

The Dehumidification Control selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Inputs
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): This module is loaded when Zone Humidity is
selected for the dehumidification process variable.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Return Air
Humidity is selected for the dehumidification process variable.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• DEHUM-SP (Dehumidification Setpoint): This is a floating-point
Constant.
State Generation
• Dehumidification Sequencing

338 CCT Help: Applications

Optional Features (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for controlling the operation of the application.
The Unit Enable logic includes the option to delay startup after controller restart
(Power Fail Restart).
The selection options for Optional Features are:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.
• Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based
on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Enable Switch is selected, then when the
Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Unit Enable Switch (BI): This option determines whether the application
operates based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected, then
when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Power Fail Restart: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator module. When this option is selected, after a
restart (power cycle, controller download, or manual restart command), the
application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time
(default = 60 seconds).

Air Handling Unit Applications 339

 Modules (MASD Optional Features)
The Optional Features selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
• UNITEN-MODE (Unit Enable Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• UNITEN-S (Unit Enable Toggle Switch)
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the position of the damper (EAD-O, MAD-O, OAD-O, or RAD-O) and
set the state/speed of the supply fan (SF-C/SF-O), return fan (RF-C/RF-O),
relief fan (RLF-C/RLF-O), and min outdoor air fan (MOAF-C/MOAF-O,
if present) during a call for Smoke Control.
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when the Unit Enable
Mode or Switch (BI) is selected or when Power Fail Restart is selected.

340 CCT Help: Applications

Mixed Air Single Duct Control Logic Selection

Optional Sensors (MASD)

These selections provide the option for loading extra, monitor-only sensors.
The selection options for Optional Sensors are:
• Outdoor Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Minimum Outdoor Air
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Preheat Air Temperature
• Mixed Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Discharge Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Static Pressure
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
- Minimum Flow Protection For Staged Heating

Air Handling Unit Applications 341

 • Return Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Static Pressure
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Relief Air
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Zone
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Misc
- Building Static Pressure
- Heat Recovery Air Temperature
If a Sensor is required for one of the selections made in the Mechanical System
Selection, the option is not available here.
The Minimum Flow Protection for Staged Heating can be selected if Staged
Preheat (in Mixed Air) or Staged Reheat is selected and the Discharge Flow is
available (either due to selecting Return Fan Volume Matching of an optional
Discharge Flow sensor).

342 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (MASD Optional Sensors)
The Optional Sensors selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded when a physical
Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected.
• FLOW-LL (Airflow Low Limit): This module is loaded when Minimum
Flow Protection For Staged Heating is selected. It is the minimum
discharge flow required before staged heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature)
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity)
• OA-Q (Outdoor Air Quality)
• OA-VP (Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure)
• OA-F (Outdoor Air Flow): The point measurement is scaled using AI
Output Range High.
• MOA-VP (Min Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure)
• MOA-F (Min Outdoor Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting
the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature)
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature)
• MA-H (Mixed Air Humidity)
• MA-Q (Mixed Air Quality)
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature)
• DA-H (Discharge Air Humidity)
• DA-Q (Discharge Air Quality)
• DA1-P (Discharge Air Static Pressure 1)
• DA-VP (Discharge Air Velocity Pressure)
• DA-F (Discharge Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the
AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature)
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity)
• RA-Q (Return Air Quality)
• RA-P (Return Air Static Pressure)
• RA-VP (Return Air Velocity Pressure)

Air Handling Unit Applications 343

 • RA-F (Return Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI
object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature)
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity)
• ZN-Q (Zone Quality)
• BLDG-P (Building Static Pressure)
• HR-T (Heat Recovery Temperature)
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Outdoor Air Flow Calculation
• Minimum OA Flow Calculation
• Discharge Flow Calculation
• Return Flow Calculation
• Relief Flow Calculation
State Generation
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Minimum Flow
Protection For Staged Heating is selected.

344 CCT Help: Applications

Optional Equipment (MASD)
These selections provide monitor only sensors for an optional pre-filter and/or
final filter.
The selection options for Optional Equipment are:
• Pre-Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor
• Final Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor

Modules (MASD Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• PFILT-S (PreFilter Status)
• PFILT-DP (PreFilter Diff Pressure)
• FFILT-S (Final Filter Status)
• FFILT-DP (Final Filter Diff Pressure)
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 345

Monitored Safeties (MASD)
These selections provide inputs for monitoring equipment safeties. The High and
Low Static Pressure Switch inputs and High and Low Temperature Switch inputs
are connected to the Emergency Mode Sequencer and shut down the application
when tripped.
The selection options for Monitored Safeties are:
• Discharge
- High Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Return
- Low Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Low Limit Temperature Switch
• High Limit Temperature Switch
• Humidity Alarm

Modules (MASD Monitored Safeties)

The Monitored Safeties selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• DAPHI-A (Discharge Air High Duct Pressure)
• DA-SD (Discharge Air Smoke Alarm)
• RAPLO-A (Return Air Low Duct Pressure)
• RA-SD (Return Air Smoke Alarm)
• LT-A (Low Temperature Alarm)
• HT-A (High Temperature Alarm)
• HUMHI-A (Humidity High Limit)
See the Inputs section.

346 CCT Help: Applications

Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
See the following sections for information on this application’s logic and
selections:
• Mixed Air Dual Duct Core Logic
• Mixed Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection
- Fans
- Economizer Damper(s)
- Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper
- Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature
- Temperature Control Strategy
- Occupancy Control
- Heat Recovery
- Coils (Preheat)
- Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck)
- Coils (Heating - Hot Deck)
- Humidification
- Optional Features
• Mixed Air Dual Duct Control Logic Selection
- Optional Sensors
- Optional Equipment
- Monitored Safeties
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Air Handling Unit Applications 347

Mixed Air Dual Duct Core Logic

Modules (MADD)
All Mixed Air Dual Duct Applications use the core logic listed below.
Network Inputs
• APP-MODE (Application Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CD-T (Cold Deck Temperature)
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air)
• Application Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water
Flush application mode for separate connection to State Selection and
passes the remaining application modes to State Selection.
• Water System Flush Pass Through: This module passes the Water Flush
system mode to a separate State Selection input so that when water flush is
requested, the valves always open.
• Mixed Air Cold Duct Sequencing
Output Control
• Heating Required LV
• Cooling Required LV

348 CCT Help: Applications

Mixed Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection

Fans (MADD)
These selections provide the logic for the main fans.
The selection options for Fans are:
Supply Fan
• Single Speed
• Variable Speed
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

Air Handling Unit Applications 349

 Return Fan
• Single Speed
• Variable Speed
- Volume Matching
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Calculate Discharge Flow from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors
• Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints
- Building Static Pressure
- Track Supply Fan
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Fan to Start First
- Supply
- Return

350 CCT Help: Applications

 Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Press Control)
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
A Supply Fan is required (that is, it is selected by default) as well as an optional
Return or Relief Fan.
A Variable Speed Supply Fan is required in order to select a Variable Speed
Return Fan.

Modules (MADD Fans)

The Fans selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• DAP-SP (Duct Static Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded for the
Variable Speed Supply Fan.
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Supply Fan Status
with Manual Restart is selected, but a Unit Reset Switch (BI) is not
selected.
• FLOW-DIFF (Flow Differential Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control is selected, but
Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints is not selected.
• OCCFLOW-DIFF (Occupied Flow Differential Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are
selected with Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching.

Air Handling Unit Applications 351

 • UNOCCFLOW-DIFF (Unoccupied Flow Differential Setpoint): This
module is loaded when Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints
are selected with Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching.
• BLDGP-SP (Building Static Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Return Fan Building Static Pressure control or
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CD-P (Cold Deck Static Pressure): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• HD-P (Hot Deck Static Pressure): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• SF-S (Supply Fan Status)
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Unit Reset Switch
(BI) is selected with Supply Fan Status with Manual Restart.
• CD-F (Cold Deck Flow): This module is loaded when Flow Measurement
(Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow is calculated
from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• HD-F (Hot Deck Flow): This module is loaded when Flow Measurement
(Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow is calculated
from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• DA-F (Discharge Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow
Measurement (Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow
is measured directly. The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI
object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• RA-F (Return Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow Measurement
(Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• CD-VP (Cold Deck Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control and
Discharge Flow is calculated from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.

352 CCT Help: Applications

 • HD-VP (Hot Deck Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control and
Discharge Flow is calculated from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• DA-VP (Discharge Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control and
Discharge Flow is measured directly.
• RA-VP (Return Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• BLDG-P (Building Static Pressure): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Return Fan Building Static Pressure control or Variable Speed
Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) is selected.
• RF-S (Return Fan Status): This module is loaded when Return Fan Status is
selected. This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• RLF-S (Relief Fan Status): This module is loaded when Relief Fan Status
is selected. This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• RLF-BA (Relief Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) Alarm Management Belt
Alarm is selected.
• RLF-LO (Relief Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) Alarm Management
Lockout Switch is selected.
• RF-BA (Return Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Return
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• RF-LO (Return Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Return Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SF-BA (Supply Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Supply
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• SF-LO (Supply Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Supply Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) options are selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 353

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Discharge Flow Determination Cold Deck and Hot Deck Flow together to
determine the Discharge Flow: This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control with Discharge Flow calculated from
Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• Cold Deck Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow
is calculated from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• Hot Deck Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity Pressure
(Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow is calculated
from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• Discharge Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow
is measured directly.
• Return Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity Pressure
(Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• VOLUMEMATCH-RANGE (Volume Match PID Process Range): This
module is loaded for Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
It determines the default PID proportional band for the volume matching
control loop and should be configured to the design flow of the Return Fan.
• Flow Differential Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when
Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are selected for
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• Return Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Return Fan, Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.
• Relief Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Press Control), Fan Status Loss of
Airflow Strategy is selected.
State Generation
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Supply Fan
Status is selected.
• Relief Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Variable Speed Relief Fan
(Bldg Static Press Control) Alarm Management is selected.
• Return Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Return Fan Alarm
Management is selected.
• Supply Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Supply Fan Alarm
Management is selected.

354 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Constant Capacity Supply Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan OnOff LV
• Supply Fan Percent Cmd LV: This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Supply Fan is selected.
• Constant Capacity Return Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Return Fan is selected.
• Variable Capacity Return Fan Volume Matching Control: This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching is selected.
• Return Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Return Fan Building Static Pressure is selected.
• Variable Capacity Return Fan Track Control: This module is loaded when
Return Fan Variable Speed Track Supply Fan is selected.
• Relief Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected.
Outputs
• SF-C (Supply Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Supply
Fan is selected.
• SF-O (Supply Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Supply Fan is selected.
• RF-C (Return Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Return Fan
is selected.
• RF-O (Return Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Return Fan is selected.
• RLF-C (Relief Fan Command): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected.
• RLF-O (Relief Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 355

Economizer Damper(s) (MADD)
These selections provide the logic for the Economizer Damper(s). If no
economizer control (also known as Free Cooling) is required, these options should
not be selected (use Two Position Min OA Damper instead).
The selection options for Economizer Damper(s) are:
• Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output
• Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs)
• EAD & RAD Proportional
- Separate Outputs
- Common Output
- Two Position OAD
• OAD & RAD Proportional
- Separate Outputs
- Common Output
- Two Position EAD
• Economizer Suitability
- Network Command
- Enthalpy Switch (BI)
- Outdoor Air
• Dry Bulb Temp Economizer
• Temp & Enthalpy Economizer
• Outdoor Air versus Return Air: This option compares outdoor air
with return air to switch the economizer.
• Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 Sensor
- Use Zone CO2 Sensor
- Use Return CO2 Sensor
Per ASHRAE Guideline16-2003 - Selecting Outdoor, Return, and Relief Dampers
for Air-Side Economizer Systems, OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate
Outputs is required if Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is
selected.
OAD & RAD Proportional is only allowed if Variable Speed Return Fan Volume
Matching is selected.

356 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (MADD Economizer Damper[s])
The Economizer Damper(s) selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OAD-MINPOS (occupied minimum position for the Economizer
dampers): This module is loaded when no dedicated Minimum Outdoor Air
Fan and/or Damper is selected.
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enable): This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Network Command is selected.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature shared via network): This module is
loaded when either Outdoor Air Economizer Suitability is selected and a
physical Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected in the Optional
Sensors group of the Control System Selections.
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity shared via network): This module is loaded
when Temp & Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected and a physical
Outdoor Air Humidity input is not selected in the Optional Sensors group
of the Control System Selections.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enable): This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Enthalpy Switch (BI) is selected.
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy, Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy, Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected
• ZN-Q (Zone Quality for CO2, CO, and others): This module is loaded
when Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by
CO2 Sensor using Zone CO2 Sensor is selected.
• RA-Q (Return Air Quality for CO2, CO, and others): This module is
loaded when Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset
by CO2 Sensor using Return CO2 Sensor is selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 357

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Economizer Availability Determination
• MAD-RAMPRATE (Damper Ramp Rate): This floating-point Constant
determines the rate at which the damper ramps open to its minimum
position during the startup process.
• Damper Minimum Position Determination: This module is loaded when no
dedicated Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper is selected.
• Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2: This module is loaded when
Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2
Sensor is selected.
• Econ Enable OA versus RA: This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Outdoor Air, Outdoor Air versus Return Air is selected.
Output Control
• Proportional OA Damper Control: This module is loaded when one of the
following three combinations of selections are made: 1) Common
Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output; 2) Separate Proportional Outputs
(3 AOs), but not Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching; 3) OAD &
RAD Proportional but not Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press
Control).
• Proportional EA Damper Control for Volume Matching: This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Volume Match is selected with an
Economizer Damper selection of either Separate Proportional Outputs (3
AOs) or EAD & RAD Proportional.
• Proportional OA Damper Control for Relief Fan: This module is loaded
when OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate Outputs and Variable
Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) are selected.
• Two Position Exhaust Damper Control: This module is loaded when the
Two Position EAD option under OAD & RAD Proportional is selected.
• Damper Control Status LV

358 CCT Help: Applications

 Outputs
• MAD-O (Mixed Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output is selected.
• RAD-O (Return Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs), EAD & RAD Proportional with
Separate Outputs, or OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate Outputs is
selected.
• OAD-O (Outdoor Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when either
Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) or OAD & RAD Proportional is
selected.
• OAD-C (Outdoor Air Damper Command): This module is loaded when
EAD & RAD Proportional with Two Position OAD is selected.
• EAD-O (Exhaust Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) or EAD & RAD Proportional is
selected.
• EAD-C (Exhaust Air Damper Command): This module is loaded when
OAD & RAD Proportional with Two Position EAD is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 359

Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper (MADD)
These selections provide the logic for a dedicated Minimum Outdoor Air Damper
and/or a Minimum Outdoor Air Fan (Injection Fan) with optional damper.
The selection options for Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper are:
• Two Position Damper
• Proportional Damper
- Adjustable Minimum Position Outdoor Air Damper
• Single Speed Injection Fan
- Two Position Damper
• Variable Speed Injection Fan
- Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
- Flow Measurement (Scaled)
- Unreliable Flow Sensor Operation
• Close Damper - Turn Off Fan
• Open Damper - Fan Maximum Speed
- Two Position Damper
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

360 CCT Help: Applications

 - Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Damper End Switch
The Fan Status and Damper End Switch are available only for selection if
applicable (that is, if fan or damper is selected).

Modules (MADD Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper)

The Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper selection loads the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• MOADPOS-SP (Minimum Outdoor Air Damper Position): This module is
loaded when an Adjustable Minimum Position is selected for the
Proportional Minimum OA Damper.
• MOAFLOW-SP (Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Injection Fan is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• MOA-F (Min Outdoor Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow
Measurement (Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Injection Fan control. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• MOA-VP (Min Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded
when Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Injection Fan control.
• MOAF-S (Min Outdoor Air Fan Status): This module is loaded when Min
Outdoor Air Fan Status is selected. This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• MOAD-S (Min Outdoor Air Damper Status): This module is loaded when
Min Outdoor Air Damper End Switch is selected. This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• MOAF-BA (Minimum OA Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded
when Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• MOAF-LO (Minimum OA Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded
when Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 361

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Minimum OA Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type with Variable
Speed Injection Fan.
• Min Outdoor Air Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.
State Generation
• Minimum OA Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Alarm
Management is selected.
Output Control
• Two Position Min OA Damper Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Damper is selected.
• Proportional Damper Minimum OA Flow Control: This module is loaded
when Proportional Damper is selected.
• Constant Capacity Fan Minimum OA Flow Control: This module is loaded
when Single Speed Injection Fan is selected.
• Variable Capacity Fan Minimum OA Flow Control: This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Injection Fan is selected.
Outputs
• MOAD-C (Min Outdoor Air Damper Command): This module is loaded
when Two Position Damper is selected either by itself or supporting an
Injection Fan.
• MOAD-O (Min Outdoor Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Proportional Damper is selected.
• MOAF-C (Min Outdoor Air Fan Command): This module is loaded when
either injection fan option is selected.
• MOAF-O (Min Outdoor Air Fan Output): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Injection Fan is selected.
See the Outputs section.

362 CCT Help: Applications

Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature (MADD)
This selection loads logic that reduces the intake of outdoor air when the
temperature is low. This reduction is accomplished by closing dampers, reducing
the volume differential (if Variable Capacity Return Fan Volume Matching control
is selected), and turning off or closing two-position fans or dampers.
If a preheat coil is located downstream of the mixing plenum (that is, it is in the
mixed air), the Preheat Temperature (downstream of the coil) serves as the process
variable for this control strategy. Otherwise, the Mixed Air Temperature serves as
the process variable.
The control logic for the low limit strategy is embedded directly into the Output
Control modules and activated simply by connecting the appropriate setpoint and
process variable. The logic takes precedence over all logic other than Emergency
Modes.
This selection is allowed if any of the Economizer Damper, Minimum Outdoor Air
Fan, or Minimum Outdoor Air Damper options is selected.

Modules (MADD Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature)

The Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature selection loads the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Inputs
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature): This module serves as the low limit
process variable when a preheat coil is not located in the mixed air duct.
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature): This module serves as the low limit process
variable when a preheat coil is located in the mixed air duct.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant allows
configuration of the upper threshold of the low limit control logic.
• LT-PB (Low Limit Proportional Band): This floating-point Constant
determines the range over which the outdoor air is reduced from its normal
operating values to the minimum achievable by the application.

Air Handling Unit Applications 363

Temperature Control Strategy (MADD)
These selections provide the logic for determining the setpoints of the Cold Deck
and Hot Deck temperature control loops. The Hot Deck Setpoint options apply
only if a Hot Deck heating coil is selected.
The selection options for Temperature Control Strategy are:
• Fixed Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperatures
• Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T
• Hot Deck Temperature Reset from RA-T

Modules (MADD Temperature Control Strategy)

The Temperature Control Strategy selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• CDT-SP (Cold Deck Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Fixed Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperatures or Hot Deck Temperature Reset
from RA-T is selected.
• HDT-SP (Hot Deck Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Fixed Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperatures is selected (and Hot Deck
heating coil is selected).
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Hot Deck
Temperature Reset from RA-T is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Cold Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset: This module is loaded when Hot
and/or Cold Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T is selected.
• Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset: This module is loaded when Hot
and/or Cold Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T is selected (and Hot Deck
heating coil is selected).
• Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset by RA-T: This module is loaded
when Hot Deck Temperature Reset from RA-T is selected (and Hot Deck
heating coil is selected).

364 CCT Help: Applications

Occupancy Control (MADD)
These selections provide the logic for Occupancy Mode Determinination.
The selection options for Occupancy Control are:
• Always Occupied
• Scheduled Occupancy
- Override Support
- Occupancy Switch (BI)
- Unoccupied Strategy
• Intermittent Night Operation
• Off during Unoccupied
If any options are selected for separate Occupied and Unoccupied Setpoints or
Temporary Occupancy, the Always Occupied option cannot be selected.

Modules (MADD Occupancy Control)

The Occupancy Control selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE: This module is loaded when Scheduled Occupancy is
selected; connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• OCC-OVERRIDE: This module is loaded when Override Support is
selected; connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• WC-C (WarmupCooldown command): This is an input for when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected.
• ZN-T (network Zone Temperature): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected and a physical Zone Temperature
input is not selected in the Optional Sensors group of the Control System
Selections.
• CLGUNOCC-SP (Night Cooling Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
• HTGUNOCC-SP (Night Heating Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module is loaded when Occupancy
Switch (BI) is selected and connected to the Occupancy Mode
Determination module.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 365

 State Generation
• Always Occupied: This is an Enum Constant. In applications that are
always Occupied (when Enabled), the Always Occupied module is loaded
to provide a consistent source of data for other modules that require
Occupancy Mode information.
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• WarmupCooldown Pass Through: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• DA-T Unocc Status Determination: This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Occupancy Status Display): This module is loaded when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected and a Zone Temperature Sensor is also
loaded (either due to the Temperature Control Strategy or selected as an
Optional Sensor). It provides Occupancy Mode information for models of
the network sensor with a LED.
See the Outputs section.

366 CCT Help: Applications

Heat Recovery (MADD)
The selection options for Heat Recovery are:
Enable Type
• Dry Bulb
• Enthalpy
Enthalpy Wheel
• Single Speed
- Modulated Bypass Dampers
• Variable Speed
- Bypass Damper BO
• Wheel Status
- Loss of Status Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Blocking Protection/Cleaning Mode: This option provides cleaning mode
functionality. If the wheel is off for an extended period, the wheel turns on for
a short time to keep the wheel free of dirt and dust.

Air Handling Unit Applications 367

 Glycol Loop
• 3-Way Valve
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
• Circulation Pump
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).

368 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (MADD Heat Recovery)
The Heat Recovery selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HR-EN (Heat Recovery isAllowed)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when either Enable
Type option is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Enthalpy
Enable Type is selected.
• EA-T (Exhaust Air Temperature)
• EAHR-T (Exhaust Air Heat Recovery Temperature): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is selected or when Glycol Loop is selected
but not a 3-Way Valve (Circulation Pump only). This input serves as the
low limit process variable.
• GLY-T (Glycol Temperature): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected. This input serves as the low limit process
variable.
• HRW-S (Heat Recovery Wheel Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• HRP-S (Heat Recovery Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• HRP-LO (Heat Recovery Pump Lockout Switch BI): This module is
loaded when Glycol Loop Circulation Pump Alarm Management Lockout
Switch is selected.
• HRW-BA (Heat Recovery Wheel Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• HRW-LO (Heat Recovery Wheel Lockout Switch BI): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Lockout Switch is
selected.
• HRW-FAULT (Heat Recovery Wheel VFD Fault BI): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Frequency Converter
Fault is selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 369

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HRLL-SP (Heat Recovery Low Limit Setpoint)
• Heat Recovery Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Glycol Loop Circulation Pump, Pump Status is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel, Wheel Status is selected.
State Generation
• Heat Recovery Suitability Determination: This module is loaded when Dry
Bulb Enable Type is selected.
• Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination: This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Enable Type is selected.
• Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing
• Heat Recovery Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
Circulation Pump Alarm Management is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Alarms: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel
Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Heat Recovery Htg CS LV
• Enthalpy Wheel Control: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is
selected.
• Glycol Loop Control: This module is loaded when Glycol Loop is selected.
• Energy Wheel Two Pos Byp: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel
Variable Speed Bypass Damper BO is selected.
• Heat Recovery Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when
Glycol Loop Circulation Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Blocking Protection is selected.

370 CCT Help: Applications

 Outputs
• HROAFBD-O (Heat Recovery OA FBD AO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
• HREAFBD-O (Heat Recovery EA FBD AO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
• HRW-C (Heat Recovery Wheel Command): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed is selected.
• HR-O (Heat Recovery Output): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected.
• HRP-C (Heat Recovery Pump Command): This module is loaded when
Glycol Loop with 3-Way Valve is selected.
• HREAFBD-C (Heat Recovery Exhaust FBD BO): This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed Modulated Bypass Dampers is
selected.
• HROAFBD-C (Heat Recovery OA FBD BO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 371

Coils (Preheat) (MADD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Preheat coil. Preheat coils may be
located in the Outdoor Air Duct (ahead of the mixing plenum). If this is the case, a
Preheat coil is always set to Control to Preheat Air Temperature. When in the
Mixed Air Duct, a coil may either be controlled by a dedicated sensor or
sequenced with the other devices. During startup, Preheat controls the PH-T or
CD-T to the OALT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint).
The selection options for Coils (Preheat) are:
Preheat
Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air
Location
• Outdoor Air
• Mixed air
- Sequenced with Cold Deck Control Strategy
- Control to Preheat Air Temperature
Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The
current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior.
• High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a
High Temperature alarm occurs.
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages

372 CCT Help: Applications

 Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Incremental Output
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Output
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

Air Handling Unit Applications 373

 - Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Face and Bypass Switchover
- Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- Based on Mixed Air Temperature
- Based on Network Input
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control: This option turns on
the coil pump if the outdoor air temperature is lower than the setpoint and
the unit is off. The preheat valve is modulated to control the leaving water
temperature.
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support using Face & Bypass Damper or Circulation
Pump controls.
The Face and Bypass Switchover option is applicable only when either a
Proportional or Incremental valve actuator is selected with Face and Bypass
Damper. This option specifies how to determine when the valve should be in
control (with the Damper at full face) and when the damper should be in control
(with the Valve fully open).

374 CCT Help: Applications

 The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Modules (MADD Coils [Preheat])

The Coils (Preheat) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• PH-EN (Preheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Preheat
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point is
the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall below before
heating is enabled.
• FBPD-SWO (Network Face & Bypass Switchover): This module is loaded
when Face and Bypass Switchover Based on Network Input is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature): This module is loaded when Control to
Preheat Air Temperature is selected or when the Preheat Coil is in the
Outdoor Air (and Control to Preheat Air Temperature is the only control
option permitted).
• PHWE-T (Preheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• PHWL-T (Preheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• PHP-S (Preheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Face and
Bypass Switchover Based on Mixed Air Temperature is selected.
• PHP-LO (Preheat Pump Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is
selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 375

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is the setpoint
for Low Limit control of the Preheat Coil during Startup (to either CD-T or
PH-T). This point is also loaded as setpoint for the Remain in Control
Shutdown Control option if selected.
• PHT-SP (Preheat Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Control to Preheat Air Temperature is selected or when the Preheat Coil is
in the Outdoor Air (and Control to Preheat Air Temperature is the only
control option permitted).
• Preheat Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Preheat Availability Determination
• Preheat Sequencing: This module is loaded when Control to Preheat Air
Temperature is selected or when the Preheat Coil is in the Outdoor Air (and
Control to Preheat Air Temperature is the only control option permitted).
• Preheat Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Hot Water or Steam
Coil Pump Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Preheat Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Preheat Control Status LV
• Staged Preheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Preheat is
selected.
• Preheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of Staged Preheat are selected.
• MSC Staged Preheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat.
• Preheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.

376 CCT Help: Applications

 • Preheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Sequenced Valves Preheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• FBPD Proportional Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when the
Face and Bypass Damper option for Proportional Actuator or Incremental
Actuator is selected.
• Proportional Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (and Two Valves
and Face and Bypass Damper are not selected).
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• Preheat Proportional Valve Output: This module is loaded when Loss of
Airflow Strategy Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control is
selected.
• Preheat Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• PHX-C (Preheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• PH-O (Preheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (but not the Two Valves
option).
• PH1-O (Preheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• PH2-O (Preheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• PH-C (Preheat Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• PHFBD-O (Preheat Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• PHP-C (Preheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Preheat
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 377

Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) (MADD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Cooling coil,
The selection options for Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) are:
Cooling - Cold Deck
Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air
DX Cooling
• Device Rotation
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Chilled Water
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Actuator
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

378 CCT Help: Applications

 - Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 379

 Modules MADD Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck)
The Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• CLG-EN (Cooling isAvailable): This module is loaded when Cooling
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• CLGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Cooling Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point
determines the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must rise
above before cooling is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CHWE-T (Chilled Water Entering Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CHWL-T (Chilled Water Leaving Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CP-S (Cooling Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• Cooling Pump Lockout Switch BI: This input is loaded when Chilled
Water Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Cooling Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Chill Water Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Availability Determination
• Cooling Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Chilled Water Coil
Pump Alarm Management is selected.

380 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Cooling Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Control Status LV
• Staged Cooling Control: This module is loaded when DX Cooling is
selected.
• Cooling Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of DX Cooling are selected.
• MSC Staged Cooling X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for DX Cooling.
• Cooling X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for DX Cooling and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Cooling X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for DX Cooling and Device Rotation is selected. One
module is loaded per stage.
• Proportional Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• Cooling Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Chilled
Water Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• CLGX-C (Cooling X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for DX Cooling. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• CLG-O (Cooling Output): This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• CLG-C (Cooling Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• CLGFBD-O (Cooling Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• CP-C (Cooling Pump Command): This module is loaded when Cooling
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 381

Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) (MADD)
These selections provide the logic to control the Hot Deck temperature using a
Heating coil.
The selection options for Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) are:
Heating - Hot Deck
Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air
Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The
current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior.
• High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a
High Temperature alarm occurs.
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
• Incremental Output
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature

382 CCT Help: Applications

 • Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position

Air Handling Unit Applications 383

 The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support including Face & Bypass Damper or
Circulation Pump controls.
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Modules (MADD Coils [Heating - Hot Deck])

The Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• RH-EN (Reheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Reheat Lockout
from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point is
the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall below before
heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• HD-T (Hot Deck Temperature)
• RHWE-T (Reheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHWL-T (Reheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHP-S (Reheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• Reheat Pump Lockout Switch BI: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• Reheat Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.

384 CCT Help: Applications

 State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Availability Determination
• Mixed Air Hot Deck Sequencing
• Reheat Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Hot Water or Steam
Coil Pump Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Heating Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Control Status LV
• Staged Reheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Reheat is
selected.
• Reheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more stages
of Staged Reheat are selected.
• MSC Staged Reheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat.
• Reheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Reheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Sequenced Valves Reheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• Proportional Valve Reheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (and Two Valves
is not selected).
• Reheat Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 385

 Outputs
• HTGX-C (Reheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• RH-O (Reheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (but not the Two Valves
option).
• HTG1-O (Reheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• HTG2-O (Reheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• RHP-C (Reheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Reheat
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

386 CCT Help: Applications

Humidification (MADD)
These selections provide the logic to control a humidifier if present.
The selection options for Humidification are:
• Staged
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the humidifier.
• Steam Proportional Valve
- Isolation Valve
• Modulated Packaged Unit
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier).
• Scrubber: This option is for a scrubber humidifier, which is a shower head,
pump, and basin located in the ductwork. This type of humidifier requires
3 BOs; a pump BO, a drain valve BO, and a BO to close the fill valve. The
drain valve and fill valve BOs should actuate together (if draining, close the
inlet valve and disable the pump). The operational water level is maintained by
a mechanical float valve.
- Drain Valve: This option provides an output for the drain valve and an
output for the fill valve.
• Open valve if scrubber is inactive: This option provides monitoring
of and indicates the status of the pump command and a network input to
open the drain valve. If the network input requests the valve to open or
if the pump command has been off for a period of time, the drain valve
opens. If the pump is required to start, the drain valve closes for a
period of time to allow the sump to fill before starting the pump.
• Open valve on Network Input
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier).
• Control Sensor
- Zone Humidity
• During Unoccupied Mode
- Return Air Humidity
• Hot Deck Humidity High Limit Control

Air Handling Unit Applications 387

 The During Unoccupied Mode option is applicable only when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.

Modules (MADD Humidification)

The Humidification selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HUM-EN (Humidification isAvailable)
• BASIN-C (Drain Basin): This module is loaded when Scrubber Drain
Valve Open valve on Network Input is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): This module is loaded when Zone Humidity is
selected for the humidification process variable.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Return Air
Humidity is selected for the humidification process variable.
• HD-H (Hot Deck Humidity): This module is loaded when Hot Deck
Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HUM-SP (Humidification Setpoint): This is a floating-point Constant.
• DAH-SP (Discharge Air Humidity Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when Hot Deck Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
State Generation
• Humidification Sequencing
• Humidification isAvailable Pass Through

388 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Humidity Control Status LV
• Staged Humidification Control: This module is loaded when Staged
Humidification is selected.
• Humidification Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or
more stages of Staged Humidification are selected.
• MSC Staged Humidification X: This module is loaded when X number of
stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
• Proportional Steam Humidification Control: This module is loaded when
Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• Packaged Humidifier Control: This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• Humidity Scrubber Output: This module is loaded when Scrubber is
selected.
Outputs
• HUMX-C (Humidification X Command): This module is loaded when a
number of stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
One Output is loaded per stage.
• HUM-O (Humidifier Output): This module is loaded when Steam
Proportional Valve or Modulated Packaged Unit is selected.
• HUM-C (Humidifier Command): This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• STMISO-C (Steam Isolation Valve Command): This module is loaded
when the Isolation Valve option for Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• HDV-C (Drain Valve BO): This module is loaded when Scrubber Drain
Valve is selected.
• HFV-C (Fill Valve BO): This module is loaded when Scrubber is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 389

Optional Features (MADD)
These selections provide the logic for controlling the operation of the application.
The Unit Enable logic includes the option to delay startup after controller restart
(Power Fail Restart).
The selection options for Optional Features are:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.
• Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based
on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Enable Switch is selected, then when the
Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Unit Enable Switch (BI): This option determines whether the application
operates based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected, then
when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Power Fail Restart: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator module. When this option is selected, after a
restart (power cycle, controller download, or manual restart command), the
application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time
(default = 60 seconds).

390 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (MADD Optional Features)
The Optional Features selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
• UNITEN-MODE (Unit Enable Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• UNITEN-S (Unit Enable Toggle Switch)
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the position of the damper (EAD-O, MAD-O, OAD-O, or RAD-O) and
set the state/speed of the supply fan (SF-C/SF-O), return fan (RF-C/RF-O),
relief fan (RLF-C/RLF-O), and min outdoor air fan (MOAF-C/MOAF-O,
if present) during a call for Smoke Control.
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when the Unit Enable
Mode or Switch (BI) is selected or when Power Fail Restart is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 391

Mixed Air Dual Duct Control Logic Selection

Optional Sensors (MADD)

These selections provide the option for loading extra, monitor-only sensors.
The selection options for Optional Sensors are:
• Outdoor Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Minimum Outdoor Air
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Preheat Air Temperature
• Mixed Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Discharge Air
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
- Minimum Flow Protection For Staged Preheat

392 CCT Help: Applications

 • Hot Deck
- Temperature
- Humidity
- Static Pressure
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Cold Deck
- Static Pressure
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Return Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Static Pressure
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Relief Air
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Zone
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Misc
- Building Static Pressure
- Heat Recovery Air Temperature

Air Handling Unit Applications 393

 If a Sensor is required for one of the selections made in the Mechanical System
Selection, the option is not available here.
The Minimum Flow Protection for Staged Preheat can be selected if Staged
Preheat (in Mixed Air) is selected and the Discharge Flow is available (either due
to selecting Return Fan Volume Matching of an optional Discharge Flow sensor).

Modules (MADD Optional Sensors)

The Optional Sensors selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded when a physical
Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected.
• FLOW-LL (Airflow Low Limit): This module is loaded when Minimum
Flow Protection For Staged Heating is selected. It is the minimum
discharge flow required before staged heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity)
• OA-Q (Outdoor Air Quality)
• OA-VP (Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure)
• OA-F (Outdoor Air Flow): The measurement is scaled using AI Output
Range High.
• MOA-VP (Min Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure)
• MOA-F (Min Outdoor Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting
the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature)
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature)
• MA-H (Mixed Air Humidity)
• MA-Q (Mixed Air Quality)
• DA-H (Discharge Air Humidity)
• DA-Q (Discharge Air Quality)
• DA-VP (Discharge Air Velocity Pressure)
• DA-F (Discharge Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the
AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• HD-T (Hot Deck Temperature)
• HD-H (Hot Deck Humidity)

394 CCT Help: Applications

 • HD-P (Hot Deck Static Pressure)
• HD-VP (Hot Deck Velocity Pressure)
• HD-F (Hot Deck Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI
object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• CD-P (Cold Deck Static Pressure)
• CD-VP (Cold Deck Velocity Pressure)
• CD-F (Cold Deck Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI
object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature)
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity)
• RA-Q (Return Air Quality)
• RA-P (Return Air Static Pressure)
• RA-VP (Return Air Velocity Pressure)
• RA-F (Return Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI
object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature)
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity)
• ZN-Q (Zone Quality)
• BLDG-P (Building Static Pressure)
• HR-T (Heat Recovery Temperature)
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Outdoor Air Flow Calculation
• Minimum OA Flow Calculation
• Discharge Flow Calculation
• Hot Deck Flow Calculation
• Cold Deck Flow Calculation
• Return Flow Calculation
• Relief Flow Calculation
State Generation
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Minimum Flow
Protection For Staged Preheat is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 395

Optional Equipment (MADD)
These selections provide monitor only sensors for an optional pre-filter and/or
final filter.
The selection options for Optional Equipment are:
• Pre-Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor
• Final Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor

Modules (MADD Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• PFILT-S (PreFilter Status)
• PFILT-DP (PreFilter Diff Pressure)
• FFILT-S (Final Filter Status)
• FFILT-DP (Final Filter Diff Pressure)
See the Inputs section.

396 CCT Help: Applications

Monitored Safeties (MADD)
These selections provide inputs for monitoring equipment safeties. The High and
Low Static Pressure Switch inputs and High and Low Temperature Switch inputs
are connected to the Emergency Mode Sequencer and shut down the application
when tripped.
The selection options for Monitored Safeties are:
• Discharge
- High Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Return
- Low Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Low Limit Temperature Switch
• High Limit Temperature Switch
• Humidity Alarm

Modules (MADD Monitored Safeties)

The Monitored Safeties selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• DAPHI-A (Discharge Air High Duct Pressure)
• DA-SD (Discharge Air Smoke Alarm)
• RAPLO-A (Return Air Low Duct Pressure)
• RA-SD (Return Air Smoke Alarm)
• LT-A (Low Temperature Alarm)
• HT-A (High Temperature Alarm)
• HUMHI-A (Humidity High Limit)
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 397

100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
See the following sections for information on this application’s logic and
selections:
• 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Core Logic
• 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Mechanical System Selection
- Fans
- Temperature Control Strategy
- Occupancy Control
- Heat Recovery
- Coils (Preheat)
- Coils (Cooling)
- Coils (Reheat)
- Coils (Common Heating-Cooling)
- Humidification
- Dehumidification Control
- Optional Features
• 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Control Logic Selection
- Optional Sensors
- Optional Equipment
- Monitored Safeties
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

398 CCT Help: Applications

100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Core Logic

Modules (OASD)
All 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Applications use the core logic listed below.
Network Inputs
• APP-MODE (Application Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature)
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• 100 OA Start Stop Sequencing
• Application Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water
Flush application mode for separate connection to State Selection and
passes the remaining application modes to State Selection.
• Water System Flush Pass Through: This module passes the Water Flush
system mode to a separate State Selection input so that when water flush is
requested, the valves always open.
• 100 OA Single Duct Sequencing
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Discharge Air Setpoint Determination
Output Control
• Heating Required LV
• Cooling Required LV

Air Handling Unit Applications 399

100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Mechanical System Selection

Fans (OASD)
These selections provide the logic for the main fans.
The selection options for Fans are:
Supply Fan
• Single Speed
• Variable Speed
- Two Duct Static Pressure Sensors
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

400 CCT Help: Applications

 Exhaust Fan
• Single Speed
• Variable Speed
- Volume Matching
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints
- Building Static Pressure
- Track Supply Fan
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
A Supply Fan is required (that is, it is selected by default) as well as an optional
Exhaust or Relief Fan.
A Variable Speed Supply Fan is required in order to select a Variable Speed
Exhaust Fan.

Air Handling Unit Applications 401

 Modules (OASD Fans)
The Fans selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• DAP-SP (Duct Static Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Supply Fan Status
with Manual Restart is selected but not a Unit Reset Switch (BI).
• FLOW-DIFF (Flow Differential Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control is selected, but
Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints is not selected.
• OCCFLOW-DIFF (Occupied Flow Differential Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are
selected with Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching.
• UNOCCFLOW-DIFF (Unoccupied Flow Differential Setpoint): This
module is loaded when Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints
are selected with Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching.
• BLDGP-SP (Building Static Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Building Static Pressure control is
selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• DA1-P (Discharge Air Static Pressure 1): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• DA2-P (Discharge Air Static Pressure 2): This module is loaded when Two
Duct Static Pressure Inputs is selected with Variable Speed Supply Fan.
• SF-S (Supply Fan Status)
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Unit Reset Switch
(BI) is selected with Supply Fan Status with Manual Restart.
• DA-F (Discharge Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow
Measurement (Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control. The flow scaling is
configured by setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum
Value attributes.
• EA-F (Exhaust Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow Measurement
(Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.

402 CCT Help: Applications

 • DA-VP (Discharge Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control.
• EA-VP (Exhaust Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control.
• BLDG-P (Building Static Pressure): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Exhaust Fan Building Static Pressure control is selected.
• EF-S (Exhaust Fan Status): This module is loaded when Exhaust Fan
Status is selected. This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• EF-BA (Exhaust Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Exhaust
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• EF-LO (Exhaust Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Exhaust Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SF-BA (Supply Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Supply
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• SF-LO (Supply Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Supply Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) options are selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Discharge Flow Determination: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control.
• Exhaust Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity Pressure
(Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control.
• VOLUMEMATCH-RANGE (Volume Match PID Process Range): This
module is loaded for Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching
control. It determines the default PID proportional band for the volume
matching control loop and should be configured to the design flow of the
Exhaust Fan.
• Flow Differential Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when
Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are selected for
Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control.
• Exhaust Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Exhaust Fan, Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 403

 State Generation
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Supply Fan
Status is selected.
• Exhaust Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Exhaust Fan Alarm
Management is selected.
• Supply Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Supply Fan Alarm
Management is selected.
Output Control
• Constant Capacity Supply Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan OnOff LV
• Supply Fan Percent Cmd LV: This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Supply Fan is selected.
• Constant Capacity Exhaust Fan Control: This module is loaded when
Single Speed Exhaust Fan is selected.
• Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan Volume Matching Control: This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching is selected.
• Exhaust Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Building Static Pressure is selected.
• Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan Track Control: This module is loaded when
Exhaust Fan Variable Speed Track Supply Fan is selected.
Outputs
• SF-C (Supply Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Supply
Fan is selected.
• SF-O (Supply Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Supply Fan is selected.
• EF-C (Exhaust Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Exhaust
Fan is selected.
• EF-O (Exhaust Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Exhaust Fan is selected.
See the Outputs section.

404 CCT Help: Applications

Temperature Control Strategy (OASD)
These selections provide the logic for the basic Temperature Control Strategy for
the application. The Discharge Air Control options (fixed setpoint and Reset from
Outdoor Air Temperature) are designed for providing air to separately controlled
zones. The Zone or Exhaust Control options are designed for directly controlling a
single zone (whether the sensor is in the zone or in the exhaust duct) and controls
to the Discharge Air Temperature to a setpoint reset based on the Zone or Exhaust
Air Temperature.
The selection options for Temperature Control Strategy are:
• Discharge Air Control
- Reset from Outdoor Air Temperature: This option loads a module that
uses four parameters to define the outside reset band and the associated
discharge setpoints.
- Alternate Reset From Outdoor Air Temperature: This option loads a
module that uses four parameters to define the outside reset band and the
associated setpoint and offset band.
• Zone or Exhaust Control
- Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Exhaust Air Temperature: This
options resets the discharge air setpoint based on zone or return air
temperature.
• Add Exhaust/Zone Reset by OA: This option resets the zone/exhaust
air setpoint based on the outdoor air temperature.
- Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone Temperature
• Setpoint Adjust
- Common Setpoint Adjust
- Warm Cool Adjust
• Temp Occ Support
• Add Exhaust/Zone Reset by OA: This option resets the zone/exhaust
air setpoint based on the outdoor air temperature.
- Summer/Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift

Air Handling Unit Applications 405

 Modules (OASD Temperature Control Strategy)
The Temperature Control Strategy selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• DAT-SP (Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded
when (fixed) Discharge Air Control is selected.
• EAT-SP (Exhaust Air Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Exhaust Air Temperature is selected.
This point serves as the Network Setpoint input into the ZN-T Setpoint
Determination module.
• ZNT-SP (Zone Network Temperature Setpoint): This setpoint is always
created. If no Setpoint Adjustment or Warm Cool Adjust is selected,
ZNT-SP provides a Zone Setpoint Adjustment for the Supervisory system.
If a Setpoint Input for the Network Sensor is created, ZNT-SP becomes the
local backup if the Supervisory system is not communicating.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• EA-T (Exhaust Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Discharge
Air Temperature Reset by Exhaust Air Temperature is selected.
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature): This module is loaded when Discharge Air
Temperature Reset by Zone Temperature is selected.
• ZN-SP (local Zone Setpoint): This module is loaded when Common
Setpoint Adjust is selected.
• WC-ADJ (local Warmer/Cooler Adjust): This module is loaded when
Warm Cool Adjust is selected.
• ZN-TOCC (Zone Temporary Occupancy): This module is loaded when
Temp Occ Support is selected; connected to the Occupancy Mode
Determination module.
See the Inputs section.

406 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Discharge Air Setpoint Reset: This module is loaded when the Reset from
Outdoor Air Temperature option of Discharge Air Control is selected.
• ZN-T Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when Zone or
Exhaust Control is selected.
• Summer Winter Compensation: This module is loaded when Summer/
Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift is selected.
• DA-T sp Reset by OA: This module is loaded when Discharge Air Control
Alternate Reset From Outdoor Air Temperature is selected.
• RA-T sp Reset by OA: This module is loaded when Add Exhaust/Zone
Reset by OA is selected.
State Generation
• Zone Sequencing: This module is loaded when Zone or Exhaust Control is
selected.
Output Control
• Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded
when Zone or Exhaust Control is selected.
• Cascaded DA-T Setpoint LV: This module is loaded when Zone or Exhaust
Control is selected.
• Zone Heating Control Status LV: This module is loaded when Zone or
Exhaust Control is selected.
• Zone Cooling Control Status LV: This module is loaded when Zone or
Exhaust Control is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 407

Occupancy Control (OASD)
These selections provide the logic for Occupancy Mode Determinination.
The selection options for Occupancy Control are:
• Always Occupied
• Scheduled Occupancy
- Override Support
- Occupancy Switch (BI)
- Unoccupied Strategy
• Intermittent Night Operation
• Off during Unoccupied
If any options are selected for separate Occupied and Unoccupied Setpoints or
Temporary Occupancy, the Always Occupied option cannot be selected.

Modules (OASD Occupancy Control)

The Occupancy Control selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE: This module is loaded when Scheduled Occupancy is
selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• OCC-OVERRIDE: This module is loaded when Override Support is
selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• WC-C (WarmupCooldown command): This is an input when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• ZN-T (network Zone Temperature): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected with the Discharge Air Control
temperature control strategy and a physical Zone Temperature input is not
selected in the Optional Sensors group of the Control System Selections.
• CLGUNOCC-SP (Night Cooling Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected with the Discharge Air Control
temperature control strategy.
• HTGUNOCC-SP (Night Heating Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected with the Discharge Air Control
temperature control strategy.
See the Network Inputs section.

408 CCT Help: Applications

 Inputs
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module is loaded when Occupancy
Switch (BI) is selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode
Determination module.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Always Occupied: This is an Enum Constant. In applications that are
always Occupied (when Enabled), the Always Occupied module is loaded
to provide a consistent source of data for other modules that require
Occupancy Mode information.
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• WarmupCooldown Pass Through: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• DA-T Unocc Status Determination: This module is loaded when both
Discharge Air Control and Intermittent Night Operation are selected or
when Zone or Exhaust Control is selected. For Discharge Air Control
applications, this module sequences the application only during
intermittent unoccupied night operation. For Zone or Exhaust Control
applications, it sequences during Warmup or Cooldown as well.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Occupancy Status Display): This module is loaded when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected and a Zone Temperature Sensor is also
loaded (either due to the Temperature Control Strategy or selected as an
Optional Sensor). It provides Occupancy Mode information for models of
the network sensor with an LED.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 409

Heat Recovery (OASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Heat Recovery Enthalpy Wheel or
Glycol Loop.
The selection options for Heat Recovery are:
Enable Type
• Dry Bulb
• Enthalpy
Enthalpy Wheel
• Single Speed
- Modulated Bypass Dampers
• Variable Speed
- Bypass Damper BO
• Wheel Status
- Loss of Status Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Blocking Protection/Cleaning Mode: This option provides cleaning mode
functionality. If the wheel is off for an extended period, the wheel turns on for
a short time to keep the wheel free of dirt and dust.

410 CCT Help: Applications

 Glycol Loop
• 3-Way Valve
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
• Circulation Pump
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).

Air Handling Unit Applications 411

 Modules (OASD Heat Recovery)
The Heat Recovery selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HR-EN (Heat Recovery isAllowed)
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when either Enable
Type option is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Enthalpy
Enable Type is selected.
• EA-T (Exhaust Air Temperature)
• EAHR-T (Exhaust Air Heat Recovery Temperature): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is selected or when Glycol Loop is selected
but not a 3-Way Valve (Circulation Pump only). This input serves as the
low limit process variable.
• GLY-T (Glycol Temperature): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected. This input serves as the low limit process
variable.
• HRW-S (Heat Recovery Wheel Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• HRP-S (Heat Recovery Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• HRP-LO (Heat Recovery Pump Lockout Switch BI): This module is
loaded when Glycol Loop Circulation Pump Alarm Management Lockout
Switch is selected.
• HRW-BA (Heat Recovery Wheel Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• HRW-LO (Heat Recovery Wheel Lockout Switch BI): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Lockout Switch is
selected.
• HRW-FAULT (Heat Recovery Wheel VFD Fault BI): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Frequency Converter
Fault is selected.
See the Inputs section.

412 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HRLL-SP (Heat Recovery Low Limit Setpoint)
• Heat Recovery Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Glycol Loop Circulation Pump, Pump Status is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel, Wheel Status is selected.
State Generation
• Heat Recovery Suitability Determination: This module is loaded when Dry
Bulb Enable Type is selected.
• Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination: This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Enable Type is selected.
• Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing
• Heat Recovery Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
Circulation Pump Alarm Management is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Alarms: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel
Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Heat Recovery Htg CS LV
• Enthalpy Wheel Control: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is
selected.
• Glycol Loop Control: This module is loaded when Glycol Loop is selected.
• Energy Wheel Two Pos Byp: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel
Variable Speed Bypass Damper BO is selected.
• Exhaust Fan Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Glycol
Loop Circulation Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
• Heat Recovery Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when
Glycol Loop Circulation Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Blocking Protection is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 413

 Outputs
• HROAFBD-O (Heat Recovery OA FBD AO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
• HREAFBD-O (Heat Recovery EA FBD AO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
• HRW-C (Heat Recovery Wheel Command): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed is selected.
• HR-O (Heat Recovery Output): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected.
• HRP-C (Heat Recovery Pump Command): This module is loaded when
Glycol Loop with 3-Way Valve is selected.
• HREAFBD-C (Heat Recovery Exhaust FBD BO): This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed Modulated Bypass Dampers is
selected.
• HROAFBD-C (Heat Recovery OA FBD BO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
See the Outputs section.

414 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (Preheat) (OASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Preheat coil. During startup, Preheat
controls the DA-T to the OALT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint).
The selection options for Coils (Preheat) are:
Preheat
Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air
Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The
current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior.
• High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a
High Temperature alarm occurs.
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Incremental Output
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator

Air Handling Unit Applications 415

 • Two Position Actuator
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Face and Bypass Switchover
- Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- Based on Network Input
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position

416 CCT Help: Applications

 • Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control: This option turns on
the coil pump if the outdoor air temperature is lower than the setpoint and
the unit is off. The preheat valve is modulated to control the leaving water
temperature.
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support including Face & Bypass Damper or
Circulation Pump controls.
The Face and Bypass Switchover option is applicable only when either a
Proportional or Incremental valve actuator is selected with Face and Bypass
Damper. This option specifies how to determine when the valve should be in
control (with the Damper at full face) and when the damper should be in control
(with the Valve fully open).
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 417

 Modules (OASD Coils [Preheat])
The Coils (Preheat) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• PH-EN (Preheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Preheat
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point
determines the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall
below before heating is enabled.
• FBPD-SWO (Network Face & Bypass Switchover): This module is loaded
when Face and Bypass Switchover Based on Network Input is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• PHWE-T (Preheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• PHWL-T (Preheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• PHP-S (Preheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Remain
in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected and Preheat Temperature is not
otherwise loaded.
• PHP-LO (Preheat Pump Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is
selected.
See the Inputs section.

418 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HTG-RAMPRATE (Heating Ramp Rate): This floating-point Constant
determines the rate at which the preheat is allowed to close if the cold
temperature startup process.
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when a
process variable is available for Low Limit control of the Preheat Coil
during Startup (either DA-T or PH-T) or for when any Coil has the Remain
in Control Shutdown Control options selected.
• Preheat Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Preheat Availability Determination
• Preheat Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Hot Water or Steam
Coil Pump Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Preheat Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Preheat Control Status LV
• Preheat Percent Cmd LV: This module is required by the 100 OA Single
Duct Sequencing module to determine whether Preheat needs to remain in
control after startup has completed.
• Staged Preheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Preheat is
selected.
• Preheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of Staged Preheat are selected.
• MSC Staged Preheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat.
• Preheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.

Air Handling Unit Applications 419

 • Preheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Sequenced Valves Preheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• FBPD Proportional Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when the
Face and Bypass Damper option for Proportional Actuator or Incremental
Actuator is selected.
• Proportional Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (and Two Valves
and Face and Bypass Damper are not selected).
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• Preheat Proportional Valve Output: This module is loaded when Loss of
Airflow Strategy Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control is
selected.
• Preheat Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• PHX-C (Preheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• PH-O (Preheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (but not the Two Valves
option).
• PH1-O (Preheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• PH2-O (Preheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• PH-C (Preheat Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• PHFBD-O (Preheat Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• PHP-C (Preheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Preheat
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

420 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (Cooling) (OASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Cooling coil.
The selection options for Coils (Cooling) are:
Cooling
Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air
DX Cooling
• Device Rotation
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Chilled Water
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Actuator
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

Air Handling Unit Applications 421

 - Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
Cooling cannot be selected if Common Heating-Cooling is selected.
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

422 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (OASD Coils [Cooling])
The Coils (Cooling) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• CLG-EN (Cooling isAvailable): This module is loaded when Cooling
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• CLGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Cooling Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point
determines the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must rise
above before cooling is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CHWE-T (Chilled Water Entering Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CHWL-T (Chilled Water Leaving Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CP-S (Cooling Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• Cooling Pump Lockout Switch BI: This input is loaded when Chilled
Water Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Cooling Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Chill Water Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Availability Determination
• Cooling Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Chilled Water Coil
Pump Alarm Management is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 423

 Output Control
• Cooling Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Control Status LV
• Staged Cooling Control: This module is loaded when DX Cooling is
selected.
• Cooling Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of DX Cooling are selected.
• MSC Staged Cooling X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for DX Cooling.
• Cooling X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for DX Cooling and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Cooling X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for DX Cooling and Device Rotation is selected. One
module is loaded per stage.
• Proportional Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• Cooling Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Chilled
Water Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• CLGX-C (Cooling X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for DX Cooling. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• CLG-O (Cooling Output): This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• CLG-C (Cooling Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• CLGFBD-O (Cooling Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• CP-C (Cooling Pump Command): This module is loaded when Cooling
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

424 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (Reheat) (OASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Reheat coil.
The selection options for Coils (Reheat) are:
Reheat
Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air
Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The
current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior.
• High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a
High Temperature alarm occurs.
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
• Incremental Output
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

Air Handling Unit Applications 425

 - Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
Reheat cannot be selected if Common Heating-Cooling is selected.
The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support including Face & Bypass Damper or
Circulation Pump controls.
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

426 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (OASD Coils [Reheat])
The Coils (Reheat) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• RH-EN (Reheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Reheat Lockout
from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point
determines the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall
below before heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• RHWE-T (Reheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHWL-T (Reheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHP-S (Reheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Remain
in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• Reheat Pump Lockout Switch BI: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• Reheat Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Availability Determination
• Reheat Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Hot Water or Steam
Coil Pump Alarm Management is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 427

 Output Control
• Reheat Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Control Status LV
• Staged Reheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Reheat is
selected.
• Reheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more stages
of Staged Reheat are selected.
• MSC Staged Reheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat.
• Reheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Reheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Sequenced Valves Reheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• Proportional Valve Reheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (and Two Valves
is not selected).
• Reheat Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• HTGX-C (Reheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• RH-O (Reheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (but not the Two Valves
option).
• HTG1-O (Reheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• HTG2-O (Reheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• RHP-C (Reheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Reheat
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

428 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) (OASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Common Heating-Cooling (2-pipe)
coil.
The selection options for Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) are:
Common Heating-Cooling
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Actuator
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).

Air Handling Unit Applications 429

 • Summer/Winter Switchover Strategy
- Local Switch (BI)
- Network
- Supply Water Temperature
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
Common Heating-Cooling cannot be selected if either Cooling or Reheat is
selected.
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

430 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (OASD Coils [Common Heating-Cooling])
The Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) selection loads the following modules in
these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• HC-EN (2 Pipe isAvailable)
• SUMWIN-C (SummerWinter): This module is loaded when the Network
option for Summer/Winter Switchover Strategy is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• SUMWIN-S (Summer/Winter Mode Status): This module is loaded when
the Local Switch (BI) option for Summer/Winter Switchover Strategy is
selected.
• HCWE-T (Htg/Clg Entering Water Temperature): This module is loaded
when the Supply Water Temperature option for Summer/Winter
Switchover Strategy is selected or when selected as a monitor only input.
• HCWL-T (Htg/Clg Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• HCP-S (Heating/Cooling Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Remain
in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• HCP-LO (Heating/Cooling Pump Lockout Switch, 2 Pipe Pump Lockout
Switch BI): This module is loaded when Coil Pump Alarm Management
Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• SummerWinter Mode Determination: This module is loaded when the
Supply Water Temperature option for Summer/Winter Switchover Strategy
is selected.
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• 2 Pipe Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 431

 State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• 2 Pipe isAvailable Pass Through
• 2 Pipe Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Coil Pump Alarm
Management is selected.
Output Control
• 2 Pipe Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• 2 Pipe Heating Control Status LV
• 2 Pipe Cooling Control Status LV
• Proportional Valve 2 Pipe Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• FBPD 2 Position Valve 2 Pipe Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• 2 Pipe Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Coil Pump
Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• HC-O (Heating/Cooling Output): This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• HC-C (Heating/Cooling Command): This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• HCFBD-O (Heating/Cooling Face & Bypass Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• HCP-C (Heating/Cooling Pump Command): This module is loaded when
Heating/Cooling Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

432 CCT Help: Applications

Humidification (OASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a humidifier if present.
The selection options for Humidification are:
• Staged
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the humidifier.
• Steam Proportional Valve
- Isolation Valve
• Modulated Packaged Unit
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier).
• Scrubber: This option is for a scrubber humidifier, which is a shower head,
pump, and basin located in the ductwork. This type of humidifier requires
3 BOs; a pump BO, a drain valve BO, and a BO to close the fill valve. The
drain valve and fill valve BOs should actuate together (if draining, close the
inlet valve and disable the pump). The operational water level is maintained by
a mechanical float valve.
- Drain Valve: This option provides an output for the drain valve and an
output for the fill valve.
• Open valve if scrubber is inactive: This option provides monitoring
of and indicates the status of the pump command and a network input to
open the drain valve. If the network input requests the valve to open or
if the pump command has been off for a period of time, the drain valve
opens. If the pump is required to start, the drain valve closes for a
period of time to allow the sump to fill before starting the pump.
• Open valve on Network Input
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier).
• Control Sensor
- Zone Humidity
• During Unoccupied Mode
- Exhaust Air Humidity
• Discharge Humidity High Limit Control

Air Handling Unit Applications 433

 The During Unoccupied Mode option is applicable only when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.

Modules (OASD Humidification)

The Humidification selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HUM-EN (Humidification isAvailable)
• BASIN-C (Drain Basin): This module is loaded when Scrubber Drain
Valve Open valve on Network Input is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): This module is loaded when Zone Humidity is
selected for the humidification process variable.
• EA-H (Exhaust Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Exhaust Air
Humidity is selected for the humidification process variable.
• DA-H (Discharge Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Discharge
Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HUM-SP (Humidification Setpoint): This is a floating-point Constant.
• DAH-SP (Discharge Air Humidity Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when Discharge Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
State Generation
• Humidification Sequencing
• Humidification isAvailable Pass Through

434 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Humidity Control Status LV
• Staged Humidification Control: This module is loaded when Staged
Humidification is selected.
• Humidification Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or
more stages of Staged Humidification are selected.
• MSC Staged Humidification X: This module is loaded when X number of
stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
• Proportional Steam Humidification Control: This module is loaded when
Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• Packaged Humidifier Control: This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• Humidity Scrubber Output: This module is loaded when Scrubber is
selected.
Outputs
• HUMX-C (Humidification X Command): This module is loaded when a
number of stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
One Output is loaded per stage.
• HUM-O (Humidifier Output): This module is loaded when Steam
Proportional Valve or Modulated Packaged Unit is selected.
• HUM-C (Humidifier Command): This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• STMISO-C (Steam Isolation Valve Command): This module is loaded
when the Isolation Valve option for Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• HDV-C (Drain Valve BO): This module is loaded when Scrubber Drain
Valve is selected.
• HFV-C (Fill Valve BO): This module is loaded when Scrubber is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 435

Dehumidification Control (OASD)
These selections provide the logic for dehumidification control.
The selection options for Dehumidification Control are:
• Zone Humidity
• Exhaust Air Humidity
Dehumidification cannot be selected unless both Cooling and Reheat are selected.

Modules (OASD Dehumidification)

The Dehumidification Control selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Inputs
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): This module is loaded when Zone Humidity is
selected for the dehumidification process variable.
• RA-H (Exhaust Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Exhaust Air
Humidity is selected for the dehumidification process variable.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• DEHUM-SP (Dehumidification Setpoint): This is a floating-point
Constant.
State Generation
• Dehumidification Sequencing

436 CCT Help: Applications

Optional Features (OASD)
These selections provide the logic for controlling the operation of the application.
The Unit Enable logic includes the option to delay startup after controller restart
(Power Fail Restart).
The selection options for Optional Features are:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.
• Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based
on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Enable Switch is selected, then when the
Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Unit Enable Switch (BI): This option determines whether the application
operates based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected, then
when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Power Fail Restart: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator module. When this option is selected, after a
restart (power cycle, controller download, or manual restart command), the
application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time
(default = 60 seconds).

Air Handling Unit Applications 437

 Modules (OASD Optional Features)
The Optional Features selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
• UNITEN-MODE (Unit Enable Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• UNITEN-S (Unit Enable Toggle Switch)
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the state/speed of the supply/exhaust fan during a call for Smoke
Control.
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when the Unit Enable
Mode or Switch (BI) is selected or when Power Fail Restart is selected.

438 CCT Help: Applications

100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Control Logic Selection

Optional Sensors (OASD)

These selections provide the option for loading extra, monitor-only sensors.
The selection options for Optional Sensors are:
• Outdoor Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Preheat Air Temperature
• Discharge Air
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Static Pressure
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Minimum Flow Protection For Staged Heating
• Exhaust Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Static Pressure
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Zone
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor

Air Handling Unit Applications 439

 • Misc
- Building Static Pressure
- Heat Recovery Air Temperature
If a Sensor is required for one of the selections made in the Mechanical System
Selection, the option is not available here.
The Minimum Flow Protection for Staged Heating can be selected if Staged
Preheat or Staged Reheat is selected and the Discharge Flow is available (either
due to selecting Exhaust Fan Volume Matching or an optional Discharge Flow
sensor).

Modules (OASD Optional Sensors)

The Optional Sensors selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded when a physical
Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected.
• FLOW-LL (Airflow Low Limit): This module is loaded when Minimum
Flow Protection For Staged Heating is selected. It is the minimum
discharge flow required before staged heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature)
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity)
• OA-Q (Outdoor Air Quality)
• OA-VP (Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure)
• OA-F (Outdoor Air Flow (measurement scaled using AI Output Range
High)
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature)
• DA-H (Discharge Air Humidity)
• DA-Q (Discharge Air Quality)
• DA1-P (Discharge Air Static Pressure 1)
• DA-VP (Discharge Air Velocity Pressure)
• DA-F (Discharge Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the
AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• EA-T (Exhaust Air Temperature)
• EA-H (Exhaust Air Humidity)
• EA-Q (Exhaust Air Quality)

440 CCT Help: Applications

 • EA-P (Exhaust Air Static Pressure)
• EA-VP (Exhaust Air Velocity Pressure)
• EA-F (Exhaust Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI
object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature)
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity)
• ZN-Q (Zone Quality)
• BLDG-P (Building Static Pressure)
• HR-T (Heat Recovery Temperature)
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Outdoor Air Flow Calculation
• Discharge Flow Calculation
• Exhaust Flow Calculation
State Generation
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Minimum Flow
Protection For Staged Heating is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 441

Optional Equipment (OASD)
The selection options for Optional Equipment are:
• Pre-Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor
• Final Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor

Modules (OASD Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• PFILT-S (PreFilter Status)
• PFILT-DP (PreFilter Diff Pressure)
• FFILT-S (Final Filter Status)
• FFILT-DP (Final Filter Diff Pressure)
See the Inputs section.

442 CCT Help: Applications

Monitored Safeties (OASD)
These selections provide inputs for monitoring equipment safeties. The High and
Low Static Pressure Switch inputs and High and Low Temperature Switch inputs
are connected to the Emergency Mode Sequencer and shut down the application
when tripped.
The selection options for Monitored Safeties are:
• Discharge
- High Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Exhaust
- Low Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Low Limit Temperature Switch
• High Limit Temperature Switch
• Humidity Alarm

Modules (OASD Monitored Safeties)

The Monitored Safeties selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• DAPHI-A (Discharge Air High Duct Pressure)
• DA-SD (Discharge Air Smoke Alarm)
• EAPLO-A (Exhaust Air Low Duct Pressure)
• EA-SD (Exhaust Air Smoke Alarm)
• LT-A (Low Temperature Alarm)
• HT-A (High Temperature Alarm)
• HUMHI-A (Humidity High Limit)
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 443

100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
See the following sections for information on this application’s logic and
selections:
• 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Core Logic
• 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection
- Fans
- Temperature Control Strategy
- Occupancy Control
- Heat Recovery
- Coils (Preheat)
- Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck)
- Coils (Heating - Hot Deck)
- Humidification
- Optional Features
• 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Control Logic Selection
- Optional Sensors
- Optional Equipment
- Monitored Safeties
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

444 CCT Help: Applications

100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Core Logic

Modules (OADD)
All 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Applications use the core logic listed below.
Network Inputs
• APP-MODE (Application Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CD-T (Cold Deck Temperature)
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• 100 OA Start Stop Sequencing
• Application Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water
Flush application mode for separate connection to State Selection and
passes the remaining application modes to State Selection.
• Water System Flush Pass Through: This module passes the Water Flush
system mode to a separate State Selection input so that when water flush is
requested, the valves always open.
• 100 OA Cold Duct Sequencing
Output Control
• Heating Required LV
• Cooling Required LV

Air Handling Unit Applications 445

100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection

Fans (OADD)
These selections provide the logic for the main fans.
The selection options for Fans are:
Supply Fan
• Single Speed
• Variable Speed
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

446 CCT Help: Applications

 Exhaust Fan
• Single Speed
• Variable Speed
- Volume Matching
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Calculate Discharge Flow from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Inputs
• Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints
- Building Static Pressure
- Track Supply Fan
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
A Supply Fan is required (that is, it is selected by default) as well as an optional
Exhaust or Relief Fan.
A Variable Speed Supply Fan is required in order to select a Variable Speed
Exhaust Fan.

Air Handling Unit Applications 447

 Modules (OADD Fans)
The Fans selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• DAP-SP (Duct Static Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Supply Fan Status
with Manual Restart is selected but not a Unit Reset Switch (BI).
• FLOW-DIFF (Flow Differential Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control is selected, but
Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints is not selected.
• OCCFLOW-DIFF (Occupied Flow Differential Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are
selected with Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching.
• UNOCCFLOW-DIFF (Unoccupied Flow Differential Setpoint): This
module is loaded when Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints
are selected with Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching.
• BLDGP-SP (Building Static Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Building Static Pressure control is
selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CD-P (Cold Deck Static Pressure): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• HD-P (Hot Deck Static Pressure): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• SF-S (Supply Fan Status)
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Unit Reset Switch
(BI) is selected with Supply Fan Status with Manual Restart.
• CD-F (Cold Deck Flow): This module is loaded when Flow Measurement
(Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow is calculated
from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• HD-F (Hot Deck Flow): This module is loaded when Flow Measurement
(Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow is calculated
from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.

448 CCT Help: Applications

 • DA-F (Discharge Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow
Measurement (Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge
Flow is measured directly. The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI
object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• EA-F (Exhaust Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow Measurement
(Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• CD-VP (Cold Deck Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control and
Discharge Flow is calculated from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• HD-VP (Hot Deck Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control and
Discharge Flow is calculated from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• DA-VP (Discharge Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control and
Discharge Flow is measured directly.
• EA-VP (Exhaust Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control.
• BLDG-P (Building Static Pressure): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Exhaust Fan Building Static Pressure control is selected.
• EF-S (Exhaust Fan Status): This module is loaded when Exhaust Fan
Status is selected. This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• EF-BA (Exhaust Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Exhaust
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• EF-LO (Exhaust Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Exhaust Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SF-BA (Supply Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Supply
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• SF-LO (Supply Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Supply Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) options are selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 449

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Discharge Flow Determination adds the Cold Deck and Hot Deck Flow
together to determine the Discharge Flow: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control with Discharge
Flow calculated from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• Cold Deck Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge
Flow is calculated from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• Hot Deck Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity Pressure
(Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow is calculated
from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• Discharge Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge
Flow is measured directly.
• Exhaust Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity Pressure
(Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control.
• VOLUMEMATCH-RANGE (Volume Match PID Process Range): This
module is loaded Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control. It
determines the default PID proportional band for the volume matching
control loop and should be configured to the design flow of the Exhaust
Fan.
• Flow Differential Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when
Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are selected for
Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching control.
• Exhaust Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Exhaust Fan, Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.
State Generation
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Supply Fan
Status is selected.
• Exhaust Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Exhaust Fan Alarm
Management is selected.
• Supply Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Supply Fan Alarm
Management is selected.

450 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Constant Capacity Supply Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan OnOff LV
• Supply Fan Percent Cmd LV: This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Supply Fan is selected.
• Constant Capacity Exhaust Fan Control: This module is loaded when
Single Speed Exhaust Fan is selected.
• Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan Volume Matching Control: This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Volume Matching is selected.
• Exhaust Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Exhaust Fan Building Static Pressure is selected.
• Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan Track Control: This module is loaded when
Exhaust Fan Variable Speed Track Supply Fan is selected.
Outputs
• SF-C (Supply Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Supply
Fan is selected.
• SF-O (Supply Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Supply Fan is selected.
• EF-C (Exhaust Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Exhaust
Fan is selected.
• EF-O (Exhaust Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Exhaust Fan is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 451

Temperature Control Strategy (OADD)
These selections provide the logic for determining the setpoints of the Cold Deck
and Hot Deck temperature control loops. The Hot Deck Setpoint options apply
only if a Hot Deck heating coil is selected.
The selection options for Temperature Control Strategy are:
• Fixed Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperatures
• Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T
• Hot Deck Temperature Reset from EA-T

Modules (OADD Temperature Control Strategy)

The Temperature Control Strategy selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• CDT-SP (Cold Deck Temperature Setpoint): for when Fixed Hot and/or
Cold Deck Temperatures or Hot Deck Temperature Reset from RA-T is
selected.
• HDT-SP (Hot Deck Temperature Setpoint): for when Fixed Hot and/or
Cold Deck Temperatures is selected (and Hot Deck heating coil is
selected).
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• EA-T (Exhaust Air Temperature): for when Hot Deck Temperature Reset
from EA-T is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Cold Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset: This module is loaded when Hot
and/or Cold Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T is selected.
• Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset: This module is loaded when Hot
and/or Cold Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T is selected (and Hot Deck
heating coil is selected).
• Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset by EA-T: This module is loaded
when Hot Deck Temperature Reset from EA-T is selected (and Hot Deck
heating coil is selected).

452 CCT Help: Applications

Occupancy Control (OADD)
These selections provide the logic for Occupancy Mode Determinination.
The selection options for Occupancy Control are:
• Always Occupied
• Scheduled Occupancy
- Override Support
- Occupancy Switch (BI)
- Unoccupied Strategy
• Intermittent Night Operation
• Off during Unoccupied
If any options are selected for separate Occupied and Unoccupied Setpoints or
Temporary Occupancy, the Always Occupied option cannot be selected.

Modules (OADD Occupancy Control)

The Occupancy Control selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE: This module is loaded when Scheduled Occupancy is
selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• OCC-OVERRIDE: This module is loaded when Override Support is
selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• WC-C (WarmupCooldown command): This point is an input when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected.
• ZN-T (network Zone Temperature): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected and a physical Zone Temperature
input is not selected in the Optional Sensors group of the Control System
Selections.
• CLGUNOCC-SP (Night Cooling Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
• HTGUNOCC-SP (Night Heating Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module is loaded when Occupancy
Switch (BI) is selected; connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination
module.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 453

 State Generation
• Always Occupied: This is an Enum Constant. In applications that are
always Occupied (when Enabled), the Always Occupied module is loaded
to provide a consistent source of data for other modules that require
Occupancy Mode information.
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• WarmupCooldown Pass Through: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• DA-T Unocc Status Determination: This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Occupancy Status Display): This module is loaded when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected and a Zone Temperature Sensor is also
loaded (either due to the Temperature Control Strategy or selected as an
Optional Sensor). It provides Occupancy Mode information for models of
the network sensor with a LED.
See the Outputs section.

454 CCT Help: Applications

Heat Recovery (OADD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Heat Recovery Enthalpy Wheel or
Glycol Loop.
The selection options for Heat Recovery are:
Enable Type
• Dry Bulb
• Enthalpy
Enthalpy Wheel
• Single Speed
- Modulated Bypass Dampers
• Variable Speed
- Bypass Damper BO
• Wheel Status
- Loss of Status Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Blocking Protection/Cleaning Mode: This option provides cleaning mode
functionality. If the wheel is off for an extended period, the wheel turns on for
a short time to keep the wheel free of dirt and dust.

Air Handling Unit Applications 455

 Glycol Loop
• 3-Way Valve
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
• Circulation Pump
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).

456 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (OADD Heat Recovery)
The Heat Recovery selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HR-EN (Heat Recovery isAllowed)
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when either Enable
Type option is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Enthalpy
Enable Type is selected.
• EA-T (Exhaust Air Temperature)
• EAHR-T (Exhaust Air Heat Recovery Temperature): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is selected or when Glycol Loop is selected
but not a 3-Way Valve (Circulation Pump only). This serves as the low
limit process variable.
• GLY-T (Glycol Temperature): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected. This input serves as the low limit process
variable.
• HRW-S (Heat Recovery Wheel Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• HRP-S (Heat Recovery Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• HRP-LO (Heat Recovery Pump Lockout Switch BI): This module is
loaded when Glycol Loop Circulation Pump Alarm Management Lockout
Switch is selected.
• HRW-BA (Heat Recovery Wheel Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• HRW-LO (Heat Recovery Wheel Lockout Switch BI): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Lockout Switch is
selected.
• HRW-FAULT (Heat Recovery Wheel VFD Fault BI): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Frequency Converter
Fault is selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 457

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HRLL-SP (Heat Recovery Low Limit Setpoint): This is a floating-point
Constant.
• Heat Recovery Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Glycol Loop Circulation Pump, Pump Status is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel, Wheel Status is selected.
State Generation
• Heat Recovery Suitability Determination: This module is loaded when Dry
Bulb Enable Type is selected.
• Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination: This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Enable Type is selected.
• Heat Recovery Suitability Determination
• Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing
• Heat Recovery Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
Circulation Pump Alarm Management is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Alarms: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel
Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Heat Recovery Htg CS LV
• Enthalpy Wheel Control: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is
selected.
• Glycol Loop Control: This module is loaded when Glycol Loop is selected.
• Energy Wheel Two Pos Byp: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel
Variable Speed Bypass Damper BO is selected.
• Exhaust Fan Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Glycol
Loop Circulation Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
• Heat Recovery Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when
Glycol Loop Circulation Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Blocking Protection is selected.

458 CCT Help: Applications

 Outputs
• HROAFBD-O (Heat Recovery OA FBD AO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
• HREAFBD-O (Heat Recovery EA FBD AO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
• HRW-C (Heat Recovery Wheel Command): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed is selected.
• HR-O (Heat Recovery Output): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected.
• HRP-C (Heat Recovery Pump Command): This module is loaded when
Glycol Loop with 3-Way Valve is selected.
• HREAFBD-C (Heat Recovery Exhaust FBD BO): This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed Modulated Bypass Dampers is
selected.
• HROAFBD-C (Heat Recovery OA FBD BO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 459

Coils (Preheat) (OADD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Preheat coil. During startup, Preheat
controls the CD-T to the OALT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint).
The selection options for Coils (Preheat) are:
Preheat
Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air
Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The
current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior.
• High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a
High Temperature alarm occurs.
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Incremental Output
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator

460 CCT Help: Applications

 • Two Position Output
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Face and Bypass Switchover
- Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- Based on Network Input
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position

Air Handling Unit Applications 461

 • Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control: This option turns on
the coil pump if the outdoor air temperature is lower than the setpoint and
the unit is off. The preheat valve is modulated to control the leaving water
temperature.
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support including Face & Bypass Damper or
Circulation Pump controls.
The Face and Bypass Switchover option is applicable only when either a
Proportional or Incremental valve actuator is selected with Face and Bypass
Damper. This option specifies how to determine when the valve should be in
control (with the Damper at full face) and when the damper should be in control
(with the Valve fully open).
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

462 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (OADD Coils [Preheat])
The Coils (Preheat) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• PH-EN (Preheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Preheat
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point
determines the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall
below before heating is enabled.
• FBPD-SWO (Network Face & Bypass Switchover): This module is loaded
when Face and Bypass Switchover Based on Network Input is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• PHWE-T (Preheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• PHWL-T (Preheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• PHP-S (Preheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Remain
in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected and Preheat Temperature is not
otherwise loaded.
• PHP-LO (Preheat Pump Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is
selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 463

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HTG-RAMPRATE (Heating Ramp Rate): This floating-point Constant
determines the rate at which the preheat is allowed to close if the cold
temperature startup process.
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when a
process variable is available for Low Limit control of the Preheat Coil
during Startup (either DA-T or PH-T) or for when any Coil has the Remain
in Control Shutdown Control options selected.
• Preheat Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Preheat Availability Determination
• Preheat Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Hot Water or Steam
Coil Pump Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Preheat Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Preheat Control Status LV
• Preheat Percent Cmd LV: This point is required by the 100 OA Single Duct
Sequencing module to determine whether Preheat needs to remain in
control after startup has completed.
• Staged Preheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Preheat is
selected.
• Preheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of Staged Preheat are selected.
• MSC Staged Preheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat.
• Preheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.

464 CCT Help: Applications

 • Preheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Sequenced Valves Preheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• FBPD Proportional Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when the
Face and Bypass Damper option for Proportional Actuator or Incremental
Actuator is selected.
• Proportional Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (and Two Valves
and Face and Bypass Damper are not selected).
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• Preheat Proportional Valve Output: This module is loaded when Loss of
Airflow Strategy Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control is
selected.
• Preheat Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• PHX-C (Preheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• PH-O (Preheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (but not the Two Valves
option).
• PH1-O (Preheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• PH2-O (Preheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• PH-C (Preheat Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• PHFBD-O (Preheat Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• PHP-C (Preheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Preheat
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 465

Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) (OADD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Cooling coil.
The selection options for Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) are:
Cooling - Cold Deck
Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air
DX Cooling
• Device Rotation
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Chilled Water
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Actuator
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

466 CCT Help: Applications

 - Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 467

 Modules (OADD Coils [Cooling - Cold Deck])
The Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• CLG-EN (Cooling isAvailable): This module is loaded when Cooling
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• CLGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Cooling Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point
determines the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must rise
above before cooling is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CHWE-T (Chilled Water Entering Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CHWL-T (Chilled Water Leaving Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CP-S (Cooling Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• Cooling Pump Lockout Switch BI: This input is loaded when Chilled
Water Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Cooling Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Chill Water Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Availability Determination
• Cooling Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Chilled Water Coil
Pump Alarm Management is selected.

468 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Cooling Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Control Status LV
• Staged Cooling Control: This module is loaded when DX Cooling is
selected.
• Cooling Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of DX Cooling are selected.
• MSC Staged Cooling X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for DX Cooling.
• Cooling X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for DX Cooling and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Cooling X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for DX Cooling and Device Rotation is selected. One
module is loaded per stage.
• Proportional Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• Cooling Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Chilled
Water Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• CLGX-C (Cooling X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for DX Cooling. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• CLG-O (Cooling Output): This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• CLG-C (Cooling Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• CLGFBD-O (Cooling Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• CP-C (Cooling Pump Command): This module is loaded when Cooling
Circulation Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 469

Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) (OADD)
These selections provide the logic to control the Hot Deck temperature using a
Heating coil.
The selection options for Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) are:
Heating - Hot Deck
Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air
Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The
current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior.
• High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a
High Temperature alarm occurs.
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
• Incremental Output
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature

470 CCT Help: Applications

 • Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
- Loss of Status Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position

Air Handling Unit Applications 471

 The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support including Face & Bypass Damper or
Circulation Pump controls.
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Modules (OADD Coils [Heating - Hot Deck])

The Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• RH-EN (Reheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Reheat Lockout
from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point
determines the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall
below before heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• HD-T (Hot Deck Temperature)
• RHWE-T (Reheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHWL-T (Reheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHP-S (Reheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Remain
in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• Reheat Pump Lockout Switch BI: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.

472 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• Reheat Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Availability Determination
• 100 OA Hot Deck Sequencing
• Reheat Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Hot Water or Steam
Coil Pump Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Heating Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Control Status LV
• Staged Reheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Reheat is
selected.
• Reheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more stages
of Staged Reheat are selected.
• MSC Staged Reheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat.
• Reheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Reheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Sequenced Valves Reheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• Proportional Valve Reheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (and Two Valves
is not selected).

Air Handling Unit Applications 473

 • Reheat Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• HTGX-C (Reheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• RH-O (Reheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (but not the Two Valves
option).
• HTG1-O (Reheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• HTG2-O (Reheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• RHP-C (Reheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Reheat
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

474 CCT Help: Applications

Humidification (OADD)
These selections provide the logic to control a humidifier if present.
The selection options for Humidification are:
• Staged
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the humidifier.
• Steam Proportional Valve
- Isolation Valve
• Modulated Packaged Unit
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier).
• Scrubber: This option is for a scrubber humidifier, which is a shower head,
pump, and basin located in the ductwork. This type of humidifier requires
3 BOs; a pump BO, a drain valve BO, and a BO to close the fill valve. The
drain valve and fill valve BOs should actuate together (if draining, close the
inlet valve and disable the pump). The operational water level is maintained by
a mechanical float valve.
- Drain Valve: This option provides an output for the drain valve and an
output for the fill valve.
• Open valve if scrubber is inactive: This option provides monitoring
of and indicates the status of the pump command and a network input to
open the drain valve. If the network input requests the valve to open or
if the pump command has been off for a period of time, the drain valve
opens. If the pump is required to start, the drain valve closes for a
period of time to allow the sump to fill before starting the pump.
• Open valve on Network Input
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier).
• Control Sensor
- Zone Humidity
• During Unoccupied Mode
- Exhaust Air Humidity
• Hot Deck Humidity High Limit Control

Air Handling Unit Applications 475

 The During Unoccupied Mode option is applicable only when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.

Modules (OADD Humidification)

The Humidification selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HUM-EN (Humidification isAvailable)
• BASIN-C (Drain Basin): This module is loaded when Scrubber Drain
Valve Open valve on Network Input is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): This module is loaded when Zone Humidity is
selected for the humidification process variable.
• EA-H (Exhaust Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Exhaust Air
Humidity is selected for the humidification process variable.
• HD-H (Hot Deck Humidity): This module is loaded when Hot Deck
Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HUM-SP (Humidification Setpoint): This is a floating-point Constant.
• DAH-SP (Discharge Air Humidity Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when Hot Deck Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
State Generation
• Humidification Sequencing
• Humidification isAvailable Pass Through

476 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Humidity Control Status LV
• Staged Humidification Control: This module is loaded when Staged
Humidification is selected.
• Humidification Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or
more stages of Staged Humidification are selected.
• MSC Staged Humidification X: This module is loaded when X number of
stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
• Proportional Steam Humidification Control: This module is loaded when
Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• Packaged Humidifier Control: This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• Humidity Scrubber Output: This module is loaded when Scrubber is
selected.
Outputs
• HUMX-C (Humidification X Command): This module is loaded when a
number of stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
One Output is loaded per stage.
• HUM-O (Humidifier Output): This module is loaded when Steam
Proportional Valve or Modulated Packaged Unit is selected.
• HUM-C (Humidifier Command): This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• STMISO-C (Steam Isolation Valve Command): This module is loaded
when the Isolation Valve option for Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• HDV-C (Drain Valve BO): This module is loaded when Scrubber Drain
Valve is selected.
• HFV-C (Fill Valve BO): This module is loaded when Scrubber is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 477

Optional Features (OADD)
These selections provide the logic for controlling the operation of the application.
The Unit Enable logic includes the option to delay startup after controller restart
(Power Fail Restart).
The selection options for Optional Features are:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.
• Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based
on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Enable Switch is selected, then when the
Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Unit Enable Switch (BI): This option determines whether the application
operates based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected, then
when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Power Fail Restart: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator module. When this option is selected, after a
restart (power cycle, controller download, or manual restart command), the
application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time
(default = 60 seconds).

478 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (OADD Optional Features)
The Optional Features selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
• UNITEN-MODE (Unit Enable Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• UNITEN-S (Unit Enable Toggle Switch)
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the state/speed of the supply/exhaust fan during a call for Smoke
Control.
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when the Unit Enable
Mode or Switch (BI) is selected or when Power Fail Restart is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 479

100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Control Logic Selection

Optional Sensors (OADD)

These selections provide the option for loading extra, monitor-only sensors.
The selection options for Optional Sensors are:
• Outdoor Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Preheat Air Temperature
• Discharge Air
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
- Minimum Flow Protection For Staged Heating
• Hot Deck
- Temperature
- Humidity
- Static Pressure
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Cold Deck
- Static Pressure
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)

480 CCT Help: Applications

 • Exhaust Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Static Pressure
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Zone
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Misc
- Building Static Pressure
- Heat Recovery Air Temperature
If a Sensor is required for one of the selections made in the Mechanical System
Selection, the option is not available here.
The Minimum Flow Protection for Staged Preheat can be selected if Staged
Preheat is selected and the Discharge Flow is available (either due to selecting
Exhaust Fan Volume Matching orRooftop Unit Application an optional Discharge
Flow sensor).

Air Handling Unit Applications 481

 Modules (OADD Optional Sensors)
The Optional Sensors selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded when a physical
Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected.
• FLOW-LL (Airflow Low Limit): This module is loaded when Minimum
Flow Protection For Staged Heating is selected. It is the minimum
discharge flow required before staged heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature)
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity)
• OA-Q (Outdoor Air Quality)
• OA-VP (Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure)
• OA-F (Outdoor Air Flow): The measurement is scaled using AI Output
Range High.
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature)
• DA-H (Discharge Air Humidity)
• DA-Q (Discharge Air Quality)
• DA1-P (Discharge Air Static Pressure 1)
• DA-VP (Discharge Air Velocity Pressure)
• DA-F (Discharge Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the
AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• HD-T (Hot Deck Temperature)
• HD-H (Hot Deck Humidity)
• HD-P (Hot Deck Static Pressure)
• HD-VP (Hot Deck Velocity Pressure)
• HD-F (Hot Deck Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI
object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• CD-P (Cold Deck Static Pressure)
• CD-VP (Cold Deck Velocity Pressure)
• CD-F (Cold Deck Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI
object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• EA-T (Exhaust Air Temperature)
• EA-H (Exhaust Air Humidity)

482 CCT Help: Applications

 • EA-Q (Exhaust Air Quality)
• EA-P (Exhaust Air Static Pressure)
• EA-VP (Exhaust Air Velocity Pressure)
• EA-F (Exhaust Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI
object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature)
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity)
• ZN-Q (Zone Quality)
• BLDG-P (Building Static Pressure)
• HR-T (Heat Recovery Temperature)
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Outdoor Air Flow Calculation
• Discharge Flow Calculation
• Hot Deck Flow Calculation
• Cold Deck Flow Calculation
• Exhaust Flow Calculation
State Generation
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Minimum Flow
Protection For Staged Preheat is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 483

Optional Equipment (OADD)
These selections provide monitor only sensors for an optional pre-filter and/or
final filter.
The selection options for Optional Equipment are:
• Pre-Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor
• Final Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor

Modules (OADD Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• PFILT-S (PreFilter Status)
• PFILT-DP (PreFilter Diff Pressure)
• FFILT-S (Final Filter Status)
• FFILT-DP (Final Filter Diff Pressure)
See the Inputs section.

484 CCT Help: Applications

Monitored Safeties (OADD)
These selections provide inputs for monitoring equipment safeties. The High and
Low Static Pressure Switch inputs and High and Low Temperature Switch inputs
are connected to the Emergency Mode Sequencer and shuts down the application
when tripped.
The selection options for Monitored Safeties are:
• Discharge
- High Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Exhaust
- Low Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Low Limit Temperature Switch
• High Limit Temperature Switch
• Humidity Alarm

Modules (OADD Monitored Safeties)

The Monitored Safeties selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• DAPHI-A (Discharge Air High Duct Pressure)
• DA-SD (Discharge Air Smoke Alarm)
• EAPLO-A (Exhaust Air Low Duct Pressure)
• EA-SD (Exhaust Air Smoke Alarm)
• LT-A (Low Temperature Alarm)
• HT-A (High Temperature Alarm)
• HUMHI-A (Humidity High Limit)
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 485

Rooftop Unit Application
See the following sections for information on the Rooftop Unit (RTU)
application’s logic and selections:
• Rooftop Core Logic
• Rooftop Mechanical System Selection
- Fans
- Economizer Damper(s)
- Temperature Control Strategy
- Occupancy Control
- Coils (Cooling)
- Coils (Heating)
- Humidification
- Dehumidification Control
- Optional Features
• Rooftop Control Logic Selection
- Optional Sensors
- Optional Equipment
- Monitored Safeties
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

486 CCT Help: Applications

Rooftop Core Logic

Modules (RTU)
All Rooftop Applications use the core logic listed below.
Network Inputs
• APP-MODE (Application Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
State Generation
• Application Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water
Flush application mode for separate connection to State Selection and
passes the remaining application modes to State Selection.
• Water System Flush Pass Through: This module passes the Water Flush
system mode to a separate State Selection input so that when water flush is
requested, the valves always open.
• Mixed Air Single Duct HR Sequencing
Output Control
• Heating Required LV
• Cooling Required LV

Air Handling Unit Applications 487

Rooftop Mechanical System Selection

Fans (RTU)
These selections provide the logic for the main fans.
The selection options for Fans are:
• Supply Fan - Single Speed
- Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

Modules (RTU Fans)

The Fans selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Supply Fan Status
with Manual Restart is selected, but a Unit Reset Switch (BI) is not
selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• SF-S (Supply Fan Status)
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Unit Reset Switch
(BI) is selected with Supply Fan Status with Manual Restart.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
•Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Supply Fan
Status is selected.
Output Control
• Constant Capacity Supply Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan OnOff LV
Outputs
• SF-C (Supply Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Supply
Fan is selected.
See the Outputs section.

488 CCT Help: Applications

Economizer Damper(s) (RTU)
The selection options for Economizer Damper(s) are:
• Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output
• Packaged Economizer Enable (BO)
• Economizer Suitability
- Network Command
- Enthalpy Switch (BI)
- Outdoor Air
• Dry Bulb Temp Economizer
• Temp & Enthalpy Economizer
• Mixed Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 Sensor
- Use Zone CO2 Sensor
- Use Return CO2 Sensor
• Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature
The Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature selection enables logic that reduces
the intake of outdoor air when the Mixed Air Temperature is low. This outdoor air
intake reduction is accomplished by modulating the outdoor dampers closed. The
control logic for the low limit strategy is embedded directly into the Output
Control modules and activated simply by connecting the appropriate setpoint and
process variable. The logic takes precedence over all logic other than Emergency
Modes.

Air Handling Unit Applications 489

 Modules (RTU Economizer Dampers[s])
The Economizer Damper(s) selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OAD-MINPOS (Occupied Minimum Position for the Economizer
Dampers): This module is loaded when Common Proportional Mixed Air
Damper Output is selected.
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enable): This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Network Command is selected.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature shared via network): This module is
loaded when Outdoor Air Economizer Suitability is selected and a physical
Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected in the Optional Sensors
group of the Control System Selections.
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity shared via network): This module is loaded
when Temp & Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected and a physical
Outdoor Air Humidity input is not selected in the Optional Sensors group
of the Control System Selections.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enable): This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Enthalpy Switch (BI) is selected.
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy, Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy, Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected.
• ZN-Q (Zone Quality for CO2, CO, and others): This module is loaded
when Outdoor and/or Mixed Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2
Sensor using Zone CO2 Sensor is selected.
• RA-Q (Return Air Quality for CO2, CO, and others): This module is
loaded when Outdoor and/or Mixed Air Damper Minimum Position Reset
by CO2 Sensor using Return CO2 Sensor is selected.
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Reduce
Outdoor Air on Low Temperature is selected.
See the Inputs section.

490 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Economizer Availability
• MAD-RAMPRATE (Damper Ramp Rate): This floating-point Constant is
loaded when Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output is selected.
This module is used to specify the rate at which the damper ramps open to
its minimum position during the startup process.
• Damper Minimum Position Determination: This module is loaded when
Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output is selected.
• Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2: This module is loaded when
Outdoor and/or Mixed Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2
Sensor is selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature is selected. This module is the
upper threshold of the low limit control logic.
• LT-PB (Low Limit Proportional Band): This floating-point Constant is
loaded when Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature is selected. It is the
range as the Mixed Air Temperature falls below the LT-SP over which the
outdoor air is reduced from its normal operating values to the minimum
that can be achieved by the application.
Output Control
• Proportional OA Damper Control: This module is loaded when Common
Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output is selected.
• Damper Control Status LV: This module is loaded when Common
Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output is selected.
• Packaged Economizer Control: This module is loaded when Packaged
Economizer Enable (BO) is selected.
Outputs
• MAD-O (Mixed Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output is selected.
• ECON-C (Economizer Enable Command): This module is loaded when
Packaged Economizer Enable (BO) is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 491

Temperature Control Strategy (RTU)
These selections provide the logic for the basic Temperature Control Strategy for
the application. The Discharge Air Control options (fixed setpoint and Reset from
Outdoor Air Temperature) provide air to separately controlled zones. The Zone or
Return Control options directly control a single zone (whether the sensor is in the
zone or in the return duct). For single zone control, the application can be
optionally configured to control the Discharge Air Temperature to a setpoint reset
based on the Zone or Return Air Temperature.
The selection options for Temperature Control Strategy are:
• Discharge Air Control
- Reset from Outdoor Air Temperature
• Zone or Return Control
- Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return
- Cycle During Occupied
- Return Air Temperature
- Zone Temperature
• Setpoint Adjust
- Common Setpoint Adjust
- Warm Cool Adjust
• Temp Occ Support
- Summer/Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift
If Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return is selected, Cycle During
Occupied cannot be selected.

492 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (RTU Temperature Control Strategy)
The Temperature Control Strategy selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• DAT-SP (Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded
when (fixed) Discharge Air Control is selected.
• RAT-SP (Return Air Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Return Air Temperature control is selected. This point serves as the
Network Setpoint input into the ZN-T Setpoint Determination module.
• ZNT-SP (Zone Network Temperature Setpoint): This setpoint is always
created. If no Setpoint Adjustment or Warm Cool Adjust is selected,
ZNT-SP provides a Zone Setpoint Adjustment for the Supervisory system.
If a Setpoint Input for the Network Sensor is created, ZNT-SP becomes the
local backup if the Supervisory system is not communicating.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when
Discharge Air Control or Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or
Return is selected. This module may also be loaded if needed for particular
coil control strategy.
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Return Air
Temperature control is selected.
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature): This module is loaded when Zone Temperature
control is selected.
• ZN-SP (local Zone Setpoint): This module is loaded when Common
Setpoint Adjust is selected.
• WC-ADJ (local Warmer/Cooler Adjust): This module is loaded when
Warm Cool Adjust is selected.
• ZN-TOCC (Zone Temporary Occupancy): This module is loaded when
Temp Occ Support is selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode
Determination module.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 493

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Discharge Air Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when
Discharge Air Control or Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or
Return is selected.
• Discharge Air Setpoint Reset: This module is loaded when the Reset from
Outdoor Air Temperature option of Discharge Air Control is selected.
• ZN-T Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when Zone or Return
Control is selected.
• Summer Winter Compensation: This module is loaded when Summer/
Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift is selected.
State Generation
• Start Stop Sequencing DA-T: This module is loaded when Discharge Air
Control or Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return is selected.
• Start Stop Sequencing Zone: This module is loaded when Zone or Return
Air Temperature Control is selected, but Discharge Air Temperature Reset
by Zone or Return is not selected.
• Zone Sequencing: This module is loaded when the Discharge Air
Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of Zone or Return Control is
selected.
Output Control
• Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded
when the Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of
Zone or Return Control is selected.
• Cascaded DA-T Setpoint LV: This module is loaded when the Discharge
Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of Zone or Return Control
is selected.
• Zone Heating Control Status LV: This module is loaded when the
Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of Zone or
Return Control is selected.
• Zone Cooling Control Status LV: This module is loaded when the
Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of Zone or
Return Control is selected.

494 CCT Help: Applications

Occupancy Control (RTU)
These selections provide the logic for Occupancy Mode Determinination.
The selection options for Occupancy Control are:
• Always Occupied
• Scheduled Occupancy
- Override Support
- Occupancy Switch (BI)
- Unoccupied Strategy
• Intermittent Night Operation
• Off during Unoccupied
If any options are selected for separate Occupied and Unoccupied Setpoints or
Temporary Occupancy, the Always Occupied option cannot be selected.

Modules (RTU Occupancy Control)

The Occupancy Control selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE: This module is loaded when Scheduled Occupancy is
selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• OCC-OVERRIDE: This module is loaded when Override Support is
selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• WC-C (WarmupCooldown command): This module is the input when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected.
• ZN-T (network Zone Temperature): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected with the Discharge Air Control
temperature control strategy, and a physical Zone Temperature input is not
selected in the Optional Sensors group of the Control System Selections.
• CLGUNOCC-SP (Night Cooling Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected with the Discharge Air Control
temperature control strategy.
• HTGUNOCC-SP (Night Heating Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected with the Discharge Air Control
temperature control strategy.
See the Network Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 495

 Inputs
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module is loaded when Occupancy
Switch (BI) is selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode
Determination module.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Always Occupied: This is an Enum Constant. In applications that are
always Occupied (when Enabled), the Always Occupied module is loaded
to provide a consistent source of data for other modules that require
Occupancy Mode information.
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• WarmupCooldown Pass Through: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• DA-T Unocc Status Determination: This module is loaded when both
Discharge Air Control and Intermittent Night Operation are selected or
when Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return is selected. For
Discharge Air Control applications, this module only sequences the
application during intermittent unoccupied night operation. For Zone or
Return Control applications, it sequences during Warmup or Cooldown as
well.
• Zone Unoccupied Sequencing: This module is loaded when Zone or Return
Control is selected, but Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or
Return is not selected.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Occupancy Status Display): This module is loaded when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected and a Zone Temperature Sensor is also
loaded (either due to the Temperature Control Strategy or selected as an
Optional Sensor). It provides Occupancy Mode information for models of
the network sensor with a LED.
See the Outputs section.

496 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (Cooling) (RTU)
These selections provide the logic to control a Cooling coil.
The selection options for Coils (Cooling) are:
Cooling
• Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air
• DX Cooling
- Device Rotation
- Number of Stages
• One Stage
• Two Stages
• Three Stages
• Four Stages
• Five Stages
• Six Stages
• Seven Stages
• Eight Stages
• Chilled Water
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
- Two Position Actuator
• Face and Bypass Damper
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
- Entering Water Temperature
- Leaving Water Temperature
- Coil Pump
• Pressure/Flow Boost
• Low Temperature Circulation
• Pump Status

Air Handling Unit Applications 497

 - Shutdown Strategy
• Off
• Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
• User Defined Position
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Off
• Remain in Control
• Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
• User Defined Position
- Unreliable Sensor Operation
• Off
• Hold
• Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
• User Defined Position
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

498 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (RTU Coils [Cooling])
The Coils (Cooling) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• CLG-EN (Cooling isAvailable): This module is loaded when Cooling
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• CLGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Cooling Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point is
the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must rise above before
cooling is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CHWE-T (Chilled Water Entering Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CHWL-T (Chilled Water Leaving Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CP-S (Cooling Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Availability Determination

Air Handling Unit Applications 499

 Output Control
• Cooling Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Control Status LV
• Staged Cooling Control: This module is loaded when DX Cooling is
selected.
• Cooling Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of DX Cooling are selected.
• MSC Staged Cooling X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) is selected for DX Cooling.
• Cooling X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) is selected for DX Cooling and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Cooling X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) is selected for DX Cooling and Device Rotation is selected. One
module is loaded per stage.
• Proportional Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
Outputs
• CLGX-C (Cooling X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) is selected for DX Cooling. One Output is loaded
per stage.
• CLG-O (Cooling Output): This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• CLG-C (Cooling Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• CLGFBD-O (Cooling Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• CP-C (Cooling Pump Command): This module is loaded when Cooling
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

500 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (Heating) (RTU)
These selections provide the logic to control a Heating coil.
The selection options for Coils (Heating) are:
• Heating
- Heating Lockout from Outdoor Air
- Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• Gas Bonnet Switch
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
- Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
• Incremental Output
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position

Air Handling Unit Applications 501

 • Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
The Gas Bonnet Switch is only supported for Zone or Return Control (not DA-T
Reset) when the unit has an opportunity to use it for triggering start up. This option
applies when Cycle During Occupied or Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support including Face & Bypass Damper or
Circulation Pump controls.
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

502 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (RTU Coils [Heating])
The Coils (Heating) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• RH-EN (Reheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Heating
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Heating Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point is
the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall below before
heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• HTGBS-S (Reheat Bonnet Switch Status): This module is loaded when the
Gas Bonnet Switch is selected.
• RHWE-T (Reheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHWL-T (Reheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHP-S (Reheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Remain
in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Availability Determination

Air Handling Unit Applications 503

 Output Control
• Heating Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Control Status LV
• Staged Reheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Heating is
selected.
• Reheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more stages
of Staged Heating are selected.
• Reheat Percent Cmd LV: This module is loaded when the Gas Bonnet
Switch is selected.
• MSC Staged Reheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) is selected for Staged Heating.
• Reheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) is selected for Staged Heating and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Reheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) is selected for Staged Heating and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Sequenced Valves Reheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• Proportional Valve Reheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (and Two Valves
is not selected).
Outputs
• HTGX-C (Reheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) is selected for Staged Heating. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• RH-O (Reheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (but not the Two Valves
option).
• HTG1-O (Reheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• HTG2-O (Reheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• RHP-C (Reheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Coil Pump
is selected.
See the Outputs section.

504 CCT Help: Applications

Humidification (RTU)
These selections provide the logic to control a humidifier, if present.
The selection options for Humidification are:
• Staged
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
• Steam Proportional Valve
- Isolation Valve
• Modulated Packaged Unit
• Control Sensor
- Zone Humidity
• During Unoccupied Mode
- Return Air Humidity
• Discharge Humidity High Limit Control
The During Unoccupied Mode option is applicable only when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.

Modules (RTU Humidification)

The Humidification selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HUM-EN (Humidification isAvailable)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): This module is loaded when Zone Humidity is
selected for the humidification process variable.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Return Air
Humidity is selected for the humidification process variable.
• DA-H (Discharge Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Discharge
Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 505

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HUM-SP (Humidification Setpoint): This is a floating-point Constant.
• DAH-SP (Discharge Air Humidity Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when Discharge Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
State Generation
• Humidification Sequencing
• Humidification isAvailable Pass Through
Output Control
• Humidity Control Status LV
• Staged Humidification Control: This module is loaded when Staged
Humidification is selected.
• Humidification Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or
more stages of Staged Humidification are selected.
• MSC Staged Humidification X: This module is loaded when X number of
stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
• Proportional Steam Humidification Control: This module is loaded when
Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• Packaged Humidifier Control: This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
Outputs
• HUMX-C (Humidification X Command): This module is loaded when a
number of stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
One Output is loaded per stage.
• HUM-O (Humidifier Output): This module is loaded when Steam
Proportional Valve or Modulated Packaged Unit is selected.
• HUM-C (Humidifier Command): This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• STMISO-C (Steam Isolation Valve Command): This module is loaded
when the Isolation Valve option for Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
See the Outputs section.

506 CCT Help: Applications

Dehumidification Control (RTU)
These selections provide the logic for dehumidification control.
The selection options for Dehumidification Control are:
• Zone Humidity
• Return Air Humidity
• Activate Hot Gas Bypass during Dehumidification
Dehumidification cannot be selected unless both Cooling and Reheat are selected.

Modules (RTU Dehumidification Control)

The Dehumidification Control selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Inputs
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): This module is loaded when Zone Humidity is
selected for the dehumidification process variable.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Return Air
Humidity is selected for the dehumidification process variable.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• DEHUM-SP (Dehumidification Setpoint): This is a floating-point
Constant.
State Generation
• Dehumidification Sequencing
Output Control
• Hot Gas Bypass Valve Control: This module is loaded when Activate Hot
Gas Bypass during Dehumidification is selected.
Outputs
• HGBPV-C (Hot Gas Bypass Valve Command): This module is loaded
when Activate Hot Gas Bypass during Dehumidification is selected. It is
turned on when dehumidification is active.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 507

Optional Features (RTU)
These selections provide the logic for controlling the operation of the application.
The Unit Enable logic includes the option to delay startup after controller restart
(Power Fail Restart).
The selection options for Optional Features are:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.
• Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based
on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Enable Switch is selected, then when the
Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Unit Enable Switch (BI): This option determines whether the application
operates based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected, then
when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Power Fail Restart: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator module. When this option is selected, after a
restart (power cycle, controller download, or manual restart command), the
application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time
(default = 60 seconds).

508 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (RTU Optional Features)
The Optional Features selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
• UNITEN-MODE (Unit Enable Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• UNITEN-S (Unit Enable Toggle Switch)
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the position of the mixed air damper (MAD-O) and set the state of the
fan (SF-C) during a call for Smoke Control.
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when the Unit Enable
Mode, Unit Enable Switch (BI), or Power Fail Restart is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 509

Rooftop Control Logic Selection

Optional Sensors (RTU)

These selections provide the option for loading extra, monitor-only sensors.
The selection options for Optional Sensors are:
• Outdoor Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Mixed Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Discharge Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Return Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Zone
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
If a Sensor is required for one of the selections made in the Mechanical System
Selection, the option is not available in the Optional Sensors section.

510 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (RTU Optional Sensors)
The Optional Sensors selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded when a physical
Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature)
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity)
• OA-Q (Outdoor Air Quality)
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature)
• MA-H (Mixed Air Humidity)
• MA-Q (Mixed Air Quality)
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature)
• DA-H (Discharge Air Humidity)
• DA-Q (Discharge Air Quality)
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature)
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity)
• RA-Q (Return Air Quality)
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature)
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity)
• ZN-Q (Zone Quality)
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 511

Optional Equipment (RTU)
These selections provide monitor only sensors for an optional pre-filter and/or
final filter.
The selection options for Optional Equipment are:
• Pre-Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor
• Final Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor

Modules (RTU Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• PFILT-S (PreFilter Status)
• PFILT-DP (PreFilter Diff Pressure)
• FFILT-S (Final Filter Status)
• FFILT-DP (Final Filter Diff Pressure)
See the Inputs section.

512 CCT Help: Applications

Monitored Safeties (RTU)
These selections provide inputs for monitoring equipment safeties. The High and
Low Static Pressure Switch inputs and High and Low Temperature Switch inputs
are connected to the Emergency Mode Sequencer and shut down the application
when tripped.
The selection options for Monitored Safeties are:
• Discharge
- High Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Return
- Smoke Detector
• Low Limit Temperature Switch
• High Limit Temperature Switch

Modules (RTU Monitored Safeties)

The Monitored Safeties selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• DAPHI-A (Discharge Air High Duct Pressure)
• DA-SD (Discharge Air Smoke Alarm)
• RA-SD (Return Air Smoke Alarm)
• LT-A (Low Temperature Alarm)
• HT-A (High Temperature Alarm)
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 513

Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
See the following sections for information on the Multizone (Mixed Air Dual
Duct) application’s logic and selections:
• Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Core Logic
• Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Mechanical System Selection
- Configuration Options
- Air Handling Unit Configuration
• Fans
• Economizer Damper (Common MAD Output)
• Temperature Control Strategy
• Occupancy Control
• Heat Recovery
• Coils (Preheat)
• Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck)
• Coils (Heating - Hot Deck)
• Humidification
• Optional Features
- Zone Configuration
• Number of Zones
• Sensor(s) for Zones
• Mixing Dampers for Zones
• Heating for Zones
• Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Control Logic Selection
- Optional AHU Sensors
- Optional Equipment
- Monitored Safeties
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

514 CCT Help: Applications

Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Core Logic

Modules (MADD-MZ)
The Air Handling Unit configuration portion of Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
applications use the core logic listed below. The following modules are loaded if
the AHU Only or AHU + Zones configuration options are selected.
Network Inputs
• APP-MODE (Application Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CD-T (Cold Deck Temperature)
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air)
• Application Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water
Flush application mode for separate connection to State Selection and
passes the remaining application modes to State Selection.
• Water System Flush Pass Through: This module passes the Water Flush
system mode to a separate State Selection input so that when water flush is
requested, the valves always open.
• Mixed Air Cold Duct Sequencing
Output Control
• Heating Required LV
• Cooling Required LV

Air Handling Unit Applications 515

Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Mechanical System Selection

Configuration Options (MADD-MZ)

These selections allow the user to select the portion(s) of the Multizone logic to
include in this system. The selection options are:
• AHU Only
- Zone Heating Valve Mode Output
- Zone Staged Heating Mode Output
• Zones Only
• AHU + Zones

Modules (MADD-MZ Configuration Options)

The Configuration Options selections determine the major portions of the tree that
are available for selection. Also, when AHU Only or Zones Only is selected,
Network Inputs and/or Network Outputs are created to provide an interface
between the distributed portions of the overall Multizone application (AHU +
Zones).
Network Inputs
• ZNDPR-MODE (Zone Damper Mode): This module is loaded when
Zones Only is selected.
• ZNHTGVALVE-MODE (Zone Htg Valve Mode): This module is
loaded when Zones Only is selected and the zones are configured to control
individual zone Hot Water or Steam heating.
• ZNSTAGEDHTG-MODE (Zone Staged Htg Mode): This module is
loaded when Zones Only is selected and the zones are configured to control
individual zone Staged Electric heating.
See the Network Inputs section.
State Generation
• Zone Damper Mode Pass Through SG: This module is loaded when Zones
Only is selected. It passes the corresponding Network Input to State
Selection.
• Zone Staged Htg Mode Pass Through SG: This module is loaded when
Zones Only is selected and the zones are configured to control individual
zone Hot Water or Steam heating. It passes the corresponding Network
Input to State Selection.
• Zone Htg Valve Mode Pass Through SG: This module is loaded when
Zones Only is selected and the zones are configured to control individual
zone Staged Electric heating. It passes the corresponding Network Input to
State Selection.

516 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Zone Damper Mode Pass Through: This module is loaded in every
application. For the AHU Only configuration, it passes the Zone Damper
Mode from State Selection to the Network Output. For other
configurations, it is used to broadcast the Zone Damper Mode from State
Selection to all of the zone Output Controllers.
• Zone Htg Valve Mode Pass Through: This module is loaded when the
zones are configured to control individual zone Hot Water or Steam
heating. For the AHU Only configuration, it passes the Zone Htg Valve
Mode from State Selection to the Network Output. For other
configurations, it is used to broadcast the Zone Htg Valve Mode from State
Selection to all zone Output Controllers that have reheat.
• Zone Staged Htg Mode Pass Through: This module is loaded when the
zones are configured to control individual zone Staged Electric heating.
For the AHU Only configuration, it passes the Zone Staged Htg Mode from
State Selection to the Network Output. For other configurations, it is used
to broadcast the Zone Staged Htg Mode from State Selection to all zone
Output Controllers that have reheat.
Network Outputs
• EFFZNDPR-MODE (Zone Htg Valve Mode CSO): This module is
loaded when AHU Only is selected.
• EFFZNHTGVALVE-MODE (Zone Htg Valve Mode CSO): This
module is loaded when AHU Only is selected and Zone Heating Valve
Mode Output is selected.
• EFFZNSTAGEDHTG-MODE (Zone Staged Htg Mode CSO): This
module is loaded when AHU Only is selected and Zone Staged Heating
Mode Output is selected.
See the Network Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 517

Air Handling Unit Configuration (MADD-MZ)

Fans (MADD-MZ)
These selections provide the logic for the Air Handling Unit fans.
The selection options for Fans are:
Supply Fan – Single Speed
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

518 CCT Help: Applications

 Return Fan – Single Speed
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Fan to Start First
- Supply
- Return
A Supply Fan is required (that is, it is selected by default) as well as an optional
Return Fan.

Air Handling Unit Applications 519

 Modules (MADD-MZ: Fans)
The Fans selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Supply Fan Status
with Manual Restart is selected, but a Unit Reset Switch (BI) is not
selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• SF-S (Supply Fan Status)
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Unit Reset Switch
(BI) is selected with Supply Fan Status with Manual Restart.
• RF-S (Return Fan Status): This module is loaded when Return Fan Status is
selected. This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• RF-BA (Return Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Return
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• RF-LO (Return Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Return Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SF-BA (Supply Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Supply
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• SF-LO (Supply Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Supply Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) options are selected.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Supply Fan
Status is selected.
• Return Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Return Fan Alarm
Management is selected.
• Supply Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Supply Fan Alarm
Management is selected.

520 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Constant Capacity Supply Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan OnOff LV
• Constant Capacity Return Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Return Fan is selected.
Outputs
• SF-C (Supply Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Supply
Fan is selected.
• RF-C (Return Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Return Fan
is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 521

 Economizer Damper (Common MAD Output) (MADD-MZ)
The selection options for Economizer Damper(s) are:
• Economizer Damper (Common MAD Output)
• Economizer Suitability
- Network Command
- Enthalpy Switch (BI)
- Outdoor Air
• Dry Bulb Temp Economizer
• Temp & Enthalpy Economizer
• Outdoor Air versus Return Air: This option compares outdoor air
with return air to switch the economizer.
• Mixed Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 Sensor
• Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature
The Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature selection enables logic that reduces
the intake of outdoor air when the Mixed Air Temperature is low. This reduction is
accomplished by modulating closed the outdoor dampers.
If a preheat coil is located downstream of the mixing plenum (that is, it is in the
mixed air), the Preheat Temperature (downstream of the coil) serves as the process
variable for this control strategy. Otherwise, the Mixed Air Temperature serves as
the process variable.
The control logic for the low limit strategy is embedded directly into the Output
Control modules and activated simply by connecting the appropriate setpoint and
process variable. The logic takes precedence over all logic other than Emergency
Modes.

522 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (MADD-MZ: Economizer Damper [Common MAD Output])
The Economizer Damper (Common MAD Output) selection loads the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• OAD-MINPOS (Occupied Minimum Position): This module is loaded for
the Economizer dampers.
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enable): This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Network Command is selected.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature shared via network): This module is
loaded when Outdoor Air Economizer Suitability is selected and a physical
Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected in the Optional AHU
Sensors group of the Control System Selections.
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity shared via network): This module is loaded
when Temp & Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected and a physical
Outdoor Air Humidity input is not selected in the Optional AHU Sensors
group of the Control System Selections.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enable): This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Enthalpy Switch (BI) is selected.
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy, Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy, Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected.
• RA-Q (Return Air Quality for CO2, CO, and others): This module is
loaded when Mixed Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 Sensor
is selected.
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature): This module serves as the low limit
process variable when a preheat coil is not located in the mixed air duct.
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature): This module serves as the low limit process
variable when a preheat coil is located in the mixed air duct.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 523

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Economizer Availability Determination
• MAD-RAMPRATE (Damper Ramp Rate): This floating-point Constant
determines the rate at which the damper ramps open to its minimum
position during the startup process.
• Damper Minimum Position Determination
• Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2: This module is loaded when
Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2
Sensor is selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature is selected. It is the upper
threshold of the low limit control logic.
• LT-PB (Low Limit Proportional Band): This floating-point Constant is
loaded when Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature is selected. It is the
range as the Mixed Air Temperature falls below the LT-SP over which the
outdoor air is reduced from its normal operating values to the minimum
that can be achieved by the application.
• Econ Enable OA versus RA: This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Outdoor Air, Outdoor Air versus Return Air is selected.
Output Control
• Proportional OA Damper Control: This module is loaded when one of the
following three combinations of selections are made: 1) Economizer
Damper (Common MAD Output); 2) Separate Proportional Outputs (3
AOs), but not Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching; 3) OAD &
RAD Proportional, but not Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static
Press Control).
• Damper Control Status LV
Outputs
• MAD-O (Mixed Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Economizer Damper (Common MAD Output) is selected.
See the Outputs section.

524 CCT Help: Applications

 Temperature Control Strategy (MADD-MZ)
These selections provide the logic for determining the setpoints of the Cold Deck
and Hot Deck temperature control loops. The Hot Deck Setpoint options apply
only if a Hot Deck heating coil is selected.
The selection options for Temperature Control Strategy are:
• Fixed Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperatures
• Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T
• Hot Deck Temperature Reset from RA-T

Modules (MADD-MZ AHU: Temperature Control Strategy)

The Temperature Control Strategy selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• CDT-SP (Cold Deck Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Fixed Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperatures or Hot Deck Temperature Reset
from RA-T is selected.
• HDT-SP (Hot Deck Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Fixed Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperatures is selected (and Hot Deck
heating coil is selected).
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Hot Deck
Temperature Reset from RA-T is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Cold Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset: This module is loaded when Hot
and/or Cold Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T is selected.
• Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset: This module is loaded when Hot
and/or Cold Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T is selected (and Hot Deck
heating coil is selected).
• Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset by RA-T: This module is loaded
when Hot Deck Temperature Reset from RA-T is selected (and Hot Deck
heating coil is selected).

Air Handling Unit Applications 525

 Occupancy Control (MADD-MZ)
These selections provide the logic for Occupancy Mode Determinination.
The selection options for Occupancy Control are:
• Always Occupied
• Scheduled Occupancy
- Override Support
- Occupancy Switch (BI)
- Unoccupied Strategy
• Intermittent Night Operation
• Off during Unoccupied
If any options are selected for separate Occupied and Unoccupied Setpoints or
Temporary Occupancy, the Always Occupied option cannot be selected.

Modules (MADD-MZ: Occupancy Control)

The Occupancy Control selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE: This module is loaded when Scheduled Occupancy is
selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• OCC-OVERRIDE: This module is loaded when Override Support is
selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• WC-C (WarmupCooldown command): This is an input for when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected.
• CLGUNOCC-SP (Night Cooling Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
• HTGUNOCC-SP (Night Heating Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module is loaded when Occupancy
Switch (BI) is selected and connected to the Occupancy Mode
Determination module.
See the Inputs section.

526 CCT Help: Applications

 State Generation
• Always Occupied: This is an Enum Constant. In applications that are
always Occupied (when Enabled), the Always Occupied module is loaded
to provide a consistent source of data for other modules that require
Occupancy Mode information.
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• WarmupCooldown Pass Through: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• Unocc Status Determination (MZ): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 527

 Heat Recovery (MADD-MZ)
The selection options for Heat Recovery are:
Enable Type
• Dry Bulb
• Enthalpy
Enthalpy Wheel
• Single Speed
- Modulated Bypass Dampers
• Variable Speed
- Bypass Damper BO
• Wheel Status
- Loss of Status Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Blocking Protection/Cleaning Mode: This option provides cleaning mode
functionality. If the wheel is off for an extended period, the wheel turns on for
a short time to keep the wheel free of dirt and dust.

528 CCT Help: Applications

 Glycol Loop
• 3-Way Valve
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
• Circulation Pump
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).

Air Handling Unit Applications 529

 Modules (MADD-MZ Heat Recovery)
The Heat Recovery selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HR-EN (Heat Recovery isAllowed)
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when either Enable
Type option is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Enthalpy
Enable Type is selected.
• EA-T (Exhaust Air Temperature)
• EAHR-T (Exhaust Air Heat Recovery Temperature): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is selected or when Glycol Loop is selected
but not a 3-Way Valve (Circulation Pump only). This input serves as the
low limit process variable.
• GLY-T (Glycol Temperature): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected. This input serves as the low limit process
variable.
• HRW-S (Heat Recovery Wheel Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• HRP-S (Heat Recovery Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• HRP-LO (Heat Recovery Pump Lockout Switch BI): This module is
loaded when Glycol Loop Circulation Pump Alarm Management Lockout
Switch is selected.
• HRW-BA (Heat Recovery Wheel Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• HRW-LO (Heat Recovery Wheel Lockout Switch BI): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Lockout Switch is
selected.
• HRW-FAULT (Heat Recovery Wheel VFD Fault BI): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Frequency Converter
Fault is selected.
See the Inputs section.

530 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HRLL-SP (Heat Recovery Low Limit Setpoint)
• Heat Recovery Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Glycol Loop Circulation Pump, Pump Status is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel, Wheel Status is selected.
State Generation
• Heat Recovery Suitability Determination: This module is loaded when Dry
Bulb Enable Type is selected.
• Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination: This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Enable Type is selected.
• Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing
• Heat Recovery Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
Circulation Pump Alarm Management is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Alarms: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel
Alarm Management is selected.
• Preheat Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Hot Water or Steam
Coil Pump Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Heat Recovery Htg CS LV
• Enthalpy Wheel Control: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is
selected.
• Glycol Loop Control: This module is loaded when Glycol Loop is selected.
• Energy Wheel Two Pos Byp: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel
Variable Speed Bypass Damper BO is selected.
• Heat Recovery Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when
Glycol Loop Circulation Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Blocking Protection is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 531

 Outputs
• HROAFBD-O (Heat Recovery OA FBD AO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
• HREAFBD-O (Heat Recovery EA FBD AO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
• HRW-C (Heat Recovery Wheel Command): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed is selected.
• HR-O (Heat Recovery Output): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected.
• HRP-C (Heat Recovery Pump Command): This module is loaded when
Glycol Loop with 3-Way Valve is selected.
• HREAFBD-C (Heat Recovery Exhaust FBD BO): This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed Modulated Bypass Dampers is
selected.
• HROAFBD-C (Heat Recovery OA FBD BO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
See the Outputs section.

532 CCT Help: Applications

 Coils (Preheat) (MADD-MZ)
These selections provide the logic to control a Preheat coil. Preheat coils may be
located in the Outdoor Air Duct (ahead of the mixing plenum). If this is the case, a
Preheat coil is always set to Control to Preheat Air Temperature. When in the
Mixed Air Duct, a coil may either be controlled by a dedicated sensor or
sequenced with the other devices. During startup, Preheat controls the PH-T or
CD-T to the OALT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint).
The selection options for Coils (Preheat) are:
Preheat
Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air
Location
• Outdoor Air
• Mixed air
- Sequenced with Cold Deck Control Strategy
- Control to Preheat Air Temperature
Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The
current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior.
• High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a
High Temperature alarm occurs.
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages

Air Handling Unit Applications 533

 Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Incremental Output
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Output
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

534 CCT Help: Applications

 - Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Face and Bypass Switchover
- Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- Based on Mixed Air Temperature
- Based on Network Input
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control: This option turns on
the coil pump if the outdoor air temperature is lower than the setpoint and
the unit is off. The preheat valve is modulated to control the leaving water
temperature.
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position

Air Handling Unit Applications 535

 The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support including Face & Bypass Damper or
Circulation Pump controls.
The Face and Bypass Switchover option is applicable only when either a
Proportional or Incremental valve actuator is selected with Face and Bypass
Damper. This option specifies how to determine when the valve should be in
control (with the Damper at full face) and when the damper should be in control
(with the Valve fully open).
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

536 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (MADD-MZ: Coils [Preheat])
The Coils (Preheat) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• PH-EN (Preheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Preheat
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point
determines the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall
below before heating is enabled.
• FBPD-SWO (Network Face & Bypass Switchover): This module is loaded
when Face and Bypass Switchover Based on Network Input is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature): This module is loaded when Control to
Preheat Air Temperature is selected or when the Preheat Coil is in the
Outdoor Air (and Control to Preheat Air Temperature is the only control
option permitted).
• PHWE-T (Preheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• PHWL-T (Preheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• PHP-S (Preheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Face and
Bypass Switchover Based on Mixed Air Temperature is selected.
• PHP-LO (Preheat Pump Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is
selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 537

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is the setpoint
for Low Limit control of the Preheat Coil during Startup (to either CD-T or
PH-T). This point is also loaded as a setpoint for the Remain in Control
Shutdown Control option if selected.
• PHT-SP (Preheat Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Control to Preheat Air Temperature is selected or when the Preheat Coil is
in the Outdoor Air (and Control to Preheat Air Temperature is the only
control option permitted).
• Preheat Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Preheat Availability Determination
• Preheat Sequencing: This module is loaded when Control to Preheat Air
Temperature is selected or when the Preheat Coil is in the Outdoor Air (and
Control to Preheat Air Temperature is the only control option permitted).
Output Control
• Preheat Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Preheat Control Status LV
• Staged Preheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Preheat is
selected.
• Preheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of Staged Preheat are selected.
• MSC Staged Preheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat.
• Preheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat and Device Rotation.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Preheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat and Device Rotation. One module
is loaded per stage.

538 CCT Help: Applications

 • Sequenced Valves Preheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• FBPD Proportional Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when the
Face and Bypass Damper option for Proportional Actuator or Incremental
Actuator is selected.
• Proportional Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (and Two Valves
and Face and Bypass Damper are not selected).
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• Preheat Proportional Valve Output: This module is loaded when Loss of
Airflow Strategy Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control is
selected.
• Preheat Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• PHX-C (Preheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• PH-O (Preheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (not the Two Valves option).
• PH1-O (Preheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• PH2-O (Preheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• PH-C (Preheat Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• PHFBD-O (Preheat Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• PHP-C (Preheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Preheat
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 539

 Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) (MADD-MZ)
These selections provide the logic to control a Cooling coil.
The selection options for Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) are:
Cooling - Cold Deck
Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air
DX Cooling
• Device Rotation
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Chilled Water
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Actuator
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

540 CCT Help: Applications

 - Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 541

 Modules (MADD-MZ: Coils [Cooling - Cold Deck])
The Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• CLG-EN (Cooling isAvailable): This module is loaded when Cooling
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• CLGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Cooling Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point
determines the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must rise
above before cooling is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CHWE-T (Chilled Water Entering Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CHWL-T (Chilled Water Leaving Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CP-S (Cooling Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• Cooling Pump Lockout Switch BI: This input is loaded when Chilled
Water Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Cooling Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Chill Water Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Availability Determination
• Cooling Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Chilled Water Coil
Pump Alarm Management is selected.

542 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Cooling Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Control Status LV
• Staged Cooling Control: This module is loaded when DX Cooling is
selected.
• Cooling Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of DX Cooling are selected.
• MSC Staged Cooling X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for DX Cooling.
• Cooling X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for DX Cooling and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Cooling X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for DX Cooling and Device Rotation is selected. One
module is loaded per stage.
• Proportional Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• Cooling Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Chilled
Water Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• CLGX-C (Cooling X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for DX Cooling. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• CLG-O (Cooling Output): This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• CLG-C (Cooling Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• CLGFBD-O (Cooling Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• CP-C (Cooling Pump Command): This module is loaded when Cooling
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 543

 Coils (Heating - Hot Deck)
These selections provide the logic to control the Hot Deck temperature using a
Heating coil.
The selection options for Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) are:
Heating - Hot Deck
Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air
Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The
current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior.
• High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a
High Temperature alarm occurs.
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
• Incremental Output
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status

544 CCT Help: Applications

 • Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position

Air Handling Unit Applications 545

 The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support including Face & Bypass Damper or
Circulation Pump controls.
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Modules (MADD-MZ: Coils [Heating - Hot Deck])

The Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• RH-EN (Reheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Reheat Lockout
from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point
determines the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall
below before heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• HD-T (Hot Deck Temperature)
• RHWE-T (Reheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHWL-T (Reheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHP-S (Reheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• Reheat Pump Lockout Switch BI: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• Reheat Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.

546 CCT Help: Applications

 State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Availability Determination
• Mixed Air Hot Deck Sequencing
• Reheat Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Hot Water or Steam
Coil Pump Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Heating Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Control Status LV
• Staged Reheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Reheat is
selected.
• Reheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more stages
of Staged Reheat are selected.
• MSC Staged Reheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat.
• Reheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Reheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Sequenced Valves Reheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• Proportional Valve Reheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (and Two Valves
is not selected).
• Reheat Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 547

 Outputs
• HTGX-C (Reheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• RH-O (Reheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (but not the Two Valves
option).
• HTG1-O (Reheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• HTG2-O (Reheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• RHP-C (Reheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Reheat
Circulation Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

548 CCT Help: Applications

 Humidification (MADD-MZ)
These selections provide the logic to control a humidifier if present.
The selection options for Humidification are:
• Staged
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the humidifier.
• Steam Proportional Valve
- Isolation Valve
• Modulated Packaged Unit
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier).
• Scrubber: This option is for a scrubber humidifier, which is a shower head,
pump, and basin located in the ductwork. This type of humidifier requires
3 BOs; a pump BO, a drain valve BO, and a BO to close the fill valve. The
drain valve and fill valve BOs should actuate together (if draining, close the
inlet valve and disable the pump). The operational water level is maintained by
a mechanical float valve.
- Drain Valve: This option provides an output for the drain valve and an
output for the fill valve.
• Open valve if scrubber is inactive: This option provides monitoring
of and indicates the status of the pump command and a network input to
open the drain valve. If the network input requests the valve to open or
if the pump command has been off for a period of time, the drain valve
opens. If the pump is required to start, the drain valve closes for a
period of time to allow the sump to fill before starting the pump.
• Open valve on Network Input
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier).
• Enable During Unoccupied Operation
• Hot Deck Humidity High Limit Control
The Enable During Unoccupied Operation option is applicable only when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 549

 Modules (MADD-MZ: Humidification)
The Humidification selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HUM-EN (Humidification isAvailable)
• BASIN-C (Drain Basin): This module is loaded when Scrubber Drain
Valve Open valve on Network Input is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when humidification
is selected.
• HD-H (Hot Deck Humidity): This module is loaded when Hot Deck
Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HUM-SP (Humidification Setpoint): This is a floating-point Constant.
• DAH-SP (Discharge Air Humidity Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when Hot Deck Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
State Generation
• Humidification Sequencing
• Humidification isAvailable Pass Through
Output Control
• Humidity Control Status LV
• Staged Humidification Control: This module is loaded when Staged
Humidification is selected.
• Humidification Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or
more stages of Staged Humidification are selected.
• MSC Staged Humidification X: This module is loaded when X number of
stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
• Proportional Steam Humidification Control: This module is loaded when
Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• Packaged Humidifier Control: This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• Humidity Scrubber Output: This module is loaded when Scrubber is
selected.

550 CCT Help: Applications

 Outputs
• HUMX-C (Humidification X Command): This module is loaded when a
number of stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
One Output is loaded per stage.
• HUM-O (Humidifier Output): This module is loaded when Steam
Proportional Valve or Modulated Packaged Unit is selected.
• HUM-C (Humidifier Command): This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• STMISO-C (Steam Isolation Valve Command): This module is loaded
when the Isolation Valve option for Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• HDV-C (Drain Valve BO): This module is loaded when Scrubber Drain
Valve is selected.
• HFV-C (Fill Valve BO): This module is loaded when Scrubber is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 551

 Optional Features (MADD-MZ)
These selections provide the logic for controlling the operation of the application.
The Unit Enable logic includes the option to delay startup after controller restart
(Power Fail Restart).
The selection options for Optional Features are:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.
• Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based
on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Enable Switch is selected, then when the
Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Unit Enable Switch (BI): This option determines whether the application
operates based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected, then
when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Power Fail Restart: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator module. When this option is selected, after a
restart (power cycle, controller download, or manual restart command), the
application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time
(default = 60 seconds).

552 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (MADD-MZ: Optional Features)
The Optional Features selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
• UNITEN-MODE (Unit Enable Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• UNITEN-S (Unit Enable Toggle Switch)
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the position of the mixed air damper and set the state of the supply/
return fan during a call for Smoke Control.
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when the Unit Enable
Mode or Switch (BI) is selected or when Power Fail Restart is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 553

Zone Configuration (MADD-MZ)

Number of Zones (MADD-MZ)

This selection specifies the number of zones controlled by the Multizone unit
(minimum of two). This selection does not directly load modules, but determines
the number of modules loaded for each subsequent Zone Configuration selection.
The module for each zone is designated by X (from 1 to the selected number of
zones).
• Two Zones
• Three Zones
• Four Zones
• Five Zones
• Six Zones
• Seven Zones
• Eight Zones

Sensor(s) for Zones (MADD-MZ)

These selections allow the user to specify the zone sensors required for each zone.
The selection options for Sensor(s) for Zones are:
• Temperature
- Setpoint Adjust
• Common Setpoint Adjust
• Warm Cool Adjust
- Temp Occ Support
• Humidity
• CO2 Sensor
The Temp Occ Support option is available only when Scheduled Occupancy is
selected.

554 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (MADD-MZ: Sensor[s] for Zones)
The Sensor(s) for Zones selections load the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• ZNX-SP (network Zone X Common Setpoint): This module is loaded
when the Common Setpoint Adjust (AI) is not selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ZNX-T (Zone X Temperature): This module is loaded for each zone.
• ZNX-SP (local Zone X Common Setpoint): This module is loaded for each
zone when Common Setpoint Adjust is selected.
• WCX-ADJ (Warmer/Cooler Adjust for Zone X): This module is loaded for
each zone when Warm Cool Adjust is selected.
• ZNX-TOCC (Zone X Temporary Occupancy): This module is loaded for
each zone when Temp Occ Support is selected. These inputs are connected
to the Occupancy Mode Determination (MZ) module.
• ZNX-H (Zone X Humidity): This module is loaded for each zone when
Humidity is selected.
• ZNX-Q (Zone X Quality): This module is loaded for each zone when CO2
Sensor is selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 555

 Mixing Dampers for Zones (MADD-MZ)
These selections allow the user to specify the type of actuator on the mixing
dampers for each zone.
The selection options for Mixing Dampers for Zones are:
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator

Modules (MADD-MZ: Mixing Dampers for Zones)

The Mixing Dampers for Zones selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Output Control
•Zone X Damper Control: This module is loaded for each zone that does not
have heat.
Outputs
• ZNXD-O (Zone X Damper Output): This module is loaded for every zone.
See the Outputs section.

556 CCT Help: Applications

 Heating for Zones (MADD-MZ)
These selections allow the user to specify the type of heat available for each zone
as well as to identify the zones that have that heat.
The selection options for Heating for Zones are:
• Lockout from Outdoor Air
• Electric Staged
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
• Hot Water or Steam
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
- Two Position Actuator
• Zones with Heat
- Heating Zone One
- Heating Zone Two
- Heating Zone Three
- Heating Zone Four
- Heating Zone Five
- Heating Zone Six
- Heating Zone Seven
- Heating Zone Eight

Modules (MADD-MZ: Heating for Zones)

The Heating for Zones selections load the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• ZNHTG-EN (Zone Heating isAvailable): This module is loaded when
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Heating Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point is
the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall below before
heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 557

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HUM-SP (Humidification Setpoint): This is a floating-point Constant.
State Generation
• Zone Heating Availability Determination
Output Control
• Zone X with Staged Heating Control: This module is loaded for each zone
with heat when Electric Staged zone heating is selected.
• Zone X MSC Staged Heating XX: This module is loaded for each zone
with heat when XX number of stages (from one to three) are selected for
Electric Staged zone heating.
• Zone X Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded for each zone with heat
when two or three stages are selected for Electric Staged zone heating.
• Zone X with Proportional Heating Valve Control: This module is loaded
for each zone with heat when Proportional Actuator or Incremental
Actuator is selected for Hot Water or Steam zone heating.
• Zone X with 2 Position Heating Valve Control: This module is loaded for
each zone with heat when Two Position Actuator is selected for Hot Water
or Steam zone heating.
• Zone X MSC 2 Position Heating: This module is loaded for each zone with
heat when Two Position Actuator is selected for Hot Water or Steam zone
heating.
Outputs
• ZNXHTGX-C (Zone X Heating Stage X Command): This module is
loaded for each zone with heat when a number of stages (from one to three)
are selected for Electric Staged zone heating. One Output is loaded per
stage.
• ZNXHTG-O (Zone X Heating Output): This module is loaded for each
zone with heat when Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is
selected for Hot Water or Steam zone heating.
• ZNXHTG-C (Zone X Heating Command): This module is loaded for each
zone with heat when Two Position Actuator is selected for Hot Water or
Steam zone heating.
See the Outputs section.

558 CCT Help: Applications

Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Control Logic Selection

Optional AHU Sensors (MADD-MZ)

These selections provide the option for loading extra, monitor-only sensors.
The selection options for Optional Sensors are:
• Outdoor Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Preheat Air Temperature
• Mixed Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Discharge Air
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Hot Deck
- Temperature
- Humidity
• Return Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Misc
- Heat Recovery Air Temperature
If the Zones Only configuration type is selected or if a Sensor is required for one of
the selections made in the Mechanical System Selection, the option is not available
here.

Air Handling Unit Applications 559

 Modules (MADD-MZ Optional AHU Sensors)
The Optional AHU Sensors selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded when a physical
Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature)
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity)
• OA-Q (Outdoor Air Quality)
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature)
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature)
• MA-H (Mixed Air Humidity)
• MA-Q (Mixed Air Quality)
• DA-H (Discharge Air Humidity)
• DA-Q (Discharge Air Quality)
• HD-T (Hot Deck Temperature)
• HD-H (Hot Deck Humidity)
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature)
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity)
• RA-Q (Return Air Quality)
• HR-T (Heat Recovery Temperature)
See the Inputs section.

560 CCT Help: Applications

Optional Equipment (MADD-MZ)
These selections provide monitor only sensors for an optional pre-filter and/or
final filter.
The selection options for Optional Equipment are:
• Pre-Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor
• Final Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor
These options are not applicable if the Zones Only configuration type is selected.

Modules (MADD-MZ Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• PFILT-S (PreFilter Status)
• PFILT-DP (PreFilter Diff Pressure)
• FFILT-S (Final Filter Status)
• FFILT-DP (Final Filter Diff Pressure)
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 561

Monitored Safeties (MADD-MZ)
These selections provide inputs for monitoring equipment safeties. The High and
Low Static Pressure Switch inputs and High and Low Temperature Switch inputs
are connected to the Emergency Mode Sequencer and shut down the application
when tripped.
The selection options for Monitored Safeties are:
• Discharge
- High Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Return
- Low Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Low Limit Temperature Switch
• High Limit Temperature Switch
• Humidity Alarm
These options are not applicable if the Zones Only configuration type is selected.

Modules (MADD-MZ Monitored Safeties)

The Monitored Safeties selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• DAPHI-A (Discharge Air High Duct Pressure)
• DA-SD (Discharge Air Smoke Alarm)
• RAPLO-A (Return Air Low Duct Pressure)
• RA-SD (Return Air Smoke Alarm)
• LT-A (Low Temperature Alarm)
• HT-A (High Temperature Alarm)
• HUMHI-A (Humidity High Limit)
See the Inputs section.

562 CCT Help: Applications

Chapter 15: CCT Help: Applications
Fan Coil Applications
Introduction
The Fan Coil (FC) application provides mechanical and control logic selections
that match standard Fan Coil Terminal Unit configurations.
Fan Coil applications include the following:
• Fan Coil Core Logic
• Fan Coil Mechanical System Selection
- Supply Fan
- Coils
- Optional Equipment
- Sensors
- Monitored Safeties
- Misc
• Fan Coil Control Logic Selection
- Occupancy
- Optional Features
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Fan Coil Applications 563

Fan Coil Core Logic
Modules (FC)
The core set of modules created for all Fan Coil applications provides the zone
temperature setpoint and base heating/cooling sequencing logic. Specific
selections in the Fan Coil selection tree provide the required Inputs, Outputs, and
Network Input connections for the core logic set and integrate the specific Output
Controller options for Fan Logic, Heating, and Cooling Coils.
The following is the list of modules created by the core logic.
Network Inputs
• SYSTEM-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the System Mode
Pass Through State Generator to use during commissioning to drive any
system outputs to a specific state.
See the Network Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• ZN-T Setpoint Determination: This module determines the Effective
Heating and Cooling Setpoints.
State Generation
• System Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water Flush
system mode for separate connection to State Selection and passes the
remaining system modes to State Selection.
• Zone Sequencing (FC): This module manages the transition between
heating and cooling output controllers and determines which device should
be operating to control the space temperature.

564 CCT Help: Applications

Fan Coil Mechanical System Selection
Supply Fan (FC)
The selection options for Supply Fan are:
• Single Speed: This option creates a State Generator, Output Controller and
Output to manage the Fan.
• Three Speed: This option creates a State Generator, Output Controller, and
three Outputs to manage the low, medium, high fan speeds. This selection
enables the selection for the Fan Speed Adjust option under the Zone Sensors
selection which is an optional interface for specific Network Sensor models.
• Variable Speed: This option creates a State Generator and Output Controller
to manage both a Binary Output to stop/start the fan and a Proportional Output
to vary the speed. If you select the Variable Speed Supply Fan selection, only
Proportional Heating and Cooling Coils are available for selection.
• Fan Control by Others: This option assumes that the supervisory system or
local binary switch is directly in control of the fan through a separate hardware
interface. This option creates a Fan Controlled By Other Binary Input point for
use in conjunction with a State Generator for Fan Control By Others to turn
heating and/or cooling output controllers off if the fan is commanded off.
• Fan Status: This option creates a monitoring only point to use during
commissioning or to map to the Supervisory system.

Fan Coil Applications 565

Modules (FC Supply Fan)
The Supply Fan selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Inputs
• FCBO-S (Fan Control By Others Switch)
• FAN-S (Fan Status) for the Fan Status selection
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Fan Control By Others Pass Through
• Fan Determination for Single Speed, Three Speed, and Variable Speed Fan
selections
Output Control
• Single Speed Fan Control: This module is loaded when single speed fan is
selected.
• Three Speed Fan Control: This module is loaded when three speed fan is
selected.
• Proportional Fan Control: This module is loaded when variable speed fan is
selected.
Outputs
• FAN-C (Fan Command) for the Single Speed and Variable Speed Fan
selections
• FAN-O (Fan Output) for the Variable Speed Fan selection
• Three Speed Fan selection
- FANL-C (Fan Low Command)
- FANM-C (Fan Medium Command)
- FANH –C (Fan High Command)
See the Outputs section.

566 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (FC)
The separate selections for Cooling and Heating Coils allow for either staged,
proportional, or on-off outputs.
The selection options for Coils are:
• Cooling
- Staged
• One Stage
• Two Stages
• Three Stages
- Modulated
• Proportional
• Incremental
• Two Position
• Heating
- Staged
• One Stage
• Two Stages
• Three Stages
- Modulated
• Proportional
• Incremental
• Two Position
• Common Heating-Cooling: If you select either one of the Cooling or Heating
Coil options, this option is not available.
- Proportional
- Incremental
- Two Position
- Summer-Winter Changeover Switch: This option provides a Binary Input
to determine the control action of the coil.

Fan Coil Applications 567

Modules (FC Coils)
The Coils selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• CLG-EN (Cooling isAvailable): This module works in conjunction with
the Cooling isAvailable Passthrough State Generator to enable or disable
the cooling device.
• HTG-EN (Heating isAvailable): This module works in conjunction with
the Heating isAvailable Passthrough State Generator to enable or disable
the heating device.
• HC-EN (2 Pipe is Available): This module works in conjunction with the 2
Pipe isAvailable Passthrough State Generator to enable or disable the 2-
pipe (heating/cooling) device.
• SUMWIN-C (SummerWinter Command): This module provides the
Supervisory system interface to specify whether hot water (winter) or cold
water (summer) is available to the 2 Pipe Output Controller.
• FLUSHPOS (Flush Position): This module provides the parameter setting
used by any Heating, Cooling, or 2 Pipe Valve Output. The Flush Position
value is used when the System Mode Generator state is set to Water Flush.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• SUMWIN-S (Summer Winter Switch): This module is loaded when the
Summer Winter Changeover Switch is selected and creates a local Binary
Input to specify whether hot water (winter) or cold water (summer) is
available to the 2 Pipe Output Controller. If a Summer Winter Switch is not
selected, the Summer Winter Command Network Input is created to
provide the changeover logic input from the Supervisory system.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Water System Flush Pass Through: This module passes the Water Flush
system mode to a separate State Selection input so that when water flush is
requested, the valves always open.
• Cooling isAvailable Passthrough: This module works in conjunction with
the CLG-EN Network Input.
• Heating isAvailable Passthrough: This module works in conjunction with
the HTG-EN Network Input.
• 2 Pipe isAvailable Passthrough: This module works in conjunction with the
HC-EN Network Input.

568 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
Cooling Output Controllers
• Staged Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Staged Cooling is
selected.
• Cooling Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of Staged Cooling are selected.
• MSC Staged Cooling X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to three) are selected for Staged Cooling.
• Proportional Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• 2 Position Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator is selected.
• MSC 2 Position Cooling: This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator is selected.
Heating Output Controllers
• Staged Heating Control: This module is loaded when Staged Heating is
selected.
• Heating Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of Staged Heating are selected.
• MSC Staged Heating X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to three) are selected for Staged Heating.
• Proportional Heating Control: This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• 2 Position Heating Control: This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator is selected.
• MSC 2 Position Heating: This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator is selected.
Common Heating Cooling Output Controllers
• Proportional 2 Pipe Control: This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• 2 Position 2 Pipe Control: This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator is selected.
• MSC 2 Position 2 Pipe: This module is loaded when Two Position Actuator
is selected.

Fan Coil Applications 569

 Outputs
• HC-O (Heating Cooling Output): This module is loaded for Proportional or
Incremental Common Heating Cooling Coil selections.
• HC-C (Heating Cooling Command): This module is loaded for 2 Position
Common Heating Cooling Coil selections.
• HTG1-C (1 Stage Heating Command)
• HTG2-C (2 Stage Heating Command)
• HTG3-C (3 Stage Heating Command)
• HTG-C (2 Position Heating Coil Command)
• CLG1-C (1 Stage Cooling Command)
• CLG2-C (2 Stage Cooling Command)
• CLG3-C (3 Stage Cooling Command)
• CLG-C (2 Position Cooling Coil Command)
See the Outputs section.

570 CCT Help: Applications

Optional Equipment (FC)
The selection options for Optional Equipment are:
• Filter Switch: This option creates a Filter Status Input and is typically mapped
to the Supervisory system to create a Change Filter Alarm.
• Lighting: This option creates an output to interface a Lighting Relay. When
selected, the Always Occupied selection in the Occupancy (FC) section is not
available. Only the Occupancy Mode Determination Mode logic interfaces
with the Lighting Output. The default output configuration is a single,
maintained binary output.

Modules (FC Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• FILT-S (Filter Status): This module is loaded for the Filter Switch selection
option.
See the Inputs section.
Output Control
• Lighting Control: This module is loaded for the Lighting selection option.
Outputs
• LIGHT-C (Lighting Command): This output is loaded for the Lighting
selection option.
See the Outputs section.

Fan Coil Applications 571

Sensors (FC)
The selection options for Sensors are:
• Outdoor Air Temperature: This option provides an optional monitoring
point or an input to the Summer Winter Compensation module created under
Optional Features.
• Zone: A Zone Temperature Input is always provided. All the Zone
Temperature options assume that a model of the Network Sensor family is
being used for Temperature, the Setpoint Adjust options of Common Setpoint
Adjust or Warm Cool Adjust, a Temporary Occupancy Interface from the
Network Sensor, and the Fan Speed Adjust Option and Humidity input from
the Network Sensor. Refer to the Network Sensors product literature listed in
the Related Documentation section to match the functionality selected for the
application with a specific Network Sensor hardware model.
- Temperature
• Setpoint Adjust
- Common Setpoint Adjust
- Warm Cool Adjust
• Temp Occ Support
• Fan Speed Adjust
- Humidity
- Occupancy: This option provides an Input interface to the logic from a
separate Occupancy Sensor.

572 CCT Help: Applications

Modules (FC Sensors)
The Sensors selections load the following modules in these Control View columns
based on the specific selections:
Network Inputs
• ZNT-SP (Zone Network Temperature Setpoint): This setpoint is created
when Warm Cool Adjust or no setpoint adjustment is selected. The ZNT-
SP provides a Zone Setpoint Adjustment for the Supervisory system.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature)
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature): The default is set to the Network Sensor
interface. Zone Temperature is a required input for any Fan Coil
application.
• ZN-SP (Zone Setpoint): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when the Common Setpoint Adjust is selected.
• WC-ADJ (Zone Adjust): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when Warm Cool Adjust is selected. The Warm Cool Adjust option is not
available on Network Sensors for applications requiring the Fan Speed
Adjust interface from the Network Sensor.
• ZN-TOCC (Zone Temporary Occupancy): The default is set to the
Network Sensor interface when Temp Occ Support is selected.
• ZNF-O (Zone Fan Override): The default is set to the Network Sensor
interface when Fan Speed Adjust is selected. This module provides an
override during commissioning to set the fan to Auto/Off/Low/Medium/
High.
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when Zone Humidity is selected.
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module appears when Occupancy is
selected and assumes an Occupancy Sensor is mapped to a Binary Input.
See the Inputs section.
Outputs
• ZNF-% (Zone Fan Status Display): If Fan Speed Adjust is selected, this
point provides the fan speed command value to a Network Sensor local
display.
See the Outputs section.

Fan Coil Applications 573

Monitored Safeties (FC)
The selection option for Monitored Safeties is Discharge Air Smoke Detector
which creates an Input that is typically mapped to the supervisory system to create
an alarm point.

Modules (FC Monitored Safeties)

The Monitored Safeties selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• DA-SD (Discharge Air Smoke Detector)
See the Inputs section.

Misc (FC)
The Miscellaneous selections provide binary inputs for the Energy Hold Off
Determination and Unit Enable Determination State Generators.
The selection options for Miscellaneous are:
• Energy Hold Off Switch: This option allows the unit to shut down based on
the energy hold off Hardware Input (BI). If Energy Hold Off is selected in the
Optional Features section, then the Hardware Input or the Network Input can
activate the mode. This feature is typically used to shut down the temperature
and airflow control when a window or loading door is open (for example, a
window switch).
• Unit Enable Switch: This option determines whether the application operates
based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected in the Optional
Features section, then when the Network Input does not have a valid command
from the network, it is considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both
BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate
(that is, either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).

574 CCT Help: Applications

Modules (FC Misc)
This Misc selections load the following modules in these Control View columns:
Inputs
• EHO-TS (Energy Hold Off Toggle Switch): This module is loaded when
Energy Hold Off Switch is selected and works in conjunction with the
Energy Hold Off Determination State Generator.
• UNIT-TS (Unit Toggle Switch): This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected and works in conjunction with the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Unit Enable or Power
Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.
• Energy Hold Off Determination: This module is loaded when Energy Hold
Off Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Energy Hold Off
or Power Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.

Fan Coil Applications 575

Fan Coil Control Logic Selection
Occupancy (FC)
The selection options for Occupancy are:
• Cycle During Occupied: This option configures the Fan Determination State
Generator module’s input for Fan Cycle to a Yes value, allowing the fan to turn
off during Occupied if heating and cooling are both inactive. Otherwise, the
Fan runs continuously during Occupied Mode. This selection is not available if
the Fan Controlled By Other selection has been made.
• Fan Status Interlock with Staged Heating: This option is available only if a
Stage Heating Coil is selected. When selected, logic is created to monitor fan
status through a binary input. The Airflow Status Determination module uses
this status feedback to enable or disable the Staged Heating Control Output
Controller.
• Always Occupied: This option is loaded for applications that are always
Occupied (when Enabled).
• Scheduled Occupancy: This option creates the interface for the supervisory
system scheduling logic.
- Override Support: This option creates the local override interfaces from
optional Occupancy Sensors or Networked Sensor Temporary Occupancy
interfaces.

576 CCT Help: Applications

Modules (FC Occupancy)
The Occupancy selection options load the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE: This module is loaded for the Scheduled Occupancy
selection.
• OCC-OVERRIDE: This module is loaded for Override Support when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• FAN-S (Fan Status): This module is loaded for Fan Status Interlock with
Staged Heating.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Airflow Status Determination: This module is loaded for Fan Status
Interlock with Staged Heating.
State Generation
• Always Occupied: This Enum Constant is loaded to provide a consistent
source of data for other modules that require Occupancy Mode
information.
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded for the Scheduled
Occupancy selection.
• VAV-Unocc Status Determination: This module is loaded to sequence the
heating and cooling devices when the unit is unoccupied.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Zone Occupancy Status Display): If Scheduled Occupancy
is selected, this point provides logic to display the Occupancy Status of the
system on a Network Sensor.
See the Outputs section.

Fan Coil Applications 577

Optional Features (FC)
The Optional Features selections provide Network Inputs modules for Supervisory
system interfaces to override the main applications sequence of operation through
connections to the appropriate Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules or State
Generators.
The selection choices for Optional Features are:
• Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based
on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Enable Switch is selected in the Misc
section, then when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the
network, it is considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV
are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is,
either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Power Fail Restart Logic: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator module. When this option is selected, after a
restart (power cycle, controller download, or manual restart command), the
application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time
(default = 60 seconds).
• Energy Hold Off: This option allows the unit to shut down based on the
energy hold off Network Input. If Energy Hold Off Switch is selected in the
Misc section, then the Network Input or the Hardware Input (BI) can activate
the mode. This feature is typically used to shut down the temperature and
airflow control when a window or loading door is open (for example, a
window switch).
• Network Warmup-Cooldown Support: This feature starts the fan coil and
operates in a heating only mode until the warm-up is cancelled or the occupied
temperature is reached.
• Zone Low Limit Support: This feature is typically used with the Energy Hold
Off feature to cycle heating On when the temperature falls below a low limit.
• Summer-Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift: This option allows the zone
setpoints to be automatically adjusted based on the outdoor air temperature.
This feature is often used for entry zones, such as an atrium, that feel
comfortable at warmer or cooler temperatures because occupants usually enter
from much warmer or cooler conditions. For example, if the outdoor air
temperature is 20 deg F, the atrium temperature may be kept at 65 deg F rather
than 69 deg F because occupants wear heavier clothing as they come in from or
go to the outdoors.

578 CCT Help: Applications

Modules (FC Optional Features)
The Optional Features selections load the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• UNITEN-MODE (Unit Enable Mode): If Unit Enable is selected, an
interface is provided from the network for the Unit Enable Determination
State Generator Module to provide a Shutdown or Enable State. This
module works in conjunction with the Misc Unit Enable Switch input to
prioritize a Supervisory versus local override from a Binary Input.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature Network): If Summer-Winter
Compensation Setpoint Shift is selected, an Outdoor Air Temperature input
from the Supervisory system is required as an input to the Summer Winter
Compensation Module. If an Outdoor Air Temperature Input is selected in
the Sensors selection section, this Network Input is not added.
• EHO-MODE (Energy Hold Off Mode): If Powerfail Restart Logic is
selected, this interface is provided to the network for the Energy Hold Off
Determination module. This module works in conjunction with the
optional Misc Energy Hold Off Switch.
• WUCD-MODE (Warmup-Cooldown): If Network Warm-up Cooldown
Support is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.

Fan Coil Applications 579

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Summer Winter Compensation: If Summer-Winter Compensation Setpoint
Shift is selected, this module uses the Network Input for Outdoor Air
Temperature or the Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Input that is
optionally added under the Sensors selection. The setup parameters for
Summer-Winter Compensation create summer and winter setpoints and
gains based around the Outdoor Air Temperature to calculate effective
heating and cooling setpoint shifts. The setpoint shifts interface to the ZN-
T Setpoint Determination module to bias the Occupied, Standby, and
Unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints.
• WarmupCooldown Determination: This module is loaded when Network
Warm-up Cooldown Support is selected.
State Generation
• WarmupCooldown Sequencing: This module is loaded when Network
Warm-up Cooldown is selected.
• Zone Low Limit Determination: If Zone Limit Support is selected, this
module interfaces with the Zone Temperature and a Zone Low Limit
Setpoint parameter that can be set to trigger state selection modes to
override any configured output controllers to heat the space until the Zone
Temperature is within a differential parameter.
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Unit Enable or Power
Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.
• Energy Hold Off Determination: This module is loaded when Energy Hold
Off Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Energy Hold Off
or Power Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.

580 CCT Help: Applications

Chapter 16: CCT Help: Applications
Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications
Introduction
The Unit Ventilator application provides mechanical and control logic selections
that match ASHRAE cycles for standard Unit Ventilator configurations.
Unit Ventilator (UV) applications include the following:
• Unit Ventilator Core Logic
• Unit Ventilator Mechanical System Selection
• Supply Fan
• Coils
• Optional Equipment
• Sensors
• Monitored Safeties
• Misc
• Unit Ventilator Control Logic Selection
• ASHRAE Cycle Control
• Occupancy
• Economizer Suitability
• Optional Features
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications 581

Unit Ventilator Core Logic
Modules (UV)
The core set of modules created for all Unit Vent applications provides the zone
temperature setpoint and base heating/cooling sequencing logic. A Unit Vent
application always includes a Mixed Air Damper Output. The specific control
logic for the damper output is determined by which ASHRAE Cycle Control and
Economizer Suitability logic are selected in the Control Logic Selection section.
Specific selections in the Unit Vent selection tree provide the required Inputs,
Outputs, and Network Input connections for the core logic set and integrate the
specific Output Controller options for Fan Logic, Heating, and Cooling Coils.
The following is the list of modules created by the core logic:
Network Inputs
• SYSTEM-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the System Mode
Determination State Generator used to force the unit into a mode of
operation.
See the Network Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• ZN-T Setpoint Determination: This module determines the Effective
Heating and Cooling Setpoints.
State Generation
• System Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water Flush
system mode for separate connection to State Selection and passes the
remaining system modes to State Selection.
Outputs
• MAD-O (Mixed Air Damper Output)
See the Outputs section.

582 CCT Help: Applications

Unit Ventilator Mechanical System Selection
Supply Fan (UV)
The selection options for Supply Fan are:
• Single Speed: This option creates a State Generator, Output Controller, and
Output to manage the fan.
• Three Speed: This option creates a State Generator, Output Controller, and
three Outputs to manage the low, medium, and high fan speeds. This option
also enables the selection for the Fan Speed Adjust option under the Zone
Sensors selection which is an optional interface for specific Network Sensor
models.
• Variable Speed: This option creates a State Generator and Output Controller
to mange both a Binary Output to stop/start the fan and a Proportional Output
to vary the speed. If Variable Speed Fan is selected, only Proportional Heating
and Cooling Coils can be selected.
• Fan Control by Others: This option assumes that the supervisory system or
local binary switch is directly in control of the fan through a separate hardware
interface. A Fan Controlled By Other Binary Input point is created and used in
conjunction with a State Generator for Fan Control By Others that turns
heating and/or cooling output controllers off if the fan is commanded off.
• Fan Status: This option creates a monitoring only point that can be used
during commissioning or be mapped to the Supervisory system.

Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications 583

Modules (UV Supply Fan)
The Supply Fan selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Inputs
• FCBO-S (Fan Control By Others Switch)
• FAN-S (Fan Status): This module is loaded for the Fan Status selection.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Fan Control By Others Pass Through
• Fan Determination: This module is loaded for the Single Speed, Three
Speed, and Variable Speed Fan selections.
Output Control
• Single Speed Fan Control: This module is loaded when single speed fan is
selected.
• Three Speed Fan Control: This module is loaded when three speed fan is
selected.
• Proportional Fan Control: This module is loaded when variable speed fan is
selected.
Outputs
• FAN-C (Fan Command): This module is loaded for the Single Speed and
Variable Speed Fan selections.
• FAN-O (Fan Output): This module is loaded for the Variable Speed Fan
selection.
• Three Speed Fan selection
- FANL-C (Fan Low Command)
- FANM-C (Fan Medium Command)
- FANH-C (Fan High Command)
See the Outputs section.

584 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (UV)
The separate selections for Cooling and Heating Coils allow for either staged,
proportional, or on-off outputs.
The selection options for Coils are:
Cooling
• Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air: This option creates Network Inputs for
Cooling Lockout Setpoints along with an Outdoor Air Temperature Network
Input. If this option is not selected, then Cooling Enabled Network inputs are
created. All of created Network Inputs interface to the Cooling Availability
Determination State Generators which are always used as State Table
Interfaces to the Staged Compressor Control Output Controllers.
• DX Cooling
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
• Cold Water
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
- Two Position Actuator
Heating
• Heating Lockout from Outdoor Air: This option creates Network Inputs for
Heating Lockout Setpoints along with an Outdoor Air Temperature Network
Input. If this option is not selected, then Heating Enabled Network inputs are
created. All of created Network Inputs interface to the Heating Availability
Determination State Generators which are always used as State Table
Interfaces to the Staged Compressor Control Output Controllers.
• Electric Staged
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
• Hot Water or Steam
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
- Two Position Actuator

Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications 585

 • Face and Bypass Damper: This option modulates a Face and Bypass
Damper in conjunction with Two Position Control logic for the Heating
Coil. The position of the face and Bypass Coil in conjunction with the
Cooling Coil configures a setting on the UV Face and Bypass Heating
Control Output module to determine the control action of the Face and
Bypass Damper.
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
• Configuration
- Cooling Coil in Same Path as Heating
- Cooling Coil in Separate Path from Heating
Common Heating-Cooling: If you select either one of the Cooling or Heating
Coil options, this option is not available.
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
- Two Position Actuator
- Summer-Winter Changeover Switch: This option provides a Binary
Input to determine the control action of the coil.

586 CCT Help: Applications

Modules (UV Coils)
The Coils selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded for the Lockout
from Outdoor Air selection.
• CLGOALOCKOUT-SP (Cooling Outdoor Air Setpoint Lockout): This
module is loaded for the Lockout from Outdoor Air selection.
• HTGOALOCKOUT-SP (Heating Outdoor Air Setpoint Lockout): This
module is loaded for the Lockout from Outdoor Air selection.
• CLG-EN (Cooling Enabled): This module is loaded when Lockout from
Outside Air is not selected.
• HTG-EN (Heating Enabled): This module is loaded when Lockout from
Outside Air is not selected.
• HC-EN (Heating/Cooling 2 Pipe is Available): This module is loaded in
conjunction with the 2 Pipe isAvailable Passthrough State Generator.
• SUMWIN-C (Summer Winter Command): This module provides the
Supervisory system interface to set the logic for any 2 Pipe Output
Controller.
• FLUSHPOS (Flush Position): This module provides the parameter setting
used by any Heating, Cooling, or 2 Pipe Valve Output. The Flush Position
value is used when the System Mode Generator state is set to Water Flush.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• SUMWIN-S (Summer Winter Switch): This module is loaded when the
Summer Winter Changeover Switch selection is made to create a local
binary input to set the logic for any 2 Pipe Output Controller. If a Summer
Winter Switch is not selected, the Summer Winter Command Network
Input is created to provide the changeover logic input from the Supervisory
system.
See the Inputs section.

Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications 587

 State Generation
• Water System Flush Pass Through: This module passes the Water Flush
system mode to a separate State Selection input so that when water flush is
requested, the valves always open.
• Cooling Available Determination: This module is always created and
interfaced to either the Outdoor Air Setpoint Lockouts or Cooling Enabled
Network Input.
• Heating Available Determination: This module is always created and
interfaced to either the Outdoor Air Setpoint Lockouts or Heating Enabled
Network Input.
• 2 Pipe isAvailable Passthrough: This module works in conjunction with the
HC-EN Network Input.
Output Control
Cooling Output Controllers
• Staged Cooling Control: This module is loaded when DX Cooling is
selected.
• Cooling Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of DX Cooling are selected.
• MSC Staged Cooling X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to three) are selected for DX Cooling.
• Proportional Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• 2 Position Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator is selected.
• MSC 2 Position Cooling: This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator is selected.
Heating Output Controllers
• Staged Heating Control: This module is loaded when Electric Staged
Heating is selected.
• Heating Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of Electric Staged Heating are selected.
• MSC Staged Heating X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to three) are selected for Electric Staged Heating.
• Proportional Heating Control: This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• 2 Position Heating Control: This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator is selected and Face and Bypass Damper is not selected.
• MSC 2 Position Heating: This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator is selected and Face and Bypass Damper is not selected.

588 CCT Help: Applications

 • UV Face and Bypass Heating Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator is selected and Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
Common Heating Cooling Output Controllers
• Proportional 2 Pipe Control: This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• 2 Position 2 Pipe Control: This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator is selected.
• MSC 2 Position 2 Pipe: This module is loaded when Two Position Actuator
is selected.
Outputs
• HC-O (Heating Cooling Output): This module is loaded for the
Proportional or Incremental Common Heating Cooling Coil selections.
• HC-C (Heating Cooling Command): This module is loaded for 2 Position
Common Heating Cooling Coil selections.
• HTG1-C (1 Stage Heating Command)
• HTG2-C (2 Stage Heating Command)
• HTG3-C (3 Stage Heating Command)
• HTG-C (2 Position Heating Coil Command): This module is loaded for 2
Position Heating or Face and Bypass Heating selections.
• FBD-O (Face and Bypass Damper Output): This module is loaded for both
Proportional or Incremental Face and Bypass Damper selections.
• CLG1-C (1 Stage Cooling Command)
• CLG2-C (2 Stage Cooling Command)
• CLG3-C (3 Stage Cooling Command)
• CLG-C (2 Position Cooling Coil Command)
See the Outputs section.

Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications 589

Optional Equipment (UV)
The selection options for Optional Equipment are:
• Filter Switch: This option creates a Filter Status Input that is typically mapped
to the Supervisory system to create a Change Filter Alarm.
• Lighting: An output to interface a Lighting Relay is created if the Lighting
Selection is checked. If the lighting option is selected, the “Always Occupied”
selection in the Occupancy section is not available. Only the Occupancy Mode
Determination Mode logic interfaces with the Lighting Output. The default
output configuration is a single maintained binary output.

Modules (UV Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• FILT-S (Filter Status): This module is loaded for the Filter Switch
selection.
See the Inputs section.
Output Control
• Lighting Control: This module is loaded for the Lighting selection option.
Outputs
• LIGHT-C (Lighting Command): This output is loaded for the Lighting
selection option.
See the Outputs section.

590 CCT Help: Applications

Sensors (UV)
The selection options for Sensors/Inputs are:
• Outdoor Air
- Temperature: This option can be used with the Economizer Suitability
Logic that is selected in the Control Logic section. If this option is not
selected here, then Network Inputs are created in the Economizer
Suitability Logic section to provide the inputs for the Economizer Logic.
The Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor can also be used as an input to the
Summer Winter Compensation module that is created under Optional
Features.
- Humidity: This option can be used with the Economizer Suitability Logic
that is selected in the Control Logic section. If this option is not selected
here, then Network Inputs are created in the Economizer Suitability Logic
section to provide the inputs for the Economizer Logic.
• Mixed Air Temperature
• Discharge Air Temperature
• Zone
- Temperature: A Zone Temperature Input is always provided. All the
Zone Temperature options assume that a model of the Network Sensor
family is being used for Temperature, the Setpoint Adjust options of
Common Setpoint Adjust or Warm Cool Adjust, a Temporary Occupancy
Interface from the Network Sensor, the Fan Speed Adjust Option, and
Humidity input from the Network Sensor. Refer to the Network Sensors
product literature listed in the Related Documentation section to match the
functionality selected for the application with a specific Network Sensor
hardware model.
• Setpoint Adjust
- Common Setpoint Adjust
- Warm Cool Adjust
• Temp Occ Support
• Fan Speed Adjust
- Humidity
- Occupancy: This option provides an Input interface to the logic from a
separate Occupancy Sensor.

Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications 591

Modules (UV Sensors)
The Sensors/Inputs selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns based on the specific selections:
Network Inputs
• ZNT-SP (Zone Network Temperature Setpoint): This setpoint is created
when Warm Cool Adjust or no setpoint adjustment is selected. The ZNT-
SP provides a Zone Setpoint Adjustment for the Supervisory system.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature)
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity)
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature)
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature)
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature): The default is set to the Network Sensor
interface. Zone Temperature is a required input for any Unit Ventilator
application.
• ZN-SP (Zone Setpoint): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when the Common Setpoint Adjust is selected.
• WC-ADJ (Zone Adjust): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when Warm Cool Adjust is selected. The Warm Cool Adjust option is not
available on Network Sensors for applications requiring the Fan Speed
Adjust interface from the Network Sensor.
• ZN-TOCC (Zone Temporary Occupancy): The default is set to the
Network Sensor interface when Temp Occ Support is seleced.
• ZNF-O (Zone Fan Override): The default is set to the Network Sensor
interface when Fan Speed Adjust is selected. This module provides an
override during commissioning to set the fan to Auto/Off/Low/Medium/
High.
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when Zone Humidity is selected.
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module is loaded when Occupancy is
selected and assumes an Occupancy Sensor is mapped to a Binary Input.
See the Inputs section.

592 CCT Help: Applications

 Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Zone Occupancy Status Display): If Scheduled Occupancy
is selected, this point provides the Network Inputs to display Occupancy
Status for the system.
• ZNF-% (Zone Fan Status Display): If Fan Speed Adjust is selected, this
point provides the fan speed command value to a Network Sensor local
display.
See the Outputs section.

Monitored Safeties (UV)

The Discharge Air Smoke Detector and Low Limit Temperature Switch selections
create optional Sensor points that can be mapped to the Supervisory system and
alarm points created.
The selection options for Monitored Safeties are:
• Discharge Air Smoke Detector
• Low Limit Temperature Switch

Modules (UV Monitored Safeties)

The Monitored Safeties selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• DA-SD (Discharge Air Smoke Detector)
• LT-A (Low Temperature Alarm)
See the Inputs section.

Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications 593

Misc (UV)
The Miscellaneous selections provide binary inputs for the Energy Hold Off
Determination Determination and the Unit Enable Determination State Generators.
The selection options for Miscellaneous are:
• Energy Hold Off Switch: This option allows the unit to shut down based on
the energy hold off Hardware Input (BI). If Energy Hold Off is selected in the
Optional Features section, then the Hardware Input or the Network Input can
activate the mode. This feature is typically used to shut down the temperature
and airflow control when a window or loading door is open (for example, a
window switch).
• Unit Enable Switch: This option determines whether the application operates
based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected in the Optional
Features section, then when the Network Input does not have a valid command
from the network, it is considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both
BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate
(that is, either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).

Modules (UV Misc)

This Misc selections load the following modules in these Control View columns:
Inputs
• EHO-TS (Energy Hold Off Toggle Switch): This module is loaded when
Energy Hold Off Switch is selected and works in conjunction with the
Energy Hold Off Determination State Generator.
• UNIT-TS (Unit Toggle Switch): This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected and works in conjunction with the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Unit Enable or Power
Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.
• Energy Hold Off Determination: This module is loaded when Energy Hold
Off Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Energy Hold Off
or Power Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.

594 CCT Help: Applications

Unit Ventilator Control Logic Selection
ASHRAE Cycle Control (UV)
The ASHRAE Cycle selections create specific Generator and Output Controllers
to control the Mixed Air Damper.
ASHRAE Cycles I, II and W require a Discharge Air Temperature Input to
interface to the damper control logic. This input is created if the Discharge Air
Sensor was not selected under the Sensors selection. A DATLL-SP (Discharge Air
Low Limit Setpoint) Network Input is also created for the Supervisory system
interface. ASHRAE Cycles II and W also create a Damper Minimum Position
Setpoint as a Network Input for the Supervisory system.
ASHRAE Cycle III requires a Mixed Air Temperature Input to interface to the
damper control logic. This input is created if the Mixed Air Sensor was not
selected under the Sensors selection. Mixed Air Temperature and Damper
Minimum Position Setpoints are also created as Network Inputs for the
Supervisory system.
The selection options for ASHRAE Cycle Control are:
• ASHRAE Cycle I
• ASHRAE Cycle II
• ASHRAE Cycle III
• ASHRAE Cycle W

Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications 595

Modules (UV ASHRAE Cycle Control)
The ASHRAE Cycle Control selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• DATLL-SP (Discharge Air Temperature Low Limit Setpoint)
• OAD-MINPOS (Outdoor Air Minimum Position)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature)
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature)
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Min Position Determination: This module is loaded when ASHRAE Cycle
2, 3 or W is selected.
State Generation
• UV-ZN-T Sequencing ASHRAE 1: This module is loaded when ASHRAE
Cycle 1 is selected.
• UV-ZN-T Sequencing ASHRAE 2: This module is loaded when ASHRAE
Cycle 2 is selected.
• UV-ZN-T Sequencing ASHRAE 3: This module is loaded when ASHRAE
Cycle 3 is selected.
• UV-ZN-T Sequencing ASHRAE W: This module is loaded when
ASHRAE Cycle W is selected.
Output Control
• Proportional Unit Vent 1 Damper Control: This module is loaded when
ASHRAE Cycle 1 is selected.
• Proportional Unit Vent 2-W Damper Control: This module is loaded when
ASHRAE Cycle 2 or W is selected.
• Proportional Unit Vent 3 Damper Control: This module is loaded when
ASHRAE Cycle 3 is selected.

596 CCT Help: Applications

Occupancy (UV)
The selection options for Occupancy are:
• Cycle During Occupied: This option configures the Fan Determination State
Generator module’s input for Fan Cycle to a Yes value. Otherwise, the Fan
runs continuously during Occupied Mode. This selection is not available if the
Fan Controlled By Other option is selected.
- Cycle Fan with Staged Outputs: This option is only enabled if DX
Cooling and/or Electric Staged Coils are selected. This selection interlocks
the command of the Multi Stage Controllers with the fan to ensure that only
the damper is open and the fan is commanded on only when a stage of
cooling or heating is active. This prevents excess intake of high-humidity
outdoor air.
• In Unoccupied Protect Hot Water Coil Based on OAT: This option is only
allowed if Scheduled Occupancy and Hot Water Coils are selected. When
selected, the heating coil is activated when the unit is off during Unoccupied
and the Outdoor Air Temperature is cold. See the Unocc Status Determination
with OAT module description for more information.
• Turn Fan off on loss of Air Flow: This option is available only when the Fan
Status option is selected under the Supply Fan section.
• Always Occupied: This option sets the default value of Occupied for the ZN-T
Setpoint Determination to Occupied.
• Scheduled Occupancy: This option creates the interface for the Supervisory
system scheduling logic.
- Override Support: This option creates the local override interfaces from
optional Occupancy Sensors or Networked Sensor Temporary Occupancy
interfaces.

Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications 597

Modules (UV Occupancy)
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE: This module is loaded for the Scheduled Occupancy
selection.
• OCC-OVERRIDE: This module is loaded for Override Support when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected.
• FAN-RESET: This module allows you to reset the fan alarm, if active. This
module is loaded when Turn Fan Off on Loss of Airflow is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded for the In
Unoccupied Protect Hot Water Coil Based on OAT selection (if the
Outdoor Air Temperature sensor is not selected).
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Always Occupied: This Enum Constant is only required for the Always
Occupied selection. Although this module is shown in the State Generation
column of the Control View, it does not interface into the State Selection
Table (State Tables).
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded for the Scheduled
Occupancy selection.
• Unocc Status Determination with OAT: This module is loaded for the
Scheduled Occupancy selection.
• Fan Alarm Status: This module is loaded for the Turn Fan Off on Loss of
Airflow selection.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Zone Occupancy Status Display): If Scheduled Occupancy
is selected, this point provides logic to display the Occupancy Status of the
system on a Network Sensor.
See the Outputs section.

598 CCT Help: Applications

Economizer Suitability (UV)
The Economizer Suitability selections are not available when ASHRAE Cycle 1 is
selected. Otherwise, the Economizer Availability Determination Setpoint module
is created and interfaced to the choice selected.
The selection options for Economizer Suitability are:
• Network Command
• Binary Input (Enthalpy Switch)
• Outdoor Air
- Dry Bulb Temp Economizer
- Temp & Enthalpy Economizer

Modules (UV Economizer Suitability)

The Economizer Suitability selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Dry Bulb
Temp Economizer or Temp & Enthalpy Economizer are selected and an
Outdoor Air Temperature Input was not selected under the Sensors section.
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy Economizer is selected and an Outdoor Air Humidity Input was
not selected under the Sensors section.
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enabled): This module is loaded when Network
Command is selected.
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): This module is loaded when Temp & Enthalpy
Economizer is selected and a Zone Humidity Input was not selected under
the Sensors section.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enabled): This module is loaded when Binary
Input (Enthalpy Switch) is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Economizer Availability Determination: This module is always required,
except when ASHRAE Cycle 1 is selected.

Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications 599

Optional Features (UV)
The Optional Features selections provide Network Input modules for Supervisory
system interfaces to override the main application’s sequence of operation through
connections to the appropriate Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules or State
Generators.
The selection choices for Optional Features are:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.
• Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based
on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Enable Switch is selected in the Misc
section, then when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the
network, it is considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV
are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is,
either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Power Fail Restart Logic: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator module. When this option is selected, after a
restart (power cycle, controller download, or manual restart command), the
application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time
(default = 60 seconds).
• Energy Hold Off: This option allows the unit to shut down based on the
energy hold off Network Input. If Energy Hold Off Switch is selected in the
Misc section, then the Network Input or the Hardware Input (BI) can activate
the mode. This feature is typically used to shut down the temperature and
airflow control when a window or loading door is open (for example, a
window switch).
• Network Warmup-Cooldown Support: This feature starts the unit ventilator
and operates in a heating only mode until the warm-up is cancelled or the
occupied temperature is reached. The unit ventilator outdoor air dampers are
closed during warm-up operation.
• Zone Low Limit Support: This feature is typically used with the Energy Hold
Off feature to cycle heating On when the temperature falls below a low limit.

600 CCT Help: Applications

 • Summer-Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift: This option allows the zone
setpoints to be automatically adjusted based on the outdoor air temperature.
This feature is often used for entry zones, such as an atrium, that feel
comfortable at warmer or cooler temperatures because occupants usually enter
from much warmer or cooler conditions. For example, if the outdoor air
temperature is 20 deg F, the atrium temperature may be kept at 65 deg F rather
than 69 deg F because occupants wear heavier clothing as they come in from or
go to the outdoors.

Modules (UV Optional Features)

The Optional Features selections load the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
• UNITEN-MODE (Unit Enable Mode): If Unit Enable is selected, an
interface is provided from the network for the Unit Enable Determination
State Generator module to provide a Shutdown or Enable State. This
module works in conjunction with the Misc Unit Enable Switch input to
prioritize a Supervisory versus local override from a Binary Input.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature Network): If Summer-Winter
Compensation Setpoint Shift is selected, an Outdoor Air Temperature input
from the Supervisory system is required as an input to the Summer Winter
Compensation module. If an Outdoor Air Temperature Input is selected in
the Sensors selection section, this Network Input is not added.
• EHO-MODE (Energy Hold Off Mode): If Powerfail Restart Logic is
selected, this interface is provided to the network for the Energy Hold Off
Determination Module. This module works in conjunction with the
optional Energy Hold Off Switch.
• WUCD-MODE (Warmup-Cooldown): This module is loaded when
Network Warm-up Cooldown Support is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.

Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications 601

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Summer Winter Compensation: If Summer-Winter Compensation Setpoint
Shift is selected, this module uses the Network Input for Outdoor Air
Temperature or the Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Input that is
optionally added under the Sensors section. The setup parameters for
Summer Winter Compensation create summer and winter setpoints and
gains based around the Outdoor Air Temperature to calculate effective
heating and cooling setpoint shifts. The setpoint shifts interface to the ZN-
T Setpoint Determination module to bias the Occupied, Standby, and
Unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints.
• WarmupCooldown Determination: This module is loaded when Network
Warm-up Cooldown Support is selected.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the position of the mixed air damper and set the state/speed of the fan
during a call for Smoke Control.
• WarmupCooldown Sequencing: This module is loaded when Network
Warm-up Cooldown is selected.
• Zone Low Limit Determination: If Zone Limit Support is selected, this
module interfaces with the Zone Temperature and a Zone Low Limit
Setpoint parameter that can be set to trigger state selection modes to
override any configured output controllers to heat the space until the Zone
Temperature is within a differential parameter.
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Unit Enable or Power
Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.
• Energy Hold Off Determination: This module is loaded when Energy Hold
Off Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Energy Hold Off
or Power Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.

602 CCT Help: Applications

Chapter 17: CCT Help: Applications
Heat Pump Applications
Introduction
The Heat Pump selections allow you to configure the mechanical choices for either
an Air to Air or Water to Air Heat Pump configuration that contains one or two
compressors. System Selection also allows optional Economizer and Supplemental
Heating that are sequenced with the compressor logic.
Heat Pump applications include the following:
• Heat Pump Core Logic
• Heat Pump Mechanical System Selection
- Supply Fan
- Coils
- Optional Equipment
- Sensors
- Monitored Safeties
- Misc
• Heat Pump Control Logic Selection
- Occupancy
- Economizer Suitability
- Reversing Valve Output(s)
- Optional Features
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Heat Pump Applications 603

Heat Pump Core Logic
Modules (HP)
The core set of modules created for all Heat Pump applications provides the zone
temperature setpoint and base heating/cooling sequencing logic. Specific
selections in the Heat Pump selection tree provide the required Inputs, Outputs,
and Network Input connections for the core logic set and integrate the specific
Output Controller options for Fan Logic, Heating, and Cooling Coils.
The following is the list of modules created by the core logic:
Network Inputs
• SYSTEM-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the System Mode
Determination State Generator used to force the unit into a mode of
operation.
See the Network Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• ZN-T Setpoint Determination: This module determines the Effective
Heating and Cooling Setpoints.
State Generation
• System Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water Flush
system mode for separate connection to State Selection and passes the
remaining system modes to State Selection.
• Zone Sequencing (FC): This module manages the transition between
heating and cooling output controllers and determines which device should
be operating to control the space temperature.

604 CCT Help: Applications

Heat Pump Mechanical System Selection
Supply Fan (HP)
The selection options for Supply Fan are:
• Single Speed: This option creates a State Generator, Output Controller, and
Output to manage the Fan.
• Three Speed: This option creates a State Generator, Output Controller, and
three Outputs to manage the low, medium, and high fan speeds. This option
also enables the selection for the Fan Speed Adjust option under the Zone
Sensors selection which is an optional interface for specific Network Sensor
models.
• Variable Speed: This option creates a State Generator and Output Controller
to manage both a Binary Output to stop/start the fan and a Proportional Output
to vary the speed.
• Fan Control by Others: This option assumes that the supervisory system or
local binary switch is directly in control of the fan through a separate hardware
interface. A Fan Controlled By Other Binary Input point is created that is used
in conjunction with a State Generator for Fan Control By Others that turns
heating and/or cooling output controllers off if the fan is commanded off.
• Fan Status: This option creates a monitoring only point that can be used
during commissioning or be mapped to the Supervisory System.

Heat Pump Applications 605

Modules (HP Supply Fan)
The Supply Fan selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Inputs
• FCBO-S (Fan Control By Others Switch)
• FAN-S (Fan Status): This module is loaded for the Fan Status selection.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Fan Control By Others Pass Through
• Fan Determination: This module is loaded for the Single Speed, Three
Speed, and Variable Speed Fan selections.
Output Control
• Single Speed Fan Control: This module is loaded when single speed fan is
selected.
• Three Speed Fan Control: This module is loaded when three speed fan is
selected.
• Proportional Fan Control: This module is loaded when variable speed fan is
selected.
Outputs
• FAN-C (Fan Command): This module is loaded for the Single Speed and
Variable Speed Fan selections.
• FAN-O (Fan Output): This module is loaded for the Variable Speed Fan
selection.
• Three Speed Fan Selection
• FANL-C (Fan Low Command)
• FANM-C (Fan Medium Command)
• FANHC (Fan High Command)
See the Outputs section.

606 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (HP)
The Coils selections assumes that at least one compressor is created for a Heat
Pump System.
During the Control Selection process, you must select the configuration of the
reversing valves to determine if a reversing valve is enabled for heating or cooling.
The selection options for Coils are:
• Lockout from Outdoor Air: This option creates Network Inputs for Cooling
and Heating Lockout Setpoints along with an OA-T (Outdoor Air
Temperature) Network Input. If this option is not selected, then Cooling and
Heating Enabled Network inputs are created. All of created Network Inputs
interface to the Cooling and Heating Availability Determination State
Generators which are always used as State Table Interfaces to the Staged
Compressor Control Output Controllers.
• Two Compressors-Reversing Valves: This option creates the required Output
Controllers and Outputs for a two compressor system.
• Supplemental Heating
- One Stage
- Two Stages

Modules (HP Coils)

The Coils selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded for the Lockout
from Outdoor Air selection.
• CLGOALOCKOUT-SP (Cooling Outdoor Air Setpoint Lockout): This
module is loaded for the Lockout from Outdoor Air selection.
• HTGOALOCKOUT-SP (Heating Outdoor Air Setpoint Lockout): This
module is loaded for the Lockout from Outdoor Air selection.
• CLG-EN (Cooling Enabled): This module is loaded when Lockout from
Outside Air is not selected.
• HTG-EN (Heating Enabled): This module is loaded when Lockout from
Outside Air is not selected.
See the Network Inputs section.

Heat Pump Applications 607

 State Generation
• Cooling Available Determination: This module is always created and
interfaced to either the Outdoor Air Setpoint Lockouts or Cooling Enabled
Network Input.
• Heating Available Determination: This module is always created and
interfaced to either the Outdoor Air Setpoint Lockouts or Heating Enabled
Network Input.
Output Control
• Staged Compressor Control: This module is created for both 1 or 2
Compressor Systems.
• MSC Staged Compressor 1: This module is created for 1 Compressor
Systems.
• MSC Staged Compressor 2: This module is created for 2 Compressor
Systems.
• Compressor Max Cap Fract LV: This module is created for 2 Compressor
Systems.
• Staged Heating Control: This module is created for both 1 or 2 Stages for
Supplemental Heating.
• Heating Max Cap Fract LV: This module is created for 2 Compressor
Systems.
• MSC Staged Heating 1: This module is created for 1 Stage of Supplemental
Heating.
• MSC Stage Heating 2: This module is created for 2 Stages of Supplemental
Heating.
Outputs
• COMP1-C (Compressor 1 Command): This module is created for 1
Compressor Systems.
• REV1-C (Reversing Valve 1 Command): This module is created for 1
Compressor Systems.
• COMP2-C (Compressor 2 Command): This module is created for 2
Compressor Systems.
• REV2-C (Reversing Valve 2 Command): This module is created for 2
Compressor Systems.
• HTG1-C (Supplemental Heating Stage 1 Command): This module is
created for 1 Stage of Supplemental Heating.
• HTG2-C (Supplemental Heating Stage 2 Command): This module is
created for 2 Stages of Supplemental Heating.
See the Outputs section.

608 CCT Help: Applications

Optional Equipment (HP)
The selection options for Optional Equipment are:
• Filter Switch: This option creates a Filter Status Input. This point is typically
mapped to the Supervisory system to create a Change Filter Alarm.
• Lighting: This option creates an output to interface a Lighting Relay. If this
option is selected, the Always Occupied selection in the Occupancy section is
not available. Only the Occupancy Mode Determination Mode logic interfaces
with the Lighting Output. The default output configuration is a single
maintained binary output.

Modules (HP Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• FILT-S (Filter Status): This module is loaded for the Filter Switch selection
option.
See the Inputs section.
Output Control
• Lighting Control: This module is loaded for the Lighting selection option.
Outputs
• LIGHT-C (Lighting Command): This output is loaded for the Lighting
selection option.
See the Outputs section.

Heat Pump Applications 609

Sensors (HP)
The selection options for Sensors/Inputs are:
• Outdoor Air
- Temperature: This option can be used with the Economizer Suitability
Logic that is selected in the Control Logic Section. If this Sensor input is
not selected in this section, then Network Inputs are created in the
Economizer Suitability Logic section to provide the inputs for the
Economizer Logic. The Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor is also used as an
input to the Summer Winter Compensation module that is created under
Optional Features.
- Humidity: This option can be used with the Economizer Suitability Logic
that is selected in the Control Logic section. If this Sensor input is not
selected in this section, then Network Inputs are created in the Economizer
Suitability Logic section to provide the inputs for the Economizer Logic.
• Discharge Air Temperature
• Zone
- Temperature: A Zone Temperature Input is always provided. All the
Zone Temperature options assume that a model of the Network Sensor
family is being used for Temperature, the Setpoint Adjust options of
Common Setpoint Adjust or Warm Cool Adjust, a Temporary Occupancy
Interface from the Network Sensor, the Fan Speed Adjust Option and
Humidity input from the Network Sensor. Refer to the Network Sensors
product literature listed in the Related Documentation section to match the
functionality selected for the application with a specific Network Sensor
hardware model.
• Setpoint Adjust
- Common Setpoint Adjust
- Warm Cool Adjust
• Temp Occ Support
• Fan Speed Adjust
- Humidity
- Occupancy: This option provides an Input interface to the logic from a
separate Occupancy Sensor.

610 CCT Help: Applications

Modules (HP Sensors)
The Sensors/Inputs selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns based on the specific selections:
Network Inputs
• ZNT-SP (Zone Network Temperature Setpoint): This setpoint is created
when Warm Cool Adjust or no setpoint adjustment is selected. The ZNT-
SP provides a Zone Setpoint Adjustment for the Supervisory system.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature)
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature)
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity)
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature): The default is set to the Network Sensor
interface. Zone Temperature is a required input for any Heat Pump
application.
• ZN-SP (Zone Setpoint): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when the Common Setpoint Adjust is selected.
• WC-ADJ (Zone Adjust): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when Warm Cool Adjust is selected. The Warm Cool Adjust option is not
available on Network Sensors for applications requiring the Fan Speed
Adjust interface from the Network Sensor.
• ZN-TOCC (Zone Temporary Occupancy): The default is set to the
Network Sensor interface when Temp Occ Support is selected.
• ZNF-O (Zone Fan Override): This default is set to the Network Sensor
interface when Fan Speed Adjust is selected. This option provides an
override during commissioning to set the fan to Auto/Off/Low/Medium/
High.
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when Zone Humidity is selected.
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module is loaded when Occupancy is
selected. This module assumes an Occupancy Sensor is mapped to a Binary
Input.
See the Inputs section.

Heat Pump Applications 611

 Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Zone Occupancy Status Display): If Scheduled Occupancy
is selected, this point provides the Network Inputs to display Occupancy
Status for the system.
• ZNF-% (Zone Fan Status Display): If Fan Speed Adjust is selected, this
point provides the fan speed command value to a Network Sensor local
display.
See the Outputs section.

Monitored Safeties (HP)

The selection option for Monitored Safeties is:
• Discharge Air Smoke Detector: This option creates optional Sensor points
that can be mapped to the Supervisory system and creates alarm points.

Modules (HP Monitored Safeties)

The Monitored Safeties selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• DA-SD (Discharge Air Smoke Detector)
See the Inputs section.

612 CCT Help: Applications

Misc (HP)
The Miscellaneous selections provide binary inputs for the Energy Hold Off
Determination and Unit Enable Determination State Generators.
The selection options for Miscellaneous are:
• Energy Hold Off Switch: This option allows the unit to shut down based on
the energy hold off Hardware Input (BI). If Energy Hold Off is selected in the
Optional Features section, then the Hardware Input or the Network Input can
activate the mode. This feature is typically used to shut down the temperature
and airflow control when a window or loading door is open (for example, a
window switch).
• Unit Enable Switch: This option determines whether the application operates
based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected in the Optional
Features section, then when the Network Input does not have a valid command
from the network, it is considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both
BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate
(that is, either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).

Modules (HP Misc)

This Misc selections load the following modules in these Control View columns:
Inputs
• EHO-TS (Energy Hold Off Toggle Switch): This module is loaded when
Energy Hold Off Switch is selected. This Input works in conjunction with
the Energy Hold Off Determination State Generator.
• UNIT-TS (Unit Toggle Switch): This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected. This Input works in conjunction with the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when Unit Enable Switch is
selected in the Misc section or when either Unit Enable or Power Fail Restart
is selected in the Optional Features section.
• Energy Hold Off Determination: This module is loaded when Energy Hold Off
Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Energy Hold Off or
Power Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.

Heat Pump Applications 613

Heat Pump Control Logic Selection
Occupancy (HP)
The selection options for Occupancy are:
• Cycle During Occupied: This option configures the Fan Determination State
Generator module’s input for Fan Cycle to a Yes value. Otherwise, the Fan
runs continuously during Occupied Mode. This selection is not available if Fan
Controlled By Other is selected.
- Cycle Fan with Staged Outputs: This option is only enabled if DX
Cooling and/or Electric Staged Coils are selected. This selection interlocks
the command of the Multi Stage Controllers with the Fan to ensure that
only the fan is commanded on when a stage of cooling or heating has been
enabled.
• Turn Fan Off on Loss of Air Flow: This option is available only if Fan Status
is selected under the Supply Fan section.
• Always Occupied: This option sets the default value of Occupied for the ZN-T
Setpoint Determination to Occupied.
• Scheduled Occupancy: This option creates the interface for the Supervisory
system scheduling logic.
- Override Support: This option creates the local override interfaces from
optional Occupancy Sensors or Networked Sensor Temporary Occupancy
interfaces.

614 CCT Help: Applications

Modules (HP Occupancy)
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE: This module is loaded for the Scheduled Occupancy
selection.
• OCC-OVERRIDE: This module is loaded for Override Support when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected.
• FAN-RESET: This module is loaded for the Turn Fan Off on Loss of
Airflow selection.
See the Network Inputs section.
State Generation
• Always Occupied: This Enum Constant is only loaded for the Always
Occupied selection. Although this module is shown in the State Generation
column of the Control View, it does not interface into the State Selection
Table.
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded for the Scheduled
Occupancy selection.
• VAV-Unocc Status Determination: This module is loaded for the
Scheduled Occupancy selection.
• Fan Alarm Status: This module is loaded for the Turn Fan Off on Loss of
Airflow selection.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Zone Occupancy Status Display): If Scheduled Occupancy
is selected, this point provides logic to display the Occupancy Status of the
system on a Network Sensor.
See the Outputs section.

Heat Pump Applications 615

Economizer Suitability (HP)
Whenever any of the choices for Economizer Suitability are selected the
Proportional Damper Output Controller, Mixed Air Damper Output, and Minimum
Position Determination Logic are created. The Economizer Availability
Determination Setpoint module is also created and interfaced to the Economizer
Suitability option selected.
The selection options for Economizer Suitability are:
• Network Command
• Binary Input (Enthalpy Switch)
• Outdoor Air
- Dry Bulb Temp Economizer
- Temp & Enthalpy Economizer

Modules (HP Economizer Suitability)

The Economizer Suitability selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Dry Bulb
Temp Economizer or Temp & Enthalpy are selected and an Outdoor Air
Temperature Input is not selected under the Sensor/Input selections.
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy Economizer is selected and an Outdoor Air Humidity Input is not
selected under the Sensor/Input selections.
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enabled): This module is loaded when Network
Command is selected.
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): This module is loaded when Temp & Enthalpy
Economizer is selected and a Zone Humidity Input is not selected under the
Sensor Selections.
• DATLL-SP
See the Network Inputs section.

616 CCT Help: Applications

 Inputs
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enabled): This module is loaded when Binary
Input (Enthalpy Switch) is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Economizer Availability
• Min Position Determination
Output Controllers
• Proportional Damper Output
Outputs
• MAD-O (Mixed Air Damper Output)
See the Outputs section.

Heat Pump Applications 617

Reversing Valve Output(s) (HP)
The Reversing Valve Output selections set the logic in the Staged Compressor
Control Output module to determine whether the Reversing Valve Outputs
(REV1-C and REV2-C) should be commanded on when there is a call for heating
or cooling.
The selection options for Reversing Valve Output(s) are:
• On for Cooling
• On for Heating

618 CCT Help: Applications

Optional Features (HP)
The Optional Features selections provide Network Inputs modules for Supervisory
system interfaces to override the main applications sequence of operation through
connections to the appropriate Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules or State
Generators.
The selection choices for Optional Features are:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.
• Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based
on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Enable Switch is selected in the Misc
section, then when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the
network, it is considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV
are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is,
either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Power Fail Restart Logic: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator module. When this option is selected, after a
restart (power cycle, controller download, or manual restart command), the
application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time
(default = 60 seconds).
• Energy Hold Off: This option allows the unit to shut down based on the
energy hold off Network Input. If Energy Hold Off Switch is selected in the
Misc section, then the Network Input or the Hardware Input (BI) can activate
the mode. This feature is typically used to shut down the temperature and
airflow control when a window or loading door is open (for example, a
window switch).
• Network Warmup-Cooldown Support: This feature starts the heat pump and
operates in a heating only mode until the warm-up is cancelled or the occupied
temperature is reached. The heat pump outdoor air dampers are closed during
warm-up operation.
• Zone Low Limit Support: This feature is typically used with the Energy Hold
Off feature to cycle heating On when the temperature falls below a low limit.

Heat Pump Applications 619

 • Summer-Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift: This option allows the zone
setpoints to be automatically adjusted based on the outdoor air temperature.
This feature is often used for entry zones, such as an atrium, that feel
comfortable at warmer or cooler temperatures because occupants usually enter
from much warmer or cooler conditions. For example, if the outdoor air
temperature is 20 deg F, the atrium temperature may be kept at 65 deg F rather
than 69 deg F because occupants wear heavier clothing as they come in from or
go to the outdoors.

Modules (HP Optional Features)

The Optional Features selections load the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
• UNITEN-MODE (Unit Enable Mode): If Unit Enable is selected, an
interface is provided from the network for the Unit Enable Determination
State Generator module to provide a Shutdown or Enable State. This
module works in conjunction with the Misc Unit Enable Switch input to
prioritize a supervisory versus local override from a Binary Input.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature Network): If Summer-Winter
Compensation Setpoint Shift is selected, an Outdoor Air Temperature input
from the Supervisory system is required as an input to the Summer Winter
Compensation module. If an Outdoor Air Temperature Input was selected
in the Sensors selection section, this Network Input is not added.
• EHO-MODE (Energy Hold Off Mode): If Powerfail Restart Logic is
selected, this interface is provided to the network for the Energy Hold Off
Determination module. This module works in conjunction with the
optional Energy Hold Off Switch.
• WUCD-MODE (Warmup-Cooldown): This module is loaded when
Network Warm-up Cooldown Support is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.

620 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Summer Winter Compensation: If Summer-Winter Compensation Setpoint
Shift is selected, this module uses the Network Input for Outdoor Air
Temperature or the Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Input that is
optionally added under the Sensors selection. The setup parameters for
Summer Winter Compensation create summer and winter setpoints and
gains based around the Outdoor Air Temperature to calculate effective
heating and cooling setpoint shifts. The setpoint shifts interface to the ZN-
T Setpoint Determination module to bias the Occupied, Standby, and
Unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints.
• WarmupCooldown Determination: This module is loaded when Network
Warm-up Cooldown Support is selected.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the position of the mixed air damper and set the state/speed of the fan
during a call for Smoke Control.
• WarmupCooldown Sequencing: This module is loaded when Network
Warm-up Cooldown is selected.
• Zone Low Limit Determination: If Zone Limit Support is selected, this
module interfaces Zone Temperature and a Zone Low Limit Setpoint
parameter that can be set to trigger state selection modes to override any
configured output controllers to heat the space until the Zone Temperature
is within a differential parameter.
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Unit Enable or Power
Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.
• Energy Hold Off Determination: This module is loaded when Energy Hold
Off Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Energy Hold Off
or Power Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.

Heat Pump Applications 621

622 CCT Help: Applications
Chapter 18: CCT Help: Applications
VAV Applications
Introduction
There are four system selection tree applications available to configure single duct
and dual duct VAV boxes. Most space configuration scenarios use the VAV single
duct or dual duct applications because one VAV single duct or dual duct box
controls the temperature and air flow requirements. For spaces that need more than
one VAV box to maintain the required air flow, use the VAV slave single duct or
slave dual duct applications. For example, typical slave applications may include
large conference rooms or classrooms where one zone setpoint is desired, but the
size of the space under control dictates the need for more than one VAV box to
maintain the space’s air flow requirements. For these spaces, create one single duct
or dual duct Master application to provide the temperature control logic for the
space, and integrate single duct or dual duct Slave configurations. You can set up
the slave configurations to read output points from their associated master
application using peer-to-peer communication.
See the sections specific to the VAV Application Type:
• VAV Single Duct Application
• VAV Slave Single Duct Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
• VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
See the Master and Slave VAV Box Peer-to-Peer Communication section for
information on peer-to-peer communication between Master and Slave VAV
boxes.

VAV Applications 623

VAV Single Duct Application
The core logic of the VAV single duct application provides the default
configuration and setup parameters for the zone temperature and flow control
sequences. The selection tree also includes options for the following key
configurations:
• an Exhaust Box interface to track the flow of the Supply Box to maintain
positive or negative pressure in a space
• Fan logic for both Series and Parallel Fan configurations
• Heating Coil interfaces to sequence Box and Baseboard Supplemental Heat
• UL 864 UUKL Smoke Control
• Warmup and Cooldown mode logic interfaces to the building-wide Optimal
Start logic
• automated Zone Setpoint shifts based on the Outdoor Air Temperature reset
schedule
• CO2 Sensor interface that automatically resets the flow settings for the zone
The process of commissioning and balancing an application created from the VAV
single duct system selection tree is simplified because CCT provides:
• integrated logic that auto-calibrates all flow sensors
• an optional Box Flow Test application
• the Balancer Override module that interfaces to a specific Network Sensor or
the CCT Commissioning Balancer UI (Balancer Tab) for the Balancing
Contractor to set the cubic feet per minute (cfm) parameters, box areas, and
flow constants.
Once you define the desired temperature and cfm setpoint values for the space,
CCT uses patented adaptive control techniques in all of the temperature and flow
control loops to continually update all of the tuning parameters.

624 CCT Help: Applications

 See the following sections for information on this application’s logic and
selections:
• VAV Single Duct Core Logic
• VAV Single Duct Mechanical System Selection
- Supply Damper Actuator
- Exhaust Damper Actuator
- Box Fan
- Coils
- Optional Equipment
- Sensors
- Misc
• VAV Single Duct Control Logic Selection
- Occupancy
- Heating Priority
- Optional Features
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes made since the last release of CCT.

VAV Applications 625

VAV Single Duct Core Logic

Modules (VAV-SD)
The core set of modules created for all Single Duct applications are the zone
temperature and flow logic required for a Pressure Independent Cooling Only
application. Specific selections in the Single Duct tree provide the required Inputs,
Outputs, and Network Input connections for the core logic set and integrate the
specific Output Controller options for Box Heating, Supplemental Heating, Series
or Parallel Fans, and Exhaust Boxes.
The following is the list of modules created by the core logic.
Network Inputs
• AUTOCAL-C (Auto Calibration Command): This module is a Network
Input for the Autocalibration Sequence State Generator.
• OA-PERCENT: This module is a Network Input that provides an interface
to the Minimum Flow Determination module to bias the Supply Damper
based on fresh air requirements for the zone under control.
• SYSTEM-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the System Mode
Determination State Generator used to force the unit into a mode of
operation.
See the Network Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Minimum Flow Determination: This module determines the minimum flow
for the VAV box and sets up the flow setpoint parameters for unoccupied
and warm-up modes.
• Supply Damper Control Stroke Time: This module provides the stroke time
for the Supply Damper.
• Supply Flow Calculation: This module calculates the supply flow based on
the Supply Velocity Pressure.
• ZN-T Setpoint Determination: This module determines the Effective
Heating and Cooling Setpoints.

626 CCT Help: Applications

 State Generation
• Autocalibration Sequence: This module provides the signals to close the
damper and recalculate the offset for the flow sensor.
• Balancer Override SD: This module is loaded for applications without an
Exhaust Damper. This module sets up the Supply Dampers Area, K-Factor,
and the Occupied Flow parameters. This module also interfaces with
specific Network Sensor models used by the Balancing Contractor.
• Balancer Override SDX: This module is loaded for applications with an
Exhaust Damper.
• Box Flow Test: This module steps the supply damper and then measures
the flow to provide a check on the VAV box.
• System Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water Flush
system mode for separate connection to State Selection and passes the
remaining system modes to State Selection.
• VAV-ZN-T Sequencing: This module determines which device should be
operating to control the space temperature.
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module determines the current
occupancy state of the controller.
Output Control
• Supply Damper Control: This module controls the Supply Air Damper
Output.
• Supply Flow Setpoint Control: This module determines the Flow Setpoint
for the Supply Air Damper.

VAV Applications 627

VAV Single Duct Mechanical System Selection

Supply Damper Actuator (VAV-SD)

The selections for Supply Damper Actuators provide the same Inputs and Outputs
for the actuator and velocity Inputs. The key difference between the three choices
is how the hardware definition for each Input and Output is set up.
The selection options for Supply Damper Actuator are:
• VMA Integrated Actuator: This option assumes that you are using an FEC-
VMA hardware model that has the actuator and velocity pressure inputs
packaged with the controller.
• Proportional Actuator: This option assumes that you are using a non-
integrated actuator that uses a 0-10 VDC signal for the supply damper and that
a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.
• Incremental Actuator: This option assumes that you are using a non-
integrated actuator with two binary outputs for incremental control for the
supply damper and that a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.

Modules (VAV-SD Supply Damper Actuator)

The Supply Damper Actuator selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Inputs
• SA-VP (Supply Air Velocity Pressure)
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
•Supply Damper Stroke Time: This module provides the Stroke Time
parameter for incremental actuators.
Outputs
• SAD-O (Supply Air Damper Output): This module interfaces with the
Supply Damper Output Controller.
• PARAM-SAD-MINP (Supply Air Damper Minimum Pulse Width): This
module is required for VMA Integrated or Incremental Supply Damper
Actuators.
• PARAM-SAD-ST (Supply Air Damper Stroke Time): This module is
required for VMA Integrated or Incremental Supply Air Damper Actuators.
See the Outputs section.

628 CCT Help: Applications

Exhaust Damper Actuator (VAV-SD)
Exhaust Damper logic requires that a separate actuator and velocity pressure
transmitter are mounted on the Exhaust VAV Box. The Exhaust Box is set up to
track the flow delivered by the Supply VAV Box to pressurize the space under
control.
The two selections for the Exhaust Damper Actuator load the same Inputs and
Outputs. The key difference between the two choices is how the hardware
definition for each Input and Output is created.
If an Exhaust Damper is selected, Box Fans cannot be selected.
The selection options for Exhaust Damper Actuator are:
• Proportional Actuator: This option assumes that you are using a
non-integrated actuator that uses a 0-10 VDC signal for the exhaust damper
and that a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.
• Incremental Actuator: This option assumes that you are using a
non-integrated actuator with two binary outputs for incremental control for the
exhaust damper and that a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.

Modules (VAV-SD Exhaust Damper Actuator)

The Exhaust Damper Actuator selections load the following modules:
Inputs
• EA-VP (Exhaust Air Velocity Pressure)
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Exhaust Differential Setpoint Calculation: This module determines the
Exhaust Differential Setpoint based on Occupancy.
• Exhaust Flow Calculation: This module calculates the exhaust flow based
on the Exhaust Velocity Pressure.
• Exhaust Damper Stroke Time: This module provides the Stroke Time
parameter for incremental actuators.
Output Control
• Exhaust Damper Control: This module controls the exhaust flow by
modulating the exhaust damper.
Outputs
• EAD-O (Exhaust Air Damper Output)
• PARAM-EAD-MINP (Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Pulse Width): This
module provides the setup parameter required for Incremental Actuators.
• PARAM-EAD-ST (Exhaust Air Damper Stroke Time): This module is
required for Incremental Actuators.
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 629

Box Fan (VAV-SD)
The three selections for Box Fans provide the necessary State Generator, Output
Controller, and Outputs based on the type of fan selected.
If an Exhaust Damper is selected, Box Fans cannot be selected.
The selection options for Box Fans are:
• Parallel Fan Single Speed
- Temperature Based
- Flow Based
• Series Fan Single Speed
• Series Fan Variable Speed
- Series Fan Enable

Modules (VAV-SD Box Fan)

The Box Fan selections load the following modules in the Control View columns
based on whether Parallel or Series Fan options are selected:
State Generation
• Parallel Fan Determination Temperature Based: This module determines
when to run the parallel fan based on temperature.
• Parallel Fan Determination Flow Based: This module determines when to
run the parallel fan based on supply flow.
•Series Fan Determination: This module is loaded for both Series Fan Single
Speed and Variable Speed selections.
Output Control
• Parallel Fan Control: This module is loaded for Temperature and Flow
Based Parallel Fan Single Speed selections.
•Series Fan Control: This module is loaded for both Single and Variable
Speed Series Fan selections.
Outputs
• SF-C (Supply Fan Command): This module is loaded for Temperature and
Flow Based Parallel Fans, Series Fan Single Speed, and the Series Fan
Enable options for the Series Fan Variable Speed.
• SF-O (Supply Fan Output): This module is loaded for the Series Fan
Variable Speed.
See the Outputs section.

630 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (VAV-SD)
A separate option is enabled in the Control Selection section to choose how Box
Heating and Supplemental Heating are sequenced if both are required.
The selection options for Coils are:
• Box Heating
- Electric Staged
• One Stage
• Two Stages
• Three Stages
- Hot Water
• Proportional Output
• Incremental Output
• Two Position Output
• Supplemental Heating
- Electric Stage
- Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
• Incremental Output
• Two Position Output

Modules (VAV-SD Coils)

The Coils selections load the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• FLUSHPOS (Flush Position): This module provides the parameter setting
used by any Box or Supplemental Heating Valve Output. The Flush
Position value is used when the System Mode Generator state is set to
Water Flush.
• HTG-EN (Box Heating is Available): This module works in conjunction
with the Box Heating isAvailable Pass Through State Generator.
• SUPHTG-EN (Supp Heating is Available): This module works in
conjunction with the Supplemental Heating isAvailable Pass Through State
Generator.
See the Network Inputs section.

VAV Applications 631

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel: This module is loaded when
Electric Staged Box Heat and a Parallel Fan are both selected.
• Staged Device Enable Determination Series: This module is loaded when
Electric Staged Box Heat and a Series Fan are both selected.
State Generation
• Water System Flush Pass Through: This module passes the Water Flush
system mode to a separate State Selection input so that when water flush is
requested, the valves always open.
• Box Heating isAvailable Pass Through: This module works in conjunction
with the HTG-EN Network Input.
• Supp Heating isAvailable Pass Through: This module works in conjunction
with the SUPHTG-EN Network Input.
Output Control
• Proportional Box Heating Control: This module is loaded for proportional
and incremental actuator selections.
• Proportional Supplemental Heating Control: This module is loaded for
proportional and incremental actuator selections.
• 2 Position Box Heating Control and MSC 2 Position Box Heating: These
modules are loaded for the Two Position selection.
• Staged Box Heating Control and MSC Staged Box Heating 01, 02, or 03:
These modules are loaded depending on how many stages are selected.
Box Heating Max Cap Fract LV is loaded when two or three stages are
selected.
• 2 Position Supplemental Heating Control and MSC 2 Position
Supplemental Heating: This module is loaded for the Two Position
selection.
• Staged Supplemental Heating Control and MSC Staged Supplemental
Heating 01: These modules are loaded for staged supplemental heating.

632 CCT Help: Applications

 Outputs
• HTG-O (Heating Output): This module is loaded for Proportional or
Incremental Box Heating selections.
• HTG-C: This module is loaded for the Two Position Box Heating Control
selection.
• HTG-1C, HTG-2C, HTG-3C (Heating Stages 1, 2, or 3): These modules
are loaded for Staged Box Heating selections.
• SUPHTG1-C (Supplemental Heating Command): This module is loaded
for the Single Stage Supplemental Heating selection.
• SUPHTG-O (Supplemental Heating Output): This module is loaded for
Proportional and Incremental Supplemental Heating for the Proportional or
Incremental Supplemental selections.
• SUPHTG-C (Supplemental Heating Command): This module is loaded for
the Two Position Supplemental Heating selection.
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 633

Optional Equipment (VAV-SD)
The selection options for Optional Equipment are:
• Lighting: An output to interface a Lighting Relay is created if the Lighting
selection is checked. If the lighting option is selected, the Always Occupied
selection in the Occupancy (VAV-SD) section is not available. Only the
Occupancy Mode Determination Mode logic interfaces with the Lighting
Output. The default output configuration is a single, maintained binary output.
• Calibration Solenoid Valve (BO): An output to interface to one or more
Calibration Solenoid Valves is created if the Calibration Solenoid Valve BO
selection is checked. This selection is always available. Select this option to
use calibration solenoid valves during the autocalibration process for spaces
that must remain in control at all times (for example, labs or hospital rooms
with supply exhaust boxes). All damper outputs stay at their current value
during this 10 second process. The BO is connected to the State Selector
through the Calibration Solenoid Pass Through module. The BO zeroes the
differential pressure for the Differential Pressure sensor during autocalibration.
The effective stroke time for the autocalibration sequence module changes to
10 seconds when this option is selected to speed up the process. Use this BO
for all Differential Pressure sensors in the system (Exhaust Box).

Modules (VAV-SD Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selections load the following module in this Control
View column:
Output Control
• Lighting Control: This module is loaded for the Lighting selection option.
• Calibration Solenoid Pass Through: This module is loaded for the Calibration
Solenoid Valve (BO) selection option.
Outputs
• LIGHT-C (Lighting Command): This output is loaded for the Lighting
selection option.
• ACSOL-C (Autocalibration Solenoid Command): This output is loaded for the
Calibration Solenoid Valve (BO) selection option.
See the Outputs section.

634 CCT Help: Applications

Sensors (VAV-SD)
The selection options for the Sensors/Inputs are:
• Supply Air Temperature: This option provides an input for stand-alone
morning warm-up logic.
- Used for Morning Warm-up: Warm-up logic assumes that the air
handling unit supplies hot air during the warm-up cycle to the associated
VAV Box. Typically, morning warm-up logic is initiated via a Network
Input for morning warm-up which is a selection in the Optional Features
(VAV-SD) section of the tree. If the Supply Air Temperature Used for
Morning Warm-up option is selected, the option under Optional Feature for
Network Warmup - Cooldown Support is not required.
• Discharge Air Temperature: This option is used primarily as a
commissioning check-out feature for applications that have Box Heating to
ensure the Discharge Air Temperature increases when Box Heating is
commanded on.
• Zone (always required): This module is a Zone Temperature Input and it is
always provided. All the Zone Temperature options assume that a model of the
Network Sensor family is being used for Temperature, the Setpoint Adjust
options of Common Setpoint Adjust or Warm Cool Adjust, a Temporary
Occupancy interface from the Network Sensor, and Humidity input from the
Network Sensor. Refer to the Network Sensors product literature listed in the
Related Documentation section to match the functionality selected for the
application with a specific Network Sensor hardware model. See the ZN-T
Setpoint Determination section for details on how this module works.
- Temperature
• Setpoint Adjust
- Common Setpoint Adjust
- Warm Cool Adjust
• Temp Occ Support
- Humidity
- Occupancy: This module provides an Input interface to the logic from a
separate Occupancy Sensor.
- CO2 Sensor: This module provides an Input interface to the logic from a
separate CO2 Sensor.
• Used for Minimum Flow Reset

VAV Applications 635

 Modules (VAV-SD Sensors)
The Sensors/Inputs selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns based on the specific selections:
Network Inputs
• ZNT-SP (Zone Network Temperature Setpoint): This setpoint is created
when Warm Cool Adjust or no setpoint adjustment is selected. The
ZNT-SP provides a Zone Setpoint Adjustment for the Supervisory system.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• SA-T (Supply Air Temperature)
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature)
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature): The default is set to the Network Sensor
interface. The Zone Temperature is a required input for any VAV
application.
• ZN-SP (Zone Setpoint): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when the Common Setpoint Adjust is selected.
• WC-ADJ (Zone Adjust): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when Warm Cool Adjust is selected.
• ZN-TOCC (Zone Temporary Occupancy): The default is set to the Network
Sensor interface when Temp Occ Support is selected.
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when Zone Humidity is selected.
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module is loaded when Occupancy is
selected and assumes an Occupancy Sensor is mapped to a Binary Input.
• ZN-Q (Zone CO2 Input): This module is loaded when CO2 Inputs is
selected and assumes a CO2 Sensor is mapped to an Analog Input. This
module interfaces to the Minimum Flow Determination module to bias the
Heating and Cooling Minimum Flow settings.
See the Inputs section.

636 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• WarmupCooldown Determination: This module is loaded for the Supply
Air Temperature Used for Morning Warm-up option.
State Generation
• WarmupCooldown Sequencing: This module is loaded for the Supply Air
Temperature Used for Morning Warm-up option.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Zone Occupancy Status Display): This module is loaded
when Scheduled Occupancy is selected and provides the Network Inputs to
display Occupancy Status for the system.
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 637

Misc (VAV-SD)
The Miscellaneous selections provide binary inputs for the Energy Hold Off
Determination and Unit Enable Determination State Generators.
The selection options for Miscellaneous are:
• Energy Hold Off Switch: This option allows the unit to shut down based on
the energy hold off Hardware Input (BI). If Energy Hold Off is selected in the
Optional Features section, then the Hardware Input or the Network Input can
activate the mode. This feature is typically used to shut down the temperature
and airflow control when a window or loading door is open (for example, a
window switch).
• Unit Enable Switch: This option determines whether the application operates
based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected in the Optional
Features section, then when the Network Input does not have a valid command
from the network, it is considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both
BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate
(that is, either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).

Modules (VAV-SD Misc)

The Misc selections load the following modules in these Control View columns:
Inputs
• EHO-TS (Energy Hold Off Toggle Switch): This module is loaded when
Energy Hold Off Switch is selected and works in conjunction with the
Energy Hold Off Determination State Generator.
• UNIT-TS (Unit Toggle Switch): This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected and works in conjunction with the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Unit Enable or Power
Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.
• Energy Hold Off Determination: This module is loaded when Energy Hold
Off Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Energy Hold Off
or Power Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.

638 CCT Help: Applications

VAV Single Duct Control Logic Selection

Occupancy (VAV-SD)
The selection options for Occupancy are:
• Always Occupied: This option sets the default value of Occupied for the ZN-T
Setpoint Determination and Balancer Override modules to Occupied.
• Scheduled Occupancy: This option creates the interface for the Supervisory
system scheduling logic.
- Override Support: This option creates the local override interfaces from
optional Occupancy Sensors or Networked Sensor Temporary Occupancy
interfaces.

Modules (VAV-SD Occupancy)

The Occupancy selection options load the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE (Occupancy Schedule): This module is loaded for the
Scheduled Occupancy selection.
• OCC-OVERRIDE (Occupancy Override): This module is loaded for
Override Support when Scheduled Occupancy is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
State Generation
• Always Occupied: This Enum Constant is only required for the Always
Occupied selection. Although this module is shown in the State Generation
column of the Control View, it does not interface into the State Selection
Table (State Tables).
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded for the Scheduled
Occupancy selection.
• VAV-Unocc Status Determination: This module is loaded to sequence the
heating and cooling device(s) during Unoccupied when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Zone Occupancy Status Display): This module is loaded
when Scheduled Occupancy is selected and provides logic to display the
Occupancy Status of the system on a Network Sensor.
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 639

Heating Priority (VAV-SD)
If Box Heating and Supplemental Heating are selected in the Coils (VAV-SD)
configuration section, the Heating Priority selections are enabled to determine the
sequencing. A configuration input to the VAV-ZN-T Sequencing,
WarmupCooldown Sequencing, and the VAV-Unocc Status Determination
modules are set to match the selected choice.
The selection options for Heating Priority are:
• Heating Priority
- Box Heating used first
- Supplemental Heating used first

Optional Features (VAV-SD)

The Optional Features selections provide Network Inputs modules for supervisory
system interfaces to override the main applications sequence of operation through
connections to the appropriate Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules or State
Generators.
The selection choices for Optional Features are:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.
• Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based
on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Enable Switch is selected in the Misc
section, then when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the
network, it is considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV
are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is,
either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Power Fail Restart Logic: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator module. When this option is selected, after a
restart (power cycle, controller download, or manual restart command), the
application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time
(default = 60 seconds).
• Energy Hold Off: This option allows the unit to shut down based on the
energy hold off Network Input. If Energy Hold Off Switch is selected in the
Misc section, then the Network Input or the Hardware Input (BI) can activate
the mode. This feature is typically used to shut down the temperature and
airflow control when a window or loading door is open (for example, a
window switch).

640 CCT Help: Applications

 • Network Warmup-Cooldown Support: This feature provides central system
warm-up (or cooldown) support. Warm-up occurs when the AHU serving a set
of VAV boxes provides warm air (typically 85 to 90 deg F) to the boxes. This
feature is often used first thing in the morning on cool days before occupants
arrive. The control action on the flow setpoint control is reversed to prevent
overheating the spaces. The minimum flow setpoint may be independently
specified for warm-up and cooldown. Warm-up is triggered either based on
writing to the Network Input when the AHU is commanded to warm up, or by
each VAV sensing the actual temperature of the air supplied by the AHU and
automatically switching to warm-up.
• Zone Low Limit Support: This feature is typically used with the Energy Hold
Off feature to cycle heating On when the temperature falls below a low limit.
• Summer-Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift: This option allows the zone
setpoints to be automatically adjusted based on the outdoor air temperature.
This feature is often used for entry zones, such as an atrium, that feel
comfortable at warmer or cooler temperatures because occupants usually enter
from much warmer or cooler conditions. For example, if the outdoor air
temperature is 20 deg F, the atrium temperature may be kept at 65 deg F rather
than 69 deg F because occupants wear heavier clothing as they come in from or
go to the outdoors.

VAV Applications 641

 Modules (VAV-SD Optional Features)
The Optional Features selections load the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
• UNITEN-MODE (Unit Enable Mode): This module is loaded when Unit
Enable is selected to provide an interface from the network for the Unit
Enable Determination State Generator module that provides a Shutdown or
Enable State. This module works in conjunction with the Misc Unit Enable
Switch input to prioritize a Supervisory versus local override from a Binary
Input.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature Network): If Summer-Winter
Compensation Setpoint Shift is selected, an Outdoor Air Temperature input
from the Supervisory system is required as an input to the Summer Winter
Compensation module.
• EHO-MODE (Energy Hold Off Mode): If Powerfail Restart Logic is
selected, this interface is provided to the network for the Energy Hold Off
Determination module. This module works in conjunction with the
optional Misc Energy Hold Off Switch.
• SA-T (Supply Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Network
Warm-Up Cooldown Support is selected and the Optional Supply Air
Temperature Inputs used for Morning Warm-up is not selected.
• WUCD-MODE (Warmup-Cooldown): This module is loaded if Network
Warm-up Cooldown Support is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• DPR-%: This input is loaded when Smoke Control Support
(UL-864-UUKL) is selected. This input is the command to the Supply
Damper. The signal is used by the Supply Damper Trouble Detection
module to set an alarm if the damper is not in the proper position.
• EAD-%: This input is loaded when Smoke Control Support
(UL-864-UUKL) and an Exhaust Damper are selected. This input is the
command to the Exhaust Damper. The signal is used by the Exhaust
Damper Trouble Detection module to set an alarm if the damper is not in
the proper position.
See the Inputs section.

642 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Summer Winter Compensation: If Summer-Winter Compensation Setpoint
Shift is selected, this module uses the Network Input for Outdoor Air
Temperature. Setup parameters create summer and winter setpoints and
gains based around the Outdoor Air Temperature to calculate effective
heating and cooling setpoint shifts. Setpoint shifts interface to the ZN-T
Setpoint Determination module to bias the Occupied, Standby, and
Unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints.
• WarmupCooldown Determination: This module is loaded if Network
Warm-up Cooldown Support is selected.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the position of the supply damper and exhaust damper (if present) and
set the state of the fan (if present) during a call for Smoke Control.
• WarmupCooldown Sequencing: This module is loaded if Network
Warm-up Cooldown is selected.
• Zone Low Limit Determination: If Zone Limit Support is selected, this
module interfaces with the Zone Temperature and a Zone Low Limit
Setpoint parameter to trigger state selection modes to override any
configured output controllers to heat the space until the Zone Temperature
is within a differential parameter.
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Unit Enable or Power
Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.
• Energy Hold Off Determination: This module is loaded when Energy Hold
Off Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Energy Hold Off
or Power Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.

VAV Applications 643

VAV Slave Single Duct Application
For single duct slave applications, no zone temperature or setpoint logic is created.
Instead, Network Input points read corresponding values using peer-to-peer
references from the associated Master VAV application to track key Mode states,
inputs for CO2 and OA Percent, Flow Status and % Command, and any heating
outputs from the master VAV box. Using this technique to control the VAV slaves
ensures that the master and slave boxes are synchronized to heat and cool the entire
space.
See the following sections for information on this application’s logic and
selections:
• VAV Slave Single Duct Core Logic
• VAV Slave Single Duct Mechanical System Selection
- Supply Damper Actuator
- Exhaust Damper Actuator
- Box Fan
- Coils
- Optional Equipment
- Sensors
• VAV Slave Single Duct Control Logic Selection
- Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL

644 CCT Help: Applications

VAV Slave Single Duct Core Logic

Modules (VAV-SD Slave)

The core set of modules created for all Slave Single Duct applications is the flow
logic required for a Pressure Independent Cooling Only application. Specific
selections in the Slave Single Duct tree provide the required Inputs, Outputs, and
Network Input connections for the core logic set and integrate the specific Output
Controller options for Box Heating, Supplemental Heating, Series or Parallel Fans,
and Exhaust Boxes.
The following is the list of modules created by the core logic.
Network Inputs
• AUTOCAL-C (Auto Calibration Command): This module is a Network
Input for the Autocalibration Sequence State Generator.
• OA-PERCENT: This module is a Network Input that provides an interface
to the Minimum Flow Determination module to bias the Supply Damper
based on fresh air requirements for the zone under control.
• MSTRZN-CO2: This module is a Network Input that provides CO2 Input
and assumes a CO2 Sensor is mapped to an Analog Input on the master
single duct VAV controller. This module interfaces to the Minimum Flow
Determination module to bias the Heating and Cooling Minimum Flow
settings.
• MSTRFLOW-S: This module is a Network Input for the Master Flow
Setpoint Pass Through State Generator to manage the state of the damper
output controllers.
• MSTRFLOW-PERCENT: This module is a Network Input for the Slave
Supply Flow Setpoint Control Output Controller to indicate the percentage
of flow needed.
See the Network Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Minimum Flow Determination: This module determines the minimum flow
for the VAV box and sets up the flow setpoint parameters for unoccupied
and warm-up modes.
• Supply Damper Control Stroke Time: This module provides the stroke time
for the Supply Damper.
• Supply Flow Calculation: This module calculates the supply flow based on
the Supply Velocity Pressure.

VAV Applications 645

 State Generation
• Autocalibration Sequence: This module provides the signals to close the
damper and recalculate the offset for the flow sensor.
• Balancer Override SD: This module is loaded for applications without an
Exhaust Damper. This module sets up the Supply Dampers Area, K-Factor,
and the Occupied Flow parameters. This module also interfaces with
specific Network Sensor models used by the Balancing Contractor.
• Balancer Override SDX: This module is loaded for applications with an
Exhaust Damper.
• Box Flow Test: This module steps the supply damper through its full range
and measures the flow at each step to provide a check on the VAV box.
• Master Flow Setpoint Pass Through: This module passes the Master Flow
Setpoint State to State Selection.
Output Control
• Supply Damper Control: This module controls the Supply Air Damper
Output.
• Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control: This module determines the Flow
Setpoint for the Supply Air Damper.

646 CCT Help: Applications

VAV Slave Single Duct Mechanical System Selection

Supply Damper Actuator (VAV-SD Slave)

The selections for Supply Damper Actuators provide the same Inputs and Outputs
for the actuator and velocity Inputs. The key difference between the three choices
is how the hardware definition for each Input and Output is set up.
The selection options for Supply Damper Actuator are:
• VMA Integrated Actuator: This option assumes that you are using an
FEC-VMA hardware model that has the actuator and velocity pressure inputs
packaged with the controller.
• Proportional Actuator: This option assumes that you are using a
non-integrated actuator that uses a 0-10 VDC signal for the supply damper and
that a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.
• Incremental Actuator: This option assumes that you are using a
non-integrated actuator with two binary outputs for incremental control for the
supply damper and that a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.

Modules (VAV-SD Slave: Supply Damper Actuator)

The Supply Damper Actuator selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Inputs
• SA-VP (Supply Air Velocity Pressure)
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Supply Damper Stroke Time: This module provides the Stroke Time
parameter for incremental actuators.
Outputs
• SAD-O (Supply Air Damper Output): This module interfaces with the
Supply Damper Output Controller.
• PARAM-SAD-MINP (Supply Air Damper Minimum Pulse Width): This
module is required for VMA Integrated or Incremental Supply Damper
Actuators.
• PARAM-SAD-ST (Supply Air Damper Stroke Time): This module is
required for VMA Integrated or Incremental Supply Air Damper Actuators.
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 647

Exhaust Damper Actuator (VAV-SD Slave)
Exhaust Damper logic requires that a separate actuator and velocity pressure
transmitter are mounted on the Exhaust VAV Box. The Exhaust Box is set up to
track the flow delivered by the Supply VAV Box to pressurize/depressurize the
space under control.
The two selections for the Exhaust Damper Actuator load the same Inputs and
Outputs. The key difference between the two choices is how the hardware
definition for each Input and Output is created.
If an Exhaust Damper is selected, Box Fans cannot be selected.
The selection options for Exhaust Damper Actuator are:
• Proportional Actuator: This option assumes that you are using a
non-integrated actuator that uses a 0-10 VDC signal for the exhaust damper
and that a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.
• Incremental Actuator: This option assumes that you are using a
non-integrated actuator with two binary outputs for incremental control for the
exhaust damper and that a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.

Modules (VAV-SD Slave: Exhaust Damper Actuator)

The Exhaust Damper Actuator selections load the following modules:
Inputs
• EA-VP (Exhaust Air Velocity Pressure)
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Exhaust Differential Setpoint Calculation: This module determines the
Exhaust Differential Setpoint based on Occupancy.
• Exhaust Flow Calculation: This module calculates the exhaust flow based
on the Exhaust Velocity Pressure.
• Exhaust Damper Stroke Time: This module provides the Stroke Time
parameter for incremental actuators.
Output Control
•Exhaust Damper Control: This module controls the exhaust flow by
modulating the exhaust damper.
Outputs
• EAD-O (Exhaust Air Damper Output)
• PARAM-EAD-MINP (Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Pulse Width): This
module provides the setup parameter required for Incremental Actuators.
• PARAM-EAD-ST (Exhaust Air Damper Stroke Time): This module is
required for Incremental Actuators.
See the Outputs section.

648 CCT Help: Applications

Box Fan (VAV-SD Slave)
The three selections for Box Fans provide the necessary State Generator, Output
Controller, and Outputs based on the type of fan selected.
If an Exhaust Damper is selected, Box Fans cannot be selected.
The selection options for Box Fans are:
• Parallel Fan Single Speed
• Series Fan Single Speed
• Series Fan Variable Speed
- Series Fan Enable

Modules (VAV-SD Slave: Box Fan)

The Box Fan selections load the following modules in the Control View columns
based on whether Parallel or Series Fan options are selected:
Outputs
• SF-C (Supply Fan Command): This module is loaded for Parallel Fans,
Series Fan Single Speed, and the Series Fan Enable options for the Series
Fan Variable Speed.
• SF-O (Supply Fan Output): This module is loaded for the Series Fan
Variable Speed.
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 649

Coils (VAV-SD Slave)
A separate option is enabled in the Control Selection section to choose how Box
Heating and Supplemental Heating are sequenced if both are required.
The selection options for Coils are:
• Box Heating
- Electric Staged
• One Stage
• Two Stages
• Three Stages
- Hot Water
• Proportional Output
• Incremental Output
• Two Position Output
• Supplemental Heating
- Electric Stage
- Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
• Incremental Output
• Two Position Output

650 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (VAV-SD Slave: Coils)
The Coils selections load the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• MSTRHTG-O (Master Heating Output): This module is loaded for
Proportional or Incremental Box Heating selections.
• MSTRHTG-C (Master Heating Command): This module is loaded for the
Two Position Box Heating Control selection.
• MSTRHTG-1C, MSTRHTG-2C, MSTRHTG-3C (Master Heating Stages
1, 2, or 3): These modules are loaded for Staged Box Heating selections.
• MSTRSUPHTG1-C (Master Supplemental Heating Command): This
module is loaded for the Single Stage Supplemental Heating selection.
• MSTRSUPHTG-O (Master Supplemental Heating Output): This module is
loaded for Proportional and Incremental Supplemental Heating for the
Proportional or Incremental Supplemental selections.
• MSTRSUPHTG-C (Master Supplemental Heating Command): This
module is loaded for the Two Position Supplemental Heating selection.
See the Network Inputs section.
Outputs
• HTG-O (Heating Output): This module is loaded for Proportional or
Incremental Box Heating selections.
• HTG-C: This module is loaded for the Two Position Box Heating Control
selection.
• HTG-1C, HTG-2C, HTG-3C (Heating Stages 1, 2, or 3): These modules
are loaded for Staged Box Heating selections.
• SUPHTG1-C (Supplemental Heating Command): This module is loaded
for the Single Stage Supplemental Heating selection.
• SUPHTG-O (Supplemental Heating Output): This module is loaded for
Proportional and Incremental Supplemental Heating for the Proportional or
Incremental Supplemental selections.
• SUPHTG-C (Supplemental Heating Command): This module is loaded for
the Two Position Supplemental Heating selection.
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 651

Optional Equipment (VAV-SD Slave)
The selection option for Optional Equipment is Calibration Solenoid Valve (BO).
This BO is an output to interface to one or more Calibration Solenoid Valves, and
is created if the Calibration Solenoid Valve BO selection is checked. This selection
is always available. Select this option to use calibration solenoid valves during the
autocalibration process for spaces that must remain in control at all times (for
example, labs with supply exhaust boxes or hospital rooms). All damper outputs
stay at their current value during this 10 second process. The BO is connected to
the State Selector through the Calibration Solenoid Pass Through module. The BO
zeroes the differential pressure for the Differential Pressure sensor during
autocalibration. The effective stroke time for the autocalibration sequence module
changes to 10 seconds when this option is selected to speed up the process. Use
this BO for all Differential Pressure sensors in the system (Exhaust Box).

Modules (VAV-SD Slave: Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selection loads the following module in this Control
View column:
Output Control
• Calibration Solenoid Pass Through: This module is loaded for the Calibration
Solenoid Valve (BO) selection option.
Outputs
• ACSOL-C (Autocalibration Solenoid Command): This output is loaded for the
Calibration Solenoid Valve (BO) selection option.
See the Outputs section.

652 CCT Help: Applications

Sensors (VAV-SD Slave)
The selection options for the Sensors/Inputs are:
• Supply Air Temperature: This option provides an input for stand-alone
morning warm-up logic.
• Discharge Air Temperature: This option is used primarily as a
commissioning check-out feature for applications that have Box Heating to
ensure the Discharge Air Temperature increases when Box Heating is
commanded on.

Modules (VAV-SD Slave: Sensors)

The Sensors/Inputs selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns based on the specific selections:
Inputs
• SA-T (Supply Air Temperature)
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature)
See the Inputs section.

VAV Applications 653

VAV Slave Single Duct Control Logic Selection

Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL (VAV-SD Slave)

The selection option for Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL is:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.

Modules (VAV-SD Slave: Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL)

The Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL selection option loads the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• DPR-%: This input is loaded when Smoke Control Support
(UL-864-UUKL) is selected. This input is the command to the Supply
Damper. The signal is used by the Supply Damper Trouble Detection
module to set an alarm if the damper is not in the proper position.
• EAD-%: This input is loaded when Smoke Control Support
(UL-864-UUKL) and an Exhaust Damper are selected. This input is the
command to the Exhaust Damper. The signal is used by the Exhaust
Damper Trouble Detection module to set an alarm if the damper is not in
the proper position.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the position of the supply damper and exhaust damper (if present) and
set the state of the fan (if present) during a call for Smoke Control.

654 CCT Help: Applications

VAV Dual Duct Application
The core logic of the VAV dual duct application provides the default configuration
and setup parameters for the zone temperature and flow control sequences. This
application has options to configure the flow pick-up locations for the different
combinations of the Hot Deck, Cold, Deck, or Total Flow. The selection tree also
includes options for the following key configurations:
• an Exhaust Box interface to track the flow of the Supply Box to maintain
positive or negative pressure in a space
• Heating Coil interfaces to sequence Hot Deck Heat and Baseboard
Supplemental Heat
• UL 864 UUKL Smoke Control
• Warmup and Cooldown mode logic interfaces to the building-wide Optimal
Start logic
• automated Zone Setpoint shifts based on the Outdoor Air Temperature reset
schedule
• CO2 Sensor interface that automatically resets the flow settings for the zone
The process of commissioning and balancing an application created from the VAV
dual duct system selection tree is simplified because CCT provides:
• integrated logic that auto-calibrates all flow sensors
• an optional Box Flow Test application
• the Balancer Override module that interfaces to a specific Network Sensor or
the CCT Commissioning Balancer UI (Balancer Tab) for the Balancing
Contractor to set the cfm parameters, box areas, and flow constants.
Once you define the desired temperature and cfm setpoint values for the space,
CCT uses patented adaptive control techniques in all of the temperature and flow
control loops to continually update all of the tuning parameters.

VAV Applications 655

 See the following sections for information on this application’s logic and
selections:
• VAV Dual Duct Core Logic
• VAV Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection
- Cold Deck Damper Actuator
- Hot Deck Damper Actuator
- Flow Sensor Locations
- Exhaust Damper Actuator
- Coils
- Optional Equipment
- Sensors
- Misc
• VAV Dual Duct Control Logic Selection
- Control Scheme
- Occupancy
- Optional Features
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes made since the last release of CCT.

656 CCT Help: Applications

VAV Dual Duct Core Logic

Modules (VAV-DD)
The core set of modules created for all Dual Duct applications are the zone
temperature and basic flow logic. Specific selections in the tree provide the
required Inputs and Outputs connections for this core set and add the necessary
Output Controllers for Supplemental Heating and Exhaust Box Integration.
All Dual Duct VAV Applications use the following base set of modules:
Network Inputs
• AUTOCAL-C (Auto Calibration Command): This module is a Network
Input for the Autocalibration Sequence State Generation.
• SYSTEM-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the System Mode
Determination State Generator used to force the unit into a mode of
operation.
See the Network Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Minimum Flow Determination - Dual Duct: This module determines the
minimum flows for the VAV box and sets up the flow setpoint parameters
for unoccupied and warm-up modes.
• Supply Flow Calculation
• ZN-T Setpoint Determination: This module determines the Effective
Heating and Cooling Setpoints.
State Generation
• Autocalibration Sequence: This module provides the signals to close the
damper and recalculate the offset for the flow sensor.
• Balancer Override DD: This module is loaded for applications without an
Exhaust Damper to set up the Supply Dampers Area, K-Factor, and the
Occupied Flow parameters. This module also interfaces with specific
Network Sensor models used by the Balancing Contractor.
Note: CCT provides specific Balancer Override State Generators for
applications with and without Exhaust Box logic.
• Balancer Override DDX: This module is loaded for applications with an
Exhaust Damper.
• System Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water Flush
system mode for separate connection to State Selection and passes the
remaining system modes to State Selection.
• VAV-ZN-T Sequencing: This module determines which device should be
operating to control the space temperature.

VAV Applications 657

VAV Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection

Cold Deck Damper Actuator (VAV-DD)

The three selections for Cold Deck Damper Actuator load the same Outputs for the
actuator. The key difference between the three choices is how the hardware
definition for each of the Outputs is created in the Details dialog box. The
configuration and naming of the Flow Inputs for the Cold Deck, Hot Deck, or Total
Flow is determined by the Flow Inputs Locations selections which follow the Cold
and Hot Deck Damper Actuator selections.
The selection options for Cold Deck Damper Actuator are:
• VMA Integrated Actuator: This option assumes that you are using an FEC-
VMA hardware model that has the actuator and velocity pressure inputs
packaged with the controller. If the Cold Deck is set up for the VMA Integrated
Actuator and Flow Sensor, the Hot Deck Damper selection for VMA
Integrated Actuator is disabled.
• Proportional Actuator: This option assumes that a non-integrated actuator
that uses a 0-10 VDC signal is used for the Cold Deck Damper and a non-
integrated velocity pressure input is selected.
• Incremental Actuator: This option assumes that a non-integrated actuator
that uses two binary outputs for incremental control is used for the Cold Deck
Damper and a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.

Modules (VAV-DD Cold Deck Damper Actuator)

The Cold Deck Damper Actuator selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
•Cold Deck Damper Stroke Time: This module provides the Stroke Time
parameter for incremental actuators.
Outputs
• CDD-O (Cold Deck Damper Output)
• PARAM-CDD-MINP (Cold Deck Damper Minimum Pulse Width): This
module is loaded only for VMA Integrated and Incremental Actuators.
• PARAM-CDD-ST (Cold Deck Damper Stroke Time)
See the Outputs section.

658 CCT Help: Applications

Hot Deck Damper Actuator (VAV-DD)
The three selections for Hot Deck Damper Actuator load the same Outputs for the
actuator. The key difference between the three choices is how the hardware
definition for each Input and Output is created in the Details dialog box. If the Hot
Deck is set up for the VMA Integrated Actuator and Flow Sensor, the Cold Deck
Damper selection for VMA Integrated Actuator is disabled. The configuration and
naming of the Flow Inputs for the Cold Deck, Hot Deck, or Total Flow is
determined by the Flow Inputs Locations selections which follow the Cold and Hot
Deck Damper Actuator selections.
• VMA Integrated Actuator: This option assumes that you are using an FEC-
VMA hardware model that has the actuator and velocity pressure inputs
packaged with the controller. If the Hot Deck is set up for the VMA Integrated
Actuator and Flow Sensor, the Hot Deck Damper selection for VMA
Integrated Actuator is disabled.
• Proportional Actuator: This option assumes that a non-integrated actuator
that uses a 0-10 VDC signal is used for the Hot Deck Damper and a non-
integrated velocity pressure input is selected.
• Incremental Actuator: This option assumes that a non-integrated actuator
that uses two binary outputs for incremental control is used for the Hot Deck
Damper and a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.

Modules (VAV-DD Hot Deck Damper Actuator)

The Hot Deck Damper Actuator selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Hot Deck Damper Stroke Time: This module provides the Stroke Time
parameter for incremental actuators.
Outputs
• HDD-O (Hot Deck Damper Output)
• PARAM-HDD-MINP (Hot Deck Damper Minimum Pulse Width): This
module is loaded only for VMA Integrated and Incremental Actuators.
• PARAM-HDD-ST (Hot Deck Damper Stroke Time)
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 659

Flow Sensor Locations (VAV-DD)
The three selection options determine the specific Input names created for the flow
inputs and the Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules, and the connection interfaces
from the flow inputs required to calculate Hot Deck, Cold Deck, and Total Flows.
The selection options for Flow Sensor Locations are:
• Hot and Cold Deck Flow
• Hot Deck and Total Flow
• Cold Deck and Total Flow

Modules (VAV-DD Flow Sensor Locations)

The following Inputs and Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules are created based on the
selection options for Flow Sensor Locations:
Inputs
For Hot and Cold Deck Flow
• HD-VP
• CD-VP
For Hot Deck and Total Flow
• HD-VP
• TOT-VP
For Cold Deck and Total Flow
• CD-VP
• TOT-VP
See the Inputs section.

660 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
For Hot and Cold Deck Flow
• Calculate Supply Flow: This module calculates the supply flow based on
the hot deck flow and cold deck flow.
• Cold Deck Flow Calculation: This module calculates the cold deck flow
based on the cold deck velocity pressure.
• Hot Deck Flow Calculation: This module calculates the hot deck flow
based on the hot deck velocity pressure.
For Hot Deck and Total Flow
• Calculate HD Flow: This module calculates the hot deck flow based on the
supply flow and cold deck flow.
• CD Flow Calculation: This module calculates the cold deck flow based on
the cold deck velocity pressure.
• Supply Flow Calculation: This module calculates the supply flow based on
the supply velocity pressure.
For Cold Deck and Total Flow
• Calculate CD Flow: This module calculates the cold deck flow based on
the supply flow and hot deck flow.
• HD Flow Calculation: This module calculates the hot deck flow based on
the hot deck velocity pressure.
• Supply Flow Calculation: This module calculates the supply flow based on
the Supply Velocity Pressure.

VAV Applications 661

Exhaust Damper Actuator (VAV-DD)
Exhaust Damper logic requires that a separate actuator and velocity pressure
transmitter are mounted on the Exhaust VAV Box. The Exhaust Box can is set up
to track the flow delivered by the Supply VAV Box to pressurize the space under
control.
The two selections for the Exhaust Damper Actuator load the same Inputs and
Outputs. The key difference between the two choices is how the hardware
definition for each Input and Output is created.
The selection options for Exhaust Damper Actuator are:
• Proportional Actuator: This option assumes that a non-integrated actuator
that uses a 0-10 VDC signal is used for the exhaust damper and a non-
integrated velocity pressure input is selected.
• Incremental Actuator: This option assumes that a non-integrated actuator
that uses two binary outputs for incremental control is used for the exhaust
damper and a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.

Modules (VAV-DD Exhaust Damper Actuator)

The Exhaust Damper Actuator selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Inputs
• EA-VP (Exhaust Air Velocity Pressure)
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Exhaust Differential Setpoint Calculation: This module determines the
Exhaust Differential Setpoint based on Occupancy.
• Exhaust Flow Calculation: This module calculates the exhaust flow based
on the Exhaust Velocity Pressure.
•Exhaust Damper Stroke Time: This module provides the Stroke Time
parameter for incremental actuators.
Outputs
• EAD-O (Exhaust Air Damper Output)
• PARAM-EAD-MINP (Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Pulse Width): This
module is loaded only for VMA Incremental Actuators.
• PARAM-EAD-ST (Exhaust Air Damper Stroke Time)
See the Outputs section.
Output Control
• Exhaust Damper Control: This module controls the exhaust flow by
modulating the exhaust damper.

662 CCT Help: Applications

Coils (VAV-DD)
The selection options for Coils are:
• Supplemental Heating
- Electric Stage
- Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
• Incremental Output
• Two Position Output

Modules (VAV-DD Coils)

The Coils selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• FLUSHPOS (Flush Position): This module provides the parameter setting
used by Supplemental Heating Valve Outputs. The Flush Position value is
used when the System Mode Generator state is set to Water Flush.
• SUPHTG-EN (Supp Heating is Available): This module works in
conjunction with the Supplemental Heating isAvailable Pass Through State
Generator.
See the Network Inputs section.
State Generation
• Water System Flush Pass Through: This module passes the Water Flush
system mode to a separate State Selection input so that when water flush is
requested, the valves always open.
• Supp Heating isAvailable Pass Through: This module works in conjunction
with the SUPHTG-EN Network Input; Valve Outputs only.

VAV Applications 663

 Output Control
• Proportional Box Heating Control: This module is loaded for proportional
and incremental actuator selections.
• Proportional Supplemental Heating Control: This module is loaded for the
proportional and incremental actuator selections.
• 2 Position Box Heating Control and MSC 2 Position Box Heating: These
modules are loaded for the Two Position selection.
• Staged Box Heating Control and MSC Staged Box Heating 01, 02, or 03:
These modules are loaded depending on how many stages are selected.
• 2 Position Supplemental Heating Control and MSC 2 Position
Supplemental Heating: These modules are loaded for the Two Position
selection.
• Staged Supplemental Heating Control and MSC Staged Supplemental
Heating 01: These modules are loaded for staged supplemental heating.
Outputs
• HTG-O (Heating Output): This module is loaded for Proportional or
Incremental Box Heating selections.
• HTG-C: This module is loaded for the Two Position Box Heating Control
selection.
• HTG-1C, HTG-2C, HTG-3C (Heating Stages 1,2, or 3): These modules are
loaded for Staged Box Heating selections.
• SUPHTG1-C (Supplemental Heating Command): This module is loaded
for the Single Stage Supplemental Heating selection.
• SUPHTG-O (Supplemental Heating Output): This module is loaded for
Proportional and Incremental Supplemental Heating for the Proportional or
Incremental Supplemental selections.
• SUPHTG-C (Supplemental Heating Command): This module is loaded for
the Two Position Supplemental Heating selection.
See the Outputs section.

664 CCT Help: Applications

Optional Equipment (VAV-DD)
The selection options for Optional Equipment are:
• Lighting: An output to interface a Lighting Relay is created if the Lighting
selection is checked. If the lighting option is selected, the Always Occupied
selection in the Occupancy section is not available. Only the Occupancy Mode
Determination Mode logic interfaces with the Lighting Output. The default
output configuration is a single, maintained binary output.
• Calibration Solenoid Valve (BO): An output to interface to one or more
Calibration Solenoid Valves is created if the Calibration Solenoid Valve BO
selection is checked. This selection is always available. Select this option to
use calibration solenoid valves during the autocalibration process for spaces
that must remain in control at all times (for example, labs with supply exhaust
boxes or hospital rooms). All damper outputs stay at their current value during
this 10 second process. The BO is connected to the State Selector through the
Calibration Solenoid Pass Through module. The BO zeroes the differential
pressure for the Differential Pressure sensor during autocalibration. The
effective stroke time for the autocalibration sequence module changes to
10 seconds when this option is selected to speed up the process. Use this BO
for all Differential Pressure sensors in the system (Hot Deck, Cold Deck, Total
Flow, and Exhaust Box).

Modules (VAV-DD Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selections load the following module in this Control
View column:
Output Control
• Lighting Control: This module is loaded for the Lighting selection option.
• Calibration Solenoid Pass Through: This module is loaded for the Calibration
Solenoid Valve (BO) selection option.
Outputs
• LIGHT-C (Lighting Command): This output is loaded for the Lighting
selection option.
• ACSOL-C (Autocalibration Solenoid Command): This output is loaded for the
Calibration Solenoid Valve (BO) selection option.
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 665

Sensors (VAV-DD)
The selection options for the Sensors/Inputs are:
• Discharge Air Temperature: This option is used primarily as a monitoring
feature during commissioning.
• Zone (always required): A Zone Temperature Input is always provided. All the
Zone Temperature options assume that a model of the Network Sensor family
is being used for Temperature, the Setpoint Adjust options of Common
Setpoint Adjust or Warm Cool Adjust, a Temporary Occupancy Interface from
the Network Sensor, and Humidity input from the Network Sensor. Refer to the
Network Sensors product literature listed in the Related Documentation section
to match the functionality selected for the application with a specific Network
Sensor hardware model. See the ZN-T Setpoint Determination section for
details on how this module works
- Temperature
• Setpoint Adjust
- Common Setpoint Adjust
- Warm Cool Adjust
• Temp Occ Support
- Humidity
- Occupancy: This option provides an Input interface to the logic from a
separate Occupancy Sensor.
- CO2 Sensor: This option provides an Input interface to the logic from a
separate CO2 Sensor.
• Used for Minimum Flow Reset

666 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (VAV-DD Sensors)
The Sensors/Inputs selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns based on the specific selections:
Network Inputs
• ZNT-SP (Zone Network Temperature Setpoint): This setpoint is created
when Warm Cool Adjust or no setpoint adjustment is selected. The ZNT-
SP provides a Zone Setpoint Adjustment for the Supervisory system.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature option)
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature): The default is set to the Network Sensor
interface. Zone Temperature is a required input for any VAV application.
• ZN-SP (Zone Setpoint): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when the Common Setpoint Adjust is selected.
• WC-ADJ (Zone Adjust): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when Warm Cool Adjust is selected.
• ZN-TOCC (Zone Temporary Occupancy): The default is set to the Network
Sensor interface when Temp Occ Support is selected.
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): The default is set to the Network Sensor interface
when Zone Humidity is selected.
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module appears when Occupancy is
selected and assumes an Occupancy Sensor is mapped to a Binary Input.
• ZN-Q (Zone CO2 Input): This module appears when CO2 Inputs is
selected and assumes a CO2 Sensor is mapped to an Analog Input. This
module interfaces to the Minimum Flow Determination module to bias the
Heating and Cooling Minimum Flow settings.
See the Inputs section.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Zone Occupancy Status Display): This module is loaded
when Scheduled Occupancy is selected and provides the Network Inputs to
display Occupancy Status for the system.
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 667

Misc (VAV-DD)
The Miscellaneous selections provide binary inputs for the Energy Hold Off
Determination and Unit Enable Determination State Generators.
The selection options for Miscellaneous are:
• Energy Hold Off Switch: This option allows the unit to shut down based on
the energy hold off Hardware Input (BI). If Energy Hold Off is selected in the
Optional Features section, then the Hardware Input or the Network Input can
activate the mode. This feature is typically used to shut down the temperature
and airflow control when a window or loading door is open (for example, a
window switch).
• Unit Enable Switch: This option determines whether the application operates
based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected in the Optional
Features section, then when the Network Input does not have a valid command
from the network, it is considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both
BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate
(that is, either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).

Modules (VAV-DD Misc)

The Misc selections load the following modules in these Control View columns:
Inputs
• EHO-TS (Energy Hold Off Toggle Switch): This module is loaded when
Energy Hold Off Switch is selected and works in conjunction with the
Energy Hold Off Determination State Generator.
• UNIT-TS (Unit Toggle Switch): This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected and works in conjunction with the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Unit Enable or Power
Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.
• Energy Hold Off Determination: This module is loaded when Energy Hold
Off Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Energy Hold Off
or Power Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.

668 CCT Help: Applications

VAV Dual Duct Control Logic Selection

Control Scheme (VAV-DD)

The Control Scheme for Dual Duct applications determines how the Setpoints and
Output Control Logic are configured. Constant Box Flow configurations are set up
so the Hot and Cold Deck Dampers are controlled to maintain constant flow
delivery into the space. The Variable Box Flow configurations are set up so the
Cold Deck Damper and Hot Deck Damper maintain separate flow setpoints
depending on whether the zone requires heating or cooling to maintain heating and
cooling zone temperature setpoints.
The Selection options for Control Scheme are:
• Constant Box Flow
• Variable Box Flow

Modules (VAV-DD Control Scheme)

The Control Scheme option loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• CD OA%: This module is loaded for the Variable Box Flow selection.
• HD OA%: This module is loaded for the Variable Box Flow selection.
See the Network Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
For Constant Box Flow selection
• Constant Dual Duct End Point Calculation: This module determines the
maximum flows for each duct.
For Variable Box Flow selection
• Standard Dual Duct End Point Calculation: This module determines the
minimum and maximum flows for each duct.

VAV Applications 669

 Output Control
For Constant Box Flow selection
• CD Constant Damper Control: This module provides control of the cold
deck flow by modulating the cold deck damper.
• CD Constant Flow Setpoint Control: This module determines the flow
setpoint for the cold deck.
• HD Constant Damper Control: This module provides control of the hot
deck flow by modulating the hot deck damper.
• HD Constant Flow Setpoint Control: This module determines the flow
setpoint for the hot deck.
For Variable Box Flow selection
• CD Damper Control: This module provides control of the cold deck flow
by modulating the cold deck damper.
• CD Flow Setpoint Control: This module determines the flow setpoint for
the cold deck.
• HD Damper Control: This module provides control of the hot deck flow by
modulating the hot deck damper.
• HD Flow Setpoint Control: This module determines the flow setpoint for
the hot deck.

670 CCT Help: Applications

Occupancy (VAV-DD)
The selection options for Occupancy are:
• Always Occupied: This option sets the default value of Occupied for the ZN-T
Setpoint Determination and Balancer Override modules to Occupied.
• Scheduled Occupancy: This option creates the interface for the Supervisory
system scheduling logic.
- Override Support: This option creates the local override interfaces from
optional Occupancy Sensors or Networked Sensor Temporary Occupancy
interfaces.

Modules (VAV-DD Occupancy)

The Occupancy Selection options load the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE (Occupancy Schedule): This module is loaded for the
Scheduled Occupancy selection.
• OCC-OVERRIDE (Occupancy Override): This module is loaded when
Override Support for Scheduled Occupancy is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
State Generation
• Always Occupied: This Enum Constant is only required for the Always
Occupied selection. Although this module is shown in the State Generation
column of the Control View, it does not interface into the State Selection
Table (State Tables).
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded for the Scheduled
Occupancy selection.
• VAV-Unocc Status Determination: This module is loaded for the
Scheduled Occupancy selection.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Zone Occupancy Status Display): This module is loaded
when Scheduled Occupancy is selected and provides logic to display the
Occupancy Status of the system on a Network Sensor.
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 671

Optional Features (VAV-DD)
The Optional Features selections provide Network Inputs modules for supervisory
system interfaces to override the main applications sequence of operation through
connections to the appropriate Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules or State
Generators.
The selection choices for Optional Features are:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.
• Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based
on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Enable Switch is selected in the Misc
section, then when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the
network, it is considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV
are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is,
either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Power Fail Restart Logic: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator module. When this option is selected, after a
restart (power cycle, controller download, or manual restart command), the
application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time
(default = 60 seconds).
• Energy Hold Off: This option allows the unit to shut down based on the
energy hold off Network Input. If Energy Hold Off Switch is selected in the
Misc section, then the Network Input or the Hardware Input (BI) can activate
the mode. This feature is typically used to shut down the temperature and
airflow control when a window or loading door is open (for example, a
window switch).
• Network Warmup-Cooldown Support: This feature provides warm-up by
using the hot duct to warm up the space. This feature is often used first thing in
the morning on cool days before occupants arrive. The cold duct damper is
kept at its minimum flow while the hot duct damper controls the space
temperature. Warm-up is triggered based on writing to the Network Input to
command the controller into warm-up.
• Zone Low Limit Support: This feature is typically used with the Energy Hold
Off feature to cycle heating On when the temperature falls below a low limit.

672 CCT Help: Applications

 • Summer-Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift: This option allows the zone
setpoints to be automatically adjusted based on the outdoor air temperature.
This feature is often used for entry zones, such as an atrium, that feel
comfortable at warmer or cooler temperatures because occupants usually enter
from much warmer or cooler conditions. For example, if the outdoor air
temperature is 20 deg F, the atrium temperature may be kept at 65 deg F rather
than 69 deg F because occupants wear heavier clothing as they come in from or
go to the outdoors.

Modules (VAV-DD Optional Features)

The Optional Features selections load the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
• UNITEN-MODE (Unit Enable Mode): If Unit Enable is selected, an
interface is provided from the network for the Unit Enable Determination
State Generator module to provide a Shutdown or Enable State. This
module works in conjunction with the Misc Unit Enable Switch input to
prioritize a Supervisory versus local override from a Binary Input.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature Network): If Summer-Winter
Compensation Setpoint Shift is selected, an Outdoor Air Temperature input
from the Supervisory system is required as an input to the Summer Winter
Compensation module.
• EHO-MODE (Energy Hold Off Mode): If Powerfail Restart Logic is
selected, this interface is provided to the network for the Energy Hold Off
Determination module. This module works in conjunction with the
optional Misc Energy Hold Off Switch.
• WUCD-MODE (Warmup-Cooldown): This module is loaded when
Network Warm-up Cooldown Support is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.

VAV Applications 673

 Inputs
• CD-%: This input is loaded when Smoke Control Support
(UL-864-UUKL) and is the command to the Cold Deck Damper. The
signal is used by the Cold Deck Damper Trouble Detection module to set
an alarm if the damper is not in the proper position.
• EAD-%: This input is loaded when Smoke Control Support
(UL-864-UUKL) and an Exhaust Damper are selected. This input is the
command to the Exhaust Damper. The signal is used by the Exhaust
Damper Trouble Detection module to set an alarm if the damper is not in
the proper position.
• HD-%: This input is loaded when Smoke Control Support
(UL-864-UUKL) and is the command to the Hot Deck Damper. The signal
is used by the Hot Deck Damper Trouble Detection module to set an alarm
if the damper is not in the proper position.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Summer Winter Compensation: If Summer-Winter Compensation Setpoint
Shift is selected, this module uses the Network Input for Outdoor Air
Temperature. Setup parameters create summer and winter setpoints and
gains based around the Outdoor Air Temperature to calculate effective
heating and cooling setpoint shifts. Setpoint shifts interface to the ZN-T
Setpoint Determination module to bias the Occupied, Standby, and
Unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints.
• WarmupCooldown Determination: This module is loaded when Network
Warm-up Cooldown Support is selected.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the position of the hot deck damper, cold deck damper, and exhaust
damper (if present) during a call for Smoke Control.
• WarmupCooldown Sequencing: This module is loaded when Network
Warm-up Cooldown is selected.
• Zone Low Limit Determination: If Zone Limit Support is selected, this
module interfaces with the Zone Temperature and a Zone Low Limit
Setpoint parameter to trigger state selection modes to override any
configured output controllers to heat the space until the Zone Temperature
is within a differential parameter.
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when Unit Enable
Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Unit Enable or Power
Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.
• Energy Hold Off Determination: This module is loaded when Energy Hold
Off Switch is selected in the Misc section or when either Energy Hold Off
or Power Fail Restart is selected in the Optional Features section.

674 CCT Help: Applications

VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
For dual duct slave applications, no zone temperature or setpoint logic is created.
Instead, Network Input points read corresponding values using peer-to-peer
references from the associated Master VAV application to track key Mode states,
inputs for CO2 and OA Percent, and any heating outputs from the master VAV
box. Using this technique to control the VAV slaves ensures that the master and
slave boxes are synchronized to heat and cool the entire space.
See the following sections for information on this application’s logic and
selections:
• VAV Slave Dual Duct Core Logic
• VAV Slave Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection
- Cold Deck Damper Actuator
- Hot Deck Damper Actuator
- Flow Sensor Locations
- Exhaust Damper Actuator
- Coils
- Optional Equipment
- Sensors
• VAV Slave Dual Duct Control Logic Selection
- Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL
- Control Scheme

VAV Applications 675

VAV Slave Dual Duct Core Logic

Modules (VAV-DD Slave)

The core set of modules created for all Slave Dual Duct applications is the basic
flow logic. Specific selections in the tree provide the required Inputs and Outputs
connections for this core set and add the necessary Output Controllers for
Supplemental Heating and Exhaust Box Integration.
All Slave Dual Duct VAV Applications use the following base set of modules:
Network Inputs
• AUTOCAL-C (Auto Calibration Command): This module is a Network
Input for the Autocalibration Sequence State Generation.
See the Network Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Minimum Flow Determination - Dual Duct: This module determines the
minimum flows for the VAV box and sets up the flow setpoint parameters
for unoccupied and warm-up modes.
• Supply Flow Calculation
State Generation
• Autocalibration Sequence: This module provides the signals to close the
damper and recalculate the offset for the flow sensor.
• Balancer Override DD: This module is loaded for applications without an
Exhaust Damper to set up the Supply Dampers Area, K-Factor, and the
Occupied Flow parameters. This module also interfaces with specific
Network Sensor models used by the Balancing Contractor.
Note: CCT provides specific Balancer Override State Generators for
applications with and without Exhaust Box logic.
• Balancer Override DDX: This module is loaded for applications with an
Exhaust Damper.

676 CCT Help: Applications

VAV Slave Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection

Cold Deck Damper Actuator (VAV-DD Slave)

The three selections for Cold Deck Damper Actuator load the same Outputs for the
actuator. The key difference between the three choices is how the hardware
definition for each of the Outputs is created in the Details dialog box. The
configuration and naming of the Flow Inputs for the Cold Deck, Hot Deck, or Total
Flow is determined by the Flow Sensor Locations selections, which follow the
Cold and Hot Deck Damper Actuator selections.
The selection options for Cold Deck Damper Actuator are:
• VMA Integrated Actuator: This option assumes that you are using an
FEC-VMA hardware model that has the actuator and velocity pressure inputs
packaged with the controller. If the Cold Deck is set up for the VMA Integrated
Actuator and Flow Sensor, the Hot Deck Damper selection for VMA
Integrated Actuator is disabled.
• Proportional Actuator: This option assumes that a non-integrated actuator
that uses a 0-10 VDC signal is used for the Cold Deck Damper and a
non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.
• Incremental Actuator: This option assumes that a non-integrated actuator
that uses two binary outputs for incremental control is used for the Cold Deck
Damper and a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.

Modules (VAV-DD Slave: Cold Deck Damper Actuator)

The Cold Deck Damper Actuator selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Cold Deck Damper Stroke Time: This module provides the Stroke Time
parameter for incremental actuators.
Outputs
• CDD-O (Cold Deck Damper Output)
• PARAM-CDD-MINP (Cold Deck Damper Minimum Pulse Width): This
module is loaded only for VMA Integrated and Incremental Actuators.
• PARAM-CDD-ST (Cold Deck Damper Stroke Time)
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 677

Hot Deck Damper Actuator (VAV-DD Slave)
The three selections for Hot Deck Damper Actuator load the same Outputs for the
actuator. The key difference between the three choices is how the hardware
definition for each Input and Output is created in the Details dialog box. If the Hot
Deck is set up for the VMA Integrated Actuator and Flow Sensor, the Cold Deck
Damper selection for VMA Integrated Actuator is disabled. The configuration and
naming of the Flow Inputs for the Cold Deck, Hot Deck, or Total Flow is
determined by the Flow Sensor Locations selections which follow the Cold and
Hot Deck Damper Actuator selections.
• VMA Integrated Actuator: This option assumes that you are using an
FEC-VMA hardware model that has the actuator and velocity pressure inputs
packaged with the controller. If the Hot Deck is set up for the VMA Integrated
Actuator and Flow Sensor, the Hot Deck Damper selection for VMA
Integrated Actuator is disabled.
• Proportional Actuator: This option assumes that a non-integrated actuator
that uses a 0-10 VDC signal is used for the Hot Deck Damper and a
non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.
• Incremental Actuator: This option assumes that a non-integrated actuator
that uses two binary outputs for incremental control is used for the Hot Deck
Damper and a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.

Modules (VAV-DD Slave: Hot Deck Damper Actuator)

The Hot Deck Damper Actuator selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
•Hot Deck Damper Stroke Time: This module provides the Stroke Time
parameter for incremental actuators.
Outputs
• HDD-O (Hot Deck Damper Output)
• PARAM-HDD-MINP (Hot Deck Damper Minimum Pulse Width): This
module is loaded only for VMA Integrated and Incremental Actuators.
• PARAM-HDD-ST (Hot Deck Damper Stroke Time)
See the Outputs section.

678 CCT Help: Applications

Flow Sensor Locations (VAV-DD Slave)
The three selection options determine the specific Input names created for the flow
inputs and the Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules, and the connection interfaces
from the flow inputs required to calculate Hot Deck, Cold Deck, and Total Flows.
The selection options for Flow Sensor Locations are:
• Hot and Cold Deck Flow
• Hot Deck and Total Flow
• Cold Deck and Total Flow

Modules (VAV-DD Slave: Flow Sensor Locations)

The following Inputs and Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules are created based on the
selection options for Flow Sensor Locations:
Inputs
For Hot and Cold Deck Flow
• HD-VP
• CD-VP
For Hot Deck and Total Flow
• HD-VP
• TOT-VP
For Cold Deck and Total Flow
• CD-VP
• TOT-VP
See the Inputs section.

VAV Applications 679

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
For Hot and Cold Deck Flow
• Calculate Supply Flow: This module calculates the supply flow based on
the hot deck flow and cold deck flow.
• Cold Deck Flow Calculation: This module calculates the cold deck flow
based on the cold deck velocity pressure.
• Hot Deck Flow Calculation: This module calculates the hot deck flow
based on the hot deck velocity pressure.
For Hot Deck and Total Flow
• Calculate HD Flow: This module calculates the hot deck flow based on the
supply flow and cold deck flow.
• CD Flow Calculation: This module calculates the cold deck flow based on
the cold deck velocity pressure.
• Supply Flow Calculation: This module calculates the supply flow based on
the supply velocity pressure.
For Cold Deck and Total Flow
• Calculate CD Flow: This module calculates the cold deck flow based on
the supply flow and hot deck flow.
• HD Flow Calculation: This module calculates the hot deck flow based on
the hot deck velocity pressure.
• Supply Flow Calculation: This module calculates the supply flow based on
the Supply Velocity Pressure.

680 CCT Help: Applications

Exhaust Damper Actuator (VAV-DD Slave)
Exhaust Damper logic requires that a separate actuator and velocity pressure
transmitter are mounted on the Exhaust VAV Box. The Exhaust Box can is set up
to track the flow delivered by the Supply VAV Box to pressurize/depressurize the
space under control.
The two selections for the Exhaust Damper Actuator load the same Inputs and
Outputs. The key difference between the two choices is how the hardware
definition for each Input and Output is created.
The selection options for Exhaust Damper Actuator are:
• Proportional Actuator: This option assumes that a non-integrated actuator
that uses a 0-10 VDC signal is used for the exhaust damper and a
non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.
• Incremental Actuator: This option assumes that a non-integrated actuator
that uses two binary outputs for incremental control is used for the exhaust
damper and a non-integrated velocity pressure input is selected.

Modules (VAV-DD Slave: Exhaust Damper Actuator)

The Exhaust Damper Actuator selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Inputs
• EA-VP (Exhaust Air Velocity Pressure)
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Exhaust Differential Setpoint Calculation: This module determines the
Exhaust Differential Setpoint based on Occupancy.
• Exhaust Flow Calculation: This module calculates the exhaust flow based
on the Exhaust Velocity Pressure.
• Exhaust Damper Stroke Time: This module provides the Stroke Time
parameter for incremental actuators.
Outputs
• EAD-O (Exhaust Air Damper Output)
• PARAM-EAD-MINP (Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Pulse Width): This
module is loaded only for VMA Incremental Actuators.
• PARAM-EAD-ST (Exhaust Air Damper Stroke Time)
See the Outputs section.
Output Control
• Exhaust Damper Control: This module controls the exhaust flow by
modulating the exhaust damper.

VAV Applications 681

Coils (VAV-DD Slave)
The selection options for Coils are:
• Supplemental Heating
- Electric Stage
- Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
• Incremental Output
• Two Position Output

Modules (VAV-DD Slave: Coils)

The Coils selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• MSTRHTG-O (Master Heating Output): This module is loaded for
Proportional or Incremental Box Heating selections.
• MSTRHTG-C (Master Heating Command): This module is loaded for the
Two Position Box Heating Control selection.
• MSTRHTG-1C, MSTRHTG-2C, MSTRHTG-3C (Master Heating Stages
1, 2, or 3): These modules are loaded for Staged Box Heating selections.
• MSTRSUPHTG1-C (Master Supplemental Heating Command): This
module is loaded for the Single Stage Supplemental Heating selection.
• MSTRSUPHTG-O (Master Supplemental Heating Output): This module is
loaded for Proportional and Incremental Supplemental Heating for the
Proportional or Incremental Supplemental Heating selections.
• MSTRSUPHTG-C (Master Supplemental Heating Command): This
module is loaded for the Two Position Supplemental Heating selection.
See the Network Inputs section.

682 CCT Help: Applications

 Outputs
• HTG-O (Heating Output): This module is loaded for Proportional or
Incremental Box Heating selections.
• HTG-C: This module is loaded for the Two Position Box Heating Control
selection.
• HTG-1C, HTG-2C, HTG-3C (Heating Stages 1, 2, or 3): These modules
are loaded for Staged Box Heating selections.
• SUPHTG1-C (Supplemental Heating Command): This module is loaded
for the Single Stage Supplemental Heating selection.
• SUPHTG-O (Supplemental Heating Output): This module is loaded for
Proportional and Incremental Supplemental Heating for the Proportional or
Incremental Supplemental selections.
• SUPHTG-C (Supplemental Heating Command): This module is loaded for
the Two Position Supplemental Heating selection.
See the Outputs section.

VAV Applications 683

Optional Equipment (VAV-DD Slave)
The selection option for Optional Equipment is Calibration Solenoid Valve (BO).
This BO is an output to interface to one or more Calibration Solenoid Valves, and
is created if the Calibration Solenoid Valve BO selection is checked. This selection
is always available. Select this option to use calibration solenoid valves during the
autocalibration process for spaces that must remain in control at all times (for
example, labs with supply exhaust boxes or hospital rooms). All damper outputs
stay at their current value during this 10 second process. The BO is connected to
the State Selector through the Calibration Solenoid Pass Through module. The BO
zeroes the differential pressure for the Differential Pressure sensor during
autocalibration. The effective stroke time for the autocalibration sequence module
changes to 10 seconds when this option is selected to speed up the process. Use
this BO for all Differential Pressure sensors in the system (Hot Deck, Cold Deck,
Total Flow, and Exhaust Box).

Modules (VAV-DD Slave: Optional Equipment)

The Optional Equipment selection loads the following module in this Control
View column:
Output Control
• Calibration Solenoid Pass Through: This module is loaded for the Calibration
Solenoid Valve (BO) selection option.
Outputs
• ACSOL-C (Autocalibration Solenoid Command): This output is loaded for the
Calibration Solenoid Valve (BO) selection option.
See the Outputs section.

Sensors (VAV-DD Slave)

The selection option for Sensors/Inputs is:
• Discharge Air Temperature: This option is used primarily as a monitoring
feature during commissioning.

Modules (VAV-DD Slave: Sensors)

The Sensors/Inputs selection loads the following module in the Control View
column:
Inputs
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature option)
See the Inputs section.

684 CCT Help: Applications

VAV Slave Dual Duct Control Logic Selection

Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL (VAV-DD Slave)

The selection option for Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL is:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.

Modules (VAV-DD Slave: Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL)

The Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL selection option loads the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CD-%: This input is loaded when Smoke Control Support
(UL-864-UUKL) is selected and is the command to the Cold Deck
Damper. The signal is used by the Cold Deck Damper Trouble Detection
module to set an alarm if the damper is not in the proper position.
• EAD-%: This input is loaded when Smoke Control Support
(UL-864-UUKL) and an Exhaust Damper are selected. This input is the
command to the Exhaust Damper. The signal is used by the Exhaust
Damper Trouble Detection module to set an alarm if the damper is not in
the proper position.
• HD-%: This input is loaded when Smoke Control Support
(UL-864-UUKL) is selected and is the command to the Hot Deck Damper.
The signal is used by the Hot Deck Damper Trouble Detection module to
set an alarm if the damper is not in the proper position.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the position of the hot deck damper, cold deck damper, and exhaust
damper (if present) during a call for Smoke Control.

VAV Applications 685

Control Scheme (VAV-DD Slave)
The Control Scheme for Slave Dual Duct applications determines how the
Setpoints and Output Control Logic are configured. Constant Box Flow
configurations are set up so the Hot and Cold Deck Dampers are controlled to
maintain constant flow delivery into the space. The Variable Box Flow
configurations are set up so the Cold Deck Damper and Hot Deck Damper
maintain separate flow setpoints depending on whether the zone requires heating
or cooling to maintain heating and cooling zone temperature setpoints.
The selection options for Control Scheme are:
• Constant Box Flow
• Variable Box Flow

Modules (VAV-DD Slave: Control Scheme)

The Control Scheme option loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• MSTRCDFLOW-OUTSTATE: This module is loaded for the Variable Box
Flow selection and for the Constant Box Flow selection.
• MSTRCDFLOW-PERCENT: This module is loaded for the Variable Box
Flow selection and for the Constant Box Flow selection.
• MSTRHDFLOW-OUTSTATE: This module is loaded for the Variable Box
Flow selection.
• MSTRHDFLOW-PERCENT: This module is loaded for the Variable Box
Flow selection.
See the Network Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
For Constant Box Flow selection
• Constant Dual Duct End Point Calculation: This module determines the
maximum flows for each duct.
For Variable Box Flow selection
• Standard Dual Duct End Point Calculation: This module determines the
minimum and maximum flows for each duct.

686 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
For Constant Box Flow selection
• CD Constant Damper Control: This module provides control of the cold
deck flow by modulating the cold deck damper.
• Slave CD Constant Flow Setpoint Control: This module determines the
flow setpoint for the cold deck.
• HD Constant Damper Control: This module provides control of the hot
deck flow by modulating the hot deck damper.
• HD Constant Flow Setpoint Control: This module determines the flow
setpoint for the hot deck.
For Variable Box Flow selection
• CD Damper Control: This module provides control of the cold deck flow
by modulating the cold deck damper.
• Slave CD Flow Setpoint Control: This module determines the flow setpoint
for the cold deck.
• HD Damper Control: This module provides control of the hot deck flow by
modulating the hot deck damper.
• Slave HD Flow Setpoint Control: This module determines the flow setpoint
for the hot deck.

VAV Applications 687

Master and Slave VAV Box Peer-to-Peer Communication
The following sections contain information on peer-to-peer communication
between Master and Slave VAV boxes:
• VAV Master and Slave Single Duct Peer References
• VAV Master and Slave Dual Duct Peer References

VAV Master and Slave Single Duct Peer References

Table 18-96 summarizes all of the possible Network Inputs created in the VAV
Slave Single Duct Application and their corresponding Peer References to read
from the Master VAV application.
Table 18-96: VAV Master and Slave Single Duct Peer References (Part 1
of 2)
Slave Application Network Inputs Master Application Object ID Type Master Object ID
and Name Peer Reference
AUTOCAL-C Autocal State value from the Autocalibration MV 3091
Sequence State Generation module
EMERGENCY-MODE Smoke Sequence-State from the Smoke MV 3915
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State
Generation module
MSTRFAN-C Output BO 2045
Parallel Fan Flow Based SF-C
MSTRFAN-C Output BO 2045
Parallel Fan Temp Based SF-C
MSTRFAN-C Output BO 2045
Series Fan On-Off or Proportional SF-C
MSTRFAN-O Output AO 2049
Series Proportional SF-O
MSTRFLOW-PERCENT CLG-O parameter from the Slave Supply AV 3615
Flow Setpoint Control Output Controller
module
MSTRFLOW-S SAFLOW-OUTSTATE parameter from the MV 3387
Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Output
Controller module
MSTRHTG1-C Output AO 2011
Stage 1 HTG1-C
MSTRHTG2-C Output AO 2012
Stage 2 HTG2-C
MSTRHTG3-C Output AO 2013
Stage 3 HTG3-C
MSTRHTG-O Output AO 2015
Incremental HTG-O
MSTRHTG-O Output AO 2014
Proportional HTG-O
MSTRSUPHTG1-C Output BO 2126
Electric On Off SUPHTG1-C
MSTRSUPHTG1-C Output BO 2128
Steam/Hot Water On Off SUPHTG1-C
MSTRSUPHTG-O Output AO 2129
Incremental SUPHTG-O

688 CCT Help: Applications

 Table 18-96: VAV Master and Slave Single Duct Peer References (Part 2
of 2)
Slave Application Network Inputs Master Application Object ID Type Master Object ID
and Name Peer Reference
MSTRSUPHTG-O Output AO 2127
Proportional SUPHTG-O
MSTRZN-CO2 Input AI 1100
ZN-Q
OA-PERCENT Network Input AV 56
OA Percent

VAV Applications 689

VAV Master and Slave Dual Duct Peer References
Table 18-97 summarizes all of the possible Network Inputs created in the VAV
Slave Dual Duct Application and their corresponding Peer References to read from
the Master VAV application.
Table 18-97: VAV Master and Slave Dual Duct Peer References
Slave Application Master Application Object ID Master Object ID Peer
Network Inputs Type and Name Reference
AUTOCAL-C Autocal State value from the MV 3091
Autocalibration Sequence State
Generation module
CD-OA% Network Input AV 10
CD-OA%
EMERGENCY-MODE Smoke Sequence-State value from MV 3915
the Smoke Control Sequencing for
UL-864-UUKL State Generation
module
HD-OA% Network Input AV 36
HD-OA%
MSTRCDFLOW-OUTSTATE CDD-OUTSTATE parameter from MV 3123 (Constant Flow)
the CD Damper Control module MV 3126 (Variable Flow)
MSTRCDFLOW-PERCENT Damper % Command value from AV 78370
the CD Damper Control module
MSTRHDFLOW-OUTSTATE HDD-OUTSTATE parameter from MV 3224 (Constant Flow)
the HD Damper Control module MV 3226 (Variable Flow)
MSTRHDFLOW-PERCENT Damper % Command value from AV 78628
the HD Damper Control module
MSTRSUPHTG1-C Output BO 2126
Electric On Off SUPHTG1-C
MSTRSUPHTG1-C Output BO 2128
Steam/Hot Water On Off SUPHTG1-C
MSTRSUPHTG-O Output AO 2129
Incremental SUPHTG-O
MSTRSUPHTG-O Output AO 2127
Proportional SUPHTG-O
MSTRZN-CO2 Input AI 1100
ZN-Q

690 CCT Help: Applications

Chapter 19: CCT Help: Applications
Sideloop Applications
Introduction
Sideloops provide control of equipment separate from the main control logic. The
Sideloop (SL) Wizard allows you to add custom logic to a system one control loop
at a time. The Sideloop System Selection Wizard can be run as many times as
desired. The logic added by the sideloop selection is given a user-specified prefix
to identify the modules associated with that particular sideloop. This prefix is
denoted in this document by the characters XXX.
If the you need to re-run System Selection for the main application after sideloops
have been created, the sideloops will not be deleted. However, once a sideloop is
created, there is not a process to re-run the sideloop selection process on one of the
sideloops.
Sideloop applications include the following:
• Sideloop Selection
- Feedback Control
- Binary Interlock Control
- Create State Selection Output
For information on how to add a sideloop to a system, see Creating a Sideloop in
the Configuring a System section.
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Sideloop Applications 691

Sideloop Selection
Feedback Control
The selection options for Feedback Control are:
• Input Type
- Temperature
- Humidity
- Other: This option is configured by default for pressure control, but can be
used for any generic input type.
• Number of Inputs
- Use Existing (Manually Connect): This option does not load an Input,
but allows the user to manually connect an existing Input to the Process
Variable input of the selected control module.
- One
- Two
• Select Minimum Value
• Select Maximum Value
• Average Inputs
• Control Type
- Simple Reset (SPAN)
- Feedback Control (PI)
• Remote Setpoint (AI)
• Setpoint Reset (SPAN) from Input (AI)
• Control Action
- Reverse Acting (e.g., Heating, Supply Fan, Humidifier, etc.)
- Direct Acting (e.g., Cooling, Exhaust Fan, etc.)

692 CCT Help: Applications

 • Output Type
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
- Staged Outputs
• One Stage
• Two Stages
• Three Stages
• Four Stages
• Five Stages
• Six Stages
• Seven Stages
• Eight Stages
If the Other Input Type is selected, the following selections are not allowed:
Simple Reset (SPAN), Remote Setpoint (AI), and Setpoint Reset (SPAN) from
Input (AI).
If the Humidity Input Type is selected, Remote Setpoint (AI) is not allowed.

Sideloop Applications 693

Modules (Feedback Control)
The Feedback Control selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• XXX SLT-SP (Sideloop Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded
when Temperature input type is selected and no setpoint reset or remote
setpoint is selected.
• XXX SLH-SP (Sideloop Humidity Setpoint): This module is loaded
when Humidity input type is selected and no setpoint reset is selected.
• XXX SLP-SP (Sideloop Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Other input type is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• XXX SL-T (Sideloop Temperature): This module is loaded when one or
more Temperature inputs are selected.
• XXX SLB-T (Sideloop Temperature B): This module is loaded when
two Temperature inputs are selected.
• XXX SL-H (Sideloop Humidity): This module is loaded when one or
more Humidity inputs are selected.
• XXX SLB-H (Sideloop Humidity B): This module is loaded when two
Humidity inputs are selected.
• XXX SL-P (Sideloop Pressure): This module is loaded when one or more
Other inputs are selected.
• XXX SLB-P (Sideloop Pressure B): This module is loaded when two
Other inputs are selected.
• XXX SL-SP (Sideloop Setpoint): This module is loaded when Remote
Setpoint (AI) is selected.
• XXX SLRESET-T (Sideloop Reset Temperature): This module is
loaded when Setpoint Reset (SPAN) from Input (AI) is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• XXX Average Inputs: This module is loaded when Average Inputs is
selected.
• XXX Maximum Selector: This module is loaded when Select Maximum
Value is selected.
• XXX Minimum Selector: This module is loaded when Select Minimum
Value is selected.

694 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• XXX Reset Output: This module is loaded when the Simple Reset control
type is selected.
• XXX PI Proportional Output: This module is loaded when the Feedback
Control (without setpoint reset) control type is selected to control a
proportional output (proportional or incremental actuator).
• XXX PI With Reset Proportional Output: This module is loaded when
the Feedback Control (with setpoint reset) control type is selected to
control a proportional output (proportional or incremental actuator).
• XXX PI Staged Output: This module is loaded when the Feedback
Control (without setpoint reset) control type is selected to control staged
outputs.
• XXX PI With Reset Staged Output: This module is loaded when the
Feedback Control (with setpoint reset) control type is selected to control
two or more staged outputs.
• XXX Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
staged outputs are selected.
• XXX MSC X: This module is loaded when X staged outputs (from one to
eight) are selected.
Outputs
• XXX SL-O (Sideloop Output): This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• XXX SLX-C (Sideloop Stage X Command): This module is loaded based
on the number of stages (from one to eight) selected for Staged Outputs.
One Output is loaded per stage.
See the Outputs section.

Sideloop Applications 695

Binary Interlock Control
The selection options for Binary Interlock Control are:
• Use Existing BI (Manually Connect): This option does not load an Input,
but allows the user to manually connect an existing Input to the Process
Variable input of the selected control module.
• Output Type
- Binary Output
- Analog Output
• Delay Type
- None
- Delay when BI turns on
- Delay when BI turns off
- Delay when BI turns on and off

Modules (Binary Interlock Control)

The Binary Interlock Control selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Inputs
• XXX SL-S (Sideloop Status)
See the Inputs section.
Output Control
• XXX Interlock Binary to Analog: This module is loaded when Analog
Output is selected for the Output Type.
•XXX Interlock Binary to Binary: This module is loaded when Binary
Output is selected for the Output Type.
Outputs
• XXX SL-C (Sideloop Command): This module is loaded when Binary
Output is selected for the Output Type.
• XXX SL-O (Sideloop Output): This module is loaded when Analog
Output is selected for the Output Type.
See the Outputs section.

696 CCT Help: Applications

Create State Selection Output
The Create State Selection Output option allows a column to be created in the State
Selection tables for the sideloop Output Control module. The values in that column
are automatically populated for the Unit Enable Determination and Occupancy
Mode Determination tables of standard applications. Other values must be
manually configured.

Sideloop Applications 697

698 CCT Help: Applications
Chapter 20: CCT Help: Applications
Central Plant Applications
Introduction
The Central Plant applications provide selections capable of controlling many
different heating and cooling configurations. The mechanical system and control
logic selections for the Central Plant applications are integrated into the
Mechanical System Selection screen of the System Selection Wizard. Input
sensors are automatically loaded if they are required for a selected device or
control option. The Control Logic Selection screen provides optional sensors,
equipment, and monitored safeties.
See the sections specific to the Central Plant Application Type:
• Central Cooling Applications
• Central Heating Applications
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Central Cooling Applications

Introduction
The Central Cooling (CC) application provides selections capable of controlling
many different cooling system configurations.
Central Cooling applications include the following:
• Central Cooling Core Logic
• Central Cooling Mechanical System Selection
- Cooling System Enable
- Chillers
- Condenser Water System
- Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping
• Central Cooling Control Logic Selection
- Chiller Options
- Condenser Options
- Basin Options
- Secondary Chill Water Options
- General Options

Central Plant Applications 699

Central Cooling Core Logic

Modules (CC)
All Central Cooling applications use the core logic listed below.
Network Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded if the Outdoor
Air Temperature (OA-T) optional sensor is not selected.
• SYSTEM-EN (System Enable)
See the Network Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• PMPDOWN-TIME (Pump Down Time): This floating constant delays
the pump stop command allowing the primary cooling equipment to
maintain flow after shutdown.
State Generation
• Chilled Water System Enable: This module enables and disables other
modules based on the SYSTEM-EN and Outdoor Air Temperature values.

Central Cooling Mechanical System Selection

Cooling System Enable (CC)

The selection option for Cooling System Enable is:
• OA Cooling Lockout: This input is the setpoint, below which, the system is
locked out or disabled.

Modules (CC Cooling System Enable)

The Cooling System Enable selection loads the following module in the Control
View column:
Network Inputs
• CLGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Cooling Enable Setpoint): This network
input is loaded when OA Cooling Lockout is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.

700 CCT Help: Applications

Chillers (CC)
The selection options for Chillers are:
Number of Chillers: This option describes the number of chillers in the system.
• One
• Two
• Three
• Four
• Five
• Six
• Seven
• Eight
Select Type of Sequencing: This option describes the method of sequencing or
staging the chillers in the system.
• Return Water Temp Differential: This option sequences chillers to maintain
a return water differential.
• Chiller Load: This option sequences chillers based on the load of each chiller.
- % Full Load Amps: This option provides control based on a percent of
full load amps.
- Actual Amps: This option provides control based on actual amps.
• Decouple Loop Flow: This option sequences chillers using a decouple loop
flow.
- Bi-directional Flow Sensor: This option provides a flow meter that reads
and outputs a positive or negative flow.
- Bi-directional Flow Sensor with BI input: This option provides a flow
meter that always outputs a positive value, but also has a BI that indicates a
positive or negative flow.
- Calculate Decouple Flow: This option is available when there are two
flow meters that are used to calculate the decouple flow.
• Building Load: This option sequences chillers to meet building load.
- BTU Meter AI: This option measures the building load with a BTU meter
through a single AI.
- Calculate Building Load: This option determines building load using two
temperatures and a flow meter.
Chiller Rotation (Runtime): This option automatically changes chiller staging
order based on runtime (equal runtime rotation strategy).
Chiller Status: This option monitors the status of each chiller.

Central Plant Applications 701

 Chiller Maintenance Switch: This option generates network inputs used to
remove a chiller from service.
• Maintenance Switch (BI): This option generates a binary input used to
remove a chiller from service.
Chill Water Pumps: This option provides control for any chill water pumps.
• Dedicated Primary CHW Pumps: This option provides control if each chiller
has one dedicated CHW pump.
- Pump Status: This option monitors the status of the pump.
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Belt Alarm
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
- Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor: This option allows a bypass
valve to control differential pressure.

702 CCT Help: Applications

 • Parallel Primary CHW Pumps: This option provides control when CHW
pumps are piped in a parallel fashion (any pump may work with any chiller).
- One Pump
- Two Pumps
- Three Pumps
- Four Pumps
- Five Pumps
- Six Pumps
- Seven Pumps
- Eight Pumps
- Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor: This option allows a bypass
valve to control differential pressure.
- Pump Rotation (Runtime): This option automatically changes pump
staging order based on runtime (equal runtime rotation strategy).
- Pump Status: This option monitors the status of the pump.
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
- Lockout Switch (BI)
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Belt Alarm
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).

Central Plant Applications 703

 Condenser Water Pumps: This option controls any condenser water pumps.
• Dedicated Pumps: This option provides control if each chiller has one
dedicated CW pump.
- Pump Status: This option monitors the status of the pump.
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Belt Alarm
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).

704 CCT Help: Applications

 • Parallel Pumps: This option provides control if the CW pumps are piped in a
parallel fashion (any pump may work with any chiller).
- One Pump
- Two Pumps
- Three Pumps
- Four Pumps
- Five Pumps
- Six Pumps
- Seven Pumps
- Eight Pumps
- Pump Rotation (Runtime): This option automatically changes pump
staging order based on runtime (equal runtime rotation strategy).
- Pump Status: This option monitors the status of the pump.
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
- Lockout Switch (BI)
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Belt Alarm
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).

Central Plant Applications 705

 Modules (CC Chillers)
The Chillers selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• CH-ROT (Rotate Chillers): This Network Input is loaded for applications
that require chillers to be rotated according to the equal runtime rotation
strategy. This Network Input is loaded when the Chillers node is selected
unless there is only one chiller in the system (that is, the One node is
selected) or the chillers should not be rotated according to runtime (the
Chiller Rotation (Runtime) node is not selected).
• CHWDP-SP (CHW Differential Pressure Setpoint): This Network Input
is loaded for applications that require pressure control for the chilled water
loop. This Network Input is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed
Chill Water Pumping, the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor node
in the Dedicated Pumps section, or the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure
Sensor node in the Parallel Pumps section is selected.
• CHWDT-SP (Differential Temperature Chill Water Setpoint): This
Network Input is loaded for applications that require chillers to be
sequenced by return water temperature differential. This Network Input is
loaded when the Return Water Temp Differential node is selected.
• CHX-MS (ChlrX Maintenance Switch, where X is 1-8): This Network
Input is loaded for applications that require a method to remove a chiller
from service. This Network Input is loaded when the Chiller Maintenance
Switch node is selected and the Maintenance Switch (BI) child node is
not selected. Specific Network Inputs are loaded per chiller.
• CHLRX-LO (ChlrX Lockout Switch, where X is 1-8): This Network
Input is loaded when the Chiller Maintenance Switch node is selected and
the Condenser Water Pumps, Dedicated Pumps node is selected.
Specific Network Inputs are loaded per chiller.
• CWP-ROT (Rotate Condenser Water Pumps): This Network Input is
loaded for applications that require condenser water pumps to be rotated
according to the equal runtime rotation strategy. This Network Input is
loaded when the Condenser Water Pumps node is selected, unless there
is only one condenser water pump in the system (that is, the One node is
selected) or the pumps should not be rotated according to runtime (that is,
the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node is not selected).
• CWPX-LO (CWPX Lockout Switch, where X is 1-8): This Network
Input is loaded when the Condenser Water Pumps, Parallel Pumps
Alarm Management Lockout Switch node is selected. Specific Network
Inputs are loaded per pump.

706 CCT Help: Applications

 • DCPLF-SP (Decouple Loop Flow Setpoint): This Network Input is
loaded for applications that require chillers to be sequenced by decouple
loop flow. This Network Input is loaded when the Decouple Loop Flow
node is selected.
• PCHWP-ROT (Rotate Primary Chilled Water Pumps): This Network
Input is loaded for applications that require primary chilled water pumps to
be rotated according to the equal runtime rotation strategy. This Network
Input is loaded when the Parallel Primary CHW Pumps node is selected,
unless there is only one parallel primary CHW pump in the system (that is,
the One Pump node is selected) or the pumps should not be rotated
according to runtime (the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node is not
selected).
• PCHWPX-LO (PCHWPX Lockout Switch, where X is 1-8): This
Network Input is loaded when the Parallel Primary CHW Pumps Alarm
Management Lockout Switch node is selected. Specific Network Inputs
are loaded per pump.
• STAGE-CAP (Stage Capacity): This Network Input is loaded for
applications that require chillers sequenced by building load. This Network
Input is loaded when the Building Load node is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
• CTX-LO (TwrFanX Lockout Switch, where X is 1-8): This module is
loaded when Condenser Water System Cooling Towers Alarm
Management Lockout Switch is selected. Specific Network Inputs are
loaded per cooling tower.
See the Network Inputs section.

Central Plant Applications 707

 Inputs
• BLDG-L (Building Load): This Input is loaded when the application
requires an AI for building load. The Input is loaded when the BTU Meter
AI or Building Load Meter node is selected.
• CHX-%FLA (Chiller X Percent FLA, where X is 1-8): This Input is
loaded for applications that require an AI to measure the chiller percent full
load amps (% Full Load Amps selection). Specific Inputs are loaded per
chiller.
• CHX-AMPS (Chiller X Amps, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded for
applications that require an AI to measure the chiller amps when the
Actual Amps node or Chiller Amperage(s) node is selected. Specific
Inputs are loaded per chiller.
• CHX-MS (Chiller X Maint Sw, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI to remove a chiller from service. This module
is loaded when Chiller Maintenance Switch Maintenance Switch (BI) is
selected. Specific Inputs are loaded per chiller.
• CHX-S (Chiller X Status, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI for chiller status (Chiller Status node).
Specific Inputs are loaded per chiller.
• CHW-DP (Chill Water Differential Pressure): This Input is loaded for
applications that require pressure control for the chilled water loop. This
Input is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water
Pumping node or the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor node in
the Dedicated Pumps section is selected, or the Bypass Valve with Diff
Pressure Sensor node in the Parallel Pumps section is selected.
• CWPX-S (Condenser Water Pump X Status, where X is 1-8): This Input
is loaded for applications that require a BI for condenser water pump status
(Pump Status node). Specific Inputs are loaded per pump/chiller.
• DCPL-F (Decouple Loop Flow): This Input is loaded for applications that
require an AI to measure decouple loop flow. This Input is loaded when the
Bi-directional Flow Sensor, Bi-directional Flow Sensor with BI Input,
or Decouple Flow Meter node is selected.
• DCPL-S (Decouple Loop Direction): This Input is loaded for applications
that require a BI to measure decouple loop flow direction. This Input is
loaded when the Bi-directional Flow Sensor with BI Input or Decouple
Flow Direction node is selected.
• PCHW-F (Primary CHW Flow): This Input is loaded for applications
that require an AI to measure primary chilled water flow. This Input is
loaded when the Calculate Decouple Flow or Primary Flow Sensor node
is selected.

708 CCT Help: Applications

 • PCHWPX-S (Primary CHW Pump X Status, where X is 1-8): This
Input is loaded for applications that require a BI for primary chilled water
pump status (Pump Status node). Specific Inputs are loaded per pump/
chiller.
• PCHWR-T (Primary CHW Return Temp): This Input is loaded when
the application requires an AI for primary CHW return temperature. The
Input is loaded when the Return Water Temp Differential or the
Primary Return Temperature node is selected.
• PCHWS-T (Primary CHW Supply Temp): This Input is loaded when
the application requires an AI for primary CHW supply temperature. The
Input is loaded when the Return Water Temp Differential or the
Primary Supply Temperature node is selected.
• SCHW-F (Secondary CHW Flow): This Input is loaded when the
application requires an AI for secondary CHW flow. The Input is loaded
when the Calculate Decouple Flow, Calculate Building Load, or Flow
Meter node is selected.
• SCHWR-T (Secondary CHW Return Temp): This Input is loaded when
the application requires an AI for secondary CHW return temperature. The
Input is loaded when the Calculate Building Load or Return
Temperature node is selected.
• SCHWS-T (Secondary CHW Supply Temp): This Input is loaded when
the application requires an AI for secondary CHW supply temperature. The
Input is loaded when the Calculate Building Load or Supply
Temperature node is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any Manual
Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) option is selected.
• CHLRX-LO (ChlrX Lockout Switch BI, where X is 1-8): This module
is loaded when Chill Water Pumps Dedicated Primary CHW Pumps Alarm
Management Lockout Switch, Lockout Switch (BI) is selected. Specific
Inputs are loaded per pump.
• CWPX-BA (CWPX Belt Alarm BI, Condenser Water Pump X Belt
Alarm Binary Input, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI for the parallel condenser water pump belt
alarm. This Input is loaded when the Condenser Water Pumps, Parallel
Pumps Alarm Management Belt Alarm node is selected. Specific Inputs
are loaded per pump.
• CWPX-LO (CWPX Lockout Switch BI, Condenser Water Pump X
Lockout Switch Binary Input, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI for the parallel condenser water pump alarm
lockout switch. This Input is loaded when the Condenser Water Pumps,
Parallel Pumps Alarm Management Lockout Switch, Lockout Switch
(BI) node is selected. Specific Inputs are loaded per pump.

Central Plant Applications 709

 • CWPX-OL (CWPX Overload BI, Condenser Water Pump X Overload
Binary Input, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded for applications that
require a BI to monitor the motor overload alarm for the dedicated or
parallel condenser water pump. This Input is loaded when the Condenser
Water Pumps, Parallel Pumps Alarm Management Motor Overload
Tripped node is selected or when the Condenser Water Pumps,
Dedicated Pumps Alarm Management Motor Overload Tripped node
is selected. Specific Inputs are loaded per pump.
• PCHWPX-BA (PCHWPX Belt Alarm BI, Primary CHW Pump X Belt
Alarm Binary Input, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI to monitor the primary dedicated or parallel
chill water pump belt alarm. This Input is loaded when the Chill Water
Pumps, Parallel Primary CHW Pumps Alarm Management Belt
Alarm node is selected or when the Chill Water Pumps, Dedicated
Primary CHW Pumps Alarm Management Belt Alarm node is
selected. Specific Inputs are loaded per pump.
• PCHWPX-LO (PCHWPX Lockout Switch BI, Primary CHW Pump X
Lockout Switch Binary Input, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI for the primary dedicated or parallel chill
water pump alarm lockout switch. This Input is loaded when the Chill
Water Pumps, Parallel Primary CHW Pumps Alarm Management
Lockout Switch, Alarm Lockout Switch (BI) node is selected or when
the Chill Water Pumps, Dedicated Primary CHW Pumps Alarm
Management Lockout Switch, Alarm Lockout Switch (BI) node is
selected. Specific Inputs are loaded per pump.
• PCHWPX-OL (PCHWPX Overload BI, Primary CHW Pump X
Overload Binary Input, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI to monitor the motor overload alarm for the
dedicated or parallel chill water pump. This Input is loaded when the Chill
Water Pumps, Parallel Primary CHW Pumps Alarm Management
Motor Overload Tripped node is selected or when the Chill Water
Pumps, Dedicated Primary Pumps Alarm Management Motor
Overload Tripped node is selected. Specific Inputs are loaded per pump.
See the Inputs section.

710 CCT Help: Applications

 Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Chiller Load Total Calc: This module is loaded for applications that
sequence chillers based on chiller load. The module is loaded when the
Chiller Load node is selected.
• Diff Flow Calc: This module is loaded for applications that calculate
decouple loop flow using the differential of the primary flow and the
secondary flow. The module is loaded when the Calculate Decouple Flow
node is selected.
• Supply Return Water Differential Calc: This module is loaded for
applications that calculate the temperature differential of the supply and
return water. The module is loaded when the Return Water Temp
Differential node is selected.
• PCHWPX Status Alarm Determination (where x is 1-8): This module is
loaded when Chill Water Pumps Dedicated Primary CHW Pumps, Pump
Status is selected or when Chill Water Pumps Parallel Primary CHW
Pumps, Pump Status is selected.
• CWPX Status Alarm Determination (where x is 1-8): This module is
loaded when Condenser Water Pumps Dedicated Pumps, Pump Status is
selected or when Condenser Water Pumps Parallel Pumps, Pump Status is
selected.

Central Plant Applications 711

 State Generation
• Building Load Calculation v2: This module is loaded for applications that
calculate the building load. The module is loaded when the Calculate
Building Load node is selected.
• Chiller Sequencing by Building Load: This module is loaded for
applications that sequence chillers based on building load. The module is
loaded when the Building Load node is selected.
• Chiller Sequencing by Chiller Load: This module is loaded for applications
that sequence chillers based on chiller load. The module is loaded when the
Chiller Load node is selected.
• Chiller Sequencing by Decouple Loop Flow: This module is loaded for
applications that sequence chillers based on decouple loop flow. The
module is loaded when the Decouple Loop Flow node is selected.
• Chiller Sequencing by Delta T: This module is loaded for applications that
sequence chillers based on differential temperature. The module is loaded
when the Return Water Temp Differential node is selected.
• CHW Isolation Valve Status: This module is loaded for applications that
enable chilled water pumps based on the number of isolation valves open.
The module is loaded when the Chill Water Pumps and Isolation Valve
nodes are selected.
• CW Isolation Valve Status: This module is loaded for applications that
enable condenser water pumps based on the number of isolation valves
open. The module is loaded when the Condenser Water Pumps and
Isolation Valve nodes are selected.
• CWPs Available: This module is loaded for applications that need to
calculate the number of condenser water pumps that are available to run.
The module is loaded when the Parallel Pumps node is selected.
• PCHWPs Available: This module is loaded for applications that need to
calculate the number of primary chilled water pumps that are available to
run. The module is loaded when the Parallel Pumps node is selected.
• CWPX Alarms (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded when Condenser
Water Pumps, Dedicated Pumps Alarm Management is selected or when
Condenser Water Pumps, Parallel Pumps Alarm Management is selected.
• PCHWPX Alarms (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded when Chill
Water Pumps, Dedicated Primary CHW Pumps Alarm Management is
selected or when Chill Water Pumps, Parallel Primary CHW Pumps Alarm
Management is selected.

712 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• Chilled Water Bypass Valve Control: This module is loaded for
applications that need to control a bypass valve to maintain the chilled
water differential pressure. The module is loaded when either of the
Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor nodes is selected.
• Chiller X Control (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for applications
that need to output a stop-start signal to a chiller. Specific modules are
loaded per chiller.
• Chiller X Enable LV (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a chiller. Specific
modules are loaded per chiller.
• Chiller X Interlock Cmd LV (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a chiller, have
isolation valves without status, and need to calculate how many pumps to
run. This module is loaded when the Chillers node is selected, the Chill
Water Isolation Valve node is selected, the Chill Water Isolation Valve
Status is not selected, and the Chilled Water Pumps node is selected, or
when the Chillers node is selected, the Condenser Water Isolation Valve
node is selected, the Condenser Water Isolation Valve Status is not
selected, and the Condenser Water Pumps node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per pump/chiller.
• Chiller X LV (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for applications that
need to calculate individual chiller runtime. This module is loaded when
the Chiller Rotation (Runtime) node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per chiller.
• Chiller X Totalization (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that need to calculate individual chiller runtime. This module
is loaded when the Chiller Rotation (Runtime) node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per chiller.
• Chiller Rotation Small: This module is loaded for applications that contain
chillers. The module is loaded when the Chiller node is selected.
• CHW PumpX Enable LV (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a parallel chill water
pump. This module is loaded when the Parallel Primary CHW Pumps
node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• CW Pump X Control v2 (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a parallel condenser
water pump. This module is loaded when the Parallel Pumps node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.

Central Plant Applications 713

 • CW Pump X LV (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for applications
that need to calculate individual condenser water pump runtime. This
module is loaded when the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node is selected
and the Parallel Pumps node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per
pump.
• CW Pump X Totalization (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that need to calculate individual condenser water pump
runtime. This module is loaded when the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node
is selected and the Parallel Pumps node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per pump.
• CW Pump Rotation Small: This module is loaded for applications that
contain parallel condenser water pumps. The module is loaded when the
Parallel Pumps node is selected.
• CW PumpX Enable LV (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a parallel condenser
water pump. This module is loaded when the Parallel Pumps node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Number of Devices Running LV: This module is loaded for applications
that contain chillers. The module is loaded when the Chiller node is
selected.
• Primary CHW Pump X Control v2 (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded
for applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a parallel primary
chill water pump. This module is loaded when the Parallel Primary
Pumps node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Primary CHW Pump X LV (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that need to calculate individual chill water pump runtime.
This module is loaded when the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node is
selected and the Parallel Pumps node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per pump.
• Primary CHW Pump X Totalization (where X is 1-8): This module is
loaded for applications that need to calculate individual chill water pump
runtime. This module is loaded when the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node
is selected and the Parallel Pumps node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per pump.
• Primary CHW Pump Rotation Small: This module is loaded for
applications that contain parallel chill water pumps. The module is loaded
when the Parallel Primary CHW Pumps node is selected.
• CWPX Blocking Protection (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded when
Condenser Water Pumps, Parallel Pumps Blocking Protection is selected.
• PCHWPX Blocking Protection (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded
when Chill Water Pumps, Dedicated Primary Pumps Blocking Protection
is selected or when Chill Water Pumps, Parallel Primary CHW Pumps
Blocking Protection is selected.

714 CCT Help: Applications

 Outputs
• CHX-EN (Chiller X Enable, where X is 1-8): This Output is loaded for
applications that control chillers. Specific modules are loaded per chiller.
• CHWBYPV-O (Chilled Water Bypass Valve Output): This Output is
loaded for applications that control chill water bypass valves. The Output is
loaded when either of the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor nodes
is selected.
• CWPX-C (Condenser Water Pump X Command, where X is 1-8): This
Output is loaded for applications that control condenser water pumps. This
Output is loaded when the Parallel Pumps node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per pump.
• PCHWPX-C (Primary CHW Pump X Command, where X is 1-8): This
Output is loaded for applications that control primary CHW pumps. This
Output is loaded when the Parallel Primary CHW Pumps node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
See the Outputs section.

Central Plant Applications 715

Condenser Water System (CC)
The selection options for Condenser Water System are:
• Tower Bypass Valve: This option allows a bypass valve to control condenser
water temperature.
• Cooling Towers: This option allows a cooling tower to control condenser
water temperature
- Number of Cooling Towers (One Fan Per): This option provides the
number of cooling towers (one fan per cooling tower) in the system.
• One
• Two
• Three
• Four
• Five
• Six
• Seven
• Eight
- Single Speed
• With One Vernier Stage: This option allows an analog output to be
commanded from 0 to 100% between each stage.
- Two Speed
- Three Speed
- Variable Speed
- Fan Status: This option monitors the status of the fan.
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

716 CCT Help: Applications

 - Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
- Lockout Switch (BI)
• Frequency Converter Fault
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Belt Alarm
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
- Tower Rotation (Runtime): This option automatically changes tower
staging order based on runtime (equal runtime rotation strategy).
- Isolation Valve per Tower: This option provides control for systems with
isolation valves preventing flow over the cooling towers when not in use.
• Valve Open Status: This option monitors the status of the isolation
valve.

Central Plant Applications 717

 Modules (CC Condenser Water System)
The Condenser Water System Selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• CTX-LO (Cooling TowerX Lockout Switch, where X is 1-8): This
Network Input is loaded for applications that require a method to remove a
cooling tower from service. This Network Input is loaded when the Tower
Maintenance Switch node is selected and the Maintenance Switch (BI)
child node is not selected. Specific modules are loaded per tower.
• CT-ROT (Rotate Tower Now): This Network Input is loaded for
applications that require towers to be rotated according to the equal runtime
rotation strategy. This Network Input is loaded when the Condenser
Water System node is selected, unless there is only one tower in the
system (that is, the One node is selected) or the towers should not be
rotated according to runtime (that is, the Tower Rotation (Runtime) node
is not selected).
• CTSTG-SP (CT StageUp Setpoint): This Network Input is loaded for
applications that require a method to sequence variable speed tower fans.
The Network Input is loaded when the Variable Speed node is selected.
• CW-SP (Condenser Water Setpoint): This Network Input is loaded for
applications that require condenser water temperature control. The
Network Input is loaded when the Condenser Water System node is
selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.

718 CCT Help: Applications

 Inputs
• CTXISOV-S (Tower X Iso Valve Status, where X is 1-8): This Input is
loaded for applications that require a BI for cooling tower isolation valve
status. This Input is loaded when the Valve Open Status node is selected.
Specific modules are loaded per tower.
• CTX-S (Tower X Status, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI to monitor cooling tower fan status. This
Input is loaded when the Fan Status node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per tower.
• CWS-T (Condenser Water Supply Temperature): This Input is loaded
for applications that require an AI to monitor condenser water supply
temperature. The Input is loaded when the Condenser Water System node
is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any Manual
Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) option is selected.
• CTX-BA (TwrFanX Belt Alarm BI, where X is 1-8): This Input is used
for applications that require a BI to monitor a cooling tower fan belt alarm
and is loaded when the Cooling Towers Alarm Management Belt Alarm
node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per tower.
• CTX-LO (TwrFanX Lockout Switch BI, where X is 1-8): This module is
loaded when Cooling Towers Alarm Management Lockout Switch,
Lockout Switch BI is selected. Specific modules are loaded per tower.
• CTX-FAULT (TwrFanX VFD Fault BI, where X is 1-8): This Input is
loaded when the Cooling Towers Alarm Management Frequency
Converter Fault node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per tower.
• CTX-OL (TwrFanX Overload BI, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded
for applications that require a BI to monitor the motor overload alarm for a
cooling tower. This Input is loaded when the Cooling Towers Alarm
Management Motor Overload Tripped node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per tower.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• TwrFanX Status Alarm Determination (where X is 1-8): This module is
loaded when Cooling Towers Fan Status is selected and One through Eight
tower fans nodes is selected.

Central Plant Applications 719

 State Generation
• 2 Speed Fan Clg Twr Sequencing: This module is loaded for applications
that contain 2-speed cooling tower fans. The module is loaded when the
Two Speed node is selected.
• 3 Speed Fan Clg Twr Sequencing: This module is loaded for applications
that contain 3-speed cooling tower fans. The module is loaded when the
Three Speed node is selected.
• CW Sequencing: This module is loaded for applications that require
control of a tower bypass valve. The module is loaded when the Tower
Bypass Valve node is selected.
• CW Sequencing LV: This module is loaded for applications that require
control of a tower bypass valve. The module is loaded when the Tower
Bypass Valve node is selected.
• On/Off Fan Clg Twr Sequencing: This module is loaded for applications
that contain on off cooling tower fans. The module is loaded when the
Single Speed node is selected and the with one vernier stage node is not
selected.
• On/Off Fan w/ Vernier Output Clg Twr Sequencing: This module is loaded
for applications that contain on off cooling tower fans with a single analog
tower fan. The module is loaded when the with one vernier stage node is
selected.
• Variable Speed Fan Clg Twr Sequencing: This module is loaded for
applications that contain variable speed tower fans. The module is loaded
when the Variable Speed node is selected.
• TwrFanX Alarms (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded when Cooling
Towers Alarm Management is selected and One through Eight tower fans
nodes is selected.

720 CCT Help: Applications

 Output Control
• CTX Enable LV (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for applications
that need to output a stop-start signal to a tower fan. This module is loaded
when the Condenser Water System node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per tower.
• Condenser Water Bypass Valve Control: This module is loaded for
applications that need to control a bypass valve to maintain the condenser
water temperature. The module is loaded when the Tower Bypass Valve
node is selected.
• Modulating Device PID: This module is loaded for applications that need
to control a variable speed tower fan. The module is loaded when the
Variable Speed node is selected.
• Number of Towers Running LV: This module is loaded for applications
that need to control a variable speed tower fan. The module is loaded when
the Variable Speed node is selected.
• PID LV: This module is loaded for applications that need to control a
variable speed tower fan. The module is loaded when the Variable Speed
node is selected.
• Tower Fan X Control v2 (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a tower fan. This
module is loaded when the Condenser Water System node is selected.
Specific modules are loaded per tower fan.
• Tower Fan X LV (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for applications
that need to calculate individual tower fan runtime. This module is loaded
when the Tower Rotation (Runtime) node is selected. Specific modules
are loaded per tower fan.
• Tower Fan X Totalization (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that need to calculate individual tower fan runtime. This
module is loaded when the Tower Rotation (Runtime) node is selected.
Specific modules are loaded per tower fan.
• TWR Iso Valve (Pass Through): This module is loaded for applications
that require tower isolation valves. The module is loaded when the
Isolation Valve per Tower node is selected.
• Tower Rotation Small: This module is loaded for applications that contain
variable speed towers. The module is loaded when the Variable Speed
node is selected.
• TwrFanX Blocking Protection (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded
when Cooling Towers Blocking Protection is selected and One through
Eight tower fans nodes is selected.

Central Plant Applications 721

 Outputs
• CTX-C (Tower X Command, where X is 1-8): This Output is loaded for
applications that control single speed or variable speed cooling towers.
This Output is loaded when the Single Speed or Variable Speed node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per tower.
• CTXH-C (Tower X HI Command, where X is 1-8): This Output is
loaded for applications that control two-speed or three-speed cooling
towers. This Output is loaded when the Two Speed or Three Speed node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per tower.
• CTXISOV-C (Tower X Iso Valve Command, where X is 1-8): This
Output is loaded for applications that control cooling tower isolation
valves. This Output is loaded when the Isolation Valve per Tower node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per tower.
• CTXL-C (Tower X LO Command, where X is 1-8): This Output is
loaded for applications that control two-speed or three-speed cooling
towers. This Output is loaded when the Two Speed or Three Speed node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per tower.
• CTXM-C (Tower X MED Command, where X is 1-8): This Output is
loaded for applications that control three-speed cooling towers. This
Output is loaded when the Three Speed node is selected. Specific modules
are loaded per tower.
• CTX-O (Tower X Output, where X is 1-8): This Output is loaded for
applications that control vernier or variable speed cooling towers. This
module is loaded when the With One Vernier Stage or Variable Speed
node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per tower.
• CTV-O (Tower Valve Output): This Output is loaded for applications
that control a tower bypass valve. The Output is loaded when the Tower
Bypass Valve node is selected.
See the Outputs section.

722 CCT Help: Applications

Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping (CC)
The selection options for Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping are:
• Number of Pumps: This option is used to select the number of secondary
CHW pumps.
- One Pump
- Two Pumps
- Three Pumps
- Four Pumps
- Five
- Six
- Seven
- Eight
• Pump Rotation (Runtime): This option automatically changes pump staging
order based on runtime (equal runtime rotation strategy).
• Pump Status: This option monitors the status of the pump.
- Loss of Status Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
• Lockout Switch (BI)
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to a
motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of time
(for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor from
seizing up).

Central Plant Applications 723

 If the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor is selected, Secondary Variable
Speed Chill Water Pumping cannot be selected.

Modules (CC Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping)

The Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping selections load the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• CHWDP-SP (CHW Differential Pressure Setpoint): This Network Input
is loaded for applications that contain secondary pumping systems. The
Network Input is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Chill
Water Pumping node is selected.
• SCHWPX-LO (SCHWPX Lockout Switch, where X is 1-8): This
Network Input is loaded when the Alarm Management Lockout Switch
node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• SCHWP-ROT (Rotate Secondary Chilled Water Pumps): This
Network Input is used for applications that require secondary pumps to be
rotated according to the equal runtime strategy. This Network Input is
loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping node
is selected, unless there is only one pump in the system (that is, the One
node is selected) or the pumps should not be rotated according to runtime
(that is, the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node is not selected).
• SCHWPSTG-SP (Secondary Chill Water Stageup Setpoint): This
Network Input is required for applications that contain secondary pumping
systems. The Network Input is loaded when the Secondary Variable
Speed Chill Water Pumping node is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CHW-DP (Chill Water Differential Pressure): This Input is required for
applications that contain a secondary pumping system. The Input is loaded
when the Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping node is
selected.
• SCHWPX-S (Secondary CHW Pump X Status, where X is 1-8): This
Input is loaded for applications that require a BI to monitor secondary
pump status. This Input is loaded when the Pump Status node is selected.
Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any Manual
Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) option is selected.

724 CCT Help: Applications

 • SCHWPX-BA (Secondary CHW Pump X Belt Alarm Binary Input,
where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded for applications that require a BI to
monitor secondary belt alarm. This Input is loaded when the Alarm
Management Belt Alarm node is selected. Specific modules are loaded
per pump.
• SCHWPX-LO (Secondary CHW Pump X Lockout Switch Binary
Input, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded when the Alarm
Management Lockout Switch, Lockout Switch (BI) node is selected.
Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• SCHWPX-FAULT (SCHWPX VFD Fault BI, where X is 1-8): This
Input is loaded when the Alarm Management Frequency Converter
Fault node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• SCHWPX Status Alarm Determination (where x is 1-8): This module is
loaded when Pump Status is selected. Specific modules are loaded per
pump.
State Generation
• Secondary CHW Pump Sequencing: This module is required for an
application that contains a secondary pumping system. The module is
loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping node
is selected.
• SCHWPX Alarms (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded when Alarm
Management is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
Output Control
• SCHWP PID LV: This module is required for an application that contains a
secondary pumping system. The module is loaded when the Secondary
Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping node is selected.
• Number of SCHWP Running LV: This module is required for an
application that contains a secondary pumping system. The module is
loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping node
is selected.
• Secondary Chill Water Pump PID: This module is required for an
application that contains a secondary pumping system. The module is
loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping node
is selected.
• Secondary CHW Pump X LV (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that need to calculate individual secondary pump runtime.
This module is loaded when the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.

Central Plant Applications 725

 • Secondary CHW Pump X Modulating Control v2 (where X is 1-8): This
module is loaded for applications that contain a secondary pumping
system. This module is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Chill
Water Pumping node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Secondary CHW Pump X Totalization (where X is 1-8): This module is
loaded for applications that need to calculate individual secondary pump
runtime. This module is loaded when the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node
is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Secondary CHW Pump Rotation Small: This module is required for an
application that contains a secondary pumping system. The module is
loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping node
is selected.
• Secondary PumpX Enable LV (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that contain a secondary pumping system. This module is
loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping node
is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• SCHWPX Blocking Protection (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded
when Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping Blocking Protection
is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
Outputs
• SCHWPX-C (Secondary CHW Pump X Command, where X is 1-8):
This module is loaded for applications that control secondary pumps. This
Output is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water
Pumping node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• SCHWPX-O (Secondary CHW Pump X Output, where X is 1-8): This
module is loaded for applications that control secondary pumps. This
Output is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water
Pumping node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
See the Outputs section.

726 CCT Help: Applications

Central Cooling Control Logic Selection

Chiller Options (CC)

The selection options for Chiller Options are:
• Chilled Water Options - Per Chiller
- Flow Switch: This option monitors the flow switch status of the chiller.
- Flow Sensor: This option monitors the flow sensor of the chiller.
- Entering Water Temp: This option monitors the entering (return) water
temperature of each chiller.
- Leaving Water Temp: This option monitors the leaving (supply) water
temperature of each chiller.
- Isolation Valve: This option controls an isolation valve for each chiller.
• Valve Open Status: This option monitors the isolation valve status.
• Condenser Water Options - Per Chiller
- Flow Switch: This option monitors the flow switch status of the chiller.
- Flow Sensor: This option monitors the flow sensor of the chiller.
- Entering Water Temp: This option monitors the entering or return water
temperature of each chiller.
- Leaving Water Temp: This option monitors the leaving or supply water
temperature of each chiller.
- Isolation Valve: This option controls an isolation valve for each chiller.
• Valve Open Status: This option monitors the isolation valve status.
• Chiller Alarm(s): This option monitors the general alarm status of the chiller.
• Chiller Setpoint Adjustment(s): This option generates an AO to each chiller
to command the setpoint through the BAS.
• Chiller Current Limit Adjustment(s): This option generates an AO to each
chiller to command the current limit through the BAS.
• Chiller Amperage(s): This option monitors the chiller amperages of each
chiller.
• Primary Supply Temperature: This option monitors the primary supply
water temperature.
• Primary Return Temperature: This option monitors the primary return
water temperature.
• Primary Flow Sensor: This option monitors the primary flow sensor.
• Refrigerant Monitor Panel Alarm: This option monitors the refrigerant
monitor panel alarm.

Central Plant Applications 727

 Modules (CC Chiller Options)
The Chiller Options selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• CH-SP (Chiller Setpoint): This module is loaded for applications that
require controlling or outputting chiller setpoints. The Network Input is
loaded when the Chiller Setpoint Adjustment(s) node is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CHX-A (Chiller X Alarm, where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that require a BI to monitor a chiller alarm. This Input is
loaded when the Chiller Alarm(s) node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per chiller.
• CHX-AMPS (Chiller X Amps, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded for
applications that require an AI to measure the chiller amps. This Input is
loaded when the Actual Amps node is selected or the Chiller
Amperage(s) node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per chiller.
• CHXCHWE-T (Chiller X CHW Entering Temperature, where X is 1-
8): This module is loaded for applications that require an AI to monitor
chiller entering water temperature. This Input is loaded when the Entering
Water Temp node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per chiller.
• CHXCHW-F (Chiller X Chill Water Flow, where X is 1-8): This module
is loaded for applications that require an AI to monitor chill water flow for
each chiller. This Input is loaded when the Flow Sensor node is selected.
Specific modules are loaded per chiller.
• CHXCHW-FS (Chiller X CHW Flow Switch, where X is 1-8): This
module is loaded for applications that require a BI to monitor chill water
flow for each chiller. This Input is loaded when the Flow Switch node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per chiller.
• CHXCHWISOV-S (Chiller X CHW Isolation Valve Status, where X is
1-8): This module is loaded for applications that require a BI to monitor
chill water isolation valve status for each chiller. This Input is loaded when
the Valve Open Status node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per
chiller.
• CHXCHWL-T (Chiller X CHW Leaving Temperature, where X is 1-
8): This module is loaded for applications that require an AI to monitor
chiller leaving water temperature. This Input is loaded when the Leaving
Water Temp node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per chiller.

728 CCT Help: Applications

 • CHXCWE-T (Chiller X CW Entering Temperature, where X is 1-8):
This module is loaded for applications that require an AI to monitor chiller
entering condenser water temperature. This Input is loaded when the
Entering Water Temp node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per
chiller.
• CHXCW-F (Chiller X CW Flow, where X is 1-8): This module is loaded
for applications that require an AI to monitor condenser water flow for
each chiller. This Input is loaded when the Flow Sensor node is selected.
Specific modules are loaded per chiller.
• CHXCW-FS (Chiller X CW Flow Switch, where X is 1-8): This module
is loaded for applications that require a BI to monitor condenser water flow
for each chiller. This Input is loaded when the Flow Switch node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per chiller.
• CHXCWISOV-S (Chiller X CW Isolation Valve Status, where X is 1-
8): This module is loaded for applications that require a BI to monitor
condenser water isolation valve status for each chiller. This Input is loaded
when the Valve Open Status node is selected. Specific modules are loaded
per chiller.
• CHXCWL-T (Chiller X CW Leaving Temperature, where X is 1-8):
This module is loaded for applications that require an AI to monitor chiller
leaving condenser water temperature. This Input is loaded when the
Leaving Water Temp node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per
chiller.
• PCHW-F (Primary CHW Flow): This Input is loaded for applications
that require an AI to measure primary chilled water flow. This Input is
loaded when the Calculate Decouple Flow or Primary Flow Sensor node
is selected.
• PCHWR-T (Primary CHW Return Temp): This Input is loaded when
the application requires an AI for primary CHW return temperature. The
Input is loaded when the Return Water Temp Differential or Primary
Return Temperature node is selected.
• PCHWS-T (Primary CHW Supply Temp): This Input is loaded when
the application requires an AI for primary CHW supply temperature. The
Input is loaded when the Return Water Temp Differential or Primary
Supply Temperature node is selected.
• REFRIG-A (Refrigerant Alarm): This Input is loaded when the
application requires a BI to monitor a refrigerant alarm. The Input is loaded
when the Refrigerant Monitor Panel Alarm node is selected.
See the Inputs section.

Central Plant Applications 729

 State Generation
• CHW Isolation Valve Status: This module is loaded for applications that
enable chilled water pumps based on the number of isolation valves open.
The module is loaded when the Chill Water Pumps and Isolation Valve
nodes are selected.
• CW Isolation Valve Status: This module is loaded for applications that
enable condenser water pumps based on the number of isolation valves
open. The module is loaded when the Condenser Water Pumps and
Isolation Valve nodes are selected.
Output Control
• Chiller X Interlock Cmd LV (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a chiller, have
isolation valves without status, and need to calculate how many pumps to
run. This module is loaded when the Chillers node is selected, the Chill
Water Isolation Valve node is selected, the Chill Water Isolation Valve
Status is not selected, and the Chilled Water Pumps node is selected, or
when the Chillers node is selected, the Condenser Water Isolation Valve
node is selected, the Condenser Water Isolation Valve Status is not
selected, and the Condenser Water Pumps node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per pump/chiller.
Outputs
• CHXCHWISOV-C (Chiller X CHW Isolation Valve Command, where
X is 1-8): This module is loaded for applications that require a BO to
control a chill water isolation valve for each chiller. This Output is loaded
when the Valve Open Status node is selected. Specific modules are loaded
per chiller.
• CHXCL-O (Chiller X Current Limit Output, where X is 1-8): This
module is loaded for applications that require an AO to output the chiller
current limit for each chiller. This Output is loaded when the Chiller
Current Limit Adjustment(s) node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per chiller.
• CHXCWISOV-C (Chiller X CW Isolation Valve Command, where X is
1-8): This module is loaded for applications that require a BO to control a
condenser water isolation valve for each chiller. This Output is loaded
when the Valve Open Status node is selected. Specific modules are loaded
per chiller.
• CHXSP-O (Chiller X Setpoint Output, where X is 1-8): This module is
loaded for applications that require an AO to output the chiller setpoint for
each chiller. This Output is loaded when the Chiller Setpoint
Adjustment(s) node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per chiller.
See the Outputs section.

730 CCT Help: Applications

Condenser Options (CC)
The selection options for Condenser Options are:
• Common Return Temperature: This option monitors the condenser return
water temperature.
• Condenser Flow Sensor: This option monitors the condenser flow sensor.
• Vibration Alarm per Tower: This option monitors the vibration alarm on
each cooling tower.

Modules (CC Condenser Options)

The Condenser Options selections load the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• CTXVIB-A (Tower X Vibration Alarm, where X is 1-8): This Input is
loaded for applications that require a BI for cooling tower vibration alarm
status. This Input is loaded when the Vibration Alarm per Tower node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per tower fan.
• CW-F (Condenser Water Flow): This Input is loaded for applications that
require the monitoring of the condenser water flow. The Input is loaded
when the Condenser Flow Sensor node is selected.
• CWR-T (Condenser Water Return Temperature): This Input is loaded
for applications that require the monitoring of the condenser water return
temperature. The Input is loaded when the Common Return
Temperature node is selected.
See the Inputs section.

Central Plant Applications 731

Basin Options (CC)
The selection options for Basin Options are:
• Dedicated - one per tower: This option provides control if all the towers have
individual sumps.
• Common Sump: This option provides control if all the towers share a
common sump.
• Basin Level Alarm(s): This option monitors a basin level alarm.
• Basin Heater Enable(s): This option generates a BO to command the basin
heater(s) through the BAS.
• Basin Water Temperature(s): This option monitors a basin water
temperature.
- Switch(es): This option monitors BI inputs for temperature.
- Analog Temperature(s): This option monitors an AI input for temperature
• Basin Level Switch(es): This option monitors the basin level.
• Basin Makeup Valve(s): This option generates a BO to command basin
makeup valve(s) through the BAS.

Modules (CC Basin Options)

The Basin Options selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Inputs
• CTXBSN-T (Tower X Basin Temperature, where X is 1-8): This Input is
loaded for applications that require an AI for cooling tower basin
temperature. This Input is loaded when the Analog Temperature(s) and
the Dedicated - One per Tower nodes are selected. Specific modules are
loaded per tower fan.
• CTXBSN-TS (Tower X Basin Temp Status, where X is 1-8): This Input
is loaded for applications that require a BI for a cooling tower basin
temperature switch. This Input is loaded when the Switch(es) and the
Dedicated - One per Tower nodes are selected. Specific modules are
loaded per tower fan.
• CTXLVL-A (Tower X Level Alarm, where X is 1-8): This Input is
loaded for applications that require a BI for a cooling tower basin level
alarm. This Input is loaded when the Basin Level Alarm(s) and the
Dedicated - One per Tower nodes are selected. Specific modules are
loaded per tower fan.
• CTXLVL-S (Tower X Level Status, where X is 1-8): This Input is loaded
for applications that require a BI for a cooling tower basin level switch.
This Input is loaded when the Basin Level Switch(es) and the Dedicated -
One per Tower nodes are selected. Specific modules are loaded per tower
fan.

732 CCT Help: Applications

 • CTLVL-A (Tower Level Alarm): This Input is loaded for applications
that require a BI for a cooling tower basin level alarm switch. The Input is
loaded when the Basin Level Alarm(s) and the Common Sump nodes are
selected.
• CTLVL-S (Tower Level Status): This Input is loaded for applications
that require a BI for a cooling tower basin level switch. The Input is loaded
when the Basin Level Switch(es) and the Common Sump nodes are
selected.
• CT-T (Tower Basin Temperature): This Input is loaded for applications
that require an AI for the cooling tower basin temperature. The Input is
loaded when the Analog Temperature(s) and the Common Sump nodes
are selected.
• CT-TS (Tower Basin Temperature Switch): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI for a cooling tower basin temperature switch.
The Input is loaded when the Switch(es) and the Common Sump nodes
are selected.
See the Inputs section.
Outputs
• CTXBH-EN (Tower X Basin Heater Enable, where X is 1-8): This
Output is loaded for applications that require a BO for a cooling tower
basin heater enable. Since no code is associated with this Output, you must
add it manually. This Output is loaded when the Basin Heater Enable(s)
and the Dedicated - One per Tower nodes are selected. Specific modules
are loaded per tower fan.
• CTXMUV-C (Tower X MU Valve Command, where X is 1-8): This
Output is loaded for applications that require a BO for a cooling tower
make up valve. Since no code is associated with this Output, you must add
it manually. This Output is loaded when the Basin Makeup Valve(s) and
the Dedicated - One per Tower nodes are selected. Specific modules are
loaded per tower fan.
• CTBH-EN (Tower Basin Heater Enable): This Output is loaded for
applications that require a BO for the cooling tower basin heater enable.
Since no code is associated with this Output, you must add it manually. The
Output is loaded when the Basin Heater Enable(s) and the Common
Sump nodes are selected.
• CTMUV-C (Tower MU Valve Command): This Output is loaded for
applications that require a BO for a cooling tower make up valve. Since no
code is associated with this Output, you must add it manually. The Output
is loaded when the Basin Makeup Valve(s) and the Common Sump
nodes are selected.
See the Outputs section.

Central Plant Applications 733

Secondary Chill Water Options (CC)
The selection options for Secondary Chill Water Options are:
• Supply Temperature: This option monitors the secondary loop supply
temperature.
• Return Temperature: This option monitors the secondary loop return
temperature.
• Flow Meter: This option monitors the secondary loop flow rate.
• Decouple Temperature: This option monitors the decouple loop temperature.
• Decouple Flow Meter: This option monitors the decouple loop flow rate.
• Decouple Flow Direction: This option monitors the decouple loop flow
direction.
• Building Load Meter: This option monitors the secondary loop BTUs.

734 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (CC Secondary Chill Water Options)
The Secondary Chill Water Options selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Inputs
• BLDG-L (Building Load): This Input is loaded when the application
requires an AI for building load. The Input is loaded when the BTU Meter
AI or Building Load Meter node is selected.
• DCPL-F (Decouple Loop Flow): This Input is loaded for applications that
require an AI to measure decouple loop flow. This Input is loaded when the
Bi-directional Flow Sensor, Bi-directional Flow Sensor with BI Input,
or Decouple Flow Meter node is selected.
• DCPL-S (Decouple Loop Direction): This Input is loaded for applications
that require a BI to measure decouple loop flow direction. This Input is
loaded when the Bi-directional Flow Sensor with BI Input or Decouple
Flow Direction node is selected.
• DCPL-T (Decouple Loop Temperature): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI to measure decouple loop temperature. This
Input is loaded when the Decouple Temperature node is selected.
• SCHW-F (Secondary CHW Flow): This Input is loaded when the
application requires an AI for secondary CHW flow. The Input is loaded
when the Calculate Decouple Flow, Calculate Building Load, or Flow
Meter node is selected.
• SCHWR-T (Secondary CHW Return Temp): This Input is loaded when
the application requires an AI for secondary CHW return temperature. The
Input is loaded when the Calculate Building Load or Return
Temperature node is selected.
• SCHWS-T (Secondary CHW Supply Temp): This Input is loaded when
the application requires an AI for secondary CHW supply temperature. The
Input is loaded when the Calculate Building Load or Supply
Temperature node is selected.
See the Inputs section.

Central Plant Applications 735

General Options (CC)
The selection options for General Options are:
• Outside Air Temperature: This option monitors the outdoor air temperature.
• Outside Air Humidity: This option monitors the outdoor air humidity.
• Mechanical Room Temperature: This option monitors the temperature of the
mechanical room.

Modules (CC General Options)

The General Options selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This Input is used for applications
that require an AI for outdoor air temperature. The Input is loaded when the
Outside Air Temperature node is selected.
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity): This Input is used for applications that
require an AI for outdoor air humidity. The Input is loaded when the
Outside Air Humidity node is selected.
• MR-T (Mechanical Room Temperature): This Input is used for
applications that require an AI for the mechanical room temperature. The
Input is loaded when the Mechanical Room Temperature node is
selected.
See the Inputs section.

736 CCT Help: Applications

Central Heating Applications
Introduction
The Central Heating (CH) application provides selections capable of controlling
many different heating system configurations.
Central Heating applications include the following:
• Central Heating Core Logic
• Central Heating Mechanical System Selection
- Heating System Enable
- Hot Water/Steam Boilers
- Heat Exchangers
- Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping
- Zone Loop Control
• Central Heating Control Logic Selection
- Boiler Options
- Heat Exchanger Options
- Secondary Hot Water Options
- General Options

Central Heating Core Logic

Modules (CH)
All Central Heating applications use the core logic listed below.
Network Inputs
• SYSTEM-EN (System Enable): This network input enables the heating
system via network command or schedule.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This network input is loaded unless
the system has an OA-T sensor.
See the Network Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• PMPDOWN-TIME (Pump Down Time): This floating constant delays
the pump stop command allowing the primary heating equipment to
maintain flow after shutdown.
State Generation
• Hot Water System Enable: This module enables and disables other
modules based on the SYSTEM-EN and Outdoor Air Temperature values.

Central Plant Applications 737

Central Heating Mechanical System Selection

Heating System Enable (CH)

The selection option for Heating System Enable is:
• OA Heating Lockout: This option allows the system to be automatically
enabled and disabled based on the outdoor air temperature.

Modules (CH Heating System Enable)

The Heating System Enable selection loads the following module in the Control
View column:
Network Inputs
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module
is loaded when the OA Heating Lockout option is selected. This input is the
setpoint, above which, the system is locked out or disabled.
See the Network Inputs section.

738 CCT Help: Applications

Hot Water/Steam Boilers (CH)
Select this option if the system has boilers.
The selection options for Hot Water/Steam Boilers are:
Number of Boilers: This option describes the number of boilers in the system.
• One
• Two
• Three
• Four
Select Type of Control: This option describes the method to control the boilers in
the system.
• Modulate Burner(s): This option is used for boilers with modulating burners
to control.
- Pressure: This option controls modulating burners to maintain steam
pressure.
- Loop Supply Water Temp: This option controls modulating burners to
maintain leaving or supply water temperature.
- Loop Return Water Temp: This option controls modulating burners to
maintain entering or return water temperature.
• On Off Boilers by Return: This option controls discrete (cycling) boilers to
maintain entering or return water temperature.
• Package Controls: This option allows boiler factory controls to manage the
boiler.
- Building Load: This option provides stages on package control boilers to
meet building load.
• BTU Meter AI: This option measures the building load with a BTU
meter through a single AI.
• Calculate Building Load: This option measures building load using
two temperatures and a flow meter.
- OA-T: This option provides stages on package control boilers based on
outdoor air temperature.
- 3-Way Mixing Valve: This option controls a mixing valve to maintain
supply water temperature to the building load.
- Setpoint Adjust AO: This option generates an AO to each boiler to
command the setpoint through the BAS.
• Boiler Rotation (Runtime): This option automatically changes boiler staging
order based on runtime (equal runtime rotation strategy).

Central Plant Applications 739

 • Boiler Maintenance Switch: This option generates network inputs used to
remove a boiler from service.
- Maintenance Switch (BI): This option generates a binary inputs used to
remove a boiler from service.
• Dedicated Boiler Pump(s): This option controls a pump as part of the boiler
or each boiler has one dedicated HW pump.
- Pump Status: This option monitors the status of the boiler pump.
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Belt Alarm
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up.).
- Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor: This option allows a bypass
valve to control differential pressure.

740 CCT Help: Applications

 • Parallel Primary HW Pumps: This option provides control if the HW pumps
are piped in a parallel fashion (any pump may work with any boiler).
- One Pump
- Two Pumps
- Three Pumps
- Four Pumps
- Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor: This option allows a bypass
valve to control differential pressure.
- Pump Rotation (Runtime): This option automatically changes pump
staging order based on runtime (equal runtime rotation strategy).
- Pump Status: This option monitors the status of the pump.
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
- Lockout Switch (BI)
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Belt Alarm
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up.).

Central Plant Applications 741

 - Three Stage Frost Protection: This option provides 3 stages of frost
protection. If the outdoor air temperature is less than the first setpoint, the
primary pumps run (at medium flow for variable speed). If the outdoor air
temperature continues to drop and goes below the second setpoint and the
zone temperature is greater than or equal to the zone heating setpoint, the
boiler turns on. If the outdoor air temperature is below the second setpoint
and the zone temperature is less than the zone heating setpoint, the
appropriate zone loop turns on.
If the Pressure (Steam Boilers) or Dedicated Boiler Pump(s) is selected,
Parallel Primary HW Pumps cannot be selected.

Modules (CH Hot Water/Steam Boilers)

The Hot Water/Steam Boilers selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• BLRX-MS (Blr X Maintenance Switch, where X is 1-4): This Network
Input is loaded for applications that require a method to remove a boiler
from service. This Network Input is loaded when the Boiler Maintenance
Switch node is selected and the Maintenance Switch (BI) child node is
not selected. Specific modules are loaded per boiler.
• BLR-SP (Boiler Setpoint): This Network Input is loaded for applications
that require a boiler setpoint to be passed to each boiler. This Network
Input is loaded when the Setpoint Adjust AO node is selected.
• BLRSTG-SP (Boiler Stage-up Setpoint): This Network Input is required
for applications that contain boilers with modulating burners. The Network
Input is loaded when the Modulate Burner(s) node is selected.
• HWDP-SP (HW Differential Pressure Setpoint): This Network Input is
loaded for applications that require pressure control for the hot water loop.
This Network Input is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot
Water Pumping, the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor node in
the Dedicated Pumps section, the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure
Sensor node in the Parallel Pumps section, or the Bypass Valve with Diff
Pressure Sensor node in the Heat Exchanger section is selected.
• HWT-OARSTB (Input Range High): This the high input value for the
reset schedule. This Network Input is required for resetting the setpoint by
outdoor air. The Network Input is loaded when the Loop Supply Water
Temp, Loop Return Water Temp, On Off Boilers by Return, 3-way
Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected.
• HWT-OARSTA (Input Range Low): This the low input value for the
reset schedule. This Network Input is required for resetting the setpoint by
outdoor air. The Network Input is loaded when the Loop Supply Water
Temp, Loop Return Water Temp, On Off Boilers by Return, 3-way
Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected.

742 CCT Help: Applications

 • HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This
Network Input is loaded for applications that need to cycle the heating
enable mode based on the outdoor air temperature. The Network Input is
loaded when the OA-T or OA Heating Lockout node is selected.
• OALT-SP (OA Low Limit SP): This Network Input is loaded for
applications that sequence boilers based on the outdoor air temperature.
The Network Input is loaded when the OA-T node is selected.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This Network Input is loaded if the
application does not have an AI for the outdoor air temperature.
• HWTHI-SP (Output Range High): This the output value when the input
is high for the reset schedule. This Network Input is required for resetting
the setpoint by outdoor air. The Network Input is loaded when the Loop
Supply Water Temp, Loop Return Water Temp, On Off Boilers by
Return, 3-way Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected.
• HWTLO-SP (Output Range Low): This the output value when the input
is low for the reset schedule. This Network Input is required for resetting
the setpoint by outdoor air. The Network Input is loaded when the Loop
Supply Water Temp, Loop Return Water Temp, On Off Boilers by
Return, 3-way Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected.
• PHWPX-LO (PHWPX Lockout Switch, where X is 1-4): This Network
Input is loaded when the Parallel Primary HW Pumps Alarm
Management Lockout Switch node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per pump.
• BLR-ROT (Rotate Boilers): This Network Input is loaded for
applications that require boilers to be rotated according to the equal
runtime rotation strategy. This Network Input is loaded when the Hot
Water/Steam Boilers node is selected, unless there is only one boiler in
the system (that is, the One node is selected) or the boilers should not be
rotated according to runtime (that is, the Boiler Rotation (Runtime) node
is not selected).
• PHWP-ROT (Rotate Primary Hot Water Pumps): This Network Input
is loaded for applications that require primary hot water pumps to be
rotated according to the equal runtime rotation strategy. This Network
Input is loaded when the Parallel Primary HW Pumps node is selected,
unless there is only one pump in the system (that is, the One node is
selected) or the pumps should not be rotated according to runtime (that is,
the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node is not selected). Additionally, the
Network Input is loaded when the Heat Exchangers node is selected,
unless there is only one pump in the system (that is, the One node is
selected) or the pumps should not be rotated according to runtime (that is,
the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node is not selected).
• STMP-SP (Setpoint): This Network Input is loaded for applications that
require modulating burners to control steam pressure. This Network Input
is loaded when the Pressure node is selected.

Central Plant Applications 743

 • STAGE-CAP (Stage Capacity): Stage Capacity is the amount of load that
can be handled by each stage of heating equipment. This Network Input is
loaded for applications that require boilers sequenced by building load.
This Network Input is loaded when the Building Load node is selected.
• BLRX-LO (BlrX Lockout Switch, where X is 1-4): This Network Input
is loaded when the Hot Water/Steam Boilers Maintenance Switch node
is selected. Specific modules are loaded per boiler.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
• Frost Protect Differential: This Network Input is loaded when the
Parallel Primary HW Pumps Three Stage Frost Protection node is
selected.
• Frost Protect OA Setpoint X (where X is 1-2): This Network Input is
loaded when the Parallel Primary HW Pumps Three Stage Frost
Protection node is selected.
• Zone Differential: This Network Input is loaded when the Parallel
Primary HW Pumps Three Stage Frost Protection node is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• BLRX-MS (Boiler X Maint Sw, where X is 1-4): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI to remove a boiler from service. This Input is
loaded when the Maintenance Switch (BI) node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per boiler.
• BPX-S (Boiler Pump X Status, where X is 1-4): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI for dedicated boiler pump status. This Input is
loaded when the Pump Status node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per boiler.
• BLDG-L (Building Load): This Input is loaded when the application
requires an AI for building load. The Input is loaded when the BTU Meter
AI or Building Load Meter node is selected.
• HW-DP (Hot Water Differential Pressure): This Input is loaded for
applications that require pressure control for the hot water loop. This Input
is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping, the
Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor node in the Dedicated Pumps
section, the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor node in the Parallel
Pumps section, the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor node in the
Heat Exchanger section, or the Loop Differential Pressure Sensor node
is selected.

744 CCT Help: Applications

 • PHWPX-MS (Primary HW Pump X Maint Sw, where X is 1-4): This
Input is loaded for applications that require a BI to remove a primary hot
water pump from service. This Input is loaded when the Maintenance
Switch (BI) node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• PHWPX-S (Primary HW Pump X Status, where X is 1-4): This Input is
loaded for applications that require a BI for primary hot water pump status.
This Input is loaded when the Pump Status node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per pump.
• PHWR-T (Primary HW Return Temp): This Input is loaded for
applications that require an AI to monitor the primary hot water return
temperature. The Input is loaded when the Loop Return Water Temp, On
Off Boilers by Return, or Primary HW Return Temperature node is
selected.
• PHWS-T (Primary HW Supply Temp): This Input is loaded for
applications that require an AI to monitor the primary hot water supply
temperature. The Input is loaded when the Loop Supply Water Temp, 3-
way Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected, the Secondary
Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node is not selected, or the
Primary HW Supply Temperature node is selected.
• SHW-F (Secondary HW Flow): This Input is loaded for applications that
require an AI to monitor the secondary hot water flow. The Input is loaded
when the Calculate Building Load or Flow Meter node is selected.
• SHWR-T (Secondary HW Return Temp): This Input is loaded for
applications that require an AI to monitor the secondary hot water return
temperature. The Input is loaded when the Calculate Building Load or
Return Temperature node is selected.
• SHWS-T (Secondary HW Supply Temp): This Input is loaded for
applications that require an AI to monitor the secondary hot water supply
temperature. The Input is loaded when the Loop Supply Water Temp, 3-
way Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected, the Secondary
Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node is selected, or the Supply
Temperature or Calculate Building Load node is selected.
• STM-P (Steam Pressure): This Input is loaded for applications that
require an AI to monitor the steam pressure. The Input is loaded when the
Pressure or Main Steam Header Pressure node is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any Manual
Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) option is selected.
• BLRX-LO (BlrX Lockout Switch BI, where X is 1-4): This module is
loaded when Dedicated Boiler Pump(s) Alarm Management is selected.
Specific modules are loaded per pump.

Central Plant Applications 745

 • PHWPX-BA (Primary Hot Water Pump X Belt Alarm Binary Input,
where X is 1-4): This module is loaded when Dedicated Boiler Pump(s)
Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected or when Parallel Primary
HW Pumps Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per pump.
• PHWPX-LO (Primary Hot Water Pump X Lockout Switch BI, where
X is 1-4): This module is loaded when Dedicated Boiler Pump(s) Alarm
Management Lockout Switch, Lockout Switch (BI) is selected or when
Parallel Primary HW Pumps Alarm Management Lockout Switch,
Lockout Switch (BI) is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Hot Water Reset by OA-T: This module is required for resetting the
setpoint by outdoor air. The module is loaded when the Loop Supply
Water Temp, Loop Return Water Temp, On Off Boilers by Return, 3-
way Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected.
• PHWPX Status Alarm Determination (where x is 1-4): This module is
loaded when Dedicated Boiler Pump(s), Pump Status and One Pump
through Four Pumps is selected or when Parallel Primary HW Pumps,
Pump Status and One Pump through Four Pumps is selected.

746 CCT Help: Applications

 State Generation
• Boiler Sequencing by Building Load: This module is required for
applications that have boilers sequenced by building load. The module is
loaded when the Building Load node is selected.
• Boiler Sequencing by OA-T: This module is required for applications that
have boilers sequenced by outdoor air temperature. The module is loaded
when the OA-T node is selected.
• Boilers Available: This module is used in applications that need to
calculate how many boilers or heat exchangers are available to use to meet
the heating load. The module is loaded when the Parallel Primary HW
Pumps node is selected or the Inlet Valve or With Isolation Valves node
is selected in the Heat Exchanger section.
• Building Load Calculation v2: This module is required for applications that
calculate building load. The module is loaded when the Calculate
Building Load node is selected.
• Discrete Boiler Sequencing by HWR-T: This module is required for
applications that sequence on off boilers by return water temperature. The
module is loaded when the On Off Boilers by Return node is selected.
• Modulating HX or Boiler Sequencing: This module is required for
applications that contain modulating heating devices. The module is loaded
when the Modulated Burners node is selected or when heat exchangers
that have the With Isolation Valves or Inlet Valve node selected.
• PHWPX Alarms (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded when Dedicated
Boiler Pump(s) Alarm Management and One Pump through Four
Pumps is selected or when Parallel Primary HW Pumps Alarm
Management and One Pump through Four Pumps is selected.
• Frost Protection Determination: This module is loaded when Parallel
Primary HW Pumps Three Stage Frost Protection is selected.

Central Plant Applications 747

 Output Control
• Boiler X Control (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded for applications
that need to output a stop-start signal to a boiler. This module is loaded
when the Hot Water/Steam Boilers node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per boiler.
• Boiler X Enable LV (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a boiler. This module
is loaded when the Hot Water/Steam Boilers node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per boiler.
• Boiler X LV (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded for applications that
need to calculate individual boiler runtime. This module is loaded when the
Boiler Rotation (Runtime) node is selected. Specific modules are loaded
per boiler.
• Boiler X Totalization (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded for
applications that need to calculate individual boiler runtime. This module is
loaded when the Boiler Rotation (Runtime) node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per boiler.
• Boiler Rotation Small: This module is loaded for applications that contain
boilers. The module is loaded when the Hot Water/Steam Boilers node is
selected.
• Hot Water Bypass Valve Control: This module is required for applications
that contain a pressure control bypass valve. The module is loaded when
the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor node in the Dedicated Boiler
Pump, the Parallel Boiler Pump, or the Heat Exchanger section is selected.
• Modulating Device PID: This module is used for multiple functions. It is
used in applications that contain modulated boiler burners, 3-way mixing
valves, heat exchanger inlet valves, or loop mixing valves. The module is
loaded when the Modulate Burner(s), 3-way Mixing Valve, Inlet Valve,
or Loop Mixing Valve node is selected.
• Number of Devices Running LV: This module is included in applications
the need to calculate the number of heating devices running. The module is
loaded when the Hot Water/Steam Boilers node is selected and the OA-T
node is not selected, or when the Heat Exchangers node is selected and
the With Isolation Valves or the Inlet Valve node is selected.
• PID LV: This module is used for multiple functions. It is used in
applications that contain modulated boiler burners, heat exchanger inlet
valves, or loop mixing valves. The module is loaded when the Modulate
Burner(s), Inlet Valve, or Loop Mixing Valve node is selected.

748 CCT Help: Applications

 • Primary HW Pump X LV (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded for
applications that need to calculate individual parallel primary hot water
pump runtime. This module is loaded when the Pump Rotation
(Runtime) node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Primary HW Pump X Totalization (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded
for applications that need to calculate individual parallel primary hot water
pump runtime. This module is loaded when the Pump Rotation
(Runtime) node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Primary Pump X Control v2 (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a primary HW pump.
This module is loaded when the Parallel Primary HW Pumps node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Primary Pump Rotation Small: This module is loaded for applications that
contain parallel primary HW pumps. The module is loaded when the
Parallel Primary HW Pumps or Heat Exchangers node is selected.
• Primary PumpX Enable LV (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a parallel primary HW
pump. This module is loaded when the Parallel Primary HW Pumps or
Heat Exchangers node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• PHWPX Blocking Protection (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded
when Dedicated Boiler Pump(s) Blocking Protection is selected or when
Parallel Primary HW Pumps Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• BLRX-C (Boiler X Command, where X is 1-4): This Output is loaded for
applications that need a BO to control boilers. This Output is loaded when
the Hot Water/Steam Boilers node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per boiler.
• BLRX-EN (Boiler X Enable, where X is 1-4): This Output is loaded for
applications that need a BO to control boilers. This Output is loaded when
the Hot Water/Steam Boilers node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per boiler.
• BLRX-O (Boiler X Output, where X is 1-4): This Output is loaded for
applications that need an AO to control a boiler’s burners. This Output is
loaded when the Modulate Burner(s) node is selected. Specific modules
are loaded per boiler.
• BLRXSP-O (Boiler X Setpoint Output, where X is 1-4): This Output is
loaded for applications that need an AO to output remote boiler setpoint
values. This Output is loaded when the Setpoint Adjust AO node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per boiler.
• BLRXISOV-C (Boiler X Isolation Valve Command, where X is 1-4):
This Output is loaded for applications that need a BO to control boiler
isolation valves. This Output is loaded when the Isolation Valves on Each
Boiler node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per boiler.

Central Plant Applications 749

 • BPX-C (Boiler Pump X Command, where X is 1-4): This Output is
loaded for applications that need a BO to control boiler pumps. This Output
is loaded when the Dedicated Boiler Pump(s) node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per boiler.
• BYPV-O (Bypass Valve Output): This Output is loaded for applications
that need an AO to control a bypass valve to maintain loop differential
pressure. The Output is loaded when one of the Bypass Valve with Diff
Pressure Sensor nodes is selected.
• MIX-O (Mixing Valve Output): This Output is loaded for applications
that need an AO to control a 3-way valve to maintain temperature. The
Output is loaded when the 3-way Mixing Valve or the Loop Mixing Valve
node is selected.
• PHWPX-C (Primary HW Pump X Command, where X is 1-4): This
Output is loaded for applications that need a BO to control parallel primary
pumps. This Output is loaded when the Parallel Primary HW Pumps or
Heat Exchangers node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
See the Outputs section.

750 CCT Help: Applications

Heat Exchangers (CH)
Use this section for systems with Heat Exchangers.
The selection options for Heat Exchangers are:
• Number of Heat Exchangers: This option is used to select the number of heat
exchangers.
- One
- Two
• With Isolation Valves: This option provides control for systems with
isolation valves preventing flow through the heat exchangers when not
in use.
- Valve Open Status: This option monitors the status of the isolation
valve.
• Inlet Valve: This option is loaded for heat exchangers that are controlled by
modulating an inlet valve.
- Two Valves: This option provides control if the flow is split through two
valves to increase control ability.
- Return Water Low Limit Control: This option provides temperature
control for the inlet return water. This process uses the supply water
temperature to modulate the control valve. The inlet return water control
overrides the primary control to prevent the inlet return water temperature
from dropping below its limit.
• Loop Mixing Valve: This option provides control if the loop supply
temperature is controlled using a 3 way mixing valve.
• HX Maintenance Switch: This option generates network inputs used to
remove a heat exchanger from service.
- Maintenance Switch (BI): This option generates binary inputs used to
remove a heat exchanger from service.

Central Plant Applications 751

 • Primary HW Pumps: This option is used to select the number of primary HW
pumps.
- One Pump
- Two Pumps
- Three Pumps
- Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor: This option allows a bypass
valve to control differential pressure.
- Pump Rotation (Runtime): This option automatically changes pump
staging order based on runtime (equal runtime rotation strategy).
- Pump Status: This option monitors the status of the pump.
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
- Lockout Switch (BI)
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Belt Alarm
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).

752 CCT Help: Applications

 - Three Stage Frost Protection: This option provides 3 stages of frost
protection. If the outdoor air temperature is less than the first setpoint, the
primary pumps run (at medium flow for variable speed). If the outdoor air
temperature continues to drop and goes below the second setpoint and the
zone temperature is greater than or equal to the zone heating setpoint, the
boiler turns on. If the outdoor air temperature is below the second setpoint
and the zone temperature is less than the zone heating setpoint, the
appropriate zone loop turns on.
If the Hot Water/Steam Boilers is selected, Heat Exchangers cannot be selected.

Modules (CH Heat Exchangers)

The Heat Exchangers selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HXSTG-SP (Heat Exchanger Stage-up Setpoint): This Network Input is
required for applications that contain heat exchangers with either inlet
valves or isolation valves. The Network Input is loaded when the Heat
Exchangers node is selected and the Inlet Valve or the With Isolation
Valves nodes is selected.
• HWDP-SP (HW Differential Pressure Setpoint): This Network Input is
loaded for applications that require pressure control for the hot water loop.
This Network Input is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot
Water Pumping node is selected, or one of the Bypass Valve with Diff
Pressure Sensor nodes in the Dedicated Pumps section, Parallel Pumps
section, or Heat Exchanger section is selected.
• HXX-MS (HXX Maintenance Switch, where the second X is 1-2): This
Network Input is loaded for applications that require a method to remove a
heat exchanger from service.
- The HX1 Maintenance Switch Network Input is loaded when the HX
Maintenance Switch node is selected and the Maintenance Switch
(BI) child node is not selected.
- The HX2 Maintenance Switch Network Input is loaded when the HX
Maintenance Switch node is selected, the Maintenance Switch (BI)
child node is not selected, and the Two heat exchangers node is
selected.
• HWT-OARSTB (Input Range High): This is the high input value for the
reset schedule. This Network Input is required for resetting the setpoint by
outdoor air. The Network Input is loaded when the Loop Supply Water
Temp, Loop Return Water Temp, On Off Boilers by Return, 3-way
Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected.

Central Plant Applications 753

 • HWT-OARSTA (Input Range Low): This is the low input value for the
reset schedule. This Network Input is required for resetting the setpoint by
outdoor air. The Network Input is loaded when the Loop Supply Water
Temp, Loop Return Water Temp, On Off Boilers by Return, 3-way
Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected.
• HWTHI-SP (Output Range High): This is the output value when the
input is high for the reset schedule. This Network Input is required for
resetting the setpoint by outdoor air. The Network Input is loaded when the
Loop Supply Water Temp, Loop Return Water Temp, On Off Boilers
by Return, 3-way Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected.
• HWTLO-SP (Output Range Low): This is the output value when the
input is low for the reset schedule. This Network Input is required for
resetting the setpoint by outdoor air. The Network Input is loaded when the
Loop Supply Water Temp, Loop Return Water Temp, On Off Boilers
by Return, 3-way Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected.
• PHWP-ROT (Rotate Primary Hot Water Pumps): This Network Input
is loaded for applications that require primary hot water pumps to be
rotated according to the equal runtime rotation strategy. This Network
Input Is loaded when the Parallel Primary HW Pumps node is selected,
unless there is only one pump in the system (that is, the One node is
selected) or the pumps should not be rotated according to runtime (that is,
the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node is not selected). Additionally, the
Network Input is loaded when the Heat Exchangers node is selected,
unless there is only one pump in the system (that is, the One node is
selected) or the pumps should not be rotated according to runtime (that is,
the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node is not selected).
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
• Frost Protect Differential: This Network Input is loaded when the
Primary HW Pumps Three Stage Frost Protection node is selected.
• Frost Protect OA Setpoint X (where X is 1-2): This Network Input is
loaded when the Primary HW Pumps Three Stage Frost Protection
node is selected.
• Zone Differential: This Network Input is loaded when the Primary HW
Pumps Three Stage Frost Protection node is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.

754 CCT Help: Applications

 Inputs
• HXX-MS (Heat Exchanger X Maint Sw, where X is 1-2): This Input is
loaded for applications that require a BI to remove a heat exchanger from
service.
- The Heat Exchanger 1 Maint Sw Input is loaded when the
Maintenance Switch (BI) node is selected.
- The Heat Exchanger 2 Maint Sw Input is loaded when the
Maintenance Switch (BI) node is selected and the Two heat
exchangers node is selected.
• HW-DP (Hot Water Differential Pressure): This Input is loaded for
applications that require pressure control for the hot water loop. This Input
is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping
nodes is selected, one of the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor
nodes is selected in the Dedicated Pumps section, Parallel Pumps section,
or Heat Exchanger section, or the Loop Differential Pressure Sensor
node is selected.
• HXXISOV-S (HXX Isolation Valve Status, where the second X is 1-2):
This Input is loaded for applications that require a BI to monitor the
position of heat exchanger isolation valves. This Input is loaded when the
Valve Open Status node is selected.
• PHWPX-S (Primary HW Pump X Status, where X is 1-4): This Input is
loaded for applications that require a BI for primary hot water pump status.
This Input is loaded when the Pump Status node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per pump.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any Manual
Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) option is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Hot Water Reset by OA-T: This module is required for resetting the
setpoint by outdoor air. The module is loaded when the Loop Supply
Water Temp, Loop Return Water Temp, On Off Boilers by Return, 3-
way Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected.
State Generation
• Boilers Available: This module is used in applications that need to
calculate how many boilers or heat exchangers are available to use to meet
the heating load. The module is loaded when the Parallel Primary HW
Pumps node is selected, or when the Inlet Valve node or With Isolation
Valves node is selected in the Heat Exchanger section.
• Isolation Valve Status: This module is required for applications that
contain isolation valves. The module is loaded when the With Isolation
Valves or the Isolation Valves on Each Boiler node is selected.

Central Plant Applications 755

 • Modulating HX or Boiler Sequencing: This module is required for
applications that contain modulating heating devices. The module is loaded
when the Modulated Burners node is selected, or when heat exchangers
have the With Isolation Valves or Inlet Valve node selected.
Output Control
• Boiler X Control (where X is 1-2): This module is loaded for applications
that need to output a stop-start signal to a heat exchanger. This module is
loaded when the Heat Exchangers node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per heat exchanger.
- The Boiler 2 Control module is loaded when the Two heat exchangers
node is selected.
• Boiler X Enable LV (where X is 1-2): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a heat exchanger. This
module is loaded when the Heat Exchangers node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per heat exchanger.
• Boiler X Interlock Cmd LV (where X is 1-2): This module is loaded for
applications that need to calculate interlock device status. This module is
loaded when the With Isolation Valves node is selected and the Valve
Open Status node is not selected. Specific modules are loaded per heat
exchanger.
• Boiler Rotation Small: This module is loaded for applications that contain
boilers. The module is loaded when the Heat Exchanger node and the
Inlet Valve node is selected.
• Hot Water Bypass Valve Control: This module is required for applications
that contain a pressure control bypass valve. The module is loaded when
the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor node in the Dedicated Boiler
Pump, the Parallel Boiler Pump, or the Heat Exchanger section is selected.
• HXX Multi Valve Span (where the second X is 1-2): This module is
required for applications that contain a 2 inlet valves per heat exchanger.
This module is loaded when the Two Valves node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per heat exchanger.
• Modulating Device PID: This module is used for multiple functions. It is
used in applications that contain modulated boiler burners, 3 way mixing
valves, heat exchanger inlet valves, or loop mixing valves. The module is
loaded when the Modulate Burner(s), 3-way Mixing Valve, Inlet Valve,
or Loop Mixing Valve node is selected.
• Number of Devices Running LV: This module is included in applications
the need to calculate the number of heating devices running. The module is
loaded when the Hot Water/Steam Boilers node is selected and the OA-T
node is not selected, or when the Heat Exchanger node is selected and the
With Isolation Valves or the Inlet Valve node is selected.

756 CCT Help: Applications

 • PID LV: This module is used for multiple functions. It is used in
applications that contain modulated boiler burners, heat exchanger inlet
valves, or loop mixing valves. The module is loaded when the Modulate
Burner(s), or Inlet Valve, or Loop Mixing Valve node is selected.
• Primary HW Pump X LV (where X is 1-3): This module is loaded for
applications that need to calculate individual parallel primary hot water
pump runtime. This module is loaded when the Pump Rotation
(Runtime) node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Primary HW Pump X Totalization (where X is 1-3): This module is loaded
for applications that need to calculate individual parallel primary hot water
pump runtime. This module is loaded when the Pump Rotation
(Runtime) node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Primary Pump X Control (where X is 1-3): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a primary HW pump.
This module is loaded when the Heat Exchangers node is selected.
Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Primary Pump Rotation Small: This module is loaded for applications that
contain parallel primary HW pumps. The module is loaded when the
Parallel Primary HW Pumps node or the Heat Exchangers node is
selected.
• Primary PumpX Enable LV (where X is 1-3): This module is loaded for
applications that need to output a stop-start signal to a parallel primary HW
pump. This module is loaded when the Parallel Primary HW Pumps
node or the Heat Exchangers node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per pump.
• Heat Exchanger with Low Limit Output: This module is loaded when
Return Water Low Limit Control for an Inlet Valve is selected.
Outputs
• BYPV-O (Bypass Valve Output): This Output is loaded for applications
that need an AO to control a bypass valve to maintain loop differential
pressure. The Output is loaded when one of the Bypass Valve with Diff
Pressure Sensor nodes is selected.
• HXXISOV-C (Heat Exchanger X Isolation Valve Command, where X
is 1-2): This Output is loaded for applications that need a BO to control
boiler isolation valves. This Output is loaded when the With Isolation
Valves node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per boiler.
• HXXV1-O (Heat Exchanger X Valve 1 Output, where X is 1-2): This
Output is loaded for applications that need an AO to control heat exchanger
inlet valves. This Output is loaded when the Inlet Valve node is selected.
Specific modules are loaded per heat exchanger.

Central Plant Applications 757

 • HXXV2-O (Heat Exchanger X Valve 2 Output, where X is 1-2): This
Output is loaded for applications that need an AO to control a second heat
exchanger inlet valve. This Output is loaded when the Two Valves node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per heat exchanger.
• HXMV-O (Heat Exchanger Mixing Valve Output): This Output is
loaded for applications that need an AO to control heat exchanger mixing
valves. The Output is loaded when the Loop Mixing Valve node is
selected.
• PHWPX-C (Primary HW Pump X Command, where X is 1-3): This
Output is loaded for applications that need a BO to control parallel primary
pumps. This Output is loaded when the Parallel Primary HW Pumps or
Heat Exchangers node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
See the Outputs section.

758 CCT Help: Applications

Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping (CH)
Use this section for systems with secondary pumping subsystems.
The selection options for Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping are:
• Number of Pumps: This option is used to select the number of secondary HW
pumps.
- One Pump
- Two Pumps
- Three Pumps
- Four Pumps
• Pump Rotation (Runtime): This option automatically changes pump staging
order based on runtime (equal runtime rotation strategy).
• Pump Status: This option monitors the status of the pump.
- Loss of Status Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
• Lockout Switch (BI)
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to a
motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of time
(for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor from
seizing up).
If the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor or Pressure (Steam Boilers) is
selected, Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping cannot be selected.

Central Plant Applications 759

 Modules (CH Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping)
The Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping selections load the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• HWDP-SP (HW Differential Pressure Setpoint): This Network Input is
loaded for applications that require pressure control for the hot water loop.
This Network Input is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot
Water Pumping node is selected, or one of the Bypass Valve with Diff
Pressure Sensor nodes is selected in the Dedicated Pumps, Parallel
Pumps, or in the Heat Exchanger section.
• SHWP-ROT (Rotate Secondary Hot Water Pumps): This Network
Input is used for applications that require secondary pumps to be rotated
according to the equal runtime strategy. This Network Input is loaded when
the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node is selected,
unless there is only one pump in the system (that is, the One node is
selected) or the pumps should not be rotated according to runtime (that is,
the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node is not selected).
• SHWPX-LO (SHWPX Lockout Switch, where X is 1-4): This Network
Input is loaded when the Alarm Management Lockout Switch node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• SHWPSTG-SP (Stageup Setpoint): This Network Input is required for
applications that contain secondary pumping systems. The Network Input
is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node
is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.

760 CCT Help: Applications

 Inputs
• HW-DP (Hot Water Differential Pressure): This Input is loaded for
applications that require pressure control for the hot water loop. This Input
is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node
is selected, or one of the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor nodes is
selected in the Dedicated Pumps, Parallel Pumps, or in the Heat
Exchanger section, or the Loop Differential Pressure Sensor node is
selected.
• SHWPX-S (Secondary HW Pump X Status, where X is 1-4): This Input
is loaded for applications that require a BI to monitor secondary pump
status. This Input is loaded when the Pump Status node is selected.
Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any Manual
Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) option is selected.
• SPHWPX-BA (Secondary Hot Water Pump X Belt Alarm Binary
Input, where X is 1-4): This module is loaded when Alarm Management
Belt Alarm is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• SHWPX-LO (Secondary Hot Water Pump X Lockout Switch Binary
Input, where X is 1-4): This module is loaded when Alarm Management
Lockout Switch, Lockout Switch (BI) is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per pump.
• SHWPX-FAULT (SHWPX VFD Fault BI, where X is 1-4): This Input
is loaded when the Alarm Management Frequency Converter Fault
node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• SHWPX Status Alarm Determination (where x is 1-4): This module is
loaded when Pump Status and One Pump through Four Pumps is
selected.
State Generation
• Secondary HW Pump Sequencing: This module is required for an
application that contains a secondary pumping system. The module is
loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node is
selected.
• SHWPX Alarms (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded when Alarm
Management and One Pump through Four Pumps is selected.

Central Plant Applications 761

 Output Control
• Number of SHWP Running LV: This module is required for an application
that contains a secondary pumping system. The module is loaded when the
Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node is selected.
• Secondary Hot Water Pump PID: This module is required for an
application that contains a secondary pumping system. The module is
loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node is
selected.
• Secondary Hot Water Pump Rotation Small: This module is required for an
application that contains a secondary pumping system. The module is
loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node is
selected.
• Secondary HW Pump X Control v2 (where X is 1-4): This module is
loaded for applications that contain a secondary pumping system. This
module is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water
Pumping node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Secondary HW Pump X LV (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded for
applications that need to calculate individual secondary pump runtime.
This module is loaded when the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Secondary HW Pump X Totalization (where X is 1-4): This module is
loaded for applications that need to calculate individual secondary pump
runtime. This module is loaded when the Pump Rotation (Runtime) node
is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• Secondary PumpX Enable LV (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded for
applications that contain a secondary pumping system. This module is
loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node is
selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• SHWP PID LV: This module is required for an application that contains a
secondary pumping system. The module is loaded when the Secondary
Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node is selected.
• SHWPX Blocking Protection (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded
when Blocking Protection and One Pump through Four Pumps is
selected.

762 CCT Help: Applications

 Outputs
• SHWPX-C (Secondary HW Pump X Command, where X is 1-4): This
module is loaded for applications that control secondary pumps. This
Output is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water
Pumping node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
• SHWPX-O (Secondary HW Pump X Output, where X is 1-4): This
module is loaded for applications that control secondary pumps. This
Output is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water
Pumping node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump
See the Outputs section.

Central Plant Applications 763

Zone Loop Control (CH)
The selection options for Zone Loop Control are:
• Number of Zones
- One
- Two
- Three
- Four
- Five
- Six
- Seven
- Eight
• Pump for Each Zone
• Mixing Valve for Each Zone
- Reset Zone Setpoint by OA-T

Modules (CH Zone Loop Control)

The Zone Loop Control selections load the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• ZNX-SP (Zone X Temperature Setpoint, where X is 1-8): This Network
Input is loaded when the Mixing Valve for Each Zone node is selected.
One through Eight modules appear depending on the number of zones
selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ZNX-T (Zone X Temperature, where X is 1-8): One through Eight
modules appear depending on the number of zones selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Heating Zone X SP Reset (where X is 1-8): This module is loaded when
Mixing Valve for Each Zone, Reset Zone Setpoint by OA-T is selected.
One through Eight modules appear depending on the number of zones
selected.
Output Control
• Heating Zone X Output (where X is 1-8): One through Eight modules
appear depending on the number of zones selected.

764 CCT Help: Applications

 Outputs
• ZHLPX-C (Zone X Heating Pump Command, where X is 1-8): This
module is loaded for applications with zone loop control when Pump for
Each Zone is selected. One through Eight modules appear depending on
the number of zones selected.
• ZNXHTG-O (Zone X Heating Output, where X is 1-8): One through
Eight modules appear depending on the number of zones selected.
See the Outputs section.

Central Plant Applications 765

Central Heating Control Logic Selection

Boiler Options (CH)

Use this section for miscellaneous boiler options.
The selection options for Boiler Options are:
• Boiler Status: This option monitors the status of the boiler.
• Boiler General Alarm: This option monitors the general alarm status of the
boiler.
• Boiler High Temp Alarm: This option monitors the high temperature alarm
status of the boiler.
• Boiler Flow Switch: This option monitors the flow switch status of the boiler.
• Combustion Air Damper: This option controls a combustion air damper for
the boilers.
- End Switch: This option monitors the Combustion air damper status.
• Hot Water Supply Temp Per Boiler: This option monitors the leaving or
supply water temperature of each boiler.
• Hot Water Return Temp Per Boiler: This option monitors the entering or
return water temperature of each boiler.
• Isolation Valves on each Boiler: This option controls an isolation valve for
each boiler.
- Valve Open Status: This option monitors the isolation valve status.
• Main Steam Header Pressure: This option monitors the steam pressure of the
system.
If the Hot Water/Steam Boilers is not selected, none of these options can be
selected.
If the Pressure (Steam Boilers) is selected, the Main Steam Header Pressure
cannot be selected.
If the Pressure (Steam Boilers) or Dedicated Boiler Pump(s) is selected, the
Isolation Valves on each Boiler cannot be selected.

766 CCT Help: Applications

 Modules (CH Boiler Options)
The Boiler Options selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Inputs
• BLRX-A (Boiler X Alarm, where X is 1-4): This Input is included in
applications that require a BI to monitor the boiler general alarm. This
Input is loaded when the Boiler General Alarm node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per boiler.
• BLRXEW-T (Boiler X Entering Water Temperature, where X is 1-4):
This Input is included in applications that require an AI to monitor the
boiler entering water temperature. This Input is loaded when the Hot
Water Return Temp per Boiler node is selected. Specific modules are
loaded per boiler.
• BLRX-FS (Boiler X Flow Switch, where X is 1-4): This Input is included
in applications that require a BI to monitor the boiler flow status. This
Input is loaded when the Boiler Flow Switch node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per boiler.
• BLRXHT-A (Boiler X High Temperature Alarm, where X is 1-4): This
Input is included in applications that require a BI to monitor the boiler high
temperature alarm. This Input is loaded when the Boiler High Temp
Alarm node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per boiler.
• BLRXISOV-S (Boiler X Isolation Valve Status, where X is 1-4): This
Input is included in applications that require a BI to monitor the open status
of boiler isolation valves. This Input is loaded when the Valve Open Status
node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per boiler.
• BLRXLW-T (Boiler X Leaving Water Temperature, where X is 1-4):
This Input is included in applications that require an AI to monitor the
boiler leaving water temperature. This Input is loaded when the Hot Water
Supply Temp per Boiler node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per
boiler.
• BLRX-S (Boiler X Status, where X is 1-4): This Input is included in
applications that require a BI to monitor the boiler operating status. This
Input is loaded when the Boiler Status node is selected. Specific modules
are loaded per boiler.
• STM-P (Steam Pressure): This Input is loaded for applications that
require an AI to monitor the steam pressure. The Input is loaded when the
Pressure or Main Steam Header Pressure node is selected.
• COMBDPR-S (Combustion Damper Status): This Input is loaded for
applications that require a BI to monitor the open status of a combustion
damper. The Input is loaded when the End Switch node is selected.
See the Inputs section.

Central Plant Applications 767

 State Generation
• Isolation Valve Status: This module is required for applications that
contain isolation valves. The module is loaded when the With Isolation
Valves or the Isolation Valves on Each Boiler node is selected.
Output Control
• Boiler X Interlock Cmd LV (where X is 1-4): This module is loaded for
applications that need to calculate interlock device status. This module is
loaded when the Isolation Valves on Each Boiler node is selected and the
Valve Open Status node is not selected. Specific modules are loaded per
boiler.
Outputs
• BLRXISOV-C (Boiler X Isolation Valve Command, where X is 1-4):
This Output is included in applications that require a BO to command
boiler isolation valves. This Output is loaded when the Isolation Valves on
Each Boiler node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per boiler.
• COMBDPR-C (Combustion Damper Command): This Output is loaded
for applications that require a BO to command the combustion damper.
The Output is loaded when the Combustion Air Damper node is selected.
See the Outputs section.

768 CCT Help: Applications

Heat Exchanger Options (CH)
This section is for general options associated with heat exchanger systems.
The selection options for Heat Exchanger Options are:
• Loop Bypass Temperature Sensor: This option monitors the loop bypass
temperature.
• Hot Water Supply Temp Per Heat Exchanger: This option monitors the
leaving (supply) water temperature for each heat exchanger.
• Hot Water Return Temp Per Heat Exchanger: This option monitors the
entering (return) water temperature for each heat exchanger.
• Steam Pressure Sensor: This option monitors steam pressure.
If Heat Exchangers is not selected, none of these options can be selected.

Modules (CH Heat Exchanger Options)

The Heat Exchanger Options selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• PHWPX-LO (PHWPX Lockout Switch, where X is 1-8): This Network
Input is loaded when the Primary HW Pumps Alarm Management
Lockout Switch node is selected. Specific modules are loaded per pump.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• HXBYP-T (Heat Exchanger Bypass Temperature): This Input is
included in applications that require an AI to monitor the heat exchanger
bypass temperature. The Input is loaded when the Loop Bypass
Temperature Sensor node is selected.
• HXSTM-P (Heat Exchanger Steam Pressure): This Input is included in
applications that require an AI to monitor the heat exchanger steam
pressure. The Input is loaded when the Steam Pressure Sensor node is
selected.
• HXXEW-T (HXX Entering Water Temperature, where the second X is
1-2): This Input is included in applications that require an AI to monitor the
heat exchanger entering water temperature. This Input is loaded when the
Hot Water Return Temp Per Heat Exchanger node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per heat exchanger.
• HXXLW-T (HXX Leaving Water Temperature, where the second X is
1-2): This input is included in applications that require an AI to monitor the
heat exchanger leaving water temperature. This Input is loaded when the
Hot Water Supply Temp Per Heat Exchanger node is selected. Specific
modules are loaded per heat exchanger.
See the Inputs section.

Central Plant Applications 769

Secondary Hot Water Options (CH)
This section is for general options associated with secondary pumping systems.
The selection options for Secondary Hot Water Options are:
• Supply Temperature: This option monitors the secondary loop supply
temperature.
• Return Temperature: This option monitors the secondary loop return
temperature.
• Flow Meter: This option monitors the secondary loop flow rate.
• Building Load Meter: This option monitors the secondary loop BTUs.
If Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping is not selected, none of these
options can be selected.
If Calculate Building Load is selected, Return Temperature and Flow Meter
cannot be selected.
If BTU Meter AI is selected, Building Load Meter cannot be selected.
If Calculate Building Load, Loop Supply Water Temp, or Heat Exchangers is
selected, Supply Temperature cannot be selected.

Modules (CH Secondary Hot Water Options)

The Secondary Hot Water Options selections load the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Inputs
• BLDG-L (Building Load): This Input is loaded when the application
requires an AI for building load. The Input is loaded when the BTU Meter
AI or Building Load Meter node is selected.
• SHW-F (Secondary HW Flow): This Input is loaded for applications that
require an AI to monitor the secondary hot water flow. The Input is loaded
when the Calculate Building Load or Flow Meter node is selected.
• SHWR-T (Secondary HW Return Temp): This Input is loaded for
applications that require an AI to monitor the secondary hot water return
temperature. The Input is loaded when the Calculate Building Load or
Return Temperature node is selected.
• SHWS-T (Secondary HW Supply Temp): This Input is loaded for
applications that require an AI to monitor the secondary hot water supply
temperature. The Input is loaded when the Loop Supply Water Temp, 3-
way Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected and the
Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node is selected, or
when the Supply Temperature or Calculate Building Load node is
selected.
See the Inputs section.

770 CCT Help: Applications

General Options (CH)
This section is for general options associated with all systems.
The selection options for General Options are:
• Loop Differential Pressure Sensor: This option monitors the secondary loop
differential pressure.
• Primary HW Supply Temperature: This option monitors the primary loop
supply temperature.
• Primary HW Return Temperature: This option monitors the primary loop
return temperature.
• Outdoor Air Temperature: This option monitors the outdoor air temperature.
• Outdoor Air Humidity: This option monitors the outdoor air humidity.
• Mechanical Room Temperature: This option monitors the mechanical room
temperature.
If Loop Supply Water Temp or Heat Exchangers is selected, Primary HW
Supply Temperature cannot be selected.

Central Plant Applications 771

 Modules (CH General Options)
The General Options selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Inputs
• HW-DP (Hot Water Differential Pressure): This Input is loaded for
applications that require pressure control for the hot water loop. This Input
is loaded when the Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node
is selected, one of the Bypass Valve with Diff Pressure Sensor nodes is
selected in the Dedicated Pumps, Parallel Pumps, or Heat Exchanger
section, or the Loop Differential Pressure Sensor node is selected.
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity): This Input is loaded for applications that
require an AI to monitor the outdoor air humidity. The Input is loaded
when the Outdoor Air Humidity node is selected.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This Input is loaded for applications
that require an AI to monitor the outdoor air temperature. The Input is
loaded when the Outdoor Air Temperature node is selected.
• PHWR-T (Primary HW Return Temp): This Input is loaded for
applications that require an AI to monitor the primary hot water return
temperature. The Input is loaded when the Loop Return Water Temp, On
Off Boilers by Return, or Primary HW Return Temperature node is
selected.
• PHWS-T (Primary HW Supply Temp): This Input is loaded for
applications that require an AI to monitor the primary hot water supply
temperature. The Input is loaded when the Loop Supply Water Temp,
3-way Mixing Valve, or Heat Exchangers node is selected and the
Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping node is not selected, or
when the Primary HW Supply Temperature node is selected.
• MR-T (Mechanical Room Temperature): This Input is loaded for
applications that require an AI to monitor the mechanical room
temperature. The Input is loaded when the Mechanical Room
Temperature node is selected.
See the Inputs section.

772 CCT Help: Applications

Chapter 21: CCT Help: Modules
Modules
Introduction
A module is a component made up of logic blocks used to create portions of the
overall control logic of a system. Module inputs are used to influence the state or
values presented as outputs. You can view and /or edit modules highlighted in tan
in the Control View, but changes should not be made until the default
configuration is thoroughly understood and the effect of changes on the connected
outputs is considered. See the Configuring a System section for information on
viewing and modifying modules.
Modules are categorized according to function. The modules are visually
displayed in these categories (sections/columns) in the Control View of CCT (for
example, the Network Inputs and Outputs sections). The modules in the sections
are automatically added based on the items selected for your system in the System
Selection Wizard. For information on this wizard, see the System Selection Wizard
in the Configuring a System section.
See Figure 2-1 in the Configuring a System section for the location of the module
categories in the CCT UI.
See the following sections for information on the module categories and the
individual modules they contain:
• Network Inputs
• Inputs
• Setpoint Determination/Misc
• State Generators
• Output Controller
• Network Outputs
• Outputs
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.
The module sections provide descriptions of the modules, indicates where they are
used in applications, and identifies their inputs and outputs. See the Module
Descriptions section for further descriptions of the type of information provided in
this Help system for the modules.

Modules 773
Module Descriptions
The Setpoint Determination/Misc, State Generators, and Output Controller module
sections contain the following topics to describe the modules:
• Module Category Introduction
• Module Group Overview
• Module Overview
• Module Use in Applications
• Attributes
• Primary States
• Reliability
If a section does not apply to a particular module, it is not included.
The Network Inputs, Inputs, Network Outputs, and Outputs sections contain
similar information, but cover the modules as a general group.

Module Category Introduction

The Introduction section describes the overall module type and lists the groups of
modules it contains.

Module Group Overview

Each module group has an Overview that describes the group and lists the modules
it contains.

Module Overview
This section describes the module’s operation, behavior, and use. This section also
indicates if you can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT
software.

Module Use in Applications

This section indicates how the module is identified in the CCT software. This
section includes a table that lists the individual module instances used by that
particular group of modules and the applications in which the module instance is
used.
To see module connections and how modules interact:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

774 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes
This section contains a table describing the module group’s attributes/parameters.
The table has four columns:
• Name: Indicates the name of the attribute/parameter. If the attribute/parameter
has a separate BACnet Exposed name, it is listed first, followed by the standard
attribute/parameter name in parenthesis; for example. SA-AREA (Supply
Area).
• Type: Indicates the attribute/parameter’s type. Options include:
- Configuration Mode Only (C): Indicates if the attribute/parameter
appears in only the Configuration mode.
- Generated State (Default Element) (G): Indicates if the attribute/
parameter is a state generated by the module’s logic. This attribute/
parameter is the logic’s Default Element and appears in the Control View
columns below the module name.
- Simulation and Commissioning Modes Only (SC): Indicates if the
attribute/parameter appears in only the Simulation and Commissioning
modes.
- Calculated Value (Outputs) (V): Indicates if the attribute/parameter is a
value calculated by module’s logic and configuration in the State Tables.
This attribute/parameter appears in the Parameters table in the Control
View and/or in the Details dialog box.
Note: All attributes/parameters are exposed to BACnet systems by default
(BACnet Exposed attributes/parameters in the Details dialog box are
True) and appear in the Parameters table in the Control View. The
BACnet Exposed Parameter (B) indication type has been removed
from the Help system’s attribute tables.
• Description: Describes the function of the attribute/parameter.
• Default Value: Indicates the default value of the attribute/parameter with its
units and identifies the enumeration set used when applicable.
If the attributes/parameters listed in the attribute table apply to the entire module
group and no module instance-specific attributes require identification, all
attributes/parameters are listed in the table normally. If the module group has
module instance-specific attributes/parameters requiring identification, any
attributes/parameters applying to the entire module group are listed first under a
Module Group Common Attributes row header, then the attributes/parameters
applying only to certain instances are listed separately under a Module Instance
Name-Specific Attributes row header. For an example of these row headers, see
the Balancer Override module group’s attribute table.

Modules 775
Primary States
This section describes Normal transitions for complex modules. When applicable,
this section also includes a Command Hierarchy table showing the common inputs
and states.

Reliability
This section describes the module’s handling of the reliability of its inputs
(paragraph or table format).

776 CCT Help: Modules

Chapter 22: CCT Help: Modules
Network Inputs
The Network Inputs module category appears in the Control View of CCT and lists
the network inputs defined for the system. Network inputs are typically used to
read/write values to/from a supervisory device or using peer-to-peer references
between FECs. When a network input is not integrated into the network, it uses its
default value and can be commanded from the Commissioning mode of CCT.
Network inputs connect into other modules or the State Table.
Network Input modules fall into one of the following categories:
• Generator Interface Modules
• Enable Modules
• Sensor and Setpoint Modules
• Rotation and Switch Modules
• Generic (Add New) Modules
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Network Inputs 777

Generator Interface Modules
The Generator Interface Network Inputs are always paired with a State Generation
module. These inputs drive a state condition in their paired State Generation
module that is captured in the State Selection Table.
For example, the Emergency-Mode Network Input is integrated with the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generation module. The state
conditions set by the Emergency-Mode Network Input are Normal, Pressurize,
Depressurize, Purge, Shutdown, and Pre-Shutdown. These states are represented in
the State Selection Table so that the desired result of the state with the Output
Controllers can be set in the table.
The following table describes the Generator Interface Network Input modules and
lists the applications in which they are used.
Table 22-98: Generator Interface Network Input Modules (Part 1 of 2)
Name Description Applications
APP-MODE Application Mode - Provides input to All Air Handling Unit Applications
the Application Mode Determination
State Generation module.
AUTOCAL-C Autocalibrate - Provides input to All VAV Applications
Autocalibration Sequence State
Generation module.
EHO-MODE Energy Hold Off Mode - Provides • Fan Coil Application
input to Energy Hold Off • Heat Pump Application
Determination State Generation • Unit Ventilator Application
module. • VAV Single Duct Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
EMERGENCY-MODE Emergency Mode - Provides input to • All Air Handling Unit Applications
the Smoke Control Sequencing for • Heat Pump Application
UL-864-UUKL State Generation • Unit Ventilator Application
module. • All VAV Applications
OCC-OVERRIDE Occupancy Override - Provides input • All Air Handling Unit Applications
to Occupancy Mode Determination • Fan Coil Application
State Generation module. • Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
OCC-SCHEDULE Occupancy Schedule - Provides input • All Air Handling Unit Applications
to Occupancy Mode Determination • Fan Coil Application
State Generation module. • Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
SUMWIN-C SummerWinter - Connects directly to Any Applications with 2 Pipe Output Controller
the 2 Pipe Output Controller modules. modules:
• AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• Fan Coil Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
SYSTEM-EN System Enable - Provides input to the • Central Cooling Applications
Chilled Water System Enable or the • Central Heating Applications
Hot Water System Enable State
Generation module.

778 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 22-98: Generator Interface Network Input Modules (Part 2 of 2)
Name Description
SYSTEM-MODE System Mode - Provides input to the
System Mode Determination State
Generation module.
UNITEN-MODE Unit Enable Mode - Provides input to
Unit Enable Determination State
Generation module.
WC-C WarmupCooldown - Provides input to
one of the following modules:
• WarmupCooldown Sequencing
• WarmupCooldown Determination
• WarmupCooldown Pass Through
ZNDPR-MODE Zone Damper Mode - Provides input
to the Zone Damper Mode Pass
Through SG module.
ZNHTGVALVE-MODE Zone Htg Valve Mode - Provides input
to the Zone Htg Valve Mode Pass
Through SG module.
ZNSTAGEDHTG- Zone Staged Htg Mode - Provides
MODE input to the Zone Staged Htg Mode
Pass Through SG module.
Network Inputs
Applications
• Fan Coil Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
• All Air Handling Unit Applications
• Fan Coil Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
• VAV Single Duct Application
• All other Applications
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
779
Enable Modules
All Network Inputs with a -EN name are always paired with an Availability type
State Generation module. These inputs drive a state condition in their paired State
Generation module that is captured in the State Selection Table.
The primary use of the Enable modules is to allow system-wide logic to determine
if the Central Heating and Cooling Central Plants are providing Hot or Chilled
Water to the devices. For example, if the HTG-EN Network Input is set to a False
state, the Box Heating isAvailable Pass Through State Generation module does not
allow the Heating Valve to open on a VAV Box.
The following table describes the Enable Network Input modules and lists the
applications in which they are used.
Table 22-99: Enable Network Input Modules (Part 1 of 2)
Name Description Applications
BASIN-C Drain Basin - Provides input to the • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
Humidity Scrubber Output Output • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
Controller module. • AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Application
CLG-EN Cooling isAvailable - Provides input to one
of the following modules:
• Cooling is Available Pass Through • Fan Coil Application
• Cooling Availability Determination • All Air Handling Unit Applications
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
ECON-EN Economizer isAvailable - Provides an input • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
to the Economizer Availability • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
Determination module. • AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
HC-EN 2 Pipe isAvailable - Provides an input to • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
the 2 Pipe is Available Pass Through State • AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
Generation module. • Fan Coil Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
HR-EN Heat Recovery isAllowed - Allows or locks • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
out Heat Recovery operation where the • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
actual suitability is determined locally to set • AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
the device for the heating or cooling • AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
operation. • AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Application
HTG-EN Heating isAvailable and Box Heating
isAvailable - Provides input to one of the
following modules:
• Heating is Available Pass Through • Fan Coil Application
• Box Heating is Available Pass Through • VAV Single Duct Application
• Heating Availability Determination • Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
HUM-EN Humidification isAvailable - Provides an All Air Handling Unit Applications
input to the Humidification is Available
Pass Through State Generation module.

780 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 22-99: Enable Network Input Modules (Part 2 of 2)
Name Description
PH-EN Preheat isAvailable - Provides an input to
the Preheat Availability Determination
State Generation module.
RH-EN Reheat isAvailable - Provides an input to
the Reheat Availability Determination State
Generation module.
SUPHTG-EN Supp Heating isAvailable - Provides an
input to the Supplemental Heating is
Available Pass Through State Generation
module.
SYS-RESET System Reset - Provides manual restart
functionality.
ZNHTG-EN Zone Heating IsAvailable - Provides input
to the Zone Heating Availability
Determination State Generation module
Network Inputs
Applications
• AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Application
All Air Handling Unit Applications
• VAV Single Duct Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Application
• Central Cooling Applications
• Central Heating Applications
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
781
Sensor and Setpoint Modules
Key Sensor and Setpoint Network Inputs are created during System Selection to
allow system-wide logic to easily interface with the local control logic.
Typical examples for sensors include scenarios when the Supervisory System
provides Outdoor Air Temperature and Humidity values for all the local devices
using Network Inputs. An example use is that a Supervisory device reads an
Outdoor Air Temperature sensor from one device and writes its value to the
network input of other devices.
Another example is that slave VAV box applications read key values from the
master VAV box applications using peer-to-peer references to make sure the zone
under control does not have some VAV boxes calling for cooling while others are
calling for heating.
The following table describes the Sensor and Setpoint Network Input modules and
lists the applications in which they are used.
Note: If you wish to change the default names used for these modules, you can do
so by editing the Object Naming Preferences. See the following topics in
the Setting and Using Preferences section for details: Object Naming and
Signal Preferences, Setting Default Object Naming and Signal
Preferences, and Preferences-Object Naming and Signal Screen.
Table 22-100: Sensor and Setpoint Network Input Modules (Part 1 of 4)
Name Description Applications
BLDGP-SP Building Static Pressure Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
BLR-SP Boiler Setpoint Central Heating Applications
BLRSTG-SP Boiler Stage-up Setpoint Central Heating Applications
CD-OA% CD OA Percent • VAV Dual Duct Application
• VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
CDT-SP Cold Deck Air Temperature Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Application
CH-SP Chiller Setpoint Central Cooling Applications
CHWDP-SP CHW Differential Pressure Setpoint Central Cooling Applications
CHWDT-SP Differential Temperature Chill Water Central Cooling Applications
Setpoint
CLGOATLOCKOUT-SP OA Cooling Enable Setpoint • All Air Handling Unit Applications
• Central Cooling Applications
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
CLGUNOCC-SP Night Cooling Setpoint All Air Handling Unit Applications
CTSTG-SP CT StageUp Setpoint Central Cooling Applications
CW-SP Condenser Water Setpoint Central Cooling Applications
DAP-SP Duct Static Pressure Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application

782 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 22-100: Sensor and Setpoint Network Input Modules (Part 2 of 4)
Name Description Applications
DATLL-SP Discharge Air Low Limit Setpoint • Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
DAT-SP Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit Application
DCPLF-SP Decouple Loop Flow Setpoint Central Cooling Applications
EAT-SP Exhaust Air Temperature Setpoint AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
FAN-RESET Fan Alarm Reset • Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
FBPD-SWO Network Switchover • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Application
FLOW-DIFF Flow Differential Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
FLOW-LL Airflow Low Limit • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
FLUSHPOS Flush Position • Fan Coil Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
FROST-DIFF Frost Protect Differential Central Heating Applications
FROST-SPX (Where X Frost Protect OA Setpoint X Central Heating Applications
Is 1-2)
FSCS-EF FSCS Exhaust Fan • AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
FSCS-RF FSCS Return Fan • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
FSCS-RLF FSCS Relief Fan • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
FSCS-SF FSCS Supply Fan • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
HD-OA% HD OA Percent • VAV Dual Duct Application
• VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
HDT-SP Hot Deck Air Temperature Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Application
HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP OA Heating Enable Setpoint • All Air Handling Unit Applications
• Central Heating Applications
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
HTGUNOCC-SP Night Heating Setpoint All Air Handling Unit Applications
HWDP-SP HW Differential Pressure Setpoint Central Heating Applications

Network Inputs 783

 Table 22-100: Sensor and Setpoint Network Input Modules (Part 3 of 4)
Name Description Applications
HWTHI-SP Hot Water Supply Temperature High Central Heating Applications
Reset Temperature Output Range
High
HWTLO-SP Hot Water Supply Temperature Low Central Heating Applications
Reset Temperature Output Range
Low
HWT-OARSTA Hot Water Supply Temperature Central Heating Applications
Setpoint Reset Input Range Low
HWT-OARSTB Hot Water Supply Temperature Central Heating Applications
Setpoint Reset Input Range High
HXSTG-SP Heat Exchanger Stage-up Setpoint Central Heating Applications
MAT-SP MA Temperature Setpoint Unit Ventilator Application
MOADPOS-SP Min OA Damper Position • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
MOAFLOW-SP Min OA Flow Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
MSTCDFLOW- Master CD Constant Flow Setpoint VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
OUTSTATE Control
MSTCDFLOW- Master CD Flow Setpoint Control VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
OUTSTATE
MSTHDFLOW- Master HD Flow Setpoint Control VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
OUTSTATE
MSTRCDFLOW- Master CD Flow Percent VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
PERCENT
MSTRFAN-C Master Fan Command VAV Slave Single Duct Application
MSTRFAN-O Master Fan Output VAV Slave Single Duct Application
MSTRFLOW-PERCENT Master Supply Flow Percent VAV Slave Single Duct Application
MSTRFLOW-S Master Flow Setpoint Status VAV Slave Single Duct Application
MSTRHDFLOW- Master HD Flow Percent VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
PERCENT
MSTRHTG-1C Master Heating Stage 1 Cmd VAV Slave Single Duct Application
MSTRHTG-2C Master Heating Stage 2 Cmd VAV Slave Single Duct Application
MSTRHTG-3C Master Heating Stage 3 Cmd VAV Slave Single Duct Application
MSTRHTG-C Master Heating Command VAV Slave Single Duct Application
MSTRHTG-O Master Heating Output VAV Slave Single Duct Application
MSTRSUPHTG-C Master Supp Heating Command • VAV Slave Single Duct Application
MSTRSUPHTG1-C Master Supp Heating Stage 1 Cmd • VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
MSTRSUPHTG-O Master Supp Heating Output • VAV Slave Single Duct Application
• VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
MSTRZN-CO2 Master Zone CO2 VAV Slave Single Duct Application
OAD-MINPOS OA Damper Minimum Position • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
OA-H Outdoor Air Humidity • All Air Handling Unit Applications
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application

784 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 22-100: Sensor and Setpoint Network Input Modules (Part 4 of 4)
Name Description Applications
OALT-SP OA Low Limit SP Central Heating Applications
OA-PERCENT OA Percent • VAV Single Duct Application
• VAV Slave Single Duct Application
OA-T Outdoor Air Temperature All Applications (except VAV Slave Applications)
OCCFLOW-DIFF Occupied Flow Differential Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
RAT-SP Return Air Temperature Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit Application
SA-T Supply Air Temperature VAV Single Duct Application
SCHWPSTG-SP Secondary Chill Water Stageup Central Cooling Applications
Setpoint
SHWPSTG-SP Stageup Setpoint Central Heating Applications
SLH-SP Sideloop Humidity Setpoint Sideloop Applications
SLP-SP Sideloop Pressure Setpoint Sideloop Applications
SLT-SP Sideloop Temperature Setpoint Sideloop Applications
STAGE-CAP Stage Capacity • Central Cooling Applications
• Central Heating Applications
Stage Capacity (%FLA) • Central Cooling Applications
Stage Capacity (AMPS) • Central Cooling Applications
STMP-SP Setpoint Central Heating Applications
UNIT-RESET Unit Reset All Air Handling Unit Applications
UNOCCFLOW-DIFF Unoccupied Flow Differential Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
ZN-H Zone Humidity • Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
ZN-T Zone Temperature • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit Application
ZNT-SP Common Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
Zone Temperature Setpoint • AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit Application
• Fan Coil Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
ZNX-SP Zone X Common Setpoint (where X is AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
1-8)
Zone X Temperature Setpoint (where Central Heating Applications
X is 1-4)
ZONE-DIFF Zone Differential Central Heating Applications

Network Inputs 785

Rotation and Switch Modules
Rotation and Switch Network Input modules are directly connected to Output
Control modules in Central Heating and Central Cooling applications, unless
otherwise indicated. The primary use of Rotation modules is to immediately
recalculate the equipment starting order. You can command this input for manual
rotation, or you can schedule it for automatic rotation. The primary use of
Maintenance Switch modules is to stop equipment from running during repairs or
maintenance. You can command Switch modules ON to put a piece of equipment
out of service. This action results in stopping the equipment if it is running and
taking it out of the rotation sequence until you command the maintenance switch
OFF.
The following table describes the Rotation and Switch Network Input modules and
lists the applications in which they are used.
Table 22-101: Rotation and Switch Network Input Modules (Part 1 of 2)
Name Description Applications
BLRX-LO (Where X Is 1-4) Blr X Lockout Switch - Provides input Central Heating Applications
to the PHWPX Alarms State
Generation module.
BLRX-MS (Where X Is 1-4) Blr X Maintenance Switch - Provides Central Heating Applications
input to the Boiler X Control Output
Control module.
BLR-ROT Rotate Boilers - Provides input to the Central Heating Applications
Boiler Rotation Small Output Control
module.
CHLRX-LO (Where X Is 1-8) ChillerX Lockout Switch - Provides Central Cooling Applications
input to the PCHWPX Alarms and
CWPX Alarms State Generation
modules.
CHX-MS (Where X Is 1-8) ChillerX Maintenance Switch - Central Cooling Applications
Provides input to the Chiller X Control
Output Control module.
CH-ROT Rotate Chillers - Provides input to the Central Cooling Applications
Chiller Rotation Small Output Control
module.
CTX-LO (Where X Is 1-8) TwrFanX Lockout Switch - Provides Central Cooling Applications
input to the TwrFanX Alarms State
Generation module.
CTX-MS (Where X Is 1-8) Cooling TowerX Maintenance Switch - Central Cooling Applications
Provides input to the Tower Fan X
Control Output Control module.
CT-ROT Rotate Tower Now - Provides input to Central Cooling Applications
the On/Off Fan Clg Twr Sequencing
State Generation module.
CWPX-LO (Where X Is 1-8) CWPX Lockout Switch - Provides Central Cooling Applications
input to the CWPX Alarms State
Generation module.
CWPX-MS (Where X Is 1-8) CWPX Maintenance Switch - Provides Central Cooling Applications
input to the CW Pump X Control
Output Control module.

786 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 22-101: Rotation and Switch Network Input Modules (Part 2 of 2)
Name
CWP-ROT
HX1-MS or HX2-MS
PCHWPX-LO (Where X Is 1-8)
PCHWPX-MS (Where X Is 1-8)
PCHWP-ROT
PHWPX-LO (Where X Is 1-4)
PHWPX-MS (Where X Is 1-4)
PHWP-ROT
SCHWPX-LO (Where X Is 1-8)
SCHWPX-MS (Where X Is 1-8)
SCHWP-ROT
SHWPX-LO (Where X Is 1-8)
SHWPX-MS (Where X Is 1-8)
SHWP-ROT
Network Inputs
Description Applications
Rotate Condenser Water Pumps - Central Cooling Applications
Provides input to the CW Pump
Rotation Small Output Control
module.
HX1 Maintenance Switch or Central Heating Applications
HX2 Maintenance Switch - Provides
input to the Boiler X Control Output
Control module.
PCHWPX Lockout Switch - Provides Central Cooling Applications
input to the PCHWPX Alarms State
Generation module.
PCHWPX Maintenance Switch - Central Cooling Applications
Provides input to the Primary CHW
Pump X Control Output Control
module.
Rotate Primary Chilled Water Pumps - Central Cooling Applications
Provides input to the CW Pump
Rotation Small Output Control
module.
PHWPX Lockout Switch - Provides Central Heating Applications
input to the PHWPX Alarms State
Generation module.
PHWPX Maintenance Switch - Central Heating Applications
Provides input to the Primary Pump X
Control Output Control module.
Rotate Primary Hot Water Pumps - Central Heating Applications
Provides input to the Primary Pump
Rotation Small Output Control
module.
SCHWPX Lockout Switch - Provides Central Cooling Applications
input to the SCHWPX Alarms State
Generation module.
SCHWPX Maintenance Switch - Central Cooling Applications
Provides input to the Secondary CHW
Pump X Modulating Control Output
Control module.
Rotate Secondary Chilled Water Central Cooling Applications
Pump - Provides input to the
Secondary CHW Pump Rotation
Small Output Control module.
SHWPX Lockout Switch - Provides Central Heating Applications
input to the SHWPX Alarms State
Generation module.
SHWPX Maintenance Switch - Central Heating Applications
Provides input to the Secondary HW
Pump X Control Output Control
module.
Rotate Secondary Hot Water Pumps - Central Heating Applications
Provides input to the Secondary Hot
Water Pump Rotation Small Output
Control module.
787
Generic (Add New) Modules
For Custom Application creation, generic Network Inputs can be created using the
right-click > New process available on the Network Inputs header in the Control
View. You have the choice of creating a Boolean, Enum, or Float-based Network
Input that can be renamed and integrated into the custom logic. See Adding a
Network Input in the Configuring a System section.
The following table describes the generic Network Input modules and lists the
applications in which they are used.
Table 22-102: Generic Network Input Modules
Name Description Applications
INPUT-BOOLEAN CS Input (Boolean) Custom Applications
INPUT-ENUM CS Input (Enum) Custom Applications
INPUT-FLOAT CS Input (Float) Custom Applications

788 CCT Help: Modules

Chapter 23: CCT Help: Modules
Inputs
The Inputs module category appears in the Control View of CCT and lists the
inputs defined for the system. An input defines an interface to the actual hardware
in a system. An input can represent a physical sensor in the system, or an input
associated with a sensor. Inputs get data directly from hardware input points of a
device.
See the following sections for information:
• Setting and Using Preferences: The Preferences - Object Naming screen lists
the inputs available in the system.
• Applications: The application sections list the inputs used by a particular
application.
• Configuring a System: This section explains how to add an input, adjust an
input signal, change an input name, and so on.
• Commissioning a System: This section explains how to commission inputs.
• CCT Input and Output Object Overview: This section describes the objects
used in CCT.
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Inputs 789
790 CCT Help: Modules
Chapter 24: CCT Help: Modules
Setpoint Determination/Misc
Introduction
The Setpoint Determination/Misc group includes modules that provide setpoints or
input to other modules (typically not state selection).
Setpoint Determination/Misc modules fall into one of the following categories:
• Central Plant
• Device Enable
• Device Mode Determination
• Fan Lockout
• Flow Calculation
• Setpoint Calculation
• Sideloop Signal Conditioning
• Timing
• Damper Trouble Detection
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 791

Central Plant
Overview
The Central Plant group provides modules used to calculate setpoint values for
heating and cooling equipment. The Central Plant group contains the following
modules:
• Add-8
• Subtract

Add-8

Overview
The Add-8 module is responsible for adding up to eight inputs. This module
accepts as inputs an Input 1 through Input 8 and has one output. This module adds
Input 1 through Input 8 with one output as the total.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Add-8)
• Attributes (Add-8)

Module Use in Applications (Add-8)

The Application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 24-103: Add-8 Uses in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Chiller Load Total Calc Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

792 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Add-8)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Add-8 modules:
Table 24-104: Add-8 Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CH-TOT V Indicates the sum of Input 1 through Input 0
8.
Input 1 Indicates the float variable to add to the 0
other inputs.
Input 2 Indicates the float variable to add to the 0
other inputs.
Input 3 Indicates the float variable to add to the 0
other inputs.
Input 4 Indicates the float variable to add to the 0
other inputs.
Input 5 Indicates the float variable to add to the 0
other inputs.
Input 6 Indicates the float variable to add to the 0
other inputs.
Input 7 Indicates the float variable to add to the 0
other inputs.
Input 8 Indicates the float variable to add to the 0
other inputs.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Setpoint Determination/Misc 793

Subtract

Overview
The Subtract module subtracts two inputs. This module accepts as inputs Input 1
and Input 2, and has one output. This module subtracts Input 1 from Input 2 and
the differential is the output.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Subtract)
• Attributes (Subtract)

Module Use in Applications (Subtract)

The Application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 24-105: Subtract Uses in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Supply Return Water Differential Calc Central Cooling Applications
Diff Flow Calc Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Subtract)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Subtract modules:
Table 24-106: Subtract Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CHWTEMP-DIFF or V Indicates the differential of Input 1 0
CHWFLOW-DIFF subtracted from Input 2.
[Output (Float)]
Input 1 Indicates the floating variable from which 0
Input 2 is subtracted.
Input 2 Indicates the variable that is subtracted 0
from Input 1.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

794 CCT Help: Modules

Device Enable
Overview
The Device Enable group provides the ability to enable devices based on network
commands or outdoor air temperature. The Device Enable group contains the
following modules:
• Economizer Availability
• Economizer Availability RA-T Compare
These modules are included in the Miscellaneous category because they typically,
but not always, provide information to other State Generation modules rather than
connecting directly to State Selection. Also, see the Device Enable category of
modules in the State Generators section.

Economizer Availability

Overview
The Economizer Availability module defines the suitability of the economizer
based on a number of possible inputs (including outdoor air temperature and
humidity, return air temperature, and humidity), a hardware switch commonly
know as Enthalpy Switch, and a network command that most likely originates in a
supervisory controller.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software;
however, the Free Cooling Availability contained within this module that performs
much of the module’s calculations cannot be viewed or modified.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Economizer Availability)
• Attributes (Economizer Availability)
• Reliability (Economizer Availability)

Module Use in Applications (Economizer Availability)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-107.
Table 24-107: Economizer Availability Uses In Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Economizer Availability Determination AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application

Setpoint Determination/Misc 795

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Economizer Availability)

Table 24-108 describes the attributes used by the Economizer Availability module.
Table 24-108: Economizer Availability Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Bypass Percent Provides the percent of air passing through the 20%
coil that is unaffected by the coil [%]. This is
used for the Model-Based Economizer Type.
Discharge Air Provides the effective discharge air 12.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Temperature temperature for the cooling coil. This is used for
the Model-Based Economizer Type.
ECON-AVAILABLE G, V Displays a value of True when increasing the
(Free Cooling volume of outside air can reduce the cooling
Available) coil load. This attribute contains a value of
False when the volume of outside air should be
at the minimum required for ventilation.
Economizer Type Allows you to select the type of economizer Temperature&Enthalpy
logic. Set Name: Free Cooling
Method
ECONSWO-SP Specifies the change over dry bulb temperature 20.0 Deg C, 68 Deg F
(Change Over used to determine if free cooling is available for
Temperature) the Dry Bulb Temperature economizer option.
Elevation Contains the distance above or below sea level 0 m, 0 ft
[m or ft]. This is used in the psychrometric
calculations performed for Economizer Type =
Temperature & Enthalpy or Model Based.
Hardware Free Cooling Provides an input that can be used to Not Available
Available determine whether the economizer is suitable Set Name: Not Available/
or not. The failsoft property on this attribute is Available
set to True. If this input becomes unreliable, the
default value of Not Available is used.
Hardware Free Cooling Available is typically
connected to the ECON-EN hardware input
(BI).
Minimum OA Percent Provides the percent of maximum supply fan 20%
flow rate required for the minimum amount of
ventilation air.
Network Free Cooling Provides an input to this module that can be False
Available used to determine whether the economizer is
suitable or not. True means suitable and False
means not suitable. The failsoft property on this
attribute is set to True. If this input becomes
unreliable, the default value of False is used.
Network Free Cooling Available is typically
connected to the ECON-EN Network Input.

796 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 24-108: Economizer Availability Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
OA Humidity Provides the relative humidity of the outdoor air 50.0%RH
and is used when the Economizer Type is
Temperature & Enthalpy or Model Based. OA
Humidity is typically connected from a Network
Input or hardware input (OA-H).
OA Temperature Contains the dry bulb temperature of the 25.0 Deg C, 77 Deg F
outside air.
Return Air Humidity Provides the relative humidity of the return air 50.0%RH
and is used when the Economizer Type is
Temperature & Enthalpy or Model Based.
Return Air Humidity is typically connected from
the RA-H hardware input.
Return Air Provides the dry bulb temperature of the return 20.0 Deg C, 68 Deg F
Temperature air and is used when the Economizer Type is
Temperature & Enthalpy or Model Based.
Return Air Temperature is typically connected
from the RA-T hardware input.
Suitability Selection Defines the method for determining the Local Sensors
suitability. Suitability may be a function of Set Name: Free Cooling
network suitability, hardware suitability, or Select
humidity and temperature.
Supply Fan Status Provides the operating status of air-handling True
unit supply fan. When the fan is off,
ECON-AVAILABLE is immediately set to False.
When the fan turns on, the conditions are
immediately evaluated to determine the
economizer status.
Running = True, Off = False.
Unit Set Specifies whether this module should operate SI, IP
in Metric or Imperial units. Set Name: Unit Set

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Economizer Availability)

Table 24-109: Economizer Availability Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Network Free Cooling The input is assumed to be False.
Available
Hardware Free Cooling The input is assumed to be False.
Available

Setpoint Determination/Misc 797

Economizer Availability RA-T Compare

Overview
The Economizer Availability RA-T Compare module compares the outdoor air
temperature with the return air temperature to determine economizer availability.
If the return air temperature is greater than the outdoor air temperature by the
Temp Difference SP value and the outdoor air temperature is less than the Change
Over Temperature minus the Change Over Differential, then the economizer is
available. When the difference drops below this value by the Temp Difference
Differential, the economizer is not available. If the outdoor air temperature rises
above the Change Over Temperature, the economizer is not available.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software;
however, the Free Cooling Availability contained within this module that performs
much of the module’s calculations cannot be viewed or modified.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Economizer Availability RA-T Compare)
• Attributes (Economizer Availability RA-T Compare)
• Reliability (Economizer Availability RA-T Compare)

Module Use in Applications (Economizer Availability RA-T Compare)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-110.
Table 24-110: Economizer Availability RA-T Compare Uses In
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Econ Enable OA versus RA AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

798 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Economizer Availability RA-T Compare)
Table 24-111 describes the attributes used by the Economizer Availability RA-T
Compare module.
Table 24-111: Economizer Availability RA-T Compare Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Change Over Determines whether the economizer is 4.5 Deg C, 8.0 Deg F
Differential available. When the OA Temperature is less
than the Change Over Temperature by this
value, free cooling is available.
ECON-AVAILABLE G, V Displays a value of True when increasing the False
(Free Cooling volume of outside air can reduce the cooling
Available) coil load. This attribute contains a value of
False when the volume of outside air should be
at the minimum required for ventilation.
ECONSWO-SP Specifies the change over dry bulb temperature 20.0 Deg C, 68 Deg F
(Change Over used to determine whether the economizer is
Temperature) available. When the OA Temperature is greater
than this value, the economizer is not available.
OA Temperature Contains the dry bulb temperature of the 25.0 Deg C, 77 Deg F
outside air.
Return Air Provides the dry bulb temperature of the return 20.0 Deg C, 68 Deg F
Temperature air.
Supply Fan Status Provides the operating status of the AHU True
supply fan (Running = True, Off = False).
Temp Difference SP Determines whether the economizer is 3.0 Deg C, 5.5 Deg F
available. When the Return Air Temperature
minus the OA Temperature is greater than this
value, the economizer is available.
Temp Difference Determines the value used to disable the 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
Differential economizer. When the Return Air Temperature
minus the OA Temperature is less than the
Temp Difference SP, the economizer is
disabled.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Economizer Availability RA-T Compare)

This module uses the last reliable value if its inputs become unreliable.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 799

Device Mode Determination
Overview
The Device Mode Determination group provides flow status determination for heat
pumps and unit ventilators, staged device enable and warmup cooldown
determination for VAV boxes, and summer winter mode determination for mixed
air and 100% outdoor air single duct air handling units.
The Device Mode Determination group contains the following modules:
• Flow Status Determination
• Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel
• Staged Device Enable Determination Series
• Status Alarm Determination
• SummerWinter Mode Determination
• WarmupCooldown Determination

Flow Status Determination

Overview
This module monitors the status of the Airflow Proving Switch as compared to the
commanded Fan Mode. The module adds some error checking to remove short
glitches in the signal and also indicates a fault should the fan command be on for a
length of time without any indication of proof of flow.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software,
but the Airflow Proving FSM contained within cannot be modified.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Flow Status Determination)
• Attributes (Flow Status Determination)
• Primary States (Flow Status Determination)
• Reliability (Flow Status Determination)

Module Use in Applications (Flow Status Determination)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group with the names in Table 24-112.
Table 24-112: Flow Status Determination Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Airflow Status Determination Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application

800 CCT Help: Modules

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Flow Status Determination)

Table 24-113 describes the attributes used by the Flow Status Determination
module.
Table 24-113: Flow Status Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Air Proving Switch Displays the current status of the Air Proving Off
Switch. Set Name: Off/On
Delay Specifies the delay allowed for the fan to start 30 Seconds
before a fault occurs.
Fan Mode Provides the last command sent to the fan. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Fan Status V Displays the current effective status of the
Airflow Proving Switch. This attribute is the
same as the Status except that Fault is
mapped to False.
FLOW-S (Status) G, V Displays the current effective status of the Set Name: False/True/Fault
Airflow Proving switch.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Flow Status Determination)

• False: The Airflow Proving Switch is Off and the Fan Mode is Off or has been
On for less than the Delay time.
• True: The Airflow Proving Switch is On and the Fan Mode is On.
• Fault: The Airflow Proving Switch is Off and the Fan Mode has been On for at
least the Delay time.

Reliability (Flow Status Determination)

This module uses the last reliable value if its inputs become unreliable.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 801

Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel

Overview
This module generates a True, False, or Fault state to indicate to a parallel staged
device that the airflow requirements have been met. For a parallel device (a
parallel fan in a single duct VAV box application), the only requirement to enable
the device is that the fan is commanded on.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel)
• Attributes (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel)
• Primary States (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel)
• Reliability (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel)

Module Use in Applications (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-114.
Table 24-114: Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel Uses in
Application System
Module Instance Name Applications
Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel VAV Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel)

Table 24-115 describes the attributes used by the Staged Device Enable
Determination Parallel module.
Table 24-115: Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Fan Mode Displays the last command sent to the fan. Off
Set Name: Off/On
STGDEV-STATE G, V Displays the current effective status for the Enable
(State) staged device. Set Name: False/True/Fault

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

802 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel)
• False: Conditions are not appropriate to allow staged devices to operate.
• True: Conditions are appropriate to allow staged devices to operate.
• Fault: Conditions are not appropriate to allow staged devices to operate.

Reliability (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel)

This module uses the last reliable value if its inputs become unreliable.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 803

Staged Device Enable Determination Series

Overview
This module generates the True, False, or Fault state to indicate to a staged device
that the airflow requirements have been met. If either the fan command (on/off) is
on or the supply flow is greater than the minimum flow value, the state is True.
This module is designed for use with VAV boxes that contain a heating coil in the
discharge air stream (series). This module can be used for VAV boxes with or
without a fan. If a fan does not exist, the default Fan Mode value is Off and the
default for the State does not change if the Fan Mode is not connected.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Staged Device Enable Determination Series)
• Attributes (Staged Device Enable Determination Series)
• Primary States (Staged Device Enable Determination Series)
• Reliability (Staged Device Enable Determination Series)

Module Use in Applications (Staged Device Enable Determination Series)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-116.
Table 24-116: Staged Device Enable Determination Series Uses in
Application System
Module Instance Name Applications
Staged Device Enable Determination Series VAV Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

804 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Staged Device Enable Determination Series)
Table 24-117 describes the attributes used by the Staged Device Enable
Determination Series module.
Table 24-117: Staged Device Enable Determination Series Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Fan Mode Displays the last command sent to the fan. Off
Set Name: Off/On
STGDEV-MINFLOW Displays the minimum required flow that must 100 l/s, 200 cfm
(Staged Device Min be reached (without the fan being commanded
Flow) on) before the system issues a True.
STGDEV-STATE G, V Displays the current effective status indicating Enable
(State) whether the staged device should be enabled Set Name: False/True/Fault
or disabled.
Supply Flow Indicated the current supply air flow rate. 0 l/s, 0 cfm

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Staged Device Enable Determination Series)

• False: Conditions are not appropriate to allow staged devices to operate.
• True: Conditions are appropriate to allow staged devices to operate.
• Fault: Conditions are not appropriate to allow staged devices to operate.

Reliability (Staged Device Enable Determination Series)

This module uses the last reliable value if its inputs become unreliable.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 805

Status Alarm Determination

Overview
This module generates the appropriate alarm state for a device. The Status Alarm
Determination module monitors the command and flow status to determine
whether the current state is Normal or Alarm.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Status Alarm Determination)
• Attributes (Status Alarm Determination)
• Primary States (Status Alarm Determination)
• Reliability (Status Alarm Determination)

Module Use in Applications (Status Alarm Determination)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-118.
Table 24-118: Status Alarm Determination Uses in Application System
(Part 1 of 2)
Module Instance Name
2 Pipe Pump Status Alarm Determination
Cooling Pump Status Alarm Determination
CWPX Status Alarm Determination (Where X
Is 1-8)
Exhaust Fan Status Alarm Determination
Heat Recovery Pump Status Alarm
Determination
HR Energy Wheel Status Alarm Determination
Min Outdoor Air Fan Status Alarm
Determination
PCHWPX Status Alarm Determination (Where
X Is 1-8)
PHWPX Status Alarm Determination (Where X
Is 1-4)
Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Central Heating Applications
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
Central Cooling Applications
Central Heating Applications

806 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 24-118: Status Alarm Determination Uses in Application System
(Part 2 of 2)
Module Instance Name
Preheat Pump Status Alarm Determination
Reheat Pump Status Alarm Determination
Relief Fan Status Alarm Determination
Return Fan Status Alarm Determination
SCHWPX Status Alarm Determination (Where
X Is 1-8)
SHWPX Status Alarm Determination (Where X
Is 1-4)
TwrFanX Status Alarm Determination (Where
X Is 1-8)
Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
Central Cooling Applications
Central Heating Applications
Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 807

Attributes (Status Alarm Determination)
Table 24-119 describes the attributes used by the Status Alarm Determination
module.
Table 24-119: Status Alarm Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Alarm G Indicates the current alarm status of the device. Normal
Set Name: Normal/Alarm
Command Indicates the current command to the device. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Delay Displays the delay (time period) allowed to 30 seconds
elapse after the device starts and before it
indicates a fault.
Flow Status Indicates the current status of the device. If Off
Failsoft is True, the switch is set to Off when Set Name: Off/On
the input is not Reliable.
Status Indicates the current effective status of the False
device. When True, the device is commanded
on and the Flow Status is on. This value is
False when the Flow Status input is off.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Status Alarm Determination)

• NoFlow: The input is Off.
• Flow: The input is On.

Reliability (Status Alarm Determination)

This module uses the last reliable value if its inputs become unreliable.

808 CCT Help: Modules

SummerWinter Mode Determination

Overview
The Summer Winter Mode module is designed to switch a unit that controls a
2-pipe coil between summer and winter operation based on the supply water
temperature. This module accepts supply water temperature, setpoint, and
differential as inputs. The module has a state output. If the supply water
temperature is greater than the setpoint, the unit operates in the winter mode, and if
the supply water temperature is less than the setpoint (with a differential), the unit
operates in the summer mode. The module use the last reliable water temperature
when the water temperature becomes unreliable.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (SummerWinter Mode Determination)
• Attributes (SummerWinter Mode Determination)
• Primary States (SummerWinter Mode Determination)
• Reliability (SummerWinter Mode Determination)

Module Use in Applications (SummerWinter Mode Determination)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-120.
Table 24-120: Flow Status Determination Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Summer Winter Mode Determination AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 809

Attributes (SummerWinter Mode Determination)
Table 24-121 describes the attributes used by the Flow Status Determination
module.
Table 24-121: Flow Status Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
State G, V Indicates the current effective status of Set Name: Summer/Winter
Summer Winter Mode Determination.
SUMWINSWO-DIFF Represents the switchover differential. To 22.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
(Switchover Diff) reverse from winter to summer, the Switchover
Process Variable must be less than the
setpoint minus this attribute value.
SUMWINSWO-SP Compares the supply water temperature with 38.0 Deg C, 100.0 Deg F
(Switchover Setpoint) this setpoint to determine whether the water is
warm or cold. This input is the switchover
setpoint.
Switchover Process Indicates the supply water temperature. If the 15.0 Deg C, 60 Deg F
Variable water is hot, then the unit must operate in the
winter mode, and if the water is cold, the unit
must operate in the summer mode. Switchover
Process Variable is typically connected from a
hardware input.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (SummerWinter Mode Determination)

• Summer: The supply water is cold and the unit may operate in cooling modes.
• Winter: The supply water is hot and the unit may operate in heating modes.

Reliability (SummerWinter Mode Determination)

This module uses the last reliable value if its inputs become unreliable.

810 CCT Help: Modules

WarmupCooldown Determination

Overview
This module determines the effective WarmupCooldown status for single duct
VAV applications by evaluating the Network Input and the automatic Warmup
mode based on the supply air temperature. The module issues a warmup status
ANY TIME the SA-T (Supply Air Temperature) meets the requirements necessary
for warmup (that is, both SA-T and ZN-T are reliable and SA-T > [ZN-
T+Differential]). If both SA-T and ZN-T are reliable and the SA-T is not warm
enough to trigger warmup, the WC-C (WarmupCooldown) network input is not
allowed to force warmup (remains in Normal). The module state output is the
effective WarmupCooldown mode for the application.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (WarmupCooldown Determination)
• Attributes (WarmupCooldown Determination)
• Primary States (WarmupCooldown Determination)
• Reliability (WarmupCooldown Determination)

Module Use in Applications (WarmupCooldown Determination)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-122.
Table 24-122: WarmupCooldown Determination Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
WarmupCooldown Determination VAV Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 811

Attributes (WarmupCooldown Determination)
Table 24-123 describes the attributes used by the WarmupCooldown
Determination module.
Table 24-123: WarmupCooldown Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Supply Air Indicates the temperature of the supply air used 15.0 Deg C, 59.0 Deg F
Temperature to determine whether the status should
automatically be set to warmup. It also prevents
a network warmup command if the supply air is
not warmer than the temperature in the Zone
Temperature attribute.
WarmupCooldown Specifies the network input for warmup Normal
cooldown mode selection. Set Name: OST Warmup
Cooldown
WC-S (State) G, V Indicates the effective WarmupCooldown state Set Name: OST Warmup
of the application. If the Supply Air temperature Cooldown
is greater than the value of Zone Temperature
plus the value of Warmup Diff, the output is
Warmup. Otherwise, the output matches the
WarmupCooldown input.
WCT-DIFF (Warmup Contains the minimum differential between the
Diff) supply air and zone temperatures before the
system issues a warmup status.
Zone Temperature Indicates the zone temperature that is 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
compared to the Supply Air Temperature to
determine whether warmup mode should be
active.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (WarmupCooldown Determination)

• Normal: No warmup/cooldown is required based on the Network Input.
Warmup is activated only if the supply air temperature is greater than the zone
temperature by more than the differential.
• Warmup: The heating and cooling temperature setpoints adjust to the
occupied values and go to the heating states to control to the heating setpoint.
• Cooldown: The heating and cooling temperature setpoints adjust to the
occupied values and turn all heating modes off (does not affect this module.)
• Coast: The heating and cooling temperature setpoints adjust to the unoccupied
values (does not affect this module).

Reliability (WarmupCooldown Determination)

Table 24-124: WarmupCooldown Determination Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Supply Air Temperature Automatic Warmup activation is disabled and the module only
passes through the network warmupcooldown mode input.
Zone Temperature Automatic Warmup activation is disabled and the module only
passes through the network warmupcooldown mode input.

812 CCT Help: Modules

Fan Lockout
Overview
The Fan Lockout group locks out the fan in the unoccupied mode when there is no
heating or cooling available, according to whether the module is a heating or
cooling lockout module. The Fan Lockout group contains the following modules:
• Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout
• Unocc Heating Fan Lockout

Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout

Overview
The Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout module locks out the fan in the unoccupied mode
when there is no cooling available. This module’s Boolean output indicates
whether or not the fan can run.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout)
• Attributes (Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout)
• Reliability (Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout)

Module Use in Applications (Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the Unocc Cooling
Fan Lockout module in this group using the name in Table 24-125.
Table 24-125: Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 813

Attributes (Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout)
Table 24-126 describes the attributes used by the Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout
module.
Table 24-126: Unoccupied Cooling Fan Lockout Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling isAvailable Provides a network input used to enable or False
disable cooling.
Cooling Required Indicates whether there is a need for cooling. True
Occupancy Indicates the effective occupancy command. Occupied
Set Name: Occ Effective
Present Value Indicates the current status of the device False
availability. The Present Value is True when the
device is available and False when the device
is not available.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout)

The Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout modules use the last reliable value if the inputs
become unreliable.

814 CCT Help: Modules

Unocc Heating Fan Lockout

Overview
The Unocc Heating Fan Lockout module locks out the fan in the unoccupied mode
when there is no heating available. This module’s Boolean output indicates
whether or not the fan can run.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Unocc Heating Fan Lockout)
• Attributes (Unocc Heating Fan Lockout)
• Reliability (Unocc Heating Fan Lockout)

Module Use in Applications (Unocc Heating Fan Lockout)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the Unocc Heating
Fan Lockout module in this group using the name in Table 24-127.
Table 24-127: Unocc Heating Fan Lockout Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Unocc Heating Fan Lockout All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 815

Attributes (Unocc Heating Fan Lockout)
Table 24-126 describes the attributes used by the Unocc Heating Fan Lockout
module.
Table 24-128: Unoccupied Heating Fan Lockout Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Heating isAvailable Provides a network input used to enable or False
disable heating.
Heating Required Indicates whether there is a need for heating. True
Occupancy Indicates the effective occupancy command. Occupied
Set Name: Occ Effective
Preheat isAvailable Provides a network input used to enable or False
disable the preheat functionality.
Present Value Indicates the current status of the device False
availability. The Present Value is True when the
device is available and False when the device
is not available.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Unocc Heating Fan Lockout)

The Unocc Heating Fan Lockout modules use the last reliable value if the inputs
become unreliable.

816 CCT Help: Modules

Flow Calculation
Overview
The Flow Calculation group provides flow calculations for various applications.
The Flow Calculation group contains the following modules:
• Flow Calculation
• Flow Differential Calculation
• Flow Sum Calculation

Flow Calculation

Overview
This module calculates flow from a differential pressure input. It is applicable for
use with pitot tube sensors that are commonly provided with variable air volume
terminal units.
This module supports automated offset (that is, zero flow) calibration of the
differential pressure sensor input. The application can take advantage of this by
closing the dampers or equalizing the intakes of the differential pressure sensor
input and then setting the Autocalibrate Now input temporarily to True.
As long as this input is True, the module calculates the average Autocalibration
Offset that would cause the flow calculation Effective dP to equal zero. This
average is done recursively using the EWMA function that does a simple average
for the first 1000 samples. Typically, the Autocalibrate Now input is set True for
only 5 to 10 seconds at a time and must reset to False by the connected source.
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Flow Calculation)
• Attributes (Flow Calculation)
• Pickup Gain Calculations (Flow Calculation)
• Reliability (Flow Calculation)

Setpoint Determination/Misc 817

Module Use in Applications (Flow Calculation)
The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
module in this group using the names in Figure 24-129.
Table 24-129: Flow Calculation Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name
CD Flow Calculation
Cold Deck Flow Calculation
Discharge Flow Calculation
Exhaust Air Flow Calculation
Exhaust Flow Calculation
HD Flow Calculation
Hot Deck Flow Calculation
Minimum OA Flow Calculation
Outdoor Air Flow Calculation
Relief Flow Calculation
Return Flow Calculation
Supply Flow Calculation
Applications
VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
All VAV Applications
VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
All VAV Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

818 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Flow Calculation)
Figure 24-130 describes the attributes used by the Flow Calculation modules.
Table 24-130: Flow Calculation Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Autocalibrate Now When True, causes the Flow Calculation False
module to re-calculate the Autocalibration
Offset property to make the current flow zero.
Autocalibrate Offset V Displays the correction added to Differential Display Units: Pa, in. W.C.
Pressure that determines the Effective dP is
used to calculate the Airflow Rate. It is
recalculated whenever Autocalibrate Now is set
to True.
CD-AREA, DA-AREA, Contains the area at the location of the pitot 0.0 m2, 0.0 ft2
EA-AREA, HD-AREA, tube [m2 or ft2].
MOA-AREA, Note: In VAV applications, this input receives
OA-AREA, RA-AREA, its value from the Balancer Override
or RLF-AREA (Area) module.
CD-KFACTOR, Displays the amplification provided by the 2.0
DA-KFACTOR, pickup tube. For single point calibration, Pickup
EA-KFACTOR, Gain 2 is set to zero and Pickup Gain is
HD-KFACTOR, calculated using the equation in Pickup Gain
MOA-KFACTOR, Calculations (Flow Calculation).
OA-KFACTOR, Note: In VAV applications, this input receives
RA-KFACTOR, or its value from the Balancer Override
RLF-KFACTOR module.
(Pickup Gain)
Differential Pressure Displays the differential pressure measured 0.0 Pa, 0.0 in. W.C.
across a square law device (normally a pitot
tube. The differential pressure measurement is
related in a non-linear way to the flow rate.
Effective dP V Contains the effective differential pressure Display Units: Pa, in. W.C.
used for calculating Airflow Rate. It is
determined by adding the Autocalibrate Offset
to the Differential Pressure input. This value is
clamped at a minimum value of zero.
Elevation Displays the distance above or below sea level. 0.0 m, 0.0 ft
A negative value represents a distance below
sea level [m or ft].
Flow Units C Defines the preferred flow units [l/s, cu meter/h, l/s, cfm
or cfm]. Set Name: Flow Calculation
Units
FLOW, CD-F, DA-F, G, V Contains the measured airflow rate [l/s, cu
EA-F, HD-F, MOA-F, meter/h, or cfm].
OA-F, RA-F, RLF-F, or
SA-F (Airflow Rate)
Full Range dP Contains a scaling factor used for calculating 373.5 Pa, 1.5 in. W.C.
the Percent dP Offset. If the percent dP Offset
is far from zero, it likely indicates the Flow
Calculation was autocalibrated when the flow
was not really zero.
Percent dP Offset V Displays the value of the Autocalibration Offset Display Units: %
as a percentage of the Full Range dP (that is,
the value is 100 * Autocalibrate Offset/Full
Range dP).

Setpoint Determination/Misc 819

 Table 24-130: Flow Calculation Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Pickup Gain 2 Used for 2 point calibration so that the 0.0
measured airflow rate can match the balancer
at both minimum and maximum airflow rate
setpoints. For single point calibration the value
of this input is zero.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Pickup Gain Calculations (Flow Calculation)

For single point calibration, Pickup Gain 2 is set to zero and Pickup Gain is
calculated using the following equation:
PickupGainnew = (FlowController / FlowHood)2 x PickupGainoriginal
When using 2-point calibration, to calculate the Pickup Gain values:
1. Set Pickup Gain 2 to zero and record the original value for Pickup Gain.
2. Override the flow setpoint to the desired minimum flow and allow the flow
controller to stabilize.
3. Record the Airflow Rate (MinFlowController) and Effective dP (EffDPminflow)
values.
4. Record the airflow (MinFlowHood) measured using a calibrated airflow-
measuring device (for example, hood).
5. Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 for the desired maximum flow.
6. Calculate a new value for Pickup Gain and Pickup Gain 2 using the following
equations:
PGmin flow = (MinFlowController / MinFlowHood)2 x PickupGainoriginal

PGmax flow = (MaxFlowController / MaxFlowHood)2 x PickupGainoriginal

PickupGain2new = (PGmax flow - PGmin flow / EffDPmax flow - EFFDPmin
flow)
PickupGainnew = PGmin flow - EFFDPmin flow x PickupGain2new

Reliability (Flow Calculation)

The Reliability of the Flow Calculation module and its outputs is set as follows:
• Input Unreliable: Set if either the Autocalibrate Now or Differential Pressure
inputs are unreliable.
• Math Error: Set if the external Patm (atmospheric pressure) function called
by this module is unreliable.
• Reliable: Set otherwise.

820 CCT Help: Modules

Flow Differential Calculation

Overview
This module subtracts two flows and attaches the reliability of the two inputs onto
the result. (The resultant reliability is unreliable if either of the inputs is
unreliable).
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Flow Differential Calculation)
• Attributes (Flow Differential Calculation)
• Reliability (Flow Differential Calculation)

Module Use in Applications (Flow Differential Calculation)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-131.
Table 24-131: Flow Differential Calculation Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Calculate CD Flow VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Calculate HD Flow VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 821

Attributes (Flow Differential Calculation)
Table 24-132 describes the attributes used by the Flow Differential Calculation
module.
Table 24-132: Flow Differential Calculation Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CD-F, HD-F, or FLOW G, V Contains the result of the subtraction with Display Units: l/s, cfm
(Calculated Flow) reliability.
Contributing Flow Displays the measured flow to be subtracted 0 l/s, 0 cfm
from the Total Flow.
Total Flow Displays the measured total flow. 0 l/s, 0 cfm

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Flow Differential Calculation)

Table 24-133: Flow Differential Calculation Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Contributing Flow The Calculate Flow is flagged unreliable.
Total Flow The Calculate Flow is flagged unreliable.

822 CCT Help: Modules

Flow Sum Calculation

Overview
This module adds two flows and attaches the reliability of the two inputs onto the
result. (The resultant reliability is unreliable if either of the inputs is unreliable).
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Flow Sum Calculation)
• Attributes (Flow Sum Calculation)
• Reliability (Flow Sum Calculation)

Module Use in Applications (Flow Sum Calculation)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-134.
Table 24-134: Flow Sum Calculation Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Calculate Supply Flow VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Calculate Supply Flow Setpoint VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Discharge Flow Determination AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 823

Attributes (Flow Sum Calculation)
Table 24-135 describes the attributes used by the Flow Sum Calculation module.
Table 24-135: Flow Sum Calculation Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Contributing Flow 1 Displays the measured flow to be added to 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Contributing Flow 2.
Contributing Flow 2 Displays the measured flow to be added to 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Contributing Flow 1.
DA-F, SA-F, or FLOW G, V Contains the result of the addition with Display Units: l/s, cfm
(Calculated Flow) reliability.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Flow Sum Calculation)

Table 24-136: Flow Sum Calculation Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Contributing Flow 1 The Calculate Flow is flagged unreliable.
Contributing Flow 2 The Calculate Flow is flagged unreliable.

824 CCT Help: Modules

Setpoint Calculation
Overview
This group provides calculations for setpoints within the applications.
The Setpoint Calculation group contains the following modules:
• Damper Minimum Position Determination
• Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2
• Discharge Air Setpoint Determination
• Discharge Air Setpoint Reset
• Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation
• Setpoint Reset by OA
• Summer Winter Compensation
• VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation
• VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination
• VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation
• VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination
• ZN-T Setpoint Determination

Damper Minimum Position Determination

Overview
This module sets the minimum damper position to the Occ Min Damper Value
when the Occupancy is Occupied or Bypass and sets it to zero otherwise.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Damper Minimum Position Determination)
• Attributes (Damper Minimum Position Determination)
• Reliability (Damper Minimum Position Determination)

Setpoint Determination/Misc 825

Module Use in Applications (Damper Minimum Position Determination)
The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-137.
Table 24-137: Damper Minimum Position Determination Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Damper Minimum Position Determination AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Min Position Determination Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Damper Minimum Position Determination)

Table 24-138 describes the attributes used by the Damper Minimum Position
Determination modules.
Table 24-138: Damper Minimum Position Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Occupancy Displays the current Occupancy status of the Occupied
unit. Set Name: Occ Effective
Occ Minimum OA Contains the desired damper minimum position 10.0%
Percent during occupied or bypass mode.
Minimum OA Position G, V Displays the minimum damper position. 0.0%

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Damper Minimum Position Determination)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

826 CCT Help: Modules

Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2

Overview
This module is designed to reset the damper minimum position based on the space
CO2. The module has an input for the space CO2, two inputs to define the CO2
reset band (CO2 Reset A and CO2 Reset B), and two inputs for damper minimum
position and the low and high ends of the band (Min Pos Low Setpoint and Min
Pos High). This module has an output for the Damper Minimum Position.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2)
• Attributes (Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2)
• Reliability (Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2)

Module Use in Applications (Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-139.
Table 24-139: Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 827

Attributes (Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2)
Table 24-140 describes the attributes used by the Damper Minimum Position
Reset by CO2 modules.
Table 24-140: Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CO2 Represents the CO2 input. 800 ppm
MAD-MINPOS (Present G, V Specifies the damper minimum position as Display Units: %
Value) determined by this module based on the CO2
value.
Min Pos High Setpoint Defines the maximum damper position when 100.0%
the CO2 input equals the CO2 Reset B value.
Min Pos Low Setpoint Defines the minimum damper position when 0.0%
the input equals the CO2 Reset A value.
MOA-CO2RSTA (CO2 Specifies that when CO2 is less than or equal to 800 ppm
Reset A) this value, the Damper Minimum equals the Min
Pos Low Setpoint.
MOA-CO2RSTB (CO2 Specifies that when CO2 is greater than or 1000 ppm
Reset B) equal to this value, the Damper Minimum
equals the Min Pos High Setpoint.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

828 CCT Help: Modules

Discharge Air Setpoint Determination

Overview
The Discharge Air Setpoint Determination module sets the DA-T Setpoint based
on the operating modes of the air handler. The module accepts as input the
Unoccupied Status, the WarmupCooldown state, the occupied setpoint, the
unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints, and a default DA-T setpoint. The
EFFDAT-SP (Discharge Air Setpoint) is set to the Occ Setpoint, the
DATHTGUNOCC-SP (Unocc Heating Setpoint), or the DATCLGUNOCC-SP
(Unocc Cooling Setpoint) based on the WarmupCooldown input first, and the
Unocc Status input if WarmupCooldown does not equal Warmup or Cooldown.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)
• Attributes (Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)
• Reliability (Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)

Module Use in Applications (Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-141.
Table 24-141: Discharge Air Setpoint Determination Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Discharge Air Setpoint Determination AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 829

Attributes (Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)
Table 24-142 describes the attributes used by the Discharge Air Setpoint
Determination modules.
Table 24-142: Discharge Air Setpoint Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
DATCLGUNOCC-SP Contains the Discharge Air setpoint used 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
(Unocc Cooling when unoccupied cooling or Cooldown is
Setpoint) required.
DATHTGUNOCC-SP Specifies the Discharge Air setpoint used 32.0 Deg C, 90 Deg F
(Unocc Heating when unoccupied heating or Warmup is
Setpoint) required.
EFFDAT-SP (Discharge G, V Indicates the effective Discharge Air 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Air Setpoint) Temperature Setpoint.
Occ Setpoint Contains the Discharge Air setpoint used 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
when unoccupied control and
WarmupCooldown are not required.
Unocc Status Displays the current unocc status. This input Unocc Ctrl Not Req’d
indicates if unoccupied cooling, unoccupied Set Name: Unocc Status
heating, or neither is required.
WarmupCooldown Indicates the current warm up or cool down Normal
status of the application. Set Name: OST Warmup
Cooldown

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)

These modules use the last reliable value if their inputs become unreliable.

830 CCT Help: Modules

Discharge Air Setpoint Reset

Overview
This module is designed to reset the discharge air temperature setpoint based on a
reset process variable (typically the outdoor air temperature). The module has two
inputs that define the temperature reset band (OA Reset A and OA Reset B), and
two inputs that specify the DA-T setpoints at each end of that band (Discharge Air
Low Limit and Discharge Air High Limit). This module has an output for the
DAT-SP (Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint).
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Discharge Air Setpoint Reset)
• Attributes (Discharge Air Setpoint Reset)
• Reliability (Discharge Air Setpoint Reset)

Module Use in Applications (Discharge Air Setpoint Reset)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-143.
Table 24-143: Discharge Air Setpoint Reset Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Cold Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Discharge Air Setpoint Reset AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset by AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
EA-T
Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset by AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
RA-T

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 831

Attributes (Discharge Air Setpoint Reset)
Table 24-144 describes the attributes used by the Discharge Air Setpoint Reset
modules.
Table 24-144: Discharge Air Setpoint Reset Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CDTHI-SP, DATHI-SP, Defines the Discharge Air Setpoint when the Depends on use
or HDTHI-SP OA Temperature input equals the OA Reset B (Deg C, Deg F)
(Discharge Air High value.
Setpoint)
CDTLO-SP, Defines the Discharge Air Setpoint when the Depends on use
DATLO-SP, or HDTLO- OA Temperature input equals the OA Reset A (Deg C, Deg F)
SP (Discharge Air Low value.
Setpoint)
CDT-OARSTA, Specifies that when OA Temperature equals Depends on use
DAT-OARSTA, this value, the Discharge Air Setpoint equals (Deg C, Deg F)
HDT-EARSTA, the Discharge Air Low Setpoint.
HDT-OARSTA, or HDT-
RARSTA (OA Reset A)
CDT-OARSTB, Specifies that when the OA Temperature Depends on use
DAT-OARSTB, equals this value, the Discharge Air Setpoint (Deg C, Deg F)
HDT-EARSTB, equals the Discharge Air High Setpoint.
HDT-OARSTB, or HDT-
RARSTB (OA Reset B)
CDT-SP or HDT-SP G, V Displays the Discharge Air Setpoint as Depends on use
(Discharge Air determined by this module based on the OA (Deg C, Deg F)
Setpoint) Temperature level.
OA Temperature Serves as a reset variable for determining the 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
effective DA-T Setpoint.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Discharge Air Setpoint Reset)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

832 CCT Help: Modules

Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation

Overview
This module is responsible for generating the differential flow setpoint based upon
the occupancy input.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation)
• Attributes (Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation)
• Reliability (Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation)

Module Use in Applications (Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-145.
Table 24-145: Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Exhaust Differential Setpoint Calculation All VAV Applications
Flow Differential Setpoint Determination AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 833

Attributes (Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation)
Table 24-146 describes the attributes used by the Flow Differential Setpoint
Calculation modules.
Table 24-146: Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
EFFFLOW-DIFF G, V Contains the actual flow differential setpoint. Display Units: l/s, cfm
(Diff Setpoint)
OCCEAFLOW-DIFF Contains the desired difference between the 0 l/s, 0 cfm
(Occ Diff Setpoint) exhaust and supply flow or between the supply
flow and return flow under occupied conditions.
(Exhaust Flow-Supply Flow or Supply
Flow-Return Flow).
Occupancy Displays the current Occupancy status of the Unoccupied
unit. Set Name: Occ Effective
UNOCCEAFLOW-DIFF Contains the desired difference between the 0 l/s, 0 cfm
(Unocc Diff Setpoint) exhaust and supply flow or between the supply
flow and return flow under unoccupied and
standby conditions. (Exhaust Flow-Supply Flow
or Supply Flow-Return Flow).

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

834 CCT Help: Modules

Setpoint Reset by OA

Overview
This module calculates the setpoint offset based on the outdoor air temperature.
The Setpoint Reset by OA-T module has an input for the outdoor air temperature,
two inputs for the outdoor air setpoints (OA High Setpoint and OA Low Setpoint),
and two inputs for the offset span (Setpoint and Setpoint Span). The output of this
module is the Setpoint Offset.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Setpoint Reset by OA)
• Attributes (Setpoint Reset by OA)
• Reliability (Setpoint Reset by OA)

Module Use in Applications (Setpoint Reset by OA)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-147.
Table 24-147: Setpoint Reset by OA Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
CD-T sp Reset by OA AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
DA-T sp Reset by OA AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
HD-T sp Reset by OA AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Heating Zone X SP Reset (Where X Is 1-8) Central Heating Applications
RA-T sp Reset by OA AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 835

Attributes (Setpoint Reset by OA)
Table 24-148 describes the attributes used by the Setpoint Reset by OA modules.
Table 24-148: Setpoint Reset by OA Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Effective Setpoint G, V Indicates the setpoint calculated by adding the 0.0 Deg C, 0.0 Deg F
Setpoint Offset to the Setpoint.
OA High Setpoint Indicates that when the outdoor air temperature 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
is this value, the Setpoint Offset is the Setpoint
Span.
OA Low Setpoint Indicates that when the outdoor air temperature 0.0 Deg C, 32.0 Deg F
is this value, the Setpoint Offset is the Setpoint.
OA Temperature Indicates the outdoor air temperature. 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Setpoint Determines the value of the Setpoint Offset 0.0 Deg C, 0.0 Deg F
when the outdoor air temperature is at the OA
Low Setpoint.
Setpoint Offset Indicates the setpoint offset as determined by 6.0 Deg C, 11.0 Deg F
this module based on the outdoor air
temperature.
Setpoint Span Determines the amount by which to adjust the 6.0 Deg C, 11.0 Deg F
Setpoint when the outdoor air temperature is at
the OA High Setpoint.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Setpoint Reset by OA)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

836 CCT Help: Modules

Summer Winter Compensation

Overview
The Summer Winter Compensation module provides local calculation of setpoint
shifts based on the outdoor air temperature. This method is sometimes used for
units serving building entry areas (lobbies, vestibules, and more) to save energy by
allowing the temperature setpoint to shift closer to the outdoor conditions.
Alternatively, in poorly insulated buildings, the heating shift may increase the
temperature setpoint in all exterior spaces to compensate for cold wall
temperatures.
The ZN-T Setpoint Determination module uses these shifts as well as other
influences to calculate the zone heating setpoints and zone cooling setpoints.
When the Outdoor Air Temp is Reliable, the effective shift values are calculated.
Otherwise, the shift values are set to zero.
In the Winter example, the Winter Setpoint determines the Outdoor Air
Temperature at which the module begins shifting the setpoints. The Winter Gain is
the gain of the shift expressed in the number of degrees shift per number of degrees
deviation from the Outdoor Air Temperature. The Winter Change Limit limits the
maximum amount of shift allowed (positive or negative).
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Summer Winter Compensation)
• Attributes (Summer Winter Compensation)
• Reliability (Summer Winter Compensation)

Module Use in Applications (Summer Winter Compensation)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
module in this group using the names in Table 24-149.
Table 24-149: Summer Winter Compensation Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Application(s)
Summer Winter Compensation AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

Setpoint Determination/Misc 837

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Summer Winter Compensation)

Table 24-150 describes the attributes used by the Summer Winter Compensation
modules.
Table 24-150: Summer Winter Compensation Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
EFF-CLGSHIFT V Contains the effective cooling shifting value for Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
(Effective Cooling the cooling setpoints.
Shift)
EFF-HTGSHIFT V Contains the effective heating shifting value for Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
(Effective Heating the heating setpoints.
Shift)
Outdoor Air Temp Displays the current Outdoor Air Temperature. 18.0 Deg C, 65.0 Deg F
SUM-CHANGELIMIT Displays the value of the difference between 5.0 Deg C, 9.0 Deg F
(Summer Change the calculated cooling compensation and the
Limit) value of the Summer Change Limit attribute.
(The calculated cooling compensation may
only be positive.)
SUM-GAIN (Summer Contains the gain of the compensation, 0.2
Gain) expressed in degrees of shift per degree
deviation from the Summer Setpoint.
SUM-SP (Summer Contains the point at which this object begins 24.0 Deg C, 75.0 Deg F
Setpoint) calculating a cooling shift. The Outdoor Air
Temperature must be greater than the Summer
Setpoint before a cooling shift is calculated.
WIN-CHANGELIMIT Displays the absolute value of the difference 3.0 Deg C, 5.4 Deg F
(Winter Change) Limit between the calculated heating compensation
and the value of the Winter Change Limit
attribute. (The calculated heating
compensation may be positive or negative.)
WIN-GAIN (Winter Contains the gain of the compensation, -0.1
Gain) expressed in degrees of shift per degree
deviation from the Winter Setpoint.
WIN-SP (Winter Contains the point at which this object begins 10.0 Deg C, 50.0 Deg F
Setpoint) calculating a heating shift. The Outdoor Air
Temperature must be less than the Winter
Setpoint before a heating shift is calculated.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Summer Winter Compensation)

This module uses the last reliable value if its inputs become unreliable.

838 CCT Help: Modules

VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation

Overview
This module is responsible for generating minimum and maximum deck flows for
both the cold and hot decks of a constant volume dual duct application. The
module accepts the minimum deck flow setpoints and the maximum box flow
setpoint. The module outputs individual deck minimum and maximum flow
setpoints.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint
Calculation)
• Attributes (VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation)
• Reliability (VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation)

Module Use in Applications (VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint

Calculation)
The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-151.
Table 24-151: VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation Uses
in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Constant Dual Duct Endpoint Calculation VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 839

Attributes (VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation)
Table 24-152 describes the attributes used by the VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow
Endpoint Calculation modules.
Table 24-152: VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation
Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Box Max Flow Contains the constant flow for the dual duct 0 l/s, 0 cfm
box.
CD Min Flow Contains the minimum flow for the cold duct. 0 l/s, 0 cfm
EFFCD-MAXFLOW (Eff V Contains the effective maximum flow setpoint Display Units: l/s, cfm
CD Max Flow) for the cold deck.
EFFCD-MINFLOW (Eff G, V Contains the effective minimum flow setpoint Display Units: l/s, cfm
CD Min Flow) for the cold deck.
EFFHD-MAXFLOW (Eff V Contains the effective maximum flow setpoint Display Units: l/s, cfm
HD Max Flow) for the hot deck.
EFFHD-MINFLOW (Eff V Contains the effective minimum flow setpoint Display Units: l/s, cfm
HD Min Flow) for the hot deck.
HD Min Flow Contains the minimum flow for the hot duct. 0 l/s, 0 cfm

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

840 CCT Help: Modules

VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination

Overview
This module determines the minimum deck flow setpoints (heating and cooling)
according to the occupied and warmupcooldown conditions within a VAV dual
duct application. The module accepts Occupancy, WarmupCooldown modes, and
flow setpoints. The module outputs the minimum deck flows. During conditions of
Standby, the unoccupied flow setpoints are issued. During conditions of
Unoccupied, the unoccupied flow setpoints are also issued unless there is a
warmup/cooldown mode. During conditions of Occupied or Bypass, the occupied
flow setpoints are issued.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination)
• Attributes (VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination)
• Reliability (VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination)

Module Use in Applications (VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-153.
Table 24-153: VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Minimum Flow Determination – Dual Duct VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 841

Attributes (VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination)
Table 24-154 describes the attributes used by the VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow
Determination modules.
Table 24-154: VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CD-MINFLOW (CD Min G, V Contains the minimum required cold deck flow. 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Flow)
CDUNOCC-MINFLOW Contains the minimum required cold deck flow 0 l/s, 0 cfm
(Unocc CD Min Flow) when unoccupied.
CLDWNCD-MINFLOW Contains the minimum required cold deck flow 0 l/s, 0 cfm
(Cooldown CD Min when cooldown.
Flow)
CLDWNHD-MINFLOW Contains the minimum required hot deck flow 0 l/s, 0 cfm
(Cooldown HD Min when cooldown.
Flow)
HD-MINFLOW (HD Min V Contains the minimum required hot deck flow. 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Flow)
HDUNOCC-MINFLOW Contains the minimum required hot deck flow 0 l/s, 0 cfm
(Unocc HD Min Flow) when unoccupied.
Occ CD Min Flow Contains the minimum required cold deck flow 0 l/s, 0 cfm
when occupied.
Occ HD Min Flow Contains the minimum required hot deck flow 0 l/s, 0 cfm
when occupied.
Occupancy Contains the current Occupancy status of the Occupied
unit. Set Name: Occ Effective
WarmupCooldown Contains the current WarmupCooldown status Normal
of the unit. Set Name: OST Warmup
Cooldown
WUCD-MINFLOW Contains the minimum required cold deck flow 0 l/s, 0 cfm
(Warmup CD Min Flow) when warmup.
WUHD-MINFLOW Contains the minimum required hot deck flow 0 l/s, 0 cfm
(Warmup HD Min Flow) when warmup.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

842 CCT Help: Modules

VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation

Overview
This module generates minimum and maximum deck flows for both the cold and
hot deck of a standard dual duct application. These values are based upon the input
minimum and maximum flows and ventilation requirements.
The module is designed to meet the following three conditions (listed from highest
priority):
• Do not exceed the user entered maximum flows. There is a heating maximum
flow and a cooling maximum flow and under the appropriate heating/cooling
conditions, these total flows are not exceeded.
• Do not provide individual deck flows that are less than the user entered
minimum flows. This condition is obeyed unless it causes the condition above
to be exceeded. In this situation, the minimum flows is adjusted down.
• Meet the outdoor air requirements. This condition is met as long as it does not
cause the above conditions to be exceeded. As part of this condition, the
outdoor air requirements may be compromised when the sum of the two OA
percentages is less than 10 percent. This is done to ensure that the individual
deck minimums change smoothly as the outdoor air percentages change. For
example, a change from 2% to 3% in outdoor air percent does not cause the
minimum flow rate to jump from 500 cfm to 333 cfm.
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint
Calculation)
• Attributes (VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation)
• Reliability (VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation)

Setpoint Determination/Misc 843

Module Use in Applications (VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint
Calculation)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-155.
Table 24-155: VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Standard Dual Duct Endpoint Calculation VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation)

Table 24-156 describes the attributes used by the VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow
Endpoint Calculation modules.
Table 24-156: VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation
Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CD Min Flow Specifies the minimum flow for the cold duct. 0 l/s, 0 cfm
CD OA Percent Displays the percent of the cold duct air that is 20.0%
outdoor air.
Cooling Max Flow Contains the constant flow for the dual duct 500 l/s, 1000 cfm
box.
EFFCD-MAXFLOW (Eff V Contains the required cold duct maximum flow. Display Units: l/s, cfm
CD Max Flow)
EFFCD-MINFLOW (Eff G, V Contains the required cold duct minimum flow. Display Units: l/s, cfm
CD Min Flow)
EFFHD-MAXFLOW (Eff V Contains the required hot duct maximum flow. Display Units: l/s, cfm
HD Max Flow)
EFFHD-MINFLOW (Eff V Contains the required hot duct minimum flow. Display Units: l/s, cfm
HD Min Flow)
HD Min Flow Specifies the minimum flow for the hot duct. 0 l/s, 0 cfm
HD OA Percent Displays the percent of the hot duct air that is 20.0%
outdoor air.
Heating Max Flow Specifies the constant flow for the dual duct 500 l/s, 1000 cfm
box

844 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 24-156: VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation
Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Min Flow Reset Type Defines the type of min flow reset strategy. None
When None is selected, the min flow values Set Name: None/CO2
are the values at the appropriate inputs. When
CO2 is selected, a proportional reset based on
a CO2 setpoint and a CO2 proportional band
determines the required min flow values. In
both cases, the Occupancy Level and
Ventilation Requirement can increase the
minimum flows.
MINFLOWCO2-PB Specifies the band that the CO2 level must 400 ppm
(Proportional Band) increase above the Setpoint to produce the
largest minimum flow values when the Min
Flow Reset Type is other than None.
MINFLOWCO2-SP Specifies the CO2 level that the process 700 ppm
(Setpoint) variable must exceed to begin resetting the
minimum flows when the Min Flow Reset Type
is other than None.
OCC-LEVEL Displays the number of people in the zone. 0
(Occupancy Level)
Process Variable Contains the measured variable used to reset 0 ppm
the minimum airflow when the Min Flow Reset
Type is other than None.
Ventilation Displays the outdoor airflow required per 10 l/s, 20 cfm
Requirement person (Occupancy Level).

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 845

VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination

Overview
This module is responsible for determining the minimum flow setpoint (heating
and cooling) according to the occupied and warmup/cooldown conditions. During
conditions of Standby, the unoccupied flow setpoints are issued. During conditions
of Unoccupied, the unoccupied flow setpoints are also issued unless there is a
warmup/cooldown mode. During conditions of Occupied or Bypass, the occupied
flow setpoints are issued, including adjustments made by the reset scheme.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow
Determination)
• Attributes (VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination)
• Reliability (VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination)

Module Use in Applications (VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-157.
Table 24-157: VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Minimum Flow Determination VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Slave Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

846 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination)
Table 24-158 describes the attributes used by the VAV Single Duct Minimum
Flow Determination modules.
Table 24-158: VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination Attributes
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLDWN-MINFLOW Contains the minimum required cooling flow 100 l/s, 200 cfm
(Cooldown Min Flow) when cooldown.
CLG-MINFLOW The required cooling minimum flow. Display Units: l/s, cfm
(Cooling Min Flow)
CLGUNOCC-MINFLOW Displays the minimum required cooling flow 0 l/s, 0 cfm
(Unocc Cooling Min when unoccupied.
Flow)
HTG-MINFLOW The required heating minimum flow. Display Units: l/s, cfm
(Heating Min Flow)
HTGUNOCC-MINFLOW Contains the minimum required heating flow 0 l/s, 0 cfm
(Unocc Heating Min when unoccupied.
Flow)
Min Flow Reset Type Defines the type of min flow reset strategy. None
When None is selected, the min flow values Set Name: None/CO2
are the values at the appropriate inputs. When
CO2 is selected, a proportional reset based on
a CO2 setpoint and a CO2 proportional band
determines the required min flow values. In
both cases, the Occupancy Level and
Ventilation Requirement can increase the
minimum flows.
MINFLOWCO2-PB This parameter specifies the band that the CO2 400 ppm
(Proportional Band) level must increase above the Setpoint to
produce the largest min flow values when the
Min Flow Reset Type is other than None.
MINFLOWCO2-SP Specifies the CO2 level that the process 700 ppm
(Setpoint) variable must exceed to begin resetting the min
flows when the Min Flow Reset Type is other
than None.
OA Percent Percent of the supply air that is outdoor air. 20.0%
Occ Cooling Min Flow Displays the minimum required cooling flow 100 l/s, 200 cfm
when occupied.
Occ Heating Min Flow Displays the minimum required heating flow 100 l/s, 200 cfm
when occupied.
OCC-LEVEL The number of people in the zone 0
(Occupancy Level)
Occupancy Displays the current Occupancy status of the Occupied
unit. Set Name: Occ Effective
Process Variable Contains the measured variable used to reset 0 ppm
the minimum airflow when the Min Flow Reset
Type is other than None.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 847

 Table 24-158: VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination Attributes
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Ventilation Outdoor airflow required per person 10 l/s, 20 cfm
Requirement (Occupancy Level).
WarmupCooldown Displays the current WarmupCooldown status Normal
of the unit. Set Name: OST Warmup
Cooldown
WU-MINFLOW Contains the minimum required heating flow 100 l/s, 200 cfm
(Warmup Min Flow) when warmup.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination)

These modules use the last reliable value if its inputs become unreliable.

848 CCT Help: Modules

 ZN-T Setpoint Determination

Overview
The configuration options for the ZN-T Setpoint Determination module are done
with a combination of system selection choices under the Temperature/Setpoint
Adjust section of the selection tree and the module’s configuration settings in the
Details dialog box. The resulting configuration provides the Zone Setpoints for
Heating and Cooling used by any applications configured for a zone temperature
control strategy.
The following block diagram highlights the standard and optional interfaces to this
module.
Figure 24-26: ZN-T Setpoint Determination Interfaces

Zone Setpoint Determination

Zone Setpoint Interface
Options Based on Selections Module Logic, Setup
Under Zone / Temperature / Parameters, and
Setpoint Adjust: Calculations:
° Network Input for ZNT-SP ° Parameter Defaults for
when no Setpoint Adjust is
selected ZNT-SP Heating and Cooling
or Setpoints during Occupied,
or Effective ° Heating or Cooling
° Analog Input for ZN-SP ZN-SP Standby, and Unoccupied Output Controllers
when Common Setpoint Cooling
or Modes
Setpoint
Adjust is selected. Option Both ZNT-SP ° Zone Sequencing
to manually add a Network State Generator
Input for ZNT-SP and and WC-ADJ ° Default View to set up the
configure ZN-SP as backup Remote Setpoint ° Unoccupied
or Configuration Status
° Network Input for ZNT-SP Effective Determination
and Analog Input for ° Default View to set up the State Generator
WC-ADJ when Warm Cool Heating
Min and Max Setpoint Setpoint
Adjust is selected ° Supply Flow
Range Limits Setpoint Output
Modules in VAV
Occupied, Occupancy Mode connection to Applications
Occupancy Mode Determination Standby, or Effective Occupancy Status
State Generator Unoccupied from the Occupancy Mode
Mode Determination Generator

Effective Heating Effective Setpoint Shift Values

FIG:Zone Setpoint Determination Logic
Optional Summer Winter
and Cooling per Occupied, Standby, and
Compensation Setpoint Module
Shift Values Unoccupied modes

Warmup, Optimal Start Configuration

Optional Warmup / Cooldown Modes for Warmup, Cooldown,
Cooldown, or
State Generator and Coast Modes
Coast Mode

Setpoint Determination/Misc 849

 During the System Selection process for any Zone Temperature controlled
application, you have the following options to determine how to integrate the
Network or local Zone Setpoint interfaces. Under the Temperature/Setpoint
Adjust selection:
• If no options are selected, then only a Network Input for Zone Setpoint is
created (ZNT-SP).
• If a Common Setpoint Adjust option is selected, then an Analog Input is
created for a Zone Setpoint (ZN-SP). You can also manually add a Network
Zone Setpoint (ZNT-SP) and make a connection to the Network Setpoint of the
module. For this scenario, the Analog Input for the local Zone Setpoint is
configured as the backup to the Network Zone Setpoint when communication
is lost from the Network. To make the local Zone Setpoint the backup, open the
Details dialog box of this module and modify the Remote Setpoint Mode
attribute.
• If the Warm-Cool Adjust option is selected, then a Warmer Cooler Offset
Analog Input (WC-ADJ) is created along with a Network Input for the Zone
Setpoint (ZNT-SP). In this case, the Warmer Cooler Adjustment value
configured at the local Zone Temperature Setpoint offsets the value of the
Zone Setpoint value from the Network Input for the Zone Setpoint. The offset
range for the Warmer Cooler Adjustment is configured in its Input Detail
dialog box for this input.
To derive the Effective Heating and Cooling Setpoints, you must first understand
the default settings for the key Setpoint values (Table 24-159). In the Parameters
table or Details dialog box for this module, you can edit the default heating and
cooling setpoints for each Occupancy mode. You also can set the default value for
the Network or Local Zone Setpoint in their respective Details dialog box.
The Default Value for the Network or Local Zone Setpoint is 72.
Table 24-159: Key Setpoint Values
Setpoint Value
Occ Cooling Setpoint 74
Occ Heating Setpoint 70
Standby Cooling Setpoint 77
Standby Heating Setpoint 66
Unocc Cooling Setpoint 82
Unocc Heating Setpoint 61

If these values are never adjusted, the system uses the Occupied, Standby, and
Unoccupied Heating or Cooling Setpoints as the Effective Heating and Cooling
Setpoints. This occurs based on the state generated from the Occupancy Mode
Determination State Generation module.
As you change the Network or Local Zone Setpoint, the module automatically
derives an Absolute Setpoint Offset Value (AbsOffset). The Absolute Setpoint
Offset (AbsOffset) is calculated as the difference between the Network or Local
Setpoint and the mean of the Occupied Heating and Occupied Cooling setpoints.

850 CCT Help: Modules

 Absolute Setpoint Offset (AbsOffset) Calculation:
AbsOffset = Network or Local Setpoint - AVG (Occ Cooling Setpoint, Occ
Heating Setpoint)
Based on system default values, the AbsOffset = 72 - AVG (74 - 70), which
equals 0.
For example, assume the Network or Local Setpoint is changed from 72 to 70 and
the Occupied Cooling and Heating Setpoints remain at their default values of 74
and 70. The AbsOffset value is now -2. The value of -2 is now added to established
Cooling and Heating defaults per Occupancy Mode to derive the Effective Cooling
and Heating Setpoints per mode.
In a scenario where the Warm Cool Adjust option was selected for the zone
sensor interface, the offset value provided from this local adjustment is added to
the AbsOffset calculation. For example, assume that all of the default values for
the Network Zone Setpoints and Mode Heating and Cooling Setpoints were set up
with the Warm Cool Adjust option. If you adjust the Warmer/Cooler setting at the
zone sensor from 0 to -2, the AbsOffset value is -2.
You also can limit the range of the Network or Local Setpoint adjustments. In the
Details dialog box for the module, you can configure the Maximum and Minimum
settings for both the Heating and Cooling Setpoints. These limits take precedence
over any default setpoints created per Occupancy Mode.
For configurations with Optional Summer Winter Compensation, the Effective
Heating and Effective Cooling Setpoints are derived based on setpoint shift values,
and are included in the calculation for the Absolute Offset Value. See the Summer
Winter Compensation module to see how it uses Outdoor Air Temperature to
derive the offset used by this module.
For configurations with integrated Warmup/Cooldown logic, the Details dialog
box of the Zone Setpoint Configuration module allows you to set the occupancy
modes during the Warmup, Cooldown, and Coast modes generated by the
WarmupCooldown Sequencing State Generator.
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (ZN-T Setpoint Determination)
• Attributes (ZN-T Setpoint Determination)
• Reliability (ZN-T Setpoint Determination)

Setpoint Determination/Misc 851

Module Use in Applications (ZN-T Setpoint Determination)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in Table 24-160.
Table 24-160: ZN-T Setpoint Determination Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
ZN-T Setpoint Determination AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (ZN-T Setpoint Determination)

Table 24-161 describes the attributes used by the ZN-T Setpoint Determination
modules.
Table 24-161: ZN-T Setpoint Determination Attributes (Part 1 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLGOCC-SP (Occ Contains the value for the occupied cooling 23.0 Deg C, 74.0 Deg F
Cooling Setpoint) setpoint.
CLGSTBY-SP Contains the value for the standby cooling 25.0 Deg C, 77.0 Deg F
(Standby Cooling setpoint.
Setpoint)
CLGUNOCC-SP Specifies the value for the unoccupied cooling 28.0 Deg C, 82.0 Deg F
(Unocc Cooling setpoint.
Setpoint)
Eff Occ Cooling V Specifies the effective occupied cooling Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Setpoint setpoint.
Eff Occ Heating V Specifies the effective occupied heating Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Setpoint setpoint.
EFFCLG-SP (Effective V Contains the effective cooling setpoint. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Cooling Setpoint)
EFFHTG-SP (Effective V Contains the effective heating setpoint. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Heating Setpoint)
Hardware Setpoint Specifies the absolute setpoint of the space 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
(this is one of two optional inputs). This input is
used if the Remote Setpoint Mode is Hardware
Only or if the Network Setpoint is not reliable
and the Remote Setpoint Mode is Network with
Hardware Backup.

852 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 24-161: ZN-T Setpoint Determination Attributes (Part 2 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Hardware Setpoint Contains the setpoint offset for the space. 0.0 Deg C, 0.0 Deg F
Offset
HTGOCC-SP (Occ Specifies the value for the occupied heating 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
Heating Setpoint) setpoint.
HTGSTBY-SP Specifies the value for the standby heating 19.0 Deg C, 66.0 Deg F
(Standby Heating setpoint.
Setpoint)
HTGUNOCC-SP Specifies the value for the unoccupied heating 16.0 Deg C, 61.0 Deg F
(Unocc Heating setpoint.
Setpoint)
Max Cooling Setpoint Defines the maximum cooling setpoint allowed. 30.0 Deg C, 86.0 Deg F
Max Heating Setpoint Defines the maximum heating setpoint allowed. 25.0 Deg C, 77.0 Deg F
Min Cooling Setpoint Defines the minimum cooling setpoint allowed. 20.0 Deg C, 68.0 Deg F
Min Heating Setpoint Defines the minimum heating setpoint allowed. 15.0 Deg C, 59.0 Deg F
Network Setpoint Specifies the absolute setpoint of the space 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
(this is one of two optional inputs). This input is
used if the Remote Setpoint Mode is Network
Only or Network with Hardware Backup. If the
Network Setpoint is not reliable and the
Remote Setpoint Mode is Network Only, the
last reliable value is used. If the Network
Setpoint is not reliable and the Remote
Setpoint Mode is Network with Hardware
Backup, the Hardware Setpoint is used.
Occ Cooling Shift2 Specifies the value for shifting occupied cooling 0.0 Deg C, 0.0 Deg F
setpoints.
Occ Heating Shift2 Contains the value for shifting occupied heating 0.0 Deg C, 0.0 Deg F
setpoints.
Occupancy Indicates the actual occupancy mode of the Occupied
unit. Set Name: Occ Effective
Optimal Start Status Indicates the status of an optimal start/stop Normal
algorithm, if being used by this application. Set Name: OST Warmup
When the Optimal Start/Stop input is not Cooldown
Normal, then the user can choose the effective
occupancy used for the setpoint calculations
via the OST Warmup State, OST Cooldown
State, and OST Coast State properties.
OST Coast State Specifies the effective occupancy mode when Unoccupied
the Optimal Start/Stop input is equal to Coast. Set Name: Occ Effective
OST Cooldown State Specifies the effective occupancy mode when Occupied
the Optimal Start/Stop input is equal to Set Name: Occ Effective
Cooldown.
OST Warmup State Specifies the effective occupancy mode when Occupied
the Optimal Start/Stop input is equal to Set Name: Occ Effective
Warmup.
Remote Setpoint Mode Allows you to decide whether or not the No Remote Setpoint
Remote Setpoint input should be used in the Set Name: ZN-T Remote
setpoint calculations. If used, you can choose Setpoint Mode
whether the default value or last reliable value
is used when the Remote Setpoint input is not
Reliable.
Standby Cooling Shift2 Specifies the value for shifting standby cooling 0.0 Deg C, 0.0 Deg F
setpoints.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 853

 Table 24-161: ZN-T Setpoint Determination Attributes (Part 3 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value

Standby Heating Shift2
Unocc Cooling Shift2
Unocc Heating Shift2
Contains the value for shifting standby heating 0.0 Deg C, 0.0 Deg F
setpoints.
Contains the value for shifting unoccupied 0.0 Deg C, 0.0 Deg F
cooling setpoints.
Contains the value for shifting unoccupied 0.0 Deg C, 0.0 Deg F
heating setpoints.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)
2. Shift attributes are set by the Summer Winter Compensation module.

Reliability (ZN-T Setpoint Determination)

Table 24-162: ZN-T Setpoint Determination Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Hardware Setpoint The Hardware Setpoint uses the last reliable value.
Hardware Setpoint Offset The Hardware Setpoint Offset uses the last reliable value.
Network Setpoint If the Remote Setpoint mode is Network Only, use the last reliable
value.
If the Remote Setpoint mode is Network with Hardware Backup,
use the Hardware Setpoint.

854 CCT Help: Modules

Sideloop Signal Conditioning
Overview
These modules allow you to use multiple analog inputs with a single sideloop
output controller. They provide the ability to average the inputs, add the inputs
together, select the maximum value, and select the minimum value. The Flow
Calculation module is described elsewhere. It allows you to convert an analog
value representing velocity pressure into flow.
The Sideloop Signal Conditioning contains the following modules:
• Flow Calculation (See the Flow Calculation section.)
• Sideloop Average Inputs
• Sideloop Maximum Selector
• Sideloop Minimum Selector
• Sideloop Sum Inputs

Sideloop Average Inputs

Overview
This module averages the inputs to produce the output. The module accepts two
inputs and outputs the average of the inputs. The user can add more inputs to the
module.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
To see this module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Attributes (Sideloop Average Inputs)
• Reliability (Sideloop Average Inputs)

Setpoint Determination/Misc 855

Attributes (Sideloop Average Inputs)
Table 24-163 describes the attributes used by the Sideloop Average Inputs
modules.
Table 24-163: Sideloop Average Inputs Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input 1 Contains the first input to be averaged. 0.0
Input 2 Contains the second input to be averaged. 0.0
Present Value G, V Displays the average of the inputs.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Sideloop Average Inputs)

Table 24-164: Sideloop Average Inputs Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Input 1 The average calculation uses the last Reliable value.
Input 2 The average calculation uses the last Reliable value.

856 CCT Help: Modules

Sideloop Maximum Selector

Overview
This module selects the maximum value of the inputs to produce the output. The
module accepts two inputs and outputs the maximum of the inputs. The user can
add more inputs to the module.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
To see this module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Attributes (Sideloop Maximum Selector)
• Reliability (Sideloop Maximum Selector)

Attributes (Sideloop Maximum Selector)

Table 24-165 describes the attributes used by the Sideloop Maximum Selector
modules.
Table 24-165: Sideloop Maximum Selector Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input 1 Contains the first input used to determine the 0.0
maximum.
Input 2 Contains the second input used to determine 0.0
the maximum.
Present Value G, V Displays the maximum of the inputs.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Sideloop Maximum Selector)

Table 24-166: Sideloop Maximum Selector Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Input 1 The last Reliable value is used in the maximum selection.
Input 2 The last Reliable value is used in the maximum selection.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 857

Sideloop Minimum Selector

Overview
This module selects the minimum value of the inputs to produce the output. The
module accepts two inputs and outputs the minimum of the inputs. You can add
more inputs to the module.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
To see this module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Attributes (Sideloop Minimum Selector)
• Reliability (Sideloop Minimum Selector)

Attributes (Sideloop Minimum Selector)

Table 24-167 describes the attributes used by the Sideloop Minimum Selector
modules.
Table 24-167: Sideloop Minimum Selector Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input 1 Contains the first input used to determine the 0.0
minimum.
Input 2 Contains the second input used to determine 0.0
the minimum.
Present Value G, V Displays the minimum of the inputs.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Sideloop Minimum Selector)

Table 24-168: Sideloop Minimum Selector Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Input 1 The last Reliable value is used in the minimum selection.
Input 2 The last Reliable value is used in the minimum selection.

858 CCT Help: Modules

Sideloop Sum Inputs

Overview
This module adds the inputs together to produce the output. The module accepts
two inputs and outputs the sum of the inputs. The user can add more inputs to the
module.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
To see this module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Attributes (Sideloop Sum Inputs)
• Reliability (Sideloop Sum Inputs)

Attributes (Sideloop Sum Inputs)

Table 24-169 describes the attributes used by the Sideloop Sum Inputs modules.
Table 24-169: Sideloop Sum Inputs Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input 1 Contains the first input to add. 0.0
Input 2 Contains the second input to add. 0.0
Present Value G, V Displays the minimum of the inputs.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Sideloop Sum Inputs)

Table 24-170: Sideloop Sum Inputs Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Input 1 The sum calculation uses the last Reliable value.
Input 2 The sum calculation uses the last Reliable value.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 859

Timing
Overview
The Timing group provides a unit (one time step) delay for a data signal. The
Timing group contains the Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) modules.

Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)

Overview
This section describes the Last Value modules of the Setpoint Determination/Misc
type. For information on the Last Value modules of the Output Control type, see
Timing in the Output Controller section.
The Last Value module holds the value that its input had at the end of the previous
execution (of the Control System) for use by the current execution. This module is
used when you want to compare the current value of a variable with the value from
the last execution. If this module is not operated continuously (for example, placed
in the state section of a hybrid activity), it starts at its Default Value when
re-enabled. One additional constraint is that connections from Hybrid Activity
Inputs are not allowed to be made directly to the Input of the Last Value module in
one of its State Sections. If such logic is needed, a no-op component (such as
adding zero to a float) should be connected between the Input and the Last Value.
This is required because the Hybrid Activity inputs are considered part of the
Event Section and are therefore earlier in the sequence order than all State Section
components.
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Last Value)
• Attributes (Last Value)
• Reliability (Last Value)

860 CCT Help: Modules

Module Use in Applications (Last Value)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
Setpoint Determination/Misc Last Value modules in this group using the names in
Table 24-171.
Table 24-171: Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Autocalibrate Now LV All VAV Applications
CD Area LV VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
CD Pickup Gain LV VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Exhaust Area LV All VAV Applications
Exhaust Pickup Gain LV All VAV Applications
HD Area LV VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
HD Pickup Gain LV VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Supply Area LV All VAV Applications
Supply Pickup Gain LV All VAV Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Setpoint Determination/Misc 861

Attributes (Last Value)
Table 24-172 describes the attributes used by the Setpoint Determination/Misc
Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) modules.
Table 24-172: Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input Passes the Default Value to the Present Value False
on the first execution after startup or enable. 1st Enum
Otherwise the Current Value of the Input is 0.0
passed to the Present Value.
Present Value G, V Displays the output of this module.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Last Value)

(Setpoint Determination/Misc Last Value)
For the first execution, the Reliability of the Present Value are Reliable. For
subsequent executions, the Reliability of the Present Value reflects the reliability
of the Input.

862 CCT Help: Modules

Damper Trouble Detection
Overview
The Trouble Detection group determines the trouble status of the damper control
within VAV applications. The Trouble Detection group contains the Damper
Trouble Detection modules.

Damper Trouble Detection

Overview
The Damper Trouble Detection module determines the trouble status of the
damper control within VAV applications. This module provides position detection
for VAV dampers and also provides an indication of failure due to the damper not
opening or closing properly. This module is used for UL 864 UUKL Smoke
Control support to validate the VAV damper is in the commanded position. This
module monitors the Damper Percent Cmd and outputs a Trouble warning after the
specified Delay under the following circumstances:
• The flow is not near zero if the damper is commanded closed.
• The flow is not near maximum if the damper is commanded to 100%.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Damper Trouble Detection)
• Attributes (Damper Trouble Detection)
• Reliability (Damper Trouble Detection)

Module Use in Applications (Damper Trouble Detection)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
Damper Trouble Detection modules in this group using the names in Table 24-173.
Table 24-173: Damper Trouble Detection Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Cold Deck Damper Trouble Detection VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Exhaust Damper Trouble Detection VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Single Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Hot Deck Damper Trouble Detection VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Supply Damper Trouble Detection VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Slave Single Duct Application

Setpoint Determination/Misc 863

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Damper Trouble Detection)

Table 24-174 describes the attributes used by the Damper Trouble Detection
modules.
Table 24-174: Damper Trouble Detection Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Closed Flow Fraction Indicates the maximum fraction of the Max 0.10
Flow to expect when the damper is fully closed. Display Precision =
This value is non-zero to account for leakage of 100ths
the damper when fully closed.
Current Flow Indicates the flow measurement for the 0.0 l/s, 0.0 cfm
monitored damper.
Damper Closed Indicates whether the damper is closed. False
Damper Open Indicates whether the damper is open. False
Damper Percent Cmd Indicates the Present Value of the damper 0.0%
output object (Analog Output Object or Position
Adjust Output Object).
Delay Specifies the time allowed for the damper to 75 seconds
open or close before the flow is checked to Display Precision = 1s
indicate Trouble.
Max Flow Indicates the rated flow for the monitored 500.0 l/s, 1000.0 cfm
damper.
Open Flow Fraction Indicates the minimum fraction of the Max Flow 0.85
to expect when the damper is fully opened. Display Precision =
Adjust this value after testing and balancing 100ths
each VAV box to determine the actual flow that
can be achieved during an emergency situation
(for example, pressurize).
Trouble G Indicates the current status of the damper False
control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Damper Trouble Detection)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

864 CCT Help: Modules

Chapter 25: CCT Help: Modules
State Generators
Introduction
The State Generation group of modules determines the current mode of the unit.
State Generation modules fall into one of the following categories:
• Alarm Management
• Central Plant
• Device Enable
• General Sequencing
• Occupied Sequencing
• Pass Through
• State Determination
• Unoccupied Sequencing
• VAV Specific Sequencing
• VAV Fan Determination
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

State Generators 865

Alarm Management
Overview
The Alarm Management group provides State Generators for alarms. The Alarm
Management group contains the Latching Alarm Manager module.

Latching Alarm Manager

Overview
This module provides the ability to latch the inputs to the module. The module
applies the OR operator to the result and passes it to the output. The Latching
Alarm Manager module contains an input that attaches the OR operator to all of
the results to cascade multiple modules.
When the Setup attribute is set to Automatic, the Output is Alarm when the value
of any of the inputs is Alarm, and equals Normal when all input values are Normal.
When the Setup attribute is set to Manual, the Output is Alarm when the value of
any of the inputs is Alarm, and equals Normal when all input values are Normal
and the Reset input is set to Reset.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Latching Alarm Manager)
• Attributes (Latching Alarm Manager)
• Primary States (Latching Alarm Manager)
• Reliability (Latching Alarm Manager)

Module Use in Applications (Latching Alarm Manager)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-175: Latching Alarm Manager Uses in Application System
Selection Trees (Part 1 of 2)
Module Instance Name Applications
2 Pipe Pump Alarms AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
Cooling Pump Alarms AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
CWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-8) Central Cooling Applications
Exhaust Fan Alarms AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application

866 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 25-175: Latching Alarm Manager Uses in Application System
Selection Trees (Part 2 of 2)
Module Instance Name
Heat Recovery Pump Alarms
HR Energy Wheel Alarms
Minimum OA Fan Alarms
PCHWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-8)
PHWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-4)
Preheat Pump Alarms
Reheat Pump Alarms
Relief Fan Alarms
Return Fan Alarms
SCHWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-8)
SHWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-4)
Supply Fan Alarms
TwrFanX Alarms (Where X Is 1-8)
Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
Central Cooling Applications
Central Heating Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Central Cooling Applications
Central Heating Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 867

Attributes (Latching Alarm Manager)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Latching Alarm Manager
modules:
Table 25-176: Latching Alarm Manager Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cascaded OR Input Provides the functionality to connect Normal
multiple modules using the OR operator on Set Name: Normal/Alarm
more than four inputs.
Input X Indicates the inputs to this module (X is Normal
1-4). Set Name: Normal/Alarm
Maintenance Switch Provides the result of the latch and OR Enable
operation, but is translated into the Set Name: Disable/Enable
disabling/enabling of the maintenance
switch.
Output G, V Provides the result of the latch and OR Normal
operation. Set Name: Normal/Alarm
Rest X Provides the inputs (X is 1-4) to return the Off
Output to Normal when the Setup X Set Name: Off/Reset
attribute is set to Manual.
Setup X Indicates the latch action used by the Automatic
specific input (X is 1-4). Set Name: Reset Type
When the Setup X attribute is set to
Automatic, the Output is Alarm if the
associated input is Alarm, and equals
Normal when all input values are Normal.
When the Setup X attribute is set to
Manual, the Output is Alarm if the
associated input is Alarm, and equals
Normal when all input values are Normal
and the Reset n input is set to Reset.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

868 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Latching Alarm Manager)
• When the Setup X attribute is set to Automatic, the Output is Alarm if the
associated input is Alarm, and equals Normal when all input values are
Normal.
• When the Setup X attribute is set to Manual, the Output is Alarm if the
associated input is Alarm, and equals Normal when all input values are Normal
and the Reset X input is set to Reset.
Table 25-177: Latching Alarm Manager Command Hierarchy
Input Reset LastOut Setup Output
Alarm * * * Alarm
Normal * * Automatic Normal
Reset Normal Manual Normal
Alarm Manual Normal
Off Normal Manual Normal
Alarm Manual Alarm

Reliability (Latching Alarm Manager)

This module uses the input’s last reliable value if the input becomes unreliable.

State Generators 869

Central Plant
Overview
The Central Plant group provides State Generators for heating and cooling
equipment. The Central Plant group contains the following modules:
• Calculate Building Load
• Load Calculation v2
• Central Heating Low Temp Control
• Count On Inputs
• Device Availability Calculation
• PID Sequencer
• Plant Sequencing-Building Load
• Plant Sequencing-Decouple
• Plant Sequencing-Discrete
• Plant Sequencing-Modulating
• Plant Sequencing-OA-T
• System Enable
• Tower Sequencing-1 Speed
• Tower Sequencing-2 Speed
• Tower Sequencing-3 Speed
• Tower Sequencing-Vernier

870 CCT Help: Modules

Calculate Building Load

Overview

IMPORTANT: As of Release 3.0, the Calculate Building Load module is

replaced by the Load Calculation v2 module.

The Calculate Building Load module provides the logic necessary to evaluate cold
and hot water loads. The module inputs include system flow, supply and return
temperatures media, a Heating or Cooling Switch, and glycol concentration. This
module considers Pure water, Water-Ethylene Glycol solution, and Water-
Propylene Glycol solution. You can select the media and the concentration of
Glycol in percentage, as necessary. The output of this module is the heating or
cooling heat transfer rate. A positive output value in the Heating mode indicates a
heating load and a positive output value in the Cooling mode indicates a cooling
load.
The required physical properties (density and heat capacity) are calculated for
water as functions of temperature. The Glycol solutions are calculated as functions
of both temperature and concentration according to the following equations.
Load Calculation
Load is calculated according to the following equation.
Load = Flow x 10-3 x ρ x Cp x ΔT
where
• Flow: Volumetric Flow [gpm input converted to l/s]

• ρ: Density [kg/m3]
• cp: Specific Heat Capacity [kJ/kg-°C]
• ΔT: Temperature Differential (Treturn - Tsupply) [°F input converted
to°C]

State Generators 871

 Load Calculation Computations
The Load Calculation Standard Object computes heating/cooling loads if the
heat transfer media is one of the following:
• Water
• Water-Ethylene Glycol solution
• Water-Propylene Glycol solution
If you choose Water, the density (ρ) and specific heat (Cp) are calculated using
the following equations:
ρ = R(1) + R(2)*T +R(3)*T^2
Cp = C(1) + C(2)*T +C(3)*T^2
where
• ρ in kg/m^3
• Cp in kJ/kg-K
• T in °C. Range of applicability is 0 to 226.85 °C.
constants
• R(1) = 1002.346
• R(2) = -0.1811972
• R(3) = -0.002543243
• C(1) = 4.211899
• C(2) = -0.001419488
• C(3) = 0.00001446954
If you choose any of the solutions, the concentration in volume percent of the
Glycol (either Ethylene or Propylene) should be provided. In these two cases,
two properties are calculated as a function of both Temperature and
Composition, using the following equations:
ρ = R(1) + R(2)*T +R(3)*Comp +R(4)*T*Comp +R(5)*T^2 +R(6)*Comp^2
Cp = C(1) + C(2)*T +C(3)*Comp +C(4)*T*Comp +C(5)*T^2 +C(6)*Comp^2
where
• ρ in kg/m^3
• Cp in kJ/kg-K
• T in °C. Range of applicability –35 to 125 °C
Composition is in decimals, for example, 10% is 0.1.
The range of applicability is 0.1 to 0.9.

872 CCT Help: Modules

 constants
Ethylene Glycol:
• R(1) = 1000.993
• R(2) = -0.1820508
• R(3) = 180.1828
• R(4) = -0.3142169
• R(5) = -0.002448466
• R(6) = -39.50314
• C(1) = 4.090844
• C(2) = 0.001329405
• C(3) = -1.5259387
• C(4) = 0.005028424
• C(5) = -0.0000001239507
• C(6) = -0.4911836
Propylene Glycol:
• R(1) = 1004.741
• R(2) = -0.2981901
• R(3) = 126.9451
• R(4) = -0.4054804
• R(5) = -0.001850845
• R(6) = -61.60746
• C(1) = 4.12479074756495
• C(2) = 0.00105318162514
• C(3) = -0.73136943192630
• C(4) = 0.00559981967494
• C(5) = 0.00000004392872
• C(6) = -1.21562837961674

IMPORTANT: Since the preceding equations are curve fits of experimental

data, these equations cannot and should not be used beyond the stated range of
applicability.

State Generators 873

 You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Calculate Building Load)
• Attributes (Calculate Building Load)

Module Use in Applications (Calculate Building Load)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-178: Calculate Building Load Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Building Load Calculation Central Heating Applications
Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Calculate Building Load)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Calculate Building Load
modules:
Table 25-179: Calculate Building Load Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Flow Indicates the rate at which the media is 0
moving through the system. Display Units: gpm
Glycol Concentration Indicates the percentage of Glycol in the 0
system. Display Units: %
HeatingCooling Switches the Load output, so a positive Heating
value is output for either a Heating or Set Name: Heating/Cooling
Cooling Mode.
Load V Indicates the calculated Load. 0
Display Units: W, Btuh
Media Indicates the type of media being used in Water
the system. Set Name: Load Media
Return Temperature Indicates the temperature of the media 0
returning from the system. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Supply Temperature Indicates the temperature of the media 0
being supplied to the system. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

874 CCT Help: Modules

Load Calculation v2

Overview

IMPORTANT: As of Release 3.0, the Load Calculation v2 module replaces

the Calculate Building Load module.

The Load Calculation v2 module provides the logic necessary to evaluate cold and
hot water loads. The module inputs include system flow, supply and return
temperatures media, a Heating or Cooling Switch, and glycol concentration. This
module considers Pure water, Water-Ethylene Glycol solution, and
Water-Propylene Glycol solution. You can select the media and the concentration
of Glycol in percentage, as necessary. The output of this module is the heating or
cooling heat transfer rate. A positive output value in the Heating mode indicates a
heating load and a positive output value in the Cooling mode indicates a cooling
load.
The required physical properties (density and heat capacity) are calculated for
water as functions of temperature. The Glycol solutions are calculated as functions
of both temperature and concentration according to the following equations.
Load Calculation
Load is calculated according to the following equation.
Load = Flow x 10-3 x ρ x Cp x ΔT
where
• Flow: Volumetric Flow [gpm input converted to l/s]

• ρ: Density [kg/m3]
• cp: Specific Heat Capacity [kJ/kg-°C]
• ΔT: Temperature Differential (Treturn - Tsupply) [°F input converted
to°C]

State Generators 875

 Load Calculation Computations
The Load Calculation Standard Object computes heating/cooling loads if the
heat transfer media is one of the following:
• Water
• Water-Ethylene Glycol solution
• Water-Propylene Glycol solution
If you choose Water, the density (ρ) and specific heat (Cp) are calculated using
the following equations:
ρ = R(1) + R(2)*T +R(3)*T^2
Cp = C(1) + C(2)*T +C(3)*T^2
where
• ρ in kg/m^3
• Cp in kJ/kg-K
• T in °C. Range of applicability is 0 to 226.85 °C.
constants
• R(1) = 1002.346
• R(2) = -0.1811972
• R(3) = -0.002543243
• C(1) = 4.211899
• C(2) = -0.001419488
• C(3) = 0.00001446954
If you choose any of the solutions, the concentration in volume percent of the
Glycol (either Ethylene or Propylene) should be provided. In these two cases,
two properties are calculated as a function of both Temperature and
Composition, using the following equations:
ρ = R(1) + R(2)*T +R(3)*Comp +R(4)*T*Comp +R(5)*T^2 +R(6)*Comp^2
Cp = C(1) + C(2)*T +C(3)*Comp +C(4)*T*Comp +C(5)*T^2 +C(6)*Comp^2
where
• ρ in kg/m^3
• Cp in kJ/kg-K
• T in °C. Range of applicability –35 to 125 °C
Composition is in decimals, for example, 10% is 0.1.
The range of applicability is 0.1 to 0.9.

876 CCT Help: Modules

 constants
Ethylene Glycol:
• R(1) = 1000.993
• R(2) = -0.1820508
• R(3) = 180.1828
• R(4) = -0.3142169
• R(5) = -0.002448466
• R(6) = -39.50314
• C(1) = 4.090844
• C(2) = 0.001329405
• C(3) = -1.5259387
• C(4) = 0.005028424
• C(5) = -0.0000001239507
• C(6) = -0.4911836
Propylene Glycol:
• R(1) = 1004.741
• R(2) = -0.2981901
• R(3) = 126.9451
• R(4) = -0.4054804
• R(5) = -0.001850845
• R(6) = -61.60746
• C(1) = 4.12479074756495
• C(2) = 0.00105318162514
• C(3) = -0.73136943192630
• C(4) = 0.00559981967494
• C(5) = 0.00000004392872
• C(6) = -1.21562837961674

IMPORTANT: Since the preceding equations are curve fits of experimental

data, these equations cannot and should not be used beyond the stated range of
applicability.

State Generators 877

 You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Load Calculation v2)
• Attributes (Load Calculation v2)

Module Use in Applications (Load Calculation v2)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-180: Load Calculation v2 Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Building Load Calculation v2 Central Heating Applications
Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

878 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Load Calculation v2)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Load Calculation v2
modules:
Table 25-181: Load Calculation v2 Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Flow Indicates the rate the media is moving 0
through the system. Display Units: l/s, gpm
Glycol Concentration Indicates the percentage of Glycol in the 0
system. Display Units: %
HeatingCooling Switches the Load output, so a positive Heating
value is output for either a Heating or Set Name: Heating/Cooling
Cooling Mode.
Load V Indicates the calculated Load. 0
Display Units: W, Btuh
Media Indicates the type of media used in the Water
system. Set Name: Load Media
Return Temperature Indicates the temperature of the media 0
returning from the system. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Supply Temperature Indicates the temperature of the media 0
supplied to the system. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Unit Set Switches the calculation based on the IP
application’s system of units. Display Units: SI, IP

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 879

Central Heating Low Temp Control

Overview
This module generates the appropriate frost protection state.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Central Heating Low Temp Control)
• Attributes (Central Heating Low Temp Control)
• Primary States (Central Heating Low Temp Control)
• Reliability (Central Heating Low Temp Control)

Module Use in Applications (Central Heating Low Temp Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-182: Central Heating Low Temp Control Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Frost Protection Determination Central Heating Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

880 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Central Heating Low Temp Control)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Central Heating Low
Temp Control modules:
Table 25-183: Central Heating Low Temp Control Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Frost Protect Indicates the amount by which the outdoor 1.5 Deg C, 3.0 Deg F
Differential air temperature must rise above a setpoint
to reset the condition.
Frost Protect OA Provides the first outdoor air temperature 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
Setpoint 1 setpoint. When the Outdoor Air
Temperature is less than this value, the
State is Low OAT 1.
Frost Protect OA Provides the second outdoor air 2.0 Deg C, 35.0 Deg F
Setpoint 2 temperature setpoint. When the Outdoor
Air Temperature is greater than this value,
the State is Low OAT 2.
Outdoor Air Temp Indicates the outdoor air temperature. 0.0
Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
State G Indicates the current state of the module. Normal
This output connects to the State Selection Set Name: CP Frost Protect
table.
Zone Differential Indicates the amount by which the Zone 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
Temperature must rise above the Zone
Setpoint to reset the condition.
Zone Setpoint Provides the zone temperature setpoint. 20.0 Deg C, 68.0 Deg F
This attribute typically connects to the
Zone Heating Setpoint. When the Zone
Temperature is less than this value and
the Outdoor Air Temperature is less than
Frost Protect OA Setpoint 2, the State is
Low OAT and Low Zone.
Zone Temperature Indicates the zone temperature. 0.0
Display Units: Deg C, Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 881

Primary States (Central Heating Low Temp Control)
• When the Zone Temperature is less than the Zone Setpoint value and the
Outdoor Air Temperature is less than Frost Protect OA Setpoint 2, the State is
Low OAT and Low Zone.
• When the Outdoor Air Temperature is less than the Frost Protect OA Setpoint
1 value, the State is Low OAT 1.
• When the Outdoor Air Temperature is greater than the Frost Protect OA
Setpoint 2 value, the State is Low OAT 2.
Table 25-184: Central Heating Low Temp Control Command Hierarchy
Zone Loop Boiler Primary Pumps State
* * * Normal
* * On Low OAT 1
* On On Low OAT 2
On On On Low OAT and Low
Zone

Reliability (Central Heating Low Temp Control)

This module uses the input’s last reliable value if the input becomes unreliable.

882 CCT Help: Modules

Count On Inputs

Overview
This module is responsible for determining if any of the interlock devices are on.
The module accepts eight status inputs as well as a limit input value that acts as a
high limit. Based on the input commands and the parameter settings, the module
outputs the number of devices that are ON.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Count On Inputs)
• Attributes (Count On Inputs)

Module Use in Applications (Count On Inputs)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-185: Count On Inputs Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
CHW Isolation Valve Status Central Cooling Applications
CW Isolation Valve Status Central Cooling Applications
Isolation Valve Status Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Count On Inputs)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Count On Inputs modules:
Table 25-186: Count On Inputs Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input # Indicates if the device status is off or on. Off
Input # is a Binary input.
Limit Variable Acts as a high limit in the number of 8
devices that are able to run. Limit Variable
is a floating value.
Output (Float) V Indicates the current number of devices 0
that are ON.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 883

Device Availability Calculation

Overview
The Device Availability Calculation module calculates the number of available
devices that are able to run. This module accepts eight device enable inputs as well
as a limit input value that acts as a high limit. Based on the input commands and
the attribute settings, the module outputs a number (floating value) of devices that
are currently available.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Device Availability Calculation)
• Attributes (Device Availability Calculation)

Module Use in Applications (Device Availability Calculation)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-187: Device Availability Calculation Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Boilers Available Central Heating Applications
CWPs Available Central Cooling Applications
PCHWPs Available Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

884 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Device Availability Calculation)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Device Availability
Calculation modules:
Table 25-188: Device Availability Calculation Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Device X Enable Indicates if the device is available to run. False
Device X Enable is a Boolean input.
Limit Variable Acts as a high limit in the number of 8
devices that are able to run. Limit Variable
is a floating value.
Output (Float) V Indicates the current number of devices 0
that are able to run.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 885

PID Sequencer

Overview
The PID Sequencer module is responsible for sequencing the cooling tower valve
and the cooling tower fans and making sure that the tower valve is open before
starting the cooling tower fans. This module accepts as inputs a Delay, an Input 1,
an Input 2, and a System Enable. Based on the input commands and the attribute
settings, the module outputs a state for sequencing the valve and fans.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (PID Sequencer)
• Attributes (PID Sequencer)

Module Use in Applications (PID Sequencer)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-189: PID Sequencer Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
CW Sequencing Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

886 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (PID Sequencer)
The following table describes the attributes used by the PID Sequencer modules:
Table 25-190: PID Sequencer Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
BYP Saturation Provides an input that comes from the Disabled
(Input 1) Cooling Tower Valve Control Status Set Name: Control Status
output.
CT Saturation (Input 2) Provides an input that comes from the Disabled
Cooling Tower Fans Control Status output. Set Name: Control Status
Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 15
Up that another operation (Stage Up or Display Units: Seconds
Stage Down) can be performed.
State Indicates the current state generated. Off
Set Name: Plant Sequencing
Mode
System Enable Enables the staging process to run using Disabled
an Off/On command. Set Name: Disable Enable

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 887

Plant Sequencing-Building Load

Overview
The Plant Sequencing-Building Load module is responsible for sequencing pumps,
interlocks, and stages of a discrete plant system to meet a building load. This
module accepts as inputs a stage capacity, a load, a percent deadband, a Stabilize
Delay, an Up Delay, a Down Delay, a System Interlock Status, a Start-Up Delay,
Minimum Running Devices, and a System Enable. Based on the input commands
and the attribute settings, the module outputs a state for sequencing pumps,
interlocks, and stages of a discrete plant system and an output for the number of
devices to run.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Building Load)
• Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Building Load)

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Building Load)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-191: Plant Sequencing-Building Load Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Boiler Sequencing by Building Load Central Heating Applications
Chiller Sequencing by Building Load Central Cooling Applications
Chiller Sequencing by Chiller Load Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

888 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Building Load)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Plant Sequencing-Building
Load modules:
Table 25-192: Plant Sequencing-Building Load Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
% Deadband Indicates the percentage of the Stage 5%
Capacity that will separate the Stage up
and the Stage down.
Control Status This returns a status of the System Off
Enable.
Down Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 10 Minutes
Down that another operation (Stage Up or
Stage Down) can be performed.
Load Indicates the amount of the load a single 0 btuh or %FLA or Amps
stage can satisfy.
Minimum Running Indicates the minimum quantity of stages 0
Devices to run as a first stage.
Number of Devices Indicates the number of devices that are 0
Running currently being called by the BO
sequencer to run.
Output (Float) V Indicates the number of devices that are 0
being called to run.
Stabilize Delay Prevents debounce in staging up or down. 180 Seconds
Stage Capacity Determines whether Stage Up or Stage 0 btuh or %FLA or Amps
Down is required and is the variable that is
compared to the Stage Capacity and the
number of devices running.
Start-Up Delay Prevents staging until system reaches 60 Minutes
equilibrium.
State G Indicates the current state. Off
Set Name: Plant Sequencing
Mode
System Enable Enables the staging process to run using Off
an Off/On command.
System Interlock Indicates the status of the interlock. The On
Status Global System Interlock Status must be
On before any staging can occur.
Up Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 15 Minutes
Up that another operation (Stage Up or
Stage Down) can be performed.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 889

Plant Sequencing-Decouple

Overview
The Plant Sequencing-Decouple module is responsible for sequencing pumps,
interlocks, and stages of a discrete plant system to maintain a decouple flow
setpoint. This module accepts as inputs a process variable, a setpoint, an Up Delay,
a Down Delay, a Number of Devices Running, a System Interlock Status, a
Stabilize Delay, a Start-Up Delay, Minimum Running Devices, Device Mode, and
a System Enable. Based on the input commands and the attribute settings, the
module outputs a state for sequencing pumps, interlocks, and stages of a discrete
plant system and an output for the number of devices to run.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Decouple)
• Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Decouple)
• Primary States (Plant Sequencing-Decouple)

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Decouple)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-193: Plant Sequencing-Decouple Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Chiller Sequencing by Decouple Loop Flow Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

890 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Decouple)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Plant Sequencing-
Decouple modules:
Table 25-194: Plant Sequencing-Decouple Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Device Mode Indicates the direction of flow for flow Normal
meters with a BI for direction. Set Name: Polarity
Down Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 10
Down that another operation (Stage Up or Display Units: Minutes
Stage Down) can be performed.
Minimum Running Indicates the minimum quantity of stages 0
Devices to run. Display Units: Minutes
Number of Devices Indicates the number of devices that are 0
Running currently being called by the BO Display Units: Minutes
sequencer to run.
Output Indicates the number of devices that are 0
being called to run.
Process Variable Determines whether Stage Up or Stage 100
Down is required and is the variable that is
compared to the setpoint.
Setpoint Indicates the target value of the process 100
variable.
Stabilize Delay Prevents debounce in staging up or down. 180
Display Units: Minutes
Start-Up Delay Prevents staging until the system reaches 60
equilibrium. Display Units: Minutes
State Indicates the current state generated by Off
the sequence. Set Name: Plant Sequencing
Mode
System Enable Enables the staging process to run using Off
an Off/On command. Set Name: Off/On
System Interlock Indicates the status of the Global System On
Status Interlock. The Global System Interlock Set Name: Off/On
Status must be On before any staging may
occur.
Up Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 15
Up that another operation (Stage Up or Display Units: Minutes
Stage Down) can be performed.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Plant Sequencing-Decouple)

• Off: Indicates the system is disabled.
• Pump Only: Allows a circulation pump to run as a minimum whenever the
system is enabled.
• System Interlock: Allows a global system interlock to be turned on prior to
starting any stages.
• Control: Allows the output value to change to meet the demand of the system.

State Generators 891

Plant Sequencing-Discrete

Overview
The Plant Sequencing-Discrete module is responsible for sequencing pumps,
interlocks, and stages of a discrete plant system to maintain a setpoint. This
module accepts as inputs a process variable, a setpoint, a deadband, a heating/
cooling flag, a Stabilize Delay, an Up Delay, a Down Delay, a Number of Devices
Running, a System Interlock Status, a Start-Up Delay, Minimum Running
Devices, and a System Enable. Based on the input commands and the attribute
settings, the module outputs a state for sequencing pumps, interlocks, and stages of
a discrete plant system and an output for the number of devices to run.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Discrete)
• Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Discrete)
• Primary States (Plant Sequencing-Discrete)

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Discrete)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-195: Plant Sequencing-Discrete Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Chiller Sequencing by Delta T Central Cooling Applications
Discrete Boiler Sequencing by HWR-T Central Heating Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

892 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Discrete)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Plant Sequencing-Discrete
modules:
Table 25-196: Plant Sequencing-Discrete Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Deadband Indicates an area of a signal range or band 2
where no action occurs and the State
outputs a Hold.
Down Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 10
Down that another operation (Stage Up or Display Units: Minutes
Stage Down) can be performed.
HeatingCooling Inverts the action of the Stage Up/Stage Heating
Down. Set Name: Heating/Cooling
Minimum Running Indicates the minimum quantity of stages 0
Devices to run. Display Units: Minutes
Number of Devices Indicates the number of devices that are 0
Running currently being called by the BO Display Units: Minutes
sequencer to run.
Output Indicates the number of devices that are 0
being called to run.
Process Variable Determines whether Stage Up or Stage 100
Down is required by being compared to the
setpoint.
Setpoint Indicates the target value of the process 100
variable.
Stabilize Delay Prevents debounce in staging up or down. 180
Display Units: Minutes
Start-Up Delay Prevents staging until the system reaches 60
equilibrium. Display Units: Minutes
State Represents the current state generated. Off
Set Name: Plant Sequencing
Mode
System Enable Enables the staging process to run using Off
an Off/On command. Set Name: Off/On
System Interlock Indicates the status of the Global System On
Status Interlock. The Global System Interlock Set Name: Off/On
Status must be On before any staging may
occur.
Up Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 15
Up that another operation (Stage Up or Display Units: Minutes
Stage Down) can be performed.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 893

Primary States (Plant Sequencing-Discrete)
• Control: Allows the output value to change, to meet the demand of the system.
• Off: Indicates the system is disabled.
• Pump Only: Allows a circulation pump to run as a minimum whenever the
system is enabled.
• System Interlock: Allows a global system interlock to be turned on prior to
starting any stages.

894 CCT Help: Modules

Plant Sequencing-Modulating

Overview
The Plant Sequencing-Modulating module is responsible for sequencing pumps,
interlocks, and stages of modulating plant equipment to maintain a setpoint. This
module accepts as inputs a process variable, a stageup setpoint, a number of stages
running, an Up Delay, a Down Delay, a System Interlock Status, a Stabilize Delay,
a Start-Up Delay, and a System Enable. Based on the input commands and the
attribute settings, the module outputs a state for sequencing pumps, interlocks, and
stages of modulating plant equipment and an output for the number of devices to
run. This module provides an output for a stagedown setpoint that is calculated
based on the number of devices running.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Modulating)
• Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Modulating)
• Primary States (Plant Sequencing-Modulating)

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Modulating)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-197: Plant Sequencing-Modulating Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Modulating HX or Boiler Sequencing Central Heating Applications
Secondary CHW Pump Sequencing Central Cooling Applications
Secondary HW Pump Sequencing Central Heating Applications
Variable Speed Fan Clg Twr Sequencing Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 895

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Modulating)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Plant Sequencing-
Modulating modules:
Table 25-198: Plant Sequencing-Modulating Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Plant Sequencing-Modulating Common Attributes
Down Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 10 Minutes
Down that another operation (Stage Up or
Stage Down) can be performed.
Minimum Running Indicates the minimum quantity of stages 0
Devices to run as a first stage.
Number of Devices Indicates the number of devices that are 0
Running currently being called by the BO
sequencer to run.
Output V Indicates the number of devices that are 0
being called to run.
Process Variable Indicates the variable that is compared to 100%
the setpoint and determines whether
Stage Up or Stage Down is required.
Stabilize Delay Prevents debounce in staging up or down. 180 Seconds
The Plant Sequencing-Modulating module
must be in stage up or stage down mode
for this length of time before command is
issued,
StageDown Setpoint V Indicates the target value of the process 15%
variable.
StageUp Setpoint Indicates the target value of the process 95%
variable.
Start-up Delay Indicates the period to wait before staging 60 Minutes
on additional (above minimum) devices to
allow the system to stabilize.
State G Indicates the current state generated by Off
the sequence. Set Name: Plant Sequencing
Mode
System Enable Indicates the status of the Off/On Off
command that enables the staging
process to run.
System Interlock Indicates the on or off status of the Global On
Status System Interlock. This attribute must be
On before staging can occur.
Up Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 15 Minutes
Up that another operation (Stage Up or
Stage Down) can be performed.
Secondary HW Pump Sequencing and Secondary CHW Pump Sequencing Attributes
Down Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 5 Minutes
Down that another operation (Stage Up or
Stage Down) can be performed.
Start-up Delay Indicates the period to wait before staging 0 Minutes
on additional (above minimum) devices to
allow the system to stabilize.
Up Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 5 Minutes
Up that another operation (Stage Up or
Stage Down) can be performed.

896 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 25-198: Plant Sequencing-Modulating Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Variable Speed Fan Clg Twr Attributes
Down Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 3 Minutes
Down that another operation (Stage Up or
Stage Down) can be performed.
Start-up Delay Indicates the period to wait before staging 0 Minutes
on additional (above minimum) devices to
allow the system to stabilize.
Up Delay Indicates the minimum time after a Stage 3 Minutes
Up that another operation (Stage Up or
Stage Down) can be performed.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Plant Sequencing-Modulating)

• Off: Indicates that the system is disabled.
• Pump Only: Allows a circulation pump to run as a minimum whenever the
system is enabled.
• System Interlock: Allows a global system interlock to be turned on prior to
starting any stages.
• Control: Allows the output value to change to meet the demand of the system.

State Generators 897

Plant Sequencing-OA-T

Overview
The Plant Sequencing-OA-T module is responsible for sequencing stages of a
discrete heating system based on an outdoor air temperature setpoint. This module
accepts as inputs an outdoor air temperature, an OA heating enable setpoint, a low
limit setpoint, a Number Available, a System Interlock Status, Minimum Running
Devices, and a System Enable. Based on the input commands and the attribute
settings, the module outputs a state for sequencing pumps, interlocks, and stages of
a discrete plant system and an output for the number of devices to run.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-OA-T)
• Attributes (Plant Sequencing-OA-T)

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-OA-T)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-199: Plant Sequencing-OA-T Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Boiler Sequencing by OA-T Central Heating Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

898 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-OA-T)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Plant Sequencing-OA-T
modules:
Table 25-200: Plant Sequencing-OA-T Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Low Limit Setpoint Indicates the temperature at which all the 0 Deg C, 30 Deg F
stages of heat are running.
Minimum Running Indicates the minimum quantity of stages 1
Devices to run as a first stage.
Number Available Indicates the maximum quantity of stages 8
allowed to start by a Stage Up command.
OA Heating Enable Indicates the temperature at which the first 18 Deg C, 65 Deg F
Setpoint heating device is able to run.
Outdoor Air Determines whether another stage is 24 Deg C, 75 Deg F
Temperature required and is the variable that is
compared to the setpoint.
Output (Float) V Indicates the number of devices that are 0
being called to run.
State G Indicates the current state. Off
Set Name: Plant Sequencing
Mode
System Enable Enables the staging process to run using Off
an Off/On command.
System Interlock Indicates the status of the interlock. The On
Status Global System Interlock Status mst be On
before any staging can occur.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 899

System Enable

Overview
The System Enable module enables or locks out a heating or cooling device. This
module accepts as inputs outdoor air temperature, outdoor air enable setpoint,
outdoor air enable differential, heating/cooling selection, and a network
isAvailable. The module has a state output that indicates if the module is enabled.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (System Enable)
• Attributes (System Enable)

Module Use in Applications (System Enable)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-201: System Enable Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Chilled Water System Enable Central Cooling Applications
Hot Water System Enable Central Heating Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

900 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (System Enable)
The following table describes the attributes used by the System Enable modules:
Table 25-202: System Enable Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
HeatingCooling Determines the polarity of the comparison. Cooling
Set HeatingCooling to Heating for a Set Name: Heating/Cooling
heating device, and set HeatingCooling to
Cooling for a cooling device.
If HeatingCooling is set to Cooling, a
greater than comparison is used, so State
is true if the OA Temperature is greater
than the OA Temperature Setpoint.
If HeatingCooling is set to Heating, a less
than comparison is used, so State is true if
the OA Temperature is less than the OA
Temperature Setpoint.
HWSYS-AVAILABLE Indicates if the State output is true when False
or CHWSYS-AVAIL the device is available and is false when Boolean
the device is not available.
isAvailable Enables or disables a device. True
Boolean
OA Temperature Indicates the outdoor air temperature. 24, 70
Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
OA Temperature Diff Indicates the differential for the setpoint. 4
Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
OA Temperature Indicates the outdoor air temperature 15, 61
Enable Setpoint setpoint above which, the cooling is Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
enabled, or below which the heating is
enabled.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 901

Tower Sequencing-1 Speed

Overview
The Tower Sequencing 1 Speed module is responsible for sequencing cooling
tower fans to maintain a setpoint. This module accepts as inputs a mode, a process
variable, a setpoint, a minimum on time, a minimum off time, a rotate now,
process units, a device x runtime (where x is 1-12), and a device x enable (where x
is 1-12). Based on the input commands and the attribute settings, the module
outputs a control status and a device x out (where x is 1-12).
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing 1 Speed)
• Attributes (Tower Sequencing 1 Speed)

Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing 1 Speed)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-203: Tower Sequencing-1 Speed Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
On/Off Fan Clg Twr Sequencing Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

902 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Tower Sequencing 1 Speed)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Tower Sequencing-1
Speed modules:
Table 25-204: Tower Sequencing-1 Speed Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status Indicates the status of the PID that controls Normal
the stages. Set Name: Control Status
Device 1 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 1 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 1 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 10 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 10 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 10 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 11 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 11 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 11 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 12 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 12 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 12 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 2 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 2 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 2 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 3 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 3 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 3 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 4 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 4 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 4 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.

State Generators 903

 Table 25-204: Tower Sequencing-1 Speed Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Device 5 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 5 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 5 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 6 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 6 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 6 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 7 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 7 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 7 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 8 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 8 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 8 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 9 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 9 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 9 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Minimum Off Time Indicates the minimum time a stage is held 15
off. Display Units: Seconds
Minimum On Time Indicates the minimum time a stage is held 15
on. Display Units: Seconds
Mode Enables the staging process to run using Off
an Off/On command. Set Name: Off/On
Process Units Rotates the lead of the stages, when True, Deg F
starting with the one that has the lowest Set Name: Unit
runtime.
Process Variable Determines whether Stage Up or Stage 100
Down is required and is the variable that is Display Units: Deg F
compared to the setpoint.
Rotate Now Indicates the target value of the process False
variable. Boolean
Setpoint Indicates the target value of the process 95
variable. Display Units: Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

904 CCT Help: Modules

Tower Sequencing-2 Speed

Overview
The Tower Sequencing-2 Speed module is responsible for sequencing two speed
cooling tower fans to maintain a setpoint. This module accepts as inputs a mode, a
process variable, a setpoint, a minimum on time, a minimum off time, a rotate
now, process units, a device x runtime (where x is 1-6), and a device x enable
(where x is 1-6). Based on the input commands and the attribute settings, the
module outputs a control status and a device x out (where x is 1-12).
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing-2 Speed)
• Attributes (Tower Sequencing-2 Speed)

Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing-2 Speed)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-205: Tower Sequencing-2 Speed Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
2 Speed Fan Clg Twr Sequencing Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 905

Attributes (Tower Sequencing-2 Speed)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Tower Sequencing-2
Speed modules:
Table 25-206: Tower Sequencing-2 Speed Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status Indicates the status of the PID that controls Normal
the stages. Set Name: Control Status
Device 1 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 1 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 1 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 10 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 11 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 12 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 2 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 2 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 2 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 3 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 3 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 3 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 4 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 4 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 4 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 5 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 5 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 5 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 6 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 6 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 6 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.

906 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 25-206: Tower Sequencing-2 Speed Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Device 7 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 8 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 9 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Minimum Off Time Indicates the minimum time a stage is held 15
off. Display Units: Seconds
Minimum On Time Indicates the minimum time a stage is held 15
on. Display Units: Seconds
Mode Enables the staging process to run using Off
an Off/On command. Set Name: Off/On
Process Units Rotates the lead of the stages, when True, Deg F
starting with the one that has the lowest Set Name: Unit
runtime.
Process Variable Determines whether Stage Up or Stage 100
Down is required and is the variable that is Display Units: Deg F
compared to the setpoint.
Rotate Now Indicates the target value of the process False
variable. Boolean
Setpoint Indicates the target value of the process 95
variable. Display Units: Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 907

Tower Sequencing-3 Speed

Overview
The Tower Sequencing-3 Speed module is responsible for sequencing cooling
tower fans to maintain a setpoint. This module accepts as inputs a mode, a process
variable, a setpoint, a minimum on time, a minimum off time, a rotate now,
process units, a device x runtime (where x is 1-8), and a device x enable (where x
is 1-8). Based on the input commands and the attribute settings, the module outputs
a control status and a device x out (where x is 1-12).
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing-3 Speed)
• Attributes (Tower Sequencing-3 Speed)

Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing-3 Speed)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-207: Tower Sequencing-3 Speed Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
3 Speed Fan Clg Twr Sequencing Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

908 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Tower Sequencing-3 Speed)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Tower Sequencing-3
Speed modules:
Table 25-208: Tower Sequencing-3 Speed Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status Indicates the status of the PID that controls Normal
the stages. Set Name: Control Status
Device 1 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 1 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 1 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 10 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 11 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 12 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 2 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 2 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 2 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 3 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 3 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 3 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 4 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 4 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 4 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 5 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 6 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 7 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 8 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 9 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Minimum Off Time Indicates the minimum time a stage is held 15
off. Display Units: Seconds

State Generators 909

 Table 25-208: Tower Sequencing-3 Speed Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Minimum On Time Indicates the minimum time a stage is held 15
on. Display Units: Seconds
Mode Enables the staging process to run using Off
an Off/On command. Set Name: Off/On
Process Units Rotates the lead of the stages, when True, Deg F
starting with the one that has the lowest Set Name: Unit
runtime.
Process Variable Determines whether Stage Up or Stage 100
Down is required and is the variable that is Display Units: Deg F
compared to the setpoint.
Rotate Now Indicates the target value of the process False
variable. Boolean
Setpoint Indicates the target value of the process 95
variable. Display Units: Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

910 CCT Help: Modules

Tower Sequencing-Vernier

Overview
The Tower Sequencing-Vernier module is responsible for sequencing cooling
tower fans to maintain a setpoint. This module accepts as inputs a mode, a process
variable, a setpoint, a minimum on time, a minimum off time, a rotate now,
process units, a device x runtime (where x is 1-12), and a device x enable (where x
is 1-12). Based on the input commands and the attribute settings, the module
outputs a control status, an output for modulating the vernier device, and a device x
out (where x is 1-12). You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic
using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing-Vernier)
• Attributes (Tower Sequencing-Vernier)

Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing-Vernier)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-209: Tower Sequencing-Vernier Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
On/Off Fan w/ Vernier Output Clg Twr Central Cooling Applications
Sequencing

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 911

Attributes (Tower Sequencing-Vernier)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Tower Sequencing-Vernier
modules:
Table 25-210: Tower Sequencing-Vernier Attributes (Part 1 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status Indicates the status of the PID that controls Normal
the stages. Set Name: Control Status
Device 1 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 1 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 1 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 10 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 10 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 10 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 11 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 11 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 11 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 12 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 12 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 12 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 2 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 2 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 2 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 3 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 3 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 3 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 4 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 4 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 4 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.

912 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 25-210: Tower Sequencing-Vernier Attributes (Part 2 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Device 5 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 5 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 5 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 6 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 6 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 6 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 7 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 7 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 7 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 8 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 8 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 8 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Device 9 Enable Enables the stage to be a part of the False
control strategy. Boolean
Device 9 Out Commands the fan to run or not. False
Boolean
Device 9 Runtime Indicates the device’s current runtime 0
value.
Minimum Off Time Indicates the minimum time a stage is held 15
off. Display Units: Seconds
Minimum On Time Indicates the minimum time a stage is held 15
on. Display Units: Seconds
Mode Enables the staging process to run using Off
an Off/On command. Set Name: Off/On
Output (Float) Indicates the output for the vernier stage to 0
be controlled proportionally Display Units: %
Process Units Rotates the lead of the stages, when True, Deg F
starting with the one that has the lowest Set Name: Unit
runtime.
Process Variable Determines whether Stage Up or Stage 100
Down is required and is the variable that is Display Units: Deg F
compared to the setpoint.

State Generators 913

 Table 25-210: Tower Sequencing-Vernier Attributes (Part 3 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Rotate Now Indicates the target value of the process False
variable. Boolean
Setpoint Indicates the target value of the process 95
variable. Display Units: Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

914 CCT Help: Modules

Device Enable
Overview
The Device Enable group provides the ability to enable devices based on network
commands or outdoor air temperature. The Device Enable group contains the
following modules:
• Pass Through (Device Enable)
• Availability Determination
• Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination
• Heat Recovery Suitability Determination
This module typically provides information to other State Generation modules
rather than connecting directly to State Selection. Also, see the Device Enable
category of modules in the Setpoint Determination/Misc section.

Pass Through (Device Enable)

Overview
The Device Enable Pass Through modules provide an automatic connection to the
State Selection module. They typically take Network Inputs and connect them to
State Selection. The Device Enable category’s Pass Through modules have the
same configuration as the Pass Through category’s Pass Through (Boolean, Enum)
module.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Device Enable Pass Through)
• Pass Through (Boolean, Enum)

State Generators 915

Module Use in Applications (Device Enable Pass Through)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-211: Device Enable Pass Through Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
2 Pipe isAvailable Pass Through AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
Fan Coil Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Box Heating isAvailable Pass Through VAV Single Duct Application
Cooling isAvailable Pass Through Fan Coil Application
Heating isAvailable Pass Through Fan Coil Application
Humidification IsAvailable Pass Through All Air Handling Unit Applications
Supp Heating isAvailable Pass Through VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

916 CCT Help: Modules

Availability Determination

Overview
The Availability Determination module enables or locks out a heating or cooling
device. The module accepts as inputs outdoor air temperature, outdoor air enable
setpoint, outdoor air enable differential, heating/cooling selection, network
isAvailable, and a resolution mode. The module has a state output that indicates if
the device should be enabled. When the output is True, the heating or cooling
device is enabled. When the output is False, the heating or cooling device is not
enabled.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Availability Determination)
• Attributes (Availability Determination)
• Primary States (Availability Determination)
• Reliability (Availability Determination)

Module Use in Applications (Availability Determination)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-212: Availability Determination Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Cooling Availability Determination All Air Handling Unit Applications
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Heating Availability Determination Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Preheat Availability Determination AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Reheat Availability Determination All Air Handling Unit Applications
Zone Heating Availability Determination AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 917

Attributes (Availability Determination)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Availability Determination
modules.
Table 25-213: Availability Determination Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Availability Determination Common Attributes
DEVICE-AVAILABLE, G, V Displays True when the device is available
CLG-AVAILABLE, and False when the device is not available
HTG-AVAILABLE,
PH-AVAILABLE,
RH-AVAILABLE,
ZNHTG-AVAILABLE
(State)
isAvailable Displays the network input for enabling or True
disabling a device.
OA Temperature Contains the temperature that is 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
compared to the outdoor air temperature
setpoint to determine if heating or cooling
is available.
OA Temperature Diff Contains the differential input to the 2.0 Deg C, 4.0 Deg F
comparison between the OA temperature
and the OA temperature enable setpoint.
When Heating/Cooling = Cooling, a
greater than comparison is used. When
Heating/Cooling = Heating, a less than
comparison is used.
OA Temperature Contains the outdoor air temperature 16.0 Deg C, 61.0 Deg F
Enable Setpoint setpoint above which the cooling is
enabled or below which the heating is
enabled.
Resolution Mode Allows the module to be configured to use Either Can Activate
the outdoor air temperature, the network Set Name: Resolution Mode
input, or either of the two to enable a
cooling or heating device
Cooling Availability Determination-Specific Attributes
HeatingCooling Specifies that when Heating/Cooling = Cooling
Cooling, a greater than comparison is Set Name: Heating/Cooling
used, so State is True if the OA
Temperature is greater than the OA
Temperature Setpoint.
Heating Availability Determination-Specific Attributes
HeatingCooling Specifies that when Heating/Cooling = Heating
Heating, a less than comparison is used, Set Name: Heating/Cooling
so State is True if the OA Temperature is
less than the OA Temperature Setpoint.
Preheat Availability Determination-Specific Attributes
HeatingCooling Specifies that when Heating/Cooling = Heating
Heating, a less than comparison is used, Set Name: Heating/Cooling
so State is True if the OA Temperature is
less than the OA Temperature Setpoint.
Reheat Availability Determination-Specific Attributes
HeatingCooling Specifies that when Heating/Cooling = Heating
Heating, a less than comparison is used, Set Name: Heating/Cooling
so State is True if the OA Temperature is
less than the OA Temperature Setpoint.

918 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 25-213: Availability Determination Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Zone Heating Availability Determination-Specific Attributes
HeatingCooling Specifies that when Heating/Cooling = Heating
Heating, a less than comparison is used, Set Name: Heating/Cooling
so State is True if the OA Temperature is
less than the OA Temperature Setpoint.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Availability Determination)

The device is enabled when the State output is True and disabled when the State
output is False. The following table shows the command hierarchy used to
determine whether the State should be True or False. The Hardware Mode is
determined by the OA Temperature being compared with the OA Temperature
Enable Setpoint and by whether it is configured for heating or cooling. For
example, when configured for heating, and the OA Temperature is below the
setpoint, the Hardware Mode is True. If the OA Temperature is not reliable, then
the Hardware Reliability is False. Network Mode and reliability is determined by
the IsAvailable input.
Table 25-214: Availability Determination Command Hierarchy
Resolution Network Network Mode Hardware Hardware State
Mode Reliable Reliable Mode
* False * False * True
Network Priority True True * * True
False * * False
False * True True True
False False
Hardware Priority * * True True True
False False
True True False * True
False False * False
Either Can True False False * False
Activate
True False False
True True True
True * * True
False * True False False
True True

Reliability (Availability Determination)

See the Availability Determination Command Hierarchy for operation when inputs
are not Reliable.

State Generators 919

Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination

Overview
The Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination module determines
whether the conditions are suitable for using the heat recovery function for heating
or cooling. This module uses outdoor air and return/exhaust air enthalpy to
determine whether to use heat recovery. The return/exhaust air dry bulb
temperature is adjusted by the amount of the Deadband/2 to make sure enough
energy can transfer to justify the operation of heat recovery. The module compares
the return/exhaust air temperature with the outdoor air temperature to make the
decision. If any of the temperature or humidity inputs are unreliable, the heat
recovery is set to not suitable.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability
Determination)
• Attributes (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination)
• Primary States (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination)
• Reliability (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination)

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability

Determination)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 25-215: Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
Determination AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

920 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heat Recovery Enthalpy
Suitability Determination modules.
Table 25-216: Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination
Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Deadband Provides an input to make sure the return air 5.0 Deg C, 10.0 Deg F
and outdoor air conditions are different so that
heat recovery operations are possible.
Elevation Indicates the distance above or below sea level 0 ft, 0 m
and is used for psychrometric calculations. Display Precision: 1s
Exhaust Air Displays the exhaust air temperature. 25.0 Deg C, 77.0 Deg F
Temperature
Heat Recovery Diff Displays the heat recovery temperature 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
suitability differential. Once heat recovery is
suitable, the difference between Exhaust Air
Temperature and OA Temperature must
decrease by the Heat Recovery Diff value
below the setpoint to make heat recovery
unsuitable.
Heat Recovery Contains a network input that can be used to True
isAllowed make heat recovery suitable or not suitable.
True means heat recovery may be suitable and
False means not suitable.
HR-AVAILABLE (Heat G, V Used to determine whether the heat recovery is Set Name: AHU HR Suit
Recovery Suitability) used for cooling control or heating control, or if
the heat recovery is unsuitable for either
control.
HRT-SP (Heat Recovery Contains the heat recovery temperature 6.0 Deg C, 11.0 Deg F
Setpoint) suitability setpoint. If the OA Temperature
minus the Exhaust Air Temperature is greater
than the Setpoint, Heat Recovery is suitable for
cooling. If the Exhaust Air Temperature minus
the OA Temperature is greater than the
Setpoint, Heat Recovery is suitable for heating;
otherwise, heat recovery is not suitable.
Low Limit Process Contains the low limit process variable that 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Variable may be the glycol temperature in a glycol loop
or the exhaust air leaving air temperature for
an enthalpy wheel. The low limit process
variable must be reliable for heat recovery to
be suitable.
OA Humidity Indicates the outdoor air humidity. 45.0% RH
OA Temperature Contains the outdoor air temperature. If the 25.0 Deg C, 77.0 Deg F
temperature difference between the exhaust air
temperature and the outdoor air temperature is
large enough, heat recovery may be suitable.
Return Air Humidity Indicates the return air humidity. 30.0% RH
Return Air Temperature Displays the return air temperature. 25.0 Deg C, 77.0 Deg F

State Generators 921

 Table 25-216: Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination
Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Supply Fan Status Indicates the operating status of the AHU True
supply fan, where Running equals True and Off
equals False.
Unit Set Indicates the units of measurement used at the SI, IP
site. Set Name: Unit Set

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination)

The Heat Recovery Suitability output is set to Cool if heat recovery is allowed, the
temperature inputs are reliable, and Clg HR is True. The Clg HR tells the
command hierarchy whether the exhaust air is cold enough with respect to the
outside air temperature to make cooling energy recovery suitable. The exhaust air
temperature must be below the outdoor air temperature by the Deadband/2 before
the CLG HR is set to True.
The Heat Recovery Suitability output is set to Heat if heat recovery is allowed, the
temperature inputs are reliable, and Htg HR is True. The Htg HR tells the
command hierarchy whether the exhaust air is warm enough with respect to the
outside air temperature to make heating energy recovery suitable. The exhaust air
temperature must be above the outdoor air temperature by the Deadband/2 before
the Htg HR is set to True.
The Heat Recovery Suitability output is set to None if Heat Recovery isAllowed is
False, any temperature input is not reliable, or both Clg HR and Htg HR are False.
Table 25-217: Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination
Command Hierarchy
Heat Recovery Clg HR Htg HR Heat Recovery
IsAllowed Suitability
False * * None
True False False None
True True None
True False Cool
False True Heat

Reliability (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination)

The Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability output is set to None if the OA
Temperature, Exhaust Air Temperature, or the Low Limit Process Variable inputs
are not reliable.

922 CCT Help: Modules

Heat Recovery Suitability Determination

Overview
The Heat Recovery Suitability Determination Module determines whether the
conditions are suitable for using the heat recovery function for heating or cooling.
The module checks the reliability of all analog inputs and compares the exhaust air
temperature with the outdoor air temperature to make the decision.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination)
• Attributes (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination)
• Primary States (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination)
• Reliability (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination)

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 25-218: Heat Recovery Suitability Determination Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Heat Recovery Suitability Determination Applications
Heat Recovery Suitability Determination AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 923

Attributes (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heat Recovery Suitability
Determination modules.
Table 25-219: Heat Recovery Suitability Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Exhaust Air Displays the exhaust air temperature. 25.0 Deg C, 77.0 Deg F
Temperature
Heat Recovery Diff Displays the heat recovery temperature 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
suitability differential. Once heat recovery is
suitable, the difference between Exhaust Air
Temperature and OA Temperature must
decrease this much below the setpoint to make
heat recovery unsuitable.
Heat Recovery Contains a network input that can be used to True
isAllowed make heat recovery suitable or not. True
means heat recovery may be suitable and
False means not suitable.
HR-AVAILABLE (Heat G, V Used to determine whether the heat recovery is Set Name: AHU HR Suit
Recovery Suitability) used for cooling control or heating control, or if
the heat recovery is unsuitable for either
control.
HRT-SP (Heat Recovery Contains the heat recovery temperature 6.0 Deg C, 11.0 Deg F
Setpoint) suitability setpoint. If the OA Temperature
minus the Exhaust Air Temperature is greater
than the Setpoint, Heat Recovery is suitable for
cooling. If the Exhaust Air Temperature minus
the OA Temperature is greater than the
Setpoint, Heat Recovery is suitable for heating;
otherwise, heat recovery is not suitable.
Low Limit Process Contains the low limit process variable which 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Variable may be the glycol temperature in a glycol loop
or the exhaust air leaving air temperature for
an enthalpy wheel. The low limit process
variable must be reliable for heat recovery to
be suitable.
OA Temperature Contains the outdoor air temperature. If the 25.0 Deg C, 77.0 Deg F
temperature difference between the exhaust air
temperature and the outdoor air temperature is
large enough, heat recovery may be suitable.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

924 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination)
The Heat Recovery Suitability output is set to Cool if heat recovery is allowed, the
temperature inputs are reliable, and Clg HR is True. The Clg HR tells the
command hierarchy if the exhaust air is cold enough with respect to the outside air
temperature to make cooling energy recovery suitable. The exhaust air temperature
must be below the outdoor air temperature by the heat recovery setpoint amount
before the CLG HR is set to True.
The Heat Recovery Suitability output is set to Heat if heat recovery is allowed, the
temperature inputs are reliable, and Htg HR is True. The Htg HR tells the
command hierarchy if the exhaust air is warm enough with respect to the outside
air temperature to make heating energy recovery suitable. The exhaust air
temperature must be above the outdoor air temperature by the heat recovery
setpoint amount before the Htg HR is set to True.
The Heat Recovery Suitability output is set to None if heat recovery is allowed and
is False, any temperature input is not reliable, or both Clg HR and Htg HR are
False.
Table 25-220: Heat Recovery Suitability Determination Command
Hierarchy
Heat EA-T OA-T LL-T Clg HR Htg HR Heat Recovery
Recovery Reliable Reliable Reliable Suitability
IsAllowed
False * * * * * None
True False * * * * None
True False * * * None
True False * * None
True False False None
True True None
True False Cool
False True Heat

Reliability (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination)

The Heat Recovery Suitability output is set to None if the OA Temperature,
Exhaust Air Temperature, or the Low Limit Process Variable inputs are not
reliable.

State Generators 925

General Sequencing
Overview
The General Sequencing modules sequence a set of specific devices or control
modes for (primarily) AHU applications.
The General Sequencing group contains the following modules:
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing
• Dehumidification Sequencing
• Emergency Mode Sequencing
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
• Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing
• Humidification Sequencing
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing
• Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100% OA)
• Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air)

Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing

The Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing provides Less Than or Equal logic. This
logic block is laid down by the Coils > Coil Pump > Low Temperature Circulation
selection in the Air Handling Unit Applications. If the Outdoor Air Temperature is
less than the Low OA-T Setpoint, the pump is called to run. See the Less Than or
Equal description in the Compare topic of the Logic section.
To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

926 CCT Help: Modules

Dehumidification Sequencing

Overview
This module is designed for the sequencing the dehumidification process. While
dehumidifying, the dehumidification devices are controlled based on the return or
zone air relative humidity and the relative humidity setpoint. This module
monitors the controlled relative humidity and the status of the cooling and heating
devices to determine the current dehumidification control state.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Dehumidification Sequencing)
• Attributes (Dehumidification Sequencing)
• Primary States (Dehumidification Sequencing)
• Reliability (Dehumidification Sequencing)

Module Use in Applications (Dehumidification Sequencing)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-221: Dehumidification Sequencing Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Dehumidification Sequencing AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 927

Attributes (Dehumidification Sequencing)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Dehumidification
Sequencing module.
Table 25-222: Dehumidification Sequencing Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status Contains the value fed back from the Normal
cooling controller that is necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to
take. This input is the PID status from
cooling output controller.
Cooling Setpoint Displays the desired occupied cooling 23.0 Deg C, 73.0 Deg F
temperature setpoint (must be equal to or
greater than the heating setpoint).
Dehum Process Displays the zone air humidity or the return 50.0%RH
Variable air humidity.
DEHUM-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current state generated by Set Name: AHU Dehum
the AHU dehumidification sequence. States
Eff Heating Setpoint V Displays the effective occupied heating 21.0 Deg C, 69.0 Deg F
temperature setpoint used by the heating
output controller (if present). When
dehumidification is active, this equals the
Cooling Setpoint input, otherwise it equals
the Heating Setpoint input.
Heating Setpoint Displays the desired occupied heating 21.0 Deg C, 69.0 Deg F
temperature setpoint (must be equal to or
less than the cooling setpoint).
Humidity Setpoint Defines the dehumidification setpoint. 60.0%RH
Reheat Control Status Contains the value fed back from the Normal
heating controller that is necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to
take. This input is the PID status from
heating output controller

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

928 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Dehumidification Sequencing)
• Normal Dehumid: The sequencer is in this state if the cooling and heating
output controllers are responding to this sequencer and the Dehum Process
Variable is greater than the Humidity Setpoint.
• Humidity Unreliable: This is the unreliable state. The sequencer is in this
state if the Process Variable sensor becomes unreliable.
• No Dehumid: The sequencer is in this state if the Dehum Process Variable
sensor is reliable and any of the three following conditions are true:
- The heating device is not responding to this sequencer.
- The cooling device is not responding to this sequencer.
- The Dehum Process Variable is less than the Humidity Setpoint and the
heating output controller Control Status is Low.

Reliability (Dehumidification Sequencing)

Table 25-223: Dehumidification Sequencing Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Dehum Process Variable Transition to Humidity Unreliable state.

State Generators 929

Emergency Mode Sequencing

Overview

IMPORTANT: As of Release 3.0, the Emergency Mode Sequencing module

is replaced by the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL module.

This module processes the emergency command and determine the current
emergency mode. This module accepts the emergency command, four safety
switch inputs, and a shutdown delay duration. The module has a state output.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Emergency Mode Sequencing)
• Attributes (Emergency Mode Sequencing)
• Primary States (Emergency Mode Sequencing)

Module Use in Applications (Emergency Mode Sequencing)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-224: Emergency Mode Sequencing Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Emergency Mode Sequencing AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

930 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Emergency Mode Sequencing)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Emergency Mode
Sequencing module.
Table 25-225: Emergency Mode Sequencing Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Emergency Mode Used to force the controller to respond to Normal
fire or shutdown commands. Set Name: Emergency
Modes
EMERGENCY-STATE G, V Indicates the current mode of the state Set Name: Emergency
(State) generator. States
Safety Switch 1 Connected to a safety input such as high Normal
or low limit alarm switches. Set Name: Normal/Alarm
Safety Switch 2 Connected to a safety input such as high Normal
or low limit alarm switches. Set Name: Normal/Alarm
Safety Switch 3 Connected to a safety input such as high Normal
or low limit alarm switches. Set Name: Normal/Alarm
Safety Switch 4 Connected to a safety input such as high Normal
or low limit alarm switches Set Name: Normal/Alarm
Shutdown Delay Displays the amount of time in seconds to 180 Seconds
remain in the Pre-Shutdown state prior to
transitioning to Shutdown. This attribute
also specifies the delay from Shutdown to
Normal after the Mode and/or Safety
Switches are cleared.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Emergency Mode Sequencing)

• Normal: This is the normal operational state. The sequencer transitions to this
state after being in Shutdown for the Shutdown Delay and the Emergency
Mode is in Normal and all the Safety Switches are in Normal state.
• Pre-Shutdown: The sequencer transitions to this state from Normal if
Emergency Mode is set to Shutdown or any Safety Switch goes to Alarm. The
sequencer transitions to Pre-Shutdown from Depressurize, Pressurize, or Purge
if Emergency Mode is set to Shutdown or any Safety Switch goes to Alarm.
• Shutdown: The sequencer transitions to this state after being in Pre-Shutdown
for the Shutdown Delay.
• Pressurize: The sequencer enters this state when the Emergency Mode is set to
Pressurize and all the Safety Switches are in Normal.
• Depressurize: The sequencer enters this state when the Emergency Mode is
set to Depressurize and all the Safety Switches are in Normal.
• Purge: The sequencer enters this state when the Emergency Mode is set to
Purge and all the Safety Switches are in Normal.

State Generators 931

Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL

Overview

IMPORTANT: As of Release 3.0, the Smoke Control Sequencing for

UL-864-UUKL module replaces the Emergency Mode Sequencing module.

The Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL module processes the

emergency command and determines the current emergency mode. This module
accepts the emergency command, four safety switch inputs, and a shutdown delay
duration. The module has state and priority outputs. The priority output provides
UL 864 UUKL smoke control support where you can write to the hardware points
at a high priority during an emergency.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL)
• Attributes (Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL)
• Primary States (Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL)

Module Use in Applications (Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-226: Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL All Applications (except not used in the Fan Coil
Application)

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

932 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Smoke Control
Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL module.
Table 25-227: Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Emergency Mode Used to force the controller to respond to Normal
fire or shutdown commands. Set Name: Emergency
Modes
Priority Indicates the BACnet priority for the output 16
points. For normal control, this value is set
to 16 (default). When the State is not
Normal, this value is set to 2 (Automatic
Fire/Life Safety Control).
Safety Switch 1 Connected to a safety input (for example, Normal
high or low duct pressure or temperature). Set Name: Normal/Alarm
Safety Switch 2 Connected to a safety input (for example, Normal
high or low duct pressure or temperature). Set Name: Normal/Alarm
Safety Switch 3 Connected to a safety input (for example, Normal
high or low duct pressure or temperature). Set Name: Normal/Alarm
Safety Switch 4 Connected to a safety input (for example, Normal
high or low duct pressure or temperature). Set Name: Normal/Alarm
Shutdown Delay Displays the amount of time in seconds to 180 Seconds
remain in the Pre-Shutdown state prior to
transitioning to Shutdown. This attribute
also specifies the delay from Shutdown to
Normal after the Mode and/or Safety
Switches are cleared.
SMOKE SEQUENCE- G, V Indicates the current mode of the state Set Name: Emergency
STATE (State) generator. States

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 933

Primary States (Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL)
• Normal: This is the normal operational state. No emergency response or
shutdown is required. The sequencer transitions to this state after being in
Shutdown for the Shutdown Delay and the Emergency Mode is in Normal and
all the Safety Switches are in Normal state.
• Pre-Shutdown: Indicates to stop heating, cooling, and ventilating. The
sequencer transitions to this state from Normal if Emergency Mode is set to
Shutdown or any Safety Switch goes to Alarm. The sequencer transitions to
Pre-Shutdown from Depressurize, Pressurize, or Purge if Emergency Mode is
set to Shutdown or any Safety Switch goes to Alarm. Pre-shutdown allows the
fans to spin down and the dampers to close, which resets the fans and dampers
before entering the Normal state.
• Shutdown: Stops heating, cooling, and ventilating. The sequencer transitions
to this state after being in Pre-Shutdown for the Shutdown Delay.
• Pressurize: The sequencer enters this fire emergency state when the
Emergency Mode is set to Pressurize and all the Safety Switches are in
Normal. The zone is pressurized to prevent smoke from entering the zone.
When pressurizing, the OAD opens, the supply fan is on, the RAD closes, the
return fan is off, and the EAD closes. Also, command the VAV boxes in the
affected zones to Open.
• Depressurize: The sequencer enters this fire emergency state when the
Emergency Mode is set to Depressurize and all the Safety Switches are in
Normal. The zone is depressurized to draw smoke out of the zone. When
depressurizing, the OAD closes, the supply fan is off, the RAD closes, the
return fan is on, and the EAD opens. Also, command the VAV boxes in the
affected zones to Closed.
• Purge: The sequencer enters this fire emergency state when the Emergency
Mode is set to Purge and all the Safety Switches are in Normal. The exhaust
dampers open, the exhaust fan is on, the supply dampers open, and the supply
fan is on. The air in the zone is vented to the outside, and fresh air is brought
into the zone. Also, the VAV boxes in the affected zones are commanded
Open.

934 CCT Help: Modules

Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing

Overview
The HR Low Limit Sequencer module manages a heat recovery device and
activates an alternative control mode if the low limit process variable falls below
the low limit setpoint. This module could be used with either a glycol loop or an
energy wheel to prevent the exhaust temperature from dropping below the low
limit setpoint. This module accepts inputs for the limit temperature and setpoint,
and the heat recovery output controller control status. The module has an output
for the state.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing)
• Attributes (Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing)
• Primary States (Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing)

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-228: Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 935

Attributes (Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heat Recovery Low Limit
Sequencing module.
Table 25-229: Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Delay When Heat Recovery Modulated is False, this 120 Seconds
input defines the amount of time the Low Limit
Temperature must be greater than the Low
Limit Temperature Setpoint before the unit can
return to the T Control state.
Heat Recovery Control Contains the value fed back from the output Normal
Status controller PID. This is needed for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to take
Heat Recovery Contains a configuration input used to tell the False
Modulated state machine if the heat recovery is modulated
or not. True means modulated, and False
means not modulated.
HRLL-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current operational mode of the T Control
state generator. Set Name: AHU HX LL
Low Limit Process Contains the value that is compared to the limit 4.0 Deg C, 39.0 Deg F
Variable setpoint and used to determine whether it is
necessary to switch from T Control to LL-T
Control
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the limit setpoint used to determine 4.0 Deg C, 39.0 Deg F
whether it is necessary to switch from T Control
to LL-T Control

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing)

• T Control: This is the temperature control and starting state. The sequencer
transitions to this state from either the LL-T Wait or LL-T Control if the Heat
Recovery device is not responding to the sequencer and the Low Limit Process
Variable is greater than the Low Limit Setpoint. The Sequencer transitions to T
Control from LL-T Control if the Low Limit Process Variable is greater than
the Low Limit Setpoint and the heat recovery device Control Status is High.
Finally, the sequencer transitions to T Control from LL-T Wait if it has been in
this state for more than the Delay.
• LL-T Control: The sequencer transitions to LL-T Control from T Control or
LL-T Wait states if the Low Limit Process Variable is less than the Low Limit
Setpoint.
• LL-T Wait: This state is achieved only when sequencing on/off heat recovery
devices. The sequencer transitions to LL-T Wait from LL-T Control if the Low
Limit Process Variable is greater than the Low Limit Setpoint.

936 CCT Help: Modules

Humidification Sequencing

Overview
This module is designed for sequencing the humidification process. While
humidifying, the humidification device modulates based on the humidity and the
humidity setpoint. This state machine has a limited humidification state for the
case where too much moisture is added to the discharge air. This module monitors
the status of the zone or return air humidity, discharge air humidity, and setpoints
to determine the current humidification control state.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Humidification Sequencing)
• Attributes (Humidification Sequencing)
• Primary States (Humidification Sequencing)
• Reliability (Humidification Sequencing)

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Sequencing)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-230: Humidification Sequencing Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Humidification Sequencing All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 937

Attributes (Humidification Sequencing)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Humidification
Sequencing module.
Table 25-231: Humidification Sequencing Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Discharge Humidity Contains the discharge air humidity. 50.0%RH
Discharge Humidity Contains the discharge air high humidity 70.0%RH
Setpoint setpoint.
Humidity Control Displays the value fed back from the Normal
Status humidification controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to take.
This input is the PID status from humidification
output controller.
Humidity Process Contains the zone or the return air humidity. 50.0%RH
Variable
Humidity Setpoint Defines the zone or return air humidification 40.0%RH
setpoint.
HUM-STATE (State) G, V Displays the current state generated by the No Humid
AHU humidification sequence. Set Name: AHU Hum States

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Humidification Sequencing)

• No Humid: This is the initial state and the idle state for the humidification
sequencer. The sequencer is in this state if either of the following occurs:
- The humidification device is not responding and the Humidity Process
Variable is greater or equal to the Humidity Setpoint or any of the two
humidity sensors were unreliable and they both become reliable.
- The Humidity Process Variable is less than the setpoint and the
humidification output controller Control Status is Low
• Humidity Unreliable: This is the unreliable state. The sequencer is in this
state if any of the two humidity sensors (process variable or discharge) become
unreliable
• Normal Humid: This is the normal humidification state. The sequencer is in
this state if the Humidity Process Variable is less than the Humidity Setpoint
and the Discharge Humidity is less than the Discharge Humidity Setpoint.
• Limited Humid: This is a limited humidification state. The sequencer
transitions from Normal Humid to this state when the Discharge Humidity is
higher than the Discharge Humidity Setpoint

Reliability (Humidification Sequencing)

Table 25-232: Humidification Sequencing Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Discharge Humidity Transition to Humidity Unreliable state.
Humidity Process Variable Transition to Humidity Unreliable state.

938 CCT Help: Modules

Loss of Airflow Sequencing

Overview
This module generates the appropriate no air flow state for an air handler
application. The module, in addition to the State, provides two other outputs to
show the supply fan status. The module monitors the supply fan command and
flow and determine whether the current state should be Normal, Manual Reset
Fault, Self Reset Fault, or Low Flow.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Loss of Airflow Sequencing)
• Attributes (Loss of Airflow Sequencing)
• Primary States (Loss of Airflow Sequencing)

Module Use in Applications (Loss of Airflow Sequencing)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-233: Loss of Airflow Sequencing Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Loss of Airflow Sequencing All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Loss of Airflow Sequencing)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Loss of Airflow
Sequencing module.
Table 25-234: Loss of Airflow Sequencing Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Air Proving Switch Displays the proof of air flow input. This is Off
an enumerated input with two possible Set Name: Off/On
values: Off and On.
Delay Defines the maximum time required for the 30 Seconds
fan to prove. If the fan is commanded on
and does not prove within this time, the
unit enters either the manual recovery fault
state or the self recovery fault state.
Electric Heat Indicates when electric heat is used. Units False
with electric heat may require low flow
protection.

State Generators 939

 Table 25-234: Loss of Airflow Sequencing Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Flow Debounce Defines the amount of time the module 10 Seconds
ignores a temporary loss of air flow before
it takes action.
Hardware Restart Provides a hardware binary input for fault Normal
recovery. Set Name: Normal/Trigger
Min Air Flow Setpoint Defines the minimum amount of air flow 200 l/s, 424 cfm
required for operating the electric heat.
Network Restart Provides a network input for fault recovery. Normal
Set Name: Normal/Trigger
NOFLOW-STATE G, V Displays the current state of the activity. Set Name: AHU Flow States
(State) This output is connected to the state
selection matrix.
Proof of Airflow V Shows the current airflow status. The Set Name: False/True/Fault
output may be True, False, or Fault. True
means the fan was commanded on and air
flow has been detected. False means the
fan was not commanded on. Fault means
the fan was commanded on, but air flow
proof has not been detected. This output
would be connected to the MSC module
Proof of Airflow input for a staged device.
Restart Config Configures the sequencer for manual fault False
recovery. When set to True, a fault
requires manual intervention for recovery.
When set to False, the unit may self
recover. To exit the manual reset mode,
the operator must use the Hardware
Restart or the Network Restart inputs to
clear the fault.
Supply Fan OnOff Displays the supply fan command. The Off
activity uses this input to determine if the Set Name: Off/On
fan was commanded on or off.
Supply Fan Status V Shows the current airflow status. The
output may be either True when there is
proof of airflow or False when there is not.
This output would be connected to the
Free Cooling Availability module Supply
Fan Status input.
Supply Flow Contains the air flow measurement. This 200 l/s, 424 cfm
input may be used on a unit with electric
heat to make sure the heating coils have
enough air flow.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

940 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Loss of Airflow Sequencing)
• Normal: This is the normal operational state that results when the command
sent to the output controller agrees with the both the Air Proving Switch and
the Supply Flow. During start up of the unit, the sequencer transitions to either
Self Reset Fault or Manual Reset Fault if the Air Proving Switch does not
detect flow within the Delay time.
• Low Flow: This state is reached when the Supply Fan is commanded on and
the Supply Flow is less than the Min Air Flow Setpoint. This state is reached
only in systems with Electric Heat.
• Self Reset Fault: This state is reached when the Supply Fan is commanded On
and the Air Proving Switch does not detect flow and the sequencer has been
configured as a Self Reset system (Restart Config is False.) The sequencer
transitions to Normal if the Air Proving Switch detects flow for more than the
Flow Debounce time.
• Manual Reset Fault: This state is reached when the Supply Fan is
commanded On and the Air Proving Switch does not detect flow and the
sequencer has been configured as a Manual Reset system (Restart Config is
True.) The sequencer transitions to Normal by issuing a Trigger command
through the Manual Restart or Network Restart.

State Generators 941

Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100% OA)

Overview
The 100 OA Start Stop Sequencer module sequences the fans and dampers for a
controlled start and controlled stop in a 100% outdoor air system. The module
accepts Heating Required and Cooling Required inputs that are used to initiate a
start or stop sequence. The module accepts several user adjustable times such as
Fan Start Delay and Fan Stop Delay. The module accepts inputs for static pressure
such as Duct Static Pressure 1, Duct Static Pressure 2, and Duct Static Pressure
Setpoint. The module accepts a configuration input Supply Fan Type. The module
also has supply fan status inputs such as Supply Fan OnOff and Supply Fan
Percent Cmd. The module has a state output and a duct static pressure output.
The unit initiates a start sequence if any of the following is true:
• Cooling Required = True
• Heating Required = True
The unit goes through the shutdown sequence if either of the following conditions
is met:
• Cooling Required = False AND Heating Required = False
• The duct static pressure sensors fail.
The unit goes directly to Off, without passing through the normal shutdown
sequence if the Supply Fan Control Status stops responding. This happens when a
higher level sequencer, such as the No Air Flow Sequencer or the Emergency
Mode Sequencer, takes control of the supply fan.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
The Finite State Machine cannot be modified.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA])
• Attributes (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA])
• Primary States (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA])
• Reliability (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA])

942 CCT Help: Modules

Module Use in Applications (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA])
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-235: Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100% OA) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
100 OA Start Stop Sequencing AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA])

The following table describes the attributes used by the Start Stop Sequencing
(AHU 100% OA) modules.
Table 25-236: Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100% OA) Attributes (Part 1 of
3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Required Indicates cooling demand. When this input False
is True, the Start/Stop module initiates a
start up sequence.
Duct Static Pressure V Contains the value of the duct static Display Units: Pa, in. W.C.
pressure used by this module and passed
to the Supply Fan Output controller.
Duct Static Pressure 1 Contains the supply air duct static 0 Pa, 0.00 in. W.C.
pressure. The unit may have two pressure
sensors. When the application has one
pressure sensor, it must be connected to
both Duct Static Pressure 1 and Duct
Static Pressure 2.
Duct Static Pressure 2 Contains the supply air duct static 0 Pa, 0.00 in. W.C.
pressure. The unit may have two pressure
sensors. When the application has one
pressure sensor, it must be connected to
both Duct Static Pressure 1 and Duct
Static Pressure 2.
Duct Static Pressure Contains the supply air static pressure 250 Pa, 1.00 in. W.C.
Setpoint setpoint. This input is used to trigger a
state change if the supply fan type is
variable speed and static pressure control
is used.

State Generators 943

 Table 25-236: Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100% OA) Attributes (Part 2 of
3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Fan Ready V Indicates that the Start/Stop sequencer
has reached the On State. The
temperature control sequencers (such as
the 100OA SD Sequencer or the 100OA
CD Sequencer) use this information to
allow DAT temperature sequencing.
Fan Start Delay Contains the time delay provided from the 90 Seconds
time between issuing the start commands
(supply and exhaust fans simultaneously)
to expecting the fans to have started. This
delay includes the time for the 2-position
damper for each fan to open (that is, it
assumes the damper is hard-wired with the
fan starter).
Fan Stop Delay Displays the time delay allocated to 240 Seconds
stopping the fans and closing the dampers.
It also enforces a minimum time off before
restarting.
Heating Ramp Rate Used to determine the time to remain in 20 Change per Minute
the Cold Start state (if applicable). During
the Cold Start state, the preheat output is
prevented from closing quickly allowing it
to come into control without tripping the
Low Limit on the unit.
Heating Required Indicates heating demand. When this input False
is True, the Start/Stop module initiates a
start up sequence.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the setpoint that determines 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
whether Cold Start is necessary. When the
OA Temperature is below this setpoint or
is not reliable, the Cold Start mode is
activated during Startup.
OA Temperature Contains the outdoor air temperature. 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Proof of Airflow Shows the current airflow status. The True
output may be either True, False, or Fault. Set Name: False/True/Fault
True means the fan was commanded on
and air flow has been detected. False
means the fan was not commanded on.
Fault means the fan was commanded on,
but air flow proof has not been detected.
This input is used to restart the supply fan
after a fan status fault.
Stabilize Delay Displays the time allocated for the OA 180 Seconds
Temperature sensor to accurately reflect
the outside conditions. It is only applicable
for constant capacity units as it is assumed
that the time required for ramping the
variable capacity supply fan to the static
pressure setpoint is sufficient for the
sensor to stabilize.
STARTSTOP-STATE G, V Displays the current state of the finite state Set Name: AHU 100 OA
(State) machine. This output is connected to the StartStop States
state selection matrix.

944 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 25-236: Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100% OA) Attributes (Part 3 of
3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Supply Fan OnOff Contains the control signal for the supply Off
fan. The enumeration set only has two Set Name: Off/On
values, Off and On. The command
signature of this input indicates if the
supply fan is responding to this sequencer.
Supply Fan Percent Displays the current value of the supply 0%
Cmd fan output.
Supply Fan Type Indicates the air handler supply fan type. Variable Capacity
The module supports two supply fan types, Set Name: AHU Supply Fan
variable capacity, and constant capacity. Type

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA])

• Off: This is the Off state. Here, the fans are off, and the dampers are closed.
The unit waits for the signal to begin the start up sequence. The start sequence
begins if heating or cooling is required. In addition to these, the Supply Fan
Output Controller must respond to this sequencer.
• Start Fans: This state starts both fans. No delay is needed between supply or
exhaust fans because there is no connecting duct between them.
• Ramp SF: A variable capacity supply fan is set to ramp so it slowly speeds up
and slowly increases the duct static pressure. The FSM switches to the On state
when the duct static pressure is above the duct static pressure setpoint.
Constant Capacity fans are kept in this state for the Stabilize Delay to allow the
outside temperature to accurately sense the outside conditions prior to
determining whether a Cold Start should become active.
• Cold Start: This state allows preheat to come into control while limiting the
rate at which it can close to prevent tripping the low limit.
• Normal Start: This state is activated when it is determined that the OA
temperature is not cold. It is active for a single execution to turn off preheat
prior to releasing the unit to sequenced control.
• On: The fans and dampers are sequenced properly for a start up condition.
Control of the dampers is released to a lower level state machine. The AHU is
allowed to run.
• Stop Fans: This state is used to turn off the fans.
• Fan Fault: The FSM enters this state after proof of airflow fault. The FSM
remains in this state until air flow is proven. Once air flow is proven, the FSM
transitions to the RAMP SF state to restart the supply fan.

State Generators 945

Reliability (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA])
Table 25-237: Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100% OA) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Duct Static Pressure 1 If both Duct Static Pressure 1 and Duct Static Pressure 2 inputs
are unreliable, a shut down Sequence is initiated.
Duct Static Pressure 2 If both Duct Static Pressure 1 and Duct Static Pressure 2 inputs
are unreliable, a shut down Sequence is initiated.

946 CCT Help: Modules

Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air)

Overview
The Mixed Air Start Stop Sequencer module sequences the fans and dampers for a
controlled start and controlled stop in a mixed air system. The module accepts
several inputs which are use to initiate a start or stop sequence such as Preheat
Percent Cmd, Reheat Percent Cmd, Cooling Required, Heating Required, and
Occupancy. The module accepts several user adjustable times such as Fan Start
Delay, Stabilize delay, Damper Close Delay, Fan Stop Delay. The module accepts
inputs for static pressure such as Duct Static Pressure 1, Duct Static Pressure 2, and
Duct Static Pressure Setpoint. The module accepts configuration inputs such as
First Fan To Start, Supply Fan Type, and Intermittent Fan. The module has inputs
for a preheat bonnet switch and a reheat bonnet switch which may be used to
provide a heating fan on delay. The module also has supply fan status inputs such
as Supply Fan OnOff and Supply Fan Percent Cmd. The module has a state output,
a duct static pressure output, and a fan ready indicator output.
The unit initiated a start sequence if any of the following is true:
• Cooling Required = True
• Preheat Bonnet Switch = Hot AND Preheat Percent Cmd > 0 AND Heating
Required = True
• Reheat Bonnet Switch = Hot AND Reheat Percent Cmd > 0 AND Heating
Required = True
The unit will go through the shutdown sequence if either of the following
conditions is met:
• Cooling Required = False AND Heating Required = False
• The duct static pressure sensor fails.
The unit goes directly to Off, without passing through the normal shutdown
sequence if the Supply Fan Control Status stops responding. This will happen
when a higher level sequencer, such as the No Air Flow Sequencer or the
Emergency Mode Sequencer, takes control of the supply fan.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
The Finite State Machine cannot be modified.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air])
• Attributes (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air])
• Primary States (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air])
• Reliability (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air])

State Generators 947

Module Use in Applications (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air])
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-238: Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air) Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Start Stop Sequencing AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Start Stop Sequencing DA-T AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application (DA-T
Control)
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Start Stop Sequencing Zone AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application (Zone
Control)
AHU Rooftop Unit Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

948 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air])
The following table describes the attributes used by this module.
Table 25-239: Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air) Attributes (Part 1
of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Required Indicates cooling demand. When this input is False
True, the Start/Stop module initiates a start up
sequence.
Damper Close Delay Displays the time required to close the dampers 90 Seconds
before turning the fan off.
Duct Static Pressure V Contains the value of the duct static pressure Display Units: Pa, in.
used by this module and passed to the Supply W.C.
Fan Output controller.
Duct Static Pressure 1 Displays the supply air duct static pressure. The 0 Pa, 0.00 in. W.C.
unit may have two pressure sensors. When the
application has one pressure sensor, it must be
connected to both Duct Static Pressure 1 and
Duct Static Pressure 2.
Duct Static Pressure 2 Displays the supply air duct static pressure. The 0 Pa, 0.00 in. W.C.
unit may have two pressure sensors. When the
application has one pressure sensor, it must be
connected to both Duct Static Pressure 1 and
Duct Static Pressure 2.
Duct Static Pressure Contains the supply air static pressure setpoint. 250 Pa, 1.00 in. W.C.
Setpoint This input is used to trigger a state change if the
supply fan type is variable speed and static
pressure control is used.
Fan Ready V Indicates that the Start/Stop sequencer has
reached the On State. The temperature control
sequencers (such as the MA SD Sequencer or
the MA CD Sequencer) use this information to
allow DAT temperature sequencing. This output
is delayed one operational cycle after the State
output to ensure the Fan Ready output is in sync
with the control status inputs (Damper CS,
Cooling CS, Preheat CS, and so on) on the
lower level sequencers.
Fan Sequence Indicates which fan must start first. The module SF First
supports three cases, supply fan first (SF First), Set Name: AHU Fan
return fan first (RF/EF First), and supply fan only Sequence
(SF Only) for the case where there is no return
fan.
Fan Start Delay Displays the time delay between starting the first 10 Seconds
fan and starting the second fan.
Fan Stop Delay Serves a dual purpose. It is the time delay 30 Seconds
between stopping the first and second fan, and it
is the time delay between stopping the second
fan and allowing the system to restart.
Heating Required Indicates heating demand. When this input is False
True, the Start/Stop module initiates a start up
sequence depending on the status of the
Preheat Bonnet Switch, Preheat Percent Cmd,
Reheat Bonnet Switch, and Reheat Percent
Cmd.
Minimum OA Position Defines the minimum position for the OAD and 0%
the EAD. It is used to calculate the Ramp OA
delay time used by the FSM.

State Generators 949

 Table 25-239: Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air) Attributes (Part 2
of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Occupancy Contains the occupancy status for the unit. Occupied
Set Name: Occ
Effective
Preheat Bonnet Contains the bonnet switch input from the Hot
Switch preheat device. It indicates whether preheat is Set Name: Cold/Hot
hot enough for the fan to start. The bonnet
switch is used to provide a supply fan on delay
when the AHU has gas heat. The bonnet switch
is only supported in systems with a single speed
supply fan which starts first.
Preheat Percent Cmd Contains the heating command to the preheat 1.0%
device. This input is used to determine if the unit
is heating and if heating or cooling are required.
Proof of Airflow Shows the current airflow status. The output False
may be either True, False, or Fault. True means Set Name: False/True/
the fan was commanded on and air flow has Fault
been detected. False means the fan was not
commanded on. Fault means the fan is
commanded on, but air flow proof has not been
detected. This input is used to restart the supply
fan after a fan status fault.
Ramp Rate Defines the rate of change in damper position. It 50 Change per Minute
is used to calculate the Ramp OA delay time
used by the FSM.
Reheat Bonnet Switch Displays the bonnet switch input from the reheat Hot
device. It indicates reheat is hot enough for the Set Name: Cold/Hot
fan to start. The bonnet switch is used to provide
a supply fan on delay when the AHU has gas
heat. The bonnet switch is only supported in
systems with a single speed supply fan which
starts first.
Reheat Percent Cmd Contains the heating command to the reheat 1.0%
device. This input is used to determine if the unit
is heating and if heating or cooling are required.
Stabilize Delay Defines the amount of time it takes to circulate 60 Seconds
air within the AHU to stabilize temperatures
before opening the dampers.
STARTSTOP-STATE G, V Displays the current state of the finite state Set Name: AHU MA
(State) machine. This output is connected to the state StartStop States
selection matrix.
Supply Fan OnOff Indicates if the supply fan is responding to this Off
sequencer. This input is the control signal for the Set Name: Off/On
supply fan. The enumeration set only has two
values, Off and On.
Supply Fan Percent Contains the current value of the supply fan 0%
Cmd output.
Supply fan Type Indicates the air handler supply fan type. The Variable Capacity
module supports two supply fan types, variable Set Name: AHU Supply
capacity and constant capacity. Fan Type

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

950 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air])
• Off: This is the Off state. Here, the fans are off, and the dampers are closed.
The unit waits for the signal to begin the start up sequence. The start sequence
begins if heating or cooling is required.
• SF Starts First: This state is used if the supply fan must start first. The supply
fan is turned on.
• RF Starts First: This state is used if the return fan must start first. The return
fan is turned on.
• Ramp SF: A variable capacity supply fan is set to ramp so it slowly speeds up
and slowly increases the duct static pressure. The FSM switches to the
Stabilize state when the duct static pressure is above the duct static pressure
setpoint.
• Stabilize System: This state is used to circulate the air in the AHU and allow
temperatures to stabilize before opening the dampers.
• Ramp Min OA: This state is used to ramp the dampers from closed to
minimum position.
• On: The fans and dampers were sequenced properly for a start up condition.
Control of the dampers is released to a lower level state machine. The AHU is
allowed to run.
• Fan Fault: The FSM enters this state after proof of airflow fault. The FSM
remains in this state until air flow is proven. Once air flow is proven, the FSM
transitions to the RAMP SF state to restart the supply fan.
• Close Dampers: This is the first step in the stop sequence. The dampers are
closed during this state.
• RF Stops First: The fans are stopped in the opposite order they were started
(first on last off). This state is used when the supply fan started first. The return
fan is off in this state.
• SF Stops First: The fans are stopped in the opposite order they were started
(first on last off). This state is used when the return fan started first. The supply
fan is off in this state.
• Fans Off: This state is used to turn off the fan that started first or turn off the
supply fan when there is no return fan.

Reliability (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air])

Table 25-240: Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Duct Static Pressure 1 If both Duct Static Pressure 1 and Duct Static Pressure 2 inputs
are unreliable, a shut down Sequence is initiated.
Duct Static Pressure 2 If both Duct Static Pressure 1 and Duct Static Pressure 2 inputs
are unreliable, a shut down Sequence is initiated.

State Generators 951

Occupied Sequencing
Overview
The Occupied Sequencing modules are the default sequencers that manage the
occupied operation of an application. The sequencers follow a consistent general
philosophy for occupied sequencing and tailored for the unique devices and
requirements of each application type. The sequencing philosophy includes the
following concepts:
• Single Process, Multiple Devices: The modules typically sequence multiple
devices for control of a single process variable (typically Zone Temperature or
Discharge Air Temperature). To ensure control stability and minimize energy
consumption, the sequencers allow only one device at a time to actively control
the process to prevent rapid cycling between devices (during normal control).
• Transitions based on Saturation Status: To prevent unnecessary transitions
between devices, the sequencers allow the device in control to remain in
control until the output controller handling that device indicates that the device
is not able to maintain the process at a setpoint. This is communicated to the
sequencer via the Control Status (Saturation Status) from the Output Controller
managing that device.
• Satisfied State: Most of the sequencers support a pair of distinct setpoints (for
example, heating and cooling or humidification and dehumidification). The
Satisfied state indicates that no control is necessary (that is, in the deadzone
between setpoints). The Satisfied state also serves as a general entry point for
the sequencer before determining whether heating or cooling is necessary.
• Unreliable State: When the key process variable is not Reliable, the
sequencers enter an Unreliable state allowing for a known action to be taken
during this error condition.
• Fast Sequence on Setpoint Change: Many of the sequencers are used to
control Zone Temperature. The speed at which a zone responds to changes is
relatively slow, where Time Constant values of 15-45 minutes are not
uncommon. For this reason, the normal control sequencing for zone control is
also relatively slow to prevent rapid cycling between devices when attempting
to control at the edge of the device’s control range (that is, near 0% or 100% of
a device’s capacity). The exception to this slow sequencing is when a user
directly intervenes in the control conditions by changing the setpoints. For
example, if a heating device is in control and the Heating Setpoint is decreased
by more than the Setpoint Threshold (default of 1 Deg C, 2 Deg F) and the
current Zone Temperature is no longer below the Heating Setpoint, the
sequencer immediately transitions to the Satisfied state. A similar transition is
made for cooling devices.

952 CCT Help: Modules

 • One Sequencer per Application: The sequencers manage the worst-case
device set for a particular application (for example, Box Heating,
Supplemental Heating, and Primary Cooling for a VAV Single Duct
application). This provides a balance between the number and complexity of
the modules needed.
• Sequencer Anti-Windup: Some sequencers support more devices than a
particular application contains (for example, VAV single duct with only box
heating) or than are currently enabled (for example, VAV with electric
supplemental heating locked out due to demand limiting, but hot water box
heating is available). When this is the case, the sequencer is limited in the
number of states it may activate. The typical restriction is that the sequencer
may activate the first heating state even if it is not available, but cannot
continue on to a second heating state (if applicable). This process allows the
application to indicate to supervisory logic that heating is required, but
prevents windup of the sequencer that may cause overheating when a
temporarily unavailable heating device becomes available again (for example,
the device is no longer locked out).
• Integrated Comfort Limits (Unit Ventilators and Heat Pumps): The Heat
Pump and Unit Vent applications are unique among the simple terminal unit
applications (Unit Ventilators, Heat Pumps, Fan Coil, VAV Single Duct, and
VAV Dual Duct) in that they control introduction of outdoor air into the zone.
In situations when the outdoor air temperature is low, the sequencers for these
applications have integrated comfort limits for discharge air temperature (if the
sensor is available) to minimize occupant perception of cold drafts.
The Occupied Sequencing group contains the following modules:
• Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OADD)
• Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OASD)
• Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD)
• Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w HR)
• Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD)
• Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD w HR)
• Occupied Sequencing (Single Device)
• Occupied Zone Sequencing (FC/AHU)
• Occupied Zone Sequencing (HP)
• Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 1)
• Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 2)
• Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 3)
• Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle W)
• Occupied Zone Sequencing (VAV)

State Generators 953

Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OADD)

Overview
The Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OADD) module is responsible for
generating the appropriate temperature control state for a the cold deck of a 100%
Outdoor Air Dual Duct Air Handler Unit (AHU) application. This module accepts
the temperature and setpoint inputs listed below as well as the heating, cooling,
and heat recovery control statuses. The module outputs the current state.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD])
• Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD])
• Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD])
• Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-241: Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OADD) Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
100 OA Cold Deck Sequencing AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

954 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Sequencing
(AHU 100% OADD) module.
Table 25-242: Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OADD) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CD-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current state generated by the Set Name: AHU DAT DP OA
sequence.
Cooling Control Status Contains the value fed back from the Normal
mechanical cooling PID controller necessary Set Name: Control Status
for the sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Fan Ready Comes from the Start/Stop Sequencer and False
indicates whether the fans and dampers have
been sequenced properly.
Heat Recovery Control For proportional heat recovery devices, Normal
Status specifies the value fed back from the heat Set Name: Control Status
recovery device PID necessary for the
sequencer to determine what actions to take.
Heat Recovery Contains a configuration input used to tell the False
Modulated state machine if the heat recovery is modulated
or not. True means modulated and False
means not modulated.
Preheat Control Status Contains the value fed back from the preheat Normal
PID controller necessary for the sequencer to Set Name: Control Status
determine what actions to take.
Preheat Percent Cmd Displays the position of the output controller. 0.0%
This attribute is used to prevent the preheat
device from unnecessarily cycling off then back
on as the air handler unit starts up.
Process Variable Contains the cold deck discharge air 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
temperature. It is the variable that is compared
to the setpoint and is used to determine
whether it is necessary to heat or cool the
discharge air.
Setpoint Contains the cold deck temperature setpoint 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
the state generator attempts to control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD])

In the following descriptions, HX stands for Heat Recovery.
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state if no heating or cooling is required.
The sequencer transitions to Satisfied from HX Cool+Mech if the cooling
device is not responding to the sequencer or the Process Variable is less than
the Setpoint and the cooling device PID saturated low.
When heat recovery is modulated, the sequencer transitions to Satisfied from
HX Heat if the Process Variable is greater than the Heating Setpoint and either
the heat recovery device control status is low or the heat recovery device is not
responding to the sequencer.

State Generators 955

 When heat recovery is two position (Heat Recovery Modulated is False), the
sequencer transitions to Satisfied from HX Heat if the Process Variable is
greater than the Heating Setpoint.
The sequencer transitions to Satisfied from Heating Idle if the Process Variable
becomes greater than the Setpoint and Preheat Percent Cmd is zero.
• HX Cool+Mech: The sequencer enters this state from Satisfied if cooling is
required and the cooling device is responding to the sequencer. In this state, the
heat recovery device is on and cooling device controls the process variable.
• HX Heat: The sequencer enters this state from Heating Idle (and Satisfied) if
the startup sequence has completed and therefore the fan is ready and the
Process Variable is less than the setpoint (heating is required) and the Preheat
Percent Cmd is greater than zero and heat recovery is modulated.
The sequencer enters this state from HX Heat+Preheat if the Process Variable
is greater than the Setpoint and either the Preheat Control Status is Low or the
preheat device is not responding.
• HX Heat+Preheat: The sequencer enters this state from Heating Idle if the
startup sequence has completed and therefore the fan is ready and either
Preheat Percent Cmd is greater than zero or heat recovery is not modulated.
The sequencer enters this state if after being in HX Heat the process variable is
still less than the setpoint and any of the following three conditions is true:
- The heat recovery output controller is not responding to the sequencer.
- The heat recovery PID has saturated high.
- The heat recovery device is not modulated. In this state, Preheat is set to its
maximum position, and the reheat output controller controls the process
variable.
• Heating Idle: The sequencer enters this state through Satisfied if the Process
Variable is less than the Setpoint or Preheat Percent Cmd is greater than zero.
The sequencer enters Heating idle from any heating state if the Start Stop
sequencer informs that the fan is not ready.
• Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer enters this state if the process
variable sensor is unreliable.

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD])

Table 25-243: Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OADD) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable Transition to Temperature Unreliable.

956 CCT Help: Modules

Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OASD)

Overview
The Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OASD) module is responsible for
generating the appropriate temperature control state for a 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Air Handler Unit (AHU) application. It is to be used for discharge air
control sequencing only. This module accepts the discharge temperature and
setpoint, heating, cooling, and heat recovery devices statuses. The module outputs
the current operational state.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD])
• Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD])
• Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD])
• Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-244: Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OASD) Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
100 OA Single Duct Sequencing AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 957

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Sequencing
(AHU 100% OASD) module.
Table 25-245: Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OASD) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
AHU-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current state generated by Set Name: AHU DAT OA
the sequence
Cooling Control Status Contains the value fed back from the Normal
mechanical cooling PID controller Set Name: Control Status
necessary for the sequencer to determine
what actions to take.
Fan Ready Comes from the Start/Stop Sequencer and False
indicates that the fans and dampers have
been sequenced properly.
Heat Recovery Control For proportional heat recovery devices, Normal
Status displays the value fed back from the heat Set Name: Control Status
recovery device PID necessary for the
sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Heat Recovery Used to tell the state machine if the heat False
Modulated recovery is modulated or not. True means
modulated, and False means not
modulated.
Preheat Control Status Contains the value fed back from the Normal
preheat PID controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Preheat Percent Cmd Displays the position of the output 0.0%
controller used to prevent the preheat
device from unnecessarily cycling off then
back on as the air handler unit starts up.
Process Variable Displays the discharge air temperature. It 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
is the variable that is compared to the
setpoint to determine whether it is
necessary to heat or cool the discharge
air.
Setpoint Contains the discharge air temperature 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
setpoint the state generator attempts to
control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

958 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD])
In the following descriptions, HX stands for Heat Recovery.
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state if no heating or cooling is required.
The sequencer transitions to Satisfied from HX Cool+Mech if either of the
following occurs:
• The cooling device is not responding to the sequencer.
• The Process Variable is less than the Setpoint and the cooling device PID
saturated low.
When heat recovery is modulated, the sequencer transitions to Satisfied from
HX Heat if the Process Variable is greater than the Heating Setpoint and either
the heat recovery device control status is low or the heat recovery device is not
responding to the sequencer.
When heat recovery is two position (Heat Recovery Modulated is False), the
sequencer transitions to Satisfied from HX Heat if the Process Variable is
greater than the Heating Setpoint.
The sequencer transitions to Satisfied from Heating Idle if the Process Variable
becomes greater than the Setpoint and Preheat Percent Cmd is zero.
• HX Cool+Mech: The sequencer enters this state from Satisfied if cooling is
required and the cooling device is responding to the sequencer. In this state, the
heat recovery device is on and cooling device controls the process variable.
• HX Heat: The sequencer enters this state from Heating Idle (and Satisfied) if
the startup sequence has completed and therefore the fan is ready and the
Process Variable is less than the setpoint (heating is required) and the Preheat
Percent Cmd is greater than zero and heat recovery is modulated.
The sequencer enters this state form HX Heat+Preheat if the Process Variable
is greater than the Setpoint and either the Preheat Control Status is Low or the
preheat device is not responding. When the heat recovery is not
• HX Heat+Preheat: The sequencer enters this state from Heating Idle if the
startup sequence has completed and therefore the fan is ready and either
Preheat Percent Cmd is greater than zero or heat recovery is not modulated.
The sequencer enters this state if after being in HX Heat the process variable is
still less than the setpoint and any of the following three conditions is true:
• The heat recovery output controller is not responding to the sequencer.
• The heat recovery PID has saturated high
• The heat recovery device is not modulated.
In this state, Preheat is set to its maximum position, and the reheat output
controller controls the process variable.

State Generators 959

 Finally, the sequencer enters this state from HX Heat+Preheat+Reheat if the
Reheat device is not responding to the commands of this sequencer or the
control status of the reheat device is low and the Process Variable is greater
than the Setpoint.
• HX Heat+Preheat+Reheat: The sequencer enters this state if after being in
HX Heat+Preheat the Process Variable still is less than the Setpoint and the
reheat device is responding to the commands of this sequencer and either the
preheat device is not responding to this sequencer or the preheat device control
status is High.
• Heating Idle: The sequencer enters this state through Satisfied if the Process
Variable is less than the Setpoint or Preheat Percent Cmd is greater than zero.
The sequencer enters Heating idle from any heating state if the Start Stop
sequencer informs that the fan is not ready.
• Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer enters this state if the Process
Variable sensor is unreliable.

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD])

Table 25-246: Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OASD) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable Transition to Temperature Unreliable state.

960 CCT Help: Modules

Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD)

Overview
The Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD) module generates the appropriate
temperature control state for the cold deck on a mixed air dual deck Air Handler
Unit (AHU) application. This module accepts the temperature and setpoint inputs
listed below as well as the heating, cooling, and damper control statuses.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD])
• Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD])
• Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD])
• Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-247: Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Application
Mixed Air Cold Deck Sequencing AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 961

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Sequencing
(AHU MADD) module.
Table 25-248: Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CD-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current state generated by the Set Name: AHU DAT DP MA
sequence.
Cooling Control Status Displays the value fed back from the Normal
mechanical cooling PID controller that is Set Name: Control Status
necessary for the sequencer to determine what
actions to take.
Damper Control Status Displays the value fed back from the Normal
economizer PID controller that is necessary for Set Name: Control Status
the sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Fan Ready Comes from the Start/Stop Sequencer and False
indicates that the fans and dampers have been
sequenced properly.
Free Cooling Available Displays the output of the Economizer False
Availability Determination module.
Preheat Control Status Contains the value fed back from the preheat Normal
PID controller that is necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to take.
Process Variable Displays the cold deck discharge temperature 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
that is compared to the setpoint and used to
determine whether preheating or cooling is
required.
Setpoint Displays the setpoint the state generator 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
attempts to control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

962 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD])
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state if no heating or cooling is required.
The transition to Satisfied normally requires the sequencer to be either in
Preheat or Econ and the device to saturate low (or closed). To facilitate
commissioning, and if the Fast Sequence Enable flag is True, the sequencer
goes out of any cooling state if the Cooling Setpoint increases by more than the
Setpoint Threshold and the Process Variable is lower than the new Cooling
Setpoint. Likewise, the sequencer goes out of any heating state if the Heating
Setpoint decreases by more than the Setpoint Threshold and the Process
Variable is lower than the new Heating Setpoint.
The sequencer also might enter Satisfied from Mechanical Cooling if the
Process Variable is less than the Cooling Setpoint and the cooling device is not
responding to the sequencer. Likewise, the sequencer might enter Satisfied
from Preheat if the Process Variable is greater than the Heating Setpoint and
the preheat device is not responding to the sequencer.
• Econ: The sequencer enters this state if cooling is required and the economizer
is available. In this state, the damper controls the process variable.
• Mech: The sequencer enters this state if cooling is required and the
economizer is not available. In this state, the damper should close and the
cooling device controls the Process Variable
• Econ + Mech: The sequencer enters this state if, after being in Econ, the
damper output controller is saturated open. In this state, the damper is open to
its maximum position, and the cooling output controller controls the process
variable.
• Preheat: The sequencer enters this state if heating is required. In this state the
preheat output controller controls the process variable.
• Cooling Idle: The sequencer enters this state through Satisfied whenever it is
enabled. In this state, all of the output controllers should hold their last
command. This state allows the fans to start and obtain an accurate reading of
the Outdoor Air Temperature (and humidity if used) to determine the free
cooling suitability.
• Heating Idle: The sequencer enters this state through Satisfied whenever it is
enabled. In this state, all of the output controllers should hold their last
command. This state is used, in the DA-T Control Units, to wait for the fans to
start. In Zone control units, the state machine skips through to Preheat.
• Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer enters this state if the process
variable sensor is unreliable.

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD])

Table 25-249: Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable Transition to Temperature Unreliable state.

State Generators 963

Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w HR)

Overview
The Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w HR) module generates the appropriate
temperature control state for the cold deck on a mixed air dual deck AHU
application. This module accepts the temperature and setpoint inputs listed in the
attributes table as well as the heating, cooling, and damper control statuses.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR])
• Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR])
• Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR])
• Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-250: Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w HR) Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Application
Mixed Air Cold Deck HR Sequencing AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

964 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Sequencing
(AHU MADD w HR) module.
Table 25-251: Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w HR) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CD-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current state generated by the Set Name: AHU DAT DP MA
sequence. HX
Cooling Control Status Displays the value fed back from the Normal
mechanical cooling PID controller necessary Set Name: Control Status
for the sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Damper Control Status Displays the value fed back from the Normal
economizer PID controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to take.
Fan Ready Comes from the Start/Stop Sequencer and False
indicates that the fans and dampers have been
sequenced properly.
Free Cooling Available Displays the output of the Economizer False
Availability Determination module.
Heat Recovery Control Contains the value fed back from the heat Normal
Status recovery PID controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to take.
Heat Recovery Indicates whether the heat recovery is False
Modulated modulated (True equals modulated and False
equals not modulated).
Preheat Control Status Contains the value fed back from the preheat Normal
PID controller necessary for the sequencer to Set Name: Control Status
determine what actions to take.
Preheat Percent Cmd Indicates the preheat command used to 0.0%
prevent the preheat from cycling off and on
unnecessarily when the AHU starts.
Process Variable Displays the cold deck discharge temperature 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
compared to the setpoint and used to
determine whether heating or cooling is
required.
Setpoint Displays the setpoint the state generator 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
attempts to control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 965

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR])
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state if no heating or cooling is required.
The transition to Satisfied normally requires the sequencer to be either in
Preheat or Econ and the device to saturate low (or closed). To facilitate
commissioning when the Fast Sequence Enable flag is True, the sequencer
goes out of any cooling state when the Cooling Setpoint increases by more than
the Setpoint Threshold and the Process Variable is lower than the new Cooling
Setpoint. Likewise, the sequencer goes out of any heating state if the Heating
Setpoint decreases by more than the Setpoint Threshold and the Process
Variable is lower than the new Heating Setpoint.
The sequencer also might enter Satisfied from Mechanical Cooling if the
Process Variable is less than the Cooling Setpoint and the cooling device is not
responding to the sequencer. Likewise, the sequencer might enter Satisfied
from Preheat if the Process Variable is greater than the Heating Setpoint and
the preheat device is not responding to the sequencer.
• Econ: The sequencer enters this state if cooling is required and the economizer
is available. In this state, the damper controls the process variable.
• Econ + Mech: The sequencer enters this state if, after being in Econ, the
damper output controller is saturated open. In this state, the damper is open to
its maximum position, and the cooling output controller controls the process
variable.
• HX Cool + Mech: The sequencer enters this state if cooling is required and the
economizer is not available. In this state, the damper closes and the cooling
device controls the Process Variable.
• HX Heat: In this state, the heat recovery output controller controls the process
variable.
• HX Heat + Preheat: In this state, the preheat output controller controls the
process variable and the heat recovery is set to its maximum.
• Cooling Idle: The sequencer enters this state through Satisfied whenever it is
enabled. In this state, all of the output controllers hold their last command. This
state allows the fans to start and obtain an accurate reading of the Outdoor Air
Temperature (and humidity if used) to determine the free cooling suitability.
• Heating Idle: The sequencer enters this state through Satisfied whenever it is
enabled. In this state, all of the output controllers hold their last command. This
state is used, in the DA-T Control Units, to wait for the fans to start. In Zone
control units, the state machine skips through to Preheat.
• Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer enters this state if the process
variable sensor is unreliable.

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR])

Table 25-252: Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w HR) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable Transition to Temperature Unreliable state.

966 CCT Help: Modules

Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD)

Overview
This module generates the appropriate temperature control state for a mixed air,
single duct Air Handler Unit (MASD AHU) rooftop application. This module
accepts the temperature and setpoint inputs listed below as well as preheat, reheat,
cooling, and damper control statuses. The module outputs the current state.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD])
• Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD])
• Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD])
• Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-253: Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Mixed Air Single Duct Sequencing AHU Rooftop Unit Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 967

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Sequencing
(AHU MASD) module.
Table 25-254: Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
AHU-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current state generated by the Set Name: AHU DAT MA
sequence.
Cooling Control Status Displays the value fed back from the Normal
mechanical cooling PID controller necessary Set Name: Control Status
for the sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Cooling Setpoint Contains the setpoint the state generator 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
attempts to control when cooling.
Damper Control Status Displays the value fed back from the Normal
economizer PID controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to take.
Fan Ready Comes from the Start/Stop Sequencer and False
indicates that the fans and dampers have been
sequenced properly
Fast Sequence Indicates if a change to a Satisfied state should False
Enabled occur if a setpoint changes as described in the
Setpoint Threshold input.
Free Cooling Available Contains the output of the Economizer False
Availability Determination module.
Heating Setpoint Contains the setpoint the state generator 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
attempts to control when heating.
Preheat Control Status Contains the value fed back from the preheat Normal
PID controller necessary for the sequencer to Set Name: Control Status
determine what actions to take.
Process Variable Contains the value compared to the setpoint 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
and is used to determine whether heating or
cooling is required.
Reheat Control Status Displays the value fed back from the reheat PID Normal
controller necessary for the sequencer to Set Name: Control Status
determine what actions to take.
Setpoint Threshold Indicates how much Cooling Setpoint must 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
increase/Heating Setpoint must decrease to
cause a change to a Satisfied state from a
Cooling/Heating state.
Zone Control Contains a Boolean input that should be True False
when the unit is Zone Control without
Cascaded DA-T setpoint reset.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

968 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD])
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state if no heating or cooling is required.
The transition to Satisfied normally requires the sequencer to be either in
Preheat or Econ and the device to saturate low (or closed). To facilitate
commissioning, and if the Fast Sequence Enable flag is True, the sequencer
goes out of any cooling state if the Cooling Setpoint increases by more than the
Setpoint Threshold and the Process Variable is lower than the new Cooling
Setpoint. Likewise, the sequencer goes out of any heating state if the Heating
Setpoint decreases by more than the Setpoint Threshold and the Process
Variable is lower than the new Heating Setpoint.
The sequencer also might enter Satisfied from Mechanical Cooling if the
Process Variable is less than the Cooling Setpoint and the cooling device is not
responding to the sequencer. Likewise, the sequencer might enter Satisfied
from Preheat if the Process Variable is greater than the Heating Setpoint and
the preheat device is not responding to the sequencer.
• Econ: The sequencer enters this state if cooling is required and the economizer
is available. In this state, the damper controls the process variable.
• Mech: The sequencer enters this state if cooling is required and the
economizer is not available. In this state, the damper should close and the
cooling device controls the Process Variable.
• Econ + Mech: The sequencer enters this state if after being in Econ, the
damper output controller is saturated open. In this state, the damper is open to
its maximum position, and the cooling output controller controls the process
variable.
• Preheat: The sequencer enters this state if heating is required. In this state the
preheat output controller controls the process variable.
• Preheat + Reheat: The sequencer enters this state if after being in Preheat, the
preheat output controller has saturated high. In this state, Preheat is set to its
maximum position, and the reheat output controller controls the process
variable. To transition back to Preheat the sequencer requires that the Process
Variable is greater than the Heating Setpoint and either the reheat device
saturate low or the Reheat Device is not responding to the sequencer.
• Cooling Idle: The sequencer enters this state through Satisfied whenever it is
enabled. In this state, all of the output controllers should hold their last
command. This state is used to allow the fans to start and obtain an accurate
reading of the Outdoor Air Temperature (and humidity if used) to determine
the free cooling suitability
• Heating Idle: The sequencer enters this state through Satisfied whenever it is
enabled. In this state, all of the output controllers should hold their last
command. This state, in the DA-T Control Units, waits for the fans to start. In
Zone control units, the state machine skips through to Preheat.
• Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer enters this state if the process
variable sensor is unreliable.

State Generators 969

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD])
Table 25-255: Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable Transition to Temperature Unreliable state.

970 CCT Help: Modules

Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD w HR)

Overview
This module generates the appropriate temperature control state for a mixed air,
single duct AHU (MASD AHU) with Heat Recovery application. This module
accepts the temperature and setpoint inputs listed in the attribute table, as well as
preheat, reheat, cooling, and damper control statuses. The module outputs the
current state.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR])
• Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR])
• Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR])
• Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-256: Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD w HR) Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Mixed Air Single Duct HR Sequencing AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 971

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Sequencing
(AHU MASD w HR) module.
Table 25-257: Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD w HR) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
AHU-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current state generated by the Set Name: AHU DAT MA HX
sequence.
Cooling Control Status Displays the value fed back from the Normal
mechanical cooling PID controller necessary Set Name: Control Status
for the sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Cooling Setpoint Contains the setpoint the state generator 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
attempts to control when cooling.
Damper Control Status Displays the value fed back from the Normal
economizer PID controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to take.
Fan Ready Comes from the Start/Stop Sequencer and False
indicates that the fans and dampers have been
sequenced properly.
Fast Sequence Indicates whether a change to a Satisfied state False
Enabled occurs when a setpoint changes as described
in the Setpoint Threshold input.
Free Cooling Available Contains the output of the Economizer False
Availability Determination module.
Heat Recovery Control Contains the value fed back from the heat Normal
Status recovery PID controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to take.
Heat Recovery Indicates whether the heat recovery is False
Modulated modulated, where True equals modulated and
False equals not modulated.
Heating Setpoint Contains the setpoint the state generator 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
attempts to control when heating.
Preheat Control Status Contains the value fed back from the preheat Normal
PID controller necessary for the sequencer to Set Name: Control Status
determine what actions to take.
Preheat Percent Cmd Indicates the preheat command used to 0.0%
prevent the preheat from cycling off and on
unnecessarily when the AHU starts.
Process Variable Contains the value compared to the setpoint 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
and is used to determine whether heating or
cooling is required.
Reheat Control Status Displays the value fed back from the reheat PID Normal
controller necessary for the sequencer to Set Name: Control Status
determine what actions to take.
Setpoint Threshold Indicates how much the Cooling Setpoint must 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
increase/Heating Setpoint must decrease to
cause a change to a Satisfied state from a
Cooling/Heating state.
Zone Control Contains a Boolean input that is True when the False
unit is Zone Control without Cascaded DA-T
setpoint reset.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

972 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR])
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state if no heating or cooling is required.
The transition to Satisfied normally requires the sequencer to be either in
Preheat or Econ and the device to saturate low (or closed). To facilitate
commissioning when the Fast Sequence Enable flag is True, the sequencer
goes out of any cooling state when the Cooling Setpoint increases by more than
the Setpoint Threshold and the Process Variable is lower than the new Cooling
Setpoint. Likewise, the sequencer goes out of any heating state if the Heating
Setpoint decreases by more than the Setpoint Threshold and the Process
Variable is lower than the new Heating Setpoint.
The sequencer also might enter Satisfied from Mechanical Cooling if the
Process Variable is less than the Cooling Setpoint and the cooling device is not
responding to the sequencer. Likewise, the sequencer might enter Satisfied
from Preheat if the Process Variable is greater than the Heating Setpoint and
the preheat device is not responding to the sequencer.
• Econ: The sequencer enters this state if cooling is required and the economizer
is available. In this state, the damper controls the process variable.
• Econ + Mech: The sequencer enters this state if, after being in Econ, the
damper output controller is saturated open. In this state, the damper is open to
its maximum position, and the cooling output controller controls the process
variable.
• HX Cool + Mech: The sequencer enters this state if cooling is required and the
economizer is not available. In this state, the damper closes and the cooling
device controls the Process Variable.
• HX Heat: In this state, the heat recovery output controller controls the process
variable.
• HX Heat + Preheat: In this state, the preheat output controller controls the
process variable and the heat recovery is set to its maximum.
• HX Heat + Preheat + Reheat: In this state, the reheat output controller
controls the process variable and the preheat and heat recovery is set to
maximum.
• Cooling Idle: The sequencer enters this state through Satisfied if it is enabled.
In this state, all of the output controllers hold their last command. This state is
used to allow the fans to start and obtain an accurate reading of the Outdoor Air
Temperature (and humidity if used) to determine the free cooling suitability.
• Heating Idle: The sequencer enters this state through Satisfied if it is enabled.
In this state, all of the output controllers hold their last command. This state, in
the DA-T control units, waits for the fans to start. In Zone control units, the
state machine skips through to Preheat.
• Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer enters this state if the process
variable sensor is unreliable.

State Generators 973

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR])
Table 25-258: Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD w HR) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable Transition to Temperature Unreliable state.

974 CCT Help: Modules

Occupied Sequencing (Single Device)

Overview
The Occupied Sequencing (Single Device) module generates the appropriate
temperature control state for a single heating or cooling device in an Air Handler
Unit (AHU) application. This module can be used when the preheat device
controls the mixed air temperature, the heating device controls the hot deck
temperature, or the cooling device is not sequenced with preheat or economizer
such as a cooling only 100% Outdoor Air Unit. This module accepts the
temperature and setpoint inputs listed below as well as the control status.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device])
• Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device])
• Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device])
• Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-259: Occupied Sequencing (Single Device) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Preheat Sequencing AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application1
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application2
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

1. The AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct and Multizone applications use both Preheat Sequencing and Mixed
Air Hot Deck Sequencing.
2. The AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct application uses 100 OA Hot Deck Sequencing instead of
Preheat Sequencing.

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 975

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Sequencing
(Single Device) modules:
Table 25-260: Occupied Sequencing (Single Device) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status Displays the value fed back from the output Normal
controller PID. This is needed for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to take.
Fan Ready Comes from the Start/Stop Sequencer, and True
indicates that the fans and dampers have been
sequenced properly. This input must not be
connected in a zone control system; it is only
for a discharge air control system.
Fast Sequence Indicates if a change to a Satisfied state should False
Enabled occur if a setpoint changes as described in the
Setpoint Threshold input.
HC-STATE, Displays the current state generated by the Satisfied
HD-STATE, or sequence. Set Name: AHU Single Htg or
PH-STATE (State) Clg
Heating Device Used to tell the state machine if the module is a False
heating sequencer or a cooling sequencer.
When this input is set True, the state machine
is a heating sequencer, and when the input is
set False, the state machine is a cooling
sequencer.
Process Variable Displays the value that is compared to the 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
setpoint and used to determine whether it is
necessary to heat or cool.
Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the process 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled towards.
Setpoint Threshold Indicates how much the setpoint must change 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
to cause a state transition to a Satisfied state
from the T Control state.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

976 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device])
• Satisfied: The sequencer transitions to Satisfied from Control Unreliable if the
Process Variable becomes reliable.
The sequencer transitions to Satisfied from Idle if configured for heating and
no heating is required or configured for cooling and no cooling is required.
The sequencer transitions to Satisfied from T Control if the temperature
requirement is satisfied (configured for Heating and no heating is required of
configured for cooling and no cooling is required) and any of the three
following conditions is true:
• The output control device control status is Low.
• The output controller is not responding to this sequencer.
• A large setpoint change has occurred. This later requisite happens when
Fast Sequence Enable is True and the setpoint has changed by a value
larger than the Setpoint Threshold.
• Idle: The sequencer enters this state from Satisfied if configured for heating
and heating is required or configured for cooling and cooling is required.
• T Control: The sequencer enters this state from Idle when the fan is
operational as indicated by the Fan Ready input element.
• Control Unreliable: The sequencer enters this state if the Process Variable
sensor is unreliable.

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device])

Table 25-261: Occupied Sequencing (Single Device) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable Transition to Control Unreliable state.

State Generators 977

Occupied Zone Sequencing (FC/AHU)

Overview
This module is generates the appropriate temperature control state for a zone
control application. This module monitors the status of the heating and cooling
controllers and setpoints to determine whether the current state should be satisfied,
heating, cooling, or temperature unreliable.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [FC/AHU])
• Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [FC/AHU])
• Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [FC/AHU])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [FC/AHU])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-262: Occupied Zone Sequencing (FC) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
FC-ZN-T Sequencing Fan Coil Application
Zone Sequencing AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

978 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [FC/AHU])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Zone
Sequencing (FC/AHU) module.
Table 25-263: Occupied Zone Sequencing (FC/AHU) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status Indicates the status of the feedback controller Overridden
for the cooling process. Set Name: Control Status
Cooling Setpoint Contains the desired zone temperature when 26.0 Deg C, 75.0 Deg F
under cooling control.
Fast Sequence Allows the user to enable or disable the True
Enabled transition to satisfied when the setpoint
changes by more than the Setpoint Threshold.
Heating Control Status Indicates the status of the feedback controller Overridden
for the heating process. Set Name: Control Status
Heating Setpoint Displays the desired zone temperature when 18.0 Deg C, 68.0 Deg F
under heating control.
Setpoint Threshold Used to determine whether a significant 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
setpoint change has occurred.
ZNT-STATE (State) G, V Indicates the current operational mode of the Set Name: FC ZNC States
output controller.
Zone Temperature Contains the measured temperature in the 16.0 Deg C, 61.0 Deg F
zone.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [FC/AHU])

• Heating: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is less than
the Heating Setpoint.
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is greater
than the Heating Setpoint and the Zone Temperature is less than the Cooling
Setpoint and both the Heating and Cooling Control Status’ are Low. The
sequencer may also go to Satisfied when Fast Sequence Enabled is True and
the Zone Temperature is between the Heating and Cooling Setpoints and
Heating Setpoint was decreased by more than the Setpoint Threshold or the
Cooling Setpoint was increased by more than the Setpoint Threshold.
• Cooling: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is greater
than the Cooling Setpoint.
• Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone
Temperature is not reliable.

State Generators 979

Occupied Zone Sequencing (HP)

Overview
This module generates the appropriate temperature control state for a heat pump
application. This module monitors the status of the heating, cooling, damper,
supplemental heating controllers, setpoints, and occupancy to determine the
current zone control state.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [HP])
• Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [HP])
• Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [HP])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [HP])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-264: Occupied Zone Sequencing (HP) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
HP-ZN-T Sequencing Heat Pump Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

980 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [HP])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Zone
Sequencing (HP) module.
Table 25-265: Occupied Zone Sequencing (HP) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status Contains the value fed back from the cooling Overridden
controller necessary for the sequencer to Set Name: Control Status
determine what actions to take.
Cooling Setpoint Contains the desired zone temperature when 23.0 Deg C, 74.0 Deg F
under cooling control.
Damper Control Status Displays the value fed back from the damper Overridden
controller necessary for the sequencer to Set Name: Control Status
determine what actions to take.
Discharge Air Contains the value that is to be compared to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Temperature the Discharge Air Low Limit (DALL) and is used
to determine whether it is necessary to enter
DALL control to modulate the OA Damper
closed to keep the discharge air temperature
from falling below the DALL.
Fast Sequence Allows the user to enable or disable the True
Enabled transition to satisfied when the setpoint
changes by more than the Setpoint Threshold.
Free Cooling Available Indicates whether economizer cooling is False
available.
Heating Control Status Displays the value fed back from the heating Overridden
controller necessary for the sequencer to Set Name: Control Status
determine what actions to take.
Heating Setpoint Contains the desired zone temperature when 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
under heating control.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the low limit for the Discharge Air 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Temperature.
Occupancy Accepts the current occupancy status. Occupied
Set Name: Occ Effective
Setpoint Threshold Contains the value used to determine whether 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
a significant setpoint change has occurred.
Supp Heating Control Contains the value fed back from the Overridden
Status supplemental heating controller necessary for Set Name: Control Status
the sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
ZNT-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current state generated by the Set Name: HP ZNC States
heat pump zone temperature sequence.
Zone Temperature Contains the measured temperature in the 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
zone.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 981

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [HP])
• Heating: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is less than
the Heating Setpoint and Supplemental Heating is not needed.
• Supplemental Heating: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone
Temperature is less than the Heating Setpoint and Heating is saturated high.
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state when Heating or Cooling are not
needed.
• Economizer: The sequencer is in this state when Cooling is needed and
Economizer Cooling is available.
• Economizer + Cooling: The sequencer is in this state when the Economizer is
saturated high and Zone Temperature is still greater than the Heating Setpoint.
• Cooling Only: The sequencer is in this state when Cooling is needed and
Economizer Cooling is not available.
• DALL Economizer: The sequencer is in this state when Economizer Cooling
is available and the discharge air temperature is less than the Low Limit
Setpoint.
• Zone Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone
Temperature is not reliable.

982 CCT Help: Modules

Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 1)

Overview
This module generates the appropriate temperature control state for a Unit
Ventilator ASHRAE Cycle 1 zone control application. This module accepts the
temperature and setpoint inputs listed below as well as the heating, cooling, and
damper control statuses. The module outputs the current state as calculated by the
ZN-T Sequencing Finite State Machine.
ASHRAE Cycle 1 supplies 100% outside air at all times, except during the
warmup state. As the zone temperature rises into the range of the heating setpoint,
the outside air damper is fully opened. The heating valve is modulated in response
to the zone temperature to maintain setpoint. Low discharge air temperature can
override zone heating control to maintain a minimum discharge air temperature
into the space. Low limit control logic can also override the damper position if
opening the heating valve is unable to maintain either the zone or discharge
setpoints.
Note: If the discharge air temperature is not reliable, no discharge air low limit
operation takes place and the module controls the zone temperature only.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 1])
• Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 1])
• Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 1])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 1])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-266: Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 1) Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
UV-ZN-T Sequencing ASHRAE 1 Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 983

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 1])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Zone
Sequencing (UV Cycle 1) module.
Table 25-267: Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 1) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status Displays the value fed back from the Normal
cooling controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Cooling Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the zone 23.0 Deg C, 74.0 Deg F
temperature when under cooling control.
Damper Control Status Displays the value fed back from the OA Normal
damper controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Discharge Air Contains the value that is to be compared 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Temperature to the Discharge Air Low Limit (DALL) and
is used to determine whether it is
necessary to enter DALL control to either
turn on heating or modulate the OA
Damper closed to keep the discharge air
temperature from falling below the DALL.
Fast Sequence Allows the user to enable or disable the True
Enabled transition to satisfied when the setpoint
changes by more than the Setpoint
Threshold.
Heating Control Status Displays the value fed back from the Normal
heating controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Heating Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the zone 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
temperature when under heating control.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the low limit for the Discharge Air 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Temperature.
Setpoint Threshold Used to determine whether a significant 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
setpoint change has occurred.
ZNT-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current state generated by Set Name: ZNC ASHRAE 1
the zone temperature sequence. States
Zone Temperature Contains the value that is compared to the 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
heating and cooling setpoints and is used
to determine whether it is necessary to
heat or cool the zone.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

984 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 1])
• Zone Damper: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is
less than the Heating Setpoint and Heating is saturated High.
• Heating: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is less than
the Heating Setpoint.
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state when Heating, Cooling, or Low Limit
Protection are not needed.
• Cooling: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is greater
than the Cooling Setpoint.
• DALL Heating: The sequencer is in this state when the Discharge Air
Temperature is less than the Low Limit Setpoint and heating is not saturated
High.
• DALL Damper: The sequencer is in this state when the Discharge Air
Temperature is less than the Low Limit Setpoint and heating is saturated High.
• Zone Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone
Temperature is unreliable.

State Generators 985

Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 2)

Overview
This module generates the appropriate temperature control state for a Unit
Ventilator ASHRAE Cycle 2 zone control application. This module accepts the
temperature and setpoint inputs listed below as well as the heating, cooling, and
damper control statuses. The module outputs the current state as calculated by the
ZN-T Sequencing Finite State Machine.
As the zone temperature rises to near the heating setpoint, ASHRAE Cycle 2 opens
the outdoor air damper to the minimum position. A fixed minimum amount of
outside air, normally 15 to 50%, is admitted during the heating and ventilating
states. The percentage is gradually increased to 100%, if required, during the
ventilating state. The heating valve and outside air dampers are operated in
sequence as required to maintain zone temperature. Low discharge air temperature
can override the zone temperature’s action on the heating valve to open the valve.
Low discharge air temperature can also override the zone temperature’s action on
the damper to close the damper to minimum. As the discharge temperature
continues to drop, the heating output goes to 100% and the outside damper closes
to prevent discharge air from dropping below a minimum temperature.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 2])
• Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 2])
• Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 2])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 2])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-268: Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 2) Uses in
Application System Selection
Module Instance Name Applications
UV-ZN-T Sequencing ASHRAE 2 Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

986 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 2])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Zone
Sequencing (UV Cycle 2) module.
Table 25-269: Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 2) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status Contains the value fed back from the cooling Normal
controller necessary for the sequencer to Set Name: Control Status
determine what actions to take.
Cooling Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the zone 23.0 Deg C, 74.0 Deg F
temperature when under cooling control.
Damper Control Status Contains the value fed back from the OA Normal
damper controller necessary for the sequencer Set Name: Control Status
to determine what actions to take.
Discharge Air Contains the value that is to be compared to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Temperature the Discharge Air Low Limit (DALL) and is used
to determine whether it is necessary to enter
DALL control to either turn on heating or
modulate the OA Damper closed to keep the
discharge air temperature from falling below the
DALL.
Fast Sequence Allows the user to enable or disable the True
Enabled transition to satisfied when the setpoint
changes by more than the Setpoint Threshold.
Free Cooling Available Indicates whether economizer cooling is False
available.
Heating Control Status Contains the value fed back from the heating Normal
controller necessary for the sequencer to Set Name: Control Status
determine what actions to take.
Heating Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the zone 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
temperature when under heating control.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the low limit for the Discharge Air 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Temperature.
Setpoint Threshold Used to determine whether a significant 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
setpoint change has occurred.
ZNT-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current state generated by the Set Name: ZNC ASHRAE 2
zone temperature sequence. States
Zone Temperature Contains the value that is compared to the 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
heating and cooling setpoints and is used to
determine whether it is necessary to heat or
cool the zone.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 987

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 2])
• Zone Damper: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is
less than the Heating Setpoint and Heating is saturated High.
• Heating: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is less than
the Heating Setpoint.
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state when Heating, Cooling, or Low Limit
Protection are not needed.
• Economizer: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is
greater than the Cooling Setpoint and Free Cooling is available.
• Economizer + Cooling: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone
Temperature is greater than the Cooling Setpoint and Cooling is available and
the damper is saturated High.
• Cooling Only: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is
greater than the Cooling Setpoint and Free Cooling is not available.
• DALL Economizer: The sequencer is in this state when the Discharge Air
Temperature is less than the Low Limit Setpoint and Free Cooling is available.
• DALL Heating: The sequencer is in this state when the Discharge Air
Temperature is less than the Low Limit Setpoint and Free Cooling is not
available.
• DALL Damper: The sequencer is in this state when the Discharge Air
Temperature is less than the Low Limit Setpoint and Free Cooling is not
available and Heating is saturated High.
• Zone Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone
Temperature is not reliable.

988 CCT Help: Modules

Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 3)

Overview
This module generates the appropriate temperature control state for a Unit
Ventilator ASHRAE Cycle 3 zone control application. This module accepts the
temperature and setpoint inputs listed below as well as the heating, cooling, and
damper control statuses. The module outputs the current state as calculated by the
ZN-T Sequencing Finite State Machine.
In ASHRAE Cycle 3, a mixed air sensor controls the mixed air temperature.
During the heating, ventilating, and cooling states, Cycle 3 supplies a variable
amount of outside air as required to maintain a fixed temperature (typically 55°F)
entering the heating coil. As the zone temperature rises into the range of the
heating setpoint, ventilation dampers control the air temperature entering the
heating coil at the mixed air setpoint. Zone temperature is controlled by
positioning the heating valve as required. The zone sensor directly controls the
heating element without low limit interference.
Note: The mixed air temperature is read and used for control of the damper
within the UV Cycle 3 Damper Output module; it is not an input in this
module.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 3])
• Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 3])
• Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 3])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 3])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-270: Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 3) Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
UV-ZN-T Sequencing ASHRAE 3 Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 989

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 3])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Zone
Sequencing (UV Cycle 3) module.
Table 25-271: Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 3) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status Displays the value fed back from the Normal
cooling controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Cooling Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the zone 23.0 Deg C, 74.0 Deg F
temperature when under cooling control.
Damper Control Status Displays the value fed back from the OA Normal
damper controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Fast Sequence Allows the user to enable or disable the True
Enabled transition to “satisfied” when the setpoint
changes by more than the Setpoint
Threshold.
Heating Control Status Displays the value fed back from the Normal
heating controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Heating Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the zone 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
temperature when under heating control.
Setpoint Threshold Used to determine whether a significant 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
setpoint change has occurred.
ZNT-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current state generated by Set Name: ZNC ASHRAE 3
the zone temperature sequence. States
Zone Temperature Contains the value that is compared to the 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
heating and cooling setpoints and is used
to determine whether it is necessary to
heat or cool the zone.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 3])

• Zone Damper: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is
less than the Heating Setpoint and Heating is saturated High.
• Heating: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is less than
the Heating Setpoint.
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state when Heating or Cooling are not
needed.
• Cooling: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is greater
than the Cooling Setpoint.
• Zone Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone
Temperature is not reliable.

990 CCT Help: Modules

Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle W)

Overview
This module generates the appropriate temperature control state for a Unit
Ventilator ASHRAE Cycle W zone control application. The module accepts the
temperature and setpoint inputs listed below as well as the heating, cooling, and
damper control statuses. The module outputs the current state as calculated by the
ZN-T Sequencing Finite State Machine.
ASHRAE Cycle W is the same as ASHRAE Cycle 2 with one exception: the
discharge air low limit sensor controls only the outside and recirculated air
dampers. The zone sensor directly controls heating without interference from the
low limit. As the zone temperature rises to the normal operating temperature, the
outside air damper is opened to minimum. A fixed minimum amount of outside air,
normally 15 to 50%, is admitted during the heating and satisfied states. The
percentage is gradually increased to 100%, if required, in the economizer and
cooling states. The heating valve and outside air dampers are operated in sequence
as required to maintain zone temperature. The discharge air sensor can override the
zone sensor action on the damper to close the damper to minimum. As the
discharge temperature continues to drop, the OA damper closes to prevent
discharge air from dropping below a minimum temperature.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle W])
• Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle W])
• Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle W])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle W])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 25-272: Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle W) Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
UV-ZN-T Sequencing ASHRAE W Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 991

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle W])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Zone
Sequencing (UV Cycle W) module.
Table 25-273: Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle W) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status Contains the value fed back from the Normal
cooling controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Cooling Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the zone 23.0 Deg C, 74.0 Deg F
temperature when under cooling control.
Damper Control Status Contains the value fed back from the OA Normal
damper controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Discharge Air Contains the value that is to be compared 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Temperature to the Discharge Air Low Limit (DALL) and
is used to determine whether it is
necessary to enter DALL control to either
turn on heating or modulate the OA
Damper closed to keep the discharge air
temperature from falling below the DALL.
Fast Sequence Allows the user to enable or disable the True
Enabled transition to “satisfied” when the setpoint
changes by more than the Setpoint
Threshold.
Free Cooling Available Indicates whether economizer cooling is False
available.
Heating Control Status Contains the value fed back from the Normal
heating controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
Heating Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the zone 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
temperature when under heating control.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the low limit for the Discharge Air 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Temperature.
Setpoint Threshold Used to determine whether a significant 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
setpoint change has occurred.
ZNT-STATE (State) G, V Represents the current state generated by Set Name: ZNC ASHRAE W
the zone temperature sequence. States
Zone Temperature Contains the value that is compared to the 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
heating and cooling setpoints and is used
to determine whether it is necessary to
heat or cool the zone.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

992 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle W])
• Zone Damper: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is
less than the Heating Setpoint and Heating is saturated High.
• Heating: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is less than
the Heating Setpoint.
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state when Heating, Cooling, or Low Limit
Protection are not needed.
• Economizer: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is
greater than the Cooling Setpoint and Free Cooling is available.
• Economizer + Cooling: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone
Temperature is greater than the Cooling Setpoint and Cooling is available and
the damper is saturated High.
• Cooling Only: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is
greater than the Cooling Setpoint and Free Cooling is not available.
• DALL Economizer: The sequencer is in this state when the Discharge Air
Temperature is less than the Low Limit Setpoint and Free Cooling is available.
• DALL Damper: The sequencer is in this state when the Discharge Air
Temperature is less than the Low Limit Setpoint and Free Cooling is not
available.
• Zone Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone
Temperature is not reliable.

State Generators 993

Occupied Zone Sequencing (VAV)

Overview
This module generates the appropriate temperature control state for a VAV zone
control application. This module monitors the status of the heating and cooling
controllers and setpoints to determine whether the current state should be satisfied,
unreliable, one of the stages of heating, or one of the stages of cooling.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [VAV])
• Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [VAV])
• Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [VAV])

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [VAV])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-274: Occupied Zone Sequencing (VAV) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
VAV-ZN-T Sequencing VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV-ZN-T Sequencing Single Duct VAV Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

994 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [VAV])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupied Zone
Sequencing (VAV) module.
Table 25-275: Occupied Zone Sequencing (VAV) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Box Heating Control Displays the value fed back from the box Overridden
Status heating controller necessary for the sequencer Set Name: Control Status
to determine what actions to take.
Cooling Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the zone 23.0 Deg C, 74.0 Deg F
temperature when under cooling control.
Fast Sequence Specifies whether the state machine is allowed True
Enabled to proceed directly to Satisfied on large setpoint
changes.
Heating Priority Contains the value that determines whether Supplemental
supplemental or box heat should be the first Set Name: VAV Heating
level of heat. Priority
Note: This is a configuration input. Resulting
state changes do not take place until the
move through the Satisfied state.
Heating Setpoint Displays the desired zone temperature when 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
under heating control.
Primary Cooling Displays the value fed back from the primary Overridden
Control Status cooling output controller necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to take.
Setpoint Threshold Specifies that setpoint changes larger than this 1.0 Deg C, 2.0 Deg F
value cause the state machine to proceed
directly to the Satisfied state when the
temperature is reliable, the Fast Sequence
Enabled input is True and the change is
associated with making the satisfied
temperature band larger.
Supp Heating Control Displays the value fed back from the Overridden
Status supplemental heating controller necessary for Set Name: Control Status
the sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
ZNT-STATE (State) G, V Indicates the current operational mode of the Set Name: VAV ZNC States
controller.
Zone Temperature Contains the value that is to be compared to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
the setpoints and is used to determine whether
it is necessary to proceed from the satisfied
state.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 995

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [VAV])
• Satisfied: The sequencer is in this state when Heating or Cooling are not
needed.
• Supp Htg: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is less
than the Heating Setpoint and Box Priority = Supplemental.
• Supp Htg + Box Htg: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone
Temperature is less than the Heating Setpoint, Box Priority = Supplemental,
and Supp Heating Control Status = High.
• Box Heating: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is less
than the Heating Setpoint and Box Priority = Box.
• Box Htg + Supp Htg: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone
Temperature is less than the Heating Setpoint, Box Priority = Box, and Box
Heating Control Status = High.
• Prmy Clg: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone Temperature is greater
than the Cooling Setpoint.
• Temperature Unreliable: The sequencer is in this state when the Zone
Temperature is not reliable.

996 CCT Help: Modules

Pass Through
Overview
The Pass Through group contains the Pass Through (Boolean, Enum) modules.

Pass Through (Boolean, Enum)

Overview
The Pass Through modules provide an automatic connection to the State Selection
module. They typically take Network Inputs and connect them to State Selection
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Pass Through)
• Attributes (Pass Through)
• Reliability (Pass Through)

Module Use in Applications (Pass Through)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-276: Pass Through (Boolean, Enum) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees (Part 1 of 2)
Module Instance Name Applications
Emergency Mode Pass Through No longer used. Previously used by:
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application
Fan Control by Others BI Pass Through Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Fan Speed Override Pass Through Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Master CD Constant Flow Setpoint Pass VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Through
Master CD Flow Setpoint Pass Through VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Master Flow Setpoint Pass Through VAV Slave Single Duct Application
Master HD Flow Setpoint Pass Through VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
WarmupCooldown Pass Through All Air Handling Unit Applications
Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Water System Flush Pass Through All Air Handling Unit Applications
Fan Coil Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

State Generators 997

 Table 25-276: Pass Through (Boolean, Enum) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees (Part 2 of 2)
Module Instance Name Applications
Zone Damper Mode Pass Through SG AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Zone Htg Valve Mode Pass Through SG AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Zone Staged Htg Mode Pass Through SG AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

A pass through module takes a value from a Network Input and connects it to State
Selection.
To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Pass Through)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Pass Through (Boolean,
Enum) modules.
Table 25-277: Pass Through (Boolean, Enum) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input The input to the pass through module. 1st Enum or False
Present Value G, V The output of the pass through module

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Pass Through)

The Reliability of the Present Value reflects the reliability of the Input.

998 CCT Help: Modules

State Determination
Overview
The State Determination modules determine the effective state for a particular
device or application feature.
The State Determination group contains the following modules:
• Application Mode Determination
• Energy Hold Off Determination
• Fan Alarm Status
• Fan Determination (Terminal Units)
• Occupancy Mode Determination
• Occupancy Mode Determination (MZ)
• System Mode Determination
• Unit Enable Determination
• Zone Low Limit Determination

State Generators 999

Application Mode Determination

Overview
AHU applications have an Application Mode input that allows you to force the
unit into a mode of operation. The possible modes are Cool Only, Heat Only, Fan
Only, Water Flush, Purge, Vent, and Auto. This module separates the Water Flush
mode to a separate output to allow it to be separately connected to State Selection.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Application Mode Determination)
• Attributes (Application Mode Determination)
• Primary States (Application Mode Determination)

Module Use in Applications (Application Mode Determination)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-278: Application Mode Determination Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Application Mode Determination All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1000 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Application Mode Determination)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Application Mode
Determination modules:
Table 25-279: Application Mode Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Application Mode Indicates the current Application Auto
Mode. Set Name: AHU Application
Mode
Eff Mode G, V Indicates the effective Application Set Name: AHU Effective App
mode after splitting off the Water Mode
Flush output.
Water Flush V Indicates whether Water Flush is Boolean
requested.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning
Modes Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Application Mode Determination)

• Cool Only: The unit may operate but cannot use heating device(s).
• Heat Only: The unit may operate but cannot use cooling device(s).
• Fan Only: The unit may operate but cannot use heating or cooling device(s).
• Purge: The unit should start and operate with maximum outdoor air but no
heating or cooling device(s).
• Vent: The unit should start and operate with maximum outdoor air as well as
any available heating or cooling device(s).
• Auto: No application modes are active.

State Generators 1001

Energy Hold Off Determination

Overview
This module resolves two energy hold off inputs, one hardware mode and one
network mode, into a single energy hold off output. This single output is generated
from the two inputs based on the resolution mode setting and the reliability of the
inputs. Energy Hold Off is typically used with Zone Low Limit Determination for
applications serving zones with direct openings outside the building, including
loading docks and offices with operable windows. When the Energy Hold Off is
active (that is, window open), all heating and cooling is de-activated. The Zone
Low Limit option should be selected if heat is needed to prevent the zone from
cold outdoor air conditions.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Energy Hold Off Determination)
• Attributes (Energy Hold Off Determination)
• Primary States (Energy Hold Off Determination)
• Reliability (Energy Hold Off Determination)

Module Use in Applications (Energy Hold Off Determination)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-280: Energy Hold Off Determination Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Energy Hold Off Determination Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1002 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Energy Hold Off Determination)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Energy Hold Off
Determination modules.
Table 25-281: Energy Hold Off Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
EHO-STATE (State) G, V Contains the state output generated from Set Name: Normal/Energy
the Network mode and Hardware mode Hold Off
inputs based on the Resolution Mode
setting.
Hardware Mode Specifies whether to allow the unit to Normal
operate normally or in Energy Hold Off. Set Name: Normal/Energy
Hold Off
Network Mode Specifies whether to allow the unit to Normal
operate normally or in Energy Hold Off. Set Name: Normal/Energy
Hold Off
Resolution Mode Used when both inputs are connected to Either Can Activate
determine how the two input commands Set Name: Resolution Mode
(network and hardware) should be
resolved into a single output command.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 1003

Primary States (Energy Hold Off Determination)
The state output is generated from the Network mode and Hardware mode inputs
based on the Resolution Mode setting. The following table shows the command
hierarchy used to determine whether the State should be Normal or Energy Hold
Off.
Table 25-282: Energy Hold Off Determination Command Hierarchy
Resolution Network Network Mode Hardware Hardware State
Mode Reliable Reliable Mode
Network Priority True Normal * * Normal
Energy Hold Off * * Energy Hold
Off
False * True Normal Normal
Energy Hold Off Energy Hold
Off
False * Normal
Hardware Priority * * True Normal Normal
Energy Hold Off Energy Hold
Off
True Normal False * Normal
Energy Hold Off False * Energy Hold
Off
False * False * Normal
Either Can True Normal False * Normal
Activate
True Normal Normal
Energy Hold Off Energy Hold
Off
Energy Hold Off * * Energy Hold
Off
False * True Normal Normal
Energy Hold Off Energy Hold
Off
False * Normal

Reliability (Energy Hold Off Determination)

Table 25-283: Energy Hold Off Determination Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Hardware Mode Specifies that when the Hardware Reliability is False the State
output will match the Network Mode if the Network Reliability is
True. If both Hardware Reliability and Network Reliability are
False the output is Normal.
Network Mode Specifies that when the Network Reliability is False the State
output will match the Hardware Mode if the Hardware Reliability is
True. If both Hardware Reliability and Network Reliability are
False the output is Normal.

1004 CCT Help: Modules

Fan Alarm Status

Overview
This module monitors the airflow status and the fan command. If the fan is
commanded on and the air flow status goes to a fault state, the fan alarm output is
set to Alarm. The output remains in the Alarm state until manually reset.
The Fan Alarm module is used by the Unit Ventilator and Heat Pump applications
when the user has requested that the Fan be locked off when a failure has been
detected. When a fan failure is detected, the fan is locked off until a reset is
received.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Alarm Status)
• Attributes (Fan Alarm Status)
• Primary States (Fan Alarm Status)
• Reliability (Fan Alarm Status)

Module Use in Applications (Fan Alarm Status)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-284: Fan Alarm Status Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Applications
Fan Alarm Status Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 1005

Attributes (Fan Alarm Status)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Alarm Status modules.
Table 25-285: Fan Alarm Status Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Fan Alarm G, V Indicates if a fan alarm has been detected.
Fan Mode Contains the current fan command. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Flow Status Displays the current status from the Air Flow False
Status module. Set Name: False/True/Fault
Reset Used to clear the Fan Alarm and allow the fan False
to restart.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Fan Alarm Status)

When the Fan Alarm from the command hierarchy is True the module output is
latched in an Alarm state until reset by the reset input.
Table 25-286: Fan Alarm Status Command Hierarchy
Fan Mode Flow Status Fan Alarm
Off * False
On NOT Fault False
Fault True

Reliability (Fan Alarm Status)

This module uses the input’s last reliable value if the input becomes unreliable.

1006 CCT Help: Modules

Fan Determination (Terminal Units)

Overview
This module generates the on or off state for the control of a fan within a zone
control application. It looks at the heating, cooling, and damper command values
fed back from the output controllers and the occupancy status to determine
whether the fan is required to operate. The heating or cooling command must
exceed the fan on threshold while the damper command must exceed the minimum
damper position to turn the fan on. The module can be configured to operate the
fan continuously during occupied and bypass or cycle based on demand.
This module can be used to provide the on command to single speed fans, three
speed fans, or proportional fans. It can also be set up to continue to operate the fan
for a period of time following the call for heat by setting the Heating Purge
Duration parameter to a positive value.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [Terminal Units])
• Attributes (Fan Determination [Terminal Units])
• Primary States (Fan Determination [Terminal Units])
• Reliability (Fan Determination [Terminal Units])

Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [Terminal Units])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-287: Fan Determination Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Fan Determination Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 1007

Attributes (Fan Determination [Terminal Units])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Determination
modules.
Table 25-288: Fan Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Percent Cmd Contains the value fed back from the 0.0%
cooling output control. It should be set to
0% if no cooling output exists.
Damper Percent Cmd Contains the value fed back from the 0.0%
damper output control and must exceed
the minimum oa position value by 2%
before the fan state output is turned on. It
should be set to 0% if no damper output
exists.
Fan Off Threshold Displays the percent output command 1.0%
required to turn the fan off. This value is
compared to the larger of the Cooling
Percent Cmd and Heating Percent Cmd.
Fan On Threshold Contains the percent output command 5.0%
required to turn the fan on. This value is
compared to the larger of the Cooling
Percent Cmd and Heating Percent Cmd.
FAN-CYCLE Specifies whether the fan cycles during No
(Fan Cycling) occupied periods. If the parameter is set to Set Name: No/Yes
Yes, the fan will only turn on when there is
a call for cooling, heating, or economizer
(damper percent cmd). Otherwise, if set to
No, the fan operates during all occupied
and bypass periods.
FAN-STATE (State) G, V Indicates whether the fan is required to Set Name: Off/On
operate.
Heating Percent Cmd Contains the value fed back from the 0.0%
heating output control. It should be set to
0% if no heating output exists.
HTG-PURGETIME Specifies that when the heating percent 120.0 Seconds
(Heating Purge command drops below the fan off
Duration) threshold value, the fan continues to
operate for this period of time
Minimum OA Position Used to prevent the fan from starting 0.0%
unless the Damper Percent Cmd is above
its minimum position by 2%.
Occupancy Contains input from the Occupancy Mode Unoccupied
Determination module relaying the Set Name: Occ Effective
effective occupancy mode of the
application.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1008 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Fan Determination [Terminal Units])
The state output is set to On if the heating percent command or cooling percent
command exceed the fan on threshold, the damper percent command exceeds the
minimum oa position by two percent, or fan cycling is False and the occupancy is
Occupied or Bypass.
The state output is set to Off if the heating percent command is less than the fan off
threshold and the heating purge duration has expired, the cooling percent
command is less than the fan off threshold, the damper percent command drops
below the min oa position, and the fan cycling is False and the occupancy is
Unoccupied or Standby.

Reliability (Fan Determination [Terminal Units])

This module uses the input’s last reliable value if the input becomes unreliable.

State Generators 1009

Occupancy Mode Determination

Overview
Most standard applications use the Occupancy Mode Determination module which
can make use of up to four different occupancy inputs. These inputs (Occupancy
Override, Temporary Occupancy, Occupancy Schedule, and Occupancy Sensor)
from highest to lowest priority are used to determine the effective occupancy used
by other modules throughout the application.
The following example illustrates the common use of the various inputs:
A particular system is responsible for maintaining temperature control of a large
conference room. The output of this module, Effective Occupancy, is used by
other modules in determining the effective setpoint. You can use Occupancy
Override to perform manual control of the Occupancy Mode. The building
schedule dictates the Occupancy Schedule input for daily Occupied/Unoccupied
operation. The room has an Occupancy Sensor to allow the system to use the
Standby heating and cooling setpoints and lower outdoor air requirements if the
room is not being used during scheduled Occupied hours. Finally, the room has a
Temporary Occupancy push-button on the local zone temperature sensor to allow
the occupants to activate Occupied temperature control after normal business
hours.
See the Primary States (Occupancy Mode Determination) section for a detailed
description of the interaction between these inputs in determining the effective
occupancy.
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupancy Mode Determination)
• Attributes (Occupancy Mode Determination)
• Primary States (Occupancy Mode Determination)
• Reliability (Occupancy Mode Determination)

1010 CCT Help: Modules

Module Use in Applications (Occupancy Mode Determination)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names the following table.
Table 25-289: Occupancy Mode Determination Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Occupancy Mode Determination AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Occupancy Mode Determination)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupancy Mode
Determination modules.
Table 25-290: Occupancy Mode Determination Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
EFF-OCC (Effective G, V The resultant Occupancy Mode of the control Set Name: Occ Effective
Occupancy) system as determined based on the input
values.
OCCMODE- V Displays the length of time that the Bypass 3600 Seconds
BYPASSTIME (Bypass mode will remain active, once activated.
Time)
Occupancy Override SC Contains the highest priority in controlling the Not Set
effective occupancy output. It typically is Set Name: Occ Override
controlled by the user directly commanding
the input.
Occupancy Schedule SC Contains the third highest priority in Not Set
controlling the effective occupancy output. It Set Name: Occ Schedule
typically is controlled by a schedule in the
supervisory system.
Occupancy Sensor SC Indicates when someone is in the space or Not Set
whether the space should be considered Set Name: Occ Sensor
occupied.

State Generators 1011

 Table 25-290: Occupancy Mode Determination Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Temporary Occupancy SC Represents a local momentary button that Inactive
allows occupants to indicate their presence. Set Name: Inactive/Active

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Occupancy Mode Determination)

The Effective Occupancy is determined based on four inputs: Occupancy
Schedule, Occupancy Sensor, Temporary Occupancy, and Occupancy Override.
The Occupancy Override has the highest priority in the Decision Table. If the
Occupancy Override is Occupied, Unoccupied, or Standby, the Effective
Occupancy is set to that value. The Occupancy Override can also be set to Bypass
or Not Set. When the Occupancy Override is set to Bypass, it does not directly set
the Effective Occupancy, but may trigger the Bypass Timer as described below.
The Bypass Timer has the second highest priority in the Decision Table, but is
allowed to operate only if the Occupancy Schedule is not equal to Occupied (that
is, it is equal to Standby, Unoccupied, or Not Set). The Bypass Timer is reset if the
Occupancy Schedule becomes equal to Occupied and is prevented from restarting
as long as the Occupancy Schedule remains equal to Occupied. The Bypass Timer
also is reset if the Occupancy Override is set to a value other than Bypass or Not
Set.
When the Occupancy Schedule is not equal to Occupied, if either the Occupancy
Override is Bypass or if the Occupancy Override is Not Set and the Temporary
Occupancy input is Active, the Bypass Timer is started for the Bypass Time. When
active, the timer restarts when the Occupancy Override is Not Set and the
Temporary Occupancy input changes from Inactive to Active or when the
Occupancy Override changes from Not Set to Bypass. The Bypass Timer is
allowed to continue timing if the Occupancy Override is set to Not Set.
The Bypass Time is user configurable. If the Bypass Timer is active and the
Bypass Time is changed, the Bypass Timer is restarted for the new Bypass Time.
The Occupancy Schedule has the third highest priority in the Decision Table. If the
Occupancy Schedule is Unoccupied or Standby, then the Effective Occupancy is
set to that value. If the Occupancy Schedule is Occupied but the Occupancy Sensor
indicates no one is present (that is, value is Unoccupied), then the Effective
Occupancy is set to Standby to conserve energy. Otherwise, the Effective
Occupancy is set to Occupied.
The Occupancy Sensor has the lowest priority in the Decision Table. If the
Occupancy Schedule is Not Set, the Occupancy Sensor directly sets the Effective
Occupancy. Finally, if all of the inputs are Not Set and the Bypass Timer is False,
then the effective Occupancy Mode is set to the Default Occupancy property
(initially equal to occupied).

1012 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 25-291: Occupancy Mode Determination Decision Command
Hierarchy
Occupancy Bypass Occupancy Occupancy Effective Occupancy
Override Timer Schedule Sensor
Occupied * * * Occupied
Unoccupied * * * Unoccupied
Standby * * * Standby
Bypass or Not True Occupied 2 * Occupied2
Set1
NOT * Bypass
Occupied3
False Occupied Occupied Occupied
Not Set1 Occupied
Unoccupied Standby
Unoccupied * Unoccupied
Standby * Standby
Not Set1 Occupied Occupied
Unoccupied Unoccupied
Not Set1 Default Occupancy4

1. Input is set to be Not Set by default when no value has been written to it following a reset. This would typically
mean that the input does not have any value assigned and it is represented by this value Not Set.
2. When the Occupancy Schedule is set to Occupied, the Bypass Timer is reset. For that reason, this row in the table
is never active (the output of the Bypass Timer is reset to False before this table is evaluated following the
Occupancy Schedule transition to Occupied). It is shown to avoid the potential confusion that could be caused if
one of the combinations of the inputs was not handled in the Decision Table logic.
3. The use of NOT in the table indicates that any other value than the one specified following the NOT (including Not
Set) is received for that input.
4. Default Occupancy is initially set to Occupied but the user can change the value.

Reliability (Occupancy Mode Determination)

This module uses the input’s last reliable value if the input becomes unreliable.

State Generators 1013

Occupancy Mode Determination (MZ)

Overview
This module extends the base Occupancy Mode Determination module with
support for a Temporary Occupancy input for up to eight zones (with the zone
number designated here by X, representing zones 1-8). You can view and modify
this module using CCT software; however, you cannot change the key behavior
performed by the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ])
• Attributes (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ])
• Primary States (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ])
• Reliability (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ])

Module Use in Applications (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-292: Occupancy Mode Determination (MZ) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Occupancy Mode Determination (MZ) AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1014 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Occupancy Mode
Determination (MZ) modules:
Table 25-293: Occupancy Mode Determination (MZ) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
EFF-OCC (Effective G, V Displays the resultant Occupancy Mode Set Name: Occ Effective
Occupancy) based on the input values.
OCCMODE- Displays the length of time that the Bypass 3600 Seconds
BYPASSTIME (Bypass mode will remain active once activated.
Time)
Occupancy Override Contains the highest priority in controlling Not Set
the effective occupancy output. It typically Set Name: Occ Override
is controlled by the user directly
commanding the input.
Occupancy Schedule Contains the third highest priority in Not Set
controlling the effective occupancy output. Set Name: Occ Schedule
The occupancy schedule typically is
controlled by a schedule in the supervisory
system.
Occupancy Sensor Indicates when someone is in the space or Not Set
whether the space should be considered Set Name: Occ Sensor
occupied.
Zone X Temp Occ Allows monitoring of up to eight zones’ Inactive
local momentary buttons using the Zone X Set Name: Inactive/Active
Temp Occ inputs (X=1-8) to allow
occupants to indicate their presence.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ])

The module behaves in the same manner as the base Occupancy Mode
Determination module. The eight Zone X Temp Occ inputs are assumed to be
momentary (only active for a few seconds at a time and up to a minute for remote
sensors). If an input remains active for long periods of time, the module may not be
able to detect other zones requesting temporary occupancy.

Reliability (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ])

Table 25-294: Occupancy Mode Determination (MZ) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Zone X Temp Occ Input returned to its default value (Inactive)

State Generators 1015

System Mode Determination

Overview
Terminal Unit applications have a System Mode input that allows you to force the
unit into a mode of operation. The possible modes are Cool Only, Heat Only, Fan
Only, Water Flush, Purge, and Auto. This module splits out the Water Flush mode
to a separate output to allow it to be separately connected to State Selection.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (System Mode Determination)
• Attributes (System Mode Determination)
• Primary States (System Mode Determination)

Module Use in Applications (System Mode Determination)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-295: System Mode Determination Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
System Mode Determination Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1016 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (System Mode Determination)
The following table describes the attributes used by the System Mode
Determination modules:
Table 25-296: System Mode Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Eff Mode G, V Indicates the effective System Set Name: Effective System
mode after splitting off the Water Mode
Flush output.
System Mode Indicates the current System Auto
Mode. Set Name: System Mode
Water Flush V Indicates whether Water Flush is Boolean
requested.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning
Modes Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (System Mode Determination)

• Cool Only: The unit may operate but cannot use heating device(s).
• Heat Only: The unit may operate but cannot use cooling device(s).
• Fan Only: The unit may operate but cannot use heating or cooling device(s).
• Purge: The unit should start and operate with maximum outdoor air but no
heating or cooling device(s).
• Auto: There are no system mode overrides.

State Generators 1017

Unit Enable Determination

Overview
This module generates a unit enable command. This command is generated from a
combination of a network and hardware mode and the parameters for controlling
the power fail restart.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Unit Enable Determination)
• Attributes (Unit Enable Determination)
• Primary States (Unit Enable Determination)
• Reliability (Unit Enable Determination)

Module Use in Applications (Unit Enable Determination)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-297: Unit Enable Determination Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Unit Enable Determination All Air Handling Unit Applications
Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1018 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Unit Enable Determination)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Unit Enable Determination
modules.
Table 25-298: Unit Enable Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Hardware Mode Specifies whether to allow the unit to Enable
operate normally or to shutdown. Set Name: Shutdown/Enable
Network Mode Specifies whether to allow the unit to Enable
operate normally or to shutdown. Set Name: Shutdown/Enable
PFRESTART-EN Specifies that, when this value is set to False
(Power Fail Restart true, a timer holds the output at shutdown
Enable) until the Power Fail Restart Time elapses.
PFRESTART-TIME Specifies that, when the power fail restart 60.0 Seconds
(Power Fail Restart logic is enabled, the start is delayed by the
Time) time specified in this value.
Resolution Mode Used when both inputs are connected to Either Can Shutdown
determine how the two input commands Set Name: Resolution
(network and hardware) should be Mode2
resolved into a single output command.
UNITEN-STATE (State) G, V Displays the current desired state for the Set Name: Shutdown/Enable
unit.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 1019

Primary States (Unit Enable Determination)
The state output is generated from the network mode and hardware mode inputs
based on the resolution mode setting and the power fail restart timer. The
following table shows the command hierarchy used to determine whether the state
should be Enable or Shutdown. If the timer input is false the state output is
shutdown. The timer input is False until the power fail restart time expires. When
both hardware and network mode inputs are unreliable the state output remains
Enable. When one of the two inputs is reliable, its mode determines the state.
When both inputs are reliable, the resolution mode determines which has priority.
The state output matches the state of the mode having priority. For example, when
hardware mode is reliable and the resolution mode is hardware priority, the state
output is set to Enable when hardware mode is Enable and Shutdown when
hardware mode is Shutdown.
Table 25-299: Unit Enable Determination Command Hierarchy
Timer Resolution Network Network Hardware Hardware State
Mode Mode Reliable Mode Reliable
False * * * * * Shutdown
True * * False * False Enable
Network Priority Enable True * * Enable
Shutdown True * * Shutdown
* False Enable True Enable
Shutdown True Shutdown
Hardware Priority * * Enable True Enable
Shutdown True Shutdown
Enable True * False Enable
Shutdown True * False Shutdown
Either Can Enable True * False Enable
Shutdown
Shutdown True Shutdown
Enable True Enable
Shutdown True * * Shutdown
* False Enable True Enable
Shutdown True Shutdown

Reliability (Unit Enable Determination)

Table 25-300: Unit Enable Determination Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Hardware Mode Specifies that when the Hardware Reliability is False, the State output matches
the Network Mode if the Network Reliability is True. If both Hardware Reliability
and Network Reliability are False, the output is Enable.
Network Mode Specifies that when the Network Reliability is False, the State output matches
the Hardware Mode if the Hardware Reliability is True. If both Hardware
Reliability and Network Reliability are False, the output is Enable.

1020 CCT Help: Modules

Zone Low Limit Determination

Overview
This module specifies whether a low limit condition exits. This condition is
determined based on the zone temperature, the low limit setpoint, and the low limit
differential. When the zone temperature drops below the low limit setpoint the
module outputs a low limit state. When the zone temperature is unreliable, the last
reliable value is used in the comparison.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Zone Low Limit Determination)
• Attributes (Zone Low Limit Determination)
• Primary States (Zone Low Limit Determination)
• Reliability (Zone Low Limit Determination)

Module Use in Applications (Zone Low Limit Determination)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-301: Zone Low Limit Determination Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Zone Low Limit Determination Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 1021

Attributes (Zone Low Limit Determination)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Zone Low Limit
Determination modules.
Table 25-302: Zone Low Limit Determination Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
ZNLL-DIFF (Low Limit Specifies that once a low limit state is reached, 2.0 Deg C, 4.0 Deg F
Diff) the zone temperature must increase by this
value above the setpoint to return to a normal
state.
ZNLL-SP (Low Limit Contains the value the zone temperature must 16.0 Deg C, 61.0 Deg F
Setpoint) go below for it to output a low limit state.
ZNLL-STATE (State) G, V Indicates whether a low limit condition exists Set Name: Normal/Low Limit
within the zone.
Zone Temperature Displays the current temperature of the zone 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
used to determine if a low limit condition exists.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Zone Low Limit Determination)

The state output is Low Limit when the zone temperature drops below the low
limit setpoint. It remains in the Low Limit state until the zone temperature
increases above the low limit setpoint plus the differential. It then switches to the
Normal state.

Reliability (Zone Low Limit Determination)

This module uses the input’s last reliable value if the input becomes unreliable.

1022 CCT Help: Modules

Unoccupied Sequencing
Overview
The Unoccupied Sequencing subgroup of modules determines the action of a unit
when the zone temperature drops below the Unoccupied Heating Setpoint or rises
above the Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint. The general sequence of operation is to
cycle the unit and its heating or cooling devices on and off during unoccupied to
keep the controlled temperature within the Unoccupied Heating and Cooling
Setpoints. When the temperature goes outside the limits set by the Unoccupied
Setpoints, the unit is typically started and the appropriate device (heating or
cooling) operates at its limited max value. When the temperature returns within the
limits, the unit continues to operate for a period of time and then turns off.
In some cases, the heating device is opened if the outdoor air temperature is low
during the unoccupied mode.
The Unoccupied Sequencing subgroup contains the following modules:
• Unoccupied Sequencing (Common)
• Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU)
• Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air ZN-T)
• Unoccupied Sequencing (MZ)
• Unoccupied Sequencing (UV)
• Unoccupied Sequencing (VAV)

State Generators 1023

Unoccupied Sequencing (Common)

Overview
This module generates an Unocc Status. When not in Unoccupied, the Unocc
Status is Unocc Cntrl Not Req’d which allows other sequencers to control the
devices. When unoccupied, the zone temperature is monitored to determine when
the temperature exceeds the band specified by the two unoccupied temperature
setpoints. When this occurs, the Unocc Status is set to the appropriate heating or
cooling state. The module remains in this state until the appropriate setpoint has
been satisfied for the Satisfied Timer Duration. After that period of time the status
is set to Satisfied.
When unoccupied, if the temperature is unreliable, the Unocc Status is set to
Temperature Unreliable.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common])
• Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common])
• Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common])
• Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common])

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-303: Unoccupied Sequencing (Common) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Unocc Status Determination Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1024 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Unoccupied Sequencing
modules.
Table 25-304: Unoccupied Sequencing (Common) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Occupancy Displays the occupancy as determined by Occupied
Occupancy Mode Determination. Set Name: Occ Effective
State V Shows the current state of the hybrid Set Name: COM Unocc
activity. Status State
Unocc Cooling Contains the desired unoccupied cooling 28.0 Deg C, 82.0 Deg F
Setpoint temperature setpoint.
Unocc Heating Displays the desired unoccupied heating 16.0 Deg C, 61.0 Deg F
Setpoint temperature setpoint.
UNOCC-SATTIME Contains the time that the Zone 300 Seconds
(Satisfied Timer Temperature must be within the limits
Duration) before switching to Satisfied.
UNOCC-STATE V, G Contains the current unoccupied status. Set Name: Unocc Status
(Unocc Status)
Zone Temperature Displays the current Zone Temperature. 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common])

• Unocc Cooling: The unit operates in a cooling mode. Typically the cooling
device operates at its limited max position until the temperature drops below
the unoccupied cooling setpoint for a period of time. The system then
transitions to Satisfied. (Because Heat Pumps are staged devices, the cooling
device operates in the control mode.)
• Unocc Heating: The unit operates in a heating mode. Typically the heating
device operates at its limited max position until the temperature rises above the
unoccupied heating setpoint for a period of time. The system then transitions to
Satisfied. (Because Heat Pumps are staged devices, the heating device operates
in the control mode.)
• Unocc Cntrl Not Req’d: The unit is not in an unoccupied mode or warmup or
cooldown are active.
• Satisfied: The temperature has returned within the limits defined by the
unoccupied temperature setpoints.
• Temperature Unreliable: The monitored temperature is unreliable.

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common])

Table 25-305: Unoccupied Sequencing (Common) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Zone Temperature State and Unocc Status go to Temperature Unreliable.

State Generators 1025

Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU)

Overview
This module generates an Unoccupied Status for AHUs that perform DA-T
Control (both constant DA-T and single zone Cascaded DA-T). When not
Unoccupied, the Status is Unocc Cntrl Not Req'd.
When unoccupied, the zone temperature is monitored to determine when the
temperature exceeds the band specified by the two unoccupied temperature
setpoints. When this occurs, the Unoccupied status is set appropriately (Unocc
Cooling or Unocc Heating) until the zone temperature is satisfied for the length of
time specified by the satisfied timer duration. After that period of time, the status is
set to Satisfied.
If the temperature is unreliable when unoccupied, the Unoccupied Status is set to
Unreliable. When commanded to Vent, the unit runs with maximum outdoor air.
When units that serve multiple zones (that is, Cascaded Zone Control = False) are
commanded to Warmup or Cooldown, the units run continuously to provide warm
or cool air. In both cases, the sequencer switches to Not Unoccupied to allow the
main AHU sequencer to control the heating and cooling devices.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU])
• Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU])
• Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU])

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-306: Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
DA-T Unocc Status Determination AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1026 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Unoccupied Sequencing
(AHU) modules:
Table 25-307: Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Application Mode Indicates the current Application Mode. Auto
Set Name: AHU Effective
App Mode
Cascaded Zone Indicates whether the module is used to control True
Control a single zone using cascaded DA-T reset
based on zone or return air is considered zone
control. For AHU applications with constant
discharge temperature control (or reset by OA-
T), this value should be false.
Occupancy Indicates the current Occupancy mode as Occupied
determined by Occupancy Mode Set Name: Occ Effective
Determination.
Off During Unoccupied Selects the unoccupancy scheme. False
State V Indicates the current state of the hybrid activity. Set Name: COM Unocc
Status State
Unocc Cooling Indicates the desired unoccupied cooling 28.0 Deg C, 82.0 Deg F
Setpoint temperature setpoint.
Unocc Heating Indicates the desired unoccupied heating 16.0 Deg C, 61.0 Deg F
Setpoint temperature setpoint.
UNOCC-SATTIME Indicates the time that the Zone Temperature 300 seconds
(Satisfied Timer must be within the limits before switching to
Duration) Satisfied.
UNOCC-STATE G, V Indicates the current Unoccupied Status. Set Name: Unocc Status
(Unocc Status)
WarmupCooldown Indicates the current OST status. Normal
Set Name: OST Warmup
Cooldown
Zone Temperature Indicates the current Zone Temperature. 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 1027

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU])
The module is implemented using a Hybrid Activity with possible states of Not
Unoccupied, Unocc Htg/Clg Check, and Unoccupied Off. When the State is Not
Unoccupied, the Unocc Status is set to Unocc Cntrl Not Req’d and when the State
is Unoccupied Off, the State is set to Satisfied. When the State is Unocc Htg/Clg
Check, the Zone Temperature input is monitored to determine whether unoccupied
operation is required.
• Unocc Cooling: Unoccupied sequencing is active and the zone requires
cooling.
• Unocc Heating: Unoccupied sequencing is active and the zone requires
heating.
• Unocc Cntrl Not Req'd: Unit does not require unoccupied sequencing.
• Satisfied: Unoccupied sequencing is active but zones are all satisfied.
• Temperature Unreliable: Unoccupied sequencing is active but the zone
temperature is not reliable.
Table 25-308: Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU) Command Hierarchy
Occupancy Application Temp Off During Zone Warmup State
Mode Reliable Unocc Control Cooldown
NOT * * * * * Not Unoccupied
(Unoccupied)
Unoccupied Vent * * * * Not Unoccupied
NOT (Vent) * * FALSE Warmup Not Unoccupied
Cooldown Not Unoccupied
TRUE * Normal Unoccupied Off
Coast Unoccupied Off
TRUE FALSE * Normal Unocc Htg/Clg Check
Coast Unocc Htg/Clg Check
FALSE FALSE * Normal Temperature Unreliable
Coast Temperature Unreliable
TRUE * TRUE Warmup Unocc Htg/Clg Check
Cooldown Unocc Htg/Clg Check
FALSE * TRUE Warmup Temperature Unreliable
Cooldown Temperature Unreliable

1028 CCT Help: Modules

Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air ZN-T)

Overview
This module generates an Unocc Status for the AHU zone temperature control
applications. When not in Unoccupied, the Unocc Status is Unocc Cntrl Not
Req’d which allows other sequencers to control the devices. When unoccupied,
the zone temperature is monitored to determine when the temperature exceeds the
band specified by the two unoccupied temperature setpoints. When this occurs, the
Unocc Status is set to the appropriate heating or cooling state. The module remains
in this state until the appropriate setpoint has been satisfied for the Satisfied Timer
Duration. After that period of time the status is set to Satisfied.
When unoccupied, if the temperature is unreliable, the Unocc Status is set to
Temperature Unreliable.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-
T])
• Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T])
• Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T])
• Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T])

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-309: Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air ZN-T) Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Zone Unoccupied Sequencing AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 1029

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Zone Unoccupied
Sequencing modules.
Table 25-310: Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air ZN-T) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Setpoint Contains the desired unoccupied cooling 28.0 Deg C, 82.0 Deg F
temperature setpoint.
Damper Control Status Indicates to this module that it can affect Overridden
the damper output. Set Name: Control Status
Detailed State V Contains the detailed unocc state giving Set Name: AHU Zone Unocc
devices requested. Detailed
Fan Ready Indicates when the Start Stop sequencer False
has finished its delay for the fans to start.
This wait time allows time for the fans to
start and the temperatures to stabilize
before starting control.
Free Cooling Available Indicates when the economizer is False
available.
Heating Setpoint Contains the desired unoccupied heating 16.0 Deg C, 61.0 Deg F
temperature setpoint.
Occupancy Contains the current Occupancy mode as Occupied
determined by Occupancy Mode Set Name: Occ Effective
Determination.
Off During Unoccupied Selects the unoccupied scheme. True False
provides Off during Unoccupied and only
enters unocc htg/clg states when
WarmupCooldown is Warmup or
Cooldown.
Preheat Control Status Indicates to this module that it can affect Overridden
the preheat output. Set Name: Control Status
State V Contains the current state of the hybrid Set Name: Unoccupied
activity. Status States
UNOCC-SATTIME Contains the time that the Zone 300 Seconds
(Satisfied Timer Temperature must be within the limits
Duration) before switching to Satisfied.
UNOCC-STATE V, G Displays the current unoccupied status. Set Name: AHU Zone Unocc
(Unocc Status) Status
WarmupCooldown Displays the current WarmupCooldown Normal
State. Set Name: OST Warmup
Cooldown
Zone Temperature Displays the current Zone Temperature. 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1030 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T])
• Satisfied: The temperature has returned within the limits defined by the
unoccupied temperature setpoints.
• Econ: The unit operates in a cooling mode with the economizer damper fully
open until the temperature drops below the unoccupied cooling setpoint. If the
temperature remains above the unoccupied cooling setpoint for a period of
time, the system transitions to Econ+Mech.
• Mech: The unit operates in a cooling mode with the economizer damper fully
closed. Typically the cooling device operates at its limited max position until
the temperature drops below the unoccupied cooling setpoint for a period of
time. The system then transitions to Satisfied. If the Free Cooling Available
input becomes True, the system transitions to Econ+Mech.
• Econ+Mech: The unit operates in a cooling mode with the economizer damper
fully open. Typically the cooling device operates at its limited max position
until the temperature drops below the unoccupied cooling setpoint for a period
of time. The system then transitions to Satisfied. If the Free Cooling Available
input becomes False, the system transitions to Mech.
• Preheat: The unit operates in a heating mode. Typically the preheat device
operates at its limited max position until the temperature rises above the
unoccupied heating setpoint for a period of time. The system then transitions to
Satisfied. If the temperature remains below the unoccupied heating setpoint for
a period of time the system transitions to Preheat+Reheat.
• Preheat+Reheat: The unit operates in a heating mode. Typically the preheat
and reheat devices operates at their limited max positions until the temperature
rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint for a period of time. The system
then transitions to Satisfied.
• Idle: This state is active when the supply fan is starting and the temperature is
greater than the unoccupied cooling setpoint. Once the Fan Ready input goes
true, one of the cooling states become active.
• Unocc Cntrl Not Req’d: The unit is not in an unoccupied mode or warmup or
cooldown are active.
• Temperature Unreliable: The monitored temperature is unreliable.

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T])

Table 25-311: Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air ZN-T) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Zone Temperature State and Unocc Status go to Temperature Unreliable.

State Generators 1031

Unoccupied Sequencing (MZ)

Overview
This module is used as part of a Multizone AHU that provides air to up to eight
zones. The unit may cycle during unoccupied based on the minimum or maximum
zone temperature. When the temperatures exceed the band specified by the two
unoccupied temperature setpoints, the Unocc status is set appropriately (Unocc
Cooling, Unocc Heating, or Unocc Htg Clg) until all zone temperatures are
satisfied for the length of time specified by the Satisfied Timer Duration.
If some zones are calling for heating while others are calling for cooling, then the
unit runs without any device restrictions. Zones that are unreliable are ignored
(input element Failsoft = True and the Default Value is between unoccupied
setpoints).
The Warmup or Cooldown command allows this type of unit to run continuously
to provide warm or cool air. Similarly, the Vent command allows the unit to run
with maximum outdoor air. In both cases, the sequencer switches to Not
Unoccupied to allow the main AHU sequencer to control the heating and cooling
devices.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ])
• Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ])
• Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ])
• Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ])

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-312: Unoccupied Sequencing (MZ) Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Unocc Status Determination (MZ) AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1032 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Unoccupied Sequencing
(MZ) modules:
Table 25-313: Unoccupied Sequencing (MZ) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Application Mode Displays the current Application Mode. Auto
Set Name: AHU Effective
App Mode
Occupancy Displays the current Occupancy Mode. Occupied
Set Name: Occ Effective
Off During Unoccupied Selects the unoccupancy scheme. False
State V Displays the current state of the Hybrid Set Name: MZ Unocc Status
Activity. State
Unocc Cooling Displays the desired unoccupied cooling 28 Deg C, 82 Deg F
Setpoint temperature setpoint.
Unocc Heating Displays the desired unoccupied heating 16 Deg C, 61 Deg F
Setpoint temperature setpoint.
UNOCC-SATTIME Displays the time that the Zone 300 Seconds
(Satisfied Timer Temperature must be within the limits
Duration) before switching to Satisfied.
UNOCC-STATE G, V Displays the current Unoccupied Status. Set Name: MZ Unocc Status
(Unocc Status)
WarmupCooldown Displays the current OST status. Normal
Set Name: OST Warmup
Cooldown
Zone X Temperature Displays the current temperature of Zone 22 Deg C, 72 Deg F
X (X=1-8).

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 1033

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ])
This module is implemented using a Hybrid Activity with possible states of Not
Unoccupied, Unocc Htg/Clg Check, and Unoccupied Off. When the State is Not
Unoccupied, the Unocc Status is set to Unocc Cntrl Not Req’d. When the State is
Unoccupied Off, the State is set to Satisfied. When the State is Unocc Htg/Clg
Check, the Zone Temperature inputs are monitored to determine whether
unoccupied operation is required.
• Unocc Cntrl Not Req'd: Unit does not require unoccupied sequencing.
• Satisfied: Unoccupied sequencing is active, but zones are all satisfied.
• Unocc Htg Clg: Unoccupied sequencing is active and zones require a mix of
heating and cooling.
• Unocc Heating: Unoccupied sequencing is active and zone(s) require heating
(only).
• Unocc Cooling: Unoccupied sequencing is active and zone(s) require cooling
(only).
Table 25-314: Zone Damper Command Hierarchy
Occupancy Application WarmupCooldown Off During Unocc State
Mode
NOT (Unoccupied) * * * Not Unoccupied
Unoccupied Vent * * Not Unoccupied
NOT (Vent) Warmup * Not Unoccupied
Cooldown * Not Unoccupied
Normal FALSE Unocc Htg/Clg
Check
Coast FALSE Unocc Htg/Clg
Check
Normal TRUE Unoccupied Off
Coast TRUE Unoccupied Off

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ])

Table 25-315: Unoccupied Sequencing (MZ) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Zone X Temperature Input returned to its default value (22 Deg C, 72 Deg F)

1034 CCT Help: Modules

Unoccupied Sequencing (UV)

Overview
This module generates an Unocc Status for Unit Ventilators. When not in
Unoccupied, the Unocc Status is Unocc Cntrl Not Req’d which allows other
sequencers to control the devices. When unoccupied, the zone temperature is
monitored to determine when the temperature exceeds the band specified by the
two unoccupied temperature setpoints. When this occurs, the Unocc Status is set to
the appropriate heating or cooling state. The module remains in this state until the
appropriate setpoint has been satisfied for the Satisfied Timer Duration. After that
period of time the status is set to Satisfied.
When unoccupied, if the temperature is unreliable, the Unoccupied Status is set to
Temperature Unreliable.
If the user selects the Monitor OA During Unoccupied option, the outdoor air
temperature also is monitored and if the OA-T is below the Low OA
Temperature Setpoint, the heating valve is opened to a user-defined position.
This operation does not take precedence over unocc heating, unocc cooling,
warmup, or cooldown operation.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV])
• Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV])
• Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV])
• Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV])

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-316: Unoccupied Sequencing (UV) Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Unocc Status Determination with OAT Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

State Generators 1035

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Unocc Status
Determination with OAT module.
Table 25-317: Unoccupied Sequencing (UV) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Low OA Temperature Contains the differential for the Low OA 0.5 Deg C, 1.0 Deg F
Diff Temperature mode. Once the unocc status has
been set to Low OAT, the outdoor air
temperature must rise above the Low OA
Temperature Setpoint by this amount to switch
out of this mode.
Monitor OA During Set to True if operation of the heating valve is False
Unoccupied required when outdoor air temperature is cold
during unoccupied.
OALL-SP (Low OA Specifies that when the outdoor air temperature 0.0 Deg C, 32.0 Deg F
Temperature Setpoint) drops below this, and monitor OA during
unoccupied is true, the Unocc Status is set to
LOW OAT.
Occupancy Contains the current Occupancy mode as Occupied
determined by Occupancy Mode Set Name: Occ Effective
Determination.
Outdoor Air Used to decide if the heating valve should be 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Temperature opened based on low outdoor air temperature.
Satisfied Timer Displays the length of time that the Zone 300 Seconds
Duration Temperature must be within the limits before
switching to Satisfied.
State V Displays the current state of the hybrid activity. Set Name: COM Unocc
Status State
Unocc Cooling Contains the desired unoccupied cooling 28.0 Deg C, 82.0 Deg F
Setpoint temperature setpoint.
Unocc Heating Displays the desired unoccupied heating 16.0 Deg C, 61.0 Deg F
Setpoint temperature setpoint.
Unocc Status V, G Contains the current unoccupied status. Set Name: UV Unocc Status
WarmupCooldown Displays the current WarmupCooldown State. Normal
Set Name: OST Warmup
Cooldown
Zone Temperature Displays the current Zone Temperature. 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1036 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV])
• Unocc Cooling: The unit operates in a cooling mode. Typically the cooling
device operates at its limited max position with the outdoor air damper closed
until the temperature drops below the unoccupied cooling setpoint for a period
of time. The system then transitions to Satisfied.
• Unocc Heating: The unit operates in a heating mode. Typically the heating
device operates at its limited max position with the outdoor air damper closed
until the temperature rises above the unoccupied heating setpoint for a period
of time. The system then transitions to Satisfied.
• Unocc Cntrl Not Req’d: The unit is in this mode if it is not in an unoccupied
mode or warmup or cooldown are active.
• Satisfied: The temperature has returned within the limits defined by the
unoccupied temperature setpoints.
• Temperature Unreliable: The monitored temperature is unreliable.
• Low OA-T: The system enters this mode if Monitor OA During Unoccupied is
TRUE, the outdoor air temperature is reliable and below the Low OA
Temperature Setpoint and the zone temperature is within the band specified by
the two unoccupied temperature setpoints. If the zone temperature drops below
the unoccupied heating setpoint and cooldown mode is not active, the system
transitions to Unocc Heating. If the zone temperature rises above the
unoccupied cooling setpoint and warmup mode is not active, the system
transitions to Unocc Cooling.

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV])

Table 25-318: Unoccupied Sequencing (UV) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Zone Temperature State and Unocc Status go to Temperature Unreliable.

State Generators 1037

Unoccupied Sequencing (VAV)

Overview
This module generates an Unocc Status for the VAV applications. When not in
Unoccupied, the Unocc Status is Unocc Cntrl Not Req’d which allows other
sequencers to control the devices. When unoccupied and Warmup or Cooldown
are active, the Unocc Status is Unocc Cntrl Not Req’d. When unoccupied and
Warmup and Cooldown are not active, the zone temperature is monitored to
determine when the temperature exceeds the band specified by the two unoccupied
temperature setpoints. When this occurs, the Unocc Status is set to the appropriate
heating or cooling state. The module remains in this state until the appropriate
setpoint has been satisfied for the Satisfied Timer Duration. After that period of
time the status is set to Satisfied.
When unoccupied, if the temperature is unreliable, the Unoccupied Status is set to
Temperature Unreliable.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV])
• Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV])
• Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV])
• Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV])

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-319: Unoccupied Sequencing (VAV) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
VAV Unocc Status Determination VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1038 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV])
The following table describes the attributes used by the VAV Unocc Status
Determination modules.
Table 25-320: Unoccupied Sequencing (VAV) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Box Heating Control Used to indicate to this module that it can affect Overridden
Status the box heating output. Set Name: Control Status
Cooling Setpoint Displays the desired unoccupied cooling 28.0 Deg C, 82.0 Deg F
temperature setpoint.
Detailed State V Contains the detailed unocc state giving Set Name: VAV Unocc
devices requested. Detailed
Heating Priority Indicates which heating to use first when both Supplemental
box and supplemental heating exist. Set Name: VAV Heating
Priority
Heating Setpoint Displays the desired unoccupied heating 16.0 Deg C, 61.0 Deg F
temperature setpoint.
Occupancy Contains the current Occupancy mode as Occupied
determined by Occupancy Mode Set Name: Occ Effective
Determination.
State V Displays the current state of the hybrid activity. Set Name: Unoccupied
Status States
Supp Heating Control Used to indicate to this module that it can affect Overridden
Status the supplemental heating output. Set Name: Control Status
UNOCC-SATTIME Displays the time that the Zone Temperature 300 Seconds
(Satisfied Timer must be within the limits before switching to
Duration) Satisfied.
UNOCC-STATE V, G Contains the current unoccupied status. Set Name: VAV Unocc
(Unocc Status) Status
WarmupCooldown Displays the current WarmupCooldown State. Normal
Set Name: OST Warmup
Cooldown
Zone Temperature Displays the current Zone Temperature. 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 1039

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV])
• Satisfied: The temperature has returned within the limits defined by the
unoccupied temperature setpoints.
• Prmy Clg: The unit operates in a cooling mode with the VAV flow setpoint set
to Cooling Max Flow. When the temperature drops below the unoccupied
cooling setpoint for a period of time the system transitions to Satisfied.
• Supp Htg: The unit operates in a heating mode with the supplemental heating
device at limited max. When the temperature rises above the unoccupied
heating setpoint for a period of time the system transitions to Satisfied. If the
temperature remains below the unoccupied heating setpoint and box heating is
available, the system transitions to Box Htg + Supp Htg.
• Box Htg: The unit operates in a heating mode with the box heating device at
limited max. When the temperature rises above the unoccupied heating
setpoint for a period of time the system transitions to Satisfied. If the
temperature remains below the unoccupied heating setpoint and supplemental
heating is available, the system transitions to Box Htg + Supp Htg.
• Box Htg + Supp Htg: The unit operates in a heating mode. Typically the
heating device operates at its limited max position until the temperature rises
above the unoccupied heating setpoint for a period of time. The system then
transitions to Satisfied.
• Temperature Unreliable: The monitored temperature is unreliable.
• Unocc Cntrl Not Req’d: The unit is not in an unoccupied mode or warmup or
cooldown are active.

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV])

Table 25-321: Unoccupied Sequencing (VAV) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Zone Temperature State and Unocc Status go to Temperature Unreliable.

1040 CCT Help: Modules

VAV Specific Sequencing
Overview
The VAV Specific Sequencing modules provide features specific to the
requirements of VAV applications.
The VAV Specific Sequencing contains the following modules:
• Autocalibration Sequence
• Balancer Override (DD, DDX, SD, and SDX)
• Box Flow Test
• WarmupCooldown Sequencing

Autocalibration Sequence

Overview
The Autocalibration Sequence module controls the timing for automatically
calibrating (that is, recalculating the zero offset) of the velocity pressure sensors.
The sequence for calibration involves commanding the dampers to close, waiting
sufficient time for the dampers to close, signaling the calibration process itself, and
then returning the application to normal control. It is used in standard VAV control
applications.
The calibration sequence is enabled to occur automatically if the input Days
between Autocals is greater than zero. If that is the case, the first autocalibration is
initiated automatically after controller download, startup, power enable, and so on.
The delay before this first autocalibration is equal to five times the FCB MAC
address of the controller so that not all VAV applications on a given network trunk
calibrate at the same time.
If automatic calibration is enabled, an autocalibration sequence occurs periodically
based on the Days between Autocals input. The timer used to determine the next
automatic calibration is restarted whenever a calibration sequence completes.
The calibration sequence can also be manually initiated on a rising edge (False to
True transition) of the Autocalibration Request input (connected by default from
the AUTOCAL-C network input.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Autocalibration Sequence)
• Attributes (Autocalibration Sequence)
• Primary States (Autocalibration Sequence)

State Generators 1041

Module Use in Applications (Autocalibration Sequence)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-322: Autocalibration Sequence Use in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Autocalibration Sequence All VAV Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Autocalibration Sequence)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Autocalibration Sequence
modules.
Table 25-323: Autocalibration Sequence Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Autocalibrate Now V Specifies that when this value is true, this
attribute signals the Flow Calculation modules
to calculate a new zero offset.
Autocalibration This input is typically connected from the False
Request AUTOCAL-C network input (via the Balancer
Override modules) to allow a user to manually
trigger autocalibration.
AUTOCAL-STATE G, V Current operational state of the module.
(Autocalibration
Status)
Damper Percent Cmd Current position of the primary damper. This 0.0
input is used to verify whether the damper is
responding to this module.
Days between Specifies the period between autocalibrations. 14 days (no Exhaust Box)
Autocals If set to zero, then periodic autocalibration is 0 days (with Exhaust Box)
not performed. It is set to zero for VAV
applications with an exhaust box to prevent
disturbing the flow differential controls.
Eff Stroke Time 1 Specifies the effective stroke time of one of the 120 Seconds
dampers controlled by the VAV application.
Eff Stroke Time 2 Specifies the effective stroke time of one of the 0 Seconds
dampers controlled by the VAV application.
Eff Stroke Time 3 Specifies the effective stroke time of one of the 0 Seconds
dampers controlled by the VAV application.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1042 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Autocalibration Sequence)
The module’s AUTOCAL-STATE will take on the following values.
• Uncalibrated: This is the initial state for the module. If periodic
autocalibration is enabled (Days Between Autocals > 0), then the module
remains in this state until the initial autocalibration sequence begins. If not
enabled, then the module immediately transitions to the Normal state and await
a manual request for autocalibration.
• Waiting to Calibrate: This is the first state in the calibration sequence. The
dampers are commanded closed while the module is in this state. The module
remains in this state long enough for all of the dampers to close (based on the
values of the Stroke Time inputs).
• Waiting for Damper: This state is a holding pattern for the module if the
Damper Percent Cmd indicates that the damper is not responding to the
module’s command (for example, Emergency Mode has control via a value
other than Normal). The module remains in this state until the damper again is
responding. This is done to prevent a new zero offset from being calculated
when the damper may not be closed.
• Autocalibrate: This state indicates that the flow calculation primitives should
re-calculate the zero offset point. The module remains in this state for 10
seconds, during which time the flow calculation primitives average the
velocity pressure input to determine a smoothed offset.
• Normal: This state is the typical value for the module. It indicates that no
calibration is currently active. If periodic autocalibration is enabled (Days
Between Autocals > 0), then the module remains in this state for the time
specified by the Days Between Autocals input.

State Generators 1043

Balancer Override

Overview
The Balancer Override modules provides a known interface for external balancing
tools to gather data from the VAV application logic and to interact with the
application to calibrate the flow calculations. They provide a single point of
interface for values that are used in several places in the applications. They also
allow the user to configure a subset of that data.
The outputs of this block can be configured by a balancer UI from CCT or a
balancing version of the Network Sensor. See the Network Sensor documentation
listed in the Related Documentation section.
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.

IMPORTANT: Do not right-click the State Generation header in the Control

View and add a second Balancer Override module because this action breaks the
balancing functionality of the application. In addition, do not delete an existing
Balancer Override module because this deletion ruins the application.

For more information on this module, see the following sections:

• Module Use in Applications (Balancer Override)
• Attributes (Balancer Override)
• Primary States (Balancer Override)
• Reliability (Balancer Override)

Module Use in Applications (Balancer Override)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-324: Balancer Override Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Balancer Override DD VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Balancer Override DDX VAV Dual Duct Application (with exhaust box)
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Balancer Override SD VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Slave Single Duct Application
Balancer Override SDX VAV Single Duct Application (with exhaust box)
VAV Slave Single Duct Application

1044 CCT Help: Modules

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Balancer Override)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Balancer Override
modules.
Table 25-325: Balancer Override Attributes (Part 1 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Balancer Override Common Attributes
Autocal Status SC, V Contains the status of the application with Set Name: False/True/Fault
respect to Autocalibration.
Autocalibrate Now Contains input from the logic handling False
autocalibration that triggers the Flow
Calculation modules to calculate new dP
offset values. When this input goes from
False to True to False, it indicates that the
autocalibration process is complete.
Balancer Override G, V Specifies the current state of the VAV Set Name: Balancer
Balancer module. Override
Effective Autocalibrate V Triggers autocalibration sequence on
receipt of the Start Autocalibration
command.
Flow Setpoint V Specifies the effective occupancy mode for Set Name: Occ Effective
Occupancy use in calculating flow setpoints. When the
Balancer Override output is equal to
Normal, the Flow Setpoint Occupancy is
set to the current value of the Occupancy
input. When the Balancer Override output
is equal to any other value (that is, not
Normal), the Flow Setpoint Occupancy is
set to Occupied.
Network Autocalibrate Used to manually trigger an autocalibration False
sequence. The user is responsible for
setting (to True) and clearing (to False) the
CS input that is typically connected to the
Network Autocalibrate input.
Occupancy Displays the current status of the Occupied
Occupancy Mode for the application. Set Name: Occ Effective
Recalculate Gain SC, V Contains the status resulting from the Set Name: Recalculate Gain
Status Recalculate Gain command most recently Status
sent to this module.
Settling Time Specifies the time over which the module 10 Seconds
averages the flow reading after receiving
the Recalculate Gain command.

State Generators 1045

 Table 25-325: Balancer Override Attributes (Part 2 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Balancer Override SD and SDX-Specific Attributes
CLG-MAXFLOW V Displays the maximum flow allowed for 500 l/s, 1000 cfm
(Cooling Max Flow) Supply Flow.
CLGOCC-MINFLOW V Contains the occupied cooling minimum 100 l/s, 200 cfm
(Occ Cooling Min flow setpoint for Supply Flow.
Flow)
HTGOCC-MINFLOW V Contains the occupied Heating minimum 100 l/s, 200 cfm
(Occ Heating Min flow setpoint for Supply Flow.
Flow)
SA-AREA (Supply V Displays the area at location of 0.0324 sq meter, 0.349 sq ft
Area) measurement of Supply Flow.
SA-KFACTOR (Supply V Contains the amplification provided by the 2.00
Pickup Gain) pitot tube for Supply Flow.
Supply Flow Contains the current flow measurement for 0.0 l/s, 0.0 cfm
Supply Flow.
Supply Percent dP Displays the percent offset used in 0.0%
Offset calculating Supply Flow.
Supply Stroke Time Contains the stroke time of the damper 60 Seconds
controlling Supply Flow.
Balancer Override DD and DDX-Specific Attributes
CD Percent dP Offset Contains the percent offset used in 0.0%
calculating Cold Deck Flow.
CD Stroke Time Displays the stroke time of the damper 60 Seconds
controlling Cold Deck Flow.
CD-AREA (Cold Deck V Displays the area at location of 0.0324 sq meter, 0.349 sq ft
Area) measurement of Supply Flow.
CD-KFACTOR (Cold V Displays the amplification provided by the 2.00
Deck Pickup Gain) pitot tube for Supply Flow.
CDOCC-MINFLOW V Contains the occupied cooling minimum 100 l/s, 200 cfm
(Occ Cold Deck Min flow setpoint for Cold Deck Flow.
Flow)
CLG-MAXFLOW V Contains the maximum flow allowed for 500 l/s, 1000 cfm
(Cooling Maximum Cold Deck Flow.
Flow)
Cold Deck Flow Contains the current flow measurement for 0.0 l/s, 0.0 cfm
Cold Deck Flow.
HD Percent dP Offset Displays the percent offset used in 0.0%
calculating the Deck Flow.
HD Stroke Time Contains the stroke time of the damper 0 Seconds
controlling the Deck Flow.
HD-AREA (Hot Deck V Displays the area at location of 0.0324 sq meter, 0.349 sq ft
Area) measurement of Supply Flow.
HD-KFACTOR (Hot V Displays the amplification provided by the 2.00
Deck Pickup Gain) pitot tube for Supply Flow.
HDOCC-MINFLOW V Contains the occupied heating minimum 100 l/s, 200 cfm
(Occ Hot Deck Min flow setpoint for Hot Deck Flow.
Flow)
Hot Deck Flow Contains the current flow measurement for 0.0 l/s, 0.0 cfm
Hot Deck Flow.

1046 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 25-325: Balancer Override Attributes (Part 3 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
HTG-MAXFLOW V Contains the maximum flow allowed for 500 l/s, 1000 cfm
(Heating Maximum Hot Deck Flow.
Flow)
Balancer Override SDX and DDX-Specific Attributes2
EA-AREA (Exhaust V Contains the area at location of 0.0324 sq meter, 0.349 sq ft
Area) measurement of Exhaust Flow.
EA-KFACTOR V Contains the amplification provided by the 2.00
(Exhaust Pickup Gain) pitot tube for Exhaust Flow.
Exhaust Flow Displays the current flow measurement for 0.0 l/s, 0.0 cfm
the Exhaust box.
Exhaust Percent dP Contains the percent offset used in 0.0%
Offset calculating the Exhaust Flow.
Exhaust Stroke Time Contains the stroke time of the damper 0 Seconds
controlling Exhaust Flow.
OCCEAFLOW-DIFF V Contains the desired occupied setpoint for 100 l/s, 200 cfm
(Occ Exhaust Diff) the difference between the exhaust and
supply (that is, Occ Exhaust Diff = Exhaust
Flow - Supply Flow). Positive values result
in a negative zone static pressure, while
negative values result in a positive zone
static pressure. Zero provides matching
supply and exhaust flows.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)
2. The attributes specific to the Balancer Override SD also apply to the Balancer Override SDX, and the attributes
specific to the Balancer Override DD also apply to the Balancer Override DDX.

Primary States (Balancer Override)

The balancer override sends the following states to state selection:
• Close All: This is typically used to close all dampers and turns off any box fan.
• Flow 1 Min: This sets the VAV Single Duct application to cooling minimum
flow. For VAV Dual Duct applications, it sets the cold duct to cooling
minimum flow and closes the hot duct damper.
• Flow 1 Max: This sets the VAV Single Duct application to cooling maximum
flow. For VAV Dual Duct applications, it sets the cold duct to cooling
maximum flow and closes the hot duct damper.
• Flow 2 Min: This sets the VAV Single Duct application to heating minimum
flow. For VAV Dual Duct applications, it sets the hot duct to minimum flow
and closes the cold duct damper.
• Flow 2 Max: This sets the VAV Single Duct application to heating minimum
flow. For VAV Dual Duct applications, it sets the hot duct to maximum flow
and closes the cold duct damper.

Reliability (Balancer Override)

The Balancer Override modules are always reliable.

State Generators 1047

Box Flow Test

Overview
The Box Flow Test module can be used to verify and diagnose the operation of
VAV Single Duct applications. It provides the timing, output control, and data-
gathering functions for testing the flow control performance of a VAV application.
It can identify eight different potential errors including Large dP Offset, Flow Not
Reliable, Damper Command Not Responding, Poor Flow Response, Insufficient
Flow, Excessive Flow, Non-Increasing Flow, and Excessive Hysteresis. The Box
Flow Test module supports only Single Duct applications. It does not support
exhaust box or hot deck applications.
You cannot view or modify this modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Box Flow Test)
• Attributes (Box Flow Test)
• Primary States (Box Flow Test)
• Reliability (Box Flow Test)

Module Use in Applications (Box Flow Test)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 25-326: Box Flow Test Uses in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Box Flow Test VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Slave Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Box Flow Test)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Box Flow Test modules.
Table 25-327: Box Flow Test Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Damper Percent Cmd Contains the current value for the 0.0%
command being sent to the damper output.
This does not reflect any user-overrides of
the actual damper output object or any
problems with the actuator.

1048 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 25-327: Box Flow Test Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
dP Offset Tolerance Displays the percentage above which the 10.0%
absolute value of the Percent dP Offset is
considered to be out of normal range.
Eff Stroke Time Contains the time (in seconds) that it takes 0.0 Seconds
the actuator to go from fully closed to fully
open as well as the time from fully open to
fully closed. If the open and close stroke
times are unequal, this input should be set
to the maximum of the two values.
Error Summary Contains a byte of which each bit Set Name: Box Flow Test
represents the error status of each of the Errors
eight possible errors evaluated during data
analysis at the end of the test.
Flow Contains the current amount of airflow as 0.0 l/s, 0.0 cfm
measured by the VAV box flow pickup.
Flow Data Displays the raw position and flow pairs
collected during the test.
Flow Tolerance Contains the percentage of the Rated Box 10.0%
Flow used for analyzing the test data.
Percent dP Offset Contains the current value for the zero 0.0%
offset of the differential pressure input
expressed as a percentage of the sensor
range.
Rated Box Flow Displays the flow of the box under nominal 0.0 l/s, 0.0 cfm
conditions when the damper is 100%
open.
Settling Time Contains the time over which the module 10.0 Seconds
averages the flow reading at each data
point. This is done because the sensed
flow is typically a noisy signal and is not
filtered.
State G, V Contains the current operational mode for Set Name: Normal/Box Flow
the module. State is set equal to Box Flow Test
Test when a test is active; otherwise it is
Normal.
Step Position V, SC Specifies the position, when a box flow test 0.0%
is active, to which the damper should be
commanded.
Test Status SC Displays a simple summary of the status of No Test Data
the current or most recent test. Set Name: Box Flow Test
Status
Errors during test, No Test
Data, Test Cancelled, Test
Complete Normal, Test In
Progress, Test Started
Test Step SC Displays the current step of the active test
or the last step completed of the most
recent test.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Box Flow Test)

The module begins a test when the Start Test command is received.

State Generators 1049

 Once a test is started, it runs through to completion unless the test cancelled by the
user or the module is disabled.
At the start of the test, all errors are reset to False (see below for exceptions). Once
the test is complete, the data collected during the test is analyzed to flag any errors.
In addition, the Percent dP Offset and Flow reliability during the test is noted.
The Max Flow and Min Flow are calculated based on the data gathered during the
test (ignoring any unreliable flows of -999.999). The value of the Rated Box Flow
input and Flow Tolerance property when the module finishes the test are used for
the error analysis. The module otherwise ignores any changes to these values
during the test.
The following are the eight possible errors that can be detected by the Box Flow
Test module.
• Large dP Offset: Set if the absolute value of the Percent dP Offset is greater
than or equal to the dP Offset Tolerance. This indicates that an auto calibration
was performed when the damper was not fully closed. This is often a symptom
of a stuck or reversed actuator. This error is evaluated on input change while
the test state is Test in Progress or No Test Data. The error is reset when a test
begins and the absolute value of the current Percent dP Offset input is less than
the dP Offset Tolerance.
• Flow Not Reliable: Set if the Flow input Reliability is not reliable. This error
is evaluated on input change while the test state is Test in Progress or No Test
Data. The error is reset when a test begins and the Flow is currently reliable.
This error will indicate one or more of the Flow readings is not reliable.
• Damper Command Not Responding: Set if the Damper Percent Cmd input
did not reach the Step Position (within 1%) for one or more of the test steps.
This indicates the application is being controlled by higher precedence logic.
• Poor Flow Response: Set if (Max Flow - Min Flow) <= (Rated Box Flow *
Flow Tolerance / 100). The Min Flow and Max Flow refer to the minimum and
maximum of the recorded flow values.
• Insufficient Flow: Set if (Max Flow) < Rated Box Flow * (100 – Flow
Tolerance) / 100.
• Excessive Flow: Set if (Max Flow) > 1.5 * Rated Box Flow.
• Non-Increasing Flow: Check all steps (other than the starting position)
against previous step to verify flow is moving in direction expected.
Considered an error if moving opposite expected direction (by more than half
the tolerance) for any of the steps or if the flows at the fully open or closed
positions are not within the tolerance of the max or min flows, respectively.
• Excessive Hysteresis: Evaluated only if Check Hysteresis is True. For all
positions that have a pair of flow values (all steps except the end stop opposite
the starting position), set error if flows are different by more than the tolerance.

1050 CCT Help: Modules

Reliability (Box Flow Test)
The reliability associated with the Box Flow Test module always reports as
Reliable.

State Generators 1051

WarmupCooldown Sequencing

Overview
This module is responsible for generating a WarmupCooldown status. For VAV
Single Duct, it sequences the primary heating (hot supply air), box heating and
supplemental heating. For warmup, it starts with primary heating and then adds
box or supplemental heating based on the heating priority. For VAV Dual Duct,
the hot duct is considered box heating and there is no primary heating. For
warmup, it uses supplemental heating or box heating based on the heating priority.
You can view and modify the module in this group’s logic using CCT software,
but the finite state machine logic cannot be modified.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (WarmupCooldown Sequencing)
• Attributes (WarmupCooldown Sequencing)
• Primary States (WarmupCooldown Sequencing)
• Reliability (WarmupCooldown Sequencing)

Module Use in Applications (WarmupCooldown Sequencing)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
module in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 25-328: WarmupCooldown Sequencing Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
WarmupCooldown Sequencing VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1052 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (WarmupCooldown Sequencing)
The following table describes the attributes used by the WarmupCooldown
Sequencing module.
Table 25-329: WarmupCooldown Sequencing Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Box Heating Control Contains the current control status from the box Overridden
Status heating controller necessary for the sequencer Set Name: Control Status
to determine what actions to take.
Heating Priority Defines whether supplemental or box heat Supplemental
should be the next level of heat after the Set Name: VAV Heating
primary heat has been used. Priority
Heating Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the zone 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
temperature when under warmup control.
Mode Supports a network command for Warmup, Normal
Cooldown, or Coast. Set Name: OST Warmup
Cooldown
Primary Heating Contains the current control status from the Overridden
Control Status Supply Flow Setpoint Control necessary for the Set Name: Control Status
sequencer to determine what actions to take.
State V Contains the current state generated by Set Name: VAV Warmup
Warmup Cooldown Sequencing. Cooldown State
Supp Heating Control Contains the current control status from the Overridden
Status supplemental heating controller necessary for Set Name: Control Status
the sequencer to determine what actions to
take.
WC-STATE G, V Contains the desired status of Set Name: VAV Warmup
(WarmupCooldown WarmupCooldown. This output is the default Cooldown Status
Status) element as it is the key output of this module
typically connected to the State Selection.
Zone Temperature Specifies the process variable. 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

State Generators 1053

Primary States (WarmupCooldown Sequencing)
• Normal: Normal temperature control. (warmup, or cooldown or coast are
inactive)
• Warmup Satisfied: System is in a warmup mode, and the zone temperature is
greater than the heating setpoint. The system transitions to Prmy Htg if the
zone temperature drops below the heating setpoint.
• Warmup Unreliable: Zone temperature is unreliable and warmup is
requested.
• Cooldown: System is in a cooldown mode.
• Cooldown Unreliable: Zone temperature is unreliable and cooldown is
requested.
• Prmy Htg: Primary heating is used to warm up the space. The system
transitions to Prmy Htg + Supp Htg or Prmy Htg + Box Htg (based on heating
priority) if the zone temperature remains below the zone setpoint for a period
of time. The system transitions to Warmup Satisfied if the zone temperature
rises above the heating setpoint for a period of time.
• Prmy Htg + Supp Htg: Primary heating is at maximum and the supplemental
heating is modulated. The system transitions to Prmy Htg + Supp Htg + Box
Htg if the zone temperature remains below the zone setpoint for a period of
time. The system transitions to Prmy Htg if the zone temperature rises above
the heating setpoint for a period of time.
• Prmy Htg + Supp Htg + Box Htg: Primary heating is at maximum, the
supplemental heating is at maximum and the box heating is modulated. The
system transitions to Prmy Htg + Supp Htg if the zone temperature rises above
the heating setpoint for a period of time.
• Prmy Htg + Box Htg: Primary heating is at maximum and the box heating is
modulated. The system transitions to Prmy Htg + Box Htg + Supp Htg if the
zone temperature remains below the zone setpoint for a period of time. The
system transitions to Prmy Htg if the zone temperature rises above the heating
setpoint for a period of time.
• Prmy Htg + Box Htg + Supp Htg: Primary heating is at maximum, the box
heating is at maximum and the supplemental heating is modulated. The system
transitions to Prmy Htg + Box Htg if the zone temperature rises above the
heating setpoint for a period of time.

Reliability (WarmupCooldown Sequencing)

Table 25-330: WarmupCooldown Sequencing Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Zone Temperature State is Warmup Unreliable if Mode is Warmup and
WarmupCooldown Status is Warmup Unreliable.
State is Cooldown Unreliable if Mode is Cooldown and
WarmupCooldown Status is Cooldown Unreliable.

1054 CCT Help: Modules

VAV Fan Determination
Overview
The VAV Fan Determination modules determine when the VAV box fan should
operate. They use combinations of the current Occupancy status, current damper,
and heating and cooling commands to determine when the VAV box fan should be
on.
The VAV Fan Determination group contains the following modules:
• Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Flow Based)
• Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Temp Based)
• Fan Determination (VAV Series)

Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Flow Based)

Overview
This module generates the on or off state for the control of a parallel fan within a
VAV application according to a flow based algorithm.
If the unit is in Occupied, Standby or Bypass mode and the flow is less the Parallel
Fan Occ Min Flow setting, the state output is on. Additionally, if the heating or
cooling command are greater than the Fan On Threshold, the state output is on.
When the heating and cooling command are both below the Fan Off Threshold, the
state output is off. If the Heating Purge Duration is greater than zero, the Heating
Command must be below the Fan Off Threshold for the time specified before the
state output is off.
This module can be used to provide the on command to single speed fans, three
speed fans, or proportional fans.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based])
• Attributes (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based])
• Primary States (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based])
• Reliability (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based])

Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 25-331: Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Flow Based) Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Parallel Fan Determination Flow Based VAV Single Duct Application

State Generators 1055

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based])

The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Determination (VAV
Parallel Flow Based) module.
Table 25-332: Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Flow Based) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Percent Cmd Displays the current cooling command. 0.0%
Fan Off Threshold Contains the percent output required to 0.1%
disable the fan. This value is compared to
the Cooling Percent Cmd and the Heating
Percent Cmd. Both must be less than this
to turn the fan off due to heating or cooling
requirements.
Fan On Threshold Contains the percent output required in 5.0%
order to enable the fan. This value is
compared to the Cooling Percent Cmd and
the Heating Percent Cmd. If either is
greater than this value, the State output is
on.
FAN-STATE (State) G, V Contains the desired Status for the Fan. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Heating Percent Cmd Displays the current heating command. 0.0%
HTG-PURGETIME Specifies that when a call for heating is 120 Seconds
(Heating Purge ended, the fan continues to operate for
Duration) this period of time. Although this input can
accept any value, it is connected to the
timer’s duration input. The Timer clamps
the duration value at its min value or its
max value if the write is outside of this
range.
OCC-MINFLOW Contains the occupied flow threshold. For Display Units: l/s, cfm
(Parallel Fan Min Occ occupied conditions, a supply flow below
Flow) this value causes the fan to start.
Occupancy Contains the effective occupancy of the Unoccupied
Occupancy Mode Determination. Set Name: Occ Effective
Supply Flow Contains the measured Supply Flow. 0.0 l/s, 0.0 cfm

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1056 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based])
• Off: The fan is desired to be off.
• On: The fan is desired to be on.

Reliability (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based])

This module always uses the last reliable value received if any of the inputs should
become unreliable.

State Generators 1057

Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Temp Based)

Overview
This module is responsible for generating the on or off state for the control of a
parallel fan within a VAV application according to a temperature based algorithm.
If the heating or cooling command are greater than the Fan On Threshold, the state
output is on. When the heating and cooling command are both below the Fan Off
Threshold, the state output is off. If the Heating Purge Duration is greater than
zero, the Heating Command must be below the Fan Off Threshold for the time
specified before the state output is off.
This module can be used to provide the on command to single speed fans, three
speed fans, or proportional fans.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based])
• Attributes (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based])
• Primary States (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based])
• Reliability (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based])

Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 25-333: Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Temp Based) Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Parallel Fan Determination Temp Based VAV Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1058 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Determination (VAV
Parallel Temp Based) module.
Table 25-334: Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Temp Based) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Percent Cmd Contains the current cooling command. 0.0%
Fan Off Threshold Displays the percent output required to 0.1%
disable the fan. This value is compared to
the Cooling Percent Cmd and the Heating
Percent Cmd. Both must be less than this
to turn the fan off due to heating or cooling
requirements.
Fan On Threshold Displays the percent output required in 5.0%
order to enable the fan. This value is
compared to the Cooling Percent Cmd and
the Heating Percent Cmd. If either is
greater than this value, the State output is
on.
FAN-STATE (State) G, V Contains the desired Status for the Fan. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Heating Percent Cmd Contains the current heating command. 0.0%
HTG-PURGETIME Specifies that when a call for heating is 120 Seconds
(Heating Purge ended, the fan will continue to operate for
Duration) this period of time. Although this input can
accept any value, it is connected to the
timer’s duration input. The Timer clamps
the duration value at its min value or its
max value if the write is outside of this
range.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based])

• Off: The fan is desired to be off.
• On: The fan is desired to be on.

Reliability (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based])

This module always uses the last reliable value received if any of the inputs should
become unreliable.

State Generators 1059

Fan Determination (VAV Series)

Overview
This module generates the on or off state for the control of a parallel fan within a
VAV application according to a flow based algorithm.
If the unit is in Occupied, Standby mode, or Bypass mode, the state output is on. If
the unit is in the Unoccupied mode and the damper, heating or cooling command
are greater than the Fan On Threshold, the state output is on. When the damper,
heating and cooling command are all below the Fan Off Threshold, the state output
is off. If the Heating Purge Duration is greater than zero, the heating command
must be below the Fan Off Threshold for the time specified before the state output
is off.
This module can be used to provide the on command to single speed fans, three
speed fans, or proportional fans.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [VAV Series])
• Attributes (Fan Determination [VAV Series])
• Primary States (Fan Determination [VAV Series])
• Reliability (Fan Determination [VAV Series])

Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [VAV Series])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
module in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 25-335: Fan Determination (VAV Series) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Series Fan Determination VAV Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1060 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Fan Determination [VAV Series])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Determination (VAV
Series) module.
Table 25-336: Fan Determination (VAV Series) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Percent Cmd Displays the current cooling command. 0.0%
Damper Percent Cmd Displays the current supply damper 0.0%
command.
Fan Off Threshold Contains the percent output required to 0.1%
disable the fan. This value is compared to
the Cooling Percent Cmd and the Heating
Percent Cmd. Both must be less than this
to turn the fan off due to heating or cooling
requirements.
Fan On Threshold Contains the percent output required in 5.0%
order to enable the fan. This value is
compared to the Cooling Percent Cmd and
the Heating Percent Cmd. If either is
greater than this value, the State output is
on.
FAN-STATE (State) G, V Contains the desired Status for the Fan. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Heating Percent Cmd Displays the current heating command. 0.0%
HTG-PURGETIME Specifies that when a call for heating is 120 Seconds
(Heating Purge ended, the fan continues to operate for this
Duration) period of time. Although this input can
accept any value, it is connected to the
timer’s duration input. The Timer clamps
the duration value at its min value or its
max value if the write is outside of this
range.
Occupancy Contains the effective occupancy of the Unoccupied
Occupancy Mode Determination. Set Name: Occ Effective

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Fan Determination [VAV Series])

• Off: The fan is desired to be off.
• On: The fan is desired to be on.

Reliability (Fan Determination [VAV Series])

This module always uses the last reliable value received if any of the inputs should
become unreliable. The default value of the input is used if the signal to it has
never been reliable.

State Generators 1061

1062 CCT Help: Modules
Chapter 26: CCT Help: Modules
Output Controller
Introduction
The output controllers use the following general philosophies:
• Two Position Devices: Two position devices can be off/on or closed/open.
These controllers typically support modes of Close/Open/Hold or Off/On/
Hold.
• Variable Devices: Variable devices are modulated to control a process
variable. These controllers typically support modes for the following purposes:
- control the system (pressurize, depressurize, purge, water flush, and so on)
- close the device
- turn off the device
- set the device to a maximum position
- set the device to a user defined position
- control the process variable
- control to the limit process variable
- ramp to a position (move at a selected rate)
Output Controller modules fall into one of the following categories:
• Cascaded Zone Control
• Central Plant
• Damper Control
• Damper Control - AHU Econ
• Damper Control - AHU Min OA
• Damper Control - VAV
• Fan Control
• Fan Control - AHU
• Heating & Cooling Control - 2 Pipe
• Heating & Cooling Control - Cooling
• Heating & Cooling Control - Heat Pump
• Heating & Cooling Control - Heat Recovery
• Heating & Cooling Control - Heating
• Humidity Control
• Lighting Control

Output Controller 1063

 • Motor Protection
• Multizone Zone Control
• Pass Through
• Sideloop
• Staged Output Control
• Staged Output Sequencing
• Timing
• Totalization
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Cascaded Zone Control

Overview
The Cascaded Zone Control output controllers provide a setpoint for another
control loop (discharge air temperature or VAV flow control). The output
controllers vary the setpoint based on the zone temperature and the appropriate
zone heating or cooling setpoint.
Cascaded Zone Control contains the following modules:
• Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination
• Flow Setpoint (VAV Dual Duct)
• Flow Setpoint (VAV Single Duct)
• HD Constant Flow Setpoint
• Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control
• Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct

1064 CCT Help: Modules

Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination

Overview
This module resets the discharge air temperature setpoint based on the zone
temperature error. This module should only be used when the air handler is
controlling one zone. The module has inputs for the control temperature, heating
and cooling setpoints, PID configuration inputs, and min and max heating and
cooling DAT setpoints. The module may operate in one of several modes which
include Off, Hold, Htg DA-Tsp Reset, or Clg DA-Tsp Reset. This module has
outputs for the DA-T setpoint.
Figure 26-27: Cascaded DA-T Setpoint
DA-T Setpoint

Cascaded DA-T Setpoint

Reset Schedule
DA-T sp Htg Max

DA-T sp
Zone Satisfied
Satisfied

Zone Heating Zone Cooling

DA-T sp Clg Min

FIG:Cascaded DA-T Setpoint

Heating Cooling Process Variable
Setpoint Setpoint

You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)
• Attributes (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)
• Primary States (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)
• Reliability (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)

Output Controller 1065

Module Use in Applications (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint
Determination)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-337: Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
Determination AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Cascaded Discharge Air
Setpoint Determination modules.
Table 26-338: Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination Attributes
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Setpoint Contains the desired cooling setpoint for the 23.0 Deg C, 74.0 Deg F
zone.
Cooling Zone Control V Displays the current zone cooling saturation Set Name: Control Status
Status status of the controller.
DATCLGMIN-SP Displays the minimum cooling DA-T setpoint. 12.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
(Discharge Air
Setpoint Cooling Min)
DATHTGMAX-SP Displays the maximum heating DA-T setpoint. 40.0 Deg C, 105.0 Deg F
(Discharge Air
Setpoint Heating Max)
DATSATISFIED-SP Contains the minimum heating DA-T setpoint 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
(Discharge Air and the maximum cooling DA-T setpoint.
Setpoint Zone
Satisfied)
DATSP-STATE (State) G, V Displays the current operational state of the Set Name: AHU DAT RST
output controller.
Discharge Air Setpoint V Displays the discharge air temperature setpoint Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
as determined by this module based on the
zone air temperature error.
Heating Setpoint Contains the desired heating setpoint for the 21.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
zone.
Heating Zone Control V Displays the current zone heating saturation Set Name: Control Status
Status status of the controller.

1066 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-338: Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination Attributes
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: AHU DAT RST
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. See the PID Deg C, Deg F
specification for more information. For this Set Name: Unit
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the
only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the control temperature. Either Zone 22.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
temperature or return air temperature may be
connected to this input.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)

• Off: The Discharge Air Setpoint does not reset. It is held constant at Discharge
Air Setpoint-Zone Satisfied.
• Hold: Holds the outputs at their current value.
• Htg DA-Tsp Reset: The Discharge Air Setpoint is reset between the min and
max heating limits based on the control temperature and the Heating Setpoint.
• Clg DA-Tsp Reset: The Discharge Air Setpoint is reset between the min and
max cooling limits based on the control temperature and the Cooling Setpoint.

Reliability (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1067

Flow Setpoint (VAV Dual Duct)

Overview
This module provides the flow setpoint to be controlled by a module (typically a
Supply Damper Control). This module is designed to control zone temperature
while keeping the flow within the minimum and maximum flow settings. The
module accepts as inputs a mode, a process variable, a setpoint, the measured flow,
and configuration values. Based upon the input mode and configuration settings,
the module outputs a flow setpoint, a flow percent, and a Control Status. This
module is intended for use within dual duct applications.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct])
• Attributes (Flow Setpoint [VAV Attributes (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct])
• Primary States (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct])
• Reliability (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct])

Module Use in Applications (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-339: Flow Setpoint (VAV Dual Duct) Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
CD Constant Flow Setpoint Control VAV Dual Duct Application
CD Flow Setpoint Control VAV Dual Duct Application
HD Flow Setpoint Control VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1068 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Flow Setpoint [VAV Attributes (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Flow Setpoint (VAV Dual
Duct) modules.
Table 26-340: Flow Setpoint (VAV Dual Duct) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CDFLOW-OUTSTATE, G, V Displays the current operational state of Set Name: VAV DD Flow
HDFLOW-OUTSTATE, the output controller. Controller
or SAFLOW-
OUTSTATE (State)
Control Status V Contains the current saturation status of Set Name: Control Status
the controller.
Deck Specifies the type of deck (Cold or Hot). Cold
Set Name: Cold/Hot
Deck Max Flow Contains the maximum deck flow setpoint. 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Deck Min Flow Contains the minimum deck flow setpoint. 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Failsoft Value Contains the percent of Deck Max Flow 0.0%
desired when mode is set to Failsoft.
Flow Percent V Displays the flow setpoint rescaled Display Units: %
between 0 and 100 percent. 0% maps to
the min flow and 100% maps to max flow.
Flow Setpoint V Contains the desired Flow Setpoint. This is 0 l/s, 0 cfm
the setpoint for another activity, typically
the Supply Damper Control module.
Mode Contains the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: VAV DD Flow
Controller
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are Set Name: Unit
the only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when commanded to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Control, this is the attribute that is to be
controlled. Typically connected to the Zone
Temperature.
Setpoint Specifies that when the mode is set to 23.0 Deg C, 74.0 Deg F
Control, this is the desired setpoint to
which the process variable is to be
controlled.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1069

Primary States (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct])
• Min: Output the Deck Min Flow.
• Max: Output the Deck Max Flow.
• Hold: Maintain the current flow setpoint.
• Control: Adjust the flow setpoint to maintain the process variable at the
setpoint.
• Failsoft: Output the flow setpoint that is spanned between the Deck Min Flow
and Deck Max Flow by the value of Failsoft Value (percent).

Reliability (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct])

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1070 CCT Help: Modules

Flow Setpoint (VAV Single Duct)

Overview
This module provides the flow setpoint to be controlled by a module (typically a
Supply Damper Control). This module is designed to control zone temperature
while keeping the flow within the minimum and maximum flow settings. The
module accepts as inputs a mode, a process variable, a setpoint, the measured flow,
and configuration values. Based upon the input mode and configuration settings,
the module outputs a flow setpoint, a flow percent, and a Control Status.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct])
• Attributes (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct])
• Primary States (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct])
• Reliability (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct])

Module Use in Applications (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 26-341: Flow Setpoint (VAV Single Duct) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Supply Flow Setpoint Control VAV Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1071

Attributes (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Flow Setpoint (VAV
Single Duct) modules.
Table 26-342: Flow Setpoint (VAV Single Duct) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLG-O (Flow) Percent V Displays the flow setpoint rescaled between Display Units: %
0 and 100 percent. 0% maps to the min flow
(whether heating or cooling) and 100% maps to
Max Cooling Flow.
Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
controller.
Cooling Max Flow Contains the desired setpoint for the flow to be 500 l/s, 1000 cfm
controlled when the cooling mode is set to Max
Cooling. This is also the maximum flow when
the mode is set to Control Cooling.
Cooling Min Flow Contains the desired setpoint for the flow to be 0 l/s, 0 cfm
controlled to when the mode is set to Min
Cooling. This is also the minimum flow when
the mode is set to Control Cooling.
Cooling Setpoint Specifies that when the mode is set to Cooling 23.0 Deg C, 74.0 Deg F
Control, this is the desired setpoint to which the
process variable is controlled.
Failsoft Value Contains the percent of Cooling Max Flow 0.0%
desired when mode is set to Failsoft.
Flow Setpoint V Contains the desired Flow Setpoint. This is the 0 l/s, 0 cfm
setpoint for another activity, typically the hybrid
PVDC module.
Heating Min Flow Displays the minimum flow setpoint under any 0 l/s, 0 cfm
heating conditions (that is, Heating, Warmup)
Heating Setpoint Specifies that when the mode is set to Heating 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
Control, this is the desired setpoint to which the
process variable is controlled.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: VAV Cascaded
Flow Controller
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable When commanded to Control, this is the 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
variable that is to be controlled. Typically
connected to the Zone Temperature.
SAFLOW-OUTSTATE G, V Contains the current operational state of the Set Name: VAV Cascaded
(State) output controller. Flow Controller

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1072 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct])
• Min: Output the Cooling Min Flow Setpoint.
• Max: Output the Cooling Max Flow Setpoint.
• Hold: Maintain the current flow setpoint.
• Control: Adjust the flow setpoint to maintain the process variable at the
cooling setpoint. The flow setpoint adjusts between the minimum and
maximum flows.
• Heating: Set the flow setpoint to the value of the Heating Min Flow.
• Warmup: Adjust the flow setpoint to maintain the process variable at the
heating setpoint.
• Failsoft: Output the flow setpoint what is spanned between the Cooling Min
Flow and Cooling Max Flow by the value of Failsoft Value (percent).

Reliability (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct])

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1073

HD Constant Flow Setpoint

Overview
This module determines the hot deck flow setpoint to complement the cold deck
flow setpoint in a constant volume dual deck VAV application. The generated flow
setpoint is to be controlled by a module (typically a Supply Damper Control).
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (HD Constant Flow Setpoint)
• Attributes (HD Constant Flow Setpoint)
• Reliability (HD Constant Flow Setpoint)

Module Use in Applications (HD Constant Flow Setpoint)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 26-343: HD Constant Flow Setpoint Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
HD Constant Flow Setpoint Control VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1074 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (HD Constant Flow Setpoint)
The following table describes the attributes used by the HD Constant Flow
Setpoint modules.
Table 26-344: HD Constant Flow Setpoint Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CD Percent Contains a percentage that spans between 0.0%
the max and min flows. 0% maps to max
flow and 100% maps to min flow.
Deck Max Flow Contains the maximum deck flow setpoint. 500 l/s, 1000 cfm
Deck Min Flow Specifies the minimum deck flow setpoint. 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Flow Percent V Displays the flow setpoint rescaled Display Units: %
between 0 and 100 percent. 0% maps to
the min flow and 100% maps to max flow.
Flow Setpoint V Contains the desired Flow Setpoint. This is 0 l/s, 0 cfm
the setpoint for another activity, typically
the Supply Damper Control module.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (HD Constant Flow Setpoint)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1075

Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control

Overview
This module provides the flow setpoint controlled by a module (typically a Supply
Damper Control). This module controls air flow while keeping the flow within the
minimum and maximum flow settings. The module accepts as inputs a mode, a
flow percent, and configuration values. Based upon the input mode and
configuration settings, the module outputs a flow setpoint. This module is intended
for use within slave VAV single duct applications.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control)
• Attributes (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control)
• Primary States (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control)
• Reliability (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control)

Module Use in Applications (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 26-345: Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control VAV Slave Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1076 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Slave Supply Flow
Setpoint Control modules.
Table 26-346: Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLG-O (Flow Percent) V Displays the flow setpoint rescaled between Display Units: %
0 and 100 percent. 0% maps to the min flow
(whether heating or cooling) and 100% maps to
Max Cooling Flow.
Cooling Max Flow Contains the desired setpoint for the flow to be 500 l/s, 1000 cfm
controlled when the cooling mode is set to Max
Cooling. This is also the maximum flow when
the mode is set to Control Cooling.
Cooling Min Flow Contains the desired setpoint for the flow to be 0 l/s, 0 cfm
controlled when the mode is set to Min Cooling.
This is also the minimum flow when the mode is
set to Control Cooling.
Flow Setpoint V Contains the desired Flow Setpoint. This is the 0 l/s, 0 cfm
setpoint for another activity, typically the hybrid
PVDC module.
Heating Min Flow Displays the minimum flow setpoint under any 0 l/s, 0 cfm
heating conditions (that is, Heating or
Warmup).
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Min
Selection. Set Name: VAV Cascaded
Flow Controller
SAFLOW-OUTSTATE G, V Contains the current operational state of the Set Name: VAV Cascaded
(State) output controller. Flow Controller

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control)

• Min: Output the Cooling Min Flow Setpoint.
• Max: Output the Cooling Max Flow Setpoint.
• Hold: Maintain the current flow setpoint.
• Control: Adjust the flow setpoint to maintain the process variable at the
cooling setpoint. The flow setpoint adjusts between the minimum and
maximum flows.
• Heating: Set the flow setpoint to the value of the Heating Min Flow.
• Warmup: Adjust the flow setpoint to maintain the process variable at the
heating setpoint.
• Failsoft: Output the flow setpoint that is spanned between the Cooling Min
Flow and Cooling Max Flow by the value of the Failsoft Value (percent).

Reliability (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1077

Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct

Overview
This module provides the flow setpoint to be controlled by a module (typically a
Supply Damper Control). This module controls air flow while keeping the flow
within the minimum and maximum flow settings. The module accepts as inputs a
mode, a flow percent, and configuration values. Based upon the input mode and
configuration settings, the module outputs a flow setpoint. This module is intended
for use within slave VAV dual duct applications.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct)
• Attributes (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct)
• Primary States (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct)
• Reliability (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct)

Module Use in Applications (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-347: Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Slave CD Constant Flow Setpoint Control VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Slave CD Flow Setpoint Control VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Slave HD Flow Setpoint Control VAV Slave Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1078 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Slave Supply Flow
Setpoint Control Dual Duct modules.
Table 26-348: Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CD Percent V Displays the flow setpoint rescaled 0.0%
between 0 and 100 percent. 0% maps to
the min flow and 100% maps to max flow.
CDFLOW-OUTSTATE, G, V Displays the current operational state of Min
HDFLOW-OUTSTATE, the output controller. Set Name: VAV DD Flow
or SAFLOW- Controller
OUTSTATE (State)
Deck Max Flow Contains the maximum deck flow setpoint. 500 l/s, 1000 cfm
Deck Min Flow Contains the minimum deck flow setpoint. 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Flow Percent V Displays the flow setpoint rescaled 0.0%
between 0 and 100 percent. 0% maps to
the min flow and 100% maps to max flow.
Flow Setpoint V Contains the desired flow setpoint. This is 0 l/s, 0 cfm
the setpoint for another activity, typically
the Supply Damper Control module.
Mode Contains the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: VAV DD Flow
Controller

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct)

• Min: Output the Deck Min Flow.
• Max: Output the Deck Max Flow.
• Hold: Maintain the current flow setpoint.
• Control: Adjust the flow setpoint to maintain the process variable at the
setpoint.
• Failsoft: Output the flow setpoint that is spanned between the Deck Min Flow
and Deck Max Flow by the value of the Failsoft Value (percent).

Reliability (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1079

Central Plant
Overview
The Central Plant group provides Output Controllers for all central plant
equipment. The Central Plant group contains the following modules:
• Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control
• Plant Control
• Pump Control
• Pump Control v2
• Rotation Small
• Secondary Pump PID
• Sequenced Output
• Tower Control
• Tower Control v2

Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control

Overview
The Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control module controls a heat exchanger
that uses superheated hot water as its heating source. This module manages the
output water temperature. If the leaving heating source water temperature drops
below the limit setpoint, the control valve is modulated to control the leaving
heating source water at its low limit.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control)
• Attributes (Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control)
• Primary States (Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control)

Module Use in Applications (Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-349: Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Heat Exchanger with Low Limit Output Central Heating Applications

1080 CCT Help: Modules

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Heat Exchanger with
Return Water Control modules:
Table 26-350: Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status Provides the PID status with possible Normal
values of Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Set Name: Control Status
Low, Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Low Limit Process Provides the low limit temperature process 38.0 Deg C, 100.0 Deg F
Variable variable.
Low Limit Proportional Provides the range across which the valve 5.0 Deg C, 9.0 Deg F
Band is proportionally modulated open as the
Low Limit Process Variable drops below
the Low Limit Setpoint.
Low Limit Setpoint Provides the upper threshold for the low 38.0 Deg C, 100.0 Deg F
limit temperature, below which the heating
supply water valve is proportionally
modulated open during normal control
modes.
Mode Indicates the mode of operation for the Off
module. Set Name: Off/Max/Control
Percent Cmd Controls the heating supply water valve. 0.0%
Percent Request Contains the output requested by the 0.0%
control before being limited based on the
Low Limit Process Variable. This attribute
provides bumpless transfer between state
sections.
Process ID Indicates the type of heating process being ZN-T
controlled by the device when the mode is Set Name: Process ID
Control.
Process Units Specifies the units for the heating PID. For Deg C, Deg F
this particular module, the only two valid Set Name: Unit
values are Deg C and Deg F.
Process Variable Provides the control temperature. 0.0
Setpoint Provides the control temperature setpoint. 0.0
State G Provides the operating state output as Off
determined by the Mode input. Set Name: Off/Max/Control

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1081

Primary States (Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control)
• Off: Set the Percent Request and Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Max: Set the output to maximum. Set the Percent Request and Percent Cmd to
100%
• Control: Adjust the output to control the Process Variable. If the leaving
heating source water temperature drops below the limit, the control valve
opens further to control the leaving water temperature.

1082 CCT Help: Modules

Plant Control

Overview
This module is responsible for controlling a central plant device (for example, a
Boiler, Chiller, or Tower Fan). This module accepts as inputs a mode, command,
on delay, safety, interlock status, interlock off delay, alarm delay, percent
command, ramp time, percent limit, and maintenance switch. Based on the input
command and attribute settings, the module outputs a rotate enable, device onoff,
alarm command, interlock device command, and an output.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Plant Control)
• Attributes (Plant Control)
• Primary States (Plant Control)

Module Use in Applications (Plant Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-351: Plant Control Uses in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Boiler X Control (Where X Is 1-4) Central Heating Applications
Chiller X Control (Where X Is 1-8) Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1083

Attributes (Plant Control)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Plant Control modules:
Table 26-352: Plant Control Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Alarm Indicates the status of the primary device Normal
condition.
Alarm Delay Indicates the value in seconds to wait for 30 Seconds
inputs to clear before generating an alarm.
BLRX-OUTSTATE or G Provides a Binary output to the primary Off
CHX-OUTSTATE controlled device. This attribute is used to
(Device OnOff) start the pump or boiler, for example.
Command Starts the interlock and the device when in False
a Mode of Control. When in a Mode of
Interlock Only, this input starts the
interlock.
Interlock Command Provides a Binary output for the interlock Off
device. This attribute is used to open the
isolation valve or circulation pump, for
example.
Interlock Off Delay Indicates the value in seconds to wait in 300 Seconds
Off Mode before stopping the interlock
device.
Interlock Status Provides a Binary Input from an optional On
interlock device (isolation valve status).
This attribute is used to prevent the
primary device from starting unless status
is On when connected.
Maintenance Switch Provides a Binary Input to disable or Enable
enable the controlled device.
Mode Determines mode of the module. Off
Set Name: Plant Control
On Delay Indicates the time in seconds to wait 20 Seconds
before turning on the Command output in
Control Mode. This attribute is used to
allow interlocked device(s) to activate
before starting the primary device.
Output (Float) V Provides an Analog output for the primary 0.0%
device. This attribute is used to modulate
the boiler burner or load chiller, for
example.
Percent Cmd Provides an Analog Value input to 0.0%
determine the percent operating level of
the controlled device.
Percent Limit Indicates the maximum analog output 100%
value for the controlled device. This
attribute is used to limit the operation of the
analog device.
Ramp Time Indicates the time in minutes that the ramp 20 Minutes
block will take to change from 0 to 100%
output.
Rotate Enable Provides a Binary output that indicates if False
the current device is allowed to run.

1084 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-352: Plant Control Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Safety Provides a Binary Input from an additional On
optional safety device (flow switch). This
attribute is used to prevent the primary
device from starting unless safety is On
when connected.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Plant Control)

• Off: Turns the device off. The Output is set to 0%, the Alarm is set to Off, the
interlock Command is delayed off, and the Command is set to Off.
• Control: Enables the Command Input to start and stop the interlock and the
device.
• Instant Shutdown: Turns the device off immediately. The Output is set to 0%,
the Alarm is set to Off, the interlock Command is off, and the Command is set
to Off. This state is used for Emergency Shutdown only and bypasses all timers
which may cause dangerous conditions.
• Interlock Only: Enables the Command Input to start and stop the interlock.

Output Controller 1085

Pump Control

Overview

IMPORTANT: As of Release 3.1, the Pump Control module is replaced by the

Pump Control v2 module.

The Pump Control module is responsible for controlling a pump. This module
accepts as inputs a mode, a command, an on delay, off delay, a status, an alarm
delay, a percent command, a ramp time, a percent limit, and a maintenance switch.
Based on the input command and attribute settings, the module outputs a rotate
enable, a device on off, an alarm command, and an output.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Pump Control)
• Attributes (Pump Control)
• Primary States (Pump Control)

Module Use in Applications (Pump Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-353: Pump Control Uses in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
CW Pump X Control (Where X Is 1-8) Central Cooling Applications
Primary CHW Pump X Control (Where X Is 1-8) Central Cooling Applications
Primary Pump X Control (Where X Is 1-4) Central Heating Applications
Secondary CHW Pump X Modulating Control Central Cooling Applications
(Where X Is 1-8)
Secondary HW Pump X Control (Where X Is 1- Central Heating Applications
4)

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1086 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Pump Control)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Pump Control modules:
Table 26-354: Pump Control Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Alarm Indicates the status of the primary device Normal
condition.
Alarm Delay Indicates the value in seconds to wait for 30 Seconds
inputs to clear before generating an alarm.
Command Starts or stops the pump when in a Mode False
of Control or Interlock Only.
Maintenance Switch Provides a Binary Input to disable or Enable
enable the controlled device.
Mode Determines the operating mode of the Off
module. Set Name: Plant Control
Off Delay Indicates the time in seconds to wait 300 Seconds
before turning off the Device OnOff output
in Control Mode. This attribute is used to
allow interlocked device(s) to deactivate
before stopping the primary device.
On Delay Indicates the time in seconds to wait 20 Seconds
before turning on the Device OnOff output
in Control Mode. This attribute is used to
allow interlocked device(s) to activate
before starting the primary device.
Output (Float) V Provides an Analog output for the primary 0.0
device. This attribute is used to modulate
variable speed pumps.
Percent Cmd Provides an Analog Value input to 0.0%
determine the percent operating level of
the controlled device.
Percent Limit Provides a maximum analog output value 100%
for the controlled device. This attribute is
used to limit the operation of the analog
device.
PHWP1-OUTSTATE, G Provides a Binary output to the primary Off
SHWP1-OUTSTATE, controlled device. This attribute is used to
CWP1-OUTSTATE, start the pump.
PCHWP1-OUTSTATE,
OR SCHWP1-
OUTSTATE
(Device OnOff)
Pump Status Provides a Binary Input from the primary On
controlled device. This attribute is used as
feedback from the pump.
Ramp Time Indicates the time in minutes that the ramp 20 Minutes
block will take to change from 0 to 100%
output.
Rotate Enable Provides a Binary output that indicates if False
the current device is allowed to run.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1087

Primary States (Pump Control)
• Off: Turns the device off. The Output is set to 0%, the Alarm is set to Off, and
the Device OnOff is delayed off.
• Control: Enables the Command Input to start and stop the device.
• Instant Shutdown: Turns the device off immediately. The Output is set to 0%,
the Alarm is set to Off, and the Device OnOff is set to Off. This state is used
for Emergency Shutdown only and bypasses all timers which may cause
dangerous conditions.
• Interlock Only: Works the same as the Control Mode.

1088 CCT Help: Modules

Pump Control v2

Overview

IMPORTANT: As of Release 3.1, the Pump Control v2 module replaces the

Pump Control module.

The Pump Control module is responsible for controlling a pump. This module
accepts as inputs a mode, a command, an on delay, off delay, a status, an alarm
delay, a percent command, a ramp time, a percent limit, and a maintenance switch.
Based on the input command and attribute settings, the module outputs a rotate
enable, a device on off, an alarm command, and an output.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Pump Control v2)
• Attributes (Pump Control v2)
• Primary States (Pump Control v2)

Module Use in Applications (Pump Control v2)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-355: Pump Control v2 Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
CW Pump X Control v2 (Where X Is 1-8) Central Cooling Applications
Primary CHW Pump X Control v2 (Where X Is Central Cooling Applications
1-8)
Primary Pump X Control v2 (Where X Is 1-4) Central Heating Applications
Secondary CHW Pump X Modulating Control Central Cooling Applications
v2 (Where X Is 1-8)
Secondary HW Pump X Control v2 (Where X Is Central Heating Applications
1-4)

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1089

Attributes (Pump Control v2)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Pump Control modules:
Table 26-356: Pump Control v2 Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Command Starts or stops the pump when in a Mode False
of Control or Interlock Only.
Maintenance Switch Provides a binary input to disable or Enable
enable the controlled device. Set Name: Disable/Enable
Mode Determines the operating mode of the Off
module. Set Name: Plant Control
Off Delay Indicates the time in seconds to wait 300 Seconds
before turning off the Device OnOff output
in Control Mode. This attribute is used to
allow interlocked device(s) to deactivate
before stopping the primary device.
On Delay Indicates the time in seconds to wait 20 Seconds
before turning on the Device OnOff output
in Control Mode. This attribute is used to
allow interlocked device(s) to activate
before starting the primary device.
Output (Float) V Provides an analog output for the primary 0.0%
device. This attribute is used to modulate
variable speed pumps.
Percent Cmd Provides an analog value input to 0.0%
determine the percent operating level of
the controlled device.
Percent Limit Provides a maximum analog output value 100%
for the controlled device. This attribute is
used to limit the operation of the analog
device.
PHWP1-OUTSTATE, G Provides a binary output to the primary Off
SHWP1-OUTSTATE, controlled device. This attribute is used to Set Name: Off/On
CWP1-OUTSTATE, start the pump.
PCHWP1-OUTSTATE,
OR SCHWP1-
OUTSTATE
(Device OnOff)
Ramp Time Indicates the time in minutes that the ramp 1 Minute
block takes to change from 0 to 100%
output.
Rotate Enable Provides a binary output that indicates False
whether the current device is allowed to
run.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1090 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Pump Control v2)
• Off: Turns the device off. The Output is set to 0%, the Alarm is set to Off, and
the Device OnOff is delayed off.
• Control: Enables the Command Input to start and stop the device.
• Instant Shutdown: Turns the device off immediately. The Output is set to 0%,
the Alarm is set to Off, and the Device OnOff is set to Off. This state is used
for Emergency Shutdown only and bypasses all timers which may cause
dangerous conditions.
• Interlock Only: Works the same as the Control Mode.

Output Controller 1091

Rotation Small

Overview
The Rotation Small module provides the same logic as the Sequencer 08 module
(See the Sequencer 01 through Sequencer 16 section.). The Sequencer module
provides multiple stage sequence control. This module is designed to control
discrete systems where the relative capacities of the stages are known. This
module uses relative capacities to determine which outputs to turn on or off. For
example, three boilers with different capacities (x btu, y btu, and z btu) allow for
8 stages of control. The method is based on the split-range control concept and
allows multiple stages to be controlled by a single feedback controller, such as a
PID. This module should be operated continuously (that is, do not place this
module in a hybrid activity because the activity disables all modules associated
with a specific state when that state is not active.)
You cannot view and modify this modules in this group’s logic using CCT
software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Rotation Small)
• Attributes (Rotation Small)
• Primary States (Rotation Small)
• Reliability (Rotation Small)

Module Use in Applications (Rotation Small)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-357: Rotation Small Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Boiler Rotation Small Central Heating Applications
Chiller Rotation Small Central Cooling Applications
CW Pump Rotation Small Central Cooling Applications
Primary CHW Pump Rotation Small Central Cooling Applications
Primary Pump Rotation Small Central Heating Applications
Secondary CHW Pump Rotation Small Central Cooling Applications
Secondary Hot Water Pump Rotation Small Central Heating Applications
Tower Rotation Small Central Cooling Applications

1092 CCT Help: Modules

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Rotation Small)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Rotation Small modules:
Table 26-358: Rotation Small Attributes (Part 1 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Rotation Small Common Attributes
BLRROTATE-STATE, G Identifies the operational state of the Idle
CHROTATE-STATE, sequencer at any given point in time.
CWPROTATE-STATE,
PCHWPROTATE-OUTS
TATE,
PHWPROTATE-STATE,
SHWPROTATE-
OUTSTATE,
SCHWPROTATE-OUTS
TATE, or
CTROTATE-STATE
(Operating State)
BLR-RUNNING, V Indicates the number of active outputs of 0
CH-RUNNING, the sequencer.
CWP-RUNNING,
PCHWP-RUNNING,
PHWP-RUNNING,
SHWP-RUNNING,
SCHWP-RUNNING, or
CT-RUNNING (Current
Stage)
Device X Enable Establishes the enable status of the True
sequencer device outputs. A value of
FALSE takes the associated device out of
service. Only the enables for the number
of outputs are shown. This module is
created with X individual Device X Enable
inputs based on the Number of Outputs.
Device X Out SC Contains the output value for the False
corresponding device. This module is
created with X individual Device X Output
inputs based on Number of Outputs.
Device X Rank Represents the ranking of each device. 0.0
This value establishes the order by which Units: %
the device outputs are activated. Only the
ranks for the number of outputs are shown.
This module is created with X individual
Device X Rank inputs based on Number of
Outputs.

Output Controller 1093

 Table 26-358: Rotation Small Attributes (Part 2 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input Provides a floating value control signal 0.0
input to this module. This input is Min Value: 0.0
compared against the make and break Units: %
limits to determine how many outputs to
activate.
Instant Shutdown Forces all outputs inactive when TRUE. False
When FALSE, the module monitors the
input and stages the outputs. When this
value transitions from FALSE to TRUE, all
of the outputs are deactivated instantly
(ignoring any Minimum On Timers and the
Interstage Off Timer).
Interstage Off Delay Defines the minimum time interval that 0 Seconds
Time must elapse between the sequential
deactivation of multiple Sequencer stages
unless the Instant Shutdown value is
TRUE or the module is disabled.
Interstage On Delay Defines the minimum time interval that 0 Seconds
Time must elapse between the sequential
activation of multiple Sequencer stages.
Interstage Timing SC Provides an indication of when an False
interstage timer is active.
Min Off Time Indicates the minimum time that an output 600 Seconds
must remain off before it can be
reactivated to an on condition following
deactivation. A separate timer is
established for each device output upon
deactivation. Until the time interval expires,
the output is blocked from being
reactivated unless Rotate Now has
transitioned from FALSE to TRUE.
Min On Time Indicates the minimum time interval that an 600 Seconds
output must remain on before it can be
deactivated to an off condition following
activation. A separate timer is established
for each device output upon activation.
Until the time interval expires, the output is
blocked from being deactivated unless the
Instant Shutdown value is TRUE, the
module is disabled, or Rotate Now has
transitioned from FALSE to TRUE.
Rotate Now Provides rising edge activation. This False
attribute retains a value of TRUE until it is
written back to FALSE. Writing this
attribute to TRUE causes an immediate
rotation based on the current ranks.
Boiler Rotation Small and Chiller Rotation Small Attributes
Min On Time Indicates the minimum time interval that an 30 Seconds
output must remain on before it can be
deactivated to an off condition following
activation. A separate timer is established
for each device output upon activation.
Until the time interval expires, the output is
blocked from being deactivated unless the
Instant Shutdown value is TRUE, the
module is disabled, or Rotate Now has
transitioned from FALSE to TRUE.

1094 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-358: Rotation Small Attributes (Part 3 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CW Pump Rotation Small, Primary CHW Pump Rotation Small, Primary Pump Rotation Small,
Secondary Hot Water Pump Rotation Small, Secondary CHW Pump Rotation Small, and Tower Rotation
Small Attributes
Min Off Time Indicates the minimum time that an output 30 Seconds
must remain off before it can be
reactivated to an on condition following
deactivation. A separate timer is
established for each device output upon
deactivation. Until the time interval expires,
the output is blocked from being
reactivated unless Rotate Now has
transitioned from FALSE to TRUE.
Min On Time Indicates the minimum time interval that an 30 Seconds
output must remain on before it can be
deactivated to an off condition following
activation. A separate timer is established
for each device output upon activation.
Until the time interval expires, the output is
blocked from being deactivated unless the
Instant Shutdown value is TRUE, the
module is disabled, or Rotate Now has
transitioned from FALSE to TRUE.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning
Modes Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Rotation Small)

• Idle: Idle State, Satisfied has no change pending.
• Deactivated, Instant Shutdown: Instant Shutdown is True, shutdown is
complete, all outputs are commanded off, and the input value is not being used
to determine the number of required stages.
• Shutdown In-Process: Instant Shutdown is True with a shutdown in progress.
• Staging Up, Interstage On Delay: Needs to stage up and is waiting for
Interstage On Delay to expire.
• Staging Up, Minimum Off Delay: Needs to stage up and is waiting for
Minimum Off Delay to expire.
• Staging Down, Interstage Off Delay: Needs to Stage down and is waiting for
Interstage Off Delay to expire.
• Staging Down, Minimum On Delay: Needs to stage down and is waiting for
Minimum On Delay to expire.

Output Controller 1095

Reliability (Rotation Small)
The reliability associated with the Sequencer module may report the input
unreliable. When the input is unreliable, all outputs hold the last value set when the
input was reliable.
If the Sequencer is unable to stage up or down because the remaining outputs are
disabled, the Sequencer’s reliability is Unreliable.
The Sequencer module provides the following reliability values: Input unreliable,
Unreliable.
This module does not associate any output with the module’s reliability. Therefore,
even though the Reliability may not be equal to Reliable, the outputs from this
module always appear Reliable.

1096 CCT Help: Modules

Secondary Pump PID

Overview
The Secondary Pump PID module controls a proportional source within a control
application. This module accepts the following inputs: a mode, a process variable,
a setpoint, and more. Based on the input mode and parameter settings, the module
outputs a percent command and control status. This module has a delay timer.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Secondary Pump PID)
• Attributes (Secondary Pump PID)
• Primary States (Secondary Pump PID)

Module Use in Applications (Secondary Pump PID)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-359: Secondary Pump PID Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Secondary Chill Water Pump PID v2 Central Cooling Applications
Secondary Hot Water Pump PID v2 Central Heating Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Secondary Pump PID)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Secondary Pump PID
modules:
Table 26-360: Secondary Pump PID Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status Indicates the current status of the module. Overridden
Set Name: Control Status
Delay Indicates the duration of the delay timer. 0.0 seconds

Output Controller 1097

 Table 26-360: Secondary Pump PID Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Direct Acting Signals the action of the PID (True = Direct False
Acting and False = Reverse Acting).
Direct Acting is used in applications where
an increase in the process variable causes
the controller’s present value to increase.
For example, a direct acting control is
temperature control with a cooling coil.
Reverse Acting is used in applications
where an increase in the process variable
causes the controller’s present value to
decrease. For example, reverse acting
control is temperature control with a
heating coil, flow rate control, or static
pressure control applications.
Mode Determines the operating mode of the Control
module. Set Name: Off/Max/Control
Percent Cmd Provides an Analog output to control the 0.0%
single actuator that provides cooling or
heating.
Process ID Specifies the process being controlled. Pump Diff P
See the PID Pre-Processor for details. Set Name: Process ID
Process Range Indicates the magnitude of the range that 40 psi
the PID process variable traverses as the
PID present value varies between its
minimum and maximum values. You do
not need to configure this attribute except
for when the Process ID equals Airflow or
Airflow Diff. When this occurs, configure
this attribute to the designed maximum
flow rate of the controlled device. For other
Process ID values, the effective process
range is automatically found in the
standards table.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. psi
Set Name: Unit
Process Variable When commanded to Control, this is the 10 psi
variable under control. This variable is
typically connected to the Zone
Temperature
Setpoint Indicates the desired setpoint for the 10 psi
process variable being controlled (when
commanded to Control).
State G Indicates the state of the device. Control
Set Name: Off/Max/Control

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Secondary Pump PID)

• Off: Sets the Common Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Max: Sets the output for maximum and sets the Percent Cmd to 100%.
• Control: Adjusts the output to control the process variable. If the process
variable is reliable, the module controls the output to maintain the process
variable at the setpoint.

1098 CCT Help: Modules

Sequenced Output

Overview
The Sequenced Output module takes one proportional output and spans it over two
proportional outputs. This module accepts as inputs an Input (float) and a Valve 1
Percent Capacity. Based on the input commands, the module outputs two
proportional outputs.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Sequenced Output)
• Attributes (Sequenced Output)

Module Use in Applications (Sequenced Output)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-361: Sequenced Output Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
HX1 Multi Valve Span Central Heating Applications
HX2 Multi Valve Span Central Heating Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Sequenced Output)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Sequenced Output
modules:
Table 26-362: Sequenced Output Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input (Float) Provides the variable that comes from the 0%
PID that is spanned across two outputs.
Valve 1 Percent Indicates the capacity of the first valve, in 33.3%
Capacity percent.
Valve 1 Percent Cmd V Provides an output from the span. 0%
Valve 2 Percent Cmd V Provides an output from the span. 0%

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1099

Tower Control

Overview

IMPORTANT: As of Release 3.1, the Tower Control module is replaced by

the Tower Control v2 module.

The Tower Control module controls a single or multiple speed cooling tower fan.
This module accepts as inputs a mode, a command, a speed 2, a speed 3, a fan
status, an on delay, a safety, an alarm delay, a percent command, a ramp time, a
percent limit, and a maintenance switch. Based upon the input command and
attribute settings, the module outputs a rotate enable, a fan onoff, a fan onoff x
(where x is 1-3), an alarm command, and an output.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Tower Control)
• Attributes (Tower Control)

Module Use in Applications (Tower Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-363: Tower Control Uses in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Tower Fan X Control (Where X Is 1-8) Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1100 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Tower Control)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Tower Control modules:
Table 26-364: Tower Control Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Alarm Indicates the status of the primary device Normal
condition. Set Name: Normal/Alarm
Alarm Delay Indicates the value in seconds to wait for 30
inputs to clear before generating an alarm. Display Units: Seconds
Command Starts the Fan OnOff 1 when in a Mode of False
On. Boolean
Device OnOff Provides a Binary output to the primary Off
controlled device and indicates if any fan Set Name: Off/On
output is on.
Device OnOff 1 Provides a Binary output to the primary Off
controlled device and is used to start the Set Name: Off/On
Single or Low Speed Tower Fan.
Device OnOff 2 Provides a Binary output to the primary Off
controlled device and is used to start the Set Name: Off/On
Medium Speed Tower Fan.
Device OnOff 3 Provides a Binary output to the primary Off
controlled device and is used to start the Set Name: Off/On
High Speed Tower Fan.
Fan Status Provides a Binary Input from fans. On
Set Name: Off/On
Maintenance Switch Provides a Binary Input to disable or Enable
enable the controlled device. Set Name: Disable Enable
Mode Indicates the outdoor air temperature. Off
Set Name: Off/On
On Delay Indicates the time in seconds to wait 20
before turning on the Command output in Display Units: Seconds
Control Mode. This attribute is used to
allow interlocked device(s) to activate
before starting a primary device.
Output (Float) V Provides an Analog output for the primary 0
device and is used to modulate the boiler Display Units: %
burner, and load chiller, for example.
Percent Cmd Provides an Analog Value input to 0
determine the percent operating level of Display Units: %
the controlled device.
Percent Limit Provides a maximum analog output value 100
for the controlled device and is used to Display Units: %
limit the operation of an analog device.

Output Controller 1101

 Table 26-364: Tower Control Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Ramp Time Indicates the time in minutes the ramp 1
block will take to change from 0 to 100% Display Units: Minutes
output.
Rotate Enable Provides a Binary output that determines if False
the current device is allowed to run. Boolean
Safety Provides a Binary Input from an additional On
optional safety device (flow switch). This Set Name: Off/On
attribute is used to prevent a primary
device from starting unless the safety is
On when connected.
Speed 2 Starts the Fan OnOff 2 when in a Mode of False
On. Boolean
Speed3 Starts the Fan OnOff 3 when in a Mode of False
On. Boolean

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1102 CCT Help: Modules

Tower Control v2

Overview

IMPORTANT: As of Release 3.1, the Tower Control v2 module replaces the

Tower Control module.

The Tower Control module controls a single or multiple speed cooling tower fan.
This module accepts as inputs a mode, a command, a speed 2, a speed 3, a delay, a
safety, a percent command, a ramp time, a percent limit, and a maintenance switch.
Based upon the input command and attribute settings, the module outputs a rotate
enable, a fan onoff, a fan onoff x (where x is 1-3), and an output.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Tower Control v2)
• Attributes (Tower Control v2)
• Primary States (Tower Control v2)

Module Use in Applications (Tower Control v2)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-365: Tower Control v2 Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Tower Fan X Control v2 (Where X Is 1-8) Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1103

Attributes (Tower Control v2)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Tower Control modules:
Table 26-366: Tower Control v2 Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Command Starts the Fan OnOff 1 when in a Mode of False
On.
Delay Indicates the time in seconds to wait 5 Seconds
before turning on the Command output in
Control Mode. This attribute is used to
allow interlocked device(s) to activate
before starting a primary device.
Device OnOff G Provides a binary output to the primary Off
controlled device and indicates whether Set Name: Off/On
any fan output is on.
Device OnOff 1 Provides a binary output to the primary Off
controlled device and is used to start the Set Name: Off/On
Single or Low Speed Tower Fan.
Device OnOff 2 Provides a binary output to the primary Off
controlled device and is used to start the Set Name: Off/On
Medium Speed Tower Fan.
Device OnOff 3 Provides a binary output to the primary Off
controlled device and is used to start the Set Name: Off/On
High Speed Tower Fan.
Maintenance Switch Provides a binary input to disable or Enable
enable the controlled device. Set Name: Disable Enable
Mode Indicates the mode of operation for the Off
device. Set Name: Off/On
Output (Float) V Provides an analog output for the primary 0.0%
device and is used to modulate the boiler
burner and load chiller, for example.
Percent Cmd Provides an analog value input to 0.0%
determine the percent operating level of
the controlled device.
Percent Limit Provides a maximum analog output value 100%
for the controlled device and is used to
limit the operation of an analog device.
Ramp Time Indicates the time in minutes the ramp 1 Minute
block takes to change from 0 to 100%
output.
Rotate Enable Provides a binary output that determines False
whether the current device is allowed to
run.
Safety Provides a binary input from an additional On
optional safety device (flow switch). This Set Name: Off/On
attribute is used to prevent a primary
device from starting unless the safety is
On when connected.
Speed 2 Starts the Fan OnOff 2 when in a Mode of False
On.

1104 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-366: Tower Control v2 Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Speed3 Starts the Fan OnOff 3 when in a Mode of False
On.
State V Provide an Enum Output to indicate the Off
operating mode of the module. Set Name: Off Low Med Hi

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Tower Control v2)

• Off: Turn the device off. Set the Output to 0%, set the Alarm to Off, delay off
the interlock Command, and set the Command to Off.
• On: Enable the inputs to start and stop the device.

Output Controller 1105

Damper Control
Overview
The Damper Control output controllers provide for outdoor and return economizer
dampers control of the process variable at the setpoint. The output controllers also
provide for low limit control. The module for Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2,
or W provide specific sequencing to meet the ASHRAE cycles 1, 2, or W for unit
ventilators.
Damper Control contains the following modules:
• Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W
• Damper Control with Low Limit

Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W

Overview
This module is responsible for outside air damper control for Unit Ventilator zone
control applications. The module accepts as inputs; a mode, a process variable, a
setpoint, a low limit process variable, and a low limit setpoint. The module outputs
a percent command and the control status based on the input mode and parameter
settings.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W)
• Attributes (Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W)
• Primary States (Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W)

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names the following table.
Table 26-367: Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional Unit Vent 1 Damper Control Unit Ventilator Application
Proportional Unit Vent 2-W Damper Control Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1106 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Damper Control for UV
Cycle 1, 2, or W module.
Table 26-368: Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status V Displays the current status of the controller for Set Name: Control Status
damper control.
Cooling Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the process 22 Deg C, 72 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
Control Econ.
Heating Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the process 20 Deg C, 68 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
Control Min.
Low Limit Process Specifies that when Mode is Control Econ Limit 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
Variable or Control Min Limit, this is the variable that is
controlled. Typically connected to the DA
Temperature.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the process 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
Control Econ Limit or Control Min Limit.
MAD-OUTSTATE V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Set Name: UV Damper
(State) output controller. Control Mode
Minimum OA Position Display the desired minimum for the Percent 10%
Cmd.
Mode Indicates the desired state. Close
Set Name: UV Damper
Control Mode
Percent Cmd V Controls the single actuator that is modulating Display Units: %
the OA Damper.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when Mode is Control Econ or 22 Deg C, 72 Deg F
Control Min, this is the variable that is to be
controlled. Typically connected to the Zone
Temperature.
Proof of Airflow Specifies that when set to True, the controller TRUE
operates as normal. When set to False or Fault,
the controller transitions to the close state.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1107

Primary States (Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W)
• Open: Sets the output for maximum outdoor air. The Percent Cmd is set to
100%.
• Close: Sets the output for zero outdoor air. The Percent Cmd is set to 0%.
• Min: Sets the output for minimum outdoor air. The Percent Cmd is set to
Minimum OA Pos.
• Hold: Keeps the outputs at their current position.
• Control Econ: Adjusts the output to control the Process Variable. The Percent
Cmd is adjusted between Minimum OA Pos and 100%.
• Control Min: Adjusts the output to control the Process Variable. The Percent
Cmd is adjusted between 0% and Minimum OA Pos.
• Control Econ Limit: Adjusts the output to control the Low Limit Process
Variable. The Percent Cmd is adjusted between Minimum OA Pos and 100%.
• Control Min Limit: Adjusts the output to control the Low Limit Process
Variable. The Percent Cmd is adjusted between 0% and Minimum OA Pos.
Table 26-369: Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W Command
Hierarchy
Proof of Airflow Mode State
Fault * Close
FALSE * Close
TRUE Close Close
Open Open
Min Min
Hold Hold
Control Econ Control Econ
Control Min Control Min
Control Econ Limit Control Econ Limit
Control Min Limit Control Min Limit

1108 CCT Help: Modules

Damper Control with Low Limit

Overview
This module is responsible for outside air damper control. It is used by two
applications, the Unit Ventilator ASHRAE Cycle 3 zone control application and
the Heat Pump application. When in the Control Limit mode, the module selects
the minimum percent command from the normal control and the low limit control
to position the OA Damper. The module accepts inputs in the form of a mode,
process variable, setpoint, low limit process variable, and low limit setpoint. The
module outputs a percent command and the control status based on the input mode
and parameter settings.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Damper Control with Low Limit)
• Attributes (Damper Control with Low Limit)
• Primary States (Damper Control with Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control with Low Limit)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-370: Damper Control with Low Limit Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional Damper Output Heat Pump Application
Proportional Unit Vent 3 Damper Control Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1109

Attributes (Damper Control with Low Limit)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Damper Control with Low
Limit module.
Table 26-371: Damper Control with Low Limit Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status V Indicates the current status of the controller for Set Name: Control Status
damper control.
Low Limit Process ID Indicates the process type that is represented DA-T
by the Low Limit Process Variable. Set Name: Process ID
Low Limit Process Specifies that when Mode is Control Econ 20 Deg C, 68 Deg F
Variable Limit, this is the variable that is to be controlled.
For the Heat Pump this is typically the
Discharge Air Temperature. For the Unit
Ventilator this is typically the Zone
Temperature.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the process 20 Deg C, 68 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
Control Limit.
MAD-OUTSTATE V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Set Name: COM Damper
(State) output controller. Control Mode
Minimum OA Position Contains the desired minimum for the Percent 10.0%
Cmd.
Mode Indicates the desired state. Close
Set Name: COM Damper
Control Mode
Percent Cmd V Used to control the single actuator that is Display Units: %
modulating the OA Damper.
Process ID Indicates the process type that is represented ZN-T
by the Process Variable. Set Name: Process ID
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when Mode is Control Econ, this 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
is the variable that is to be controlled. For the
Heat Pump this is typically the Zone
Temperature. For the Unit Ventilator this is
typically the Mixed Air Temperature.
Proof of Airflow Specifies that when set to True, the controller True
operates as normal. When set to False or Fault,
the controller transitions to the close state.
Setpoint Displays the Mixed Air Temperature setpoint 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
for Unit Ventilator and Zone Temperature
Setpoint for Heat Pump.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1110 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Damper Control with Low Limit)
• Open: Sets the output for maximum outdoor air. The Percent Cmd is set to
100%.
• Close: Sets the output for zero outdoor air. The Percent Cmd is set to 0%.
• Min: Sets the output for minimum outdoor air. The Percent Cmd is set to
Minimum OA Pos.
• Hold: Keeps the outputs at their current position.
• Control Econ: Adjusts the output to control the Process Variable. The Percent
Cmd is adjusted between Minimum OA Pos and 100%.
• Control Min: Adjusts the output to control the Process Variable. The Percent
Cmd is adjusted between 0% and Minimum OA Pos.
• Control Econ Limit: Adjusts the output to control the Low Limit Process
Variable. The Percent Cmd is adjusted between Minimum OA Pos and 100%.
• Control Min Limit: Adjusts the output to control the Low Limit Process
Variable. The Percent Cmd is adjusted between 0% and Minimum OA Pos.
Table 26-372: Damper Control with Low Limit Command Hierarchy -
Command Hierarchy (Enum Output)
Proof Of Airflow Process Variable Mode State
Is Reliable
Fault * * Close
FALSE * * Close
TRUE FALSE * Close
TRUE Close Close
Open Open
Min Min
Hold Hold
Control Econ Control Econ
Control Econ Limit Control Econ Limit

Output Controller 1111

Damper Control - AHU Econ
Overview
The AHU Damper Control output controllers provide for control of the outdoor,
return, and exhaust economizer dampers to control the process variable at the
setpoint. These output controllers also provide integrated logic for low limit
control.
The Damper Control - AHU Econ group contains the following modules:
• Damper Control for Economizer
• Damper Control for Relief Fan
• Damper Control for Volume Matching

Damper Control for Economizer

Overview
This module controls the Exhaust Air Damper (EAD), Outdoor Air Damper
(OAD), and the Return Air Damper (RAD). The module is designed so that the
EAD and OAD positions are the same, and the RAD position is complementary
(the sum of the RAD and OAD positions is 100%). The module has functions for
economizer control and low limit control of the dampers. It also has functions to
ramp the damper to minimum position and maximum position. The module also
accepts commands for pressurize, depressurize, and purge. In the normal control
modes, the damper control is modulated closed as the Low Limit Process Variable
drops below the Low Limit Setpoint.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for Economizer)
• Attributes (Damper Control for Economizer)
• Primary States (Damper Control for Economizer)
• Reliability (Damper Control for Economizer)

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for Economizer)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-373: Damper Control for Economizer Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional OA Damper Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

1112 CCT Help: Modules

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Damper Control for Economizer)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Damper Control for
Economizer modules.
Table 26-374: Damper Control for Economizer Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Damper Control Status V Contains the PID Status, and the possible Normal
values are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Low, Set Name: Control Status
Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Exhaust Percent Cmd V Controls the exhaust air damper. The exhaust 0%
air damper is commanded from 0% to 100%.
Low Limit Process Contains the low limit temperature process 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
Variable variable. This temperature is usually the mixed
air temperature or the preheat air temperature.
Low Limit Proportional Specifies the range across which the damper is 5 Deg C, 9 Deg F
Band proportionally modulated shut as the Low Limit
Process Variable drops below the Low Limit
Setpoint.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the upper threshold for the low limit 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
temperature, below which the damper is
proportionally modulated shut during normal
control modes.
MAD-OUTSTATE V, G Displays the operating state as determined by Close
(State) the Mode input. Set Name: AHU OA Damper
Control
Minimum OA Position Defines the minimum position for the OAD and 0.0%
the EAD.
Mode Contains the desired mode of operation Close
Set Name: AHU OA Damper
Control
OA Percent Cmd V Controls the outdoor air damper. The outdoor 0%
air damper is commanded from 0% to 100%.
Process ID Contains the type of cooling process that this DA-T
output controller is controlling when the mode Set Name: Process ID
is T Control.
Process Units Specifies the units for the cooling PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Contains the control temperature. Either Zone 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
temperature, discharge air temperature, or
return air temperature may be connected to this
input.

Output Controller 1113

 Table 26-374: Damper Control for Economizer Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Ramp Rate Defines the rate of change in damper position. 50.0 Change per minute
This input is used in the Ramp Min OA and
Ramp Open state.
Return Percent Cmd V Controls the return air damper. The return air 0%
damper is commanded from 0% to 100%.
Setpoint Displays the control temperature setpoint. 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Damper Control for Economizer)

• Pressurize: This mode opens the OAD and closes the RAD and EAD.
• Depressurize: This mode opens the EAD and closes the RAD and OAD.
• Close: This mode opens the RAD and closes the EAD and OAD.
• Purge: This mode opens the EAD and OAD and closes the RAD.
• Min OA: This mode puts the EAD and OAD to minimum position. The RAD
is 100% - Min Pos.
• Hold: This mode holds the dampers in their last position.
• Ramp Min OA: This mode ramps the EAD and OAD to Min Pos at a
controlled ramp rate. The RAD position is the complement of the EAD
position.
• Ramp Open: This mode ramps the EAD and OAD open at a controlled ramp
rate. The RAD position is the complement of the EAD position.
• T Control: This is the free cooling mode. The OAD is modulated to allow
outdoor air for cooling purposes. The EAD position is the same as the OAD
position, and the RAD position is the complement of the OAD position. The
OAD and EAD modulate between the minimum position and 100%.

Reliability (Damper Control for Economizer)

The inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.

1114 CCT Help: Modules

Damper Control for Relief Fan

Overview
This module controls the Outdoor Air Damper (OAD) and Return Air Damper
(RAD) in a system with a relief fan. The module is designed so that OAD and the
RAD are staged as shown in the following figure and ASHRAE Guideline16-2003 -
Selecting Outdoor, Return, and Relief Dampers for Air-Side Economizer Systems.
Figure 26-28: Dampers Staged for Control with a Relief Fan

100%

Outdoor Air Return Air

Damper Position Damper Position
Damper Positions

Minimum
Position

FIG:Damper Control Relief Fan

0%

0% 50% 100%

Percentage of Outdoor Air

For temperature control modes, the OAD modulates from minimum position to
100%, Once the OAD is 100% open, the RAD modulates from 100% to 0%. The
module has functions for economizer control and low limit control of the dampers.
It also has functions to ramp the dampers to minimum position and maximum
position. The module also accepts commands for pressurize, depressurize, and
purge.

Output Controller 1115

 For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for Relief Fan)
• Attributes (Damper Control for Relief Fan)
• Primary States (Damper Control for Relief Fan)
• Reliability (Damper Control for Relief Fan)

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for Relief Fan)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-375: Damper Control for Relief Fan Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional OA Damper Control for Relief AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
Fan AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1116 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Damper Control for Relief Fan)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Damper Control for Relief
Fan modules.
Table 26-376: Damper Control for Relief Fan Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Damper Control Status V Contains the PID Status, and the possible Normal
values are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Low, Set Name: Control Status
Timing Low, High, and Timing High
Low Limit Process Contains the low limit temperature process 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
Variable variable. This temperature is usually the mixed
air temperature or the preheat air temperature.
Low Limit Proportional Specifies the range across which the damper is 5 Deg C, 9 Deg F
Band proportionally modulated shut as the Low Limit
Process Variable drops below the Low Limit
Setpoint.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the low limit temperature setpoint. 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
MAD-OUTSTATE V, G Displays the operating state as determined by Close
(State) the Mode input. Set Name: AHU OA Damper
Control
Minimum OA Position Defines the minimum position for the OAD. 0%
Mode Displays the desired mode of operation. Close
Set Name: AHU OA Damper
Control
OA Percent Cmd V Controls the outdoor air damper. The outdoor 0%
air damper is commanded from 0% to 100%.
Process ID Contains the type of cooling process that this DA-T
output controller is controlling when the mode is Set Name: Process ID
T Control.
Process Units Specifies the units for the cooling PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Contains the control temperature. Either Zone 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
temperature, discharge air temperature, or
return air temperature may be connected to this
input.
Ramp Rate Defines the rate of change in damper position. 50 Change per Minute
This input is used in the Ramp Min OA and
Ramp Open.
Return Percent Cmd V Controls the return air damper. The return air 0%
damper is commanded from 0% to 100%.
Setpoint Displays the control temperature setpoint. 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1117

Primary States (Damper Control for Relief Fan)
• Pressurize: This mode opens the OAD and closes the RAD.
• Depressurize: This mode closes the RAD and OAD.
• Close: This mode opens the RAD and closes the OAD.
• Purge: This mode opens the OAD and closes the RAD.
• Min OA: This mode moves the OAD and RAD to the appropriate position for
minimum outdoor air flow.
• Hold: This mode holds the dampers in their last position.
• Ramp Min OA: This mode ramps the OAD to the minimum position and
ramps the RAD to 100%.
• Ramp Open: This mode ramps the OAD to 100% and the RAD to 0%.
• T Control: This is the free cooling mode. The OAD and the RAD is
modulated to allow outdoor air for cooling purposes. The OAD modulates
from minimum position to 100%. If more outdoor air is required, the RAD
modulates from 100% to 0%.

Reliability (Damper Control for Relief Fan)

The inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.

1118 CCT Help: Modules

Damper Control for Volume Matching

Overview
This module controls the Exhaust Air Damper (EAD), Outdoor Air Damper
(OAD), and the Return Air Damper (RAD). The module controls air flow by
modulating the EAD instead of the OAD; therefore, the EAD is modulated, the
OAD is controlled like a 2-position damper, and the RAD position becomes the
complement of the EAD position. Controlling the dampers in this fashion (with
Return Fan Volume Matching Control) helps make sure that all outdoor air drawn
into the unit comes through the outdoor air damper (and is not drawn in through
the exhaust damper).
The module has functions for economizer and low limit control. It also has
functions to ramp the damper to minimum position, and maximum position. The
module also accepts commands for pressurize, depressurize, and purge.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for Volume Matching)
• Attributes (Damper Control for Volume Matching)
• Primary States (Damper Control for Volume Matching)
• Reliability (Damper Control for Volume Matching)

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for Volume Matching)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-377: Damper Control for Volume Matching Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional EA Damper Control for Volume AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
Matching AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1119

Attributes (Damper Control for Volume Matching)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Damper Control for
Volume Matching modules.
Table 26-378: Damper Control for Volume Matching Attributes (Part 1 of
2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Damper Control Status V Contains the PID Status, and the possible Normal
values are normal, overridden, disabled, Set Name: Control Status
low, timing low, high, and timing high.
Exhaust Percent Cmd V Controls the exhaust air damper. The 0%
exhaust air damper is commanded from
0% to 100%.
Low Limit Delay Defines the time the OA OpenClose 180 Seconds
damper remains closed once the low limit
process variable rises above the low limit
setpoint minus the deadband. This low
limit delay only applies to a two position
damper.
Low Limit Process Displays the low limit temperature process 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
Variable variable. This temperature is usually the
mixed air temperature or the preheat air
temperature.
Low Limit Proportional Displays the range across which the 5 Deg C, 9 Deg F
Band damper is proportionally modulated shut
as the Low Limit Process Variable drops
below the Low Limit Setpoint.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the upper threshold for the low 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
limit temperature, below which the damper
is proportionally modulated shut during
normal control modes.
MAD-OUTSTATE V, G Represents the current module mode of Close
(State) operation. Set Name: AHU OA Damper
Control
Minimum EA Position Defines the minimum position for the EAD. 0%
Mode Contains the desired mode of operation. Close
Set Name: AHU OA Damper
Control
OA OpenClose V Controls the two position outdoor air Close
damper. The outdoor air damper is Set Name: Close/Open
commanded open or close.
OA Percent Cmd V Controls the proportional outdoor air 0%
damper. The outdoor air damper is
commanded from 0% to 100%.
Process ID Contains the type of cooling process that DA-T
this output controller is controlling when Set Name: Process ID
the mode is T Control.
Process Units Specifies the units for the cooling PID. For Deg C, Deg F
this particular module, Deg C and Deg F Set Name: Unit
are the only two valid values.
Process Variable Contains the control temperature. Either 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
Zone temperature, discharge air
temperature, or return air temperature may
be connected to this input.

1120 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-378: Damper Control for Volume Matching Attributes (Part 2 of
2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Ramp Rate Defines the rate of change in damper 50 Change per Minute
position. This input is used in the Ramp
Min OA and Ramp Open state.
Return Percent Cmd V Controls the return air damper. The return 0%
air damper is commanded from 0% to
100%.
Setpoint Contains the control temperature setpoint. 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Damper Control for Volume Matching)

• Pressurize: This mode opens the OAD and closes the RAD and EAD.
• Depressurize: This mode opens the EAD and closes the RAD and OAD.
• Close: This mode opens the RAD and closes the EAD and OAD.
• Purge: This mode opens the EAD and OAD and closes the RAD.
• Min OA: This mode closes the EAD. The RAD and OAD are 100% open. This
is done to prevent air from entering the building through the exhaust air
damper.
• Hold: This mode holds the dampers in their last position.
• Ramp Min OA: This mode ramps the EAD closed and the OAD open at a
controlled ramp rate. The RAD position is the complement of the EAD
position.
• Ramp Open: This mode ramps the EAD open at a controlled ramp rate. The
RAD position is the complement of the EAD position, and the OAD is at a
fixed 100% position.
• T Control: This is the free cooling state. The EAD is modulated to allow
outdoor air for cooling purposes. The OAD position is fixed at 100%, and the
RAD position is the complement of the EAD position.

Reliability (Damper Control for Volume Matching)

The inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.

Output Controller 1121

Damper Control - AHU Min OA
Overview
The AHU Min OA output controllers provide support for two position or variable
dampers and two position and variable capacity fans.
The Damper Control - AHU Min OA group contains the following modules:
• Min OA Damper 2 Position
• Min OA Damper Proportional Output
• Min OA Fan Constant Capacity
• Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control

Min OA Damper 2 Position

Overview
This module controls a 2 position damper. The module accepts a mode input a well
as inputs for low limit protection. It has an output to command the damper open or
close.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Min OA Damper 2 Position)
• Attributes (Min OA Damper 2 Position)
• Primary States (Min OA Damper 2 Position)
• Reliability (Min OA Damper 2 Position)

Module Use in Applications (Min OA Damper 2 Position)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-379: Min OA Damper 2 Position Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Packaged Economizer Control AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Two Position Exhaust Damper Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
Two Position Min OA Damper Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

1122 CCT Help: Modules

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Min OA Damper 2 Position)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Min OA Damper 2
Position modules.
Table 26-380: Min OA Damper 2 Position Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Damper OpenClose V Contains the control signal for the Damper Close
output. The enumeration set only has two Set Name: Close/Open
values, Close and Open.
DAMPER-OUTSTATE V, G Represents the current module mode of Close
or MOAD-OUTSTATE operation. Set Name: Close/Open/Hold
(State)
Low Limit Delay Defines the time the damper remains closed 180 Seconds
once the low limit process variable rises above
the low limit setpoint minus the Low Limit
Proportional Band.
Low Limit Process Contains the low limit temperature process 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
Variable variable. This temperature is usually the mixed
air temperature or the preheat air temperature.
Low Limit Proportional Specifies the amount below the Low Limit 0 Deg C, 0 Deg F
Band Setpoint that the Low Limit Process Variable is
allowed to fall before the damper closes.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the upper threshold for the low limit 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
process function.
Mode Displays the desired mode of operation. Close
Set Name: AHU Two Pos
Damper

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1123

Primary States (Min OA Damper 2 Position)
• Close: The output is commanded close.
• Open: The output is commanded open, but it is closed during low limit
conditions.
• Emergency Open: This command opens the minimum OA damper.
• Hold: When commanded to this mode of operation, the module outputs retain
their last values.
Table 26-381: Min OA Damper 2 Position Command Hierarchy
Mode Damper Lockout State
Close * Close
Open TRUE Open
FALSE Close
Emergency Open * Open
Hold * Hold

The Damper Lockout is False when the low limit process variable is less then the
low limit setpoint, or it is false when the low limit process variable is unreliable.
While damper lockout is false, the damper may not open.

Reliability (Min OA Damper 2 Position)

If the low limit process variable is unreliable, the damper closes unless
commanded to Emergency Open. All other inputs use their last reliable value
while unreliable.

1124 CCT Help: Modules

Min OA Damper Proportional Output

Overview
This module is designed to control a proportional minimum outdoor air damper.
The module is used to provide a minimum outdoor air flow. During normal
operation, the minimum OA damper is either closed or at its operational position.
The module also accepts a Mode input, a minimum OA position input which
allows the minimum OA damper position to be reset externally, and a ramp rate
input. The module outputs a 0% to 100% control signal to a proportional minimum
OA damper.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Min OA Damper Proportional Output)
• Attributes (Min OA Damper Proportional Output)
• Primary States (Min OA Damper Proportional Output)
• Reliability (Min OA Damper Proportional Output)

Module Use in Applications (Min OA Damper Proportional Output)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 26-382: Min OA Damper Proportional Output Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional Damper Minimum OA Flow AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
Control AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1125

Attributes (Min OA Damper Proportional Output)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Min OA Damper
Proportional Output modules.
Table 26-383: Min OA Damper Proportional Output Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Damper Percent Cmd V Contains the analog signal for the 0%
minimum OA damper, it is used to
command the minimum OA damper
position. This output can range from 0% to
100%.
Low Limit Process Displays the low limit temperature process 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
Variable variable. This temperature is usually the
mixed air temperature or the preheat air
temperature.
Low Limit Proportional Defines the temperature range where the 5 Deg C, 9 Deg F
Band damper is proportionally modulated to
control the mixed air temperature to the
low limit temperature setpoint.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the upper threshold for the low 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
limit process function. When the low limit
process variable is above this
temperature, the damper may be
modulated to provide adequate levels of
outdoor air. Below this setpoint, outdoor air
levels may be limited by modulating the
damper closed to control the low limit
process variable to the low limit setpoint.
Minimum OA Position Defines the minimum OA damper position. 90%
MOAD-OUTSTATE V, G Indicates the current operational mode of Close
(State) the output controller. Set Name: AHU MinOAD
Mode
Mode Contains the desired mode of operation. Close
Set Name: AHU MinOAD
Mode
Ramp Rate Defines the rate of change in damper 50 Change per Minute
position. This input is used in the Ramp
Min OA and Ramp Closed modes.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1126 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Min OA Damper Proportional Output)
• Close: This command closes the minimum OA damper.
• Open: This command opens the minimum OA damper.
• Emergency Open: This command opens the minimum OA damper. While in
this mode of operation, the low limit reset factor is ignored.
• Min OA: The minimum OA damper is opened to its minimum position when
commanded to this mode.
• Ramp Min OA: The minimum OA damper ramps to its minimum position
when commanded to this mode of operation.
• Ramp Closed: The minimum OA damper ramps to closed when commanded
to this mode of operation.

Reliability (Min OA Damper Proportional Output)

If the low limit process variable is unreliable, the damper closes unless
commanded to Emergency Open. All other inputs use their last reliable value
while unreliable.

Output Controller 1127

Min OA Fan Constant Capacity

Overview
This module controls a minimum OA damper and a minimum OA injection fan.
Both components are two position devices.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity)
• Attributes (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity)
• Primary States (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity)
• Reliability (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity)

Module Use in Applications (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 26-384: Min OA Fan Constant Capacity Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Constant Capacity Fan Minimum OA Flow AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
Control AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1128 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Min OA Fan Constant
Capacity modules.
Table 26-385: Min OA Fan Constant Capacity Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Damper Delay Allows the damper to start opening before the 30 Seconds
fan is energized. The damper delay defines the
amount of time between the damper opening
and the fan starting.
Damper OpenClose Contains the control signal for the minimum OA Close
damper. The enumeration set only has two Set Name: Close/Open
values, Close and Open.
Fan OnOff Contains the control signal for the minimum Off
injection fan. The enumeration set only has two Set Name: Off/On
values, Off and On.
Low Limit Delay Defines the time the damper remains closed 180 Seconds
once the low limit process variable rises above
the low limit setpoint.
Low Limit Process Contains the low limit temperature process 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
Variable variable. This temperature is usually the mixed
air temperature or the preheat air temperature.
Low Limit Setpoint Indicates the threshold for the low limit process 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
function. When the low limit process variable is
above this temperature, the damper and fan
may be turned on to provide adequate levels of
outdoor air. Below this setpoint, outdoor air
levels may be limited by turning off the fan and
damper until the low limit process variable
remains above the setpoint for the Low Limit
Delay.
MOA-OUTSTATE Indicates the current operational mode of the No Flow
(State) Output Controller. Set Name: AHU MinOA Fan
State
Mode Displays the desired mode of operation. No Flow
Set Name: AHU MinOA Fan
Mode

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1129

Primary States (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity)
• No Flow: This mode closes the OAD, and it de-energizes the minimum
injection fan.
• Max Flow: This mode opens the OAD, and it energizes the minimum injection
fan.
• Start: This mode opens the OAD, and the minimum injection fan is off. This
mode is used to sequence the damper and the fan to ensure the damper is
opening before the fan is energized.
Table 26-386: Min OA Fan Constant Capacity Command Hierarchy
Mode Min Flow Control Damper Ready State
Enable
Emergency Flow * TRUE Max Flow
FALSE Start
No Flow * * No Flow
Max Flow TRUE TRUE Max Flow
FALSE Start
FALSE * No Flow

The Min Flow Control Enable Input indicates that the damper may be opened, and
the fan may be energized. This input is True when the Low Limit Process variable
is reliable, and it is more than the Low Limit Setpoint.
The Damper Ready input indicates that the damper has started to open, the damper
delay has expired, and the fan is now allowed to start.

Reliability (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity)

If the low limit process variable is unreliable, the damper closes unless
commanded to Emergency Open. All other inputs use their last reliable value
while unreliable.

1130 CCT Help: Modules

Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control

Overview
This module controls a two position minimum outdoor air damper and a variable
capacity minimum outdoor air injection fan. The two components are used to
provide and control a minimum outdoor air flow. The module accepts a mode
input, a flow and flow setpoint input, and an unreliable mode input which defines
the module behavior when the flow sensor is unreliable. The module has a binary
control output for the minimum OA damper, a binary and an analog output for the
injection fan, and an output which gives PID status information.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control)
• Attributes (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control)
• Primary States (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control)
• Reliability (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control)

Module Use in Applications (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-387: Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Variable Capacity Fan Minimum OA Flow AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
Control AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1131

Attributes (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Min OA Fan Variable
Capacity Flow Control modules:
Table 26-388: Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control Attributes (Part
1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Damper Delay Allows the damper to start opening before 30 Seconds
the fan is energized. The damper delay
defines the amount of time between the
damper opening and the fan starting.
Damper OpenClose Contains the control signal for the Close
minimum OA damper. The enumeration Set Name: Close/Open
set only has two values, Close and Open.
Fan OnOff Displays the binary signal for the minimum Off
injection fan. The enumeration set only has Set Name: Off/On
two values, Off and On.
Fan Percent Cmd Displays the analog signal for the minimum 0%
injection fan, it is used to command a fan
speed. This output can range from 0% to
100%.
Low Limit Delay Defines the time the damper remains 180 Seconds
closed once the low limit process variable
rises above the low limit setpoint minus the
deadband.
Low Limit Process Specifies the low limit temperature process 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
Variable variable. This temperature is usually the
mixed air temperature or the preheat air
temperature.
Low Limit Proportional Defines the temperature range where the 5 Deg C, 9 Deg F
Band damper is proportionally modulated to
control the mixed air temperature to the
low limit temperature setpoint.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the upper threshold for the low 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
limit process function. When the low limit
process variable is above this
temperature, the minimum injection fan
may be modulated to provide adequate
levels of outdoor air. Below this setpoint,
outdoor air levels may be limited by
resetting the flow setpoint to control the
low limit process variable to the low limit
setpoint.
Minimum OA Flow Displays the flow through the minimum OA 940 l/s, 2000 cfm
damper.
Minimum OA Flow Contains the desired flow through the 940 l/s, 2000 cfm
Setpoint minimum OA damper. This module does
not perform any setpoint reset. If that
function is desired, it must be performed in
another module.

1132 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-388: Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control Attributes (Part
2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
MOAFLOW-RANGE Specifies that the magnitude of the range 850 l/s, 1800 cfm
(Minimum OA Flow that the PID Process Variable traverses as
Range) the PID Present Value varies between its
minimum and maximum values. For
example, when the Process Variable
ranges between 200 and 2000 l/s due to
the PID Present Value varying from is Low
Limit to its High Limit, then Process Range
is set to 1800 (|2000 – 200|). This input is
location specific.
MOA-OUTSTATE Represents the current module mode of No Flow
(State) operation Set Name: AHU MinOA VFD
Fan State
Mode Displays the desired mode of operation. No Flow
Set Name: AHU MinOA VFD
Fan Mode
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this l/s, cfm
particular module, l/s, cu m/h, and cfm are Set Name: Unit
the only valid values.
Unrel Flow Mode Defines the module behavior when the No Flow
flow station sensor is unreliable. Set Name: NoFlow/Flow

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1133

Primary States (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control)
• No Flow: This mode closes the OAD and de-energizes the minimum injection
fan.
• Max Flow: This mode opens the OAD and energizes the minimum injection
fan.
• Start: This mode opens the OAD and the minimum injection fan is turned off.
This mode sequences the damper and the fan to ensure the damper is opening
before the fan is energized.
• Min Flow Control: The minimum OA Damper is opened, and the flow is
controlled by the PID block. The PID block increases the injection fan speed as
the flow drops below the flow setpoint. This module does not have flow
setpoint reset based on CO2 or some other indoor air quality parameter, but
another module could be connected to the flow setpoint input which does reset
the flow setpoint.
Table 26-389: Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control Command
Hierarchy
Mode Minimum Unrel Flow Min Flow Damper State
OA Flow Mode Control Ready
Reliable Enable
No Flow * * * * No Flow
Max Flow * * TRUE TRUE Max Flow
FALSE Start
FALSE * No Flow
Emergency * * * TRUE Max Flow
Flow
FALSE Start
Min Flow TRUE * TRUE TRUE Min Flow Control
Control
FALSE Start
FALSE * No Flow
FALSE No Flow * * No Flow
Flow TRUE TRUE Max Flow
FALSE Start
FALSE * No Flow

Reliability (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control)

If the low limit process variable is unreliable, the damper closes and the fan
de-energizes unless commanded to Emergency Open.
If the flow sensor is unreliable, module commands the fan off and the damper
closed or it commands the fan on and the damper open based on a user selection.
All other inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.

1134 CCT Help: Modules

Damper Control - VAV
Overview
This group of modules provides the flow control for VAV dampers.
The Damper Control - VAV group contains the following modules:
• Damper Control (VAV Exhaust)
• Damper Control (VAV Supply)

Damper Control (VAV Exhaust)

Overview
This module controls the exhaust flow through a damper to maintain a difference
between this flow and the supply flow. This difference is calculated as Exhaust
Flow - Supply Flow. The responsibility of this module is to maintain this
difference at the Differential Setpoint by adjusting the output percent, thereby
controlling the Flow. This module accepts as inputs a mode, an exhaust flow
(measured), a supply flow (measured), a differential setpoint (positive or negative),
and configuration values. Based upon the input mode and configuration settings,
the module outputs a percent command representing the desired position of the
damper and a Control Status. If either of the flows are detected as unreliable, this
controller switches to pressure dependent control. If a request to control a flow
near zero (0.2% of Rated Flow) is detected, the module instead closes the damper
rather than control zero flow. The adjustable parameters provide a way for the user
to configure the module to operate in the correct manner for any size damper
whether a positive or negative differential is desired.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust])
• Attributes (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust])
• Primary States (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust])
• Reliability (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust])

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-390: Damper Control (VAV Exhaust) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Exhaust Damper Control All VAV Applications

Output Controller 1135

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust])

The following table describes the attributes used by the Damper Control (VAV
Exhaust) modules.
Table 26-391: Damper Control (VAV Exhaust) Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
controller.
EAD-OUTSTATE G, V Displays the current operational state of the Set Name: VAV Exhaust
(State) output controller. Flow Ctrl State
EAFLOW-DIFF (Diff Contains the desired setpoint for the 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Setpoint) difference between the two measured flows
when the mode is set to Control. This
setpoint can be positive, negative, or zero.
Positive values result in a negative zone
static pressure, while negative values result
in a positive zone static pressure. Zero
provides flow matching.
Exhaust Flow Specifies that when the mode is set to 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Control, this is the flow that is to be controlled
and must therefore respond to changes in
the output.
Exhaust Rated Flow Displays the rated flow of the exhaust box. 500 l/s, 1000 cfm
This is not a limit to the flow when in control
mode.
Exhaust Stroke Time Contains the time (in seconds) that it takes 60 Seconds
the actuator to move from 0% to 100% or
from 100% to 0%. Should these values be
different, the average is used.
Minimum Pulse Width V Contains the minimum pulse width used by Display Units: Seconds
the PVDC block.
Mode Contains the mode requested by State Close
Selection. Set Name: VAV Exhaust
Flow Ctrl Mode
PD Max Position Displays the maximum position under 80.0%
unreliable control. Under unreliable flow
conditions, flow setpoints are linearly
converted into a damper position between
this value and 0%.
Percent Cmd V Contains the analog percent output on a Display Units: %
scale of 0% to 100%. This value is typically
connected to either a PAO or an AO.
Shutdown Position Contains the percentage to output when 0.0%
commanded to a shutdown position.

1136 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-391: Damper Control (VAV Exhaust) Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Supply Flow Specifies that when the mode is set to 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Control, this provides the second flow for
calculating the flow difference.
Supply Flow Setpoint Contains the current flow setpoint for the 0 l/s, 0 cfm
supply damper.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust])

• Shutdown: Issue the Percent Cmd specified by the shutdown position
variable.
• Close: Set the Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Open: Set the Percent Cmd to 100%.
• Hold Position: Hold the Percent Cmd output at its current value.
• Control Flow Unreliable: Adjust the Percent Cmd output using a pressure
dependent mode of operation while either flow input is unreliable.
• Control Flow Reliable: Adjust the Percent Cmd output to maintain the flow
difference at the value of the Flow Differential SP.

Reliability (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust])

Table 26-392: Damper Control (VAV Exhaust) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Exhaust Flow Control using a Pressure Dependent mode.
Supply Flow Control using a Pressure Dependent mode.

Output Controller 1137

Damper Control (VAV Supply)

Overview
This module specifies the damper position in flow control modules and
applications. This module accepts a mode as close, open, hold, control, box flow
test, and failsoft and adjusts the output accordingly. Should control be requested
and the flow is unreliable, it sets the damper position to a value proportional to the
PD Max Position. Unreliable flow results in operation as a pressure dependent
controller. Attempts to control near zero result in the damper being closed. The
adjustable parameters provide a way for the user to configure the module to
operate in the correct manner for control of any size damper.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Damper Control [VAV Supply])
• Attributes (Damper Control [VAV Supply])
• Primary States (Damper Control [VAV Supply])
• Reliability (Damper Control [VAV Supply])

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control [VAV Supply])

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table .
Table 26-393: Damper Control (VAV Supply) Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
CD Constant Damper Control VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
CD Damper Control VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
HD Constant Damper Control VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
HD Damper Control VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Supply Damper Control VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Slave Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1138 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Damper Control [VAV Supply])
The following table describes the attributes used by the Damper Control (VAV
Supply) modules.
Table 26-394: Damper Control (VAV Supply) Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Auxiliary Flow 1 Contains the measured auxiliary flow. The 0 l/s, 0 cfm
reliability of this input is monitored. The
flow estimate parameter updates only
when in control and this variable is reliable.
Auxiliary Flow 2 Displays the measured auxiliary flow. The 0 l/s, 0 cfm
reliability of this input is monitored. The
flow estimate parameter updates only
when in control and this variable is reliable.
Auxiliary Stroke Time Displays the time (in seconds) that it takes 0 Seconds
1 the auxiliary actuator to go from fully
closed to fully open or from fully open to
fully closed. Should these values be
different, the average value is used. This is
employed in dual duct and supply/exhaust
control applications to keep actuator
adjustments within the speed of the
slowest actuator.
Auxiliary Stroke Time Displays the time (in seconds) that it takes 0 Seconds
2 the auxiliary actuator to go from fully
closed to fully open or from fully open to
fully closed. Should these values be
different, the average value is used. This is
employed in dual duct and supply/exhaust
control applications to keep actuator
adjustments within the speed of the
slowest actuator.
Box Flow Test Displays the desired damper position 0.0%
Position when mode is set to Box Flow Test.
CDD-OUTSTATE, G, V Displays the current operational state of Set Name: VAV Flow Control
HDD-OUTSTATE, or the output controller. State
SAD-OUTSTATE
(State)
CDFLOW-SP, Specifies that if the mode is set to Control, 0 l/s, 0 cfm
HDFLOW-SP, or this is the desired setpoint to which the
SAFLOW-SP (Flow Flow is controlled.
Setpoint)
Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of Set Name: Control Status
the controller.
Damper Percent Cmd V Contains the analog percent output on a Display Units: %
scale of 0% to 100%. This value typically is
connected to either a PAO or an AO.
Failsoft Value Displays the desired damper position 0.0%
when in Failsoft mode.
Flow Displays the measured flow. When the 0 l/s, 0 cfm
mode is set to Control, this is the flow that
is directly controlled and therefore must
respond to changes in the output.
Minimum Pulse Width V Contains the minimum pulse width used by Display Units: Seconds
the PVDC block.

Output Controller 1139

 Table 26-394: Damper Control (VAV Supply) Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Mode Contains the mode requested by State Close
Selection. Set Name: VAV Flow Control
Mode
PD Max Position Displays the maximum position under 80.0%
unreliable control. Under unreliable flow
conditions, flow setpoints are linearly
converted into a damper position between
this value and 0%.
Rated Box Flow Contains the rated flow of the box under 500 l/s, 1000 cfm
nominal conditions. For most control
purposes and under most reasonable
design conditions, this can be set to the
desired maximum box flow. Should the
rated flow be larger than the desired
maximum box flow by more than 25%
unstable control may result. Correct this by
setting this value to the actual rated box
flow.
Stroke Time Displays the time (in seconds) that it takes 60 Seconds
the actuator to go from fully closed to fully
open or from fully open to fully closed.
Should these values be different, the
average value is used.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Damper Control [VAV Supply])

• Bypass: Issue a fixed value to the Damper Percent Cmd (Shutdown, Box Flow
Test, or Failsoft values).
• Hold: Hold the Percent Cmd output at its current value.
• Control Flow Unreliable: Adjust the Percent Cmd output using a pressure
dependent mode of operation while either flow input is unreliable.
• Control Flow Reliable: Adjust the Percent Cmd output to maintain the flow
difference at the value of the Flow Differential SP.
Table 26-395: Damper Control (VAV Supply) Command Hierarchy
Mode Flow Reliable Non-Zero SP State
Open * * Bypass
Close * * Bypass
Hold * * Hold
Control * False Bypass
False True Control Flow Unreliable
True True Control Flow Reliable
Box Flow Test * * Bypass
Failsoft * * Bypass

1140 CCT Help: Modules

Reliability (Damper Control [VAV Supply])
Table 26-396: Damper Control (VAV Supply) Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Flow Control using a Pressure Dependent mode.
Auxiliary Flow 1 Control using a Pressure Dependent mode.
Auxiliary Flow 2 Control using a Pressure Dependent mode.

Output Controller 1141

Fan Control
Overview
This group provides modules that control single speed air handling and terminal
unit fans as well as proportional and three speed terminal unit fans.
The Fan Control group contains the following modules:
• Fan Proportional
• Parallel Fan Control
• Single Speed Fan Control
• Fan Three Speed
• Fan VAV Series

Fan Proportional

Overview
This module controls a proportional fan. The module accepts as inputs a command,
a heating percentage and a cooling percentage. Based upon the input command and
parameter settings, the module outputs a percent command and an on/off
command.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Proportional)
• Attributes (Fan Proportional)
• Primary States (Fan Proportional)
• Reliability (Fan Proportional)

Module Use in Applications (Fan Proportional)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-397: Fan Proportional Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional Fan Control Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application

1142 CCT Help: Modules

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Fan Proportional)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Proportional modules.
Table 26-398: Fan Proportional Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Percent Cmd Contains the percent cooling, typically
connected from the cooling output module.
This value is used to span to a fan speed.
Fan OnOff Contains the output command Set Name: Off/On
enumeration for information feedback
representing the on/off status of the fan.
FAN-OUTSTATE Displays the current operational state of Set Name: Off/On/Max
(State) the output controller.
Heating Percent Cmd Contains the percent cooling, typically
connected from the heating output module.
Used to span to a fan speed.
Max Speed Cooling Contains the output percentage when the 100.0%
Cooling Percent Cmd input is at 100%.
Max Speed Heating Contains the output percentage when the 100.0%
Heating Percent Cmd input is at 100%.
Minimum Speed Specifies that when commanded to on, this 20.0%
is the minimum value that is output in the
Percent Cmd output.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: Off/On/Max
Percent Cmd Displays the output for fan control (0- Display Units: %
100%).

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1143

Primary States (Fan Proportional)
• Off: Turn the fan off. The Percent Cmd is set to 0% and the Fan OnOff is set to
Off.
• On: Turn the fan on at the appropriate speed. The speed is determined
internally based on a span of the Minimum Speed and the max heating or
cooling percentage inputs.
• Max: Turn the fan on at the max heating speed. The Percent Cmd is set to the
Max Speed Heating.

Reliability (Fan Proportional)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1144 CCT Help: Modules

Parallel Fan Control

Overview
This module passes the state selection output to the output and is used for
consistency in the User Interface.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Parallel Fan Control)
• Attributes (Parallel Fan Control)
• Reliability (Parallel Fan Control)

Module Use in Applications (Parallel Fan Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-399: Parallel Fan Control Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Parallel Fan Control VAV Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Parallel Fan Control)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Parallel Fan Control
modules.
Table 26-400: Parallel Fan Control Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input The input to the pass through module Off
Set Name: Off/On
Present Value G, V The output of the pass through module Set Name: Off/On

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Parallel Fan Control)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1145

Single Speed Fan Control

Overview
This module passes the state selection output to the output and is used for
consistency in the User Interface.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Single Speed Fan Control)
• Attributes (Single Speed Fan Control)
• Primary States (Single Speed Fan Control)
• Reliability (Single Speed Fan Control)

Module Use in Applications (Single Speed Fan Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-401: Single Speed Fan Control Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Single Speed Fan Control Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Single Speed Fan Control)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Single Speed Fan Control
modules.
Table 26-402: Single Speed Fan Control Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Fan OnOff Contains the output command enumeration for Set Name: Off/On
information feedback representing the on/off
status of the fan.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: Off/On

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning
Modes Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1146 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Single Speed Fan Control)
• Off: Turn the fan off. The Fan OnOff is set to Off.
• On: Turn the fan on. The Fan OnOff is set to On.

Reliability (Single Speed Fan Control)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1147

Fan Three Speed

Overview
This module controls a three-speed fan. The module accepts a single input mode
and produces three separate output On/Off commands. As the fan stages up, the
module turns off the lower speed output first before turning on the higher speed
output (following a very short delay so that both contacts are not closed at the same
time). As the fan stages down, the module provides a user defined delay after
turning off the higher speed output before turning on the lower speed output.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Three Speed)
• Attributes (Fan Three Speed)
• Primary States (Fan Three Speed)
• Reliability (Fan Three Speed)

Module Use in Applications (Fan Three Speed)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-403: Fan Three Speed Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Three Speed Fan Control Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1148 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Fan Three Speed)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Three Speed modules.
Table 26-404: Fan Three Speed Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Percent Cmd Displays the percent cooling, typically
connected from the cooling output module. In
Auto Low and Auto Medium Modes, the value is
used to determine fan speed based on
threshold values.
Fan OnOff V Indicates that the fan is off or on. Set Name: Off/On
Fan OnOff 1 V Contains the output for fan speed 1. Set Name: Off/On
Fan OnOff 2 V Contains the output for fan speed 2. Set Name: Off/On
Fan OnOff 3 V Contains the output for fan speed 3. Set Name: Off/On
Fan Speed Status V Contains the feedback to zone sensor and/or Set Name: Three Speed
other display to indicate the current control Status
state (auto/off) and speed (off/low/medium/
high) of the fan.
FAN-OUTSTATE G, V Displays the current operational state of the Set Name: Off/On/Max
(State) output controller.
Heating Percent Cmd Contains the percent cooling, typically
connected from the heating output module. In
Auto Low and Auto Medium Modes, this value
is used to determine fan speed based on
threshold values.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: Off/On/Max
Speed 2 Off Threshold Used when Mode = Auto-Low to determine 30.0%
whether to decrease fan speed to Low (done if
the larger of the cooling and heating
percentages is less than or equal to this value).
Speed 2 On Threshold Used when Mode = Auto-Low to determine 35.0%
whether to increase fan speed to Medium
(done if the larger of the cooling and heating
percentages is greater than this value).
Speed 3 Off Threshold Used when Mode = Auto-Low or Auto-Medium 65.0%
to determine whether to decrease fan speed to
Medium (done if the larger of the cooling and
heating percentages is less than or equal to this
value).
Speed 3 On Threshold Used when Mode = Auto-Low or Auto-Medium 70.0%
to determine whether to increase fan speed to
High (done if the larger of the cooling and
heating percentages is greater than this value).
Stage Down Delay Specifies the time that all outputs are turned off 1 Second
when the requested speed is decreased one
stage before the next lower stage is turned on.
This time allows the motor to slow down before
re-engaging the motor at the lower speed. If the
speed is decreased two stages (from High to
Low), the outputs are held off for twice the time.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1149

Primary States (Fan Three Speed)
• Off: Manual request to turn the fan off (typically made by network or zone
sensor input). All three Fan OnOffs are set to Off.
• Low: Manual request to turn the fan on at the low speed (typically made by
network or zone sensor input). Fan OnOff 1 is set to On. The others are set to
Off.
• Medium: Manual request to turn the fan on at the medium speed (typically
made by network or zone sensor input). Fan OnOff 2 is set to On. Fan OnOff 1
and 3 is set to Off.
• High: Manual request to turn the fan on at the high speed (typically made by
network or zone sensor input). Fan OnOff 3 is set to On and Fan OnOff 1 and 2
set to Off.
• Auto-Off: Turn the fan off. All three Fan OnOffs are set to Off.
• Auto-Low: Turn the fan on at no lower than Low speed. Compare the percent
cmd inputs to the thresholds to determine the actual speed.
• Auto-Medium: Turn the fan on at no lower than Medium speed. Compare the
percent cmd inputs to the thresholds to determine the actual speed.
• Auto-High: Turn the fan on at the high speed. Fan OnOff 3 will be set to On
and Fan OnOff 1 and 2 set to Off.
Table 26-405: Fan Three Speed Command Hierarchy
Mode Speed 2 Speed 3 State
Off * * Off
Low * * Low
Medium * * Medium
High * * High
Auto-Off * * Off
Auto-Low False False Low
True False Medium
* True High
Auto-Medium * False Medium
True High
Auto-High * * High

Reliability (Fan Three Speed)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1150 CCT Help: Modules

Fan VAV Series

Overview
This module is responsible for controlling a single-speed fan. The module accepts
an input mode and an adjustable speed and produces fan output.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan VAV Series)
• Attributes (Fan VAV Series)
• Primary States (Fan VAV Series)
• Reliability (Fan VAV Series)

Module Use in Applications (Fan VAV Series)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-406: Fan VAV Series Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Series Fan Control VAV Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1151

Attributes (Fan VAV Series)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan VAV Series modules.
Table 26-407: Fan VAV Series Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Fan OnOff Displays the output command enumeration Set Name: Off/On
for information feedback representing the on/
off status of the fan.
FAN-OUTSTATE Displays the current operational state of the Set Name: Off/On/Hold
(State) output controller.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: Off/On/Hold
Percent Cmd Contains the output for fan control (0-100%). Display Units: %
Speed Setting Contains the desired output (0-100%) when 100.0%
the fan is commanded on.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Fan VAV Series)

• Off: Turn the fan off. The Percent Cmd is set to 0% and the Fan OnOff is set to
Off.
• On: Turn the fan on at the Speed Setting value.
• Hold: Hold the existing output.

Reliability (Fan VAV Series)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1152 CCT Help: Modules

Fan Control - AHU
Overview
The AHU Fan Control output controllers provide for variable capacity control of
supply, return, exhaust, and relief fans.
The Fan Control - AHU group contains the following modules:
• Fan Single Speed
• Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control
• Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL
• Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control
• Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL
• Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking
• Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control
• Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL
• Fan Supply Duct Static Control
• Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL

Output Controller 1153

Fan Single Speed

Overview
This module controls a 2 position fan. The module accepts a mode input and it has
an output to turn the fan on or off.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Single Speed)
• Attributes (Fan Single Speed)
• Primary States (Fan Single Speed)
• Reliability (Fan Single Speed)

Module Use in Applications (Fan Single Speed)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-408: Fan Single Speed Uses in Application System Selection
Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Constant Capacity Exhaust Fan Control AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
Constant Capacity Return Fan Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Constant Capacity Supply Fan Control All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1154 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Fan Single Speed)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Single Speed modules.
Table 26-409: Fan Single Speed Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Fan OnOff Contains the output command enumeration for Set Name: Off/On
information feedback representing the on/off
status of the fan.
FAN-OUTSTATE Displays the current operational state of the Set Name: Off/On/Hold
(State) output controller.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: Off/On/Hold

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Fan Single Speed)

• Off: Turn the fan off. The Fan OnOff is set to Off.
• On: Turn the fan on. The Fan OnOff is set to On.
• Hold: The fan remains in the state it was in when this mode was requested. If it
is on, it stays on. If it is off, it stays off.

Reliability (Fan Single Speed)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1155

Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control

Overview
The Relief Fan BSP module controls building static pressure using a variable
speed relief fan in an air handler application. This module accepts building static
pressure and setpoints. The module has outputs for controlling a variable speed
relief fan.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control)
• Attributes (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control)
• Primary States (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control)
• Reliability (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control)

Module Use in Applications (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-410: Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Variable Capacity Relief Fan BSP Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Relief Variable
Capacity BSP Control modules.
Table 26-411: Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control Attributes (Part 1
of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Bldg Static Pressure Displays is the building static pressure. 25 Pa, 0.10 in. W.C.
Bldg Static Pressure Used in the BS-P Control modes. This is the 25 Pa, 0.10 in. W.C.
Setpoint building static pressure setpoint.
Building Static Used in the BS-P Control mode. This input Pa, in. W.C.
Pressure Units allows the user to define the units for the Set Name: Unit
process.

1156 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-411: Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control Attributes (Part 2
of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Mode Indicates the desired mode of operation. Off
Set Name: AHU Relief Fan
BSP
Relief Fan Control V Displays the PID Status, and the possible Normal
Status values are normal, overridden, disabled, low, Set Name: Control Status
timing low, high, and timing high.
Relief Fan OnOff V Displays the control signal for the relief fan. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Relief Fan Percent V Displays the analog signal for the relief fan, it is 0%
Cmd used to command a fan speed. This output
ranges from 0% to 100%.
RLF-OUTSTATE V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Off
(State) output controller. Set Name: AHU Relief Fan
BSP

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control)

• Off: The fan is off when the module is in this mode of operation
• Max: The relief fan turns at its maximum speed. The Relief Fan Percent Cmd
output is set to 100%.
• Min: The analog fan output (Relief Fan Percent Cmd) is zero, and the fan
control output (Relief Fan OnOff) is on when the module is in this mode of
operation.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• BS-P Control: The relief fan controls the building static pressure when the
module receives this command. The module operates in the BS-P Control
mode if the building static pressure is reliable.
Table 26-412: Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control Command
Hierarchy
Mode BSP Is Reliable State
Off * Off
Min * Min
Max * Max
Hold * Hold
BS-P Control TRUE BS-P Control
FALSE Off

Reliability (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control)

If building static pressure is unreliable, the fan state changes to off as shown in the
Command Hierarchy table.
All other inputs use the last reliable value while unreliable.

Output Controller 1157

Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL

Overview
The Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UKL module controls building static pressure
using a variable speed relief fan in an air handler application. This module accepts
building static pressure, PID tuning parameters, and setpoints. The module has
outputs for controlling a variable speed relief fan. This module accepts commands
from a Firefighter Smoke Control Station (FSCS). The FSCS input takes
precedence over the mode input.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Attributes (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL)
• Primary States (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL)
• Reliability (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL)

Module Use in Applications (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-413: Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Relief Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1158 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Relief BSP for
UL-864-UUKL modules.
Table 26-414: Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Bldg Static Pressure Displays the building static pressure. 25 Pa, 0.10 in. W.C.
Building Static Used in the BS-P Control mode. This input Pa, in. W.C.
Pressure Units defines the units for the process. Set Name: Unit
Emergency BSP Used in the BS-P Control modes during an -25 Pa, -0.10 in. W.C.
Setpoint emergency or when the FSCS input is not set
to Auto.
Emergency On Indicates the Percent Cmd issued to the fan 70%
Percent Cmd during an emergency if the Building Static
Pressure is not reliable.
Mode Indicates the desired mode of operation. Off
Set Name: AHU RF BSP
Mode UL
Normal BSP Setpoint Used in the BS-P Control modes under normal 25 Pa, 0.10 in. W.C.
control circumstances. This is the building
static pressure setpoint.
Priority Specifies the BACnet priority for the output 16
points. For normal control, this value is set to
16 (Default). This value is set to 1 when the
FSCS input is not Auto and set to 2 (Automatic
Fire/Life Safety Control) when the Mode
indicates an emergency is not Normal.
Relief Fan Control V Displays the PID Status. The possible values Normal
Status are normal, overridden, disabled, low, timing Set Name: Control Status
low, high, and timing high.
Relief Fan OnOff V Displays the control signal for the relief fan. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Relief Fan Percent V Displays the analog signal for the relief fan, 0.0%
Cmd which is used to command a fan speed. This
output ranges from 0% to 100%.
RLF-OUTSTATE V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Off
(State) output controller. Set Name: AHU Relief Fan
State UL

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1159

Primary States (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL)
• Off: The fan is off when the module is in the Off mode of operation.
• Min: The analog fan output (Relief Fan Percent Cmd) is zero, and the fan
control output (Relief Fan OnOff) is on when the module is in the Min mode of
operation.
• BS-P Control: The relief fan controls the building static pressure when the
module receives this command. The module operates in the BS-P Control
mode if the building static pressure is reliable.
• Emergency BS-P Control: The relief fan controls the Emergency BSP
Setpoint when the module receives this command. The module operates in the
Emergency On state if the pressure sensor is unreliable and the Emergency On
Percent Cmd is issued to the Fan Percent Cmd output.
• Emergency Off: The fan is off and the priority is set to 1 or 2 depending on the
FSCS status.
Table 26-415: Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL Command Hierarchy
Mode BSP Is Reliable FSCS RF Cmd State
* * Off Off
* TRUE On BS-P Control
* FALSE On Emergency On
Off * Auto Off
Min * Auto Min
BS-P Control TRUE Auto BS-P Control
FALSE Auto Off
Emergency BS-P Control TRUE Auto BS-P Control
FALSE Auto Emergency On
Emergency Off * Auto Off

Reliability (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL)

If building static pressure is unreliable, the fan state changes to Off as shown in the
Command Hierarchy table.
All other inputs use the last reliable value while unreliable.

1160 CCT Help: Modules

Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control

Overview
The Return Fan BSP module controls a variable speed fan and building static
pressure (BSP) in an air handler application. This module accepts building static
pressure, and setpoints. The module has outputs for controlling a variable speed
return fan.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control)
• Attributes (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control)
• Primary States (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control)
• Reliability (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control)

Module Use in Applications (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-416: Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan BSP Control AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
Variable Capacity Return Fan BSP Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1161

Attributes (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Return or Exhaust
BSP Control modules.
Table 26-417: Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Bldg Static Pressure Displays the building static pressure. 25 Pa, 0.10 in. W.C.
Bldg Static Pressure Displays the building static pressure setpoint. 25 Pa, 0.10 in. W.C.
Setpoint
Building Static Allows the user to define the units for the Pa, in. W.C.
Pressure Units process. Set Name: Unit
EF-OUTSTATE or RF- V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Off
OUTSTATE (State) output controller. Set Name: AHU RF BSP
State
Mode Indicates the desired mode of operation. Off
Set Name: AHU RF BSP
Mode
Return Fan Control V Displays the PID Status. The possible values Normal
Status are normal, overridden, disabled, low, timing Set Name: Control Status
low, high, and timing high.
Return Fan OnOff V Displays the control signal for the return fan or Off
exhaust fan. Set Name: Off/On
Return Fan Percent V Contains the analog signal for the return fan or 0%
Cmd the exhaust fan and it is used to command a
fan speed. This output can range from 0% to
100%.
Supply Fan Percent Displays the supply fan percent command and 0%
Cmd used in the Failsoft mode.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1162 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control)
• Off: The fan is off when the module is in this mode of operation
• Max: The return fan turns at its maximum speed. The Return Fan Percent Cmd
output is set to 100%.
• Min: The analog fan output (Return Fan Percent Cmd) is zero, and the fan
control output (Return Fan OnOff) is on when the module is in this mode of
operation.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• BS-P Control: The return fan controls the building static pressure when the
module receives this command. The module operates in the BS-P Control
mode if the building static pressure is reliable.
• Failsoft: The return fan tracks the supply fan while in this mode of operation.
Failsoft is a fault mode entered only if the pressure sensor is unreliable.
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Return or Exhaust
BSP Control modules.
Table 26-418: Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control Command Hierarchy
Mode BSP Is Reliable State
Off * Off
Min * Min
Max * Max
Hold * Hold
BS-P Control TRUE BS-P Control
FALSE Failsoft

Reliability (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control)

If building static pressure is unreliable, the fan state changes to failsoft as shown in
the Command Hierarchy table.
All other inputs uses the last reliable value while unreliable.

Output Controller 1163

Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL

Overview
The Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL module controls a variable speed fan
and Building Static Pressure (BSP) in an AHU application. This module accepts
building static pressure, PID tuning parameters, and setpoints. The module has
outputs for controlling a variable speed return fan. This module accepts commands
from a Firefighter Smoke Control Station (FSCS). The FSCS input takes
precedence over the mode input.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL)
• Attributes (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL)
• Primary States (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL)
• Reliability (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL)

Module Use in Applications (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-419: Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Exhaust Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
Return Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1164 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan RF or EF BSP for
UL-864-UUKL modules.
Table 26-420: Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Bldg Static Pressure Displays the building static pressure. 25 Pa, 0.10 in. W.C.
Building Static Allows the user to define the units for the Pa, in. W.C.
Pressure Units process. Set Name: Unit
EF-OUTSTATE or RF- V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Off
OUTSTATE (State) output controller. Set Name: AHU RF BSP
State UL
Emergency BSP Used in the BS-P Control modes during an -25 Pa, -0.10 in. W.C.
Setpoint emergency or when the FSCS RF Cmd is On.
Emergency On Indicates the Percent Cmd issued to the fan 70%
Percent Cmd during an emergency if the Building Static
Pressure is not reliable.
FSCS RF Cmd Accepts a command from the FSCS, and Auto
allows emergency personnel to control the Set Name: Auto/Off/On
return fan.
Mode Indicates the desired mode of operation. Off
Set Name: AHU RF BSP
Mode UL
Normal BSP Setpoint Used in the BS-P Control modes under normal 25 Pa, 0.10 in. W.C.
control circumstances. This is the building
static pressure setpoint.
Priority Specifies the BACnet priority for the output 16
points. For normal control, this value is set to
16 (Default). This value is set to 1 when the
FSCS input is not Auto and set to 2 (Automatic
Fire/Life Safety Control) when the Mode
indicates an emergency is not Normal.
Return Fan Control V Displays the PID Status. The possible values Normal
Status are normal, overridden, disabled, low, timing Set Name: Control Status
low, high, and timing high.
Return Fan OnOff V Displays the control signal for the return fan. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Return Fan Percent V Contains the analog signal for the return fan 0%
Cmd and is used to command a fan speed. This
output can range from 0% to 100%.
Supply Fan Percent Displays the supply fan percent command and 0%
Cmd is used in the Failsoft mode.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1165

Primary States (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL)
• Off: The fan is off when the module is in the Off mode of operation.
• Min: The analog fan output (Return Fan Percent Cmd) is zero, and the fan
control output (Return Fan OnOff) is on when the module is in the Min mode
of operation.
• BS-P Control: The return fan controls the building static pressure when the
module receives the BS-P Control command. The module operates in the BS-P
Control mode if the building static pressure is reliable. If the pressure sensor is
unreliable, the module operates in the Failsoft state.
• Failsoft: The return fan tracks the supply fan while in this mode of operation.
Failsoft is a fault mode entered only if the pressure sensor is unreliable.
• Emergency BS-P Control: The relief fan controls the Emergency BSP
Setpoint when the module receives this command. The module operates in the
Emergency On state if the pressure sensor is unreliable and the Emergency On
Percent Cmd is issued to the Fan Percent Cmd output.
• Emergency Off: The fan is off and the priority is set to 1 or 2 depending on the
FSCS status.
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan RF or EF BSP for
UL-864-UUKL modules.
Table 26-421: Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL Command Hierarchy
Mode BSP Is Reliable FSCS RF Cmd State
* * Off Off
* TRUE On BS-P Control
* FALSE On Emergency On
Off * Auto Off
Min * Auto Min
BS-P Control TRUE Auto BS-P Control
FALSE Auto Failsoft
Emergency BS-P Control TRUE Auto BS-P Control
FALSE Auto Emergency On
Emergency Off * Auto Off

Reliability (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL)

If building static pressure is unreliable, the fan state changes to Failsoft as shown
in the Command Hierarchy table.
All other inputs use the last reliable value while unreliable.

1166 CCT Help: Modules

Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking

Overview
The Return Fan track Output Controller module is designed to control a variable
speed return fan in an air handler application. The return fan tracks the supply fan.
The module has outputs for controlling a variable speed return fan.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking)
• Attributes (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking)
• Primary States (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking)
• Reliability (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking)

Module Use in Applications (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-422: Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan Track Control AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
Variable Capacity Return Fan Track Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1167

Attributes (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Return or Exhaust
Tracking modules.
Table 26-423: Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
EF-EFRSTHI or Displays the desired return fan speed 100%
RF-RFRSTHI when the supply fan is at its high
(Return Fan High) calibration point. This input is used in the
Fan Track mode. It is used to scale the
Supply fan command so the return fan
moves the desired amount of air.
EF-EFRSTLO or Displays the desired return fan speed 0%
RF-RFRSTLO (Return when the supply fan is at its low calibration
Fan Low) point. This input is used in the Fan Track
mode. It is used to scale the Supply fan
command so the return fan moves the
desired amount of air.
EF-OUTSTATE or V, G Indicates the current operational mode of Off
RF-OUTSTATE (State) the output controller. Set Name: AHU RF Track
EF-SFRSTHI or Displays the supply fan high flow 100%
RF-SFRSTHI (Supply calibration point. This input is used in the
Fan High) Fan Track mode. It is used to scale the
Supply fan command so the return fan
moves the desired amount of air.
EF-SFRSTLO or Displays the supply fan low flow calibration 0%
RF-SFRSTLO (Supply point. This input is used in the Fan Track
Fan Low) mode. It is used to scale the Supply fan
command so the return fan moves the
desired amount of air.
Mode Displays the desired mode of operation. Off
Set Name: AHU RF Track
Return Fan Control V Displays the PID Status. The possible Normal
Status values are normal, overridden, disabled, Set Name: Control Status
low, timing low, high, and timing high.
Return Fan OnOff V Contains the control signal for the return Off
fan. Set Name: Off/On
Return Fan Percent V This output is the analog signal for the 0%
Cmd return fan, it is used to command a fan
speed. This output can range from 0% to
100%.
Supply Fan Percent Displays the analog signal from the supply 0%
Cmd fan.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1168 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking)
• Off: The fan is off when the module is in this mode of operation
• Max: The return fan turns at its maximum speed. The Return Fan Percent Cmd
output is set to 100%.
• Min: The analog fan output (Return Fan Percent Cmd) is zero, and the fan
control output (Return Fan OnOff) is on when the module is in this mode of
operation.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Fan Track Control: The return fan speed tracks the supply fan speed. When
the module receives this command, it operates in the Fan Track mode.

Reliability (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking)

The inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.

Output Controller 1169

Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control

Overview
The Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control module controls a variable
speed fan and maintains a volume differential between the supply and return or
exhaust ducts in an air handler application. This module accepts return or exhaust
and supply flows, a low limit temperature, and setpoints. The module has outputs
for controlling a variable speed return or exhaust fan. In addition to the volume
matching capabilities, this module also has a low limit function where the
differential flow setpoint is decreased when the low limit temperature is below the
low limit setpoint.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control)
• Attributes (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control)
• Primary States (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control)
• Reliability (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control)

Module Use in Applications (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-424: Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan Volume Match AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
Control AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
Variable Capacity Return Fan Volume Match AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
Control AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1170 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Return or Exhaust
Volume Match Control modules.
Table 26-425: Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control Attributes
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Common Attributes
EF-OUTSTATE or RF- V, G Indicates the current operational mode of Off
OUTSTATE (State) the output controller. This output is the Set Name: AHU RF VOL
current state of the activity. State
Mode Contains the desired mode of operation. Off
Set Name: AHU RF VOL
Mode
Process Units Allows the user to define the units for the l/s, cfm
process. Set Name: Unit
Return Fan Control V Displays the PID Status. The possible Normal
Status values are normal, overridden, disabled, Set Name: Control Status
low, timing low, high, and timing high.
Return Fan OnOff V Displays the on/off signal for the return Off
fan. Set Name: Off/On
Return Fan Percent V Contains the analog signal for the return 0.0%
Cmd fan used to command a fan speed. This
output can range from 0% to 100%.
Return Flow Allows you to connect the return airflow or 10000 l/s, 22000 cfm
the exhaust air flow to this input.
Supply Fan Percent Contains the analog signal from the supply 0.0%
Cmd fan used in the Failsoft mode.
Supply Flow Displays the discharge air flow. 10000 l/s, 22000 cfm
Vol Process Range Specifies that the magnitude of the range 10000 l/s, 22000 cfm
that the PID Process Variable traverses as
the PID Present Value varies between its
minimum and maximum values. For
example, the process range should be
configured to be the design flow of the
return fan.
Volume Diff Setpoint Contains the volume differential (Supply 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Flow - Return Flow or Supply Flow -
Exhaust Flow) setpoint.

Output Controller 1171

 Table 26-425: Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control Attributes
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Variable Capacity Return Fan Volume Match Control Specific Attributes
Low Limit Process Displays the low limit temperature process 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
Variable variable. This temperature is usually the
mixed air temperature or the preheat air
temperature.
Low Limit Proportional Defines the temperature range where the 5 Deg C, 9 Deg F
Band flow differential setpoint is reset to control
the low limit process variable to the low
limit temperature setpoint.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the upper threshold for the low 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
limit process function. When the low limit
process variable is above this
temperature, the return fan may be
modulated to maintain the desired flow
differential between the supply duct and
the return duct. Below this setpoint,
outdoor air levels may be limited by
resetting the differential flow setpoint.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control)

• Off: The fan is off when the module is in this mode of operation
• Max: The return fan is commanded to its maximum speed. The Return Fan
Percent Cmd output is set to 100%.
• Min: The analog fan output (Return Fan Percent Cmd) is zero, and the fan
control output (Return Fan OnOff) is on when the module is in this mode of
operation.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Failsoft: When in this mode of operation, the return fan tracks the supply fan.
This mode is a fault mode entered if either flow sensor is unreliable.
• VOL Control: When in this mode of operation, the return fan controls the
return flow to maintain a differential flow (Volume Diff Setpoint) between the
return and supply ducts. This is volume matching.

1172 CCT Help: Modules

 The following table illustrates the State Output dependencies on Mode and Flow
Reliability inputs.
Table 26-426: Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control Command
Hierarchy
Mode Flow Reliable State
Off * Off
Min * Min
Max * Max
Hold * Hold
VOL Control TRUE VOL Control
FALSE Failsoft
Zero VOL Control TRUE Zero VOL Control
FALSE Failsoft

Reliability (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control)

If either of the flow measurements is unreliable, the fan state changes to failsoft as
shown in the Command Hierarchy table.
All other inputs use the last reliable value while unreliable.

Output Controller 1173

Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL

Overview
The Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL module controls a variable speed
fan and maintains a volume differential between the supply and return or exhaust
ducts in an AHU application. This module accepts discharge and supply flows, a
low limit temperature, PID tuning parameters, and setpoints. The module has
outputs for controlling a variable speed return or exhaust fan. In addition to the
volume matching capabilities, this module also has a low limit function where the
differential flow setpoint is decreased when the low limit temperature is below the
low limit setpoint. This module accepts commands from a Firefighter Smoke
Control Station (FSCS). The FSCS input takes precedence over the mode input.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL)
• Attributes (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL)
• Primary States (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL)
• Reliability (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL)

Module Use in Applications (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-427: Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control for AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
UL-864-UUKL AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
Return Fan Volume Match Control for AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
UL-864-UUKL AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1174 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan RF or EF Vol Match
for UL-864-UUKL modules.
Table 26-428: Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL Attributes (Part 1
of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
EF-OUTSTATE or RF- V, G Indicates the current operational mode of Off
OUTSTATE (State) the output controller. This output is the Set Name: AHU RF VOL
current state of the activity. State UL
Emergency On Indicates the Percent Cmd issued to the 70%
Percent Cmd fan if an emergency calls for the Return
Fan to run and the Supply Fan is Off.
FSCS RF Cmd Accepts a command from the FSCS, and Auto
allows emergency personnel to control the Set Name: Auto/Off/On
return fan.
Low Limit Process Displays the low limit temperature process 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
Variable variable. This temperature is usually the
mixed air temperature or the preheat air
temperature.
Low Limit Proportional Defines the temperature range where the 5 Deg C, 9 Deg F
Band flow differential setpoint is reset to control
the low limit process variable to the low
limit temperature setpoint.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the upper threshold for the low 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
limit process function. When the low limit
process variable is above this
temperature, the return fan may be
modulated to maintain the desired flow
differential between the supply duct and
the return duct. Below this setpoint,
outdoor air levels may be limited by
resetting the differential flow setpoint.
Mode Contains the desired mode of operation. Off
Set Name: AHU RF VOL
Mode UL
Priority Specifies the BACnet priority for the output 16
points. For normal control, this value is set
to 16 (Default). This value is set to 1 when
the FSCS input is not Auto and set to 2
(Automatic Fire/Life Safety Control) when
the Mode indicates an emergency is not
Normal.
Process Units Allows the user to define the units for the l/s, cfm
process. Set Name: Unit
Return Fan Control V Displays the PID Status. The possible Normal
Status values are normal, overridden, disabled, Set Name: Control Status
low, timing low, high, and timing high.
Return Fan OnOff V Displays the on/off signal for the return Off
fan. Set Name: Off/On
Return Fan Percent V Contains the analog signal for the return 0.0%
Cmd fan used to command fan speed. This
output can range from 0% to 100%.
Return Flow Displays the return air flow. 10000 l/s, 22000 cfm
Supply Fan Percent Contains the analog signal from the supply 0.0%
Cmd fan used in the Failsoft mode.

Output Controller 1175

 Table 26-428: Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL Attributes (Part 2
of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Supply Fan State Indicates the current state of operation for Off
the supply fan. During an emergency
mode, this value determines whether the
fan is running.
Supply Flow Displays the discharge air flow. 10000 l/s, 22000 cfm
Vol Process Range Specifies the magnitude of the range that 10000 l/s, 22000 cfm
the PID Process Variable traverses as the
PID Present Value varies between its
minimum and maximum values. For
example, the process range should be
configured to be the design flow of the
return fan.
Volume Diff Setpoint Contains the volume differential (Supply 0 l/s, 0 cfm
Flow - Return Flow or Supply Flow -
Exhaust Flow) setpoint.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL)

• Off: The fan is off when the module is in this mode of operation.
• Max: The return fan is commanded to its maximum speed. The Return Fan
Percent Cmd output is set to 100%.
• Min: The analog fan output (Return Fan Percent Cmd) is zero, and the fan
control output (Return Fan OnOff) is on when the module is in this mode of
operation.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• VOL Control: In this mode of operation, the return fan controls the return
flow to maintain a differential flow (Volume Diff Setpoint) between the return
and supply ducts. This is volume matching.
• Zero VOL Control: In this mode of operation, the return fan controls the
return flow to maintain a differential flow (Volume Diff Setpoint) between the
return and supply ducts.
• Emergency VOL Control: If the Supply Fan is On, the return fan controls the
volume match differential. If the Supply Fan is Off, the module operates in the
Emergency On state and the Emergency On Percent Cmd is issued to the Fan
Percent Cmd output.
• Emergency Off: The fan is off and the priority is set to 1 or 2 depending on the
FSCS status.
• Fan Track: The return fan is turned on and the Return Fan Percent Cmd is set
to match the Supply Fan Percent Cmd.

1176 CCT Help: Modules

 The following table describes the State Output dependencies on Mode and Flow
Reliability inputs.
Table 26-429: Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL Command
Hierarchy
Mode Flow Reliable FSCS SF State
State
* * Off * Off
* * On Off Emergency On
* TRUE On ! Off VOL Control
* FALSE On ! Off Failsoft
Off * Auto * Off
Min * Auto * Min
VOL Control TRUE Auto * VOL Control
FALSE Auto * Failsoft
Zero VOL Control TRUE Auto * Zero VOL Control
FALSE Auto * Failsoft
Emergency VOL * Auto Off Emergency On
Control
TRUE Auto ! Off VOL Control
FALSE Auto ! Off Failsoft
Emergency Off * Auto * Off
Fan Track * Auto ! Off Failsoft

Reliability (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL)

If either of the flow measurements is unreliable, the fan state changes to Failsoft,
as shown in the Command Hierarchy table.
All other inputs use the last reliable value while unreliable.

Output Controller 1177

Fan Supply Duct Static Control

Overview
This module is designed to use the supply fan to control the supply air duct static
pressure. The module has inputs for the desired mode, a ramp rate, pressure,
pressure setpoint, and process units. The module is also designed to accept
commands from a firefighter smoke control station (FSCS). The FSCS input takes
precedence over the mode input.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Supply Duct Static Control)
• Attributes (Fan Supply Duct Static Control)
• Primary States (Fan Supply Duct Static Control)
• Reliability (Fan Supply Duct Static Control)

Module Use in Applications (Fan Supply Duct Static Control)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-430: Fan Supply Duct Static Control Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Variable Capacity Supply Fan Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1178 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Fan Supply Duct Static Control)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Supply Duct Static
Control modules.
Table 26-431: Fan Supply Duct Static Control Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Duct Static Pressure Displays the supply air duct static 250 Pa, 1 in. W.C.
pressure.
Duct Static Pressure Displays the normal supply air duct static 250 Pa, 1 in. W.C.
Setpoint pressure setpoint.
Emergency Duct Static Contains the supply air duct static 374 Pa, 1.5 in. W.C.
Setpoint pressure setpoint when Emergency S-P
control is activated.
FSCS SF Cmd Accepts a command from the FSCS and Auto
allows emergency response personnel to Set Name: Auto/Off/On
control the supply fan. Possible states are
Auto, Off, and On.
Mode Displays the desired mode of operation. Off
Set Name: AHU SF Control
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Pa, in. W.C.
particular module, Pa, in. W.C., Psi, and Set Name: Unit
kPa are valid values.
Ramp Rate Defines the rate of change in fan speed. 50 Change per Minute
This input is used in the Ramp mode.
SF-OUTSTATE (State) V, G Indicates the current operational mode of Off
the output controller. Set Name: AHU SF State
Supply Fan Control V Displays the PID Status. The possible Normal
Status values are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Set Name: Control Status;
Low, Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Supply Fan OnOff V Contains the control signal for the supply Off
fan. The enumeration set only has two Set Name: Off/On
values, Off and On
Supply Fan Percent V Displays the analog signal for the supply 0.0%
Cmd fan and uses it to command a fan speed.
This output ranges from 0% to 100%.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1179

Primary States (Fan Supply Duct Static Control)
• Off: The fan is off when the module is in this mode of operation.
• Min: The analog fan output (Supply Fan Percent Cmd) is zero and the fan
control output (Supply Fan OnOff) is on when the module is in this mode of
operation.
• Emergency On: When the mode is Emergency S-P and the pressure sensor is
not reliable, the module enters this state and turns on the fan while retaining its
last value for the fan percent command.
• Ramp: The supply fan slowly changes from its initial speed to 100% at a rate
defined by the ramp rate input. This mode may be used during the Start/Stop
sequence to start the fan in a controlled fashion.
• S-P Control: The module controls the supply duct static pressure to the duct
static pressure setpoint while the module is in this mode of operation.
The following table90 describes the State Output dependencies on FSCS SF Cmd,
Mode, and Duct Static Pressure reliability inputs.
Table 26-432: Fan Supply Duct Static Control Command Hierarchy
FSCS SF Cmd Mode Duct Static State
Pressure Reliable
Off * * Off
On * TRUE S-P Control
FALSE Emergency On
Auto Off * Off
Min * Min
Ramp TRUE Ramp
FALSE Off
S-P Control TRUE S-P Control
FALSE Off
Emergency S-P TRUE S-P Control
Control
FALSE Emergency On
Emergency Off * Off

Reliability (Fan Supply Duct Static Control)

If the duct static pressure input is unreliable, the supply fan state changes to off as
shown in the Command Hierarchy table.
All other inputs use the last reliable value while unreliable.

1180 CCT Help: Modules

Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL

Overview
This module uses the supply fan to control the supply air duct static pressure. The
module has inputs for the following items: desired mode, desired mode when the
pressure sensor is unreliable, a ramp rate, pressure, pressure setpoint, and process
units. The module is also designed to accept commands from a firefighter smoke
control station (FSCS). The FSCS input takes precedence over the mode input.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL)
• Attributes (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL)
• Primary States (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL)
• Reliability (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL)

Module Use in Applications (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-433: Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Supply Fan Duct Static Control for AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
UL-864-UUKL AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1181

Attributes (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Fan Supply Duct Static for
UL-864-UUKL modules.
Table 26-434: Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Duct Static Pressure Displays the supply air duct static 250 Pa, 1 in. W.C.
pressure.
Duct Static Pressure Displays the normal supply air duct static 250 Pa, 1 in. W.C.
Setpoint pressure setpoint.
Emergency Duct Static Contains the supply air duct static 374 Pa, 1.5 in. W.C.
Setpoint pressure setpoint when Emergency S-P
control is activated.
Emergency On Indicates the Percent Cmd issued during 70%
Percent Cmd an emergency if the Duct Static Pressure
is not reliable.
FSCS SF Cmd Accepts a command from the FSCS and Auto
allows emergency response personnel to Set Name: Auto/Off/On
control the supply fan. Possible states are
Auto, Off, and On.
Mode Displays the desired mode of operation. Off
Set Name: AHU SF Control
Priority Specifies the BACnet priority for the output 16
points. For normal control, this value is set
to 16 (Default). This value is set to 1 when
the FSCS input is not Auto and set to 2
(Automatic Fire/Life Safety Control) when
the Mode indicates an emergency is not
Normal.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Pa, in. W.C.
particular module, Pa, in. W.C., Psi, and Set Name: Unit
kPa are valid values.
Ramp Rate Defines the rate of change in fan speed. 50 Change per Minute
This input is used in the Ramp mode.
SF-OUTSTATE (State) V, G Indicates the current operational mode of Off
the output controller. Set Name: AHU SF State
Supply Fan Control V Displays the PID Status. The possible Normal
Status values are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Set Name: Control Status
Low, Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Supply Fan OnOff V Contains the control signal for the supply Off
fan. The enumeration set only has two Set Name: Off/On
values, Off and On.
Supply Fan Percent V Displays the analog signal for the supply 0.0%
Cmd fan and uses it to command a fan speed.
This output ranges from 0% to 100%.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1182 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL)
• Off: The fan is off when the module is in this mode of operation.
• Min: The analog fan output (Supply Fan Percent Cmd) is zero and the fan
control output (Supply Fan OnOff) is on when the module is in this mode of
operation.
• Emergency On: When the mode is Emergency S-P and the pressure sensor is
not reliable, the module enters this state and turns on the fan while retaining its
last value for the fan percent command.
• Ramp: The supply fan slowly changes from its initial speed to 100% at a rate
defined by the ramp rate input. This mode may be used during the Start/Stop
sequence to start the fan in a controlled fashion.
• S-P Control: The module controls the supply duct static pressure to the duct
static pressure setpoint while the module is in this mode of operation. If the
pressure sensor is not reliable, the fan turns off.
• Emergency S-P Control: The module controls the supply duct static pressure
to the Emergency Duct Static Pressure Setpoint while the module is in this
mode of operation. If the pressure sensor is not reliable, the fan stays on at the
Emergency On Percent Cmd.
• Emergency Off: The mode turns off.
The following table describes the State Output dependencies on FSCS SF Cmd,
Mode, and Duct Static Pressure reliability inputs.
Table 26-435: Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL Command
Hierarchy
FSCS SF Cmd Mode Duct Static State
Pressure Reliable
Off * * Off
On * TRUE S-P Control
FALSE Emergency On
Auto Off * Off
Min * Min
Ramp TRUE Ramp
FALSE Off
S-P Control TRUE S-P Control
FALSE Off
Emergency S-P TRUE S-P Control
Control
FALSE Emergency On
Emergency Off * Off

Reliability (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL)

If the duct static pressure input is unreliable, the supply fan state changes to Off, as
shown in the Command Hierarchy table.
All other inputs use the last reliable value while unreliable.

Output Controller 1183

Heating & Cooling Control - 2 Pipe
Overview
The 2 Pipe Heating and Cooling output controllers control a coil that can be
supplied with hot or chilled water. Support for 2 position and proportional valves
is provided and some modules also provide support for face and bypass dampers.
Some of the modules offer low limit control.
The Heating & Cooling Control - 2 Pipe group contains the following modules:
• 2 Pipe 2 Position Valve
• 2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit
• 2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit
• 2 Pipe Proportional Valve
• 2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit
• 2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit

1184 CCT Help: Modules

2 Pipe 2 Position Valve

Overview
This module controls a two-position valve where the temperature of the source
water is either hot or cold (depending on the season). The module accepts as inputs
a cooling mode and a heating mode, a process variable, two setpoints, and the
SummerWinter setting. The module outputs the calculated Percent Command,
which is typically passed to the MSC module which in turn translates the percent
value into pulses of the binary output. The module also outputs the calculated
cooling and heating percentages and statuses.
This module controls a single two-position valve that dynamically switches from a
heating (winter) to a cooling (summer) mode. This module provides this control
within a zone control application.
The module accepts as inputs a cooling mode, a heating mode, a process variable,
heating and a cooling setpoint, a SummerWinter setting, a limited max value, a
flush position, and configuration information. Based upon the input commands,
other inputs and the parameter settings, the module outputs the calculated Percent
Command, which is typically passed to the MSC module, which in turn translates
the percent value into pulses of the binary output. The module also outputs the
calculated cooling and heating percentages and statuses.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve)
• Attributes (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve)
• Primary States (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve)
• Reliability (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve)

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-436: 2 Pipe 2 Position Valve Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
2 Position 2 Pipe Control Fan Coil Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1185

Attributes (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve)
The following table describes the attributes used by the 2 Pipe 2 Position Valve
modules.
Table 26-437: 2 Pipe 2 Position Valve Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLG-O (Cooling V Controls the single actuator when Display Units: %
Percent Cmd) SummerWinter is set to Summer.
Control Band V Displays the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Cooling Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of Overridden
the controller when SummerWinter is set Set Name: Control Status
to Summer.
Cooling Mode Contains the cooling mode requested by Off
State Selection. Set Name: COM Valve Out
Cooling Setpoint Contains the desired cooling setpoint to 23.0 Deg C, 74.0 Deg F
which the process variable should be
controlled when the cooling mode is set to
Control.
Eff Process Time V Displays the effective process time Display Units: Seconds
Const constant used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Contains the Process Variable used by the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
MSC.
Failsoft Cooling Value Displays the value of the output when the 0.0%
cooling mode is set to Failsoft.
Failsoft Heating Value Displays the value of the output when the 0.0%
heating mode is set to Failsoft.
HC-MINOFF (Eff V Displays the minimum off time to be used Display Units: Seconds
Minimum Off Time) by the MSC.
HC-MINON (Eff V Displays the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
Minimum On Time) MSC.
HC-OUTSTATE (State) G, V Displays the current operational state of Set Name: FC 2or4-Pipe Out
the output controller. State
Heating Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of Overridden
the controller when SummerWinter is set Set Name: Control Status
to Winter.
Heating Mode Contains the heating mode requested by Off
State Selection. Set Name: COM Valve Out
Heating Setpoint Contains the desired heating setpoint to 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
which the process variable should be
controlled when the heating mode is set to
Control.
HTG-O (Heating V Controls the single actuator when Display Units: %
Percent Cmd) SummerWinter is set to Winter.
Limited Max Position Specifies that when the cooling or heating 100.0%
mode are set to Limited Max, this is the
value the Percent Cmd will be set to.
Percent Cmd V Indicates the current capacity requested Display Units: %
by either the Cooling Percent Cmd or the
Heating Percent Cmd.
PMAC Period V Contains the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.

1186 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-437: 2 Pipe 2 Position Valve Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are Set Name: Unit
the only two valid values.
Process Variable Indicates the variable that is to be 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
controlled. This input typically is connected
to the Zone Temperature.
SummerWinter Specifies whether the supply is currently Winter
configured to deliver cooling (Summer) or Set Name: Summer/Winter
heating (Winter).

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve)

• Off: Turn everything off. The Percent Cmd, and Damper Percent Cmd is set to
0%.
• Max: Open the valve and the damper. The Percent Cmd and Damper Percent
Cmd is set to 100%.
• Limited Max Heating: The valve is opened and the damper is opened to the
Limited Max Heating Value. This state may be used for unoccupied heating.
Percent Cmd is set equal to Limited Max Heating Value; therefore, this mode
would be able to start the AHU.
• Limited Max Cooling: The valve is opened and the damper is opened to the
Limited Max Cooling Value. This state may be used for unoccupied cooling.
Percent Cmd is set equal to Limited Max Cooling Value; therefore, this mode
would be able to start the AHU.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Water Flush: The valve is opened and the damper is closed. The Percent Cmd
is set to 0%, therefore this mode does not trigger the AHU to start.
• Heating Control: If the Process Variable is reliable, open the valve and adjust
the damper output to control the Process Variable at the Heating Setpoint. The
Percent Cmd and Damper Percent Cmd are adjusted between 0% and 100%.
• Cooling Control: If the Process Variable is reliable, open the valve and adjust
the damper output to control the Process Variable at the Cooling Setpoint. The
Percent Cmd and Damper Percent Cmd are adjusted between 0% and 100%.
• Failsoft Heating: The valve is opened and the damper is opened to the Failsoft
Heating Value. This state is used when the control temperature is unreliable.
Percent Cmd remains unchanged so this mode does not trigger the AHU to
either start or stop.
• Failsoft Cooling: The valve is opened and the damper is opened to the Failsoft
Cooling Value. This state is used when the control temperature is unreliable.
Percent Cmd remains unchanged so this mode does not trigger the AHU to
either start or stop.

Output Controller 1187

 Table 26-438: 2 Pipe 2 Position Valve Command Hierarchy
SummerWinter Cooling Mode Heating Mode State
Winter * Off Off
Max Max Heating
Limited Max Limited Max Heating
Hold Hold
Waterflush Water Flush Heating
Failsoft Failsoft Heating
Control Control Heating
Summer Off * Off
Max * Max Cooling
Limited Max * Limited Max Cooling
Hold * Hold
Waterflush * Water Flush Cooling
Failsoft * Failsoft Cooling
Control * Control Cooling

Reliability (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1188 CCT Help: Modules

2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit

Overview
This module controls a single two positional source that is dynamically switched
from a heating (winter) to a cooling (summer) mode. It also supports a discharge
low limit for the heating mode. The module accepts as inputs a mode, a process
variable, a low limit process variable, setpoints, and configuration information.
The module outputs the representative percent commands, control status, and
Multistage Output configuration information. The Percent Cmd is typically passed
to the MSC module, which in turn translates the percent value into pulses of the
binary output.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
• Attributes (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
• Primary States (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-439: 2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Application
UV 2 Pipe 2 Position Control Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1189

Attributes (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
The following table describes the attributes used by the 2 Pipe 2 Position Valve
with DA-T Low Limit module.
Table 26-440: 2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLG-O (Cooling V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
Percent Cmd) output on a scale of 0% to 100%. This is
the value that represents the desired
(requested) output for purposes of
determining the Fan On/Off command.
This value typically feeds back to the inputs
of the Fan Status Determination block.
Control Band V Contains the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Cooling Control Status V Displays the current status of the controller Set Name: Control Status
for cooling control.
Cooling Mode Contains the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: COM Valve Out
Cooling Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when
the mode is Control Cooling and
SummerWinter is Summer.
Eff Minimum Off Time V Displays the minimum off time to be used Display Units: Seconds
by the MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Displays the minimum on time to be used Display Units: Seconds
by the MSC.
Eff Process Time V Displays the effective process time Display Units: Seconds
Const constant that is used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Contains the Process Variable to be used Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
by the MSC.
Failsoft Cooling Value Displays the value of the output when the 100.0%
Cooling Mode is Failsoft.
Failsoft Heating Value Displays the value of the output when the 100.0%
Heating Mode is Failsoft.
HC-MINOFF (Minimum Displays the Minimum Off Duration for all 120 Seconds
Off Time) stages.
HC-MINON (Minimum Displays the Minimum On Duration for all 120 Seconds
On Time) stages.
HC-OUTSTATE (State) G, V Contains the current operational mode of Set Name: UV 2-Pipe Out
the output controller. States
Heating Control Status V Displays the current status of the controller Set Name: Control Status
for heating control.
Heating Mode Contains the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: UV Valve Out
Heating Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the 20.0 Deg C, 68.0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when
the mode is Control Heating and
SummerWinter is Winter.

1190 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-440: 2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
HT-O (Heating Percent V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
Cmd) output on a scale of 0% to 100%. This is
the value that represents the desired
(requested) output for purposes of
determining the Fan On/Off command.
This value typically feeds back to the inputs
of the Fan Status Determination block.
Limited Max Value Specifies that when the mode is Limited 100.0%
Max Heating or Limited Max Cooling, the
output is set to this value.
Low Limit Process Specifies that when the mode is Control 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Variable Limit and SummerWinter is Winter, this is
the variable that is to be controlled and
must therefore respond to changes in the
output. This value typically is connected to
the Discharge Air Temperature.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the low 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
limit process variable to be controlled to
when the mode is Control Limit and
SummerWinter is Winter.
Percent Cmd V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
output on a scale of 0% to 100%. This
output is connected to the MSC input.
PMAC Period V Displays the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are Set Name: Unit
the only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the variable that is to be 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
controlled and must therefore respond to
changes in the output. This attribute
typically is connected to the Zone
Temperature.
SummerWinter Indicates the desired summer-winter mode Summer
for this module. When it is Summer it is in a Set Name: Summer/Winter
cooling mode and responds to the Cooling
Mode input. When it is Winter it is in a
heating mode and responds to the Heating
Mode input.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1191

Primary States (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
Cooling Mode
The following cooling modes are only active when the SummerWinter input is set
to Summer.
• Off: Sets the Cooling Percent Cmd and Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Max: Sets the output for maximum cooling. The Cooling Percent Cmd is set to
100%.
• Limited Max: Sets the Heating Percent Cmd to the Limited Max Value input
percentage.
• Hold: Holds the Cooling Percent Cmd output at its current value.
• Water Flush: Sets the Cooling Percent Cmd output to 100%.
• Control: Adjusts the output to control the Process Variable (cooling only). As
this Cooling Percent Cmd varies, it causes changes to the valve output. If the
Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the output in order to maintain
the process variable at the Cooling Setpoint. Otherwise, the Cooling Percent
Cmd output is set to the failsoft value.
• Failsoft: Sets the Cooling Percent Cmd and Percent Cmd outputs to the
Failsoft Clg Value.
Heating Mode
The following heating modes are only active when the SummerWinter input is set
to Winter.
• Off: Sets the Htg Percent Cmd and Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Max: Sets the output for maximum heating. The Heating Percent Cmd is set to
100%.
• Limited Max: Sets the Heating Percent Cmd to the Limit Max Value input
percentage.
• Hold: Holds the Heating Percent Cmd output at its current value.
• Water Flush: Sets the Heating Percent Cmd output to 100%.
• Control: Adjusts the output to control the Process Variable (heating only). As
the Heating Percent Cmd varies, it causes changes to the valve output.
• Control Limit: Adjusts the output to control the Low Limit Process Variable
(heating only). As the Heating Percent Cmd varies, it causes changes to the
valve output. The process variable (zone temperature) is also controlled in this
mode. The maximum of the Control Limit and Control Heating output is sent
as the Heating Percent Cmd.
• Failsoft: Sets the Heating Percent Cmd and Percent Cmd outputs to the
Failsoft Htg Value.

1192 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-441: 2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit Command
Hierarchy
SummerWinter Heating Mode Cooling Mode State
Winter Off * Off
Max * Max Heating
Limited Max * Limited Max Heating
Water Flush * Water Flush Heating
Hold * Hold
Control Limit * Control Limit
Control * Control Heating
Failsoft * Failsoft Heating
Summer * Off Off
Max Max Cooling
Water Flush Water Flush Cooling
Limited Max Limited Max Cooling
Hold Hold
Control Control Cooling
Failsoft Failsoft Cooling

Output Controller 1193

2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit

Overview
The Heating Cooling 2-position Valve with Face and Bypass Damper Output
Module controls a 2-position valve with a face and bypass damper that
dynamically switches between heating and cooling. The module can be configured
for DA-T or ZN-T control. The module has been designed with temperature
control, Limited Max control, and a Low OA Temperature mode. In addition to the
2-position valve and face and bypass damper, this module is also designed to
control a circulating pump.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)
• Attributes (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)
• Primary States (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)
• Reliability (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-442: 2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
FBPD 2 Position Valve 2 Pipe Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1194 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)
The following table describes the attributes used by the 2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position
Valve with Low Limit modules.
Table 26-443: 2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit Attributes
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status V Displays the cooling PID Status. The Normal
possible values are Normal, Overridden, Set Name: Control Status
Disabled, Low, Timing Low, High, and
Timing High.
Cooling Mode Contains the desired cooling mode of Off
operation. Set Name: AHU Common
Valve Out
Cooling Setpoint Displays the desired cooling setpoint for 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
the process variable to be controlled to
when the Cooling Mode is T Control.
Damper Percent Cmd V Controls the heating/cooling face and 0%
bypass damper. The damper is
commanded from 0% (full bypass) to
100% (full face).
Failsoft Cooling Value Defines the face and bypass damper 100%
position when the module is cooling and in
the Failsoft mode.
Failsoft Heating Value Defines the face and bypass damper 100%
position when the module is heating and in
the Failsoft mode.
HC-OUTSTATE (State) V, G Indicates the current operational mode of Off
the output controller. Set Name: AHU Common
Valve State
Heating Control Status V Displays the heating PID Status. The Normal
possible values are Normal, Overridden, Set Name: Control Status
Disabled, Low, Timing Low, High, and
Timing High.
Heating Mode Contains the desired heating mode of Off
operation. Set Name: AHU Common
Valve Out
Heating Setpoint Displays the desired heating setpoint for 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
the process variable to be controlled to
when the Heating Mode is T Control.
Limited Max Cooling Defines the face and bypass damper 100%
Value position when the module is in the Limited
Max Cooling state.
Limited Max Heating Defines the face and bypass damper 100%
Value position when the module is in the Limited
Max Heating state.
Low OA Temperature Displays the differential for the Low OA 0.5 Deg C, 1.0 Deg F
Diff Temperature function. Once the valve
opens, the OA Temperature must increase
Low OA Temperature Diff more than the
setpoint before the valve can close.
Low OA Temperature Contains the setpoint for the Low OA 4 Deg C, 40 Deg F
Setpoint Temperature function. When the OA
Temperature is below this setpoint, the
valve will be opened.

Output Controller 1195

 Table 26-443: 2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit Attributes
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
OA Temperature Used for the Low OA Temperature mode. 4 Deg C, 40 Deg F
If the OA Temperature drops below a
defined setpoint the valve will be opened.
Process ID Contains the type of process that this DA-T
output controller is controlling when the Set Name: Process ID
mode is T Control.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are Set Name: Unit
the only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the control temperature. Zone 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
temperature, discharge air temperature, or
return air temperature may be connected
to this input.
Pump OnOff V Controls the circulating pump. Off
Set Name: Off/On
SummerWinter Determined if the module should heat or Winter
cool. If the input is Summer, cooling is Set Name: Summer/Winter
allowed, and heating is unavailable. If the
input is winter, heating is allowed, and
cooling is unavailable.
Valve OpenClose V Controls the two position valve. Close
Set Name: Close/Open

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1196 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)
• Off: Turn everything off. The Percent Cmd, and Damper Percent Cmd is set to
0%.
• Max: Open the valve and the damper. The Percent Cmd and Damper Percent
Cmd is set to 100%.
• Limited Max Heating: The valve is opened and the damper is opened to the
Limited Max Heating Value. This state may be used for unoccupied heating.
Percent Cmd is set equal to Limited Max Heating Value; therefore, this mode
would be able to start the AHU.
• Limited Max Cooling: The valve is opened and the damper is opened to the
Limited Max Cooling Value. This state may be used for unoccupied cooling.
Percent Cmd is set equal to Limited Max Cooling Value; therefore, this mode
would be able to start the AHU.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Water Flush: The valve is opened and the damper is closed. The Percent Cmd
is set to 0%, therefore this mode does not trigger the AHU to start.
• Heating T Control: If the Process Variable is reliable, open the valve and
adjust the damper output to control the Process Variable at the Heating
Setpoint. The Percent Cmd and Damper Percent Cmd are adjusted between 0%
and 100%.
• Cooling T Control: If the Process Variable is reliable, open the valve and
adjust the damper output to control the Process Variable at the Cooling
Setpoint. The Percent Cmd and Damper Percent Cmd are adjusted between 0%
and 100%.
• Failsoft Heating: The valve is opened and the damper is opened to the Failsoft
Heating Value. This state is used when the control temperature is unreliable.
Percent Cmd remains unchanged so this mode does not trigger the AHU to
either start or stop.
• Failsoft Cooling: The valve is opened and the damper is opened to the Failsoft
Cooling Value. This state is used when the control temperature is unreliable.
Percent Cmd remains unchanged so this mode does not trigger the AHU to
either start or stop.
• Low OA Temperature: When the OA Temperature is reliable and less than
the Low OA Temperature Setpoint the valve is open. Damper Percent Cmd is
set to the Low OA Temperature Position. The Percent Cmd is set to 0%,
therefore this mode does not trigger the AHU to start.

Output Controller 1197

 Table 26-444: 2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit Command
Hierarchy
SummerWinter Cooling Heating OA State
Mode Mode Temperature is
Reliable
Winter * Off * Off
Hold * Hold
Water Flush * Water Flush
Max * Max
Limited Max * Limited Max Heating
T Control * Heating T Control
Failsoft * Failsoft Heating
Low OA TRUE Low OA Temperature
Temperature
FALSE Limited Max Heating
Summer Off * * Off
Hold * * Hold
Water Flush * * Water Flush
Max * * Max
Limited max * * Limited Max Cooling
T Control * * Cooling T Control
Failsoft * * Failsoft Cooling
Low OA * TRUE Low OA Temperature
Temperature
FALSE Limited Max Cooling

Reliability (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)

All inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.
If the outdoor air temperature is unreliable while in the Low OA Temperature
mode, the module switches to the Limited Max mode as shown in the Command
Hierarchy table.

1198 CCT Help: Modules

2 Pipe Proportional Valve

Overview
This module controls a single proportional source that dynamically switches from
a heating (winter) to a cooling (summer) mode. This module is designed to provide
this control within a zone control application.
The module accepts as inputs a cooling mode, heating mode, process variable,
heating and cooling setpoints, SummerWinter setting, limited max value, flush
position, and configuration information. Based upon the input commands, other
inputs, and the parameter settings, the module outputs a percent command (the
proportional signal) along with the calculated cooling and heating percentages and
statuses for feedback purposes.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe Proportional Valve)
• Attributes (2 Pipe Proportional Valve)
• Primary States (2 Pipe Proportional Valve)
• Reliability (2 Pipe Proportional Valve)

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe Proportional Valve)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-445: 2 Pipe Proportional Valve Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional 2 Pipe Control Fan Coil Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1199

Attributes (2 Pipe Proportional Valve)
The following table describes the attributes used by the 2 Pipe Proportional Valve
modules.
Table 26-446: 2 Pipe Proportional Valve Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control V Displays the current saturation status of the Overridden
Status controller when SummerWinter is set to Summer. Set Name: Control Status
Cooling Mode Displays the cooling mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: COM Valve Out
Cooling Percent V Analog percent output that controls the single Display Units: %
Cmd actuator when SummerWinter is set to Summer.
Cooling Setpoint Displays the desired cooling setpoint for the 23.0 Deg C, 74.0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when the
cooling mode is set to Control.
Failsoft Cooling Displays the value of the output when the cooling 0.0%
Value mode is set to Failsoft.
Failsoft Heating Displays the value of the output when the heating 0.0%
Value mode is set to Failsoft.
Flush Position Displays the value the Percent Cmd is 100.0%
commanded to when the cooling or heating mode
is set to Water Flush. This value is sent directly to
the Percent Cmd output.
HC-OUTSTATE G, V Displays the current operational state of the Set Name: FC 2or4-Pipe
(State) output controller. Out State
Heating Control V Displays the current saturation status of the Overridden
Status controller when SummerWinter is set to Winter. Set Name: Control Status
Heating Mode Displays the heating mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: COM Valve Out
Heating Percent V Controls the single actuator when SummerWinter Display Units: %
Cmd is set to Winter.
Heating Setpoint Displays the desired heating setpoint for the 21.0 Deg C, 70.0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when the
heating mode is set to Control.
Limited Max Specifies that when the cooling or heating mode 100.0%
Position are set to Limited Max, this is the value for the
Percent Cmd.
Percent Cmd V Indicates the current capacity requested by either Display Units: %
the Cooling Percent Cmd or the Heating Percent
Cmd.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this particular Deg C, Deg F
module, Deg C and Deg F are the only two valid Set Name: Unit
values.
Process Variable Specifies that when the cooling or heating mode 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
are set to Control, this is the variable that is
controlled. Typically connected to the Zone
Temperature.
SummerWinter Specifies whether the supply is currently Winter
configured to deliver cooling (Summer) or heating Set Name: Summer/Winter
(Winter).

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning
Modes Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1200 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (2 Pipe Proportional Valve)
Cooling Mode
The following cooling modes are only active when the SummerWinter input is set
to Summer.
• Off: Set the Percent Cmd to 0%. The state is Off.
• Max: Set the output for maximum cooling. The Heating Percent Cmd is set to
0% and the Cooling and Percent Cmds are set to 100% if in Summer mode.
The state is Max Cooling.
• Limited Max: Set the output for maximum cooling with a limit. Similar to the
Max Cooling command except the maximum value is specified by the user
through the Limited Max Value input. The state is Limited Max Cooling.
• Water Flush: Set the output to the Flush Position value. The state is Water
Flush Cooling.
• Hold: Hold the Percent Cmd output at its current value. The state is Hold.
• Control: Adjust the output to control the Process Variable (cooling only). If in
Summer mode and the Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the
output to maintain the process variable at the Cooling Setpoint. The state is
Control Cooling
• Failsoft: The state generation section can use this if the process variable is
unreliable, the output is set to the Failsoft Cooling Value. The state is Failsoft
Cooling.

Output Controller 1201

 Heating Mode
The following heating modes are only active when the SummerWinter input is set
to Winter.
• Off: Set the Percent Cmd to 0%. The state is Off.
• Max: Set the output for maximum heating. The Cooling Percent Cmd is set to
0% and the Heating and Percent Cmds are set to 100% if in Winter mode. The
state is Max Heating.
• Limited Max: Set the output for maximum heating with a limit. Similar to the
Max Heating command except the maximum value is specified by the user
through the Limited Max Value input. The state is Limited Max Heating.
• Water Flush: Set the output to the Flush Position value. The state is Water
Flush Heating.
• Hold: Hold the Percent Cmd output at the current value. The state is Hold.
• Control: Adjust the output to control the Process Variable (heating only). If in
Winter mode and the Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the
output in order to maintain the process variable at the Heating Setpoint. The
state is Control Heating.
• Failsoft: The state generation section can use this if the process variable is
unreliable, the output is set to the Failsoft Heating Value. The state is Failsoft
Heating.
Table 26-447: 2 Pipe Proportional Valve Command Hierarchy
SummerWinter Cooling Mode Heating Mode State
Winter * Off Off
Max Max Heating
Limited Max Limited Max Heating
Hold Hold
Waterflush Water Flush Heating
Failsoft Failsoft Heating
Control Control Heating
Summer Off * Off
Max * Max Cooling
Limited Max * Limited Max Cooling
Hold * Hold
Waterflush * Water Flush Cooling
Failsoft * Failsoft Cooling
Control * Control Cooling

Reliability (2 Pipe Proportional Valve)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1202 CCT Help: Modules

2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit

Overview
This module controls a single proportional source that is dynamically switched
from a heating (winter) to a cooling (summer) mode. It also supports a discharge
low limit for the heating mode. The module accepts as inputs a summer/winter
changeover, cooling mode, heating mode, process variable, limit variable, cooling
setpoint, heating setpoint, limit setpoint, and configuration information. The
module outputs a cooling percent command, heating percent command, percent
command, cooling control status, and a heating control status.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low
Limit)
• Attributes (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
• Primary States (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-448: 2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
UV 2 Pipe Proportional Control Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1203

Attributes (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
The following table describes the attributes used by the 2 Pipe Proportional Valve
with DA-T Low Limit module.
Table 26-449: 2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit Attributes
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status V Displays the current status of the controller Set Name: Control Status
for cooling control.
Cooling Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection, only active when the Set Name: COM Valve Out
SummerWinter input is set to Summer.
Cooling Percent Cmd V Contains the representative analog Display Units: %
percent output on a scale of 0% to 100%
for cooling. This typically is for information
only and is not connected to an output.
Cooling Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when
commanded to Control Cooling.
Failsoft Cooling Value Contains the value of the Cooling Percent 100%
Cmd and Percent Cmd when Cooling
Mode is commanded to Control and the
process variable is unreliable.
Failsoft Heating Value Displays the value of the Heating Percent 100%
Cmd and Percent Cmd when Heating
Mode is commanded to Control and the
process variable is unreliable.
Flush Position Contains the value the Cooling or Heating 100%
Percent Cmd is commanded to when
Cooling Mode or Heating Mode = Water
Flush. This value is sent directly to the
Percent Cmd output.
HC-OUTSTATE (State) V, G Displays the current operational mode of Set Name: UV 2-Pipe Out
the output controller. States
Heating Control Status V Displays the current status of the controller Set Name: Control Status
for heating control.
Heating Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection, only active when the Set Name: UV Valve Out
SummerWinter input is set to Winter.
Heating Percent Cmd V Contains the representative analog Display Units: %
percent output on a scale of 0% to 100%
for heating. This typically is for information
only and is not connected to an output.
Heating Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the 20.0 Deg C, 68.0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when
commanded to Control Heating.
Limited Max Value Specifies that when Cooling Mode or 100%
Heating Mode = Limited Max, this is the
value the output is commanded to.
Low Limit Process Specifies that when the Heating Mode = 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Variable Control Limit, this is the variable that is to
be controlled and must therefore respond
to changes in the output. This value
typically is connected to the Discharge Air
Temperature.

1204 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-449: 2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit Attributes
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when
the Heating Mode = Control Limit.
Percent Cmd V Contains an analog percent output on a Display Units: %
scale of 0% to 100% that represents the
command sent to the valve for heating or
cooling.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are Set Name: Unit
the only two valid values.
Process Variable Contains the variable that is to be 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
controlled and must therefore respond to
changes in the output. This value typically
is connected to the Zone Temperature.
SummerWinter Indicates the desired mode for this Summer
module. When it is Summer, it is in a Set Name: Summer/Winter
cooling mode. When it is Winter, it is in a
heating mode.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit)

Cooling Mode
The following cooling modes are only active when the SummerWinter input is set
to Summer.
• Off: Sets the Cooling Percent Cmd and Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Max: Sets the output for maximum cooling. The Cooling Percent Cmd is set to
100%.
• Limited Max: Sets the Heating Percent Cmd to the Limited Max Value input
percentage.
• Hold: Holds the Cooling Percent Cmd output at its current value.
• Water Flush: Sets the Cooling Percent Cmd output to 100%.
• Control: Adjusts the output to control the Process Variable (cooling only). As
this Cooling Percent Cmd varies, it causes changes to the valve output. If the
Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the output in order to maintain
the process variable at the Cooling Setpoint. Otherwise, the Cooling Percent
Cmd output is set to the failsoft value.
• Failsoft: Sets the Cooling Percent Cmd and Percent Cmd outputs to the
Failsoft Clg Value.

Output Controller 1205

 Heating Mode
The following heating modes are only active when the SummerWinter input is set
to Winter.
• Off: Sets the Htg Percent Cmd and Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Max: Sets the output for maximum heating. The Heating Percent Cmd is set to
100%.
• Limited Max: Sets the Heating Percent Cmd to the Limit Max Value input
percentage.
• Hold: Holds the Heating Percent Cmd output at its current value.
• Water Flush: Sets the Heating Percent Cmd output to 100%.
• Control: Adjusts the output to control the Process Variable (heating only). As
the Heating Percent Cmd varies, it causes changes to the valve output.
• Control Limit: Adjusts the output to control the Low Limit Process Variable
(heating only). As the Heating Percent Cmd varies, it causes changes to the
valve output. The process variable (zone temperature) is also controlled in this
mode. The maximum of the Control Limit and Control Heating output is sent
as the Heating Percent Cmd.
• Failsoft: Sets the Heating Percent Cmd and Percent Cmd outputs to the
Failsoft Htg Value.

Table 26-450: 2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit Command
Hierarchy
SummerWinter Heating Cooling Mode State
Mode
Winter Off * Off
Max * Max Heating
Limited Max * Limited Max Heating
Water Flush * Water Flush Heating
Hold * Hold
Control Limit * Control Limit
Control * Control Heating
Failsoft * Failsoft Heating
Summer * Off Off
Max Max Cooling
Limited Max Limited Max Cooling
Water Flush Water Flush Cooling
Hold Hold
Control Control Cooling
Failsoft Failsoft Cooling

1206 CCT Help: Modules

2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit

Overview
The Heating and Cooling 2-pipe Control with 2-position Valve and Proportional
valve Module controls a 2-position valve and a proportional valve for either reheat
or cooling. The module can be configured for DA-T, RA-T, or ZN-T control. The
module is designed with temperature control, low limit control, and a Low OA
Temperature mode. In addition to the proportional valve, this module is also
designed to control a circulating pump.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
• Attributes (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
• Primary States (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
• Reliability (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-451: 2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional Valve 2 Pipe Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1207

Attributes (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
The following table describes the attributes used by the 2 Pipe Proportional Valve
with Low Limit modules.
Table 26-452: 2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit Attributes (Part 1
of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status V Contains the cooling PID Status. The Normal
possible values are Normal, Overridden, Set Name: Control Status
Disabled, Low, Timing Low, High, and Timing
High.

Cooling Mode Indicates which cooling mode is active Off

Set Name: AHU Common
Valve Out
Cooling Setpoint Displays the desired cooling setpoint for the 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when the
cooling mode is T Control.
Failsoft Cooling Value Defines the proportional valve position when 100%
the module is cooling and in the Failsoft
mode.
Failsoft Heating Value Defines the proportional valve position when 100%
the module is heating and in the Failsoft
mode.
Flush Position Defines the proportional valve position when 100%
the module is in the Water Flush state.
HC-OUTSTATE (State) V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Off
output controller. Set Name: AHU 2 Pipe Htg
Valve State
Heating Control Status V Displays the heating PID Status. The Normal
possible values are Normal, Overridden, Set Name: Control Status
Disabled, Low, Timing Low, High, and Timing
High.
Heating Mode Indicates which heating mode is active. Off
Set Name: AHU 2 Pipe Htg
Valve Out
Heating Setpoint Displays the desired heating setpoint for the 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when the
Heating Mode is T Control.
Limited Max Cooling Defines the proportional valve position when 100%
Value the module is in the Limited Max Cooling
state.
Limited Max Heating Defines the proportional valve position when 100%
Value the module is in the Limited Max Heating
state.
Low Limit Process Contains the low limit temperature process 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F
Variable variable. This input usually is the mixed air
temperature or the preheat air temperature
Low Limit Proportional Contains the range across which the valve is 5 Deg C, 9 Deg F
Band proportionally modulated open as the Low
Limit Process Variable drops below the Low
Limit Setpoint plus the Low Limit Proportional
Band. This input is used only in the Remain
In Control mode.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the low limit temperature setpoint. 7 Deg C, 45 Deg F

1208 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-452: 2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit Attributes (Part 2
of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Low OA Temperature Contains the differential for the Low OA 0.5 Deg C, 1.0 Deg F
Diff Temperature function. Once the valve has
been opened to protect the coil, the protect
temperature must increase Low OA
Temperature Diff more than the Protect
setpoint before the valve can close.
Low OA Temperature Defines the proportional valve position or the 100%
Position face and bypass damper position when the
module is in the Low OA Temperature state.
Low OA Temperature Specifies that when the protect temperature 4 Deg C, 40 Deg F
Setpoint is below this setpoint, the valve is opened.
OA Temperature Specifies that the module supports a Low 4 Deg C, 40 Deg F
Temperature response where the valve may
be opened if OA Temperature drops below a
defined setpoint. This input is used for the
Low OA Temperature input temperature.
Process ID Determines the type of process that this DA-T
output controller controls when the mode is Set Name: Process ID
Control.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the control temperature. Zone 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
temperature, discharge air temperature,
return air temperature, or preheat
temperature may be connected to this input.
Pump OnOff V Controls the circulating pump. Off
Set Name: Off/On
SummerWinter Used to determine if the module should heat Winter
or cool. If the input is Summer, cooling is Set Name: Summer/Winter
allowed, and heating is unavailable. If the
input is Winter, heating is allowed, and
cooling is unavailable.
Valve Percent Cmd V Used to control the single actuator that is 0%
modulating the valve.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1209

Primary States (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
• Off: Turn everything off. The Percent Cmd is set to 0%.
• Max: Open the valve. The Percent Cmd is set to 100%.
• Limited Max Heating: The valve is opened to the Limited Max Heating
Value. This state may be used for unoccupied heating.
• Limited Max Cooling: The valve is opened to the Limited Max Cooling. This
state may be used for unoccupied heating.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Water Flush: The valve is opened to the Water Flush Position.
• Heating T Control: Adjust the valve output to control the Process Variable. If
the Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the output in order to
maintain the Process Variable at the Heating Setpoint. The Valve Percent Cmd
and the Percent Cmd are adjusted between 0% and 100%.
• Cooling T Control: Adjust the valve output to control the Process Variable. If
the Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the output in order to
maintain the Process Variable at the Cooling Setpoint. The Valve Percent Cmd
and the Percent Cmd are adjusted between 0% and 100%.
• Failsoft Heating: The valve is opened to the Failsoft Heating Value. This state
may be used when the control temperature is unreliable.
• Failsoft Cooling: The valve is opened to the Failsoft Cooling Value. This state
may be used when the control temperature is unreliable.
• Low OA Temperature: The valve is opened to the Low OA Temperature
Position when the OA Temperature is less than the Low OA Temperature
Setpoint.
• Remain In Control: Modulate the valve to control the Limit Variable to the
Limit Setpoint. If the Limit Variable is reliable, the module controls the output
in order to maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit Setpoint. This mode should
only be used as a shutdown strategy to add energy to the duct when the fan is
off. It should not be used for general temperature control.

1210 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-453: 2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit Command
Hierarchy
SummerWinte Cooling Heating OA Low Limit State
r Mode Mode Temperature Process
is Reliable Variable is
Reliable
Winter * Off * * Off
Hold * * Hold
Water Flush * * Water Flush
Max * * Max
Limited Max * * Limited Max Heating
T Control * * Heating T Control
Failsoft * * Failsoft Heating
Low OA TRUE * Low OA Temperature
Temperature
FALSE * Limited Max Heating
Remain In * TRUE Remain In Control
Control
FALSE Failsoft Heating
Summer Off * * * Off
Hold * * * Hold
Water Flush * * * Water Flush
Max * * * Max
Limited max * * * Limited Max Cooling
T Control * * * Cooling T Control
Failsoft * * * Failsoft Cooling
Low OA * TRUE * Low OA Temperature
Temperature
FALSE * Limited Max Cooling

Reliability (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit)

• All inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.
• If the outdoor air temperature is unreliable while in the Low OA Temperature
mode, the module switches to the Limited Max mode as shown in the
Command Hierarchy table.
• If the Low Limit Process Variable is unreliable while in the Remain In Control
mode, the module switches to the Failsoft mode as shown in the Command
Hierarchy table.

Output Controller 1211

Heating & Cooling Control - Cooling
Overview
The Cooling output controllers control a cooling device. Some of the modules
offer dehumidification control.
The Heating & Cooling Control - Cooling group contains the following modules:
• Cooling 2 Position Valve
• Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification
• Cooling Proportional Valve
• Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification
• Cooling Staged Outputs
• Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification

Cooling 2 Position Valve

Overview
This module controls a two-position cooling valve within a zone control
application. This module determines the required percent of capacity and then
provides the appropriate control inputs to a MSC. The module accepts as inputs a
mode, process variable, and a setpoint. Based upon the input mode, the module
produces outputs intended to be connected to the MSC module that controls the
actual two-position valve.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Cooling 2 Position Valve)
• Attributes (Cooling 2 Position Valve)
• Primary States (Cooling 2 Position Valve)
• Reliability (Cooling 2 Position Valve)

1212 CCT Help: Modules

Module Use in Applications (Cooling 2 Position Valve)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-454: Cooling 2 Position Valve Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
2 Position Cooling Control Fan Coil Application
Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Cooling 2 Position Valve)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Cooling 2 Position Valve
modules.
Table 26-455: Cooling 2 Position Valve Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLG-MINOFF Displays Min Off Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
(Minimum Off Time)
CLG-MINON (Minimum Displays Min On Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
On Time)
CLG-O (Percent Cmd) V Controls the single actuator that is providing Display Units: %
cooling.
CLG-OUTSTATE G, V Contains the current operational state of the Set Name: COM Valve Out
(State) output controller.
Control Band V Displays the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of the Overridden
controller. Set Name: Control Status
Eff Minimum Off Time V Displays the minimum off time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Displays the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Contains the effective process time constant Display Units: Seconds
Const used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Displays the Process Variable used by the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
MSC.
Failsoft Value Displays the value of the output when 0.0%
commanded to Failsoft.
HeatingCooling Configures the module to be either compatible Cooling
with a heating source or a cooling source. Set Name: Heating/Cooling
Limited Max Value Specifies that when commanded to Limited 100,0%
Max, this is the value the Percent Cmd is set to.

Output Controller 1213

 Table 26-455: Cooling 2 Position Valve Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: COM Valve Out
PMAC Period V Displays the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when the mode is set to Control, 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
this is the variable that is controlled. This value
typically is connected to the Zone Temperature.
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
set to Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Cooling 2 Position Valve)

• Off: Set the Percent Cmd to 0%. The MSC closes the 2 position valve, but only
after all timers are satisfied.
• Max: Percent Cmd is set to 100%. The MSC opens the 2 position valve, but
only after all timers are satisfied.
• Limited Max: Set the Percent Cmd to the Limited Max Value. The MSC
cycles the 2 position valve to provide the percent represented by the Limited
Max Value.
• Hold: Hold the Percent Cmd at its current value. This value continues to be fed
to the MSC and the 2 position valve cycles to provide the percent represented
by the current input to the MSC.
• Water Flush: Set the Percent Cmd to 100%. The MSC opens the 2 position
valve, but only after all timers are satisfied.
• Control: Adjust the Percent Cmd to control the Process Variable. As the
Percent Cmd varies, the MSC varies the open and closed timing of the 2
position valve.
• Failsoft: Set the Percent Cmd to the Failsoft value. This value then feeds
through the MSC and the 2 position valve opens accordingly based on the
timer settings.

Reliability (Cooling 2 Position Valve)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1214 CCT Help: Modules

Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification

Overview
The Cooling Control with 2-position Valve and Face and Bypass Damper (FBPD)
Output Module is designed to control a 2-position valve and a face and bypass
damper for either cooling or dehumidification. The module can be configured for
DA-T, RA-T, or ZN-T control as well as dehumidification. This module accepts a
control temperature, a low limit temperature, relative humidity, and setpoints. The
module has outputs for controlling a face and bypass damper, a 2-position valve,
and a circulating pump.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with
Dehumidification)
• Attributes (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification)
• Primary States (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification)
• Reliability (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification)

Module Use in Applications (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with

Dehumidification)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-456: Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification Uses
in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
FBPD 2 Position Valve Cooling Control All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1215

Attributes (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Cooling FBPD 2 Position
Valve with Dehumidification modules:
Table 26-457: Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification
Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLG-OUTSTATE V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Off
(State) output controller. Set Name: AHU Clg FBPD
Out
Cooling Control Status V Displays the PID Status. The possible values Normal
are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Low, Set Name: Control Status
Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Damper Percent Cmd V Controls the face and bypass damper. The 0%
damper is commanded from 0% (full bypass)
to 100% (full face).
Dehum Process ID Specifies the type of process that this output RA-H
controller is controlling when the mode is H Set Name: Process ID
Control.
Failsoft Value Defines the face and bypass damper 100%
position when the module is in the Failsoft
state.
Humidity Process Displays the value of the humidity being 50% RH
Variable measured by the humidity sensor. It is used
as the process variable in the
dehumidification control.
Humidity Setpoint Displays the dehumidification Setpoint. 50% RH
Limited Max Value Defines the face and bypass damper 100%
position when the module is in the Limited
Max Heating state.
Low OA Temperature Contains the differential for the Low OA 0.5 Deg C, 1.0 Deg F
Diff Temperature mode. Once the valve has
been in the Low AO Temperature mode, the
OA Temperature must increase Low OA
Temperature Diff more than the Low OA
Temperature Setpoint before the valve can
close.
Low OA Temperature Displays the setpoint for the Low OA 4 Deg C, 40 Deg F
Setpoint Temperature mode. When the OA
Temperature is below this setpoint, the valve
opens and the face and bypass dampers are
be set to 100%.
Mode Displays the desired mode of operation. Off
Set Name: AHU Clg FBPD
Out
OA Temperature Specifies that when the module supports a 4 Deg C, 40 Deg F
Low Temperature response, the valve may
be opened if OA Temperature drops below a
defined setpoint. This input is used for the
Low OA Temperature input temperature.
Process ID Specifies the type of cooling process that this DA-T
output controller is controlling when the Set Name: Process ID
mode is T Control.
Process Units Specifies the units for the cooling PID. For Deg C, Deg F
this particular module, Deg C and Deg F are Set Name: Unit
the only two valid values.

1216 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-457: Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification
Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Process Variable Contains the control temperature. Either 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
Zone temperature, discharge air
temperature, or return air temperature may
be connected to this input.
Pump OnOff V Controls the circulating pump. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the process 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
Control.
Valve OpenClose V Controls the two position cooling valve. Close
Set Name: Close/Open

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification)

• Off: Turn everything off. The Damper Percent Cmd is set to 0%.
• Max: Open the cooling valve and the damper. The Damper Percent Cmd is set
to 100%.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Water Flush: The valve opens to the Water Flush Position and the face and
bypass damper closes.
• Limited Max: The valve is open, and the damper is opened to the Limited
Max Value. This state may be used for unoccupied heating or cooling.
• T Control: The valve is open, and the damper is modulated to control the
process variable to the setpoint. The Damper Percent Cmd is adjusted between
0% and 100%.
• H Control: The cooling valve is opened, and the face and bypass damper is
modulated to control the humidity process variable to the humidity setpoint.
Adjust the cooling valve to control the humidity. The Damper Percent Cmd is
adjusted between 0% and 100%.
• Low OA Temperature: The valve is opened and the face and bypass damper
is opened to 100% when the OA Temperature is less than the Low OA
Temperature Setpoint.
• Failsoft: The valve is opened and the face and bypass damper is opened to the
Failsoft Value. This state may be used when the control temperature is
unreliable.
• Face: The valve is closed, but the damper is opened to 100% face. This state
may be used during heating if the unit needs the FBPD to be 100% face while
using electric heat.

Output Controller 1217

 Table 26-458: Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification
Command Hierarchy
OA Temperature is Mode State
Reliable
* Off Off
Max Max
T Control T Control
H Control H Control
Hold Hold
TRUE Low OA Temperature Low OA Temperature
FALSE Low OA Temperature Limited Max
* Water Flush Water Flush
Limited Max Limited Max
Failsoft Failsoft
Face Face

Reliability (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification)

All inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.
If the outdoor air temperature is unreliable while in the Low OA Temperature
mode, the module switches to the Limited Max mode as shown in the Command
Hierarchy table.

1218 CCT Help: Modules

Cooling Proportional Valve

Overview
This module controls a proportional Cooling source within a zone control
application. The module accepts as inputs a mode, process variable, and a setpoint.
Based upon the input mode and parameter settings, the module outputs a percent
command and control status.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Cooling Proportional Valve)
• Attributes (Cooling Proportional Valve)
• Primary States (Cooling Proportional Valve)
• Reliability (Cooling Proportional Valve)

Module Use in Applications (Cooling Proportional Valve)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names the following table.
Table 26-459: Cooling Proportional Valve Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional Cooling Control Fan Coil Application
Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1219

Attributes (Cooling Proportional Valve)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Cooling Proportional
Valve modules.
Table 26-460: Cooling Proportional Valve Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLG-OUTSTATE G, V Displays the current operational state of the Set Name: COM Valve Out
(State) output controller.
Control Status V Contains the current saturation status of the Overridden
controller. Set Name: Control Status
Failsoft Value Displays the value of the output when 0.0%
commanded to Failsoft.
Flush Position Displays the value of the output when 100,0%
commanded to Water Flush. This value is sent
directly to the Percent Cmd output.
HeatingCooling Configures the module to be either compatible Cooling
with a heating source or a cooling source. Set Name: Heating/Cooling
Limited Max Value Specifies that when the module is commanded 100,0%
to Limited Max, this is the value of the Percent
Cmd.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: COM Valve Out
Percent Cmd V Controls the single actuator that is providing Display Units: %
Cooling.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when the mode is set to Control, 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
this is the variable that is controlled. This value
typically is connected to the Zone Temperature.
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
set to Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Cooling Proportional Valve)

• Off: Sets the Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Max: The Percent Cmd is set to 100%.
• Limited Max: Set the Percent Cmd to the Limited Max Value.
• Hold: Hold the Percent Cmd at the current value.
• Water Flush: Set the Percent Cmd to Flush Position.
• Control: Adjust the Percent Cmd to control the Process Variable.
• Failsoft: Set the Percent Cmd to the Failsoft value.

Reliability (Cooling Proportional Valve)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1220 CCT Help: Modules

Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification

Overview
The Cooling Proportional Valve Output Module controls a proportional valve for
either cooling or dehumidification. The module can be configured for DA-T, RA-
T, or ZA-T control and it may be configured for RA-H or ZN-H control. The
module has been designed with temperature control, dehumidification, and several
different protection modes. This module also can control a circulating pump.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Cooling Proportional Valve with
Dehumidification)
• Attributes (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification)
• Primary States (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification)
• Reliability (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification)

Module Use in Applications (Cooling Proportional Valve with

Dehumidification)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-461: Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional Valve Cooling Control All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1221

Attributes (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Cooling Proportional
Valve with Dehumidification modules.
Table 26-462: Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification
Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLG-OUTSTATE G, V Displays the current operational state of the Off
(State) output controller. Set Name: AHU Clg Valve
Out
Cooling Control Status V Contains the current saturation status of the Normal
controller. Set Name: Control Status
Cooling Percent Cmd V Controls the cooling valve. The valve is 0%
commanded from 0% to 100%.
Dehum Process ID Specifies the type of process that this output RA-H
controller is controlling when the mode is H Set Name: Process ID
Control.
Failsoft Value Specifies the output when the mode is set to 100%
Failsoft.
Flush Position Specifies the output when the mode is set to 100%
Water Flush.
Humidity Process Displays the value of the relative humidity 50% RH
Variable being measured by the humidity sensor. It is
used as the process variable in the
dehumidification control.
Humidity Setpoint Contains the dehumidification Setpoint. 50% RH
Limited Max Value Specifies the output when the mode is set to 100%
Limited Max.
Low OA Temperature Indicates the differential for the Low OA 0.5 Deg C, 1.0 Deg F
Diff Temperature mode. Once the valve is
opened to allow water to flow through the coil
during low OA temperature conditions, the
OA temperature must increase above the OA
Temperature Setpoint by the Low OA
Temperature Diff before the valve can close.
Low OA Temperature Specifies the output when the mode is set to 100%
Position Low OA Temperature.
Low OA Temperature Indicates the setpoint for the Low OA 4 Deg C, 40 Deg F
Setpoint Temperature mode. When the OA
Temperature falls below this setpoint, the
valve opens.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: AHU Clg Valve
Out

1222 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-462: Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification
Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
OA Temperature Indicates the Outside Air Temperature. 4 Deg C, 40 Deg F
Process ID Specifies the type of process that this output DA-T
controller is controlling when the mode is T Set Name: Process ID
Control.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when the mode is set to 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
Control, this is the variable that is controlled.
This value typically is connected to the Zone
Temperature.
Pump OnOff V Controls the circulating pump. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
set to Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification)

• Off: Turn everything off. The Cooling Percent Cmd is set to 0%.
• Max: Open the cooling valve. The Cooling Percent Cmd is set to 100%.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Water Flush: The valve is opened to the Water Flush Position.
• Limited Max: The valve is opened to the Limited Max Value. This state may
be used for unoccupied cooling.
• T Control: Adjust the cooling valve to control the Process Variable. If the
Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the output in order to maintain
the Process Variable Setpoint. The Cooling Percent Cmd is adjusted between
0% and 100%.
• H Control: Adjust the cooling valve to control the humidity. If the humidity is
reliable, the module controls the output to maintain the humidity at the
dehumidification setpoint. The Cooling Percent Cmd is adjusted between 0%
and 100%.
• Low OA Temperature: The valve is opened to the Low OA Temperature
Position when the OA Temperature is less than the Low OA Temperature
Setpoint.
• Failsoft: The valve is opened to the Fail Soft Position. This state may be used
when the process variable is unreliable.

Output Controller 1223

 Table 26-463: Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification
Command Hierarchy
OA Temperature is Reliable Mode State
* Off Off
Max Max
T Control T Control
H Control H Control
Hold Hold
TRUE Low OA Temperature Low OA Temperature
FALSE Low OA Temperature Limited Max
* Water Flush Water Flush
Limited Max Limited Max
Failsoft Failsoft

Reliability (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification)

All inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.
If the outdoor air temperature is unreliable while in the Low OA Temperature
mode, the module switches to the Limited Max mode as shown in Table 26-463.

1224 CCT Help: Modules

Cooling Staged Outputs

Overview
This module is responsible for controlling a discrete Cooling device within a zone
control application. The module accepts an input mode, a process variable, a
setpoint, and configuration information. The module outputs the representative
percent command and a control status. The outputs are sent to a MSC module
which provides the control for the actual binary outputs.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Cooling Staged Outputs)
• Attributes (Cooling Staged Outputs)
• Primary States (Cooling Staged Outputs)
• Reliability (Cooling Staged Outputs)

Module Use in Applications (Cooling Staged Outputs)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-464: Cooling Staged Outputs Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Staged Cooling Control Fan Coil Application
Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1225

Attributes (Cooling Staged Outputs)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Cooling Staged Outputs
module.
Table 26-465: Cooling Staged Outputs Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLG-MINOFF Contains the Min Off Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
(Minimum Off Time)
CLG-MINON (Minimum Contains the Min On Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
On Time)
CLG-O (Percent Cmd) V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
output on a scale of 0% to 100%.
CLG-OUTSTATE G, V Displays the current operational mode of the Set Name: COM Staged Out
(State) output controller.
Control Band V Contains the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Control Status V Displays the current status of the controller Set Name: Control Status
for Cooling control.
Eff Minimum Off Time V Contains the minimum off time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Contains the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Displays the effective process time constant Display Units: Seconds
Const used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Displays the Process Variable used by the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
MSC.
Failsoft Value Specifies that when the mode is set to 0.0%
Failsoft, the output cycles to maintain this
percentage duty cycle.
HeatingCooling Configures the module to be either Cooling
compatible with a heating source or a cooling Set Name: Heating/Cooling
source.
Instant Shutdown V Indicates to the MSC to shut off all outputs
instantly.
Limited Max Value Specifies that when the mode is set to 100.0%
Limited Max, the output cycles to maintain
this percentage duty cycle.
Max Capacity Fraction Displays the ratio of the largest stage to the 1.0
sum of all the stages.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: COM Staged Out
PMAC Period V Displays the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when the mode is set to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Control, this is the variable that is controlled.
This value typically is connected to the Zone
Temperature.

1226 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-465: Cooling Staged Outputs Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Proof of Airflow Specifies that when set to False or True, the True
controller operates as normal. Set Name: False/True/Fault
When set to Fault, the controller transitions to
an instant off state.
Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the process 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
set to Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Cooling Staged Outputs)

• Off: Set the Percent Cmd to 0% and the Instant Shutdown output to False. The
MSC turns off all outputs, but only after all timers are satisfied.
• Max: The Percent Cmd is set to 100%. This value then feeds through the MSC
and the stages are turned on accordingly based on the timer settings.
• Limited Max: Set the output to the limited max value. This value then feeds
through the MSC and the stages are turned on accordingly based on the timer
settings.
• Hold: Hold the Percent Command output at the current value. This value
continues to feed to the MSC and the stages continue to be controlled by the
sequencer. Should timers expire, it is possible for the number of enabled stages
to change during a hold command because the Percent Command is really the
only value that is explicitly held.
• Instant Shutdown: Set the Percent Cmd to 0% and the Instant Shutdown
output to True. The MSC turns off all outputs instantly.
• Control: Adjust the output to control the Process Variable. As this Percent
Cmd varies, it causes changes to the enabling of the staged outputs from the
MSC.
• Failsoft: Set the output to the Failsoft value. This value then feeds through the
MSC and the stages are turned on accordingly based on the timer settings.

Reliability (Cooling Staged Outputs)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1227

Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification

Overview
The Staged Cooling Output Module is designed to control staged compressors for
either cooling or dehumidification. The temperature control can be configured for
DA-T, RA-T, or ZA-T control and the dehumidification may be configured for
RA-H or ZN-H. The module accepts inputs for temperature, relative humidity,
temperature setpoint, humidity setpoint, and compressor minimum on and off
times. The module has outputs for controlling the MSC module.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification)
• Attributes (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification)
• Primary States (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification)
• Reliability (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification)

Module Use in Applications (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-466: Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
AHU Staged Cooling Control All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Cooling Staged Outputs
with Dehumidification modules.
Table 26-467: Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification Attributes
(Part 1 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLG-MINOFF Contains the Min Off Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
(Minimum Off Time)
CLG-MINON (Minimum Contains the Min On Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
On Time)

1228 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-467: Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification Attributes
(Part 2 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
CLG-O (Cooling V Controls the cooling device. The device is Display Units: %
Percent Cmd) commanded from 0% to 100%.
CLG-OUTSTATE G, V Displays the current operational mode of the Set Name: AHU Clg Staged
(State) output controller. Out
Control Band V Displays the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Cooling Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
controller.
Dehum Process ID Specifies the type of process that this output RA-H
controller is controlling when the mode is H Set Name: Process ID
Control.
Eff Minimum Off Time V Displays the minimum off time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Displays the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Contains the effective process time constant Display Units: Seconds
Const that is used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Contains the Process Variable used by the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
MSC.
Humidity Process Displays the value of the relative humidity 50.0% RH
Variable being measured by the humidity sensor. It is
used as the process variable in the
dehumidification control.
Humidity Setpoint Contains the dehumidification Setpoint. 50.0% RH
Instant Shutdown V Indicates to the MSC to shut off all outputs
instantly.
Limited Max Value Defines the proportional valve position when 100.0%
the module is in the Limited Max state.
Max Capacity Fraction Contains the ratio of the largest stage to the 1.0
sum of all the stages.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: AHU Clg Staged
Out
PMAC Period V Specifies the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.
Process ID Specifies the type of process that this output DA-T
controller is controlling when the mode is H Set Name: Process ID
Control.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the control temperature. Either 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Zone temperature, discharge air
temperature, return air temperature or
preheat temperature may be connected to
this input.
Proof of Airflow Specifies that when set to False or True, the True
controller operates as normal. When set to Set Name: False/True/Fault
Fault, the controller transitions to an instant
off state.

Output Controller 1229

 Table 26-467: Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification Attributes
(Part 3 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification)

• Off: Turn everything off. The Cooling Percent Cmd is set to 0%. The MSC
module observe any minimum on and minimum off times.
• Max: The Cooling Percent Cmd is set to 100%.
• Limited Max: The Cooling Percent Cmd is opened to the Limited Max
Position. This state may be used for unoccupied cooling.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Instant Shutdown: Turn everything off. The Cooling Percent Cmd is set to
0%. The MSC module does not observe any minimum on and minimum off
times.
• T Control: Adjust the cooling device to control the Process Variable. If the
Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the output to maintain the
Setpoint. The Cooling Percent Cmd is adjusted between 0% and 100%.
• H Control: Adjust the cooling device to control the humidity. If the relative
humidity sensor is reliable, the module controls the output to maintain the
humidity at the dehumidification setpoint. The Cooling Percent Cmd is
adjusted between 0% and 100%.
Table 26-468: Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification Command
Hierarchy
Proof of Airflow Mode State
Fault * Instant Shutdown
Not (Fault) Instant Shutdown Instant Shutdown
Off Off
Max Max
Hold Hold
H Control H Control
T Control T Control
Limited Max Limited Max

Reliability (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1230 CCT Help: Modules

Heating & Cooling Control - Heat Pump
Overview
The Heat Pump output controller controls a heat pump. This provides control for
switchover of the reversing valves as well as staging of the compressor.
Heating & Cooling Control - Heat Pump contains the Heat Pump Staged
Compressors module.

Heat Pump Staged Compressors

Overview
This module controls heat pump compressors and reversing valves that are
dynamically switched from a heating to a cooling mode. This module is designed
to provide this control within a zone control application.
The module accepts as inputs a cooling mode and a heating mode, process
variable, two setpoints, and configuration information. Based upon the input
modes and Proof of Airflow input, the module outputs a percent command along
with the calculated cooling and heating percentages for feedback purposes. Prior to
commanding, the compressor on the module commands the reversing value to the
proper position. The heating and cooling control status are also output.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
The Finite State Machine cannot be modified.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heat Pump Staged Compressors)
• Attributes (Heat Pump Staged Compressors)
• Primary States (Heat Pump Staged Compressors)
• Reliability (Heat Pump Staged Compressors)

Module Use in Applications (Heat Pump Staged Compressors)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-469: Heat Pump Staged Compressors Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Staged Compressor Control Heat Pump Application

Output Controller 1231

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Heat Pump Staged Compressors)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Heat Pump Staged
Compressors modules.
Table 26-470: Heat Pump Staged Compressors Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Action Controls the action of the reversing valve. On for Htg
The On for Htg state energizes the reversing Set Name: On For Htg/On
valve output when in heating mode. For Clg
COMPCLG-O (Cooling V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
Percent Cmd) output for cooling on a scale of 0% to 100%.
This typically is connected to the three speed
or proportional fan output. This value does
not exactly match the staged outputs due to
PMAC and the status of min on and min off
timers.
COMPHTG-O (Heating V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
Percent Cmd) output for heating on a scale of 0% to 100%.
This typically is connected to the three speed
or proportional fan output. This value does
not exactly match the staged outputs due to
PMAC and the status of min on and min off
timers.
COMP-MINOFF Displays the Min Off Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
(Minimum Off Time)
COMP-MINON Displays the Min On Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
(Minimum On Time)
COMP-OUTSTATE G, V Displays the current operational state of the Set Name: HP Discrete Out
(State) output controller. State
Control Band V Displays the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Cooling Control Status V Displays the current cooling saturation status Set Name: Control Status
of the controller.
Cooling Mode Displays the cooling mode requested by Off
State Selection. Set Name: HP Cooling Mode
Cooling Setpoint Contains the desired cooling setpoint for the 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when the
cooling mode is set to Control.
Eff Minimum Off Time V Specifies the minimum off time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Specifies the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Contains the effective process time constant Display Units: Seconds
Const that is used by the MSC.

1232 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-470: Heat Pump Staged Compressors Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Eff Process Variable V Displays the Process Variable used by the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
MSC.
Heating Control Status V Displays the current heating saturation Set Name: Control Status
status of the controller.
Heating Mode Displays the heating mode requested by Off
State Selection. Set Name: HP Heating Mode
Heating Setpoint Displays the desired heating setpoint for the 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when the
heating mode is set to Control.
Instant Shutdown V Triggers the MSC to shut off all outputs
instantly.
Max Capacity Fraction Contains the ratio of the largest pulsable 1
stage to the sum of all the stages.
Off Time Specifies the delay in the Off state before 6 Seconds
switching the reversing valve.
Percent Cmd V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
output on a scale of 0% to 100%.
PMAC Period V Specifies the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when the cooling or heating 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
mode are set to Control, this is the variable
that is controlled. This value typically is
connected to the Zone Temperature.
Proof of Airflow Specifies that when set to Fault, the module True
goes to the Off state. Set Name: False/True/Fault
Reversing Valve V Specifies the on/off command to the Set Name: Off/On
reversing valve.
System Mode Displays the current System Mode. This is Auto
used to lock out heating when in cooling only Set Name: System Mode
system mode, and to lock out cooling when
in heating only system mode.
Transition Time Specifies the delay before commanding on 6 Seconds
the compressor, which allows the reversing
valve to switch into position.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1233

Primary States (Heat Pump Staged Compressors)
Heating Mode
• Off: Set the Percent Cmd and Heating Percent Cmd to 0%. Instant Shutdown is
issued to the MSC and turns off all the stages.
• Max: Set the output for maximum heating when in a heating configuration.
The Common Percent Cmd is set to 100%. This value then feeds through the
MSC and the stages turns on accordingly based on the timer settings. See the
MSC section for more information.
• Control: Adjust the output to control the Process Variable when in a heating
configuration. As the Common Percent Cmd varies, it causes changes to the
enabling of the staged outputs from the MSC. If the Process Variable is
reliable, the module controls the output in order to maintain the process
variable at the Setpoint. Otherwise the Common Percent Cmd output is set to
0%. See the MSC section for more information.
• Failsoft: Set the Percent Cmd, Heating Percent Cmd and Cooling Percent Cmd
output to the 0%.
Cooling Mode
• Off: Set the Percent Cmd and Cooling Percent Cmd to 0%. The MSC turns off
all the stages, but proceed through the minimum on timers. See the MSC
section for more information.
• Control: Adjust the output to control the Process Variable when in a cooling
configuration. As the Common Percent Cmd varies, it causes changes to the
enabling of the staged outputs from the MSC. If the Process Variable is
reliable, the module controls the output to maintain the process variable at the
Setpoint. Otherwise the Common Percent Cmd output is set to 0%. See the
MSC section for more information.
• Failsoft: Set the Percent Cmd and Cooling Percent Cmd output to 0%.
Table 26-471: Heat Pump Staged Compressors Command Hierarchy
Proof of Airflow Cooling Mode Heating Mode State
Fault * * Off
Not(Fault) Failsoft * Off
* Failsoft Off
Off Off Off
Max Max Heating
Control Control Heating
Control * Control Cooling

Reliability (Heat Pump Staged Compressors)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1234 CCT Help: Modules

Heating & Cooling Control - Heat Recovery
Overview
The Heat Recovery output controllers controls heat recovery equipment. Support
for glycol loop control and heat recovery wheels is included.
The Heating & Cooling Control - Heat Recovery group contains the following
modules:
• Heat Recovery Glycol Loop
• Heat Recovery Wheel
• Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers
• Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers

Heat Recovery Glycol Loop

Overview
The Heat Recovery Glycol Loop Output Module recovers energy from the exhaust
air using a glycol loop. The module can be configured for DA-T, EA-T, or ZN-T
control. This module accepts heating and cooling mode inputs, a suitability input,
control temperature and setpoint inputs, and limit temperature and setpoint inputs.
It has an analog output and a binary output for controlling the glycol valve and a
binary signal for controlling a circulating pump.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop)
• Attributes (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop)
• Primary States (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop)
• Reliability (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop)

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-472: Heat Recovery Glycol Loop Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Glycol Loop Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

Output Controller 1235

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Heat Recovery Glycol
Loop modules.
Table 26-473: Heat Recovery Glycol Loop Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status V Displays the PID Status. The possible values Normal
are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Low, Set Name: Control Status
Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Cooling Mode Displays the desired cooling mode of Off
operation. Set Name: AHU HR Cl EW
Heat Recovery V Displays the binary signal to the glycol valve. Close
OpenClose Set Name: Close/Open
Heat Recovery Percent V Displays the analog signal to the glycol valve. 0%
Cmd
Heat Recovery Indicates if the heat recovery may be used None
Suitability for cooling control, heating control, or Set Name: AHU HR Suit
unsuitable for either control. The
enumeration set is Heat, Cool, or None.
Heating Control Status V Displays the PID Status. The possible values Normal
are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Low, Set Name: Control Status
Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Heating Mode Displays the desired heating mode of Off
operation. Set Name: AHU HR Ht GL
HR-OUTSTATE (State) V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Off
output controller.
Low Limit Process Contains the low limit temperature process 4 Deg C, 39 Deg F
Variable variable, normally connected to a sensor
located in the exhaust duct after the Heat
Recovery device.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the low limit temperature setpoint. 4 Deg C, 39 Deg F
Process ID Specifies the type of process that this output DA-T
controller is controlling when the mode is Set Name: Process ID
Tctrl.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Contains the control temperature, and it may 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
be connected to either Zone temperature,
discharge air temperature, or exhaust air
temperature. The latter signal is expected to
come from a sensor in the exhaust duct
upstream of the heat recovery device.

1236 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-473: Heat Recovery Glycol Loop Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Pump OnOff V Displays the binary signal to the glycol Off
circulating pump. Set Name: Off/On
Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the process 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
Tctrl.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop)

• Off: Turn everything off. The Heat Recovery percent Cmd is set to 0%.
• Max: The glycol valve is opened 100%.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• T Control: Modulate the glycol valve to control the Process Variable at the
setpoint. This mode is used for heating only since the heat recovery device can
provide more heat than what is required to condition the space. On the other
hand, during cooling, the heat recovery device cannot produce enough cold air
to condition the space.
• LL-T Control: Modulate the glycol valve to control the Low Limit Variable.
Normally the low limit variable is the glycol temperature, and this mode would
be used to prevent the glycol temperature from dropping below freezing. If the
Limit Variable is reliable, the module controls the output to maintain the Limit
Variable at the Limit setpoint.
Table 26-474: Heat Recovery Glycol Loop Command Hierarchy
Heat Recovery Cooling Mode Heating Mode State
Suitability
None * * Off
Cool Off * Off
Max * Max
Hold * Hold
Heat * Off Off
Max Max
Hold Hold
T Control T Control
LL-T Control LL-T Control

Reliability (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop)

All inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.

Output Controller 1237

Heat Recovery Wheel

Overview
The Heat Recovery Energy Wheel Output Module recovers energy from the
exhaust air using an energy wheel. The module can be configured for DA-T, EA-
T, or ZN-T control. This module accepts heat and cooling mode inputs, a
suitability input, control temperature and setpoint inputs, limit temperature and
setpoint inputs, a maximum speed input, and a Limited Max Speed input. It has an
analog output and a binary output for controlling the energy wheel.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Wheel)
• Attributes (Heat Recovery Wheel)
• Primary States (Heat Recovery Wheel)
• Reliability (Heat Recovery Wheel)

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Wheel)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-475: Heat Recovery Wheel Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Enthalpy Wheel Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1238 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Heat Recovery Wheel)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heat Recovery Wheel
modules.
Table 26-476: Heat Recovery Wheel Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status V Displays the PID Status. The possible values Normal
are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Low, Set Name: Control Status
Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Cooling Mode Displays the desired cooling mode of Off
operation. Set Name: AHU HR Cl EW
Heat Recovery OnOff V Displays the binary signal to the Enthalpy Off
Wheel. Set Name: Off/On
Heat Recovery Percent V Contains the analog signal sent to the 0%
Cmd Enthalpy Wheel.
Heat Recovery Indicates if the heat recovery may be used None
Suitability for cooling control, heating control, or Set Name: AHU HR Suit
unsuitable for either control. The
enumeration set is Heat, Cool, or None.
Heating Control Status V Displays the PID Status. The possible values Normal
are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Low, Set Name: Control Status
Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Heating Mode Displays the desired heating mode of Off
operation. Set Name: AHU HR Ht EW
HR-MAXOUT (Max Defines the maximum wheel speed which 65%
Wheel Speed) provides maximum heat transfer.
HR-OUTSTATE (State) V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Off
output controller. Set Name: AHU HR Ht EW
Limited Max Speed Defines the wheel speed when the module is 65%
in the Limited Max state.
Low Limit Process Displays the low limit temperature process 4 Deg C, 39 Deg F
Variable variable, normally connected to a sensor
located in the exhaust duct after the Heat
Recovery device.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the low limit temperature setpoint. 4 Deg C, 39 Deg F
Process ID Specifies the type of process that this output DA-T
controller is controlling when the mode is T Set Name: Process ID
Control.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the control temperature, and it may 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
be connected to either Zone temperature,
discharge air temperature, or exhaust air
temperature. The latter signal is expected to
come from a sensor in the exhaust duct
upstream of the enthalpy wheel.
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
T Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1239

Primary States (Heat Recovery Wheel)
• Off: Turn everything off. The Heat Recovery Percent Cmd is set to 0%.
• Max: Operate the energy recovery wheel at the maximum wheel speed.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• T Control: Modulate the energy wheel speed to control the Process Variable at
the Setpoint. This mode is used for heating only since the heat recovery device
can provide more heat than what is required to condition the space. On the
other hand, during cooling, the heat recovery device cannot produce enough
cold air to condition the space.
• Limited Max: Operate the energy recovery wheel at the Limited Max Speed.
• LL-T Control: Modulate the energy wheel speed to control the Low Limit
Variable. The low limit variable is the air temperature leaving the energy
wheel, and this mode would be used to prevent the leaving temperature from
dropping below freezing. If the Limit Variable is reliable, the module controls
the output in order to maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit Setpoint.
Table 26-477: Heat Recovery Wheel Command Hierarchy
Heat Recovery Cooling Mode Heating Mode State
Suitability
None * * Off
Cool Off * Off
Max * Max
Hold * Hold
Heat * Off Off
Max Max
Hold Hold
Limited Max Limited Max
T Control T Control
LL-T Control LL-T Control

Reliability (Heat Recovery Wheel)

All inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.

1240 CCT Help: Modules

Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers

Overview
The Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers output module recovers
energy from the exhaust air using an energy wheel with a two-position bypass
damper. The module can be configured for DA-T, EA-T, or ZN-T control. This
module accepts heat and cooling mode inputs, a suitability input, control
temperature and setpoint inputs, limit temperature and setpoint inputs, and
maximum speed and limited max speed inputs. It has an analog output and a binary
output for controlling the energy wheel, and a second binary output to control the
two-position bypass damper.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass
Dampers)
• Attributes (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers)
• Primary States (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers)
• Reliability (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers)

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass

Dampers)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-478: Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Energy Wheel Two Pos Byp AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1241

Attributes (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heat Recovery Wheel with
2 Pos Bypass Dampers modules.
Table 26-479: Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers
Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status V Displays the PID Status. The possible values Normal
are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Low, Set Name: Control Status
Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Cooling Mode Displays the desired cooling mode of Off
operation. Set Name: AHU HR Cl EW
Heat Recovery Displays the binary signal to the bypass Close
CloseOpen damper. Set Name: Close/Open
Heat Recovery OnOff V Displays the binary signal to the Enthalpy Off
Wheel. Set Name: Off/On
Heat Recovery Percent Displays the analog signal to the Enthalpy 0%
Cmd Wheel.
Heat Recovery Indicates whether the heat recovery may be None
Suitability used for cooling control, heating control, or Set Name: AHU HR Suit
unsuitable for either control. The
enumeration set is Heat, Cool, or None.
Heating Control Status V Displays the PID Status. The possible values Normal
are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Low, Set Name: Control Status
Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Heating Mode Displays the desired heating mode of Off
operation. Set Name: AHU HR Ht EW
HR-OUTSTATE (State) V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Off
output controller. Set Name: AHU HR Ht EW
Limited Max Speed Defines the wheel speed when the module is 65%
in the Limited Max state.
Low Limit Process Displays the low limit temperature process 4 Deg C, 39 Deg F
Variable variable, normally connected to a sensor
located in the exhaust duct after the Heat
Recovery device.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the low limit temperature setpoint. 4 Deg C, 39 Deg F
Max Wheel Speed Defines the maximum wheel speed to 65%
provide the maximum heat transfer.
Process ID Specifies the type of process that this output DA-T
controller is controlling when the mode is Set Name: Process ID
T Control. The Discharge Air Temperature
process variable has a Process ID of DA-T.
The Zone Air Temperature process variable
has a Process ID of ZN-T. The Exhaust Air
Temperature process variable has a
Process ID of EA-T. The Return Air
Temperature process variable has a
Process ID of RA-T.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.

1242 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-479: Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers
Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Process Variable Displays the control temperature, and it may 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
be connected to either Zone temperature,
discharge air temperature, or exhaust air
temperature. The latter signal is expected to
come from a sensor in the exhaust duct
upstream of the enthalpy wheel.
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
T Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers)

• Off: Set the output to the heat recovery wheel to off.
• Max: Operate the energy recovery wheel at the maximum wheel speed. Turn
off the Heat Recovery CloseOpen.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Limited Max: Operate the energy recovery wheel at the Limited Max Speed.
Turn off the Heat Recovery CloseOpen.
• T Control: Modulate the energy wheel speed to control the Process Variable at
the Setpoint. This mode is used for heating only because the heat recovery
device can provide more heat than what is required to condition the space.
During cooling, the heat recovery device cannot produce enough cold air to
condition the space. When Heat Recovery Percent Cmd is 0%, the Heat
Recovery OpenClose is set to Open. When Heat Recovery Percent Cmd is any
other value, the Heat Recovery OpenClose is set to Close.
• LL-T Control: Modulate the energy wheel speed to control the Low Limit
Variable. The low limit variable is the air temperature leaving the energy
wheel, and this mode is used to prevent the leaving temperature from dropping
below freezing. If the Limit Variable is reliable, the module controls the output
to maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit Setpoint. When Heat Recovery
Percent Cmd is 0%, the Heat Recovery OpenClose is set to Open. When Heat
Recovery Percent Cmd is any other value, the Heat Recovery OpenClose is set
to Close.

Output Controller 1243

 Table 26-480: Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers
Command Hierarchy
Heat Recovery Cooling Mode Heating Mode State
Suitability
None * * Off
Cool Off * Off
Max * Max
Hold * Hold
Heat * Off Off
Max Max
Limited Max Limited Max
Hold Hold
T Control T Control
LL-T Control LL-T Control

Reliability (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers)

All inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.

1244 CCT Help: Modules

Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers

Overview
The Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers output module recovers energy
from the exhaust air using an energy wheel. The module can be configured for
DA-T, EA-T, or ZN-T control. This module accepts heat and cooling mode inputs,
a suitability input, control temperature and setpoint inputs, and limit temperature
and setpoint inputs. It has two analog outputs for outdoor air and exhaust face and
bypass dampers, and a binary output for controlling the energy wheel.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers)
• Attributes (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers)
• Primary States (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers)
• Reliability (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers)

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-481: Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1245

Attributes (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heat Recovery Wheel with
Bypass Dampers modules.
Table 26-482: Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers Attributes
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status V Displays the PID Status. The possible values Normal
are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Low, Set Name: Control Status
Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Cooling Mode Displays the desired cooling mode of Off
operation. Set Name: AHU HR Cl EW
EA FBD Modulated Indicates whether the EA face and bypass True
damper is modulated or set to the EA FBD
Value when the state is T Control or LL-T
Control.
EA FBD Value Indicates the position of the EA face and 100%
bypass damper when EA FBD Modulated is
set to False.
Heat Recovery V Contains the analog signal sent to the 0%
Exhaust FBD Cmd exhaust face and bypass damper.
Heat Recovery OA V Contains the analog signal sent to the OA 0%
FBD Cmd face and bypass damper.
Heat Recovery OnOff V Displays the binary signal to the Enthalpy Off
Wheel. Set Name: Off/On
Heat Recovery Indicates whether the heat recovery may be None
Suitability used for cooling control, heating control, or Set Name: AHU HR Suit
unsuitable for either control. The
enumeration set is Heat, Cool, or None.
Heating Control Status V Displays the PID Status. The possible values Normal
are Normal, Overridden, Disabled, Low, Set Name: Control Status
Timing Low, High, and Timing High.
Heating Mode Displays the desired heating mode of Off
operation. Set Name: AHU HR Ht EW
HR-OUTSTATE (State) V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Off
output controller. Set Name: AHU HR Ht EW
Low Limit Process Displays the low limit temperature process 4 Deg C, 39 Deg F
Variable variable, normally connected to a sensor
located in the exhaust duct after the Heat
Recovery device.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the low limit temperature setpoint. 4 Deg C, 39 Deg F
OA FBD Modulated Indicates whether the OA face and bypass True
damper is modulated or set to the OA FBD
Value when the state is T Control or LL-T
Control.

1246 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-482: Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers Attributes
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
OA FBD Value Indicates the position of the OA face and 100%
bypass damper when OA FBD Modulated is
set to False.
Process ID Specifies the type of process that this output DA-T
controller is controlling when the mode is Set Name: Process ID
T Control. The Discharge Air Temperature
process variable has a Process ID of DA-T.
The Zone Air Temperature process variable
has a Process ID of ZN-T. The Exhaust Air
Temperature process variable has a
Process ID of EA-T.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the control temperature, and it may 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
be connected to either Zone temperature,
discharge air temperature, or exhaust air
temperature. The latter signal is expected to
come from a sensor in the exhaust duct
upstream of the enthalpy wheel.
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 13 Deg C, 55 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
T Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers)

Cooling Mode
• Off: Turn everything off. The face and bypass damper outputs are set to 0%.
• Max: Operate the energy recovery wheel with the face and bypass dampers
positioned for full flow through the wheel. The wheel operates at maximum
capacity during cooling, since the heat recovery device cannot produce enough
cold air to condition the space.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
Heating Mode
• Off: Turn everything off. The face and bypass damper outputs are set to 0%.
• Max: Operate the energy recovery wheel with the face and bypass dampers
positioned for full flow through the wheel.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• T Control: Modulate the bypass damper position to control the Process
Variable at the Setpoint. This mode is used for heating only, since the heat
recovery device can provide more heat than what is required to condition the
space.

Output Controller 1247

 • LL-T Control: Modulate the bypass damper position to control the Low Limit
Variable. The low limit variable is the air temperature leaving the energy
wheel, and this mode is used to prevent the leaving temperature from dropping
below freezing. If the Limit Variable is reliable, the module controls the output
in order to maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit Setpoint.
State
• Off: Turn everything off. The face and bypass damper outputs are set to 0%.
• Max: Operate the energy recovery wheel with the face and bypass dampers
positioned for full flow through the coil.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• T Control: Modulate the bypass damper position to control the Process
Variable at the Setpoint. This mode is used for heating only since the heat
recovery device can provide more heat than what is required to condition the
space. On the other hand, during cooling, the heat recovery device cannot
produce enough cold air to condition the space
• LL-T Control: Modulate the bypass damper position to control the Low Limit
Variable. The low limit variable is the air temperature leaving the energy
wheel, and this mode is used to prevent the leaving temperature from dropping
below freezing. If the Limit Variable is reliable, the module controls the output
in order to maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit Setpoint.
Table 26-483: Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers Command
Hierarchy
Heat Recovery Cooling Mode Heating Mode State
Suitability
None * * Off
Cool Off * Off
Max * Max
Hold * Hold
Heat * Off Off
Max Max
Hold Hold
T Control T Control
LL-T Control LL-T Control

Reliability (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers)

All inputs use their last reliable value while unreliable.

1248 CCT Help: Modules

Heating & Cooling Control - Heating
Overview
The Heating output controllers controls a heating device. Support for two position
valves, face and bypass dampers, proportional valves, and staged outputs is
included. Support for face and bypass dampers combined with proportional or two
position valves is also included. Some of the modules also provide for low limit
control.
The Heating & Cooling Control - Heating group contains the following modules:
• Heating 2 Position Valve
• Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit
• Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit
• Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit
• Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit
• Heating Proportional Valve
• Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit
• Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit
• Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit
• Heating Staged Outputs
• Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit
• Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit
• Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control

Output Controller 1249

Heating 2 Position Valve

Overview
This module controls a two-position heating valve within a zone control
application. This module determines the required percent of capacity and then
provides the appropriate control inputs to a MSC. The module accepts as inputs, a
mode, a process variable, a setpoint. Based upon the input mode, the module
produces outputs intended to be connected to the MSC module that controls the
actual two-position valve.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heating 2 Position Valve)
• Attributes (Heating 2 Position Valve)
• Primary States (Heating 2 Position Valve)
• Reliability (Heating 2 Position Valve)

Module Use in Applications (Heating 2 Position Valve)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-484: Heating 2 Position Valve Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
2 Position Box Heating Control VAV Single Duct Application
2 Position Heating Control Fan Coil Application
2 Position Supplemental Heating Control VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1250 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Heating 2 Position Valve)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating 2 Position Valve
modules:
Table 26-485: Heating 2 Position Valve Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Band V Displays the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of the Overridden
controller. Set Name: Control Status
Eff Minimum Off Time V Contains the minimum off time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Contains the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Contains the effective process time constant Display Units: Seconds
Const used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Contains the Process Variable used by the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
MSC.
Failsoft Value Contains the value of the output when 0.0%
commanded to Failsoft.
HeatingCooling Configures the module to be either compatible Heating
with a heating source or a cooling source. Set Name: Heating/Cooling
HTG-MINOFF or Contains the Min Off Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
SUPHTG-MINOFF
(Minimum Off Time)
HTG-MINON or Contains the Min On Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
SUPHTG-MINON
(Minimum On Time)
HTG-O or SUPHTG-O V Controls the single actuator that is providing Display Units: %
(Percent Cmd) heating.
HTG-OUTSTATE or G, V Displays the current operational state of the Set Name: COM Valve Out
SUPHTG-OUTSTATE output controller.
(State)
Limited Max Value Specifies that when commanded to Limited 100,0%
Max, this is the value for the Percent Cmd.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: COM Valve Out
PMAC Period V Contains the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when the mode is set to Control, 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
this is the variable that is controlled. Typically
connected to the Zone Temperature.
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
set to Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1251

Primary States (Heating 2 Position Valve)
• Off: Sets the Percent Cmd to 0%. The MSC closes the 2 position valve, but
only after all timers are satisfied.
• Max: The Percent Cmd is set to 100%. The MSC opens the 2 position valve,
but only after all timers are satisfied.
• Limited Max: Set the Percent Cmd to the Limited Max Value. The MSC
cycles the 2 position valve to provide the percent represented by the Limited
Max Value.
• Hold: Hold the Percent Cmd at it’s current value. This value continues to feed
to the MSC and the 2 position valve cycles to provide the percent represented
by the current input to the MSC.
• Water Flush: Sets the Percent Cmd to 100%. The MSC opens the 2 position
valve, but only after all timers are satisfied.
• Control: Adjust the Percent Cmd to control the Process Variable. As the
Percent Cmd varies, the MSC varies the open and closed timing of the 2
position valve.
• Failsoft: Set the Percent Cmd to the Failsoft value. This value then feeds
through the MSC and the 2 position valve opens accordingly based on the
timer settings.

Reliability (Heating 2 Position Valve)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1252 CCT Help: Modules

Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit

Overview
This module is responsible for controlling a two-position heating valve within a
zone control application. This module determines the required percent of capacity
and then provides the appropriate control input to a MSC. This module also
provides for discharge air low limit control in Unit Ventilator applications.
The module accepts as inputs a mode, process variable, setpoint, low limit process
variable, low limit setpoint, and other configuration inputs. The module outputs a
representative percent command, a percent request, a control status, and other
outputs which feed the MSC module. It passes the outputs to the MSC module that
controls the actual binary outputs.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
• Attributes (Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
• Primary States (Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-486: Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Application
UV 2 Position Heating Control Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating 2 Position Valve
with DA-T Low Limit module.
Table 26-487: Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit Attributes
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Band V Displays the control band for the MSC. Set Name: Unit
Control Status V Displays the current status of the controller Set Name: Control Status
for cooling or heating control.

Output Controller 1253

 Table 26-487: Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit Attributes
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Eff Minimum Off Time V Displays the minimum off time to be used by Display Units: Seconds
the MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Displays the minimum on time to be used by Display Units: Seconds
the MSC.
Eff Process Time V Contains the effective process time constant Display Units: Seconds
Const that is used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Displays the Process Variable used by the Set Name: Unit
MSC.
Failsoft Value Specifies that when the mode is set to 100.0%
Control and the process variable is
unreliable, the output cycles to maintain this
percentage duty cycle.
HTG-MINOFF Contains the Min Off Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
(Minimum Off Time)
HTG-MINON (Minimum Contains the Min On Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
On Time)
HTG-O (Percent Cmd) V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
output on a scale of 0% to 100%.
HTG-OUTSTATE V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Set Name: UV Valve Out
(State) output controller.
Limited Max Value Specifies that when the mode is set to 100.0%
Limited Max, the output cycled to maintain
this percentage duty cycle.
Low Limit Process Contains the process variable to be 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Variable controlled when the mode is set to Control
Limit.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the low limit 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when the
mode is Control Limit.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: UV Valve Out
PMAC Period V Displays the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when the mode is set to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Control, this is the variable that is to be
controlled. Typically connected to the Zone
Temperature.
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
set to Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1254 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
• Off: Output is commanded to 0%.
• Max: Set the Percent Cmd to 100%. This value then feeds through the MSC
and the valve opens accordingly based on the timer settings.
• Limited Max: Set the output to the limited max value. This value then feeds
through the MSC and the valve opens and closes accordingly based on the
timer settings.
• Hold: Output holds its current value.
• Water Flush: Set the Percent Cmd output to 100%. This value continues to
feed to the MSC and the valve opens by the sequencer
• Control: Adjust the output to control the Process Variable. As this Percent
Cmd varies, it causes changes to the opening and closing of the valve from the
MSC.
• Control Limit: Adjust the output to control the Low Limit Process Variable.
As this Percent Cmd varies, it causes changes to the opening and closing of the
valve from the MSC.
• Failsoft: The Percent Cmd is set to the Failsoft Value. This value then feeds
through the MSC and the valve opens and closes accordingly based on the
timer settings.

Output Controller 1255

Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit

Overview
This module is responsible for face and bypass damper control within a Unit
Ventilator zone control application. The module accepts as inputs a mode, process
variable, setpoint, limit setpoint, limit process variable, and other configuration
inputs. The module outputs a damper percent command, control status, a valve
open/close command for a two-position valve, and state based on the input mode
and parameter settings.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low
Limit)
• Attributes (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
• Primary States (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low
Limit)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-488: Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit Uses
in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
UV Face and Bypass Heating Control Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1256 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating FBPD 2 Position
Valve with DA-T Low Limit module.
Table 26-489: Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit
Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status V Displays the current status of the controller for Set Name: Control Status
FBP damper control.
Cooling Coil Location Displays the location of the Cooling Coil (same Same as Heating
path as Heating or Separate from Heating.) Set Name: Coil Location
Damper Percent Cmd V Used to control the single actuator that is Display Units: %
modulating the FBP Damper.
Failsoft Value Specifies that when the mode is Failsoft, the 0.0%
damper percent cmd output is set to the Failsoft
Value.
HTG-OUTSTATE V, G Indicates the current operational mode of the Set Name: UV Face Bypass
(State) output controller. Out
Limited Max Value Specifies that when the mode is Limited Max, 100.0%
this is the value for the damper percent cmd
output.
Low Limit Process Specifies that when the mode is Control Limit, 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Variable this is the variable that is to be controlled and
must therefore respond to changes in the
output. This value typically is connected to the
DA Temperature.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the low limit 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when the
mode is Control Limit.
Mode Indicates the desired state of operation. Off
Set Name: UV Face Bypass
Out
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when the mode is Control, this is 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
the variable that is controlled and must
therefore respond to changes in the output.
Typically connected to the Zone Temperature.
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
Control.
Valve OpenClose V Contains the output command to the two Set Name: Close/Open
position valve.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1257

Primary States (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
• Off: Turn everything off. The Damper Percent Cmd is set to 0%.
• Max: Open the heating valve. The Damper Percent Cmd is set to 100%.
• Limited Max: Open the heating valve. Damper Percent Cmd is set to the
Limited Max Value.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Water Flush: Open the heating valve. The Damper Percent Cmd is set to
100%.
• Control: Open the heating valve and adjust the damper output to control the
Process Variable. If the Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the
output to maintain the Process Variable at the Setpoint. The Damper Percent
Cmd is adjusted between 0% and 100%.
• Control Limit: Open the heating valve and adjust the output to control the
Low Limit Process Variable. If the Low Limit Process Variable is reliable, the
module controls the output in order to maintain the Low Limit Process
Variable at the Low Limit Setpoint. The Damper Percent Cmd is adjusted
between 0% and 100%.
• Failsoft: Set the output to the Failsoft value.
• Cooling: Set the damper output for cooling operation. The Damper Percent
Cmd is set to 100% when the Cooling Coil Location is the same path as heating
and 0% when in separate path from heating.

1258 CCT Help: Modules

Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit

Overview
The Heating Control with 2-position Valve and Face and Bypass Damper Output
Module controls a 2-position valve and a proportional face and bypass damper for
either preheat or reheat. The module can be configured for DA-T, RA-T, ZN-T, or
PH-T control. The module has been designed with temperature control, low limit
control, and a Low OA Temperature mode. In addition to the valve and
proportional damper, this module is also designed to control a circulating pump.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)
• Attributes (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)
• Primary States (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)
• Reliability (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-490: Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
FBPD 2 Position Valve Preheat Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1259

Attributes (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating FBPD 2 Position
Valve with Low Limit modules.
Table 26-491: Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit Attributes
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Damper Percent Cmd V Controls the face and bypass damper. The Display Units: %
damper is commanded from 0% (full bypass)
to 100% (full face).
Failsoft Value Defines the face and bypass damper position 100.0%
when the module is in the Failsoft state.
Heating Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
controller.
Heating Ramp Rate Determines the time to remain in the Cold 20.0%
Start state (if applicable). During the cold
start state, the preheat output is prevent from
closing quickly to allow it to come into control
without tripping the Low Limit on the unit.
HTG-OUTSTATE or G, V Displays the current operational mode of the Set Name: AHU Htg FBPD
PH-OUTSTATE (State) output controller. State
Limited Max Value Defines the face and bypass damper position 100.0%
when the module is in the Limited Max mode.
Low Limit Process Contains the low limit temperature process 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Variable variable. This input is usually the preheat or
discharge air temperature.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the low limit temperature setpoint. 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Low OA Temperature Contains the differential for the Low OA 0.5 Deg C, 1.0 Deg F
Diff Temperature function. Once the valve has
been opened in the Low OA Temperature
mode, the OA Temperature must increase
Low OA Temperature Diff more than the Low
OA Temperature Setpoint before the valve
can close.
Low OA Temperature Contains the setpoint for the Low OA 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
Setpoint Temperature function. When the OA
Temperature is below this setpoint, the valve
opens and the face and bypass damper is
set to Low OA Temperature Position.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: AHU Htg FBPD
Out
OA Temperature Displays the outdoor air temperature. 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
Process ID This is the type of process that this output DA-T
controller is controlling when the mode is T Set Name: Process ID
Control. The following lists the process
variables and the correct setting for the
Process ID:
Process Variable: Process ID
Discharge Air Temperature: DA-T
Preheat Air Temperature: DA-T
Return Air Temperature: ZN-T
Zone Air Temperature: ZN-T
Exhaust Air Temperature: ZN-T

1260 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-491: Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit Attributes
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the control temperature. Either 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Zone temperature, discharge air
temperature, return air temperature, or
preheat temperature may be connected to
this input.
Pump OnOff V Controls the circulating pump. Set Name: Off/On
Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the process 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
T Control.
Valve OpenClose V Contains the output command to the two- Set Name: Close/Open
position valve.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)

• Off: Turn everything off. The Damper Percent Cmd is set to 0%. The Pump
OnOff is turned off and the Valve OpenClose is commanded closed.
• Max: The valve is open, and the damper is opened to 100% face. The Damper
Percent Cmd is set to 100%.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Water Flush: The damper is 0% face, the valve is opened, and the pump is on.
• Limited Max: The valve is open, and the damper is opened to the Limited
Max Value. This state may be used for unoccupied heating or cooling.
• T Control: Open the heating valve and adjust the damper output to control the
Process Variable. If the Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the
output in order to maintain the Process Variable at the Setpoint. The Damper
Percent Cmd is adjusted between 0% and 100%.
• LL-T Control: Open the heating valve and adjust the output to control the
Limit Variable. If the Limit Variable is reliable, the module controls the output
in order to maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit Setpoint. The Damper
Percent Cmd is adjusted between 0% and 100%.
• Low OA Temperature: The valve is open and the damper is opened to 100%
when the OA Temperature is less than the Low OA Temperature Setpoint.
• Failsoft: The valve is opened, and the damper is opened to the Failsoft Value.
This state may be used when the control temperature is unreliable.
• Low OA Temperature Startup: This mode activates the T Control state
section, but limits the rate at which the valve can close so that the unit can
safely come into control (typically used for 100% OA units with low OA
temperatures at startup).

Output Controller 1261

 Table 26-492: Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit Command
Hierarchy
OA Temperature is Reliable Mode State
* Off Off
Max Max
T Control T Control
LL-T Control LL-T Control
Hold Hold
Water Flush Water Flush
True Low OA Temperature Low OA Temperature
False Low OA Temperature Failsoft
* Limited Max Limited Max
Failsoft Failsoft
Low OA Temperature Startup T Control

Reliability (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit)

Table 26-493: Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
OA Temperature Output controller changes to Failsoft Mode.

1262 CCT Help: Modules

Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit

Overview
The Heating Control with Proportional Valve and Face and Bypass Damper
Output Module controls both a proportional valve and a face and bypass damper
for either preheat or reheat. The valve is the controlled device if the OA
Temperature is above the Switchover Setpoint, and the face and bypass damper is
the controlled device if the OA Temperature is less than the Switchover Setpoint.
When the valve is in control, the face and bypass damper is 100% face. When the
face and bypass damper is in control, the valve is 100% open. The module can be
configured for DA-T, RA-T, ZN-T, or PH-T control. The module has been
designed with temperature control, low limit control, and protection modes. This
module is also designed to control a circulating pump.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low
Limit)
• Attributes (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
• Primary States (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
• Reliability (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low

Limit)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-494: Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
FBPD Proportional Valve Preheat Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1263

Attributes (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating FBPD
Proportional Valve with Low Limit modules.
Table 26-495: Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit Attributes
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Damper Percent Cmd V Controls the face and bypass damper. The Display Units: %
damper is commanded from 0% (full bypass)
to 100% (full face).
Failsoft Value Defines the face and bypass damper position 100.0%
when the module is in the Failsoft state.
FBPDSWO-SP Contains the switch over setpoint. If the 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
(Switchover Setpoint) Switchover Process Variable Temperature is
greater than the setpoint, the valve is the
controlled device. If the Switchover Process
Variable Temperature is less than the
setpoint, the face and bypass damper is the
controlled device.
Flush Position Defines the proportional valve position when 100.0%
the module is in the Water Flush state.
Heating Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
controller.
Heating Percent Cmd V Controls the heating valve. The valve is Display Units: %
commanded from 0% to 100%.
Heating Ramp Rate Used to determine the time to remain in the 20.0%
Cold Start state (if applicable). During the
cold start state, the preheat output is prevent
from closing quickly to allow it to come into
control without tripping the Low Limit on the
unit.
HTG-OUTSTATE or G, V Displays the current operational mode of the Set Name: AHU Htg w FBPD
PH-OUTSTATE (State) output controller. Valve Out
Limited Max Value Defines the face and bypass damper position 100.0%
when the module is in the Limited Max mode.
Low Limit Process Displays the low limit temperature process 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Variable variable. This input is usually the preheat or
discharge air temperature.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the low limit temperature setpoint. 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Low OA Temperature Contains the differential for the Low OA 0.5 Deg C, 1.0 Deg F
Diff Temperature function. Once the valve has
been opened in the Low OA Temperature
mode, the OA Temperature must increase
Low OA Temperature Diff more than the Low
OA Temperature Setpoint before the valve
can close.
Low OA Temperature Defines the proportional valve position or the 100.0%
Position face and bypass damper position when the
module is in the Low OA Temperature state.
Low OA Temperature Contains the setpoint for the Low OA 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
Setpoint Temperature function. When the OA
Temperature is below this setpoint, the valve
opens and the face and bypass damper is set
to Low OA Temperature Position.

1264 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-495: Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit Attributes
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: AHU Htg Valve
Out
Network Switchover Contains the network switch over variable FBPD
which is used to determine if the valve or the Set Name: FBPD/Valve
FBPD is the control device.
OA Temperature Displays the outdoor air temperature. 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
Percent Cmd V Shows the total system output from 0% to Display Units: %
100%.
Process ID Displays the type of process that this output DA-T
controller is controlling when the mode is T Set Name: Process ID
Control. The following lists the process
variables and the correct setting for the
Process ID:
Process Variable: Process ID
Discharge Air Temperature: DA-T
Preheat Air Temperature: DA-T
Return Air Temperature: ZN-T
Zone Air Temperature: ZN-T
Exhaust Air Temperature: ZN-T
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the control temperature. Either Zone 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
temperature, discharge air temperature,
return air temperature, or preheat
temperature may be connected to this input.
Pump OnOff V Controls the circulating pump. Set Name: Off/On
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
T Control.
Switchover Diff Specifies the switch over differential. The 0.5 Deg C, 1.0 Deg F
Switch T must be this much more than the
setpoint before the module may return to
valve control.
Switchover Process Contains the switch over variable which is 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
Variable used to determine if the valve or the FBPD is
the control device. The mixed air temperature
or the outdoor air temperature are usually
connected to this input.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1265

Primary States (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
• Off: Turn everything off. The damper is 0% face, and the valve closes.
• Max: Open the heating valve and the damper.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Water Flush: The damper is 0% face, and the valve is opened to the Water
Flush Position. Percent Cmd is set to 0 because this mode is not intended to
provide heating (that is, should not transition from full open).
• Limited Max: For valve control, the damper is 100% face, and the valve is
opened to the Limited Max Value. For damper control, the valve is opened
100%, and the damper is opened to the Limited Max Value. This state may be
used for unoccupied heating.
• T Control: Modulate the controlled device to control the Process Variable. If
the Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the output in order to
maintain the Process Variable at the Setpoint.
• LL-T Control: Modulate the controlled device to control the Limit Variable.
If the Limit Variable is reliable, the module controls the output in order to
maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit Setpoint.
• Low OA Temperature: The valve is opened to the Low OA Temperature
Position when the Protect-T is less than the Protect-Tsp.
• Failsoft: For valve control, the damper is 100% face, and the valve is opened
to the Failsoft Value. For damper control, the valve is opened 100%, and the
damper is opened to the Failsoft Value. This state may be used when the
control temperature is unreliable.
• Low OA Temperature Startup: This mode activates the T Control state
section, but limits the rate at which the valve can close so that the unit can
safely come into control (typically used for 100% OA units with low OA
temperatures at startup).
• Remain In Control: Modulate the controlled device to control the Limit
Variable to the Limit Setpoint. If the Limit Variable is reliable, the module
controls the output in order to maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit
Setpoint. This mode should only be used as a shutdown strategy to add energy
to the duct when the fan is off. It should not be used for general temperature
control.
Table 26-496: Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit
Command Hierarchies - 1
Local is Reliable Network is Local Switchover Network Valve in Control
Reliable Switchover (State)
False * * * False
True False * * False
True False FPBD False
Valve True
True * True

1266 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-497: Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit
Command Hierarchies - 2
Low Limit OA Temperature Valve in Control Mode State
Process Variable is Reliable
is Reliable
* * * Off Off
Max Max
True T Control T Control Valve
False T Control T Control Damper
True LL-T Control LL-T Control Valve
False LL-T Control LL-T Control
Damper
* Hold Hold
Water Flush Water Flush
True Limited Max Limited Max Valve
False Limited Max Limited Max
Damper
True * Low OA Temperature Low OA
Temperature
False * Low OA Temperature Failsoft Valve
* True Failsoft Failsoft Valve
False Failsoft Failsoft Damper
True Low OA Temperature T Control Valve
Startup
False Low OA Temperature T Control Damper
Startup
True * * Remain In Control Remain In Control
False * * Remain In Control Failsoft Valve

Reliability (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit)

Table 26-498: Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit
Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
OA Temperature If the requested mode is Low OA Temperature, the output
controller changes to Failsoft Valve.
Low Limit Process Variable If the requested mode is Remain In Control, the output controller
changes to Failsoft Valve.

Output Controller 1267

Heating Proportional Valve

Overview
This module controls a proportional heating source within a zone control
application. The module accepts as inputs mode, process variable, and a setpoint.
Based upon the input mode and parameter settings, the module outputs a percent
command and control status.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heating Proportional Valve)
• Attributes (Heating Proportional Valve)
• Primary States (Heating Proportional Valve)
• Reliability (Heating Proportional Valve)

Module Use in Applications (Heating Proportional Valve)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-499: Heating Proportional Valve Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional Box Heating Control VAV Single Duct Application
Proportional Heating Control Fan Coil Application
Proportional Supplemental Heating Control VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1268 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Heating Proportional Valve)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating Proportional
Valve modules.
Table 26-500: Heating Proportional Valve Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of the Overridden
controller. Set Name: Control Status
Failsoft Value Displays the value of the output when 0.0%
commanded to Failsoft.
Flush Position Contains the value the output is commanded 100.0%
to when commanded to Water Flush. This
value is sent directly to the Percent Cmd
output.
HeatingCooling Configures the module to be either Heating
compatible with a heating source or a cooling Set Name: Heating/Cooling
source.
HTG-OUTSTATE or G, V Displays the current operational state of the Set Name: COM Valve Out
SUPHTG-OUTSTATE output controller.
(State)
Limited Max Value Specifies that when commanded to Limited 100.0%
Max, this is the value for the Percent Cmd.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: COM Valve Out
Percent Cmd V Controls the single actuator that is providing Display Units: %
heating.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when the mode is set to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Control, this is the variable that is to be
controlled. This value typically is connected
to the Zone Temperature.
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
set to Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1269

Primary States (Heating Proportional Valve)
• Off: Sets the Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Max: The Percent Cmd is set to 100%.
• Limited Max: Set the Percent Cmd to the Limited Max Value.
• Hold: Hold the Percent Cmd at the current value.
• Water Flush: Sets the Percent Cmd to Flush Position.
• Control: Adjust the Percent Cmd to control the Process Variable.
• Failsoft: Set the Percent Cmd to the Failsoft value.

Reliability (Heating Proportional Valve)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1270 CCT Help: Modules

Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit

Overview
This module controls a proportional heating source within a zone control
application. Besides controlling the primary source temperature (typically the
zone), this module specifies functionality for controlling a discharge air low limit
temperature. The module accepts as inputs a mode, process variable, setpoint, limit
variable, limit setpoint, limited max value, flush position, and inputs to the PID
blocks within the module. Based upon the input command and parameter settings,
the module outputs a percent command and control status.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low
Limit)
• Attributes (Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
• Primary States (Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low

Limit)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-501: Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
UV Proportional Heating Control Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1271

Attributes (Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating Proportional
Valve with DA-T Low Limit module
Table 26-502: Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status V Displays the current status of the controller Display Units: %
for heating control.
Failsoft Value Contains the value of the Percent Cmd 100%
output when commanded to Failsoft.
Flush Position Specifies the value the output is 100%
commanded to when Mode = Water Flush.
This value is sent directly to the Percent
Cmd output.
HTG-OUTSTATE V, G Displays the current operational mode of Set Name: UV Valve Out
(State) the output controller.
Limited Max Value Specifies that when Mode = Limited Max, 100%
this is the value the output is commanded
to.
Low Limit Process Specifies that when Mode = Control Limit, 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Variable this is the variable that is controlled.
Typically connected to the Discharge Air
Temperature.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the Limit 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Variable to be controlled to when Mode =
Control Limit.
Mode Commands the module into a state of Off
operation. Set Name: UV Valve Out
Percent Cmd V Contains the analog percent output to be Display Units: %
used to control the single actuator that is
providing heating.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are Set Name: Unit
the only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when Mode = Control, this is 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
the variable that is controlled. Typically
connected to the Zone Temperature.
Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Process Variable to be controlled to when
Mode = Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1272 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit)
• Off: The Percent Cmd is set to 0%.
• Max: Set the output for maximum heating. The Percent Cmd is set to 100%.
• Limited Max: Set the Percent Cmd to the Limit Max Value input percentage.
• Hold: Hold the Percent Command output at its current value.
• Water Flush: Command the Percent Cmd to the Flush Position.
• Control: Adjust the Percent Cmd to control the Process Variable (heating
only).
• Control Limit: Adjust the Percent Cmd to control the Low Limit Process
Variable (heating only).
• Failsoft: Set the Percent Cmd output to the Failsoft Value.

Output Controller 1273

Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit

Overview
The Heating Proportional Valve Output Module controls a proportional valve for
either preheat or reheat. The module can be configured for DA-T, RA-T, ZA-T, or
PH-T control. The module has been designed with temperature control, low limit
control, and protection modes such as Low OA Temperature based on OA
Temperature. In addition to the proportional valve, this module is also designed to
control a circulating pump.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
• Attributes (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
• Primary States (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
• Reliability (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-503: Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Heating Zone X Output (Where X Is 1-8) Central Heating Applications
Proportional Valve Preheat Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Proportional Valve Reheat Control All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1274 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating Proportional
Valve with Low Limit modules.
Table 26-504: Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit Attributes (Part
1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Failsoft Value Defines the face and bypass damper position 100.0%
when the module is in the Failsoft state.
Flush Position Defines the proportional valve position when 100.0%
the module is in the Water Flush state.
Heating Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
controller.
Heating Percent Cmd V Controls the heating valve. The valve is Display Units: %
commanded from 0% to 100%.
Heating Ramp Rate Determines the time to remain in the Cold 20.0%
Start state (if applicable). During the cold
start state, the preheat output is prevented
from closing quickly to allow it to come into
control without tripping the Low Limit on the
unit.
HTG-OUTSTATE, PH- G, V Displays the current operational mode of the Set Name: AHU Htg FBPD
OUTSTATE, or RH- output controller. State
OUTSTATE (State)
Limited Max Value Defines the face and bypass damper position 100.0%
when the module is in the Limited Max mode.
Low Limit Process Displays the low limit temperature process 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Variable variable. This input is usually the preheat or
discharge air temperature.
Low Limit Proportional Contains the range across which the valve is 5.0 Deg C, 9.0 Deg F
Band proportionally modulated open as the Low
Limit Process Variable drops below the Low
Limit Setpoint plus the Low Limit Proportional
Band. This input is used only in the Remain
In Control mode.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the low limit temperature setpoint. 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Low OA Temperature Displays the differential for the Low OA 0.5 Deg C, 1.0 Deg F
Diff Temperature function. Once the valve has
been opened in the Low OA Temperature
mode, the OA Temperature must increase
Low OA Temperature Diff more than the Low
OA Temperature Setpoint before the valve
can close.
Low OA Temperature Defines the proportional valve position or the 100.0%
Position face and bypass damper position when the
module is in the Low OA Temperature state.
Low OA Temperature Contains the setpoint for the Low OA 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
Setpoint Temperature function. When the OA
Temperature is below this setpoint, the valve
opens and the face and bypass damper is set
to Low OA Temperature Position.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: AHU Htg Valve
Out
OA Temperature Displays the outdoor air temperature. 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F

Output Controller 1275

 Table 26-504: Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit Attributes (Part
2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Process ID Specifies the type of process that this output DA-T
controller is controlling when the mode is T Set Name: Process ID
Control. The following lists the process
variables and the correct setting for the
Process ID.
Process Variable: Process ID
Discharge Air Temperature: DA-T
Preheat Air Temperature: DA-T
Return Air Temperature: ZN-T
Zone Air Temperature: ZN-T
Exhaust Air Temperature: ZN-T
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the control temperature. Either Zone 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
temperature, discharge air temperature,
return air temperature, or preheat
temperature may be connected to this input.
Pump OnOff V Controls the circulating pump. Set Name: Off/On
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
T Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit)

• Off: Turn everything off. The Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0%.
• Max: Open the heating valve. The Heating Percent Cmd is set to 100%.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Water Flush: The valve is opened to the Water Flush Position.
• Limited Max: The valve is opened to the Limited Max Value. This state may
be used for unoccupied heating.
• T Control: Open the heating valve and adjust the output to control the Process
Variable. If the Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the output to
maintain the Process Variable at the Setpoint. The Heating Percent Cmd is
adjusted between 0% and 100%.
• LL-T Control: Open the heating valve and adjust the output to control the
Limit Variable. If the Limit Variable is reliable, the module controls the output
to maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit Setpoint. The Heating Percent Cmd
is adjusted between 0% and 100%.
• Low OA Temperature: The valve is opened to the Low OA Temperature
Position when the Protect-T is less than the Protect-Tsp.
• Failsoft: The valve is opened to the Failsoft Value. This state may be used
when the control temperature is unreliable.

1276 CCT Help: Modules

 • Low OA Temperature Startup: This mode activates the T Control state
section, but limits the rate at which the valve can close so that the unit can
safely come into control (typically used for 100% OA units with low OA
temperatures at startup).
• Remain In Control: Modulate the valve to control the Limit Variable to the
Limit Setpoint. If the Limit Variable is reliable, the module controls the output
to maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit Setpoint. This mode should only be
used as a shutdown strategy to add energy to the duct when the fan is off. It
should not be used for general temperature control.

Table 26-505: Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit Command

Hierarchy
OA Temperature is Low Limit Process Mode State
Reliable Variable is Reliable
* * Off Off
Max Max
T Control T Control
LL-T Control LL-T Control
Hold Hold
True * Low OA Temperature Low OA Temperature
False * Low OA Temperature Failsoft
* * Water Flush Water Flush
Limited Max Limited Max
Failsoft Failsoft
Low OA Temperature T Control
Startup
True Remain In Control Remain In Control
False Remain In Control Failsoft

Reliability (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit)

Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Low Limit Process Variable If the requested mode is Remain In Control, the output controller
changes to Failsoft.
OA Temperature If the requested mode is Low OA Temperature, the output
controller changes to Failsoft.

Output Controller 1277

Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit

Overview
The Htg 2 Sequenced Valves Output Module controls two sequenced proportional
steam valves for either preheat or reheat. The capacity ratio of the valves is a
required input from the user. When controlling a temperature, the first (smaller)
valve starts to modulate. When this valve is fully open the second valve starts to
modulate. When the control temperature increases, the second valve (larger) closes
first. When the second valve is fully closed, the first valve starts to close. The
module can be configured for DA-T, RA-T, ZA-T, or PH-T control. The module
has been designed with temperature control, low limit control, Low OA
Temperature and Failsoft.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit)
• Attributes (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit)
• Primary States (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit)
• Reliability (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-506: Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Sequenced Valves Preheat Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Sequenced Valves Reheat Control All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1278 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating Sequenced Valves
with Low Limit modules.
Table 26-507: Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit Attributes (Part
1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Failsoft Value Defines the face and bypass damper position 100.0%
when the module is in the Failsoft state.
Heating Control Status V Contains the current saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
controller.
Heating Ramp Rate Determines the time to remain in the Cold 20.0%
Start state (if applicable). During the cold
start state, the preheat output is prevented
from closing quickly to allow it to come into
control without tripping the Low Limit on the
unit.
HTG-O (Percent Cmd) V Contains an analog percent output showing Display Units: %
the total system output from 0% to 100%.
HTG-OUTSTATE, PH- G, V Displays the current operational mode of the Set Name: AHU Htg FBPD
OUTSTATE, or RH- output controller. State
OUTSTATE (State)
Limited Max Value Defines the face and bypass damper position 100.0%
when the module is in the Limited Max mode.
Low Limit Process Displays the low limit temperature process 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Variable variable. This input usually is the preheat or
discharge air temperature.
Low Limit Proportional Contains the range across which the valve is 5.0 Deg C, 9.0 Deg F
Band proportionally modulated open as the Low
Limit Process Variable drops below the Low
Limit Setpoint plus the Low Limit Proportional
Band. This input is used in the Remain In
Control mode.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the low limit temperature setpoint. 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Low OA Temperature Contains the differential for the Low OA 0.5 Deg C, 1.0 Deg F
Diff Temperature function. Once the valve has
been opened in the Low OA Temperature
mode, the OA Temperature must increase
Low OA Temperature Diff more than the Low
OA Temperature Setpoint before the valve
can close.
Low OA Temperature Defines the proportional valve position or the 100.0%
Position face and bypass damper position when the
module is in the Low OA Temperature state.
Low OA Temperature Displays the setpoint for the Low OA 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
Setpoint Temperature function. When the OA
Temperature is below this setpoint, the valve
opens and the face and bypass damper is set
to Low OA Temperature Position.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: AHU 2
Sequenced Valves Out
OA Temperature Displays the outdoor air temperature. 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F

Output Controller 1279

 Table 26-507: Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit Attributes (Part
2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Process ID This is the type of process that this output DA-T
controller is controlling when the mode is T Set Name: Process ID
Control. The following lists the process
variables and the correct setting for the
Process ID.
Process Variable: Process ID
Discharge Air Temperature: DA-T
Preheat Air Temperature: DA-T
Return Air Temperature: ZN-T
Zone Air Temperature: ZN-T
Exhaust Air Temperature: ZN-T
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the control temperature. Either Zone 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
temperature, discharge air temperature,
return air temperature, or preheat
temperature may be connected to this input.
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
T Control.
Valve 1 Percent Indicates the percent of the total capacity 33.0%
Capacity provided by valve 1. In a 1/3 - 2/3
configuration, this input would be 33.3%.
Valve 1 Percent Cmd V Controls the first (smaller) heating valve. The Display Units: %
valve is commanded from 0% to 100%.
Valve 2 Percent Cmd V Controls the second (larger) heating valve. Display Units: %
The valve is commanded from 0% to 100%.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit)

• Off: Turn everything off. The two valves are set to 0%.
• Max: Open the two heating valves to 100%.
• Hold: When commanded to this mode of operation, the module outputs retain
their last values.
• Limited Max: The valves are opened to the Limited Max Value. This state
may be used for unoccupied heating.
• T Control: The two valves are modulated in sequence to maintain the Process
Variable at the Setpoint. The Percent Cmd is adjusted between 0% and 100%
showing the total capacity percent used at any given time. The valves are
modulated from 0% to 100%.
• LL-T Control: The two valves are modulated in sequence to maintain the Low
Limit Process Variable at the Low Limit Setpoint. The Percent Cmd is adjusted
between 0% and 100% showing the total capacity percent used at any given
time. The valves are modulated from 0% to 100%.

1280 CCT Help: Modules

 • Low OA Temperature: When the OA Temperature is less than the Low OA
Temperature Setpoint the valves are opened to the Low OA Temperature
Position.
• Failsoft: The valve is opened to the Failsoft Value. This state may be used
when the control temperature is unreliable.
• Low OA Temperature Startup: This mode activates the T Control state
section, but limits the rate at which the valve can close so that the unit can
safely come into control (typically used for 100% OA units with low OA
temperatures at startup).
• Remain In Control: Modulate the valve to control the Limit Variable to the
Limit Setpoint. If the Limit Variable is reliable, the module controls the output
to maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit Setpoint. This mode should only be
used as a shutdown strategy to add energy to the duct when the fan is off. It
should not be used for general temperature control.

Table 26-508: Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit Command

Hierarchy
Low Limit Process OA Temperature is Mode State
Variable is Reliable Reliable
* * Off Off
Max Max
T Control T Control
LL-T Control LL-T Control
Hold Hold
True Low OA Temperature Low OA Temperature
False Low OA Temperature Failsoft
* Limited Max Limited Max
Failsoft Failsoft
Low OA Temperature T Control
Startup
True * Remain In Control Remain In Control
False * Remain In Control Failsoft

Reliability (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit)

Table 26-509: Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
OA Temperature If the requested mode is Low OA Temperature, the output
controller changes to Failsoft.
Low Limit Process Variable If the requested mode is Remain In Control, the output controller
changes to Failsoft.

Output Controller 1281

Heating Staged Outputs

Overview
This module controls a discrete heating device within a zone control application.
The module accepts an input mode, a process variable, a setpoint, and
configuration information. The module outputs the representative percent
command and a control status. The outputs are sent to a MSC module that provides
the control for the actual binary outputs.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heating Staged Outputs)
• Attributes (Heating Staged Outputs)
• Primary States (Heating Staged Outputs)
• Reliability (Heating Staged Outputs)

Module Use in Applications (Heating Staged Outputs)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-510: Heating Staged Outputs Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Staged Box Heating Control VAV Single Duct Application
Staged Heating Control Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Staged Supplemental Heating Control VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1282 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Heating Staged Outputs)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating Staged Outputs
module.
Table 26-511: Heating Staged Outputs Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
BOXHTG-O, HTG-O, or V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
SUPHTG-O (Percent output on a scale of 0% to 100%.
Cmd)
Control Band V Displays the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Control Status V Displays the current status of the controller Set Name: Control Status
for heating control. See the PID section for
more information.
Eff Minimum Off Time V Displays the minimum off time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Displays the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Contains the effective process time constant Display Units: Seconds
Const used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Contains the Process Variable used by the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
MSC.
Failsoft Value Specifies that when the mode is set to 0.0%
Failsoft, the output cycles to maintain this
percentage duty cycle.
HeatingCooling Configures the module to be either Heating
compatible with a heating source or a Set Name: Heating/Cooling
cooling source.
HTG-MINOFF or Contains the Min Off Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
SUPHTG-MINOFF
(Minimum Off Time)
HTG-MINON or Contains the Min On Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
SUPHTG-MINON
(Minimum On Time)
HTG-OUTSTATE or V, G Displays the current operational mode of the Set Name: COM Staged Out
SUPHTG-OUTSTATE output controller.
(State)
Instant Shutdown V Contains the indication to the MSC to shut
off all outputs instantly.
Limited Max Value Specifies that when the mode is set to 100.0%
Limited Max, the output cycles to maintain
this percentage duty cycle.
Max Capacity Fraction Displays the ratio of the largest stage to the 1.0
sum of all the stages.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: COM Staged Out
PMAC Period V Contains the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSCController.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when the mode is set to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Control, this is the variable that is controlled.
Typically connected to the Zone
Temperature.

Output Controller 1283

 Table 26-511: Heating Staged Outputs Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Proof of Airflow Specifies that when set to False or True, the True
controller operates as normal. When set to Set Name: False/True/Fault
Fault, the controller transitions to an instant
off state.
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
set to Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Heating Staged Outputs)

• Off: Sets the Percent Cmd to 0% and sets the Instant Shutdown output to False.
The MSC turns off all outputs, but only after all timers are satisfied.
• Max: The Percent Cmd is set to 100%. This value then feeds through the MSC
and the stages turn on accordingly based on the timer settings.
• Limited Max: Set the output to the limited max value. This value then feeds
through the MSC and the stages turn on accordingly based on the timer
settings.
• Hold: Hold the Percent Command output at it’s current value. This value
continues to feed to the MSC and the stages continue to be controlled by the
sequencer. Should timers expire, it is possible for the number of enabled stages
to change during a hold command since the Percent Command is really the
only value that is explicitly held.
• Instant Shutdown: Sets the Percent Cmd to 0% and sets the Instant Shutdown
output to True. The MSC turn off all outputs instantly.
• Control: Adjust the output to control the Process Variable. As this Percent
Cmd varies, it causes changes to the enabling of the staged outputs from the
MSC.
• Failsoft: Set the output to the Failsoft value. This value then feeds through the
MSC and the stages turn on accordingly based on the timer settings.

Reliability (Heating Staged Outputs)

These modules use the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1284 CCT Help: Modules

Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit

Overview
This module controls a discrete heating device within a zone control application.
The module accepts an input mode, process variable, setpoint, low limit process
variable, low limit setpoint, and configuration information. The module outputs
the representative percent command, and a control status. The outputs are sent to a
MSC module which provides the control for the actual binary outputs.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit)
• Attributes (Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit)
• Primary States (Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-512: Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
UV Staged Heating Control Unit Ventilator Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating Staged Outputs
with DA-T Low Limit module.
Table 26-513: Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit Attributes
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Band V Displays the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C
Control Status V Displays the current status of the controller Set Name: Control Status
for heating control.
Eff Minimum Off Time V Displays the minimum off time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Displays the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Contains the effective process time constant Display Units: Seconds
Const used by the MSC.

Output Controller 1285

 Table 26-513: Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit Attributes
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Eff Process Variable V Displays the Process Variable used by the Display Units: Deg C
MSC.
Failsoft Value Contains the value of the output when the 0.0%
mode is Failsoft.
HTG-MINOFF Contains the Min Off Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
(Minimum Off Time)
HTG-MINON (Minimum Contains the Min On Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
On Time)
HTG-O (Percent Cmd) V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
output on a scale of 0% to 100%.
HTG-OUTSTATE V, G Displays the current operational mode of the Set Name: UV Discrete Out
(State) output controller.
Instant Shutdown V Contains the indication to the MSC to shut all
outputs off instantly.
Limited Max Value Specifies that when the mode is set to 100.0%
Limited Max, the output cycles to maintain
this percentage duty cycle.
Low Limit Process Contains the process variable controlled 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Variable when the mode is set to Control Limit. This
value typically is connected to the Discharge
Air Temperature.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the low limit 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when the
mode is Control Limit.
Max Capacity Fraction Contains the ratio of the largest stage to the 1.0
sum of all the stages.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: UV Discrete Out
PMAC Period V Specifies the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Specifies that when the mode is set to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Control, this is the variable that is controlled.
This value typically is connected to the Zone
Temperature.
Proof of Airflow Specifies that when set to False or True, the True
controller operates as normal. When set to Set Name: False/True/Fault
Fault, the controller transitions to an instant
off state.
Setpoint Displays the desired setpoint for the process 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
set to Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1286 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit)
• Off: Sets the Percent Cmd to 0% and sets the Instant Shutdown output to False.
The MSC turns all outputs off, but only after all timers are satisfied.
• Max: The Percent Cmd is set to 100%. This value then feeds through the MSC
and the stages turns on accordingly based on the timer settings.
• Limited Max: Set the output to the limited max value. This value then feeds
through the MSC and the stages turns on accordingly based on the timer
settings.
• Hold: Hold the Percent Command output at it’s current value. This value
continues to feed to the MSC and the stages continue to be controlled by the
sequencer. Should timers expire, it is possible for the number of enabled stages
to change during a hold command since the Percent Command is really the
only value that is explicitly held.
• Instant Shutdown: Sets the Percent Cmd to 0% and sets the Instant Shutdown
output to True. The MSC turns off all outputs instantly.
• Control: Adjust the output to control the Process Variable. As this Percent
Cmd varies, it causes changes to the enabling of the staged outputs from the
MSC.
• Control Limit: Adjust the output to control the Low Limit Process Variable.
As this Percent Cmd varies, it causes changes to the enabling of the staged
outputs from the MSC.
• Failsoft: Set the output to the Failsoft value.

Output Controller 1287

Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit

Overview
The Staged Heating Output Module is designed to control staged electric or gas
heat for either heating or low limit control. The temperature control can be
configured for DA-T, RA-T, or ZA-T. The module accepts inputs for temperature,
temperature setpoint, and minimum on and off times. The module has outputs for
controlling the MSC module.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit)
• Attributes (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit)
• Primary States (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit)
• Reliability (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit)

Module Use in Applications (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-514: Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Staged Preheat Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Staged Reheat Control All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1288 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating Staged Outputs
with Low Limit modules.
Table 26-515: Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit Attributes (Part 1
of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Band V Displays the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Eff Minimum Off Time V Displays the minimum off time to be used by Display Units: Seconds
the MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Displays the minimum on time to be used by Display Units: Seconds
the MSC.
Eff Process Time V Contains the effective process time constant Display Units: Seconds
Const that is used by the MSC
Eff Process Variable V Contains the Process Variable to be used by Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
the MSC.
Heating Control Status V Displays the current saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
controller.
Heating Ramp Rate Determines the time to remain in the Cold 20 Change per Minute
Start state (if applicable). During the cold
start state, the preheat output is prevented
from closing quickly to allow it to come into
control without tripping the Low Limit on the
unit.
HTG-MINOFF, Contains the Min Off Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
PH-MINOFF, or
RH-MINOFF (Minimum
Off Time)
HTG-MINON, Contains the Min On Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
PH-MINON, or
RH-MINON (Minimum
On Time)
HTG-O, PH-O, or RH-O V Controls the heating device. The device is Display Units: %
(Heating Percent Cmd) commanded from 0% to 100%.
HTG-OUTSTATE, PH- G, V Displays the current operational mode of the Set Name: AHU Htg Staged
OUTSTATE, or RH- output controller. State
OUTSTATE (State)
Instant Shutdown V Contains the indication to the MSC to shut off
all outputs instantly.
Limited Max Value Defines the proportional valve position or the 100.0%
face and bypass damper position when the
module is in the Limited Max Heating state.
Low Limit Process Contains the low limit temperature process 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Variable variable.
Low Limit Setpoint Displays the low limit temperature setpoint. 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Max Capacity Fraction Contains the ratio of the largest stage to the 1.0
sum of all the stages.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: AHU Htg Staged
Out
PMAC Period V Displays the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.

Output Controller 1289

 Table 26-515: Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit Attributes (Part 2
of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Process ID Displays the type of process that this output DA-T
controller is controlling when the mode is Set Name: Process ID
Control.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the control temperature. Either 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
Zone temperature, discharge air
temperature, return air temperature or
preheat temperature may be connected to
this input.
Proof of Airflow Specifies that when set to False or True, the True
controller operates as normal. When set to Set Name: False/True/Fault
Fault, the controller transitions to an instant
off state.
Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the process 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit)

• Off: Turn everything off. The Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0%. The MSC
module will observe any minimum on time.
• Max: The Heating Percent Cmd is set to 100%.
• Limited Max: The Heating Percent Cmd is set to the Limited Max Value. This
state may be used for unoccupied heating.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Instant Shutdown: Turn everything off. The Heating Percent Cmd is set to
0%. The MSC module does not observe any minimum on time.
• T Control: Use the heating device to control the Process Variable. The module
controls the output in order to maintain the Process Variable at the Setpoint.
The Heating Percent Cmd adjusts between 0% and 100%.
• LL-T Control: Use the heating device to control the Limit Variable. The
module controls the output to maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit
Setpoint. The Heating Percent Cmd adjusts between 0% and 100%.
• Low OA Temperature Startup: This mode activates the T Control state
section, but limits the rate at which the valve can close so that the unit can
safely come into control (typically used for 100% OA units with low OA
temperatures at startup).

1290 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-516: Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit Command
Hierarchy
Proof of Airflow Mode State
Fault * Instant Shutdown
Not (Fault) Instant Shutdown Instant Shutdown
Off Off
Max Max
Hold Hold
LL-T Control LL-T Control
T Control T Control
Limited Max Limited Max
Low OA Temperature Startup T Control

Reliability (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1291

Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control

Overview
The Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control module controls a
proportional valve for preheat. The module can be configured for DA-T, RA-T,
ZN-T, or PH-T. The proportional valve is modulated to control the configured
Process Variable. If the return water temperature falls below the Low Limit
Setpoint, the valve opens beyond the current control position (maximum 100%) to
warm up the return water temperature.The module has temperature control, low
limit control, and protection modes such as Low OA Temperature based on OA
Temperature. In addition to the proportional valve, this module controls a
circulating pump.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water
Control)
• Attributes (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control)
• Primary States (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control)
• Reliability (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control)

Module Use in Applications (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water

Control)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-517: Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control
Uses in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Preheat Proportional Valve Output AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1292 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Heating Staged Outputs
with Low Limit modules.
Table 26-518: Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control
Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Failsoft Value Defines the proportional valve position or the 100.0%
face and bypass damper position when the
module is in the Failsoft state.
Flush Position Defines the proportional valve position when 100.0%
the module is in the Water Flush state.
Heating Control Status V Displays the PID status. Normal
Set Name: Control Status
Heating Ramp Rate Determines the time to remain in the Cold 20 Change per Minute
Start state (if applicable). During the cold
start state, the preheat output is prevented
from closing quickly to allow it to come into
control without tripping the Low Limit on the
unit.
HTG-O, PH-O, or RH-O V Controls the heating valve. The valve is 0.0%
(Heating Percent Cmd) commanded from 0% to 100%.
HTG-OUTSTATE, PH- G, V Displays the current operational mode of the Off
OUTSTATE, or RH- output controller. Set Name: AHU Htg Valve
OUTSTATE (State) State
Limited Max Value Defines the proportional valve position when 100.0%
the module is in the Limited Max mode.
Low Limit Process Contains the low limit temperature process 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Variable variable. This input is usually the mixed air
temperature or the preheat air temperature.
Low Limit Proportional Contains the range across which the valve is 5.0 Deg C, 9 Deg F
Band proportionally modulated open as the Low
Limit Process Variable drops below the Low
Limit Setpoint plus the Low Limit Proportional
Band. This input is used only in the Remain
In Control mode.
Low Limit Setpoint Contains the low limit temperature setpoint. 7.0 Deg C, 45.0 Deg F
Low OA Temperature Contains the differential for the Low OA 0.5 Deg C, 1.0 Deg F
Diff Temperature function. When the valve is
open in the Low OA Temperature Mode, the
protect temperature must increase the Low
OA Temperature by more than the Protect
setpoint before the valve closes.
Low OA Temperature Defines the proportional valve position or the 100.0%
Position face and bypass damper position when the
module is in the Low OA Temperature state.
Low OA Temperature Contains the setpoint for the Low OA 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
Setpoint Temperature function. When the protect
temperature is below this setpoint, the valve
opens to the Low OA Temperature Position.
Mode Displays the mode of operation. Off
Set Name: AHU Htg Valve
Out
OA Temperature Contains the outdoor air temperature. 4.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F

Output Controller 1293

 Table 26-518: Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control
Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Process ID Displays the type of process that this output DA-T
controller is controlling when the mode is T Set Name: Process ID
Control.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are the Set Name: Unit
only two valid values.
Process Variable Displays the control temperature. Either zone 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
temperature, discharge air temperature,
return air temperature or preheat
temperature may be connected to this input.
Pump OnOff Controls the circulating pump. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Setpoint Contains the desired setpoint for the process 13.0 Deg C, 55.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when the mode is
T Control.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control)

• Off: Turn everything off. The Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0%.
• Max: Open the heating valve. The Heating Percent Cmd is set to 100%.
• Hold: Hold the outputs at their current position.
• Water Flush: Open the valve to the Water Flush Position.
• Limited Max: Open the valve to the Limited Max Value. This state may be
used for unoccupied heating.
• T Control: Open the heating valve and adjust the output to control the Process
Variable. The module controls the output in order to maintain the Process
Variable at the Setpoint. The Heating Percent Cmd adjusts between 0% and
100%.
• LL-T Control: Open the heating valve and adjust the output to control the
Limit Variable. The module controls the output to maintain the Limit Variable
at the Limit Setpoint. The Heating Percent Cmd adjusts between 0% and
100%.
• Low OA Temperature: Open the valve to the Low OA Temperature when the
Protect-T is less than Protect-Tsp.
• Failsoft: Open the valve to the Failsoft Value. This state may be used when the
control temperature is unreliable.

1294 CCT Help: Modules

 • Low OA Temperature Startup: This mode activates the T Control state
section, but limits the rate at which the valve can close so that the unit can
safely come into control (typically used for 100% OA units with low OA
temperatures at startup).
• Remain In Control: Modulate the valve to control the Limit Variable to the
Limit Setpoint. If the Limit Variable is reliable, the module controls the output
to maintain the Limit Variable at the Limit Setpoint. Use this mode only as a
shutdown strategy to add energy to the duct when the fan is off. Do not use this
mode for general temperature control.

Reliability (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1295

Humidity Control
Overview
The Humidity Control output controllers control humidification equipment.
Support for a proportional signal or staged outputs is included.
The Humidity Control group contains the following modules:
• Humidification Packaged Unit
• Humidification Proportional Steam Output
• Humidification Scrubber Output
• Humidification Staged Outputs

Humidification Packaged Unit

Overview
The Humidification Packaged Unit module controls a packaged humidification
device. The humidity control may be configured for either RA-H or ZN-H. When
the percent cmd is greater than 1%, the Humidity Enable output is set to on to
activate the unit. In addition, the module is designed with a humidity high limit
control to prevent the duct humidity from rising above a duct high humidity
setpoint. The module accepts inputs from the control relative humidity and
setpoint and the high limit humidity and setpoint.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Humidification Packaged Unit)
• Attributes (Humidification Packaged Unit)
• Primary States (Humidification Packaged Unit)
• Reliability (Humidification Packaged Unit)

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Packaged Unit)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-519: Humidification Packaged Unit Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Packaged Humidifier Control AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

1296 CCT Help: Modules

 To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Humidification Packaged Unit)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Humidification Packaged
Unit modules.
Table 26-520: Humidification Packaged Unit Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Discharge Humidity Contains the process variable when the 70.0% RH
activity operates in the Limited H Control
mode.
Discharge Humidity Contains the desired process variable 70.0% RH
Setpoint setpoint when the activity operates in the
Limited H Control mode.
Humidity Control V Contains the current saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
Status controller.
Humidity Enable V Used to enable the electric heating element Set Name: Off/On
is a packaged humidification device. This
output would be ON anytime humidification is
required.
Humidity Percent Cmd V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
output on a scale of 0 to 100%. This output
should be connected to the humidification
control device.
Humidity Process ID Defines the type of process being controlled. RA-H
This input must be set to either zone humidity Set Name: Process ID
or return humidity depending on the actual
process.
Humidity Process Used for either the return air humidity or the 40.0% RH
Variable zone air humidity. This is the process
variable when the activity operates in the H
Control mode.
Humidity Setpoint Displays the desired process variable 40.0% RH
setpoint when the activity operates in the H
Control mode.
HUM-OUTSTATE G, V Contains the current operational mode of the Set Name: AHU Hum Prop
(State) output controller.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: AHU Hum Prop

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1297

Primary States (Humidification Packaged Unit)
• Off: The proportional device is closed, and the Hum-O output is set to 0%.
• H Control: When operating in the H Control mode, the activity attempts to
control the process variable (either return relative humidity or zone relative
humidity) to the setpoint. As the humidity drops below the setpoint, the
proportional valve opens to add humidity into the air stream. This mode is the
normal humidification mode.
• Limited H Control: When operating in the Limited H Control mode, the
activity attempts to control the discharge relative humidity to the setpoint. As
the humidity drops below the setpoint, the proportional valve opens to add
humidity into the air stream. This mode is the humidity high limit mode and is
intended to prevent the discharge air from becoming too humid.

Reliability (Humidification Packaged Unit)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1298 CCT Help: Modules

Humidification Proportional Steam Output

Overview
The Humidification Proportional Steam Output module controls a proportional
steam humidification device. The module includes an Isolation Valve Command
and On Delay input to configure the time that the Isolation Valve is on before the
proportional output is allowed to open. The humidity control may be configured
for either RA-H or ZN-H. In addition, the module has a humidity high limit control
to prevent the duct humidity from rising above a duct high humidity setpoint. The
module accepts inputs from the control relative humidity and setpoint and the high
limit humidity and setpoint.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Humidification Proportional Steam Output)
• Attributes (Humidification Proportional Steam Output)
• Primary States (Humidification Proportional Steam Output)
• Reliability (Humidification Proportional Steam Output)

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Proportional Steam Output)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-521: Humidification Proportional Steam Output Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Proportional Steam Humidification Control All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1299

Attributes (Humidification Proportional Steam Output)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Humidification
Proportional Steam Output modules.
Table 26-522: Humidification Proportional Steam Output Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Delay Defines the time that the Humidity Percent Cmd 300 Seconds
is held at 0% following activation of the Isolation
Valve Command.
Discharge Humidity Contains the process variable when the activity 70.0% RH
operates in the Limited H Control mode.
Discharge Humidity Contains the desired process variable setpoint 70.0% RH
Setpoint when the activity operates in the Limited H
Control mode.
Humidity Control V Contains the current saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
Status controller.
Humidity Percent Cmd V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
output on a scale of 0% to 100%. This output
should be connected to the humidification
control device.
Humidity Process ID Defines the type of process being controlled. RA-H
This input must be set to either zone humidity Set Name: Process ID
or return humidity depending on the actual
process.
Humidity Process Used for either the return air humidity or the 40.0% RH
Variable zone air humidity. This is the process variable
when the activity operates in the H Control
mode.
Humidity Setpoint Displays the desired process variable setpoint 40.0% RH
when the activity operates in the H Control
mode.
HUM-OUTSTATE G, V Contains the current operational mode of the Set Name: AHU Hum Prop
(State) output controller.
Isolation Valve V Enables the steam isolation and/or humidifier Set Name: Off/On
Command jacket valve when controlling a proportional
steam humidification valve. This output would
be ON anytime humidification is required.
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: AHU Hum Prop

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1300 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Humidification Proportional Steam Output)
• Off: The proportional device is closed, and the Hum-O output is set to 0%.
• H Control: When operating in the H Control mode, the activity attempts to
control the process variable (either return relative humidity or zone relative
humidity) to the setpoint. As the humidity drops below the setpoint, the
proportional valve opens to add humidity into the air stream. This mode is the
normal humidification mode.
• Limited H Control: When operating in the Limited H Control mode, the
activity attempts to control the discharge relative humidity to the setpoint. As
the humidity drops below the setpoint, the proportional valve opens to add
humidity into the air stream. This mode is the humidity high limit mode and is
intended to prevent the discharge air from becoming too humid.

Reliability (Humidification Proportional Steam Output)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1301

Humidification Scrubber Output

Overview
The Humidification Scrubber Output module controls a scrubber that provides
humidification. A scrubber is a two-position humidification device. The basin fills
and the pump runs when humidification is required. If the pump is off for a
user-defined period of time, the fill line closes and the basin drains.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Humidification Scrubber Output)
• Attributes (Humidification Scrubber Output)
• Primary States (Humidification Scrubber Output)
• Reliability (Humidification Scrubber Output)

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Scrubber Output)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-523: Humidification Scrubber Output Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Humidity Scrubber Output AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1302 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Humidification Scrubber Output)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Humidification Scrubber
Output modules.
Table 26-524: Humidification Scrubber Output Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Basin Drain Enable Disables the timed activation of the basin True
drain.
Basin Fill Time Indicates the amount of time it takes to fill the 15 Minutes
basin.
Control Band V Displays the control band for the MSC. 5.0% RH
Discharge Humidity Contains the process variable when the 70.0% RH
activity operates in the H Control mode.
Discharge Humidity Contains the desired process variable 70.0% RH
Setpoint setpoint when the activity operates in the
Limited H Control mode.
Drain Basin Provides a Network Input to initiate basin False
drain process.
Drain Delay Time Indicates the amount of time the pump output 24 Hours
must be off before the basin drains.
Drain Valve Provides the output for the drain valve. Close
Set Name: Close/Open
Eff Minimum Off Time V Contains the minimum off time used by the 120 Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Contains the minimum on time used by the 120 Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Contains the effective process time constant 720 Seconds
Const used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Displays the process variable to be used by 22.0% RH
the MSC.
Fill Valve Provides the output for the fill valve. Open
Set Name: Close/Open
Humidity Control V Displays the current status of the Normal
Status humidification controller. Set Name: Control Status
Humidity Enable Turns on the scrubber pump. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Humidity Process ID Defines the type of process being controlled. RA-H
This input must be set to either zone Set Name: Process ID
humidity or return humidity depending on the
actual process.
Humidity Process Provides the process variable when the 40.0% RH
Variable activity operates in the H Control mode. This
attribute is used for either the return air
humidity or the zone air humidity.
Humidity Setpoint Contains the desired process variable 40.0% RH
setpoint when the activity operates in the H
Control mode.
HUM-MINOFF Displays the Min Off Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
(Minimum Off Time)
HUM-MINON Displays the Min On Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
(Minimum On Time)

Output Controller 1303

 Table 26-524: Humidification Scrubber Output Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
HUM-O (Humidity V Contains a representative analog percent 0.0%
Percent Cmd) output on a scale of 0% to 100%. This output
should be connected to the humidification
control device.
HUM-OUTSTATE G, V Contains the current operational mode of the Off
(State) output controller. Set Name: AHU Hum Staged
Instant Shutdown Contains the indication to the MSC to shut all False
outputs off instantly.
Mode Displays the mode of operation. Off
Set Name: AHU Hum Staged
PMAC Period V Displays the period used by the PMAC 24 Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Humidification Scrubber Output)

• Off: Set Humidity Percent Cmd to 0% and turn off all the stages, but observe
the minimum on and off timers. If this state is active longer than the Basin
Delay Time and Basin Drain Enable is True, the drain valve opens and the fill
valve closes.
• Instant Shutdown: Turn everything off and do not observe minimum on and
off timers. Close the fill valve and open the basin drain valve.
• H Control: When operating in the H Control mode, the module controls the
process variable (either return humidity or zone humidity) to the setpoint. As
the humidity drops below the setpoint, the analog percent output Humidity
Percent Cmd increases, which with the intervention of the MSC module causes
the controlled devices to remain on longer and/or turn on more devices. The fill
valve opens and the drain valve closes. The pump stays off for an adjustable
amount of time (Basin Fill Time) to allow the basin to fill if the drain valve was
open when this state first occurred.
• Limited H Control: When operating in the Limited H Control mode, the
module controls the discharge humidity to the setpoint. As the humidity rises
above the setpoint, the analog percent output Humidity Percent Cmd decreases,
which with the intervention of the MSC module causes the controlled devices
to remain on less time and/or turn off more devices. This mode is the humidity
high limit mode and is intended to prevent the discharge air from becoming too
humid. The fill valve opens and the drain valve closes.

Reliability (Humidification Scrubber Output)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

1304 CCT Help: Modules

Humidification Staged Outputs

Overview
The Humidity Staged output module is designed to control staged humidification
devices. The relative humidity control may be configured for either RA-H or ZN-
H. The module is also designed with a humidity high limit control to prevent the
duct relative humidity from rising above a duct high humidity setpoint. The
module accepts inputs for relative humidity and setpoint, the high limit humidity
and setpoint, and minimum on and off times. The module has outputs for
controlling the MSC module.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Humidification Staged Outputs)
• Attributes (Humidification Staged Outputs)
• Primary States (Humidification Staged Outputs)
• Reliability (Humidification Staged Outputs)

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Staged Outputs)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-525: Humidification Staged Outputs Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Staged Humidification Control All Air Handling Unit Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1305

Attributes (Humidification Staged Outputs)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Humidification Staged
Outputs modules.
Table 26-526: Humidification Staged Outputs Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Band V Displays the control band for the MSC. Display Units: % RH
Discharge Humidity Contains the process variable when the 70.0% RH
activity operates in the Limited H Control
mode.
Discharge Humidity Contains the desired process variable 70.0% RH
Setpoint setpoint when the activity operates in the
Limited H Control mode.
Eff Minimum Off Time V Contains the minimum off time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Contains the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Contains the effective process time constant Display Units: Seconds
Const used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Displays the Process Variable to be used by Display Units: % RH
the MSC.
Humidity Control V Displays the current saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
Status controller.
Humidity Process ID Defines the type of process being controlled. RA-H
This input must be set to either zone Set Name: Process ID
humidity or return humidity depending on the
actual process.
Humidity Process Used for either the return air humidity or the 40.0% RH
Variable zone air humidity. This is the process
variable when the activity operates in the H
Control mode.
Humidity Setpoint Contains the desired process variable 40.0% RH
setpoint when the activity operates in the H
Control mode.
HUM-MINOFF Displays the Min Off Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
(Minimum Off Time)
HUM-MINON Displays the Min On Duration for all stages. 120 Seconds
(Minimum On Time)
HUM-O (Humidity V Contains a representative analog percent Display Units: %
Percent Cmd) output on a scale of 0% to 100%. This output
should be connected to the humidification
control device.
HUM-OUTSTATE G, V Contains the current operational mode of the Set Name: AHU Hum Prop
(State) output controller.
Instant Shutdown V Contains the indication to the MSC to shut all
outputs off instantly.
Max Capacity Fraction Contains the ratio of the largest stage to the 1.0
sum of all the stages.

1306 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-526: Humidification Staged Outputs Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Mode Displays the mode requested by State Off
Selection. Set Name: AHU Hum Prop
PMAC Period V Displays the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Humidification Staged Outputs)

• Off: Set Humidity Percent Cmd to 0% and turn off all the stages, but observe
the minimum on and off timers.
• Instant Shutdown: Turn everything off, do not observe minimum on and off
timers.
• H Control: When operating in the H Control mode, the activity attempts to
control the process variable (either return humidity or zone humidity) to the
setpoint. As the humidity drops below the setpoint, the analog percent output
Humidity Percent Cmd increases, which with the intervention of the MSC
module causes the controlled devices to remain on longer and/or turn on more
devices.
• Limited H Control: When operating in the Limited H Control mode, the
activity attempts to control the discharge humidity to the setpoint. As the
humidity rises above the setpoint, the analog percent output Humidity Percent
Cmd decreases, which with the intervention of the MSC module causes the
controlled devices to remain on less time and/or turn off more devices. This
mode is the humidity high limit mode and is intended to prevent the discharge
air from becoming too humid.

Reliability (Humidification Staged Outputs)

This module uses the last reliable value if the inputs become unreliable.

Output Controller 1307

Lighting Control
Overview
The lighting control group provides output control for lighting circuits that are
connected to a controller.
The Lighting Control group contains the Lighting module.

Lighting

Overview
The Lighting Control module provides lighting operation. It accepts a two-state
enumerated input and outputs a two-state enumerated Present Value. The Present
Value typically is sent to a Binary Output object that controls the physical lighting
hardware. For Pulse type lighting outputs, the Lighting Control module monitors
the Light Status input and changes (if necessary) the Polarity output to synchronize
the lighting hardware with the desired Present Value.
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Lighting)
• Attributes (Lighting)
• Primary States (Lighting)
• Reliability (Lighting)

Module Use in Applications (Lighting)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-527: Lighting Uses in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Lighting Control Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1308 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Lighting)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Lighting Control modules.
Table 26-528: Lighting Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Feedback Provided C Indicates whether the lighting hardware False
provides binary feedback indicating the
actual status of the lights. The Lighting
module’s Feedback Provided input should
be set True only for the Pulsed BO with BI
Status hardware type.
Input Contains the desired state of the lights. If the Off
Input is unreliable, the last reliable value is Set Name: Off/On
used.
Light Status Displays the status of the lights from pulse- Off
type lighting control hardware. Set Name: Off/On
LIGHT-DELAY (Light Specifies the time between the warning blink 120 Seconds
Shutoff Delay) (if issued) and the light being permanently
switched off. If the Lighting module’s Lighting
Operating State is Waiting to Shut Off and
the Light Shutoff Delay is changed, the
current time remaining is discarded and the
Lighting module starts a new timer for the
new Light Shutoff Delay.
Lighting Operating V Displays the current state of operation for the Lights Off
State module. Set Name: Lighting
Operation
LIGHT-WARN (Warn Indicates that the Lighting module should True
Occupant) issue a warning blink before the lights are
permanently switched off.
Polarity V Displays the output used to synchronize Normal
pulsed-type lighting output devices Set Name: Polarity
(Feedback Provided = True) so that the Light
Status matches the Present Value. If
Feedback Provided = False, the value for the
Polarity output always remains Normal. The
Lighting module assumes that changing the
Polarity causes the Binary Output object to
issue an extra pulse. If the Binary Output
used does not support this behavior, the user
must connect the Present Value and Polarity
outputs to the inputs of an XOR block and
connect the output of the XOR block to the
Binary Output.
Present Value G, V Displays the current output of the module. Set Name: Off/On
Sync State V Displays the current state of the Present Value Changed
synchronization of the pulse-type lighting Set Name: Lighting Sync
control hardware. State

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1309

Primary States (Lighting)
• Lights On: The Present Value is on in this state. If the input switches to off,
the state changes to Lights Blink if Warn Occupant is True. Otherwise, the
state changes to Lights Off.
• Lights Off: The Present Value is off in this state. If the input switches to on,
the state changes to Lights On.
• Lights Blink: The Present Value is off in this state. If the input remains off for
2 seconds, the state changes to Waiting to Turn Off. If the input remains off
and Warn Occupant changes to False, the state changes to Lights Off. If the
input switches to on, the state changes to Lights On.
• Waiting to Turn Off: The Present Value is on in this state. If the input
remains off for a period of time longer than the Light Shutoff Delay, the state
changes to Lights Off. If the input remains off and Warn Occupant changes to
False, the state changes to Lights Off. If the input switches to on, the state
changes to Lights On.

Reliability (Lighting)
The following reliability states only apply when Feedback Provided = True.
Otherwise, the last reliable input values are used.
• Reliability is set to Failed to Synchronize if LC is unable to make the Light
Status reflect the desired Present Value (after 1 minute delay - 30 seconds
before changing the Polarity output and another 30 seconds waiting for
synchronization).
• Reliability returns to Reliable from Failed to Synchronize if the Light Status
changes at a later time (without the Present Value changing) so that it now
matches the desired Present Value.
• Reliability changes to Failed to Synchronize if Light Status changes so that it
no longer matches the desired Present Value.

1310 CCT Help: Modules

Motor Protection
Overview
The Motor Protection modules provide protection for motors. The Motor
Protection modules contain the Blocking Protection modules.

Blocking Protection

Overview
The Motor Protection module monitors the output command for a motor. If the
command is off for an extended period of time, the motor starts for a short amount
of time.
You can view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Motor Protection)
• Attributes (Motor Protection)

Module Use in Applications (Motor Protection)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-529: Motor Protection Uses in Application System Selection
Trees (Part 1 of 2)
Module Instance Name Applications
2 Pipe Pump Blocking Protection AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
Cooling Pump Blocking Protection AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
CWPX Blocking Protection (Where X Is 1-8) Central Cooling Applications
Exhaust Fan Blocking Protection AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
Heat Recovery Pump Blocking Protection AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
HR Energy Wheel Blocking Protection AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
PCHWPX Blocking Protection (Where X Is 1-8) Central Cooling Applications
PHWPX Blocking Protection (Where X Is 1-4) Central Heating Applications

Output Controller 1311

 Table 26-529: Motor Protection Uses in Application System Selection
Trees (Part 2 of 2)
Module Instance Name
Preheat Pump Blocking Protection
Reheat Pump Blocking Protection
SCHWPX Blocking Protection (Where X Is 1-8)
SHWPX Blocking Protection (Where X Is 1-4)
TwrFanX Blocking Protection (Where X Is 1-8)
Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Central Cooling Applications
Central Heating Applications
Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Motor Protection)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Motor Protection modules.
Table 26-530: Motor Protection Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Blocking On Time Indicates the amount of time that the motor is 5 seconds
turned on when blocking protection is
required.
Max Off Time Indicates the maximum amount of time that 7.0 days
the motor can be off before this module
starts the motor for the Blocking On Time.
Motor Input Displays the current requested command to Off
the motor. Set Name: Off/On
Motor Output G Provides the final output to the motor. Off
Set Name: Off/On

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1312 CCT Help: Modules

Multizone Zone Control
Overview
The Multizone Zone Control modules provide temperature control for one zone
served by a constant volume, dual duct AHU. Typically the damper for the hot
deck and cold deck are mechanically linked. For example, when the damper is
open to one deck, the damper to the other deck is closed. These linked dampers are
modulated to maintain a Zone Temperature setpoint. Some of the modules
optionally sequence the dampers with control of a reheat coil. The multizone
application supports up to eight independent zones, with the zone number
designated by X (representing zones 1-8).
The Multizone Zone Control modules contain the following modules:
• Zone Damper
• Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve
• Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve
• Zone Damper w Staged Heating

Output Controller 1313

Zone Damper

Overview
This module controls the zone dampers on a multizone unit. You can view and
modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper)
• Attributes (Zone Damper)
• Primary States (Zone Damper)
• Reliability (Zone Damper)

Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-531: Zone Damper Uses in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Zone X Damper Control AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Zone Damper)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Zone Damper modules:
Table 26-532: Zone Damper Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status V Indicates the saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
module.
Damper Percent Cmd V Provides the output for the mixing Display Units: %
dampers, with 0% corresponding to
maximum heating and 100%
corresponding to maximum cooling.
Mode Indicates the desired mode of operation for Control
the module. Set Name: MZ Zone Mode
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are
the only two valid values.
Process Variable Indicates the variable that is controlled, 22 Deg C, 72 Deg F
typically Zone Temperature.

1314 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-532: Zone Damper Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Setpoint Indicates the desired nominal value for the 22 Deg C, 72 Deg F
controlled variable when the mode is
Control.
Setpoint Adjust Indicates the user adjustment that is added 0 Deg C, 0 Deg F
to the nominal setpoint value.
Shutdown Option Indicates the desired control action for the Hold Damper
damper when the module Mode is Set Name: MZ Zone
Shutdown. Configuration
Unreliable Option Indicates the desired control action for the Hold Damper
damper when the module Mode is Control, Set Name: MZ Zone
but the Process Variable is not Reliable. Configuration
ZNEFF-SP, V Indicates the effective setpoint to which the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
ZNXEFF-SP (Effective module attempts to control.
Setpoint)
ZN-OUTSTATE, G, V Indicates the current operational state of Set Name: MZ Zone State
ZNX-OUTSTATE the module.
(State)

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Zone Damper)

• Close (Heating): Damper Percent Cmd is set to 0% (maximum heating).
• Open (Cooling): Damper Percent Cmd is set to 100% (maximum heating).
• Hold Damper: Damper Percent Cmd is held at its last value.
• Control: Damper Percent Cmd is modulated based on the PID output to
control the Process Variable to the Effective Setpoint.
Table 26-533: Zone Damper Command Hierarchy
Mode Shutdown Option ZN-T Reliable Unreliable Option State
Shutdown Open (Cooling) * * Open (Cooling)
Close (Heating) * * Close (Heating)
Hold Damper * * Hold Damper
Not * TRUE * Control
(Shutdown)
FALSE Open (Cooling) Open (Cooling)
Close (Heating) Close (Heating)
Hold Damper Hold Damper

Reliability (Zone Damper)

Table 26-534: Zone Damper Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable Damper action set based on the Unreliable Option input.

Output Controller 1315

Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve

Overview
This module sequences the control of the zone dampers on a multizone unit with a
2 position heating valve. You can view and modify the modules in this group’s
logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve)
• Attributes (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve)
• Primary States (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve)
• Reliability (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve)

Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-535: Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Zone X with 2 Position Heating Valve Control AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1316 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Zone Damper w 2 Position
Heating Valve modules:
Table 26-536: Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve Attributes (Part 1
of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Band V Indicates the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Cooling Control Status V Indicates the saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
module.
Cooling Mode Indicates the desired mode of operation for Control
the zone cooling operation. Set Name: MZ Zone Mode
Damper Percent Cmd V Provides the output for the mixing Display Units: %
dampers, with 0% corresponding to
maximum heating and 100%
corresponding to maximum cooling.
Eff Minimum Off Time V Indicates the minimum off time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Indicates the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Indicates the effective process time Display Units: Seconds
Const constant used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Indicates the process variable used by the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
MSC.
Fast Sequence Indicates if a state change should be True
Enabled allowed if a setpoint changes as described
in the Setpoint Threshold input.
Heating Control Status V Indicates the saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
module.
Heating Mode Indicates the desired mode of operation for Control
the zone heating operation. Set Name: MZ Zone Heating
Mode
PMAC Period V Indicates the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm within the MSC.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are
the only two valid values.
Process Variable Indicates the variable that is controlled, 22 Deg C, 72 Deg F
typically Zone Temperature.
Setpoint Indicates the desired nominal value for the 22 Deg C, 72 Deg F
controlled variable when the mode is
Control.
Setpoint Adjust Indicates the user adjustment that is added 0 Deg C, 0 Deg F
to the nominal setpoint value to produce
an Effective Cooling Setpoint.
Setpoint Threshold Indicates how much the Cooling Setpoint 1 Deg C, 2 Deg F
must Increase/Heating Setpoint must
decrease to cause an immediate change
from Cooling to/from Heating.
Shutdown Option Indicates the desired control action for the Hold Damper
damper when the module Mode is Set Name: MZ Zone
Shutdown. Configuration

Output Controller 1317

 Table 26-536: Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve Attributes (Part 2
of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Unreliable Option Indicates the desired control action for the Hold Damper
damper when the module Mode is Control, Set Name: MZ Zone
but the Process Variable is not Reliable. Configuration
ZNEFFCLG-SP, V Indicates the effective setpoint to which the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
ZNXEFFCLG-SP module attempts to control using the zone
(Effective Cooling damper.
Setpoint)
ZNEFFHTG-SP, V Indicates the effective setpoint to which the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
ZNXEFFHTG-SP module attempts to control using the
(Effective Heating heating valve.
Setpoint)
ZNHTG-MINOFF, Specifies the minimum time for which the 120 Seconds
ZNXHTG-MINOFF two position output should be off before it
(Minimum Off Time) can be turned on.
ZNHTG-MINON, Specifies the minimum time for which the 120 Seconds
ZNXHTG-MINON two position output should be on before it
(Minimum On Time) can be turned off.
ZNHTG-O, ZNXHTG-O V Provides the Percent command for input to Display Units: %
(Heating Percent Cmd) the MSC.
ZNHTGSHFT-SP, Indicates the Offset value that is added to -2 Deg C, -4 Deg F
ZNXHTGSHFT-SP the Effective Cooling Setpoint to produce
(Heating Shift) the Effective Heating Setpoint.
ZN-OUTSTATE, G, V Indicates the current operational state of Set Name: MZ Zone Heating
ZNX-OUTSTATE the module. State
(State)

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1318 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve)
The key states are described below. If the Heating Mode is Water Flush or
Shutdown, however, the Heating Percent Cmd is set to 100% or 0%, respectively,
and the state is not allowed to enter Control Heating. Otherwise, when the Cooling
Mode is Control and the Zone Temperature is reliable, a two-state Finite State
Machine (FSM) determines whether heating or cooling should be active.
• Close (Heating): Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Damper Percent Cmd
is set to 0% (maximum heating).
• Open (Cooling): Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Damper Percent Cmd
is set to 100% (maximum heating).
• Hold Damper: Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Damper Percent Cmd is
held at its last value.
• Control Cooling: Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Damper Percent Cmd
is modulated based on the PID output to control the Process Variable to the
Effective Setpoint.
• Control Heating: Damper Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Heating Percent Cmd
is modulated based on the PID output to control the Process Variable to the
Effective Setpoint.
Table 26-537: Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve Command
Hierarchy
Cooling Heating Shutdown ZN-T Unreliable FSM State
Mode Mode Option Reliable Option State
Shutdown Not Open (Cooling) * * * Open (Cooling)
(Control)
Close (Heating) * * * Close (Heating)
Hold Damper * * * Hold Damper
Control * TRUE * * Control Heating
FALSE Open (Cooling) * Open (Cooling)
Close (Heating) * Close (Heating)
Hold Damper * Hold Damper
Not * * TRUE * Cooling Control Cooling
(Shutdown)
Heating Control Heating
FALSE Open (Cooling) * Open (Cooling)
Close (Heating) * Close (Heating)
Hold Damper * Hold Damper

Reliability (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve)

Table 26-538: Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable Damper action set based on the Unreliable Option input.

Output Controller 1319

Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve

Overview
This module sequences the control of the zone dampers on a multizone unit with a
proportional heating valve. You can view and modify the modules in this group’s
logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve)
• Attributes (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve)
• Primary States (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve)
• Reliability (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve)

Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-539: Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve Uses in
Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Zone X with Proportional Heating Valve AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Control

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1320 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Zone Damper w
Proportional Heating Valve modules:
Table 26-540: Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve Attributes (Part
1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Cooling Control Status V Indicates the saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
module.
Cooling Mode Indicates the desired mode of operation Control
for the zone cooling operation. Set Name: MZ Zone Mode
Damper Percent Cmd V Provides the output for the mixing Display Units: %
dampers, with 0% corresponding to
maximum heating and 100%
corresponding to maximum cooling.
Fast Sequence Indicates if a state change should be True
Enabled allowed if a setpoint changes as
described in the Setpoint Threshold
input.
Flush Position Indicates the valve position when 100%
Heating Mode is Water Flush.
Heating Control Status V Indicates the saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
module.
Heating Mode Indicates the desired mode of operation Control
for the zone heating operation. Set Name: MZ Zone Heating
Mode
Heating Percent Cmd V Indicates the Percent command for the Display Units: %
heating valve.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are
the only two valid values.
Process Variable Indicates the variable that is controlled, 22 Deg C, 72 Deg F
typically Zone Temperature.
Setpoint Indicates the desired nominal value for 22 Deg C, 72 Deg F
the controlled variable when the mode is
Control.
Setpoint Adjust Indicates the user adjustment that is 0 Deg C, 0 Deg F
added to the nominal setpoint value to
produce an Effective Cooling Setpoint.
Setpoint Threshold Indicates how much the Cooling 1 Deg C, 2 Deg F
Setpoint must increase and the Heating
Setpoint must decrease to cause an
immediate change from Cooling to/from
Heating.
Shutdown Option Indicates the desired control action for Hold Damper
the damper when the module Mode is Set Name: MZ Zone
Shutdown. Configuration
Unreliable Option Indicates the desired control action for Hold Damper
the damper when the module Mode is Set Name: MZ Zone
Control, but the Process Variable is not Configuration
Reliable.
ZNEFFCLG-SP, V Indicates the effective setpoint to which Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
ZNXEFFCLG-SP the module attempts to control using the
(Effective Cooling zone damper.
Setpoint)

Output Controller 1321

 Table 26-540: Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve Attributes (Part
2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
ZNEFFHTG-SP, V Indicates the effective setpoint to which Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
ZNXEFFHTG-SP the module attempts to control using the
(Effective Heating heating valve.
Setpoint)
ZNHTGSHFT-SP, Indicates the Offset value that is added -2 Deg C, -4 Deg F
ZNXHTGSHFT-SP to the Effective Cooling Setpoint to
(Heating Shift) produce the Effective Heating Setpoint.
ZN-OUTSTATE, G, V Indicates the current operational state of Set Name: MZ Zone Heating
ZNX-OUTSTATE the module. State
(State)

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning
Modes Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve)

The key states are described below. If the Heating Mode is Water Flush or
Shutdown, the Heating Percent Cmd is set to the Flush Position or 0%, and the
state is not allowed to enter Control Heating. Otherwise, the Cooling Mode is
Control and the Zone Temperature is reliable. A two-state Finite State Machine
(FSM) determines whether heating or cooling should be active.
• Close (Heating): Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Damper Percent Cmd
is set to 0% (maximum heating).
• Open (Cooling): Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Damper Percent Cmd
is set to 100% (maximum heating).
• Hold Damper: Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Damper Percent Cmd is
held at its last value.
• Control Cooling: Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Damper Percent Cmd
is modulated based on the PID output to control the Process Variable to the
Effective Setpoint.
• Control Heating: Damper Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Heating Percent Cmd
is modulated based on the PID output to control the Process Variable to the
Effective Setpoint.

1322 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-541: Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve Command
Hierarchy
Cooling Heating Shutdown ZN-T Unreliable FSM State
Mode Mode Option Reliable Option State
Shutdown Not Open * * * Open (Cooling)
(Control) (Cooling)
Close * * * Close (Heating)
(Heating)
Hold Damper * * * Hold Damper
Control * TRUE * * Control Heating
FALSE Open (Cooling) * Open (Cooling)
Close (Heating) * Close (Heating)
Hold Damper * Hold Damper
Not * * TRUE * Cooling Control Cooling
(Shutdown)
* Heating Control Heating
FALSE Open (Cooling) * Open (Cooling)
Close (Heating) * Close (Heating)
Hold Damper * Hold Damper

Reliability (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve)

Table 26-542: Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable Damper action set based on the Unreliable Option input.

Output Controller 1323

Zone Damper w Staged Heating

Overview
This module sequences the control of the zone dampers on a multizone unit with
staged electric heating. You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic
using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper w Staged Heating)
• Attributes (Zone Damper w Staged Heating)
• Primary States (Zone Damper w Staged Heating)
• Reliability (Zone Damper w Staged Heating)

Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper w Staged Heating)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-543: Zone Damper w Staged Heating Uses in Application
System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Zone X with Staged Heating Control AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1324 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Zone Damper w Staged Heating)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Zone Damper w Staged
Heating modules:
Table 26-544: Zone Damper w Staged Heating Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Band V Indicates the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Cooling Control Status V Indicates the saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
module.
Cooling Mode Indicates the desired mode of operation for Control
the zone cooling operation. Set Name: MZ Zone Mode
Damper Percent Cmd V Provides the output for the mixing Display Units: %
dampers, with 0% corresponding to
maximum heating and 100%
corresponding to maximum cooling.
Eff Minimum Off Time V Indicates the minimum off time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Indicates the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Indicates the effective process time Display Units: Seconds
Const constant used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Indicates the process variable used by the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
MSC.
Fast Sequence Indicates if a state change should be True
Enabled allowed if a setpoint changes as described
in the Setpoint Threshold input.
Heating Control Status V Indicates the saturation status of the Set Name: Control Status
module.
Heating Mode Indicates the desired mode of operation for Control
the zone heating operation. Set Name: MZ Zone Mode
Instant Shutdown V Indicates to the MSC to shut off all outputs Boolean
without delay.
Max Capacity Fraction Indicates the ratio of the largest stage to 1.0
the sum of all the stages.
PMAC Period V Indicates the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm within the MSC.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. For this Deg C, Deg F
particular module, Deg C and Deg F are
the only two valid values.
Process Variable Indicates the variable that is controlled, 22 Deg C, 72 Deg F
typically Zone Temperature.
Setpoint Indicates the desired nominal value for the 22 Deg C, 72 Deg F
controlled variable when the mode is
Control.
Setpoint Adjust Indicates the user adjustment that is added 0 Deg C, 0 Deg F
to the nominal setpoint value to produce
an Effective Cooling Setpoint.
Setpoint Threshold Indicates how much the Cooling Setpoint 1 Deg C, 2 Deg F
must increase and the Heating Setpoint
must decrease to cause an immediate
change from Cooling to/from Heating.

Output Controller 1325

 Table 26-544: Zone Damper w Staged Heating Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Shutdown Option Indicates the desired control action for the Hold Damper
damper when the module Mode is Set Name: MZ Zone
Shutdown. Configuration
Unreliable Option Indicates the desired control action for the Hold Damper
damper when the module Mode is Control, Set Name: MZ Zone
but the Process Variable is not Reliable. Configuration
ZNEFFCLG-SP, V Indicates the effective setpoint to which the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
ZNXEFFCLG-SP module attempts to control using the zone
(Effective Cooling damper.
Setpoint)
ZNEFFHTG-SP, V Indicates the effective setpoint to which the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
ZNXEFFHTG-SP module attempts to control using the
(Effective Heating heating valve.
Setpoint)
ZNHTG-MINOFF, Specifies the minimum time for which the 120 Seconds
ZNXHTG-MINOFF two position output should be off before it
(Minimum Off Time) can be turned on.
ZNHTG-MINON, Specifies the minimum time for which the 120 Seconds
ZNXHTG-MINON two position output should be on before it
(Minimum On Time) can be turned off.
ZNHTG-O, ZNXHTG-O V Indicates the Percent command for input to Display Units: %
(Heating Percent Cmd) the MSC.
ZNHTGSHFT-SP, Indicates the Offset value that is added to -2 Deg C, -4 Deg F
ZNXHTGSHFT-SP the Effective Cooling Setpoint to produce
(Heating Shift) the Effective Heating Setpoint.
ZN-OUTSTATE, G, V Indicates the current operational state of Set Name: MZ Zone Heating
ZNX-OUTSTATE the module. State
(State)

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1326 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Zone Damper w Staged Heating)
The key states are described below. If the Heating Mode is Shutdown, the Heating
Percent Cmd is set to 0%, and the state is not allowed to enter Control Heating.
Otherwise, the Cooling Mode is Control and the Zone Temperature is reliable. A
two-state Finite State Machine (FSM) determines whether heating or cooling
should be active.
• Close (Heating): Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Damper Percent Cmd
is set to 0% (maximum heating).
• Open (Cooling): Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Damper Percent Cmd
is set to 100% (maximum heating).
• Hold Damper: Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Damper Percent Cmd is
held at its last value.
• Control Cooling: Heating Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Damper Percent Cmd
is modulated based on the PID output to control the Process Variable to the
Effective Setpoint.
• Control Heating: Damper Percent Cmd is set to 0% and Heating Percent Cmd
is modulated based on the PID output to control the Process Variable to the
Effective Setpoint.
Table 26-545: Zone Damper w Staged Heating Command Hierarchy
Cooling Heating Shutdown ZN-T Unreliable FSM State
Mode Mode Option Reliable Option State
Shutdown Not Open * * * Open (Cooling)
(Control) (Cooling)
Close * * * Close (Heating)
(Heating)
Hold Damper * * * Hold Damper
Control * TRUE * * Control Heating
FALSE Open (Cooling) * Open (Cooling)
Close (Heating) * Close (Heating)
Hold Damper * Hold Damper
Not * * TRUE * Cooling Control Cooling
(Shutdown)
Heating Control Heating
FALSE Open (Cooling) * Open (Cooling)
Close (Heating) * Close (Heating)
Hold Damper * Hold Damper

Reliability (Zone Damper w Staged Heating)

Table 26-546: Zone Damper w Staged Heating Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable Damper action set based on the Unreliable Option input.

Output Controller 1327

Pass Through
Overview
The Pass Through group contains the Pass Through (Enum) modules.

Pass Through (Enum)

Overview
The Pass Through modules provide an automatic connection from State Selection.
They typically take Outputs and connect to them from State Selection.
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Pass Through)
• Attributes (Pass Through)
• Reliability (Pass Through)

Module Use in Applications (Pass Through)

The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-547: Pass Through (Enum) Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
2 Pipe Coil Pump Pass Through AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
Calibration Solenoid Pass Through All VAV Applications
Combustion Damper Command Central Heating Applications
Cooling Coil Pump Pass Through All Air Handling Unit Applications
High Temp Alarm Pass Through AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Hot Gas Bypass Valve Control AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Preheat Coil Pump Pass Through AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Reheat Coil Pump Pass Through All Air Handling Unit Applications
TWR Iso Valve (Pass Through) Central Cooling Applications
Zone Damper Mode Pass Through AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Zone Htg Valve Mode Pass Through AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Zone Staged Htg Mode Pass Through AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

1328 CCT Help: Modules

 Unless otherwise stated, a pass through module takes a value from State Selection
and connects it to an Output.
To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Pass Through)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Pass Through (Enum)
modules.
Table 26-548: Pass Through (Enum) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input The input to the pass through module. 1st Enum or False
Present Value G, V The output of the pass through module

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Pass Through)

The Reliability of the Present Value reflects the reliability of the Input.

Output Controller 1329

Sideloop
Overview
These modules provide several methods of controlling outputs. These include
simple interlocks (where the input is binary), reset control (where an analog input
is spanned to produce an output), Proportional Input (PI) proportional and staged
control, and PI with reset proportional and staged.
The Sideloop Output Controllers contains the following modules:
• Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog
• Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary
• Sideloop PI Proportional Output
• Sideloop PI With Reset Proportional Output
• Sideloop PI Staged Output
• Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output
• Sideloop Reset Output

Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog

Overview
This module selects the value sent to a proportional output based on the
enumerated input value (typically from a Binary Input). The value may be delayed
based on the selected delay type (none, on, off, or both.)
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
The Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog modules work with the state selection
mode (optional).
To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Attributes (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog)
• Primary States (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog)
• Reliability (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog)

1330 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Sideloop Interlock Binary
to Analog module.
Table 26-549: Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input Contains the input to this module. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Mode Contains a connection to the Selection object Control
of a control System. It overrides the internal Set Name: Off/On/Control
logic.
Present Value G, V Displays the analog value output based on
the input and the status of the associated
delays.
SL-DELAYTYPE (Delay Selects the type of delay from the time the None
Type) binary input is energized or de-energized to Set Name: BI to BO/AO
the time when the analog output goes to Delay Type
Output Range High or Output Range Low.
This can be set for None, On, Off, or Both.
SL-OFFDELAY Specifies the delay from the time the input is 30 Seconds
(Off Delay) de-energized to the time when the analog
output goes to Output Range Low.
SL-ONDELAY Specifies the delay from the time the binary 30 Seconds
(On Delay) input is energized to the time when the
analog output goes to Output Range High
SL-OUTA (Output Contains the value sent to the output when 0.0
Range Low) the input is off and all timers are satisfied. If
the Mode is Off, this value is sent to the
Output
SL-OUTB (Output Contains the value sent to the output when 100.0
Range High) the input is on and all timers are satisfied. If
the Mode is On, this value is sent to the
Output.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog)

• Off: The Present Value is set to Output Range Low.
• On: The Present Value is set to Output Range High.
• Control: If the Input is On and all timers are satisfied, the Output Range High
is passed to the Present Value. If the input is Off and all timers are satisfied, the
Output Range Low is passed to the Present Value.

Reliability (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog)

Table 26-550: Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Input The last Reliable value is used as the input.

Output Controller 1331

Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary

Overview
This module passes the enumerated value (typically from a Binary Input) to an
enumerated output (typically connect to a Binary Output). The value may be
delayed based on the selected delay type (None, On, Off, or Both.)
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
The Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary modules work with the state selection
mode (optional).
To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Attributes (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary)
• Primary States (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary)
• Reliability (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary)

1332 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Sideloop Interlock Binary
to Binary module.
Table 26-551: Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input Contains input to this module. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Mode Contains the connection to the Selection object Control
of a control System. It overrides the internal Set Name: Off/On/Control
logic.
Present Value G, V Contains the output based on the input and the Set Name: Off/On
status of the associated delays.
SL-DELAYTYPE (Delay Selects the type of delay from the time the None
Type) binary input is energized or de-energized to the Set Name: BI to BO/AO
time when the analog output goes to Output Delay Type
Range High or Output Range Low. This can be
set to None, On, Off, or Both.
SL-OFFDELAY Selects the delay from the time the input is 30 Seconds
(Off Delay) de-energized to the analog output going to the
Output Range Low.
SL-ONDELAY Selects the delay from time the binary input is 30 Seconds
(On Delay) energized to time when the analog output goes
to Output Range High

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary)

• Off: The Present Value is set to Off.
• On: The Present Value is set to On.
• Control: If the Input is On and all timers are satisfied, the Present Value is set
to On. If the input is Off and all timers are satisfied, the Present Value is set to
Off.

Reliability (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary)

Table 26-552: Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Input The last Reliable value is used as the input.

Output Controller 1333

Sideloop PI Proportional Output

Overview
This module controls a proportional source within a control application. The
module accepts as inputs, a mode, a process variable, a setpoint, and so on. Based
upon the input mode and parameter settings, the module outputs a percent
command and control status. This module is a simplified version of Cooling
Proportional Output or Heating Proportional Output and supports only three Mode
states, namely, Off, Max, and Control.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Attributes (Sideloop PI Proportional Output)
• Primary States (Sideloop PI Proportional Output)
• Reliability (Sideloop PI Proportional Output)

Attributes (Sideloop PI Proportional Output)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Sideloop PI Proportional
Output module.
Table 26-553: Sideloop PI Proportional Output Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status V Displays the current status of the module. Set Name: Control Status
Direct Acting Signals the action of the PID: True = Direct True
Acting, False = Reverse Acting. Direct acting
control is used in applications where an
increase in the process variable causes the
controller’s present value to increase. An
example of direct acting control is
temperature control with a cooling coil. With
reverse acting control, an increase in the
process variable causes the control present
value to decrease. Temperature control with
a heating coil, flow rate control, and static
pressure control applications are three
examples of reverse acting control.
EFFSL-SP (Setpoint) Contains the desired setpoint for the process 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when
commanded to Control.
Mode Allows the state to be set to Off, Max or Control
Control. Set Name: Off/Max/Control

1334 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-553: Sideloop PI Proportional Output Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Percent Cmd V Controls the single actuator that is providing Display Units: %
cooling or heating.
Process ID Allows you to specify the process that is DA-T
being controlled. Set Name: Process ID
Process Range Displays the magnitude of the range that the 22.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
PID Process Variable traverses as the PID
Present Value varies between its minimum
and maximum values. You do not need to
configure this parameter unless Process ID =
Airflow or Airflow Diff. In these cases,
Process Range should be configured to the
design maximum flow rate of the controlled
device. For other Process ID values, the
effective process range is determined
automatically from the standards table.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. Deg C, Deg F
Set Name: Unit
Process Variable Specifies that when Mode is commanded to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Control, this is the variable that is controlled
and must therefore respond to changes in
the output. For example, it can be connected
to the Zone Temperature.
SL-OUTSTATE (State) G, V Displays the current State of the module Set Name: Off/Max/Control

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Sideloop PI Proportional Output)

• Off: Set the Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Max: Set the Percent Cmd to 100%.
• Control: Adjust the Percent Cmd to control the Process Variable. If the
Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the Percent Cmd to maintain
the process variable at the Setpoint.

Reliability (Sideloop PI Proportional Output)

Table 26-554: Sideloop PI Proportional Output Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable If the State is Control, the PID skips execution and holds its
output at its last value.

Output Controller 1335

Sideloop PI With Reset Proportional Output

Overview
This module controls a proportional source within a control application. The
module accepts as inputs, a mode, a process variable, a setpoint, and so on. Based
upon the input mode and parameter settings, the module outputs a percent
command and control status. This module allows the setpoint to reset according to
the change in Reset Input.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Attributes (Sideloop PI with Reset Proportional Output)
• Primary States (Sideloop PI with Reset Proportional Output)
• Reliability (Sideloop PI with Reset Proportional Output)

Attributes (Sideloop PI with Reset Proportional Output)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Sideloop PI With Reset
Proportional Output module.
Table 26-555: Sideloop PI With Reset Proportional Output Attributes
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Control Status V Displays the current status of the module. Set Name: Control Status
Direct Acting Signals the action of the PID: True = Direct True
Acting, False = Reverse Acting. Direct acting
control is used in applications where an
increase in the process variable causes the
controller’s present value to increase. An
example of direct acting control is
temperature control with a cooling coil. With
reverse acting control, an increase in the
process variable causes the control present
value to decrease. Temperature control with
a heating coil, flow rate control, or static
pressure control applications are three
examples of reverse acting control.
EFFSL-SP (Setpoint) V Contains the actual setpoint for the process Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
variable to be controlled to when
commanded to Control.
Mode Allows the state to be set to Off, Max or Control
Control. Set Name: Off/Max/Control

1336 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-555: Sideloop PI With Reset Proportional Output Attributes
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Percent Cmd V Controls the single actuator that is providing Display Units: %
cooling or heating.
Process ID Allows you to specify the process being DA-T
controlled. Set Name: Process ID
Process Range Specifies the magnitude of the range that the 22.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
PID Process Variable traverses as the PID
Present Value varies between its minimum
and maximum values. You do not need to
configure this parameter unless Process ID =
Airflow or Airflow Diff. In these cases,
Process Range should be configured to the
design maximum flow rate of the controlled
device. For other Process ID values, the
effective process range is determined
automatically from the standards table.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. Deg C, Deg F
Set Name: Unit
Process Variable Specifies that when Mode is commanded to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Control, this is the variable that is controlled
and must therefore respond to changes in the
output. For example, it can be connected to
the Zone Temperature.
Reset Input Used to reset the desired setpoint for the 22.0 Deg C, 72,0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when
commanded to Control.
SL-OUTSTATE (State) G, V Displays the current State of the module Set Name: Off/Max/Control
SL-RSTA (Reset A) Used to set up the span for the Control mode. 21.0 Deg C, 70 Deg F
When the Reset Input is at this value, the
effective setpoint is at Setpoint A.
SL-RSTB (Reset B) Used to set up the span for the Control mode. 0.0 Deg C, 32.0 Deg F
When the Reset Input is at this value, the
effective setpoint is at Setpoint B.
SL-SPA (Setpoint A) Used to set up the span for the Control mode. 13.0 Deg C, 55 Deg F
This represents the setpoint when the Input is
at the Reset A value.
SL-SPB (Setpoint B) Used to set up the span for the Control mode. 24.0 Deg C, 75.0 Deg F
This represents the setpoint when the Input is
at the Reset B value.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Output Controller 1337

Primary States (Sideloop PI with Reset Proportional Output)
• Off: Set the Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Max: Set the Percent Cmd to 100%.
• Control: Adjust the Percent Cmd to control the Process Variable. If the
Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the Percent Cmd to maintain
the process variable at the Setpoint. The Setpoint is reset based on the Reset
Input and the limits Reset A, Reset B, Setpoint A, Setpoint B.

Reliability (Sideloop PI with Reset Proportional Output)

Table 26-556: Sideloop PI With Reset Proportional Output Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable If the State is Control, the PID skips execution and holds its
output at its last value.
Reset Input The last Reliable value is used as the input.

1338 CCT Help: Modules

Sideloop PI Staged Output

Overview
This module controls a proportional source within a control application. The
module accepts as inputs, a mode, a process variable, a setpoint, and so on. Based
upon the input mode and parameter settings, the module outputs a percent
command and control status. It passes the outputs to the MSC module that controls
the actual binary outputs. This module is a simplified version of Cooling Staged
Outputs or Heating Staged Outputs and only supports three Mode states, namely,
Off, Max and Control.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Attributes (Sideloop PI Staged Output)
• Primary States (Sideloop PI Staged Output)
• Reliability (Sideloop PI Staged Output)

Attributes (Sideloop PI Staged Output)

The following table describes the attributes used by the Sideloop PI Staged Output
module.
Table 26-557: Sideloop PI Staged Output Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Sideloop PI Staged Output Attributes Common Attributes
Control Status V Displays the current status of the module. Set Name: Control Status
Direct Acting Signals the action of the PID: True = Direct True
Acting, False = Reverse Acting. Direct acting
control is used in applications where an
increase in the process variable causes the
controller’s present value to increase. An
example of direct acting control is
temperature control with a cooling coil. With
reverse acting control, an increase in the
process variable causes the control present
value to decrease. Temperature control with
a heating coil, flow rate control, or static
pressure control applications are three
examples of reverse acting control.
Max Capacity Fraction Contains the ratio of the largest stage to the 1.0
sum of all the stages.

Output Controller 1339

 Table 26-557: Sideloop PI Staged Output Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Mode Allows the state to be set to Off, Max, or Control
Control. Set Name: Off/Max/Control
Process ID Allows the user to specify the process being DA-T
controlled. Set Name: Process ID
Process Range Displays the magnitude of the range that the 22.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
PID Process Variable traverses as the PID
Present Value varies between its minimum
and maximum values. User does not need to
configure this parameter unless Process ID =
Airflow or Airflow Diff. In these cases,
Process Range should be configured to the
design maximum flow rate of the controlled
device. For other Process ID values, the
effective process range is determined
automatically from the standards table.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. Deg C, Deg F
Set Name: Unit
Process Variable Specifies that when Mode is commanded to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Control, this is the variable that is controlled
and must therefore respond to changes in
the output. For example, it can be connected
to the Zone Temperature.
SL-MINOFF (Minimum Displays the minimum off duration for all 120 Seconds
Off Time) stages.
SL-MINON (Minimum Displays the minimum on duration for all 120 Seconds
On Time) stages.
SL-OUTSTATE (State) G, V Displays the current State of the module Set Name: Off/Max/Control
SL-SP (Setpoint) Displays the desired setpoint for the process 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
variable to be controlled to when
commanded to Control.
Attributes That Must be Connected to the MSC XX Controller
Control Band V Displays the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Eff Minimum Off Time V Contains the minimum off time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Contains the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Contains the effective process time constant Display Units: Seconds
Const used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Contains the Process Variable used by the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
MSC. It is filtered when the Process Time
Constant is shorter than the sum of the
Minimum On Time and Minimum Off Time.
Instant Shutdown V Indicates to the MSC to shut off all outputs False
instantly.
PMAC Period V Specifies the period of time used by the Display Units: Seconds
PMAC algorithm portion of the MSC.
SL-O (Percent Cmd) V Controls the single actuator that is providing Display Units: %
cooling or heating.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1340 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Sideloop PI Staged Output)
• Off: Set the Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Max: Set the Percent Cmd to 100%.
• Control: Adjust the Percent Cmd to control the Process Variable. If the
Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the Percent Cmd to maintain
the process variable at the Setpoint.

Reliability (Sideloop PI Staged Output)

Table 26-558: Sideloop PI Staged Output Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable If the State is Control, the PID skips execution and holds its
output at its last value.

Output Controller 1341

Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output

Overview
This module controls a proportional source within a control application. The
module accepts as inputs, a mode, a process variable, a setpoint, and so on. Based
upon the input mode and parameter settings, the module outputs a percent
command and control status. It passes the outputs to the MSC module that controls
the actual binary outputs. This module is a simplified version of Cooling Staged
Outputs or Heating Staged Outputs and only supports three Mode states, namely,
Off, Max, and Control. This module allows the setpoint to be reset according to the
change in Reset Input.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Attributes (Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output)
• Primary States (Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output)
• Reliability (Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output)

1342 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Sideloop PI With Reset
Staged Output module.
Table 26-559: Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output Attributes (Part 1 of
2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output Common Attributes
Control Status V Displays the current status of the module. Set Name: Control Status
Direct Acting Signals the action of the PID: True = Direct True
Acting, False = Reverse Acting. Direct acting
control is used in applications where an
increase in the process variable causes the
controller’s present value to increase. An
example of direct acting control is
temperature control with a cooling coil. With
reverse acting control, an increase in the
process variable causes the control present
value to decrease. Temperature control with
a heating coil, flow rate control, or static
pressure control applications are three
examples of reverse acting control.
EFFSL-SP (Setpoint) V Contains the actual setpoint for the process Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
variable to be controlled to when
commanded to Control.
Max Capacity Fraction Contains the ratio of the largest stage to the 1.0
sum of all the stages.
Mode Allows the state to be set to Off, Max, or Control
Control. Set Name: Off/Max/Control
Process ID Allows you to specify the process that is DA-T
being controlled. Set Name: Process ID
Process Range Specifies the magnitude of the range that the 22.0 Deg C, 40.0 Deg F
PID Process Variable traverses as the PID
Present Value varies between its minimum
and maximum values. You do not need to
configure this parameter unless Process ID
= Airflow or Airflow Diff. In these cases,
Process Range should be configured to the
design maximum flow rate of the controlled
device. For other Process ID values, the
effective process range is determined
automatically from the standards table.
Process Units Specifies the units for the PID. Deg C, Deg F
Set Name: Unit
Process Variable Specifies that when Mode is commanded to 22.0 Deg C, 72.0 Deg F
Control, this is the variable that is controlled
and must therefore respond to changes in
the output. For example, it can be connected
to the Zone Temperature.
Reset Input Used to reset the desired setpoint for the 22.0 Deg C, 72,0 Deg F
process variable to be controlled to when
commanded to Control.
SL-MINOFF (Minimum Contains the minimum off duration for all 120 Seconds
Off Time) stages.
SL-MINON (Minimum Contains the minimum on duration for all 120 Seconds
On Time) stages.

Output Controller 1343

 Table 26-559: Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output Attributes (Part 2 of
2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
SL-OUTSTATE (State) G, V Displays the current State of the module. Set Name: Off/Max/Control
SL-RSTA (Reset A) Used to set up the span for the Control 21.0 Deg C, 70 Deg F
mode. When the Reset Input is at this value,
the output is at Setpoint A.
SL-RSTB (Reset B) Used to set up the span for the Control 0.0 Deg C, 32.0 Deg F
mode. When the Reset Input is at this value,
the output is at Setpoint B.
SL-SPA (Setpoint A) Used to set up the span for the Control state 13.0 Deg C, 55 Deg F
section. This represents the setpoint when
the Input is at the Reset A value.
SL-SPB (Setpoint B) Used to set up the span for the Control state 24.0 Deg C, 75.0 Deg F
section. This represents the setpoint when
the Input is at the Reset B value.
The following output attributes must be connected to the MSC XX controller
Control Band V Specifies the control band for the MSC. Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
Eff Minimum Off Time V Contains the minimum off time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Minimum On Time V Contains the minimum on time used by the Display Units: Seconds
MSC.
Eff Process Time V Contains the effective process time constant Display Units: Seconds
Const used by the MSC.
Eff Process Variable V Contains the Process Variable used by the Display Units: Deg C, Deg F
MSC. It is filtered when the Process Time
Constant is shorter than the sum of the
Minimum On Time and Minimum Off Time.
Instant Shutdown V Indicates to the MSC to shut off all outputs False
instantly.
PMAC Period V Specifies the period used by the PMAC Display Units: Seconds
algorithm portion of the MSC.
SL-O (Percent Cmd) V Controls the single actuator that is providing Display Units: %
cooling or heating.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

1344 CCT Help: Modules

Primary States (Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output)
• Off: Set the Percent Cmd to 0%.
• Max: Set the Percent Cmd to 100%.
• Control: Adjust the Percent Cmd to control the Process Variable. If the
Process Variable is reliable, the module controls the Percent Cmd in order to
maintain the process variable at the Setpoint. The Setpoint is reset based on the
Reset Input and the limits Reset A, Reset B, Setpoint A, Setpoint B.

Reliability (Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output)

Table 26-560: Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output Reliability
Input Behavior When Input is Not Reliable
Process Variable If the State is Control, the PID skips execution and holds its
output at its last value.
Reset Input The last Reliable value is used as the input.

Output Controller 1345

Sideloop Reset Output

Overview
This module spans the input using coordinates of a straight line. The Output is the
result of the span. The module accepts as inputs, a mode, an input, input range low,
input range high, output range low, and output range high. The module outputs a
value based on the input mode and parameter settings.
You can view and modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Attributes (Sideloop Reset Output)
• Primary States (Sideloop Reset Output)
• Reliability (Sideloop Reset Output)

1346 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Sideloop Reset Output)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Sideloop Reset Output
module.
Table 26-561: Sideloop Reset Output Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input Used to reset the desired setpoint for the 0.0
process variable to be controlled to when
commanded to Control.
Mode Allows the state to be set to Min, Max, or Control
Control. Set Name: Min/Max/Control
Present Value V Contains the result of spanning the Input using
the Input Range Low, Input Range High, Output
Range Low, and Output Range High.
SL-OUTA (Output Used to set up the span when the mode is 0.0
Range Low) Control. This represents the Present Value
when the Input is at or below the Input Range
Low.
SL-OUTB (Output Used to set up the span when the mode is 0.0
Range High) Control. This represents the Output when the
Input is at or above the Input Range High.
SL-OUTSTATE (State) G, V Displays the current State of the module. Set Name: Min/Max/Control
SL-RSTA (Input Range Used to set up the span when the mode is 0.0
Low) Control. This corresponds to the low x value.
SL-RSTB (Input Range Used to set up the span when the mode is 0.0
High) Control. This corresponds to the high x value.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Primary States (Sideloop Reset Output)

• Min: The Present Value is set to Output Range Low.
• Max: The Present Value is set to Output Range High.
• Control: The Input is spanned using the Input Range Low, Input Range High,
Output Range Low, and Output Range High to produce the Present Value.

Reliability (Sideloop Reset Output)

The last reliable value of the inputs are used if they go unreliable.

Output Controller 1347

Staged Output Control
Overview
The Staged Output Control group contains the MSC 01 through MSC 12 modules.

MSC 01 through MSC 12

Overview
The Multi-Stage Controller (MSC) module provides sequencing operations for
multi-stage systems (typically smaller tonnage rooftop multi-stage DX systems,
heat pumps, and electric heat). This module uses relative capacities to determine
which outputs to turn on or pulse (cycle a device on and off while respecting the
Min On Time and Min Off Time) to meet a specific load requirement. The method
is based on the split-range control concept and it allows multiple stages to be
controlled by a single feedback controller, such as a PID. The module uses Pulse
Modulation Adaptive Control (PMAC) to provide the pulse train for the device
that is pulsed. The Multistage Controller module multiplexes the PMAC pulse
train with the multistage control outputs and passes the resultant to a set of outputs.
It also monitors the Min On Time and Min Off Time for each element of the
outputs to make sure that a device does not turn off or on too rapidly.
Disabling this module is the same as setting the Instant Shutdown to True.
The Multistage Controller module establishes a means of activating 1 to 12
individual devices. The Multistage Controller algorithm performs the following
main functions:
• Allows you to set up the number and capacities of configured devices. See
Number of Devices and Device Capacity for details.
• Determines the appropriate device combination automatically. This module
determines the switch points between stage combinations using the relative
capacities, the capacity requirement, and the Staging Hysteresis. You do not
need to provide make/break limits. See Determining Device Combinations for
details.
• Provides a vernier output representing the difference between required
capacity and actual capacity. The PMAC algorithm uses the vernier output to
provide behavior that is similar to proportional operation between the current
capacity and the next larger capacity. The module provides an output to
indicate which device is being pulsed at the current capacity. See Vernier
Output and Pulsed Device for details.
• Provides equipment protection by enforcing minimum on and off times. See
Minimum On and Minimum Off for details.
Note: You can bypass this protection by interacting directly with the Binary
Output objects.
• Allows instant deactivation of all devices based on an Instant Shutdown input
or Instant Shutdown command. See Instant Shutdown for details.

1348 CCT Help: Modules

 • Provides intelligent rotation of the start and stop order of the devices based on
the runtime and the device status. The module also allows the user to force a
rotation to occur immediately. See Device Runtime for details on lead rotation.
• Provides the relationship between devices (for example, runtime, or start order)
using Runtime. Devices with a lower runtime value start prior to devices with
the same capacity but a higher runtime value and devices with a higher runtime
value are deactivated prior to devices with the same capacity but a lower
runtime value.
• Indicates whether the device is enabled or disabled.
• Provides intelligent actions when a device is enabled or disabled. See Device
Enable/Disable for details.
• Allows you to set up device groupings so that the first device always starts
prior to the remaining devices in the group. You can set the action of the
dependent devices to be either normal or inverse. See Device Grouping for
details.
Number of Devices and Device Capacity
Select the MSC with the appropriate number of devices (for example, MSC 02,
MSC 05, and so on). The relative capacity for each device is entered into the
Device Capacity array.
Determining Device Combinations
This module creates and maintains a list of capacity combinations based on
Device Capacity of all enabled devices. For example four devices with the
capacities 5, 5, 10, 10 can achieve the following capacities when they are all
enabled: 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30. The Input indicates a percentage of the total
enabled capacity that is required. The module selects a new combination to use
when either the required capacity exceeds the next larger capacity by the
Deadzone divided by two or when the required capacity is less than the current
operating capacity by the Deadzone divided by two.
The Multistage Controller uses the following criteria to narrow the possible
combinations sequentially until a single combination is found:
• Selects the possible combinations of Device X Out that provides the
capacity which is closest to but does not exceed the required capacity.
• Selects the combinations that have a pulseable device with the smallest
capacity that is off.
• Finds the combinations that produce the least number of changes in Device
X Out compared to the current status of Device X Out.
• Finds the combination with a Device X Out that has the lowest runtime of
the devices that are on. See Device Runtime for an example of this selection
process.

Output Controller 1349

 If multiple combinations still exist, find the combination with a Device X Out
that has the second lowest runtime of the devices that are on. See Device
Runtime for an example of this selection process.
If multiple combinations still exist, continue to test subsequent runtimes until a
combination is found.
If all devices that are on have been compared with respect to runtime (the
runtimes matched at every comparison), and one combination has less devices
that are on than the other, choose the combination with fewest devices that are
on.
If all devices that are on have been compared with respect to runtime and a
single combination was not found, select the combination with the lowest
number of Device X Out. See Device Runtime for an example of this selection
process.
If Rotate Now transitions from False to True or a Rotate Now Command is
issued, the reevaluation for the new combination occurs immediately with the
selection criterion 4, 5, 6 (lowest runtimes) taking precedence over the
selection criteria 3 (lowest number of changes).
For example, 4, 5, 6 takes precedence over 3 in case of Rotate Now. Otherwise,
the normal sequence 1, 2, 3, 4, or 8 of selection criterion is applicable for
finding the best combination out of the available choices.

1350 CCT Help: Modules

 Vernier Output and Pulsed Device
The vernier output is an indication of the proportion of the required capacity
that is not met by the current output combination. This output takes into
account the Deadzone. If there is only one device, the deadzone used to
calculate the vernier is set to zero.
The following table shows the associated staging table that produces the
vernier signal in the following figure. The different vernier output results when
the combination of devices pulse a larger device to get to the next stage level.
The first vernier is what would be produced while pulsing the 5 ton device. The
second vernier would be produced when pulsing the 10 ton device.
Table 26-562: Staging Combinations for Capacities of 5 Tons, 10 Tons,
and 15 Tons
Capacity 5 Ton 10 Ton 15 Ton Vernier Output
Device Device Device
0 Off Off Off The vernier output varies from 0 to 100 as the required capacity
(pulsed) changes from 0.5 to 4.5.
5 On Off Off The vernier output varies from 0 to 50 as the required capacity
(pulsed) changes from 5.5 to 9.5.
10 Off On Off The vernier output varies from 0 to 100 as the required capacity
(pulsed) changes from 10.5 to 14.5.
15 Off Off On The vernier output varies from 0 to 100 as the required capacity
(pulsed) changes from 15.5 to 19.5.
20 On Off On The vernier output varies from 0 to 50 as the required capacity
(pulsed) changes from 20.5 to 24.5.
25 Off On On The vernier output varies from 0 to 100 as the required capacity
(pulsed) changes from 25.5 to 29.5.
30 On On On The vernier output is 0.

Output Controller 1351

 Figure 26-29: Typical Vernier Signal
Current Stage Current Stage.+1 Current Stage.+2,
100% Combination Active Combination and so on

Vernier Signal
for Current Stage

Split Range Vernier Signal

Signal for Current
Stage + 1
Deadzone
with
Hysteresis

Deadzone
with
Hysteresis

0%

Current Stage Current Stage + 1 Current Stage + 2

Capacity Capacity Capacity

FIG:Typical Vernier Signal

Deadzone / 2 Deadzone / 2 Deadzone / 2

0% Input 100%

The example shown in the previous table has three devices with the capacities
5 tons, 10 tons, and 15 tons. Only the first (5 ton) and second (10 ton) devices
are pulseable. The first stage would pulse the first device as the vernier signal
goes from 0 to 100%. To go from the capacity of 5 tons to the capacity of
10 tons, the second device would be pulsed while the first device is on
continuously. When the capacity reaches 10 tons, the first device is pulsed
while the second device now runs continuously. If the current combination is
the second to last combination from the table and the input reaches 100%, the
last stage is not chosen if there is an existing pulsable device in the second to
last combination. But, the pulsable device (in the second to last combination) is
controlled by PMAC. PMAC receives 100% from the vernier (in effect giving
full 100% capacity) and the second to last combination is maintained. If the
current combination is not the second to last combination and the input goes to
100%, the last stage combination (all 1s or On's) is chosen immediately,
checking for existing timers first, by virtue of the Deadzone divided by two
rule.

1352 CCT Help: Modules

 Minimum On and Minimum Off
The outputs are all subject to minimum on and minimum off timers. The
Multistage Controller maintains individual timers for each device. These
timers protect equipment from excessive wear due to short cycling. A timer is
cleared and an appropriate timer is started when a Device X Out changes
status.
If a minimum on or minimum off timer is active for any device that is changing
state when a combination change is required, the change in combination delays
until all timers associated with the changing devices have been met except for
the following special conditions:
• Instant Shutdown is True
• Rotate Now changes from False to True
• Device Pulseable changes
• Device First of changes
When a device is activated, it remains active for at least the Min On Time. This
occurs even if the input to the Multistage Controller indicates that it should
stage. If a device that needs to be deactivated has an active minimum on timer,
the Multistage Controller waits for that timer to expire before changing the
state of any device. Commanding the module to Instant Shutdown or setting
the Instant Shutdown input to True causes the Min On Time to be ignored and
all devices are immediately deactivated. In addition, when a particular Device
X Enable transitions to False, the corresponding Device X Out is set off
ignoring the Min On Time.
When a device is deactivated, it remains inactive for the Min Off Time. This
occurs even if the Multistage Controller indicates that it should stage. If a
device that needs to be activated has an active minimum off timer, the
Multistage Controller waits for that timer to expire before changing the state of
any device. At startup or enable, the Multistage Controller does not consider
minimum off timers (when disabled, all timers are canceled.) If the Instant
Shutdown input is True, the minimum off timers are maintained for all outputs.
If a device transitions to off due to the Instant Shutdown input, a minimum off
timer is started for that device. If Instant Shutdown goes False and a device has
its minimum off timer active, the Multistage Controller waits for that timer to
expire before staging up and activating that device. If a device is disabled, a
minimum off timer is started for that device if it turns off when it is disabled.
If the module is commanded to Rotate Now or the Rotate Now input transitions
from False to True, the module evaluates and implements the appropriate
device combination immediately, ignoring the Minimum On/Off timers.
If any Device Pulseable or Device First changes, the Multistage Controller
immediately reevaluates the required outputs and changes the state of the
outputs ignoring the minimum on and minimum off timers.

Output Controller 1353

 The Multistage Controller does not provide inter-stage timing. You can use a
Sequencer module for inter-stage timing. As indicated in Determining Device
Combinations above, the Staging Hysteresis provides protection from rapid
cycling between adjacent stages.
In the past, Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) controllers (set for
proportional only) provided a signal to a stage sequencer to control the process
variable. You manually set the sequencer’s make and break limits for each
stage. Typically, large load disturbances or setpoint changes caused the system
to overreact. To prevent using more energy than required and major overshoots
of the process variable, inter-stage delays kept the system from staging too
quickly. This method created sluggish response to large disturbances, although
it worked for smaller disturbances.
The MSC with a self-tuning PID and the MSC Pre-Processor provide proper
control for the current load. If a load change occurs, the MSC has an
appropriate response in the outputs without excessive overshoot. Because of
this operation, the MSC does not require Inter-Stage Timers.
Starts-per-hour is another method to make sure that the staged equipment does
not cycle too frequently. The MSC provides the same functionality by
selecting appropriate Minimum On Time and Minimum Off Time.
Instant Shutdown
When the Instant Shutdown input is True or the Instant Shutdown command is
received, all of the devices are turned off ignoring the Min On Time. The
vernier signal sent to the PMAC algorithm is set to zero and the PMAC
algorithm is re-initialized. If the Instant Shutdown input is True, it must be set
false for the Multistage Controller to control the devices. If an Instant
Shutdown command is received, a Release Shutdown command must be
received for the Multistage Controller to control the devices.

1354 CCT Help: Modules

 Device Runtime
Each Device X Out has an associated Device X Runtime. As described above
in section Determining Device Combinations, this value is used to make a
selection when more than one combination of devices can meet the required
capacity.
Note: Capacity takes priority over runtime.
The module always looks for the combination that has the device with the
lowest runtime value.
For example, consider four devices with the relative capacities of 5, 5, 10, 10
and with runtimes of 1, 2, 3, 4. Assume that currently the Device X Out
combination is 1, 1, 0, 0, which is a capacity of 10 and the input has changed to
a value that requires a capacity of 15.
Table 26-563: Staging Combinations Using Runtime
51 52 101 102 Changes Pulse Lowest Second
Runtime Lowest
Runtime Runtime
1 2 3 4
Current 1 1 0 0 101
Combination
1 New 0 1 0 1 2 51 2 4
Options
2 0 1 1 0 2 51 2 3
3 1 0 0 1 2 52 1 4
4 1 0 1 0 2 52 1 3

The combinations shown in row 1, 2, 3, 4 would be evaluated. The search

through the possible combinations follows a binary order, so combination 1 (0,
1, 0, 1) would be checked and accepted with two changes from the current
outputs. Then combination 2 (0, 1, 1, 0) would be evaluated. combination 2
also has two changes and it has the same runtime. The devices with the next
lowest runtime would be compared. The next lowest combination would have
the second lowest runtime and would be selected over the first combination.
Combination 3 (1, 0, 0, 1) also has the same number of changes but it has the
lowest runtime device. Combination 3 would be the best candidate at this
point. Combination 4 (1, 0, 1, 0) is then evaluated. It has the same number of
changes and the same lowest runtime device. The next lowest runtime devices
would be compared. It would have the lowest second lowest runtime and be
selected as the current combination.

Output Controller 1355

 Another example would be four devices with the relative capacities of 5, 5, 10,
10 and with runtimes of 0, 0, 0, 0. Assume that currently the Device X Out
combination is 1, 1, 0, 0, which is a capacity of 10 and the input has changed to
a value that requires a capacity of 15.
Table 26-564: Staging Combinations Using Device Number
51 52 101 102 Changes Pulse Lowest Second
Device Lowest
Runtime Number Device
0 0 0 0
Number
Current 1 1 0 0 101
Combination
1 New Options 0 1 0 1 2 51 2 4
2 0 1 1 0 2 51 2 3
3 1 0 0 1 2 52 1 4
4 1 0 1 0 2 52 1 3

The combinations shown in row 1, 2, 3, 4 would be evaluated. The search

through the possible combinations follows a binary order, so combination 1 (0,
1, 0, 1) would be checked and accepted with two changes from the current
outputs. Then combination 2 (0, 1, 1, 0) would be evaluated. It also has two
changes and the same matching runtime. It would be selected over the first
combination because it has Device 3 on while the first row has Device 4 on.
Combination 3 (1, 0, 0, 1) also has two changes, and it has the same runtime for
all inputs that are on. It would be selected over the currently selected
combination because it has Device 1 on while the other combination has
Device 2 on. The final combination (1, 0, 1, 0) is then evaluated. It has the
same number of changes and the same runtimes. They both have Device 1 on,
but this combination has Device 3 on while the previously selected
combination has Device 4 on. It would have the second lowest Device number
and thus selected as the current combination.

1356 CCT Help: Modules

 Device Enable/Disable
When a Device X Enable changes state to False, the associated Device X Out
is set to off and the module determines a new combination appropriate to the
required capacity as indicated by the Input. A minimum off timer is started for
the disabled device. When a Device X Enable changes state to True, the
module determines a new combination appropriate for the required capacity
indicated by the Input. If a minimum off timer is active for the device, it must
expire before the device is started.
Note: Changing a Device X Enable to False when Device X Out is True
causes a change in the current combination of devices.
Device Grouping
In some instances, devices are grouped together. This is used when a device
must be turned on prior to turning on any subsequent devices. The user sets up
the group by indicating that this device is the first of x devices. The module
then knows that this output must be on before it can turn on any of the
subsequent devices.
An example is a compressor with two unloaders. Device 1 First Of would be
set to three. Any combinations that require Device 2 Out or Device 3 Out, must
also have Device 1 Out on also. The available combinations for this
compressor would be: (0, 0, 0), (1, 0, 0), (1, 0, 1), (1, 1, 0) and (1, 1, 1). If it is
desired to always have Device 2 Out on before Device 3 Out, the user must
make sure that Device 2 Runtime is equal to or less than Device 3 Runtime
assuming that Device 2 and Device 3 are the same capacity.
When devices are grouped they can also support inverting. This means that
when the first device turns on, all of the devices turn on (the dependent devices
do not begin tracking a minimum on timer). Then as the capacity requirement
increases, the subsequent devices are turned off to increase the capacity. If the
first device turns off, all of the devices are turned off.
Note: If a combination change is made that turns the first device off, the
dependent devices may turn off prior to satisfying their minimum on
timer.
Note: Grouping means that the first device is always started first before the
dependent devices.

Output Controller 1357

 PMAC Operation
The PMAC algorithm determines the on time and off time of a device to keep
the process variable within the control band while minimizing the number of
times that the staged device turns on and off. The Multistage Controller
operates similar to the Duration Adjust Output. Duration Adjust has a fixed
cycle time and varies the on and off times based on the vernier signal. PMAC
varies the on and off times as well as the cycle time. It generates a pulse train
based on the vernier control signal. A pulse train is comprised of a sequence of
on and off states. See the following figure for an example of a pulse. A cycle
period is the time between two off to on transitions. PMAC varies both the on–
time, off–time, and cycle period to constrain the variation in the controlled
variable to be within the Control Band (as much as possible) while minimizing
the number of cycles. The PMAC’s calculated On Time and Off Time are
always greater than the Min On Time and Min Off Time respectively.
Figure 26-30: Example Pulse
On Time Off Time

FIG:Example Pulse

Cycle Time

Re-initialization of the PMAC Algorithm

The PMAC algorithm is reinitialized and calculates a new pulse train when the
following occur:
• A new Pulsed Device is selected.
• The PMAC Period changes.
The pulse train starts in an on state if the Vernier is greater than zero when
re-initialization occurs. If the Vernier is zero, the pulse train starts in an off
state.

1358 CCT Help: Modules

 Percent Request Output
The Percent Request output is connected to the fan determination module in
the standard applications for terminal units. There are two modes of operation
for the Percent Request output. Setting the Percent Request Mode input
chooses the mode of operation.
Percent Request Mode = Demand
The Percent Request output is set to the value of the Input.
Percent Request Mode = With Output
When the Percent Request Mode is With Output, the Percent Request is set to
zero if all of the device outputs are off (even if the input is non-zero). When
one or more device outputs are on, the Percent Request output is set to the
maximum of the Input or Min Percent Request. When connected with the fan
determination module, this connection allows the fan to be turned on only
when the pulsed heating or cooling devices are on (and turned off when the
first device cycles off).
Merging the PMAC Pulse Train
The Multistage Controller merges the pulse train from the PMAC algorithm
with the selected output states from the Multistage algorithm and then these
states are passed to the appropriate Device X Out. Changing the state of all
Device X Out is subject to Minimum On and Minimum Off timers. See
Minimum On and Minimum Off for details on Minimum On and Minimum Off
timing.
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (MSC)
• Attributes (MSC)
• Reliability (MSC)

Output Controller 1359

Module Use in Applications (MSC)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the names in the following table.
Table 26-565: MSC 01 through MSC 12 Uses in Application System
Selection Trees
Module Instance Name
MSC 2 Position 2 Pipe
MSC 2 Position Box Heating
MSC 2 Position Cooling
MSC 2 Position Heating
MSC 2 Position Supplemental Heating
MSC Staged Box Heating XX (Where XX Is
01-03)
MSC Staged Compressor X (Where X Is 1 or 2)
MSC Staged Cooling XX (Where XX Is 01-08)
MSC Staged Heating XX (Where XX Is 01- 03)
MSC Staged Humidification XX (Where XX Is
01-04)
MSC Staged Preheat XX (Where XX Is 01-08)
MSC Staged Reheat XX (Where XX Is 01-08)
MSC Staged Supplemental Heating
MSC XX (Where XX Is 01-08)
Zone X MSC 2 Position Heating (Where X Is
1-8)
Zone X MSC Staged Heating XX (Where X Is
1-8 and XX Is 01-03)
Applications
Fan Coil Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
Fan Coil Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Fan Coil Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Single Duct Application
Heat Pump Application
All Air Handling Unit Applications
Fan Coil Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
All Air Handling Unit Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
All Air Handling Unit Applications
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application
Sideloop Applications
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1360 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (MSC)
The following table describes the attributes used by the MSC XX (where XX is 01
through 12) modules.
Table 26-566: MSC 01 through MSC 12 Attributes (Part 1 of 4)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Active Stage Count G, V Specifies the number of discrete devices
under control that are in an on state. This
output is equal to the total number of ON
devices and is used for diagnostic purposes.
Actual Period V Specifies the actual instantaneous PMAC Display Units: Seconds
period of execution, measured as the actual
time between successive periodic executions
of the PMAC algorithm.
Capacity List V Contains a list of the possible capacities
based on the Device Capacity input.
Control Band Contains the user-specified variation band of 10.0 Deg C, 16.0 Deg F
the controlled variable. Multistage Controller
controls the pulse train output. The variation
of the pulse train then causes the variation of
the Process Variable to be equal to or
smaller than the specified value.
Note: The minimum achievable Control
Band is not zero, but is dependent on
the system process time constant,
process gain, minimum on/off times,
and the number of stages. Multistage
Controller may not be able to achieve
the Control Band you set.
Deadzone V Contains a value calculated from the Staging
Hysteresis and the smallest Device X
Capacity. Deadzone = Staging Hysteresis *
smallest Device X Capacity.
Desired Outputs V Represents the desired state of all Device X
Out at this instant. If this is different from the
actual state of the outputs, it is due to a
minimum on or minimum off timer.
Device Capacity Represents the relative capacity of each 1 (for all devices)
device. This value is used in establishing the
order by which the devices are activated.
These numbers can represent the wattage of
an electric heater, the tonnage of a chiller,
and so on. All capacities entered must be
based on the same units and all
combinations of the capacities are used to
create the Capacity List.
Note: The Capacity List is limited to 50
entries. To limit the Capacity List to a
maximum of 50, the user may need to
round off the capacities to reduce the
number of unique values (for
example, use capacity of 5 for three
devices with actual capacities of 4.6,
5.1, and 5.9).

Output Controller 1361

 Table 26-566: MSC 01 through MSC 12 Attributes (Part 2 of 4)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Device First Of Specifies how many devices are in the group 1 (for all devices)
where this device is the first of the group.
This device and the following (value - 1)
devices are grouped together for control. The
Device First Of attribute for the dependent
devices of this group are ignored.
Device Pulsable Represents the action allowed for the device. True (for all devices)
When this is false, the associated device is
turned on or off only by the staging algorithm
of this module. It is never selected as the
Pulsed Device. If the value is True, then this
device can be pulsed using the PMAC
algorithm.
Note: If none of the devices are pulseable,
the controlling PID should have its
Adaptive Tuning input set to False.
IMPORTANT: Using the MSC without a
pulseable device may cause excessive
cycling of the equipment.
Device X Enable Establish the enable status of the devices. A True
value of False takes the associated device
out of service. If a device is on when this is
set to False, Device X Out is set off
immediately, disregarding the minimum on
timer. In Device X Enable, X is 1-12.
Device X Out V Contains the output value for the Set Name: Off/On
corresponding device. In Device X Out, X is
1-12.
Device X Runtime Represent the ranking of each device. This 0.0
value is used with the Device Capacity in
establishing the order by which the devices
are activated. In Device X Runtime, X is 1-12.
Input Represents the required capacity from zero 0.0%
to 100% of available capacity. This signal
typically is fed from an upstream controller
(for example, PID or a user defined
algorithm).
Instant Shutdown Forces all Device X Out to False when it is False
True. When it is False, the module monitors
the input and sequences the devices. When
this value transitions from False to True, all
of the devices are deactivated instantly
(ignoring any minimum on timers).
Invert Stage Indicates the action of devices within a group False
as specified in Device First Of. If this input
is True, when the first device of a group is
turned on, all the devices are turned on and
the second and subsequent devices of the
group are turned off sequentially as the load
increases. If this input is False, when the first
device of the group is turned on, the
remaining devices of the group turn on
sequentially as the load increases.
Max Capacity Fraction V Contains the ratio of the largest enabled
Device Capacity to the sum of all Device
Capacity.

1362 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-566: MSC 01 through MSC 12 Attributes (Part 3 of 4)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Min Off Time Displays the minimum time that a Device X 120 Seconds
Out must remain off before it can be
reactivated to an on state (following
deactivation).
Min On Time Displays the minimum time interval that a 240 Seconds
Device X Out must remain on before it can be
deactivated to an off state (following
activation).
Min Percent Request Displays the minimum output signal at 1.0%
Percent Request when any output is desired
to be on.
Min Period C Defines the shortest period that can be 1 Second
executed.
Number of Devices V Displays the number of devices controlled by
this Multistage Controller.
Off Pulse V Specifies the width of the current off pulse of Display Units: Seconds
the Pulsed Device in seconds.
On Capacity V Specifies the capacity of the on outputs in
units of the Device Capacity.
On Pulse V Specifies the width of the current on pulse of Display Units: Seconds
the Pulsed Device in seconds.
Percent Capacity V Indicates the percentage of the total capacity
Enabled represented by the currently enabled
devices’ capacities.
Percent Request V Indicates when the Multistage Controller
requires the fan to be on. The value of this
request depends on the property Percent
Request Mode.
Percent Request Mode Indicates the method used to control the Demand
output Percent Request. Set Name: Percent
Request Mode Enum
Set
PMAC Period Specifies the execution period of the PMAC 24 Seconds
algorithm of this module. If set to a value less
than the Min Period property, the period
requested for execution is limited to the Min
Period.
Process Time Displays the dominant time constant of the 720 Seconds
Constant process being controlled.
Process Variable Displays the value from the area that is being 0.0 Deg C, 0.0 Deg F
controlled. It typically originates at a sensor
and, after some signal processing, passes to
the Multistage Controller module.
Pulsed Device V Displays the current device that the PMAC
algorithm controls at this capacity step.
Requested Capacity V Displays the capacity requested by the Input
in units of the Device Capacity.

Output Controller 1363

 Table 26-566: MSC 01 through MSC 12 Attributes (Part 4 of 4)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Rotate Now Retains a value of True until it is written back False
to False. (This attribute is rising edge
activated.) Writing this attribute to True
causes an immediate update (disregarding
Min On Time and Min Off Time) of the active
devices based on the current runtimes. All
timers are cleared and the minimum on (for
devices that transition to on) and minimum off
(for devices that transition to off) timers begin
counting from zero.
Staging Hysterisis Determines the Multistage Controller’s 20.0%
deadzone size (Deadzone divided by two is
the amount the Input must be greater than a
capacity switch point to increase the
capacity. The Input must be less than a
capacity switch point by this amount to
decrease the capacity. The capacity list
determines the capacity switch points. See
Deadzone.)
Timer Status V Represents the status of any timers
associated with all Device X Out at this
instant. If the element corresponding to a
specific Device X Out is True, then a
minimum on or minimum off timer is active. If
the element is False, then no timers are
active.
Vernier V Contains an analog output of 0 to 100 that Display Units: %
indicates the percentage of the currently
pulsed device necessary to meet the
required capacity.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning
Modes Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (MSC)
• If the Device Capacity inputs produce more than fifty combinations, the
module becomes unreliable and the Reliability is set to Inconsistent Inputs.
• If the Process Variable is unreliable, the module generates a pulse train based
on the Input and the last valid Process Variable. If the Input is unreliable, the
system generates a pulse train based on the last valid Input.

1364 CCT Help: Modules

Staged Output Sequencing
Overview
The Staged Output Sequencing group contains the Sequencer 01 through
Sequencer 16 modules.

Sequencer 01 through Sequencer 16

Overview
The Sequencer module behaves the same as the Sequencer block in the Metasys
system extended architecture NAE. See the Sequencer block description in the
Logic Connector Tool (LCT) section of the Metasys system Help.
The Sequencer module provides a Control System with multiple stage sequence
control. This module controls discrete systems where the relative capacities of the
stages are known. This module uses relative capacities to determine which outputs
to turn on or off. The method is based on the split-range control concept and it
allows multiple stages to be controlled by a single feedback controller, such as a
PID. This module should be operated continuously (that is, do not place this
module in a hybrid activity). The activity disables all modules associated with a
specific state when that state is not active. There is no user interface to this disable/
enable behavior.
The sequencer module establishes a means of sequentially activating 1 to X stages
of individual devices. The sequencer control algorithm performs the following
main functions:
• Handles transitions between stage combinations using make and break limits.
See Configuration Details for details on make and break limits. See Staging
Up and Staging Down for details on staging up and staging down.
• Provides equipment protection by enforcing minimum on and off times. See
Minimum On and Minimum Off for details.
Note: The user can defeat this protection by interacting directly with the
output points.
• Provides inter-stage on and off delays. See Inter-Stage Timing for details.
• Allows instant deactivation of all outputs based on an Instant Shutdown input.
See Instant Shutdown for details.
• Provides intelligent rotation of the start and stop order of the outputs based on
the rank and the device status. The sequencer module also allows the user to
force a rotation to occur immediately. See Lead Rotation for details on lead
rotation.

Output Controller 1365

 • Provides the relationship between outputs (for example, runtime, number of
starts). Devices with a lower rank value start prior to devices with a higher rank
value and devices with a higher rank value are deactivated prior to devices with
a lower rank value. If the rank values are equal, the output with the lowest
device number is activated first and the output with the highest device number
is deactivated first.
• Indicates whether the device is active, inactive, or disabled. Active devices are
first on the sequence order, inactive devices are second and disabled devices
are last. This provides a simple method to determine the next device to start or
stop.
• Provides for a First On, Last Off operation (default sequence order).
• Provides intelligent actions when a device is enabled or disabled. See Device
Enable for details.
Configuration Details
The number of actively managed stages depends on the Number of Outputs
and the operating mode (normal or proactive).
When the sequencer is operating in a proactive mode, the lead output of the
sequencer module is activated continuously when the sequencer is enabled and
Instant Shutdown is False. This causes the actively managed stages to be one
less than the Number of Outputs. When it is not in a proactive mode, the lead
output of the sequencer module is activated when the input exceeds the first
make limit. In this case the actively managed stages is equal to the Number of
Outputs.
The sequencer maintains one make limit and one break limit for each of the
output stages it must actively manage. When in Normal mode, the first make
and break limits are the start and stop limits for stage 1. When in proactive
mode, the first make limit and break limit are the start and stop limits for the
second stage since the first stage is active continuously.
The input values at which the sequencer activates and deactivates each
configured stage is contingent on the sets of make and break limits specified
for the sequencer. You can configure the make and break limits.
If a change to the make or break limits would cause an output to change state, it
changes state provided that the inter-stage, minimum on and minimum off
timing are satisfied.
If a timer prevents an output from starting or stopping, the module activates or
deactivates the output when the timer expires.

1366 CCT Help: Modules

 Staging Up
A staging up process involves comparing the input value against each of the
make limits defined for the sequencer module. When an input value equals or
exceeds a make limit, when the Inter-stage On Delay is not active and when the
next device to activate does not have an active Minimum Off Timer, the
sequencer reacts by increasing the current stage. If more than one make limit is
exceeded, the sequencer stages up one stage at a time with an Inter-stage On
Delay between each stage. When an increase in the current stage occurs, the
Inter-stage On Delay starts.
If an Inter-stage Off Delay is active when a make limit is exceeded, it does not
prevent the stage up. When a stage up occurs, any active Inter-Stage Off Delay
is canceled.
Staging Down
A staging down process involves comparing the input value against each of the
break limits defined for the sequencer module. When an input value is less than
or equal to a break limit, when the Inter-stage Off Delay is not active and when
the next device to deactivate does not have an active Minimum On Timer, the
sequencer decreases the current stage. If more than one break limit has been
passed, the sequencer stages down one stage at a time with an Inter-stage Off
Delay between each stage. When a decrease in the current stage occurs, the
Inter-stage Off Delay starts.
If an Inter-stage On Delay is active when a break limit is exceeded and it does
not prevent the stage down. When a stage down occurs, any active Inter-Stage
On Delay is canceled.
Minimum On and Off Timing
The outputs are all subject to minimum on and minimum off timers. The
sequencer maintains individual timers for each output. These timers protect
equipment from excessive wear due to short cycling. Timers are cleared if the
sequencer is commanded to Rotate Now or the Rotate Now input transitions
from False to True.
When an output is activated, it remains active for the Min On Time. This
occurs even if the input to the sequencer indicates that it should stage down. If
the output that needs to be deactivated has an active Minimum On Timer, the
sequencer waits for that timer to expire before staging down and deactivating
that device. Setting the Instant Shutdown input to True causes the Minimum
On Timer to be ignored and all devices are immediately deactivated.
When an output is deactivated, it remains inactive for the Min Off Time. This
occurs even if the sequencer decides to stage up. If the output that needs to be
activated has an active Minimum Off Timer, the sequencer waits for that timer
to expire before activating that output. At startup, the sequencer considers all
minimum off timers to have been met. If the Instant Shutdown input is True,
the minimum off timers are maintained for all outputs. If Instant Shutdown
goes False and a device has its minimum off timer active, the sequencer waits
for that timer to expire before staging up and activating that device.

Output Controller 1367

 When a Minimum On/Off timer expires, the module checks to see if a stage up
or down is required (the input is currently greater than the next make limit or
less than the appropriate break limit). If a change is required, the stage up or
down occurs if the appropriate Inter-stage and Minimum On/Off timers have
been met. If there are no pending changes, the module waits for the input to
exceed a make limit or drop below a break limit to initiate a stage change.
Inter-Stage Timing
Staged equipment requires some time to have an effect on the process variable.
Delays between switching stages are used to ensure that the process variable
has adequate time to sense the change from the capacity increase or decrease.
Staging up and staging down are subject to inter-stage on and off timers
respectively. These timers are cleared and restarted if the sequencer is
commanded to Rotate Now or the Rotate Now input transitions from False to
True.
The Inter-stage On Delay Timer starts when the sequencer increases the
current stage and must expire before the sequencer is allowed to increase the
current stage again. The Inter-stage On Delay allows the process variable to
respond to the increase in the system capacity before the control system
continues to stage up.
If the input drops below a break limit while an Inter-stage On delay is active,
the stage down occurs if the device to be deactivated has no active minimum
on timer.
The Inter-stage Off Delay Timer starts when the sequencer decreases the
current stage and must expire before the sequencer is allowed to decrease the
current stage again. The Inter-stage Off Delay allows the process variable to
respond to the decrease in the system capacity before the control system
continues to stage down. Setting the Instant Shutdown input to True
deactivates all outputs, ignoring the Inter-stage Off Delay.
If the input rises above a make limit while an Inter-stage Off delay is active,
the stage up occurs if the device to be activated has no active minimum off
timer.
When an Inter-stage timer expires, the module checks to see if a stage up or
down is required (the input is currently greater than the next make limit or less
than the appropriate break limit). If a change is required, the stage up or down
occurs if all appropriate Minimum On/Off timers have been met. If there are no
pending changes, the module waits for the input to exceed a make limit or drop
below a break limit to initiate a stage change.
Instant Shutdown
When the Instant Shutdown input is True, all of the outputs are deactivated
ignoring the Minimum On Timers and the Inter-stage Off Delay timer.

1368 CCT Help: Modules

 Lead Rotation
The following six events can cause the sequence order to change:
• Device activation
• Device deactivation
• Enabling a device
• Disabling a device
• Change of a device’s rank value
• Change in the Rotate Now input from False to True or receipt of a Rotate
Now command.
The manner in which the outputs are scheduled for activation is based on a
combination of three factors: the rank value defined for each device, whether
or not the device is enabled, and whether or not the device is already active.
Dynamic Reordering
After any occurrence of the first five items (cited above), the sequence order is
re-evaluated. The devices are placed into three distinct collections or
categories:
• Enabled and active
• Enabled and not active
• Disabled
Within each of the categories, the entries are arranged in ascending order
beginning with the lowest ranked device and ending with the highest ranked
device.
Note: If two or more devices are assigned equal “rank” values, they are
ordered based on the device number.
The combination of the three categories is the overall sequence order with the
enabled and active devices lowest in the list, followed by enabled and inactive
devices and finally by disabled devices.
The dynamic reordering allows the current lead device to be changed without
actually deactivating or activating any of the devices until a stage change is
required. If an output is being deactivated, then the active output with the
highest rank value is deactivated. If an output is being activated, then the
inactive output with the lowest rank value is activated. After the device
activates or deactivates, the groupings update.

Output Controller 1369

 Static Reordering
In the case that the sixth event occurs, the sequence order is re-evaluated. This
allows you to make an immediate change to the devices that are running.
Note: This disregards all Inter-stage and Minimum On/Off Timers.
The devices are placed into two distinct collections or categories:
• Enabled
• Disabled
Within each of the categories, the entries are arranged in ascending order
beginning with the lowest ranked device and ending with the highest ranked
device.
Note: If two or more devices are assigned equal rank values, they are ordered
based on the device number.
This method does not take into account the current status of the output (active
or inactive). The combination of the two categories is the overall sequence
order with the enabled devices lowest in the list.
When the reordering is complete, the sequencer module immediately switches
the state of its outputs to match the new sequence order and Current Stage.
This may result in currently active devices stopping and inactive devices
starting. For devices that change state, any current Minimum On or Minimum
Off timers are cleared and appropriate timers are started.)
Default Sequencing Order
At creation, the default sequence order matches the device numbering. The
default value for Device X Rank is zero, so the sequencer module defaults to
the device numbering for the sequence.
Device Enable
The sequencer module only activates those devices that are enabled. When an
active device is disabled, it is immediately deactivated (disregarding minimum
on timers) and the next available (enabled and inactivate) device is activated in
its place.
When a device is enabled, the sequencer module reevaluates the sequence
order. The sequencer continues to consider this device inactive when it
becomes enabled. When a change is required by the make and break limits, the
appropriate device is started or stopped.
If some of the output devices are disabled, the sequencer may not be able to
provide 100 percent capacity. In that case, the input may continue to wind-up
to a max value of 100 percent. When the load drops and the input signal drop,
the value of the input must drop to the break limit associated with the last stage
that is currently enabled before actually deactivating any outputs.
When a Device X Enable changes to false and the associated Device X Out is
turned off, a minimum off timer is started.

1370 CCT Help: Modules

 You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Sequencer)
• Attributes (Sequencer)
• Reliability (Sequencer)

Module Use in Applications (Sequencer)

The Application System Selection Trees in the CCT software do not use the
individual modules in this group.
To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:
• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Attributes (Sequencer)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Sequencer XX (where XX
is 01 through 16) modules.
Table 26-567: Sequencer 01 through Sequencer 16 Attributes (Part 1 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Break Limit Represents the limits at which each
successive stage deactivates. If Proactive
is True, the first limit applies to the second
stage, the second limit applies to the third
stage, and so on. Each successive value
must be greater than the previous break
limit and also less than its corresponding
make limit. The size of this array is set to
Number of Outputs (or Number of
Outputs - 1 if Proactive is True) at
configuration time.
Current Stage G, V Indicates the number of the active outputs
of the sequencer.
Device X Enable Establishes the enable status of the True
sequencer device outputs. A value of
False takes the associated device out of
service. In Device X Enable, X is 1-16.
Device X Out V Contains the output value for the
corresponding device. In Device X Out, X
is 1-16.
Device X Rank These float values represent the ranking of 0.0
each device. This value establishes the
order by which the device outputs are
activated. In Device X Rank, X is 1-12.

Output Controller 1371

 Table 26-567: Sequencer 01 through Sequencer 16 Attributes (Part 2 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input Contains the control signal input to this 0.0%
module. It is compared against the make
and break limits to determine how many
outputs to activate.
Instant Shutdown Forces all outputs inactive when it is True. False
When it is False, the module monitors the
input and stages the outputs. When this
value transitions from False to True, all of
the outputs are deactivated instantly
(ignoring any Minimum On Timers and the
Interstage Off Timer).
Interstage Off Delay Defines the minimum time interval that 1200 Seconds
must elapse between the sequential
deactivation of multiple Sequencer stages
unless the Instant Shutdown value is True
or the module is disabled.
Interstage On Delay Defines the minimum time interval that 1200 Seconds
must elapse between the sequential
activation of multiple Sequencer stages.
Interstage Timing V Provides an indication of when an False
interstage timer is active.
Make Limit Represents the limits at which each
successive stage is to be activated. If
Proactive is True, the first limit applies to
the second stage, the second limit applies
to the third stage, and so on. Each
successive value must be greater than the
previous make limit and also greater than
its corresponding break limit. The size of
this array is set to Number of Outputs (or
Number of Outputs - 1 if Proactive is True)
at configuration time.
Min Off Time Displays the minimum time that an output 600 Seconds
must remain of” before it can be
reactivated to an on condition following
deactivation. As such, a separate timer is
established for each device output upon
being deactivated. Until the time interval
expires, the output is blocked from being
reactivated unless Rotate Now has
transitioned from False to True.
Min On Time Contains the minimum time interval that an 600 Seconds
output must remain on before it can be
deactivated to an off condition following
activation. As such, a separate timer is
established for each device output upon
being activated. Until the time interval
expires, the output is blocked from being
deactivated unless the Instant Shutdown
value is True, the module is disabled or
Rotate Now has transitioned from False to
True.
Number of Outputs V Displays the number of outputs controlled
by this Sequencer.
Operating State V Displays the current operational state of Set Name: Sequencer
the sequencer. Operating State

1372 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-567: Sequencer 01 through Sequencer 16 Attributes (Part 3 of 3)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Proactive C Indicates the mode of operation for the False
sequencer. When this value is False, the
lead output is activated when the input
reaches the first make limit. When this
attribute is True, the lead output is placed
in a continuously activated state (provided
Instant Shutdown is False). The second
stage actually is activated when Input
reaches the first make limit.
Rotate Now Retains a value of True until it is written False
back to False. This attribute is rising edge
activated. Writing this attribute to True
causes an immediate rotation based on
the current ranks.
Sequence Order V Contains the activation/deactivation order
of the sequencer as determined by the
Lead Rotation. See Lead Rotation for
details. In the case where the sequencing
order is Device 3 Output, Device 4 Output,
Device 1 Output, and Device 2 Output for a
four stage Sequencer, the contents of this
array would be 3, 4, 1, 2.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Sequencer)
• The reliability associated with the Sequencer module may report the input
unreliable. When the input is unreliable, all outputs hold the last value set when
the input was reliable during this situation.
• If the Sequencer is unable to stage up or down because the remaining outputs
are disabled, the Sequencer’s reliability is Unreliable.

Output Controller 1373

Timing
Overview
This group provides a unit (one time step) delay for a data signal.
The Timing group contains the Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) modules.

Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)

Overview
This section describes the Last Value modules of the Output Controller type. For
information on the Last Value modules of the Setpoint Determination/Misc type,
see Timing in the Setpoint Determination/Misc section.
The Last Value module holds the value that its input had at the end of the previous
execution of the control logic for use by the current execution. Use this module
when you want to compare the current value of a variable with the value from the
last execution. If this module does not operate continuously (that is, is placed in the
state section of a hybrid activity), it starts at its Default Value when re-enabled.
One additional constraint is that connections from Hybrid Activity Inputs are not
allowed to be made directly to the Input of Last Value module in one of its State
Sections. If such logic is needed, a no-op component (such as adding zero to a
float) should be connected between the Input and the Last Value. This is required
because the Hybrid Activity inputs are considered part of the Event Section and are
therefore earlier in the sequence order than all State Section components.
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Last Value)
• Attributes (Last Value)
• Reliability (Last Value)

1374 CCT Help: Modules

Module Use in Applications (Last Value)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
Output Controller Last Value modules in this group using the names in the
following table.
Table 26-568: Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees (Part 1 of 4)
Module Instance Name
2 Pipe Cooling Control Status LV
2 Pipe Heating Control Status LV
2 Pipe Pump Command LV
Boiler X Enable LV (where X is 1-4)
Boiler X Interlock Cmd LV (Where X Is 1-4)
Boiler X LV (Where X Is 1-4)
Box Heating LV
Box Heating Max Cap Fract LV
Cascaded DA-T Setpoint LV
CD CS LV
CD Output LV
Chiller X Enable LV (Where X Is 1-8)
Chiller X Interlock Cmd LV (Where X Is 1-8)
Chiller X LV (Where X Is 1-8)
CHW Pump X Enable LV (Where X Is 1-8)
Compressor Max Cap Fract LV
Cooling X LV (Where X Is 1-8)
Cooling Control Status LV
Cooling Max Cap Fract LV
Cooling Percent Cmd LV
Cooling Pump Command LV
Cooling Required LV
CW Pump X Enable LV (Where X Is 1-8)
CW Pump X LV (Where X Is 1-8)
CW Sequencing LV
Output Controller
Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
Central Heating Applications
Central Heating Applications
Central Heating Applications
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Central Cooling Applications
Central Cooling Applications
Central Cooling Applications
Central Cooling Applications
Heat Pump Application
All Air Handling Unit Applications
All Air Handling Unit Applications
Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
All Air Handling Unit Applications
Fan Coil Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Fan Coil Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Central Cooling Applications
All Air Handling Unit Applications
Central Cooling Applications
Central Cooling Applications
Central Cooling Applications
1375
 Table 26-568: Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees (Part 2 of 4)
Module Instance Name
Damper Control Status LV
Damper Output LV
Exhaust Fan Command LV
Fan Cmd LV
Fan OnOff LV
HD CS LV
Heat Recovery Htg CS LV
Heating Control Status LV
Heating Cooling Required LV
Heating Max Cap Fract LV
Heating Percent Cmd LV
Heating Required LV
Heat Recovery Pump Command LV
Humidification Max Cap Fract LV
Humidification Pump Command LV
Humidity Control Status LV
Min Outdoor Air Fan Command LV
1376 CCT Help: Modules
Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Slave Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
VAV Single Duct Application
Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Fan Coil Application
Heat Pump Application
Unit Ventilator Application
Fan Coil Application
Unit Ventilator Application
VAV Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
All Air Handling Unit Applications
All Air Handling Unit Applications
All Air Handling Unit Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
 Table 26-568: Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees (Part 3 of 4)
Module Instance Name
Number of Devices Running LV
Number of SCHWP Running LV
Number of SHWP Running LV
Number of Towers Running LV
PID LV
Preheat X LV (Where X Is 1-8)
Preheat Control Status LV
Preheat Max Cap Fract LV
Preheat Percent Cmd LV
Preheat Pump Command LV
Primary CHW Pump X LV (Where X Is 1-8)
Primary HW Pump X LV (Where X Is 1-4)
Primary Pump X Enable LV (Where X Is 1-4)
Reheat X LV (Where X Is 1-8)
Reheat Control Status LV
Reheat Max Cap Fract LV
Reheat Percent Cmd LV
Reheat Pump Command LV
Relief Fan Command LV
Return Fan Command LV
SCHWP PID LV
Secondary CHW Pump X LV (Where X Is 1-8)
Output Controller
Applications
Central Cooling Applications
Central Heating Applications
Central Cooling Applications
Central Heating Applications
Central Cooling Applications
Central Cooling Applications
Central Heating Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Central Cooling Applications
Central Heating Applications
Central Heating Applications
All Air Handling Unit Applications
All Air Handling Unit Applications
All Air Handling Unit Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
All Air Handling Unit Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Central Cooling Applications
Central Cooling Applications
1377
 Table 26-568: Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) Uses in Application
System Selection Trees (Part 4 of 4)
Module Instance Name
Secondary HW Pump X LV (Where X Is 1-4)
Secondary Pump X Enable LV (Where X Is 1-4)
SHWP PID LV
Sideloop Max Cap Fract LV
Supp Heating Control Status LV
Supp Heating LV
Supply Fan OnOff LV
Supply Fan Percent Cmd LV
Tower Fan X Enable LV (Where X Is 1-4)
Tower Fan X LV (Where X Is 1-4)
Zone Cooling Control Status LV
Zone Heating Control Status LV
Zone X Max Cap Fract LV (Where X Is 1-8)
Applications
Central Heating Applications
Central Cooling Applications
Central Heating Applications
Central Heating Applications
Sideloop Applications
Heat Pump Application
VAV Single Duct Application
VAV Dual Duct Application
All Air Handling Unit Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
Central Cooling Applications
Central Cooling Applications
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU Rooftop Unit Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

1378 CCT Help: Modules

Attributes (Last Value)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Output Controller Last
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) modules:
Table 26-569: Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) Attributes
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Input Contains a Default Value of this Input that is False
passed to the Present Value on the first 1st Enum
execution after startup or enable. Otherwise, 0.0
the Current Value of the Input is passed to the
Present Value.
Present Value G, V Contains the output of this module

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Last Value)

(Output Controller Last Value)
The first execution, the Reliability of the Present Value will be Reliable.
Subsequent executions, the Reliability of the Present Value will reflect the
reliability of the Input.

Output Controller 1379

Totalization
Overview
This group provides runtime totalization for the preheat, reheat, and cooling staged
outputs.
The Totalization group contains the Totalization (Enum Runtime) modules.
Also, see Calculation in the Logic section for information on Totalization (Enum
Runtime).

Totalization (Enum Runtime)

Overview
The Totalization (Enum Runtime) modules compute the runtime for the staged
outputs in the AHU applications. These outputs can be preheat, reheat or cooling
outputs.
You cannot view or modify the modules in this group’s logic using CCT software.
For more information on this module, see the following sections:
• Module Use in Applications (Totalization)
• Attributes (Totalization)
• Reliability (Totalization)

1380 CCT Help: Modules

Module Use in Applications (Totalization)
The application System Selection trees in the CCT software use the individual
modules in this group using the name in the following table.
Table 26-570: Totalization in Application System Selection Trees
Module Instance Name Applications
Boiler X Totalization (Where X Is 1-4) Central Heating Applications
Chiller X Totalization (Where X Is 1-8) Central Cooling Applications
Cooling X Totalization (Where X Is 1-8) All Air Handling Unit Applications
CW Pump X Totalization (Where X Is 1-8) Central Cooling Applications
Preheat X Totalization (Where X Is 1-8) AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Primary CHW Pump X Totalization (Where X Is Central Cooling Applications
1-8)
Primary HW Pump X Totalization (Where X Is Central Heating Applications
1-4)
Reheat X Totalization (Where X Is 1-8) All Air Handling Unit Applications
Secondary CHW Pump X Totalization (Where Central Cooling Applications
X Is 1-8)
Secondary HW Pump X Totalization (Where X Central Heating Applications
Is 1-4)
Tower Fan X Totalization (Where X Is 1-8) Central Cooling Applications

To see a module’s connections and how modules interact with it:

• view the Connection tab in the Control View. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section and Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for details.
• use the Show Involvement option in the Control View while in the Simulation
or Commissioning mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the
Commissioning a System section for details.

Output Controller 1381

Attributes (Totalization)
The following table describes the attributes used by the Totalization modules.
Table 26-571: Totalization Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Accumulator V Accumulates the remainders in the
calculation of Present Value due to the
precision limit of a single floating-point
number. The sum of Present Value and
Accumulator gives effectively a double
floating-point expression of current totalized
value for the module.
Active Halts the update of Present Value when you True
transition this attribute from True to False.
Writing this attribute from False to True
resumes the Present Value update.
Error Since Last Reset V Set to True if, since last reset, the module
Reliability has ever been set to any value
other than Reliable. This output is False
when the Reset input changes from False to
True or an Reset command is issued.
Input Contains the value to be totalized. Off
Set Name: Off/On
Period C Specifies the execution period of this module 60 Seconds
when Setup is Analog Integration or Time in
State.
Reference State Specifies the value the input needs to stay On
for the module to update the Present Value Set Name: Off/On
periodically.
Reset Resets the Present Value, Accumulator, False
Rollover Count, and Rollover Amount to zero
when you transition this attribute from False
to True.
Rollover Amount V Increments by the current value of Present
Value when the Present Value rolls over.
Rollover Count V Increments by 1 at Present Value rollover.
Rollover Limit Specifies that if the Rollover Mode is 10,000
selected to be Rollover Limit, this property
allows you to set a value that would roll over
automatically the Present Value (that is, add
the Present Value to Rollover Amount, add 1
to Rollover Count, and set the Present Value
and Accumulator to 0) as the Present Value
exceeds the value.
Rollover Mode Allows the user to set a method to No Rollover
automatically rollover the Present Value (that Set Name: Totalization
is, add the Present Value to Rollover Rollover
Amount, add 1 to Rollover Count, and set the
Present Value and Accumulator to 0). The
rollover method can be based on value
(Rollover Limit) or the user can select not to
roll over. When Rollover Mode changes,
Rollover Count and Rollover Amount should
all be zeroed.
Scale Factor Used for unit conversion. 1

1382 CCT Help: Modules

 Table 26-571: Totalization Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type1 Description Default Value
Setup C Specifies the Setup of this module. Time in State
Set Name: Totalization
Setup
XX-RUNTIME (Present G, V Contains a single floating-point expression of
Value) current totalized value for the module. The
sum of Present Value and Accumulator gives
effectively a double floating-point expression
of current totalized value for the module.

1. C - Configuration Mode Only, G - Generated State (Default Element), SC - Simulation and Commissioning
Modes Only, V - Calculated Value (Outputs)

Reliability (Totalization)
The Totalization module reports the following reliability values:
• Overflow: Takes place when the Present Value, Accumulator, Rollover
Amount, or Rollover Count exceeds the maximum value that can be expressed
by single floating-point number. At Overflow, the Present Value keeps its
previous value and stops updating.
• Round Off Error: Because the Present Value is implemented as a single
floating-point number, it has 7 digits precision.
• Input Unreliable: If input is unreliable, the module stops Totalization.

Output Controller 1383

1384 CCT Help: Modules
Chapter 27: CCT Help: Modules
Network Outputs
The Network Outputs module category appears in the Control View of CCT and
lists the network outputs defined for the system. A Network Output allows an
output to be connected to over the network, acting as a network variable read from
a supervisory device. When a network output is not mapped to a supervisory
device, it can only be viewed from the Commissioning mode of CCT. Network
outputs connect from other modules or the State Table. The main difference
between these outputs is the data type.
Network Output modules fall into one of the following categories:
• Output Control Interface Modules
• Generic (Add New) Modules
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Output Control Interface Modules

The Output Control Interface Network Outputs are always paired with an Output
Control module. These outputs receive a state condition from their paired Output
Control module that is captured in the State Selection Table. For example, the
EFFZNDPR-MODE Network Output is integrated with the Zone Damper Mode
Pass Through Output Control module.
The following table describes the Output Control Interface Network Output
modules and lists the applications in which they are used.
Table 27-572: Output Control Interface Network Outputs Modules
Name Description Applications
EFFZNDPR-MODE Zone Damper Mode CSO - AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Receives input from the Zone
Damper Mode Pass Through
Output Control module.
EFFZNHTGVALVE- Zone Htg Valve Mode CSO - AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
MODE Receives input from the Zone
Damper Mode Pass Through
Output Control module.
EFFZNSTAGEDHTG- Zone Staged Htg Mode CSO - AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
MODE Receives input from the Zone
Damper Mode Pass Through
Output Control module.

Network Outputs 1385

Generic (Add New) Modules
For Custom Application creation, generic Network Outputs can be created using
the right-click > New process available on the Network Outputs header in the
Control View. You have the choice of creating a Boolean, Enum, or Float-based
Network Output that can be renamed and integrated into the custom logic. See
Adding a Network Output in the Configuring a System section.
The following table describes the generic Network Output modules and lists the
applications in which they are used.
Table 27-573: Generic Network Output Modules
Name Description Applications
OUTPUT-BOOLEAN CS Output (Boolean) Custom Applications
OUTPUT-ENUM CS Output (Enum) Custom Applications
OUTPUT-FLOAT CS Output (Float) Custom Applications

1386 CCT Help: Modules

Chapter 28: CCT Help: Modules
Outputs
The outputs module category appears in the Control View of CCT and lists the
outputs defined for the system. Outputs are the points that get connected to an
actual device, representing a physical hardware point in the system. Outputs can
also represent a point associated with an output. Outputs send data to hardware
output points of a device. Outputs may be connected to the Network Sensor, as
well as Analog Inputs, Analog Outputs, Binary Inputs, and Binary Outputs.
See the following sections for information:
• Setting and Using Preferences: The Preferences - Object Naming screen lists
the outputs available in the system.
• Applications: The application sections list the outputs used by a particular
application.
• Configuring a System: This section explains how to add an output, adjust an
output signal, change an output name, and so on.
• Commissioning a System: This section explains how to commission outputs.
• CCT Input and Output Object Overview: This section describes the objects
used in CCT.
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Outputs 1387
1388 CCT Help: Modules
Chapter 29: CCT Help: Objects
CCT Input and Output Object Overview
CCT Input and Output Objects
The input and output objects in this section appear in CCT on the Hardware View
tabs in the Details dialog box of inputs and outputs. To see the objects, right-click
an input, output, network input, or network output and select View Details. The
Object Type attribute indicates the object by which the input or output is
represented.
During Commissioning, the Present Value appears in the Inputs and Outputs
section of the Control View. Two values appear (for example 70, 70), where the
first value comes from the hardware, while the second value is the value being
used by the software.
The default values for the attributes vary depending on the configuration you are
using. Often, values are filled in automatically and you will not need to edit the
individual values.
An SAB device such as a network sensor (duct or zone) may be represented by an
Analog Input (zone temperature or zone relative humidity), Analog Value
(setpoint request or zone temperature display), Binary Value (occupancy request),
or Multistate Value (fan speed request, fan status display, or occupancy status
display) object.
Click the following section names to view the attribute and command details for
each object:
• Analog Input Object
• Analog Output Object
• Analog Value Object
• Binary Input Object
• Binary Output Object
• Binary Value Object
• Counter Input (Accumulator) Object
• Multistate Value Object
• Position Adjust Output Object
When viewing these objects through the UI of an NAE or ADS/ADX, you see
them as MS/TP Field Device object children.
For details, see Inputs, Outputs, Network Inputs, and Network Outputs. For details
about command priorities, see Command Priority Levels. For details about object
attributes, see Object Attributes.

CCT Input and Output Object Overview 1389

Command Priority Levels
Many objects have BACnet commands (for example, Metasys system object)
associated with them. The commands in CCT have different priority levels. Use
Table 29-574 as a reference to understand these command priority levels. The
priority level command conventions appear from highest priority to lowest
priority. The default priority level is 16.
Table 29-574: Priority Levels
Priority Level Description
1 Manual life safety - high priority
2 Automatic life safety - high priority
3 Priority 3 - user defined. High priority
4 Priority 4 - user defined. High priority
5 Critical equipment control - high priority
6 Minimum on/off
7 Heavy equipment delay
8 Operator override (manual operator)
9 Priority 9 - user defined
10 Priority 10 - user defined
11 Priority 11 - user defined
12 Priority 12 - user defined
13 Priority 13 - user defined
14 Priority 14 - user defined
15 Scheduling
16 Default
0 No priority

To use a different priority level, you need to perform an operator override

command on the NAE. For more information on how to perform an operation
override command, see the NAE documentation.

1390 CCT Help: Objects

Object Attributes
The columns in the object attribute tables provide the following information:
• Name: Indicates the name of the attribute/parameter.
• Type: Indicates the attribute/parameter type. Options include:
- All Types: Indicates if the attribute/parameter appears in all types: Input,
Output, Network Input, and Network Output.
- Input: Indicates if the attribute/parameter appears for an Input module.
- Network Input: Indicates if the attribute/parameter appears for a Network
Input module.
- Network Output: Indicates if the attribute/parameter appears for a
Network Output module.
- Output: Indicates if the attribute/parameter appears for an Output module.
• Mode: Indicates the view mode of the attribute/parameter. Options include:
- All Modes: Indicates if the attribute/parameter appears in all modes:
Configuration, Simulation, and Commissioning mode.
- Simulation: Indicates if the attribute/parameter appears in the Simulation
mode.
- Commissioning: Indicates if the attribute/parameter appears in the
Commissioning mode.
- Network Input and Network Output Configuration Mode Only:
Indicates if the attribute/parameter is for Configuration mode only (for
Network Input and Network Output modules).
• Description: Describes the function of the attribute/parameter. Along with the
descriptions, the
attributes/parameters can be defined as:
- Generated State (Default Element): Indicates if the attribute/parameter is
a state generated by the object’s logic. This attribute/parameter is the
logic’s Default Element and appears in the Control View columns below
the module name.
- Visible in an AI SAB Device: Indicates if the attribute/parameter appears
for an Analog Input device on the SA Bus.
- Calculated Value (Outputs): Indicates if the attribute/parameter is a value
calculated by object’s logic and configuration in the State Tables. This
attribute/parameter appears in the Parameters table in the Control View
and/or in the Details dialog box.

CCT Input and Output Object Overview 1391

1392 CCT Help: Objects
Chapter 30: CCT Help: Objects
Analog Input Object
Introduction
The CCT Analog Input (AI) object smooths and filters analog data from hardware
devices. You can use the value of this object in logic and to monitor the status of
hardware.
SAB Device Analog Input objects (for example, network duct or zone sensor AI
objects) contain only a subset of the attributes available in Analog Input objects
that monitor the hardware inputs of a controller or IOM. See the Type column in
Table 30-575 for whether the attribute is present in an SAB Device Analog Input
object.

Analog Input Attributes

Table 30-575 describes the Analog Input object attributes. These attributes are
displayed in alphabetical order. See Object Attributes in the CCT Input and Output
Object Overview section for descriptions of the data provided in this table. Unless
otherwise stated, the attributes listed in this table appear in the Details dialog box
(for example, the Present Value appears in the Control View below the module
name in Simulation and Commissioning modes).
Table 30-575: Analog Input Attributes (Part 1 of 6)
Name Type Mode Description
Anti Spike Input Configuration Enables (True) or disables (False) the anti-spike filter. When this
attribute is False, the sub-filter input passes directly to the sub-filter
output.
For details on this attribute, see Table 30-576.
COV Input Configuration Indicates the minimum change in Present Value that triggers a new
Increment Commissioning Change of Value (COV) message. On the expiration of the Update
Interval, the object compares the current Present Value with that of
Present Value the last time a COV was sent.
Units: See Units.
This attribute is visible in an SAB device.
Description Input All Modes Indicates the description provided for the object.
Device Type Input Configuration Describes the physical network device to which the object is
connected.
This attribute is visible in an SAB device.
Display Input Configuration Indicates the point at which value attributes are rounded for display
Precision (how many numbers following the decimal point appear).
Set Name: Display Precision
This attribute is visible in an SAB device.
Endpoint Input Configuration Defines a band outside the endpoints of the input signal for which the
Tolerance input is considered to equal the endpoint value.
For example, with a resistive setpoint adjustment, use this attribute to
achieve the full range but to prevent the input from going unreliable
unless the input truly fails (due to a wire break, for example).
Range: 0 - 100
Units: %

Analog Input Object 1393

 Table 30-575: Analog Input Attributes (Part 2 of 6)
Name Type Mode Description
Field Offset Input Configuration Specifies an offset applied to the hardware value to compensate for
certain aspects of the system. This value is added to the hardware
value before the object smooths out the data.
For example, you can enter a value for this attribute to compensate
for wiring resistance in a temperature sensing application.
Field Units Input Configuration Indicates the units for Field Offset, Input Range Low, Input Range
High, Output Range Low, and Output Range High.
Set Name: Unit
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Filter Setup Input Configuration Allows you to specify the mechanism that configures the AI filter
parameters for your specific application. This attribute affects these
attributes:
• Time Constant
• Anti Spike
• Spike Fraction
• Lowpass Filter Enable
• Minus 20 dB Frequency
• Update Interval
CCT does not enforce restrictions on these attributes. You are not
prevented from editing these attributes, even though the Analog Input
in the controller may ignore the value you enter.
The AI Filter Setup includes the following:
• Process ID: Derives the Time Constant from an internal
standards table. You cannot change any filter setup inputs.
• Process Data: Ignores Process ID and allows you to configure
Time Constant directly.
• Monitor Only: Sets Time Constant to 900 seconds. You can
modify Time Constant but no other filter setup inputs.
• VAV Flow Control: Includes built-in handling of signal noise. The
object disables Lowpass Filter Enable and ignores Process ID
and Time Constant. You cannot change any filter setup inputs
except Update Interval.
• Custom: Allows you to configure all the filter setup points directly.
The object ignores Process ID and Time Constant.
For details on this attribute, see Table 30-576.
Set Name: AI Filter Setup
Input Range Input Configuration Allows you to create a custom line of the input signal, along with Input
High Range Low, Output Range Low, and Output Range High. The Input
Range Low and Input Range High default to the ends of the typical
input range (0-10 Volts, 0-2000 ohms, or 4=20 mA). Input Range Low
must be less than Input Range High.
To define a line with a negative slope, set Output Range High to a
value less than Output Range Low. The range of reliable values is
based on the Min Value and Max Value. The Input Range Low, Input
Range High, Output Range Low, and Output Range High attributes
are used only to define the linear model.
If you choose a specific type of sensor, the input range high is
defined already. In this case, the Input Range High attribute is not
used, even though it does not appear dimmed.
Units: See Field Units.

1394 CCT Help: Objects

 Table 30-575: Analog Input Attributes (Part 3 of 6)
Name Type Mode Description
Input Range Input Configuration Allows you to create a custom line of the input signal, along with Input
Low Range Low, Output Range Low, and Output Range High. The Input
Range Low and Input Range High default to the ends of the typical
input range (0-10 Volts, 0-2000 ohms, or 4=20 mA). Input Range Low
must be less than Input Range High.
To define a line with a negative slope, set Output Range High to a
value less than Output Range Low. The range of reliable values is
based on the Min Value and Max Value. The Input Range Low, Input
Range High, Output Range Low, and Output Range High attributes
are used only to define the linear model.
If you choose a specific type of sensor, the input range high is
defined already. In this case, the Input Range High attribute is not
used, even though it does not appear dimmed.
Units: See Field Units.
Lowpass Input Configuration Enables (True) or disables (False) the low pass sub-filter. When this
Filter Enable attribute is False, the sub-filter input passes directly to the sub-filter
output.
For details on this attribute, see Table 30-576.
Max Value Input Configuration Specifies the maximum value at which Present Value can still be
considered reliable. If the Present Value is higher than this value, the
Reliability attribute goes to Unreliable High. Max Value must be more
than Min Value.
This attribute resets to the default value if you edit the Setup or Units
attributes.
Units: See Units.
This attribute is visible in an SAB device.
Min Value Input Configuration Specifies the minimum value at which Present Value can still be
considered reliable. If the Present Value is lower than this value, the
Reliability attribute goes to Unreliable Low. Min Value must be less
than Max Value.
This attribute resets to the default value if you edit the Setup or Units
attributes.
Units: See Units.
This attribute is visible in an SAB device.
Minus 20 dB Input Configuration Indicates the rejection frequency of the Bessel filter. A sinusoid signal
Frequency at this frequency that passes through this filter is reduced ten times.
An incorrect setting for this attribute can lead to instability of the
Bessel filter.
The minimum value of this attribute is 0.01 and the maximum value is
3 (10* Hardware Period in seconds).
For details on this attribute, see Table 30-576.
Name Input All Modes Indicates the name of the object.
Object Input All Modes Indicates the instance number of the Object Type as exposed to the
Identifier network. The Object Identifier must be unique within the host device.
The Object Identifier is created after defining hardware in the
Hardware Definition Wizard accessible from the Define Hardware
button or Operations menu option.
The Object Identifier consists of the BACnet Class ID and the object’s
Instance Number separated by a colon. For example, an Object
Identifier of AV.10026 has a BACnet Class ID of AV and an Instance
Number of 10026.
This attribute is visible in an SAB device.
Offline Input Commissioning Indicates if the object is currently communicating with the network
device.
This attribute is visible in an SAB device.

Analog Input Object 1395

 Table 30-575: Analog Input Attributes (Part 4 of 6)
Name Type Mode Description
Offset Input Configuration Specifies an offset applied to the hardware value to compensate for
certain aspects of the system. This value is added to the input after
the object smooths out the data.
Units: See Units.
This attribute is visible in an SAB device.
Out of Input Commissioning Indicates whether the object is currently connected to the hardware
Service or offline (out of service).
This attribute is visible in an SAB device.
Output Input Configuration Allows you to create a custom line of the input signal, along with Input
Range High Range Low, Input Range High, and Output Range Low. The Input
Range Low and Input Range High default to the ends of the typical
input range (0-10 Volts, 0-2000 ohms, or 4=20 mA). Input Range Low
must be less than Input Range High.
To define a line with a negative slope, set Output Range High to a
value less than Output Range Low. The range of reliable values is
based on the Min Value and Max Value. The Input Range Low, Input
Range High, Output Range Low, and Output Range High attributes
are used only to define the linear model.
If you choose a specific type of sensor, the Output Range High is
defined already. In this case, the Output Range High attribute is not
used, even though it does not appear dimmed.
Units: See Units.
Output Input Configuration Allows you to create a custom line of the input signal, along with Input
Range Low Range Low, Input Range High, and Output Range Low. The Input
Range Low and Input Range High default to the ends of the typical
input range (0-10 Volts, 0-2000 ohms, or 4=20 mA). Input Range Low
must be less than Input Range High.
To define a line with a negative slope, set Output Range High to a
value less than Output Range Low. The range of reliable values is
based on the Min Value and Max Value. The Input Range Low, Input
Range High, Output Range Low, and Output Range High attributes
are used only to define the linear model.
If you choose a specific type of sensor, the Output Range Low is
defined already. In this case, the Output Range Low attribute is not
used, even though it does not appear dimmed.
Units: See Units.
Present Input Simulation Indicates the current value of the input.
Value Commissioning This attribute changes when the following occurs:
• if the Present Value attribute is changed by a user editing the
attribute. This can be done only when Out of Service is False.
• if changes occur in the hardware input (when the object has a live
connection to the hardware)
• if, on a transition from offline to a live connection to the hardware,
the Present Value uses the last value reported from the
hardware. If a value was never recorded before going offline, the
value is not updated and Reliability goes to Connection Fail.
The Present Value appears in the Control View below the module
name in Simulation and Commissioning modes.
While in CCT Commissioning mode, the user interface displays two
values (does not apply to network inputs or network outputs):
• The first value comes from the Present Value of the Binary
Output object.
• The second value is the value calculated by the control logic.
These two values may be different if the Binary Output is
commanded at a priority higher than that of the control logic or if
the device is offline (for example, an IOM that is offline).
Set Name: States Text
This attribute is a generated value (Default Element), a calculated
value (Output), and is visible in an SAB device.

1396 CCT Help: Objects

 Table 30-575: Analog Input Attributes (Part 5 of 6)
Name Type Mode Description
Process ID Input Configuration Specifies the process that the Analog Input object measures. If the
Filter Setup is Process ID, the Process Identifier determines the filter
setup. Otherwise, this attribute is ignored.
Set Name: Process ID
Reliability Input Simulation Provides the following values to indicate whether or not the Present
Commissioning Value is reliable:
• Open Circuit: The hardware input is infinite for resistive
measurements.
• Short Circuit: The input is 0 for resistive measurements.
• Unreliable Low: The Present Value is less than the Min Value.
• Unreliable High: The Present Value is more than Max Value.
• Connection Fail: The object fails to connect to the hardware.
• Reliable: The object is none of the above.
If an Out of Service command is received, this attribute is Reliable.
Only when the object is out of service can you write values to this
attribute.
Set Name: Reliability
This attribute is a calculated value (Output) and is visible in an SAB
device.
Source Input Simulation Indicates the array of attribute references for the sources. All
References Commissioning references must be from a single object.
Spike Input Configuration Defines the initial and minimum width of the anti-spike filter window in
Fraction terms of AI range. The value should be less than 1.
For details on this attribute, see Table 30-576.
Status Input Simulation Reflects the status of the object based on the Reliability attribute and
Commissioning the status of any commands.
Possible values for Analog Input objects are:
• Out of Service: Out of Service is True.
• Unreliable: Reliability is not reliable.
• Normal: Neither of the above is correct.
Set Name: Status
This attribute is a calculated value (Output) and is visible in an SAB
device.
Time Input Configuration Specifies the time it takes a first-order system to reach 63% of its
Constant final magnitude given a 100% step change. This setting affects the -
20dB frequency of the Bessel filter. Small values can result in Bessel
filter instability.
The minimum value of this attribute should be 10* Hardware Period
in seconds. If Time Constant is less than the minimum value, set
Lowpass Filter Enable to False.
For details on this attribute, see Table 30-576.
Units: Seconds
Units Input Configuration Indicates the units of measurement for Present Value, Min Value,
Max Value, and Offset.
Set Name: Unit
This attribute is visible in an SAB device.
Update Input Configuration Specifies the amount of time between evaluation of updates to
Interval Present Value, Reliability, and Status.
For details on this attribute, see Table 30-576.
Range: 0 - 4,294,967,295
Units = 100ths of seconds

Analog Input Object 1397

 Table 30-575: Analog Input Attributes (Part 6 of 6)
Name Type Mode Description
Use COV Min Input Configuration Configures the object to send COV messages on a periodic basis
Send Time instead of on every change of value that exceeds the COV
Increment. This attribute is typically set to True for objects with
values that fluctuate greatly, such as air pressure, to decrease the
number of COV messages. The change of value still must exceed the
COV Increment to be reported.
The Min Send Time value is set at the supervisory controller on the
Device object, and has a default of 15 seconds.
This attribute is visible in an SAB device.
Use Default if Input All Modes Specifies the behavior when the Source is not reliable. If True, the
Not Reliable Output is set to its Default Value whenever its Source is not reliable
and its Reliability is marked as Reliable. If False, the Output
maintains its last reliable value and its Reliability reflects the reason
that the source is not reliable.

Table 30-576: Filter Setup Impact on Other Attributes

Filter Setup Input Process ID Process Data Monitor Only VAV Flow Custom
Control
Update Interval Time Constant / 30 1 second1 Defined by the
user.1
Anti Spike True
Spike Fraction 0.02
Lowpass Filter True False
Enable
Minus 20 dB 3.0 / Time Constant N/A
Frequency
Time Constant Based on the Defined by the 900 seconds1 N/A
Process ID. user.1

1. Attributes in this table are updated by the controller to the specified values (online); however, you can modify them
if desired.

Analog Input Commands

Table 30-577 describes the Analog Input object commands.
Table 30-577: Analog Input Commands
Name Description
In Service Cancels the effects of an Out of Service command. This command changes Out of
Service to False and reconnects the input to the hardware. Present Value, Reliability, and
Status values update at time specified in Update Interval.
Out of Service Overrides Present Value for simulation or other purposes. This command changes Out of
Service to True, Present Value to the value you specify, Status to Out of Service, and
Reliability to Reliable. Present Value and Reliability are not connected to the hardware
when the input is out of service, so this is the only time they are writable.

1398 CCT Help: Objects

Chapter 31: CCT Help: Objects
Analog Output Object
Introduction
The CCT Analog Output (AO) object provides an output between Min Out Value
and Max Out Value when the Present Value is between the Min Value and Max
Value. The output is spanned between the Min Out Value and Max Out Value as
the Present Value changes from the Min Value to Max Value. You can use the
value of this object in logic and to monitor the status of hardware.
The Present Value is almost always between the range of 0-100%, so the Min Out
Value corresponds to the Output with an input signal of 0% and the Max Out
Value corresponds to the Output with an input signal of 100%.
For example, for an EP-8000-2 at factory calibration, if you want 10 psi for the full
closed position and 3 psi for the full open position:
• Min Out Value = 50% (5 VDC)
• Max Out Value = 15% (1.5 VDC)
As the present value increases from 0-100%, the Output moves from the Min Out
value to the Max Out value.

Analog Output Object 1399

Analog Output Attributes
Table 31-578 describes the Analog Output object attributes. These attributes are
displayed in alphabetical order. See Object Attributes in the CCT Input and Output
Object Overview section for descriptions of the data provided in this table. Unless
otherwise stated, the attributes listed in this table appear in the Details dialog box
(for example, the Present Value appears in the Control View below the module
name in Simulation and Commissioning modes).
Table 31-578: Analog Output Attributes (Part 1 of 3)
Name Type Mode Description
COV Increment Output Configuration Indicates the minimum change in Present Value that triggers a
Commissioning new Change of Value (COV) message.
Range: 0 -100
Deadband Output Configuration Specifies the range around the current output outside which the
Commissioning calculation of a new Output must fall before the Output attribute is
updated. A deadband of 0 allows the Output to reflect all changes
to Present Value.
The low and high values for the Deadband range are calculated
this way:
Low value: Output - (1/2 * Deadband attribute)
High value: Output + (1/2 * Deadband attribute)
Note: If Present Value equals or is outside Min Value or Max
Value, Deadband is ignored. Deadband is enabled again
after Output changes from Min Out Value or Max Out
Value. This allows Output to be set to either Min Out Value
or Max Out Value.
Range: 0 -100
Description Output All Modes Indicates the description provided for the object.
Destination Output Simulation Indicates the array of attribute references for the destinations. All
References Commissioning references must be from a single object.
Device Type Output Configuration Describes the physical network device to which the object is
Commissioning connected.
Display Output Configuration Indicates the point at which value attributes are rounded for
Precision Commissioning display (and how many numbers following the decimal point
appear).
Set Name: Display Precision
Max Out Value Output Configuration Specifies the value for the output when Present Value is greater
Commissioning than or equal to Max Value.
Range: 0 -100
Max Value Output Configuration Represents the upper limit for Present Value when it is used to
Commissioning calculate output. If Present Value is higher than the value
specified in this attribute, Present Value assumes the value of Max
Value.
Note: This attribute does not affect the value of the Present
Value attribute, only the impact Present Value has on
Output calculation.
If the Present Value amount used in the Output calculation equals
Max Value, Output equals the Max Out Value.
Max Value must be greater than Min Value.
Units: See Units.
Min Change to Output All Modes Indicates the array of floating values (each value corresponding to
Send a single Input) to specify the minimum change in the Input that is
sent to the destination. This attribute is only applicable when the
Input is of floating-point data type. The change is evaluated by
comparing the current value of the Input to the value the last time
a message was sent to the destination.

1400 CCT Help: Objects

 Table 31-578: Analog Output Attributes (Part 2 of 3)
Name Type Mode Description
Min Out Value Output Configuration Specifies the value for the output when Present Value is less than
Commissioning or equal to Min Value.
Range: 0 -100
Min Value Output Configuration Represents the lower limit for Present Value when it is used to
Commissioning calculate output. If Present Value is lower than the value specified
in this attribute, Present Value assumes the value of Min Value.
Note: This attribute does not affect the value of the Present
Value attribute, only the impact Present Value has on
Output calculation.
If the Present Value amount used in the Output calculation equals
Min Value, Output equals the Min Out Value.
Min Value must be less than the Max Value.
This attribute resets to the default value if you edit the Units
attribute.
Units: See Units.
Name Output All Modes Indicates the name of the object.
Object Identifier Output All Modes Indicates the instance number of the Object Type as exposed to
the network. The Object Identifier must be unique within the host
device. The Object Identifier is created after defining hardware in
the Hardware Definition Wizard accessible from the Define
Hardware button or Operations menu option.
The Object Identifier consists of the BACnet Class ID and the
object’s Instance Number separated by a colon. For example, an
Object Identifier of AV.10026 has a BACnet Class ID of AV and an
Instance Number of 10026.
Offline Output Commissioning Indicates if the object is currently communicating with the network
device.
Out of Service Output Commissioning Indicates whether the object is currently connected to the
hardware or offline (out of service).
Present Value Output Simulation Indicates the current value (with the highest priority) being sent to
Commissioning this object. Present Value is used to calculate the output.
Note: During this calculation, Present Value is restricted between
Min Value and Max Value; however, the value represented
in the Present Value attribute is not restricted.
The Present Value appears in the Control View below the module
name in Simulation and Commissioning modes.
While in CCT Commissioning mode, the user interface displays
two values (does not apply to network inputs or network outputs):
• The first value comes from the Present Value of the Binary
Output object.
• The second value is the value calculated by the control logic.
These two values may be different if the Binary Output is
commanded at a priority higher than that of the control logic or
if the device is offline (for example, an IOM that is offline).
Default Value: See Relinquish Default.
Units: See Units.
This attribute is a generated state (Default Element).
Reliability Output Simulation Provides the following values to indicate whether or not the
Commissioning Present Value is reliable:
• Connection Fail: The object fails to connect to the hardware.
• Math Error: An error occurred in the calculation of the output.
• Reliable: The object is none of the above.
If an Out of Service command is received, this attribute is Reliable.
Only when the object is out of service can you write values to this
attribute.
Set Name: Reliability
This attributed is a calculated value (Output).

Analog Output Object 1401

 Table 31-578: Analog Output Attributes (Part 3 of 3)
Name Type Mode Description
Relinquish Output Configuration Contains the default value for Present Value when all priorities are
Default Commissioning released.
The Present Value is sent to the value in Relinquish Default only
at startup or when the last priority value is released. Present Value
does not update if you change Relinquish Default.
Units: See Units.
Restore Output Configuration Restores the commands you select in the case of a power failure.
Command Commissioning For more information about command priorities, see Command
Priority Priority Levels. The following list displays the command priorities
you can select.
• Operator Override
• Default
Status Output Simulation Reflects the status of the object based on the Reliability attribute
Commissioning and the status of any commands.
Possible values for Analog Output objects are:
• Out of Service: Out of Service is True.
• High Priority: Present Value is currently controlled at Priorities
1 - 5.
• Operator Override: Present Value is currently controlled at
Priority 8.
• Unreliable: Reliability is not reliable.
• Output Clipped: Present Value is outside the limits of Min
Value and Max Value. Status remains Output Clipped until the
output changes (that is, it exceeds Deadband).
• Normal: None of the above is correct.
Set Name: Status
This attributed is a calculated value (Output).
Units Output Configuration Indicates the units of measurement for Present Value, Min Value,
Commissioning and Max Value. This attribute resets to the default value if you edit
the Setup attribute.
Set Name: Unit
Use COV Min Output Configuration Configures the object to send COV messages on a periodic basis
Send Time Commissioning instead of on every change of value that exceeds the COV
Increment. This attribute is typically set to True for objects with
values that fluctuate greatly, such as air pressure, to decrease the
number of COV messages. The change of value still must exceed
the COV Increment to be reported.
The Min Send Time value is set at the supervisory controller on
the Device object, and has a default of 15 seconds.
Use Default if Output All Modes Specifies the behavior when the Input is not reliable. If True, the
Not Reliable destination is sent the Input’s Default Value whenever the Input is
not reliable and its Reliability is marked as Reliable. If False, the
destination is not updated and keeps its last reliable value.

1402 CCT Help: Objects

Analog Output Commands
Table 31-578 describes the Analog Output object commands. For information
about command priorities, see Command Priority Levels.
Table 31-579: Analog Output Commands
Name Description
Adjust Releases Priorities 9 - 15 and sets Priority 16 to the value you enter in the command.
Present Value changes to the highest value in the priority table.
In Service Cancels the effects of an Out of Service command. This command changes Out of
Service to False and reconnects the input to the hardware. If you make changes to
Present Value when Out of Service is True, the hardware is commanded when you issue
the In Service command.
Operator Override Replaces Present Value at the Operator Override priority with the value you enter in the
command. The override has no effect if a higher priority value is in the Present Value
attribute.
Operator Override Releases an Operator Override command.
Release
Out of Service Changes Out of Service to True, Present Value to the value you specify, Status to Out of
Service, and Reliability to Reliable. Present Value and Reliability are not connected to the
hardware when the input is out of service, so this is the only time they are writable.
Commands cannot be sent to the hardware output when Out of Service is True.
Release Releases a specific priority of Present Value.
Release All Releases Priorities 3 - 15.

Analog Output Object 1403

1404 CCT Help: Objects
Chapter 32: CCT Help: Objects
Analog Value Object
Introduction
This object allows you to hold an analog value for other objects to reference. In
CCT, an Analog Value (AV) may be created as part of an SAB device to provide
analog data points from that device (for example, Zone Setpoint of the Network
Zone Sensor). Alternately, an Analog Value may be created as a reference point
for a wireless sensor to write its value (typically to the mapped AV in the
supervisory device).

Analog Value Attributes

Table 32-580 describes the Analog Value object attributes. These attributes are
displayed in alphabetical order. See Object Attributes in the CCT Input and Output
Object Overview section for desciptions of the data provided in this table.
Table 32-580: Analog Value Attributes (Part 1 of 5)
Name Type Mode Description
BACnet Exposed Network Input All Modes Allows you to expose the object to BACnet systems. The
Network Output BACnet exposed object is a viewable object through the
NAE.
COV Increment Input Configuration Indicates the minimum change in Present Value that triggers
Output Commissioning a new Change of Value (COV) message.
Network Output Range: 0 -100
Default Value Network Input All Modes Allows you to specify the Present Value if no source is
Network Output connected or if the connected source is never reliable.
Description Input All Modes Indicates the description provided for the object.
Output
Destination Output Simulation Indicates the array of attribute references for the
References Commissioning destinations. All references must be from a single object.
Display Precision All Types Configuration Indicates the point at which value attributes are rounded for
Commissioning display (and how many numbers following the decimal point
appear).
Set Name: Display Precision

Analog Value Object 1405

 Table 32-580: Analog Value Attributes (Part 2 of 5)
Name Type Mode Description
Error Status Network Input Configuration Displays the status of the last communication that occurred
Network Output Commissioning with an input or output reference. Common errors include:
• Surrogate Object is Not Bound: The referenced device
(Device ID) has never responded because a device with
the entered Device ID either does not exist or is offline.
• Remote Device is Offline: The referenced device did
respond at one time but is no longer responding.
• Unknown Object: The referenced device exists and is
online, but the Object ID entered does not exist on that
device.
• Type Mismatch: The referenced object exists but the
data type of the referenced attribute/property is invalid.
This error generally does not appear for inputs on
Johnson Controls or third-party devices. For outputs on
third-party devices, the Object Type of the output needs
to match the type of output object making the peer
reference.
• Unknown Property: This error generally does not
appear if you leave the Peer Reference Attribute field as
Present Value. If you change this setting, the Unknown
Property error means the referenced object exists but the
referenced attribute does not exist.
Failsoft Network Input All Modes Indicates how the Network Input or Network Output behaves
Network Output when the connected source is not Reliable. If the source is
not Reliable, the element uses the default value for the
current value (if Failsoft is true and the Last Reliable Value of
Failsoft is false). For a Network Input, the source is
considered unreliable whenever the priority array of the
Present Value is empty.
In Test Network Input Simulation Displays a Boolean value that is True if you manually set the
Network Output Commissioning Current Value for test purposes.
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Max Value Input Configuration Represents the upper limit for Present Value when it is used
Output Commissioning to calculate output. If Present Value is higher than the value
specified in this attribute, Present Value assumes the value
of Max Value.
Note: This attribute does not affect the value of the Present
Value attribute, only the impact Present Value has on
Output calculation.
Max Value must be greater than Min Value.
This attribute resets to the default value if you edit the Units
attribute.
Units: See Units.
Min Change to Output All Modes Indicates the array of floating values (each value
Send corresponding to a single Input) to specify the minimum
change in the Input that is sent to the destination. This
attribute is only applicable when the Input is of floating-point
data type. The change is evaluated by comparing the current
value of the Input to the value the last time a message was
sent to the destination.

1406 CCT Help: Objects

 Table 32-580: Analog Value Attributes (Part 3 of 5)
Name Type Mode Description
Min Value Input Configuration Represents the lower limit for Present Value when it is used
Output Commissioning to calculate output. If Present Value is lower than the value
specified in this attribute, Present Value assumes the value
of Min Value.
Note: This attribute does not affect the value of the Present
Value attribute, only the impact Present Value has on
Output calculation.
Min Value must be less than the Max Value.
This attribute resets to the default value if you edit the Units
attribute.
Units: See Units.
Name All Types All Modes Displays the object name.
Object Identifier All Types All Modes Indicates the instance number of the Object Type as exposed
to the network. The Object Identifier must be unique within
the host device. The Object Identifier is created after defining
hardware in the Hardware Definition Wizard accessible from
the Define Hardware button or Operations menu option.
The Object Identifier consists of the BACnet Class ID and the
object’s Instance Number separated by a colon. For
example, an Object Identifier of AV.10026 has a BACnet
Class ID of AV and an Instance Number of 10026.
Out of Service Input Commissioning Indicates whether the object is currently connected to the
Output hardware or offline (out of service).
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Peer Reference Network Input Configuration Contains the elements needed to use peer-to-peer
Network Output Commissioning communication. These elements are:
• Instance Number (BACnet ID): Displays the device’s
Instance Number. Make sure you verify the device's
instance number before setting this value. You can
access the device instance number on the Network
Settings screen of the Hardware Definition Wizard. You
also can locate the instance number of devices using the
Metasys system UI. If the Johnson Controls Point
Schedule was used to download the controllers, check
the instance number on the MSTP Field Device tab of the
project's Point Schedule.
• Object Identifier: Displays the BACnet Class ID and the
object’s Instance Number.
The BACnet Class ID should typically have the same
Data Type as the object for which the peer-to-peer
attribute is being configured. For example, an AV
Network Input should reference another AV, an AI, or an
AO object. If multistate values are used in peer-to-peer
references, the Enumeration sets should match. If the
sets do not match, you must determine whether the
values in the sets are compatible.
You can locate the Object Identifier in the Advanced view
of the Details dialog box. The Peer to Peer Disabled
option allows you to disable peer-to-peer communication.

Analog Value Object 1407

 Table 32-580: Analog Value Attributes (Part 4 of 5)
Name Type Mode Description
Present Value All Types Simulation Indicates the current value (with the highest priority) being
Commissioning sent to this object.
Present Value is used to calculate the output.
Note: During this calculation, Present Value is restricted
between Min Value and Max Value; however, the
value represented in the Present Value attribute is not
restricted.
The Present Value appears in the Control View below the
module name in Simulation and Commissioning modes.
While in CCT Commissioning mode, the user interface
displays two values (does not apply to network inputs or
network outputs):
• The first value comes from the Present Value of the
Binary Output object.
• The second value is the value calculated by the control
logic. These two values may be different if the Binary
Output is commanded at a priority higher than that of the
control logic or if the device is offline (for example, an
IOM that is offline).
Units: See Units.
This attribute is a generated state (Default Element) and is a
calculated value (Output).
Reliability All Types Simulation Provides the following values to indicate whether or not the
Commissioning Present Value is reliable:
• Unreliable Low: Present Value is below Min Value.
• Unreliable High: Present Value is above Max Value.
• Reliable: Preset Value is between the Min Value and Max
Value.
Set Name: Reliability
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Relinquish Input Configuration Contains the default value for Present Value when all
Default Output Commissioning priorities are released.
The Present Value is sent to the value in Relinquish Default
only at startup or when the last priority value is released.
Present Value does not update if you change Relinquish
Default.
Units: See Units.
Restore All Types All Modes Restores the commands you select in the case of a power
Command failure. For more information about command priorities, see
Priority Command Priority Levels. The following list displays the
command priorities you can select.
• Operator Override
• Default
Source Input Simulation Indicates the array of attribute references for the sources. All
References Commissioning references must be from a single object.
Status All Types Simulation Reflects the status of the object based on the Reliability
Commissioning attribute and the status of any commands.
Possible values for Analog Value objects are:
• Offline
• Out of Service: Out of Service is True.
• High Priority: Present Value is currently controlled at
Priorities 1 - 5.
• Operator Override: Present Value is currently controlled
at Priority 8.
• Unreliable: Reliability is not reliable.
• Normal: None of the above is correct.
Set Name: Status
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).

1408 CCT Help: Objects

 Table 32-580: Analog Value Attributes (Part 5 of 5)
Name Type Mode Description
Units All Types Configuration Indicates the units of measurement for Present Value, Min
Mode for All Value, and Max Value.
Types This attribute resets to the default value if you edit the Setup
Commissioning attribute.
Mode for Input Set Name: Unit
and Output
Types
Use COV Min Input Configuration Configures the object to send COV messages on a periodic
Send Time Output Commissioning basis instead of on every change of value that exceeds the
COV Increment. This attribute is typically set to True for
objects with values that fluctuate greatly, such as air
pressure, to decrease the number of COV messages. The
change of value still must exceed the COV Increment to be
reported.
The Min Send Time value is set at the supervisory controller
on the Device object, and has a default of 15 seconds.
Use Default if Not Input All Modes For Inputs: Specifies the behavior when the Source is not
Reliable Output reliable. If True, the Output is set to its Default Value
whenever its Source is not reliable and its Reliability is
marked as Reliable. If False, the Output maintains its last
reliable value and its Reliability reflects the reason that the
source is not reliable.
For Outputs: Specifies the behavior when the Input is not
reliable. If True, the destination is sent the Input’s Default
Value whenever the Input is not reliable and its Reliability is
marked as Reliable. If False, the destination is not updated
and keeps its last reliable value.

Analog Value Commands

Table 32-580 describes the Analog Value object commands. For information about
command priorities, see Command Priority Levels.
Table 32-581: Analog Value Commands
Name Description
Adjust Releases priorities 9 - 15 and sets Priority 16 to the value you enter in the command.
Present Value changes to the highest value in the priority table.
Note: This command is available only if the Analog Value is prioritized.
Operator Override Replaces Present Value at the Operator Override priority with the value you enter in the
command. The override has no effect if a higher priority value is in the Present Value
attribute.
Note: This command is available only if the Analog Value is prioritized.
Operator Override Releases an Operator Override command.
Release Note: This command is available only if the Analog Value is prioritized.
Release Releases a specific priority of Present Value.
Note: This command is available only if the Analog Value is prioritized.
Release All Releases Priorities 3 - 15.
Note: This command is available only if the Analog Value is prioritized.

Analog Value Object 1409

1410 CCT Help: Objects
Chapter 33: CCT Help: Objects
Binary Input Object
Introduction
The CCT Binary Input (BI) object interprets binary signals from hardware and
presents them to you as the physical states of the items. For example, a Binary
Input can indicate whether a switch is on or off. You can use the state of this object
in logic and to monitor the status of hardware.

Binary Input Attributes

Table 33-582 describes the Binary Input object attributes. These attributes are
displayed in alphabetical order. See Object Attributes in the CCT Input and Output
Object Overview section for descriptions of the data provided in this table. Unless
otherwise stated, the attributes listed in this table appear in the Details dialog box
(for example, the Present Value appears in the Control View below the module
name in Simulation and Commissioning modes).
Table 33-582: Binary Input Attributes (Part 1 of 3)
Name Type Mode Description
Active Text Input Configuration Indicates the active state of the object (for example, Occupied,
Commissioning Cooling, or Active). This value for this attribute matches the
active state name in States Text.
Debounce Input Configuration Indicates the length of time that the hardware input must remain
Commissioning in a state for the connected object to detect that a change has
occurred. The hardware contact may bounce, producing extra
input pulses. You can use the Debounce attribute to eliminate
these nuisance input pulses. Contact fluctuations are ignored
and, thus, filtered during this time period.
Device Type Input Configuration Describes the physical network device to which the object is
Commissioning connected.
Description Input All Modes Indicates the description provided for the object.
Inactive Text Input Configuration Indicates the inactive state of the object (for example, Not
Commissioning Occupied, Heating, or Inactive). This value for this attribute
matches the inactive state name in States Text.
Name Input All Modes Indicates the name of the object.
Object Identifier Input All Modes Indicates the instance number of the Object Type as exposed to
the network. The Object Identifier must be unique within the host
device. The Object Identifier is created after defining hardware
in the Hardware Definition Wizard accessible from the Define
Hardware button or Operations menu option.
The Object Identifier consists of the BACnet Class ID and the
object’s Instance Number separated by a colon. For example,
an Object Identifier of AV.10026 has a BACnet Class ID of AV
and an Instance Number of 10026.
Offline Input Commissioning Indicates if the object is currently communicating with the
network device.
Out of Service Input Commissioning Indicates whether the object is currently connected to the
hardware or offline (out of service).

Binary Input Object 1411

 Table 33-582: Binary Input Attributes (Part 2 of 3)
Name Type Mode Description
Polarity Input Configuration Indicates the relationship between the physical state of the input
Commissioning read from the hardware and the logical state represented by
Present Value. If the Object is Out of Service, this attribute has
no effect on Present Value.
Set Name: Polarity
Present Value Input Simulation Reflects the current physical state of a device based on the
Commissioning state of the input and Polarity.
This attribute changes when the following occurs:
• If the Present Value attribute is changed by a user editing
the attribute. This can be done only when Out of Service is
False.
• If changes occur in the hardware input (when the object has
a live connection to the hardware).
• If, on a transition from offline to a live connection to the
hardware, the Present Value uses the last value reported
from the hardware. If a value was never recorded before
going offline, the value is not updated and Reliability goes to
Connection Fail.
The Present Value appears in the Control View below the
module name in Simulation and Commissioning modes.
While in CCT Commissioning mode, the user interface displays
two values (does not apply to network inputs or network
outputs):
• The first value comes from the Present Value of the Binary
Output object.
• The second value is the value calculated by the control logic.
These two values may be different if the Binary Output is
commanded at a priority higher than that of the control logic
or if the device is offline (for example, an IOM that is offline).
Set Name: States Text
This attribute is a generated state (Default Element) and is a
calculated value (Output).
Reliability Input Simulation Provides the following values to indicate whether or not the
Commissioning Present Value is reliable:
• Connection Fail: The object fails to connect to the hardware.
• Reliable: The object is not in the Connection Fail state.
If an Out of Service command is received, this attribute is
Reliable. Only when the object is out of service can you write
values to this attribute.
The controller must be online for this attribute value to appear.
Set Name: Reliability
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Source References Input Simulation Indicates the array of attribute references for the sources. All
Commissioning references must be from a single object.
States Text Input Configuration Indicates the set used by Present Value.
Commissioning Set Name: Two State
Status Input Simulation Reflects the status of the object based on the Reliability attribute
Commissioning and the status of any commands.
Possible values for Binary Input objects are:
• Out of Service: Out of Service is True.
• Unreliable: Reliability is not reliable.
• Normal: Neither of the above is correct.
The controller must be online for this attribute value to appear.
Set Name: Status
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).

1412 CCT Help: Objects

 Table 33-582: Binary Input Attributes (Part 3 of 3)
Name Type Mode Description
Use Default if Not Input All Modes Specifies the behavior when the Source is not reliable. If True,
Reliable the Output is set to its Default Value whenever its Source is not
reliable and its Reliability is marked as Reliable. If False, the
Output maintains its last reliable value and its Reliability reflects
the reason that the source is not reliable.

Binary Input Commands

Table 33-582 describes the Binary Input object commands.
Table 33-583: Binary Input Commands
Name Description
In Service Cancels the effects of an Out of Service command. This command changes Out of
Service to False and reconnects the input to the hardware. Present Value, Reliability, and
Status values return to the last known value as reported before the Out of Service
command.
Out of Service Overrides Present Value for simulation or other purposes. This command changes Out of
Service to True, Present Value to the value you specify, Status to Out of Service, and
Reliability to Reliable. Present Value and Reliability are not connected to the hardware
when the input is out of service, so this is the only time they are writable.

Binary Input Object 1413

1414 CCT Help: Objects
Chapter 34: CCT Help: Objects
Binary Output Object
Introduction
The CCT Binary Output (BO) object represents a physical binary output.
You can use the value of this object in logic and to monitor the status of hardware.

Binary Output Attributes

Table 34-584 describes the Binary Output object attributes. These attributes are
displayed in alphabetical order. See Object Attributes in the CCT Input and Output
Object Overview section for descriptions of the data provided in this table. Unless
otherwise stated, the attributes listed in this table appear in the Details dialog box
(for example, the Present Value appears in the Control View below the module
name in Simulation and Commissioning modes).
Table 34-584: Binary Output Attributes (Part 1 of 4)
Name Type Mode Description
Active Text Output Configuration Indicates the active state of the object (for example, Occupied,
Commissioning Cooling, or Active).
Device Type Output Configuration Describes the physical network device to which the object is
Commissioning connected.
Description Output All Modes Indicates the description provided for the object.
Destination Output Simulation Indicates the array of attribute references for the destinations. All
References Commissioning references must be from a single object.
Heavy Equip Delay Output Configuration Represents the minimum amount of time between the activation
Commissioning of the current load and the activation of the next load.
When an HED controller is designated, it uses this value to
assure the separation between activations. The HED holds
Present Value as Inactive by writing to it at Heavy Equip Delay
priority (7). The attribute applies only when Present Value is
written at priorities lower than the Heavy Equip Delay priority (7).
Range: 0 - 255
HED Controller Output Configuration Contains the object reference for the Heavy Equipment Controller
Commissioning that services HED function calls for this object.
Range: 0 - 255
Inactive Text Output Configuration Indicates the inactive state of the object (for example, Not
Commissioning Occupied, Heating, or Inactive).
Min Change to Output All Modes Indicates the array of floating values (each value corresponding to
Send a single Input) to specify the minimum change in the Input that is
sent to the destination. This attribute is only applicable when the
Input is of floating-point data type. The change is evaluated by
comparing the current value of the Input to the value the last time
a message was sent to the destination.

Binary Output Object 1415

 Table 34-584: Binary Output Attributes (Part 2 of 4)
Name Type Mode Description
Min Cycle Time Output Configuration Represents the minimum total amount of time for the following
Commissioning transitions:
• transition from Inactive (or Hold) to Active
• transition from Active to Inactive
• transition from Inactive to Active
If the object stays in an Active state for less than the Min On
Time, the object is held Inactive at the Minimum Off priority for the
remainder of the minim cycle time (or Min Off Time, whichever is
longer) so that the minimum cycle time is maintained.
Note: For modules that are driven by the Multistage Controller
(MSC), Minimum Cycle Time, Min On Time, and Min Off
Time should be configured at the Output Controller
module and must be set to 0 in the Binary Output.
Range: 0 - 65,535
Min Off Time Output Configuration Represents the minimum amount of time the object must remain
Commissioning Inactive between deactivation and activation. The load is Inactive
at the Minimum On Off priority for the time specified in this
attribute.
Note: For modules that are driven by the Multistage Controller
(MSC), Minimum Cycle Time, Min On Time, and Min Off
Time should be configured at the Output Controller
module and must be set to 0 in the Binary Output.
Range: 0 - 65,535
Min On Time Output Configuration Represents the minimum amount of time the object must remain
Commissioning Active between activation and deactivation. The object is Active at
the Minimum On Off priority for the time specified in this attribute.
Note: For modules that are driven by the Multistage Controller
(MSC), Minimum Cycle Time, Min On Time, and Min Off
Time should be configured at the Output Controller
module and must be set to 0 in the Binary Output.
Range: 0 - 65,535
Name Output All Modes Indicates the name of the object.
Object Identifier Output All Modes Indicates the instance number of the Object Type as exposed to
the network. The Object Identifier must be unique within the host
device. The Object Identifier is created after defining hardware in
the Hardware Definition Wizard accessible from the Define
Hardware button or Operations menu option.
The Object Identifier consists of the BACnet Class ID and the
object’s Instance Number separated by a colon. For example, an
Object Identifier of AV.10026 has a BACnet Class ID of AV and
an Instance Number of 10026.
Offline Output Commissioning Indicates if the object is currently communicating with the network
device.
Out of Service Output Commissioning Indicates whether the object is currently connected to the
hardware or offline (out of service).
Polarity Output Configuration Indicates the following, depending on the mode:
Commissioning • Maintained: The Polarity attribute indicates the relationship
between the hardware output and Present Value.
• Pulse: Changes to the Polarity attribute cause a pulse to be
issued.
• Start Stop: The Polarity attribute determines which slot
receives a pulse on an update of Present Value.
If the Object is Out of Service, this attribute has no effect on
Present Value.
Set Name: Polarity

1416 CCT Help: Objects

 Table 34-584: Binary Output Attributes (Part 3 of 4)
Name Type Mode Description
Present Value Output Simulation Indicates the current value (with the highest priority) being sent to
Commissioning this object.
Only values of Inactive or Active can be written to this attribute.
Note: A value of Hold means that the hardware output has not
been commanded to Inactive or Active since the last
device cold start, and the true status of the hardware
output is unknown.
Hold is used by Pulse and Start Stop devices. Hardware
outputs do not change while Present Value is Hold.
The Present Value appears in the Control View below the module
name in Simulation and Commissioning modes.
While in CCT Commissioning mode, the user interface displays
two values (does not apply to network inputs or network outputs):
• The first value comes from the Present Value of the Binary
Output object.
• The second value is the value calculated by the control logic.
These two values may be different if the Binary Output is
commanded at a priority higher than that of the control logic or
if the device is offline (for example, an IOM that is offline).
Set Name: See States Text.
This attribute is a generated state (Default Element) and a
calculated value (Output).
Pulse Width Output Configuration Specifies how many seconds each pulse should remain Active
Commissioning following activation.
Note: In Maintained mode, this attribute is not used.
Note: A write to this attribute does not affect a pulse currently in
progress. Instead, the change takes effect for the next
pulse.
Note: If the BO goes out of service during a pulse, the pulse
completes normally.
Range: 0.0 - 99.99
Reliability Output Simulation Provides the following values to indicate whether or not the
Commissioning Present Value is reliable:
• Connection Fail: The object fails to connect to the hardware.
• Reliable: The object is none in Connection Fail.
If an Out of Service command is received, this attribute is
Reliable.
Only when the object is out of service can you write values to this
attribute.
Set Name: Reliability
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Relinquish Default Output Configuration Contains the default value for Present Value when all priorities
Commissioning are released.
The Present Value is sent to the value in Relinquish Default only
at startup or when the last priority value is released. Present
Value does not update if you change Relinquish Default.
Restore Command Output Configuration Restores the commands you select in the case of a power failure.
Priority Commissioning For more information about command priorities, see Command
Priority Levels. The following list displays the command priorities
you can select.
• Operator Override
• Default
States Text Output Configuration Indicates the set number used by Present Value.
Commissioning Set Name: Two State

Binary Output Object 1417

 Table 34-584: Binary Output Attributes (Part 4 of 4)
Name Type Mode Description
Status Output Simulation Reflects the status of the object based on the Reliability attribute
Commissioning and the status of any commands.
Possible values for Binary Output objects are:
• Out of Service: Out of Service is True.
• High Priority: Present Value is currently controlled at Priority 1
- 5.
• Min On Min Off: Present Value is currently controlled at
Priority 6.
• Heavy Equip Delay: Present Value is currently controlled at
Priority 7.
• Operator Override: Present Value is currently controlled at
Priority 8.
• Unreliable: Reliability is not reliable.
• Normal: None of the above is correct.
Note: Priorities for Min On Min Off (6) and Operator Override (8)
are specified by BACnet requirements.
The priority for Heavy Equip Delay (7) follows Johnson
Controls conventions.
Set Name: Status
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Use Default if Not Output All Modes Specifies the behavior when the Input is not reliable. If True, the
Reliable destination is sent the Input’s Default Value whenever the Input is
not reliable and its Reliability is marked as Reliable. If False, the
destination is not updated and keeps its last reliable value.

1418 CCT Help: Objects

Binary Output Commands
Table 34-584 describes the Binary Output object commands. For information
about command priorities, see Command Priority Levels.
Table 34-585: Binary Output Commands
Name Description
In Service Cancels the effects of an Out of Service command. This command changes Out of
Service to False and reconnects the input to the hardware. If you make changes to
Present Value when Out of Service is True, the hardware is commanded when you issue
the In Service command.
Operator Override Replaces Present Value at the Operator Override priority (8) with the value you enter in
the command. The override has no effect if a higher priority value is in the Present Value
attribute. Min On Time, Min Off Time, Min Cycle Time, or Heavy Equip Delay may apply.
Operator Override Releases an Operator Override command.
Release
Out of Service Changes Out of Service to True, Present Value to the value you specify, Status to Out of
Service, and Reliability to Reliable. Present Value and Reliability are not connected to the
hardware when the input is out of service, so this is the only time they are writable.
Commands cannot be sent to the hardware output when Out of Service is True.
Recommand Reissues the current value of Present Value at the highest active priority to the hardware.
This command is used when the hardware is out of sync with Present Value. Present
Value is not changed.
The action that results from Recommand is based on system type:
• Maintained: A command to the expected hardware state is issued to the hardware
output.
• Start Stop: A pulse is issued depending on Present Value and Polarity.
• Pulse: A pulse is issued.
Recommand is most useful when used in the Pulse mode. Writing Present Value in the
other modes (at or above the highest active priority) can be used instead of Recommand
in the Maintained or Start Stop modes because redundant commands are sent in those
modes. In Pulse mode, no pulse is issued on a write from Active to Active, for example.
If Present value is decoupled from the hardware output, Present Value is Hold, the object
is not connected to a hardware object, or field commands have not been enabled,
Recommand is ignored.
Note: The return status of the command is OK even if the command is ignored.
Note: Recommand may send an immediate pulse to change the load to the opposite of
the current state. No consideration is given to Heavy Equip Delay, Min On Time,
Min Off Time, or Min Cycle Time.
Release Releases a specific priority of Present Value.
Release All Releases priorities 3 - 15.
State0 Releases priorities 9 - 15 and sets Priority 16 to Inactive. A Min Off Time may apply. The
Present Value changes to the highest pending value in the priority table.
State1 Releases priorities 9 - 15 and sets Priority 16 to Active. A Min On Time, Min Cycle Time, or
Heavy Equip Delay may apply. The Present Value changes to the highest pending value
in the priority table.

Binary Output Object 1419

1420 CCT Help: Objects
Chapter 35: CCT Help: Objects
Binary Value Object
Introduction
This object allows you to hold a binary value for other objects to reference. In
CCT, a Binary Value (BV) may be created as part of an SAB device to provide
binary data points from that device (for example, Temporary Occupancy of the
Network Sensor). Alternately, a Binary Value may be created as a reference point
for a wireless sensor to write its value (typically to the mapped BV in the
supervisory device).

Binary Value Attributes

Table 35-586 describes the Binary Value object attributes. These attributes are
displayed in alphabetical order. See Object Attributes in the CCT Input and Output
Object Overview section for descriptions of the data provided in this table. Unless
otherwise stated, the attributes listed in this table appear in the Details dialog box
(for example, the Present Value appears in the Control View below the module
name in Simulation and Commissioning modes).
Table 35-586: Binary Value Attributes (Part 1 of 4)
Name Type Mode Description
Active Text Input Configuration Indicates the active state of the object (for example,
Output Commissioning Occupied, Cooling, or Active). This value for this attribute
matches the active state name in States Text.
BACnet Exposed Network Input All Modes Allows you to expose the object to BACnet systems. The
Network Output BACnet exposed object is a viewable object through the
NAE.
Default Value Network Input All Modes Allows you to specify the Present Value if no source is
Network Output connected or if the connected source is never reliable.
Description Input All Modes Indicates the description provided for the object.
Output
Destination Output Simulation Indicates the array of attribute references for the
References Commissioning destinations. All references must be from a single object.

Binary Value Object 1421

 Table 35-586: Binary Value Attributes (Part 2 of 4)
Name Type Mode Description
Error Status Network Input Configuration Displays the status of the last communication that occurred
Network Output Commissioning with an input or output reference. Common errors include:
• Surrogate Object is Not Bound: The referenced device
(Device ID) has never responded because a device with
the entered Device ID either does not exist or is offline.
• Remote Device is Offline: The referenced device did
respond at one time but is no longer responding.
• Unknown Object: The referenced device exists and is
online, but the Object ID entered does not exist on that
device.
• Type Mismatch: The referenced object exists but the
data type of the referenced attribute/property is invalid.
This error generally does not appear for inputs on
Johnson Controls or third-party devices. For outputs on
third-party devices, the Object Type of the output needs
to match the type of output object making the peer
reference.
• Unknown Property: This error generally does not
appear if you leave the Peer Reference Attribute field as
Present Value. If you change this setting, the Unknown
Property error means the referenced object exists but the
referenced attribute does not exist.
Failsoft Network Input All Modes Indicates how the Network Input or Network Output behaves
Network Output when the connected source is not Reliable. If the source is
not Reliable, the element uses the default value for the
current value (if Failsoft is true and the Last Reliable Value of
Failsoft is false). For a Network Input, the source is
considered unreliable whenever the priority array of the
Present Value is empty
In Test Network Input Simulation Displays a Boolean value that is True if you manually set the
Network Output Commissioning Current Value for test purposes.
Inactive Text Input Configuration Indicates the inactive state of the object (for example, Not
Output Commissioning Occupied, Heating, or Inactive). This value for this attribute
matches the inactive state name in States Text.
Min Change to Output All Modes Indicates the array of floating values (each value
Send corresponding to a single Input) to specify the minimum
change in the Input that is sent to the destination. This
attribute is only applicable when the Input is of floating-point
data type. The change is evaluated by comparing the current
value of the Input to the value the last time a message was
sent to the destination.
Min Off Time Input Configuration Represents the minimum amount of time the object must
Output Commissioning remain Inactive between deactivation and activation. The
load is Inactive for the time specified in this attribute.
Note: For modules that support staged equipment,
Minimum Cycle Time, Min On Time, and Min Off
Time must be set to 0.
Range: 0 - 65,535
Min On Time Input Configuration Represents the minimum amount of time the object must
Output Commissioning remain Active between activation and deactivation. The
object is Active for the time specified in this attribute.
Note: For modules that support staged equipment,
Minimum Cycle Time, Min On Time, and Min Off
Time must be set to 0.
Range: 0 - 65,535
Name All Types All Modes Displays the object name.

1422 CCT Help: Objects

 Table 35-586: Binary Value Attributes (Part 3 of 4)
Name Type Mode Description
Object Identifier All Types All Modes Indicates the instance number of the Object Type as
exposed to the network. The Object Identifier must be unique
within the host device. The Object Identifier is created after
defining hardware in the Hardware Definition Wizard
accessible from the Define Hardware button or Operations
menu option.
The Object Identifier consists of the BACnet Class ID and
the object’s Instance Number separated by a colon. For
example, an Object Identifier of AV.10026 has a BACnet
Class ID of AV and an Instance Number of 10026.
Out of Service Input Commissioning Indicates whether the object is currently connected to the
Output hardware or offline (out of service).
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Peer Reference Network Input Configuration Contains the elements needed to use peer-to-peer
Network Output Commissioning communication. These elements are:
• Instance Number (BACnet ID): Displays the device’s
Instance Number. Make sure you verify the device's
instance number before setting this value. You can
access the device instance number on the Network
Settings screen of the Hardware Definition Wizard. You
also can locate the instance number of devices using the
Metasys system UI. If the Johnson Controls Point
Schedule was used to download the controllers, check
the instance number on the MSTP Field Device tab of the
project's Point Schedule.
• Object Identifier: Displays the BACnet Class ID and the
object’s Instance Number.
The BACnet Class ID should typically have the same
Data Type as the object for which the peer-to-peer
attribute is being configured. For example, an AV
Network Input should reference another AV, an AI, or an
AO object. If multistate values are used in peer-to-peer
references, the Enumeration sets should match. If the
sets do not match, you must determine whether the
values in the sets are compatible.
You can locate the Object Identifier in the Advanced view
of the Details dialog box. The Peer to Peer Disabled
option allows you to disable peer-to-peer communication.
Present Value All Types Simulation Indicates the current value (with the highest priority) being
Commissioning sent to this object.
Only values of Inactive or Active can be written to this
attribute.
The Present Value appears in the Control View below the
module name in Simulation and Commissioning modes.
While in CCT Commissioning mode, the user interface
displays two values (does not apply to network inputs or
network outputs):
• The first value comes from the Present Value of the
Binary Output object.
• The second value is the value calculated by the control
logic. These two values may be different if the Binary
Output is commanded at a priority higher than that of the
control logic or if the device is offline (for example, an
IOM that is offline).
Set Name: States Text
This attribute is a generated state (Default Element) and a
calculated value (Output).

Binary Value Object 1423

 Table 35-586: Binary Value Attributes (Part 4 of 4)
Name Type Mode Description
Reliability All Types Simulation Provides values to indicate whether or not the Present Value
Commissioning is reliable.
If an Out of Service command is received, this attribute is
Reliable. Only when the object is out of service can you write
values to this attribute.
Set Name: Reliability
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Relinquish Default Input Configuration Contains the default value for Present Value when all
Output Commissioning priorities are released.
The Present Value is sent to the value in Relinquish Default
only at startup or when the last priority value is released.
Present Value does not update if you change Relinquish
Default.
Restore Command All Types Configuration Restores the commands you select in the case of a power
Priority Commissioning failure. For more information about command priorities, see
Command Priority Levels. The following list displays the
command priorities you can select.
• Operator Override
• Default
Source Input Simulation Indicates the array of attribute references for the sources. All
References Commissioning references must be from a single object.
States Text Input All Modes Specifies the set used to obtain text for Present Value. The
Output set should have at least the same number of states as
specified in this attribute.
Status All Types Simulation Reflects the status of the object based on the Reliability
Commissioning attribute, the status of any commands.
Possible values for Binary Value objects are:
• Offline:
• Out of Service: Out of Service is True.
• High Priority: Present Value is currently controlled at
Priorities 1 - 5.
• Min On Min Off: Present Value is currently controlled at
Priority 6 (which is reserved for min on min off).
• Operator Override: Present Value is currently controlled
at Priority 8.
• Unreliable: Reliability is not reliable.
• Normal: None of the above is correct.
Set Name: Status
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Use Default if Not Input All Modes For Inputs: Specifies the behavior when the Source is not
Reliable Output reliable. If True, the Output is set to its Default Value
whenever its Source is not reliable and its Reliability is
marked as Reliable. If False, the Output maintains its last
reliable value and its Reliability reflects the reason that the
source is not reliable.
For Outputs: Specifies the behavior when the Input is not
reliable. If True, the destination is sent the Input’s Default
Value whenever the Input is not reliable and its Reliability is
marked as Reliable. If False, the destination is not updated
and keeps its last reliable value.

1424 CCT Help: Objects

Binary Value Commands
Table 35-586 describes the Binary Value object commands. For information about
command priorities, see Command Priority Levels.
Table 35-587: Binary Value Commands
Name Description
Operator Override Replaces Present Value at the Operator Override priority with the value you enter in the
command. The override has no effect if a higher priority value is in the Present Value
attribute.
Note: This command is available only if the Binary Value is prioritized.
Operator Override Releases an Operator Override command.
Release Note: This command is available only if the Binary Value is prioritized.
Release Releases a specific priority of Present Value.
Note: This command is available only if the Binary Value is prioritized.
Release All Releases Priorities 3 - 15.
Note: This command is available only if the Binary Value is prioritized.
State 0 Releases command Priorities 9 - 15 and then writes State 1 to Present Value at
Priority 16.
Note: This command is available only if the Binary Value is prioritized.
State 1 Releases command Priorities 9 - 15 and then writes State 1 to Present Value at
Priority 16.
Note: This command is available only if the Binary Value is prioritized.

Binary Value Object 1425

1426 CCT Help: Objects
Chapter 36: CCT Help: Objects
Counter Input (Accumulator) Object
Introduction
The CCT Counter Input (CI) object receives and accumulates the pulse count from
any device that generates pulses that indicate quantity (for example, an electrical
meter or flow meter with a pulse output). The Counter Input object appears as an
Accumulator Object Type in CCT. This object is a metered/pulsed binary input.

Counter Input (Accumulator) Attributes

Table 36-588 describes the Counter Input object attributes. These attributes are
displayed in alphabetical order. See Object Attributes in the CCT Input and Output
Object Overview section for descriptions of the data provided in this table. Unless
otherwise stated, the attributes listed in this table appear in the Details dialog box
(for example, the Present Value appears in the Control View below the module
name in Simulation and Commissioning modes).
Table 36-588: Counter Input Attributes (Part 1 of 2)
Name Type Mode Description
Debounce Input Configuration Indicates the length of time that the hardware input must remain
Commissioning in a state for the connected object to detect that a change has
occurred. The hardware contact may bounce, producing extra
input pulses. You can use the Debounce attribute to eliminate
these nuisance input pulses. Contact fluctuations are ignored
and, thus, filtered during this time period.
Description Input All Modes Indicates the description provided for the object.
Device Type Input Configuration Describes the physical network device to which the object is
Commissioning connected.
Max Value Input Configuration Specifies the maximum amount for Present Value.
Commissioning
Name Input All Modes Indicates the name of the object.
Object Identifier Input All Modes Indicates the instance number of the Object Type as exposed to
the network. The Object Identifier must be unique within the host
device. The Object Identifier is created after defining hardware in
the Hardware Definition Wizard accessible from the Define
Hardware button or Operations menu option.
The Object Identifier consists of the BACnet Class ID and the
object’s Instance Number separated by a colon. For example, an
Object Identifier of AV.10026 has a BACnet Class ID of AV and
an Instance Number of 10026.
Offline Input Commissioning Indicates if the object is currently communicating with the network
device.
Out of Service Input Commissioning Indicates whether the object is currently connected to the
hardware or offline (out of service).

Counter Input (Accumulator) Object 1427

 Table 36-588: Counter Input Attributes (Part 2 of 2)
Name Type Mode Description
Present Value Input Simulation Indicates the current number of pulses from the input hardware.
Commissioning Changes in Present Value generate a COV when the Update
Interval expires. Present Value also resets to 0 on controller
reset.
The Present Value appears in the Control View below the module
name in Simulation and Commissioning modes.
While in CCT Commissioning mode, the user interface displays
two values (does not apply to network inputs or network outputs):
• The first value comes from the Present Value of the Binary
Output object.
• The second value is the value calculated by the control logic.
These two values may be different if the Binary Output is
commanded at a priority higher than that of the control logic or
if the device is offline (for example, an IOM that is offline).
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Reliability Input Simulation Provides the following values to indicate whether or not the
Commissioning Present Value is reliable:
• Offline: The input hardware is offline.
• Connection Fail: The object fails to connect to the hardware.
• Reliable: The object is neither of the above.
If an Out of Service command is received, this attribute is
Reliable. Only when the object is out of service can you write
values to this attribute.
Set Name: Reliability
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Source Input Simulation Indicates the array of attribute references for the sources. All
References Commissioning references must be from a single object
Status Input Simulation Reflects the status of the object based on the Reliability attribute
Commissioning and the status of any commands.
Possible values for Counter Input objects are:
• Out of Service: Out of Service is True.
• Unreliable: Reliability is not reliable.
• Normal: Neither of the above is correct.
Set Name: Status
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Units Input Configuration Specifies the units of measure for Present Value.
Commissioning
Update Interval Input Configuration Specifies the amount of time between evaluation of updates to
Commissioning Present Value, Reliability, and Status.
Range: 10 - 255
Use Default if Not Input All Modes Specifies the behavior when the Source is not reliable. If True,
Reliable the Output is set to its Default Value whenever its Source is not
reliable and its Reliability is marked as Reliable. If False, the
Output maintains its last reliable value and its Reliability reflects
the reason that the source is not reliable.
Value Set Input Configuration Contains the set of values used by the object.
Commissioning

1428 CCT Help: Objects

Counter Input (Accumulator) Commands
Table 36-588 describes the Counter Input object commands. For information about
command priorities, see Command Priority Levels.
Table 36-589: Counter Input Commands
Name Description
In Service Cancels the effects of an Out of Service command. This command changes Out of Service to
False and reconnects the input to the hardware. Present Value, Reliability, and Status values
update at time specified in Update Interval.
Out of Service Overrides Present Value for simulation or other purposes. This command changes Out of
Service to True, Present Value to the value you specify, Status to Out of Service, and
Reliability to Reliable. Present Value and Reliability are not connected to the hardware when
the input is out of service, so this is the only time they are writable.

Counter Input (Accumulator) Object 1429

1430 CCT Help: Objects
Chapter 37: CCT Help: Objects
Multistate Value Object
Introduction
The CCT Multistate Value (MV) object attributes represent the desired state of one
or more physical outputs or processes of the device in which the object resides.
The actual functions associated with a particular state are determined locally (not
part of protocol). Present Value represents the state with a number and States Text
associates a description with each state.
This object allows you to hold a multistate value for other objects to reference. In
CCT, an Multistate Value may be created as part of an SAB device to provide a
multistate data points from that device (for example, Fan Speed Override from the
Network Sensor) or a multistate data value sent to that device (for example, Fan
Speed Status and Occupancy Status for the Network Sensor).

Multistate Value Attributes

Table 37-590 describes the Multistate Value object attributes. These attributes are
displayed in alphabetical order. See Object Attributes in the CCT Input and Output
Object Overview section for descriptions of the data provided in this table. Unless
otherwise stated, the attributes listed in this table appear in the Details dialog box
(for example, the Present Value appears in the Control View below the module
name in Simulation and Commissioning modes).
Table 37-590: Multistate Value Attributes (Part 1 of 4)
Name Type Mode Description
BACnet Exposed Network Input All Modes Allows you to expose the object to BACnet systems. The
Network Output BACnet exposed object is a viewable object through the
NAE.
Default Value Network Input All Modes Allows you to specify the Present Value if no source is
Network Output connected or if the connected source is never reliable.
Description Input All Modes Indicates the description provided for the object.
Output
Destination Output Simulation Indicates the array of attribute references for the
References Commissioning destinations. All references must be from a single object.

Multistate Value Object 1431

 Table 37-590: Multistate Value Attributes (Part 2 of 4)
Name Type Mode Description
Error Status Network Input Configuration Displays the status of the last communication that occurred
Network Output Commissioning with an input or output reference. Common errors include:
• Surrogate Object is Not Bound: The referenced
device (Device ID) has never responded because a
device with the entered Device ID either does not exist
or is offline.
• Remote Device is Offline: The referenced device did
respond at one time but is no longer responding.
• Unknown Object: The referenced device exists and is
online, but the Object ID entered does not exist on that
device.
• Type Mismatch: The referenced object exists but the
data type of the referenced attribute/property is invalid.
This error generally does not appear for inputs on
Johnson Controls or third-party devices. For outputs on
third-party devices, the Object Type of the output needs
to match the type of output object making the peer
reference.
• Unknown Property: This error generally does not
appear if you leave the Peer Reference Attribute field
as Present Value. If you change this setting, the
Unknown Property error means the referenced object
exists but the referenced attribute does not exist.
Failsoft Network Input All Modes Indicates how the Network Input or Network Output
Network Output behaves when the connected source is not Reliable. If the
source is not Reliable, the element uses the default value
for the current value (if Failsoft is true and the Last Reliable
Value of Failsoft is false). For a Network Input, the source
is considered unreliable whenever the priority array of the
Present Value is empty.
In Test Network Input Simulation Displays a Boolean value that is True if you manually set
Network Output Commissioning the Current Value for test purposes.
Min Change to Output All Modes Indicates the array of floating values (each value
Send corresponding to a single Input) to specify the minimum
change in the Input that is sent to the destination. This
attribute is only applicable when the Input is of floating-
point data type. The change is evaluated by comparing the
current value of the Input to the value the last time a
message was sent to the destination.
Name All Types All Modes Displays the object name.
Number of States Input Configuration Specifies the number of states that are allowed.
Output Commissioning
Object Identifier All Types All Modes Indicates the instance number of the Object Type as
exposed to the network. The Object Identifier must be
unique within the host device. The Object Identifier is
created after defining hardware in the Hardware Definition
Wizard accessible from the Define Hardware button or
Operations menu option.
The Object Identifier consists of the BACnet Class ID and
the object’s Instance Number separated by a colon. For
example, an Object Identifier of AV.10026 has a BACnet
Class ID of AV and an Instance Number of 10026.
Out of Service Input Commissioning Indicates whether the object is currently connected to the
Output hardware or offline (out of service).
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).

1432 CCT Help: Objects

 Table 37-590: Multistate Value Attributes (Part 3 of 4)
Name Type Mode Description
Peer Reference Network Input Configuration Contains the elements needed to use peer-to-peer
Network Output Commissioning communication. These elements are:
• Instance Number (BACnet ID): Displays the device’s
Instance Number. Make sure you verify the device's
instance number before setting this value. You can
access the device instance number on the Network
Settings screen of the Hardware Definition Wizard. You
also can locate the instance number of devices using
the Metasys system UI. If the Johnson Controls Point
Schedule was used to download the controllers, check
the instance number on the MSTP Field Device tab of
the project's Point Schedule.
• Object Identifier: Displays the BACnet Class ID and
the object’s Instance Number.
The BACnet Class ID should typically have the same
Data Type as the object for which the peer-to-peer
attribute is being configured. For example, an AV
Network Input should reference another AV, an AI, or
an AO object. If multistate values are used in
peer-to-peer references, the Enumeration sets should
match. If the sets do not match, you must determine
whether the values in the sets are compatible.
You can locate the Object Identifier in the Advanced
view of the Details dialog box. The Peer to Peer
Disabled option allows you to disable peer-to-peer
communication.
Present Value All Types Simulation Indicates the current value (with the highest priority) being
Commissioning sent to this object. Present Value is used to calculate the
output.
The Present Value appears in the Control View below the
module name in Simulation and Commissioning modes.
While in CCT Commissioning mode, the user interface
displays two values (does not apply to network inputs or
network outputs):
• The first value comes from the Present Value of the
Binary Output object.
• The second value is the value calculated by the control
logic. These two values may be different if the Binary
Output is commanded at a priority higher than that of
the control logic or if the device is offline (for example,
an IOM that is offline).
This attribute is a generated state (Default Element) and a
calculated value (Output).
Reliability All Types Simulation Provides values to indicate whether or not the Present
Commissioning Value is reliable.
Set Name: Reliability
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Relinquish Default Input Configuration Contains the default value for Present Value when all
Output Commissioning priorities are released.
The Present Value is sent to the value in Relinquish
Default only at startup or when the last priority value is
released. Present Value does not update if you change
Relinquish Default.
Restore Command All Types Configuration Restores the commands you select in the case of a power
Priority Commissioning failure. For more information about command priorities, see
Command Priority Levels. The following list displays the
command priorities you can select.
• Operator Override
• Default

Multistate Value Object 1433

 Table 37-590: Multistate Value Attributes (Part 4 of 4)
Name Type Mode Description
Source Input Simulation Indicates the array of attribute references for the sources.
References Commissioning All references must be from a single object.
States Text All Types Configuration Specifies the set used to obtain text for Present Value.
Commissioning The set should have at least the same number of states as
specified in this attribute.
Status All Types Simulation Reflects the status of the object based on the Reliability
Commissioning attribute and the status of any commands. Possible values
for Multistate Value objects are:
• Offline
• Out of Service: Out of Service is True.
• Operator Override: Present Value is currently
controlled at Priority 8.
• Unreliable: Reliability is not reliable.
• Normal: None of the above is correct.
Set Name: Status
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Use Default if Not Input All Modes For Inputs: Specifies the behavior when the Source is not
Reliable Output reliable. If True, the Output is set to its Default Value
whenever its Source is not reliable and its Reliability is
marked as Reliable. If False, the Output maintains its last
reliable value and its Reliability reflects the reason that the
source is not reliable.
For Outputs: Specifies the behavior when the Input is not
reliable. If True, the destination is sent the Input’s Default
Value whenever the Input is not reliable and its Reliability is
marked as Reliable. If False, the destination is not updated
and keeps its last reliable value.

Multistate Value Commands

Table 37-590 describes the Multistate Value object commands. For information
about command priorities, see Command Priority Levels.
Table 37-591: Multistate Value Commands
Name Description
Operator Override Replaces Present Value at the Operator Override priority with the value you enter in the
command. The override has no effect if a higher priority value is in the Present Value
attribute.
Note: This command is available only if the Multistate Value is prioritized.
Operator Override Releases an Operator Override command.
Release Note: This command is available only if the Multistate Value is prioritized.
Release Releases a specific priority of Present Value.
Note: This command is available only if the Multistate Value is prioritized.
Release All Releases Priorities 3 - 15.
Note: This command is available only if the Multistate Value is prioritized.
State 0-N Releases Priorities 9 - 15 and then writes State 0-N to Present Value at Priority 16.
Note: This command is available only if the Multistate Value is prioritized.

1434 CCT Help: Objects

Chapter 38: CCT Help: Objects
Position Adjust Output Object
Introduction
The CCT Position Adjust Output (PAO) object drives a floating/3-wire actuator
that does not provide position feedback. The object estimates the position of an
actuator and then uses overdrives to reduce the difference between actual and
desired (Present Value) actuator position.
You can use the value of this object in logic and to monitor the status of hardware.

Position Adjust Output Attributes

Table 38-592 describes the Position Adjust Output object attributes. These
attributes are displayed in alphabetical order. See Object Attributes in the CCT
Input and Output Object Overview section for descriptions of the data provided in
this table. Unless otherwise stated, the attributes listed in this table appear in the
Details dialog box (for example, the Present Value appears in the Control View
below the module name in Simulation and Commissioning modes).
Table 38-592: Position Adjust Output Attributes
Name Type Mode Description
COV Increment Output Configuration Indicates the minimum change in output that triggers a new
Commissioning Change of Value (COV) message.
Description Output All Modes Indicates the description provided for the object.
Destination Output Simulation Indicates the array of attribute references for the
References Commissioning destinations. All references must be from a single object.
Device Type Output Configuration Describes the physical network device to which the object is
Commissioning connected.
Display Precision Output Configuration Indicates the point at which value attributes are rounded for
Commissioning display (and how many numbers following the decimal point
appear).
Set Name: Display Precision
Effective Stroke Time Output Configuration Displays the effective stroke time for the actuator to travel the
Commissioning full range on its installed state. This value should take into
account the actual range of the device to which the actuator
is attached.
For example, an actuator with a stroke time of 120 seconds
for 90 degrees of rotation would have an Effective Stroke
Time of 60 seconds when installed on a damper that allows
45 degrees of travel.
Accurate configuration of Effective Stroke Time is essential
for VAV box flow control applications and is used to estimate
the position of the actuator. If you change the value of the
Effective Stroke Time during execution, the new value is
used immediately but the Output is likely inaccurate until the
object synchronizes at an end stop.

Position Adjust Output Object 1435

 Table 38-592: Position Adjust Output Attributes
Name Type Mode Description
Min Change to Send Output All Modes Indicates the array of floating values (each value
corresponding to a single Input) to specify the minimum
change in the Input that is sent to the destination. This
attribute is only applicable when the Input is of floating-point
data type. The change is evaluated by comparing the current
value of the Input to the value the last time a message was
sent to the destination.
Min Pulse Width Output Configuration Displays the minimum allowable pulse sent to the motor
Commissioning actuator. This value is specific to the actuator and is
determined by the actuator manufacturer.
This value should not be negative.
Name Output All Modes Indicates the name of the object.
Object Identifier Output All Modes Indicates the instance number of the Object Type as
exposed to the network. The Object Identifier must be unique
within the host device. The Object Identifier is created after
defining hardware in the Hardware Definition Wizard
accessible from the Define Hardware button or Operations
menu option.
The Object Identifier consists of the BACnet Class ID and the
object’s Instance Number separated by a colon. For
example, an Object Identifier of AV.10026 has a BACnet
Class ID of AV and an Instance Number of 10026.
Offline Output Commissioning Indicates if the object is currently communicating with the
network device.
Out of Service Output Commissioning Indicates whether the object is currently connected to the
hardware or offline (out of service).
Polarity Output Configuration Reverses the direction of Slot A and Slot B.
Commissioning Set Name: Polarity
Present Value Output Simulation Indicates the desired position of the actuator (as a percent of
Commissioning possible rotation). A time-proportional command is issued to
increase or decrease the actuator to satisfy the required
position.
Present Value is used to calculate the output.
This attribute is the default attribute for the Analog Input
object.
The Present Value appears in the Control View below the
module name in Simulation and Commissioning modes.
While in CCT Commissioning mode, the user interface
displays two values (does not apply to network inputs or
network outputs):
• The first value comes from the Present Value of the
Binary Output object.
• The second value is the value calculated by the control
logic. These two values may be different if the Binary
Output is commanded at a priority higher than that of the
control logic or if the device is offline (for example, an
IOM that is offline).
Default Value: See Relinquish Default.
Range: 0 - 100
This attribute is the generated state (Default Element).

1436 CCT Help: Objects

 Table 38-592: Position Adjust Output Attributes
Name Type Mode Description
Reliability Output Simulation Provides the following values to indicate whether or not the
Commissioning Present Value is reliable:
• Connection Fail: The object fails to connect to the
hardware.
• Math Error: An error occurs in the calculation of the
output or the time proportional command.
• Reliable: The object is none in Connection Fail.
If an Out of Service command is received, this attribute is
Reliable. Only when the object is out of service can you write
values to this attribute.
Set Name: Reliability
This attribute is a calculated value (Output).
Relinquish Default Output Configuration Contains the default value for Present Value when all
Commissioning priorities are released.
The Present Value is sent to the value in Relinquish Default
only at startup or when the last priority value is released.
Present Value does not update if you change Relinquish
Default. If this value is set to 0% or 100%, the object starts
resynchronizing on startup or reset.
Restore Command Output Configuration Restores the commands you select in the case of a power
Priority Commissioning failure. For more information about command priorities, see
Command Priority Levels. The following list displays the
command priorities you can select.
• Operator Override
• Default
Resync Amount Output Configuration Indicates the percentage of the Effective Stroke Time of
Commissioning overdrive allowed per resynchronization.
This value should not be negative, but can be over 100.
Resync Period Output Configuration Indicate the length of time over which Resync Amount is the
Commissioning maximum resynchronize amount allowed.
When the output approaches an end stop (the overdrive
region), it applies overdrive to resynchronize the Output with
the actual actuator position. Two options for overdrive are:
• Apply an overdrive once each time the actuator enters
the overdrive region. Only after the actuator leaves the
region and re-enters may the overdrive be applied again.
Use this option for electrical actuators. Set Resync
Period to 0 for this option.
• Apply an initial overdrive when the actuator enters the
overdrive region and apply additional overdrives as long
as the actuator remains in the overdrive region. Use this
option for actuators that drift from their last position while
not being commanded (for example, pneumatic spring
return actuators). As long as the actuator remains in the
overdrive region, the periodic overdrives will be applied
on the Resync Period. Set the Resync Period to a non-
zero number for this option.
This value should not be negative.

Position Adjust Output Object 1437

 Table 38-592: Position Adjust Output Attributes
Name Type Mode Description
Status Output Simulation Reflects the status of the object based on the Reliability
Commissioning attribute, the status of any commands, and the disabled
condition of the object.
Possible values for Binary Output objects are:
• Out of Service: Out of Service is True.
• High Priority: Present Value is currently controlled at
Priorities 1 - 5.
• Operator Override: Present Value is currently controlled
at Priority 8.
• Unreliable: Reliability is not reliable.
• Output Clipped: Present Value is outside the limits of Min
Value and Max Value. Status remains Output Clipped
until the output changes.
• Normal: None of the above is correct.
Set Name: Status
This attribute is a Calculated Value (Output).
Units Output Configuration Specifies the units of measurement for Present Value. For
Commissioning the PAO, the units can only be set to %.
Use COV Min Send Output Configuration Configures the object to send COV messages on a periodic
Time Commissioning basis instead of on every change of value that exceeds the
COV Increment. This attribute is typically set to True for
objects with values that fluctuate greatly, such as air
pressure, to decrease the number of COV messages. The
change of value still must exceed the COV Increment to be
reported.
The Min Send Time value is set at the supervisory controller
on the Device object, and has a default of 15 seconds.
Use Default if Not Output All Modes Specifies the behavior when the Input is not reliable. If True,
Reliable the destination is sent the Input’s Default Value whenever
the Input is not reliable and its Reliability is marked as
Reliable. If False, the destination is not updated and keeps
its last reliable value.

1438 CCT Help: Objects

Position Adjust Output Commands
Table 38-592 describes the Position Adjust Output object commands. For
information about command priorities, see Command Priority Levels.
Table 38-593: Position Adjust Output Commands
Name Description
Adjust Releases Priorities 9 through 15 and sets Priority 16 to the value you specify. Present
Value changes to the highest pending priority table value.
In Service Cancels the effects of an Out of Service command. This command changes Out of
Service to False and reconnects the input to the hardware. Commands can be sent to the
object when it is in service. If you make changes to Present Value when Out of Service is
True, the hardware is commanded when you issue the In Service command.
Operator Override Replaces Present Value at the Operator Override priority with the value you enter in the
command. The override has no effect if a higher priority value is in the Present Value
attribute.
Operator Override Releases an Operator Override command.
Release
Out of Service Changes Out of Service to True, Present Value to the value you specify, Status to Out of
Service, and Reliability to Reliable. Present Value and Reliability are not connected to the
hardware when the input is out of service, so this is the only time they are writable.
Commands cannot be sent to the hardware output when Out of Service is True. The
output does not update when the object is out of service.
Release Releases a specific priority of Present Value.
Release All Releases Priorities 3 through 15.

Position Adjust Output Object 1439

1440 CCT Help: Objects
Chapter 39: CCT Help: Logic
Logic
Introduction
A logic block is a component used to construct the control logic of a system. You
can view and work with logic blocks in the Logic View of CCT. Logic block
inputs are used to influence the state or values presented as outputs. You can view
and/or edit logic contained within modules highlighted in tan in the Control View,
but changes should not be made until the default logic is thoroughly understood
and the effect of changes on the connected outputs is considered.
The Logic View is divided into three sections: a toolbar, control block palette, and
logic diagram area. For information on the Logic View user interface, see Logic
View in the User Interface section. For information on how to create or edit logic,
see Logic View Steps in the Configuring a System section. These sections also
describe the block finder and how to use it.
For information on Applications and Modules, see the Applications and Modules
sections.
If applicable, each table in this section lists the type of block, its inputs and
outputs, and the block description. The tables indicate if the inputs are of Boolean,
Enumeration (Enum), or Floating (Float) type. The inputs and outputs that are
exposed for connection by default are also identified.
Some inputs are listed as New Port, which means you can add up to 99 input
connections for that block using the New Port feature. See Adding a Port in the
Configuring a System section for details.

IMPORTANT: Not all logic blocks support the New Port feature. Although
the New Port feature may appear for some logic blocks, only use this feature for
the blocks that indicate New Port support as documented in this section. Using
the New Port feature to add ports to blocks that do not support the feature
may break your logic.

Logic 1441
Activity Inputs
The Activity Inputs folder in the control block palette contains boolean, float, and
enumeration input blocks. Use Activity Inputs to provide an incoming connection
point to custom logic modules.
Table 39-594: Activity Input Blocks
Type Description
Input (Boolean) Provides a Boolean type of input for connection to other blocks in the logic diagram.
Input (Enum) Provides an Enumeration (Enum) type of input for connection to other blocks in the
logic diagram.
Input (Float) Provides a Floating (Float) type of input for connection to other blocks in the logic
diagram.

Activity Outputs
The Activity Outputs folder in the control block palette contains boolean, float,
and enumeration output blocks. Use Activity Outputs to provide an outgoing
connection point to custom logic modules.
Table 39-595: Activity Output Blocks
Type Description
Output (Boolean) Provides a Boolean type of output for connections from other blocks in the logic
diagram.
Output (Enum) Provides an Enumeration (Enum) type of output for connection from other blocks in
the logic diagram.
Output (Float) Provides a Floating (Float) type of output for connection from other blocks in the
logic diagram.

1442 CCT Help: Logic

Boolean
The Boolean folder in the control block palette contains blocks that perform
Boolean functions on one or more inputs, producing a single output.
The number of inputs to a Boolean logic block depends on the type of Boolean
function. You cannot reduce the input count lower than the number of default
connections.The Logic View allows you to add multiple connections from the
output of the block.
Table 39-596: Boolean Blocks
Type Description Inputs1 Outputs1
AND Provides AND logic where all I1 (Boolean) Present Value (Boolean)
inputs defined must be True for I2 (Boolean)
the output to be True. New Port
NOT Provides NOT logic where the I1 (Boolean) Present Value (Boolean)
input must be False for the
output to be True.
OR Provides OR logic where at I1 (Boolean) Present Value (Boolean)
least one input must be True New Port
for the output to be True.
Reliability Check Provides the ability to check Input (Boolean) Present Value (Boolean)
(Boolean)2 reliability of the source value.
The Present Value is set to
True if the input reliability is
Reliable; otherwise the Present
Value is False.
Reliability Check Same as previous Input (Enum) Present Value (Boolean)
(Enum)
Reliability Check Same as previous Input (Float) Present Value (Boolean)
(Float)
Reliability Merge Provides the ability to set the Input (Boolean) Present Value (Boolean)
(Boolean) reliability of the value being Input is Reliable (Boolean)
sent. When the Input is
Reliable input is True, the
Present Value is set to the
current Input with a Reliability
of Reliable. When the Input is
Reliable input is False, the
Present Value is held at its last
value with a Reliability of
Unreliable.
Reliability Merge Same as previous Input (Enum) Present Value (Enum)
(Enum) Input is Reliable (Boolean)
Reliability Merge Same as previous Input (Float) Present Value (Float)
(Float) Input is Reliable (Boolean)
XOR Provides Exclusive OR logic I1 (Boolean) Present Value (Boolean)
where an odd number of inputs I2 (Boolean)
must be True for the output to New Port
be True, otherwise the output is
False.

1. The inputs and outputs of this block are exposed for connection by default.
2. An example use of the Reliability Check and Reliability Merge blocks is the min select option of duct static
pressure sensors. Use the minimum value from two duct sensors if both are Reliable, or use the Reliable value if
only one sensor is Reliable. Set the effective value to Unreliable if both sensors are not Reliable. See the following
State Generators, General Sequencing sections for details: Reliability in the Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100%
OA) section and Reliability in the Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air) module section.

Logic 1443
Calculation
The Calculation folder in the control block palette contains blocks that perform
various fixed calculations. The Calculation blocks include:
• EWMA
• Line Segment
• Span
• Totalization (Analog Integration)
• Totalization (Boolean Event)
• Totalization (Boolean Runtime)
• Totalization (Enum Event)
• Totalization (Enum Runtime)

EWMA
The EWMA logic block provides both signed (Input A - Input B) and absolute
(ABS [Input A - Input B]) EWMA statistics for estimating a time-series of values.
Use EWMA blocks for forecasting, control charts, and fault detection. The
response of the calculation can be set by choosing an appropriate Process ID or by
directly configuring the Time Constant of the process data (if Process ID = other).
The EWMA calculation is active when Update Ewma is set to False.
The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the EWMA logic block.
Table 39-597: EWMA Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 1 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Input A Float Yes Indicates the value of the first input, Input A, 0.0
used in the EWMA equation as previously
described.
Input B Float Yes Indicates the value of the second input, Input 0.0
B, used in the EWMA equation as previously
described.
Process ID Enum No Identifies the process that the EWMA is being ZN-T
used to evaluate. If the Process ID is any
value other than Other, the EWMA looks up
the Eff Time Constant. Otherwise, the Time
Constant input directly sets the Eff Time
Constant.
Time Constant Float No Indicates the time required for a system to 720 Seconds
reach 63% of its final magnitude given a
100% step change. When the Process ID is
Other, this input is used to specify the Eff
Time Constant and thus calculates the
Interval; otherwise, it is ignored.
Update Ewma Boolean No Indicates if the logic block should hold the last True
value or perform the EWMA calculations.

1444 CCT Help: Logic

 Table 39-597: EWMA Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 2 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Outputs
Absolute EWMA Float Yes Indicates the second output of the Ewma 0.0
block.
Ewma1 Float Yes Indicates the first output of the Ewma block. 0.0
Properties
Eff Time Float N/A Indicates the actual value used for the Time 720 Seconds
Constant Constant in determining the Interval.
Input Ak-1 Float N/A Indicates the delayed value of Input A to use 0.0
in place of Input B when the Setup Type is set
to control effort. This value is defaulted to
Input A for the first execution and does not
need to be stored or calculated unless the
Setup Type is control effort.
Interval Number N/A Indicates the time between expected 120 Seconds
executions. When the Eff Time Constant is
changed, the EWMA re-calculates the
Interval so that it is equal to 1/6th of the Time
Constant (rounded to the nearest second).
Setup Type Enum N/A Determines the type of calculation for the Control Accuracy
EWMA. Set Name:
EWMA Setup
Type
Smoothing Float N/A Indicates the value used in the EWMA 3.703704 E-03
Constant calculation. 1/270

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1445
Line Segment
The Line Segment logic block provides linear scaling and biasing of an input value
using one or more line segments where two points define a single line segment.
You must double-click this block to configure its Input Points and Output Points.
See Configuring the Line Segment Block in the Configuring a System section.
The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the Line Segment logic
block.
Table 39-598: Line Segment Block Inputs and Outputs
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Clamp First Boolean No Indicates the behavior when the Input is True
less than the first value in the Input Points
array.
Clamp Last Boolean No Indicates the behavior when the Input is True
greater than the last value in the Input
Points array.
Input Float Yes Indicates the signal that is transferred to the 0.0
Present Value based on the line segment
that the input falls within.
Outputs
Present Value1 Float Yes Indicates the result of the linear scaling and 0.0
biasing performed by the block.
Properties
Input Points Float N/A Provides an array of values that contains 0, 100
Array the X values for the breaking points of the Number of
linearization. Segments plus 1
Number of Number Indicates how many segments are used by Minimum Value = 1
Segments the linearization.
Output Points Float N/A Provides an array of values that contains 0, 100
Array the Y values for the breaking points of the Number of
linearization. Segments plus 1

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

1446 CCT Help: Logic

Span
The Span logic block provides linear scaling and biasing of an input value using a
straight-line interpolation. The Span block creates a linear relationship between the
low input/output and high input/output pair. If the Input for the Span block falls
between the low and high input, the Output of the Span block is found on the line
between the low and high pairs. The following table describes the inputs and
outputs of the Span logic block.
Table 39-599: Span Block Inputs and Outputs
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Clamp Highest Boolean No Indicates the behavior when the output True
exceeds the Output Range High.
Clamp Lowest Boolean No Indicates the behavior when the output True
exceeds the Output Range Low.
Input Float Yes Indicates the Input value that the block uses 0.0
to provide linear scaling and biasing using a
straight-line interpolation.
Input Range Float No Indicates the highest value allowed for an 100.0
High input (that is, the high end of the input range).
Input Range Float No Indicates the lowest value allowed for an input 0.0
Low (that is, the low end of the input range).
Output Range Float No Indicates the highest value allowed for an 100.0
High output (that is, the high end of the output
range).
Output Range Float No Indicates the lowest value allowed for an 0.0
Low output (that is, the low end of the output
range).
Outputs
Present Value1 Float Yes Indicates the output of the linear scaling and 0.0
biasing performed by the block.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1447
Totalization (Analog Integration)
The Totalization (Analog Integration) logic block provides totalization to integrate
an analog input over time. This block is typically used to record the usage of a
consumable (for example, electricity, steam, and chilled water) monitored by the
analog input. The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the
Totalization (Analog Integration) logic block.
Table 39-600: Totalization (Analog Integration) Block Inputs and Outputs
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Active Boolean No Prevents or allows the updating of Present True
Value.
Input Float Yes Indicates the Input value that the block uses 0.0
to provide totalization.
Reference State Float No This attribute is not used for Analog
Integration.
Reset Boolean No Resets the Present Value, Accumulator, False
Rollover Count, and Rollover Amount to
zero.
Scale Factor Float No Provides unit conversion. 1
Outputs
Accumulator Float No Accumulates the remainders in the 0.0
calculation of the Present Value due to the
precision limit of a single floating-point
number. The sum of the Present Value and
the Accumulator provide a double floating-
point expression of the current totalized
value for the block.
Error Since Last Boolean No Indicates any errors that occurred since the False
Reset time of the last Reset. Since the last Reset, if
the block’s Reliability is any value other than
Reliable, this output is set to True. If the
Reset input changes from False to True or a
Reset command is issued, this output is set
to False.
Present Value1 Float Yes Indicates the current value of the block. The 0.0
sum of the Present Value and the
Accumulator provide a double floating-point
expression of the current totalized value for
the block.
Rollover Float No Increments this value by the current value of 0.0
Amount Present Value.
Rollover Count Float No Indicates the value by which the Present 0.0
Value is incremented.
Properties
Period Float N/A Indicates the execution period of this block 60 Seconds
when Setup is Analog Integration or Time in
State.

1448 CCT Help: Logic

 Table 39-600: Totalization (Analog Integration) Block Inputs and Outputs
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Rollover Limit Float N/A Sets a value that automatically rolls over the 10,000
Present Value when the Present Value
exceeds the value (that is, the block adds the
Present Value to the Rollover Amount, adds
1 to the Rollover Count, and sets the Present
Value and Accumulator to 0).
Rollover Mode Enum N/A Indicates the method to automatically No Rollover
rollover the Present Value (that is, the block
adds the Present Value to the Rollover
Amount, add 1 to the Rollover Count, and
sets the Present Value and Accumulator to
0). The rollover method is based on value
(Rollover Limit) or set to No Rollover. When
the Rollover Mode changes, the Rollover
Count and Rollover Amount change to zero.
Setup Enum N/A Indicates the setup of the block. Analog
Integration
Set Name:
Totalization Setup
Stored Float N/A Indicates the persistent Accumulator value.
Accumulator
Stored Present N/A Indicates the persistent Present Value.
Value
Stored Rollover Float N/A Indicates the persistent Rollover Amount.
Amount
Stored Rollover Float N/A Indicates the persistent Rollover Count.
Count

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1449
Totalization (Boolean Event)
The Totalization (Boolean Event) logic block provides totalization to count the
number of occurrences of one state of a Boolean input over time. An example use
is to record how many times a device starts or stops. The following table describes
the inputs and outputs of the Totalization (Boolean Event) logic block.
Table 39-601: Totalization (Boolean Event) Block Inputs and Outputs
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Active Boolean No Prevents or allows the updating of Present True
Value.
Input Boolean Yes Indicates the Input value that the block uses False
to provide totalization.
Reference State Boolean No Adds 1 to the Present Value every time the False
input switches to this Reference State.
Reset Boolean No Resets the Present Value, Accumulator, False
Rollover Count, and Rollover Amount to zero.
Scale Factor Float No Provides unit conversion. 1
Outputs
Accumulator Float No Accumulates the remainders in the 0.0
calculation of the Present Value due to the
precision limit of a single floating-point
number. The sum of the Present Value and
the Accumulator provide a double floating-
point expression of the current totalized value
for the block.
Error Since Last Boolean No Indicates any errors that occurred since the False
Reset time of the last Reset. Since the last Reset, if
the block’s Reliability is any value other than
Reliable, this output is set to True. If the
Reset input changes from False to True or a
Reset command is issued, this output is set
to False.
Present Value1 Float Yes Indicates the current value of the block. The 0.0
sum of the Present Value and the
Accumulator provide a double floating-point
expression of the current totalized value for
the block.
Rollover Float No Increments this value by the current value of 0.0
Amount Present Value.
Rollover Count Float No Indicates the value by which the Present 0.0
Value is incremented.
Properties
Period Float N/A Indicates the execution period of this block 60 Seconds
when Setup is Analog Integration or Time in
State.
Rollover Limit Float N/A Sets a value that automatically rolls over the 10,000
Present Value when the Present Value
exceeds the value (that is, the block adds the
Present Value to the Rollover Amount, adds
1 to the Rollover Count, and sets the Present
Value and Accumulator to 0).

1450 CCT Help: Logic

 Table 39-601: Totalization (Boolean Event) Block Inputs and Outputs
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Rollover Mode Enum N/A Indicates the method to automatically rollover No Rollover
the Present Value (that is, the block adds the
Present Value to the Rollover Amount, add 1
to the Rollover Count, and sets the Present
Value and Accumulator to 0). The rollover
method is based on value (Rollover Limit) or
set to No Rollover. When the Rollover Mode
changes, the Rollover Count and Rollover
Amount change to zero.
Setup Enum N/A Indicates the setup of the block. Event
Totalization
Set Name:
Totalization
Setup
Stored Float N/A Indicates the persistent Accumulator value.
Accumulator
Stored Present N/A Indicates the persistent Present Value.
Value
Stored Rollover Float N/A Indicates the persistent Rollover Amount.
Amount
Stored Rollover Float N/A Indicates the persistent Rollover Count.
Count

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1451
Totalization (Boolean Runtime)
The Totalization (Boolean Runtime) logic block provides tracking of the total time
that a Boolean input resides in a state. An example use is to record the total time a
value is True or False. The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the
Totalization (Boolean Runtime) logic block.
Table 39-602: Totalization (Boolean Runtime) Block Inputs and Outputs
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Active Boolean No Prevents or allows the updating of Present True
Value.
Input Boolean Yes Indicates the Input value that the block uses False
to provide totalization.
Reference State Boolean No Updates the Present Value periodically as False
long as the input stays in the Reference
State.
Reset Boolean No Resets the Present Value, Accumulator, False
Rollover Count, and Rollover Amount to zero.
Scale Factor Float No Provides unit conversion. 1
Outputs
Accumulator Float No Accumulates the remainders in the 0.0
calculation of the Present Value due to the
precision limit of a single floating-point
number. The sum of the Present Value and
the Accumulator provide a double floating-
point expression of the current totalized value
for the block.
Error Since Last Boolean No Indicates any errors that occurred since the False
Reset time of the last Reset. Since the last Reset, if
the block’s Reliability is any value other than
Reliable, this output is set to True. If the
Reset input changes from False to True or a
Reset command is issued, this output is set
to False.
Present Value1 Float Yes Indicates the current value of the block. The 0.0
sum of the Present Value and the
Accumulator provide a double floating-point
expression of the current totalized value for
the block.
Rollover Float No Increments this value by the current value of 0.0
Amount Present Value.
Rollover Count Float No Indicates the value by which the Present 0.0
Value is incremented.
Properties
Period Float N/A Indicates the execution period of this block 60 Seconds
when Setup is Analog Integration or Time in
State.

1452 CCT Help: Logic

 Table 39-602: Totalization (Boolean Runtime) Block Inputs and Outputs
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Rollover Limit Float N/A Sets a value that automatically rolls over the 10,000
Present Value when the Present Value
exceeds the value (that is, the block adds the
Present Value to the Rollover Amount, adds
1 to the Rollover Count, and sets the Present
Value and Accumulator to 0).
Rollover Mode Enum N/A Indicates the method to automatically rollover No Rollover
the Present Value (that is, the block adds the
Present Value to the Rollover Amount, add 1
to the Rollover Count, and sets the Present
Value and Accumulator to 0). The rollover
method is based on value (Rollover Limit) or
set to No Rollover. When the Rollover Mode
changes, the Rollover Count and Rollover
Amount change to zero.
Setup Enum N/A Indicates the setup of the block. Time in State
Set Name:
Totalization
Setup
Stored Float N/A Indicates the persistent Accumulator value.
Accumulator
Stored Present N/A Indicates the persistent Present Value.
Value
Stored Rollover Float N/A Indicates the persistent Rollover Amount.
Amount
Stored Rollover Float N/A Indicates the persistent Rollover Count.
Count

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1453
Totalization (Enum Event)
The Totalization (Enum Event) logic block provides totalization to count the
number of occurrences of one state of an Enum input over time. The following
table describes the inputs and outputs of the Totalization (Enum Event) logic
block.
Table 39-603: Totalization (Enum Event) Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 1
of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Active Boolean No Prevents or allows the updating of Present True
Value.
Input Enum Yes Indicates the Input value that the block uses 1st Enum
to provide totalization.
Reference State Enum No Adds 1 to the Present Value every time the 1st Enum
input switches to this Reference State.
Reset Boolean No Resets the Present Value, Accumulator, False
Rollover Count, and Rollover Amount to zero.
Scale Factor Float No Provides unit conversion. 1
Outputs
Accumulator Float No Accumulates the remainders in the 0.0
calculation of the Present Value due to the
precision limit of a single floating-point
number. The sum of the Present Value and
the Accumulator provide a double floating-
point expression of the current totalized value
for the block.
Error Since Last Boolean No Indicates any errors that occurred since the False
Reset time of the last Reset. Since the last Reset, if
the block’s Reliability is any value other than
Reliable, this output is set to True. If the
Reset input changes from False to True or a
Reset command is issued, this output is set
to False.
Present Value1 Float Yes Indicates the current value of the block. The 0.0
sum of the Present Value and the
Accumulator provide a double floating-point
expression of the current totalized value for
the block.
Rollover Float No Increments this value by the current value of 0.0
Amount Present Value.
Rollover Count Float No Indicates the value by which the Present 0.0
Value is incremented.
Properties
Period Float N/A Indicates the execution period of this block 60 Seconds
when Setup is Analog Integration or Time in
State.
Rollover Limit Float N/A Sets a value that automatically rolls over the 10,000
Present Value when the Present Value
exceeds the value (that is, the block adds the
Present Value to the Rollover Amount, adds
1 to the Rollover Count, and sets the Present
Value and Accumulator to 0).

1454 CCT Help: Logic

 Table 39-603: Totalization (Enum Event) Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 2
of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Rollover Mode Enum N/A Indicates the method to automatically rollover No Rollover
the Present Value (that is, the block adds the
Present Value to the Rollover Amount, add 1
to the Rollover Count, and sets the Present
Value and Accumulator to 0). The rollover
method is based on value (Rollover Limit) or
set to No Rollover. When the Rollover Mode
changes, the Rollover Count and Rollover
Amount change to zero.
Setup Enum N/A Indicates the setup of the block. Event
Totalization
Set Name:
Totalization
Setup
Stored Float N/A Indicates the persistent Accumulator value.
Accumulator
Stored Present N/A Indicates the persistent Present Value.
Value
Stored Rollover Float N/A Indicates the persistent Rollover Amount.
Amount
Stored Rollover Float N/A Indicates the persistent Rollover Count.
Count

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1455
Totalization (Enum Runtime)
The Totalization (Enum Runtime) logic block provides tracking of the total time
that an Enum input resides in a state. An example use is to record the total time a
device is ON or OFF. See Totalization in the Output Controller section for more
information. The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the
Totalization (Enum Runtime) logic block.
Table 39-604: Totalization (Enum Runtime) Block Inputs and Outputs
(Part 1 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Active Boolean No Prevents or allows the updating of True
Present Value.
Input Enum Yes Indicates the Input value that the Enum
block uses to provide totalization.
Reference State Enum No Updates the Present Value 1st Enum
periodically as long as the input
stays in the Reference State.
Reset Boolean No Resets the Present Value, False
Accumulator, Rollover Count, and
Rollover Amount to zero.
Scale Factor Float No Provides unit conversion. 1
Outputs
Accumulator Float No Accumulates the remainders in the 0.0
calculation of the Present Value due
to the precision limit of a single
floating-point number. The sum of
the Present Value and the
Accumulator provide a double
floating-point expression of the
current totalized value for the block.
Error Since Last Boolean No Indicates any errors that occurred False
Reset since the time of the last Reset.
Since the last Reset, if the block’s
Reliability is any value other than
Reliable, this output is set to True. If
the Reset input changes from False
to True or a Reset command is
issued, this output is set to False.
Present Value1 Float Yes Indicates the current value of the 0.0
block. The sum of the Present Value
and the Accumulator provide a
double floating-point expression of
the current totalized value for the
block.
Rollover Float No Increments this value by the current 0.0
Amount value of Present Value.
Rollover Count Float No Indicates the value by which the 0.0
Present Value is incremented.
Properties
Period Float N/A Indicates the execution period of this 60 Seconds
block when Setup is Analog
Integration or Time in State.

1456 CCT Help: Logic

 Table 39-604: Totalization (Enum Runtime) Block Inputs and Outputs
(Part 2 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Rollover Limit Float N/A Sets a value that automatically rolls 10,000
over the Present Value when the
Present Value exceeds the value
(that is, the block adds the Present
Value to the Rollover Amount, adds
1 to the Rollover Count, and sets the
Present Value and Accumulator to
0).
Rollover Mode Enum N/A Indicates the method to No Rollover
automatically rollover the Present
Value (that is, the block adds the
Present Value to the Rollover
Amount, add 1 to the Rollover
Count, and sets the Present Value
and Accumulator to 0). The rollover
method is based on value (Rollover
Limit) or set to No Rollover. When
the Rollover Mode changes, the
Rollover Count and Rollover Amount
change to zero.
Setup Enum N/A Indicates the setup of the block. Time in State
Set Name:
Totalization Setup
Stored Float N/A Indicates the persistent Accumulator
Accumulator value.
Stored Present N/A Indicates the persistent Present
Value Value.
Stored Rollover Float N/A Indicates the persistent Rollover
Amount Amount.
Stored Rollover Float N/A Indicates the persistent Rollover
Count Count.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1457
Compare
The Compare folder in the control block palette contains comparison blocks such
as Greater Than or Not Equal. All compare blocks have three inputs (though the
differential only has influence for floating point comparisons). The blocks
compare input number 1 with input number 2 using the differential (input number
3). The type of comparison depends on the statistical type.
Table 39-605: Compare Blocks (Part 1 of 2)
Type Description Inputs Outputs
Equal (Boolean) Provides equal logic for Boolean inputs. Input 1 (Boolean)1 Present Value
If the inputs are identical, the Present Value is
Input 2 (Boolean)1 (Boolean)1
True. Otherwise, the Present Value is False.
Differential (Float)
Equal (Enum) Provides equal logic for Enumeration (Enum) Input 1 (Enum)1 Present Value
inputs. (Boolean)1
Input 2 (Enum)1
If the inputs are identical, the Present Value is
True. Otherwise, the Present Value is False. Differential (Float)

Equal (Float) Provides equal logic for Floating (Float) inputs. Input 1 (Float)1 Present Value
When the Differential is 0, the numbers must be
Input 2 (Float)1 (Boolean)1
the same for the Present Value to be True. If
the absolute value of Input 1 minus Input 2 is Differential (Float)
greater than half of the Differential, then the
Present Value is False. If the Present Value is
already False, the sign of the difference
between Input 1 and Input 2 must change or
become zero, and the absolute value of the
difference must be less than or equal to half of
the Differential for the Present Value to change
to True.2
Greater Than or Provides greater than or equal logic where Input 1 (Float)1 Present Value
Equal Input 1 must be greater than or equal to Input 2 (Boolean)1
for the Present Value to change to True. If the Input 2 (Float)1
Present Value is already True, Input 1 must be Differential (Float)
less than Input 2 minus the Differential for the
Present Value to change to False.
Greater Than Provides greater than logic where Input 1 must Input 1 (Float)1 Present Value
be greater than Input 2 for the Present Value to (Boolean)1
change to True. If the Present Value is already Input 2 (Float)1
True, Input 1 must be less than or equal to Differential (Float)
Input 2 minus the Differential for the Present
Value to change to False.
Less Than or Provides less than or equal logic where Input 1 Input 1 (Float)1 Present Value
Equal must be less than or equal to Input 2 for the (Boolean)1
Present Value to change to True. If the Present Input 2 (Float)1
Value is already True, Input 1 must be greater Differential (Float)
than Input 2 plus the Differential for the Present
Value to change to False.
Less Than Provides less than logic where Input 1 must be Input 1 (Float)1 Present Value
less than Input 2 for the Present Value to (Boolean)1
change to True. If the Present Value is already Input 2 (Float)1
True, Input 1 must be greater than or equal to Differential (Float)
Input 2 plus the Differential for the Present
Value to change to False.
Not Equal Provides NOT equal logic for Boolean inputs. Input 1 (Boolean)1 Present Value
(Boolean) If the inputs are identical, the Present Value is (Boolean)1
Input 2 (Boolean)1
False. Otherwise, the Present Value is True.
Differential (Float)

1458 CCT Help: Logic

 Table 39-605: Compare Blocks (Part 2 of 2)
Type Description Inputs Outputs
Not Equal (Enum) Provides NOT equal logic for Enumeration Input 1 (Enum)1 Present Value
(Enum) inputs. (Boolean)1
Input 2 (Enum)1
If the inputs are identical, the Present Value is
False. Otherwise, the Present Value is True. Differential (Float)

Not Equal (Float) Provides NOT equal logic for Floating (Float) Input 1 (Float)1 Present Value
inputs. (Boolean)1
Input 2 (Float)1
If the absolute value of Input 1 minus Input 2 is
greater than half of the Differential, then the Differential (Float)
Present Value is True. If the Present Value is
already True, the sign of the difference between
Input 1 and Input 2 must change or become
zero, and the absolute value of the difference
must be less than or equal to half of the
Differential for the Present Value to change to
False. When the Differential is 0, any difference
between Input 1 and Input 2 makes the Present
Value True.2

1. This input or output is exposed for connection by default.

2. This block behaves the same as the Interlock object in the Metasys system extended architecture NAE. See the
following example where the differential equals 2.0. The green upper lines are True, the black lower lines are
False, and the x-axis is the difference between Input 1 and Input 2 (x-axis = Input 1 - Input 2).

True

False
>

<

>=

<=

<>
FIG:Comparison

(Input 1 - Input 2)

Logic 1459
Constant
The Constant folder in the control block palette contains blocks that pass a
constant value to block inputs. Constant blocks can have multiple connections to
the output of the block. Constant blocks can be any one of the following:
Table 39-606: Constant Blocks
Block 1 Description Outputs2
Constant (Boolean) Provides a configurable constant value of Boolean type. Present Value (Boolean)
Constant (Enum) Provides a configurable constant value of Enumeration Present Value (Enum)
(Enum) type.
Constant (Float) Provides a configurable constant value of Floating Present Value (Float)
(Float) type.

1. For a constant block, the current Boolean, Enumeration, or Floating value appears in the header of the block.
2. The outputs of this block are exposed for connection by default.

Container
The Container folder in the control block palette contains the Activity and Hybrid
Activity blocks that act as containers for other blocks.
Table 39-607: Container Blocks
Type Description
Activity Contains additional logic than what is displayed in the current logic
diagram. This block allows you to display only the output in the diagram.
Hybrid Activity Contains state-based logic. You can define different logic for each state in
the chosen enumeration set. You also can add the Hybrid Activity to the
State Tables. For information on working with this block, see Configuring a
Hybrid Activity in the Configuring a System section.

1460 CCT Help: Logic

Control
The Control folder in the control block palette contains blocks that perform or help
configure feedback control algorithms. The Control blocks include:
• MSC Pre-Processor
• PID Pre-Processor
• PID
• PVDC

MSC Pre-Processor
The MSC Pre-Processor logic block provides configuration for the Multistage
Controller. This block also filters the Process Variable of a PID when it is used in
conjunction with the Multistage Controller to control staged (discrete) devices.
The MSC Pre-Processor is connected between the PID Pre-Processor and the PID
to adjust the default tuning data based on the constraints of controlling a set of
staged devices.
Note: An external deadband is required for the process variable when using the
MSC with the adaptive tuning feature of the PID. For proper configuration of
the PID Pre-Processor with the MSC Pre-Processor and PID, see the Cooling Staged
Outputs and Heating Staged Outputs modules (that is, view their logic).
The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the MSC Pre-Processor
logic block.
Table 39-608: MSC Pre-Processor Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 1 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Max Capacity Float No Indicates the ratio of the largest capacity 0.33%
Fraction device to the sum of all of the device Display
capacities. This value is obtained from the Precision: 100ths
MSC module.
Min Off Time Float No Indicates the requested minimum time that an 120 Seconds
output must remain Off before being
reactivated to an On condition following
deactivation.
Min On Time Float No Indicates the requested minimum time 240 Seconds
interval that an output must remain On before
being deactivated to an Off condition
following activation.
Minimum Tune Float Yes Provides a value used to determine the Eff 0.0
Band Min Tune Band if User Overwrite Minimum
Tune Band is set to True.
Process Range Float Yes Indicates the range of the process. 22, 40
Process Float Yes Indicates the value from the area being 0.0
Variable controlled. This value typically comes from a
sensor or after some signal processing is
passed to the MSC Pre-Processor block.

Logic 1461
 Table 39-608: MSC Pre-Processor Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 2 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Time Constant Float Yes Indicates the dominant time constant of the 720 Seconds
process.
Units Enum No Contains the units for the Process Variable, Deg C, Deg F
Process Range, Minimum Tune Band,
Present Value, and Eff Min Tune Band.
Outputs
Eff Min Off Time Float No Indicates the minimum time interval that an 120 Seconds
output must remain Off before being
reactivated to an On condition following
deactivation. This value is always greater
than or equal to the Min Off Time.
Eff Min On Time Float No Indicates the minimum time interval that an 240 Seconds
output must remain On before being
deactivated to an Off condition following
activation. This value is always greater than
or equal to the Min On Time.
Eff Min Tune Float No Provides the Minimum Tune Band used by 10, 16
Band the PID algorithm and the control band used
by the PMAC algorithm.
Eff Time Float No Provides the time constant used by the PID 720 Seconds
Constant and PMAC algorithms.
Interval Float No Indicates the period for this block and for the 24 Seconds
MSC's PMAC Interval. The calculation for the
Interval must truncate the resulting value to
an integer.
Present Value1 Float Yes Indicates the current output of the MSC Pre- 0.0
Processor block. This value is the filtered
Process Variable.
Properties
Min Period Number N/A Indicates the shortest period that can be 1 Second
executed.
PMAC Number N/A Indicates the number of PMAC executions per 30
Executions Time Constant.
Settling Time Number N/A Indicates the being used with the EWMA to 720 Seconds
filter the Process Variable.
Standard Boolean N/A Indicates whether to use the default True
Minimum Tune calculation for the Eff Min Tune Band or to
Band use the user-defined Minimum Tune Band to
determine the Eff Min Tune Band.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

1462 CCT Help: Logic

PID Pre-Processor
The PID Pre-Processor logic block provides a way to look up key process data
information for the PID block. If controlling a proportional device, the outputs of
the PID Pre-Processor are connected to the PID directly.
See the Cooling Proportional Valve, Heating Proportional Valve, Cooling Staged
Outputs, and Heating Staged Outputs sections for examples of how this block is
used.
The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the PID Pre-Processor
logic block. Also, see the Process ID Configuration Restrictions table.
Table 39-609: PID Pre-Processor Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 1 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Process Dead Float No Specifies the time required for the process to 72 Seconds
Time begin to reflect the results of a step change.
Process ID1 Enum No Specifies the process being controlled. For ZN-T
each Process Identifier, only a certain set of
units is allowed (see Process ID
Configuration Restrictions). If the Process
Identifier is set to a value that does align with
the current Units, the block’s reliability is set
to Input Out of Range and the logic
continues to use the last reliable value.
However, if Standard Tuning is False, the
Process ID and Units inputs are ignored, the
block is Reliable, and the outputs are
calculated based on the current values of the
Process Time Constant, Process Dead Time,
and Process Range inputs.
If a process ID is not available for the
particular process being controlled, then
choose a process ID with a similar dynamic
response and units.
Process Range Float No Indicates the range that the PID Process 22, 40
Variable traverses as the PID Present Value
varies between its minimum and maximum
values. For example, when the Process
Variable ranges between 60 and 90 degrees
due to the PID Present Value varying from its
Low Limit to its High Limit, then Process
Range is set to 30 (|60 - 90|).
Standard Boolean No Indicates whether to use standard process True
Tuning data or to directly pass the process data
inputs to the corresponding outputs.
If the Standard Tuning input is False or the
Process Identifier is Other, the block passes
the Time Constant, Process Dead Time, and
Process Range directly to their corresponding
effective outputs.
Time Constant Float No Indicates the time required for a system to 720 Seconds
reach 63% of its final magnitude given a
100% step change.

Logic 1463
 Table 39-609: PID Pre-Processor Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 2 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Units Enum No Specifies the units used for the process being Deg C, Deg F
controlled. For each Process Identifier, only a
certain set of units is allowed (see Process ID
Configuration Restrictions). If the Process
Identifier is set to a value that does align with
the current Units, the block’s reliability is set
to Input Out of Range and the logic
continues to use the last reliable value.
However, if Standard Tuning is False, the
Process ID and Units inputs are ignored, the
block is Reliable, and the outputs are
calculated based on the current values of the
Process Time Constant, Process Dead Time,
and Process Range inputs.
Outputs
Eff Process Float Yes Indicates the dead time determined by the 72 Seconds
Dead Time block to pass to the PID.
Eff Process Float Yes Indicates the process range determined by 22, 40
Range the block to pass to the PID.
Eff Time Float Yes Indicates the time constant determined by the 720 Seconds
Constant block to pass to the PID.
Minimum Tune Float Yes Indicates the region around the PID setpoint 0.88, 1.6
Band that the PRAC+ does not attempt to tune.
Properties
Output Float N/A Provides a value equal to the resolution of the 0.01
Resolution digital to analog converter for the process
output. This value is used to calculate the
Minimum Tune Band.
The Output Resolution is calculated as 1/100
based on the worst case number of steps for
a 0-10V actuator with a 0.1V response
resolution.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Process ID Configuration Restrictions

Table 39-610: Process ID Configuration Restrictions
Process IDs Allowed Process Units Process Range Used
CHWS-T HEX, CHWS-T Mixing, CWS-T, DA-T, Deg C, Deg F, K No
HWS-T HW HEX, HWS-T Mixing, HWS-T Steam
HEX, MA-T, ZN-T
DA-H, RA-H, ZN-H % RH No
Bldg Static, Duct Static, Pump Diff P Pa, in w.c., Psi, kPa No
Airflow % % No
Airflow, Airflow Diff cu m/h, cfm, l/s Yes
Other 1 Any type of units are allowed. Yes

1. Setting the Process ID to Other requires configuration of the Time Constant, Process Dead Time, and Process
Range inputs.

1464 CCT Help: Logic

PID
The Proportional, Integral, and Derivative Control (PID) logic block provides
feedback control operation to minimize the error between two inputs by adjusting
its Present Value.
Direct acting control is used in applications where an increase in the process
variable causes the controller’s Present Value to increase. An example of direct
acting control is temperature control with a cooling coil. With reverse acting
control (Direct Acting = False), an increase in the process variable causes the
controller’s Present Value to decrease.
Examples of reverse acting control include:
• temperature control with a heating coil applications
• flow rate control applications
• static pressure control applications
See the Cooling Proportional Valve, Heating Proportional Valve, Cooling Staged
Outputs, and Heating Staged Outputs sections for examples of how this block is
used.
The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the PID logic block.
Table 39-611: PID Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 1 of 6)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default
Type Connection Value
by Default
Inputs
Adaptive Tuning Boolean No Determines if adaptive tuning is allowed to True
operate. When set to False, adaptive-tuning is
disabled. When set to True and the Manual
Tuning property is False, PRAC+ is enabled,
which may result in runtime changes to the Eff
Proportional Band and Eff Integral Time.
Direct Acting Boolean No Signals the action of the PID (True= Direct Acting True
and False= Reverse Acting).
High Limit Float No Indicates the maximum value the PID Present 100.0
Value can assume. If the High Limit is set to a
value less than the Low Limit, the block’s reliability
is set to Input Out of Range and the logic
continues to use the last reliable pair of values.
See description for Low Limit for the behavior
when High Limit equals the Low Limit.

Logic 1465
 Table 39-611: PID Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 2 of 6)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default
Type Connection Value
by Default
Low Limit Float No Indicates the minimum value the PID Present 0.0
Value can assume. The Low Limit must be less
than or equal to the High Limit. If the Low Limit is
set to a value greater than the High Limit, the
block’s reliability is set to Input Out of Range and
the logic sets the Present Value to the Low Limit;
otherwise, the block behaves as if the limits are
equal.
If the Low Limit is set to the same value as the
High Limit, the logic sets the Present Value to this
value and calculates the Saturation Status. The
Saturation Status calculation is based on the
current value for the Setpoint, Process Variable,
and Direct Acting inputs (If these inputs are equal,
the block’s Reliability is not set to Input Out of
Range).
When Direct Acting is True, if the Process
Variable is less than the Setpoint, the block sets
the Saturation Status to Low. If the Process
Variable is greater than the Setpoint, the block
sets the Saturation Status to High. If the Process
Variable is equal to the Setpoint, the Saturation
Status is set to Normal. When Direct Acting is
False, the opposite behavior occurs (Saturation
Status is High if the Process Variable is less than
the Setpoint and vice versa).
When the limits are equal, the block may execute
on any input change or on the block’s normal
periodic interval. The Error and Execution Count
are updated when the block executes its logic.
The diagnostic outputs (EWMAs) are held at their
last values. The PRAC function is skipped and the
PRAC Status output is set to Normal.
Minimum Tune Float Yes Indicates the region around the Setpoint that the 0.88, 1.6
Band PRAC+ does not attempt to tune. The PID Pre-
Processor and PMAC Pre-Processor blocks
calculate this value based on the outputs being
controlled.
Offset Float No Indicates the value added to the sum of the 0.0
proportional term, integral term, and derivative
term used to generate the Present Value. The
Present Value equals the Offset when the
proportional, integral, and derivative terms are
equal to zero. The Offset has no effect for PI or
PID control (that is, the Offset’s effect is negated
by the bumpless transfer to the Startup Value).
Process Dead Float Yes Indicates the time required for the process to 72 Seconds
Time begin to reflect the results of a step change. When
the Manual Tuning property is False, this input is
used to calculate the initial tuning setup.

1466 CCT Help: Logic

 Table 39-611: PID Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 3 of 6)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default
Type Connection Value
by Default
Process Range Float Yes Indicates the magnitude of the range that the 22.0, 40.0
Process Variable traverses as the Present Value
of the PID varies between its minimum and
maximum values. For example, when the Process
Variable ranges between 60 and 90 degrees due
to the PID Present Value varying from its Low
Limit to its High Limit, then Process Range is set
to 30 (|60 - 90|). When the Manual Tuning
property is False, this input is used to calculate the
initial tuning setup.
Process Float Yes Indicates the value from the area being controlled. 0.0
Variable This value typically comes from a sensor or after
some signal processing is passed to the PID
block.
Setpoint Float No Indicates the value in which the PID controls the 0.0
Process Variable.
Startup Value Float No Allows this block to get the latest value of the 0.0
output, Present Value, when the block switches
from one control strategy to another. This value is
required for a bump-less transition from one
control strategy to another. If an integration is
being used, this value is used to set the Present
Value at initial startup and at restart.
Time Constant Float Yes Indicates the time required for a system to reach 720 Seconds
63% of its final magnitude given a 100% step
change. When the Manual Tuning property is
False, this input is used to calculate the initial
tuning setup.
Outputs
Absolute Effort Float No Provides an EWMA value of 100 x ABS (Current 0.0%
EWMA Present Value - Last Present Value) / (High Limit -
Low Limit).
Absolute Error Float No Provides an EWMA value for the absolute value of 0.0
EWMA (Setpoint - Process Variable).
Eff Integral Time Float No Indicates the value the PID is currently using for 729.0
the integral tuning value. This value may be Seconds
updated by PRAC+ during execution.
Eff Proportional Float No Indicates the value the PID is currently using for 16.0, 28.8
Band the proportional tuning value. This value may be
updated by PRAC+ during execution.
Error Float No Indicates the difference between the Setpoint and 0.0
Process Variable (offset by DB/2 if the Eff
Deadband is not zero). This value is updated at
each execution.
Error EWMA Float No Provides an EWMA value of the difference 0.0
(Setpoint - Process Variable).
Execution Float No Indicates the number of executions performed by 0.0
Count the PID. This value is incremented by 1 at every
execution and is rolled over to 0 after reaching the
maximum floating-point value.

Logic 1467
 Table 39-611: PID Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 4 of 6)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default
Type Connection Value
by Default
PRAC Status Enum No Indicates the results of the most recent PRAC+ Normal
calculation execution:
• Normal: Normal operation
• Monitoring Setpoint Change: Feature
extraction following large setpoint change in
progress
• Monitoring Load Disturbance: Feature
extraction following large load disturbance in
progress
• Tuning NOT Updated: Insignificant pattern or
control output saturated observed
• Normal Tuning Update: New gain and integral
time have been computed
• Gain Decreased: New decreased gain
computed because of fast oscillations
Present Value1 Float Yes Indicates the current output of the PID block. This 0.0
value is typically passed to an actuator to provide
repositioning information or provides the setpoint
to another PID block when using cascaded control
loops. The Present Value equals the sum of the
proportional, integral, derivative, and offset terms.
Present Value Float No Provides an EWMA of the current Present Value 0.0%
EWMA scaled to a percent where the Percent Present
Value = 100.0 x (Present Value - Low Limit) /
(High Limit - Low Limit).
Saturation Enum Yes Indicates the current operational status of the PID Normal
Status block. This value is based on the output and the
amount of time that the output is at the high or low
limits. The Saturation Status is set to Normal the
first execution after the PID is Enabled (or
Re-Enabled). The Saturation Status is Normal for
at least one execution after returning from a non-
Normal state. For example, if the Saturation
Status is Timing High and the Present Value
becomes equal to the Low Limit, the Saturation
Status is Normal for one execution before
transitioning to Timing Low at the next execution.
Note: The Enumeration Set for Saturation Status
contains the Overridden state, but the PID
does not set this attribute to that value. The
Overridden state is used by other
applications.
Properties
Actual Period Float N/A Indicates the actual instantaneous period of 120 Seconds
execution, measured as the actual time between
successive executions of the PID algorithm. This
value is not computed after the first periodic
execution (startup, restart, or enable after
disable), in which case the value is assigned the
value of Eff Period.
Deadband Float N/A Sets the Eff Deadband when Manual Tuning is 0.0
True. This value is a band centered around the
Setpoint where the error is considered zero (+/-
DB/2).

1468 CCT Help: Logic

 Table 39-611: PID Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 5 of 6)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default
Type Connection Value
by Default
Derivative Time Float N/A Sets the Eff Derivative Time when Manual Tuning 0 Seconds
is True. The Derivative Time must be zero (to
disable the derivative action) or must be greater
than 10 times the Interval. This derivative term is
calculated using a first-order finite-difference filter.
For a stable filter, the Derivative Time must be
greater than the time constant chosen for the filter.
The filter time constant chosen for the PID is 8.0 x
Actual Period, but the limit is set for 10 times to
give a factor of safety for stability in cases where
the Actual Period is greater than the Interval.
Eff Deadband Float N/A Indicates the value the PID uses for the 0.0
Deadband. When Manual Tuning is False, this
value is set to zero. Otherwise, this value is set to
the value of the configurable Deadband property.
Eff Derivative Float N/A Indicates the value the PID uses for the derivative 0 Seconds
Time tuning value. When Manual Tuning is False, this
value is set to zero. Otherwise, this value is set to
the value of the configurable Derivative Time
property.
Eff Period Float N/A Indicates the value the PID uses for the period. 120 Seconds
Eff Saturation Float N/A Indicates the value the PID uses for the saturation 720 Seconds
Time time limit. When Manual Tuning is False, this
value is calculated as 262 + 0.6364 x Time
Constant. Otherwise, this value is set to the value
of the configurable Saturation Time property.
Integral Time Float N/A Sets the Eff Integral Time when Manual Tuning is 729 Seconds
True. This value is the time required by the
integral action to contribute the same amount to
the controller output as the proportional term for a
constant error. The Integral Time must be zero (to
disable the integral action) or must be between 2
and 30 times the Interval.
Interval Float N/A Sets the Eff Period when Manual Tuning is True. 120 Seconds
This value is the time period between normal PID
algorithm executions.
Manual Tuning Boolean N/A Indicates whether to use the process-based False
tuning calculations or the manual tuning
properties. When True, the Setpoint Differential is
used to decide when a large setpoint change
occurs and the Eff Proportional Band, Eff Integral
Time, Eff Derivative Time, Eff Saturation Time,
and Eff Period are set based on the corresponding
configurable properties. When False, these tuning
parameters and some additional parameters
required by PRAC+ (Eff Min/Max Prop Band) are
calculated based on the Process Range, Time
Constant, and Process Dead Time. PRAC+ is
disabled when Manual Tuning is True.
PRAC Integral Float N/A Stores the last PRAC+ update to the Eff Integral 729 Seconds
Time Time.
PRAC Prop Float N/A Stores the last PRAC+ update to the Eff 16.0, 28.8
Band Proportional Band.

Logic 1469
 Table 39-611: PID Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 6 of 6)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default
Type Connection Value
by Default
Proportional Float N/A Sets the Eff Proportional Band when Manual 16.0, 28.8
Band Tuning is True. This value is the amount of
change in the Process Variable that produces a
full range change (High Limit - Low Limit) in the
Present Value. This value must be a positive
number, and must be greater than zero. The
action is set using the Direct Acting input rather
than by the sign of the Proportional Band.
Saturation Time Float N/A Sets the Eff Saturation Time when Manual Tuning 720 Seconds
is True. This value is the duration the Present
Value must meet or exceed either the Low or High
Limit for the saturation status to be set to Low or
High.
Setpoint Float N/A Determines when a setpoint change is large 1.0, 1.8
Differential enough for immediate execution when Manual
Tuning is True.
Smoothing Float N/A Indicates the value used in the EWMA calculation. 3.703704 E-
Constant 03
1/270
Tuning Updated Boolean N/A Indicates if PRAC+ has updated the tuning False
parameters.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

1470 CCT Help: Logic

PVDC
The PVDC logic block provides a positional percent as an output to an actuator
based on a desired flow setpoint, a measured flow, and a current position
controlling the flow. This block uses a fixed gain, proportional-only feedback
design for systems with constant-rate actuators. The PVDC has the integrating
effect that incremental motor actuators use to provide stable operation given the
nonlinear flow through a damper or a valve.
Set the PVDC configuration parameters to reflect the characteristics of the
environment. The output is sent to the object that controls the actuator, typically a
Position Adjust Output (PAO) object. Configure the PAO object consistently with
the PVDC block.
See the Damper Control (VAV Supply) section for examples of how this block is
used.
The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the PVDC logic block.
Table 39-612: PVDC Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 1 of 3)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Effective Stroke Float No Indicates the effective time the actuator 60 Seconds
Time requires to drive the damper from 0 to
100%.
For proper operation, this input must be
configured based on the actual time it
takes the actuator to drive the damper.
Depending on the range of motion for a
given VAV box, this value may be a
fraction of the full actuator stroke time
(for example, 1/2 of the 90 degree stroke
time for a 45 degree damper).
Flow Float Yes Indicates the measured volumetric flow, 0.0
or the difference between two volumetric
flow measurements (for example, the
exhaust flow and the supply flow).
Flow Setpoint Float No Indicates the desired amount of flow or 0.0
the desired flow difference requested of
the controller.
Maximum Flow Float No Indicates the maximum flow that can be 0.0
delivered by the box. You should typically
set this value to the maximum flow
required by the zone. However, you may
need to set this value to the actual
manufacturer-rated volume flow rate at a
nominal static pressure (for example, 1
in.w.g. or 250 Pa).
Min Pulse Width Float No Indicates the minimum pulse allowed for 0.1 Seconds
the motor actuator.
Smooth Factor Float No Indicates the internal filter weight used 0.015
for estimating the standard deviation of Range: Greater than 0
the flow error. and less than 1

Logic 1471
 Table 39-612: PVDC Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 2 of 3)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Startup Value Float No Indicates the startup value of PVDC 0.0%
output. This value is used when startup
or restart is the value of the PVDC
Present Value.
Outputs
Absolute Effort Float No Provides an EWMA value for the 0.0%
EWMA absolute value of the controller effort.
Absolute Error Float No Provides an EWMA value for the 0.0
EWMA absolute value of the flow error (flow
setpoint - flow measurement).
Error EWMA Float No Indicates the EWMA value of the flow 0.0
error (flow setpoint - flow measurement).
Present Value1 Float Yes Indicates the position, in percentage of 0.0%
maximum output, being requested by the
PVDC Controller of the motor actuator.
The Present Value is limited from 0 to
100%. When the calculation results in a
value beyond a limit, the Present Value
should be set to that limit.
Present Value Float No Indicates the EWMA value of the Present 0.0%
EWMA Value.
Saturation Enum Yes Indicates the current operational status of Normal
Status the PVDC block. This value is based on
the output and the amount of time that
the output is at the high or low limits
(100% or 0%, respectively). The
Saturation Status is set to Normal the
first execution after the PVDC is Enabled
(or Re-Enabled). The Saturation Status is
Normal for at least one execution after
returning from a non-Normal state. For
example, if the Saturation Status is
Timing High and the Present Value
becomes equal to the Low Limit, the
Saturation Status is Normal for one
execution before transitioning to Timing
Low at the next execution.
Note: The Enumeration Set for
Saturation Status contains the
Overridden state, but the PVDC
does not set this attribute to that
value. The Overridden state is
used by other applications.
Properties
Actual Period Float N/A Indicates the actual instantaneous period 1 Second
of execution, measured as the actual
time between successive periodic
executions of the PVDC algorithm. This
value is not computed after the first
periodic execution (startup, restart, or
enable after disable) or when the block
executes for any other reason (for
example, when an input changes value).
Dynamic Float N/A Indicates the smoothed Deadzone value. 0.0
Deadband

1472 CCT Help: Logic

 Table 39-612: PVDC Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 3 of 3)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Interval Number N/A Indicates the execution period of PVDC 1 Second
block.
Noise Estimate Float N/A Indicates the smoothed standard 0.0
deviation of the measured flow.
Smoothing Float N/A Indicates the value used in the EWMA 5.556 E-4
Constant calculation

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1473
Math
The Math folder in the control block palette contains blocks that perform
mathematical functions on one or more inputs, producing a single output. The
number of inputs to a Math block depends on the number of inputs supported by
the type of math function. The Logic View allows you to add multiple connections
to the output of the block.
Table 39-613: Math Blocks
Type Description Inputs (Float)1 Outputs (Float)1
Absolute Value Absolute Value I1 Present Value
ACOS2 Arc Cosine I1 Present Value
Add Add I1 Present Value
I2
New Port
ASIN2 Arc Sine I1 Present Value

ATAN2 Arc Tangent I1 Present Value

COS2 Cosine I1 Present Value

Divide Divide (I1/I2) I1 Present Value
I2
Exp Exponent (eI1) I1 Present Value
LOG Natural Log (LN, LOGe, I1 Present Value
or LOG base e)
LOG10 LOG10 I1 Present Value
Multiply Multiply I1 Present Value
I2
New Port
Negate Negative I1 Present Value
Power Power (I1 I2) I1 Present Value
I2
SIN2 Sine I1 Present Value
SQRT Square Root I1 Present Value
Subtract Subtract I1 Present Value
I2
TAN2 Tangent I1 Present Value

1. The inputs and outputs of this block are exposed for connection by default.
2. This block uses radians instead of degrees. To convert from degrees to radians, multiply the value
by 0.0174533, that is, pi/180.

1474 CCT Help: Logic

Psychrometric
The Psychrometric folder in the control block palette contains blocks that perform
psychrometric functions on the defined inputs, producing a single output. The
Psychrometric blocks include:
• Absolute Humidity
• Dew Point
• Enthalpy
• Free Cooling is Available
• Relative Humidity
• Wet Bulb

Absolute Humidity
The Absolute Humidity logic block calculates the density of the water vapor
element of air. The absolute humidity is the ratio of the mass of water vapor to
volume. The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the Absolute
Humidity logic block.
Table 39-614: Absolute Humidity Block Inputs and Outputs
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Dry Bulb Float Yes Indicates the temperature of air as 25 Deg F, 77 Deg C
Temperature measured with a simple thermometer.
Relative Float Yes Indicates the relative humidity of air. 50%
Humidity Range: 0-100%
Outputs
Absolute Float Yes Indicates the density of water vapor in air. 11.5, 0.000718
Humidity1 Units: lb/c ft, g/c m
Properties
Unit Set Enum N/A Indicates the units of measurement used by SI, IP
the block.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1475
Dew Point
The Dew Point logic block calculates the dew point temperature of air. The
following table describes the inputs and outputs of the Dew Point logic block.
Table 39-615: Dew Point Block Inputs and Outputs
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Dry Bulb Float Yes Indicates the temperature of air as 25 Deg F, 77 Deg C
Temperature measured with a simple thermometer.
Relative Float Yes Indicates the relative humidity of air. 50%
Humidity Range: 0-100%
Outputs
Dew Point Float Yes Indicates the dew point temperature of air, 14.0 Deg F, 57.0
Temperature1 which is the temperature at which moisture Deg C
condenses out of the air.
Properties
Unit Set Enum N/A Indicates the units of measurement used by SI, IP
the block.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

1476 CCT Help: Logic

Enthalpy
The Enthalpy logic block calculates the enthalpy of air given dry bulb temperature
and either relative humidity or dew point temperature as configured by the Setup
attribute found in the Basic Details dialog box of the block.
Table 39-616: Enthalpy Block Inputs and Outputs
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Dew Point Float Yes Indicates the dew point temperature of 14.0 Deg F, 57.0 Deg C
Temperature air, which is the temperature at which
moisture condenses out of the air. If the
Setup property is DP, this input
represents the air dew point
temperature that is used to calculate
Enthalpy. If the Setup property is RH,
this input is ignored.
Dry Bulb Float Yes Indicates the temperature of air as 25 Deg F, 77 Deg C
Temperature measured with a simple thermometer.
Elevation Float No Indicates the distance above or below 0 ft, 0 m
sea level. Below sea level is
represented with a negative value.
Relative Float Yes Indicates the relative humidity of air. If 50%
Humidity the Setup property is RH, this input Range: 0-100%
represents the air relative humidity that
is used to calculate Enthalpy. If the
Setup property is DP, this input is
ignored.
Outputs
Enthalpy1 Float Yes Indicates the air enthalpy. 50.0 Btu/lb, 21.5 kJ/kg
Properties
Setup Enum N/A Indicates if relative humidity or dew RH
point temperature is used as the second
independent variable to calculate
Enthalpy.
Unit Set Enum N/A Indicates the units of measurement SI, IP
used by the block.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1477
Free Cooling is Available
The Free Cooling is Available logic block provides economizer decision logic to
determine when outdoor air, in excess of the minimum amount required for
ventilation, can be used to reduce the cooling coil load.
The output is evaluated when the Supply Fan Status input changes and then
subsequently only on its Interval (configurable property in the Advanced Details
dialog box). This block does not constantly calculate its outputs as the inputs
change.
Different methods include:
• Dry Bulb Temperature Economizer where if the supply fan is running and
the Outside Air Temp is less than the Change Over Temp, then Free Cooling
Available is True.
• Temperature and Enthalpy Economizer where measurements of Outside
Air Temp, Outside Air Humidity, Return Air Temp, and Return Air Humidity
are used to calculate the enthalpy of the outside air and return air streams. Free
Cooling Available is True when:
- the supply fan is running
- the calculated outside air enthalpy is less than the calculated return air
enthalpy
- the outside air dry bulb temperature is less than the return air dry bulb
temperature
• Model Based Economizer where measurements of Outside Air Temp,
Outside Air Humidity, Return Air Temp, and Return Air Humidity as well as
an estimate of the temperature leaving the cooling coil are used for
calculations.
The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the Free Cooling is
Available logic block.
Table 39-617: Free Cooling is Available Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 1
of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Bypass Percent Float No Indicates the percent of air passing through 20%
the coil that is unaffected by the coil (%). Range: 0-50%
This value is used for the Model-Based
Economizer Type.
Change Over Float No Indicates the change over dry bulb 20.0 Deg F, 68.0
Temperature temperature used to determine if free Deg C
cooling is available for the Dry Bulb
Temperature economizer option.
Cooling Float Yes Indicates the effective discharge air 12.0 Deg F, 55.0
Discharge temperature for the cooling coil. This value Deg C
Temperature is used for the Model-Based Economizer
Type.

1478 CCT Help: Logic

 Table 39-617: Free Cooling is Available Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 2
of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Economizer Enum Yes Allows you to select the type of economizer Temperature &
Type logic. Enthalpy
Elevation Float No Indicates the distance above or below sea 0
level in m or ft. This value is used in the
psychrometric calculations performed for
Economizer Type = Temperature &
Enthalpy or Model Based.
Min OA Percent Float No Indicates the percent (%) of maximum 20%
supply fan flow rate required for the Range: 0-100%
minimum amount of ventilation air.
Outside Air Float Yes Indicates the Relative Humidity of the 50%
Humidity outside air. Range: 0-100%
Outside Air Float Yes Indicates the dry bulb temperature of the 25 Deg F, 77 Deg C
Temp outside air stream.
Return Air Float Yes Indicates the Relative Humidity of the return 50%
Humidity air. Range: 0-100%
Return Air Temp Float Yes Indicates the dry bulb temperature of the 20.0 Deg F, 68.0
return air stream. Deg C
Supply Fan Boolean Yes Indicates the operating status of the AHU False
Status supply fan (Running = True, Off = False).
Unit Set Enum No Indicates the units of measurement to use SI, IP
in CCT.
Outputs
Free Cooling Boolean Yes Indicates the following: False
Available1 • This output is True when increasing the
volume of outside air can reduce the
cooling coil load.
• This output is False when the volume of
outside air should be at the minimum
required for ventilation.
Properties
Interval Float N/A Indicates the time between scheduled 900 Seconds
executions of the block.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1479
Relative Humidity
The Relative Humidity logic block calculates the Relative Humidity of air given
dry bulb temperature and either the dew point or wet bulb temperature. The
following table describes the inputs and outputs of the Relative Humidity logic
block.
Table 39-618: Relative Humidity Block Inputs and Outputs
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Dew Point Float No Indicates the dew point temperature of air, 14.0 Deg F, 57.0
Temperature which is the temperature at which moisture Deg C
condenses out of the air. If the Setup
property is DP, this input represents the air
dew point temperature that is used to
calculate Enthalpy. If the Setup property is
WB, this input is ignored.
Dry Bulb Float Yes Indicates the temperature of air as 25 Deg F, 77 Deg C
Temperature measured with a simple thermometer.
Elevation Float No Indicates the distance above or below sea 0 ft, 0 m
level. Below sea level is represented with a
negative value.
Wet Bulb Float No Indicates the wet bulb temperature. If the 18.0 Deg F, 64.4
Temperature Setup property is WB, this input represents Deg C
the air wet bulb temperature that is used to
calculate Relative Humidity. If the Setup
property is DP, this input is ignored.
Outputs
Relative Float Yes Indicates the relative humidity of air. 50%
Humidity1 Range: 0-100%
Properties
Setup Enum N/A Indicates if wet bulb or dew point WB
temperature is used as the second
independent variable to calculate Relative
Humidity.
Unit Set Enum N/A Indicates the units of measurement used by SI, IP
the block.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

1480 CCT Help: Logic

Wet Bulb
The Wet Bulb logic block calculates the wet bulb temperature of air given dry bulb
temperature and either relative humidity or dew point temperature as configured
by the Setup attribute found in the Basic Details dialog box of the block. This
block calculates the saturation temperature, which is a very close approximation to
the thermodynamic wet bulb temperature. The following table describes the inputs
and outputs of the Wet Bulb logic block.
Table 39-619: Wet Bulb Block Inputs and Outputs
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Dew Point Float No Indicates the dew point temperature of air, 14.0 Deg F, 57.0
Temperature which is the temperature at which moisture Deg C
condenses out of the air. If the Setup
property is DP, this input represents the air
dew point temperature that is used to
calculate Enthalpy. If the Setup property is
RH, this input is ignored.
Dry Bulb Float Yes Indicates the temperature of air as 25 Deg F, 77 Deg C
Temperature measured with a simple thermometer.
Elevation Float No Indicates the distance above or below sea 0 ft, 0 m
level. Below sea level is represented with a
negative value.
Relative Float Yes Indicates the relative humidity of air. If the 50%
Humidity Setup property is RH, this input represents Range: 0-100%
the air relative humidity that is used to
calculate the wet-bulb temperature. If the
Setup property is DP, this input is ignored.
Outputs
Wet Bulb Float Yes Indicates the wet bulb temperature. The wet 18.0 Deg F, 64.4
Temperature1 bulb temperature is the adiabatic saturation Deg C
temperature defined as the temperature at
which water, by evaporating into air, brings
the air to saturation at the same
temperature.
Properties
Setup Enum N/A Indicates if relative humidity or dew point RH
temperature is used as the second
independent variable to calculate wet bulb
temperature.
Unit Set Enum N/A Indicates the units of measurement used by SI, IP
the block.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1481
Selection
The Selection folder in the control block palette contains Command Hierarchy and
MUX blocks that perform multiplexing for 2 inputs and one mode input,
producing a single output. Based on the current mode assigned to each input, the
selector chooses which input to pass through to the output. The Logic View allows
you to add multiple connections to the output of the block. You must double-click
a Selection block to configure it (for example, to specify the number of input ports
for a MUX block or to add and delete input ports in a Command Hierarchy block).
See Configuring the MUX Block, Configuring the Command Hierarchy Block, and
Configuring the Translation Blocks in the Configuring a System section.
Table 39-620: Selection Blocks
Type Description Inputs1 Outputs1
Boolean to Enum Provides a pre-configured Command I1 (Boolean) State (Enum)
Translation Hierarchy block with a single Boolean
input translated to an Enumeration
(Enum) output.
Command Hierarchy Provides truth table evaluation capability I1 (Enum) State (Boolean)
(Boolean Output) to convert or resolve multiple inputs into I2 (Boolean)
a single output State of Boolean type.
Command Hierarchy Provides truth table evaluation capability I1 (Enum) State (Enum)
(Enum Output) to convert or resolve multiple inputs into I2 (Boolean)
a single output State of Enumeration
(Enum) type.
Enum to Boolean Provides a pre-configured Command I1 (Enum) State (Boolean)
Translation Hierarchy block with a single
Enumeration (Enum) input translated to
a Boolean output.
MUX (Boolean IO, Provides source-switching operation. A Mode (Boolean) Present Value
Boolean Mode) Multiplexor is equivalent to a switch, I1 (Boolean) (Boolean)
which directs one of the Inputs, based I2 (Boolean)
on the Mode, to the Present Value.
This block has Boolean inputs and a
Boolean mode.
MUX (Boolean IO, Enum Same as previous, except this block has Mode (Enum) Present Value
Mode) Boolean inputs and an Enumeration I1 (Boolean) (Boolean)
(Enum) mode. I2 (Boolean)
MUX (Enum IO, Boolean Same as previous, except this block has Mode (Boolean) Present Value
Mode) Enumeration (Enum) inputs and a I1 (Enum) (Enum)
Boolean mode. I2 (Enum)
MUX (Enum IO, Enum Same as previous, except this block has Mode (Enum) Present Value
Mode) Enumeration (Enum) inputs and an I1 (Enum) (Enum)
Enumeration mode. I2 (Enum)
MUX (Float IO, Boolean Same as previous, except this block has Mode (Boolean) Present Value
Mode) Floating (Float) inputs and a Boolean I1 (Float) (Float)
mode. I2 (Float)
MUX (Float IO, Enum Same as previous, except this block has Mode (Enum) Present Value
Mode) Floating (Float) inputs and an I1 (Float) (Float)
Enumeration (Enum) mode. I2 (Float)

1. The inputs and outputs of this block are exposed for connection by default.

1482 CCT Help: Logic

Statistical
The Statistical folder in the control block palette contains blocks that perform
statistical functions on multiple inputs producing a single output. Statistical blocks
perform statistics on input. The number of inputs to a Statistical block depends on
the number of inputs supported by the type of statistic. The Logic View allows you
to add multiple connections to the output of the block.
Table 39-621: Statistical Blocks
Type Description Inputs (Float)1 Outputs (Float)1
AVG Average I1 Present Value
I2
New Port
MAX Maximum I1 Present Value
I2
New Port
MIN Minimum I1 Present Value
I2
New Port

1. The inputs and outputs of this block are exposed for connection by default.

Logic 1483
Timing
The Timing folder in the control block palette contains blocks that perform timing
functions such as Pulse, On Delay, and Off Delay. Timing blocks are used to break
up feedback loops. The Timing blocks include:
• Execution Status
• Last Value (Boolean)
• Last Value (Enum)
• Last Value (Float)
• Latch
• Rate Limiter
• Timer

Execution Status
The Execution Status logic block provides information about the conditions of the
current execution:
• Power Up: First execution following controller power cycle
• Restart: First execution following controller reboot without the power being
lost
• Re-Enabled: Neither of the above conditions are true and this is the first
execution after being re-enabled
• Normal: None of the above conditions are true
An example use of the Execution Status block is to execute alternate logic the first
execution following a power failure or controller restart by using the Present Value
to set the State of a Hybrid Activity.
Similarly, you can use this block to perform a different calculation the first
execution after a particular State of a Hybrid Activity is enabled (for example,
Execution Status - Present Value connecting to a MUX within a Hybrid Activity
State section).

1484 CCT Help: Logic

 The following table describes the output of the Execution Status logic block.
Table 39-622: Execution Status Block Output
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Outputs
Present Value1 Enum Yes Indicates the enumeration value output that Normal
provides information about the execution Set Name:
status. Execution Status
Normal, Power Up,
Restart, or
Re-Enabled

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1485
Last Value (Boolean)
The Last Value (Boolean) logic block holds the value that its input (Boolean type)
had at the end of the previous execution of the control logic for use by the current
execution. Use this block to compare the current value of a variable with the value
from the last execution.
We do not recommend connecting multiple Last Value blocks. You cannot use
Last Value blocks to create a moving average because the execution interval of the
control logic is not periodic. If a signal requires filtering or you need a moving
average, use the EWMA block.
We do not recommend using the Last Value blocks in an attempt to integrate a
value. Use the Totalization (Analog Integration) block to integrate a value.
When the control logic completes its execution and a new change (value,
reliability, or command) gets written to the input of a Last Value block (causing
the current value of the input to change), the block requests to execute again
immediately. If the logic is designed so that the input to the Last Value block
changes every execution, an infinite loop is created resulting in impaired
performance of the controller. Avoid configuring the Last Value block in this
manner.
If this block does not operate continuously (that is, is placed in the state section of
a hybrid activity), it starts at its Default Value when re-enabled. One additional
constraint is that connections from Hybrid Activity Inputs are not allowed to be
made directly to the Input of Last Value block in one of its State Sections. If such
logic is needed, a no-op component (such as adding zero to a float) should be
connected between the Input and the Last Value. This is required because the
Hybrid Activity inputs are considered part of the Event Section and are therefore
earlier in the sequence order than all State Section components.
For more Last Value information, see the Timing Output Controller and Timing
Setpoint Determination/Misc sections. The following table describes the inputs
and outputs of the Last Value (Boolean) logic block.
Table 39-623: Last Value (Boolean) Block Inputs and Outputs
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Input Boolean Yes Passes the Default Value of this Input to the False
Present Value on the first execution after
startup or being enabled. Otherwise, the
Current Value of the Input is passed to the
Present Value.
Outputs
Present Value1 Boolean Yes Indicates the output of the block. False
Properties
Include State Boolean N/A Indicates if the block passes or drops the True
Status command signature from the input.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

1486 CCT Help: Logic

Last Value (Enum)
The Last Value (Enum) logic block holds the value that its input (Enumeration
[Enum] type) had at the end of the previous execution of the control logic for use
by the current execution. Use this block to compare the current value of a variable
with the value from the last execution.
We do not recommend connecting multiple Last Value blocks. You cannot use
Last Value blocks to create a moving average because the execution interval of the
control logic is not periodic. If a signal requires filtering or you need a moving
average, use the EWMA block.
We do not recommend using the Last Value blocks in an attempt to integrate a
value. Use the Totalization (Analog Integration) block to integrate a value.
When the control logic completes its execution and a new change (value,
reliability, or command) gets written to the input of a Last Value block (causing
the current value of the input to change), the block requests to execute again
immediately. If the logic is designed so that the input to the Last Value block
changes every execution, an infinite loop is created resulting in impaired
performance of the controller. Avoid configuring the Last Value block in this
manner.
If this block does not operate continuously (that is, is placed in the state section of
a hybrid activity), it starts at its Default Value when re-enabled. One additional
constraint is that connections from Hybrid Activity Inputs are not allowed to be
made directly to the Input of Last Value block in one of its State Sections. If such
logic is needed, a no-op component (such as adding zero to a float) should be
connected between the Input and the Last Value. This is required because the
Hybrid Activity inputs are considered part of the Event Section and are therefore
earlier in the sequence order than all State Section components.
For more Last Value information, see the Timing Output Controller and Timing
Setpoint Determination/Misc sections. The following table describes the inputs
and outputs of the Last Value (Enum) logic block.
Table 39-624: Last Value (Enum) Block Inputs and Outputs
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Input Enum Yes Passes the Default Value of this Input to the 1st Enum
Present Value on the first execution after
startup or being enabled. Otherwise, the
Current Value of the Input is passed to the
Present Value.
Outputs
Present Value1 Enum Yes Indicates the output of the block. 1st Enum
Properties
Include State Boolean N/A Indicates if the block passes or drops the True
Status command signature from the input.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1487
Last Value (Float)
The Last Value (Float) logic block holds the value that its input (Floating [Float]
type) had at the end of the previous execution of the control logic for use by the
current execution. Use this block to compare the current value of a variable with
the value from the last execution.
We do not recommend connecting multiple Last Value blocks. You cannot use
Last Value blocks to create a moving average because the execution interval of the
control logic is not periodic. If a signal requires filtering or you need a moving
average, use the EWMA block.
We do not recommend using the Last Value blocks in an attempt to integrate a
value. Use the Totalization (Analog Integration) block to integrate a value.
When the control logic completes its execution and a new change (value,
reliability, or command) gets written to the input of a Last Value block (causing
the current value of the input to change), the block requests to execute again
immediately. If the logic is designed so that the input to the Last Value block
changes every execution, an infinite loop is created resulting in impaired
performance of the controller. Avoid configuring the Last Value block in this
manner.
If this block does not operate continuously (that is, is placed in the state section of
a hybrid activity), it starts at its Default Value when re-enabled. One additional
constraint is that connections from Hybrid Activity Inputs are not allowed to be
made directly to the Input of Last Value block in one of its State Sections. If such
logic is needed, a no-op component (such as adding zero to a float) should be
connected between the Input and the Last Value. This is required because the
Hybrid Activity inputs are considered part of the Event Section and are therefore
earlier in the sequence order than all State Section components.
For more Last Value information, see the Timing Output Controller and Timing
Setpoint Determination/Misc sections. The following table describes the inputs
and outputs of the Last Value (Float) logic block.
Table 39-625: Last Value (Float) Block Inputs and Outputs
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Input Float Yes Passes the Default Value of this Input to the 0.0
Present Value on the first execution after
startup or being enabled. Otherwise, the
Current Value of the Input is passed to the
Present Value.
Outputs
Present Value1 Float Yes Indicates the output of the block. 0.0
Properties
Include State Boolean N/A Indicates if the block passes or drops the True
Status command signature from the input.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

1488 CCT Help: Logic

Latch
The Latch logic block holds a Boolean True value until you command it to reset.
Latch blocks help capture rapidly changing binary states that might otherwise be
missed. For example, use this block to capture alarm conditions.
The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the Latch logic block.
Table 39-626: Latch Block Inputs and Outputs
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Input Boolean Yes Provides the Boolean value that causes False
latching of the output when it is set to True.
Reset Boolean Yes Provides the Boolean value that resets the False
output to False when this value is set to
True.
Outputs
Present Value1 Boolean Yes Indicates the output of the block. False

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1489
Rate Limiter
The Rate Limiter logic block controls the rate at which the Output changes with
variations in the Input value. If rate limiting is disabled, this block passes the value
of the Input to the Output. If rate limiting is enabled, this block limits changes to its
Output to an increment determined by the Step Equation. The Rate Limiter block
updates every 5 seconds.
Step Equation = Rate Limit x 5/60.0
The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the Rate Limiter logic
block.
Table 39-627: Rate Limiter Block Inputs and Outputs
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Input Float Yes Provides an Analog Value to the block. 0.0
Startup Value Float No Sets the output to this value when the block 0.0
is enabled.
Rate Limit Float No Provides an Analog Value used in the step 100.0
equation. The output is incremented or Units: Change per
decremented by this value. Minute
Limit Active Boolean No Enables the block to operate when set to True
True. If Limit Active is False, the output is
set to equal the input.
Outputs
Present Value1 Float Yes Indicates the output of the block. 0.0
Properties
Actively Boolean N/A Provides the following behavior: False
Limiting • If Limit Active is True, then this value is
True if the Present Value does not
reach the Input at that execution. This
value is False on the execution when
the Present Value reaches the Input.
• If Limit Active is False, then this value
remains False.
Interval Float N/A Indicates the amount of time between 5.0 Seconds
updates of the block’s output when Actively
Limiting is True.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

1490 CCT Help: Logic

Timer
The Timer logic block provides different types of timers as configured by the
Setup attribute found in the Basic Details dialog box of the block. Each type uses a
Duration (how long the timer is active) and unique functions to generate an
Output.
The Duration range is 5 seconds to 3,888,000 seconds (45 days). The Timer resets
upon power failure, controller restart, or when the control logic is disabled and re-
enabled.
The Timer types include:
• Pulse: The Present Value is normally False. The timer generates a True pulse
for the Present Value for the Duration time when the Input transitions from
False to True. For example, you can use a Pulse timer to ensure that
initialization of a device is over before transitioning to next state.
• Cancelable Pulse: This timer is the same as the Pulse timer, except that while
the timer is active an Input transition from True to False cancels the current
timing and sets the Present Value to False. For example, use this timer when a
controller performs an operation for the Duration time period, but the operation
can be stopped at the occurrence of a certain event.
• Retriggerable: This timer is similar to Pulse timer, except that while the timer
is active, each additional transition of Input from False to True forces a restart
of the timing cycle. The Present Value remains True as a result of this timing
restart. For example, if you press a button (Binary Input), the timer restarts its
timing cycle for the Duration and a certain set of logic is enabled while the
timer is active.
• On Delay: The Present Value tracks the Input except that it is delayed for the
Duration time when the Input transitions from False to True. For example, you
can set logic to delay the start of the Supply Fan until 10 seconds after the
Return fan starts.
• On Delay with Memory: Similar to the On Delay timer, except once the
Present Value becomes True, it is latched True until the Reset is True. For
example, use this timer to trigger an alarm after waiting for a delay to prove
that the equipment is in alarm.
• Off Delay: The Present Value tracks the Input except that it is delayed for the
Duration time when the Input transitions from True to False. For example, you
can set a Supply fan to turn off 30 seconds after the heating is turned off.
• Free Running: This timer runs continuously and generates a square wave for
the Present Value. Use this timer to create test signals for testing, This timer is
not typically used in feedback control applications.
• Minimum On: The Present Value tracks the Input except that it must remain
True for the Duration time before following the Input to False. For example,
you can configure a chiller so that once it is started, it remains running for a
minimum time of 10 minutes.

Logic 1491
 • Minimum Off: The Present Value tracks the Input except that it must remain
False for the Duration time before following the Input to True. For example,
once a chiller is turned off, it must be left off for a minimum time to allow
refrigerant to equalize.
The following table describes the inputs and outputs of the Timer logic block.
Table 39-628: Timer Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 1 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Inputs
Duration Float No Indicates the time period used for the 5 Seconds
specified Timer configuration.
You can change the Duration during the
execution of a Timer. If the Duration is
changed when the Timer is running a timing
cycle, the Time Remaining is set to equal the
new Duration.
For values less than 6,535 seconds, the
timing resolution is set to the nearest second.
For values greater than 6,535 seconds, the
timing resolution is rounded to the nearest
minute.
Note: CCT prevents updates to this block if
you attempt to set the Duration out of
range (Default Value and Test Value).
The block clamps the Eff Duration
property at end of the allowed range (5
to 3,888,000).
Input Boolean Yes Provides a Boolean signal that drives the False
Timer block for all Setup values other than
Free Running.
Reset Boolean No Restarts the operation, forcing the Present False
Value to False. Reset has no effect when
Setup is Minimum On or Minimum Off.
Reset Action Enum No Defines the behavior of the Timer block’s Wait
Present Value when Reset is changed from
True to False. This attribute only affects the
operation of the Timer when the value of
Setup is Pulse, Cancelable Pulse, or
Retriggerable Pulse. You can change the
Reset Action during the execution of the
Timer. The change takes effect on the next
execution.
Setup Enum No Identifies the type of timer function being used Pulse
for the Timer block. You can change the
Setup (type of timer) of the Timer at any time.
Changing the Setup cancels the Timer block's
previous activities and causes the Timer to
behave as if it were just re-enabled.
Outputs
Present Value1 Boolean Yes Indicates the current value of the output of the False
block.

1492 CCT Help: Logic

 Table 39-628: Timer Block Inputs and Outputs (Part 2 of 2)
Name Data Exposed for Description Default Value
Type Connection
by Default
Properties
Effective Float N/A Indicates the actual value used for the Timer's Seconds
Duration duration when the Duration input is set
outside its allowed range (5 to 3,888,000
seconds).
Time Remaining Float N/A Indicates the amount of time remaining in the Seconds
current active timing cycle. This value is set to
zero if the Timer is Inactive. This value is
updated when the Timer executes and when
the property value is requested.

1. This input or output is the Default Element of the block.

Logic 1493
Custom
The Custom folder only appears in the control block palette after exporting and/or
sharing custom modules.
An exported module is saved in a file in the C:\Program
Files\Johnson Controls\CCT\Custom Control Modules directory on your computer
using the current name of the module with a .caf.module file extension.
You can share the exported file with other users by placing a copy of the file in the
C:\Program Files\Johnson Controls\CCT\Custom Control Modules directory on a
different computer and the module appears in the Custom folder in the palette the
next time CCT is started on that computer.
See Exporting a Module in the Configuring a System section.

1494 CCT Help: Logic

Chapter 40: CCT Help: Reference
Troubleshooting
Table 40-629: CCT Troubleshooting (Part 1 of 2)
Problem
Simulation fails to start when the Point
Schedule is downloading and the
following error occurs:
Error starting Simulation MCE.
In Commissioning mode, a Wireless
Sensor that is Offline or Unreliable is
displayed as Unreliable along with its
last known value.
MOI to MOZ compression library
returns only Boolean values and does
not provide the cause of the error.
While downloading or uploading an
application from a device, one of the
following errors occur:
Error generating MOI file for
device xxxx
Error generating MOZ file for
device xxxx
(where xxxx is the type of device being
uploaded or downloaded)
Unable to open source MOI file
Unable to create destination MOZ file
Unable to read from MOI file
Unable to write to MOZ file
Unable to close MOZ file
Unable to close MOI file
Troubleshooting
Solution
Only one of these processes may run at a time. Do not run Simulation
while downloading the Point Schedule.
Be aware that the Wireless Sensor may be in an Offline or Unreliable
state.
Perform the download operation again in CCT.
Repeat the same uploading or downloading operation for the same
device. The upload or download completes successfully the second
time.
The MOI file path is not correctly specified. The MOI file path is
determined internally by CCT and the Point Schedule based on the
settings in the ApplicationConfiguration.properties file located in
C:\Program Files\Johnson Controls\CCT\lib.
Make sure that the following entry is defined in the
ApplicationConfiguration.properties file:
SyncAgent.DownloadObjects.DownloadFileSubDir
The MOZ file path is not correctly specified. The MOZ file path is
generated internally by CCT based on the settings in the
ApplicationConfiguration.properties file located in C:\Program
Files\Johnson Controls\CCT\lib.
Make sure that the following entry is defined in the
ApplicationConfiguration.properties file:
SyncAgent.DownloadObjects.DownloadFileSubDir
The end of the file is reached or the MOI file is corrupt. Perform the
same application download operation again in CCT.
There is not enough memory available for buffering bytes. Close a few
open applications and perform the same operation again in CCT.
OR
There is an IO operation failure and the MOZ file is corrupt. Perform
the same application download operation again in CCT.
OR
There is not enough disk space available to write data. Free some disk
space. The typical MOI file size is between 75-150 KB and MOZ file
size is 20-64 KB.
Invalid data bytes were written to the MOZ file and it is corrupt.
Perform the same application download operation again in CCT.
Invalid file handling occurred or the file is no longer valid. Perform the
same application download operation again in CCT.
1495
 Table 40-629: CCT Troubleshooting (Part 2 of 2)
Problem
You are experiencing problems
downloading devices over the SA Bus
using the Point Schedule.
You are experiencing problems
downloading multiple devices at once
(for example, using the Point Schedule).
You are experiencing slow speed while
downloading multiple devices at once
(for example, using the Point Schedule).
After selecting items to print from the
Summary Report Options dialog box,
CCT does not display the selections in
a PDF in Adobe Acrobat Reader
software.
The CCT Help does not fully open on a
computer running the Windows XP
Operating System with SP2 (or similar
system) and the following security
message appears in the Internet
Explorer Information Bar:
To help protect your security,
Internet Explorer has
restricted this file from
showing active content that
could access your computer.
Click here for options...
The CCT Help Favorites tab does not
appear.
A connection error occurs when you
first run CCT and MSDE is installed on
your computer.
1496 CCT Help: Reference
Solution
Download devices over the SA Bus using the Point Schedule using
the following sequence:
1. Individually download the Main Code of the device that is
connected to the SA Bus.
2. Individually download the Application Code of the device that is
connected to the SA Bus.
3. Select all other devices at once, as necessary, for the required
operations.
Use the FC Bus to download multiple devices at once, if possible.
If you are using the NAE Point Schedule to perform multiple
downloads at once, overall download speed can be improved by first
disconnecting the field bus from the NAE.
This problem occurs only on some computers. To print the Summary
Report:
1. Navigate to the Print.pdf file in the following location:
C:\Program Files\Johnson Controls\CCT
2. Double-click Print.pdf to open the file.
3. Print and/or save the PDF as desired from the Adobe Acrobat
Reader software.
Note: The Print.pdf file is overwritten each time you print (run) a
Summary Report from CCT.
Microsoft Windows XP operating system with SP2 (or similar system)
and Internet Explorer security settings may prevent Help systems with
active content from opening without first verifying it is OK to open. To
open the Help:
1. Click Click here for options... and select Allow Blocked Content.
A Security Warning dialog box appears stating:
Allowing active content such as script and ActiveX
controls can be useful, but active content might
also harm your computer. Are you sure you want to
let this file run active content?
2. Click Yes. The CCT Help system opens.
Enable the Java settings on your computer. See Help Appearance in
the Using This Help System section.
Check the SQL Server settings:
1. Browse to the following folder: C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL
Server\80\Tools\Binn\
2. Double-click svrnetcn.exe. The SQL Server Network Utility dialog
box appears with the General tab active.
3. Move Named Pipes and TCP/IP to the Enabled Protocols list.
4. Click OK.
5. Restart SQL Server.
6. Start CCT.
Chapter 41: CCT Help: Reference
Application and Module Reference Table
Use the following table to cross-reference the modules (Setpoint Determination/
Misc, State Generators, and Output Controller) in CCT and the applications in
which they are used. Click one of the following links to go directly to that section
of the table.
Number or A B C D E F G H I L M N O P R S T U V W Z
Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 1 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Number
100 OA Cold Deck Occupied State Occupied AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual
Sequencing on page Sequencing (AHU Generators Sequencing Duct Application
954 100% OADD)
100 OA Hot Deck Occupied State Occupied AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual
Sequencing on page Sequencing (Single Generators Sequencing Duct Application
975 Device)
100 OA Single Duct Occupied State Occupied AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single
Sequencing on page Sequencing (AHU Generators Sequencing Duct Application
957 100% OASD)
100 OA Start Stop Start Stop State General • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Sequencing on page Sequencing (AHU Generators Sequencing Single Duct Application
942 100% OA) • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
2 Pipe Coil Pump Pass Through Output Pass Through • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Pass Through on (Enum) Controller Application
page 1328 • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
2 Pipe Cooling Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Control Status LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
page 1374 Float) • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
2 Pipe Heating Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Control Status LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
page 1374 Float) • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
2 Pipe isAvailable Pass Through State Device Enable • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Pass Through on (Device Enable) Generators Application
page 915 • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• Fan Coil Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
2 Pipe Pump Alarms Latching Alarm State Alarm • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
on page 866 Manager Generators Management Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
2 Pipe Pump Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Blocking Protection Controller Application
on page 1311 • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
2 Pipe Pump Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Command LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
page 1374 Float) • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application

Application and Module Reference Table 1497

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 2 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
2 Pipe Pump Status Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Alarm Determination Determination Determination Determination Application
on page 806 /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
2 Position 2 Pipe 2 Pipe 2 Position Output Heating & Fan Coil Application
Control on page Valve Controller Cooling Control -
1185 2 Pipe
2 Position Box Heating 2 Position Output Heating & VAV Single Duct Application
Heating Control on Valve Controller Cooling Control -
page 1250 Heating
2 Position Cooling Cooling 2 Position Output Heating & • Fan Coil Application
Control on page Valve Controller Cooling Control - • Unit Ventilator Application
1212 Cooling
2 Position Heating Heating 2 Position Output Heating & Fan Coil Application
Control on page Valve Controller Cooling Control -
1250 Heating
2 Position Heating 2 Position Output Heating & • VAV Single Duct
Supplemental Valve Controller Cooling Control - Application
Heating Control on Heating • VAV Dual Duct Application
page 1250
2 Speed Fan Clg Twr Tower Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Sequencing on page 2 Speed Generators
905
3 Speed Fan Clg Twr Tower Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Sequencing on page 3 Speed Generators
908
A
AHU Staged Cooling Cooling Staged Output Heating & All Air Handling Unit
Control on page Outputs with Controller Cooling Control - Applications
1228 Dehumidification Cooling
Airflow Status Flow Status Setpoint Device Mode • Fan Coil Application
Determination on Determination Determination Determination • Heat Pump Application
page 800 /Misc • Unit Ventilator Application
Application Mode Application Mode State State All Air Handling Unit
Determination on Determination Generators Determination Applications
page 1000
Autocalibrate Now Last Value Setpoint Timing All VAV Applications
LV on page 860 (Boolean, Enum, Determination
Float) /Misc
Autocalibration Autocalibration State VAV Specific All VAV Applications
Sequence on page Sequence Generators Sequencing
1041
B
Balancer Override Balancer Override State VAV Specific • VAV Dual Duct Application
DD on page 1044 Generators Sequencing • VAV Slave Dual Duct
Application
Balancer Override Balancer Override State VAV Specific • VAV Dual Duct Application
DDX on page 1044 Generators Sequencing (with exhaust box)
• VAV Slave Dual Duct
Application

1498 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 3 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Balancer Override Balancer Override State VAV Specific • VAV Single Duct
SD on page 1044 Generators Sequencing Application
• VAV Slave Single Duct
Application
Balancer Override Balancer Override State VAV Specific • VAV Single Duct
SDX on page 1044 Generators Sequencing Application (with exhaust
box)
• VAV Slave Single Duct
Application
Boiler Rotation Rotation Small Output Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Small on page 1092 Controller
Boiler Sequencing Plant Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Heating Applications
by Building Load on Building Load Generators
page 888
Boiler Sequencing Plant Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Heating Applications
by OA-T on page 898 OA-T Generators
Boiler X Control Plant Control Output Central Plant Central Heating Applications
(Where X Is 1-4) on Controller
page 1083
Boiler X Enable LV Last Value Output Timing Central Heating Applications
(Where X Is 1-4) on (Boolean, Enum, Controller
page 1374 Float)
Boiler X Interlock Last Value Output Timing Central Heating Applications
Cmd LV (Where X Is (Boolean, Enum, Controller
1-4) on page 1374 Float)
Boiler X LV (Where X Last Value Output Timing Central Heating Applications
Is 1-4) on page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller
Float)
Boiler X Totalization Totalization (Enum Output Totalization Central Heating Applications
(Where X Is 1-4) on Runtime) Controller
page 1380
Boilers Available on Device Availability State Central Plant Central Heating Applications
page 884 Calculation Generators
Box Flow Test on Box Flow Test State VAV Specific • VAV Single Duct
page 1048 Generators Sequencing Application
• VAV Slave Single Duct
Application
Box Heating Pass Through State Device Enable VAV Single Duct Application
isAvailable Pass (Device Enable) Generators
Through on page
915
Box Heating LV on Last Value Output Timing VAV Single Duct Application
page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller
Float)
Box Heating Max Last Value Output Timing VAV Single Duct Application
Cap Fract LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller
page 1374 Float)
Building Load Calculate Building State Central Plant • Central Cooling
Calculation on page Load Generators Applications
871 • Central Heating
Applications

Application and Module Reference Table 1499

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 4 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Building Load Load Calculation v2 State Central Plant • Central Cooling
Calculation v2 on Generators Applications
page 875 • Central Heating
Applications
C
Calculate CD Flow Flow Differential Setpoint Flow Calculation • VAV Dual Duct Application
on page 821 Calculation Determination • VAV Slave Dual Duct
/Misc Application
Calculate HD Flow Flow Differential Setpoint Flow Calculation • VAV Dual Duct Application
on page 821 Calculation Determination • VAV Slave Dual Duct
/Misc Application
Calculate Supply Flow Sum Setpoint Flow Calculation • VAV Dual Duct Application
Flow on page 823 Calculation Determination • VAV Slave Dual Duct
/Misc Application
Calculate Supply Flow Sum Setpoint Flow Calculation • VAV Dual Duct Application
Flow Setpoint on Calculation Determination • VAV Slave Dual Duct
page 823 /Misc Application
Calibration Solenoid Pass Through Output Pass Through All VAV Applications
Pass Through on (Enum) Controller
page 1328
Cascaded DA-T Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Setpoint LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
1374 Float) • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
Cascaded Discharge Cascaded Output Cascaded Zone • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Air Setpoint Discharge Air Controller Control Application
Determination on Setpoint • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
page 1065 Determination Single Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
CD Area LV on page Last Value Setpoint Timing • VAV Dual Duct Application
860 (Boolean, Enum, Determination • VAV Slave Dual Duct
Float) /Misc Application
CD Constant Damper Control Output Damper Control - • VAV Dual Duct Application
Damper Control on (VAV Supply) Controller VAV • VAV Slave Dual Duct
page 1138 Application
CD Constant Flow Flow Setpoint (VAV Output Cascaded Zone VAV Dual Duct Application
Setpoint Control on Dual Duct) Controller Control
page 1068
CD CS LV on page Last Value Output Timing VAV Dual Duct Application
1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller
Float)
CD Damper Control Damper Control Output Damper Control - • VAV Dual Duct Application
on page 1138 (VAV Supply) Controller VAV • VAV Slave Dual Duct
Application
CD Flow Calculation Flow Calculation Setpoint Flow Calculation • VAV Dual Duct Application
on page 817 Determination • VAV Slave Dual Duct
/Misc Application
CD Flow Setpoint Flow Setpoint (VAV Output Cascaded Zone VAV Dual Duct Application
Control on page Dual Duct) Controller Control
1068

1500 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 5 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
CD Output LV on Last Value Output Timing • VAV Dual Duct Application
page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller • VAV Slave Dual Duct
Float) Application
CD Pickup Gain LV Last Value Setpoint Timing • VAV Dual Duct Application
on page 860 (Boolean, Enum, Determination • VAV Slave Dual Duct
Float) /Misc Application
CD-T sp Reset by Setpoint Reset by Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
OA on page 835 OA Determination Calculation Application
/Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Chilled Water System Enable State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
System Enable on Generators
page 900
Chiller Load Total Add-8 Setpoint Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Calc on page 792 Determination
/Misc
Chiller Rotation Rotation Small Output Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Small on page 1092 Controller
Chiller Sequencing Plant Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
by Building Load on Building Load Generators
page 888
Chiller Sequencing Plant Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
by Chiller Load on Building Load Generators
page 888
Chiller Sequencing Plant Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
by Decouple Loop Decouple Generators
Flow on page 890
Chiller Sequencing Plant Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
by Delta T on page Discrete Generators
892
Chiller X Control Plant Control Output Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
(Where X Is 1-8) on Controller
page 1083
Chiller X Enable LV Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
(Where X Is 1-8) on (Boolean, Enum, Controller
page 1374 Float)
Chiller X Interlock Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
Cmd LV (Where X Is (Boolean, Enum, Controller
1-8) on page 1374 Float)
Chiller X LV (Where Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
X Is 1-8) on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller
1374 Float)
Chiller X Totalization Totalization (Enum Output Totalization Central Cooling Applications
(Where X Is 1-8) on Runtime) Controller
page 1380
CHW Isolation Valve Count On Inputs State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Status on page 883 Generators
CHW Pump X Enable Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
LV (Where X Is 1-8) (Boolean, Enum, Controller
on page 1374 Float)

Application and Module Reference Table 1501

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 6 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Coil Circulation Coil Circulation State General All Air Handling Unit
Pump Sequencing Pump Sequencing Generators Sequencing Applications
on page 926
Cold Deck Damper Damper Trouble Setpoint Damper Trouble • VAV Dual Duct Application
Trouble Detection Detection Determination Detection • VAV Slave Dual Duct
on page 863 /Misc Application
Cold Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Discharge Air Setpoint Reset Determination Calculation Application
Setpoint Reset on /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
page 831 Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Cold Deck Flow Flow Calculation Setpoint Flow Calculation • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Calculation on page Determination Application
817 /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Combustion Damper Pass Through Output Pass Through Central Heating Applications
Command on page (Enum) Controller
1328
Compressor Max Last Value Output Timing Heat Pump Application
Cap Fract LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller
page 1374 Float)
Constant Capacity Fan Single Speed Output Fan Control - • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Exhaust Fan Control Controller AHU Single Duct Application
on page 1154 • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Constant Capacity Min OA Fan Output Damper Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Fan Minimum OA Constant Capacity Controller AHU Min OA Application
Flow Control on • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 1128 Application
Constant Capacity Fan Single Speed Output Fan Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Return Fan Control Controller AHU Application
on page 1154 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Constant Capacity Fan Single Speed Output Fan Control - All Air Handling Unit
Supply Fan Control Controller AHU Applications
on page 1154
Constant Dual Duct VAV Dual Duct Setpoint Setpoint • VAV Dual Duct Application
Endpoint Constant Flow Determination Calculation • VAV Slave Dual Duct
Calculation on page Endpoint /Misc Application
839 Calculation
Cooling Availability Availability State Device Enable • All Air Handling Unit
Determination on Determination Generators Applications
page 917 • Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
Cooling Coil Pump Pass Through Output Pass Through All Air Handling Unit
Pass Through on (Enum) Controller Applications
page 1328
Cooling Control Last Value Output Timing • All Air Handling Unit
Status LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
1374 Float) • Fan Coil Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application

1502 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 7 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Cooling isAvailable Pass Through State Device Enable Fan Coil Application
Pass Through on (Device Enable) Generators
page 915
Cooling Max Cap Last Value Output Timing • All Air Handling Unit
Fract LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
1374 Float) • Fan Coil Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
Cooling Percent Last Value Output Timing • Fan Coil Application
Cmd LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller • Unit Ventilator Application
1374 Float)
Cooling Pump Latching Alarm State Alarm • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Alarms on page 866 Manager Generators Management Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Cooling Pump Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Blocking Protection Controller Application
on page 1311 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Cooling Pump Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
Command LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller
page 1374 Float)
Cooling Pump Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Status Alarm Determination Determination Determination Application
Determination on /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 806 Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Cooling Required LV Last Value Output Timing All Air Handling Unit
on page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
Float)
Cooling X LV (Where Last Value Output Timing All Air Handling Unit
X Is 1-8) on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
1374 Float)
Cooling X Totalization (Enum Output Totalization All Air Handling Unit
Totalization (Where Runtime) Controller Applications
X Is 1-8) on page
1380
CW Isolation Valve Count On Inputs State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Status on page 883 Generators

Application and Module Reference Table 1503

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 8 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
CW Pump Rotation Rotation Small Output Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Small on page 1092 Controller
CW Pump X Control Pump Control v2 Output Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
v2 (Where X Is 1-8) Controller
on page 1089
CW Pump X Enable Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
LV (Where X Is 1-8) (Boolean, Enum, Controller
on page 1374 Float)
CW Pump X LV Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
(Where X Is 1-8) on (Boolean, Enum, Controller
page 1374 Float)
CW Pump X Totalization (Enum Output Totalization Central Cooling Applications
Totalization (Where Runtime) Controller
X Is 1-8) on page
1380
CW Sequencing on PID Sequencer State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
page 886 Generators
CW Sequencing on Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller
Float)
CWPs Available on Device Availability State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
page 884 Calculation Generators
CWPX Alarms Latching Alarm State Alarm Central Cooling Applications
(Where X Is 1-8) on Manager Generators Management
page 866
CWPX Blocking Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection Central Cooling Applications
Protection (Where X Controller
Is 1-8) on page 1311
CWPX Status Alarm Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode Central Heating Applications
Determination Determination Determination Determination
(Where X Is 1-8) on /Misc
page 806
D
Damper Control Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Status LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
1374 Float) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct
Application
Damper Minimum Damper Minimum Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Position Position Determination Calculation Application
Determination on Determination /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 825 Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application

1504 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 9 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Damper Minimum Damper Minimum Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Position Reset by Position Reset by Determination Calculation Application
CO2 on page 827 CO2 /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
Damper Output LV Last Value Output Timing • Heat Pump Application
on page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller • Unit Ventilator Application
Float) • VAV Single Duct
Application
• VAV Slave Single Duct
Application
DA-T sp Reset by Setpoint Reset by Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
OA on page 835 OA Determination Calculation Application
/Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
DA-T Unocc Status Unoccupied State Unoccupied • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Determination on Sequencing (AHU) Generators Sequencing Application
page 1026 • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
Dehumidification Dehumidification State General • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Sequencing on page Sequencing Generators Sequencing Application
927 • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
Diff Flow Calc on Subtract Setpoint Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
page 794 Determination
/Misc
Discharge Air Discharge Air Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Setpoint Setpoint Determination Calculation Application
Determination on Determination /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 829 Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
Discharge Air Discharge Air Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Setpoint Reset on Setpoint Reset Determination Calculation Application
page 831 /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
Discharge Flow Flow Calculation Setpoint Flow Calculation • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Calculation on page Determination Application
817 /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application

Application and Module Reference Table 1505

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 10 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Discharge Flow Flow Sum Setpoint Flow Calculation • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Determination on Calculation Determination Application
page 821 /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Discrete Boiler Plant Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Sequencing by Discrete Generators
HWR-T on page 892
E
Econ Enable OA Economizer Setpoint Device Enable • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
versus RA on page Availability RA-T Determination Application
798 Compare /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Economizer Economizer Setpoint Device Enable • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Availability Availability Determination Application
Determination on /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 795 Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
Emergency Mode Pass Through State Pass Through No longer used. Previously
Pass Through on (Boolean, Enum) Generators used by:
page 997 • Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct
Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
Emergency Mode Emergency Mode State General No longer used. Previously
Sequencing on page Sequencing Generators Sequencing used by:
930 • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Energy Hold Off Energy Hold Off State State • Fan Coil Application
Determination on Determination Generators Determination • Heat Pump Application
page 1002 • Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct
Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
Energy Wheel Two Heat Recovery Output Heating & • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Pos Byp on page Wheel with 2 Pos Controller Cooling Control - Application
1241 Bypass Dampers Heat Recovery • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application

1506 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 11 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Enthalpy Wheel Heat Recovery Output Heating & • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Control on page Wheel Controller Cooling Control - Application
1238 Heat Recovery • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Exhaust Air Flow Flow Calculation Setpoint Flow Calculation • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Calculation on page Determination Single Duct Application
817 /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Exhaust Area LV on Last Value Setpoint Timing All VAV Applications
page 860 (Boolean, Enum, Determination
Float) /Misc
Exhaust Damper Damper Control Output Damper Control - All VAV Applications
Control on page (VAV Exhaust) Controller VAV
1135
Exhaust Damper Damper Trouble Setpoint Damper Trouble All VAV Applications
Trouble Detection Detection Determination Detection
on page 863 /Misc
Exhaust Differential Flow Differential Setpoint Setpoint All VAV Applications
Setpoint Calculation Setpoint Calculation Determination Calculation
on page 833 /Misc
Exhaust Fan Alarms Latching Alarm State Alarm • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
on page 866 Manager Generators Management Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Exhaust Fan Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Blocking Protection Controller Application
on page 1311 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
Exhaust Fan BSP Fan RF or EF BSP Output Fan Control - • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Control for for UL-864-UUKL Controller AHU Single Duct Application
UL-864-UUKL on • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
page 1164 Dual Duct Application
Exhaust Fan Last Value Output Timing • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Command LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller Single Duct Application
page 1374 Float) • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Exhaust Fan Status Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Alarm Determination Determination Determination Determination Single Duct Application
on page 806 /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Exhaust Fan Volume Fan RF or EF Vol Output Fan Control - • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Match Control for Match for Controller AHU Single Duct Application
UL-864-UUKL on UL-864-UUKL • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
page 1174 Dual Duct Application
Exhaust Flow Flow Calculation Setpoint Flow Calculation All VAV Applications
Calculation on page Determination
817 /Misc

Application and Module Reference Table 1507

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 12 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Exhaust Pickup Last Value Setpoint Timing All VAV Applications
Gain LV on page 860 (Boolean, Enum, Determination
Float) /Misc
F
Fan Alarm Status on Fan Alarm Status State State • Heat Pump Application
page 1005 Generators Determination • Unit Ventilator Application
Fan Cmd LV on page Last Value Output Timing VAV Single Duct Application
1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller
Float)
Fan Control by Pass Through State Pass Through • Fan Coil Application
Others BI Pass (Boolean, Enum) Generators • Heat Pump Application
Through on page • Unit Ventilator Application
997
Fan Determination Fan Determination State State • Fan Coil Application
on page 1007 (Terminal Units) Generators Determination • Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
Fan OnOff LV on Last Value Output Timing • Fan Coil Application
page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller • Heat Pump Application
Float) • Unit Ventilator Application
Fan Speed Override Pass Through State Pass Through • Fan Coil Application
Pass Through on (Boolean, Enum) Generators • Heat Pump Application
page 997 • Unit Ventilator Application
FBPD 2 Position 2 Pipe FBPD 2 Output Heating & • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Valve 2 Pipe Control Position Valve with Controller Cooling Control - Application
on page 1194 Low Limit 2 Pipe • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
FBPD 2 Position Cooling FBPD 2 Output Heating & All Air Handling Unit
Valve Cooling Position Valve with Controller Cooling Control - Applications
Control on page Dehumidification Cooling
1215
FBPD 2 Position Heating FBPD 2 Output Heating & • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Valve Preheat Position Valve with Controller Cooling Control - Application
Control on page Low Limit Heating • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
1259 Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
FBPD Proportional Heating FBPD Output Heating & • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Valve Preheat Proportional Valve Controller Cooling Control - Application
Control on page with Low Limit Heating • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
1263 Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
FC-ZN-T Sequencing Occupied Zone State Occupied Fan Coil Application
on page 978 Sequencing (FC/ Generators Sequencing
AHU)

1508 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 13 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Flow Differential Flow Differential Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Setpoint Setpoint Calculation Determination Calculation Application
Determination on /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
page 833 Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Frost Protection Central Heating State Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Determination on Low Temp Control Generators
page 880
G
Glycol Loop Control Heat Recovery Output Heating & • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
on page 1235 Glycol Loop Controller Cooling Control - Application
Heat Recovery • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
H
HD Area LV on page Last Value Setpoint Timing • VAV Dual Duct Application
860 (Boolean, Enum, Determination • VAV Slave Dual Duct
Float) /Misc Application
HD Constant Damper Control Output Damper Control - • VAV Dual Duct Application
Damper Control on (VAV Supply) Controller VAV • VAV Slave Dual Duct
page 1138 Application
HD Constant Flow HD Constant Flow Output Cascaded Zone • VAV Dual Duct Application
Setpoint Control on Setpoint Controller Control • VAV Slave Dual Duct
page 1074 Application
HD CS LV on page Last Value Output Timing VAV Dual Duct Application
1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller
Float)
HD Damper Control Damper Control Output Damper Control - • VAV Dual Duct Application
on page 1138 (VAV Supply) Controller VAV • VAV Slave Dual Duct
Application
HD Flow Calculation Flow Calculation Setpoint Flow Calculation • VAV Dual Duct Application
on page 817 Determination • VAV Slave Dual Duct
/Misc Application
HD Flow Setpoint Flow Setpoint (VAV Output Cascaded Zone VAV Dual Duct Application
Control on page Dual Duct) Controller Control
1068
HD Pickup Gain LV Last Value Setpoint Timing • VAV Dual Duct Application
on page 860 (Boolean, Enum, Determination • VAV Slave Dual Duct
Float) /Misc Application
HD-T sp Reset by Setpoint Reset by Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
OA on page 835 OA Determination Calculation Application
/Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application

Application and Module Reference Table 1509

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 14 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Heat Exchanger with Heat Exchanger Output Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Low Limit Output on with Return Water Controller
page 1080 Control
Heat Recovery Heat Recovery State Device Enable • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Enthalpy Suitability Enthalpy Suitability Generators Application
Determination on Determination • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 920 Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Heat Recovery Htg Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
CS LV on page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
Float) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Heat Recovery Low Heat Recovery Low State General • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Limit Sequencing on Limit Sequencing Generators Sequencing Application
page 935 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Heat Recovery Latching Alarm State Alarm • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Pump Alarms on Manager Generators Management Application
page 866 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Heat Recovery Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Pump Blocking Controller Application
Protection on page • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
1311 Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application

1510 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 15 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Heat Recovery Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Pump Command LV (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
on page 1374 Float) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Heat Recovery Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Pump Status Alarm Determination Determination Determination Application
Determination on /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 806 Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Heat Recovery Heat Recovery State Device Enable • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Suitability Suitability Generators Application
Determination on Determination • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 923 Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Heat Recovery Heat Recovery Output Heating & • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Wheel with Bypass Wheel with Bypass Controller Cooling Control - Application
Dampers on page Dampers Heat Recovery • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
1245 Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Heating Availability Availability State Device Enable • Heat Pump Application
Determination on Determination Generators • Unit Ventilator Application
page 917
Heating Control Last Value Output Timing • Fan Coil Application
Status LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller • Heat Pump Application
1374 Float) • Unit Ventilator Application
Heating Cooling Last Value Output Timing • Fan Coil Application
Required LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller • Heat Pump Application
page 1374 Float) • Unit Ventilator Application
Heating isAvailable Pass Through State Device Enable Fan Coil Application
Pass Through on (Device Enable) Generators
page 915
Heating Max Cap Last Value Output Timing • Fan Coil Application
Fract LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller • Heat Pump Application
1374 Float) • Unit Ventilator Application

Application and Module Reference Table 1511

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 16 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Heating Percent Last Value Output Timing • Fan Coil Application
Cmd LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller • Unit Ventilator Application
1374 Float) • VAV Single Duct
Application
Heating Required LV Last Value Output Timing All Air Handling Unit
on page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
Float)
Heating Zone X Heating Output Heating & Central Heating Applications
Output (Where X Is Proportional Valve Controller Cooling Control -
1-8) on page 1274 with Low Limit Heating
Heating Zone X SP Setpoint Reset by Setpoint Setpoint Central Heating Applications
Reset (Where X Is 1- OA Determination Calculation
8) on page 835 /Misc
High Temp Alarm Pass Through Output Pass Through • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Pass Through on (Enum) Controller Application
page 1328 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Hot Deck Damper Damper Trouble Setpoint Damper Trouble • VAV Dual Duct Application
Trouble Detection Detection Determination Detection • VAV Slave Dual Duct
on page 863 /Misc Application
Hot Deck Discharge Discharge Air Setpoint Setpoint AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual
Air Setpoint Reset Setpoint Reset Determination Calculation Duct Application
by EA-T on page 831 /Misc
Hot Deck Discharge Discharge Air Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Air Setpoint Reset Setpoint Reset Determination Calculation Application
by RA-T on page 831 /Misc • AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Hot Deck Discharge Discharge Air Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Air Setpoint Reset Setpoint Reset Determination Calculation Application
on page 831 /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Hot Deck Flow Flow Calculation Setpoint Flow Calculation • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Calculation on page Determination Application
817 /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Hot Gas Bypass Pass Through Output Pass Through AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Valve Control on (Enum) Controller
page 1328
Hot Water System System Enable State Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Enable on page 900 Generators
HP-ZN-T Occupied Zone State Occupied Heat Pump Application
Sequencing on page Sequencing (HP) Generators Sequencing
980

1512 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 17 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
HR Energy Wheel Latching Alarm State Alarm • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Alarms on page 866 Manager Generators Management Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
HR Energy Wheel Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Blocking Protection Controller Application
on page 1311 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
HR Energy Wheel Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Status Alarm Determination Determination Determination Application
Determination on /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 806 Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Humidification Pass Through State Device Enable All Air Handling Unit
IsAvailable Pass (Device Enable) Generators Applications
Through on page
915
Humidification Max Last Value Output Timing All Air Handling Unit
Cap Fract LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
page 1374 Float)
Humidification Last Value Output Timing All Air Handling Unit
Pump Command LV (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
on page 1374 Float)
Humidification Humidification State General All Air Handling Unit
Sequencing on page Sequencing Generators Sequencing Applications
937
Humidity Control Last Value Output Timing All Air Handling Unit
Status LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
1374 Float)
Humidity Scrubber Humidification Output Humidity Control • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Output on page 1302 Scrubber Output Controller Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application

Application and Module Reference Table 1513

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 18 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
HX1 Multi Valve Sequenced Output Output Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Span or HX2 Multi Controller
Valve Span on page
1099
I
Isolation Valve Count On Inputs State Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Status on page 883 Generators
L
Lighting Control on Lighting Output Lighting Control • Fan Coil Application
page 1308 Controller • Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct
Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
Loss of Airflow Loss of Airflow State General All Air Handling Unit
Sequencing on page Sequencing Generators Sequencing Applications
939
M
Master CD Constant Pass Through State Pass Through VAV Slave Dual Duct
Flow Setpoint Pass (Boolean, Enum) Generators Application
Through on page
997
Master CD Flow Pass Through State Pass Through VAV Slave Dual Duct
Setpoint Pass (Boolean, Enum) Generators Application
Through on page
997
Master Flow Pass Through State Pass Through VAV Slave Single Duct
Setpoint Pass (Boolean, Enum) Generators Application
Through on page
997
Master HD Flow Pass Through State Pass Through VAV Slave Dual Duct
Setpoint Pass (Boolean, Enum) Generators Application
Through on page
997
Min Outdoor Air Fan Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Command LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
page 1374 Float) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
Min Outdoor Air Fan Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Status Alarm Determination Determination Determination Application
Determination on /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 806 Application
Min Position Damper Minimum Setpoint Setpoint • Heat Pump Application
Determination on Position Determination Calculation • Unit Ventilator Application
page 825 Determination /Misc
Minimum Flow VAV Dual Duct Setpoint Setpoint • VAV Dual Duct Application
Determination - Dual Minimum Flow Determination Calculation • VAV Slave Dual Duct
Duct on page 841 Determination /Misc Application
Minimum Flow VAV Single Duct Setpoint Setpoint • VAV Single Duct
Determination on Minimum Flow Determination Calculation Application
page 846 Determination /Misc • VAV Slave Single Duct
Application

1514 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 19 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Minimum OA Fan Latching Alarm State Alarm • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Alarms on page 866 Manager Generators Management Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
Minimum OA Flow Flow Calculation Setpoint Flow Calculation • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Calculation on page Determination Application
817 /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
Mixed Air Cold Deck Occupied State Occupied • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
HR Sequencing on Sequencing (AHU Generators Sequencing Application
page 964 MADD w HR) • AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Mixed Air Cold Deck Occupied State Occupied AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Sequencing on page Sequencing (AHU Generators Sequencing Application
961 MADD)
Mixed Air Hot Deck Occupied State Occupied • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Sequencing on page Sequencing (Single Generators Sequencing Application
975 Device) • AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Mixed Air Single Occupied State Occupied AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Duct HR Sequencing Sequencing (AHU Generators Sequencing Application
on page 971 MASD w HR)
Mixed Air Single Occupied State Occupied AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Duct Sequencing on Sequencing (AHU Generators Sequencing
page 967 MASD)
Modulating HX or Plant Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Boiler Sequencing Modulating Generators
on page 895
MSC 2 Position 2 MSC 01 through Output Staged Output • Fan Coil Application
Pipe on page 1348 MSC 12 Controller Control • Unit Ventilator Application
MSC 2 Position Box MSC 01 through Output Staged Output VAV Single Duct Application
Heating on page MSC 12 Controller Control
1348
MSC 2 Position MSC 01 through Output Staged Output • Fan Coil Application
Cooling on page MSC 12 Controller Control • Unit Ventilator Application
1348
MSC 2 Position MSC 01 through Output Staged Output • Fan Coil Application
Heating on page MSC 12 Controller Control • Unit Ventilator Application
1348
MSC 2 Position MSC 01 through Output Staged Output • VAV Single Duct
Supplemental MSC 12 Controller Control Application
Heating on page • VAV Dual Duct Application
1348
MSC Staged Box MSC 01 through Output Staged Output VAV Single Duct Application
Heating XX (Where MSC 12 Controller Control
XX Is 01-03) on page
1348
MSC Staged MSC 01 through Output Staged Output Heat Pump Application
Compressor X MSC 12 Controller Control
(Where X Is 1 or 2)
on page 1348

Application and Module Reference Table 1515

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 20 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
MSC Staged Cooling MSC 01 through Output Staged Output • All Air Handling Unit
XX, (Where XX Is MSC 12 Controller Control Applications
01-08) on page 1348 • Fan Coil Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
MSC Staged Heating MSC 01 through Output Staged Output • Fan Coil Application
XX (Where XX Is 01- MSC 12 Controller Control • Heat Pump Application
03) on page 1348 • Unit Ventilator Application
MSC Staged MSC 01 through Output Staged Output All Air Handling Unit
Humidification XX, MSC 12 Controller Control Applications
(Where XX Is 01-04)
on page 1348
MSC Staged Preheat MSC 01 through Output Staged Output • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
XX (Where XX Is 01- MSC 12 Controller Control Application
08) on page 1348 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
MSC Staged Reheat MSC 01 through Output Staged Output All Air Handling Unit
XX (Where XX Is 01- MSC 12 Controller Control Applications
08) on page 1348
MSC Staged MSC 01 through Output Staged Output • VAV Single Duct
Supplemental MSC 12 Controller Control Application
Heating on page • VAV Dual Duct Application
1348
MSC XX (Where XX MSC 01 through Output Staged Output Sideloop Applications
Is 01-08) on page MSC 12 Controller Control
1348
N
Number of Devices Last Value Output Timing • Central Cooling
Running LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
1374 Float) • Central Heating
Applications
Number of SCHWP Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
Running LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller
1374 Float)
Number of SHWP Last Value Output Timing Central Heating Applications
Running LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller
1374 Float)
Number of Towers Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
Running LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller
1374 Float)

1516 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 21 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
O
Occupancy Mode Occupancy Mode State State • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Determination on Determination Generators Determination Application
page 1010 • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
• Fan Coil Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct
Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
Occupancy Mode Occupancy Mode State State AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Determination (MZ) Determination (MZ) Generators Determination Dual Duct) Application
on page 1014
On/Off Fan Clg Twr Tower Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Sequencing on page 1 Speed Generators
902
On/Off Fan w/ Tower Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Vernier Output Clg Vernier Generators
Twr Sequencing on
page 911
Outdoor Air Flow Flow Calculation Setpoint Flow Calculation • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Calculation on page Determination Application
817 /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
P
Packaged Min OA Damper 2 Output Damper Control - AHU Rooftop Unit Application
Economizer Control Position Controller AHU Min OA
on page 1122
Packaged Humidifier Humidification Output Humidity Control • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Control on page Packaged Unit Controller Application
1296 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Parallel Fan Control Parallel Fan Control Output Fan Control VAV Single Duct Application
on page 1145 Controller
Parallel Fan Fan Determination State VAV Fan VAV Single Duct Application
Determination Flow (VAV Parallel Flow Generators Determination
Based on page 1055 Based)
Parallel Fan Fan Determination State VAV Fan VAV Single Duct Application
Determination Temp (VAV Parallel Temp Generators Determination
Based on page 1058 Based)

Application and Module Reference Table 1517

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 22 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
PCHWPs Available Device Availability State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
on page 884 Calculation Generators
PCHWPX Alarms Latching Alarm State Alarm Central Cooling Applications
(Where X Is 1-8) on Manager Generators Management
page 866
PCHWPX Blocking Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection Central Cooling Applications
Protection (Where X Controller
Is 1-8) on page 1311
PCHWPX Status Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode Central Cooling Applications
Alarm Determination Determination Determination Determination
(Where X Is 1-8) on /Misc
page 806
PHWPX Alarms Latching Alarm State Alarm Central Heating Applications
(Where X Is 1-4) on Manager Generators Management
page 866
PHWPX Blocking Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection Central Heating Applications
Protection (Where X Controller
Is 1-4) on page 1311
PHWPX Status Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode Central Heating Applications
Alarm Determination Determination Determination Determination
(Where X Is 1-4) on /Misc
page 806
PID LV on page 1374 Last Value Output Timing • Central Cooling
(Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
Float) • Central Heating
Applications
Preheat Availability Availability State Device Enable • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Determination on Determination Generators Application
page 917 • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Preheat Coil Pump Pass Through Output Pass Through • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Pass Through on (Enum) Controller Application
page 1328 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Preheat Control Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Status LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
1374 Float) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application

1518 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 23 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Preheat Max Cap Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Fract LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
1374 Float) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Preheat Percent Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Cmd LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
1374 Float) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Preheat Proportional Preheat Output Heating & • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Valve Output on Proportional Valve Controller Cooling Control - Application
page 1292 with Return Water Heating • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Control Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Preheat Pump Latching Alarm State Alarm • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Alarms on page 866 Manager Generators Management Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Preheat Pump Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Blocking Protection Controller Application
on page 1311 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application

Application and Module Reference Table 1519

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 24 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Preheat Pump Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Command LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
page 1374 Float) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Preheat Pump Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Status Alarm Determination Determination Determination Application
Determination on /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 806 Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Preheat Sequencing Occupied State Occupied • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
on page 975 Sequencing (Single Generators Sequencing Application
Device) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Preheat X LV (Where Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
X Is 1-8) on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
1374 Float) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Preheat X Totalization (Enum Output Totalization • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Totalization, (Where Runtime) Controller Application
X Is 1-8) on page • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
1380 Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Primary CHW Pump Rotation Small Output Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Rotation Small on Controller
page 1092
Primary CHW Pump Pump Control v2 Output Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
X Control v2 (Where Controller
X Is 1-8) on page
1089
Primary CHW Pump Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
X LV (Where X Is 1-8) (Boolean, Enum, Controller
on page 1374 Float)

1520 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 25 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Primary CHW Pump Totalization (Enum Output Totalization Central Cooling Applications
X Totalization Runtime) Controller
(Where X Is 1-8) on
page 1380
Primary HW Pump X Last Value Output Timing Central Heating Applications
LV (Where X Is 1-4) (Boolean, Enum, Controller
on page 1374 Float)
Primary HW Pump X Totalization (Enum Output Totalization Central Heating Applications
Totalization (Where Runtime) Controller
X Is 1-4) on page
1380
Primary Pump Rotation Small Output Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Rotation Small on Controller
page 1092
Primary Pump X Pump Control v2 Output Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Control v2 (Where X Controller
Is 1-4) on page 1089
Primary Pump X Last Value Output Timing Central Heating Applications
Enable LV (Where X (Boolean, Enum, Controller
Is 1-4) on page 1374 Float)
Proportional 2 Pipe 2 Pipe Proportional Output Heating & Fan Coil Application
Control on page Valve Controller Cooling Control -
1199 2 Pipe
Proportional Box Heating Output Heating & VAV Single Duct Application
Heating Control on Proportional Valve Controller Cooling Control -
page 1268 Heating
Proportional Cooling Output Heating & • Fan Coil Application
Cooling Control on Proportional Valve Controller Cooling Control - • Unit Ventilator Application
page 1219 Cooling
Proportional Min OA Damper Output Damper Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Damper Minimum Proportional Output Controller AHU Min OA Application
OA Flow Control on • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 1125 Application
Proportional Damper Control Output Damper Control Heat Pump Application
Damper Output on with Low Limit Controller
page 1109
Proportional EA Damper Control for Output Damper Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Damper Control for Volume Matching Controller AHU Econ Application
Volume Matching on • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 1119 Application
Proportional Fan Fan Proportional Output Fan Control • Fan Coil Application
Control on page Controller • Heat Pump Application
1142 • Unit Ventilator Application
Proportional Heating Heating Output Heating & Fan Coil Application
Control on page Proportional Valve Controller Cooling Control -
1268 Heating
Proportional OA Damper Control for Output Damper Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Damper Control for Relief Fan Controller AHU Econ Application
Relief Fan on page • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
1115 Application

Application and Module Reference Table 1521

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 26 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Proportional OA Damper Control for Output Damper Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Damper Control on Economizer Controller AHU Econ Application
page 1112 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Proportional Steam Humidification Output Humidity Control All Air Handling Unit
Humidification Proportional Steam Controller Applications
Control on page Output
1299
Proportional Heating Output Heating & • VAV Single Duct
Supplemental Proportional Valve Controller Cooling Control - Application
Heating Control on Heating • VAV Dual Duct Application
page 1268
Proportional Unit Damper Control for Output Damper Control Unit Ventilator Application
Vent 1 Damper UV Cycle 1, 2, or W Controller
Control on page
1106
Proportional Unit Damper Control for Output Damper Control Unit Ventilator Application
Vent 2-W Damper UV Cycle 1, 2, or W Controller
Control on page
1106
Proportional Unit Damper Control Output Damper Control Unit Ventilator Application
Vent 3 Damper with Low Limit Controller
Control on page
1109
Proportional Valve 2 2 Pipe Proportional Output Heating & • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Pipe Control on Valve with Low Controller Cooling Control - Application
page 1207 Limit 2 Pipe • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
Proportional Valve Cooling Output Heating & All Air Handling Unit
Cooling Control on Proportional Valve Controller Cooling Control - Applications
page 1221 with Cooling
Dehumidification
Proportional Valve Heating Output Heating & • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Preheat Control on Proportional Valve Controller Cooling Control - Application
page 1274 with Low Limit Heating • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Proportional Valve Heating Output Heating & All Air Handling Unit
Reheat Control on Proportional Valve Controller Cooling Control - Applications
page 1274 with Low Limit Heating

1522 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 27 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
R
RA-T sp Reset by Setpoint Reset by Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
OA on page 835 OA Determination Calculation Application
/Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
Reheat Availability Availability State Device Enable All Air Handling Unit
Determination on Determination Generators Applications
page 917
Reheat Coil Pump Pass Through Output Pass Through All Air Handling Unit
Pass Through on (Enum) Controller Applications
page 1328
Reheat Control Last Value Output Timing All Air Handling Unit
Status LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
1374 Float)
Reheat Max Cap Last Value Output Timing All Air Handling Unit
Fract LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
1374 Float)
Reheat Percent Cmd Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
LV on page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
Float) • AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
Reheat Pump Latching Alarm State Alarm • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Alarms on page 866 Manager Generators Management Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Reheat Pump Last Value Output Timing All Air Handling Unit
Command LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
page 1374 Float)
Reheat Pump Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Blocking Protection Controller Application
on page 1311 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Reheat Pump Status Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Alarm Determination Determination Determination Determination Application
on page 806 /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application

Application and Module Reference Table 1523

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 28 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Reheat X LV (Where Last Value Output Timing All Air Handling Unit
X Is 1-8) on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
1374 Float)
Reheat X Totalization (Enum Output Output Controller All Air Handling Unit
Totalization (Where Runtime) Controller Applications
X Is 1-8) on page
1380
Relief Fan Alarms on Latching Alarm State Alarm • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
page 866 Manager Generators Management Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
Relief Fan BSP Fan Relief BSP for Output Fan Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Control for UL-864-UUKL Controller AHU Application
UL-864-UUKL on • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 1158 Application
Relief Fan Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Command LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
page 1374 Float) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
Relief Fan Status Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Alarm Determination Determination Determination Determination Application
on page 806 /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
Relief Flow Flow Calculation Setpoint Flow Calculation • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Calculation on page Determination Application
817 /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
Return Fan Alarms Latching Alarm State Alarm • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
on page 866 Manager Generators Management Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Return Fan BSP Fan RF or EF BSP Output Fan Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Control for for UL-864-UUKL Controller AHU Application
UL-864-UUKL on • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 1164 Application
Return Fan Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Command LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
page 1374 Float) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Return Fan Status Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Alarm Determination Determination Determination Determination Application
on page 806 /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
Return Fan Volume Fan RF or EF Vol Output Fan Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Match Control for Match for Controller AHU Application
UL-864-UUKL on UL-864-UUKL • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 1174 Application
Return Flow Flow Calculation Setpoint Flow Calculation • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Calculation on page Determination Application
817 /Misc • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application

1524 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 29 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
S
SCHWP PID LV on Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller
Float)
SCHWPX Alarms Latching Alarm State Alarm Central Cooling Applications
(Where X Is 1-8) on Manager Generators Management
page 866
SCHWPX Blocking Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection Central Cooling Applications
Protection (Where X Controller
Is 1-8) on page 1311
SCHWPX Status Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode Central Cooling Applications
Alarm Determination Determination Determination Determination
(Where X Is 1-8) on /Misc
page 806
Secondary Chill Secondary Pump Output Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Water Pump PID v2 PID Controller
on page 1097
Secondary CHW Rotation Small Output Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Pump Rotation Controller
Small on page 1092
Secondary CHW Plant Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Pump Sequencing Modulating Generators
on page 895
Secondary CHW Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
Pump X LV (Where X (Boolean, Enum, Controller
Is 1-8) on page 1374 Float)
Secondary CHW Pump Control v2 Output Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Pump X Modulating Controller
Control v2 (Where X
Is 1-8) on page 1089
Secondary CHW Totalization (Enum Output Totalization Central Cooling Applications
Pump X Totalization Runtime) Controller
(Where X Is 1-8) on
page 1380
Secondary Hot Secondary Pump Output Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Water Pump PID v2 PID Controller
on page 1097
Secondary Hot Rotation Small Output Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Water Pump Controller
Rotation Small on
page 1092
Secondary HW Plant Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Pump Sequencing Modulating Generators
on page 895
Secondary HW Pump Control v2 Output Central Plant Central Heating Applications
Pump X Control v2 Controller
(Where X Is 1-4) on
page 1089
Secondary HW Last Value Output Timing Central Heating Applications
Pump X LV (Where X (Boolean, Enum, Controller
Is 1-4) on page 1374 Float)

Application and Module Reference Table 1525

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 30 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Secondary HW Totalization (Enum Output Totalization Central Heating Applications
Pump X Totalization Runtime) Controller
(Where X Is 1-4) on
page 1380
Secondary Pump X Last Value Output Timing • Central Cooling
Enable LV (Where X (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
Is 1-8) on page 1374 Float) • Central Heating
Applications
Sequenced Valves Heating Sequenced Output Heating & • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Preheat Control on Valves with Low Controller Cooling Control - Application
page 1278 Limit Heating • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Sequenced Valves Heating Sequenced Output Heating & All Air Handling Unit
Reheat Control on Valves with Low Controller Cooling Control - Applications
page 1278 Limit Heating
Sequencer XX Sequencer 01 Output Staged Output None
(Where XX Is 01-16) through Sequencer Controller Sequencing
on page 1365 16
Series Fan Control Fan VAV Series Output Fan Control VAV Single Duct Application
on page 1151 Controller
Series Fan Fan Determination State VAV Fan VAV Single Duct Application
Determination on (VAV Series) Generators Determination
page 1060
SHWP PID LV on Last Value Output Timing Central Heating Applications
page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller
Float)
SHWPX Alarms Latching Alarm State Alarm Central Heating Applications
(Where X Is 1-4) on Manager Generators Management
page 866
SHWPX Blocking Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection Central Heating Applications
Protection (Where X Controller
Is 1-4) on page 1311
SHWPX Status Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode Central Heating Applications
Alarm Determination Determination Determination Determination
(Where X Is 1-4) on /Misc
page 806
Sideloop Average Sideloop Average Setpoint Sideloop Signal Sideloop Applications
Inputs on page 855 Inputs Determination Conditioning
/Misc
Sideloop Interlock Sideloop Interlock Output Sideloop Sideloop Applications
Binary to Analog on Binary to Analog Controller
page 1330
Sideloop Interlock Sideloop Interlock Output Sideloop Sideloop Applications
Binary to Binary on Binary to Binary Controller
page 1332
Sideloop Maximum Sideloop Maximum Setpoint Sideloop Signal Sideloop Applications
Selector on page Selector Determination Conditioning
857 /Misc

1526 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 31 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Sideloop Minimum Sideloop Minimum Setpoint Sideloop Signal Sideloop Applications
Selector on page Selector Determination Conditioning
858 /Misc
Sideloop PI Sideloop PI Output Sideloop Sideloop Applications
Proportional Output Proportional Output Controller
on page 1334
Sideloop PI Staged Sideloop PI Staged Output Sideloop Sideloop Applications
Output on page 1339 Output Controller
Sideloop PI with Sideloop PI With Output Sideloop Sideloop Applications
Reset Proportional Reset Proportional Controller
Output on page 1336 Output
Sideloop PI With Sideloop PI With Output Sideloop Sideloop Applications
Reset Staged Output Reset Staged Controller
on page 1342 Output
Sideloop Reset Sideloop Reset Output Sideloop Sideloop Applications
Output on page 1346 Output Controller
Sideloop Sum Sideloop Sum Setpoint Sideloop Signal Sideloop Applications
Inputs on page 859 Inputs Determination Conditioning
/Misc
Single Speed Fan Single Speed Fan Output Fan Control • Fan Coil Application
Control on page Control Controller • Heat Pump Application
1146 • Unit Ventilator Application
Slave CD Constant Slave Supply Flow Output Cascaded Zone VAV Slave Dual Duct
Flow Setpoint Setpoint Control Controller Control Application
Control on page Dual Duct
1078
Slave CD Flow Slave Supply Flow Output Cascaded Zone VAV Slave Dual Duct
Setpoint Control on Setpoint Control Controller Control Application
page 1078 Dual Duct
Slave HD Flow Slave Supply Flow Output Cascaded Zone VAV Slave Dual Duct
Setpoint Control on Setpoint Control Controller Control Application
page 1078 Dual Duct
Slave Supply Flow Slave Supply Flow Output Cascaded Zone VAV Slave Single Duct
Setpoint Control on Setpoint Control Controller Control Application
page 1076
Smoke Control Smoke Control State General All Applications (except not
Sequencing for Sequencing for Generators Sequencing used in the Fan Coil
UL-864-UUKL on UL-864-UUKL Application)
page 932
Staged Box Heating Heating Staged Output Heating & VAV Single Duct Application
Control on page Outputs Controller Cooling Control -
1282 Heating
Staged Compressor Heat Pump Staged Output Heating & Heat Pump Application
Control on page Compressors Controller Cooling Control -
1231 Heat Pump
Staged Cooling Cooling Staged Output Heating & • Fan Coil Application
Control on page Outputs Controller Cooling Control - • Unit Ventilator Application
1225 Cooling
Staged Device Staged Device Setpoint Device Mode VAV Single Duct Application
Enable Enable Determination Determination
Determination Determination /Misc
Parallel on page 802 Parallel

Application and Module Reference Table 1527

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 32 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Staged Device Staged Device Setpoint Device Mode VAV Single Duct Application
Enable Enable Determination Determination
Determination Determination /Misc
Series on page 804 Series
Staged Heating Heating Staged Output Heating & • Fan Coil Application
Control on page Outputs Controller Cooling Control - • Heat Pump Application
1282 Heating
Staged Humidification Output Humidity Control All Air Handling Unit
Humidification Staged Outputs Controller Applications
Control on page
1305
Staged Preheat Heating Staged Output Heating & • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Control on page Outputs with Low Controller Cooling Control - Application
1288 Limit Heating • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Staged Reheat Heating Staged Output Heating & All Air Handling Unit
Control on page Outputs with Low Controller Cooling Control - Applications
1288 Limit Heating
Staged Heating Staged Output Heating & • VAV Single Duct
Supplemental Outputs Controller Cooling Control - Application
Heating Control on Heating • VAV Dual Duct Application
page 1282
Standard Dual Duct VAV Dual Duct Setpoint Setpoint • VAV Dual Duct Application
Endpoint Variable Flow Determination Calculation • VAV Slave Dual Duct
Calculation on page Endpoint /Misc Application
843 Calculation
Start Stop Start Stop State General • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Sequencing DA-T on Sequencing (AHU Generators Sequencing Application (DA-T Control)
page 947 Mixed Air) • AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
Start Stop Start Stop State General • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Sequencing on page Sequencing (AHU Generators Sequencing Application
947 Mixed Air) • AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Start Stop Start Stop State General • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Sequencing Zone on Sequencing (AHU Generators Sequencing Application (Zone Control)
page 947 Mixed Air) • AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
Summer Winter Summer Winter Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Compensation on Compensation Determination Calculation Application
page 837 /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
• Fan Coil Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct
Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application

1528 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 33 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Summer Winter SummerWinter Setpoint Device Mode • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Mode Determination Mode Determination Determination Application
on page 809 Determination /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
Supp Heating Last Value Output Timing Heat Pump Application
Control Status LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller
page 1374 Float)
Supp Heating Pass Through State Device Enable • VAV Single Duct
isAvailable Pass (Device Enable) Generators Application
Through on page • VAV Dual Duct Application
915
Supp Heating LV on Last Value Output Timing • VAV Single Duct
page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
Float) • VAV Dual Duct Application
Supply Area LV on Last Value Setpoint Timing All VAV Applications
page 860 (Boolean, Enum, Determination
Float) /Misc
Supply Damper Damper Control Output Damper Control - • VAV Single Duct
Control on page (VAV Supply) Controller VAV Application
1138 • VAV Slave Single Duct
Application
Supply Damper Damper Trouble Setpoint Damper Trouble • VAV Single Duct
Trouble Detection Detection Determination Detection Application
on page 863 /Misc • VAV Slave Single Duct
Application
Supply Fan Alarms Latching Alarm State Alarm • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
on page 866 Manager Generators Management Application
• AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
• AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Dual Duct) Application
Supply Fan Duct Fan Supply Duct Output Fan Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Static Control for Static for Controller AHU Application
UL-864-UUKL on UL-864-UUKL • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 1181 Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application
Supply Fan OnOff Last Value Output Timing All Air Handling Unit
LV on page 1374 (Boolean, Enum, Controller Applications
Float)
Supply Fan Percent Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Cmd LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
1374 Float) • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application

Application and Module Reference Table 1529

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 34 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Supply Flow Flow Calculation Setpoint Flow Calculation All VAV Applications
Calculation on page Determination
817 /Misc
Supply Flow Flow Setpoint (VAV Output Cascaded Zone VAV Single Duct Application
Setpoint Control on Single Duct) Controller Control
page 1071
Supply Pickup Gain Last Value Setpoint Timing All VAV Applications
LV on page 860 (Boolean, Enum, Determination
Float) /Misc
Supply Return Water Subtract Setpoint Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Differential Calc on Determination
page 794 /Misc
System Mode System Mode State State • Fan Coil Application
Determination on Determination Generators Determination • Heat Pump Application
page 1016 • Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct
Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
T
Three Speed Fan Fan Three Speed Output Fan Control • Fan Coil Application
Control on page Controller • Heat Pump Application
1148 • Unit Ventilator Application
Tower Fan X Control Tower Control v2 Output Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
v2 (Where X Is 1-8) Controller
on page 1103
Tower Fan X Enable Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
LV (Where X Is 1-8) (Boolean, Enum, Controller
on page 1374 Float)
Tower Fan X LV Last Value Output Timing Central Cooling Applications
(Where X Is 1-8) on (Boolean, Enum, Controller
page 1374 Float)
Tower Fan X Totalization (Enum Output Totalization Central Cooling Applications
Totalization (Where Runtime) Controller
X Is 1-8) on page
1380
Tower Rotation Rotation Small Output Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Small on page 1092 Controller
Two Position Min OA Damper 2 Output Damper Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Exhaust Damper Position Controller AHU Min OA Application
Control on page • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
1122 Application
Two Position Min Min OA Damper 2 Output Damper Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
OA Damper Control Position Controller AHU Min OA Application
on page 1122 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
TwrFanX Alarms Latching Alarm State Alarm Central Cooling Applications
(Where X Is 1-8) on Manager Generators Management
page 866
TwrFanX Blocking Blocking Protection Output Motor Protection Central Cooling Applications
Protection (Where X Controller
Is 1-8) on page 1311

1530 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 35 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
TwrFanX Status Status Alarm Setpoint Device Mode Central Cooling Applications
Alarm Determination Determination Determination Determination
(Where X Is 1-8) on /Misc
page 806
TWR Iso Valve (Pass Pass Through Output Pass Through Central Cooling Applications
Through) on page (Enum) Controller
1328
U
Unit Enable Unit Enable State State • All Air Handling Unit
Determination on Determination Generators Determination Applications
page 1018 • Fan Coil Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct
Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
Unocc Cooling Fan Unocc Cooling Fan Setpoint Fan Lockout All Air Handling Unit
Lockout on page 813 Lockout Determination Applications
/Misc
Unocc Heating Fan Unocc Heating Fan Setpoint Fan Lockout All Air Handling Unit
Lockout on page 815 Lockout Determination Applications
/Misc
Unocc Status Unoccupied State Unoccupied • Fan Coil Application
Determination on Sequencing Generators Sequencing • Heat Pump Application
page 1024 (Common)
Unocc Status Unoccupied State Unoccupied AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Determination (MZ) Sequencing (MZ) Generators Sequencing Dual Duct) Application
on page 1032
Unocc Status Unoccupied State Unoccupied Unit Ventilator Application
Determination with Sequencing (UV) Generators Sequencing
OAT on page 1035
UV 2 Pipe 2 Position 2 Pipe 2 Position Output Heating & Unit Ventilator Application
Control on page Valve with DA-T Controller Cooling Control -
1189 Low Limit 2 Pipe
UV 2 Pipe 2 Pipe Proportional Output Heating & Unit Ventilator Application
Proportional Control Valve with DA-T Controller Cooling Control -
on page 1203 Low Limit 2 Pipe
UV 2 Position Heating 2 Position Output Heating & Unit Ventilator Application
Heating Control on Valve with DA-T Controller Cooling Control -
page 1253 Low Limit Heating
UV Face and Bypass Heating FBPD 2 Output Heating & Unit Ventilator Application
Heating Control on Position Valve with Controller Cooling Control -
page 1256 DA-T Low Limit Heating
UV Proportional Heating Output Heating & Unit Ventilator Application
Heating Control on Proportional Valve Controller Cooling Control -
page 1271 with DA-T Low Limit Heating
UV Staged Heating Heating Staged Output Heating & Unit Ventilator Application
Control on page Outputs with DA-T Controller Cooling Control -
1285 Low Limit Heating
UV-ZN-T Occupied Zone State Occupied Unit Ventilator Application
Sequencing Sequencing (UV Generators Sequencing
ASHRAE 1 on page Cycle 1)
983

Application and Module Reference Table 1531

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 36 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
UV-ZN-T Occupied Zone State Occupied Unit Ventilator Application
Sequencing Sequencing (UV Generators Sequencing
ASHRAE 2 on page Cycle 2)
986
UV-ZN-T Occupied Zone State Occupied Unit Ventilator Application
Sequencing Sequencing (UV Generators Sequencing
ASHRAE 3 on page Cycle 3)
989
UV-ZN-T Occupied Zone State Occupied Unit Ventilator Application
Sequencing Sequencing (UV Generators Sequencing
ASHRAE W on page Cycle W)
991
V
Variable Capacity Fan Return or Output Fan Control - • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Exhaust Fan BSP Exhaust BSP Controller AHU Single Duct Application
Control on page Control • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
1161 Dual Duct Application
Variable Capacity Fan Return or Output Fan Control - • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Exhaust Fan Track Exhaust Tracking Controller AHU Single Duct Application
Control on page • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
1167 Dual Duct Application
Variable Capacity Fan Return or Output Fan Control - • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Exhaust Fan Volume Exhaust Volume Controller AHU Single Duct Application
Match Control on Match Control • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
page 1170 Dual Duct Application
Variable Capacity Min OA Fan Output Damper Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Fan Minimum OA Variable Capacity Controller AHU Min OA Application
Flow Control on Flow Control • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 1131 Application
Variable Capacity Fan Relief Variable Output Fan Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Relief Fan BSP Capacity BSP Controller AHU Application
Control on page Control • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
1156 Application
Variable Capacity Fan Return or Output Fan Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Return Fan BSP Exhaust BSP Controller AHU Application
Control on page Control • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
1161 Application
Variable Capacity Fan Return or Output Fan Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Return Fan Track Exhaust Tracking Controller AHU Application
Control on page • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
1167 Application
Variable Capacity Fan Return or Output Fan Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Return Fan Volume Exhaust Volume Controller AHU Application
Match Control on Match Control • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
page 1170 Application
Variable Capacity Fan Supply Duct Output Fan Control - • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Supply Fan Control Static Control Controller AHU Application
on page 1178 • AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct
Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Dual Duct Application

1532 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 37 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Variable Speed Fan Plant Sequencing- State Central Plant Central Cooling Applications
Clg Twr Sequencing Modulating Generators
on page 895
VAV Unocc Status Unoccupied State Unoccupied • VAV Single Duct
Determination on Sequencing (VAV) Generators Sequencing Application
page 1038 • VAV Dual Duct Application
VAV-ZN-T Occupied Zone State Occupied VAV Dual Duct Application
Sequencing on page Sequencing (VAV) Generators Sequencing
994
VAV-ZN-T Occupied Zone State Occupied VAV Single Duct Application
Sequencing Single Sequencing (VAV) Generators Sequencing
Duct on page 994
W
WarmupCooldown WarmupCooldown Setpoint Device Mode VAV Single Duct Application
Determination on Determination Determination Determination
page 811 /Misc
WarmupCooldown Pass Through State Pass Through • All Air Handling Unit
Pass Through on (Boolean, Enum) Generators Applications
page 997 • Fan Coil Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
WarmupCooldown WarmupCooldown State VAV Specific • VAV Single Duct
Sequencing on page Sequencing Generators Sequencing Application
1052 • VAV Dual Duct Application
Water System Flush Pass Through State Pass Through • All Air Handling Unit
Pass Through on (Boolean, Enum) Generators Applications
page 997 • Fan Coil Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct
Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
Z
ZN-T Setpoint ZN-T Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Determination on Determination Determination Calculation Application
page 849 /Misc • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
• Fan Coil Application
• Heat Pump Application
• Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct
Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
Zone X Damper Zone Damper Output Multizone Zone AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Control on page Controller Control Dual Duct) Application
1314
Zone X Max Cap Last Value Output Timing AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Fract LV on page (Boolean, Enum, Controller Dual Duct) Application
1374 Float)
Zone X MSC Staged MSC 01 through Output Staged Output AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Heating XX on page MSC 12 Controller Control Dual Duct) Application
1348

Application and Module Reference Table 1533

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 38 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Zone X MSC 2 MSC 01 through Output Staged Output AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Position Heating on MSC 12 Controller Control Dual Duct) Application
page 1348
Zone X with 2 Zone Damper w 2 Output Multizone Zone AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Position Heating Position Heating Controller Control Dual Duct) Application
Valve Control on Valve
page 1316
Zone X with Zone Damper w Output Multizone Zone AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Proportional Heating Proportional Controller Control Dual Duct) Application
Valve Control on Heating Valve
page 1320
Zone X with Staged Zone Damper w Output Multizone Zone AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Heating Control on Staged Heating Controller Control Dual Duct) Application
page 1324
Zone Cooling Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Control Status LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
page 1374 Float) • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
Zone Damper Mode Pass Through Output Pass Through AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Pass Through on (Enum) Controller Dual Duct) Application
page 1328
Zone Damper Mode Pass Through State Pass Through AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Pass Through SG on (Boolean, Enum) Generators Dual Duct) Application
page 997
Zone Heating Availability State Device Enable AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Availability Determination Generators Dual Duct) Application
Determination on
page 917
Zone Heating Last Value Output Timing • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Control Status LV on (Boolean, Enum, Controller Application
page 1374 Float) • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application
Zone Htg Valve Pass Through Output Pass Through AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Mode Pass Through (Enum) Controller Dual Duct) Application
on page 1328
Zone Htg Valve Pass Through State Pass Through AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Mode Pass Through (Boolean, Enum) Generators Dual Duct) Application
SG on page 997
Zone Low Limit Zone Low Limit State State • Fan Coil Application
Determination on Determination Generators Determination • Heat Pump Application
page 1021 • Unit Ventilator Application
• VAV Single Duct
Application
• VAV Dual Duct Application
Zone Sequencing on Occupied Zone State Occupied • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
page 978 Sequencing (FC/ Generators Sequencing Application
AHU) • AHU 100% Outdoor Air
Single Duct Application
• AHU Rooftop Unit
Application

1534 CCT Help: Reference

 Table 41-630: Application and Module Reference Table (Part 39 of 39)
Module Instance Module Palette Module Module Applications
Name Name Category Sub-Category
Zone Staged Htg Pass Through Output Pass Through AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Mode Pass Through (Enum) Controller Dual Duct) Application
on page 1328
Zone Staged Htg Pass Through State Pass Through AHU Multizone (Mixed Air
Mode Pass Through (Boolean, Enum) Generators Dual Duct) Application
SG on page 997
Zone Unoccupied Unoccupied State Unoccupied • AHU Mixed Air Single Duct
Sequencing on page Sequencing (AHU Generators Sequencing Application
1029 Mixed Air ZN-T) • AHU Rooftop Unit
Application

Application and Module Reference Table 1535

1536 CCT Help: Reference
Chapter 42: CCT Help: Reference
Glossary
Introduction
This glossary defines acronyms and terms used within this Help system.

A
ACOS
Arc Cosine. See Math in the Logic section.

A/D
Analog to Digital Converter

ADS
Application and Data Server

ADX
Extended Application and Data Server

AHU
Air Handling Unit

AI
Analog Input

AO
Analog Output

Application
An application is a collection of the components that make up the control logic of a
system, including modules, logic blocks, custom logic, and hardware definition.
For information on the types of applications you can create, see the Applications
section.

ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers

ASIN
Arc Sine. See Math in the Logic section.

ATAN
Arc Tangent. See Math in the Logic section.

Glossary 1537
AV
Analog Value

AVG
Average. See Statistical in the Logic section.
Back to Glossary Introduction.

B
BAS
Building Automation System

BI
Binary Input

Block
See Logic Block.

BO
Binary Output

Boolean
Boolean logic and operators where data can only be true or false and manipulated
by operators such as AND, OR, and NOT. See Boolean in the Logic section.

BSP
British Standard Pipe

BV
Binary Value
Back to Glossary Introduction.

C
.caf
Controller Application File

Controller Application File

A Controller Application File (.caf) is a file which contains all the logic
components needed to represent a system. CCT prompts you to save a controller
application file for each system you create. Saving this file allows you to access it
again later to make changes or to use it for additional systems. The default location
to save a controller application file is C:\Documents and Settings\username.

1538 CCT Help: Reference

CCT
Controller Configuration Tool: CCT is used to configure, simulate, load, and
commission devices, such as FECs, IOMs, NCEs, and VMA1600s, on an MS/TP
bus.

CI
Counter Input

CO
Configurable Output

COS
Cosine. See Math in the Logic section.

COV
Change of Value

CPU
Central Processing Unit

CHW
Chilled Water

CW
Condenser Water
Back to Glossary Introduction.

D
D/A
Digital to Analog Converter
Back to Glossary Introduction.

E
Enum
Enumeration: A set of ordered data.

EWMA
Exponentially-Weighted Moving Average. See Calculation in the Logic section.

EXP
Exponent. See Math in the Logic section.
Back to Glossary Introduction.

Glossary 1539
F
FBPD
Face and Bypass Damper

FEC
Field Equipment Controller: The FEC is a configurable digital controller that uses
the BACnet MS/TP communications protocol.

FC Bus
Field Controller Bus: The FC Bus connects MS/TP field controllers to the Metasys
system Supervisory Controller.

FCB
Field Controller Bus. See FC Bus.

Float
Floating point

FSCS
Firefighter Smoke Control Station

FSM
Finite State Machine
Back to Glossary Introduction.

H
HW
Hot Water

HX
Heat Recovery
Back to Glossary Introduction.

I
IO
Input/Output

IOM
Input/Output Module: The IOM provides expanded Input/Output capabilities to
the FEC to support specific applications.
Back to Glossary Introduction.

1540 CCT Help: Reference

L
LED
Light-Emitting Diode

Logic Block
A logic block is a component used to construct the control logic of a system. You
can view and work with logic blocks in the Logic View of CCT. Logic block
inputs are used to influence the state or values presented as outputs. You can view
and/or edit logic contained within modules highlighted in tan in the Control View,
but changes should not be made until the default logic is thoroughly understood
and the effect of changes on the connected outputs is considered. See the Logic
section for information on logic blocks.
Back to Glossary Introduction.

M
MAC Address
Media Access Control Address: The MAC Address is the same as the field device
address.

MADD
Mixed Air Dual Duct application. See the Air Handling Unit Applications section.

MASD
Mixed Air Single Duct application. See the Air Handling Unit Applications
section.

MAX
Maximum. See Statistical in the Logic section.

MIN
Minimum. See Statistical in the Logic section.

Module
A module is a component made up of logic blocks used to create portions of the
overall control logic of a system. Module inputs are used to influence the state or
values presented as outputs. You can view and /or edit modules highlighted in tan
in the Control View, but changes should not be made until the default
configuration is thoroughly understood and the effect of changes on the connected
outputs is considered. See the Modules section.

MSC
Multistage Controller. See Control in the Logic section.

Glossary 1541
MS/TP
Master-Slave/Token-Passing: MS/TP is a communications bus protocol based on
BACnet standard protocol SSPC-135, Clause 9. The MS/TP communications bus
connects supervisory controllers and field controllers to point interfaces.

MUX
Multiplexor. See Selection in the Logic section.

MV
Multistate Value

MZ
Multizone application. See the Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
section.
Back to Glossary Introduction.

N
NAE
Network Automation Engine

NCE
Network Control Engine: A controller that combines the network supervisor
capabilities and IP network connectivity of a NAE with the Input/Output point
connectivity and direct digital control capabilities of a Metasys Field Equipment
Controller.
Back to Glossary Introduction.

O
OADD
100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct application. See the Air Handling Unit Applications
section.

OASD
100% Outdoor Air Single Duct application. See the Air Handling Unit
Applications section.
Back to Glossary Introduction.

P
PAO
Position Adjust Output

1542 CCT Help: Reference

PCW
Primary Condenser Water

PCHW
Primary Chilled Water

PDF
Portable Document Format. See the Printing the Entire Help System section.

PHW
Primary Hot Water

PID
Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative. See Control in the Logic section.

PVDC
Proportional Variable Deadband Control. See Control in the Logic section.
Back to Glossary Introduction.

R
RO
Relay Output

RTU
Rooftop Unit. See the Rooftop Unit Application section.
Back to Glossary Introduction.

S
SA Bus
Sensor/Actuator Bus: The SA Bus connects point devices (IOMs, VSDs, Local
Controller Displays, or Network Sensors [Duct or Zone]) to the field devices.

SAB
Sensor/Actuator Bus. See SA Bus.

SCW
Secondary Condenser Water

SCHW
Secondary Chilled Water

SHW
Secondary Hot Water

Glossary 1543
SIN
Sine. See Math in the Logic section.

SQRT
Square Root. See Math in the Logic section.

System
In CCT, a system is represented by the mechanical equipment and the logic needed
to control that equipment, independent of hardware definition. The System
Selection Wizard in CCT describes the make up of a mechanical system to aid you
in creating the group of logic components that work together to control the
mechanical system. See System Types and Configurations in the Configuring a
System section.
Back to Glossary Introduction.

T
TAN
Tangent. See Math in the Logic section.
Back to Glossary Introduction.

U
UI
Universal Input (for hardware mapping) or User Interface. See the User Interface
section.

UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

UO
Universal Output
Back to Glossary Introduction.

V
VAV
Variable Air Volume

VAVDD or VAV-DD
VAV Dual Duct application. See the VAV Applications section.

VAVSD or VAV-SD
VAV Single Duct application. See the VAV Applications section.

1544 CCT Help: Reference

VMA
VAV Modular Assembly

VSD
Variable Speed Drive
Back to Glossary Introduction.

W
Wireless Commissioning Converter
The Wireless Commissioning Converter is a communications converter that
provides a temporary connection between the laptop running the CCT software
and the device to commission, synchronize, and balance field devices.
Back to Glossary Introduction.

Glossary 1545
1546 CCT Help: Reference
Chapter 43: CCT Help: Reference
Trademarks
Table 43-631: Trademarks
Terms ® TM Owner
ActiveX ® Microsoft Corporation
Adobe ® Adobe Systems Incorporated
ASHRAE ® ASHRAE
BACnet ® ASHRAE
Bluetooth ® Broadcom Corporation
Eaton ® Eaton Corporation
Echelon ® Echelon Corporation
Java ® Sun Microsystems
JavaScript ® Sun Microsystems
LONMARK ® Echelon Corporation
LONWORKS ® Echelon Corporation
Metasys ® Johnson Controls, Inc.
Microsoft ® Microsoft Corporation
Windows ® Microsoft Corporation

All other marks herein are the marks of their respective owners.

Trademarks 1547
1548 CCT Help: Reference
Chapter 44: CCT Help: Reference
Related Documentation
Use the following table to find information available outside this Help system.
Table 44-632: Related Documentation (Part 1 of 2)
For Information On See Document LIT or Part
Number
Metasys System Extended Metasys System Extended Architecture Overview LIT-1201527
Architecture Technical Bulletin
Metasys System Extended Metasys System Extended Architecture Glossary LIT-1201612
Architecture Terms and Acronyms Technical Bulletin
How to Use the Metasys System Metasys system Help LIT-12017931
Extended Architecture User Interface
Metasys System and CCT Metasys System Enumeration Sets Technical LIT-12011361
Enumeration Sets Bulletin
MS/TP Communications MS/TP Communications Bus Technical Bulletin LIT-12011034
How to Install the CCT Software CCT Installation Instructions Part No.
24-10110-77
How to Install the Wireless Wireless Commissioning Converter Installation Part No.
Commissioning Converter Instructions 24-10108-2
How to Set Up the Wireless Metasys CCT Bluetooth Technology LIT-12011038
Commissioning Converter Laptop Communication Commissioning Guide
How to Install the FEC16x0 FEC16x0 Field Equipment Controller Installation Part No.
Instructions 24-10143-4
How to Install the FEC26x0 FEC26x10 Field Equipment Controller Installation Part No.
Instructions 24-10143-12
How to Install the IOM1710 IOM1710 Input/Output Module Installation Part No.
Instructions 24-10144-9
How to Install the IOM2710 and IOM2710 and IOM3710 Input/Output Module Part No.
IOM3710 Installation Instructions 24-10144-17
How to Install the IOM4710 IOM4710 Input/Output Module Installation Part No.
Instructions 24-10144-25
How to Install the VMA1610 and VMA1600 Series Controllers Installation Part No.
VMA1620 Instructions 24-10143-20
How to Balance VAV Boxes VAV Balancing Sensor Technical Bulletin LIT-12011087
How to Install the NCE25 NCE25 Installation Instructions Part No.
24-10143-63
How to Commission and Configure NCE Technical Bulletin LIT-12011267
the NCE
How to Install the Local Controller DIS1710 Local Controller Display Installation Part No.
Display Instructions 24-10240-9
How to Operate the Local Controller DIS1710 Local Controller Display Technical LIT-12011270
Display Bulletin

Related Documentation 1549

 Table 44-632: Related Documentation (Part 2 of 2)
For Information On See Document LIT or Part
Number
How to Install Networked TEC2645-2 BACnet MS/TP Networked Part No.
Thermostats Thermostat with Single Proportional Output and 24-9890-226
One-Speed Fan Control Installation Instructions
TEC26x6(H)-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Networked Part No.
Thermostats with Two Outputs, Dehumidification 24-9890-234
Capability, and Three Speeds of Fan Control
Installation Instructions
TEC26x7-2 Series BACnet MS/TP Networked Part No.
Thermostats with Two Outputs Installation 24-9890-242
Instructions
How to Install Network Sensors Surface-Mounted NS Series Network Sensors Part No.
(Network Zone Sensors) with Setpoint Adjustment Installation Instructions 24-10094-9
Surface-Mounted NS Series Network Sensors Part No.
without Setpoint Adjustment Installation 24-10094-17
Instructions
Wallbox-Mounted NS Series Network Sensors Part No.
with Setpoint Adjustment Installation Instructions 24-10094-25
Wallbox-Mounted NS Series Network Sensors Part No.
without Setpoint Adjustment Installation 24-10094-33
Instructions
How to Install Network Sensors NS Series Network Discharge Air Sensors Part No.
(Network Duct Sensors) Installation Instructions 24-10336-0

1. This LIT number represents a print friendly version of the Help.

1550 CCT Help: Reference

Chapter 45: CCT Help
Index
Numerics
100 OA Cold Deck Sequencing . . . . 954
100 OA Single Duct Sequencing . . . 957
100 OA Start Stop Sequencing . . . . 942
100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Control
Logic System Selection . . . . . . . . 480
100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Core Logic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Mechanical
System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
100% Outdoor Air Single Duct
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Control
Logic System Selection . . . . . . . . 439
100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Core
Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
100% Outdoor Air Single Duct
Mechanical System Selection . . . . 400
2 Pipe 2 Position Valve . . . . . . . . . 1185
2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
2 Pipe Coil Pump Pass Through . . 1328
2 Pipe Cooling Control Status LV . 1374
2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
2 Pipe Heating Control Status LV . 1374
2 Pipe isAvailable Pass Through . . . 915
2 Pipe Proportional Valve . . . . . . . 1199
2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T
Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
2 Pipe Pump Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
2 Pipe Pump Blocking Protection . 1311
2 Pipe Pump Command LV . . . . . . 1374
2 Pipe Pump Status Alarm Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
2 Position 2 Pipe Control . . . . . . . . 1185
2 Position Box Heating Control . . . 1250
2 Position Cooling Control . . . . . . 1212
2 Position Heating Control . . . . . . 1250
Index
2 Position Supplemental Heating Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
2 Speed Fan Clg Twr Sequencing . . 905
3 Speed Fan Clg Twr Sequencing . . 908
A
Absolute Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Absolute Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Accessing
CCT Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ACOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Hybrid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Activity Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Activity Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Add block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Add-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Adding
Column to the State Selection Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Hybrid Activity to the State Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Network Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Network Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Output Control Module . . . . . . . 205
Port Using the New Port Feature 180
Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module 204
Sideloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
State Generation Module . . . . . . 204
Table to the State Selection Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
AHU Staged Cooling Control . . . . 1228
Air Handling Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Air Handling Unit Applications . . . . 287
Airflow Status Determination . . . . . 800
Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Latching Alarm Manager . . . . . . 866
Analog Input Attributes . . . . . . . . . 1393
Analog Input Commands . . . . . . . . 1398
1551
Analog Input Object . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
Analog Input Attributes . . . . . . 1393
Analog Input Commands . . . . . 1398
Analog Output Attributes . . . . . . . . 1400
Analog Output Commands . . . . . . 1403
Analog Output Object . . . . . . . . . . 1399
Analog Output Attributes . . . . . 1400
Analog Output Commands . . . 1403
Analog Value Attributes . . . . . . . . 1405
Analog Value Commands . . . . . . . 1409
Analog Value Object . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Analog Value Attributes . . . . . 1405
Analog Value Commands . . . . 1409
AND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
Application Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Application Mode Determination . 1000
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Air Handling Unit . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Central Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 347
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 288
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 444
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 398
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Sideloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) . . . . 581
VAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 675
VAV Slave Single Duct . . . . . . . 644
ASHRAE Cycle Control
Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Unit Ventilator Modules . . . . . . 596
ASIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
ATAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Attribute Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Autocalibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Autocalibrate Now LV . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Autocalibration Sequence . . . . . . . 1041
1552 CCT Help
Availability Determination . . . . . . . 917
AVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
B
B
Attribute Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Backup Files
System Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
BACnet Exposed Parameter . . . . . . 775
Balancer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 266
Balancer Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
Balancer Override DD . . . . . . . . . . 1044
Balancer Override DDX . . . . . . . . 1044
Balancer Override SD . . . . . . . . . . 1044
Balancer Override SDX . . . . . . . . . 1044
Balancer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 266, 274
Balancing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Basin Options
Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Central Cooling Modules . . . . . . 732
Binary Input Attributes . . . . . . . . . 1411
Binary Input Commands . . . . . . . . 1413
Binary Input Object . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
Binary Input Attributes . . . . . . 1411
Binary Input Commands . . . . . 1413
Binary Interlock Control . . . . . . . . . 696
Binary Interlock Control Modules . . 696
Binary Output Attributes . . . . . . . . 1415
Binary Output Commands . . . . . . . 1419
Binary Output Object . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
Binary Output Attributes . . . . . 1415
Binary Output Commands . . . . 1419
Binary Value Attributes . . . . . . . . . 1421
Binary Value Commands . . . . . . . . 1425
Binary Value Object . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
Binary Value Attributes . . . . . . 1421
Binary Value Commands . . . . . 1425
Block
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Selecting a Block from the Control
Block Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Block Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 226
Searching for a Block Using . . . 176
Block Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Blocking Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Bluetooth Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Bluetooth Wireless Connection . . . . 265
Boiler Options
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Central Heating Modules . . . . . . 767
Boiler Rotation Small . . . . . . . . . . 1092
Boiler Sequencing by Building Load 888
Boiler Sequencing by OA-T . . . . . . 898
Boiler X Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
Boiler X Enable LV . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Boiler X Interlock Cmd LV . . . . . . 1374
Boiler X LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Boiler X Totalization . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Boilers Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
Boolean to Enum Translation Block 189
Boot Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Box Fan
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
VAV Single Duct Modules . . . . 630
VAV Slave Single Duct . . . . . . . 649
VAV Slave Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Box Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 281, 1048
Canceling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Performing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Reading Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Saving Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Box Flow Test Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Box Heating isAvailable Pass Through
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Box Heating LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Box Heating Max Cap Fract LV . . 1374
Breaking a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Building Load Calculation . . . . . . . . 871
Building Load Calculation v2 . . . . . 875
C Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
C
Attribute Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Calculate Building Load . . . . . . . . . 871
Calculate CD Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Calculate HD Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Calculate K-Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Calculate Supply Flow . . . . . . . . . . . 823
Index
Calculate Supply Flow Setpoint . . . 823
Calculated Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
Calibration Solenoid Pass Through 1328
Canceling
Box Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Cascaded DA-T Setpoint LV . . . . . 1374
Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
Cascaded Zone Control . . . . . . . . . 1064
Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
Flow Setpoint (VAV Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
Flow Setpoint (VAV Single Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
HD Constant Flow Setpoint . . . 1074
Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control
Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
CCT Help
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
CCT Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
CCT System Selection Wizard . . . . 217
CD Area LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
CD Constant Damper Control. . . . 1138
CD Constant Flow Setpoint Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
CD CS LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
CD Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138
CD Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
CD Flow Setpoint Control . . . . . . . 1068
CD Output LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
CD Pickup Gain LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
CD-T sp Reset by OA . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Basin Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Basin Options Modules . . . . . . . 732
Chiller Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Chiller Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Chiller Options Modules . . . . . . 728
Chillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Condenser Options . . . . . . . . . . . 731
1553
 Condenser Options Modules . . . 731
Condenser Water System . . . . . . 716
Condenser Water System Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Cooling System Enable . . . . . . . 700
Cooling System Enable Modules 700
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
General Options Modules . . . . . 736
Secondary Chill Water Options . 734
Secondary Chill Water Options
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Secondary Variable Speed Chill
Water Pumping . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Secondary Variable Speed Chill
Water Pumping Modules . . . . 724
Central Cooling Applications . . . . . 699
Central Cooling Control Logic Selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Central Cooling Core Logic . . . . . . . 700
Central Cooling Mechanical System
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Boiler Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Boiler Options Modules . . . . . . . 767
General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
General Options Modules . . . . . 772
Heat Exchanger Options . . . . . . 769
Heat Exchanger Options Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Heat Exchangers . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Heat Exchangers Modules . . . . . 753
Heating System Enable . . . . . . . 738
Heating System Enable Modules 738
Hot Water/Steam Boilers . . . . . . 739
Hot Water/Steam Boilers Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Secondary Hot Water Options . . 770
Secondary Hot Water Options
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water
Pumping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water
Pumping Modules . . . . . . . . . 760
Zone Loop Control . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Zone Loop Control Modules . . . 764
Central Heating Applications . . . . . . 737
1554 CCT Help
Central Heating Control Logic Selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Central Heating Core Logic . . . . . . . 737
Central Heating Low Temp Control 880
Central Heating Mechanical System
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Central Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Add-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Calculate Building Load . . . . . . 871
Central Heating Low Temp Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
Count On Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Device Availability Calculation . 884
Heat Exchanger with Return Water
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
Load Calculation v2 . . . . . . . . . . 875
Output Controller Modules . . . 1080
PID Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Plant Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
Plant Sequencing-Building Load 888
Plant Sequencing-Decouple . . . . 890
Plant Sequencing-Discrete . . . . . 892
Plant Sequencing-Modulating . . 895
Plant Sequencing-OA-T . . . . . . . 898
Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
Pump Control v2 . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
Rotation Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
Secondary Pump PID . . . . . . . . 1097
Sequenced Output . . . . . . . . . . 1099
State Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
System Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Tower Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Tower Control v2 . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
Tower Sequencing-1 Speed . . . . 902
Tower Sequencing-2 Speed . . . . 905
Tower Sequencing-3 Speed . . . . 908
Tower Sequencing-Vernier . . . . 911
Central Plant Applications . . . . . . . . 699
Change Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Changing
Column Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Hidden Edge Label of a Connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Input Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Output Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
 State Table Label . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Chilled Water System Enable . . . . . 900
Chiller Load Total Calc . . . . . . . . . . 792
Chiller Options
Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Central Cooling Modules . . . . . . 728
Chiller Rotation Small . . . . . . . . . . 1092
Chiller Sequencing by Building Load
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Chiller Sequencing by Chiller Load 888
Chiller Sequencing by Decouple Loop
Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Chiller Sequencing by Delta T . . . . . 892
Chiller X Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
Chiller X Enable LV . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Chiller X Interlock Cmd LV . . . . . 1374
Chiller X LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Chiller X Totalization . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Chillers
Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Central Cooling Modules . . . . . . 706
CHW Isolation Valve Status . . . . . . 883
CHW Pump X Enable LV . . . . . . . 1374
Close .caf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Codes
Application Code . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Boot Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Main Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing . 926
Coils
Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Fan Coil Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Heat Pump Modules . . . . . . . . . . 607
Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Unit Ventilator Modules . . . . . . 587
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
VAV Dual Duct Modules . . . . . 663
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . 631, 650
VAV Single Duct Modules . . . . 631
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 682
VAV Slave Dual Duct Modules 682
VAV Slave Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Coils (Common Heating-Cooling)
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 331
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 333
Index
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 429
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck)
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 378
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 380
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 466
Outside Air Dual Duct Modules 468
Coils (Cooling)
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 322
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 324
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 421
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Rooftop Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Coils (Heating - Hot Deck)
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 382
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 384
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 470
Outside Air Dual Duct Modules 472
Coils (Heating)
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Rooftop Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Coils (Preheat)
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 372
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 375
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 315
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 318
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 460
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 415
Outside Air Dual Duct Modules 463
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
1555
Coils (Reheat)
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 326
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 328
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 425
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Cold Deck Damper Actuator
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
VAV Dual Duct Modules . . . . . 658
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 677
VAV Slave Dual Duct Modules 677
Cold Deck Damper Trouble Detection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Cold Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Cold Deck Flow Calculation . . . . . . 817
Column Label
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Combustion Damper Command . . 1328
Command Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Command Hierarchy . . . . . . . 224, 1482
Command Hierarchy Block
Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Commanding
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Commissioning
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Commissioning a System . . . . . . . . . 265
Bluetooth Wireless Connection . 265
Ethernet NAE Passthru Connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
System and Device Connections 265
Commissioning and Servicing Tasks 120
Commissioning Device Wizard . . . . 276
Commissioning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Commissioning Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Compressor Max Cap Fract LV . . . 1374
Condenser Options
Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Central Cooling Modules . . . . . . 731
Condenser Water System
Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Central Cooling Modules . . . . . . 718
Configuration and Simulation Tasks 119
1556 CCT Help
Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Configuration Options
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Configuration Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Configure Display Screen . . . . . . . . 238
Configuring
Command Hierarchy Block . . . . 185
Hybrid Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Line Segment Block . . . . . . . . . 188
MUX Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Translation Block . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Configuring a System . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Control View Configuration . . . 161
Controller Application File . . . . . 76
Details Configuration . . . . . . . . . 161
Hardware Definition . . . . . . . . . 161
Logic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Logic View Configuration . . . . . 161
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
System Selection Tree . . . . . . . . 160
System Selection Wizard . . . . . . 158
System Types and Configurations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Configuring the Local Controller Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Confirm (Delete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Confirm Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Connecting
Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Connection
Breaking a Connection . . . . . . . . 171
Changing a Connection . . . . . . . 171
Changing the Hidden Edge Label
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Exposing Ports for Connection . 170
Making a Connection . . . . . . . . . 171
Making Bluetooth Wireless
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Making Ethernet Passthru
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Connection Lines
Hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 272
Showing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 272
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 243
Connections Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Constant Capacity Exhaust Fan Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154
Constant Capacity Fan Minimum OA
Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
Constant Capacity Return Fan Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154
Constant Capacity Supply Fan Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154
Constant Dual Duct Endpoint Calculation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Contents Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
Control Block Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Control Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . 286
Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
Control Logic System Selection
Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 392
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 341
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Outdoor Air Dual Duct Control . 480
Outdoor Air Single Duct Control 439
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 685
Control Scheme
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 686
Control View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 219
Balancer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Connections Table . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Index
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Network Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Network Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Parameters Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Right-Click Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Setpoint/Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . 87
State Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
State Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Status Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Control View Configuration . . . . . . 161
Control View Details
Modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Control View Workspace . . . . . . . 84, 85
Controller Application File . . . . . . . . 76
Controller Selection Dialog Box . . . 254
Controller Selection Screen . . . . . . . 252
Cooling 2 Position Valve . . . . . . . . 1212
Cooling Availability Determination 917
Cooling Coil Pump Pass Through . 1328
Cooling Control Status LV . . . . . . 1374
Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with
Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
Cooling isAvailable Pass Through . 915
Cooling Max Cap Fract LV . . . . . . 1374
Cooling Percent Cmd LV . . . . . . . 1374
Cooling Proportional Valve . . . . . . 1219
Cooling Proportional Valve with
Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
Cooling Pump Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Cooling Pump Blocking Protection 1311
Cooling Pump Command LV . . . . 1374
Cooling Pump Status Alarm
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Cooling Required LV . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Cooling Staged Outputs . . . . . . . . . 1225
Cooling Staged Outputs with
Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
Cooling System Enable
Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Central Cooling Modules . . . . . . 700
Cooling X LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Cooling X Totalization . . . . . . . . . 1380
Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
1557
 Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 348
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 289
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 445
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 399
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 676
VAV Slave Single Duct . . . . . . . 645
COS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Count On Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Counter Input Attributes . . . . . . . . 1427
Counter Input Commands . . . . . . . 1429
Counter Input Object . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
Counter Input Attributes . . . . . 1427
Counter Input Commands . . . . 1429
Create State Selection Column . . . . 223
Create State Selection Output . . . . . 697
Create State Selection Table . . . . . . 222
Creating
Custom Applications . . . . . . . . . 194
Custom Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Monitoring/Supervisory Control
Only Applications . . . . . . . . . 210
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Custom Applications
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Custom Filters
Performing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Custom Logic
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Customizing
State Selection Tables . . . . . . . . 207
CW Isolation Valve Status . . . . . . . . 883
CW Pump Rotation Small . . . . . . . 1092
CW Pump X Control . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
CW Pump X Control v2 . . . . . . . . . 1089
CW Pump X Enable LV . . . . . . . . 1374
CW Pump X LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
CW Pump X Totalization . . . . . . . 1380
CW Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
CW Sequencing LV . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
1558 CCT Help
CWPs Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
CWPX Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
CWPX Blocking Protection . . . . . . 1311
CWPX Status Alarm Determination 806
D
Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or
W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Damper Control with Low Limit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
Damper Control - AHU Econ . . . . 1112
Damper Control for Economizer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
Damper Control for Relief Fan 1115
Damper Control for Volume
Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Damper Control - AHU Min OA . . 1122
Min OA Damper 2 Position . . . 1122
Min OA Damper Proportional Output
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
Min OA Fan Constant Capacity 1128
Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
Damper Control - VAV . . . . . . . . . 1135
Damper Control (VAV Exhaust)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
Damper Control (VAV Supply) 1138
Damper Control (VAV Exhaust) . . 1135
Damper Control (VAV Supply) . . . 1138
Damper Control for Economizer . . 1112
Damper Control for Relief Fan . . . 1115
Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Damper Control for Volume Matching
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Damper Control Status LV . . . . . . 1374
Damper Control with Low Limit . . 1109
Damper Minimum Position
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
Damper Minimum Position Reset by
CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
Damper Output LV . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Damper Trouble Detection . . . . . . . 863
DA-T sp Reset by OA . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Default Element of a Module
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Default Element Selection . . . . . . . . 227
Default Object Naming Preferences
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Default System Selection Preferences
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Default Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Define Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Defining
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Dehumidification Control
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 338
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 338
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 436
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Rooftop Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Dehumidification Sequencing . . . . . 927
Deleting
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 243
Details Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 107, 115
Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Hardware View Tab . . . . . . . . . . 107
Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 168
Device
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Uploading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Device Availability Calculation . . . . 884
Device Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795, 915
Availability Determination . . . . 917
Economizer Availability . . . . . . 795
Economizer Availability RA-T
Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
Heat Recovery Suitability
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Index
Device Mode Determination . . . . . . 800
Flow Status Determination . . . . 800
Staged Device Enable Determination
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
Staged Device Enable Determination
Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Status Alarm Determination . . . 806
SummerWinter Mode Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
WarmupCooldown Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Dew Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Diff Flow Calc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
Discharge Air Setpoint Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Discharge Air Setpoint Reset . . . . . . 831
Discharge Flow Calculation . . . . . . . 817
Discharge Flow Determination . . . . 823
Discrete Boiler Sequencing by HWR-T
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 238
Divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Downloading
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
E
Econ Enable OA versus RA . . . . . . . 798
Economizer Availability . . . . . . . . . 795
Economizer Availability Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Economizer Availability RA-T Compare
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
Economizer Damper
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 356
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 357
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 297
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 298
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Rooftop Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Economizer Suitability
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Heat Pump Modules . . . . . . . . . 616
1559
 Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Unit Ventilator Modules . . . . . . 599
Edit
Balancing Parameters . . . . . . . . 274
Emergency Mode Pass Through . . . 997
Emergency Mode Sequencing . . . . . 930
Energy Hold Off Determination . . 1002
Energy Wheel Two Pos Byp . . . . . 1241
Entering
Job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Enthalpy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Enthalpy Wheel Control . . . . . . . . 1238
Enum Set Change Dialog . . . . . . . . . 225
Enum to Boolean Translation Block 189
Equal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Ethernet NAE Passthru . . . . . . . . . . 259
Ethernet NAE Passthru Connection . 265
EWMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
Execution Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
Exhaust Air Flow Calculation . . . . . 817
Exhaust Area LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Exhaust Damper Actuator
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
VAV Dual Duct Modules . . . . . 662
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
VAV Single Duct Modules . . . . 629
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 681
VAV Slave Dual Duct Modules 681
VAV Slave Single Duct . . . . . . . 648
VAV Slave Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Exhaust Damper Control . . . . . . . . 1135
Exhaust Damper Trouble Detection . 863
Exhaust Differential Setpoint Calculation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Exhaust Fan Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Exhaust Fan Blocking Protection . 1311
Exhaust Fan BSP Control for UL-864-
UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
Exhaust Fan Command LV . . . . . . 1374
Exhaust Fan Status Alarm Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control for
UL-864-UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
Exhaust Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . 817
Exhaust Pickup Gain LV . . . . . . . . . 860
1560 CCT Help
Existing System File
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Exit CCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Exp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Exporting
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Object Naming Preferences . . . . 150
System Selection Preferences . . 152
Exposing
Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Exposing Ports for Connection . . . . 170
F
Fan Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
Fan Cmd LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Coils Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Misc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Misc Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Monitored Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Monitored Safeties Modules . . . 574
Occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Occupancy Modules . . . . . . . . . 577
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 571
Optional Equipment Modules . . 571
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Optional Features Modules . . . . 579
Sensor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Supply Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Supply Fan Modules . . . . . . . . . 566
Fan Coil Applications . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Fan Coil Control Logic System Selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Fan Coil Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Fan Coil Mechanical System Selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Fan Proportional . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Fan Three Speed . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
Fan VAV Series . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
Parallel Fan Control . . . . . . . . . 1145
Single Speed Fan Control . . . . 1146
Fan Control - AHU . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158
 Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-
UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-
UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
Fan Single Speed . . . . . . . . . . . 1154
Fan Supply Duct Static Control 1178
Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-
UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Fan Control by Others BI Pass Through
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Fan Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Fan Determination (Terminal Units)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Flow
Based) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Temp
Based) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058
Fan Determination (VAV Series) . 1060
Fan Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Fan OnOff LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Fan Proportional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL 1158
Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking . . 1167
Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-
UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
Fan Single Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154
Fan Speed Override Pass Through . . 997
Fan Supply Duct Static Control . . . 1178
Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-
UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Fan Three Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
Fan VAV Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
Index
Fans
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 349
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 351
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 290
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 293
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 446
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 400
Outside Air Dual Duct Modules 448
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Rooftop Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Favorites Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67
FBPD 2
Position Valve 2 Pipe Control . . 1194
FBPD 2 Position Valve Cooling Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
FBPD 2 Position Valve Preheat Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
FBPD Proportional Valve Preheat
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
FC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
FC-ZN-T Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . 978
FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Feedback Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Feedback Control Modules . . . . . . . 694
Filtering
Object Naming Preferences . . . . 148
Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Flow Differential Calculation . . 821
Flow Sum Calculation . . . . . . . . 823
Flow Differential Calculation . . . . . 821
Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Flow Differential Setpoint Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Flow Override Command . . . . . . . . 275
Flow Sensor Locations
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
VAV Dual Duct Modules . . . . . 660
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 679
VAV Slave Dual Duct Modules 679
1561
Flow Setpoint (VAV Dual Duct) . . 1068
Flow Setpoint (VAV Single Duct) . 1071
Flow Status Determination . . . . . . . 800
Flow Sum Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . 823
Free Cooling is Available . . . . . . . 1475
Frost Protection Determination . . . . 880
G HD Flow Setpoint Control . . . . . . . 1068
G
Attribute Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
General Options
Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Central Cooling Modules . . . . . . 736
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Central Heating Modules . . . . . . 772
General Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
Dehumidification Sequencing . . 927
Emergency Mode Sequencing . . 930
Heat Recovery Low Limit
Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Humidification Sequencing . . . . 937
Loss of Airflow Sequencing . . . 939
Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-
864-UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100%
OA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed
Air) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Generated State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
Glycol Loop Control . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
Greater Than . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Greater Than or Equal . . . . . . . . . . 1458
H Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Hardware
Defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Hardware Considerations . . . . . . . . . 247
Hardware Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Hardware Definition Wizard . . . . . . 247
Hardware Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Hardware View Tab . . . . . . . . . 107, 169
HD Area LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
HD Constant Damper Control . . . . 1138
HD Constant Flow Setpoint . . . . . . 1074
HD Constant Flow Setpoint Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
HD CS LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
HD Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138
HD Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
HD Pickup Gain LV . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
HD-T sp Reset by OA . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Heat Exchanger Options
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Central Heating Modules . . . . . . 769
Heat Exchanger with Low Limit Output
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
Heat Exchanger with Return Water
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
Heat Exchangers
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Central Heating Modules . . . . . . 753
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Coils Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Economizer Suitability . . . . . . . 616
Economizer Suitability Modules 616
Misc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Misc Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Monitored Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Monitored Safeties Modules . . . 612
Occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Occupancy Modules . . . . . . . . . 615
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 609
Optional Equipment Modules . . 609
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Optional Features Modules . . . . 620
Reversing Valve Outputs . . . . . . 618
Sensor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Supply Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Supply Fan Modules . . . . . . . . . 606
Heat Pump Application . . . . . . . . . . 603
Heat Pump Control Logic System
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Heat Pump Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . 604
Heat Pump Mechanical System Selection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Heat Pump Staged Compressors . . 1231

1562 CCT Help

Heat Recovery
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 367
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 369
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 310
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 312
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 455
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 410
Outside Air Dual Duct Modules 457
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
Heat Recovery Glycol Loop . . . . . 1235
Heat Recovery Htg CS LV . . . . . . 1374
Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Heat Recovery Pump Alarms . . . . . 866
Heat Recovery Pump Blocking
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
Heat Recovery Pump Command LV
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Heat Recovery Pump Status Alarm
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Heat Recovery Suitability Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Heat Recovery Wheel . . . . . . . . . . 1238
Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass
Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241
Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass
Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
Heating & Cooling Control - 2 Pipe
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
2 Pipe 2 Position Valve . . . . . . 1185
2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T
Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189
2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with
Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
2 Pipe Proportional Valve . . . . 1199
2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T
Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
Index
Heating & Cooling Control - Cooling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
Cooling 2 Position Valve . . . . . 1212
Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with
Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . 1215
Cooling Proportional Valve . . . 1219
Cooling Proportional Valve with
Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . 1221
Cooling Staged Outputs . . . . . . 1225
Cooling Staged Outputs with
Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . 1228
Heating & Cooling Control - Heat Pump
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Heat Pump Staged Compressors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Heating & Cooling Control - Heat
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
Heat Recovery Glycol Loop . . 1235
Heat Recovery Wheel . . . . . . . 1238
Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos
Bypass Dampers . . . . . . . . . . 1241
Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass
Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
Heating & Cooling Control - Heating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
Heating 2 Position Valve . . . . . 1250
Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T
Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with
DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . 1256
Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with
Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
Heating FBPD Proportional Valve
with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . 1263
Heating Proportional Valve . . . 1268
Heating Proportional Valve with
DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . 1271
Heating Proportional Valve with Low
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
Heating Sequenced Valves with Low
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278
Heating Staged Outputs . . . . . . 1282
Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T
Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Heating Staged Outputs with Low
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
1563
 Preheat Proportional Valve with
Return Water Control . . . . . . 1292
Heating 2 Position Valve . . . . . . . . 1250
Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
Heating Availability Determination . 917
Heating Control Status LV . . . . . . 1374
Heating Cooling Required LV . . . . 1374
Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with
DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256
Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with
Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with
Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
Heating for Zones
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Heating isAvailable Pass Through . . 915
Heating Max Cap Fract LV . . . . . . 1374
Heating Percent Cmd LV . . . . . . . . 1374
Heating Priority
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Heating Proportional Valve . . . . . . 1268
Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T
Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271
Heating Proportional Valve with Low
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
Heating Required LV . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Heating Sequenced Valves with Low
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278
Heating Staged Outputs . . . . . . . . . 1282
Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low
Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
Heating System Enable
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Central Heating Modules . . . . . . 738
Heating Zone X Output . . . . . . . . . 1274
Heating Zone X SP Reset . . . . . . . . 835
Help Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Help Content Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Help Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Hidden Edge Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
1564 CCT Help
Hiding
Connection Lines . . . . . . . . 181, 272
Involvement . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 269
High Temp Alarm Pass Through . . 1328
Hot Deck Damper Actuator
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
VAV Dual Duct Modules . . . . . 659
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 678
VAV Slave Dual Duct Modules 678
Hot Deck Damper Trouble Detection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset
by EA-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset
by RA-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Hot Deck Flow Calculation . . . . . . . 817
Hot Gas Bypass Valve Control . . . 1328
Hot Water System Enable . . . . . . . . 900
Hot Water/Steam Boilers
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Central Heating Modules . . . . . . 742
HP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
HP-ZN-T Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . 980
HR Energy Wheel Alarms . . . . . . . . 866
HR Energy Wheel Blocking Protection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
HR Energy Wheel Status Alarm
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Humidification
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 387
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 388
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 335
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 336
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549, 554
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 475
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 433
Outside Air Dual Duct Modules 476
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Rooftop Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Humidification Control
Humidification Packaged Unit . 1296
Humidification Proportional Steam
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
Humidification Scrubber Output
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
Humidification Staged Outputs 1305
Humidification IsAvailable Pass Through
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Humidification Max Cap Fract LV 1374
Humidification Packaged Unit . . . . 1296
Humidification Proportional Steam
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
Humidification Pump Command LV
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Humidification Scrubber Output . . 1302
Humidification Sequencing . . . . . . . 937
Humidification Staged Outputs . . . 1305
Humidity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
Humidity Control Status LV . . . . . 1374
Humidity Scrubber Output . . . . . . . 1302
HX1 Multi Valve Span . . . . . . . . . 1099
HX2 Multi Valve Span . . . . . . . . . 1099
Hybrid Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Hybrid Activity in State Tables
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
I Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Import and Export Preferences . . . . 146
Importing
Object Naming Preferences . . . . 151
System Selection Preferences . . 152
Index Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Input
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Input (Boolean) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Input (Enum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Input Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Input Selection (New) . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Input Signal
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 789
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Involvement
Hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 269
Showing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 269
Index
IOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Isolation Valve Status . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Items
Commanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
J
Java . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
JavaScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
L
Language Support . . . . . . . . . . 107, 147
Last Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) .860,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
Latching Alarm Manager . . . . . . . . . 866
Less Than . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Less Than or Equal . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
Lighting Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 1444
Line Segment Block
Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Load Calculation v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Load Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Load Wizard Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Loading Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Load Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Local Controller Display . . . . . 231, 238
Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Localization Preferences . . . . . 147, 153
LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
LOG10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
Activity Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Activity Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
1565
 Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Psychrometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482
Statistical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Logic Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 224
Block Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Control Block Palette . . . . . . . . . 102
Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Right-Click Menus . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Status Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Logic View Configuration . . . . . . . . 161
Logic View Details
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Logic View Workspace . . . . . . . . 84, 98
Loss of Airflow Sequencing . . . . . . 939
LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
MADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
MADD-MZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Main Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Making
Bluetooth Wireless Connection . 267
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Ethernet Passthru Connection . . 267
Making a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
MASD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Master CD Constant Flow Setpoint Pass
Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Master CD Flow Setpoint Pass Through
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Master Flow Setpoint Pass Through 997
Master HD Flow Setpoint Pass Through
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
1566 CCT Help
MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
Mechanical System Selection . . . . . 286
Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 349
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 290
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 446
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 400
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 677
VAV Slave Single Duct . . . . . . . 647
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Right-Click (Control View) . . . . . 95
Right-Click (Logic View) . . . . . 101
Metasys System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
MIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
Min OA Damper 2 Position . . . . . . 1122
Min OA Damper Proportional Output
Min OA Fan Constant Capacity . . . 1128
Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
Min Outdoor Air Fan Command LV
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Min Outdoor Air Fan Status Alarm
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Min Position Determination . . . . . . 825
Minimum Flow Determination . . . . 846
Minimum Flow Determination - Dual
Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Minimum OA Fan Alarms . . . . . . . . 866
Minimum OA Flow Calculation . . . 817
Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/ Damper
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 301
Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 360
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 361
Misc
Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Fan Coil Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Heat Pump Modules . . . . . . . . . . 613
Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Unit Ventilator Modules . . . . . . 594
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
VAV Dual Duct Modules . . . . . 668
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
VAV Single Duct Modules . . . . 638
Mixed Air Cold Deck HR Sequencing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Mixed Air Cold Deck Sequencing . . 961
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) . . . 378
Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) . . . . 382
Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Coils (Preheat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Coils (Preheat) Modules . . . . . . 375
Economizer Damper Modules . . 357
Economizer Dampers . . . . . . . . . 356
Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Fans Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Heat Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Heat Recovery Modules . . . . . . . 369
Humidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Humidification Modules . . . . . . 388
Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Monitored Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Monitored Safeties Modules . . . 397
Occupancy Control . . . . . . . . . . 365
Occupancy Control Modules . . . 365
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 396
Optional Features . . . . . . . . 390, 391
Optional Sensors . . . . . . . . 392, 394
Reduce Outdoor Air on Low
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Reduce Outdoor Air on Low
Temperature Modules . . . . . . 363
Temperature Control Strategy . . 364
Index
Temperature Control Strategy
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Mixed Air Dual Duct Application . . 347
Mixed Air Dual Duct Control Logic
System Selection . . . . . . . . . 392, 559
Mixed Air Dual Duct Core Logic . . 348
Mixed Air Dual Duct Mechanical System
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Coils (Common Heating-Cooling)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Coils (Common Heating-Cooling)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Coils (Cooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Coils (Cooling) Modules . . . . . . 324
Coils (Preheat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Coils (Preheat) Modules . . . . . . 318
Coils (Reheat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Coils (Reheat) Modules . . . . . . . 328
Dehumidification Control . . . . . 338
Dehumidification Control Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Economizer Damper . . . . . . . . . 297
Economizer Damper Modules . . 298
Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Fans Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Heat Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Heat Recovery Modules . . . . . . . 312
Humidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Humidification Modules . . . . . . 336
Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Monitored Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Monitored Safeties Modules . . . 346
Occupancy Control . . . . . . . . . . 308
Occupancy Control Modules . . . 308
Optinal Features Modules . . . . . 340
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 345
Optional Equipment Modules . . 345
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Optional Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Optional Sensors Modules . . . . . 343
Reduce Outdoor Air on Low
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
1567
 Reduce Outdoor Air on Low
Temperature Modules . . . . . . 304
Temperature Control Strategy . . 305
Temperature Control Strategy
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Mixed Air Single Duct Application . 288
Mixed Air Single Duct Control Logic
System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Mixed Air Single Duct Core Logic . 289
Mixed Air Single Duct HR Sequencing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Mixed Air Single Duct Mechanical
System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Mixed Air Single Duct Sequencing . 967
Mixing Dampers for Zones
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Mode Selection (MUX) . . . . . . . . . . 226
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Modifying
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Control View Details . . . . . . . . . 243
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Existing .caf File or Selected System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Module’s Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Output Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 243
State Selection Tables . . . . . . . . 172
System Selections . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Modulating HX or Boiler Sequencing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
Module
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Module Selection (New) . . . . . . . . . 219
Module Use in Applications . . . . . . 774
Module’s Logic
Modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
1568 CCT Help
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Enable Network Inputs . . . . . . . 780
Generator Interface Network Inputs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
Generic Network Inputs . . . . . . . 788
Generic Network Outputs . . . . 1386
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Network Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Network Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
Output Control Interface Network
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
Output Controller . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
Rotation and Switch Network Inputs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Sensor and Setpoint Network Inputs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Setpoint Determination/Misc . . . 791
State Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
Monitored Safeties
Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Fan Coil Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Heat Pump Modules . . . . . . . . . 612
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 397
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 397
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 346
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 346
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 485
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 443
Outside Air Dual Duct Modules 485
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Rooftop Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Unit Ventilator Modules . . . . . . 593
Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only
Applications
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
Blocking Protection . . . . . . . . . 1311
MS/TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
MSC 01 through MSC 12 . . . . . . . 1348
MSC 2 Position 2 Pipe . . . . . . . . . . 1348
MSC 2 Position Box Heating . . . . . 1348
MSC 2 Position Cooling . . . . . . . . 1348
MSC 2 Position Heating . . . . . . . . 1348
MSC 2 Position Supplemental Heating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
MSC Pre-Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
MSC Staged Box Heating XX . . . . 1348
MSC Staged Compressor X . . . . . . 1348
MSC Staged Cooling XX . . . . . . . 1348
MSC Staged Heating XX . . . . . . . . 1348
MSC Staged Humidification XX . . 1348
MSC Staged Preheat XX . . . . . . . . 1348
MSC Staged Reheat XX . . . . . . . . 1348
MSC Staged Supplemental Heating 1348
MSC XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
Multiply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Multistate Value Attributes . . . . . . 1431
Multistate Value Commands . . . . . 1434
Multistate Value Object . . . . . . . . . 1431
Multistate Value Attributes . . . 1431
Multistate Value Commands . . 1434
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) . . 514
Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) . . . 540
Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) . . . . 544
Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Coils (Preheat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Coils (Preheat) Modules . . . . . . 537
Configuration Options . . . . . . . . 516
Configuration Options Modules 516
Economizer Damper Modules . . 523
Economizer Dampers . . . . . . . . . 522
Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Fans Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Heat Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Heat Recovery Modules . . . . . . . 530
Heating for Zones . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Heating for Zones Modules . . . . 557
Humidification . . . . . . . . . . 549, 554
Humidification Modules . . . . . . 550
Mixing Dampers for Zones . . . . 556
Mixing Dampers for Zones Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Index
Monitored Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Monitored Safeties Modules . . . 562
Number of Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Occupancy Control . . . . . . . . . . 526
Occupancy Control Modules . . . 526
Optional AHU Sensors . . . 559, 560
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 561
Optional Features . . . . . . . . 552, 553
Sensor(s) for Zones Modules . . . 555
Temperature Control Strategy . . 525
Temperature Control Strategy
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Core
Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Mechanical System Selection . . . 516
Multizone Zone Control . . . . . . . . 1313
Zone Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating
Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
Zone Damper w Proportional Heating
Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
Zone Damper w Staged Heating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 1482
MUX Block
Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
N
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Navigate Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Navigation Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Negate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Network Input
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Network Input Selection . . . . . . . . . 219
Network Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 777
Enable Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
Generator Interface Modules . . . 778
Generic (Add New) Modules . . . 788
Rotation and Switch Modules . . 786
Sensor and Setpoint Modules . . 782
Network Output
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Network Output Selection . . . . . . . . 219
1569
Network Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 1385
Generic (Add New) Modules . . 1386
Output Control Interface Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
Network Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Network Settings Screen . . . . . . . . . 254
Networked Thermostats . . . . . . . . . 1549
New Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
New Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
New System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Normal Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
Not Equal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Number of Devices Running LV . . 1374
Number of SCHWP Running LV . 1374
Number of SHWP Running LV . . . 1374
Number of Towers Running LV . . 1374
Number of Zones
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
O Rooftop Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
OADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
OASD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Object Naming Preferences . . . . . . . 143
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Performing Custom Filters . . . . . 149
Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Object Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
Objects
Analog Input Object . . . . . . . . . 1393
Analog Output Object . . . . . . . 1399
Analog Value Object . . . . . . . . 1405
Binary Input Object . . . . . . . . . 1411
Binary Output Object . . . . . . . . 1415
Binary Value Object . . . . . . . . 1421
Counter Input Object . . . . . . . . 1427
Multistate Value Object . . . . . . 1431
Object Overview . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
Position Adjust Output Object . 1435
Occupancy
Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Fan Coil Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
1570 CCT Help
Heat Pump Modules . . . . . . . . . 615
Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Unit Ventilator Modules . . . . . . 598
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
VAV Single Duct Modules . . . . 639
Occupancy Control
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 365
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 365
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 308
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 308
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 453
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 408
Outside Air Dual Duct Modules 453
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Occupancy Mode Determination . . 1010
Occupancy Mode Determination (MZ)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
Occupied Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . 952
Occupied Sequencing (AHU
100% OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
Occupied Sequencing (AHU
100% OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
Occupied Sequencing (AHU
MADD w HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Occupied Sequencing (AHU
MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
Occupied Sequencing (AHU
MASD w HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Occupied Sequencing (AHU
MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
Occupied Sequencing (Single
Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Occupied Zone Sequencing (FC) 978
Occupied Zone Sequencing (HP) 980
Occupied Zone Sequencing
(UV Cycle 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
Occupied Zone Sequencing
UV Cycle 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986
 Occupied Zone Sequencing
UV Cycle 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Occupied Zone Sequencing
(UV Cycle W) . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Occupied Zone Sequencing
(VAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100%
OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954
Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100%
OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w
HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD w
HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
Occupied Sequencing (Single Device)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Occupied Zone Sequencing (FC) . . . 978
Occupied Zone Sequencing (HP) . . 980
Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV
Cycle 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV
Cycle 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986
Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV
Cycle 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle
W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Occupied Zone Sequencing (VAV) . 994
On/Off Fan Clg Twr Sequencing . . . 902
On/Off Fan w/ Vernier Output Clg
Twr Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
Open .caf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Opening
Existing System File . . . . . . . . . 165
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Define Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Select System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Optional AHU Sensors
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Index
Optional Equipment
Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Fan Coil Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Heat Pump Modules . . . . . . . . . 609
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 396
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 396
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 345
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 345
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 484
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 442
Outside Air Dual Duct Modules 484
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Rooftop Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Unit Ventilator Modules . . . . . . 590
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
VAV Dual Duct Modules . . . . . 665
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
VAV Single Duct Modules . . . . 634
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 684
VAV Slave Dual Duct Modules 684
VAV Slave Single Duct . . . . . . . 652
VAV Slave Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Optional Features
Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Fan Coil Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Heat Pump Modules . . . . . . . . . 620
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 390
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 391
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 339
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 340
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 478
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 437
Outside Air Dual Duct Modules 479
1571
 Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Rooftop Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Unit Ventilator Modules . . . . . . 601
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
VAV Single Duct Modules . . . . 642
Optional Sensors
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 392
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 394
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 341
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 343
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 480
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 439
Outside Air Dual Duct Modules 482
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Rooftop Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . 446
Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) . . . 466
Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) . . . . 470
Coils (Preheat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Heat Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Humidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Monitored Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Occupancy Control . . . . . . . . . . 453
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 484
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Optional Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Temperature Control Strategy . . 452
Outdoor Air Dual Duct Applications 444
Outdoor Air Dual Duct Core Logic . 445
Outdoor Air Flow Calculation . . . . . 817
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . . 400
Coils (Common Heating-Cooling)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Coils (Cooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Coils (Preheat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Coils (Reheat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Dehumidification Control . . . . . 436
Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Heat Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
1572 CCT Help
Humidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Monitored Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Occupancy Control . . . . . . . . . . 408
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 442
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Optional Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Temperature Control Strategy . . 405
Outdoor Air Single Duct Applications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Outdoor Air Single Duct Core Logic 399
Output
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Output (Boolean) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Output (Enum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Output Control Module
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Output Control Module Selection . . 219
Output Controller Modules . . . . . . 1063
Cascaded Zone Control . . . . . . 1064
Central Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Damper Control - AHU Econ . 1112
Damper Control - AHU Min OA
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
Damper Control - VAV . . . . . . 1135
Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Fan Control - AHU . . . . . . . . . 1153
Heating & Cooling Control -
2 Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Heating & Cooling Control -
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
Heating & Cooling Control -
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Heating & Cooling Control -
Heat Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
Heating & Cooling Control -
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
Humidity Control . . . . . . . . . . . 1296
Lighting Control . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 1311
Multizone Zone Control . . . . . 1313
Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328
Sideloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
Staged Output Control . . . . . . . 1348
Staged Output Sequencing . . . . 1365
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
 Totalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Output Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Output Parameter
Modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Output Selection (New) . . . . . . . . . . 220
Output Signal
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 1387
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Outside Air Dual Duct
Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Coils (Heating - Hot Deck)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Coils (Preheat) Modules . . . . . . 463
Fans Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Heat Recovery Modules . . . . . . . 457
Humidification Modules . . . . . . 476
Monitored Safeties Modules . . . 485
Occupancy Control Modules . . . 453
Optional Equipment Modules . . 484
Optional Features Modules . . . . 479
Optional Sensors Modules . . . . . 482
Temperature Control Strategy
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Outside Air Single Duct
Coils (Common Heating-Cooling)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Coils (Cooling) Modules . . . . . . 423
Coils (Preheat) Modules . . . . . . 418
Coils (Reheat) Modules . . . . . . . 427
Dehumidification Control
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Fans Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Heat Recovery Modules . . . . . . . 412
Humidification Modules . . . . . . 434
Monitored Safeties Modules . . . 443
Occupancy Control Modules . . . 408
Optional Equipment Modules . . 442
Optional Features Modules . . . . 438
Optional Sensors Modules . . . . . 440
Temperature Control Strategy
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
P Adding Using the New Port Feature
Packaged Economizer Control . . . . 1122
Packaged Humidifier Control . . . . 1296
Index
Palette
Control Block (Logic View) . . . 102
Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 244, 272
Parallel Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
Parallel Fan Determination Flow
Based . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
Parallel Fan Determination Temp
Based . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 243
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 243
Parameters Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997, 1328
Pass Through (Boolean, Enum) . 997
Pass Through (Enum) . . . . . . . 1328
Pass Through (Boolean, Enum) . . . . 997
Pass Through (Device Enable) . . . . 915
Pass Through (Enum) . . . . . . . . . . 1328
PCHWPs Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
PCHWPX Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
PCHWPX Blocking Protection . . . 1311
PCHWPX Status Alarm
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Peer Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Peer-to-Peer Communication . . . . . . 162
Performing
Box Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Custom Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
PHWPX Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
PHWPX Blocking Protection . . . . 1311
PHWPX Status Alarm Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
PID LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
PID Pre-Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
PID Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
Plant Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
Plant Sequencing-Building Load . . . 888
Plant Sequencing-Decouple . . . . . . . 890
Plant Sequencing-Discrete . . . . . . . . 892
Plant Sequencing-Modulating . . . . . 895
Plant Sequencing-OA-T . . . . . . . . . . 898
Point Assignment Screen . . . . . . . . . 253
Port
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Port Exposure (BACnet System) . . . 227
1573
Port Exposure (Connections) . . . . . . 228
Port Name Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Port Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Ports
Exposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Exposing for Connection . . . . . . 170
Position Adjust Output Attributes . 1435
Position Adjust Output Commands 1439
Position Adjust Output Object . . . . 1435
Position Adjust Output Attributes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
Position Adjust Output Commands
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Import and Exports . . . . . . . . . . 146
Localization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Object Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Preferences-Localization Screen . . . 156
Preferences-Object Naming Screen . 154
Preferences-System Selection Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Preheat Availability Determination . 917
Preheat Coil Pump Pass Through . 1328
Preheat Control Status LV . . . . . . . 1374
Preheat Max Cap Fract LV . . . . . . 1374
Preheat Percent Cmd LV . . . . . . . . 1374
Preheat Proportional Valve Output 1292
Preheat Proportional Valve with Return
Water Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292
Preheat Pump Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Preheat Pump Blocking Protection 1311
Preheat Pump Command LV . . . . . 1374
Preheat Pump Status Alarm
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Preheat Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Preheat X LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Preheat X Totalization . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Primary CHW Pump Rotation Small
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
Primary CHW Pump X Control . . . 1086
Primary CHW Pump X Control v2 1089
Primary CHW Pump X LV . . . . . . 1374
1574 CCT Help
Primary CHW Pump X Totalization
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Primary HW Pump X LV . . . . . . . 1374
Primary HW Pump X Totalization 1380
Primary Pump Rotation Small . . . . 1092
Primary Pump X Control . . . . . . . . 1086
Primary Pump X Control v2 . . . . . 1089
Primary Pump X Enable LV . . . . . 1374
Primary States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 272
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Printing Summary Reports . . . . . . . 109
Printing the Logic Diagram . . . . . . . 193
Proportional 2 Pipe Control . . . . . . 1199
Proportional Box Heating Control . 1268
Proportional Cooling Control . . . . 1219
Proportional Damper Minimum OA Flow
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
Proportional Damper Output . . . . . 1109
Proportional EA Damper Control for
Volume Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Proportional Fan Control . . . . . . . . 1142
Proportional Heating Control . . . . . 1268
Proportional OA Damper Control . 1112
Proportional OA Damper Control for
Relief Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
Proportional Steam Humidification
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
Proportional Supplemental Heating
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268
Proportional Unit Vent 1 Damper Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Proportional Unit Vent 2-W Damper
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Proportional Unit Vent 3 Damper Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
Proportional Valve 2 Pipe Control . 1207
Proportional Valve Cooling Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221
Proportional Valve Preheat Control 1274
Proportional Valve Reheat Control 1274
Psychrometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
Pump Control v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
PVDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
 Q Resetting
Quick Navigation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 84
R
RA-T sp Reset by OA . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Rate Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
Reading Results for Box Flow Test . 282
Reduce Outdoor Air on Low
Temperature
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 363
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 363
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 304
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 304
Reheat Availability Determination . 917
Reheat Coil Pump Pass Through . . 1328
Reheat Control Status LV . . . . . . . 1374
Reheat Max Cap Fract LV . . . . . . . 1374
Reheat Percent Cmd LV . . . . . . . . 1374
Reheat Pump Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Reheat Pump Blocking Protection . 1311
Reheat Pump Command LV . . . . . 1374
Reheat Pump Status Alarm
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Reheat X LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Reheat X Totalization . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . 1549
Relative Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Reliability Check (Boolean) . . . . . 1443
Reliability Check (Enum) . . . . . . . 1443
Reliability Check (Float) . . . . . . . . 1443
Reliability Merge (Boolean) . . . . . 1443
Reliability Merge (Enum) . . . . . . . 1443
Reliability Merge (Float) . . . . . . . . 1443
Relief Fan Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Relief Fan BSP Control for UL-864-
UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158
Relief Fan Command LV . . . . . . . . 1374
Relief Fan Status Alarm Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Relief Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . . 817
Rename (Module/Block) . . . . . . . . . 228
Renaming
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Index
Object Naming Preferences . . . . 150
System Selection Preferences . . 151
Restore Flow Command . . . . . . . . . 275
Return Fan Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Return Fan BSP Control for UL-864-
UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
Return Fan Command LV . . . . . . . 1374
Return Fan Status Alarm Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Return Fan Volume Match Control for
UL-864-UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
Return Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . 817
Reversing Valve Outputs
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL . 1164
Right-Click Menus (Control View) . . 95
Right-Click Menus (Logic View) . . 101
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Coils (Cooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Coils (Cooling) Modules . . . . . . 499
Coils (Heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Coils (Heating) Modules . . . . . . 503
Dehumidification Control . . . . . 507
Dehumidification Control Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Economizer Damper . . . . . . . . . 489
Economizer Damper Modules . . 490
Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Fans Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Humidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Humidification Modules . . . . . . 505
Monitored Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Monitored Safeties Modules . . . 513
Occupancy Control . . . . . . . . . . 495
Occupancy Control Modules . . . 495
Optinal Features Modules . . . . . 509
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 512
Optional Equipment Modules . . 512
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Optional Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Optional Sensors Modules . . . . . 511
Temperature Control Strategy . . 492
Temperature Control Strategy
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Rooftop Application . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
1575
Rooftop Control Logic System Secondary HW Pump X Control v2 1089
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Secondary HW Pump X LV . . . . . 1374
Rooftop Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Secondary HW Pump X Totalization
Rooftop Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Secondary Pump PID . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
Rotation Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092 Secondary Pump X Enable LV . . . 1374
RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water
Pumping
S Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Central Cooling Modules . . . . . . 724
Save .caf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water
Saving Results for Box Flow Test . . 282
Pumping
SC
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Attribute Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Central Heating Modules . . . . . . 760
SCHWP PID LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Select System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
SCHWPX Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Selecting
SCHWPX Blocking Protection . . . 1311
Block from the Control Block Palette
SCHWPX Status Alarm Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Search Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482
Search Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Sideloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Searching
Sensor(s) for Zones
for a Block Using the Block Finder
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Secondary Chill Water Options
Sensors
Central Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Central Cooling Modules . . . . . . 735
Fan Coil Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Secondary Chill Water Pump PID v2
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
Heat Pump Modules . . . . . . . . . 611
Secondary CHW Pump Rotation Small
Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
Unit Ventilator Modules . . . . . . 592
Secondary CHW Pump Sequencing 895
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Secondary CHW Pump X LV . . . . 1374
VAV Dual Duct Modules . . . . . 667
Secondary CHW Pump X Modulating
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
VAV Single Duct Modules . . . . 636
Secondary CHW Pump X Modulating
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 684
Control v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
VAV Slave Dual Duct Modules 684
Secondary CHW Pump X Totalization
VAV Slave Single Duct . . . . . . . 653
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
VAV Slave Single Duct Modules
Secondary Hot Water Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Sequenced Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
Central Heating Modules . . . . . . 770
Sequenced Valves Preheat Control 1278
Secondary Hot Water Pump PID v2
Sequenced Valves Reheat Control . 1278
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
Sequencer 01 through Sequencer 16
Secondary Hot Water Pump Rotation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
Series Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
Secondary HW Pump Sequencing . . 895
Series Fan Determination . . . . . . . . 1060
Secondary HW Pump X Control . . 1086

1576 CCT Help

Servicing Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Setpoint Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
Damper Minimum Position
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
Damper Minimum Position Reset by
CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
Discharge Air Setpoint
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Discharge Air Setpoint Reset . . . 831
Flow Differential Setpoint
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Setpoint Reset by OA . . . . . . . . 835
Summer Winter Compensation . 837
VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow
Endpoint Calculation . . . . . . . 839
VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow
Endpoint Calculation . . . . . . . 843
VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
ZN-T Setpoint Determination . . 849
Setpoint Determination/Misc Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Central Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Damper Trouble Detection . . . . 863
Device Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Device Mode Determination . . . 800
Fan Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Setpoint Calculation . . . . . . . . . . 825
Sideloop Signal Conditioning . . 855
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout . . . 813
Unocc Heating Fan Lockout . . . 815
Setpoint Reset by OA . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Setpoint/Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Setting
Default Element of a Module . . . 190
Default Object Naming Preferences
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Default System Selection Preferences
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Index
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Showing
Connection Lines . . . . . . . . 181, 272
Involvement . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 269
SHWP PID LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
SHWPX Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
SHWPX Blocking Protection . . . . 1311
SHWPX Status Alarm Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Sideloop . . . . . . . . . 211, 691, 692, 1330
Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
Sideloop PI Proportional Output
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
Sideloop PI Staged Output . . . . 1339
Sideloop PI With Reset Proportional
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Sideloop PI With Reset Staged
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
Sideloop Reset Output . . . . . . . 1346
Sideloop Applications . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Sideloop Average Inputs . . . . . . . . . 855
Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
Sideloop Max Cap Fract LV . . . . . 1374
Sideloop Maximum Selector . . . . . . 857
Sideloop Minimum Selector . . . . . . 858
Sideloop PI Proportional Output . . 1334
Sideloop PI Staged Output . . . . . . . 1339
Sideloop PI With Reset Proportional
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
Sideloop Reset Output . . . . . . . . . . 1346
Sideloop Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Binary Interlock Control . . . . . . 696
Binary Interlock Control Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Create State Selection Output . . 697
Feedback Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Feedback Control Modules . . . . 694
Sideloop Signal Conditioning . . . . . 855
Sideloop Average Inputs . . . . . . 855
1577
 Sideloop Maximum Selector . . . 857
Sideloop Minimum Selector . . . 858
Sideloop Sum Inputs . . . . . . . . . 859
Sideloop Sum Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Simulation and Commissioning Modes
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Simulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Simulation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Simulation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Simulation Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
SIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Single Speed Fan Control . . . . . . . 1146
SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Slave CD Constant Flow Setpoint
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
Slave CD Flow Setpoint Control . . 1078
Slave HD Flow Setpoint Control . . 1078
Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076
Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual
Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-
UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . 685
VAV Slave Dual Duct Modules 685
VAV Slave Single Duct . . . . . . . 654
VAV Slave Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Sorting
Object Naming Preferences . . . . 149
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
SQRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Staged Box Heating Control . . . . . 1282
Staged Compressor Control . . . . . . 1231
Staged Cooling Control . . . . . . . . . 1225
Staged Device Enable Determination
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
Staged Device Enable Determination
Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Staged Heating Control . . . . . . . . . 1282
Staged Humidification Control . . . 1305
Staged Output Control . . . . . . . . . . 1348
1578 CCT Help
MSC 01 through MSC 12 . . . . 1348
Staged Output Sequencing . . . . . . . 1365
Sequencer 01 through Sequencer 16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Staged Preheat Control . . . . . . . . . 1288
Staged Reheat Control . . . . . . . . . . 1288
Staged Supplemental Heating Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282
Standard Dual Duct Endpoint Calculation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
Start Stop Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100% OA)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Start Stop Sequencing DA-T . . . . . . 947
Start Stop Sequencing Zone . . . . . . . 947
Starting
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
State Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
Application Mode Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
Energy Hold Off Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
Fan Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
Fan Determination (Terminal Units)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Occupancy Mode Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010
Occupancy Mode Determination
(MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
System Mode Determination . . 1016
Unit Enable Determination . . . 1018
Zone Low Limit Determination 1021
State Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
State Generation Module
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
State Generation Module Selection . 219
State Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
State Generators Modules
Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . 866
Central Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Device Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
General Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . 926
Occupied Sequencing . . . . . . . . 952
Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
 State Determination . . . . . . . . . . 999
Unoccupied Sequencing . . . . . 1023
VAV Fan Determination . . . . . 1055
VAV Specific Sequencing . . . . 1041
State Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
State Selection (State Tables) . . . . . 222
State Selection Tables
Adding a Column to . . . . . . . . . . 209
Customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
State Selections Tables
Adding a Table to . . . . . . . . . . . 208
State Table Label
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
State Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Statistical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
Status Alarm Determination . . . . . . 806
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Stopping
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794, 1474
Summary Report Options . . . . . . . . 109
Summer Winter Compensation . . . . 837
SummerWinter Mode Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Supp Heating Control Status LV . . 1374
Supp Heating isAvailable Pass Through
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Supp Heating LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Supply Area LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Supply Damper Actuator
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
VAV Single Duct Modules . . . . 628
VAV Slave Single Duct . . . . . . . 647
VAV Slave Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Supply Damper Control . . . . . . . . . 1138
Supply Damper Trouble Detection . 863
Supply Fan
Fan Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Fan Coil Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Heat Pump Modules . . . . . . . . . . 606
Unit Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Unit Ventilator Modules . . . . . . 584
Supply Fan Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Index
Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-
864-UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Supply Fan OnOff LV . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Supply Fan Percent Cmd LV . . . . . 1374
Supply Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . 817
Supply Flow Setpoint Control . . . . 1071
Supply Pickup Gain LV . . . . . . . . . . 860
Supply Return Water Differential Calc
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
Switch Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
System
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
System and Device Connections . . . 265
System Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
System Mode Determination . . . . . 1016
System Rename Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 229
System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Central Cooling Control Logic . 727
Central Cooling Mechanical . . . 700
Central Heating Control Logic . 766
Central Heating Mechanical . . . 738
Control Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Fan Coil Control Logic . . . . . . . 576
Fan Coil Mechanical . . . . . . . . . 565
Heat Pump Control Logic . . . . . 614
Heat Pump Mechanical . . . . . . . 605
Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Mixed Air Dual Duct Mechanical
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Mixed Air Single Duct Control Logic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341, 392, 559
Mixed Air Single Duct Mechanical
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Outdoor Air Dual Duct Control Logic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Outdoor Air Dual Duct Mechanical
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Outdoor Air Single Duct Control
Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Outdoor Air Single Duct Mechanical
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
1579
 Rooftop Control Logic . . . . . . . . 510
Rooftop Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . 488
Unit Ventilator Control Logic . . 595
Unit Ventilator Mechanical . . . . 583
VAV Dual Duct Control Logic . 669
VAV Dual Duct Mechanical . . . 658
VAV Single Duct Mechanical . . 628
VAV Slave Dual Duct Control Logic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
VAV Slave Dual Duct Mechanical
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
VAV Slave Single Duct Mechanical
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
System Selection Preferences . . . . . 145
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
System Selection Tree . . . . . . . . . . . 160
System Selection Wizard . . . . . . . . . 158
System Selections
Modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
System Types and Configurations . . 159
System Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
New Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Upgraded Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Upgraded System Types . . . . . . 122
Upgrading a System . . . . . . . . . . 140
T TWR Iso Valve (Pass Through) . . . 1328
TAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Temperature Control Strategy
Mixed Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . 364
Mixed Air Dual Duct Modules . 364
Mixed Air Single Duct . . . . . . . . 305
Mixed Air Single Duct Modules 306
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Outdoor Air Dual Duct . . . . . . . 452
Outdoor Air Single Duct . . . . . . 405
Outside Air Dual Duct Modules 452
Outside Air Single Duct Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
1580 CCT Help
Rooftop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Rooftop Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Test Mode
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Three Speed Fan Control . . . . . . . . 1148
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860, 1374, 1484
Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860, 1374
Toolbar (Logic View) . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Totalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380, 1444
Totalization (Enum Runtime) . 1380
Totalization (Enum Runtime) . . . . 1380
Tower Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Tower Control v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
Tower Fan X Control . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Tower Fan X Control v2 . . . . . . . . 1103
Tower Fan X Enable LV . . . . . . . . 1374
Tower Fan X LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Tower Fan X Totalization . . . . . . . 1380
Tower Rotation Small . . . . . . . . . . 1092
Tower Sequencing-1 Speed . . . . . . . 902
Tower Sequencing-2 Speed . . . . . . . 905
Tower Sequencing-3 Speed . . . . . . . 908
Tower Sequencing-Vernier . . . . . . . 911
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
Two Position Exhaust Damper Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
Two Position Min OA Damper Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
TwrFanX Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
TwrFanX Blocking Protection . . . . 1311
TwrFanX Status Alarm Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
U
UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 77, 111
Unit Enable Determination . . . . . . 1018
Unit Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Unit Ventilator
ASHRAE Cycle Control . . . . . . 595
ASHREA Cycle Control Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
 Coils Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Economizer Suitability . . . . . . . 599
Economizer Suitability Modules 599
Misc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Misc Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Monitored Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Monitored Safeties Modules . . . 593
Occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Occupancy Modules . . . . . . . . . 598
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 590
Optional Equipment Modules . . 590
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Optional Features Modules . . . . 601
Sensor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Supply Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Supply Fan Modules . . . . . . . . . 584
Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) . . . . . . . 581
Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Unit Ventilator Control Logic System
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Unit Ventilator Core Logic . . . . . . . 582
Unit Ventilator Mechanical System
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout . . . . . . 813
Unocc Heating Fan Lockout . . . . . . 815
Unocc Status Determination . . . . . 1024
Unocc Status Determination (MZ) 1032
Unocc Status Determination with OAT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
Unoccupied Sequencing . . . . . . . . 1023
Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU
Mixed Air ZN-T) . . . . . . . . . 1029
Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026
Unoccupied Sequencing (Common)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
Unoccupied Sequencing (MZ) . 1032
Unoccupied Sequencing (UV) . 1035
Unoccupied Sequencing (VAV)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU Mixed
Air ZN-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU) . . 1026
Unoccupied Sequencing (Common)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
Index
Unoccupied Sequencing (MZ) . . . . 1032
Unoccupied Sequencing (UV) . . . . 1035
Unoccupied Sequencing (VAV) . . 1038
Upgraded Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Upgraded System Types . . . . . . . . . 122
Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Upgrading
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Uploading
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 77, 111
Using
File > New (Custom Applications)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Using the Balancer Tab . . . . . . . . . . 274
UV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
UV 2 Pipe 2 Position Control . . . . 1189
UV 2 Pipe Proportional Control . . 1203
UV 2 Position Heating Control . . . 1253
UV Face and Bypass Heating Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256
UV Proportional Heating Control . 1271
UV Staged Heating Control . . . . . . 1285
UV-ZN-T Sequencing ASHRAE 1 . 983
UV-ZN-T Sequencing ASHRAE 2 . 986
UV-ZN-T Sequencing ASHRAE 3 . 989
UV-ZN-T Sequencing ASHRAE W 991
V
V
Attribute Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan BSP
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan Track
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan Volume
Match Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
Variable Capacity Fan Minimum OA
Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
Variable Capacity Relief Fan BSP
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
Variable Capacity Return Fan BSP
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
Variable Capacity Return Fan Track
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167
1581
Variable Capacity Return Fan Volume
Match Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
Variable Capacity Supply Fan Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
Variable Speed Fan Clg Twr Sequencing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
VAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
VAV Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
VAV Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Coils Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Cold Deck Damper Actuator . . . 658
Cold Deck Damper Actuator
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Control Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Exhaust Damper Actuator . . . . . 662
Exhaust Damper Actuator Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Flow Sensor Location . . . . . . . . 660
Flow Sensor Locations Modules 660
Hot Deck Damper Actuator . . . . 659
Hot Deck Damper Actuator Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Misc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Misc Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 665
Optional Equipment Modules . . 665
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Sensor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
VAV Dual Duct Applications . . . . . 655
VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
VAV Dual Duct Control Logic System
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
VAV Dual Duct Core Logic . . . . . . 657
VAV Dual Duct Mechanical System
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
VAV Fan Determination . . . . . . . . 1055
Fan Determination (VAV Parallel
Flow Based) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
1582 CCT Help
Fan Determination (VAV Parallel
Temp Based) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058
Fan Determination (VAV Series)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060
VAV Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Box Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Box Fan Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631, 650
Coils Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Exhaust Damper Actuator . . . . . 629
Exhaust Damper Actuator Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Heating Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Misc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Misc Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Occupancy Modules . . . . . . . . . 639
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 634
Optional Equipment Modules . . 634
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Optional Features Modules . . . . 642
Sensor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Supply Damper Actuator . . . . . . 628
Supply Damper Actuator Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
VAV Single Duct Applications . . . . 624
VAV Single Duct Core Logic . . . . . 626
VAV Single Duct Mechanical System
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow
Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
VAV Slave DD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
VAV Slave Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Coils Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Cold Deck Damper Actuator . . . 677
Cold Deck Damper Actuator
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Control Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Exhaust Damper Actuator . . . . . 681
Exhaust Damper Actuator Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Flow Sensor Location . . . . . . . . 679
Flow Sensor Locations Modules 679
Hot Deck Damper Actuator . . . . 678
 Hot Deck Damper Actuator Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 684
Optional Equipment Modules . . 684
Sensor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Smoke Control Support UL-864-
UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Smoke Control Support UL-864-
UUKL Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 685
VAV Slave Dual Duct Applications 675
VAV Slave Dual Duct Control Logic
System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
VAV Slave Dual Duct Core Logic . 676
VAV Slave Dual Duct Mechanical
System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
VAV Slave SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
VAV Slave Single Duct . . . . . . . . . . 644
Box Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Box Fan Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Coils Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Exhaust Damper Actuator . . . . . 648
Exhaust Damper Actuator Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 652
Optional Equipment Modules . . 652
Sensor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Smoke Control Support UL-864-
UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Smoke Control Support UL-864-
UUKL Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 654
Supply Damper Actuator . . . . . . 647
Supply Damper Actuator Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
VAV Slave Single Duct Applications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
VAV Slave Single Duct Core Logic 645
VAV Slave Single Duct Mechanical
System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
VAV Specific Sequencing . . . . . . . 1041
Autocalibration Sequence . . . . 1041
Balancer Override . . . . . . . . . . 1044
Box Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
WarmupCooldown Sequencing 1052
VAV Unocc Status Determination 1038
VAVDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Index
VAVDD Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
VAVSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
VAVSD Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
VAV-ZN-T Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . 994
VAV-ZN-T Sequencing Single Duct 994
Viewing
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 243
Control View Details . . . . . . . . . 243
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Logic View Details . . . . . . . . . . 244
Module’s Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 243
State Selection Tables . . . . . . . . 172
System Selections . . . . . . . . . . . 166
VMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
W
WarmupCooldown Determination . . 811
WarmupCooldown Pass Through . . 997
WarmupCooldown Sequencing . . . 1052
Water System Flush Pass Through . 997
Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Wet Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Wireless Commissioning Converter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Working with the Test Mode . . . . . . 273
Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
X
XOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
Z
ZN-T Setpoint Determination . . . . . 849
Zone Cooling Control Status LV . . 1374
Zone Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
Zone Damper Mode Pass Through 1328
Zone Damper Mode Pass Through SG
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
Zone Damper w Proportional Heating
Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
Zone Damper w Staged Heating . . 1324
1583
Zone Heating Availability Determination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Zone Heating Control Status LV . . 1374
Zone Htg Valve Mode Pass Through
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328
Zone Htg Valve Mode Pass Through SG
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Zone Loop Control
Central Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Central Heating Modules . . . . . . 764
Zone Low Limit Determination . . . 1021
Zone Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
Zone Staged Htg Mode Pass Through
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328
Controls Group
507 E. Michigan Street
Milwaukee, WI 53202
1584 CCT Help
Published in U.S.A.
Zone Staged Htg Mode Pass Through SG
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Zone Unoccupied Sequencing . . . . 1029
Zone X Damper Control . . . . . . . . 1314
Zone X Max Cap Fract LV . . . . . . 1374
Zone X MSC 2 Position Heating . . 1348
Zone X MSC Staged Heating XX . 1348
Zone X with 2 Position Heating Valve
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
Zone X with Proportional Heating Valve
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
Zone X with Staged Heating Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 244, 272
Metasys® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
All other marks herein are the marks of their respective owners.
© 2007 Johnson Controls, Inc.
www.johnsoncontrols.com